Skip to main content

Full text of "Ed. 3"

See other formats 


A 


PALI READER 


WITH NOTES AND GLOSSARY 


BY 


DINES ANDERSEN, PH. D. 


PART I: TEXT AND NOTES 


THIRD EDITION, REVISED 


BR, RACHAGOBINDA BABAK 
COLLECTION 


COPENHAGEN 
GYLDENDALSKE BOGHANDEL — NORDISK FORLAG 


LONDON LEIPZIG 
LUZAC & CO. O. MARRASSOWITZ 


1917 


THE 3. 6 3UCIETY, 
CALCUTTA-700018 
ame No BITS] 


. 46-~2- IS 


Trykt med Understøttelse af Universitetets Fritrykskonto. 


SL “o. O 8102 747 


COPENHAGEN. — PRINTED BY CHR. CATO. 


PREFACE. 


The following selections from Pali literature were intended to 
serve as reading exercises at my own university-lectures, but I hope 
they may also be useful to other teachers of Indian philology, who 
wish to supply the Sanskrit lessons with an elementary course in 
Buddhist literature. Many of the selected specimens are well 
known, having been translated and discussed very often in Western 
literature, still I think they will be welcome to beginners in the 
original language. I have considered the Jātaka, from which the 
first 60 pages are taken, to be the fittest matter for the first reading, 
and I think these 60 pages will be sufficient for the first semester’s 
exercises. The rest of the hook, containing specimens chiefly illustra- 


ting the history of Br .d Buddhist religion and litterature, can 
probably be read ir ond semester, and a third semester might 
then be devoted to 1 the Dhammapada, of which the second 


edition is now easily accessible. To that purpose the following glos- 
sary wil be arranged so that it includes, not only all the words of 
the selected texts but also the words of the Dhammapada not occur- 
ring in the reader. | 

_ In preparing the texts and vocabulary the Mss. and collections of 
V. Fausbøll and V. Trenckner have been at my disposal and 
have in a great many cases been a valuable and almost indispensable 
guide to me. In the notes I have given an account of what I have 
corrected in the texts used, but several misprints in the printed edi- 
tions or insignificant blunders in the manuscripts I have tacitly cor- 


rected without mention; I-hope however that I have not committed 
many new ones! «The notes are only literary and critical with some 
remarks added on the metre and references to parallel passages, in 
order to accustom the beginner to notice these things in his first 
study of Pali Gāthās; all other philological matter must be sought 
in the glossary.. | | 

My best thanks are due to Professor V. Fausbøll and Dr. S. 
Serensen; both of them have spent much time and labour in help- 
ing me to make this book as correct as possible. I now lay it before 
the public hoping that it will contribute a little to propagate the 
knowledge of the interesting Pàli language and its literature. 


. Copenhagen, February 1901. - 


— Dines Andersen. 


In this second edition the texts have been printed quite as they 
stand in the first edition, so that the references in the Glossary still 
hold good. The corrections given on the last pages of Part II. have 
been inserted, and several small misprints removed; only a few emen- 
dations ought to be mentioned: tesu kathentesu kathentesu (instead 
of tesu tesu kathentesu) 481°, photthabba (photthabbo) 72*, sakkhimha 
(sakkhimhā) 7920; as to Sect. 66 I must confine myself to recommend 
the students to consult the new standard edition of the Mahāvamsa 
by W. Geiger. On the other hand I have tried to bring the literary 
references in the Notes up to date, as far as has been possible to 
me, and on this point I have to express my thanks to my collegue 
in Uppsala, Prof. K. F. Johansson, from whose splendid - Swedish 
translation of Indian tales I have derived not at few useful informations. 


Copenhagen, May 1910. 
| D. A. 


1. ŠUMSUMĀRA-JĀTAKA. 


Atite Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Kirk 
Bodhisatto kapiyoniyam nibbattitvā nāgabalo thāmasampanno mahā- 
sarīro sobhaggappatto hutvā Graūgānivattane araññayatane vāsam kap- 
pesi. ‘Tada Gaūgāya eko sumsumaro vasi. Ath’ assa bhariyā Bodhi- 5 
sattassa sarīram disva tassa hadayamarise dohala uppādetvā suth- 
sumaram āha: ,aham sāmi etassa kapirājassa hadayamamsam kbāditu- 
kāmā* ti. ,Bhadde, mayah jalagocarā, esa thalagocaro, kin ti tam 
ganhitum sakkhissama" 'ti. „Yena tena upayena ganha, sace na 
labhissāmi marissimiti*. „Tena hi mā bhāyi, atth' eko upayo ti 10 
khādāpessāmi tam tassa hadayamarisar* ti surūsumārim samassāsetvā 
Bodhisattassa Gaūgāya paniyam pivitvā Gaūgātīre nisinnakale santikam 
gantvà evam dha: „vānarinda, imasmim padese kasataphalani khādanto 
kim tvam ciņņatthāne yeva carāsi, pāra- Gaūgāya ambalabujādīnam ,. 
madhuraphalanam anto n' atthi, kin te tattha gantvā phalāphālat 16 
khaditum na vatfatiti^. | Kumbhilaraja, Gañgā mahodikā vittiņņā, 
kathaīh tattha gamissāmiti*. „Sace gacchasi aham tam mama pitthīri 
āropetvā nessāmiti'. So tam saddahitva „sādhū* 'ti sampaticohitvā , 

stena bi ehi, pitthim me abhirüha" ‘ti ca. vutte tam abhirühi. Sum- 
sumāro thokam netvā udake osidapesi. Bodhisatto ,samma, udake 20 
mam osid&pesl, kin nu kho etan“ ti dha. ,N&han tam dhamme su-.- 
dhamitistaya gahetvā gacchimi, bhariyāya pana me tava hadayamamse ”' 
dohalo uppanno, tam abam tava hadayam khādāpetukāmo" ti. „Samma, 
kathentēnā te sundaram kataz, sace hi amhākari udare hādayarh 
bhayeyya sākhaggesu carantānar cunnavicünnam bhaveyya* ‘ti, „Ka- 95 
-ham pana tumhe thapethi“ ‘ti, Bodhisatto avidüre ekath udumbarāri 


pakkaphalapindisampannaii dassento ,pass' etani amhakam hadayani 
ekasmim udumbare olambantiti^. „Sace me hadayam dassasi ahan 
tam na maressamiti“. „Tena hi ettha nehi mam, ahan te rukkhe 
olambantam dassamiti“. So tam ādāya tattha agamasi. Bodhisatto 

5 tassa pitthito uppatitvà udumbararukkhe nisīditvā „samma balasum- 
sumāra, imesain sattanam hadayam nama rukkhagge hotiti saüii ahosi, 
balo si, ahan tai vaücesim, tava phalaphalam tam eva hotu, sariram 
eva pana te.mabantam, pañña pana n' atthiti^ vatva imam ajthari 
pakasento ima gāthā avoca: 


10 Alam etehi ambehi jambühi panasehi ca 
yāni param samuddassa, varam mayharh udumbaro. 


Mahati vata te bondi, na ca pañña tadūpikā, 
sumsumara, vaiicito si, gaccha dani yathāsukhan ti. 


Sumsumiro sahassam parājito viya dukkhi dummano pajjhāyanto attano 
15 nivesanatthānam eva gato. 


2. VĀNARINDA-JĀTAKA. Ë 


Atīte Bārāņasiyai Brahmadatte rajjun kārente Bodhisutto kapi- 
yoniyam nibbattitva vuddhim anvaya assapotappamāņo thamasampanno 
ekacaro hutvā nadītīre viharati. Tassā pana nadiyà vemajjhe eko 

20 dipako nānappakārehi ambapanasādīhi phalarukkhehi sampanno. Bo- 
dhisatto nāgabalo thāmasampanno nadiyà orimatirato uppatitvā — 
dipakassa orato nadimajjhe eko pitthipāsāņo atthi — tasmir nipatati, 
tato uppatitvā tasmim dipake patat. Tattha nānappakārāni phalāni 
khāditvā sāyam ten’ eva upāyena pacoügantvü attano vasanatthane 

25 vasitvā punadivase pi tath’ eva karoti. Imina niyümena tattha vāsam 
kappeti. Tasmim pana kale eko kumbhilo sapajāpatiko tassā nadiyit 
vasati. Tassa sā bhariya Bodhisattam aparāparam gacchantam disvā 
Bodhisattassa hadayamamse dohalam uppādetvā kumbbilam dha: 
,maylia kho ayya imassa vānarindassa hadayamamse dohalo up- 

30 panno* ti. Kumbhilo „sādhu hoti, lacchasiti« vatvà „ajja tam sāyar 
dipakato āgacchantam eva ‘ganhissamiti* gantvā pitthipāsāne nipajji. 
Bodhisatto divasam caritvā sāyanņhasamaye dīpake thito va pāsāņam 


3 


oloketvā ,ayam pāsāņo idāni uccataro kii iin nu kàranan* ti | 
cintesi. Tassa kira udakappamāņai ca pásünappamünai ca suvavatthā- 
pitam eva, ten’ assa etad ahosi: „ajja imissā nadiyā udakam n' eva 


hayati na vaddhati, atha ca panáyam pāsāņo mahā hutvà paññayati, anes 


kacci nu. kho ettha mayham gahanatthaya kumbhilo nipanno* ti so 5 
,vimaribámi tava nan“ ti tatth' eva thatvā pāsāņena saddhirh kathento 
viya , bho pāsāņā" ‘ti vatvà pativacanam alabhanto yavatatiyarh npā- 
sana“ 'ti aha. „Pāsāņo kim pativacanar na dassatiti^ puna pi nai 

° vünaro „kim bho pasana aja mayham pativacanath na desiti“ aha, 
Kumbhilo „addhā ai aññesu divasesu ayam pāsāņo vanarindassa pativaca- 10 
nam adasi, dassāmi dani 'ssa pativacanan" ti cintetvā „kim bho vānarindā* 
'ti ha, „Ko si tvan“ ti. „Aham kumbhilo" ti. ,Kimatthath ettha 
nipanno siti^, „Tava hadayamamsam patthayamano“ ti. Bodhisatto 
cintesi: ,añüo me gamanamaggo n' atthi, ajja mayā esa kumbhilo 
vaīcetabbo* ti. Atha nam evam dha: „samma kumbhila, aham atti- 15 
nam tuyham pariccajissimi, tvam mukham vivaritvà mam tava santi- 
kam āgatakāle ganhahiti^. Kumbbīlānam hi mukhavivate akkhini 
nimilanti. So tam kāraņam asallakkhetva mukharñ vivari, ath’ assa 
akkhini pithiyhbéu. So mukham vivaritvà akkhini nimiletvà nipajji. 4 
Bodhisatto tathābhāvam ñatvā dīpakā uppatito gantvā kumbhīlassa 20 
matthakam akkamitvā tato uppatito vijjullatā viya vijjotamàno paratire 
atthāsi. Kumbhilo tam acchariyain disva „iminā vanarindena atiac- 
cherakam katan* ti cintetva „bho vanarinda, imasmim loke catūhi 
dhammehi samannagato puggalo pāccāmitte abhibhavati, te sabbe pi 
tuyham abbhantare atthi, mañňe“ ti vacva imam gatham aha: 95 


Yass’ ete caturo dhammā vanarinda yathū tava 


saccam dhammo dhiti cago dittbari so ativattatiti. 
i es Lev OV 
Evam kumbbīlo Bodhisattam pasamsitva attano vasanatthünam gato. 


“es 


3. BAKA-J ATAKA. 


| “Atite ekasmir araüüüyatane Bodhisattq afifiataram padumasarari 80 
nissäya thite rukkhe rukkhadevātā hutvà nibbatti. Tada aiüatarasmiri 
nātimahante sare nidāghasamaye udakath mandarh ahosi, bahü c' ettha 


~ macchii : honti,, , Ath’ eko bako te T disvà ,eken' upšyena ime ` 
macche vaticebvā. khādissāmiti* gantvā udakapariyante cintento nisīdi. 
Atha tam macchā disvā ki ayya cintento nisinno siti" puochirhsu. 
„Tumhākam cintento nisinno ` "mhiti^. | „Amhākagi kim cintesi ayyā” 

6 ti. „Imasmim sare udakam patittar gocard ‘ca, “mando, ‘nidagho ca 
mahanto, ‘idan’ ime macehā kim nama karissantiti’ tumhakarh cintento 
nisinno 'mhiti^. „Atha kim karoma ayya“ 'ti. „Tumhe sace mayham 
vacanam kareyyātha aham vo ekekam mukhatundakena gahetva ekam 
paficavannapadumssaiichannat mehāsaram netvà visssjjeyyan" ti. 
10 „Ayya, pathamakappikato petthaya macchanam cintanakabako nama 
~ m' atthi, tvah amhesu ekekam khāditukāmo siti“. ,Nàham tumhe 
` mayham saddahante khādissāmi, sace pana sarassa atthibhāvarh mayham 
na saddahathe. ekan macchar mayā saddhir sarah passitum pe- 

' setha^ 'ti. Macchü tassa saddahitvā „ayam jale pi thale pi sam- 
15 attho“ ti ekam kanamaliamaccham adamsu: ,imam gahetvā gaccha- 
tha“ 'ti. So tam gahetva netvā sare vissajjetvā sabbam saram dassetvā 
puna ānetvā tesam macchanam santike vissajjesi. So tesam macchanam 
sarassa sampattim vannesi. Te tassa kathari sutvā gantukāmā hutvā 
„sādhu ayya, amhe gaņhitvā gacchāhiti" āharmsu. Bako pathaman 
20 tam kāņamahāmaccham eva, gahetva , saratiram netvā saram dassetvā 
saratire jāte varanarukkhe nilīyitvā tai vitapantare pakkhipitva tundena 
vijjhanto jivitakkhayam pāpetvā „mamsarn khāditvā kantake rukkha- 
mile patetva puna gantvā „vissatiko me so maccho, aiio āgacchatū* 
'ti eten' upāyena ekekam gahetvā sabbamacchake khāditvā puna āgato 
25 ekamaccham pi nāddasa. Eko pan’ ettha kakkatako avasittho. Bako 
. tam pi khaditukamo hutvā „bho kakkataka, maya sabbe te macchā 
netvā padumasaüchanne mahāsare vissajjita, ehi tam i, nest. | 
„Man gahetvā gacchanto katham ganhissasiti“. „Dasit ganhissā- 
miti*. ,Tvam evam gahetvā gacchanto mam pātessasi, nāhan tayā - 
30 saddhim gamissāmiti*. „Mā bhāyi, ahan tam sugahitam gahetvā ga- 
_missāmiti'. Kakkatako cintesi: ,imassa macche netvā sare vissajja- 
nam nama n’ atthi, sace pana m sare gissajjessati icc-etam kusalazh, 
noce vissajjessati givam assa chindilvā p^ my harissámtti^. Atha nam 
evath aha: „samma baka, na kho tvar sugahitam gaheturiī sakkhissasi, | 
$5 ambakath pana gahaņari "fagahanam, sac’ ahath alena & tava. giv diva ga- ' 
heturh labhissūmi tava givath sugabitam katvā tayā saddbirh gamissi-. 


5 
T EA jā 
miti^. So tam „vaūcetukāmo esa man“ ti ajānanto „sādhū*, 'ti sam- 
paticchi. Kakkatako attano alehi kammārasaņdāšena' viya tassa givam ` 
sugahitam katvà ,idani gaccha‘ "ti dha. So tar netvā saram das- 
setvā varanarukkhabhimukho pāyāsi. Kakkatako aha: „mātula, ayam 
saro etto, tvah pana ito nesiti*. Bako „piyamātulako atibhágiviputto 5 
si me tvan“ ti vatvà ,tvam ‘esa mam ukkhipitvā vicaranto mayham 
daso’ ti saūūam karosi. maūūe. pass’ etam varanarukkhamule kanta- 
karüsii, yathā me te sabbamaccha khāditā tam pi tath’ eva khadissa- 
miti^ aha. Kakkatako „ete macchā attano balataya tayā khāditā, 
aham pana te mam khaditum na dassāmi. tañ fieva pana vināsam pā- 10 
pessami, tvam hi balataya maya valicitabhavam na jānāsi, marāntā 
ubho pi marissāma, esa te sisam chinditva bhūmiyamn khipissimiti* 
vatvā saņdāsena viya alehi tassa givam mppilesi. So vattakatena 
mukhena akkhihi assuna paggharantena maranabhayatajjito „šāmi, ahan 
tam na khādissāmi, jivitam me dehiti^ aha. ,Yadi evam otaritvā 15 
sarasmim mam vissajjehiti“. So mivattitva saram eva otaritva kak- 
katakam sarapariyante pathkapitthe thapesi. Kakkatako kattariküya 
kumudanalam kappento viya tassa gīvari kappetvā udakam pāvisi. 
Tam acchariyam disvā varanarukkhe adhivattha devata sādhukāram 
dadamānā vanam unnādayamānā madhurassarena imam gatham aha: 20 


' Naccanta nikatippaūūo nikatyā sukham edhati, 


! ārādhe nikatippaūūo bako kakkatakā-m-ivā 'ti. 
/ 4 " . 


4. NIGRODHAMIGA-JĀTAKA. 


Atīte Bārāņasijam Brahmaģatte rajam karayamane Bodhisatto 
migayoniyam patisandhizi gaņhi. So matukucchito nikkhanto su- "T 
vannavanno ahosi, akkhini © 8588. maņigufāsadisāni ahesum, siñgani 
rajatavannani, mukham rattakambalapuiij avannam, hatthapādapariyantā 
lākhāparikammekatā viya, vàladhi camarassa viya ahosi, sariram pan’ 
assa mahantam assdpotakappamanam ahosi. So paūcasatamiga-pari- | 
vāro araüie vāsarh kappesi nāmena Nigrodhamigaraja nama. Avidūre 30 
pan’ assa aüho pi paficasatamigaparivaro Sākhamigo nama, vasati. so 
pi suvannavanno va ahosi. Tena samayena Bārāņasirājā migavadhapa- 

Pali Reader, 2 


| E i 6 | 


silo hoti, vind mamsena na bhužjati, manussānam kammacchedam 
katvā sabbe negainajānapado sannipātetvā devasikam migavath gacchati. 
M anussā cintesum : aya raja amhāķa kammacchedarh karoti, yan 
nūna mayam uyyane miganam „niyāpam vapitvā paniyam Agnia! detvā : 

5 bahumige uyyāne pavesētvā ‘dvaram bandhitvā rañño niyyādēmā” "ti. 
Te sabbe uyyāne nivāpatiņar ropetvà udaka sampādetvā dvaram 
yojüpetvà nāgare adaya muggarādinānāvudhahatthā  araüüam pavi- 
sītvā mige pariyesamānā „majjhe thite mige gaņhissāmā" tl yojana- 
mattam thinam parikkhipitva samkhipamanà Nigrodhamiga-Sakhami- 
10 ganam vasanatthanam majjhe katvā parikkhipimsu. Atha tam miga- 
ganam disva usapu ca bhümiñ ca muggarebi paharanta 
nigaganam gahanatthanato nīhgritvā asisattidhanuādīni avudhani uggi- : 
ritvā mahānādam nadanta tam migaganam uyyanam pavesetva dvàram 
"pidhāya rājānam upasamkamitvā „deva, nibaddham migavam gacchantā 

15 amhākam kammam nāsetha, amhehi araññato mige ānetvā tumhakam 
uyyanai pūritam, ito patthāya tesarh mamsam khādathā" 'ti rājānam 
apucchitva pakkamirhsu. Raja tesam vacanam sutvā uyyānam gantvā 
mige E i Suv — QA tenan  abhayarh Adasi, us 
90 ‘ssa, ; bhattak&rako gs vijjhitvā āharati. Miga dhanum disvä va 
maraņabhayena tajjitā palāyanti, dve ' tayo pahare labhitvā kilamanti 
vc pi gilānāpi honti maranam pi pāpuņanti. „Migagaņo tam pavattim 
"- Bodhisattassa aroces, So Sakham pakkosāpetvā āha: „Samma, | bahü 
migà nassanti, ekarhsena, maritabbe sati ito patthaya mā kandena 
25 mige vijjhantu, dhammagandikatthane miganath varo hotu, ekadivasam 
ama parisáya vàro pāpuņātu, ekadivasam tava parisāya vāro papu- 
natu, vārappatto migo gantvā, dhammagandikaya sisam thapetva ni- 
pajjatu, evam sante miga vanita na bhavissantiti“. So „sādhū” "ti 
sampaticchi, Tato patthāya vàrappatto và migo gantvà dhamma- 
80 gandikāya givam thapetvā nipajjati. Bhattakarako āgantvā tattha ni- 
pannakam eva gahetvà gacchati. Ath’ ekadivasam Sākhamigassa pari- 
V saya ekissā gabbhinimigiyà varo pāpuņi. Šā Sākban upasamkamitvā 
„sāmi, aham pi gabbhini, puttakam vijāyitvā. dve jana vāram gamis- 
sāma, mayham vāram atikkamehiti" aha. So „na sakka tava vāram 
86. aūiesam püpetum, tvam eva tuyharh pattar jānissasi, gacchahiti aha. 
Sa tassa santikā anuggaharh alabhamānā Bodhisattam upasarkamitvai - 


7 . 


tam attham ārocesi. So tassā vacanam sutvā „hotu, gaccha tvar, 
ahan te vāra atikkamessümiti^ sayam gantva dhammagandikaya 
sisah katvā nipajji. Bhattakāro tam disva ,laddhabhayo migarājā 
gandikaya nipanno, kin nu kāraņan* ti vegena gantvā raüüo ārocesi. 
Raja tāvad eva ratham aruyha mahantena parivārena āgantvā Bodhi- 
sattam disvā aha: ,samma migarāja, nanu mayā tuyham .abhayam 
dinnam, kasmā tvar idha nipanno“ ti. „Mahārāja, gabbhini migi 
agantva ‘hana vāra ‘alifiassa papehiti’ aha, na sakkā kho pana maya 
ekassa maraņadukkķam aññassa upari pakkhipitum, sv-dham attano 
jīvitaj tassā datvā tasšā santakam maranam gahetvā idha nipanno, 


Qt 


— 


0 


mā aüüam kiūci üsarkittha mahārājā" "ti. Raja aha: „sūmi su- 


vannavannamigaràja, maya tādiso khantimettānuddayasampanno MA- no: 


nussesu pi na ditthapubbo, tena te pasanno ‘smi, utthebi, tuyhañ ca 
 tass& ca abhayam dammiti^ ,Dvihi abhaye laddhe avasesā kim ka- 
rissanti narindà^ ‘ti. „Avasesānam pi abhayam dammi samiti“. ,Ma- 
hārāja, evam pi uyyàne yeva migā abhayam labhissanti, sesā kim ka- 
risantiti^. ,Etesam pi abhayam dammi sámiti^. „Mahārāja, migā 
tava abhayam labhantu, sesà catuppadā kim karissantiti^. „Etesam 
pi abhayam dammi sámiti^. ,Maharaja, catuppadà tava abhayam 


labhantu, dvijaganà kim karissantiti^. „Etesam pi dammi samiti". 20 


| Maharaja, dvijagaņā tava abhayam labbissanti, udake vasantā maccha 
kim karissantiti^.  „Etesam pi abhayam dammi sāmiti". Evam 
Mahāsatto rājānam sabbasattānam abhayam yācitvā, utthāya tājānam 
paūcasu sīlesu patitthāpetvā ,dhammam cara mahārāja, mātāpitūsu 
puttadhītāsu brahmanagahapatikesu negamajānapadesu dhammam ca- 
ranto samam caranto kāyassa bhedā sugatim saggam lokam gamissa- 
siti" rañño Buddhali]hàya dbammarh desetvā katipaham uyyāne vasitvā 
rañño orādam datvā migaganaparivuto araññam pāvisi. Sāpi. kho 
migadhenu pupphakaņņikasadisari puttam vijāyi. So kilamano Sākha- 


ve. 
e 


migassa santikam gacchāti. Atha nam mata tassa santikam gacchan- 30 


tam disvā „putta, ito patthaya mà etassa santikam gaccha, Nigrodhass 
eva santikam gaccheyyāsiti* ovadanti imam gatham dha: 
Nigrodham eva seveyya, na Bakham upasamvase, 
Nigrodhasmim matar seyyo | yaūce Sakhasmirn jīvitan ti. 
Tato patthaya ca pana abhayaladdhak&* migā manussanam sassāni 


khadanti. Manussā. „laddhābhayā ime migā” ti paharitum va palā-. 


36 


petum vā na visahānti. Te rājaūģāņe sannipatitva rañño tam atthari 
ürocesum. Raja „mayā pasannena Nigrodhamigavarassa varo dinno, 
aham rajjam jahéyyàm na ca iar patiññarm, gacchatha, na koci mama 
| vijite mige paharitum labhatiti*. Nigrodhamigo tam pavattim sutvā 
5 migaganamm sannipatapetva, „ito Daifhüya parešar sassa khāditur 
na labhathā* 'ti mige vātetvā manussánam. ārocāpesi: „ito patthaya 
sassakārakamanussā sassarakkhanattham vāki mā "karontu, khettam 
pana āvijjhitvā panpasaiitiar Pandhantü" ‘ti, Tato patthāya kira 
khettesu pannabahdhanasaiiüam udapādi, tato patthaya pannasaiifiam 
10 atikkamanakamigo nāma n’ atthi, ayam kira nesam Bodhisattato lad- 
dhaovàdo. Evam migaganam ovaditvà Bodhisatto yavatayukam thatvā 
saddhim migehi yathakammam gato. Rājāpi Bodhisattassa ovāde 
thatvā puiifidni katvā yathakammam gato. |. * fey 


5. ŠĪHAOAMMA=-JĀTAKA. T 


Atīte Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto kassa- 
15 kakule nibbattitvā vayappatto kasikammena „jīvikari kappesi. Tasmim 
kāle eko vānijo gadrabhabhārakena vobürari karonto vicarati.. So 
gatagatatthane gadrabhassa pitthito bhandikath otaretva gadrabham siha- 
 cammena pārupitvā sāliyavakhettesu vissajjeti. Khettarakkhakā tam 
disvā siho ti saūfāya upasamkamitum na sakkonti. Ath’ ekadivasam 
20 so vünijo ekasmim gāmadvāre nivasam gahetvā pātarāsam pacāpento 
tato gadrabham sihacammam pārupitvā yavakhettam vissajjesi. Khetta- 
rakkhaka siho ti saññaya tam upagantum asakkontā geham gantvā 
ārocesuti.  Sakalagümavüsino āvudhāni gahetvā samkhe dhāmentā bhe- 
riyo «vādentā khettasamipam gantvā unnadimsu. Gadrabho maraņa- 
95 bhayabhito gadrabharavam ravi. Ath’ assa gadrabhabhavam iatvā 
Bodhisatto pathamam gātham aha: | 


N' etam sihassa naditam na vyagghassa na dipindo, ` » 
paruto sihacammena jammo ‘nadati gadrabho ti. 


Gāmavāsino pi tassa gadrabhabhāvar atvā atthini bhaijant pothēirā. | 
80 sīhacammam ādāya agamamsu. Atha so vāņijo āgantvā tarh vyasa- 
nappattam gadrabhath disvā dutiyar) gātham āķa: | : 


9 


Ciram pi kho tam khādeyya gadrabho haritam yavam 

pāruto sihacammena, ravamàno ca diisayiti. p 
Tasmim evam vadante yeva gadrabho tatth' eva mari, vanijo pi tam 
pahaya pakkāmi. 


6: RADHA-JATAKA. , 


Atīte Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto su- 
kayoniyalh nibbati, Radho ti ‘ssa nāmam, kanitthabhātā pan’ assa 
Potthapādo nāma. Te ubho pi taruņakāle yeva eko luddako gāhetvā 
Baranasiyam ajifiatarassa brahmanassa adāsi. Brahmano te putta- 


tthāne thapetvā patijaggi. Brahmanassa pana brāhmaņī arakkhita 10 


dussīlā. So voharakaranatthaya gacchanto te sukapotake āmantetvā 
„tāta, aham voharatthaya gacchami, kale vikale và tumhākam matu 
karanakammam olokeyyatha 'ti, aiifiassa purisassa gamanabhavam và 
agamanabhavam va janeyyatha* 'ti brahmanim sukapotake paticcha- 


petvà agamāsi. Sa tassa nikkhantakalato patthāya anācāram cari, 15 


rattim pi divāpi agacchantanafi ca gacchantānaū ca pamanam n’ atthi. 
Tam disvā Potthapado Radham pucchi: „brākmaņo imam brāhmaņim 
amhākam niyyādetvā gato, ayaū ca pāpakammam karoti, vadāmi nan" 
ti. Radho „mā vāditi" aha, So tassa vacanam agahetvà „amma, 
kimkaranà pāpakammam karositi^ aha. Sa tam māretukāmā hutvā 
„tāta, tvah nama mayham putto, ito patthāya na karissamiti, ehi tata 
tava“ 'ti piyayamana viya nam pakkositvā āgatam gahetvā „tvam mam 
ovadasi. attano pamanam na jānāsiti" givam gahetvā māretvā uddha- 
nantaresu pakkhipi. Brahmano āgantvā vissamitva Bodhisattam „kim 


20 


tata Radha mata vo anācāram karoti na karotiti“ pucchanto patha- 25 


mam gātham aha: 
Pavāsā āgato tāta idāni na cirāgato, 
kaccin nu tata te mata na aūūam upasevatīti. 
Rādho „tāta. pandità nāma bhūtam va abhūtam vā aniyyānikam nāma 


yA 


na kathentiti“ ģāpento dutiyam gātham aha: "8 


Na kho pan’ etam subhanam giram saccūpasamhitam, 

sayetha Potfhapüádo va mummure upakūļito. .-4.+ * ^: , 
Evam Bodhisatto brahmanassa dhammam "desetvā. „māyāpi imasmim 
thane vasitum na sakka^ ti brāhmaņam āpucchitvā araüüam eva pāvisi. 


10 


7. Nacca-JATAKA. | ai, 


Atite pathamakappe catuppadā siham rājānam akarsu, maccha 
Anandamaccham, sakuņā suvannahamsam. Tassa pana suvannaraja- 
hamsassa dhita hamsapotika abhirūpā ahositi so tassā varam adāsi. 

5 S& attano cittarucitam sāmikam vāresi. Hamsarājā tassā varam datvā 
Himavante sabbasakune sannipātāpesi. Nānappakārā hamsamorādayo 
sakuņagaņā samāgantvā ekasmim mahante pasanatale sannipatirīšu. 
Hamsarājā ,attano cittarucitam sāmikam āgantvā gaņbatū* ‘ti dhi- 
taram pakkosāpesi. Šā sakuņasamgham olokentī manivannagivam ci- 

10 trapekkhunath moram disvā „ayam me samiko hott“ 'ti rocesi. Sakuna- 
samghā moram upasamkamitva ahamsu: „samma mora, ayam rajadhità 
ettakānam sakunanam majjhe samikam rocenti tayi rucirm uppadesiti*. 
Moro „ajjāpi tava me balah na passasiti* atitutthiya hirottapparh 
bhinditva tava mahato sakuņasamghassa majjhe pakkhe pasāretvā 

15 naccitum ārabhi, naccanto appaticchanno ahosi. Suyaņņahamsarājā 
lajjito „imassa n’ eva ajjhattasamutthānā hiri atthi, na bahiddhāsam- 
utthānam ottappam, nássa bhinnahirottappassa PM dhitaram dassa- 
mīti" sakunasamghamajjhe imam gatham aha: 


Rudam manuññam rucirā ca pitthi veluriyavannupanibha ca giva 
20 vyāmamattāni ca pekkhuņāni, naccena te dhitaram no dadamiti. 


Harmsarājā tasmim yeva parisamajjhe attano bhagineyyahamsapotakassa 
dhitaram adāsi. Moro hamsapotikam alabhitvā lajjitvà tato va uttha- 
hitvā palāyi. Hamsarājāpi attano vasanatthanam eva gato. 


8. ULUKA-JATAKA. ' ^ 


95 Atte pathamakappika sannipatitvā ekam abhirūpam sobhaggap- 
pattam āņāsampannam sabbākāraparipuņnam purisam gahetvā rājānam 
karimsū, catuppadāpi sannipatitva ekam siham rājānam karimsu, maha- 
samudde maccha Ananda nama maccham rajanam akamsu. Tato 
sakunagana Himavantapadese ekasmim pitthipāsāņe sannipatitva „ma- 


80 nussesu rājā paññāyati tathā catuppadesu c eva macchesu ca, amhā- 
kam pan’ antare raja nama n’ atthi, appatisgavāso nāma na vattati, | 


i 11 


amhākam pi rajanar laddhum vattati. ekam rājatthāne thapetabba- 
yuttakath janatha‘ ti te tādisarh sakunam olokayamānā ekam ulikam 
rocetva „ayar no ruecatiti^ āhamsu. Ath’ eko sakuno sabbesam 
ajjhasayagahanattham tikkhatturn sāvesi. (Tassa sāventassa dve sāvanā 
ādhivādetvā tatiyasāvanāya eko kako utthaya „tittha tāv'. etassa imas- 5 
mim rājābhisekakāle evarupam mukham, kuddhassa kidisam bhavissa- 
titi, imina hi kuddhena olokita mayam tattakapale pakkhittatila viya 
tattha tatth’ eva bhijjissāma, imam rājānar katum mayhar na rucca- 
titi“ imam attham pakāsetum pathamam gatham āha: 

Sabbehi kira iātīhi kosiyo issaro kato 10 


sace fiatih’ anuññato bhaneyy’ aham ekavāciyan ti. 


Atha nam anuūiātattā sakuna dutiyam gatham ahamsu: 


Bhana samma anuüüato attham dhammai ca kevalam, 


M amu 


santi hi daharā pakkhī paūūāvanto jutindharā ti. 


ww o 


So evam anuūīāto tatiyam gatham aha: 15 


Na me ruccati bhaddam vo ulukass4bhisecanam, 
akuddhassa mukham passa, katham kuddho karissatiti. 


So evam vatva ,mayham na ruccati, mayham na ruccatiti^ viravanto 
ākāse uppati. Uluko pi nam utthāya anubandhi. Tato patthāya te 
aññamaññarn veram bandhithsu. Sakuņā suvannahamsam rajanam katvā 20 
pakkamimsu. 


9. KunuxcAMIGA-J ATAKA 


Atīte Bārāņasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto kurui- 
gamigo hutvā arafifie ekassa sarassa avidūre ekasmim gumbe vàsam 
kappesi. Tass’ eva sarassa avidūre ekasmim rukkhagge satapatto 25 
nisidi, sarasmi pana kacchapo vasam kappesi. Evam te tayo pi 
sahāyā aññamaññam piyasamvasam vasimsu. Ath' eko migaluddako 
araññe caragio paniyatitthe Po padávalaüjari, disvā lohani- 
gaļasadīsari Vaddhamayam pasar oddetvà agamāsi.  Bodhigati pani- 
yam pāturi āgato pathamayāme yeva pase bajjhitvā Vaddharāvari ravi. 30 
Tassa tena saddena rukkhato satapatto udākato ca kacehapo āgantvā 
„kin nu kho kātabban" ti mantayimsu. Atha satapatto kacchapam 


19 ` 


āmantetvā „samma, tava dantā atthi, tva imam pšsam chinda, aham 
gantvà yathā so nágacchati tathā karissāmi. evam amhehi dvihi pi 
kataparakkamena sahāyo no jivitam labhissatiti* imam attham pakā- 
sento pathamam gātham āha: 


6 Tigha vaddhamayam pasath chinda dantehi kacchapa, 
aham tathā karissāmi yathā n’ ehiti luddako ti. 


t 


Kacchapo cammavarattam khaditum ārabhi. Satapatto luddassa vasa- 
nagamam gato. Luddo paccūsakāle yeva sattim gahetvā nikkhami. 
Sakuno tassa nikkhamanabhavam iatvā vassitva pakkhe pappothetva 
10 tam puredvārena nikkhamantam mukhe pahari. Luddo ,kalakanni- 
sakunen’ amhi pahato“ ti nivattitvā thokam sayitva puna sattim ga- 
hetvā utthāsi. Sakuno ,ayam pathamam puredvarena nikkhanto, idani 
pacchimadvārena nikkhamissatiti^ ñatvš gantva pacchimagehe nisidi. 
Luddo pi ,puredvarena me nikkhamantena külakannisakuno dittho, 
16 idāni pacchimadvārena nikkhamissamiti‘ pacchimadvārena nikkhami. 
Sakuņo puna vassitvā gantvā mukhe pahari. Luddo puna pi kāla- 
kannisakunena pahato „na me esa nikkhamitum detiti* nivattitvā yāva 
arunuggamana sayitvā arunavelaya sattim gahetvā nikkhami. Sakuno 
vegena gantva ,luddo &àgacchatiti^ Bodhisattassa kathesi.  Tasmim 
20 khane kacchapena ekam eva vaddham thapetvā sesavarattā khāditā 
honti, dantā pan’ assa patanākārappattā jātā, mukham lohitamakkhitam. 
Bodhisatto luddaputtam sattim gahetvā asanivegena āgacchantam disva 
tam vaddham chinditvà vanam pāvisi. Sakuno rukkhagge nisīdi. Kac- 
chapo pana dubbalatta tatth' eva nipajji. Luddo kacehaparn pasibbake 
25 pakkhipitva ekasmim khanuke laggesi. Bodhisatto nivattitva olokento 
kacchapassa gahitabhavam iatvā ,sahayassa jivitadanam dassamiti“ 
dubbalo viya hutva luddassa attanam dassesi. So ,dubbalo esa bha- 
vissati, māressāmi nan“ ti sattim ādāya anubandhi. Bodhisatto náti- 
dūre nāccāsanne gacchanto tam ādāya arafiiam pavisi, dūram gata- 
80 bhavam fiatvà padam vaūcetvā aüünena maggena vātavegena gantya 
singena pasibbakam ukkbipitvā bhümiyam pātetvā phāletvā kaccha- 
pam nīhari. Satapatto pi rukkhā otari. Bodhisatto dyinnagh pi ova: 
dam dadamāno „aha tumhe niséaya' jīvitam lebhim, tumhehi pi 
sahāyassa kattabbam mayhàm katari, idāni luddo āgantvā tumhe gan- 
85 heyya, tasmà samma satapatta tvan attano puttake gahetvā afifiattha 


13 


yahi, tvarh hi samma kacchapa udakath pavisā* 'ti aha. Te tathā 
akamsu. . 

Kacchapo pāvisī väri, kuruügo pavisi vanat, 

satapatto dumaggamha dūre putte apānayiti. 


Luddo tam thānam āgantrē kañoi apassitvà chinnapasibbakam ga- 5 
hetvā domanassappatto attano geham agamāsi. Te pi tayo _— 
yāvajīvam vissasam achinditvā yathakammar gata. 


10,  JAVASAKUŅA-JĀTAKA. 


 Atīte Bārāņasijam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto Hima- 
vantapadese rukkhakotthakasakuno hutvā nibbatti. Ath’ ekassa sihassa 10 
marsam khādantassa atthi gale laggi, galo uddhumayi, gocaram gan- 
hitum na sakkoti, kharā vedana vattanti. Atha nam so sakuno go- 
carapasuto disvā sākhāya nilīno „kin te samma dukkhan* ti pucchi. 
So tam attham ācikkhi. „Ahan te samma etai atthim apaneyyam, 
bhayena pana te mukham pavisitum na visahāmi, khādeyyāsi pi man* 15 
ti. „Mā bhāyi samma, nāhan tam khadami, jivitah me dehiti", So 
„sādhū* "ti tam passena nipajjāpetvā „ko jānāti kii p' esa karissa- 
titi“ cintetvā yatha mukham pidahituh na sakkoti tathà tassa adha- 
rotthe ca uttarotthe ca dandakam thapetvā mukham pavisitvā atthi- 
kotirh tundena pahari. Atthi patitvā gatam. So atthim pātetvā sihassa 
mukhato nikkhamanto dandakam tuņdena paharitvā pātento nikkha- 
mitvā sākhagge nilīyi. Siho nirogo , hutvā ekadivasam vanamahisam 
vadhitvā khadati. Sakuno »Vimathsissimi nan“ ti tassa uparibhāge 
sākhāya niliyitvà tena saddhii sallapanto pathamarh gatham aha: 


L9 
e 


c4 2 at we 


Akarámbase te kiccam yam balam ahuvamhase, are T Š 
migarāja namo ty-atthu, api kiūci labhāmase. 


Tam sutvā siho dutiyarh gatham aha: 
Mama lohitabhakkhassa niccam lnddāni Tato 
. dantantaragato santo tai: bahum yam hi jivasiti. 


Tam sutvā sakuno itarā dve gāthā abhāsi: | 30 
Pāli Reader. 3 


14 i pili 


*Akataūīurm akattürarà katassa appatikarakam mies 
‘yasmin kataū anti n’ atthi — niratthā tassa sevanā. 
w. ' Yassa saminukhacinnena | mittadhammo na labbhati 
a ae EN ; anusuyyam m anakkosaih sapikari tamba apakkame ti. 


wL R ` 


D Evam ae 80 tuno pakkāmi. 


K P E : "AT. Sasa-JATAEA. ^. /., 
 Atite Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto sasa- 
yoniyam nibbattitvā aranüe vasati. Tassa pana araüüassa ekato pab- 
batapādo ekato nadī ekato paccantagamako. „Aparo pi ‘ssa tayo 
10 sahāyā ahesum: makkato sigālo uddo ti. Te cāttāro pi paņditā ekato 
vasantā attano attano gocaratthāne gocaram gahetvā sāyaņhasamaye 
ekato sannipatanti. Sasapandito ,danam databbam, silam rakkhitab- 
bam, uposathakammam katabban* ti tiņņam janānam ovadavasena 
dhammam deseti. Te tassa ovadam sampaticchitva attano attano 
15 nivāsagumbarĀ pavisitvā vasanti. Evam kale _gacohante ekadivasam 
Bodhisatto akasam oloketva candam disva „Sve "uposathadivaso* ti 
iatvā tare tayo | aha: „sve uposatho, tumhe tayo pi jana silam 
“° dumādigibvā. upošathikā hotha, sīle patitthāya dinnadānam mahap- 
phalam hoti, tasmā yācake sampatte tumhehi khāditabbāhārato 
90 datvà khādeyyāthā* ‘tii Te „sādhū* ‘ti sampaticchitva attano 
vasanatthanesu vasitvā punadivase tesu uddo pato va agocaram . 
pariyesiesāmiti" nikkhamitvā Gaūgātīram Mes Ath’ eko bālisiko , 
""gatta. rohitamacche uddharitva valliya ' avunitva, “netva Gaūgātīre 
valikaya paticchādetvā, macche gaņhanto adho angam bhassi./ 
25 Uddo macchagandham ghāyitvā vālikam vi iyühitvà mačclie*dievā ni- 
haritvā ,atthi nu kho imesam sāmiko“ ti tikkhattum ghosetvā simikam 
 apassanto valliyam dasitvā attano vasanagumbe thapetvā ,velayam eva 
„„khādissāmiti* attano sīlam ava janto nipajji, Sigalo pi nikkhamitya 
gochrath pariyesanto ekassa kh md kutiyam dve maīhsasūlāni 
80 ekam ‘godharh ekaii ca ° dadhivārakam disvà „atthi nu kho etassa sã- 
miko* ti tikkhatturzh gbosetvā 'sāmikam adisvā dadhivārakassa ugga- 
"baņarajjukar givāja pavesetvā mamsasūle ca godhafi ca mukbena 
dasitvà ņetvā attano «sayanagumbe thapetvà ,veliyam eva khüdissü- 


15 


miti* attano silam āvajjanto nipajji. Makkato pi vanasandax pavisitvā 
ambapindim ` Kharitvà vasanagumbe thapetvà ,,veldyam eva kbādissā- 
miti^ attano silam āvajjanto nipajji. Bodhisatto pana „velājam eva 
nikkhamitvā dabbatiņāni khadissamiti* attano gumbe yeva nipanno 
cintesi: ,mama santikam agatanam yācakānam tiņāni datum na sakkā, 5 
tilataņdulādayo pi mayham n’ atthi, sace me santika yacako àgac- 
chissati attano sariramamsam dassāmiti"., Tassa silatejena Sakkassa 
pandukambalasilasanazh uņhākārati dašsesi. So āvajjamāno imam 
kāraņai disvà „sasarājam vīmamsissāmiti' pathamam uddassa vasa- 
natthānam gantvā brahmanavesena atthasi, „brāhmana, kimattham 10 
thito siti ca vutte „pandita, sace kiūci aharam labheyyam uposathiko 
hutvā samanadhammam kareyyan* ti. So ,sadhu, dassāmi te āhāran* 
ti tena saddhim sallapanto pathamarh gātham aha: 


Satta me rohitā macchā udakā thalam ubbhatā, 
idam brahmana me atthi, etam bhutva vane vasa 'ti. 15 


Brāhmaņo ,pàto va tava hotu, pacchà jānissāmiti" sigālassa santikarh 
gato, tenāpī ,kimattham thito siti“ vutte tath’ evāha. Sigālo „sādhu 
dassamiti“ tena saddhim sallapanto dutiyam gātham aha: 
ü "Dussari me khettapālassa rattibhattam apabhatam, EN 
mamsasulà ca dve godhà ekaū ca dadhivārakam, 20 
idam brahmana me atthi, etam bhutva vane vasa ti. 


Brāhmaņo ,pato va tava hotu, paccha janissamiti* makkatassa 
santikam gato, tenāpi „kimattham thito siti“ vutte tath’ evāha. Mak- 
kato ,sadhu dammiti^ tena saddhim sallapanto tatiyam gatham dha: 

Ambapakk’ odakam sitam sitacchayam- manoramam, 25 
idam brahmana me atthi, etam bhutva vane vasa ti. 


Brāhmaņo ,pato va tava hotu, paccha jànissümiti^ sasapanditassa 
santikam gato, tenāpi ,kimattham thito siti* vutte tath’ evāha. Tam 
sutvā Bodhisatto somanassappatto ,brahmana, sutthu te katah āhā- 
ratthāya mama santikari āgaccbantena, ajjāhar maya adinnapubbam 80 
dana dassimi, wem, pana silava pāņātipātam na karissasi, gaccha 
tata dàrüni sarnkaddbitvā aūgāre katvà mayharh ārocehi, aham attā- 
Dam pariccajitvà aūgāragabbhe patissámi, mama sarire pakke tvam 
maisar khāditvā samaņadhammaīi kaveyyāsiti* tena saddhim salla- 
panto catutthazh gatham aha: 85 


= 


24 


Na sasassa tila atthi na ee pe uidi 


iminā agginā pakkam mamarm bhutvà vane vasa 'ti. 
AU 
Sakko tassa kathan sutvā attano ānubhāvena ekam atigārarāsitā ! mā- 


petvā Bodhisattassa ārocesi. So dabbatinasayanato utthaya tattha gantvā 
6 ,sace me lomantaresu panaka atthi te mā marimsū* ’ti vatvā tikkhattum 
sariram vidhūnitvā sakasariram dānamukhe datvā lamghitva paduma- 
puñje rüjahamso viya pamuditacitto aūgārarāsimhi pati. So pana aggi 
Bodhisattassa sarire lomakūpamattam pi unham katum nāsakkhi, 
himagabbham pavittho viya ahosi. Atha Sakkam āmantetvā „brāh- 


pub 


10 mana, tayā kato aggi atisitalo, mama sarire lomaküpamattam pi un- 
, ham. katum na sakkoti, kim nim’ etan“ ti āka. . „Pandita, nàham 
i brahmano, Sakko aham asmi tava vimamsanatthaya agato“ ti. „Sakka, 
tvam tava tittha, sakalo pi ce lokasannivaso mam dānenā” vīmarisey ya 
n eva me adātukāmatam passeyyà^ ti Bodhisatto sihanddam nadi. 
15 Atha nam Sakko nsasapandita, tava guno sakalakapparh pakato hota“ 
"à pabbatam pīļetvā pabbatarasam ādāya candamandale sasalakkhanam 
ālikhitvā Bodhisattarh āmantetvā tasmirh vanasande tasmim yeva vana- 
gumbe tarunadabbatinapitthe nipajjāpetvā attano devatthanam eva 
gato. Te pi cattāro panditā sammodamānā silam pūleivā uposatha- 
20 kammam katvā yathakammam gata. 


12. MATAKABHATTA-JĀTAKA. 7 i 


. | Atite Baranasiy am Brahmadatte rajjam karente eko ‘Ennai perm 
^ mam pāragū disāpātāokklo ae ācariyo brāhmaņo „matakabhattam dassā- 
miti^ ekam elakam gahapetva antevüsike aha: „tātā, imam eļakarh 
95 nadim netvà nahāpetvā kanthe malam parikkhipitva, pañcañgulikarh | 
datvā mandetvā anetha* "ti. Te „sādhū* 'ti patisunitva tam n Adaya nadin 
gantvā nahāpetvā maņdetvā naditire thapesum. So elako attano pubba- 
kammari ‘disva. , yevarlipa nāma , dukkhā a ajja muccissāmiti* somanassa- 
jato ghatam bhindarito viya mah&hasitam hasitvà puna ,ayam brāh- 
80 mano mam ghatetva maya laddham dukkham labhissatiti^ brāhmane 
karuüüam uppādetvā mahantena saddena parodi. Atha nam te māņa- 
vaka pucchimsu: „samma elaka, tvah mahāsaddena hasi c’ eva rodi 
ca, kena nu kāranena hasi, kena kāraņena roditi“. „Tumhe mam 


17 


imam karanam stis acariyassa santike puccheyyatha" ti. Te tam 
ādāya gantvā idam kāraņam acariyassa ārocesur. Acariyo tesam vacanam 
sutvā elakam pucchi: »kasma, tvar elaka hasi, kasma roditi^. Elako 
attanā katakammam jātissaraūāņena ' aņussaritvā. brahmanassa kathesi: 
,abam brāhmaņa pubbe tādiso va mantajjbāyakabrāhmano hutvā 'mata- 5 
kabbattam dassāmiti” elakath māretvā adasim, sv-āharb ekassa elakassa 
ghātitattā eken' ūnesu paücasu attabhavasatesu sisacchedam papunim, 
ayam me kotiyani "thito  pañcasatimo attabhavo, sv. āham ‘ajja evarūpā 
dukkha muccissāmiti” somanassajāto iminā kāraņena hasim, rodanto 
pana ‘aham tava ekam elakam māretvā paūcajātisatāni sīsaccheda- 10 
dukkham patvā ajja tasmā dukkhā muccissāmi, ayam pana brühmano 
mam māretvā aham vija paūcajātisatāni sisacchedadukkkam labhissa- 
titi’ tayi karuünnena rodin“ ti. „Elaka, mā bhayi, nāhan tam māressā- 
miti*. ,Brahmana, kim vadesi, tayi marente pi amārente pi na sakka 
ajja maya marana muccitun* ti. „Eļaka, ma bhāyi, ahan te ārak- 15 
khám gahetva taya saddhim yeva vicarissamiti“. ,Brahmana, appa: ` 
mattako tava arakkho, maya katapapam pana mahantam balavan ti. 
Brāhmaņo elaka muūcitvā ,imam elakam kassaci pi māretu na 
dassama“ ‘ti antevasike ādāya elaken’ eva saddhim vicari. Elako 
visattiiamatto va ekam pàsanapittham nissāya jatagumbe gīvam ukkhi- 20 
pitvā paņņāni khaditum āraddho. Tath khanam yeva tasmim pāsāņa- 
pitthe asani patita. Eka pāsāņašakalikā chijjitvā eļakassa pasaritagivaya 
patitva sisah. chindi. Mahājano sannipāti.. Tada Bodhisatto tasmim 
thane rukkhadevata hutva nibbatto. So passantass' eva tassa mahaja- 
nass& devatünubh&vena ākāse pallaikena nisiditvà ` ime sattà evarh 95 
papassa phala jānamānā app-eva nama panatipatam na kareyyun* ti 
madhurena sarena dhammam desento imam gatham aha: 


Evaū ce sattā jāneyyum ‘dukkh’ ayam jatisambhavo 
na pano pāņinam haññe, pāņaghātī hi socatiti, 


Evam Mahāsatto nirayabhayena tajjetva dini desesi. Manussā 80 
tam dhammadesanam sutvà nirayabhayabhītā pāņātipātā viramimsu, 
Bodhisatto pi dhamiari desetvā mahajanam sile patitthāpetvā yatha- 
kammam gato. Mahājano pi Bodhisattassse ovàde thatva danadini 


puūiiāti katvā devanagaram piresi. ` 


Aslatic Society, Calemtts 


Acc. Na. AM Sn UN 


5 | pe ove U) 18. 


13. Biverv-Jaraka. 3 4 


Atite Barünasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto mora- 

` yoniyam nibbattitvā vuddhim anvāja, , sobhaggappatto araūie vicari. 
Tadā ekacce vanija disākākam gāhetvā nāvāja Bāverurattham aga- 

6 mamsu, Tasmim kira kale Bāveruratthe sakuņā nama n'atthi. Āgatā- 
gatā ratthavasino tam kūpagge nisinnāri disvā n passath' imassa hig 
vaņņam „galāpariosānari mukhatundakam maņiguļasadisāni akkhīniti* 
kākam eva pasamsitvā te vāņijake āhamsu: „imam ayyo sakuņam am- 
hakam detha, amhākam hi iminā attho, tumhe attano ratthe aññam 
10 labhissathā* 'ti. „Tena hi milena ganhathà* ‘ti. »Kahapanena no 
.dethà^ ‘ti. „Na demā* ’ti. Anupubbena vaddhetva „satena detha“ 
'ti vutte „amhākari esa bahūpakāro, tumhehi pana saddhim metti 
B hotū* ’ti kahāpaņasatam gahetvā adamsu. Te tam gahetvā suvanna- 
pañjare pakkhipitvà nānappakārena macchamamsena c' eva phala- 
15 phalena ca patijaggimsu. Aūūesam sakunanam avijjamanatthane da- 
sahi ásaddhammehi samannagato kako labhaggayasaggappatto ahosi, 
Punavāre te vāņijā ekam mayūrarājānam gahetvā jathā accharāsaddenā 
vassati pāņippahārasaddena naccati evam sikkhapetva Baverurattham 
agamamsu. So mahajane sannipatite navaya dhure thatvā pakkhe 
90 vidhūnitvā madhurassaram niechāretvā nacci. Manussā tam disvā 
somanassajata „etam ayyo sobhaggappattam susikkhitasakunarajanam 
amhükam detha“ ‘ti àhamsu. „Amhehi pathamam kako ānīto, tam 
ganhittha, idāni etam morarajanam ānāyimha, etam pi yācatha, tum- 
hākam ratthe sakunam nama gahetva āganturi na sakkā“ ti. „Hotu 
25 ayyo, attano ratthe aññam labhissatha, imam no dethā* 'ti miilarh 
vaddhetvā sahassena ganhimsu. Atha nam sattaratanavicitte paiijare 
thapetvà macchamamsaphalāpbalehi c’ eva madhulājasakkharāpāta- 
kadihi ca  patijaggimsu. © Mayiiraraja lābhaggayasaggappatto jāto. 
Tassāgatakālato patthāya kakassa lābhasakkāro parihāyi, koci nam olo- 
30 ketum pi na icchi. Kako — KARAM uu ti 
vassanto gantvā ukkārabhūmijam otari.. | 


Adassanena morassa sikhino maūjubhānino 

kākam tattha apüjesum mamsena ca phalena ca. 

Yadā ca sarassmpanno moro Baverum agama 
85 atha labho ca sakkāro vüyasassa ahüyatha. — 


E" 


J Yin n' uppajjati Buddho dhammarājā pabharkaro 
| tava afifie apüjesum puthü samanabrahmane. Ad 
!| Yad& ca sarasampanno o Buddho dhamman . adesayi 


i 


| atha lābho ca sakkāro titthiyanam ahāyathā 'ti. 


| | 14. Šussoxor-JĀTAKa. ` | 5 
 Atite Bārāņasiyam Tambarājā nama rajjam karesi. Tassa Sus- 
sondi nama aggamahesī ahosi uttamarūpadharā. Tadā Bodhisatto. 
supannayoniyam nibbatti. Tasmim kale Nāgadīpo Serumadipo nama 
hoti. Bodhisatto tasmim dipe supannabhavane vasati. So Bārāņasim 
gantvā Tambarājena saddbim manavavesena jūtam kīļati. Tassa rū- 10 
pasampattim disvà „amhākam raüna saddhim evarūpo nàma māņavo 
jūtam kilatiti* Sussondiyā Zrocesum. Sa tam datthukāmā hutvā eka- 
divasam alamkaritva jūtamaņdalar āgantvā paricārikānam antare thita 
tam olokesi. So pi devim olokesi. Dve pi aññamaññam patibaddha- 
cittā ahesum. Supannaraja attano anubhavena nagare vātar samut- 15 
thapesi, gehapatanabhayena rājanivesanā manussā nikkhamimsu. So 
attano ānubhāvena andhakaram katvā devim gahetvā.ākāsena Nagadipe 
attano bhavanam pāvisi. Sussondiya agatatthanam va gatatthānam vā 
jānantā nüma nahesum. So taya saddhim abhiramamano gantvā raūiā 
saddhim jūtam kilati. Rañño pana Saggo nama gandhabbo atthi. So de- 20 
viya gatatthānam ajananto tam gandhabbam āmantetvā „gaccha tava, sab- 
bam thalajalapatham anuvicaritva deviyā gatatthanam passa" 'ti uyyojesi. 
So paribbayath gahetvā dvāragāmato patthāya vicinanto Bharukaccham 
pāpuņi. Tada ca Bharukacchavāņijā navaya Suvannabhümir gacchanti. v^ 
So te upasamkamitvà „ahah gandhabbo, nāvāya vetanam khandetva 95 
tumhakam gandhabbam karissāmi, mam pi netha“ ’ti aha. Te „sādhū* 
‘ti tam āropetvā n&vam vissajjesum. Te sukhapayataya navaya tam c 
 pakkositrà ,gandhabbam no karohiti* àhamsu. „Aham gandhabbam — 
` kareyyam, mayi pana gandhabbam karonte macchā calissanti, atha vo 
nāvā bhijjissatiti*. „Mānusamatte gandhabbam karonte macchāņarm 80 
|; calanam nama n’ athi, Aaronit. „Tena hi na mayham kujjbittha" . be 


— 0 À—À 


| aki. Tas saddens sammatta hutvā macchā, calinau. Ad: eko 


20 


makaro uppatitvā nāvāya patanto navam bhindi. Saggo phalake ni- 
pajjitva yathāvātam gacchanto Nāgadīpe supannabbavanassa nigrodha- 
rukkhassa santikam papuni. Sussondi pi devi supannarajassa jūtam 
kilitum gatagatakale vimana otaritva velante vicaranti Saggagandhabbam 
5 disvā saūjānitvā ,katham āgato siti“ puechi. So sabbam kathesi. 
„Tena hi ma bhayiti* tam assasetva bāhāhi pariggahetvā vimanam . 
aropetva sayanapitthe nipajjāpetvā samassatthakāle dibbabhojanarh 
datvā dibbagandhodakena nahāpetvā dibbavatthehi acchadetva dibba- 
gandhapuppbehi alamkaritvā puna dibbasayane nipajjāpetvā evam tam 
10 patijaggamānā supanņaraūiio agatavelaya paticchadetva gatakale tena 
saddhim kilesavasena abhirami. Tato māsaddhamāsaccayena Bārāņasi- 
vāsino vānijā dārūdakagahaņattbāya tasmim dipe nigrodharukkhamūlam 
sampattā. So tehi šaddhim nāvam abhiruyha Baranasim gantvā 
rājānam disvā va tassa Jütakilanavelàya vinam gahetvā gandhabbam 
15 karonto pathamam gātham dha: 


Vāti gandho timīrānam, kusamuddo va ghosavā, 
dūre ito pi Sussondī, Tamba kama tudanti man ti. 


Tam sutvā supanno dutiyam gātham aha: 
Katham samuddam atari, katham addakkhi Serumam, 
20 katham tassā ca tuyhan ca ahū Sagga samāgamo ti. 
Tato Saggo tisso gatha abhasi: 
Bharukaccha-payātānam vanijanam dhanesinam 
makarehi bhinnā nava, phalaken’ aham aplavim. 
Sā mam sanhena mudunā niccam candanagandhini 
25 amkena uddhari bhaddā mata puttam va orasam. 
Sà mam annena pānena vatthena sayanena ca 
attanāpi ca mandakkhi, evam Tamba vijanabiti. 


Supanno gandhabbassa kathentass' eva vippatisari hutvà ,aham su- 
pannabhavane vasanto pi rakkhitum nāsakkhim, kim etaya dussilaya“ 
80 ti tam ānetvā ranūo datva pakkami. Tato patthāya puna nagaiichi. 


15. VALĀHASSA-JĀTAKA. | 


Atite Tambapannidipe Sirisavatthun nāma yakkhanagaram ahosi. 
Tattha yakkhiniyo vasimsu. «Tā bhinnanavanam āgatakāle, alamkata- 


21 


patiyattā khādaniyam bhojaniyam gāhāpetvā dāsigaņaparivūtā dārake 
aīnkenādāva vāņije upasamkamanti. Tesam ,manussavasam āgat' amha“ 


'ti satjadanattham tattha tattha kasigorakkhadini karonte manusse, 


gogane | sunakhe ti evam dini dassenti, vāņijānam santika gantvā 
imam yagum pivatha, bhattam bhuñjatha, khadaniyam khādathā* 'ti 
vadanti. Vāņijā ajānantā tāhi dinnar  paribhuñjanti. Atha tesam 
khàditvà bhuüjitvà vissamitakale patisanthāram karonti. ,Tumhe 
katthavāsikā, kuto āgatā, kaham gacchissatha, kena kammena idhāgat' 
'atthā* 'ti pucchanti, „bhinnanāvā hutvà idhāgat” amhā“ 'ti vutte ca 
„sādhu ayyā, ambākam pi sāmikānam  nàvam abhirūhitvā gatà- 
nam tīņi samvaccharāni atikkantāni, te matā bhavissanti, tumhe 
pi vāņijā yeva, mayam tumhākam pādaparicārikā bhavissāmā* 'ti 
vatvā te vāņije itthikuttahāvabhāvavilāsehi palobhetvā yakkhanagaram 
netvà sace pathamagahita manussā atthi te devasamkhalikaya ban- 
dhitvā. kāraņaghare pakkhipanti. Attano vasanatthàne bhinnanāva- 
manusse alabhantiyo pana parato Kalyāņim orato Nāgadīpan ti evar 
samuddatiram anuvicaranti, ayam tāsam dhammatā, Ath’ ekadivasain 
paiicasatā bhinnanava: vāņijā tāsam nagarasamīpe uttarimsu. Tā tesam 
santikam gantvā palobhetvā yakkhanagaram ānetvā pathamagahita- 


10 


pas 
or 


manusse devasamkhalikaya bandhitva kāranaghare pakkhipitva jet- 20 


thayakkhini jetthavāņijam sesā sese ti tā paficasata yakkhiniyo te 
paūcasate vāņije attano sāmike akamsu. Atha sā jetthayakkhini 
ratübhage vanije niddam gate  utthaya gantva karanaghare 
manusse māretvā mamsam khaditva agacchati. Sesápi tath’ eva 


karonti. Jetthayakkhiniya manussamamsam khaditva āgatakāle sa- 25 


riram sitalam hoti. Jetthavanijo pariganhanto tassa yakkhinibhavam 


fiatva „imā paficasatipi yakkhiniyo bhavissanti, amhehi palayitum - 


vattatiti* punadivase pāto va mukhadhovanatthāya gantvā sesavāņi- 
janam ārocesi: „imā yakkhiniyo na mānusiyo, aūūesam bhinnana- 
vānam. āgatakāle te simike katvā amhe khadissanti, etha amhe palā- 


yama“ "ti tesu addhateyyasatā „mayam eta vijahitum na sakkhissāma, - 


tumhe gacchatha, mayam na palayissima“ "ti āhamsu. Jetthavāņijo 
attano vacanakare addhateyyasate gahetva tasam bhito palayi. Tas- 
mim pana kale Badhīsatto valāhasšayoniyar nibbatti, sabbaseto küka- : 


80 


PL 


siso mufjakeso iddbina vehāsarngamo ahosi., So Himavantato ākāse 36 


uppatitvà Tambapaņņidīparu gantvà tattha Tambapaņņisare pallale 
Pali Reader. ` | 4 | 


9 


sayamjatasalim khāditvā gacchati, evam gacohanto va „janapadarii pues ; 


gantukāmā atthi, janapadam gantukāmā atthiti^ tikkhattur karuņāja 
pāribhāvitari ` mānusivācari bhāsati. Te tassa vacanam sutvā upasam- 
kamitvā aüjalim paggayha „sāmi, mayari janapadam gamissama® 'ti 

6 &hamsu. „Tena. hi mayhan pitthim abhirthatha“ 'ti. Ath’ ekacce 
abhiruhimsu ekacce vàladhirà ganhirheu ekacce aüjalim paggahetvā 
attharisu yeva. Bodhisatto antamaso aūjalirin paggahetvā thite sabbe 
pi te addhateyyasate vānije attano ānubhāvena janapadam netvā 
sakasakatthānesu patitthāpetvā attano vasanatthānam agamāsi. Tāpi 

10 kho yakkhiniyo aūūesam āgatakāle te tattha ohīnake addhatezyasato 
manusse vadhitvā khadimsu. 


16. Caropvara- JA ATAKA. 


Atīte: Kassapa-dasabalassa kale Baranasiyam asītikotivibhavassa. : 
setthino putto Mittavindako nama ahosi. Tassa mātāpitaro sotāpannā 
15 ahesum, so pana dussilo assaddho, Atha nari aparabhüge pitari 
kālakate mata kutumbam vicārentī aha: „tāta, tayā dullabhamanus- 
sattari laddham, dānam dehi, silam rakkha, uposathakammam kara, 
dhammam suņāhiti!. „Amma, na mayham dānādīhi attho, mā mam 
kifici avaca, aham yathākammam gamissāmiti* evam vadantam pi nam 
20 ekadivasazh punnamuposathadivase mātā aha: „tāta, ajja abhilakkhito ` 
mahāuposathadivaso, ajja uposatham samadiyitva vihāram gantvā sab- 
barattim dhammam sutvā ebi, aham te sahassam dassamiti“. So 
„sādhū" ‘ti dhanalobhena uposatham samādiyitvā bhuttapātarāso vi- 

' hiirath gantvā divasmi vītināmetvā rattim yathā ekam pi dhamma- 
25 padam kanņari na paharati tathā ekasmim padese nipajjitva niddar 
okkamitvā punadivase pāto va mukham dhovitvā gehath gautvā nisīdi. 
Mata pan’ assa „ajja me putto dhammarh sutvā pāto va dhamma- 
kathikatheram ādāya agamissatiti^ yàgurh khadaniyam  bhojaniyarà 
patiyādetvā ūsanarm paūiiāpetvā tassāgamanarh patimanenti tam eka- 
80 kam āgatai disvā „tāta. dhammakathiko kena nānīto* ti vatvā ond 
mayhath dhammakathiken’ attho" ti vutte „tena hi yagura pivā“ "ti. 
aha, So ,tumhehi mayham sahassam patisutam, tam tava me detha, | 
pacchà pivissāmiti" aha. „Piva tata, paccha ganhissastti". „Gahetvā. 


va; pivissamiti^. Ath’ assa mata sahassabhandikain purato thapesi. 
So yāgum pivitvā sahassabhandikam gahetva vohàram karonto na- 
cirass’ eva visam satasahassam uppādesi. Ath’ assa etad ahosi: 
„nāvam utthāpētvā. vohàram karissāmiti. So navam utthāpetvā 
„amma, aha nāvāya  vohàram  karissamiti^ aha. Atha nam 5 
mata „tvah tata ekaputtako, imasmim ghare dhanam pi bahum, 
samuddo anekadinavo, ma gamiti^ vāresi, So ,aham gamissam’ eva, 
na sakki mam vāretun* ti vatva „ahah tata váressámiti^ matara 
hatthe gahito hattham vissajjāpetvā mātarar. „paharītvā pātetvā an- ` 
taram katva gantvā nāvāya samuddam pakkhandi. Nāvā sattame 10 
divase Mittavindaker ` nissaya samuddapitthe niccala atthāsi. Kāla- 
kannisalaka vāriyamānā Mittavindakass’ eva hatthe tikkhattuth pati. 
Ath’ assa uļumpam datva imam ekar nissāya bahü mà vinassantū* 
ti tam samudde khipimsu, tavad eva nava javena samuddam pakkhandi. 
So pi ulunipe nipajjitva ekam dipam pāpuņi. Tattha phalikavimane 15 
catasso petiyo addasa. Ta sattiham dukkham anubhavanti sattāham 
sukham. So tahi saddhim sattāham dibbasampattir anubhavi. Atha nath 
tā dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamana „sāmi, mayam sattame divase 
āgamissāma, yāva mayam āgacehāma tava anukkaņtbamāno idh’ eva 
vasa“ ’ti vatvā agamamsu. Šo tanhāvasiko hutvā tasmith yeva pha- 20 
lake nipajjitva puna samudda-pitthena gacchanto aparam pi dipam patva 
tattha rajatavimane attha petiyo disva .eten' eva upayena aparasmim 
dīpake maņivimāne solasa aparasmim kanakavimane dvattirisa petiyo 
disvā. tahi saddhià dibbasampattiri anubhavitva tüsam pi dukkhari 
amubhavitui gatakāle puna samuddapitthena gacchanto ekam pākāra- 25 
parikkhittam catudvarai nagarain addasa, ussadanirayo kira so ba- 
hunnam nerayikasattānari kammakaranānubhavanatthānam, Mittavinda- 
kassa pana alamkatapatiyattam nagaram viya hutva upatthasi. So 
„imam nagaram pavisitva raja bhavissāmīti" cintetva pavisitvà khura- 
cakkam ukkhipitvā paccamšnarh nerayikasattam addasa, ath’ assa tam 80 
tassa sise khuracakkar padumam hutvà upatthasi, ure paūcaūgika- ` 
“bandhanain uracehadapasādhanarh hutvà sarirato galantam lohitain 
lohitacandanavilepanath hutvā paridevanasaddo madhuragitasaddo hutvā . 
upatthüsi. So tassa santikam gantvā „bho purisa, ciram taya padu- - 
inam dharitam. dehi me etan“ ti aha. „Samma, na-y-idam padumam, 85 
-Khuracakkam etan“ ti,  ,Tvam mayhath adàtukámatàya evan va- 


: 24 


dasiti*. ' Nerayikasatto cintesi: ,mayham kammam khinam bhavis- 

sati, iminápi majā viya mātaram paháritv& āgatena bhavitabbam, das- 

sāmi 'ssa khuracakkan" ti. Atha nam „ehi bho, ganha imam padu- 

man“ ti vatvà khuracakkam tassa sise khipi, tam tassa matthakarm 
5 pithsamanam bhassi. "Tasmim khane Mittavindako tassa khuracakka- 

bhavam ūatvā „tava khuracakkam ganha, tava khuracakkam ganha“ 

'ti vedanāmatto paridevi. Itaro antaradhàyi. 

X 


vw 


17. SupPĀRAKA-JĀTAKA. ; “ t 


Atīte Bharuratthe Bharurājā nama rajjam karesi. Bharukaccham 

10 nāma pattanagāmo ahosi. Tada Bodhisatto Bharukacche niyyamakajet- 
thassa putto hutv& nibbatti pāsādiko suvanņavaņņo. Suppārakakumāro 
ti 'ssa nāmam karimsu. So mahantena parivārena vaddhanto soļasa- 
vassakāle yeva niyyāmakasippe nipphattim patvā aparabhage pitu accas 
yena niyyamakajetthako hutva niyyamakakammam akāsi, pandito ñana- 
15 sampanno ahosi, tena arülhanavàya vyāpatti nama n' atthi. Tassa 
aparabhage lonajalapahatani dve pi cakkhūni nassimsu. So tato pat- 
thaya niyyamakajetthako hutvápi niyyamakakammam akatvà ,rajanam 
nissāya jivissamiti^ rajanam upasathkami. Atha nam raja agghapani- 
yakamme thapesi Tato patthaya raüüo hatthiratanam assaratanam 
hatthī bhavissatiti! kāļapāsāņakūtavanņam ekam varanam anesum. 
Tam disva raja ,panditassa dassethā* ‘ti dha. Atha nam tassa san- 
tikan nayirnsu. So hatthena tassa sariram parimadditvā „nāyar mañ- 
galahatthi bhavitur anucchaviko, pacchāvāmanakadhātuko esa, etam 
95 hi mātā vijāyamānā ase "bhļitehitun nāsakkhi, tasmā bhiimiyam 
patitvā pacchimapadehi vāmanakadhātuko jato“ ti aha. Hatthim ga- 
hetva Agate pucchirsu. Te ,saccam pandito kathetiti^ vadimsu. 
Tam kāraņam rājā sutvā tuttho tassa attha kahāpaņe dapesi. Pun’ 
ekadivasarh ,rafifio mangalasso bhavissatiti‘. ekam assan ānayimsu. 
80 Tam pi rājā panditassa santikam pesesi. So hatthena parāmasitvā 
„ayan maūgalasso bbavitur na yutto, etassa hi jātadivase yeva mata 
mari, tasmā matu khīrar alabhanto na sammā vaddhito“ ti aha. Sāpi 
'ssa kathā saccā va ahosi. Tam pi sutvā rājā tussite& atth’ eva. 


25 


kahāpaņe dāpesi. Ath’ ekadivasarh, ,mangalaratho bhavissatiti^ ratham 
Aberimsu, tam pi raja tassa santikam pesesi. So tam hatthena parā- 
masitvā ,ayam ratho susirarukkhena kato, tasmā rañño nánucchaviko" 

ti dha. Sāpi 'ssa kathā saceā va ahosi. Raja tam pi sutvā atth' eva 
kahāpāņe dāpesi. Ath’ assa kambalaratanam mahaggham anayimsu. 5 
Tam pi tass’ eva pesesi. So hatthena parāmasitvā ,imassa mūsi- 
kacchinnam ekam thānam atthiti^ dha. Sodhentā tam disva raüüo “wv. 
ürocesum. Raja tussitvā atth' eva kahāpaņe dapesi. So cintesi: 
„ayam raja evarūpāni pi acchariyani disvā atth’ eva kahāpane dāpesi, 
imassa dāyo nahāpitadāyo, nahapitassa jātako bhavissati, kim me eva- 10 
rūpena rājupatthānena, attano vasanatthānam eva gamissamiti“ so 
Bharukaechapattanam eva paccagami. Tasmim tattha vasante  vanija 
navath sajjetvā „kam niyyamakam karissama‘ ’ti mantenta „Suppā- 
raka-panditena ārūļhanāvā na vyapajjati, esa pandito upayakusalo, 
andho samano pi Supparaka-pandito va uttamo* ti tam upasamkamitva 15 
«„niyyāmako no hohiti* vatva „tāta, aham andho, katham niyyimaka- 
kammam karissāmīti" vutte „sāmi, andhāpi tumhe yeva amhākam 
uttamo* ti punappuna yācijamāno ,sadhu tata, tumhehi arocita- 
saññaya niyyümako bhavissamiti^ tesam navam abhirūhi. Te navaya . 
mahāsamuddam pakkhandimsu. Nava satta divasani nirupaddāvā 20 
agamāsi, tato akālavātam uppajji, nàvà cattāro māse pakatisamudda- 7 
pitthe vicaritva Khuramalasamuddam nama patti, tattha maccha 
manussasamānasarīrā khuranāsā udake ummujjanimujjam karonti. 
Vanija te disva Mahasattam tassa samuddassa nāmam pucchanta pa- 
thamam gatham &hamsu: 25 

Ummujjanti nimujjanti manussā khuranāsikā, 
Suppārakan tam pucchāma, samuddo katamo ayan ti. 

Evam tehi puttho Mahāsatto attano niyyamakasuttena sarhsandetva 
dutiyam gātham āha: 


Bharukacchā payat&nam vanijanam dhanesinam 80 
VVS «tilvāya vippanaighaye 'Khuramāliti vuccatiti. 


Tasmim pana samudde vajirai wuppajjati. Mahasatto ,sac’ &ham 
‘ayath vajirasamuddo’ ti evarū etosan kathessami lobhena bahum / 
vajiram gaņhitvā nàvar osīdāpēssdntīti" tesan anācikkhitvā va nāvarū 
laggāpetvā upāyem ekan yottaīh gahetvā macchagahananiyámena jā- 85 


26. 


lah khipāpetvā "vajirasāram uddharitvā navaya ; pakkhipitva aññam 
appagghabhaņdari chaddapesi. Nava tam samuddam atikkamitvā 
parato Aggimalam nama gata. So pajjalita-aggikkhandho viya maj- 
jhantikasuriyo viya ca obhāsam muñcanto stib, Vanija 


5  Yathà aggiva suriyo va samuddo patidissati, 
Suppārakan tam pucchāma, samuddo katamo ayan ti 
gāthāya tar pucchirnsu. Mahāsaito pi tesam anantaragathüya kathesi: 
Bharukaccha payátünam — "pē — A ggimālīti vuccatiti. 
Tasmim pana samudde suvaņņam ussannam ahosi. Mahisatto puri- 
10 manayen’ eva tato pi suvannam gāhāpetvā navaya pakkhipi. Nava 
tam pi samuddam atikkamitvā khīram viya dadhim viya ca obhā- 
santa Dadhimalam nāma samuddam pāpuņi. Vāņijā 
Yathā dadhirh va khiram va samuddo patidissati — pe — 
gāthāya tassa nāmar pucchimsu. Mahāsatto anantaragathaya ācikkhi 
15 Bharukaechü payātānaim — pe — Dadhimaliti vuceatiti. 
Tasmi pana samudde rajatai ussannam. So tam pi upāyens gāhā- 
petvà nāvāya pakkhipāpesi. Nava tam pi samuddam atikkamitvā 
nilakusatinam viya sampannasassam nya ca obhāsamānam nilavaņnarh 
Kusamalam nāma samuddam pāpuni. Vānijā | 
20 Yathā kuso:va sasso va samuddo patidissati — pe — 
. güthaya tassa pi nàmam pucchimsu. So anantaragathaya ācikkhi: 
Bharukacchā payātānam — pe — Kusamāliti vucoatiti, , 
Tasmim pana samudde nilamaniratanath ussannam ahosi. So tam pi 
upāyena gāhāpetvā nāvāya pakkhipāpesi. Nava tam pi samuddam 


25 atikkamitvā nalavanar viya ca veluvanam viya ca kliāyamānai Na- 
lamālam nama samuddam papuni. Vāņijā C E 


Yathā nalo va velum va samuddo patidissati — pe — - 
güthaya tassa pi nāmam pucchimeu. Mahāsatto anantaragāthāja 
 kathesi: | 
80 Bharukaccha pay&tànam — pe — Nalamāliti vucontti, 


A Tasthim pana samudde vasisarügaveluriyas ussannaib, E: jam pi 
x gühüpetvà nāvāya pakkhipāpesi.  Vāņijā N alamālith atil à ERE 


27 


Vaļabbēmukhasemuddari nāma  passitisu, tattha udakam kaddhitrā | 
kaddhitvā sabbatobhāgena uggacchiti, tasmir. sabbatobhāgena ugga- 
todakam sabbatobhügena chinnatatamahāsobbho viya paññayati, ūmijā - 
uggataya ekato pāpātasadisar hoti, bhayajanano saddo uppajjati sotani 
bhindanto viya hadayai phālento viya, tam disva vanija bhītatasitā — 5 


 Mahabhayo bhimsanako saddo suyyati amanuso, =. 
yathā sobbho papāto ca samuddo patidissati — pe — 


güth&ya tassa nümam pucchirsu. | 
Bharukaccha payatanam — pe — Valabhamukhiti vuccatiti , 


Bodhisatto anantaragáthaya tassa namarn ācikkhitvā „tātā, imam Vaļa- 10 
bhàmukham samuddam pattā nivattitum samatthà nāvā nama n atthi, 
ayah sampattanāvar nimujjāpetvā vināsam püpetiti^ aha. Tai ca 
nāvam satta manussasatāni abhirühimsu, te sabbe maranabhayabhita 
ekappaharen’ eva Ayīcimhi paccamana — Satta viya _ atikarunasaram 
muficitsu.  Mahāsatto sthapetvā mar aitūo etesarū sotthibhavar 15 
kātu samattho nāma n' atthi, saccakiriyaya tesam sotthim karissà- 
miti^ cintetvā te āmantetvā „tātā, mam khippam gandhodakena 
nahāpetvā, ahatavatthāni nivāsāpetvā punnapatim sajjetva navaya 
dhure thapetha^ ’ti. Te vegena tatha karimsu. Mahāsatto ubhohi 
hatthehi punnapatim gahetvā nāvāya dhure thito saccakiriyam karonto 20 
osdnagatham aha: 


| Yalo : sarāmi attanam ,yato patto ‘smi viññutam ,, 
| | minm sarieicca ekapanam pi himsitam, | 
etena saccavajjena sotthim „nāvā nivattatt LE opi 


Cattàro māse videsam pakkliantà 'liāvā nivattitvā iddhimā vija iddhà- 25 
nubhāvena ekadivasen eva Bharukacchapattanam agamāsi, gantva ‘ca 
pana thale pi atthn isabhamatiarh thānari pakkhanditvā nāvikassa ghara- 
dvāre atthāsi. Mahāsatto tesam vāņijānam suvannarajatamanippavala- 
vajiráni bhājetvā adāsi, „ettakehi vo ratanehi alam, mā puna sam» 
uddar : pavisitthā* "ti ca tesam ovidant datvā mm dānādīni 80 
Pitīķāāni katvā devapurar pūresi. 


28 


9" 


18. Smam iaJ I ATAKA. /%: 


m 


Passa saddhāya sīlassā' 'ti. Idar Satthā Jetavane viharanto ekam 
saddhath upüsakam ārabbha kathesi. So kira saddho pasanno ariya- 
 süvako ekadivasam Jetavanam gacchanto sāyarit Aciravatītīrat gantvā 
5 navike nāvam tire thapetvā dhammasavanatthaya gate tithe nàvam 
adisvā buddhārammaņar pitim gahetvā nadim otari. Pādā udakamhi 
na osidimsu. So pathavitale gacchanto viya vemajjham gatakāle vici 
passi, Ath’ assa buddhārammanā piti manda jata, pada osiditum 
arabhimsu. So pana buddharammanam pitith dalham katvā udaka- 
10 pitthen’ eva gantvà Jetavanam pavisitva Sattharam vauditvā ekam- 
antam nisidi Satthi tena saddhim patisanthārarh katvā „upāsaka, 
kacei maggam agacchanto appakilamathena āgato siti“ pucchitva ,bhante, 
buddharammanam pitim gahetva udakapitthe patittham labhitv& patha- 
vim maddanto viya agato 'mhiti^ vutte „na kho upāsaka tvan ūeva 
16 Buddhagune anussaritva patittham laddho, pubbe pi upāsakā samudda- 
majjhe nāvāya bhinnàya Buddhagune anussarantā patittham labhimsii“ 
"ti vatvà tena yacito atitam ahari: 
Atīte Kassapasammāsambuddhakāle sotāpanno ariyasavako ekena 
nahüpitakutumbikena saddhim nāvar abhirühi. Tassa nahāpitassa 
20 bhariyā „ayya, imassa sukhadukkham tava bhāro* ti nahāpitam tassa 
upāgakassa hatthe nikkhipi. Atha sā nāvā sattame divase samudda- 
majjhe bhinnā. Te pi dve jana ekasmim phalake nipanna ekam 
dipakam pāpuņimsu. Tattha so nahapito sakune māretvā pacitvā kha- 
danto upāsakassāpi deti. Upasako „alah mayham“ ti na khādati. 
25 So cintesi „imasmim thane amhakam thapetvā tini saranüni añña pa- 
titthà n' atthiti^ so tinnam ratanānari gune anussari. Ath’ assa anussa- 
rantassa tasmim dipake nibbatto nāgarājā sarīram mahānāvam katvā 
māpesi. Samuddadevata niyyamako ahosi. Nava sattahi ratanehi 
s purayittha. Tayo kūpakā indanīlamaņimayā ahesum, sovannamayo 
80 lafikaro, rajatamayāni yottani, suvannamayani pādarāni. Samudda- 
devatā n&vàya thatvà „atthi Jambudīpagāmikā* ti ghosesi. Upāsako 
„mayan gamissāmā ‘ti āha. ° „Tena hi ehi, nāvam abhirūhā" "ti. So 
n&vam abhirühitvà nahapitam pakkosi. Samuddadevatā ,tuyham yeva 
labbhati na etassā* ‘ti aha. „Kimkāraņā* ti. „Etassa sīlagunācāro 


29 


n' atthi, tam legatis aham hi tuyham nàvam āharim na etassā” 'ti. 
„Hotu, aham attanā dirinadāne rakkhitasile bhāvitabhāvanāya etassa \ 

patti "dammiti*. Nahāpito „anumodāmi sámiti^ aha. Devatā „idāni 
ganhissamiti“ tam pi aropetva ubho pi jane samudda nikkhametva 
nadiyā Bārāņasim gantva attano ānubhāvena dvinnam pi tesam gehe 5 
dhanam patitthapetva ,panditeh' eva nama saddhim sathsaggo nama 
kātabbo ti, sace. hi imassa nahāpitassa iminā upāsakena saddhim sarh- 
saggo na bhavissa samuddamajjhe yeva nassissā” ‘ti panditasarnsaggassa - 
gunam "kathayamānā imā gāthā avoca: | 


Passa saddhaya silassa cāgassa ca ayam phalam, 10 
nago navaya vannena saddham vahati upāsakari. 

Sabbhir eva samāsetha, sabbhi kubbetha -santhavam, 

satar hi sannivāsena sotthim gacchati nahāpito ti. 


Evam samuddadevata akase thatva dhammazh desetva ovaditvā naga- 
rajanam ganhitva attano vimānam eva agamasi. 1h 

Satthā imam dhammadesanaii āharitvā saccāni pakasetva jatakarh 
samodhānesi : (saocapāriyosāne upāsako sākadāgāmiphale patitthāhi) 
„tadā sotapanno upāsako parinibbāyi, nāgarājā Sāriputto ahosi, samudda- 
devatā aham eva" 'ti. 


19. CAMMASATAKA-JATAKA. o; 


| ‘Kalyanartipo vat&yan' ti. Idam Sattha Jetavane viharanto cam- 90 
masātakam nama paribbājakar ārabbha kathesi. Tassa kira cammam 
eva nivāšanaū ca pārupanaī ca. So ekadivasam paribbajakarama 
nikkhamitvā Savatthiyazh bhikkhāya caranto elakanam yujjhanatthanam 
sampāpuņi. Elako tam disvā paharitukāmo osakki. Paribbajako ,esa 95 
mayham apacitim dassetiti* na patikkami. Elako vegenāgantvā tam 
ürumhi paharitvā pātesi. Tassa tai asantapaggahakaranam bhikkhu- 
samghe pākatari ahosi. Bhikkhu dhammasabhayam katharh samuttha- 
pesum: -,avuso, cammasātaka-paribbājako asantapaggaham katrā, vinā- 
sam patto“ tī. "Satthā āgantvā „kāya nu 'ttha bhikkhavé etarahi ka: "0 
thaya sannisinnà*. ti pucchitva ,imaya nāmā” 'ti vutte „na bhikkhave 
idan’ eva pubbe p’ esa asantapaggaham katvā vināsam patto“ ti vatva 
atitarh āhari: 

Pāli Reader. | ` 5 


30 


Atite Bārāņasiyam Brahmadatte rajjari kārente Bodhisatto ekas- 

mim vāņijakule nibbattitvā vaņijjar karoti. Tada eko cammasātako 
paribbajako Baranasiyam bhikkhāya caranto elakanam yujjhanatthānam 
patvā eļakam osakkantarh disva apacitim me karotiti^ saññaya apa- 
6 tikkamitvà ,imesam ettakānam manussanam antare, ayar eko elako 
amhakam gunam janàtiti^ tassa aüjalim pagganhitva thito pathamam 


gatham aha: 


Kalyāņarūpo vat’ ayam catuppado subhaddako C eva supesalo ca. 
yo brāhmaņam jatimantipapannam apacayati mendavaro Jasassiti. 


10 Tasmii khane ūpaņe nisinno panditavanijo tarh paribbājākar nise- 
dhento dutiyam gātham āha: 


» ies 


Ma brahmana ittaradassanena vissasam RS catuppadassa, 
dalhappaharam abhikarukhamāno avasakkati dassati suppahāran ti. 


Tassa pana panditavāņijassa kathentass’ eva mendako vegenāgantvā 
15 ürumhi paharitvà tatth’ eva vedanamattam katvā pātesi. So parideva- 
| mano nipajji. Sattha tam kāraņam pakasento tatiyam gatham dha: 


Satthi bhaggam, vattito khāribhāro, sabbam bhaņdari brahmanass'idha 
"n" . bhinnam, 
bahà paggayha kandati..... abhidhavatha, haūūate brahmacārīti. 


20 Catuttham gātham paribbājako āha: 


/ Evam so nihato seti yo apujjam namassati 
yathāham ajja pahato hato mendena dummatīti. 


Iti so paridevanto tatth' eva jivitakkhayam patto ti. Sattha imam 
desanam āharitvā jātakarn samodhanesi: „tadā cammasātako etarahi 
95. cammasatako va, pandito vanijo pana abam eva" ti. 


20. UocmaNeA-JaTAKA. `” 


‘Ucchaiige deva me putto’ ti. Idam Satthā Jetavane vibaranto 
aūfatararn janapaditthim ārabbha kathesi. ‘Ekasmin hi samaye. Ko- 
salaratthe tayo jana aūiatarasmim atavimukhe kasanti. Tasmim samaye 

80 anto afaviyam corā manusse vilumpitvā palàyimsu. Te core pariye- 
sitvā apassantà tam thünarh āgantvā , "tumhe ataviyam vilumpitvā: idani: 


81 


kassakā viya hotha^ 'ti te ,cor& ime“ ti bandhitvā ānetvā Kosala- 
rañño adamsu. Ath’ eka itthi āgantvā ,acchüdanam me detha, accha- 
danam me dethà^ ‘ti paridevantī punappuna rajanivesanam pariyati. 
Raja tassā saddam .sutva ,deh' imissā acchadanan“ ti aha. Sātakam 
gahetvā agamamsu. Sa tam disvā „nāham etam acchadanam yaca- 
miti**āha. Manussā gantvā rañño nivedayimsu: „na kir' esi imam 
acchadanam katheti, sāmikacehādanam kathetiti^. Atha nam raja 
pakkosāpetvā ,tvam kira samikacchadanath yācasiti* pucchi. „Ama 
deva, itthiya hi sāmiko acchādanam nama, sāmikamhi asati sahassa- 
mūlam pi sātakatli nivatthā, ' naggā yeva nama^. Imassa pan’ atthassa 
sādhanattham - 


. Naggā nadi anodakā, naggam rattham arājikam, 
itthī pi vidhava naggā yassāpi dasa bhataro ti 


idah suttam āharitabbarn. Rājā tassā pasanno „te tayo janā kim 
hontiti* pucohi. „Eko me deva sāmiko, eko bhātā, eko putto“ ti. 
Raja ,ahan te tuttho imesu tīsu ekam demi, katamam icchasiti^ pucchi. 
Sa aha: „ahārh deva jīvamānā ekam samikam labhissāmi, puttam pi 
labhissam' eva, mātāpitunnam pana me matattā bhātā va dullabho, 
bhātaram me debi deva“ ‘ti. Raja tussitva tayo pi vissajjesi. Evam 
tam ekikam nissāya tayo jana dukkhato mutta, Tar küranam bhikkhu- 
samghe pākatar jatam. Ath’ ekadivasam bhikkhü dhammasabhayam 
sannipatità „āvuso ekam itthiri nissaya tayo jana dukkha mutta“ ti 
tassā gunakathaya nisidimsu. Sattha āgantvā ,kaya nu 'ttha bhik- 
khave etarahi kathāya sannisinnà^ ti pucchitvà ,imaya nama‘ 'ti vutte 
„na bhikkhave esa itthi idan’ eva te tayo jane dukkhā mocesi, pubbe 
pi mocesi yevà* 'ti vatvā atitam ahari: 

Atīte Bārāņasiyari Brahmadatte rajjam kārente tayo jana atavi- 
mukhe kasantiti sabbam purimasadisam eva. Tadà pana rañpa „tīsu 
janesu kam icchasiti* vutte sā aha: „tayo pi datum na sakkotha deva‘ 
'ti. „Āma, na sakkomiti^. „Sace tayo datum na sakkotha bhātaram 
me dethā“ 'ti. ,Puttakam va sāmikarm vā ganha, kin te bhātarā* ti 
ca vuttā „ete nama deva sulabhā, bhātā pana dullabho* ti vatvā 
imi exu aha: | 


7 ` Uechaüge devas me putto, pathe dhšvantigā pāli 
| "1 E tāli ca desai na passümi yato sodariyam ānaye ti. 


== 


0 


20 


2b 


80 


32 


Raja ,saccam esa vadatiti* tutthacitto tayo pi jane bandhanāģārato 
üüetvà udāsi. Sa tayo pi te gahetva gata. 
Satthāpi „na bhikkhave idan’ eva, pubbe p’ es& ime tayo jane 
dukkhā mocesi yevā” ‘ti imam dhammadesanam aharitva anusandhim 
5 ghatetva jātakarh samodhānesi: ,atite cattāro etarahi cattāro va, raja 
pana alan tena samayena* "ti. 


21. VxpABBHA-JATAKA. 


. Atite Bārānasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente ckasmim gāmake 
aūūataro brahmano Vedabbhain nama mantam jānāti. So kira manto 
10 anaggho mahāraho. N akkhattayoge laddhe tam mantam parivattetva 
ākāse ullokite ākāsato sattaratanavassam vassati. Tada Bodhisatto 
tassa brahmanassa santike sippam ugganhati. Ath’ ekadivasam brāh- 
mano Bodhisattamn ādāya kenacid eva karaniyena attano gama nikkha- 
mitvā Cetiyarattham agamasi. Antaramagge ekasmim araūbatthāne 
15 paūcasatā pesanakacorà nama panthaghatam karonti. "Te Bodhi- 
sattaū ca Vedabbhabrahmanaii ca ganhimsu. Kasma pan’ ete pesana- 
kacorā ti vuccanti, te kira dve jane gahetva ekam dhanābaraņatthāya 
pesenti, tasmā pesanakacorā t' eva.vuccanti, te pi ca pitaputte ga- 
hetvà pitaram „tvah amhàákam dhanam āharitvā puttam gahetvā yā- 
20 hiti" vadanti, eten’ upāyena mātudhītaro gahetvā mātaram vissajjenti, 
jetthakakanitthe gahetvā jetthakabhatikam vissajjenti, ācariyantevāsike 
gahetvā antevasikam vissajjenti. Te tasmim pi kale Vedabbhabrah- 
manam gahetva Bodhisattam vissajjesum. Bodhisatto ācariyam van- 
ditvà ,aham ekāhadvīhaccayena āgamissāmi, tumhe mā bhayittha, 
95 api ca kho pana mama vacanam karotha, ajia dhanavassāpanaka- 
nakkhattayogo bhavissati, mà kho tumhe dukkham asahanto mantar 
parivattetvii dhanam vassāpayittba, sace vassāpessatha tumhe vināsar 
_pāpuņissatha ime ca paūcasātā cora” ti. Evam ācarijam ovaditvā 
dhanatthaya agamāsi. Corāpi suriye attham gate brāhmaņam ban- 
30 dhitvā nipajjāpesum. Tam khaņam yeva pācīnalokadhātuto paripuņ- 
ņam candamandalam utthahi. Brāhmaņo nakkhattam olokento ,dhana- 
vassiipanaka-nakkhattayogo laddho, kim me dukkhena anubhütens, 
mantah parivattetva ratanavassarh vassāpetvā corānam dhanarñ datva 
yathasukham gamissamiti“ cintetvā core āmantesi: „bho cord, tumhe 


33 


mam kimatthaya ganhittha^ ‘ti. „Dhanatthāya ayyá^ ‘ti. „Sace vo 

dhanena attho khippam mam bandhanā mocetvā Sisari nahapetva ahata- 

vatthāni acchādetvā gandhehi vilimpāpetvā pupphani pilandhāpetvā 
thapetha“ ‘ti, Cora tassa katham sutva tathā akamsu. Brahmano 
nakkhattayogam ñatvā mantam parivattetvā ākāsam ullokesi. Tavad 5 
eva ākāsā ratanāni patimsu. Cord tam dhanam sarhkaddhitvā uttar&- V 
saūgesu bhandikam katvā pāyimsu. Brāhmaņo pi tesam pacchato va 
agamasi. Atha te core aññe paficasata cora ganhimsu. ,Kimatthain 
amhe ganhathā* "ti ca vutta ,dhanatthaya“ ‘ti āhamsu. „Yadi vo 
dhanena attho etam brahmanam ganhatha, eso ākāsarm ulloketva dha- 10 
nam vassāpesi, amhakam p’ etam eten’ eva dinnan* ti. Cora ‘core 
vissajjetva „ambākam pi dhanam dehiti“ brahmanam ganhimsu. Brāh- 
mano „aham tumbakam dhanam dadeyyam, dhanavassāpanaka-nak- 
khattayogo pana ito samvaccharamatthake bhavissati, yadi vo dhanena 
attho adhivasetha, tada dhanavassam vassdpessamiti* aha. Cora 15 
kujjhitva „ambho dutthabrahmana, aññesam idin' eva dhanam vassa- 
petvà amhe aūūam samvaccharam adhivāsāpesīti* tiņhena asinā brāh- 
manam dvidbā chinditvā magge chaddetvā vegena anubandhitva tehi 
corem saddhim yujjhitvā te sabbe pi māretvā dhanam adaya puna v 
dve. "kotthāsā. hutvā aūūamaiūam yujjhitvā addhātiyāni purisasatāni 20 
ghatetva etena upāyena yāva dve jana avasitthā ahesum tava aññam- 
aññam ghātayimsu. Evam tam purisasahassam vinàsam pattam. Te 
pana dve jana upāyena tam dhanam āharitvā ekasmim gāmasamīpe 
gahanatthāne dhanam paticchadetva eko khaggam gahetvā rakkhanto 
nisidi, eko tandule gahetva bhattam pacaüpetum gāmam pāvisi. „Lobho 25 
ca nam’ esa vināsamūlam eva“ ti. Dhanasantike nisinno cintesi: 
.tasmim agate imam dhanamh dve kotthāsā bhavissanti, yan nūnāham 
tam Agatamattam eva khaggena paharitvà ghāteyyan* ti so khaggam 
sannayhitvā tassa āgamanam olokento -nisidi. Itaro pi cintesi: „tam 
dhanam dve kotthāsā bhavissanti, yan nünáham bhatte visam pakkhi- 30 
pitva tam purisam bhojetvā jivitakkhayam pāpetvā ekako va dhanam 
gaņheyyan*. ti so nitthite bhatte sayam bhuūjitvā sesake visai pak- 
khipitva tam ādāya tattha agamāsi. Tam bhattam otāretvā thita- — AR 
mattam eva itaro khaggena dvidhā chetya Han. paticchanne ' “thine — 
chaddetvà tañ ca bhattam bhuūjitvā sayam pi. tatth' eva jivitakkha- a5 
yam pāpuņi, Evam tam dhanam nissāya sabbe pi vināsam papunimsu. 


34 


Bodhisatto pi kho ekāhadvīkaccayena dhanart ādāya āgato. Tasmirh 
thine ācariyam adisvā vippakinnam pana dhanam disvà „ācariyena 
mama vacanam skatva dhanam vassāpitam bhavissati, sabbehi vinasam 
pattehi bhavitabban* ti mahāmaggena pāyāsi. Gacchanto ācariyar 
5 mahāmagge dvidha chinnam disvà „mama vacanam akate mato^ ti 
dārūni uddharitvā citakam katva ācariyam Shāpettā Vanapupphehi 
pujetva parato gacchanto jivitakkhayam patte paücasate parato addha- 
tiyasate ti anukkamena avasāne dve jane jivitakkhayam patte disva 
cintesi: ,imam dvihi unam purisasahassarm vinasam pattam, aññehi 
10 dvihi corehi bhavitabbam, te pi santhambhitum na sakkhissanti, kahan 
nu 'kho te gata“ ti gacchanto tesam dhanam ādāya gahanatthana- 
pavitthamaggam disvā gacchanto bhandikabaddhassa dhanassa ràsim 
disvà ekam bhattapatim avattharitvà matam addasa, "fato „idan nama 
tehi katarh bhavissatiti^ sabbam ūatvā „kahan nu so puriso* tà vicinanto 
15 tam pi paticchanne thane apaviddham disvā ,amhakam ācariyo mama 
vacanam akatva attano dubbacabhavena attanápi vinasam patto, aparam 
pi tena purisasahassarh vindsitam, anupāyena vata akāraņena attano 
vaddhir patthayamana amhākam ācariyo viya mahānāsam eva pāpu- 
nissantiti^ cintétva imam gātham aha: 
90 Anupayena yo attham icchati so vihaiinati, 
Cetā hanithsu Vedabbham, sabbe vyasanam ajjhagū ti. ` “ 


Evam Bodhisatto ,yathà amhākam ācariyo anupāyena atthāne pa- 
rakkamam karonto dhanam vassāpetvā attanā jīvitakkhayam patto 
aññesañ ca vindsappaccayo jāto evam eva yo aiio pi anupāyena attano 

25 attham iechitvā vāyāmam karissati sabbaso attanā ca vinassissati pare- 
sañ ca vināsappaccayo bhavissatiti^ vanam unnādetvā devatāsu sādhu- 
kàram dadamānāsu imāya gāthāya dhammam desetvā tam dhanamh 
upayena attano gehari āharitvā dānādīni puññani karonto yāvatāyukarh 
thatvā jīvitapariyosāne saggapatham pūrayamāno agamāsi. 


80 — o | "7 99. DApHIVAHANA-JATAEA. ` ji 


Atite Baranasiyarn Brahmadatte rajjarh kārente Kisiratfhe cattāro 
bhātaro brāhmaņā isipabbajjain pabbajitvā Himavantapadese. pāļipāķiyā 
panņasālā katvā vāsam kappesum. Tesar- jetthabhētā kālata. katrā. 


9b 
A. si^ Ww th 


Sakkatiari püpuni. So tam kāraņa jiatvā antarantarā sattatthadiva- 
saccayena tesam upatthanarh gacchanto , ekadivasatil jetthakatapasam 
vanditvā ekámantam  nisiditvà bhaite. kena, te aitho* ti ucchi. 
Paņdurogatāpaso „agginā me attho" ti dha. So tassa vāsiphārasukam 
adāsi. Vasipharasuko nama dande pavesanavasenā vāsi pi hoti pharasu 5 
pi. Tāpaso „ko me imam ādāya dārūni &harissatiti^ dha. Atha nam 
Sakko evam aha: nyada te bhante dārūhi attho, imam pharasum hat- 
thena pahamsitvā | "d&rüni me āharitvā aggim kareyyāsiti' vadeyyasi, 
dārūni āharitvā aggim katvā dassatiti*. Tassa vasipharasukam datva — 
dutiyam pi upasamkamitvà „bhante, kena te attho“ ti pucchi. Tassa 10 
paņņosālāja haithimaggo hoti. So hatthihi upadduto ,hatthinam, me 
vasena “dukkharñ _Uppajjati,, te palüpehiti ^ aha. Sakko tassa ekari 
bherir upan&metvà' ',bhante, imasmirb tale pahate tumhakam paccā- 
mitta palāyissanti, imasmim pahate mettacittā hutva caturaiiginiya 
senāya parivāressantiti* vatva tam bherim datvā kanitthassa santikam 15 
gantva ,bhante, kena te attho* ti pucchi. So pi pandurogadhatuko 
va, tasma ,dadhinà me attho” ti aha, Sakko tassa ekam dadhighajam. 
datvā „sace tumhe icchamānā imam ūvajjēssatha mahānadī hutvā 
mahogham pavattetvā  tumhākam rajjam gahetva datum samattho pi 
bhavissatiti^ vatva pakkami. Tato patthaya vāsipharasuko jetthabhati- 20 
kassa aggim karoti,.itarena bheritale pahate hatthi palāyanti. kanittho 
dadhim paribhuūjati. Tasmim kale eko sūkaro ekasmim purāņa- *. 
gāmatthāne caranto ānūbhāvasampānnari ekam manikkhandham addasa. 

So tam manikkhandham mukhena dasitvà tassānubhāvena ākāse uppa- 
titvā samuddamajjhe ekam dīpakam gantva „ettha dani maya : vasitum 20 
vattatiti* otaritvā phāsukatthāne udumbararukkhassa hetthā vāsarh 
kappesi. So ekadivasam tasmim rukkhamūle manikkhandbari purato 
thapetvā niddam okkami. "Āth' eko Kāsiratthavāsimanusso ,nirupa- `. 
kāro esa amhākan* ti mātāpitūhi gehā nikkaddhito ekam pattanaga- ...; 
mam gantvā nāvikānar kammakaro hutvā nüvam āruyha samudda- 80 
majjhe bhinnāya nāvāya phalake nipanno tam dipam patva phalā- 
phalüni pariyesanto tam sükeram niddayantam disvā sanikam gantvā 
manikkhandham gaņhitvā tassa ānubhāvena ākāse uppatitvā udum- 
bararukkhe nisīditvā cintesi: „ay am sūkaro imassa manikkhandhassa 
ānubhāvena ākāsacāriko hutvā idha vasati maññe, maya pana patha- 85 
mam. eva imam : ‘maretva -mamsam khāditvā pacch& gantumi vattatiti*.. 


~ 


36 


So ekam dandakam bhafijitva tassa sise pātesi. Sūkaro pabujjhitva 
manim apassantó ito c’ ito ca kampamāno vidhavati. Rukkhe ni- 
sinnapuriso hasi. Sūkaro olokento tar disvā rukkham sisena paha- 
ritvà tatth’ eva mato. So puriso otaritva aggim katvā tassa mamsam 
5 pacitva khāditvā ākāse uppatitva Himavantamatthakena gacchanto 
assamapadam disvā jetthatapasassa assame otaritva dvihatiham vasitvā 
tāpasassa vattapatirattati, akāsi vāsipharasukassa ànubhàvaii ca passi. 
So „imah maya gahetum vattatiti^ manikkhandhassa ànubhavam tāpa- 
sassa dassetvā ,bhante, imam me gahetvā vasipharasukam detha“ ’ti 
10 aha, Tāpaso akasena caritukamo tam gahetvā vasipharasukam adasi. 
So tam gahetvā thokam gantvā vasipharasukam  pahamsitvà „vāsi- 
pharasuka, tāpasassa sisar: ohinditvà manikkhandham me ahara‘ ’ti 
aha. So gantva tapasassa sisam chinditva manikkhandham āhari. So 
vasipharasukam paticchannatthāne thapetvā majjhimatāpasassa santi- 
15 kam gantvā katipāham vasitvā bheriyā ānubhāvam disvā manikkhan- 
 dhar datvā bherim ganhitvā purimanayen’ eva tassa pi sisam chinda- 
petva kanittham upasamkamitva dadhighatassānubhāvam disvā manik- 
khandham datvā dadhighatar gahetva purimanayen' eva tassa sisam 
 ehindápetv& manikkhandhaii ‘ca vāsipharasukai ca bheriñ ca dadhi- 
40 ghatai ca gahetva ākāse uppatitvā Baranasiya avidure thatva Barana- 
siraūūo ,yuddham va me detu rajjam vā* ti ekassa purisassa hatthe 
pannat pāhesi. Raja sasanam sutvā va ,coram gaņhissāmā* 'ti nik- 
khami. So ekam bheritalam pahari, caturafigini senā parivāresi. 
Rañño avattharanabhavarn iiatvā dadhighatam vissajjesi, mahānadī 
25 pavatti, mahājano  dadhimhi osīditvā nikkhamitum nāsakkhi. Vasi- 
pharasukam pahamsitvā „raūio sisam āharā" ‘ti aha, vāsipharasuko 
gantvà sisam &haritvà pādamūle nikkhipi, eko pi àvudham ukkhi- 
pitum nāsakkhi. So mahantena balena parivuto uagaram pavisitvā 
‘abhisekam kāretvā Dadhivahano nama raja hutvā dhammena rajjam 
80 karesi. Tass’ ekadivasam mahānadivam j&lakarandake  Kijantassa 
"Kaņņamuņdadahato devataparibhogam ekam ambapaļdgs āgantvā jāle 
laggi. Jālam ukkhipantā tam disvā rañño adamsu.' Tam mabantarir 
ghatappamanam parimaņdalam suvannavannam ahosi. Rājā „kissa 
phalar nām” etan“ ti vanacārake pucchitva „ambaphalan* ti-sutva 
85 paribhuūjitvā tassa atthim attano uyyāne ropāpetvā khirodakena giñ- 
cūpesi. Rukkho nibbattitvā tatiye samvacchare phalam adāsi.. Am- 


37 


bassa sakkaro maha ahosi, khirodakena siücanti, gandhapaücangulikam 
denti, mālādāmāni parikkhipanti, gandhatelena dipam jālenti, parik- 
khepo pan’ assa patasaniyà ahosi. Phalani madhurani suvannavannani 
ahesum. Dadhivāhanarājā aüüesam rajinam ambaphalam pesento 
atthito rukkhanibbattanabhayena amkuranibbattanatthanam mandu- 5 
kantakena vijjhitvā pesesi. Pesar ambam khāditvā atthi ropitam na 
sampajjati. Te „kin nu kho ettha kāraņan* ti pucchanta tam kāra- 
pam jànimsu. Ath’ eko raja uyyanapalam pakkositva „Dadhivāhanassa - 
ambaphalanam rasam nāsetvā tittakabhavam kātu sakkhissasiti^ puc- 
chitva ,ama deva“ 'ti vutte „tena hi gacchà^ ‘ti sahassari datvā pe- 10 
sesi. So Baranasim gantva „eko uyyanapalo agato“ ti raūūo ārocā- 
petva tena pakkosāpito pavisitvā r&janam vanditva „tvarh uyyānapālo* 

ti puttho „ama deva“ ‘ti vatvā attano ānubhāvam vannesi. Raja 
„gaccha, amhākar uyyānapālassa santike hohiti^ aha. Te tato 
patthaya dve jana uyyünam patijagganti. Adhunagato uyyānapālo 16 
akālapupphāni pupphāpento akālaphalāni ganhāpento uyyānari rama- 
niyam akāsi. Raja tassa pasīditvā porāņaka-uyyānapālar nīharitvā 
tass’ eva uyyanam adāsi. So uyyānassa attano latthagatabhāvari 
iatvā ambarukkham parivāretvā nimbe ca paggavavalliyo ca ropesi. 
Anupubbena nimbà vaddhimsu. Mūlehi mūlāni sākhāhi sákhà sarn- 20 
sattha onaddhà vinaddha ahesum. Tena asata-amadhurasamsaggena 
tava madhuraphalo ambo tittako jato nimbapannasadisaraso. Amba- 
phalanam tittakabhavam ūatvā uyyānapālo palāyi. Dadhivahano uy- 
yanam gantvā ambaphalam khadanto mukhe pavittham ambayusam 
nimbakasatarh viya ajjhoharitum asakkonto kakkaretva nutthubhi. Tada 25 
Bodhisatto tassa atthadhammānusāsako ahosi Raja Bodhisattam 
āmantetvā „pandita, imassa rukkhassa porāņakaparihārato parihinam 
n’ atthi. evarh sante pi 'ssa phalath tittakam jātari, kin nu kāraņan* 
ti pucchanto pathamam gatham aha: 


Vannagandharasiipeto amb’ ayam ahuvā pure, 80 
tam ‘va pūjam labhamāno ken’ ambo katukapphalo ti. 


Ath’ assa kürapar ācikkhanto Bodhisatto dutiyam gatham aha: 


` Pucimandaparivāro ambo te Dadhivāhaina, | 
Milam mūlena samsattham, sakh& sākhā nisevare, ,. ,: | 
. asatar sannivasens ten’ ambo katukapphalo ti. 35 
3 Pal! Reader, a yf | 6 


38 


Raja tassa vacanam sutva sabbe pi pucimande 08 paggave ca chindā- 
petvā mūlāni uddharāpetvā samantā amadhuram parum harüpetvà 
madhurari pamsum pakkhipapetva khirodaka-sakkharodaka-gandhoda- 
kehi ambarm patijaggāpesi. So madhurarasasamsaggena puna madhuro 

5 va ahosi. Raja pakati-uyyanapalakass’ eva uyy&nam niyyādetvā yāva- 
tayukam thatvà yathakammam gato. 


23. MAHASILAVA-J ATAEA. 


-Atite Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto rañño 
aggamahesiyā kucchismim nibbatto. Tassa nāmagahaņadivase Silava- 
10 kumāro ti nāmam akamsu. So solasavassapadesiko va sabbasippesu 
nipphattim patvā aparabhage pitu accayena rajje patitthito Mahāsīla- 
yaraja nama ahosi dhammiko dhammaraja. So nagarassa catusu dvà- 
'resu catasso majjhe ekam nivesanadvare ekan ti cha dānasālā kāretvā 
kapanaddhikanam dānam deti silam rakkhati uposathakammam karoti 
16 khantimettānuddayasampanno, amke nisinnam puttam paritosayamāno 
viya sabbasatte paritosayamano dhammena rajjam kāreti. Tass’ eko 
‘amacco antopure padubbhitva aparabhage pākato ahosi. Amaceā 
raūūo arocesum. Raja pariganhanto attanā paccakkhato iiatvā tam 
amaccam pakkosapetva ,andhabala, ayuttan te katam, na tvam mama 
20 vijite vasīturi arahasi, attano dhanañ ca puttadarañ ca gahetvā añ- 
ūattha yahiti^ ratthā pabbājesi. So Kāsirattham atikkamma Kosala- 
rājānam upatthahanto anukkamena raūūo abbhantare vissasiko jato. 
So ekādivasari Kosalarajanam aha: „deva, Baranasirajjam nimmakkhika- 
madhupatalasadisam, raja atimuduko, appen’ eva balavāhanena sakka 
25 Baranasirajjam ganhitun" ti. Raja tassa vacanam sutva „Bārāņasi- 
rajjam nama maha, ayaū ca ‘appen’ eva balavāhanena sakkā ganhitun’ 

ti aha, kin nu kho payuttakacoro siya“ ti cintetvā »payuttako si, 
maüie" ti aha. „Nāham deva payuttako, saccam eva vadami, sace- 
me na saddahatha manusse pesetvā paccantagāmar hanapetha, ott 
80 manusse gahetvā attano santikam nite dhanam datvā vissajjessatiti*. 
Raja ,ayam ativiya stro hutva katheti, vimarhsissámi tava“ "ti attano 
purise pesetvà paceantagāmarh hanāpesi. Te core gahetvā Bārāņasi- 
raüio dassesum. Raja te disvā „tātā, kasmā gāmam hankéh&t 'ti 


39 


puochi. ,Jivitum asakkontā devā“ "ti „Atha kasmā mama santikath 
na &gamittha, ito dāni patthāya evarūpa mā karittha” 'ti tesar 
dhanàm datvā vissajjesi. Te gantvā Kosalarafifio tam pavattim āro- 
cesum. So ettakenāpi gantum avisahanto puna majjhe janapadam 
hanāpesi. Te pi core raja tath' eva dhanam datva vissajjesi. So 5 
ettakenāpi agantva puna pesetvā antaravithiyam vilumpapesi. Raja 
tesam pi corānam dhanam datvā visajjesi yeva, Tada Kosalaraja 
,ativiya dhammiko raja“ ti ñatva „Bārāņasirajjam gahessāmiti* bala- 

, vāhanarh ādāya niyyāsi. „Tadā pana Bārāņasiraiīo mattavarane abhi- 
«mukhari ügacchante" anivattanadhammā asaniyapi sīse patantiya asanta- 10 
-.sanasabhivà, Sīlavamahārājassa ruciyà sati. sakala-Jambudipe rajjam i 
 gahetum samatthà sahassamatta abhejjavarasūramahāyodhā honti. Te 

I „Kosalarājā ügacchatiti^ sutvā rajanam upasamkamitva „deva, Kosala- 
raja kira 'Bārāņasirajjam ganhissamiti’ āgacchati, gacchàma nam am- 
hakam rajjasimam anokkantamattam eva pothetvā gaņhāmāt ti va- 15 
dimsu. , Tata, mam nissáya aūūesam kilamanakiccam n’ atthi, rajjat- 
thikā rajjam ganhantu, mà gamitthā* ‘ti nivāresi. Kosalarājā simam 
atikkamitvā.. janapadamajjham pāvisi. Amacca puna pi rajanam upa- 
samkamitvā tath’ eva vadimsu. Raja purimanayen' eva nivāresi. 

Iu balinagare thatvà ,rajjam và detu yuddham vā“ ti Silava- 20 
'mahārājassa sasanam pesesi Raja tam sutva „n atthi maya saddhim 
yuddham, T&jjam ganhatü^ ‘ti patisāsanam pesesi. Puna pi amaccā 
rajanam ‘upasathkamitva „deva, na mayam Kosalaraüüo nagaram pa- 
visitu dema, bahinagare yeva nam pothetvā ganhamà" ‘ti ahameu. 
Raja purimanayen’ eva nivāretvā nagaradvārāni avāpurāpetvā, saddhim 25 
 amaceasahassena mahatale pallarkamajjhe nisidi. Kosalarājā mahan- 
„tena balavühanena Bārāņasim pāvisi. So ekam pi patisatturi apas- 

: santo rafiio nivesanadvaram gantvā amaccaganaparivutam apārutādvāre | 
| ;nivesüne ‘alarhkatapatiyattam mahātalar āruyha nisinnarh niraparādham 

| (Sīlavamāhšrājānaru | saddhim amaccasahassena gaņhāpetvā ,gacchatha, 80 
;imam rājāna saddbih amaccebi pacchabaham gaJhabandhanath ban- `. 
| dhit maaan seb qalappamdge iHe sir yah eko 

Pi hattham ` ukkhipitur na sakkoti evath pareuth pakkhipitvā nikha- 

| | natha, rattim sigālā āgantvā etesam kitabbayuttakar karissantiti“ aha. 

| Manussá ` coráraüio. pani Sutvà rüjünam saddhim amaccehi pacchā- 95 
bu us čgāļhabandhanari -bandhitva ` nikkhamesum. Tasmim pi kale 


40 


Silavamaharaja coraraiio aghatamattam pi nák&si. Tesu pi &maccesu 
evam bandhitvā niyamünesu eko pi rañño vacanam bhinditum samattho 
nama nāhosi, evarh suvinītā kir’ assa parish. Atha te rājapurisā 
sāmaccam Sīlavarājānam āmakasusānam netvā galappamane āvāte 
5 khaņitvā Sīlavamahārājānam majjhe ubhosu passesu sesāmacce ti sabbe 
pi āvātesu otāretvā pamsum akiritva ghanam šākotetvā agamamsu. 
Sīlavarājā amacce "āmantetvā „coraraūiio upari kopam akatvā mettam 
eva bhavetha: tata“ ti ovadi. Atha addharattasamaye ,manussamam- 
sam khādissāmā" 'ti sigālā agamimsp. Te disvā rājā ca amaccā ca 
10 ekappahāren' eva saddam akamsu. igālā bhītā palāyimsu. Te ni- 
vattitvā olokentā pacchato kassaci anāgamanabhāvam iatvā puna 
paccügamimsu. Itare pi tath' eva saddam akamsu. Evam yāvatati- 
yam palāyitvā puna olokenta tesu ekassāpi anāgamanabhāvam fiatva 
,vajjhappattà ete bhavissantiti^ sūrā hutvā nivattitvā pupa tesu sad- 
15 dam karontesu pi na palāyimsu. Jetthakasigālo rājānam upagaiichi, 
sesā sesanam santikam agamamsu. Upayakusalo raja tassa attano 
santika agatabhavam ūatvā dasitum okásam dento viya givam ukkhi- 
 pitva tam givaya dasamanam hanukatthikena akaddhitva yante pakkhi- 
pitva viya gāļhakam ganhi. Nagabalena raūīā hanukatthikena ākad- 
20 dhitva givaya daļhagahitasigālo attānam mocetum asakkonto maraņa- 
bhayatajjito mahāvifavarh ` viravi. Avasesasigālā tassa tam attassaram 
sutvā ,ekena purisen’ esa gahito bhavissatiti^ amacce upasamkamitum 
asakkonta maranabhayatajjita sabbe palayimsu. Ratio hanukatthi- 
kena dalham katva gahitasigale aparaparam samsarante, pamsu sithilo 
25 ahosi. So pi sigālo maranabhayabhito catūhi pādehi raūžo uparima- 
bhāge pamsum apabbthi. Raja pamsuno sithilabhavath fiatva sigalam 
vissajjetvà Dagana RAE i Seep Ladas bi 
viya nikkhamitvā thito amacce assisetva pamisuh viyūhitvā sabbe ud- 
80 dharitvà amaccaparivuto ámakasusane atthāsi. Tasmith samaye ma- 
nussa ekam matamanussam āmakasusāne chaddentā dvinnam yakkha- | 
nam simantarik&ya chaddesuri. Yakkbā tam matamanussam bhajetar 
asakkontà ,mayam imam bhājeturi na sakkoma, ayam Silavaraja 
dhammiko, esa no bhājetvā dassati, etassa santikam gacchāmā" ‘ti. 
85 tam matamanussam pide gahetvā kaddhanta raūio santikam gantvà 
„deva, ambakarh imam bhājetvā dehiti^ &hamsu. „Bho yakkhā, ghar 


41 


ims iumhakam bhājetvā dadeyyam, aparisuddho pan’ amhi, nahā- 
yissami tava“ ti. Yakkhā coraraūīo thapitavasita-udakam attano ānu- 
bhāvena āharitvā aiio nahanatthaya adamsu, nahātvā thitassa sarn- - 
haritva thapite coraraiitio satake aharitva adamsu, te nivasetva ‘thitasse i 
catujātigandhasamuggar āharitvā adarūsu, gandhe vilimpitvā thitassa 5 
suvannasamugge maņitālāvantesu thapitāni nānāpupphāni āharitvā 
adamsu, pupphani pilandbitvā thitakale ,aññam kim karomā* 'ti puc- 
chimsu. Raja attano chātakākāram dassesi. Te gantvā coraraūio 
sampāditam nànaggarasgbhojanam āharitvā adamsu. Raja nahātānu- 
litto manditapasadhito nanaggarasabhojanam bhuūji. Yakkha cora- 10 
raüüo thapitavāsitapānīyar suvannabhimkaren! eva suvannasgrakena 
pi saddhirh àharimsu. Ath’ assa pàniyam pivitvā mukham vikkhā- 
letvà hatthe dhovitakale corarañño sampaditam paiicasugandhikapari- 
vüram tambulam āharitvā adamsu, tam khāditvā thitakāle „aūūam 
kim karoma“ ‘ti pucchimsu, „gantvā coraraüiio ussisake nikkhittar 15 
maīgalakhaggam aharatha^ ‘ti tam pi gantvā aharimsu. Raja khag- 
gam gahetvā tam matamanussam ujukarh thapapetva matthakamajjhe 
asina paharitvā dve kotthase katvā dvinnam yakkhanam samavibhattam 
eva vibhajitva adāsi,, datvā ca pana khaggam dhovitvā sannayhitvà 
atthasi. Atha te yakkha manussamamsam khaditva suhità hutva 20 
tuttliacittā „aūūam te maharaja kim karomā* ti pucchimsu. „Tena 
hi tumhe attano ānubhāvena mam coraraiifio sirigabbhe otāretha, ime 
ca amacce attano attano gehe patitthapetha“ ‘ti. Te „sādhu deva 
'ti sampaticchitva tatha akamsu. Tasmim samaye coraraja alamkata- 
sirigabbhe sirisayanapitthe nipanno niddayati. Raja (assa pamattassa 25 
niddāyantassa khaggatalena udaram pahari. So bhito pabujjhitvà di- 
palokena Silavamaharajanath saūjānitvā sayana vutthaya ‘dhitim | pat- D e 
thapetvā thito rajanam aha: „mahārāja, evarūpāya rattiyā gahitarakkhe - 
pihitadvāre bhavane ārakkhamanussehi nirokāse thane khaggarļ san- 
nayhitvà alamkatapatiyatto katham nama tvam imam sayanapittham 80 
āgato" ti. Raja attano ūgamanākārau sabbarh vitthārato kathesi. \ 104 
Tam sutvā. corarājā samviggamanaso „mahārāja, aham manussabhūto 

pi samüno tumhākam gunam na janami, paresam lohitamamsakha- 
dakehi pana kakkha]ehi pharusehi yakkhehi tava guna ātā, na dan’ 
āhart narinda evarüpe silasampanne tayi *dubbhissāmiti" khaggari 35 
Adaya. sapatham katvā rājānam khamāpetvā mahāsayane nipajjāpetvā 


42 
Ant 


attanā khuddakamaīcake nipajjitva pabhataya rattiyā utthite - guriye | 
bherifi carāpetvā sabbaseniyo ca amaccabrāhmaņagahapatike ca sanni- 
pātāpetvā tesam purato ākāse punnacandam ukkhipanto viya Sīlava- 
raūūo gune kathetvà parisamajjhe yeva puna rajanam khamāpetvā p 
6 rajjam patiechāpetvā „ito patthaya tumhakam uppanno corupaddavo 
mayham bhāro, maya gahitā) akkha tumhākar rajjam karothā* ‘ti 
vatvā pesuūūakārakassa anam katvā attano balavāhanari ādāūya saka- 
rattham eva gato. Sīlavamahārājāpi kho alarnkatapatiyatto setacchat- 
tassa hettha sarabhapadake kaūcanapallamke nisinno attano sampattim 
jo oloketvā ,ayaü ca evarūpā saripātti amaccasahassassa ca jivitapati- 
lābko mayi viriyam akaronte na kiūci abhayissa, viriyabalena panāham 
natthaii ga imam yasam patilabhim, amaccasahassassa ca jīvitadānam 
adāsim:vāsācchedam vata akatva viriyam eva kattabbam, kataviriyassa 
hi phalam nama evam samijjhatiti" cintetvā udānavasena imam gā- 
15 tham aha: I - 
Asimseth’ eva puriso, na nibbindeyya pandito, 
passāmi vo 'harh attānam, yatha icchim tathā ahū ti. 


Evam Bodhisatto „aho vata bho sīlasampannānam viriyaphalam nama 
samijjhatiti* imaya gāthāya udānam udānetvā yāvajīvam puiiāni ka- 
90 ritvā yathakammar gato. 


94, Rāsovāva-JĀTAKA. 


Atīte Bārāņasiyam Brahmadatte rajjarh kārente Bodhisatto tassa 
aggamahesiyā kucchismirn patisandhim gahetva laddhagabbhaparibaro 
sotthinā matukucchimha nikkhami. Nāmagahanadivase pan’ assa Brah- 

95 madattakumāro tv-eva namam akamsu. So anupuhbena vayappatto 

„ soļasavassakāle Takkasilam gantvü sabbasippesu nipphattim patva pitu 
accayena rajje patitthaya dhammena 8 šamena rajjam karesi. Cbandādi- 
vasena agantvā vinicchayam anusāsi. Tasmim evam dhammena rajjath 
kārente amaccāpi dhammen’ eva vohāram vinicehinithsu. Vohāresu 

80 dhammeng vinicchiyamanesu kūtattakārakā nama n&hesum. Tesar 
abhāvā attatthāya. rājaūgaņe uparavo pacchijji. Amaocā divasath 
vinicchayatthane nisīditvā kaūci vinicchayatthāva agacchantam adisvš 
pakkamanti. Vinicchayatthanam chaddetabbabhivar pāpuņi. Bodhi- 


43 


satto cintesi: „mayi dhammena rajjam kārente vinicchayatthaya āgac- 
charitā nāma n atthi, uparavo pacchijji, viņicchayatthānar chadde- 
tabhabhāvari pattan, idāni maya attano agunam pariyesitum vattati, - 
‘ayam nama me aguņo ti fiatva tam pahaya gunesu yeva vattissā- 
miti^. Tato patthaya „atthi nu kho me koci aguņavāditi* parigan- 5 
hanto ` antovalaājakānam antare kañci agunavadim adisvā attano guna- 
katham eva sutvā „ete mayharh bhayenāpi agunam avatva gunam eva 
vadeyyun! ti bahivalafjanake pariganhanto tatrápi adisvā antonagaram - 
pariganhi, bahinagare catüsu dvaresu dvāragāmake pariganhi. Tatrápi 
kaüci agunavadim adisva attano gunakatham eva sutvà ,janapadam 10 
pariganhissamiti“ amacce rajjam paticchāpetvā ratham āruyha sārathim ` 
eva gahetvā aūiātakavesena nagara nikkhamitva janapadam pariganha- 
mano yava paccantabhimim gantva kaüci aguņavādim adisvā. attano 
gunakatham eva sutvā paccantasimato mahāmaggena nagarabhimukho 
yeva nivatti. Tasmim pana kale Malliko nama Kosalarājāpi dham- 
mena rajjam kārento agunagavesako hutvā antovalaūjakādisu aguna- 
vadith adisvā attano gunakatham eva sutva janapada pariganhanto 
tam padesam agamāsi. Te ubho pi ekasmir ninne sakatamagge | 
abhimukhà ahesum.  Rathassa ukkamanatthànam n’ atthi. Atha 
Mallikaraüüo sārathi Baranasirañño sārathim „tava ratharh ukkamā- 20 
pehiti“ aha, So pi ,ambho sārathi, tava ratham ukkamāpehi, imasmim 
rathe Bārāņasirajjasāmiko Brahmadattamahārājā nisinno* ti aha. Itaro 

pi ,ambho sarathi, imasmim rathe Kosalarajjasāmiko Mallikamahārājā 
nisinno, tava ratham ukkamāpetvā amhàakam raūūo rathassa oküsar 
dehiti^ aha, Bārāņasiraūio sārathi „ayam pi kira raja yeva, kin nu 25 
kho kātabban* ti cintento ,atth’ esa upāyo: vayam pucchitvā dahara- 
tarassa ‘Tatham ukkamāpetvā maballakassa okasam dàpessamiti^ san- : ` 
nitthānam katvā tam sārathim Kosalaraūio vayan pucchitva pari- 
ganhanto ubhinnam pi samānavayabhāvar iiatvà rajjaparimanam balam 

. dhanam yasa jatigottakulapadesan ti sabbam pucchitva ,ubho pi 80 
tiyojanasatikessa rejjassa sāmino, samanabaladhanayasajatigottakula- 
padega“ ti ñatvā ,silavantatarassa okasam dassamiti^ cintetvā so - 
 sürüthi- „tumhākar rañfo silācāro kidiso" ti pucchi. So „ayaū ca 

| ayañ oa ‘ambakarh raiifio silücüro* ti attano rañño agunam eva e 

| páküsento pathamam gātham aha: 85 


6 


j- 


44 


Dalham dalhassa khipati Malliko, mudunā mudum, 
s&dhum pi sādhunā jeti asādhum pi asādhunā. 
Etādiso ayam raja, maggā uyyahi s&rathiti. | 
. Atha tam Baranasirañño sürathi.,ambho, kim pana tayā attano rañño 
5 guna kathita“ ti vatvà „āmā" 'ti vutte „yadi ete guna agunà pana 
kidisa“ ti vatva „ete tava agunà hontu, tumhakam pana rañño kīdisā 
guna“ ti vutte „tena hi sunahiti^ dutiyarn gatham aha: 


Akkodhena jine kodham, asadhum sadhuna jine, 
jine kadariyah dānena saccenálikavadinam, 
10  Etàadiso ayam raja, maggā uyyahi sarathiti. 
Evam vutte Mallikarājā ca sārathi ca ubho pi rathā otaritvā asse 
mocetvā ratham apanetvā Bārāņasiraūūo maggam adamsu. Barana- 
sirājā Mallikarafiio nāma ,idaü c' idaü ca katum vattatiti” ovadam' 
datvā Bārāņasim gantva dānādīni pufifiani katvā jivitapariyosaine sag- 
16 gapadam pūresi. Mallikarājāpi tassa ovadam gahetvā janapadam pa- 
riggahetvā attano agunavadim adisvā va sakanagaram gantva dānādīni 
puññani katva jīvitapariyosāne saggapadam eva pūresi. 


25. MAKHXDEVA-JATAKA. 


Atite Videharatthe Mithilayam Makhadevo nama raja ahosi dham- 
20 miko dhammarājā. So caturāsītivassasahassāni kumārakīļari tatha opa- 
rajjam tathā maharajjam katvā digham addhānar khepetv& ekadivasam 
kappakarh àmantesi: „yadā me samma kappaka sirasmim phalitani 
passeyyasi atha me aroceyyasiti*. Kappako pi digham addhanam khe- 
petvà ekadivasam raūfio afijanavanndnam kesānari antare ekam eva 
25 phalitarh disvā „deva, ekan te phalitam dissatiti^ ārocesi, „tena hi 
me samma tam phalitam uddharitvā panimhi thapehiti" ca vutto su- 
vannasandasena ‘uddharitva raūio pāņimhi patitthāpesi. Tadā rañño 
caturasitivassasahassani ayum avasittham hoti. Evam sante pi phalitam 
disvā va maccurajdnam āgantvā samīpe. thitarh viya attānam aditta- | 
80 pannasalam pavittham viya ca maññamano samvegarh āpajjitvā „bāla 
Makhādeva, yāva phalitass’ uppādā va ‘ime kilese  jahiturh nāsskkhīti* 
cintesi, Tass’ evath phalitapatubhavam āvajjantasšā ūvajjantassa anto- 


45 


dāho uppajji, sarīrā sedā muccimsu, sātakā piletva apanetabbākārap- 
pattā ahesum. So „ajj eva maya nikkhamitvā pabbajitum vattatiti* 
kappakassā satasahassutthānam gamavarain datva jetthaputtam pakko- 
sāpetvā „tāta, mama. sise phalitam pātubhūtam, mahallako 'mhi jato, 
bhuttā kho pana me mānusakā kama, idāni dibbakāme pariyesissāmi, 5 
nekkhammakalo mayham, tvam imam rajam patipajja, aham pana 
pabbajitvā Makhādevambavanuyyāne vasanto samanadhammam ka- 
rissāmiti" aha. Tam evam pabbajitukāmam amaccā upasamkamitvā 
„deva, kim tumhākam pabbajjākāraņan* ti pucchimsu. Raja phalitam 
hatthena gahetvā amaccānam imam gātham āha: 10 


Uttamangaruha mayham ime jātā vayoharā 

pātubhūtā devadūtā, pabbajjasamayo mama 'ti. 
So evam vatva tam divasam eva rajjam pahāya isipabbajjam pabba- 
jitvā tasmifi ūeva Makhādevambavane viharanto caturasitivassasahas- 
sāni cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā aparihinajjhane thito kālam katvā 15 
Brahmaloke nikbattitvā puna tato cuto Mithilāyarn yeva Nimi nama 
rājā hutvā osakkāmānari, attano vamsam ghatetva tatth' eva ambavane 
pabbajitvā brahmavihare bhāvetvā puna Brahmalokūpago va ahosi. 


"26. Susīma-JĀTAKA, 


Atīte Bārāņasiyau Brahmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto tassa 20 
purohitassa aggamahesiyü kucchismim nibbatti. Tassa jātadivase yeva 
Bārāņasiraūiio putto jāyi. Tesam namagahanadivase Mahāsattassa 
Susīmakumāro ti nàmam akamsu, rājaputtassa Brahmadattakumāro ti. 
Bārāņasirājā „puttena me saddhith 'ekadivase jāto* ti Bodhisattarh 
ānāpetvā dhatiyo datvā tena saddhim ekato va vaddhesi. “Te ubho 9 
pi vayappāttā abhirūpā devakumāravaņņino hutvā Takkasilaya sabba- ./ 
sippāni ugganhitva ` paccigamimeu. Rājaputto uparaja hutvà Bodhi- 
sattena saddhim ekato khadanto pivanto nisidanto pitu accayena rajjam 
patvā Mahāsattassa mahantam yasam datvā purohitatthane thapetvā 
ekadivasari nagaram sajjāpetvā Sakko devarājā viya alamkato Er&- 80 
vana-patibhagassa māttavaravāraņassa khandhe nisīditvā Bodhisattar 


pacchüsane hatthipitthe COPRA nagaram padakkhinam akāsi Boe Quite 
Pali: Reader. . 


46 
‘ssa „puttan olokessāmiti*. sihapañjare (hatvā tana. nagaruih padak- 
khiņam katvā āgacchantassa paccha to nisinnam purohi itārār disvā' pafi- 
baddhacitta hutyà sayanagabbham pavisitvā ,imam alabhantī etth’ eva 
 marissümiti^ Sharam pacchinditvà nipajji Raja matarath apassanto 
5 ,kuhim me mata‘ ti pucchitva ngilānā* ti sutvā tassā santikam gantvā 
vanditvā „ki amma aphasukan” ti pucchi. Sa lajjàya na kathesi. 
So gantva rajapallamke nisīditvā attano apgamahesii pakkositva ngaccha, 
«mmāys aphüsukam janahiti* pesesi. Sa gantvā pitthim parimajjanti 
, pucchi. - Itthiyo nàma itthinam rahassam na nigthanti, Sa tassā tam ` 
10 atthari ārocesi. Itarāpi taù sutvā gantvā rañño ārocesi. Rājā „hotu, . 
gaccha nam samassāsehi, purohita rājānai katvā tassa tam agga- 
mahesim karissámiti^ Sa gantvā samassāsesi. Rājāpi purohitam 
pakkosāpetvā etam attham ārocetvā „sama, matu me jīvita dehi, 
tvam raja bhavissasi, sā aggamahesī aham uparājā* ti. So „na sakkā J 
15 evar kātun* ti patikkhipitvà puna yaciyamano sampaticchi. Raja 
purohitarh rajanam mataram aggamahesim | kāretvā sayar uparājā 
ahosi. Tesam samaggavase vasantānārii ‘aparabhage Bodhisatto agāra- — 
majjhe ükkanthito ` kame "pahāya pabbajjāya namitacitto | kilesaratir 
‘analliyanto ekako va titthati ekako va nisidati ekako va sayati ban- 
20 dhanāgāre baddho viya paūjare pakkhittakukkuto viya ca ahosi. Ath’ 
assa aggamahesi „ayam. raja maya saddhim nābhiramati, ekako va 
| titthati nisidati seyyar kappeti, ayam kho pana daharo taruno, ahari 
mahallika, sise me palitāni paūfāyanti, yan nünáharh ‘sise deva eka- 
palitarh patina yatiti musāvādam katvā eken' upāyena rājānam pati- 
25 jānāpetvā maya sad bim abhiramüpeyyan" ti cintetvā ekadivasam 
raūiio sise ūkā vieinanti viya hutvā „deva, mahallako si jāto, sise te 
ekam palitarn paññāyatiti“ aha, „Tena hi bhadde ekam palitam 
luücitvà mayhan yeva hatthe thapehiti*. Sa tassa sīsato ekam kesar - 
luücitvà tam chaddetvā attano sise palitam gahetvā „idan te deva 
80 palitan“ ti tassa hatthe thapesi. Bodhisattassa tam disvā va bhitata- | 
sitassa kaficanapattasadise nalāte sedā muccithsu.  So-attünam ova- 
danto »Susima, tvam daharo hutvā mahallako jāto, ettākari kālār 
gūthakalale nimuggagāmasūkaro vija kāmakalalē nimujjitvā. tam. kala- | 
larn jahituh na sakkosi, nanu kame pahāya Himavantath parisitvē” | 
86 pabbajitvā brahmacariyarisauta te kālo* ti cintetvā ethane, m = 
tham aha: | | | Tipo 


47 


LE. m | = è s dt ME" m CNET 
Kāļāni kesāni pure ahesum jātāni sīsamhi yathüpadese, 
tan’ ajja setäni Sueima disvā dhammam cari, brahmacariyassa kālo ti. 
Era Bodhisattena brahmiacariyavüsassa gune vaņņite itarā „aham 
timassa lobba karissāmiti' vissajjanam eva karin“ ti bhitatasita 
| ET 'esa apabbajanatthāya sariravannam vannessamiti“ dve gāthā 5 
abbāsi:. 


Man’ eva deva palitam na tuyhar, m mam’ eva sisam mama uttamañgarm, 
atthari karissan ti musi abhanim, ekāparādhar khama rājasettha. 
Daharo tuvam dassaniyo si raja, pathamuggato hosi yathà kaliro. 
rajjaü ca karehi mamañ ca passa, mà kalikam anudhāvi ase 'ti. 10 


Bodhisatto tassi vacanam sutrā „bhadde, tva bhavitabbam ev’ ētarh 
kathesi, pariņamante hi vaye imehi kāļakesehi parivattitvā sanhakasa- 
disehi pandarehi bhavitabbam, ahah hi niluppaladikusumadama- 
sadisasukumaranaih kaūcanarūpakapatibhāgānarm uttamayobbanavilā- 
samattānari khattiyakaññ adinam vaye parinamante jarappattanam 15 
_,, Yevanniyañ c eva sarirabhañgañ ca passami, evam vipattipariyo- 

 süno h’ esa bhadde jivaloko* ti vatvà upari Buddhalilliayà dhammam 
desento : 


, Passēmi s vo "har daharim kumarim RT sutanum sumajjham 
Okāļāpūrāļā , va pavellamānā s sā oye va naresu sehat 20 


* 9 mm mye 
^Y 


danda gahetva va pavedhamanath gopanasibhoggasamam "carkntin t. 


gāthadvayam aha. Iti Mahāsatto imaya gāthāya rūpassa adinavam 
dassetvà idāni agāramajjhe attano anabhiratiÀ pakāsento: 


Bo 'ham tam evānuvicintayanto eko sayāmi sayanassa majjhe, . 95 
aham pi evam iti pekkhamano na gahe rame, brahmacariyassa kalo. 

i Raja valambani o est jā gehe vasato rati ^ 

| | ētam pr "ohetiāna, vajanti dhira anapekkhino kümasukham pahāyā 'ti. ^^ 


githadvayam aha. Evam Mahāsatto kāmesu assādaī ca pā Wapa ca 

pakāsetvā Buddhalīļbāya dhammarh desetvā ENS pa ositvā. rajjam 30 
te. paticlhiipetva 1 ūātimittesuhajjānam paridevantānam paridevantānam eva x 
T siejvibhavarh ohaddetv&. Himavantam pavisitvā isipabbajjam pabbajitra k. 
ji jūābhišūau nibbaltetva Brahmalokaparāyano ahosi, 


48 


27, ĀŅDABRŪTAJĀTAKA. | 


Atite Baranasiyam a: Brabmadatte rajjam kārente Bodhisatto tassa 
aggamahesiya kucchismim. nibbattitva vayappatto sabbasippesu nip- 
phattim patva . pitu accayena rajje patitthaya dhammena rajjam karesi. 

5 So purohitena saddhim jütam kilati, kīļanto one 


Sabba nadi vaihkagatī, sabbe "kātthamayā "vana, 
sabbitthiyo kare papam labbhamane nimantake ti 


imam jutagitam gāyanto rajataphalake euvannapiüsake khipati. Evam 
kilanto pana raja niocam jināti, purohito parājiyati. So anukkamena 
10 ghare vibhave parikkhayam gacchante cintesi: „evam sante: sabbam 
imasmim ghare dhanam khiyissati, pariyesitva | purisantaram agatam 
ekam matugamam ghare karissāmîti“. Ath’ assa etad ahosi: ,añña- 
purisam ditthapubbam itthirh rakkhitum na sakkhissāmiti gabbhato 
patthay' ekam mātugāmam rakkhitvā tam vayappattam vase thapetva 
15 ekapurisikar katvā galham arakkham sarinvidahitvā rajakulato dhanam 
āharissāmiti". So ca aūgavijjāya cheko, h hoti. Ath’ ekam duggatitthim 
 gabbhinim disva „dhītarar vijāyissatīti* ūatvā tar pakkosāpetvā, pa- 
ribbayam datv& ghare yeva vasāpetvā vijātakāle dhanam datva uyyo- 
jetvā, tam kumārikar afiü esam purisanam datthum adatvā, sitthinam 
20 yeva batthe datva posāpetvā, vayappattakāle tam attano vase thapesi. 
Yāva c' esā vaddhati tava rañňā saddhi na kili, tai pana vase 
thapetvā „mahārāja, jūtam kiļāmā* sti aha. Raja nsādhū* "ti puri- 
| manayen' eva kil. Purohito rañ ia "gāyitvā pāsakakhipanakāle „tha- 
I petvā Mama māņavikan* ti aha. Tato patthaya purohito jinati, raja 
25 parajryati. — Bodhisatto , pimassa ghare ekapurisikaya ekāya itthiya 
bhavitabban" ti pariganhapento atthibhavam iiatvà „silam assā bhinda- 
pessamiti® eka dhuttam pakkosapetva „sākkhasi purohitassa itthiyā 
silam bhinditun’ ti aha. ,Sakkomi devi“ "ti. Ath’ assa rājā dhanam 
datva ,tena hi khippam nitthāpeķīti*. tam pahini, So rañño santika 
80 dhanam ādāya gandhadhūpaouņņakappūrādīni gahetvā tassa gharato 
avidūre sabba ganidhāpētat `  pasütesi. ^ Purohitassāpi geham sattebhū- ,/ 
makam sattadv ārakotthākar hoti, sabbesu pi dvārakotthakesu itthīnar 
. fieva ārakkho, thapetvà pana brühmapam añño puriso geharh pavisituri 
IRDHAREO nama n' atthi, kācātāracllīģģanapačdbini pi sodhetvā yora "s 


a haesit iv pac ur Q. 


49 


pavesenti. Tam māņavikam purohito c' eva datthum labhati tass& ca 
eka paricārikā itthī. Ath’ assā sā paricārikā gandhapupphamūlari 
gahetvā gacchanti tass’ eva dhuttassa āpaņasamīpens gacehati. So 
yayam tassā paricarika^ ti sutthu ūatvā ekadivasain tam agacchantim 
disva va „āpāņā utthaya gantvā tassā pādamūle patitvà ubhohi hatthehi 5 
pāde gāļham 'ģehētvā „amma, ettakam kālam kaham gatásiti" pāri= P 
devi. Atha sesápi payuttakadhuttà ekamantam thatvā „hatthapāda- 
mukhasaņthānehi ca ākappena ca mātāputtā ekasadisā yeva* "ti dhamsu. 
Sa itthi tesu kathentesu kathentesu attano asaddahitvā ,ayam me putto 
bhavissatiti^ sayam pi roditum arabhi. Te ubho pi kanditvā roditvā 10 
aññamaññam alingitvà atthamsu. Atha so dhutto āha: „amma, kaham 
vasasiti^. „Kinriaraliļhāya vasamānāja rüpaggappattàya purohitassa ” 
daharitthiya upatthānarm kurumānā vasāmi tata" 'ti. ,ldàni kaham 
yasi amma“ ‘ti. „Tassā gandhamaladinam atthaya‘ 'ti. „Amma, kin 
te aūūattha gatena, ito patthaya mam’ eva santikā harā* ^ti mülain 16 
agahetvà va bahüni tambūlatakkolakādīni c eva nānāpupphāni ca 
adāsi. Mānavikā bahūni gandhapupphādīni disvā „kirī amma ajja am- 
hakar brahmano pasanno* ti aha. „Kasmā evam vadasiti^. „Ime- 
sain bahubhāvam disvā* ti. „Na br&hmano bahum miilam adāsi. 
maya pan’ etam mayham puttassa santikā ānītan* ti. Tato patthaya 20 
brahmanena dinnam mūlam attanā gahetva tass eva santikā gandha- 
pupphādīni ābarati. Dhutto katipāhaccāyena gilānālayam katvā ni- ... 
pajji. Šā tassa āpanadvāram gantvā tam adisvā „kahar me putto“ 
ti pucchi. „Puttassa te aphasukam jatan“ ti. Sa tassa nipannattha- 
nam gantvā nisīditvā pitthim parimajjanti „kin te tata aphasukan“ ti % 
pucchi. So tunhi ahosi. „Kin na kathesi puttā" "ti. ,Amma, ma- 
rantenāpi tuyham kathetum na sakkā" ti. ,Mayham akathetvā kassa 
katheyyasi tata“ 'ti. „Amma, mayham aüüam aphasukarm n' atthi, tassā 
pana māņavikāya vannath sutva patibaddhacitto ' smi jāto tam labhanto 
jīvissāmi, alabhanto idh’ eva marissamiti“. ,Tata, mayham esa bharo, 90 
ma tvam etai nissāya cintayiti^ tam assāsetvā bahuni gandhapupphā- 
dini Adaya 1 manavikaya santikam gantvā ,putto me amma mama 
santika tava vannam sutvā pafibaddhacitto Jato, kim kātabban* ti.. 
„Sace ànetum sakkotha maya katokāsā yeva "ti. ‘Sat tassi vacanari sutvā . 
tato patthāya tassa gehassa kaņņakaņņebi bahum. kacavar am sarikad- 85 


- -am anpas 


dhitvā pupphapacchiya gahetva gacchanti sodhanakale ārakkhitthiyā 


| Nu DUE 
upari chaddesi. Sa tena attijamānā apeti, ‘itera ten, eva nijāmena 
ya y& kiūci katlieti tassā tassā upari kacavararh c šaddeti. Tato „pat. 
| haya. yain yai sā aharati vā harati vā tam na kāci sodheturh ūsšā- - 
“hati. Tasmim kale sā tam dhuttam pupphapacchiyam nipajjāpetvā, 
5 māņavikāja santikar - “atihari. Dhutto manavikaya silah . bhinditvā 
ekāhadyīham pāsādē yeva ahosi. Purohite bahi nikkhante ubho abhi- 
ramanti, tasmim Agate dhutto niliyati. Atha nam sā ek&hadviliacca- 
yena „sāmi, idāni tava gantum vattatiti* aha. „Aham brāhmaņarh 
paharitvā gantukāmo* ti.: Sa „evam hotū* ‘ti dhuttam niliyāpetvā 
10 brāhmaņe agate evam aba: ,aham ayya tumhesu vina . vadentesu 
 naccitmi icchümiti^, .,Sadhu bhadde naccassū* ‘ti viņam vadesi. 
„Tumhesu olokentesu lajjāmi, mukham pana vo sitakena "bandhitvā. 
naecissamiti^. „Sace lajjasi evam karohiti^. Māņavikā ghanas&takam 
gahetvà tassa akkhini 'pidahamüni mukham bandhi.  Brāhmaņo 
16 mukham bandhāpetvā vinam vādesi. Sa muhuttam naccitva „ayya, 
ahan té- ekavārar sise paharitukāmā* ti aha. Itthilolo brāhmaņo 
kifici kāraņar . ajananto  ,paharahiti^ aha. Māņavikā dhuttassa 
safifiam adāsi. So saņikari „āgantvā brāhmanassa pitthipasse thatva 
sise kappareia pahári." ` Akkbini „patanākārappattāni ahesum,  sise 
20 gaūdo utthahi. Šo vedanatto hutbā "^ Ghara te hatthan" ti aha. 
Manavika attano hattham ukkhipitva, tassa — thapesi. Brāhmaņo 
„hattho muduko, paharo pana thaddho* ti aha. Dhutto brahmanam 
paharitva nilīji. Māņavikā tasmim nilīne bráhmanassa mukhato sāta- 
kar mocetvā telam adaya sise paharam sambahi, Brahmane bahi 
95 nikkhante puna sā itthi dhuttam pacchiyam nipajjāpetvā nihari.- ‘So 
raūūo santikam gantvā sabban tam pavattim @rocesi. Rājā a attano 
upatthānam &gatam brāhmaņam aha: „jūtam kiļāma brāhmaņā“ "ti. 


„Sādhu manaraja” "ti. Raja a: sajjapetvà purimanayen" 


«rudi 


vadanto pi parājito yeva.. Ra janitva pibe, kim dias. māna- 
vikāya te tapo bhinno, tva ‘matugimam gabbhato patthaya rakkhanto . 
sattasu thānesu drakkhath karonto rakkhiturn sakkhissimiti’ ‘mafifiesi, | 
mātugāmo nama kucchiyam pakkhipitvā carantenāpi rakkhituri. na. 
| 85 sakka, ekapurisikā itthi ‘nama n’ , atthi, tava māņavikā tnaccitukām” : 
amhiti' vatvā vinarh vüdentassa tava sitakena mukham bandhitvā attano. 


61 - 


ro^ 


jarath Mus sise kapparena La Sig uyyojesi, idāni kim thapestti« 
vatvā imam gatham aha: n 


Yam brāhmaņo ME "ina samukhavethito, 
anda huta bhatā bhariyā, tāsu ko jātu vissase ti. 
zs 

Evam Bodhisatto brahmanassa dhammam desesi, Brahmano Bodhi- 5 
sattassa dhammadesanam sutvā nivesanam gantvā tam mānņavikam 
aha: ,taya kira evarūpam papakammam katan“ ti. „Ayya, ko evam 
aha, na karomi, aham eva paharim, na aūūo koci, sace na sadda- 
hatha aham ‘tumhe thapetvā aūīassa purisassa hatthasamphassam na 
janamiti’ saccakiriyam katvā aggim pavisitva tumhe saddahāpessāmiti*. 10 
Brāhmaņo ,evam hotū" 'ti mahantam dārurāsim kāretvā aggim datvē. 
tam pakkosāpetvā „sace attano saddahasi aggim pavisa“ ‘ti &ha. 
Mānavikā attano paricarikam pathamam eva sikkhapesi: „amma, tava 
puttam tattha gantvà mama aggim pavisanakāle hatthagahanam katum 
vadehiti*. Sa gantva tathā avaca. Dhutto agantva parisamajjhe 15 
atthāsi. Si māņavikā brahmanam vaücetukamà mahājanamajjhe thatva 
,brahmana, tam thapetva aññassa purisassa hatthasamphassam na 
jānāmi, imin& saccena ayar aggi mā mam jhāpesiti* ageim pavisituin 
āraddhā. Tasmim khane dhutto „passatha purohitabrahmanassa kani- 
maim, evarūpam mātugāmam aggim pavesapetiti* gantvā tam mana- 90 
vikam hatthe ganhi. Sa hattham vissajjāpetvā purohitam aha: ,ayya, 
mama saccakiriya bhinnā, na sakka aggim pavisitun* ti, „Kimkāraņā* 
ti. ,Ajja maya evam saccakiriya kata: 'thapetvà mama samikam 
aūūapurisassa hatthasamphassam na jānāmiti, idāni c' amhi iminā 
purisena , hatthe gahità" ti. Brahmano „vaūcito aham imayà" 'ti ūatvā 26 
tath pothetva piharapesi. Evam asaddhammasamannagata kir’ eta 
itthiyo, kjrimahántam pi papakammam katva attano samikam vañ- 
coram: „nāham evarupam karomiti^ divasam pi sapatham kurumana 
nānācittā. ra none tena vuttam: 


Gorinazh bahubuddhinam yāsu saccam sudullabham , 80 
thinam: bhāvo durājāno macchassévodake gatar. 

Musa tāsam yathā saccall, saccam tasath yatha musa, 
gavo bahutinasséva oinasniiti varat varai. — AS 
Coriyo kathinā h' eta và]k va lapepēkkbarā; ' tuvā 

na tā kifici na jānanti yam manussesu vaiicanan ti. 80 


Mats 


52 


|Tattha „gatan“ ti gamanam, „musāt ti musāvādo tāsam ) SACCABAAIEO 
va, „gāvo bahutiņassā* ‘ti yathā gāvo khaditatthanam chiqata, babi 
manapassa tinassa varam varam omasanti khādanti,evam etāpi nid- 
dhanam chaddetvā aññam sadhanam eva * gacchanti, pe ti sam- 
5 bhatassa dhanassa vināsanena coriyo, „kathinā* ti thaddhahadaya, „vāļā* 
ti dutthā. appaken’ eva ‘kujjhanasila, „lapasakkharā* ti niratthakala- 
panena sakkharā. viya madhurā ti attho]. 
Satthā „evar arakkhiyo | matugamo“ ti imam dhninmadesanarā 
āharitvā saccāni pakasesi. Satthāpi anusandhim ghatetvà jatakam 
10 samodhānesi: „tadā Bārāņasirājā aham eva ahosin" ti. Andabhiita- 
jatakam nitthītam. (Poranapotthakesu Andabhitajatakan ti dissati, 
abhinavesu katthaci potthakesu Andhabhiita-iti dissatil. 


28. KHARAPUTTA-J ATAKA. 


Atte Baranasiyam Senake nama raññe rajjam karente Bodhisatto 

16 Sakkattam karesi. Tada Senakassa raüüo ekena nagarajena saddhim 
mittabhāvo hoti. So kira nāgabhavanā nikkhamitva thale gocarath 
gaņhanto carati. Atha nam gāmadārakā disva „sappo ayan* ti led- 
duādīhi paharimsu. Raja uyyānakīļikar gacchanto disvā „kim ete dā- 
rakā karontiti^ pucchitvā „ekam sappam paharantiti^ sutvā ,paharitum 
20 mā detha, palāpetha ne“ ti palāpesi. Nagaraja jīvitam labhitvā nā- 
 gabhavanam gantvā bahūni ratanāni ādāya addharattasamaye rañño sa- 
yanigharam: pavisitvā tani ratanāni datvā „mayā tumhe nissāya jivitam 
laddhan“ ti raūūā saddhim mittabhavam katvā punappunam gantvā 
rajanam passati. So attano nāgamāņavikāsu ekam kāmesu atittarā 
25 nāgamāņavikar rakkhanattbāya rañño santike thapesi, „yadā etam 
na passasi tada imam mantam parivatteyyasiti# c assa ekam mantar 
adāsi. So ekadivasam uyyanam gantva nāgamāņavikāya saddhir 
pokkharaniyam udakakilam kīļi. Nāgamāņavikā ekam udakasapparh 
disvā attabhāvam vijahitvā tena saddhim asaddhammam patisevi. Raja 

80 fam apassanto ,kaham nu E gatā" ti mantar parivattetvā anācāram - 
karontim disvā reļapēeikāva pahari. Sa kujjbitva tato nagabbavanam 
gantvà „kasmā āgatāsīti' putthā ,tumh&kam sahāyo mam attano va- 
canam aganhantim pitthiyam pahariti* paharam dassesi. Nagariija 


2d 


tattato ajānitvā va cattāro nāgamēņarako amantetvā „gacchatha, Sena- 
kassa sayanigharam pavisitva hāsāvātena tam bhüsam viya viddham- 
setha“ ‘ti pesesi. Te gantvā rañño sirisayane nipannakāle gabbham 
pavisimsu. Tesath pavisanavelayam eva raja devim aha: „jānāsi nu 
kho bhadde nagamanavikaya gatatthānan* ti. „Na jānāmi devā* "ti, 5 
yAjja sā amhākam pokkharaniyam kīļanakāle attabhavam vijahitvā 
ekena . udakasappena saddhim anācāram akāsi, atha nam aham ‘evar 
mà  kariti sikkhapanatthaya velupesikaya paharim, nagabhavanam 
gantva sahājassā me aüiüam kiñci kathetvā mettim bhindeyyā ‘ti me | 
bhayam uppajjatiti^. Tam sutvà nāgamānavakā tato va nivattitvā nā- 10 
gabhavanam gantvā nāgarājassa tam attham arocesum. So samve- 
gappatto hutva tam khanam neva raüio sayanigharam āgantvā tam 
attham ācikkhitvā khamápetvà ,idam me dandakamman* ti sabbaruta- . 
jananamantam datvà „ayan mahārāja anagghamanto, sace imarh man- 
tam aūūassa dadeyyāsi datva va aggim pavisitva mareyyasiti“ aha. 15 
Raji „sādhū* ‘ti sampaticchi. So tato patthāya pipilikanam pi sad- — 
dam janati. Tass’ ekadivasam mahatale nisīditvā madhuphanitehi khā-. 2: 
daniyam khādantassa ekam madhubinduī ca phāņitabinduū ca pūva- 
khandaü ca bhumiyam pati. Eka pipīlikā tam ,disva „raūūo mahātale 
madhučāti bhinnā, phanitasakatar pūvasakatar nikkujjitar, madhu- 20 ;. 
phāņitapūve khadatha" ‘ti viravantī carati. Raja tassā ravam sutva 
hasi. Raüíüo samipe thita devi „kin nu kho disva raja hasiti^ cintesi. 
Tasmit khadaniyam khāditvā nahatva pallamke nisinne ekam makkhi- 
kam sāmiko „ehi bhadde, kilesaratiyā ramümü* ‘ti dha. Atha nam 
sā, „adhivāsehi tava sāmi, idāni raūūo gandhe āharissanti, tassa vilim- 25 
pantassa pādamūle gandhacuņnaī patissati, aham tattha vasitvā su- 
gandhā "bhavissāmi, tato rafifio pitfhiyam nipajjitva ramissima“ 'ti aha. 
Raja tam pi saddam sutva hasi. Devi „kin nu kho disva hasiti* 
puna cintesi. Puna raūūo sāyamāsaii bhuiüjantassa ekar sitthar : 
bhümiyam pati. . Pipīlīkā „rājakule bhattasakatam bhaggam, bhattar 80 
bhuiüjantà EJ atihiti^ viravimnsu. Tat sutvā raja puna pi hasi. Devi 
suvannakajacchum gahetvā rājānati parivisantī ,mam nu kho disvà 
rājā hasiti* pārivitakkesi. Sa raühà saddhim sayanam aruyha ni- 
pannakāle „kirūkāraņā deva liasiti* pucchi. So „kin te mama hasita- 
kāraņenā” 'ti vatvà punappuna nibaddho’ kathesi. Atha nam sā 35 
„tumhākath jānanamantarh mayham dethā* 'ti vatva „na sakkā dātun* 
Pāli Reader. | '8 


ems B4 M | 
di patikkbitta pi puna nibandbi. Rājā „sac' Ahah imam mantam 
 tuybam dassāmi mariesāmīti* aha. „Maranto pi mayham dehi yevā* 
'ti. Rājā mātugāmavasiko - 'hutvā „sādhū* 'ti sampaticchitva ,imiss 
mantam datvà aggith pavisissamiti* rathena uyyanath pāyāsi. Tasmirh 
6 khaņe Sakko devarājā lokarh olokento imam karana. disvà „ayar 
balarajà mātugāmam nissāya 'aggim pavisissamiti’ gacchati, jīvitadānam 
assa dassamiti^ Sujan asurakaüüam ādāya Barünasim āgantvā, fam, 
ajikarh katvā attana ajo liutvā „mahājano mā passiti* adhitthaya- 
rañño rathassa purato ahosi. Tam raja c'eva rathe yuttasindhava, LJ 
10 passanti, aiio koci na passati, So katliāsaittūtthāpanatthar ajikaya 
saddhih methunadhammam patisevanto vija ahosi. Tam eko athe | 
yuttasindhavo disvà „samma aja, mayan pubbe ‘aja kira bala "ahirikā” 
ti assumha na passimha, tvah kira raho paticchannatthane kattabbam 
anācāram amhākam ettakanam passantanam eva, karosi na lajjasi, tar 
15 no pubbe sutam iminā ditthena saīnetīti" vatvā pathamam gātham aha: 
Saccam kir’ evam ahamsu bhastar ‘balo’ ti pandità, 
passa: balo rahokammarh āvikubbari na bujjhatiti. 
Tam sutvā ajo dve gāthā abhāsi: 


Tuvam kho samma balo si, kharaputta vijānahi: 
20 rajjuyāsi 'parikkhitto varikottho ohitāmukho. 
Aparam pi samma te balyam yo mutto na palāyasi, 
so ca bālataro samma yam tvarh vahasi Senakan ti. 
Raja tesam ubhinnam pi katham jānāti, tasma tam sunanto Lon 
kam ratham pesesi. Sindhavo pi tassa katham sutvā puna catutthari 
95 gātham aha: | | 
Yan nu samma ahar bālo, ajarāja vijānahi, — 
atha kena Senako bālo, tam me akkhāhi pucchito ti. 
Tam ācikkhanto ajo paiicamam gatham aha: 
' Uttamattham labhitvāna bhāriyā yo padassati 
80 tena jahissat’ att&nàm, sā c' ev’ assa na hessatiti. 


Raja tassa vacanam sutvā ,ajaraja, amhakam sotthim karonto pi tvarh 
ñeva karissasi, kathehi tāva no kattabbayuttan" ti dha. Atha nath 
ajaraja „mahārāja, imesarh sattinam attānā añño piyataro nama n 
atthi, ekam piyabhandarii nissiya attānam nāsetum, Jaddharh yasarh 
85 pahātum na vattatiti^ vatvà chatthamam gatham aha: ae 


55 


j Na vē ¿piya me ti janinda tādiso, attarh niraikatvk pi piyāni sevati, 
atta! va seyyo. Batam a Ya seyyo, labbhā piyà ojitattena paochā ti. 


Eva Mahāsatto rabio ovadath adāsi. Rājā tussitvā „ajarāja, kuto 
agato siti^ puechi. „Sakko ahah mahārāja, tava anukampāya tam 
maraņā mocetum agato 'mbiti". „Devarāja, aham etissā ‘mantah 5 
dass&miti avacam. idāni kim karomiti*. ,Tumhàkam ubhinnam pi 
vināsena. kiccam n’ atthi, ‘sippassa upacāro ti vatvā etam katipayehi 
pahārehi paharāpehi, iminā upāyena na ganhissatiti“. Raja „sā- 
dhu^ ‘ti sampaticchi. Mahāsatto raūūo ovādam datva sakatthānam 
eva gato. Raja uyyānam gantvā devir pakkosāpetvā aha: ,ganhissasi 10 
bhadde mantan“ ti. „Āma devā* 'ti. „Tena hi upacaram karohili". 
„Ko upacāro* ti. „Pitthiyam pahārasate patamāne saddam katum na 
vattatiti*. Sā mantalobhena ,sadhü^ ‘ti sampatiechi. Raja cetake | 
pakkosāpetvā kasā gāhāpetvā ubhosu passesu paharāpesi. Sa dve 
tayo pahàre adhivāsetvā tatoparam „va me manten’ attho* ti viravi. 15 
Atha naf rājā „tvar mam māretvā mantam ganhitukama" ti pitthim 
niccaminath kāretvā vissajjapesi. Šā tato patthāya puna kathetum 
násakkhi. 


29. ManBosADHA's MARBIAGE. 


Tato patthaya Bodhisattassa yaso maha ahosi, tam sabbam Udum- 20 
barādevī yeva vicāreti, sā tassa solasavassakale cintesi: „mama ka- 
nittho mahallako jāto, yaso pi 'ssa maha, āvāham assa kāturi vattar 
titi“, sā raūūo tam attham ārocesi. Raja tam sutvà somanassappatto 
hutvā ,sadhu, jānāpehi nan“ ti aha. Sa tam jānāpetvā tena sampatic- 
chite „tena hi tite kumarikam anema“ ‘ti aha. Mahosadho „kadāci 25 
imehi ünità mama na rucceyya, sayam eva tava upadhüremiti" cin- 
tetvā evam aha: „devi, katipāha mā kifici rañño vadetha, shar ekan 
dārikarn sayam pariyesitva mama cittarucitam tumbakam acikkhissa- 
míti“. „Evan karohi tātā“ ‘ti, So devit vanditva attano ghararh 
gantvā sabayakanat saññar adatvā aiifiataravesena tunnavāja-upaka- 80 
raņāni gahetvā ekako va uttaradvārena nikkhamitvā Uttara-yavamaj- 
jhakam püyasi. Tadā pana tattha puranasetthikulam parijinnam ahosi, 
tassa kalassa dhit& Amarddevi nama abhirūpā sabbalakkhaņasampannā 


56 


puiifiavati, sā tam divasam pāto va yagum pacitvā ādāya „pitu kasa- 
natthānam  gamissamiti^ nikkhamitvā tam eva magga patipajji. 
Mahāsatto tam agacchantim disvā „lakkhaņasampannā itthī, sace apa- 
riggahā imaya me padaparicarikaya bhavitum vattatiti* cintesi. Sāpi 

5 tam disvā va „sace evarūpassa purisassa gehe bhaveyyam sakka siya 
kutumbam santhapetun‘ ti cintesi. Atha Mahāsatto „imissā sapariggaha- 
apariggahabhavarh na jānāmi, hatthamuddaya nam pucchiss&mi, sace 
pandit& bhavissati jànissatiti^ cintetva dūre thito va mutthirh akāsi. 
Sā. „ayar me sassāmikabhāvam pucchatiti* üatvà hattham vikāsesi. 
10 So ūatvā samipam gantvā „bhadde, kā nānia tvan“ ti pucchi. „Sāmi, 
ahari atītānāgate vā etarahi va yam n' atthi tarhnāmikā* ti. ,Bhadde, 
-loke amaran nāma n’ atthi, tvam Amara nama bhavissasiti^, „Evam 
sāmiti', „Bhadde, kassa yāgum harasiti*. „Sāmi, pubbadevatāyā* "ti. 
„Pubbadevatā nama mātāpitaro, tava pitu harissasi maññe“ ti. Evam 
16 bhavissati sàmiti^. „Tava pitä kim karotiti^. ,Ekam dve karotiti". 
„Ekassa dvidhākaraņarm nama kasanam, kasati bhadde“ ti. „Evar sã- 
miti^. ,Kasmim pana thane te pita kasatiti^. „Yattha sakim gata 
na entiti“. „Sakim gatānam na paccāgamanatthānarm nama susānam, 
 susánasantike kasati bhadde" ti. „Evam sámiti^, „Bhadde, ajj' eva 
20 essasiti^. „Sace essati na essāmi, noce essati essamiti". ,Bhadde, 
 pità te maññe nadīpāre kasati, udake ente na essasi, anente essasiti*. 
Evam samiti“ ettakam allāpasallāpam katvà Amarādevi „yāgum pi- 
vissasi sāmīti" nimantesi. Mahāsatto patikkhipanan nama amafigalan* 
ti cintetvā „āmu pivissamiti^ aha. Sa yāgughatam otaresi. Maha- 
25 gatto „sace pāti adhovitva hatthadhovanam adatvā va dassati etth' 
eva nam pabaya. gamiesāmiti* cintesi. Sā pana p&tiy& udakam āha- 
ritvā hatthadhovanam datvā tucchapatim hatthe athapetva bhumiyam ` 
katvā ghatam āloletvā yāguyā pūresi. Tattha pana sitthani mandani. 
Atha nam Mahāsatto aha: ,kith bhadde atibahalā yagü ‘ti, „Udakam 

90 na laddham sāmiti". »Kedarehi udakam na laddharh bhavissati maññe“ 
ti. Sa ,evam sümiti^ pitu yaguzh thapetvā Bodhisattassa adāsi. So 
pivitvā mukham vikkhületvà ,bhadde, mayah tumhakam gehen. ga- 
missāma, maggam no ācikkhā* 'ti aha. Sa „sādhū* 'ti vatvā tassa 
maggam ācikkhitvā pitu yāgur gahetvā agamāsi. So t&ya kathita- 
86 maggena tai geham gato. Atha nar Amarādevijā mātā dievā va 
Geanam datvā „yāgum vaddhemi samiti* aha. „Amma, kanitthabhe-. 


57 


giniya me Amarādeviyā thokā yāgu dinnā" ti. Sa ,dhitu me atthaya 
agatena bhavitabban" ti afifiasii Mahāsatto tesam "duggatabhāvari 
jānanto pi „amma, ahar tunnavayo, atthi kiūci sibbitabban* ti. „Sāmi 
atthi, mūļam pana n’ atthiti^. „Amma, milena kammar n’ attbi, ànetha 
sibbissámiti^. Sa jinnakani pilotikāni. āharitvā adāsi. Bodhisatto 5 
āhatāhatar nitthapesi yeva, paūiiavantānam kiriya nama ijjhati. 
Atha nam „amma, vīthisabhāgānar ārocehiti* aha. Sa sakalagāme 
ārocesi. Mahasatto tunnakammam katvā ekahen’ eva sahassam 
uppādesi, mahallikāpi 'ssa pātarāsabhattar pacitva datvā süyam „tāta 
kittakam pacāmiti* aha. „Amma, yattakā imasmim gehe bhuūjanti 10 
tesam pamāņenā” 'ti. Šā anekasūpavyaūjanam bahubhattam paci. 
Amarüdevi pi sāyam sisena darukalapam ucchafigena pannam ādāya 
araūīato āgantvā puredvāre dārūni nikkhipitvā pacchimadvarena ge- 
harn pāvisi, pita pan’ assā sāyataram agami. Mahāsatto nanaggarase 
pi bhuūji, itarā mātāpitaro bhojetvā pacchā bhuūjitvā mātāpitunnam 15 
pāde dhovitvā Mahāsattassa pāde dhovi. So tam pariganhanto kati- 
paham tatth' eva vasi, atha nam vimamsanto ekadivasam aha: „bhadde 
Amaradevi, addhanalikamattam tandulam gahetva tato mayham yāguī 
ca pūvaii ca bhattaü ca pacābiti'. Sa „sādhū” ‘ti sampaticchitva te 
tandule kottetva mūlatandulehi yàgum majjhimatandulehi bhattam 20 
 kanikühi pūva pacitvā tadanurüpam vyaijanam sampadetva Mahā- 
sattassa savyaūjanam yagum adāsi. Yagu mukhe thapitamattā va 
rasaharaniyo pharitvā atthāsi. So tassā vimamsanattham eva ,bhadde, 
pacitum ajünanti kimattham mama tandule nāsesiti" yagum saha khe- 
lena nitthubbitva bhūmiyam pātesi. Sa akujjhitvā va „sace yāgu na 95 
sundarā pūvam khāda sāmiti" püvam adāsi. Tam pi tath’ eva akāsi, 
bhatte pi tath’ eva patipajjitva „tvam paciturh ajānantī mama santa- 
kam kimatther nāsestti* kuddho viya tini pi ekato madditvā tassü 
Sisato patthaya sakalasariram vilimpitvà „dvāre nisīdā* 'ti aha. Sa 
akujjhitvā va „sādhu sāmiti* tathā akāsi. So tassa nihatamānabhāvam 80 
üatvà ,bhadde ehiti^ aha. Sa ekavacanen” eva ügaià. Maha- 
satto- pana āgaochanto kahāpaņasahassena saddhim ekam satakam 
tambūlapasibbake thapetvā āgato, atha so tam sātakam nīharitvā tassā 
hatthe thapetvā „bhadde, tava sabāyikāhi saddhii nahāyitvā imam 
satakam nivāsetvā ehiti^ àba, Sa tathā akāsi. Pandito uppāditadha- 85 
nañ ca āhatadhanaii ca sabbam tassā -matapitunnam datvü te samassā- 


58 


setva tar ādāya nagaram eva gantvā vimathsanatthiya tam dovāri- 
kassa gehe. nisidapetva dovarikabhariyaya ācikkhitvā attano nivesanam 
gantvà purise āmantetvā „asukagehe itthith. thapetvā āgato 'mhi, imam 
sahassari ādāya gantvā tam vīmamsathā” ‘ti sahassam datvā- pesesi. 
5 Te tathā karimeu. Sā „imam mama sāmikassa pādarajam na aggha- 
titi“ na iechi. Te gantvā paņditassa ārocesum. Puna pi yavatatiyam 
pesetvā catutthe vāre „tena hi tam hatthe gahetvā kaddhantā &nethà* 
'ti dha. Te tathā karimsu. Sa Mahásattam mahasampattiyam thitam 
na sañjāni, oloketvā ca pana hasi c' èva rodi ca. So ubhinnam pi 
10 kāraņam pucchi. Atha nam sā evam aha: „sāmi, aham hasamānā tava 
sampattim oloketvā ‘ayam sampatti na akāraņena laddha, purimabhave 
pana kusalarh katvā laddhā bhavissati, aho puiü&nam phalarh nama’ 
'ti hasim, rodamānā pana 'idüni parassa rakkhitagopitavatthumhi apa- 
rajjhitvā Nirayarh gamissatiti’ tayi kāruūiiena rodin“ ti. So tam vi- 
15 mamsitvā suddhabhavam fiatva ,gacchatha, nam tatth” eva nethā* ‘ti 
vatvā pesetvā puna tunnavayavesam gahetvā gantvā taya saddhim 
tam rati sayitvā punadivase pāto va rājakulam pavisitvā Udum- 
barādevijā ārocesi. Sa raüüo ārocetvā Amarādevim sabbalambkürehi 
alamkaritvā mahāyogge nisīdāpetvā mahantena sakkārena Mahā- 
20 sattassa geharh ānetvā maūgalam kāresi. Raja Bodhisattassa sahassa- 
mūlar paņņākāram pesesi, dovārike ādimkatvā sakalanagaravasino 
paņņākāre pahiņimsu. Amarādevī rañña pahitath pannakaram dvidhà 
bhinditva ekam kotthasam rañño pesesi, eten’ upayena sakalanagara- 
vasinam pi paņnākāram pesetvā nagaram samganhi. Tato patthāya 
25 Mahāsatto tāya saddhim samaggavāsar vasanto raūio atthaü ca 
dhammaū ca anusāsi. | 


30. Munosanna's JUDGEMENT: 


Ek& itthi puttam ādāya mukhadhovanatthüya panditassa. pokkha- 
ranim gantva puttam nahüpetvà attano , satake nisīdāpetvā mukhai 
dhovitvā nahàyitum otari. Tasmim khane ekā yakkhini tem dārakarh 
disvā khāditukāmā hutva ittbivesam gabetvā „sāhāyike, sobhati vatā» 
yam dirako, tav’ eso putto“ ti puochitvā. „āma amma“ ti vutte: EI s: 
yemi nan“ ti vatvā ,payehiti* vuttā tam gahetvü thokath kilépetvi 


59 


ta ādāya palayitum &rabhi. Itarā tam disvā dbāvitvā „kuhim me 
puttam nesiti" ganhi Yakkhini „kuto tayā putto laddho, mam’ eso 
putto“ ti aha. Tā kalahar karontiyo sāladvārena gacchanti. Pan- 
dito kalahasaddam sutvā tā pakkositvā „kim etān* ti pucchitva attarh 
sutvā akkbīnam animisataya c' eva rattataya ca yakkhiniti ūatvāpi 5 
„mama vinicchaye thassathà^ ‘ti vatvā ,ama thassāmā" 'ti vutte le- 
‘Kham kaddhitvà lekhāmajjhe darakath nipajjāpetvā yakkhiniya hat- 
thesu mātarā pādesu gāhāpetvā „dve pi ākaddhitvā ganhatha, kad- 
dhiturh sakkontiya eva putto“ ti aha. Ta ubho pi kaddhimsu, dārako 
kaddhiyamāno dukkhappatto hutvā viravi, mātā hadayena phalitena 10 
vija puttan mocetvā rodamānā atthāsi. Paņdito mahajanam pucchi: 
„dārake mātuhadayart mudukam hoti udāhu amatuhadayan ti. 
„Mātuhadayam paņditā* ‘ti „Idāni kim etam. dārakam gahetvā 
thitā mata hoti vissajjetvā thità^ ti. „Vissajjetvā thitā pandita“ 
‘i. ,Imam pana dārakacorirt tumhe janatha‘ ‘ti. „Na jānāma 15 
pandità^ ‘ti, „Yakkhinī esa, dārakam khaditurh genhiti^. „Ka- 
tham jānāsi pandità^ ‘ti.  ,Akkhinam animisatāja c' eva ratta- 
taya ca chāyāya abhāvena ca nirdsamkataya ca nikkarunataya ca“ ’ti. 
Atha nam pucchi: „kāsi tvan“ ti. „Yakkbini-mhi. s&miti". „Kasmā 
imam dārakam ganhiti‘. ,Khaditum samiti“. „Andhabāle, pubbe pi 20 
pāpakari katvà yakkhinī jātāsi, idāni puna pi pāpam karosi, aho an- 
dhabal&siti^ ovaditvā paūcasu sīlesu patitthāpetvā uyyojesi. Daraka- 
mātā ,ciram jīva sāmiti" paņditar thometvā puttan adaya pakkāmi. 


81. AKKA AND THE ĀSUBAS. 


Tasmim kale tavatimsabhavane asurā pativasanti. Sakko devarājā 95 
pkim no sādhāranena rajjenā* ‘ti asure, dibbapānam pāyetvā matte 
samāne pādesu gahetvā Sineru-papāte khipāpesi. Te asurabhavanām 
eva sampāpuņirūsu. Asurabhavanam nama Sinerussa hetthimatale 
tüvatimsadevalokappamünam eva, tattha dev&nam Paricchattako viya 
Cittapāfalī nama | kappatthiyarukkho hoti. Te Cittapataliya pupphi- 80 
tāya jānanti „nĀyarh amhākari devaloko, devalokasmir hi Pāricchattako - 
pupphatiti* .. Atba te „jara-Sakko amhe matte katvà mahüsamudda- 
pitthe. khipitv&. ambākaih devanagaram gaņhi, mayar tena saddhih - 


60 


yujjhitva amhakam devanagaram eva ganbissama“ ‘ti kipillika viya 
thambham Sinerurt anusaificaramana utthahimsu. Sakko ,asura kira 
utthitā* ti sutva samuddapitthe yeva abbhuggantva yujjhamano tehi 
parajito diyaddhayojanasatikena Vejayantarathena dakkhinasamuddassa 
5 matthakamatthakena palāyitum āraddho. Ath’ assa ratho samudda- 
pitthena vegena gacchanto Simbalivanam pakkhanto. Tassa gamana- 
patati. Supannapotaka samuddapitthe parivattentā maharavam ra- 
vimsu. Sakko Matalim pucchi: „samma Mātali, kimsaddo nām’ esa, 
10 atikaruno ravo vattatiti^, „Deva, tumhākam rathavegavicunnite Sim- 
balivane patante supannapotaka maranabhuyatajjita ekaviravam vira- 
vantiti^. Mahāsatto „samma Mātali, mā amhe nissāya ete kilamantu, 
na mayam issariyam nissāya panavadhakammam karoma, etesarh pana 
atthāya mayam jivitam pariccajitvā asurünam dassāma, nivattay’ etam 
15 rathan“ ti vatvà imam gàtham àha: 


Kulāvakā Mātali Simbalismim, īsāmukhena parivajjayassu, 
kàmam cajama asuresu panam, mā-y-ime dijā vikulāvā ahesun ti. 


Mātali samgahako tassa vacanam sutva ratham nivattetva ajifiena 
maggena devalokābhimukham. akāsi. Asura pana tam nivattayama- 
90 nam eva disvà „addhā aüüehi pi cakkavalehi Sakkā āgacchanti, balam 
labhitvā ratho nivatto bhavissatiti^ maranabhayabhita palayitva asura- 
bhavanam eva pavisisu. Sakko pi devanagaràm pavisitva dvisu 
devalokesu devaganena parivuto nagaramajjhe atthāsi. T'asmim khane 
pathavim  bhinditvà yojanasahassubbedho Vejayantapāsādo  utthahi. 
25 Vijayante utthitattā Vejayanto tv-eva namam akamsu. Atha Sakko 
puna asurànam anügamanatthaya pañcasu thanesu ārakkhar thapesi. 


61 


39. Tas Dream or tax Queen Maya. 


Tada kira Kapilavatthu-nagare asalhinakkhattam ghuttham ahosi. 


Mahājano nakkhattari kilati. Mahāmāyā devi pure puņņamāya satta- 


madivasato patthaya vigatasurāpānam mālāgandhavibhūtisampannar 
nakkhattakīļam anubhavamānā sattamadivase pāto va utthāya gandho- 
dakena nahāyitvā cattāri satasahassāni vissajjetvā mahādānarm datvā 
sabbālamkāravibhūsitā varabhojanam bhuūjitvā uposathaūgāni adhit- 
thaya alamkatapatiyattam sirigabbham pavisitvā sirisayane nipannā 
niddam okkamamānā imam supinam addasa: Cattāro kira nam mahā- 
rājāno sayanen’ eva saddhith ukkbipitvā Himavantam netvā satthiyo- 
janike Manosilā-tale sattayojanikassa mahāsālarukkhassa hetthā tha- 
petva ekamantam atthamsu. Atha nesam deviyo āgantvā devirh Anotatta- 
daham netvā manusamalaharanattham nahāpetvā dibbavattham nivā- 
sāpetvā gandhehi vilimpapetva dibbapupphani pilandhapetva — tato 
avidūre Rajata-pabbato, tassa anto kanakavimānam atthi — tattha 
pacinasisakam dibbasayanam paūnāpetvā nipajjāpesum. Atha Bodhi- 
satto setavaravarano hutvā — tato avidūre eko Suvanna-pabbato — 
tattha caritvà tato oruyha Rajata-pabbatam abhirūhitvā uttaradisato 
gamma rajatadāmavaņnāja soņdāya setapadumam gahetvā koūca- 


nüdam naditvā kanakavimānam pavisitvā matu sayanam tikkhatturt 20 


padakkhiņam katvā dakkhinapassam tāļetvā kucchim pavitthasadiso 
ahosi. Evam uttarāsālhanakkhattena patisandhim ganhi. Punadivase 
pabuddhà devi tam supinam rañño ārocesi. Raja catusatthimatte 
brahmanapamokkhe pakkosipetwa haritupatthaya lājādīhi katamaīga- 
lasakkārāya bhūmiyā mahārahāni āsanāni paūiāpetvā tattha nisinnā- 
nam brāhmaņānam sappimadhusakkarabhisamkhatassa varapayasassa 
suvannarajatapatiyo  püretvà suvannarajatapatihi yeva patikujjetva 
adāsi, aüüehi ca ahatavatthakapilagāvidānādīhi te santappesi Atha 
tesam sabbakamehi santappitànam supinam ārocetvā ,kim bhavissatiti“ 
puechi. Brāhmanā àhamsu: „mā cintayi mahārāja, deviya te kuc- 
chimhi' gabbho patitthito, so ca kho purisagabbho na itthigabbho, 
putto te bhavissati, so sace agdrar ajjhāvasissati rājā bhavissati cakka- 
vattī, sace agārā nikkhamma pabbajissati Buddho bhavissati loke vi- 
vattacchaddo* ti. m 


Pāli Reader. ` 


16 


80 


62 


33. Tus Betu. or Gorama Buppna. 


Mahamaya devi pattena telam viya dasamase kucchiya Bodhi- 
sattam pariharitva paripunnagabbha fatigharam gantukāmā Suddho- 
dana-mahārājassa ārocesi: ,iccham’ aban deva kulasantakam Deva- 

6 daha-nagaram gantun“ ti. Raja „sādhū* 'ti sampaticchitva Kapila- 
vatthuto yāva Devadaha-nagarā maggam samam. kāretvā kadalipunna- 
ghata-dhajapatakadihi alamkārāpetvā devim sovannasivikaya nisīdāpetvā 
amaccasahassena ukkhipāpetvā mahantena parivarena pesesi. Dvin- 
nam pana nagaranam antare ubhayanagaravasinam pi Lumbini-vanari 

10 nama maügalasalavanam atthi. Tasmim samaye mūlato patthaya yāva 
aggasākhā sabbam ekaphaliphullam ahosi, sākhantarehi c' eva pup- 
phantarehi ca paūcavaņņabhamaraganā nānappakārā ca sakunasamgha 
madhurassarena vikūjantā vicaranti. Sakalam Lumbini-vanam Citta- 
latavana-sadisam mahānubhāvassa rañño susajjita-āpānamaņdalam viya 

15 ahosi. Deviyà tam disvā sālavanakīļam kīļitukāmatā udapādi. Amaccā 
devim gahetvā salavanam pavisimsu. Sa mangalasalamulam garttvā 
sālasākhājam ganhitukama ahosi. Salasakha suseditavettaggam viya 
oņamitvā deviya hatthapatham upagsāshi. Sa hattham pasāretvā sā- 
khai  aggahesi, Tāvad eva c' assā i kammajavata calimsu. Ath’ assā 

20 Boii parikkhipitva mahajano patikkami. Sülas&kham gahetva tittha- 
mānāya eva c’ assā gabbhavutthānam ahosi. Tam khanam yeva 
cattaro pi suddhacittā Mahābrahmāno suvannajalam ādāya sampattā, 
tena suvannajalena Bodhisattath sampaticchitva matu purato thapetvā 
yattamana devi hohi, mahesakliho te putto uppanno^ ti ahainsu. 

95 Yathà pana aūūe sattā matukucchito nikkhamantā patikkūlena asucin& 
makkhità nikkhamanti na evam Bodhisatto. Bodhisatto pana dham- 
māsanato otaranto dhamniakathiko viya nissenito otaranto puriso viya 
ca dve ca hatthe dve ca pāde pasāretvā thitako matukucchisambha- | 
vena kenaci asucinā amakkhito suddho visado Kasika-vatthe nikkhitta- 

80 maniratanam viya jotanto matukucchito nikkhami. Evam sante pi 
Bodhisattassa ca Bodhisatta-mātuyā ca sakkürattham ākāsato dve uda- 
kadhārā nikkhamitvā Bodhisattassa ca matu c' assa sarire utum gühà. 
pesur. T 2: DU 


aa 


63 


34. Carrānī PUBBANIMITTĀNI. 


Ath’ ekadivasam Bodhisatto uyyánabhümim gantukāmo sārathir ` 
āmantetvā „ratham yojehiti^ dha. So „sādhū* ‘ti patisunitvà , mahüra- _ 
hah uttamaratham sabbalamkarena alamkaritva _kumudapattavanne 
cattaro maügalasindhaye yojetvi Bodhisattassa pativedesi. Bodhisatto 5 
devavirnanasadisarh rathah abhirūhitvā uyyānābhimukho agamasi. 
Devatā „Siddhatthakumārassa abhisambujjhanakalo āsanno, pubbani- 
mittam dassessama“ ‘ti ekam devaputtam jarājajjaram khaņdadantam 
pélitakesarh varükarit obhaggasariram dandahatthaim pavedhamanath 
katvā dassesum. Tam Bodhisatto c' eva s&rathi ca passanti. Tato 10 
Bodhisatto sāratbirn „samma, ko nām” esa puriso, kesāpi ’ssa na yathā 
aüüesan^ ti Mahāpadāne āgatanayena pucchitvà tassa vacanaīn sutvā 
»dbi-r-atthu vata bho jatiya yatra hi nama jātassa jarā paññayissa- 
titi“ sarhviggahadayo tato va patinivattitva pāsādam eva abhiruhi. 
Raja skirnkāraņā mama putto khippam patinivattiti^ pucchi. ,Jinnam 15 
purisam disvà devā 'ti, jinnam purisam disva pabbajissatiti" ahamsu. 
„Kasmā' | mam nüsetha, si ghari puttassa nātakāni sajjetha, sampattim 
anubhavanto pabbajjaya satin na karissatiti^ vatvā. arakkharh vad- 
dhetvà sabbadisāsu addhayojane addhayojane thapesi. Pun’ ekadi- 
vasam Bodhisatto tath’ eva uyyanam gacchanto devatahi nimmitam 20 
vyadhitarh purisam, disvā purimanayen’ eva pucchitva saiviggabadayo 
nivattitvā pàsadam  abhirühi. Rājāpi pucehitvà hetthavuttanayen’ . 
eva, samvidahitvà puna, vaddhetva samantato tigāvutappamāņe padese 
ārakkharh thapesi. Aparam pana ekadivasam Bodhisatto tath’ eva 
uyyanam gacchanto devatahi nimmitam kalakatam disvá purimanayen’ 25 
eva pucchitva samviggahadayo puna nivattitvā pāsādam abhirühi. 
Rājāpi pucchitvà hetthavuttanayen' eva Samvidahitvà puna vaddhetva 
samantato yojanappamāņe padese arakkham thapesi. Aparam pana 
ekadivasam uyjānam gacchanto tath’. eva devatāhi nimmitam suni- 
vatthar suparütair pabbajitam disvā sko E eso sammā“ "tj sã- 80 
rathirh pucchi. - Sürathi kiūcāpi Buddhuppadassa abhava pabbajitam 
và pabbajitagune va na janati, devānubhāvena pana ,pabbajito nam’ 


esa devā* ‘ti vatvā pabbajjaya gune vannesi. 'Bodhisatto pil bali ya. 
rucim uppādetvā. tam divasam uyy&nam agamasi. Dīghabāņaķā pac 
nāhu: cattāri nimittāni ekadivasen' eva disvā agamasiti. 


35. Tur, Gazar RETIREMENT. 
LG 


5 Tasmiri samaye „Rāhulamātā puttam vijata* ti sutva Suddho- 
daņamahārājā ,puttassa me tutthim nivedethā” 'ti sāsanam pahini. 
Bodhisatto tam sutvā ,Rahulo jato, bandhanarh jàten" ti aha. Raja 
„kin me putto avacā” ‘ti pucchitva tam vacanam sutvā „ito patthaya 
me nattu Rāhulakumāro tv-eva nāmam hott“ ‘ti. Bodhisatto pi kho 

10 rathavararh āruyha mahantena yasena atimanoramena sirisobhaggena 
nagaram pāvisi. Tasmim samaye Kisāgotami nama khattiyakañña 
uparipasadavaratalagata nagaram padakkhiņam kurumānassa Bodhi- 
sattassa rüpasirim disvā pitisomanassajata imam udānar udanesi: | 


Nibbutā niina sā mata, nibbuto nūna so pita, ! 

16 nibbutā nūna sā nari yassiyam īdiso patiti. oe 

ut ry 
Bodhisatto tam sutvā cintesi: ,ayam evam aha, evariipam attabhavam 
passantiya mātuhadayam nibbāyati, pitubaga yam , nibbayati, pajās, 
patihadayam nibbayati, kasmim nu kho nibbt te “hadayati nibbutar 
nama hotiti“. Ath’ assa kilesesu virattamānasašsa. ead. ahou »ta- 
20 ‘gaggimbi nibbute nibbutam nama hoti, dosaggimbi mohaggimhi nib- 
bute nibbutam nama hoti, manaditthiadisu sabbakilesadarathesu nib- 
butesu nibbutam nama hoti, ayam me sussavanam savesi, nu hi 
nibbünam gavesanto carami, aj) eva maya gharāvāsau chaddet &.nik- ` 
khamma pabbajitvā nibbānam gavesitum vattati, ayam imissš àcariya- 
25 bhāgo hotü^ 'ti kanthato omuūcitvā Kisāgotamiyā satasahassagghana- 
kam muttāhāram pesesi, Sa „Siddhatthakumāro mayi patibaddhacitto 
hutvā pangākārar pesetiti^ somanassajātā ahosi. Bodhisatto Pi, ma- 
hantena sirisobhaggena attano pāsādar abhirūhitvā sirisayane nipajji. 
Tavad eva nam sabbalamkarapatimandita _haccagitadisu „Susikkhitā 
80 devakaüna viya rüpappatta itthiyo nānāturiyāni "gahetvā samparivāra- 
yitvā abhiramüpentiyo haccagitavaditani payojayimsu. Bodhisatto ki- 


lesesu virattacittatāya naccādisu anabhirato muhuttam niddath okkami. 
x 


65 


Tāpi itthiyo ,yass’ atthiya mayam naccadini payojayama so niddam 
upagato, idāni kimattham kilāmāmā* 'ti gahitagahitāni turiyüni aj- 
jhottharitvā nipajjiihsu. Gandhatelappadīpā jhayanti. Bodhisatto pa- 
bujjhitvā, sayavapitthe, pallamkena nisinno addasa tā itthiyo turiya- ' 
bhai avattharitva niddayantiyo ekaccā paggbaritakheļā lalakilinna- 5 
| "gattā, ekaecā dante khādantiyo ekaccā kükacchantiyo ekaccà vippala- 
pani ekaccā idea ekacch apagatavatthā pakhtabibhaccha- 
Qatana" Bot "tasa farà vippakaram disvā bhiyyosomattāya - 
kāmesu viratto E Tassa alarhkatapatiyattari Sakkabhavana-sadisam 
pi tam mahātalar vippaviddhananakunapabharitam àmakasusanam viya 10 
upatthāsi, tayo bhava ādittagehasadīsā viya khayimsu, ,upaddutam 
vata bho, upassattham vata bho“ ti udanam pavatti, ativiya pabbajjaya 
cittam nami. So „ajj eva mayá mahabhinikkhamanam nikkhamitum 
vattatiti" sayana vutthaya dvarasamipam gantvā „ko ettbā* ’ti aha. 
Ummāre sīsam katvā nipanno Channo „ahah ayyaputta Channo“ ti 16 
aha. „Aham ajja mahabhinikkhamanam nikkbamitukamo, ekam me 
assam kappehiti^. So „sādhu devā* "ti assabhandakam gahctva assa- 
salam gantvā gandhatelappadīpesu jalantesu sumandpattavitanassa hetthā 
ramaniye bhūmibhāge thitam Kanthakam assarājānar disvà „ajja 
mayà imam eva kappetum vattatiti' Kanthakam kappesi. So kappi- 20 
yamano va aüüüsi: „ayam kappanā atigalhà, aññesu divasesu uyyāna- 
kiladigamane kappanā viya na hoti, mayham ayyaputto ajja mahabhi- 
nikkhamanam nikkhamitukāmo bhavissatit:®, tuto tutthamanaso mahā- 
hasitam hasi. So saddo sakalanagaram pattharitva gaccheyya, devata 
pana tarh saddam niroņibhitvā na kassaci sotum adamsu. Bodhisatto 25 
pi kho Channam pesetvā. va ,puttam tava passissāmiti" cintetvā ni- 
cinnapallamkato vutthaya Rahulamataya vasanatthanam gantvā gabbha- 
dvāram vivari. Tasmim khaņe antogabbhe gandhatelappadīpo jhāyati. 
Rāhulamātā gumanamallikādīnam pupphanam ammanamattena abhip- 
pakinnasayane puttassa matthake hattham thapetvā niddāyati. Bodhi- 90 
satto ummāre pādam thapetvā fhitako va oloketvā ,sac’ &ham deviyā 
hattham apanetvā mama puttan gaņhissāmi devi pabujjhissati, evam 
me gamanantarāyo bhavissati, Buddho hutvā va āgantvā passissamiti* 
pāsādatalģto otari. 


d 


66 


36. PATIOCASAMUPPĀDO. 


Tena samayena Buddho bhagavā Uruvelayam viharati Neraūja- 
raya tiró bodhirukkhamule pathamabhisambuddho. Atha kho Bhagava 
bodhirukkhamūle sattiham ekapallaükena nisidi vimuttisukhapatisarh- 

5 vedi. Atha kho Bhagavā rattiyā pathamam y&mam paticcasamuppa- 
dam anulomapatilomam manasākāsi: avijjapaccaya samkhara, sam- 
khārapaccayā viññanam, viūūāņapaccayā n&marüpam, nāmarūpapaccayā 
salayatanam, salayatanapaccaya phasso, phassāpaccayā vedana, vedana- 
paccayā taņhā, tanhüpaecay& upādānam, _upādānapaccayā bhavo, 

10 bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraņam sokaparidevadukkhadoma- 
nassupāyāsā bhavanti. Evam etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa 
samudayo hoti Avijjāya tv-eva asesaviraganirodha sarhkhāranirodho, 
samkharanirodha vinüananirodho, viññananirodha nàmarüpanirodho, 
nāmarūpanirodhā salayatananirodho, saļāyatananirodhā phassanirodho, 

15 phassanirodhā vedanānirodho, vedanānirodhā tanbānirodho, taņhāni- 
rodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā 
jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraņam sokaparidevadukkhadomanassu- 
pāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evam etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa ni- 

rodho hotiti. Atha kho Bhagavā etam attham viditvā tayam velayam 
imam udānam udanesi: 

90 Yada have patubhavanti dhamma ātāpino jhayato brahmanassa 

ath’ assa kaūkhā vapayanti sabba yato pajānāti sahetudhamman £i. 


97. ĪDHAMMAOAKKA-PAVATTANA-ŠUTTA. 

Evam me sutam: Ekath samayam Bhagavā Barünasiyam vibarati 
Isipatane migadāye. Tatra kho Bhagava paūcavaggiye bhikkhū āman- 
95 tesi: „dve'me bhikkhave antā pabbajitena na sevitabbā. Katame dve. 
Yo cavath kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogo hino gammo pothujjaniko. 
anariyo anatthasamhito, yo cáyam attakilāmathānuyogo dukkho anariyo. 
anatthasamhito, ete kho bhikkhave ubho ante anupagammā majjhimā . 
patipadā Tathāgatena abhisambuddhà cakkhukarani . hàpakarani upa- 
80 samaya abhiünaya sambodhāya nibbünüya samvatiati. Katamā ca sā 


67 


bhikkhave majjhimā patipada Tathāgatena abhisam buddha cakkhu- 
karani üünakarani upasamāya abhiññaya sambodhāya nibbānāya sar- 
vattati. Ayam eva ariyo atthafigiko maggo, seyyath' idam: sammā.- 
ditthi sammāsarikappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo 
sammavayamo sammāsati sammasamadhi: Ayam kho sā bhikkhave 5 
majjhimā patipadā Tathagatena abhisambuddhā cakkhukarani iāņa- 
karani upasamaya abhififiaya sambodhaya nibbānāya sarhvattāti. Idam 
kho pana bhikkhave dukkham ariyasaocam: jati pi dukkhā, jarā pi 
dukkhà, vyādhi pi dukkha, maranam pi dukkham. appivehi sampa- 
yogo dukkho. piyehi vippayogo dukkho, yam p’ iccham na labhati 10 
tam pi dukkham, samkhittena paüc' upadanakkhandha pi dukkha. 
Idan kho pana bhikkhave dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam: ydyam 
taņhā ponobbhavikā nandiragasahagatà tatratatrābhinandinī, seyyath' 
īdam: kāmatanbā bhavatanha vibhavatanhā. Idam kho pana bhik- 
khave dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam: yo tassā yeva taņhāya asesavirā- 16 
ganirodho cago patinissaggo mutti anālayo. Idam kho pana bhik- 
khave dukkhanirodhagamini patipadā ariyasaccam, ayam eva ariyo 
atthaūgiko maggo, seyyath’ idam: sammāditthi sammasamkappo sam- 
māvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati samma- 
samadhi.“ 20 


38. YASAPABBAJJĀ. 


Tena kho pana samayena Bārāņasijam Yaso nāma kulaputto 
setthiputto sukhumālo hoti, tassa tayo pāsādā honti: eko hemantiko, 
eko gimhiko, eko vassiko. So vássike pāsāde cattāro māse nippurisehi 
turiyehi paricārijamāno na hettha pāsādā orohati. Atha kho Yasassa 
kulaputtassa paūcahi kamagunehi samappitassa samaūgibhūtassa pari- 25 
cüriyamünassa patigace’ eva nidd& okkami, parijanassāpi pacchā niddā 
okkami, sabbarattiyo ca telappadipo jhayati. Atha kho Yaso kula- 
putto patigacc’ eva patibujjhitvà addasa sakan parijanari supentam - 
aiiūissā kacche vīņam aññiss& kanthe mutifigam aūūissā kacche alam- 
bararh aññat vikesikam aññam vikkheļikar vippalapantiyo, hatthap- 80 
pattarh sus&nam maññe. Disvün' assa ādīnavo pāturahosi, nibbidāya 
cittarh saņthāsi. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto udanath udānesi: ,upaddu- ` 


68 


tam vata bho, upassattham vata bho“ ti. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto 
suvaņņapādukāyo ārohitvā yena nivesanadvaram ten’ upasamkami, 
amanussa dvāram vivarimsu ‘ma Yasassa kulaputtassa koci antarāyam 
akāsi agārasmā anagariyam pabbajjaya’ ‘ti. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto 
5 yena nagaradvaram ten’ upasamkami, amanussā dvaram ‘vivarithsu ‘ma 
Yasassa kulaputtassa koci antarayam akāsi agārasmā anaga@riyam pab-. 
bajjāyā” 'ti. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto yena Isipatanam migadāyo 
ten’ upasamkami. Tena kho pana samayena Bhagava rattiya paecū- 
sasamayam paccutthaya ajjhokase cafikamati. Addasa kho Bhagava 
10 Yasam kulaputtam dūrato va àgacchantam, disvana cafikama orohitva 
paimatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto Bhagavato avidūre 
udanam udanesi: „upaddutam vata bho, upassattham vata bho“ ti. 
Atha kho Bhagava Yasar kulaputtam etad avoca: „idam kho Yasa 
` anupaddutam, idam anupassattham, ehi Yasa nisida, dhammam te 
15 desessāmiti'. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto ‘idam kira anupaddutam, idam 
anupassatthan’ ti hattho udaggo suvannapadukahi orohitvā yena Bha- 
gavā ten’ upasamkami, upasamkamitva Bhagavantam abhivādetvā ekam- 
antam nisīdi.  Ekamantam nisinnassa kho Yasassa kulaputtassa Bha- 
gavā anupubbikatham kathesi, seyyath’ īdam: dānakatharm silakatham 
20 saggakatham kamanam adinavam okaram samkilesam nekkhamme ani- 
samsam pakāsesi. Yada Bhagavā aūiāsi Yasam. kulaputtam kallacittam 
muducittam vinīvarapņacittarn udaggacittam pasannacittam atha ya bud- 
dhanam sāmukkamsikā dhammadesanā tam pakāsesi: dukkham samuda- 
yam nirodhai maggain. Seyyatha pi nama suddham vattham apagata- 
95 kāļakam samma-d-eva rajanam patiganheyya evam eva Yasassa kula- 
puttassa tasmim yeva dsane virajam vitamalam dhammacakkhum udapādi 
‘yam kiūci samudayadhammam sabbam tam nirodhadhamman' ti. Atha 
kho Yasassa kulaputtassa mata pasadarn abhirūhitvā Yasam kulaputtam 
apassanti yena setthi gahapati ten’ upasamkami, upasamkamitvā set- 
80 thi gahapatim etad avoca: „putto te gahapati Yaso na dissàátiti*. 
Atha kho setthi gahapati catuddisā assadūte uyyojetva simam yeva 
yena Isipatanam migadayo ten’ upasamkami. Addasa kho setthi gaha- 
pati suvannapüdukanam nikkhepamh, disvāna tam yeva anugamāsi. 
Addasa kho Bhagavā setthim gahapatim diirato va āgacohantam; 
85 disvāna Bhagavato etad ahosi: „yah münáham tathārūpar iddhābhi- 
sarnkhārari abhisamkh&reyyam yathd setthi gahapati idha nisinno idha 


69 


nisinnam Yasam kulaputtah na passeyya“ ‘ti. Atha kho Bhagavā 
tathārūparh iddhābhisarhkhārar abhisamkhāresi. Atha kho setthi 
gahapati yena Bhagavā ten’ upasamkami, upasarnkamitvā Bhagavantam 
etad avoca: „api bhanté Bhagava Yasar kulaputtam passeyya" ‘ti. 
lena hi gahapati nisida, app-eva nama idha nisinno idha nisinnam 6 
Yasar kulaputtam passeyyasiti“. Atha kho setthi gahapati ,idh' eva 
kirāham  nisinno idha -nisinnam Yasan kulaputtam passissamiti" 
hattho udaggo Bhagavantari abhivādetvā ekamantam nisīdi. Ekam- 
antam nisinnassa kho setthissa gahapatissa Bhagavā anupubbikatham 
kathesi, seyyath’ īdam: dānakatham silakathath saggakatharh kamanam 10 
adinavam okāram samkilesam nekkhamme ànisamsam pakāsesi. Atha 
kho setthi gahapati ditthadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pari- 
yogalhadhammo tinnavicikiccho vigatakathamkatho vesārajjappatto apa- 
rappaceayo Satthu sāsane Bhagavantam etad avoca: ,abhikkantam 
bhante, abhikkantam bhante, seyyatha pi bhante nikkujjitam va 16 
ukkujjeyya, paticchannam và vivareyya, mūļhassa và maggam acik- 
kheyya, andhakare vā telapajjotam dhareyya 'cakkhumanto rūpāni 
dakkhintiti', evam eva Bhagavatā anekapariyàyena dhammo paküsito, - 
es’ aham bhante Bhagavantam saranam gacchāmi dhammaii ca bhik- 
 khusamghañ ca, upāsakam mam Bhagava dhāretu ajjatagge panupetain 20 
saranam gatan“ ti. So va loke pathamam upāsako ahosi tevüciko. 
Atha kho Yasassa kulaputtassa pituno dhamme desiyamàne yatha- 
dittham yathaviditam bhūmim paccavekkhantassa anupādāya asavehi 
citta vimucci Atha kho Bhagavato etad ahosi: ,Yasassa kula- 
puttassa pituno dhamme desiyamāne yathadittham yathaviditaxh bhü- 25 
mim paccavekkhantassa anupadaya āsavehi cittam vimuttam, abhabbo 
kho Yaso kulaputto hīnāyāvattitvā kame paribhuājitum seyyathā pi 
pubbe agārikabhūto, yam nünáham tam iddhabbisamkharam patippas- 
sambheyyan" ti Atha kho Bhagava iddhābhisarhkhārari patippas- 
sambhesi. Addasa kho setthi gabapati Yasar kulaputtam nisinnam, 95 
disvāna Yasar kulaputtarū etad avoca: „mātā te tata Yasa pari- 
devasokasampannā, dehi mātu jīvitan* tii Atha kho Yaso kulaputto 
Bhagavantār ullokesi. Atha kho Bhagavā setthim gahapatim etad 
avoca: ,tam kim maññasi gahapati, Yasassa sekhena iāņena sekhena 
dassanena dhammo. dittho seyyatha pi tayā, lassa yathādittharh yatha- 80 
| vidita bhumbh nove anupadaya āgavehi citam vimuttam, 
EIU — | RM I 


70 


bhabbo nu kho Yaso gahapati hināyāvattitvā kame . paribhuājitum 
seyyathi pi pubbe agārikabhūto* ti. „No h' etam bhante". , Yasassa 
kho gahapati kulaputtassa sekhena ūāņena sekhena dassanena dhammo 
dittho seyyatha pi taya, tassa yathadittham yathaviditam bhūmim pacca- 
6 vekkhantassa anupādāya asavehi cittam vimuttam, abhabbo kho gaha- 
pati Yaso kulaputto hinayávattitvà kame paribhuüjitum seyyatha pi 
pubbe agārikabhūto* ti. „Lābhā bhante Yasassa kulaputtassu, su- 
laddharh bhante Yasassa kulaputtassa yathā Yasassa kulaputtassa anu- 
pādāya āsavehi cittarn vimuttam, adhivāsetu me bhante Bhagavā ajja- 
10 tanāya bhattam Yasena kulaputtena pacchāsamanenā" ti. Adhivāsesi 
. Bhagava tunhibhavena. Atha kho setthi gahapati Bhagavato adhivā- 
sanam viditvā utthāyāsanā Bhagavantam abhivādetvā padakkhinam 
katvā pakkāmi. Atha kho Yaso kulaputto acirappakkante setthimhi 
gahapatimhi Bhagavantam etad avoca: ,labheyyaham bhante Bhaga- 
15 vato santike pabbajjam, labheyyam upasampadan* ti. „Ehi bhikkhü" 
'ti Bhagavā avoca, „svākkhāto dhammo, cara brahmacariyam sammā 
 dukkhassa antakiriyaya“ 'ti. Sa va tassa ayasmato upasampadā ahosí. 
Tena kho pana samayena satta/loke arahanto honti. 


39. Tux Free-Sermon. 


20 Atha kho Bhagavā Uruvelàyam yathabhirantam viharitva yena 
Gayasisam tena carikam pakkami. mahatā bhikkhusamghena saddhim 
bhikkhusahassena sabbeh’ eva puranajatilehi. Tatra sudam Bhagavā 
Gayāyam viharati Gayāsīse saddhim bhikkhusahassena. Tatra kho 
Bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: ,Sabbam bhikkhave ādittam. Kil ca 

25 bhikkhave sabbath ddittam. Cakkhurh bhikkhave aditam, rūpā ādittā, 
cakkhuviüüanam ādīttarm, cakkhusamphasso āditto, yad idam cakkhu- 
samphassapaccay& uppajjati vedayitarh sukham va dukkham và aduk- 
khamasukham va tam pi ādittam. Kena ādittam: rāgagginā dosag- 
ginā mohagginā ādittam, jātiyā jarāya maranena sokehi paridevehi 

80 dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi ādittan ti vadāmi. Sota ādittem, 
saddā ādittā, .. la . . . ghānam ādittam, gandhā ādittā, jivha ādittā, 
rasā ādittā, kayo -&ditto, photthabb& ādittā, mano āditto, dhamm& 
ādittā, maucviiūāņam ādittam, manosamphasso āditto, yad idari mano- 


71 


samphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitam sukham và dukkham vā aduk- 
khamasukham vā tam pi ādittam. Kena ādittam: rāgagginā dosaggina 
mohagginā ādittam, jātiyā jarāya maranena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi 
domanassehi upāyāsehi ādittan ti vadāmi. Evam passam bhikkhave 
sutavā ariyasāvako cakkhusmim pi nibbindati, rüpesu pi nibbindati, 5 
cakkhuviüüüne pi nibbindati, yad idam cakkhusamphassapaccayā up- 
pajjati vedayitam sukham và dukkham và adukkhamasukham va tasmim 
pi nibbindati. Sotasmim pi nibbindati, saddesu pi nibbindati, ghānas- 
mim pi nibbindati, gandhesu pi nibbindati, jivhāya pi nibbindati, rasesu 
pi nibbindati, kayasmim pi nibbindati, photthabbesu pi nibbindati, ma- 
nasmim pi nibbindati, dhammesu pi nibbindati. manoviūīāņe pi nib- 
bindati, manosamphasse pi nibbindati, yad idam manosamphassapaccaya 
uppajjati vedayitam sukham va dukkham va adukkhamasukham va 
tasmim pi nibbindati, nibbindam virajjati. virīgā vimuccati, vimuttas- 
mim ‘vimutt’ amhiti’ fianam hoti, khīņā jati, vusitam brahmacariyam, 16 
katah karaņīyam, nāparam itthattāyā ‘ti pajanatiti“. Imasmim ca 
pana veyyakaranasmim bhaūiiamāne tassa bhikkhusahassassa anupādāya 
āsavehi cittāni vimuccimsu. Adittapariyayam nitthitam. 


bp 


0 


40. Mirza as Prowman. 


Ekam samayam Bhagavā Savatthiyain viharati Jetavane Anātha- 20 
pindikassa ārāme. Tena kho pana samayena Bhagavāū bhikkhu nibbāna- 
patisamyuttàya dhammiyā kathaya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti 
sampaharhseti. Te ca bhikkhü atthikatva manasikatva sabbacetaso sam- 
annāharitvā ohitasotā dhammam sunanti. Atha kho Mārassa papimato 
etad ahosi: „ayar kho samano Gotamo bhikkhū nibhana-patisgmyuttaya 25 
dhammiyā katháya ... pa ..., yan nūnāham yena samano Gotamo ten’ upa- 
sarñkameyyarh vicakkhukammaya® ‘ti. Atha kho Maro pāpimā kassaka- 
vannam abhinimminitvā mahantam nafigalam khandhe karitvā digham 
pacanayatthim gahetva hatahatakeso sanasatinivattho kaddamamakkhite- 
hi pādehi yena Bhagavā ten’ upasamkami, upasamkamitvà Bhagavantam 80 
etad avoca: ,api samana balivadde addasā* "ti, ,Kim pana pāpima 
te balivaddehiti^, „Mam” eva samana cakkhurh mama rūpā mama 


12 


cakkhusamphaseaviāiāņājatana, kuhim me samaņa gantri mokkhasi. 
Mem’ eva samana sotam mama saddā ... pa ..., mam’ eva samana 
ghānarh mama gandhā, mam’ eva samana , jivhā mama rasa, mam’ eva 
samana kayo mama photthabba, mam’ eva samana mano mama dhammà 
5 mama manosamphassavififianayatanam, kuhim me samana gantva mok- 
khasiti"^. „Tav eva pāpima cakkhum tava rüpà tava cakkhusamphassa- 
viññanayatanam, yattha ca kho pāpima n’ atthi cakkhurh n’ atthi rūpā 
n’ atthi cakkhusamphassaviüüünayatanam agati tava tattha pāpima. 
Tav' eva pāpima sotar tava saddā tava sotasamphassavifiidnayatanam, 
10 yattha ca kho pāpima n’ atthi sotam n’ atthi saddā n’ atthi sota- 
samphassaviūiiānāyatanam agati tava tattha papima. Tav’ eva pāpima 
ghānain tava gandha tava ghanasamphassavinüanayatanam, yattha ca 
kho papima n’ atthi ghānam n' atthi gandha n’ atthi ghānasamphassa- 
S viiifidndyatanam agati tava tattha pāpima. Tav' eva pāpima jivhā tava 
15 rasa tava jivhāsamphassaviūiāņāyātanam ... pa ..., tav' eva pāpima 
kāyo tava photthabbā tava kā jasesiphasaavinaayayatanan puse Di iy 
tav’ eva papima mano tava dhammā tava manosamphassaviiiāņāyata= 
nam, yattha ca kho pāpima n’ atthi mano n’ atthi dhammà n’ atthi 


manosamphassaviünanayatanam agati tava tattha pāpimā" "ti, 


20 „Yam vadanti mama-y-idan ti ye vadanti maman ti ca, 
ettha ce te mano atthi na me samana mokkhasiti.* 
„kam vadanti na tam mayham ye vadanti na te un 
evam pupima janahi, na me maggam pi dakkhasiti*. 


Atha kho Maro pāpimā „jānāti mam Bhagava, jānāti mam Sugato“ 
95 ti dukkhi dummano tatth” ev’ antaradhayiti. 


: 41. ‘Tue MuRDER or ŠUNDARĪ. 


Bhagavato kira bhikkhusamghassa paficannam mahanadinam maho- 
ghasadise lābhasakkāre uppanne hatalābhasakkārā aññňatitthiyā suri- 
yuggamanakāle khajjopanakasadisā nippabhā hutvā ekato sannipatitvà. 

80 mantayimsu: „mayarm samanassa Gotamassa uppannakālato patthaya 
hatalābhasakkārā, na no koci atthibhāvam pi jāņāti, ‘kena mu ho: 
saddhim ekato hutvü samaņassa Gotamassa avaņņam. uppādētrē. 


13 


lābbasakkāram assa an taradhapeyyama“ ‘ti, Atha nesam etad ahosi: 
„Sundariyā saddhim ekato hutva sakkuņissāmā* ‘ti te ekadivasam 
Sundari titthiyārāmam pavisitva vanditvà thitam nālapimsu. Sa 
punappuna sallapanti pi pativacanam alabhitvā ,api nu ayyā kenaci 
vihethit* atthā* ‘ti pucchi. ,Bhagini, samanam Gotamam amhe 5 
vihethetvā . hatalābhasakkāre karitvā vicarantam na passasiti“. Sa 
evam aha: „mayā ettha kim kātum vattatiti^. ,Tvam kho si bha- 
gini abhirūpā sobhaggappattā, samanassa Gotamassa ayasam āro- 
petvā mahājanam tava katham gāhāpetvā hatalabhasakkaram ka- 
Tohiti". Sa ,sadhu“ 'ti sampaticchitva vanditvà pakkantā. Tato 10 
patthāya mālāgandhavilepanakappūrakatukapphalādīni gahetva sāyam 
mahajanassa Satthu dhammadesanam .sutvà nagaram pavisanakāle 
Jetavanābhimukhī gacchati, ,kaham gacchasiti^ ca putthā ,samanassa 
Gotamassa santikam, aham hi tena saddhim ekagandhakutiyam vasa- 
miti^ vatva aūiatarasmir titthiyārāme vasitva pato va J psum c pe 15 
otaritvā nagarābhimukhī gacchati, „kim Sundari, kaham gatasiti“ 
putthà ,samanena Gotamena saddhim ekagandhakutiyam vasitvà kt 
kilesaratiyà ramāpetvā agat’ amhiti^ vadati. Atha nam katipāhacca- 
yena dhuttānam kahāpaņe datvā „gacchatha, Sundarim māretvā sa- 
maņassa Gotamassa gandhakutisamīpe mālākacavarantare nikkhipitvā 20 
ethā* 'ti vadimsu. Te tathā akarsu. Tato titthiyā ,Sundarim na 
passāmā* ‘ti kolahalam katvā raüüo arocetva ,kaham vo āsamkā” ti 
vuttā ,ime divase Jetavanam gata ti, tatr' assa pavattim na jānāmā" 
'ti vatvā „tena hi gacchatha nam vicinatha“ ‘ti raūiā anuññata attano 
upatthāke gahetvā Jetavanam gantvā vicinantā mālākacavarantare disvā 25 
maiicakam āropetvā nagaram pavesetvā „samaņassa Gotamassa sāvakā 
‘Satthara katapāpakammam paticchādessāmā” ’ti Sundarim māretvā 
mālākacavarantare nikkhipirhsū" "ti raūūo ārocayimsu. Raja „tena hi 
gacchatha, nagaram āhiņdathā" ‘ti āha. Te nagaravithisu ,passatha 
samaņānam Sakyaputtiyanam kamman“ ti ādīni viravitva puna raūdo 80 
nivesanadvāram āgamimsu. Raja Sundariya sariram āmakasusāne 
attakarh āropetvā rakkhāpesi. Sāvatthivāsino thapetvā ariyasāvake sesā 
‘yebhuyyena ,passatha samaņānar Sakyaputtiyanam kamman“ ti ādīni 
vatvā: antonagare bahinagare upavana-araññesu bhikkhū akkosanta vi- 
Garanti. Bhikkhü tam pavattirh Tathāgatassa ārocesuti. Sattha „tona 86 
hi. tumhe te manusse evam paticodethā" ‘ti: i 


74 


Abhūtavādī nirayari upeti yo vāpi katvā ‘na karomi' c’ dha, . 
ubho pi.te pecca sama bhavanti nihinakammā manujā paratthā 'ti 
imam gātham aha. Raja ,Sundariyà aüüehi maritabhavam jānāthā* 
‘ti purise payojesi. Te pi kho dhuttā tehi kahapanehi suram pivantā 
5 aūfiamaūūam kalaham karonti, tatth' eko evam aha: „tvah Sundarim 
ekappaharen’ eva māretvā malakacavarantare nikkhipitva tato laddha- 
kahāpanehi suram pivasi*. „Hotu hotuü^ ‘ti rājapurisā te dhutte ga- 
hetvā rañño dassesum. Atha ne raja ,tumhehi sā māritā* ti pucchi. 
„Āma devā* 'ti. ,Kehi mārāpitā" ti. „Aññatitthiyehi devā* ti. Raja 
10 titthiye pakkosāpetvā ,Sundarith ukkhipāpetvā gacchatha tumhe evarh 
vadanté nagaram āhiņdatha: ayam Sundari samanassa Gotamassa 
avannam āropetukāmehi amhehi mārāpitā, n' eva Gotamassa na Gota- 
masāvakānam doso atthi, amhākam doso“ ti. Te tatha akarsu. 
Bālamahājano tadā saddahi, titthiyā pi purisavadhadandena palibuddhā. 
15 Tato patthaya Buddhanam sakkaro mahantataro ahosi. 


49. Dsvaparra’s MALICE AGAINST BUDDHA. 


Tena kho pana samayena Bhagavā mahatiya parisāya parivuto 
dhammam desento nisinno hoti sarājikāya parisāya. Atha kho De- 
vadatto utthàyásanà ekarhsam uttarāsaūgam karitva yena Bhagava 

20 ten’ aiijalim paņāmetvā Bhagavantam etad avoca: ,jinno dani bhante 
Bhagavā vuddho mahallako addhagato vayo anuppatto, appossukko 
dani bhante Bhagavā ditthadhammasukhavihāram anuyutto viharatu. 
mama bhikkhusamgham nissajjatu, abam bhikkhusamgham pariharissa- 
mîti“. „Alarm Devadatta, ma te rucci bhikkhusamgham pariharitun" 

25 ti, Dutiyam pi kho Devadatto ... tatiyam pi kho Devadatto Bhaga- 
vantam etad avoca: ,jinno dani ... pariharissāmīti*. ,Sariputta- 
Moggallānānam pi kho aham Devadatta bhikkhusamgha na nissajjey- 
yam, kim pana tuybam chavassa kheļāpakassā* ‘tii Atha kho 
Devadatto „sarājikāja mam Bhagavā parisaya khelapakavadena apa- 

80 sādeti, Sāriputta-Moggallānēva ukkarsātiti" kupito anattamano Bhaga- 
vantam abhivādetvā padakkhiņam katvā pakkāmi. Ayaū ca tarahi 
Devadattassa Bhagavati pathamo āghāto ahosi. — 


75 


Atha kho Devadatto yena Ajātasattukumāro ten’ upasamkami, 
upasamkamitvā Ajatasattukumaram etad avoca: ,purise maharaja 
āņāpehi ye samanam Gotama jīvitā voropessantiti^. Atha kho 
Ajātasattukumāro manusse āņāpesi: „yathā bhane ayyo Devadatto | 
aha tathà karothā* ‘ti. Atha kho Devadatto ekam purisam āņāpesi: 5 
»gacchivuso, amukasmim okāse samano Gotamo viharati, tam jīvitā 
voropetyà iminà maggena agaccha“ ’ti, tasmim magge dve purise 
thapesi „yo iminà maggena eko puriso āgacchati tam jīvitā voropetvā 
iminā maggena àgacchatha^ ‘ti, tasmim magge cattāro purise tbapesi 
„ye iminā maggena dve purisà āgacchanti te jivita voropetva iminā 10 
maggena agacchatha“ ‘ti, tasmim magge attha purise thapesi nye 
iminā maggena cattāro purisā agacchanti te jīvitā voropetvā iminā 
maggena āgacchathā" 'ti, tasmim magge solasa purise thapesi „ye 
iminā maggena attha purisā agacchanti te jivita voropetvā agaccha- 
tha“ ‘ti. Atha kho so eko puriso asicammam gahetva dhanukalapam 15 
sannayhitvà yena Bhagavà ten’ upasamkami, upasamkamitva Bhaga- 
vato avidure bhito ubbiggo ussanki utrasto -patthaddhena kàyena 
atthāsi. Addas& kho Bhagava tai purisam bhitam ubbiggam ussañkim 
utrastam patthaddhena kayena thitam, disvana tam purisam etad 
avoca: „ehi āvuso, mā bhayiti“. Atha kho so puriso asicammam eka- 90 
mantah kāritvā dhanukalāpam nikkhipitva yena Bhagava ten’ upa- 
samkami, upasamkamitva Bhagavato padesu sirasā nipatitvā Bhaga- 
vantam etad avoca: ,accayo mam bhante accagama yatha balam 
yathà mu]bam yathā akusalam yo 'ham dutthacitto vadhakacitto idh' 
upasamkanto, tassa me bhante Bhagavā accayam accayato patiganhatu 25 
ayatith samvar&yà^ ‘tii — Atha kho Bhagavā tassa purisassa anu- 
pubbikatham kathesi, seyyath’ īdam: danakatham — pe —. 

. Atha kho so eko puriso yena Devadatto ten’ upasamkami, upa- 
samkamitva Devadattam etad avoca: „nāham bhante sakkomi tam 
Bhagavantam jīvitā voropetum, mahiddhiko so Bhagava mahanubhavo“ 80 
ti. „Alam &vuso, mà kho tvah samanam Gotamam jīvitā voro- 
pesi, abam eva samanam Gotamam jività voropessāmiti*. Tena kho 
pana samayena Bhagavā Gijjhakūtassa pabbatassa paccháy&yam cañ- 
kamati. Atha kho Devadatto Gijjhakūtau pabbatam abhirūhitvā 
mahantam silah pavijjhi ,imaya samapam» Gotamam jīvitā voro- 85 
pessamiti“. Dve pabbatakūtā samāgantvā tam silam sampatic- 


76 


chimsu, tato papatikà uppatitva Bhagavato pade ruhiram uppādesi. 
Atha kho Bhagavà uddham ulloketvā Devadattam etad avoca: . 
„bahuri taya moghapurisa apuiifiarh pasutam yam tvam dutthacitto va- 
dhakacitto TTathagatassa ruhirah uppadesiti“. Atha kho Bhagavā 
6 bhikkhū āmantesi: idan bhikkhave Devadattena pathainarh dnantari- 
kakammam upacitam yam dutthacittena vadhakacittena Tathāgatassa 
ruhiram uppāditan* ti. — - 
Tena kho pana samayena Rajagahe Nālāgiri nama hatthi cando 
hoti manussaghatako. Atha kho Devadatto Rajagaham pavisitva 
10 hatthisālam gantva hatthibhande etad avoca: ,mayam kho bhane rā- 
jaūātakā nama patibalà nīcathāniyam ucce thane thapetum bhattam 
pi vetanam pi vaddbāpetum, tena hi bhane yada samano Gotamo 
imam raccharh patipanno hoti tadā imarh Nalagirim hatthim muūcitvā 
imam raccham patipādethā" "ti. „Evam bhante* ti kho te hatthi- 
15 bhaņdā Devadattassa paccassosum. Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasa- 
mayam.nivàsetvà pattacīvaram ādāya sambahulehi bhikkhühi saddhim 
Rajagaham pindaya pāvisi. Atha kho Bhagava tam raccharh patipajji, 
addasasum kho te hatthibhandā Bhagavantar tam raccham patipan- 
nam, disvāna Nālāgirim hatthim muūcitvā tam raccham patipadesum. 
90 Addas& kho Nālāgiri hatthi Bhagavantam dürato va agacchantam,, 
disvana soņdari ussāpetvā pahatthakannavalo yena Bhagavā tena 
abhidhavi. Addasásum khó te bhikkhü Nālāgirim hatthim dūrato va 
agacchantam, disvàna Bhagavantam etad avocum: „ayah bhante Nālā- 
giri hatthi cando manussaghatako imam raccham patipanno, patikka- 
96 matu bhante Bhagava, patikkamatu Sugato“ ti. ,Agacchatha bhik- 
khave, mā bhayittha, atthanam: etam bhikkhave anavakāso yo parū- 
pakkamena Tathagatai jivita vorcpeyya, anupakkamena bhikkhave: 
Tathagata parinibbāyantīti*, — Tena kho pana samayena manussā 
pāsādesu pi hammiyesu pi chadanesu pi ārūļhā acchanti. Tattha ye | 
80 te manussā assaddhā appasannü dubbuddhino te evam ahathgu: ,abhi- 
rüpo vata bho mahāsamaņo nāgena vihethiyissatiti^. Ye pana te 
manussa saddhā pasannā pandità buddhimanto te evam ahamsu: ,ci- 
rassa vata bho ņāgo nāgena samgümessatiti" Atha kho- "Bhegavā 
Nalagirim hatthim mettena cittena phari Atha kho Nālāgīri hatthī. 
85 Bhagavato mettena cittena phuttho sondam oropetvā yena Bhagavā 
ten’ upasaīnkami, upasathkamitva Bhagavato purato atthāsi. Atha kho 


11 


Bhagavā dakkhinena hatthena Nālāgirissa hatthissa kumbhath parāma- 
santo Nālāgirim hatthim gāthāhi ajjhabhasi: : 
Ma kulijara nàgam asado, dukkham hi kuüjara nāga-m-āsado, 

na hi nāgahatassa kuijara sugati hoti ito param yato, 

Mā ca mado mā ca pāmado, na hi pamattā sugatim vajanti te, 5 
tvam iieva tathā karissasi yena tvam sugatim gamissasiti. 


Atha kho Nālāgiri hatthi sondaya Bhagavato pádapamsüni gahetvā 
upari muddhani &kiritva patikutito patisakki yāva Bhagavantam ad- 
dakkhi. Atha kho Nālāgiri hatthi hatthisalam gantva sake thane 
atthasi, tatha danto ca pana Nalagiri hatthī ahosi, Tena kho pana 10 
samayena manussā imam gatham gāyanti: | 


Danden' eke damayanti aūkusehi kasāhi ca 
adaņdena asatthena nāgo danto mahesinā ti. 


43. Buppgas Vistr to Cunna. 


pa 


Atha kho Bhagavā Bhoganagare yathābhirantam viharitvā āyas- 15 
manta Anandam āmantesi: „āyām” Ananda yena Pāvā ten’ upa- 
sarnkamissāmā* "ti, „Evah bhaate* ti kho dyasma Anando Bhaga- 
vato paccassosi. Atha kho Bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusamghena saddhim 
yena Pāvā tad avasari.. Tatra sudan Bhagava Pāvāyam viharati 
Cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane. Assosi kho Cundo kammāra- 20 
putto: „Bhagavā kira Pāvam anuppatto, Pavayam viharati mayham 
ambavane* ti. Atha kho Cundo kammāraputto yena Bhagava ten’ 
upasamkami, upasamkamitva Bhagavantam abhivadetva ekamantam 
nisīdi, ekamantam nisinnam kho Cundam kammaraputtam Bhagava 
dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahamsesi. 25 
Atha kho Cundo kammāraputto Bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya san- 
dassito Boris ty, samuttejito sampahamsito Bhagavantam etad avoca: 
„Adhivāsetu me "bhante 5 Bhagavā svatanáfa bhattam saddhim bhikkhu- 
saxmghena^ ‘ti. Adhivasesi Bhagavà tunhibhavena. Atha Cundo 
kammāraputto Bhagavato adhivisanam viditvā utthāyāsanā Bhaga- 80 
vantam abhivādetvā padakkhinam katvā pakkāmi. Atha kho Cundo 
Pāli Reader, 11 


.. T8 
kammüraputto tassi rattiya accayens sake nivesane „pēņītam khadaniyarh 
bhojaniyam - pātirādāpetvā p pahūtai ca suka amada huh Bhagavato 
kalath ārocāpesi: „kālo bhante, nitthitar bhattan“ "ti. ‘Atha kho Bha- 
ģavā. pubbanhasamayam nivāsetvā pattacivaram Adaya saddbirh bhik- 
5 khusahghena yena Cundassa kammiraputtassa nivesanam ten’. upa- 
samkami, upasamkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, nisajja kho Bhagava 
Cundam kammāraputtam āmantesi: „yan te Cunda sūkarāmāddavar 
patiyattam tena mam parivisa, yam pan’ aññam ‘khadaniyath. bhojani- 
yam patiyattam tena bhikkhusarighari parivisā* "ti, „Evai. bhante* 
10 ti kho Cundo kammāraputto Bhagavato patissūtvā yam ahosi sūkara- 
iaddavaru patiyattam tena Bhagavantam parivisi, yam pan” aññam 
khādaniyarn bhojaniyam patiyattam tena bhikkhusamgham parivisi. 
Atha kho Bhagavā Cundari kammāraputtam amantesi: „yan te Cunda 
siikaramaddavam avasittham tam sobbhe nikhanahi, nāhan tarh. Cunda 
15 passimi sadevake loke samarake sabrahmake sassamaņabrāhmaņiyā 
pajāya ‘sadevamanussaya yassa tam paribhuttam sammāpariņāmaii 
gaccheyya aūūatra Tathāgatassā* "ti; „Evam. bhante“ ti kho Cundo: 
kammāraputto Bhagavato patissutvā yam ahosi sükaramaddavam ava- 
sittham tam sobbhe nikhanitvà yena Bhagava ten’ upasarikami, upa- 
90 sathkamitva Bhagavantarh abhivādetvā ekamantazm nisidi, ekamantath 
nisinnam kho Cundam kammaraputtam Bhagavā dhammiyā. kathaya 
sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetva sampahamsetvā utthāyāsanā 
| + pakkami. Atha kho Bhagavato Cundassa kammāraputtasss bhattar 
l bhuttāvissa khāra. gia uppajji cages JIENU pabijis TO 
avihafiemāno. ir kho Bhagava ayasmantarh Anandam āmantesi:. 
„ājām' Ananda, yena Kusinārā ten’ upasamkamissama® 'ti, „Evam 
bhante* ti. kho āyasmā Anando Bhagavato pacoaion; 


 Cundassa bhattarn bhuijitva kammārassā. ti me sutat, 
80 ābādham samphusī dhiro pabāļbar māraņantikam. | 
Bhuttassa ca sukaramaddavena. vyādhi ppabāļhā udapādi Satthuno, | 
 viriccamüno Blagavā avoca: gacchām' aham Kusinārart nagaran ti. 


79 


V 44. Buppmas Dzaru. 
done va Da 
Atha kho Bhagavā āyasmantari Ānandar āmantesi: „p$ijā k kho 


pan’ Ananda tumhükal evam assa: ‘atitasatthukem | püvacanay m, 1 n 
atthi no sattba' ti, na kho pan' etam Ananda evarh datthabbarin, yo ) VO 
Ānanda mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito pažūdito 80 Vp: mam’ acca- 6 
yena, atthe, ° bid kho pan' Ananda etarahi bhikkhü aññamaññarh 
ārusovāden» samudācaranti na vo mam’ accayena evam samudā- 
caritabbam, theratarena Ananda bhikkhunā navakataro bhikkhu nā- 
mena va gottena v va āvusovādena va samudācaritabbo, navakatarena 
bhikkhun& therataro bhikkhu bharte ti và āyasmā ti và samudacari- 10 
tabbo. „Ak khamà ino Ánanda samgho mam' accayena khuddanu- 
| Phuddakani sikkhāpadāni samühantu. Channassa Ananda bhikkhuno 
mam’ accayena brahmaddndo- kātabbo" ti. ,Katamo pana bhante 
brahmadaņdo* ti. ,Channo Ananda bhikkhu yam iccheyya tam va- 
deyya, so bhikkhūhi n’ eva vattabbo na ovaditabbo na anusāsitabbo* 15 
ti. Atha kho Bhagavā bhikkhū Amantes: „siyā kho pana bhikkhave 
ekabhikkhussa pi kainkha va vinjati va Buddhe va dhamme va samghe 
va magge vă Patipadáya vā, pucchatha bhikkhave, mā pacchavippati- 
sārino 'ahuvattha: sanimuklībbūto n Satthā ahos, na mayar sak- 
khimha Bhagavantam sdmmukha patipucchitun" ti, Evmh vutte te 20 
bhikkhü tunhi ahesum. Dutiyam pi... tatiyam pi kho Bhagava 
bhikkhū āmantesi ... Tatiyam pi kho te bhikkha tuņhī ahesum. 
Atha kho Bhagavā while amantesi: ,siyà kho pana bhikkhave 
Satth-gžravenāpi na * puccheyyatha, sahāyako pi bhikkhave sahaya- 
kassa ürocetiü^ ti. Evam vutte te bhikkhü tunhi ahesum. Atha kho 25 
üyasmà Anando Bhagavantam etad avoca: ,acchariyam bhante, ab- 
bhutārā ‘phante, evarin pasahho a ahar bhante: imasmim bhikkhusathghe 
n’ atthi ekabhikkhussa pi kamkha và vimati va Buddhe va dhamme va 
samghe và | magge và P: tipadaya và^ ti. „Pasādā kho ‘ tram Ananda 
vadesi, fiánam eva ‘h*ettha Ananda Tathigatassa, n’ atthi imasmim 30 
bhikkhusamghe ekabhikkhusss pi kamkhà va vimati và Buddhe và 
 dhamme vā samghe và magge va t patipadays vü, imesam hi Ananda 
paücannam bhikkhusatānam ye gicchimako | bhikkhu so sotāpanno avini- . 


pātadhammo  nigato. sambodhiparā o“ ti. Atha kho. Bhagavà ü 
[o st ro by fc stie AMA. Whe 


) 


~ 


80 
| hn! 
bhikkhu āmantesļ: „handa dēni bhikkhave āmenfējāmi yo: vaya- 
yo camma P Sears, "avpdmádina sampadetha® "ti, aan ba ägatassa 
pacchimā vācā. Atha kho Bhagava pathamajjhadaya samāpajji, jetla- 
majjhānā vutthahitvā dutiyajjhānam .. Pur seems CORN DR: 
5 nam samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vutthahitva (kaa aya aa 'ka sam 
pajji, skasanañcayatanasamapattiya vutthahitvā viññknañeayalan o 
samapajji, viliidnaiicayatanasamapattiya vutthahitvā ākiūcatāgatāna 


me me m ap o m 


ae maps, akiücanfüayatanasamàpattiyà vutthahitvà nevasañňánäsañňā- 
a yatana samāpajji, nevasaññanasaññayatanasamapattiyá vutthahitva 
,10 saitūāvedayitanrodlisi samüpajj. Atha kho āyasmā Anando āyas- 
mantai Anuruddham etad avoca: „parinibbuto bhante Anuruddha Bha- 
gavā“ ti. „Nu avuso Ananda Bhagavā parinibbuto, saūiāvedayitani- 
rodhai samāpanno* ti. Atha kho Bhagava saiūāvedayitanīrodha- 
samāpattiyā vutthahitva nevasaüianasaniayatanam ... akiñcaññayatanam 
15... viūūiāņaūcāyatanam . . . ākāsānaūcāyatanam . . . catutthajjhānam 
. tatiyajjhānam . . . dutiyajjhànam . . . pathamajJhanam samāpajji,| 
pathamajjhana vutthahitvā dutiyajjhānam . . . tatiyajjhanam . . . ca- 
tutthajjhānarm samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vutghakibvā samanantara Bha- 
gava parinibbāyi. Parinibbute Bhagavati saha parinibbātā mahābhū- 
20 micālo ahosi bhirsanako lomahatiso! devadundubhiyo ca phaliihsu, 
Parinibbute Bhagavati saha parinibbānā Brahma Sahampati imam 


gatham abhasi: l 
Sabbe va nikkhipissanti bhūtā loke samussayarh, ` 
ee yatha etādiso satthā loke áppatipuggalo 
ri Tathagato balappatto sambuddho parinibbuto ti. 


Parinibbute Bhagavati saha parinibbānā Sakko devānam indo imam 
gātham AME | 
Aniečā „rata samkhara ' uppadavayadhammino, : 


uppajjit itvà ` mrüjjhanli, tesam vüpasamo *sukho ti. 


80 Parinibbute Bhagavati saha parinbbānā āyasmā Anuruddho imā gā- 
thayo abhasi: 


Di assiisapassdeo {hitacittassa tādiņ šā 
da Ay M, mÈ ` 
anejo antim [s bbs ga gar ķālam a cart muni, 
Asallinena ‘cittena vedi ‘avai, 


a pajjotasskva 1 nibbānam vinokķē cétaso * tā i “th 


81 


Parinibbute Bhagavati saha parinibbānā āyasmā Anando imam ga- 
tham abhāsi: . 
Tadási yam bhimsanakam tadāsi lomahamsanam 
sabbākārayarūpete Sambuddhe parinibbute ti. 


T [ott 


Namo TASSA BHAGAVATO ÁRAHATO ŠAMMĀSAMBUDDHASSA, 


45. Tas Tex Preozprs, 


Atha. kho Bhagavā Kapilavatthusmim yathābhirantam viharitva 
yena Savatthi tena cārikam pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikam caramāno 
yena Savatthi tad avasari. Tatra sudam Bhagavā Savatthiyam viharati 
Jetavane Anathapindikassa ārāme. Tena kho pana samayena āyas- 10 
mato Sariputtassa upatthakakulam āyasmato Sariputtassa santike dāra- 
kam pāhesi „imam darakam thero pabbājetū" ‘ti. Atha kho āyas- 
mato Sāriputtassa etad ahosi: „Bhagavatā sikkhapadam paūūattam 
‘na ekena dve sāmaņerā upatthapetabba’ ti, ayañ ca me Rahulo sa- 
manero, katham nu kho maya patipajjitabban" ti. Bhagavato etam 15 
attham ārocesi. „Anujānāmi bhikkhave vyattena bhikkhunā patibalena 
ekena dve sümanere upatthapetum, yāvatake và pana ussahati ova- 
ditum anusasitum tāvatake upatthüpetun" ti. Atha kho sāmaņerānam 
etad ahosi: „Kati nu kho amhakam sikkhāpadāni, kattha ca amhehi 
sikkhitabban* ti. Bhagavato etam attham ārocesum.  ,Anujanàmi 90 
bhikkhave sāmanerānam dasa sikkhāpadāni tesu ca sāmaņerehi sik- 
khitum: pāņātipātā yeramani, adinnādānā veramani, abrahmacariyā 
veramani, musāvādā veramani, surāmerayamajjapamādatthānā vera- 
mani, vikālabhojanā veramani, naccagītavāditavisīkadassanā veramaņī, 
mālāgandhavilepanadhāraņamandanavibhūsanatthānā veramani, ucca- 95 
sayanamahasayana veramaņī, jātarūparajatapatiggahaņā veramani. 
Anujānāmi bhikkhave sāmaņerānam imáni'dasa sikkhāpadāni, imesu 
ca sümanerehi. sikkhivin* ti. ` 


82. 


46. Tuz 32 Parts or run Bony. 


Atthi imasmim kaye kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco mathsam na- 
hāru atthi atthimiñja vakkem hadayam yakanam kilomakam pihakari 
papphāsam antam antagunaim udariyam karisam pittam semham pubbo 

5 lohitam sedo medo assu vasa kheļo sifighanika lasikā muttath matthake 
matthalungam.  Dvattimsakaram. z 


47. Tus Novices Quzsrions. 


Ekan nama kim. Sabbe sattā āhāratthitikā. — Dve nama kin. 
Namafi ca rüpaü ca. — Tini nama kim. Tisso vedanā. — Cattāri 
10 nāma kim. Cattāri ariyasaccāni. — Pajica nāma kim. Paño’ upada- 
nakkhandha. — Cha nama kim. Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. — Satta 
nama kim. Satta bojjhaūgā. — Attha nama kim. Ariyo atthaūgiko 
maggo. — Nava nama kim. Nava sattāvāsā. -- Dasa nama kin. 
Dasah' aügehi samannagato arahā ti vuccati. Kumarapañham. 


1 — 48. Tae Doris or a Porm. 


Saddhiviharikena bhikkhave upajjayamhi sammavattitabbam, ta- 
tráyam sammāvattanā: kālass' eva utfhàya up&hanà omuficitvà ekam- 
sam uttarasafigam karitvā dantakattham dātabbarh, mukhodakam dā- 
tabbam, āsanam paüiüapetabbam. Sace yāgu hoti bhajanam dhovitva 

20 jāgu upanāmetabbā. Yagum pitassa udakam datvā bhājanam pa- 
tiggahetvā nicam katvā sādhukam aparighamsantena dhovitvā pati- 
sāmetabbari. Upajjbàyamhi.vutthite àsanam uddharitabham. Sace so 
deso uklapo hoti so deso sammajjitabbo. Sace upajjhāyo gamath pa- 

— visitukàmo hoti nivüsanam databbam, patinivüsanam patiggahetabbam, 

96 kayabandhanam databbam, saguņar katva samghatiyo dātabbā, dho- 
vitvā patto saudako dātabbo. Sace upajjhāyo pacchāsamaņarh ākarb- 
khati timaņdalam paticehādentena parimapdalam nivasetva kāyaban= 
dhanam bandhitvā sagunam katvā samghütiyo pārupitvā ganthikarh | 


patimudcitvé dhovitva pattam gahetvā upajjhāyassa »pacohāsamaņena 
hotabbam. Nātidūre gantabbam, na accāsanne gantabbam, pattapariyā- 
pannam patiggahetabbam. Na upajjhüyassa bhaņamānassa antarantarā 
kathā opātetabbā, upajjhāyo āpattisāmantā bhanamano nivāretabbo. 
Nivattantena pathamataram āgantvā àsanam paüüüpetabbam, pādo- 5 
dakam pādapītham pādakathalikam upanikkhipitabbam, paccuggantvā 
pattacivaram patiggahetabbam, patinivāsanam dàtabbam, nivüsanam 
patiggahetabbam. Sace cīvaram sinnam hoti muhuttam unhe otāpe- 
tabbar, na ca unhe civaram nidahitabbam. Cīvaram samharitabbam, 
civaram sambarantena caturaügulam kannar. ussāretvā civaram sam- 10 
haritabbam, mā majjhe bhaūgo ahositi, obhoge küyabandhanam ‘ka- 
tabbam. Sace piņdapāto hoti upajjhāyo ca bhuūjitukāmo hoti udakam 
datvā piņdapāto upanāmetabbo.  Upajjhāyo pāniyena pucchitabbo, 
Bhuttāvissa udakam datvā pattam patiggahetva nicam katvā sādhu- 
kam aparighamsantena dhovitvā vodakam katvā muhuttam unhe otāpe- 15 
tabbo, na ca unhe patto nidahitabbo. Pattacivaram nikkhipitabbam, 
pattam nikkhipantena ekena hatthena pattarn gahetvā ekena hatthena 
hetthāmaūcar va hetthapitham va parāmasitvā patto nikkhipitabbo, 
na ca anantarahitàya bhumiyà patto nikkhipitabbo. Civaram nikkhi- 
pantena ekena hatthena civaram gahetvā ekena hatthena civaravam- 20 
sam và civararajjum va pamajjitva pārato antam orato bhogam katvā 
civaram nikkhipitabbam, Upajjhayamhi vutthite āsanam uddharitabbam, 
padodakath pādapītharn pādakathalikam patisametabbam, sace so deso 
uklāpo hoti so deso sammajjitabbo. Sace upajjhayo nahāyitukāmo . 
hoti nahānam patiyadetabbam, sace sitena attho hoti sitam pati- 25 
yadetabbam, sace unhena attho hoti unham patiyādetabbam. Sace 
upajjhāyo jantāghararh pavisitukāmo  hoti cunnam sannetabbam, 
mattikā temetabbā, jantāgharapītbari ādāya upajjhāyassa pitthito 
pitthito gantvā jantügharapitham datva civaram patiggahetva ekam- 
anter nikkhipitabbam, cuņņam databbam, mattika dātabbā. Sace 30 
ussahati jantāgharam pavisitabbam, jantigharam pavisantena mattikāya 
mukham makkhetvā purato ca pacchato ca paticchadetva jantagharam 
pavisitabbam. . Na there bhikkhū anupakhajja nisiditabbarh, na navà 
bhikkhū  āsanena patibahetabba. Jantāghare "uppajjhāyassa parikam- 
math kātabbar, jantāgharā nikkhamantena jantagharapitham ādāya 85 
purato ca ‘pacchato ca paticchadetva jantāgharā nikkhamitabbam. 


84 


Udake pi upajjhāyassa parikammam k&tabbam, nabātena pathama- 
tarai uttaritvā attano gattam vodakar katvā nivāsetvā upajjhayassa 
gattato udaka pamajjitabbam, nivāsanam dātabbari, samghati. dā- 
tabba, jantagharapitham ādāya pathamatararit āgantvā dsanam paūūā- 
5 petabbam, padodakam padapitham padakathalikam upanikkhipitabbam, 
upajjhāyo paniyena pucchitabbo. Sace uddisāpetukāmo hoti uddisā- 
petabbo, sace paripucchitukamo hoti paripucchitabbo. Yasmirm vihāre 
upajjhāyo viharati sace so vihāro uklāpo hoti sace ussahati sodhe- 
tabbo, vihārarn. sodhentena pathamam pattacivaram nīharitvā ekam- 
10 antah nikkhipitabbam, nisidanapaccattharanam nīharitvā. ekamantam 
. nikkhipitabbam. Maūco nicam katvā sādhukar aparigharhsantena 
asamghattantena kavatapittham nīharitvā ekamantam nikkhipitabbo. 
Pitha nicam katvā sādhukam aparighamsantena asamghatfantena 
kavātapittham nīharitvā ekamantar nikkhipitabbam. Maūcapatipādakā 
16 niharitvà ekamantam nikkhipitabba, khelamallako niharitva ekamantam 
nikkhipitabbo, apassenaphalakam niharitvà ekamantam nikkhipitabbam, 
bhummattharanam yathapafifiattam sallakkhetva niharitva ekamantam 
nikkhipitabbam. Sace vihāre santānakam hoti ullokā pathamam ohā- 
retabbam, ālokasandhikanņabhāgā pamajjitabbā. Sace gerukapari- 
20 kammakata bhitti kannakita hoti coļakarh temetvā piletva pamajjitabba, 
sace kāļavaņņakatā bhümi kaņnakitā hoti colakam temetvā piletva 
pamajjitabbā, sace akatā hoti bhümi udakena paripphositva sammajji- 
tabbā, mā viharo rajena ühanniti Samkaram vicinitvā ekamantam 
chaddetabbam. | 


25 49. A Tare or A Pura. 


‘Kayo te sabbasovanno’ ti, Idam Satthari Rajagaham upanissaya 
Veluvane Kalandakanivape viharante aiifiataram sukaramukhapetam 
ārabbha vuttam. Atite kira Kassapassa Bhagavato sasane eko bhikkhu 
kāyena saūiiato ahosi, vācāya asaūūato bhikkhū akkosati paribhāsati. 

80 So kālam katvā niraye nibbatto. Ekar buddhantaram tattha pacitvā 
tató cavitvā imasmim buddhuppāde Rajagahasamipe Gijjhaküte pab- 
batapāde tass’ eva kammassa vipākavasena khuppipāsābhibhūto peto 
hutvā nibbatti. Tassa kayo suvannavanno ahosi, mukharh sūkaramu- 
khasadisam. Ath’ āyasmā Nārado Gijjhakūtapabbate vasanto pāto va 


85 


sarirapatijagganam katvā pattacivaram c' ādāja Rajagaham pinda- 
cāratthāya gacchanto antarāmagge tam petam disvā tena katakammar 
pucchanto gātham āha: 


Kāyo te sabbasovanno sabbā obhāsate disā, 
mukhan te sükarass' eva, kirh kammam akarī pure ti. 5 


[Tattha „kāyo te sabbasovanno" ti tava kayo deho sabbo suvanna- 
vanno uttattakanakasannibho, „sabbā obhāsate disā“ ti tassa pabhāya 
sabbā pi disā samantato pabhāsati vijjotati, obhāsate ti vā antogadha- 
hetu-attham idah padan ti te kayo sabbasovanno sabbā disā obhāseti 
vijjotetiti attho datthabbo, „mukhan te sükarass' eva^ 'ti mukham 10 
pana te sükarassa viya stkaramukhasadisam tava mukhan ti attho, 
„kin kammam akari pure“ ti tvam pubbe atitajatiyam kidisam kam- 
mam akasiti pucchati]. Evam so therena pana peto katakammari 
puttho gathaya vissajjento : | 


Kāyena saüiüato asim, vācāyāsim asaüiato, 15 
tena me tādiso vanno yatha passasi Narada 'ti 


aha. [Tattha „kāyena saūūato asin“ ti kāyikena saūūamena saüiato 
küyikena sathvarena samvuto ahosim, „vācāyāsim asaiifiato“ ti vā- 
casikena asamvarena samannāgato ahosim, „tenā“ ‘ti tena ubhayena 
saüüamena ca, „me“ ti mayham, „tādiso vanno“ ti etādiso yathà tvam 20 
Narada pacčākkhato passasi evarüpo kayena manussasaņthāno su- 
vannavanno mukhena sūkarasadiso āsin ti yojanā, vannasaddo hi idha 
chavisanthane va datthabbo]. Evam peto therena pucchito tam attham 
vissajjetvà tam eva küranam katvā therassa ovadam dento gatham aha: 


Tan t' dham Narada brümi: sàmam dittham idan taya, 25 
mākāsi mukhasā papam, mā [kho] sükaramukho ahū 'ti. 


[Tattha „tan“ ti tasmā, ,t &han" ti te ahar, ,Narada" 'ti theram 
ālapati, ,brümiti^ kathemi, „sāman* ti sayam eva, „idan“ ti attano 
sariram sandhaya vadati, ayar h' ettha attho: yasma bhante Narada 
idah mama sariram galato patthaya hetthà manussasanthünam upari 30 
sükarasanthànam tayā paccakkhato tava dittham tasmā te aham ova- 
davasena vadāmi, kim idan ti ce ti dha: „mākāsi mukhasā pāpam, 
mā kho sükaramukho ahi“ ’ti, tattha „mā“ ti patisedhe nipāto „mu- 
khas&^ ti mukhena, „kho“ ti avadhüranam, vācāya pāpakammam mā 


Pāli Reader. 12 


86 


akāsi mā karohi mā kho sükaramukho ahū ‘ti, aham vija sükers- 
mukho ahosi yeva, sace pana tvam mukharo hutvā vācāya pāpam 
kareyyāsi ekamsena sükaramukho bhaveyyāsi, tasmā mākāsi mukhasā 
papan ti phalapatisedhanamukhena pi hetum eva patisedheti]. Ath’ 
5 ājasmā Narado Rajagahe piņdāya caritva pacchābhattar pindapata- 
patikkanto catuparisamajjhe nisinnassa Satthuno tam attharh ārocesi. 
Satthā „Nārada, pubbe va mayá so satto dittho" ti vatvā anekā- 
kāravokātat vacīduccaritasannissitari ādīnavaih vacīsucaritapatisari- 
yuttam ānisarnsar pakāsento dhammam desesi. Sa desanā sampatta- | 
10 parisāya sātthikā, ahosi. Sükarapetavatthuvannan&. | 


50. Tuz Lzaxb or tan Weaver's DAUGTHER. 


‘Andhabhito’ ti imam dhammadesanam Sattha Aggalave cetiye 
viharanto ekam pesakāradhītaram ārabbha kathesi. Hkadivasam hi 
Āļavivāsino Satthari Alavith anuppatte nimantetva dānam adainsu. 

15 Satthā bhattakiccāvasāne anumodanam karonto ,&ddhuvam jīvitam, 
dhuvari maranath, avassam maya maritabbam, maraņapariyosānaim me 
jivitam, jivitam eva aniyatarh, maranam niyatan ti evam maranasatim 
bhavetha, yesaü hi maranasati abhāvitā te pacchime kale āsīvisam 
disvā bhitapuriso viya santasappatta bheravaravam ravantā kālam ka- 

20 ronti, yesam pana maranasati bhāvitā te dūrato va āsīvisam disvā 
daņdakena gahetvā. chaddetvā thitapuriso viya pacchime kāle na san- 
tasanti, tasmā maranasati bhāvetabbā" ti aha. Tam dhammadesanam 
sutvā avasesa jana sakiccappasuta va ahesum, ekā pana solasavassud- 
desikā pesakāradhītā „aho Buddhànam kathā nama acchariy&, may& 

25 maranasatim bhāveturh vattatiti* rattindivam maranasatim eva bha vesi, 
Satthā pi tato nikkhamitvà Jetavanam agamāsi, Sā pi kumārikā tini 
vassāni maranasatim bhāvesi yeva. Ath’ ekadivasam Satthā pacctisa- 
samaye lokam olokento tam kumārikara attano fiāņajālassa anto pa». 
vittham disvà „kin nu kho. bhavissatīti* upadhürento "maya kum&- 

80 rikàya . mama dhammadeeanarà sutadivasato patthaya tīņi  vassüni 
maranasati bhāvitā, idan’ šham tattha gantvā imam kumārikari. 
cattāro  paūhe pucchitva taya vissajjentijā va catüsu thānesu sādhu- 


87 


karam. datvā imam gatham bhāsissāmi, sā gāthāvasāne sotāpatti- 
phale patitthahissati, tam nissāya mahājanassa pi sātthikā desanā 
bhavissatiti" iiatva paiicasatabhikkhuparivaro Jetavanā nikkha- 
mitvā anupubbena Aggāļavavihārai agamāsi. Āļavivāsino „Satthā 
gato" ti sutva vihāram gantva nimantayimsu. Sa pi kumārikā Satthu 5 
āgamanam sutvà „āgato kira mayham pitā sami àcariyo punnacanda- 
mukho mahā-Gotamabuddho* ti tutthamānasā „ito me tinnam sam- 
vaccharanam matthake suvannavanno Sattha ditthapubbo, idāni 'ssa 
suvannavannam sariram datthur: madhuraū ca varadhammam sotum 
labhissamiti^ cintesi. Pita pan’ assà salam gacchanto aha: „amma, 10 
parasantako me satako āropito, tassa vidatthimattaih anitthitam, tam ajja 
nitthapessimi, sigham eva tasaram vaddhetva ahareyyasiti*. Sa cintesi: 
„abam Satthu dhammam sotukāmā, pita mam evam aha, kin nu kho 
Satthu dhammazh suņāmi, pitu tasararh vaddhetva haramiti*. Ath’ assā 
etad ahosi: „pitā mam tasare anahariyamane potheyyāpi pamareyyápi, 15 
tasmā tasaram vaddhetva tassa datvā pacchā dhammam sossāmiti" pi- 
thake nisiditva tasaram vaddhesi. Āļavivāsino pi Satthārai parivisitvā 
pattam gahetva anumodanatthaya atthamsu, Sattha „yam aham kuladhi- 
taram niss&ya timsayojanamaggam agato sā ajja pi okāsar na labhati, 
taya okāse laddhe anumodanam karissamíti^ tunhibhuto nisidi. Evam 99. 
tunhibhütam pana Sattharam sadevake loke koci kiüci vattum na vi- 
sahati. Šā pi kho kumārikā tasaram vaddhetva pacchiyam thapetva 
pitu santikam gacchamana parisapariyantam patva Sattharam oloka- 
yamānā va agamāsi. Satthā pi givam ukkhipitva tam olokesi. Sa _ 
olokitākārenēva aūiāsi: „Satthā evarūpāyam parisayam nisīditvā mam 25 
olokento mamágamanam paccasimsati, attano santikam āgamanam eva 
paccisimsatiti*. Sa tasarapacchim thapetvā Satthu santikam agamāsi. 
Kasmā pana tam Satthā olokesiti- Evam kir’ assa ahosi: „esā etto 
gacchamānā  puthujjanakalakiriyam katvā aniyatagatika bhavissati, 
mama santikam āgantvā gacchamana pana sotapattiphalam patvā ni- 30 
yatagatikā hutvā Tusitavimane nibbattissatiti"^, Tassa kira tam diva- 
sam maranato mutti nama n’ atthi. Sa olokitasaünanenéva Sattharam 
upasamkamitvà cbabbaņņānam ramsinam antaram pavisitva vanditva 
ekamantam atthasi, tathārūpāya parisaya majjhe nisīditvā tunhibhutam 
Satth&ram vanditvà thitakkhane yeva tam aha: „kumārike, kuto agaccha- 35 
siti“, „Na jānāmi bhante“ ti. „Kattha gamissasiti^. „Na jānāmi bhante* 


88 
ti. „Na janasiti^. „Jānāmi bhante* ti. ,Jünasiti^. „Na jānāmi 
bhante* ti. Iti nam Satthā cattāro paühe pucchi, mahājano ujjhayi: 
,hambho passatha, ayam pesakāradhītā Sammasambuddhena saddbim 
iechiticchitam katheti, kim nama na imāya ‘kuto āgatāsiti” vutte ‘pesa- 
6 kāragehato” ti vattabbam, ‘kaham gacchasiti’ vutte ‘pesakdrasalan’ ti 
vattabbam siya“ ti. Sattha mahājanam nissaddam katvā „kumārike, 
tvam ‘kuto agacchasiti’ putthà kasmā ‘na janamiti’ vadasiti^ pucchi. 
,Bhante, tumhe mama pesakāragehato āgatabhāvam janatha, ‘kuto 
agatasiti’ pucchanta pana ‘kuto agantva idha nibbattāsiti” pucchatha, 
10 aham pana na jānāmi kuto āgantvā idha nibbatt’ amhiti^. Ath’ 
assā Sattha: „sādhu sadhu kumārike maya pucchitapaüho va tayā 
vissajjito* ti sādhukāram datvā uttarim pi pucchi: ,'kattha gamissa- 
siti puttha kasmā ‘na jānāmit” vadesiti*. „Bhante, tumhe mam 
‘tasarapacchim gahetvā pesakārasālam gacchasiti’ janatha, ‘ito pana 
15 gantvà kattha nibbattissasiti’ pucchatha, ahaū ca ito cuta na jānāmi 
kattha gantva nibbattissāmiti'. Ath’ assā Sattha: „mayā pucchita- 
patho yeva tayā vissajjito* ti dutiyam pi sādhukāram datva uttarim 
pucchi: „atha kasma ‘na jānāsiti puttha ‘janamiti’ vadesiti'. , Bhante, 
mama maranabhavam janami, tasmā evam vademiti^. Ath’ assa 
90 Satthà: ,pucchitapaüho yeva taya vissajjto^ ti sādhukāram datva 
uttarim pi pucchi: „atha kasma ‘janasiti’ vutte ‘na janamiti’ vadesiti". 
„Maraņabhāvam eva aham janàmi bhante, mama rattindivampubban- 
hādisu pana tasukakāle nàma marissāmiti” na jānāmi, tasma evar 
vadesin* ti. Ath’ assā Sattha: „mayā pucchitapaüho yeva taya ka- 
25 thito^ ti catuttham sādhukāram datvā parisam amantesi: „ettakā 
nama tumhe imāya kathitam na jānātha, kevalam ujjhayath' eva, yesaū 
hi paūiācakkhum n’ atthi te andhā eva, yesam panüüacakkhum atthi 
te eva cakkhumanto" ti vatvà imam gātham aha: 


Andhabhūto ayam loko, tanuk’ ettha vipassati, 
80 sakunto jālamutto va appo saggāya gacchatiti. 


[Tattha ,ayam loko“ ti ayam lokamahājano paūūācakkhuno abhavena 
andhabhūto. ,tanuk’ etthā" 'ti tanuko ettha na bahujano aniccādiva- 
sena vipassati, „sakunto jālamutto vā“ 'ti yatha chekena sakunikena 
jālena ottharitvā gayhamanakesu vattakesu kocid eva jalato muccati sesā 
85 antojālam eva pavisanti tathā Māra-jālena otthatesu sattesu bahū apāya- 


89 


gāmino honti, „appo“ kocid eva satto ,saggaya gacchati^ sugatim vā 
nibbanam và pāpuņātiti attho]. Desanāvasāne sā kumārikā sotāpatti- 
phale patitthahi, mahājanassāpi sātthikā desanā ahositi. Sa pi tasara- 
pacchim gahetva pitu santikarh agamāsi. So pi nisinnako va niddayi, 
tassā asallakkhetvā va tasarapacchith upandmentiya tasarapacchi ve- 8 
makofiyam patihaūīitvā saddam kurumānā pati. So pabujjhitvā ga- 
hitanimitten’ eva vemam kaddhi, vemakoti gantvā tam kumarikam ure 
pahari, sā tatth” eva kālam katvā papatā. Ath’ assā pita nam olokento 
sakalasarirena lohitamakkhitena patitvà mata addasa. Ath’ assa 
mahasoko uppajji, so „na me sokam añño nibbapetum sakkhissatiti^ 10 
rodanto Satthu santikam gantvā tam attham ārocetvā ,bhante, 80- 
kam me nibbapetha“ ‘ti aha. Satthā tam samassāsetvā „mā soci, 
anamataggasmim hi samsāre tava evam eva dhitu maranakale paggha- 
ritam assum catunnam samuddànam udakato adhikataran* ti vatva 
anamataggakatham kathesi. So tanubhūtasoko Sattharam pabbajjam 15 
yācitvā laddhapabbajjūpasampado na cirass’ eva arahattam papuniti. 
Pesakāradhītāya vatthum. 


51. Tas Quxstions or Ūrrīva. 


Atha kho Uttiyo paribbājako yena Bhagavā ten’ upasamkami, 
upasamkamitva Bhagavatà saddhizh sammodi, sammodaniyam katham 20 
sārāņīyar vītisāretvā ekamantam  nisidi Ekamantam nisinno kho 
Uttiyo paribbajako Bhagavantam etad avoca: ,kin nu kho bho Gotama 
sassato loko, idam eva saccam, mogham aññan“ ti. ,Avyakatath kho 
etam Uttiya maya: sassato loko, idam eva saccam, mogham añňan“ 
ti. „Kirh pana bho Gotama asassato loko, idam eva saccam, mogham 26 
aññan“ ti. „Etam pi kho Uttiya avyakatam maya: asassato loko, 
idam eva saccam, mogham aññan“ ti. „Kin nu kho bho Gotama 
antavà loko . . . anantava loko . . . tam jivam tam sariram .. . añ- 
ñam jivam aüüam sariram . . . hoti Tathāgato parammarana . . . na 
hoti Tathāgato parammaraņā . . . hoti ca na ca hoti . . . w eva hoti 80 
na na hoti 'lathāgato parammarana, idam eva saccam, mogham aūāan" 


90 


ti. „Etam pi kho Uttiya avyakatam maya: n’ eva hoti na na hoti 
Tathāgato parammaraņā, idam eva saccan, mogham aññan“ ti. ,'Kin 
nu kho bho Gotama sassato loko, idam eva saccam, mogham aññan' 
ti iti puttho samāno ‘avyakatam kho etam Uttiya maya: sassato 
6 loko, idam eva saccam, mogham aūūan ’ti vadesi. ‘Kim pana bho 
Gotama asassato loko, idam eva saccam, mogham aüüan' ti iti puttho 
samano 'etam pi kho Uttiya avyakatam maya: asassato loko, idam eva 
saccam, mogham aūūan' ti vadesi. ‘Kin nu kho bho Gotama antava 

. loko ... anantavā loko ... tam jivam tam sariram... aññam 
10 jīvam aññam sariram . . . hoti Tathagato parammaraņā . . . na hoti 
Tathāgato parammaraņā . . . hoti ca na ca hoti Tathagato paramma- 
rani .. . n’ eva hoti na na hoti Tathagato parammarana, idam eva 
saccam, mogham aiiüian' ti iti puttho samano ‘etam pi kho Uttiya 
avyjākatam mayā: n' eva hoti na na hoti Tathāgato parammaraņā, 
16 idam eva saccam, mogham aññan’ ti vadesi. Atha kiñ carahi bhota 
Gotamena vyàkatan^ ti. „Abhiñňāya kho aham Uttiya sāvakānarm 
dhammam desemi sattānam visuddhiyā sokaparidevānam samatikkamaya 
dukkhadomanassānam atthaūgamāya ñayassa adhigamaya nibbānassa 
sacchikiriyājā" ‘ti. „Yam pan’ etam bhavam Gotamo abhiüüüya 
20 dhammam desesi sattānam visuddhiyā sokaparidevànam samatikkamàya . 
dukkhadomanassānam atthaīgamāya ūāyassa adhigamāya nibbünassa 
sacchikiriyaya, sabbo ca tena loko niyyissati upaddho va tibbāgo vā“ 
ti. Evam vutte Bhagavā tunhi-ahosi. Atha kho āyasmato Anandassa 
etad ahosi: „mā h' evam kho Uttiyo paribbājako papakam ditthi- 
25 gatar patilabhati: 'sabbasamukkamsikam vata me samano Gotamo 
paüham puttho samsadeti no vissajjeti, na nüna visahatiti’, tad assa 
Uttiyassa paribbüjakassa digharattam ahitāya dukkhāyā" 'ti. Atha 
kho āyasmā Anando Uttiyam paribbajakam etad avoca: „Tena h' 
āvuso Uttiya upaman te karissāmi, upamāyam idh’ ekacce viliüü pu- 
80 risà bhāsitassa attham ājānanti. Seyyathā pi āvuso Uttiya raūfio 
paccantimari nagaram dalhuddapam daļhapākāratoraņam el.advārar. 
Tatr’ assa dovāriko paņdito vyatto medhavi aüüütünam nivāretā šā-. 
tünam pavesetā, so tassa nagarassa samanta anupariyayapatham anuk- 
 kamamüno na passeyya pakdrasandhim và püküravivaram vā antamaso 
85 bilaranissakkanamattam pi, no ca khv’ āssa evam üünam hoti: 'ettakā 
pind imam nagararh pavisanti và nikkhamanti vā’ ti, atha khy" šasa.. 


91 


evam ettha hoti: ‘ye kho keci olàrik& pāņā imam nagaram pavisanti 
vā nikkhamanti và sabbe te iminā dvārena pavisanti 'vā nikkhamanti 
va’ ti." Evam eva kho āvuso Uttiya na Tathāgatassa evam ussukam 
hoti: ‘sabbo vā tena loko niyyissati upaddho va tibhāgo. va’ ti, atha - 
kho evam ettha Tathāgatassa hoti: ‘ye kho keci lokamha niyyimsu 5 
và niyyanti và niyyissanti và sabbe te paūca nivarane pahāya cetaso 
upakkilese paiifiaya dubbalikarane cātūsu satipatthānesu supatitthita- 
città satta bojjhafige yathābhūtam bhāvetvā evam ete lokamha niy- 
yimsu va niyyanti va niyyissanti va’ ti. Yad eva kho tvam āvuso 
Uttiya Bhagavantam pañham apucchi tad eva tam paūhar Bhaga- 10 
vantam ajifiena pariyayena apucchi. Tasmā te tam Bhagavā na 
vyākāsiti", 

. [Paücame: ,tunbi ahositi^ sattūpaladdhiyam thatva apuccham 
pucchatiti tunhi ahosi, ‘sabbasimukkamsikam vata maya sabbapuccha- 
nam uttamam puccharn pucchito samano Gotamo samsadeti no vis- 15 
sajjeti, nanu na sakkā vissajjetun’ ti evam papikam ditthirh mā pati- 
labhatiti, „tad assā* 'ti tam evam uppannaditthigatam bhaveyya, „pac- 
cantiman^ ti yasmà majjhimadese nagarassa uddāpādīni thirāni và 
honti dubbalani va sabbaso va pana tesam pakaro na hoti tasmā tam 
agahetva paccantimam nagaran ti aha, „daļhuddāpan* ti thirapākāra- 20 
padam, ,dalhapákáratoranan" ti thirapākārai c’ eva thirapitthasam- 
ghatakaii ca, „ekadvāran* ti kasmā aha, bahudvarasmim hi nagare bahūhi 
panditadovarikehi bhavitabbam, ekadvare eko va vattati, Tathagatassa 
ca paññaya añño sadiso n’ atthi, tasmā sutthu panditabhavassa opam- 
mattham ekam yeva dovarikam dassetum ekadvaran ti aha, „paņdito* 25 
ti pandiccena samannāgato, „vyatto” ti veyyattiyena samannagato, 
„medhāviti” thanuppattiya paññasamkhataya medhaya samannāgato, 
„anupariyāyapathan* ti anupariyàyanàmakam maggam, „pākārasan- 
dhin* ti dvinnami itthakanam apagatatthānam, „pākāravivaran* ti pā- 
kārassa chinnatthānam, „tad eva tam paūhan* ti tam yeva sassato 80 
loko ti Eñinë nayena puttham thapaniyam pañham puna pi pucchi, 
„sābbo ca tena loko" ti sattiipaladdhiyam yeva thatva aiüen&karena . 
pucchatiti dasseti]. | 


92 


52. BuppHa's Instavorion To MĀLUKKYĀPOTTA. 


„Yo kho Māluūkyāputta evam vadeyya: ‘na tàváham Bhagavati 
brahmacariyam carissimi yāva me Bhagavā na vyākarissati: sassato 
loko ti vā asassato loko ti vā...pe...n' eva hoti na na hoti Tathā- 

6 gato parammaraņā ti va’ ti, avyākatam eva tam Māluūkyāputta Ta- 
thagatena assa, atha so puggalo kālam kareyya. Seyyatha pi Malui- 
kyāputta puriso sallena viddho assa savisena gāļhapalepanena, tassa 
mittāmaccā iātisālohitā bhisakkam sallakattam upatthapeyyum, so 
evam vadeyya: ‘na taviham imam sallam aharissami yāva na tam 

10 purisam jànàmi yen’ amhi viddho: khattiyo và brahmano và vesso va 
suddo va’ ti, so evam vadeyya: ‘na tavaham imam sallam āharissāmi 
yava na tam purisam janami yen’ amhi viddho: evamnamo evamgotto 
iti và... digho và rasso và majjhimo va... kalo và samo và maūgu- 
racchavi và ..asukasmim game va nigame và nagare vā... yava na 

15 tam dhanum jānāmi yen’ amhi viddho yadi va capo yadi va kodando . . ., 
yava na tam jiyam jānāmi yay’ amhi viddho yadi va akkassa yadi 
va santhassa yadi va naharussa yadi va maruvaya yadi va khirapan- 
nino..., yava na tam kandam janami yen’ amhi viddho yadi va kac- 
cham yadi vā ropimam...yassa pattehi vajitam yadi va gijjhassa yadi 

20 và kaükassa yadi và kulalassa yadi và morassa yadi va sithilahanuno 
„..yassa nahārunā parikkhittam yadi va gavassa yadi và mahisassa yadi 
va roruvassa yadi va semhārassa..., yava na tam sallam jānāmi yen’ 
amhi viddho yadi va sallam yadi va khurappam yadi va vekandam 
yadi vā nārācam yadi va vacchadantam yadi va karavirapattan’ ti, 

95 aiifatam eva tam Malunky&putta tena purisena assa, atha so puriso 

. kálam kareyya." — 

„Sassato loko ti Māluūkyāputta ditthiyā sati brahmacariyavāso 
abhavissā ‘ti evan no, asassato loko ti Māluūkyāputta ditthiya sati 
brahmacariyavāso abhavissā ‘ti evam pi no, sassato loko ti Māluūkyā- 

80 putta ditthiya sati asassato loko ti va ditthiyā sati atth” eva jāti atthi 
jarā atthi maranam santi sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā yes’ 
āham ditthe va dhamme nighātam paiiiiapemi. Antavā loko ti... pe... 
Tam jivam tam sariran ti...pe... -Hoti Tathāgato parammarané ti 


93 


„pe... Hoti ca na ca hoti Tathagato parammaraņā ti... pe... 
Tasma ti ha Māluūkyāputta avyākataū ca me avyākatato dhāretha, 
vyikataii ca me vyākatato dhāretha. Kit ca Māluūkyāputta maya 
avyakatam: sassato loke ti Māluūkyāputta mayā avyākatam, asassato 
loko ti... pe ... n’ eva hoti na na hoti Tathāgato parammaraņā ti maya 5 
avyakatam. Kasma c' etai Māluūkyāputta maya avyakatam: na h’ 
etam Māluūkyāputta atthasamhitam n’ adibrahmacariyikain, na nibbi- 
daya na virāgāya na nirodhaya na upasamaya na abhiūiāya na sam- | 
bodhāya na nibbānāya samvattati, tasmā tam maya avyükatam. Kia 
ca Māluūkyāputta maya vyākatam: idam dukkhan ti Māluūikyāputta 10 
mayā vyākatam, ayam dukkhasamudayo ti.... ayam dukkhanirodho ti 

. ayam dukkhanirodhagamini patipadā ti maya vyakatam. Kasma 
c' etam Māluūkyāputta mayā vyākatam: etam hi Mālyūkyāputta attha- 
samhitam etam adibrahmacariyikam, etam nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya 
upasamāya abhifiiaya sambodhaya nibbānāya samvattati, tasmà tam 15 
maya vyàkatam. Tasma ti ha Malunkyaputta avyakataiü ca me avya- 
katato dhāretha, vyākataū ca me vyakatato dharetha’ ‘ti. Idam 
avoca Bhagavā. Attamano ayasma Malunkyaputto Bhagavato bhāsitam 
abhinandīti. 


53. Buppna's Discourse with VACCHAGOTTA. 90 


Evam me sutam: Ekam samayam Bhagavā Savatthiyam viharati 
Jetavane Anāthapiņdikassa arame. Atha kho Vacchagotto paribbājako 
yena Bhagava ten’ upasamkami, upasamkamitva Bhagavata saddhim 
sammodi, sammodaniyam katham saraniyam vītisāretva ekamantam 
nisīdi. Ekamantam nisinno kho Vacchagotto paribbājako Bhagavantam 25 
etad avoca: „Kin nu kho bho Gotamo 'sassato loko, idam eva sac- 
eam, mogham aūūan' ti evarditthi bhavam Gotamo“ ti. „Na kho 
aham Vaccha evamditthi: sassato loko, idam eva saccam, moghaim añ- 
ñan“ ti, „Kim pana... asassato loko“... pe... „Kin nu kho bho 
Gotamo ‘sassato loko ... ti evamditthi samano Gotamo ti’ iti puttho 80 
samāno: na kho aham Vaccha evamditthi ... ti vadesi*.... pe... „Kim 
pana bhavam Gotamo ādīnavar sampassamano evar imāni sabbaso 
ditthigatāni anupagato* ti. ,Sassato loko ti kho Vaccha ditthigatam 

Pali Reader. 13 


94 Oo 


etah ditthigahanam ditthikantārar ditthivisükam ditthivipphanditam 
ditthisamyojanam, sadukkham savighatam saupāyāsam sapariļāham, na 
nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamaya na abhiññaya na 
sambodhaya na nibbanaya sarnvattati. Asassato loko ti... pe ee 
6 Imam kho aham Vaccha ādīnavar sampassamāno evam imāni sabbaso 
ditthigatani anupagato“ ti. „Atthi pana bhoto Gotamassa kiūci ditthi- 
gatan^ ti. ,Ditthigatan ti kho Vaccha, apanitam etam Tathāgatassa. 
Dittham h' etam Vaccha Tathagatena: iti rüpam, iti rūpassa samudayo, 
iti rüpassa atthagamo, iti vedanā, iti vēdanāya samudayo ... atthagamo, 
10 iti saūūā..., iti samkhārā..., iti vinianam... Tasmā Tathāgato sab- 
bamaññitanam sabbamathitanam sabba-ahimkara-mamimkara-mananu- 
sayanam khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā patinissaggā anupādā vimutto 
ti vadamiti^. „Evam vimuttacitto pana bho Gotama bhikkhu kuhith 
upapajjatiti^. „Upapajjatīti kho Vaccha na upeti“. „Tena hi' bho 
16 Gotama na upapajjatiti^. „Na upapajjatiti kho Vaccha na upeti“. 
„Tena hi bho Gotama upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatiti^. ,Upapajjati 
Qa na ca upapajjatiti kho Vaccha na upeti“. „Tena hi bho Gotama 
n’ eva upapajjāti na na upapajjatiti“. „N’ eva upapajjati na na upa- 
pajjatiti kho. Vaccha na upeti“. „Evam vimuttacitto pana bho Gotama 
20 bhikkhu kubirh upapajjatiti iti puttho samāno: upapajjatiti kho Vaccha 
na upetiti vadesi... Etthāham bho Gotama aññanam āpādim, ettha 
sammoham apadish, ya pi me esā bhoto Gotamassa purimena katha- 
sallāpena ahu pasādamattā sā pi me etarahi antarahità" ti. „Alam 


hi te Vaccha aūūānāya, alam sammohāya. Gambhiro h’ ayah Vaccha - 


26 dhammo duddaso duranubodho santo panito atakkāvacaro nipuņo pan- 
ditavedaniyo, so taya dujjano ajifiaditthikena aūūakhantikena añña- 
rucikena aüüatrayogena aūūathācariyakena. Tena hi Vaccha tam yev’ 


ettha patipucchissimi, yathā te khameyya tathā nam vyakareyyasi. 


Tam kim maūīasi Vaccha, sace te ‘purato aggi jaleyya janeyyasi 
80 tva: ayarı me purato aggi jalatiti^. „Sace me bho Gotama purato 
aggi jaleyya jàneyyáham: ayam me purato aggi jalatiti^. „Sace 
pana tah Vaccha evam puccheyya: „yo te ayam purato aggi jalati 


ayam aggi kim paticca jalatiti, eva puttho tva Vaccha kin ti- 


vyākareyyāsiti". „Sace mam bho Gotama evam puccheyya . . . evarh 


"86 puttho ahah bho Gotama evar vyakareyyam: yo me ayam purato 
aggi jalati ayam aggi tiņakatthupādānam paticca jalatiti". „Sace te 


sve 


S 95 


Vaccha purato so aggi nibbayeyya jāneyyāsi tvah: ayam me purato aggi 
nibbuto" ti. „Sace me bho Gotama purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jā- 
neyyāhari: ayam me purato aggi nibbuto“ ti. „Sace pana tam Vaccha 
evam puccheyya: yo te ayam purato aggi nibbuto so aggi ito katamam 
disarh gato, puratthimam và pacchimam va uttaram va dakkhinam va 5 
ti, evam puttho tvam Vaccha kin ti vyakareyyasiti“. „Na upeti bho 
Gotama, yam hi so bho Gotama aggi tiņakatthupādānam paticca ajali, 
tassa ca pariyādānā aūūassa ca anupahārā anāhāro nibbuto t' eva 
samkham gacchatiti?. „Evam eva kho Vaccha yena rüpena Tathā- 
gatam paiifidpayamano pafifiapeyya tam rūpam Tathagatassa pahinam 10 
ucchinnamūlam tālāvatthukatam anabhāvakatam yatin anuppāda- 
dhammam, rūpasamkhāvimutto kho Vaccha Tathāgato gambhiro ap- 
pameyyo duppariyogaho seyyatha pi mahasamuddo, upapajjatiti na 
upeti, na upapajjatiti na upeti, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatiti na 
upeti, n’ eva upapajjati na na upapajjatiti na upeti. Yiiya vedanāya 15 
Tathagatum paiünüpayamano paūiāpeyya sā vedanā Jathāgatassa pa- 
hind... vedanāsamkhāvimutto kho Vaccha Tathagato gambhiro... sey- 
yathà pi mahāsamuddo, upapajjatiti na upeti ... Yaya saññaya ... 
Yehi saikharehi ... Yena viüüanena ... na upetiti^, Evam vutte 
Vacchagotto paribbājako Bhagavantam etad avoca: „Seyyathā pi bho 20 
Gotama gāmassa va nigamassa và avidūre maha salarukkho, tassa 
aniccata sākhāpalāsam palujjeyya, tacapapatikā palujjeyyum, pheggu 
palujjeyya, so aparena samayena apagatasakhapalaso apagatataca- 
papatiko apagataphegguko suddho assa süre patitthito, evam ev’ 
idah bhoto Gotamassa püvacanam apagatasakhapalasam ... suddhar 25 
sare patitthitam. Abhikkantam bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Go- 
tama, seyyathā pi bho Gotama nikkujjitam vā ukkujjeyya, paticchannam 
và vivareyya, mulhassa và maggam ācikkheyya, andhakare va tela- 
pajjotarh dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhintiti’, evam eva bhota 
Gotamena anekapariyayena dhammo pakāsito. Es ābam bhavantam 30 
Gotamam .saranam gacchami dhammaū ca bhikkhusamghaü ca, upā- 
sakam mam bhavam Gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pānupetam sarana- 
gatan“ ti. Aggi-Vacchagotta-suttantam. | 


96 


54. Tas Ricar Views. 


Savatthiyam viharati. Atha kho āyasmā Kaccāyanagotto yena Bha- 
gavā ten’ upasamkami, upasamkamitva Bhagavantam abhivādetvā ekam- 
antar nisidi, Ekamantam nisinno kho ayasma Kaccayanagotto Bhaga- 

"5 vantam etad avoca: „Sammāditthi sammāditthiti bhante vuccati, kittāvatā 
nu kho bhante sammāditthi hotiti*. ,Dvayam nissito kho ’yarh Kaccā- 
yana loko yebhuyyena: atthitaii c eva natfhitaū ca. Lokasamudayám - 
kho Kaccayana yathabhutam sammappaiūāya passato ya loke natthita 
sā na hoti, lokanirodham kho Kaccāyana yathabhütam sammappaūiāya 

]0 passato ya loke atthitā sā na hoti. Upāyupādānābhinivesanibandho 

© kho ’yam Kacciyana loko yebhuyyena: tañ c’ ayam "upāyupādānam 
cetaso adhitthanabhinivesanusayam na upeti na upādiyati nādhitthāti 
‘atta. me’ ti, dukkham eva uppajjamanam uppajjati, dukkham nirujjha- 
manam nirujjhatiti' na kamkhati na vicikicchati, aparappaccaya ñanam 

15 eva 'ssa ettha hoti, ettavata kho Kaccāyana sammaditthi hoti. ‘Sabbam 
atthiti’ kho Kaccayana ayam eko anto, 'sabbam n' atthiti’ ayam dutiyo 
anto, ete te Kaccayana ubho ante anupagamma majjhena Tathagato 
dhammarm deseti: avijjapaccaya samkhara, samkhārappaccayā viiiüà- 
nam — pe — evam etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti, 

90 avijjaya tv-eva asesavirāganirodhā samkhāranirodho, samkhāranirodhā 
viinananirodho — pe — evam etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa 


nirodho hotiti". 


55. Turre is no Eco. 


Atha kho Milindo raja yen’ āyasmā, Nāgaseno ten’ upasamkami, 

95 upasamkamitvā āyasmatā Nāgasenena saddhim sammodi, sammodani- 
yam kathah sürüniyam vītisāretvā ekamantam nisīdi. Āyasmā pi kho 
Nāgaseno patisammodi, yen’ eva rañño Milindassa citta ārādhesi. 
Atha kho Milindo raja āyasmantam Nagasenam etad avoca: ,katham 
bhadanto iüàyati, kinnàipo si bhante* ti. ,Nagaseno ti kho aham 
80 maharaja fayami, Nāgaseno ti mam mahārāja sabralrmacari samuda- 
caranti, api ca mātāpitaro nàmam karonti Nāgaseno ti và Süraseno ti 


97 


va Viraseno ti và Sihaseno ti và, api ca kho mahārāja samkha samaaiia 
paññatti voharo nāmamattam yad idam Nāgaseno ti, na h’ ettha puggalo 
upalabbhatiti". Atha kho Milindo raja evam dha: ,sunantu me bhonto 
paūcasatā Yonakā asītisahassā ca bhikkhū, ayam Nāgaseno evam 
aha: ‘na h’ ettha puggalo upalabbhatiti’, kallan nu kho tad abhinan- 5 
ditun“ ti. Atha kho Milindo raja &yasmantam Nügasenam etad avoca: 
„sace bhante Nagasena puggalo n’ üpalabbhati, ko carahi tumhakam 
civara-pindapata-senasana-gilinapaccayabhesajja-parikkharam deti, ko 
tam paribhuijati, ko silam rakkhati, ko bhāvanam anuyuijati, ko 
magga-phala-nibbānāni sacchikaroti, ko pāņam hanati, ko adinnam 10 
adiyati, ko kamesu miechā carati, ko musa bhanati, ko majjam pivati, 
ko paūcānantarijakammam karoti. Tasma n' atthi kusalam, n’ atthi 
akusalam, n’ atthi kusalakusalanam kammanam katta vä kāretā và. 
n’ atthi sukatadukkatanam kammānam phalam vipāko. Sace bhante 
Nāgasena yo tumhe māreti n’ atthi tassāpi pānņātipāto, tumhakam pi 15 
bhante Nāgasena n' atthi ācariyo n’ atthi upajjhāyo n' atthi upasam- 
pada. 'Nāgaseno ti mam mahiaraja sabrahmacārī samudacarantiti’ 
yam vadesi, katamo ettha Nagaseno, kin nu kho bhante kesā Nāga- 
seno“ ti. „Na hi maharajà" ‘ti. „Lomā Nagaseno“ ti. „Na hi ma- 
hārājā" '*ti. „Nakhā...pe...dantā taco mamsam naharu atthi atthi- 
miājā vakkarh hadayam yakanarh kilomakam pihakam papphāsam anta 


bo 
e 


antagunam udariyam karisam pittam semham pubbo lohitam sedo 
medo assu vasi khelo siūgbāņikā lasikā muttaih matthake matthalun- 
gam Nāgaseno* ti. „Na hi maharaja“ "ti. „Kin nu kho bhante rū- 
pam Nagaseno* ti. „Na hi mahārājā* ‘ti. „Vedanā ... sañňā ... 25 
samkhara ... viūūānam Nagasena‘ ti. „Na hi muhārājā" 'ti. „Kim 
pana bhante rüpa-vedaná-saüna-samkhára-viüüanam Nagaseno“ ti. 
„Na hi maharaja‘ ‘ti. „Kim pana bhante aññatra ripa-vedana-saina- 
samkhara-vifiianam Nagaseno“ ti. „Na hi mahārājā* 'ti. „Tam aham 
bhante pucchanto pucchanto na passami Nāgasenam, saddo yeva. nu 30 
kho bhante Nāgaseno, ko pan’ ettha Nāgaseno, alikam tvan bhāsasi 
musüvadam, n’ atthi Nāgaseno* ti. Atha kho ayasmà Nāgaseno Milin- 
dai rajanam etad avoca: ,tvam kho si mahārāja khattiyasukhumalo 
accantasukhumalo, tassa te mahārāja majjhantikasamayam tattaya bhū- 
miyà uņhāya vālikāya kharā sakkhara-kathala-vālikā madditvā pādena 95 
gacchantassa pada rujanti, kayo kilamati, cittam upahaūati dukkhasa- 


* 98 


hagatam kayaviññanam uppajjati, kin nu tvath pāden' āgato si udahu 
vāhanenā* 'ti. ,Náham bhante pāden' āgacchāmi rathendham agato 
'smiti". „Sace tvam mahārāja rathen’ āgato si ratham me ārocehi, kin nu 
kho mahārāja īsā ratho* ti. „Na hi bhante* ti. „Akkho ratho* ti. „Na 
5 hi bhante* ti. „Cakkāni... rathapaūjaram...rathadaņdako... yugam 
..rasmiyo... patodalatthi ratho* ti. „Na hi bhante* ti, „Kin nu kho 
mahārāja isà-akkha-cakka-rathapaiijara-ráthadanda-yuga-rasmi-patodam 
ratho* ti. „Na hi bhante* ti. Kim pana mahārāja aññatra īsā- 
akkha-cakka-rathapaüjara-rathadanda-yuga-rasmi-patodam ^ ratho" ti. 
10 „Na hi bhante" ti. „Tam aham mahārāja pucchanto pucchanto na 
passāmi ratharn, saddo yeva nu kho mahārāja ratho, ko pan’ ettha 
ratho, alikam tvam mahārāja bhasasi musavadam, n’ atthi ratho, tvam 
si mahārāja sakala-Jambudīpe aggarājā, kassa pana tvam bhayitva 
musa bhāsasi, sunantu me bhonto paūcasatā Yonakā asītisahassā ca 
15 bhikkhū, ayam Milindo raja evam ha: 'rathen&har Agato ‘smiti, 
‘sace tvah mahārāja rathen’ agato si ratham me ārocehiti” vutto sa- 
mano rathan na sampādeti, kallan nu kho tad abhinanditun^ ti. 
Evam vutte paūcasatā Yonakā āyasmato Nāgasenassa sādhukāram 
„datvā Milindarm rājānam etad avocum: „idāni kho tvan mahārāja 
20 sakkonto bhāsassū” ‘ti, Atha kho Milindo raja āyasmantarh Nāga- 
senam etad avoca: ,náham bhante Nāgasena musa bhanàmi, isañ ca 
paticca akkhafi ca paticca cakkani ca paticca rathapafijaraü ca paticca 
rathadandakaī ca paticca ratho ti samkha samañña paūiatti vohāro nā- 
mam pavattatiti^. „Sadhu kho tvam mahārāja ratham jānāsi, evam eva 
95 kho maharaja mayham pi kese ca paticca lome paticca... pe... mat- 
thalungaü ca paticca rüpai ca .., viññanañ ca paticca Nāgaseno ti sam- 
khā ... nāmamattam pavattati, paramatthato pan’ ettha puggalo n’ 
ūpalabbhati. Bhasitam p’ etam — PAS bhikkhuniya Bhaga- 
vato sammukhā: 


80. Yathā hi afigasambhara hoti saddo ratho iti, — 
evam khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammutiti*. 


,Accharyam bhante Nāgasena, abbhutam bhante Nāgasena, atici- 
trāni paūhapatibhānāni vissajjitani, yadi Buddho tittheyya sādhukā- 
ram dadeyya, sādhu šās Nāgasena, aticītrāni rene 
85 vissajjitāni". | i 


99 


56. No Coxrīnuous PaRsoxaL ĪDENTITY. 


Raja aha: ,Bhante Nāgasena, yo uppajjati so eva so udahu 
aüüo^ ti. Thero aha: „na ca so na ca aūiio* ti. ,Opammam karo- 
hiti. „Tam kim maūūasi mahārāja, yada tvam daharo taruno mando 
uttānaseyyako ahosi so yeva tvam etarahi mahanto ti. „Na hi bhante, 
añño so daharo taruno mando uttānaseyyako ahosi, aūūo ahar etarahi 
mahanto“ ti. „Evam sante kho mahārāja mata ti pi na bhavissati, 
pita ti pi na bhavissati, ācariyo ti pi na bhavissati, sippava ti pi na 
bhavissati, sīlavā ti pi na bhavissati, paññava ti pi na bhavissati, kin 
nu kho mabārāja aūūā eva kalalassa mata, aiia abbudassa mātā, 
aññā pesijā mata, aññā ghanassa mata, aūnā khuddakassa mata, añña 
mahantassa mata, aūūo sippam sikkhati, añño sikkhito bhavati, añño 
pāpakammam karoti, aññassa hatthapādā chijjantiti“. „Na hi bhante, 
tvah pana bhante evam vutte kim vadeyyasiti". Thero aha: „aha 
eva kho mahārāja daharo ahosim taruno mando uttānaseyyako, ahaū 
eva etarahi mahanto, imañ ñéva kayam nissāja sabbe te ekasam- 
gāhītā* ti. ,Opammam karohiti^ „Yathā mahārāja kocid eva puriso 
padipam padipeyya, kim so sabbarattim dipeyya“ ‘ti. „Āma bhante, 
sabbarattim dīpeyyā" 'ti. „Kin nu kho mahārāja yü purime yāme 


acci sā majjhime yame acciti^. „Na hi bhante“ ti. „Ya majjhime 20 


yāme acci sā pacchime yame acciti*. „Na hi bhante* ti. „Kin nu 
kho mahārāja aiio so ahosi purime yāme padipo, añño majjhime 
yāme padipo, añño pacchime yàme padīpo* ti. „Na hi bhante, tam 
yeva nissāya sabbarattim padīpito ti. „Evam eva kho mahārāja 


dhammasantati sandahati, aūūo uppajjati, añño nirujjhati, apubbam 25 


o y m 


acarimam viya sandahati, tena na ca so na ca aüio pacchimaviünana- 
samgaham ggcchatiti^. „Bhiyyo opammam karohiti". ,Yathà mahā- 
raja khiram duyhamanam kālantarena dadhi parivatteyya, dadhito 
navanitam, navanitato ghatam parivatteyya, yo nu kho mahārāja evam 
vadeyya: yam yeva khiram tam yeva dadhi, tam yeva navanitam, tam 
yeva ghatan ti, sammā nu kho so mahārāja vadamāno vadeyyā* 'ti. 
„Na hi bhante, tai yeva nissaya sambhūtan* ti. „Evam eva kho 
mahārāja dhammasantati sandahati, aūūo uppajjati, añño nirujjhati, 
apubbam acarimar viya sandabati, tena na ca so na ca añño pacchima- 
‘vitifiinasathgahath gacchatiti^, „Kallo si bhante Nāgasenā* "ti 


80 


100 


57. REBIRTH is nor ĪRANSMIGRATION. 


Raja aha: ,Bhante Nāgasena, ko patisandahatiti". Thero aha: 
,nàmarüpam kho mabaraja patisandahatiti^. „Kim imam yeva nāma- 
rüpam patisandahatiti^. „Na kho mahārāja imam yeva nāmarūpam 

5 patisandahati, iminā pana mahārāja nāmarūpena kammam karoti so- 
bhanam và pāpakam va, tena kammena aüüam nāmarūpam patisan- 
dahatīti". „Yadi bhante na imam yeva nāmarūparm patisandahati nanu 
so mutto bhavissati pāpakehi kammehiti^. Thero aha: „yadi na pati- 
sandaheyya mutto bhaveyya pāpakehi kammehi, yasmā ca kho mahārāja 

10 patisandahati tasmā na mutto pàpakehi kammehiti*. ,Opammarh ka- 
robiti£. „Yathā īmahārāja kocid eva puriso afiatarassa purisassa 
ambar avahareyya, tam enam ambasamiko gahetvā rafiüo dasseyya: 
Gmina deva purisena mayham amba avahata’ ti, so evan vadeyya: 
'náham deva imassa ambe avaharāmi, aññe te amba ye iminā ropita, 

15 aile te amba ye mayā avahata, nāham dandappatto’ ti, kin nu kho 
so mahārāja puriso dandappatto bhaveyyā* 'ti. „Āma bhante, daņ- 
dappatto bhaveyyā" "ti. „Kena karanena“ 'ti. „Kiūcūpi so evam va- 
deyya, purimam bhante ambam apaccakkhaya pacchimena ambena so 
puriso dandappatto bhaveyyā" ‘ti. „Evam eva kho mahārāja iminà 

90 nāmarūpena kammam karoti sobhanam và pāpakam va, tena kammena 
aüham nāmarūpam patisandahati, tasmā na mutto pāpakehi kamme- 
hīti". ,Bhiyyo opammam karohiti*. „Yatbā mahārāja koci puriso 
anfatarassa purisassa sülim avahareyya — pe — ucchui avaharevya 
— pe —. yathà maharaja koci puriso hemantike kale aggim jaletva 

25 visivetvā avijjhapetva pakkameyya, atha kho so aggi aññatarassa purisassa 
khettaÀ daheyya, tam enam khettasāmiko gahetvā ranno dasseyya: 
timinā deva purisena mayham khettam daddhan' ti, so evam vadeyya: 
‘niham deva imassa khettam jhāpemi, añño so aggi yo maya avijjhā- 
pito, añño go aggi yen’ imassa khēttam daddham, n&ham dandappatto' 

80 ti, kin nu kho so mahārāja puriso dandappatto bhaveyyā* 'ti. ,Ama 
bhante, dandappatto bhaveyyā* "ti. „Kena kāraņenā* ti. ,Kincápi 
so evam vadeyya, purimam bhante aggim apaccakkhāya pacchimena 
agginā so puriso dandappatto bhaveyya“ 'ti. „Evam eva kho mahā- 
rāja iminā nāmarūpena kammar karoti sobhanam va papakath va, 


101 


tena kammena aññam nāmarūpam patisandahati, tasmā na mutto pa- 
pakehi kammehiti^. ,Bhiyyo opammam karohiti*. ,Yath& mahārāja 
kocid eva puriso padipam Adaya māļam abhirühitvà bhuūjeyya, padīpo 
jhayamano tinath jhapeyya, tinam jhayamanam gharam jhāpeyya, gha- 
ram jhayamanam gāmam jhāpeyya, gimajano tam purisam gahetva 
evam vadeyya: 'kissa tvah bho purisa gāmam jhipesiti’, so evam va- 
deyya: ‘niham bho gamam jhāpemi, anno so padipaggi yassáham ālo- 
kena bhunjim, aüio so aggi yena gümo jhapito’ ti. te vivadamana 
tava santike agaccheyyum, kassa tvam mahārāju attham dhiareyyasiti‘. 
,»aamajanassa bhante* ti. „Kimkāraņāt ti. ,Kincapi so evan va- 
deyya, api ca tato eva so agģi nibbatto* ti. „Evam eva kho mahā- 
raja kiūcāpi aññam maranantikam nāmarūpam aññam patisandhismim 
nümarüpam, api ca tato yeva tam nibbattam, tasmā na mutto püpa- 
kehi kammehiti". ,Bhiyyo opammam karohitī". ,Yathü maharaja 
kocid eva puriso daharim darikam vāretvā sutikam datvā pakka- 
meyya, sā aparena samayena mahatī assa vayappatta, tato añño puriso 
suükam datvā vivaham kareyya. itaro àáganiviü evam vadeyya: ‘kissa 
pana me tvam ambho purisa bhariyam nesit”. so evum vadeyya: 
‘naham tava bhariyai nemi, anna sā dārikā dahari taruņī yä taya 
vāritā ca dinnasuükà ca. aūiā '"yam dārikā mahati vayappattà maya. 
vāritā ca dinnasulīkā ca’ ti, te vivadamānā tava santike agaccheyyuth, 
kassa tvam mahārāja attham dhāreyyāsiti“. ,Purimassa bhante® ti. 
„Kimkāraņā* ti; ,Kiücápi so evam vadeyya, api ca tato yeva sä 
mahati nibbattā* ti. „Evam eva... kainmehiti*. ,Bhiyyo opammam 
karohiti^. „Yathā mahārāja kocid eva puriso gopālakassa hatthato 
khiraghatam kinitva tass’ eva hatthe nikkhipitva pakkameyya: ‘sve 
gahetvā gamissimiti’, tam aparajju dadhi sampajjeyya, so āgantvā 
evam vadeyya: ‘dehi me khiraghatan’ ti, so dadhim dasseyya, itaro 
eva vadeyya: 'nāham tava hatthato dadhiri kinami, dehi me khīra- 
ghatan’ ti, so evam vadeyya: ‘ajanato te khirath dadhi bhutan’ ti, te 
vivadamānā...dhāreyyāsiti". „Gopālakassa bhante" ti. , Kimkarana“ 
ti. ,Kiücápi...tam nibbattan" ti. „Evam eva...kammehiti". „Kallo 
si bhante Nāgasenā" 'ti. 


Pali Reader, 14 


[d 


5 


20 


ne 
E 


30 


102 


58. Tax DISAPPEABANOE OP LEARNING. 


Pariyatti-antaradhanam nama, Tepitake Buddhavacane sattha- 
kathā pāli yāva titthati tava pariyatti-antaradhanam nama na bhavissati. 
Gacchante gacchante kale akulino rājāno adhammikā. bhavissanti, 

b amaccādayo adhammika  bhavissanti, tato ratthajanapadavasino ca 
adhammika bhavissanti. Etesam adhammikataya devo sammā na vas- 
sati, tato sassini na sammā sampajjissanti. Tesu asampajjantesu 
paccayadayaka bhikkhusamghassa paccaye datum na sakkhissanti 
bhikkhü paccaye alabhant& antevāsikānam samgaham na karissanti. 

10 Gacchante gacchante kale pariyatti parihāyissati. Tasmim parihine 
pathamam eva Mahapakaranam parihāyissati, tasmim parihine Yama- 
kam Kathāvatthu Puggalapaññatti Dhātukathā Viblaügo Dhammasai- 
gani pi. Abhidhamma-pitake parihine Suttanta-pitakam parihāyissati. 
Suttante parihine pathamam Aūguttara-nikāyo parihayissati, Afiguttara- 

15 nikàye  parihine Samyutta-nikayo  Majjhima-nikāyo Dīgha-nikāyo 
Khudda-nikāyo parihāyissati, Vinaya-pitakena saddhim Jātakam eva. 
dharayissanti. Vinaya-pitakam pana lajjino va dhārayissanti, gac- 
chante gacchante kale Jātakam pi dharayituth asakkontà pathamam 
Vessantara-jatakam parihayissati, Vessantara-jàtake parihine — pa — 

20 Apannaka-jatakam parihāyissati. Jātake parihine Vinaya-pitakam eva 
dhārayissanti, gacchante gacchante kale Vinaya-pitakam parihayissati. 
Yava manussesu catuppādikā gāthā pavattissati tava pariyatti-antara- 

* dhànam na bhavissati. Yada pasdnno raja hatthikkhandhe suvanna- 
eamgotake sahassathavikam thapapetva ‘Buddhehi kathitam gatham yo 

25 jānāti so imam sahassakahapanam hatthinagena saddhim ganhatü' 'ti 
nagare yāva dutiyam pi tatiyam pi bherim carāpetvā catuppadika- 
gāthajānanakam alabhitva sahassathavikam puna rajakulam pavesessati 
tadā pariyatti-antaradhanam nama bhavissati. 


— — -—— a ee ED 


103 


59. Pa DHĀNA = ŠUTTA. 


Tam [mam] padhātāpāhitattg nadim N eraüjaram pati 
.Yiparakkamma jhayantam yogakki hém massa pattiya 1. 


 Namuci karunam vāca bhāsamāno upāgami: 
,kiso tvam asi dybbaņņo,: santike maranan tava, 
Sahassabhige maranam, ekamse tava jivitam, 
jiva bho, jivitam Sep ign ūūāni kāhasi. 
Carato ca te fra S Wi Ms uttan ca jūha 
pahütam ciyat am. kim padhanena kāhasi. 


2. 


3. 
to 
4. 


Duggo maggo haere dukkaro durabhisambhavot, 
ima gāthā bhanam Maro attha Buddhassa santike. 
Tam tathāvādinam Maram Bhagavā etad abravi: 


„pamattabandhu pāpima sen’ atthena idhāgato. 
Anumatto pi puiifiena attho mayham na vijjati, 


6. 


yesaii ca attho pufifidnam te Maro vattum arahati. 


~~ w 


Atthi saddha tato viriyam pañña ca mama vijjati, 


evaīn mam pahitattam pi kita jiv: jivam anupucchasi. 8. 


Nadinam api sotani ayain vato visosaye, 
kii ca me pahitattassa lohitam n’ üpasussaye. 


9. 


Lohite sussamānamhi pitta semhaii ca sussaü, — 


mamsesu khiyamanesu bhiyyo cittam pasida 
bhiyyo sati ca pañña ca samadhi mama titthati. 
Tassa mévam viharato pattass’ uttamavedavam 


kame nápekkhate cittam, passa sattassa suddhatam. 11. 


Kama te pathama senā, dutiyā arati vuccati, 
tatiya khuppipāsā te, catuttbī taņhā pavuccati. 


10. 


12. 


Paficami thinamiddhan te, chattha bhīrū pavuccati, 
sattamī vicikiechà te, makkho thagbho te atthamo. 
L&bho siloko sakkāro micehüladdho ca yo yaso - 
,yo o’ attānam samukķarhse pare ca avajānati 14. 


p. Namuci „te senā Kanhassibhippaharini, 

E nam Auro jinati, jetvà ca labbat» sukham. 

. Esa Esa muījam parihare, dhi-r-atthu idha jivitam, 
aafigime me ) mater LSeyyo = ce jive parājito. 


15, 


16. 


5. 


T. 


18. . 


10 


15 


95 


10 


15 Wa 


a: 


— (Dhaniyo gopo:) ) 


1104 


. Pagalha ettha [na] dissanti eke samaņabrāhmaņā, 


tañ ca maggam na jananti yena gacchanti subbata. 17. 
Samanta dhajinith disvā yuttam, Mārai savāhanar 
yuddhāya paccuggacchami pu ju thana acüvayi. 18. 
Yam te tam na- ppasahati senam loko sadevako 


a A 


fam te paiifiaya bhaūjāmi mam pattam va amhand, 19. 


Vasim karitvà samkappam sati ca su P hitam: 
ratthā rattham vicarissam sāvake vindyam puthu. 20, 
Te appamattā pahitatta mama sāsanakārakā 
"īkāmassa te gamissanti yattha gantvā nā socare", 21. 
"„Satta vassāni Bhagavantam anubandhith pada padam, 
otaram nidhigacchissam Sambuddhassa satimato. 22. 
Medavannam va pūsāņam vayaso anupariyāgā: 


„'ap' ettha mudum vindema. api assādanā siya, 23. 


mu. ani 
Aladdhii tattha assüdam vüyas' etto apakkami, 
kako va selam aAsajja,nibbijjapema Gotamam^. 24. 


Tassa sokaparetassa viņā kacchà abhassatha, Mipsis 


tato so dummano yakkho tatth’ ev’ antaradhāyathā ‘ti 


60. Duantya-Surra. 


25. 


«va duddhakhīro “ham asmi | anutire Mahiyā samānavāso, 


channa kuti, ahito gini, | atha ce patthayasi jpavassa deva“. 


(Bhagava:) 


] 


„Akkodhano vigatakhilo ‘ham asmi | anutire Maliy' ekarattivāso, 


95 vivatā kuti, nibbuto gini,, | atha ce EM pavassa deva". 


(Dhaniyo gopo:) 


„Andhakamakasā na vijjare, | kacche rülhatine caranti gàvo, 
° vutthim pi saheyyuri ágatam, | atha ce patthayasī pavassa deva“, 3, 


(Bhagava:) | 


2, 


- 80 ,Baddba hi bhisi susamkhata, | tinno pāragato vineyya, ogham, kia 


attho bhisiy& na vijjati, | atha ce patthayasī pavassi devas. 


(Dhaniyo gopo:) 


»Gopi mama assavà alolā | digharattam sauhrāsijā manāpās - 
. tasšā na sunāmi "kiūei papam, | atha ce patthayasi pavassa deva“, 5, 


4. 


105 


(Bbagavā:) 

„Oittam mama assavam vimuttam | digharattam paribhāvitamn sudantam, 

papam pana me na vijjati, | atha ce patthayasi pavassa deva”. 6. 
(Dhaniyo gopo:) U 

„Attavetanabhato "ham asmi, | puttā ca me samāniyā aropa, 2 5 

tesam na suņāmi kiūci papam, | atha ce patthayasi pavassa deva*. 7. 
(Bhagavā:) 

„Nāham bhatako 'smi kassaci, | nibbitthena carami sabbaloke, 

attho bhatiyā na vijjati, | atha ce patthayasī pavassa deva”. 8. 
(Dhaniyo gopo:) 10 

„Atthi vasā, atthi dhenupā, | godharaņiyo paveniyo pi atthi, 

usabho pi gavampatī ca atthi, | atha ce patthayasi pavassa dova“. 9. 
(Bhagavā:) 

,N' atthi vasa, n' atthi dhenupā, | godharaniyo paveniyo pi n’ atthi, 

usabho pi gavampatidha n’ atthi, | atha ce patthayasi pavassa deva“. 10. 15 
(Dhaniyo gopo:) 

„Khīlā nikhātā asampavedhi, | dāmā muūjamayā navā susanthind, 

na hi sakkhinti dhenupāpi chettum, | atha ce patthayasi pavassa deva“. 11. 
(Bhagavā:) 

„Usabho-r-iva chetva bandhanani | nāgo püutilatun va dālayitvā 

nāhari puna upessari gabbhaseyyam, | athace patthayasi pavassa deva“. 12. 20 


Ninnaü ca thalaū ca pūrayanto | mahamegho piivassi tāvad eva, 
sutvā devassa vassato | imam attham Dhaniyo abhasatha: 13. 


„Lābhā vata no anappakā | ye maya Bhagavantam „addasāma, 
saranam tam upema cakkhuma, | satthā no hobi tuvam mahamuni. 14. 
Gopi ca ahañ ca assavā, | brahmacariyam Sugate carāmāse, 25 
jātimātaņasša pāragā | dukkhass’ antakarā bhavamase". 15. 
(Māro pāpimā:) 

,Nandati puttehi puttimā, | gomiko gohi tath’ eva nandati, 

upa i hi narassa nandanā, | na hi so nandati yo nirüpadhi“, 16. 
qhasa d nd LE 80 
. „Socati puttehi puttima, | gomiko gohi tath’ eva socati, 
' upadhī hi narassa socaná, | na hi so socati yo nirüpadhiti^. 17. 


M: 
H fae " = 
ae” l HE 
4 
LJ 


` f 61. SELEOTIONS FROM THE DBAMMAPADA. 


Yathāpi bhamaro puppham vannagandham shethayam 
paleti rasam ādāya eva game muni care. (49). 
* Na tena bhikkhu bhavati yāvatā bhikkhate pare 
5  vissam dhammam samādāya bhikkhu hoti,na tāvatā. (266). 
/ Yo ‘dha puüüaü ca pāpaū ca bāhetvā brahmacariyavā ' 
samkhaya loke carati sa ve bhikkhū 'ti vuccati. (267). 
Na jatahi na gottena na jaccā hoti brāhmaņo, 
yamhi saccaii ca dhammo ca so suci so ca brāhmaņo. (393). 
10 Kin te jatahi dummedha, kin te ajinasatiya, 
abbhantaran te gahanam, bāhiram parimajjasi. (394). 
Parnsukuladharam jantum kisan dhamanisanthafam 
ekam vanasmim jhayantam tam aham brūmi brahmanam. (395).V 
Ekan dhammam atitassa musavadissa jantuno 
15  vitinnaparalokassa n’ atthi papam akariyam. (176). 
Sudassam vajjam aññesam attano pana duddasam, 
paresam hi so vajjāni opunāti yathā bhusar, 
attano pana chādeti kalim va kitavā satho. (252). "onn 
Ayasà va malam rutin | tadutthāya tam eva khadati 
20 ^ evam atidhonacgrinam | sakakammani nayanti duggatim. (240). 
' Na hi papain kata kammai sajju khiram va muccati, "T 
dahantam balam anveti bhasmāchanno va pāvako. (71). 
' [s hi verena verāni sammant’ idha kudācanam, 
averena ca sammanti, esa dhammo sanantano. (5). 
25 Mā piyehi samāgaūchi appiyehi kudācanam, 
piyan’ adassanam dukkharh appiyünaü ca dassanam. (210). 
Udakam hi nayanti nettika, | usukārā namayanti tejanam. 
dāruri namayanti tacchakā, | attānam damayanti paņditā. (80). 
Selo yathā ekaghano väitena B samirati 
eva nindāpasarīsāsu na samifijanti paņditā. (81). 
90  Yatbà agāram succhannam vutthi na samativijj hati, 
. evan subhivitaih o cittam rāgo na sdinativijjhati. (14). 
Yo ve uppatitarh kodhar rathai bhantém va dhüraye " + 
. tam aham sārathim brūmi, rasmiggāho , taro jano. (223). 


107 


Seyyo ayogulo bhutto tatto aggisikhüpamo 
yañ ce bhuñjeyya di dussilo ratthapindam asaññato. (308). 
Yo sahasšari ‘sahassena saūgāme münnse Jine 
 ekaü ca jeyya-mrattünarh sa ve sailgītmajultamo. (103). 
Aira vat’ ayar kayo pathavim adhisessati i b 
chuddo apetavifiiano nirattham va kalingaram. (41). 
Parijinnath idari rūpari rogamddam pabhuūguņam, 
bhijjati pitisandeho, maranantam hi Jinata. (148) 
Digh& jagarato ratti, digham santassa yojanam, 
digho rip ae sarnsāro saddhammam avijānaturii. (60) 10 
‘Sabbe sakhara anicea’ tī yada paññaya passati 
atha nibbindatī "dukkhe, esa maggo visuddhiya. (277), 
‘Sabbe sāthkhārā dukkhā” tı yadā paññaya passat 
atha, nibbmdatī dukkhe, esa maggo viduddhnys. (278) 
Gabbe dhammā anatta’ tu yada paññaya passati 15 
atha nibbindati dukkhe, esa maggo visuddluya. (219). 
Yo ‘ta Buddhaū ca Dhammai ca Samghan ca saranam gato 
cattari ariyasaccdin sammiappadiiaya passati: (190) 
Dokkheih dukkhasamuppāda dukkhassa ca atikkumam | J 
ariyañ c'atthañmkarñ maggar dukkhipasamagawmath. (191) 20 
Etam kho saranam. chemarh etah saranam uttamam, 
etam saranam ügamma sabbadukkhā pamuccati (192). P 
Diva tapatı adicco, rattim sonni candımā, 
sdnnaddho khattiyo tapati, jhay tapati brābmeņo, 
atha sabbam ahorattim Buddho tapati tejasā. (387). 26 
Idha nandati pecca nandati | katapuūīo, ubhayattha nandati, 


‘puiifiam me katan’ ti nandati, | bhiyyo nandati suggatim gato. (18). 


aw 


4 62. Tun dimus or MĀLUNKYAPUTTA, 


„Manujassa pamattacārino | taņbā vaddhati māluvā viya, 

K. palavati “Phrahuram. | phalam iccham va vanasmi vànaro. 1. 80 
4” Yam esü sahati jamii tanha loke visattikā 

sokā tassa pavaddhanti abhivaddham va bīraņam. 2. 


108 


Yo c' eta sahati jammim tanham loke duracčayari U 
sokā tamhā papatanti udabindu va pokkharā. 3. 

Tam vo vadāmi, bhaddath vo ,yavant’ ettha samāgatā: 
tanhāya mülam khanatha usīrāttho và bi biranam, 

6 mā vo nalam va soto va Maro bhaiiji punappunam. 4. 
Karotha Buddhavacanam, khano ve mā upaccagā, 
"khaņātītā hi socanti nirayamhi samappita, 6. 
ete cou fr 

Pamado rajo sabbadā, pamadanupatito rajo, ' 
appamādena vijjaya abbahe sallam attano ti. 6. 


10 63. Tar Gārnās or MAHAPAJAPATI GOTAMĪ: 


Buddhavira namo ty-atthu sabbasattānam uttama 

yo mam dukkhā pamocesi aññañ ca bahukam janar. 

Sabbadukkham pariünatam, hetutanhà visositā, 

ariyatthafigiko maggo nirodho phusito maya. 2. 
15 Mata putto pita bhātā ayyikā ca pure ahum, 
yathabhuccam ajananti sarsari ‘ham anibbisam. 3. 
Dittho bi me so Bhagavā, antimo ’yam samussayo, 
vikkhino jatisamsaro, n’ atthi dāni punabbhavo. 4. 
Araddhaviriye pahitatte niccam daļhaparakkame 
samagge sāvake passa, esā Buddhàna vandanā. 5. 
Bahiinam vata atthaya Maya janayi Gotamam, 
vyādhimaraņatunnānam dukkhakkhandham vyapānudi. 


nev Ot 


64. KAPIRAJA-CARIYA. 


Yada aham kapi asim nadiküle darisaye : 

25 pilito sumsumarena gamanam na labhāmi 'ham. 1. 
Yamh' okāsē aham thatva orapārar patam’ ahath 
tatth’ acchi Satthu- vadhako kumbhilo ruddadassano, 
So mat asamsi: ,ehiti^, aham ,emiti* tam vadi, 
tassa matthakam akkamma paraküle patitthahim. 3. 

80 Na tassa alika bhanitam yathavacam akās' aham, 
saccena me samo n’ atthi, esa me saccapāramiti. 4. 


109 


* Y N e 
65. Tae CovxciL or MAHAKASSAPA. 


Satt’ eva satasahassani bhikkhusamghā samagata 
arahā khiņāsavā suddha sabbe gunaggatamh gati. 1. 
Te sabbe vicinitvāna uccinitvii varum varam 
paūcasatānari theranam akamsu sainchasammatam, 2. 
Dhutavādānam aggo so Kassapo Jinasāsane, 
bahussutānari Anando, vinaye Upiilipandito, 3. 
Dibbacakkhumhi Anuruddho. Vaūgiso patībhānavā, 


[Punņo ca dhammakathikānam, vicitrakathi Kumarakassapo |. 


Vibhajjanamhi Kaceano, Kotthito patisambhidā, 
aüüe p' atthi mahātherā agganikkhittakā bahū. 5. 
Tehi c’ aūūehi therehi katakicechi s&dhuhi 
paūcasatehi therehi dhammavinayasamgaho 
therehi katasamgaho theravādo ti vuccati. 6. 

Upàlim vinayam pucchitva dhammam Anandasavhayiü 
akarsu dhammasamgaham vinayan capi hhikkhavo. 7. 
Mahākassapathero ca Anuruddho mahagani 
Upālithero satima Anando ca bahussuto 8. 
Aññe bahu-abhiūiātā sūvakā Satthuvannità 
pattapatisambhidà dbira chalabhiñña mahiddlika 
samādhijhānam anucinna saddhamme pitramigata 9. 
Sabbe paūcasatā thera navangam Jinasisanam 
uggahetvàng dhāresum Buddhasetthassa santike. 10. 
Bhagavato sammukhā sutvā patiggahetvā ca sammukha 
dhammaii ca vinayai cápi kevalam Buddhadesitam 11. 
Dhammadhar& vinayadhara sabbe pi āgatāgamā 
asamhīrā asamkuppa Satthukappa sada garū 12. 
[Aggasantike gahetvā — aggadhammā tathāgatā — | 
agganikkhittaka thera aggam akamsu samgaham, 
sabbo pi so theravado aggavādo ti vuccati. 13. 
Sattapanna-guhe ramme thera paircasatà gani 
nisinnà pavibhajjimsu navaügam Satthusāsanam. 14. 
 [Suttar geyyam veyyakaranam gāthudānitivuttakam 
' j&takabbhutavedallam navaügam Satthusasanam]. 15. 
"PSM Reader. EE 16 


10 


10 


16 


26 


80 


110 


Pavibhajja imam thera saddhammam avinasanam 
vaggapaiifidsakan nama samyuttai ca nipātakati 
āgamapitakam nāma akamsu suttasammatam. 16. 

Yava titthanti saddhamma sathgaham na vinassāti 
tāvatā sāsan' addhānar ciram titthati Satthuno. 17. 
[Katvà dhammaū ca vinayam samgaham süsanarahai 
samkampi acala bhümi daļhā appativattiya]. 18. 

Yo koci samano cápi bráhmano ca bahussuto 
parappavadakusalo valavedhi samagato 

na sakka pativattetum, Sineru va suppatitthito. 19. 
Devo Maro va Brahma ca ye keci pathavitthita 

na passanti anumattam kifici dubbhāsitam padam. 20. 
Evam sabbangasampanuam dhammavinayasamgaham 
suvibhattam supaticchannam Satthu sabbaūūutāya ca. 21. 
Mahākassapapiimokkhā thera paiicasata ca te 

fiatva janassa saudeham akamsu dhammasamgaham. 22. 


66. THe Conquest or OxīLox. | ' 
p “í ] " 
Sabbalokahitam katvà patvà santim khanath parati ! 


parinibbāna-maācumhi nipanno lokdnayako 1. 

Devatāsaūnipātamhi mahantamhi mahamuni 

Sakkam tatra samīpattham avoca vaddnai varam: 2. 
„Vijayo Lāļavisayo Sīhabāhunarmdajo 

eko Lañkam anuppatto sattàmaceasatënugo, 3. 


Patitthissati "devinda Lafikayam mama sāsanan, I : 
tasmā saparivaran tam rakkha Lankaü ca sādhukani*, 4, 
Tathügatassa devindo vaco sutvà visārado ` NA 


devass' Uppalavannassn Laükürakkharh samappayi. LEN 

Sakkena vuttamatto so Lankam agamma eajuki | P. 

paribbajakavesena rukkhamülam upāvisi. 6. 

Vijayappamukha sabbe tam upecca apucchisuri: 

„ayam bho ko nu dīpo* ti, „Laūkādīpo" ti abruvi, 7. 
„Na santi manujā ettha, na ca hessati vo bis fam! 

iti vatvā kuņģikāgaui t te līz nišiāciyā” 8. 


111 


Suttaā ca ) tesa „patthesu laggetvā nabhasāgamā, 


i 
"vw 


i ES 
dassesi sonirupena paricārika-yakkhinī. 9, sap V 


Eko tam vāriyanto pi rājaputtena anvagā - j 
,gümamhi vijjamanamhi bhavanti sunakha® iti, 10. 
Tassā ca sāminī tattha Kuveņī nama yakkhini 

nisidi rukkhamūlamhi kantanti tāpasī viya, 11. 


` Disvàna so pokkharaņir, nisinnam taii ca tiipasiri 
tattha nahatva pivitvà c' adaya ca muļālayo 12. 


 Vüriü ca pokkhare heva šā vutthāsi,tam abruvi: 


S armaq si mama, titthā* 'ti, āļhābaddho va so naro. 13. 


"WParittasnttātejena bhakkhetuth sā na sakkuni 
yaciyanto pi tam suttam nada yakkhiniyā naro. 14. 
Tam gahetvā surungayam rudantam yakkhini khipi, 
evam ekekaso tattha khipi sattasatāni pi. 15. 
Anayantesu sabbesu Vijayo bhayasankito 
naddhapañcayudho gantvā disvā. pokkharaniti pal aii 16. 
Apassi-1 

pasgi-m -uttinnapadam hasantiū C eva tāpasim, 


| „imāya khalu bhaccā me gahita nu“ 'ti cintiya: 17. 


„Kim na passasi bhacce me bhoti tvam* iti aha tam, 
„kim rajaputta bhaccehi, piva nahāyā* 'ty-āha sā. 18. 
„Yakkhinī tava jānāti mama, jatin“ ti nicchito 
Sigham sanamam sāvetvā dhanum sandhāy" upāgato. 19. 
Yakkhim ādāya givüya nārāca:valayena so 
Tama iAtinena kesesu gahetvā dakkhiņena tu. 20. 
Ukkhipitva asim aha: ,bhacce me dehi dasi tam ` 
maremiti*, bhayattha sã jivitam yāci yakkhini: 21. 
»Jivitam 2 me sāmi, rajjam i dassāmi te abam, 
karissim’ Kr ca añ ñam kiñca yathicchitam". 22. 
Adibhatthaya ‘sapathain so tam yakkhirn akürayi, 
„ānehi bhacee, pigban" ti vuttamattā va sa nayi. 23.- 
Ime chātāt” ti vüttà sā tanduladi viniddisi 
bhakkhitāna vāņijānam nāvatthan vividham bahum. 24. 
Bhaco& te sadhapivina bhattāni vyalijan&ni ca, | 


rājaputtarh NM 20 bbe capi abhuājisum, 25... ,, 


Dapitan „Vijayen gam y i bhufjiya pīņitā, 
colēsārāstīkaiā m masa manoharai 26. 


10 


20 


20 


ab. 


15 


25 


112 


Rajaputtam upagaiichi sabbabharanabhüsita, 


māpesi rukkhamilasmim sayanaū ca mabāraham 27. 


Sāņiyā suparikkhittam vitānašamalamkatari, 


tam disvā  rajatanayo pekkha: attham anagatam 28. 
Katvana taya samvasam nipajji sayane sukham, | 


Le bar 


sanim parikkhipitvāna sabhe bhacca nipajjisum. 
Rattim turlyasaddaii ca sutvā gitaravañ ca so 


29. 


apucchi sihasemanam skirnsaddo* iti yakkhinim. 


Iti cintiya yakkhi sā abruvi rajanandanam : 
„Sirīsavatthu namena sami yakkhapuram idam, 


 Tattha jetthassa yakkhassa Laīkānagaravāsinī 


30. 
pltajjai ca sāmino deyyam sabbe yakkha ca ghātiyā. 1r 
Ë manussavasakarana yakkha mam ghatessanti hi“ 


31. 


32. 


kumárikà idh’ anita, tassā mātā ca āgati, 33. 


- = : 4 = g Exi ' E : B 
Av&hamangale tattha idhápi ussavo maha 


£: "IL ši w 
vattate, tattha saddo ’yam, maha h’ esa samagamo, 


Ajj’ eva yakkhe ghatehi, n na hi sakka itoparam*, 


so aha: ,, ‘dissamane te ghātessāmi katham aham“. 


„Tattha saddam karissami, tena saddena ghata 
āvudhar m’ anubhavena tesam kaye patissati^. 
Tassa sutva tathā katvā sabbayakkhe aghātayi. - 


ya, 


rt 
te 


36. 


sayam pi Vijayo laddha yakkharaja-pasidhanam EA 


Pasadhanehi sesehi tam tam bhaccam pasādhavyi, = 


katipābam vasitv! ettha Tambapannim upāgami. 
Mapayitvi Tambapanninagaram Vijayo tahim 
vasi yakkhiniya saddhim amaccaparivarito. 39. 
Navaya bhumim otinna Vijayappamukha tadā. 


38. 


kilanta pāņinā bhüumim: &lambiya nisidisum, 40. 


Tambabhiimirajophuttha tambapanni yato ahū 
so deso c' eva dīpo ca Tambapanni tato ahu, 
Sīhabāhu narindo so siham üdinàva iti 


MM, ME, Z= m= —- 


Sihalo, tena sambandha ‘ete sabbe pi Sīhalā. 


41. 
: zi IK. > 


vis Rey 


42. 


34. 


35. 


"i 


"uy : 


113 


, yak 
V 67. Bunppnaamnosa. ct 


Bodhimandasamipamhi jàto brābmanamānavo 


att escf T st. Me 


vijjāsippukalāvedī tīsu "vēdesu pārago 1. 
k Sammāviūiiātasamayo sabbarādavjsārado, | 
| vàdatthi sabbadipamhi āhiņdanto' pav idino, d 5 
~ Vibāram ekam āgamma rattim Patanjali- matat 
" parivatteti sainpunnapad: am suparimandalam, J. 
Tatth’ eko Revato ' nima, mahäthero vijaniya 
smahapuiitio : ayam satto, dametunir vattatiti* so 4. 
„Ko nu gadrabhariivena viravanto* ti abruvi. 10 
»gadrabhanam rave att har kim janüsiti^ aha tah, 5. 
yAham jāne* ti vutto so otāresi sakam mi ataih, | | 
vuttam vuttam fiyākāsi. virodham pi ea dass: ayl. 6. 


f 
n Tena hi tvam sukam vada otirchi* ei codito 


sali: ahabhidhammassa, attham assa na so 'dhigi. i4 00. 05: 
Aha: , káss' eso manto ti, , Buddhamanto® ti so "hrüvi 2254 


„dehi me tan“ ti vutte hi „ganha p: ibhajja tam iti, 5. 
Mantatthi „pabbajitvā so ugganhi Pitakattayar, a 


` —— ti a 


„ekāyano' ayam maggo“ iti paechá tam aggahi. 9. 


= — mu. 


| Buddhassa viya gambhiraghosattà nam viyakaru . j: 20 


| jj ‘Buddhaghoso’ ti, so sobhi Buddho viya mahitale.. 10. 


i [EI 4 


— Tattha Nāņodayari niima katvā pakaranam ` tadü 


DháiaasanganiyAki isl kandar SO Atthasáliniin. 11. 
U 1 
Parittatthakathp C eva (kātu arabhi buddhima, 


(X Cay i bot ean. 


tam disva Revató thero idam vacanam abruvi: 12. 95 


„Pālimatt: un TTR n’ atthi i Atthakatha idha, 
ttātatijārēlā ca bhirnarüpà i na vijare, 13. 


Sthalatthakatha suddha Mahindena matīmatā — 


z n. 2k. tt Faas. Ve Cali "1 
_Sadgitittayam | arulh m ‘Sammisambuddbadesitarh 14. 


rp: PETS. M abu haw PO sa 


*Bāriputtādigītaā ca "kathāriēģgan "skmekkhiya < Bu oS A 80 
- kata Sihala ala, labhasaya "Sihalesu pavattati. 15. 
Tai tattha gāūttā sutva tva Magadhanam nirüttiy& iet" 


| pafivāftehi, sā hoti sabbalokabitāvahā*. 16. 


114 


Evam vutto pasanno so nikkhamitva tato imam 

dipain aga imass e eva raüüo kale mahamati. 17. 
Mahēvihāraia sampatto vihāram sabbasadhunam 
Mahapadhinaghararh gantva Lorna rere spree 18. 


ter Audebyt det F n. 


b Sihalatthakatham sutvā theravädañ ca, ssabbaso . vae ta ( 
Dhammass&missa eso ya adhippayo” ti nicehiya 19. 
Tattha satgan samārietvā "kātum i II mama 
potthake detha sabbe* ti aha. Vimarhsiturh ga tath 20. 
Samgho gāthādvayam tassa dāsi: “ ssmatihiyath tava 

10 ettha dassehi, tam disvā sabbe dema ‘ti potthiaket 21. 

Pitakattayar um etth’ eva gaddhim Atthakathāya 2 ES ad - 

| Visuddhimaggari namaka sattigahetva samasato. ` E 

p Tato sarhgharh éaintihetva Sembuddhamatakovidari 
Mahābodhisamipamhi š $ó tara vāceturi drabhi, 93. 

16 Devatā tassa népufifiam pakāsetur 1 mahājane Pub " 

n chadesuth potthakam, so pi dvattikkhattum’ pi tam aka. 94. 
Vacetuth tatiye vare portate süniudahaie ` Tr PEN 
potthakadvayam ai aūūam pi santhapesuh tali, mari. L^ ao : 
Vāceyirisu tadā bhikkhū potthakattayam ekato, .- 

20 ganthato atthato ` vapl pubbaparavasena và 396. 


Theravadehi pálihi pādeku vyaijanehi ca 


ger 2 
—— 


- 
= 

-x 
[d 

— 


! af 


aññathattam ahu n’ eva potthakesu pi tisu p. 27. 
Atha ugghosayı samgho , tufthahattho visesato : 
,nissainsayam sa Metteyyo* iti vatvà punappunam 28. 
95 Saddhim Atthakathayada potthake Pitakattaye, 
"at Ganthākare vasanto so vihāre dūrasariikdre 5. 
Parivattes: sabba pi Sihalatthakathà tada 
X sabbesam mūlabhāsāya Mig adhaya niruttya. — 30. 
Sattanam sabbabhāsānar sā ahosi hitāvalā, 
304» thēriyācariyā sabbe Palin viya tam aggahum. 31. 
Atha kattabbakiecesu gatesu' ! pārinitthitirn — a 
vanditum so Mahabodhim Jambudipam upagami, 32. 


t 


Siüdhir astu, subham astu. 


NOTES. 


1. — ŠuwsumāRA-JĀTAKA p. 1—2,15 — Jat, (208) II 158,2s—160,10 
(The Jātaka together with its commentary, edited by V. Fausbøll. Vol. 
I—VII. London 1877—97). Translations: 1) Jat. II, transl, by W. H. 
D. Rouse p. 111. (The Jātaka or Stories of the Buddha's former births. 
Translated by various hands, Vol, I—VI. Cambridge. 1895—1907); 
2) Jātaka Tales from the Pali by R. Morris [reprinted from the Folk- 
Lore Journal II—IV.] (1887) p. 52; 3) K. F. Johansson, Indiska sagor, 
I (Stockholm 1907) p. 39. — This tale is to be found in the Northern 
Buddhist Literature in Mahāvastu (ed. by E. Sénart), vol. II 246—850 
(Markata-Jütaka) and a Chinese version in Beal's Romantic Legend of 
Sakya-Buddha from Chinese-Sanskrit, (London 1875) p. 231, cp. the Vé- 
nara-Jataka (342) III 133 and the following tale (Jat. Nr. 57). Other 
parallels: Pancatantra IV, 1; Cukasaptati Nr, 67; Kathā-Sarit-Sāgara (transl, 
by C. H. Tawney) vol. II p. 84. Literature: R. Morris: Contemporary 
Review vol 39, Academy XX 161 (1881), JPTS 1884 p. 108). R. Otto 
Franke: Eine indische Fabel bei den Suahelis. Wiener Zeitschr. f. d. 
Kunde des Morgenlandes VII 215 & 384, cp. that interesting parallel 
Russian folk-tale communicated by Rouse in his translation p. 110 and 
the literature quoted there. — P. 1,21 dhamme sudhammataya (Ed. dham- 
mesu dhammatáya) cp. Jat. VI 527,8. P. 2,15 Ed. vaūcito me si, but [me] 
must be omitted metri causa. The metre is here (and in the following 
verses, if not otherwise noticed) Anustubh (or the common (loka). For 
this metre see the very useful treatise on Pali-metres by V. Fausbgll 
in the edition of Dhammapada (1855) p. 489—41 (cp. Lanman: San- 
skrit Reader p. [800]). P. 2,10—1 = Jat, III 133, (cp. V 122,20). 


0098. — VisARIEDA-JATAKA p. 2,16—3,38 == Jat, (57) II 278,17—280,11. 
Translations: I) Jāt, I trans], by R. Chalmers p. 142; 2) Morris, 
Jūtaka Tales p. 54; 3) P. Steinthel, Aus den Geschichten früherer 


116 


Existenzen Buddhas. Zeitschrift für vergl. Literaturgeschichte N. F, VII 
306—7; 4) Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 41. The same tale occurs 
once more in the Jat. Nr. 224, Kumbhila-Jataka II 206, but with two 
Gatha’s; cp. Cariya-Pitaka III 7 (p. 97), printed below p. 108, and the 
preceding tale, — P. 3,4 Ed. pāsāņo kim pativacanam na dassati. Puna 

. I don’t believe that Mr. Steinthal is right in taking dassati as having 
the signification of a preteritum; see the note to his translation. The 
verse == Jat. II 206,8, and with the following words in the second pada: 
saddhassa gharamesino == Sn. v. 188, SN vol. I 215,5 (Mr. Feer proposes 
the reading damo for dhammo in the 3. pada), aud Ps, I, fol. kr. 4. 


3. — BakKA-JATAKA p. 3.290—8,22 == Jat, (38) I 221,22—223,e7; ed. by 
L. H. Elwell: Nine Jatakas, Pali Text with Vocabulary (Boston 1886) p. 28. 
Translations: 1) Jat. l transl. by Chalmers p. 96; 2) T. W. Rhys Da- 
vids, Buddhist Birth Stories (London 1880) p. 317—21; 3) R. Pischel, 
Ausland 1876, p. 757; 4) Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 13. Parallels: 
Baka-Jataka (236) II 233; Paūcatantra I 7; Hitopadeķa IV 6; Tantrākhyāna 
37; KSS by Tawney Il 31. Literature: Benfey: Pantschatantra I 175; 
The Fables of Bidpai ed. by J. Jacobs p. LXXIV (Folk Lore VII 69); 
Weber: Indische Studien III 343; A. Cunningham: The Stüpa of Bharhut 
(London 1879) p. 49. — P. 4,5 Ed. gahetvà etam; 4,33 Ed. pāpetvā, Cod. 
CY pātetvā; 5,22 kakkataka, abl, with euphonic m. 


4. — NignopnamiGA-dJATAKA p. 5,:—8,2 = Jat. (12) I 149.16 
—153,13: Jatakatthakatha ed. by Sīlānanda (1—2 Colombo 1892—93) 
p. 117. Translations: 1) Jat. I transl, by Chalmers p. 39; 2) Rhys 
Davids: Buddhist Birth Stories p. 205; 3) Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 
78. Parallels: Jat. (385) 111 270; Oesterley: Gesta Romanorum (1872) 
Nr. 110 p. 444 (ep. p. 730). Literature: M. Gaster: Tne Nigrodhamiga- 
Jaitaka and the life of St. Eusthatius Placitus, JRAS 1894 p. 335 (cp. 
1893 p. 869). The sculptured scenes found amongst the remains of the 
Bharhut-Stipa, Cunningham Pl, XXV, 1 (ep. XLIII, 2) dont allude to 
this tale, as has been pointed out by Pischel, Sitz,-Ber, Berlin 1905, 
512 (cp. Huber, Bull. de l'Ecole Franç. d'Extréme Orient IV, 1093). — 
P. 6,25 Hd. dhammaganthika, The verse p. 7,33—34 == Jat. IV 43,15, Dapa, 
(1855) p. 329 (cp. Mahāvastu I 366). 


. 5. — Stnacamma-d iraka p. 8,15—9,4 = Jat. (189) II 109,2:—110,25; 
Five Jatakas by V. Fausbøll (C ‘openhagen 1861) p. 14; Elwell: Nine 
Jātakas p. 2: Henry, Précis de:gram. palie, p. 73. Translations: Five 
Jatakas p. 39; Rhys Davids: Buddhist Birth Stories p. V; Jat. II 
transl. by Rouse p. 76; Warren, Buddhism in translations, p. 262; 


117 


Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 32. Parallels: Paücatantra IV 7; Hito- 
padega III, 2; KSS. by Tawney II p. 65; F. A. v. Schiefner: Tibe- 
tan Tales, done into English by W. R. S. Ralston (Londou 1882) p. 323; 


Aesop ed. by Halm Nr. 333. Literature: Benfey: Pantschatantra I 462; 
Weber: Indische Studien III 352. 


6. — Rāpna-Jāraka p. 9,5—34 = Jat, (198) I1 132,25— 134,15. 'Praus- 
lations: Jat. II transl. by Rouse p. 93; Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 
94. There is another Rādha-Jātaka (145) I 495 (cp. Kālabāhu-Jātaka (329) 
III 97); cp. The Early English Versions of the Gesta Romanorum ed. by 
Sydney J. H. Herrtage (London 1879) Nr. 45 p. 174. An Illustration 
to this tale bas been found by A. Grünwedel: Buddhistische Studien, 
Glasuren von Pagan (Berlin 1897). — P. 9,31 Hd. saccupasamhitam; 9,33 
Ed. upakūsito, for the reading upakülito see Jat. I 405,16 and R. Morris 
JPTS 1884 p. 74—75. 


7. — NaccA-JATAKA p. 10,1—-23 = Jat. (32) I 207,1--208,2; Jàta- 
katthakatha by Sīlānanda p. 156. ‘Translations: 1) Jat. I transl, by 
Chalmers p. 83; 2) Rhys Davids: Buddhist Birth Stories p. 292; 
3) Pischel, Ausland 1876 p. 758; 4) Warren, Hermes XXIX p. 476; 
5) Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 7. Iole Benfey: Pantschatan- 
tra I 280; Hahn: Sagewissenschaftliche Studien (1876) p. 69; Tawney: 
Journal of Philology XII 121 (The Story of Hippokleides, Herodotus VI 
129). Illustration in Bas-relief on the Bharhut-Stüpa pl. XXVII, 11. — 
The metre of the verse is Tristubh, see Dhpd, (1855) p. 442; in the se- 
cond pada we have to read velurya- and in the third pada viyama-, 


8. — Uzüxa-JamrakaA p. 10,4—11,5 == Jat. (270) 11 352,6—3B3,21. 
Translated Jat, JI by Rouse p. 242; Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 51. 
Litterature: Benfey, Pantschatantra 1 334; Rhys Davids: Buddhist 
Birth Stories p. 292, note; KSS. by Tawney II. p. 64—65 & 636. — 
P. lla: metri causa read bhaneyyam instead of bhaneyy’ ahar. 


9. — KunuNGAMIGA-JATAKA p. 11,22—13,7 =: Jat. (206) IL 153, 
—155,6; V. Fausbgll: Two Jātakas. The original Pāli Text with an 
English Translation and Critica! Notes (reprinted from JRAS, 1870. N. 
S. vol. V p. 10). Translations: 1) Jat. II transl. by Rouse p. 106; 
2) Cunningham: Bharhut-Stūpa p. 67 (figured on pl. XXVII, 9); 3) Jo- 
hansson, Indiska sagor, p. 36. Parallel: Ralston, Tibetan Tales, p. 
346. There is another Kuruūgamiga-Jātaka (21) 1 173. — P. 11,5: Ed. 
rukkhaggato, Cod. K rukkhato. 


Pali Reader, 16 


118 


10. — JAVASAKUŅA-JĀTAKA p. 19,.—14,5 == Jat. (308) III 25,6 
—27,7; edited and translated by V. Fausbøll: Five Jātakas p. 12 & 35. 
Translation: Jat. IIT transl. by H. T. Francis and R; A. Neil p. 17; 
Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 58. Parallels: Jātakamālā ed. by H. Kern 
(1891) Nr. 34; Ralston: Tibetan Tales, p. 311; Aesop ed. by Halm 
Nr. 276, b. Figured: Boro-Boedoer CLXX, 134—36 (cp. S. F. Olden- 
burg: Notes on Buddhist Art, JAOS, vol. 18 (1897) p. 200). Cp. We. 
ber: Ind. Stud. III 128. The two first gāthās == Dhpd. (1855) p. 147,1—4. 


ll. — Sasa-Jaraxa p. 14,6—16,20 = Jat. (316) III Bl,as—56,3; 
ed. by V. Fausbøll: Five Jütakas p. 61; Henry: Gram. palie, p. 86. 
Translations: Morris: Jàtaka Tales p. 11 (Folk-Lore Journal II 336, 
370); Jàt. III transl. by Francis & Neil p. 35. Warren, Buddhism in 
Transl. p. 274; Johansson, Ind. sagor, p. 60. Parallels: Cariya-Pitaka I, 
10 (p.82); Jātakamālā Nr. 6; Avadāna-Ģataka Nr. 37 (transl. by L. Feer, 
Annales du Musée Guimet X VIII). Figured: Boro-Boedoer CXXXIX, 22— 
95. Litterature: F, Harley: Moon-Lore p. 60. — P. 15,5 Ed. datum na 
sakkoti; p. 15,50 Ed. nadinnapubbam, Cod. B adinnapubbam; 16,6 Ed. sakala- 
sariram, Cod. Ck sakasarīram. With the 4th gatha cp. Cariyā-Pitaka IX v. 8. 


12. — MaTAKABHATTA-JATAKA p. 16,31—17,34 = Jat. (18) I 166,17 
—168,28; Silinanda’s Ed. p. 128. ‘Translations: Rhys Davids, BBS, p 
226; Jat. I transl, by Chalmers p. 51; Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 
164. — For an illustration see Grünwedel: Glasuren von Pagan. — 
P. 17,1 Ed, muccissamiti; the gatha p. 17,28—20 is found in the Commen. 
tary on Dhammapada v. 60. 


13. — Baveru-Javaxa p. 18,1—19,4 == Jat. (339) III 196,15—128,5. 
Translations: 1) Jàt. III transl. by Francis & Neil p. 83; 2) Morris: 
Jātaka Tales p. 48; 3) Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 66. Literature: J. 
Minayeff: Buddhistische Fragmente (Bull. de l'Acad. de St. Pétersbourg 
T. XVII, 1872 p. 70); O. Franke: Beziehungen der Inder zum Westen 
(Zeitschr. d. deutschen Morgenl. Gesellsch. Bd. 47, 1893 p. 606); R. Mor- 
ris: Notes and Queries (JPTS. 1893 p. 25); — P. 18.24 Ed. sakunünam 
nama; the gāthās 18,s2—19,4 — Ps. XI fol. chi & Ss. fol. ghe. 


14. — Sussonpi-Jāraka p. 19,5—20,s0 = Jat. (360) III 187,17— 
190,19. Translated: Jat. III by Francis & Neil p. 124; Johansson, 
Indiska sagor, p. 207. A parallel tale is found Jat. III 90, Kākāti-Jātaka 
Nr. 327; cp. Ralston, Tibetan Tales, p. 227; Pischel, Sussondi, KZ, 
vol, 42 p. 166; Morris, JPTS. 1891—93 p. 26; with the two first 
gathas op. Jāt. III 91,14 & 39. P. 20,16 Ed. timiránam; p. 20,29 ep. p. 
25,30; p. 20,24 op. .Th. v. 460. | DE 


119 


15..— VaALAHASSA-JATAKA D. 20,s1—22,10 == Jat. (196) II 127,88— 
129,95. Edited and translated by E. Müller: Simplified grammar of the 
Pali Language p. 128; translated by D. Fergusson, Indian Antiquary 
XIII, 1884 p. 45 and Jat. II transl. by Rouse p. 89; Johansson, 
Indiska sagor, p. 109 (cp. p. 263). Parallels: Beal: Romantic Legend 
p. 332; Divyāvadāna ed, by Cowell & Neil p. 524; Kāraņdavyūha (Ed. 
Calc.) p. 52. Literature: R. Morris: Indian Antiquary X, 1881 p. 292 
(= Academy XX, 1881.p. 161); H. Wenzel: A Jātaka-Tale from the 
Tibetan (JRAS. N. S. XX, 1888 p. 503, XXI, 1889 p. 179); E. Kuhn: 
Barlaam und Joasaph p. 81 (Abhandl. d. K. Bayerischen Akad. d. Wiss. 
philol.-philos. Cl. XX. Bd. 1897); Oldenburg: JAOS. vol. 18 p. 201 
(Boro-Boedoer Pl. 389,4). — P. 21,13 Ed. itthikuttabbāvavilāsehi (cp. Jat. 
IV 483,3); p. 21,31 Ed. jetthakayakkhini jetthakavanijam. 


16. — Carupvara-Jaraka p. 22,1—924, = Jat. (439) IV 1,9—4,s 
(the last part, containing 10 gāthās, I have omitted here). Translated: 
Jüt. IV by Rouse p. 1; Johansson, Indiska sagor, p.-117 (cp. p. 264 
—65). — Three other versions of this tale are found in the Jātaka: 
Mittavinda-Jataka (82) I 363; Mittavinda-Jataka (104) I 413, Mittavinda- 
Jātaka (369) III 206 (cp. Losaka-Jātaka (41) I 236). Other parallels 
are found in Avadāna-Ģataka Nr. 36, Avadāna-Kalpalatā Nr. 24, Divyāvadāna 
Nr. 38. Literature: L. Feer: Maitrakanyaka-Mittavindaka, la pitié filiāle 
(Journal Asiatique 7. sér. T. XI p. 300, containing a french translation); 
S. Beal: The merchant who struck his mother (Ind. Antiquary IX, 1880, 
p. 224, containing a chinese Buddhistic parallel); Child: English and 
Scottish Popular Ballads III p. 13; A. Olrik: Danske Ridderviser I. Bd. 
Nr. 375—76; D. Andersen: Udsigt over phil.-hist. Samfunds Virksom- 
hed, 28. Nvbr. 1895 (Copenhagen 1900); E. Hardy: Jona l u. Jat. 439 
(ZDMG. Bd. 50 p. 153). Illustrations: Boro-Boedoer Pl. 123—127, and 
Grünwedel: Glasuren von Pagan. — P. 23,17 Ed. so tahi saddhim dibba-, 
Cod, Ck saddhim sattaham dibba-. 


17. — SauPpARAKA-JATAKA p. 24,e—27,31 = Jat. (463) IV 137,s— 
143,5 Translated: Jat. IV by Rouse p. 86; Johansson, Indiska sagor, 
p. 228; cp. Sp. Hardy, Manual of Buddhism, p. 13. The Tibetan ver- 
sion of this tale has been published together with a German Translation 
by Griinwedel: Buddhistische Studien, Excurs: Das Suppāraka-Jātaka 
in Padmasambhavas Legendenbuch (cp. J. J. Schmidt: Der Weise u. der 
Thor. LI 227, 261) and an illustration is found ibid. Glasuren von Pagan. 
— P. 95,1; Ed. akālavātam uppātitam uppajji, p. 26,18 Ed. obbāsamānam 
‘Nilavannskusamalam; p. 27,6 samuddo suyyat’ amānuso, I think we have to 
read saddo instead of samuddo, then the metre will be correct; p. 27,3 
== Jat, III 497,5 & VI 79,5, Pd. V p. 104 v. 29. 


120 


18. — SīLĀNISAMSA-JĀTAKA p. 28,1—29,19 = Jat. (190) II 111,1— 
113,9. Translated Jat. II by Rouse p. 77 and by Feer: Journ. As, 
1875. T. VI 260; Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 106. Cp. Jat. Nr. 
442, Avadana-Cataka Nr. 11 and „The shipwrecked sailor“ in Flinders 
Petrie: Egyptian Tales, vol. I (London 1895). Literature: L. Feer: 
Études Bouddhiques, 2. partie, Journal Asiatique 7. sēr. T. VI. 1875 p. 
243, H. Wenzel: Coincidences in Buddhist literature and the Gospels 
(Academy Jan. 12. 1889 p. 27). — P. 29,4 Ed. tam hi, Cod. B. tam pi; 
p. 29,8 Ed. nassissatiti, corrected by J. S. Speyer (Vedische und San- 
skrit-Syntax p. 60 Note 2) to nassissā 'ti; p. 29,11 metri causa read: va- 
haty-upasakam; p. 29,12 == Jat. V 483,12; V 494,5; SN I p. 17 & 56; p. 
29,13 metri causa read: nhapito, cp. V. Fausbgll: Nogle Bemerkninger 
om enkelte vanskelige Pali-Ord i Jataka-Bogen (Oversigt over kongl. danske 
Vid. Selsk. Forh. 1888 p. 11). 


19. — CawMASATAKA7JATAKA D. 29,20—30,25 == Jat. (324) III 82,1 
—84,6. Translations: 1) Jat, JII transl, by Francis & Neil p. 55; 
2) Morris: Jataka-Tales p. 64; 3) Johanssou, Indiska sagor, p. 147. 
Scenes from this tale are figured on the Bharhut-Stüpa P]. XLl,1—3s. — 
P. 29,37 Ed. asantapaggahanakáranam: p. 30,5—9 Metre: Tristubh; the 3. 
foot of the first pada is increased by one syllable, Ed. vatāyam corrected 
to vat’ ayar metri causa; in the fourth pida apacāyatī (Ed. apacāyati) the 
first foot has 5 syllables; p. 30,1:—13 Tristubh: bráhmana, vocative (Ed. 
brühmana) avasakkati as apacüyati above; p. 30,17-—19 Tristubh, but the 3. 
pada has been corrupted, cp. Jat. VI 502,s—27, Th. v. 406 & Thi v. 68; 
bhaggam (Ed, bhaggā), abhidhāvathā, imperative 2. pl. (Ed. abhidhāvatha); 
p. 30,2: apujjam (Ed. apūjam). 


20. — Uccuanea-Jaraxa p. 30,26—32,6 = Jat. (67) I 306,25 —308,22. 
Translations: 1) Jat. I transl. by Chalmers p. 164; 2) German Transla- 
tion by Pischel, Hermes, XXVIII, p. 465 (cp. Néldeke, ib. XXIX, 
p. 155, & Zachariae, WZKM, XV, p. 72); by Steinthal: Zeitschr. f. 
vergl. Litteraturgesch. N. F. X. 1896 p. 88; 3) Johansson, Indiska 
sagor, p. 136. Litterature: C, H. Tawney: Folklore-parallel (Indian 
Antiquary X 1881 p. 370, the Story of Intaphernes Herodotus III 
118—20, cp. Sophocles, Antigoue v. 909 ff), — P. 31,10 naggā (Ed. 
inaggū); p. 31us—1s == Jat. VI 508,17—18, anodakà (Ed. anodikā); p. 31,35 
metri causa read: sodaryam. 


' 91. — VzpABBHA-JZTAKA 32,7—834,39 == Jat. (48) I 953,4— 9656,24. 
Translations; 1) Jat. I transl. by Chalmers p. 121; 2) Transl. by T. B. 
Panebokke (Orientalist I (1884) p. 165); 3) H. T. Francis: The Ve- 


121 


dabbha-Jataka, translated and compared with the „Pardoners Tale“ ( Lon- 
don 1884); 4) German Translation bv Steinthal: Zeitschr. t. vergl. 
Litteraturgesch, VI (1893) p. 116; 5) do. by J. J. Meyer: Dandin's Da- 
cakumaracaritam, p. 15; 6) Johansson: Indiska sagor, p. 175. Littera- 
ture: Morris: Contemp. Review 1881; Francis, Academy 29. Dee. 1883 
p. 416 (= Orientalist IL 50); Tawney, Journal of Philology NIH (1883) 
p. 208; Chaucer, Canterbury Tales ed, by Skeat (2. ed, Oxford. 1879) 
p. XXVII; Romania III (1874) p. 182; Academy Jan. 12. 1884 p. 80: 
W. A. Clouston: Popular Tales and Fictions If 379 (1887); E. Kuhn: 
Barlaam and Joasaph p. 82 (1897); Folk-Lore VIL p. 69; J. H. Know- 
les, Orientalist I 260 (the Kaemiri-Version). An illustration to this tale 
has been found by Griinwedel, Glasuren von Pagan. — P. 532s irhà- 
teyyan (Mss. ghātessan); p. 33,29 sannayhitva (Ed. sannahitva). 


29. — Davnivauana-Jaraxa p. 34,20---38,6 =. Jae (186) TL 10140 
—106,18. Ed. and transl. by V. Fausbøll: Five Jatakas p. 1 & 20; ed, 
by Elwell: Nine Jütakas p. 15. Translations: 1) Rhys Davids: BRS 
p. XVI; 2) Jat. II transl. by Rouse p. 70; 3) Johansson, Indiska sagor, 
p. 100. Parallels: KSS by Tawney Iu; Brhatkathamanjan I] 49; B. Jūlg: 
Die Märchen des Siddhi-Kür. Kalmükiseher ‘Text mit Uebersetzuny (Lpz. 
1866) Nr. 6; Grimm's Kinder- und Hausmärchen Nr. 36 & 54. Figured: 
Grünwedel: Glasuren von Pagan. -— P. 35,25 Ed. ninipakiro; p. 37,3 
Ed. pattasaniya; 37,31 Ed. tam eva. The gāthās are also found in Mp. 


.98. — ManāsīLava-JĀTaxka p. 38,7—42.9 —- Jat. (51) 1 2624—- 
267,3. Translations: 1) Jat. I transl. by Chalmers p. 128; 2) transl, 
by Panebokke, Orientalist I 267; 3) German Transl. by Steiutha!, 
Z. f. vergl. Litt. VII (1894) p. 246); 4) Johansson, Indiska sagor, 
p. 179. Cp. Seyya-Jāt. (282) IL 400, Ekarāja-Jāt. (303) HI 13 and Väl- 
sunga-saga ed. by S. Bugge p. 91—92 (v. der Hagen: Nordische Helden- 
romane lV p. 22). Literature: Tawney: Journal of Philol, NTL 120. -— 
P. 39,28 Ed. amaccaganaparivuto; p. 41,15 Ed. saunahitvā; p. 42,5 Hd. coru- 
paddavo; p. 42,15—1e == Jat. IV 269,31 & VI 43,13, Mp. Ms. Ck p. 117. 


94. — RasovApa-JarAKRA p. 42,20—44,17 — Jat. (151) II 2:1—5,5; 
ed. and transl, by V. Fausbgll: Ten Jatakas (Copenhagen 1872) p. 1 & 
57. Transl.: Jat. Il by Rouse p. 1 and Rhys Davids, BBS p. XXII; 
Johansson, Indiska sagor, p. 192. There is another Rajuvada-Jataka (334) 
III 110, and a parallel is found in Mahābh. ILI ch. 194, and in Kalevala 
III. — P. 42,9 vinicchiyamiinesu (all the Mss. vinicchayamanesu), cp. Jat. HI 
p. 10645, Vin. II p. 95,25; — p. 44,9 Ed. saccena alikavadinam (this gāthā 
== Dhpd..v. 223, cp. Mhbh. III 13253 = V 1518—19). 


122 


25. — MAKHRĀDEVA-JĀTAKA p. d4,18—45,18 — Jat. (9) I 187,5— 
139,23; Jātakatthakathā by Silánagda p. 108. Transl, Jat. I by Chalmers 
mers p. 30 and by Rhys Davids: BBS p. 186; Johansson, Indiska 
sagor, p. 133. Parallels: Makhàdevasutts MN. 83, cf. AN. III 35; Nimi- 
Jat, (541) VI 95; P. Bigandet; The Life, or Legend of Gaudama, (Ran- 
goon 1866) p. 408. Literature: L. Féer: JA. 1876, p. 516; R. Morris: 
Devadūtā (Death's Messengers. An old story with modern variations) JPTS, 
1885 p. 62; Rhys Davids: Album Kern, p. 14; J. Charpentier: 
Paccekabuddha-Geschichten (Upsala 1908) p. 116. This tale is figured on 
the Bharhut-Stūpa Pl. XLVIII, 2 with the inscription Maghā-deviya-jataka 
(cp. ZDMG. Bd. 40, p. 60). — P. 44,20 kumarakilakam kili (the Sinhalese 
Edition); p. 45,11—12 == Jūt. VI 96,4 (cp. 129,3); p. 45,13 Ed. ossakkamanam. 


: 26. — Susima-Jaraxa p. 45,19—47,33 == Jat. (411) III 891.18—396,ss. 
Translated Jat. III by Francis & Neil p. 237; Johansson, Indiska 
sagor, p. 215. Another Susīma-Jātaka (of different coutents) is found Jat. 
II 163 (Nr. 163). — P. 45,25 ānāpetvā (all the Mss. āņāpetvā); p. 47 the 
metre in these gāthās is Tristubh, excepting only tbe last, where the two 
first pādas are Anustubh; at l. 2 and 26 we have to read: brahmacaryassa; 
at several places we have foots consisting of 5 syllables: 1. 9 daharo tuvam 
& pathamuggato, 1, 26 na gahe rame, l. 28 anapekkhino; at 1. 20 the last 
foot is increased by one syllable (as in the Jagati); 47,14 Ed. -sukumàránam, 
Cod. B -sadisasukumārānam; 47,19 Ed. sümatthapassam (the Commentary 
samm-); 47,21 ena — enam (Comm.); 47,28 — Dh. 347,5—4 (cp. 346); 
47,29 gāthadvayam āha wanting in the Edition by misprint. 


. , 27, — Anpasatra-Jaraxa p. 48,1—52,19 — Jat, (62) I 289,34—295,17. 
Translated Jat. I by Chalmers p. 151, by Pischel, Philol. Abhand- 
lungen M. Hertz zum 70. Geburtstage von Schiilern dargebracht (Berlin 
1888) p. 74, and by Steinthal Z. f. vgl. Litt, N. F. X. p. 78; Jo- 
hansson, Indiska sagor, p. 186. Figured on the Bharhut-Stipa pl. XXVI, 
8 (cp. the text p. 65—67). As to the different scenes of this tale see 
the notes of Pischel to his translation, A. Pfungst: Die Reservatio 
mentalis in der indischen Mürchen-Literatur (— Aus der indischen Kultur- 
welt, Strassburg 1904 p. 115); cp. also the story of Ahalyā, KSS XVII 
137, Ģukasaptati 15, and the Samugga-jātaka (436) III p. 627. For this 
text I have collated Prof. Fausbglls Burmese Ms. (B) and a Cingalese 
Ms. (Cu) containing this Jātaka separately (both Mss. now in the Copen- 
hagen University Library) — P. 48,6—7 = Jat. V 435,16 & VI 281,26, 
varkagati (all Mss. -gatā), .labbhamāne (all Mss, labhamüuà); p. 48,12 ath’ 
assa etad C» Bà (Ed. ath’ etad); 48,28 sakkomi Bè (sakkāmi C); 48,5 
gandhadhüpaeunna- Bd C» (Ed. -dhūpā); 49,26 katheyyāsi C" (Ed. kathesi); 


123 


49,34 may& katokāsā C" B3 (Ed. mayam katokāsā); 50,2 chaddeti C" B4 (Ed, 
chaddesi): 50,12 mukham Cu Bd (Ed, sumukham); 50,17—18 dbuttussa saññam 
C» B4 (Ed. dhuttasannam); 50,19—51,1 kapparena Bd (Ed. & C" kappaha- 
rena); 50,20 vedanatto C" (Ed. vedanando, B? vedanappatto); 51,5—4 cp. the 
inscription on the Bharhut-Stüpa, samukhavethito (C. sammukha-, B4 sam- 
mukha vedhito); 51,50—3s: = Jat. V. 94,55— 1, 450,30-—st; 51, := Jät. 
I 300,21; 51,s2—s3 == Jat. V 448,25—36; 51,33 == Jat. V 446,1, omasanti C 
(Ed. mama santi, Bå omisanti); 51.34—35 == Jat. V 448,55— so, vāli va 
lapasakkhara (all Mss. vāļā capalasakkharā); vaūcanam C" Bd (Ed. vācanam); 
the following commentary p. 52,1—7 to these gūthūs is taken from Jat. 


V 451,24; 449,24; 447,13—16; 449,27—29; — p. 52,11—1» thus ends C2, 


28. — KHARAPUTTA-JĀTAKA p. 52,13-—55,18 = Jūt. (386) III 275,10 
—281,7. Translated Jat. III by Francis X Neil p. 174; Johansson, 
Indiska sagor, p. 112. Cp. Grūnwedel: Glasuren von Pagan, Benfey: 
Kin Mārchen von der Thiersprache (Orient u. Occident LL (1864) p. 133 
—171). — P. 58,13 Ed. sabbarüta-; 54,19 tuvam (Ed. tvam ca, Mss, tvam); 
54,90 ohitāmukho with the a lengthened metri causa (Kd. ohitomukho) cp. 
upahato mukho Jat. VI 515,25; 64,21 the first foot increased by one syl- 
lable; 54,22 Ed. bālātaro (Bd bālataro); 54,27 as 54,21; 54,39 bhariyā —= bha- 
riyāya; 55,1—2 (Metre: Jagatī and Tristubh) == Jat. V 498,1s—a1, ojitattena 
as in C* (Ed. ocitatthena); 55,14 pakkosāpetvā omitted in the Ed. by mis- 
print; 55,16 Ed. ganhitakāmā (misprint); 54,17 puna Ck (Ed, pana). 


29. — Manosapna's Marriage p. 55.18—58,26, extract from the Ma- 
hāummagga-Jūtaka (Nr. 546) = Jat. VI 363,25—368,14, omitting the gāthā 
p. 365,90; this gāthā seems to contain metrical difficulties, perhaps it has 
been corrupted in old times (cp. the northern version in Tibetan Tales 
p. 157). The Mahāummagga-Jāt. has been translated into English from 
the Sinhalese text by T. B. Yatawara (London 1898), for the present 
extract see p. 63—71; German transl. by J. J. Meyer: Daņdins Dacaku- 
māracaritam, p. 96—103; English trans). Jat. VI by Cowell and Rouse 
p. 182. A scene is figured pn the Bharhut-Stupa pl. XXV, 3 (cp. Jat, 
Vol. VII preface p. XV). — P. 55,29 Ed. saūūam datvā; 55,50 Ed. utta- 
radvürayavamajjhakam; 56,5 siya Ck (Ed. maya); 56,20 essasiti Bd (ld. essa- 
titi); 56,21 nadipüre B4 (Ed. naditire); 56,30 na laddham sami Bà (Ed. no 
laddbai); 67,1 si omitted in the Ed. by misprint; 57,10 Ed. bhuijati (misprint) ; 
57,1a—15 Ed, nānaggarasehi bhuūji; 57,26—37 tath’ eva (Ed. tatth’ eva); 57,38 
Ed. tambula-; 58,1 foll. cp. Mil. p. 205—6; 58,17 Ed. tamrattiyam. 


. 90. EN MAHOSADHA'S JUDGEMENT p. 58,21— 59,5, extract from the 
commentary on Mahāummagga-Jātaka — VI 336,31—337,15, translated by 


124 


RHys Davids: Buddhist Birth Stories p. XIV (cp. Ummagga-Jataka by 
Yatawara p. 19); Jat. VI by Cowell and Rouse p. 163; Johans- 
son, Indiska sagor, p. 157. For parallels see ibid. note p. 266 and H. 
Oldenberg: Die Literatur des alten Indien (Stuttgart 1903) p. 114 (& 
note p. 291). — P. 59,19 Ed. mātu hadayam, amātu hadayam. 


31. — Saxxa AND THE Asuras p. 59,23—60,26, extract from the Kulā- 
vaka-Jàtaka (31) = I 202,9—208,11, Jātakatthakathā by Silananda p. 152. 
Translated Jat. I by Chalmers p. 80 and by Rhys Davids: Buddhist 
Birth Stories p. 284. This very old myth (cp. Weber: Indische Studien 
VIII 75) is briefly retold in SN. I 224 and Pj. (comm. on Sn. v. 681), 
cp. Dhpd. (1855) p. 190—194; allusions to it are made AN. IV 432. — 
P. 60,1 kipillika (so Silénanda’s text, Ed. pipillika); 60,16—17 = SN. I 224 
(metre: Tristubh with 5 syllables in the first foot of the fourth pāda). 


32. — Tur Dream or THE Queen Maya p. 61 = Nidānakathā, Jat. I 
50,3—51,3 = Ps. (Comm. on MN. 123) fol. bà (with some slight devia- 
tions). Translated: Rhys Davids: BBS p. 62, Buddhism in Transla- 
tions by H. C. Warren (1896).p. 42. Figured on the Bharhut-Stüpa pl. 
XXVIII, 2. Cp. Rgya Tch'er Rol Pa, trad, sur la version Tibétaine du 
Bkahgyour et revue sur l'original sanscrit (Lalitavistara) par Ph. Ed. F ou- 
caux (Paris 1848) p. 61. — P. 61,13 mānusa- so Ps. (Ed. manussa-). 


33. — Tue Binru or -Gorama BUDDRA p. 62 == Nidānakathā Jat. I 
52,8—53,7. Transl. by Rhys Davids: BBS p. 65, by Warren: Buddhism 
in Transl. p. 45. — P. 62,7 Ed. -dhajapatākūdīhi; 62,15 Ed. onamitvā, 


34. — Carrāni PUBHANIMITTĀNI p. 68,1—643 = Nidānakathā, Jat, I 
58,31—59,32. Transl, by Rhys Davids: BBS. p. 76 and by Warren 
p. 56. — P. 63,12 Mahāpadāne ə: DN. XIV (Mahāpadāna-Sutta); 63,17 kasma 
(Ed. tasmā); 64,2—s Dīghabhāņakā, this seems not to agree with DN. 


,' 95. — Tur Great Retirement p. 64,4—65,34 = Nidūnakathā, Jat, I 
60,20—62,z0. Translated: Rhys Davids BBS. p. 79 and Warren p. 59, 
Cp.”the story of Yasa printed below p. 67. — P. 64,9 tv’ eva (Ed. yeva); 
64,14—15 == Dhpd. (1855) p. 118,5—4 = As. p. 34,5 (cp. Mahāvastu II, 
157); 65,1 Ed. payojayema; 65,7 Ed, pākatabhībhaccha-; 65,25 Ed. nirum- 
bhitvā; 65,53—3s Ed. pabujjhissatiti and bhavissatiti. 


36. — PATICCASAMUPPĀDO p. 66,1—21 == Vinaya-Pitaka ed. by H. Ol- 
denberg vol. I (1879), p. 1,1—2,6 (Cp. Udānam, ed. by P. Steinthal 
(London 1885) p. 1). Translations: Vinaya Texts, translated by T. W. 
Rhys Davids and H. Oldenberg (Part I—III. Oxford 1881—85 == 


126 


Sacred Books of the East vol. XIII, XVII. XX). Part I p. 73—78; 
Warren: Buddhism p. 83—84, The verse — As, p. 17, Nett. p. 145 
(Buddhaghosa, in As. p. 17—18, says that this verse was ,,pathamam Buddha- 
vacanam“, but he mentions also a different tradition, according to which 
the verses in Dbpd. 153—4 (= Jiit. I 76) were the first words of the 
Buddha, cp. Dhpd. (1855) p. 320—1, JRAS. V. p. 228). 


. 87. — ĪDHAMMACAKKA-PAVATTANA-ŠUTTA p. 66,22—67,19 = SN. V 
420,34—422,2 (= Vin. I 10,10—ss), Translated: SBE. XI p. 146 & 
XIII p. 94 & by Feer JA. 1870. I p. 363. Cp. Mahāvastu III p. 331. 


38. — YASAPABBAJJĀ p. 67,20— 10,18 = Vin. I 15,1—18,*. Trans- 
lated by Rhys Davids & Oldenberg SBE. XIII p. 102—108; cp. 
Lalita Vistara ed. by Rājendrālāla Mitra (Calc. 1877) p. 251; Sp. 
Hardy, Manual of Buddhism, p. 156 (159); P. Bigandet, The Life 
or Legend of Gaudama (Rangoon 1866) p. 55; H. Alabaster, The 
Wheel of the Law (London 1871) p. 125. — P. 67,27—33, cp. Note 2 p. 
102 of the translation and the text above p. 64,32—65,12. 


39. — Tux Fire-Szemon p. 70,19—71,8 = Vin. I 34,11—35,12. 
Trans], SBE. XIII p. 134—865, Warren p. 531, Oldenberg, Buddha p. 209. 


40. — Maza as Prowman p. 71,19—72,25 = SN. I 11446—1106,12. 
Translated by Warren p. 349, and by E. Windisch, Mara und Buddha 
(Leipz. 1895) p. 104. — P. 71,31 & 72,6 cakkhura Gs the Copenhagen 
Ms. Oz, Ed. cakkhu); 72,s—14 jivhā Ck (Ed. jihvā); 72,4 photthabbo Ck (Ed. 
potthabo!); 72,18 —18 ghanam Ck (Ed. ghanam); 72,20 mawa-y-idan to be 
read: mumēdan. The two gāthās — SN. I 116,8—11, 123,10—14. 


41. — Tue MuRgbER or Sunnari p. 72,36—74,15 = Jat. II 415,u— 
417,16 (== The Commentary on Dhpd. v. 306 (Cod. C*! fol. tā)). Trans- 
lated Jat. II by Rouse p. 283. This legend is also briefly told in Udāna 
ed. by P. Steinthal (London 1885) p. 43—45 and in Pj. XLI (Comm. 
on Sn, v. 780 ff); cp. the parallel legend in Jat. IV p. 187 (= Dhpd. 
1855 p.338), L. Feer: Ciūcā-Māņavikā Sundari JA. sēr. 9 T. IX p. 288, 
and H. Kern: Buddhismus I p. 194. — The following readings I have 
adopted from the Ms. of the Comm. on Dhpd.: p. 73,13—16 -abhimukhi 
(Ed. -abhimukhà); 73,14 tena saddhim (Ed. tena); 73,51 āgamimsu (Ed. aga- 
mühsu); 73,4 akkosantā (Ed. akkositvā); 74,8 tumhehi sā māritā, (Ed. omits 
sā), — P. 74,1—2 (metre: Tristubh) = Dhpd. v. 306, Sn. v. 661, Udāna 
p. 45, Itivuttake ed, by E. Windisch (London 1890) p. 42,15; for the 
reading karomi c’ ba see FERREA Dhpd. (1855) p. 394. 


Pāli Reader... = | 17 


126 


42. — Devaparra's MALIOE against Buppaa p. 74,16—77,13 = Vin. 
II p. 188,24—189,4, 191,26—192,16, 22—23, 198,21—38, 194,22—196,4. Trans- 
lated SBE. XX p. 238—39, 243—44, 245—46, 247—50, Cp. the Commen- 
tary on Dhpd. v. 17 & 90 (Dhpd. 1855 p. 144 & 279), Jat. V. 333—37, where 
the legend of Nālāgiri is given in a more detailed form. — P. 75.27—pe— 
as above p. 68.19—21; 76,1 Ed. papatikā ought to be corrected to papatikā; 
77,3—7 == Jat. V. 336,19; the metre Vaitaliya (see Fausbøll Dhpd. (1855) 
p. 441), kunjara sugati are to be read: Kunjarà sugati metri causa, pāmado, 
aor, as mado and asado (Kd. pamado, the same form of this aor. occurs 
Jat. V 128,27; 223,29; VI 94,30, but it must, metri causa, be corrected to 
pāmado; even in prose: this form occurs: SN. II 278,26, IV 263,20), yato 
is gen. pres, part; 77,12—13 == MN. JI 105.7, Th. v. 878. 


48. — Buppna's Visir ro CuNpA p. 77,11—78,32 == Mahāparinibbāna- 
Sutta (DN. XVI) ed. by R. C. Childers JRAS, vol. VIJI (1878) p. 
230,50—232,23 (77,17 ff = Udana p. 81,12—82); the Digha Nikāya ed. by 
Rhys Davids and Carpenter; Vol. II (London 1903) p. 126—28. 
Translated by Rhys Davids: Buddhist Suttas (Oxford 1881) p. 70—75. 
— P. 78,29--30 == Mil. p. 174—75; 78,s1—32 Tristubh; in order that the 
metre may be correct we have to read Satthu instead of Satthuno, and 
instead of nagaram we want a word of the type ~ — —. 


vē 44, — Bupbna's Deatu p. 79,1—81,+ == Mahāparinibbāna-Sutta, JRAS 
VIII p. 250,14—252 = DN, yol..]l, pag. 154— 57. "Translated by Rhys 
Davids: Buddhist Suttas and by Warren p. 107—110 (excepting the 
end of our text from 80,19). — P. 79,16—34 = AN, II p. 79,144—80,12; 
80,1—s cp. As. p. 21; 80,1—81,4 = SN. I p. 158—-59; 80,2s—29 = Jat. 
I. p. 392, SN. I p. 6,4—5, II p. 193,13, Th. v. 1159; 80,33—35 = Th. 
905—6; 80,33 yam kalam akari muni, SN. & Th.: cakkhuma parinibbuto; 
> 81,3-—4 = Th. v. 1046 (cp. v. 1158). 


45. — Tur Ten Precepts p. 81,6—28 = Vin. I 83,16—84,4. Transl. 
SBE. XIII p. 210—12. — P. 81,2::—38 cp. Khp. II (JRAS. vol. IV 
(1870) p. 310), Dhpd. v. 246—47, Warren p. 397. 


46—47. — Tak 32 Parts or raz Bopy & Tux Novices Questions 
p. 82,1—14 = Khuddakapātha ed, transl. by R. C. Childers (JRAS. N. S. 
vol. IV (1870) p. 310—39) ch. II—III. — P. 82,8 Ed. eka’ nama kim. 


48. — Tux Durs or a Purin p. 82,15—84,24 = Vin. I 46,2—48,14. 
Transl, SBE, XIII p. 154—59. — P. 84,22 paripphositva (Ed. parippositvà). 


49. — A Tare or a Pura p. 84,25—86,10 = Dhammapāla"s Paramattha- 
Dipani P. IIT, being the Commentary on the Peta-Vatthu, ed. by E. Hardy 


127 


(London 1894) I 2 (p. 9—12). — P. 84,» khuppipāsābhibhūto peto B 
(Ed. khuppipāsāhi gunüpeto, C-Mss, günopeto, which must be a misscript for 
bhütopeto); 85,1—2 piņdacāratthāya (Ed. piņdacāratvāya); 85,8 samantato pa- 
bhasati vijjotati (Ed. pabhāseti vijjoteti); 85,18 kāyikena (Ed. kāyaū cárikena); 
85,51 dittham B (Ed. dittho); 85,52 kim idan ti ce ti aha (a later correction 
by E. Hardy; Ed. kim idan ti peti aha); 86,7—s Ed. anekā kāravo karam 
(misprint), The gāthās == Pv. ed. by Minayeff (Lond. 1889) I 2 (p. 1). 


50. — Tux LrcenD or tue Weaver's DAUGTHKR 86,12—89,17 = the 
Commentary on Dhpd. v. 174 (the Copenhagen Ms. Ct! (in Dhpd. 1855 
marked B) fol. thlr—thlr'), cp. Dhpd. 1855 p. 337, where the verbal- 
commentary [88,31—89,9] is edited; Dhammapadatthakatha by Buddha- 
ghosa, revised and edited by W. Dhammananda and M. Nanissara 
(Colombo 1898) p. 428—931. To unterstand the topographical relations 
in this tale it is necessary to suppose that the *pesakára-sála' has been 
situated in the town, and the weaver's house in the quarters of the lower 
castes outside tbe town (cp. R. Fick: Die sociale Gliéderung im nordóst- 
liehen Indien zu Buddha’s Zeit (Kiel 1897) p. 196 & 211). I note here 
the following readings of the Ms.: p. 86.14 Alaviyam anupatto; 86,17 jitam 
eva... maranasati; 86,18 sesanhi; 86,19 santāsapatto... kalam; 86,23 sam- 
kiecapasutā; 86,25 vaddhati; 86,38 nam kumarikam; 86,32 catusu; 87,1 om. 
[gātbam]; 87, -bhikkhuparivāretvā; 87,6 sāmi; 87,9 [datthuin] madhurodaū ca; 
87,10 sāļam; 87,11 parasantako me sātako āropito (the reading of the Co- 
lombo Edition; Ck has: parasantako aparo pito); 87,12 vaddhetvā throughout; 
87,14 sunàmi pitu saram; 87,15 anacariyamane potheyyāpi pamāreyya pi (or 
pacāreyya?); 87,z1—a2 tuņhībhūtā... visati; 87,34 tuņhībhūto; 87,36 gamis- 
satiti; 88,4 kathesi kim nama imāya; 88,7 om. [puttha]; 88,8 āgatabhāvam na 
janatha ; ‘88,22 vaņņabhāvam eva aham jānāmi... rattim divam pubbaņhādisu ; 
88,29 andhabhüto ayam balo; 88,50 appossaggāya; 88,34 kevaddhakesu (Trenck- 
ner: vattakesu); 89,5—« tasarapacchi ceva kotiyam (Trenckner: vemako- 
tiyan); 89,7 memar kaddhi; 89,10 nibbattetum; 89,16 pāpuninsū "ti, 


51. — Tur Questions or Urmya p. 89,18—91.12 = AN. V. p. 193— 
95; p. 91,15—5s == Manoratha-pürani Ct p. 1269 (a Cingalese Paper-Ms. in, 
the Royal Library of Copenhagen). Cp. Potthapāda-Sutta DN. I p. 187 ff. 
and the Māluūīkyāputta-Sutta (MN. 63), of which the last part is printed 
below; cp. Mil. ed. by V. Trenckner (Copenhagen 1880) Note p. 424. 
— P. 89,20 —31, cp. Sn. v. 419; 90,s0—91, == Mahāparinibbāna-Sutta (DN.) 
JRAS. VII (1875) p. 59,4—12; cp. SN. V 160; 91,5 ussukam (Ed. ussuk- 
kata); 91,is paūcame o: Upasaka-Vagga, Sutta 5; 91,19 pākāro na hoti, Ms. 
paküram hoti; 91,25 Ms. eko ca vattati; 91,52' Ms, sattüpaladdhim (cp. 91,18). 


52. — Buppmas Insravorton ro Mānvšgvāpurra p. 91,1—98,19 = 


128 


Majjhima-Nikāya ed. by V. Trenckner (London 1888) (63.) vol. I p. 
498,55—439,. Transl. Warren p. 119—22 (cp. Oldenberg: Buddha 
p. 281 ff.). To avoid repetitions I have here and on the following pages 
made use of further abreviations than are found in the Mes. and editions; 
the reader will easily be able to supply the abreviated passages. 


53. — Buppna's Discourse WITH VACCHAGOTTA p. 93,30—9B5,s = 
"MN. (72) Vol. I. p. 483—89, cp. SN. IV 3958. Translated by Warren 
p. 123—928; p. 94,34—9D,15 translated JPTS. 1904—05, p. 165—66. — 
P. 95,97 nikkujjita (Ed. nikujjitam). 


54. — Tue Rieut Views p. 96,1—33 == SN. XII, 15 (the Copen- 
hagen Ms. fol ghi-ghu) — Samyutta-Nikaya ed. by L. Feer, Part II p. 
17. — P. 96,6-—22 == SN. lI p. 135,1—19; 96,0 dvayam nissito (Mes. 
dvayanissito, so also the Editions of Feer and of the King of Siam; 96,10 
upāyupādānābhinivesa-nibandho (Ms. -nivesaū ca nibaddho and -nivesana- 
khandho, Editions: -nivesa-vinibandho); 96,11 tañ c’ āyam... na kamkhati 
(9: tam ce ayam — na kamkhati, itaque si quis non dubitat, ayam being 
designation of the person represented in ‘passato’ above), the punctuation, 
I hope, will show how [ have understood this passage, for nearer infor- 
mation see the glossary; 96,18—23 = p. 66,6—18. 


55. — Turre 1s No Eco p. 96,35— 98,55 == Milinda-Paüha, ed. by V. 
Trenckner (London 1880) p. 25,1--28,12 (with some few abreviatiens). 
Translated by Warren p. 129—33 and by Rhys Davids: SBE, XXXV 
p. 40—45. — P. 98:30—31 = SN. I p. 135,20—a1. 


56. — No Continuous Personau ĪDENTITY p. 99,1—15 = Mil, p. 40,1 
—41,10. Translated by Warren p. 148—50 and by Rhys Davids SBE, 
XXXV p. 63—65. — P. 99,10—11 cp. Jàt. IV 496,25, SN. I 206,11. 

57. o Renmrn 18 NOT ĪRANSMIGRATION p. 100—101 = Mil. p. 46,5: 
—48,:6. Translated by Warren p. 234—38 and by Rhys Davids SBE, 
XXXV p. 11—75, partly transl. by R. Garbe, Beiträge zur indischen 
Kulturgeschichte (Berlin 1903) p. 129—30. Cp. the parallel passage Mil. 
p. 72. — P. 1012 māraņantikam, cp. 78,50 & Mil, p. 421. 


58. — Tur DisAPPEARANCE oF AEN p. 102 = JPTS. 1886 . jp. 
95,5—s5 (Anāgata-vamsa ed. by J. Minayeff). Translated by Warren 
p. 482—84. — P. 102,5 Ed. pariyatti antarshitezm; 102, akūlino (Ms. 
akuliro); 102,18 asakkontà (Ed. asakkonto); 102,3 dhürayissanti (Ed. dhà- 
rayissati); 102,22 Ed. catuppádikam gātharn; 102,24 oaigotake (Ed, carhkotakë), 


129 


69. — Papnàáxa-Surra p. 103,1—104,15 = Sn, III,2 (28) (= Sutta- 
Nipāta, ed, by. V. Fausbøll (London 1885) p. 74—78). Translated by 
V. Fausbøll SBE. Vol. X Part II. 2. edition p. 68—71; by E. Win- 
disch, Mara und Buddha, p. 3 (= Lalita Vistara, ch. XVIII; Mahāvastu 
II,...237),; Danish Translation by D. Andersen: Udsigt over det philol.- 
hist. Samfunds Virksomhed (1899—1904) p. 90—92; cp. Windisch, 
Māra u, Buddha, p. 322; R. Pischel, Ins Gras beissen (Berl. Sitz-Ber. 
1908) p. 461 ff.; Oldenberg, ZDMG. Vol. 62, p. 594 — V. 1 tam mam 
padhanapahitattam, the metre is incorrect, but the Burmese reading padbā- 
pshitattam can scarcely be allowed; if the words Tam... Bhagavā etad abravi 
in v. 6 have not been interpolated, I suppose we ought to read tam padhanap- 
(omitting mam); v. 3 maranassa (read: maranam?); v. 4 read: brahmacaryam ; 
v. 5 dukkaro (read: dukkho?); v. 7 anumattena (read: anumatto B), arahati 
(read: arhati); v. 8.read: viryam; v. 12 read: dutiyārati, the first foot of 
the fourth pada increased by one syllable; v. 17 the first foot has 5 sylla- 
bles; v. 19 bhaüjami (Ed. gacehāmi, cp. SBE. X, 2 p. 70 note; R. Pischel, 
Indische Miscelen, KZ. (BB) I p. 182); v. 21 omitting [te] in the first 
and the third pada the metre would be correct; v. 22 is found Ps. comm. 
on MN. 91 and Pj. comm. on Sn. v. 23, Bhagavantam (read: Bhavantam); 
v. 23—24 = SN. I p. 124,4—-7, anupariyaga (v. 23, read anuparyagā); v. 
25 = Dhpd. (1855) p. 256,6—7, SN. I p.. 122,23---24. 


60. — Daanrya-Sorra p. 104,19—105,32 = Sn. I 2 (p. 3—5). Trans- 
lated by V. Fausbøll SBE. Vol. X Part II, 2. ed. p. 3—5 (Sutta Ni- 
pata deutsch von A. Pfungst. 1. Lief. (Strassburg 1889) p. 4), by Rhys 
Davids: Buddhism (1896) p. 167, and by Pavolini, Buddismo (Milano 
1898) p. 125, — The Metre is Vaitaliya, see Fausbøll Dhpd. (1855) p. 
441: v. 1 duddhakhiro (read: duddhakhiro with shortened i metri causa) 
atha ce patthayasī pavassa deva, cp. Th. v. 51—54 & 325; v. 2 vigata- 
khilo (the metre requires vigatākhilo); v. 3 the second foot —— — 
instead of ——^-—-——; v. 5 read: digharatta-samvasiya; v. 7 the metre re- 
quires attavetanübhato; v. 11 susanthünà (read: susantha == Sa, su-samsthà); 
v. 12 read: náham pun’ upessa[m] — Mil. p. 369,5—s; v. 13 read: ma- 
hāmegho (with shortened o), sutva (read: sutvāna); v. 14 read: saranam tam 
upema; v, 15 read: brahmacaryam; v. 16—17 = SN. I p. 6,9—1s & I p. 
107—108, Nett. p. 34, cp. Mehāvastu III p. 417—18. 


Va. — SELECTIONS FROM THF ĪDEAMMAPADA p. 106,1—107,97. For Edi- 
tions and Translations of this book see: Dhammapada, 2 ed. by V. Faus- 
bgll (London 1900) p. IX—XI.—v. 49 = Jat. 1 349,u, & Nett. p. 184, 
cp. Fausbgll Bem, p. 26. — v. 266 = SN. I 182,15, cp. Ms. Khar. p. 
50,. SBE, X 67; bhavati (Mss. hoti), cp. Fausbøll Dhpd. (1855) p. 


130 


437, 2. ed. p. VI. — v. 267 = SN. I 182,20; brahmacariyava (read: brah- 
macaryava), there cannot be any doubt about reading this and similar words 
in a contracted form as has heen done by Prof. Fausbgll in his 2. ed, 
of Dhpd. — v. 393 suci Ce Sk (Ed. sukhi) — v. 394 — Jat. I 481,5, 
III 86,13. — v. 176 = It. p. 18,1. — v. 252 cp. Jat. III 223,20, Chil- 
ders JRAS. V (1871) p. 225. — v. 240 — Nett. p. 129, Metre: Vai- 
taya; cp. Morris JPTS. 1887 p. 100. — v. 71 = Nett. p. 161. Cp. 
JRAS. V p. 294, — v. 5 = Jat. III 212,10, 488,9, Vin. I 349,34. — v. 
210 piyán' metri causa for piyānam (Mss.). — v. 80 = Dhpd. v. 145, MN. 
{I 105,5, Th. v. 19 & 877; metre Vaitaliya. — v. 81 = Mil. p. 386,12, 
cp, AN. III 379,1, Th. v. 643 and Vin. I 185,5. — v. 14 = Th. v. 184, 
cp. Dhpd. v. 13, Th. v. 133. — v. 222 cp, Mahābhārata I 3320; R. 
Pischel, Die Turfan-Recensionen des Dhammapada, (Berl. Sitz-Ber. 1908) 
p. 970; "taro metri causa for itara (Mss.). — v. 398 == It. p. 43,7 & 90,12, 
Vin. III 90,87. — v. 103 == Jat. I 314,11, cp. Ms. Khar. p. 73. — v. 148 
cp. It. p. 37,11—16; maranantam cp. SN. I 97,28, Fausbgll's notes in 
Dhpd. 2. ed. and SBE, X p. 41. — v. 278—79 = Th. v. 676—78, Nett. 
p. 6 & 167, cp. Ms. Khar. p. 19—20; in order to make the metre cor- 
rect we ought to omit [ti] in v. 277. — v. 190—92 cp. Jat. I p. 97 & 
Divyāvadāna p. 164; v. 190 — Sv. I p. 233,14, ariyasaccani (read: aryasac- 
cāni); v. 191 = Thi v. 186, 193, 321; ariyaū (read: aryaū). — v. 387 = 
SN. II 284,28. cp. I 16.10, Ms. Khar. p. 39; khattiyo (read: khatyo). — 
v. 18 Metre: Vaitüliya; suggetim == sugatim, cp. Dhpd. (1855) p. 150. 


62. — Tue Gārnās or MĀLUNKYĀPUTTA p. 107,28— 108,» == Thera- 
gāthā 399—404 (Thera- and Therī-gāthā ed, Oldenberg & Pischel (1883) 
p. 43—44). — v. 1—4 = Dhpd. v. 334—37, cp. Ms. Khar. p. 18; v. 1 
Metre: Vaitālīja; v. 3 yo œ etam (Ed. yo ve tam); v. 4 the first half-cloka 
== Jat. III 387,21, IV 211,6 V 72,9, Pv. IL 7 v. 16; v. 5 cp. Dhpd, v. 315, 
Sn. v. 333, Th. v. 653, 1005; v. 6 = Sn. v. 334; sabbadā Ms. A. (Ed. 
om., BC and Sn, 334 pamādā). pamādānupatito (read: pamaduppatito?). 


63. — Tux Gārnās or Manārajārparī Goramī p. 108,10—s29 = Theri- 
gatha v. 157—62 (p. 138—39). — v. 3 samsari "ham (Ed. samsari 'ham); 
v. 4 — Thi v. 22; v. b read: āraddhavirye, for the metrical anomaly cp. p. 
103,2 & Thi v. 212, SN. I p. 198,17; Buddhāna == Buddbánam. 


64, — KarIRAJA-CABIYA p: 108,2s—s1 = II[L, (Buddhavamsa and Ca- 
riyā-pitaka ed. by R. Morris (1882) p. 97). Cp. Vānarinda-Jātaka p. 2—3. 


65. — Tar Cooncw or ManáxassapA p. 109,1—110,18 = Dipavamsa 
ed. by H. Oldenberg (London 1879) IV v. 1—23 (p. 30—32), trans- 


131 


lated ibid. p. 133—3b: cp. Mahavamsa III. For the literary history of 
the two Buddhist Chronicles see Introduction to Oldenberg's edition of 
Dipavamsa; W. Geiger, Dipavamsa und Mahavarnsa (Erlangen 1901; aus 
der Festschrift der Univ.); W, Geiger, The Dipavamsa and Mahávamsa and 
their historical development in Ceylon (German edition, Leipzig 1905, 
translated into English by E. M. Coomaraswamy. Colombo 1908); R. 
O. Franke, Dipavamsa und Mabavamsa, WZKM. XXI. 203 ff, 317 f; W. 
Geiger, Noch einmal Dipavamsa und Mahavamsa, ZDMG. 63 (1909) p. 
540. — V. 1 satt’ eva (read: satta ?), araha (read: arhā). --- v. 9 read: 
samādhijhān. — v. 11 sutā patiggahitā (Ed.). — v. 16 pavibhajja (Ed. pa- 
vibhattā). — v. 18 katvā dhammaū (Ed, katadhanmaū), asamkampi acalam 
bhümi dalham appativattiyam (Ed.) — v. 19 cápi (Ed, vápi). — Insigni- 
ficant metrical anomalies [ have not noted here, the passages put into [ ] 
must, in my opinion, be considered as interpolations and from vv. 22—23 
of the edition [ have totally omitted two half-clokas. 


V 66. — Tas Conquest or Cxvrox p. 110,17—112,4 == Mahāvamsa VII 
v. 1—42, edited from the Cingalese Ms. of the Copenhagen Collection (= 
The Mahāvamsa, ed by W. Geiger (London 1908) p. 62—66; edited for 
the first time: The Mahavanso in Roman characters with the Translation 
subjoined by G. Turnour. Vol. I (Ceylon 1837) p. 47—50. (The Maha- 
vansa, Part II containing ch. XXXIX to C. Translated by L. C. Wije- 
sinha, to which is prefixed the translation of the first part (published in 
1837) by G. Turnour (Colombo 1889) p. 31—34); cp. Dīpavamsa IX. 
The Verses 26 if. have been published by Edm. N. Snyder: Der Com- 
mentar und die Textüberlieferung des Mahavamsa (Berlin 1891, Diss. Leip- 
zig) p. 40—42. Cp. Homeri Odyssea X v. 210 f; Weber: Ueber das 
Ramayana, Abhandl. d. Akad. d. Wiss. Berlin 1870; Geiger, Dipavamsa 
and Mahávamsa (English Transl.) p. 23 Note. — v. 2 varam (Ms. varo). 


— v. 8 ca. (Ms. ce). — v. 9 Ms. lagetvā, sonirüpena. — v. 10 vāriyanto 
(Ms. varayanto) = vāriyamāno. — v. 12 Ms. ca ādāya ca mulālayo. — v. 14 
Ms, sakkuni; yāciyanto == yāciyamāno. — v. 17 Ms. passi tai corr. to ha- 


santiñ. — v. 21 dasi (Ms. bhāsi). — v. 22 Ms. jivikan. — v. 23 Ms. adu- 
bhayatthāya ... ānehi bhacche hi. — v. 24 Ms. nàvattham. (cp. Vin. III p. 
49,11). — v. 30 Ms. tūriyasaddaū ce... kithsadde, — v. 31 Ms. ghatissanti. — 
v. 32 Ms. Sirisavatthu ... yakkhepuram. — v. 35 Ms. āha dissamane, — 
v. 97 yakkharājā. — v. 38 Ms. vasinettha, — y. 42 Ms. narindo siham 
adinnava . . . Sihalà. | 


ik 67. — Bunonagnosa p. 113,1—114,82 == the Copenhagen Ms, of Ma- 
havathsa XXXVII v. 215—46 (== Mahāvamsa by Turnour p. 260—653, 
Wijesinha’s Translation p. 160—62, reprinted SBE. X. Introduction, 


132 


p. XXIX—XXXI), edited by H. Qldenberg JPTS. 1882 p. 110—12. 
— v. 1 Ms. vijjasippa-. — v. 6 Ms. dhaggayi. — v. 7 otārehi ca (read: 
otārehiti?), pālim (Ms. pālim throughojit). - — v. 8 Ms. ganhi, — v. 1] Ms. 
Dhammasanganiyà... Atthasālinam -— v. 13 Ms. Atthakathā. — v. 15 Ms. 
Sīhaļabhāsāya (id. v. 30). — v. 18 Ms. Mahāpadhānam gharam — v. 19 
Ms. Sihala- — v. 20 Ms. atthakatham (id. v. 22 & 29). — v. 22 Ms. nāmāka. 
— v. 25 mari (Ms. maru). — v. 26 Ms. vácesimsu. — v. 27 Me. aūatat- 
tham, — v. 28 Ms, tutthahattho, — v. 32 Ms. attakattabba-. 


SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE, — Several of the Texts above have been prin- 
ted in other handbooks for Pali, esp. in J. Takakusu, A. Pali Chresto- 
niethy, with notes and glossary giving Sanskrit and Chinese equivalents. 
Tokyo 1900. A German translation of some of our texts may also be 
found in J. Dutoit, Das Leben des Buddha, Eine Zusammenstellung alter 
Berichte aus den kanonischen Schriften der südlichen Buddhisten, Aus dem 
Pāli übers. u. erläutert. Leipzig 1906, and in the same author's transla- 
tion of the Jātaka (Leipzig 1907 ff). 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


AN. == Anguttara-Nikaya, As =: Atthasālinī, It, = Itivuttaka, Khp. = 
Khuddaka-patha, Jat. == Jātaka, Th, ==: Thera-gatha, ‘hi — Therigatha, DN, = 
Digha-Nikaya, Dhpd. == Dhammapada, Nett. == Netti-pakarana, Pj, = Paramattha- 
jotika, Ps, = Papanca-sudani, Pv. — Peta-vatthu, Mil. == Milinda-panba, MN, == 
Majjhima-Nikaya, Mp. == Manoratha-purani, Vin. == Vinaya-pitaka, SN. = Sam- 
yutta-Nikaya, Sn. = Sutta-nipāta, Sv, — Sumangala-vilasini, Ss. — Sārasaūgaha. 

BBS. == Buddhist Birth Stories. KSS, = Katha-Sarit-Sagara, JA. == Jour- 
nal Asiatique, JAOS, = Journal of the American Oriental Society, JPIS, = 
Journal of the Pali Text Society, JRAS. == Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, 
Ms. Khar, = Le Manuscrit Kharosthi du Dhammapada, par E. Sénart, JA, 1898, 
SBE. == Sacred Books of the East, ZDMG, == Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgen- 
lāndischen Gesellschaft, WZKM. == Wiener Zeitschrift fiir die Kunde des Morgen- 
landes, KZ (BB) — (Kuhn’s) Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung, ver- 
einigt mit Bezzenberger s Beiträge, 


———er P gt 
weep." ss “wa s s c 


A 


PALI GLOSSARY 


INCLUDING THE WORDS OF TITE 
PALI READER anor tm DHAMMAPADA 


DINES ANDERSEN, PH. D. 


PROFESSOR AT THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN 


COPENHAGEN , 
GYLDENDALSKE BOGHANDEL, NORDISK FORLAG 


LEIPZIG 
0. HARRASSOWITZ 


1904—1905 


NIELSEN & LYDICHE 
(AXEL, SIMMELKLAR) 


MY TEACHER AND FRIEND 


PROFESSOR DR. PHIL. V. FAUSBØLL 


IN COMMEMORATION OF 


THE 502! ANNIVERSARY OF HIS FIRST EDITION 


OF THE 


DHAMMAPADA 
Copenhagen, March 15., 1905 


DINES ANDERSEN 


A. 


a-l, the base of pron. gen. assa, assā, 
v. ayam. 
a-*, the prp. ā-, shortened before 
double cons. v. akkamati, akkosati ete. 
a-”, the augment originally prefixed 
to the verbal root in the formation of 
the impf., wor, & cond. tenses, in most 
cases dropped after mà (q. v.) and gene- 
rally omitted in ordinary prose. List 
of augmented forms occurring in the 
texts of the Reader & the Dhp.: 
a-kā, a-karī, a-kāsi, a-kamsu, 
a-karamhase, v. karoti. 
a-karayi, v. kareti. 
a-galünchi, a-gama, a-gamāsi, 
a-gamaimsu, v. gacchati. 
a-ggahi, a-ggahum, a-ggahesi, 
v. ganhati. 
a-ghātayi, v. ghāteti. 
a-cüri, v. carati. 
a-c&vayl, v. caveti. 
a-cchidda, a-cchindi, v. chin- 
dati. 
a-jali, v. jalati. 
a-jini, v. jināti. 
a-ttha, a-tthasi, a-tthamsu, v. 
titthati. 
a-tari, v. tarati. 
a-dā, a-d&si(À), a-damsu, v. 
dadāti. 
a-desayi, v. deseti. 
a-ddakkhi, v. dakkhati. 
a-ddasa, a-ddasa, a-ddasama, 
a-ddasasum, v. dissati. 


Pali Glossary. 


a-passi, 9. passāti. 

a-pucchi, a-pucchithsu, v. puc- 
chati. 

a-pūjesum, v. pujeti. 

a-plaviih. v. p(a)lavati. 

a-bravi, a-bruvi. v. brüti. 

a-bhavissa (cond.), v. bhavati, 

a-bhassatha, v. bhassati. 

a-bhznim, v. bhanati. 

a-bhiasi, a-bhasatha, v. bhasati. 

a-vaca(m) a-voca, a-vocum, v. 
vadati. 

a-vadhi, v. vadhati. 

a-vadesi. v. vadeti. 

a-samsi, v. samsati. 

a-sakkhi(ih), v. sakkoti. 

a-ssumha. 9. sunati. 

a-hayatha. v. hayati. 

a-hiisi, v. harati. 

a-hu, a-hum, a- huvā, a-huva- 
ttha, a-huvamhase, a-hosi(m), 
a-hesui, v. hoti. 

asim, v. atthi. 

àcCc-a-gà, acc-a-gama, 9. ale 
gacchati. | 

ajjh-a- ga. 
gacchati. 

ajjh-a-bhasi, v. adhi-bhāsati. 

ajjh-a-vāsayi, v. adhi-vaseti. 

ànu-pariy-a-gà, v. anu-pari- 
gacchati. 

anv-a-gā, v. anu-gacchati. 

apáà-naYi v. apa-neti. 


ajjh-a-gü, v. adhi- 


upacc-a-gà, v. (upati-gacchati). 
upá-gami, v. upa-gaechati. 


upáà-visi, v. upa-visati. 
pacc-a-ssosi, pacc-a-ssosum, 

v. pati-suniiti. 
pā-mado, 9. pa-majjati. 
pā-yāsi, pà-yimsu, v. pa-yati. 
pā-vassi, v. pa-vassati. 
pá-visi, v. pa-visati. 
pā-hesi, v. pahinati. 
vyapā-nudi, v. vyapa-nudati. 

a-t, negative particle, prefixed to 
the following words, 1) to nouns (subst., 
adj., adv.), 2) to verbal forms (mostly 
to part., grd., ger. or inf., rarely to 
finite verbal forms). In comp. with 
words beginning originally with two 
consonants the first cons, is generally 
doubled (v. a-ppativattiya, a-pacca- 
kkhitya), and before vowels it has al- 
ways the form an- (v. below). As to 
the signification it is often opp. to sa- 
(q. v.) and synom. with the particles na-, 
nir-, vi- (vina- ?). Sometimes this par- 
ticle is found repeated: an-a- (as a 
kind of stronger negation (?), cp. an-a- 
bhavakata [but an-a-kama, not un- 
willing]). It is doubtful whether this par- 
ticle is contained in comp. like phalā- 
phala, maggamagga etc. (q. v.). [R. Otto 
Franke: a-pacasi, ZDMG. XLVHI,ss 
(cp. a-sakkoti, Dhpd. (1855) p. 102,14. 
a-sakkhi, Jt. I, 382,24. an-abhirami, 
Jat. IIT, 30,20). G. Bühler: ZDMG. 
XL, 544 (cp. Jat. I, 171,1. 385,1]. 
a-kakkasa, mfn. free from harsh- 

ness, Dh. 408. (am, dcc. m.). 
a-kata, a) mfn. not 'done, left un- 

done, Dh, 50.165.314. b) x. the 

uncreated (9. Nibbāna): a-kata- 

jiūu!, mfn. Dh. 97. 383. (^), 

knowing the uncreated. 
a-kataüiu?, mfn. ungrateful, 14,1. 
a-kattar, m. who does no good, 14,1 

(acc. -iiram). 
a-katva, v. karoti. 
a-katham-kathin, mfn. free from 

doubt (katham -katha). n 411. 

414 (4, m.). 
a-kathetva, v. katheti. 
a-karana, ^. omission, avoiding of, 


Dh. 183. 333. 


&-karonta, v. karoti. 

a-kama, mfn. unwilling, reluctant, 
104,10. "(wassa, m. gen.). 

a- -kāranena, instr. adv. without 
(reasonable) cause, 34,17. 58,11, v. 
karana. 

a-kariya, mfn. not to be done, that 
may not be done, 106,15 — Dh. 176. 
v. karoti. 

&-kila, m. wrong time, or mfn. un- 
seasonable, 25,21. 37,16, v. kala. 
a-kicca, mfn. not to be done, Dh. 

74, 293, v. karoti. 

a-kiūcana, mfn. without anything, 
calling nothing his own, disinter- 
ested, Dh. 88. 221. 396 == 431. 

a-kifici, adv. not a little, Dh. 390, 
v. koci (cp. na). 

a-kujjhitvā, v. kujjhati. | 

a-kutobhaya, mfn. (== sa, from 
kuto -|- bhaya, q. .), knowing no 
fear, secure, Dh. 196 (xe, acc. pl. m.). 

a-kuddha, mfn. not angry, 11,17 
(wassa, gen.), v. kujjhati. 

a-kubbato, gen. m., from part. kub- 
bam, (v. karoti), who does not act, 
Dh. 51, 124. 

a-kulin, mfn. (fr. kula, g. v.), of 
base extraction, 102,4 (~ino rā- 
jano, nom. pl. m.). 

a-kusala, mfn. evil, 75,4 (yatha 
~wam, ace. m.); n. «am, evil deed, 
demerit, 97.13, Dh. 281. 

a-kkodha, m. mildness, 44,3 — Dh. 
223 (~ena, instr.), v. kodha. 

a-kkodhana, mfn. free from anger, 
104,4. Dh. 400, v. kodhana. 

a-kkhara, q. v. 

a-ganhanti, v. ganhati. 

a-gata, mfn. not gone to, 48,11; not 
frequented, Dh. 323, v. gata. 

a-gantva, v. gacchati. 

a-gandhaka,mfn. (fr. gandha, g. v.), 
without odour (opp. sa-gandhaka), 
Dh. 51 (~am puppham). 

a-gahetva, v. ganhati. 

a-guna, m. fault, ~o, 43,4, ~am, 
43.1. wi (pl) 44 EP 0-gavesaka, 
mfn. seeking his own faults, 43,16 
(~o); %-vādin, mfn. telling one of 


his faults, ~i, with (nom. acc. m.) 
43,5. 43,6. 

a-caritvā, v. Carati. 

a-carima, mfn. not subsequent, not 
last; „am, adv. 99,26 (cp. a-pubba). 

a-cala, mfn. immovable, firm, 110,7 
(~a bhūmi). 

a-cira, mfn. short, brief; „ar, adv. 
soon, before long, 107,5 — Dh. 41; 
0-ppakkanta, mfn. 70.13 ~e, loc. 
soon after he was gone (cp. pakka- 
mati). 

a-ccuta, mfn. not fallen, permanent, 
unchangeable, Dh. 225 ~am thā- 


nam, Nibbana (cp. cuta & cavati). 


a-cchidda, mfn. uninjured, fault- 
less, blameless; °-vutti adj. m. Dh. 
229 (xim, ace.) of blameless con- 
duct. | 
a-chinditva, v. chindati. 
à-jaina, mfn. not to be produced 
(v. jāyati); x. a portent; purisā- 
Jañüo, m. Dh. 193, q.v. 
a-jünanta (gen. a-jānato), a-jā- 
nitvā, v. janāti. 
a-jhayato len ), v. jhāyati. 
&-Tiliina, n. ignorance, 94,21 (~am, 
acc.), 94,21 (~āya. dat.) cp. hana. 
à-inata, mfn. unknown (v. jinàti), 
~am, nom. n. 92,25. ~ anam, gen. 
m, pl. unknown persons, 90,32. 
a-ññataka, mfn. (anata w. suf. 
-ka) id. °-vesena, instr. in dise 
guise 43,12 (cp. vesa). 
a-tthina, m. wrong place or wrong 
time (v. thāna), 34,22 (~e, loc); an 
impossible thing, that cannot take 
place 76,26 (arii, nom.). 
a-takkavacara, mfn. being beyond 
the sphere of thought, 94,25 (takka 
+ avacara, g.v.). 
à-tandita. mfn. not slothful, 
wearied, Dh, 305. 366. 375. 
a-titta, mfn. unsatisfied, insatiate, 
52,24 ~am (acc. f) kāmesu, in- 
satiate in pleasures; Dh. 48. 
a-tula, mfn. unequalled; m.nom.pr. 
(g.v.) Dh. 227. 
a-danda, mfn. 1) without stick, 77, 
t3 (wena, instr.) — *) exempt from 


une 


| 
| 
| 


punishment, innocent, Dh. 137 
(esu. loc, pl.). 

a-datvā. v. dadati. 

a-dassana, s. not seeing (w. gen.); 
piyanamn ~am, 106,26 = Dh. 210; 
wena (instr. morassa. before the 
peacock had appeared, 18,32; Dh.206; 
~am gacche, will not see, Dh. 46. 

*a-datukimati; f. (fr. inf. dii- 
tum v. dadati) -- i w. suff. 
-tā) unwillingness to give, ~mi 
(acc.) 16,11, —3ya (instr. „because 
you do not wish to give it*) 23.36. 

a-dinna, mfn. not given; „am ädi- 
yati, to take what is not given, to 
steal, 97,10, Dh. 246. 409; a-dinnā- 
dana, n. stealing, 81,22 (~i, abl); 
a-dinnapubba. mfn. not given be- 
fore, 15,30 (ep. pubba). 

a-disvu, (a)-dissamana, v. dis- 
Sati. 

a-duttha. mfn. not guilty, innocent, 
Dh. 399. 

*a-dübha, mfn. not treacherous (or 
s. m.(?) not deceiving) 111.59: a- 
dūbhatthāya (dat. cp. attha!) „in 
order that she might not prove her- 
self treacherous“ (cp. dūbhati). 

a-ddhuva, mfu. not fixed, uncer- 
tain, 86,15 (ep. dhuva). 

a-dhamma, m. injustice, Dh. 248; 
wena (instr. adv.) unjustly, Dh. 84. 

*a-dhammika, mfn. unrighteous, 

impious, wit (m. pl.) 102.6. 

*u-dhammikatà, /. unrighteous- 

ness, „āya (instr.) 102.6, 

*a-nikkasava, mfn. not free from 

impurity, impure, Dh. 9 (cp. ka- 

sāva & kasàva). 

a-nicca mfn. (v. niecam) not eternal, 

transitory, impermanent, perishable, 

wa samkhars 80,5; 107,11 = = Dh. 

277; a-niccádi-vasena (instr.) 88,32 

yon account of the instability etc. 

of this world*(?) (cp. adi & vasa). 
a-niccata, f. transient existence, 

instabHity, mortality, ~ā (= a- 

niccataya, instr.) 95,32. 

a-nitthita, mfn. not finished, not 

completed, 87,11. 


a-nindita, mfn. (v. nindati), not 
blamed, Dh. 227. 

*a-nibbisam, part. adv. uselessly, 
fruitlessly, 108,16. Db. 153. (v. 
nibbittha; SBE. X, 43.) 

a-nimitta, mfn. causeless, ground- 
less, ~o vimokho (g. v.) — Nib- 
bāna, Dh. 92. 93. 

*a-nimisatà, f. not winking; ~āya 
(akkhinath) 59,5 „on account of her 
not winking“, ° 

a-niyata, mfn. not fixed, uncertain, 
~am jīvitam, 86,17. 

*a-niyata-gatika, mfn. whose path 
(through the numerous forms of life, 
v. gati) is uncertain, <à, f. 87,29. 

*a-niyyanika, mfn. unprofitable, 
9,29. 

a-nivattana, ». not turning back, 
not fleeing: °-dhamma, mfn. hav- 
ing the nature of not fleeing, 39.10 
„ā mahiyodha. (m. pl.). 

a-nivesana, mfn. homeless; inacces- 
sible to desire, free from attach- 
ment (?) Dh. 40. (cp. SBE. X, 14.) 

a-nissita, mfn. not dependent on, 
Dh. 93 āhāre <o, „not absorbed 
in is dienas 

*a-nīgha,mfn. scatheless, harmless (?) 
Dh, 294. 295. (Sa. *a-nighna, 
Morris JPTS. '91—93, p. 41 ff.: 
*a-nyagha (= an-agha), sinless, 
Fsb. cp. SBE, X, 71ff. The na- 
tives derive this word from *nigha 
„Buffering“ and explain it by nid- 
dukkha; cp. also sa. an-ehas 
(vib). 

a-paccakkhaya, v. paccakkhati. 

a-pañ ña, mfn. not intelligent, Dh. 
372. 

a-patikkamitva, v. patikkamati. 

a-pada, mfn. footless i. e. having no 
footing in the existence (samsara), 
Dh. 179. 180. 

*a-pabbajana, n. 47.5: °-atthaya 
(dat. v. attha!) ,to keep him from 
a religious life“, 

*a-para-ppaccaya,m/fn. notdepen- 
dent of others, ~o sasane (— „for 
the knowledge of the doctrine“) 69,14; 


aparappaccaya, abl. adv. ~ianam, 
intuitive knowledge, 96,11. 

a-pariggaha, mfn. unmarried, 56,4 
(nā, f.); %-bhāva, m. the unmarried 
state, 56,7 (cp. pariggaha). 

a-parighameanta, v. parigham- 
sati. 

*a-parisuddha, mfn. dirty, 41,1. 

a-parihina-jhana, w. uninterrup- 
ted meditation, 45,15 (v. parihayati). 

a-passanta, a-passitva, 9. pas- 
sati. 

a-pāra, z. not the opposite bank, 
Dh. 385 (v. pūra). 

a-puccha, mfn. not to be asked about, 
eam (acc, n.) 91,15 (v. pucchati). 

a-pujja, mfn. not to be revered, not 
deserving homage, 30,21 (v. pūjeti). 

a-puiiiia, %. demerit, 76,5 °-labha, 
m. acquisition of demerit, Dh. 309, 
310. 

*a-puthujjana-sevita, mfn. which 
common people cannot enjoy, Dh. 
272 (cp. sevati). 

a-pubba, mfn. not first, unprecee- 
ded (opp. a-carima); «am, adv. 
99,25: apubbam acarimam, „not 
before and not after“, „simulta- 
neously“ (Morris JPTS, '87 p. 101; 
Rhys Davids SBE. XXXV y. 64). 

a-ppagabbha, mfn. not arrogant, 
modest, quiet, Dh. 245 (v. pagab- 
bla). 

*a-ppatiechanna,7fx. notcovered, 
naked, 10,5 ~o ahosi, „he ex- 
posed himself“ (v. paticchanna). 

*a-ppatipuggala, mfn. unequal- 
led, 80,24 (v. pati-puggala). 

a-ppatibaddha-citta, mfn. one 
whose mind is not turned to (70c.), 
kamesu <o, „not bewildered by 
love*, Dh. 218 (v. patibaddha). 

a-ppativattiya, mfn. insubvertible, 
110,7 ~ā (f. bhümi). (v. pativatteti). 

*a-ppatikaraka, mfn. ungrateful, 
14,1: katassa „am (acc. m.) one 
who does not return what has been 
done. (v. patikáraka). 

*a-ppatissavàsa,. anarchy,10,31. 
(v. patissava). 


a-ppatta. m/n. not having obtained 
(ace.) Dh. 272. (v. patta? cp. SBE. 
X, p. 61). 

a-ppaduttha, mfn. harmless, Dh, 
125, (v. paduttha, cp. dussati). 

a-ppamatta, mfr. not slothful, ear- 
nest, zealous, strenuous, «à (m. pl.) 
104.9. Dh. 21. (v. pamatta, pa- 
majjati; cp. appa-matta). 

i-ppamada, m. carnestness, stre- 
nuousness, eO Dh. 91; we  Samhi 
(loc.) Dh. 22; «ena sampiidetha, 
„work out your salvation with dili- 
gence“ (instr. °-rata, mfn. de- 
lighting in earnestness, Dh. 31. 327. 
Ü-vagga, m. the second chapter of 
Dh. *?-vihariw. mfn. living stre- 
nuously, Dh. 57 (Ainai, gen. pl.) 
(cp. pamáda 4 pamajjati). 

a-ppameyya, mfn. immensurable, 
95,13. (v. pameyya). 

a-ppasanna, mfn. not quiet, un- 
believing, without faith, 76,0. (ep. 
pasanna £ pasidati). 

a-ppiya, mfn. unpleasant, disagree- 
able; ~ehi (instr. n, pl.) 67,9. 106,25 
== Dh. 210; «unam (gen. n. pl.) 
106.26 =: Dh. 210; m. ~o, an en- 
nemy, Dh. 77. (v. piya). 

a-phala, mfn, without fruit, impro- 
fitable, vain, wi vaca Dh. 51. (opp. 
sa-phala, cp. phalāphala). 

*a-phüsuka, mfn. unpleasant, un- 
easy; n. sickness, 46,5. 49,24. 28. kim 
te ~ai, what ails you? 49,25. 

a-bala, mfn. weak; *a-bal'-assa, m. a 
weak horse, a hack (opp. sighassa), 
Dh. 29. 

a-bbana, mfn. having no wound 
(vana, q. v.) Dh. 124. 

a-bbata, mfn. undisciplined, not ob- 
serving the religious duties (vata, 
g. v,) Dh. 264 (cp. subbata). 

a-brahmacariya, n. unchastity, 
impurity, ~ā (abl.) 81,22. 

a-bhabba, mfn. (v. bhabba £ bha- 
vati) unable, w. inf. 69,26: ~o 
Yaso kame paribhuūjitum, „it is 
impossible that Y. should enjoy 
pleasures“; w. dat. ~o parihà- 


naya, ,cannot fall away (from holi- 
ness)“, Dh, 32. 

a-bhaya (fr. bhaya, x.) !) mfa. 
free from fear, Dh. 258. 2) n. sa- 
fety, security, immunity, «am, nom. 
T, ace. 6,18, «e, loc. Tas Dh. 
317. *a-bhaya-laddhaka, mfn. 7.35, 
who has obtained immunity 
*laddhābhaya, mfn. 7,3 (cp. la- 
ddha). *a-bhaya-dassiw, mfn. see- 
ing no danger, Dh. 317 (Aino, m. 
pl.). 

a-bhäva. m. absence, non-existence, 
e (abl.) 42,30. 63.34 & wena 
(ins/r.) 59.15. 88,31, on account of 
the absence of (gen.); an-abhāva- 
kata, q. v. 

a-bhavita, mfn. (v. bhaveti) !) not 
produced, not praetised, not reali- 
zed, ^it (f. maranasati) 86,18. 2) not 
trained, not versed in religious prac- 
tise, ^mi (cittain) Dh. 13 „unre- 
flecting (opp. su-bhavita). 

a-bhita, mfn. that has not happened, 
wam (acc. n.) 9,29. *"-v&din, mfn. 
delighting in lie, mī (nom. m.) 74,1. 

a-bhejja, mfn. unconquerable, 9-va- 
rasura-, 39.12. 

a-magga, m. the evil path, Dh. 403 
(maggāmaggā). 

a-maūgala, mfn. unauspicious, un- 
gracious, impolite(?), ~ai (n. pati- 
kkhipanaih) 56,25. 

a-mata, mfn. immortal; 2. the im- 
mortal (= Nibbiina), Dh. 374; ~am 
padam (x.) Dh. 114 -- a-mata- 
pada, n. Dh. 21, the immortal place, 
Nibbana (opp. maccuno padari). 
*a-matogadha, x. (2) (cp. ogadha) 
the depth of Nibbana, Dh. 411. 

*a-mattaninu. mfn. immoderate 
(w. loc.) Dh. 7. 

a-madhura, mfn. not sweet, sour, 
bitter, %-samsaggena, „by the com- 
pany of the sour (plant)", 37,21. 

a-manussa, m. not a human being, 
pl. nū, 68,3 (cp. a-mānusa). 

a-mara, mfn. immortal, imperishable, 
n. ~a, 56,12; f. ~i, nom. pr. — 
Amaradevi, g. v. 


a-matu-hadaya, x. not a mother's 
heart, 59,12 (v. matar). 

a-mānušsa, mfn. not human, super- 
human; m. ~o (saddo) 27,6; fi wi 
(rati) Dh. 373 (cp. a-manussa). 

a-mārenta, v. mareti. 

a-mitta, m. an enemy, «enóva, 
(instr.) Dh. 66. 207 („as with an 
enemy", cp. iva). 

a-yasa, m. infamy, disgrace, acc. 
eam 73,8. 

a-yutta, mfn. unfit, unright, wrong, 
A. vam 38,19. 

&-yoga, m. not meditation, lack of 
devotion or religious exertion, abl, 
wa Dh. 282, loc. ~e Dh. 209. 

a-yojayam, v. yojeti. 

a-rakkhita, mfn. 9,0, = a-rak- 
khiya, mfn. 52,8. difficult to watch 
(v. rakkhati). 

a-rati, f. discontent, 108,25 (dutiya 
senā Marassa). 

a-rüjika. mfn. (sa. a-rijaka), hav- 
ing no king (v. rājat), n. ~am rat- 
tham, 31.1». 

a-roga, mfn. free from disease, heal- 
thy, m. pl. «à, 105,5 (cp. arogya). 

a-lajjitàya, mfn. what one ought 
not to be ashamed of, Dh. 316 (v. 
lajjati). 

a-laddha, a-labhanta, a-la- 
bhanti, a-labhamana, a-la- 
bhitva v. labhati. 

a-lasa, mfn. (— sa.) without energy, 
lazy, slothful, Dh. 280 (cp. ala- 
siya). 

*a-lina, mfn. free from attachment, 
instr, «ena, Dh. 245 (cp. alliyati). 

a-lola, mfn. unagitated, not desi- 
rous, not wanton, f. «à (gopi) 
104,33. 

*3-vajja, mfn. to be avoided, x. sin, 
fault, loc. ~e Dh. 318; °-dassin, 
mfn. seeing no sin, m. pl. «ino 
Dh. 318. 

a-vanna, m. blame; «am uppā- 
deti, to bring reproach on (gem.) 
12.31. 

*a-vatthu-kata, mfn, pulled out 
of the ground, tālā-" 95,11. g. v. 


Oe 


a-vatvā, v. vadati. 

a-vassam, adv. necessarily, inevi- 
tably, 86,16 (sa. a-vagyam, cp. vasa 
@ vasi). 

a-vijanat, v. vijanati. 

a-vijjamina, v. vijjati. 

a-vijjā, f. ignorance, gem. «aya 
66,12; °-paccaya, 66,6, g. v. 

a-vijjhāpita, a-vijjhapetva, v. 
vijjhāpeti. 

a-vitinna-kamkha, mfn. who has 
not overcome desires, Dh. 141. 

a-vidlūre, adv. not far off, near, 1,26; 
prp. w. gen. 5,30. 36,20. 75,17, 
w. abl. tato ~ 61,15 (cp. vidūra). 

a-viddasu, mfn. ignorant, Dh. 
268. 

*a-vinásana, mfn. imperishable, m. 
acc. ani 110,1. 

*4-vinipāta-dhamma, mfn. not 
liable to be born in a lower state 
of existence (v. vinipata), 79,33. 

a-viruddha, mfn. compatible, tole- 
rant, Dh. 406 (w. loc.). 

a-visahanta, v. visahati. 

a-vihaüiamina, v. vihaññati. 

*a-vera, «. abstinence from hatred 
or anger, mildness, instr. «ena 
105,24 -= Dh. 5. 

ta-verin, mfn. free from hatred, m. 
~i Dh. 258. pl. ~ino Dh. 197. 

a-vyükata, mfn. not explained, not 
elucidated, 93,2 (v. vyākaroti). 

a-Sainvara, m. lack of self-restraint, 
instr. wena 85,19. 

a-samvuta, mfn. not controlled, in- 
temperate, indriyesu ~ar (acc. m.) 
„whose senses are not controlled“, 
Dh. 7. b 

a-samsattha, mfn. not mixed with, 
who keeps aloof from (insir.) acc. 
m. ~am Dh, 404, 

*a-samhira, mfn. not to be shaken, 
immovable, m. pl. ~ā 109,27. 

a-sakkonta, v. sakkoti. 

*a-samkuppa, mfn. immovable, m. 
pl. nā 109,27. 

a-sajjamāna, mfn. not attached to 
(loc.), Dh. 221 (cp. sajjati, satta'). 

a-sajjhaya, m. (sa. a-svādhyāya) 


non-repetition; "-mala, mfn. Dh. 
241 (v. mala. 7). 

a-sanüata, mfn. unrestrained, in- 
temperate, 107,» =- Dh. 308; pl. 
ad Dh. 248; w. instr. vacaya 
~0, 84,29. 


a-saina, f. non-perception, 80,8 
(m comp. neva-saūiā-nāsaūā-0, 
g. v.). 


a-sat, mfn. (cp. a-santa) !) not be- 
ing, not existing, false; instr. asatā 
socati Dh. 367, loc. abs. sāmi- 
kamhi asati 31.9 (without husband). 
2) bad, pl. asant(o) Db. 304 (bad 
people), gen. pl. asatam Dh. 73. 
77, ~ sannivasena 37,55 („by bad 
company“); a-sad-dhamma. m. bad 
quality, fault, instr. pl. ~chi sam- 
annāgato 18,16; wickedness 51,26 
(asaddhamma-samannagata itthi- 
ya); sexual intercourse 52.29 (~am 
patisevi). 

a-satta, mfn. not clinging to the 
world, free from desires, Dh. 419 
(cp. sajjati £ sanga). 

a-sattha, mfn. weaponless, unarmed, 
instr. Mm. wena (1.15. 

a-saddahitva, v. saddahati. 

a-saddhamma, v. a-sat. 

*a-santa, mfn. (cp. a-sat), not be- 
ing, unreal, imaginary. — a-santa- 
paggaha, m. taking or accepting for 
real what is only imaginary, „am 
katvā 29.29 („because he imagined 
himself saluted“); ~-karana, w. id. 
(naiveté?) 29,27. 

*a-santasana, %. intrepidity; a 
-bhava, mfn. intrepid, m. pl. nā 
(mahayodha) 39,10. 

*a-santasin, mfn. who does not 
tremble, m. „i, Dh. 351. 

a-sabblia. mfn. unfit, improper, abl. 
n. wa, Dh. 77. 

*a-samahita, mfn. not collected, 
whose mind is not composed (opp. 
jhayin), Dh. 110. 

à-sampajjanta, v. sampajjati. 

*a-sampavedhin, mfn. not to be 
shaken, „i (= ~ino, m. pl. (khīlā)) 
105,17. 


mm P —H—— Á—— ———————————— 


a-sarira, mfn. bodiless, incorporeal, 
«am cittam. Dh. 37. 

a-sallakkhetva, v. sallakkheti. 

*a-sallina, mfn. not depressed, re- 
solute, wena cittena (instr. „with 
unshaken mind“) 80,31. 

a-sassata, mfu. not eternal, trans- 
lent, wo loko 89,26, 

a-sahanta. v. sahati. 

*a-sāta, mfn. unpleasant, noxious, 
37,21 ('-amadhura-). 

a-sadhu, mfn. not good, bad, evil; 
n. pl. «unl, bad deeds, Dh. 163. 

a-sāra, m. (or mfn.) what is not es- 
sential, Dh. 11, 12 (v. sära); a-sara- 
dassin, m/n. considering anything 
as unessential, m. pl. ~ino, Dh. 11. 

a-sühasa, n. non-violence; instr. adv. 
wena, not arbitrarily, Dh. 257 (cp. 
saliasá). 

a-SUci, mfn. impure; m. impure mat- 
ter, phlegm, semen etc. instr. inā 
602.25. 

*a-suddhin, mfn. impure, nom. m. 
«A Dh. 165 (cp. suddha). 

a-subha, mfn. not beautiful, dis- 
agreeable, inauspicious, bad, 2. wam 
Dh. 350, subhásubham Dh. 409. 
*a-subhásupassim, mf». not look- 
ing for what is agreeable, acc. m. 

*a-sura, m. not a hero, na ~o 
„none but a hero" 103,32. 

a-sesa, mfn. without remainder, per- 
fect, complete; -virāga-nirodhā 
(abl.), by a complete annihilation 
that leaves no track, 66,12. (cp. 
virāga). 

a-soka, m/n. free from sorrow, Dh. 
28. 412. 

a-ssaddha, mfn. 1) unbelieving, m. 
~O 22.14, pl. ~it 76,30. 7) free 
from credulity, Dh. 97 (v. saddha 

` & saddha). 

a-hata, mfn. not beaten, uninjured; 
%-vatthāni (n. pl.) 27,18, ?-vattha- 
61,286 new (unwashed or not worn 
out?) clothes, 

a-himsa, f. ( sa. cp. himsati) not 
injuring anything, harmlessness, com- 


a7 


passion or pity on all beings, Dh. 
261; —& (= ~āya. instr.) Dh. 270; 
maya. loc. Dh. 300. a-himsaka, 
mfn. not injuring, m. pl. wa, Dh. 
225. 

a-hita. mfn. not good, unadvanta- 
geous; n. disadvantage, damage, 
e Aya (dat.) 90,21, ~ani (pl) „evil 
deeds“, Dh. 163. 

a-hirika or a-hirika, mfm. (fr. 
hiri, g. v.) shameless, m. pl. nā, 
54,12; instr. wena (varr. -hiri-, 
-hiri-) Dh, 244. 

a-hethayam, v. hetheti. 
an- (only before vowels, 

the foll. comp.: 

an-akkosam, v. akkosati. 

*an-akkhata, mfn. not described, 
ineffable; n. == Nibbana, ~e, loc. 
Dh. 218. 

an-agariya, f. (sa. an-agārikā, cp. 
agara) houseless life, acc. „ari. 
68,4. | 

an-aggha, mfn. priceless, invaluable, 
m. ~o (manto) 32,10; *-manto 
53 ,14. 
*an-aūgana, mfn. free from lust, 
without sin, Dh. 125. 236. 351. 
&n-atikkamanta, v. atikkamati. 
an-atta, mfn. (v. attan) destitute of 
a soul or a self; sabbe dhammā 
e (m. pl.) 107,15 -- Dh. 279. 
*an-attamana, mfn. (fr. atta! + 
manas. q. v.) displeased, m. ~o, 
74,30, 

an-attha, 1) m. (v. attha 1) non-value, 
harm, a bad or worthless thing; 
atthar ~aň ca (acc. „right and 
wrong” Dh. 256; dat. „āya „to 
harm“ Dh. 72; °%-samhita, mfn. 
profitless, 66,97. 2) mfn. worthless, 
senseless; °-pada-samhita, mfn. 
„made up of senseless words“, Dh. 
100. 

an-anta, mfn. endless, (cp. ānaūca); 
*0-gocara, mfn. whose sphere (of 
perception) is unlimited, Dh. 179 
(~am Buddha). 

an-antara, mfn. having no inter- 
val, next following; °-gatha, f. 


——— 


a-1) in 


26,7 («vāya, instr.); cp. anantariya, 
samanantarā. 

an-antarahita, mfn. not concea- 
led, open, bare; loc. f. ~aya bhū- 
miyā, 83,19 (v. antaradhayati). 

an-antavat, mfn. infinite; nom. m. 
~va loko, 89,28. 

*an-anvāhata-cetasa,mfn.whose 
mind is not perplexed, Dh. 39 (cp. 
cetas). 

an-apayin, mfn. not going away, 
f. ~ini (chaya) Dh. 2. 

an-apekkhin, an-apekhin, mfn. 
without desire, regardless, indiffe- 
rent, m. pl. ~ino, 47,28 — Dh. 346, 
347 (-kh-). 

*an-appaka, mfn. not a little, con- 
siderable, great, f. ~ii (labha) 105,23; 
n. eam (dukkhaih) Dh. 144. 

*an-a-bhava-kata, mfn. become 
not existent, annihilated, ‘n. „ar 
(rüpun Tathagatassa) The often 
recurring phrase ,anabhavam ga- 
meti“, to annihilate, seems to infer 
that we have to take an-a- in a 
negative sense, as a kind of stron- 
ger negation (cp. Tr. PM. 64,35, 
who considers "-kata an error for 
cata, due to the preceeding tālā- 
vatthukata). In Prakrit a similar 
use of ana- has been traced in not 
a few instances, (cp. Pischel, Gramm. 
d. Prakrit-Spr. S 77). I should, how- 
ever, be inclined to think that this 
phenomenon is only a secondary de- 
velopment, having no true base in 
the original language; thus sa. ana- 
bhavakrta would mean ,made not 
non-existing“ o: brought into a state 
in which it can neither be said to 
exist nor not to exist; in this case 
an-abhava would be adj. „free from 
annihilation“ (a-bhava being taken 
in a kind of positive value, as Faus- 
ball suggests), and °-kata would be 
correct. cp. anamatagga. 

*an-abhirati, f. not delighting in, 
discontent (w. /oc.), acc. ~it, 47,24 
(agāra-majjhe). 

*an-abhirata, mfn. not taking plea- 


sure in (Ž0c.), m. ~o (naccādisu) 
64,32 (cp. abhiramati). 
*an-amatagga, mfn. endless, loc. 
e,asmim samsārē „in the endless 
revolution of being“ 89,13; °-katha, 
f. acc. ~am kathesi „he instructed 
him about Samsara“ 89,15. This 
word has generally been taken as 
== Sa, *an-amrta + agra „which 
does not end in Nibbiina“ (ep. a- 
mata above), or *ana-mata (yman) 
+ agra, „whose end is not known" 
(Alwis, Buddhist Nirv. p. 21., Tr. 
PM., p. 64, with the negative pre- 
fix doubled, like ana-bhiva-kata). 
Weber, Ind. Str. IJI p. 150 refers 
to Sa. an-amrta, ,without end or 
beginning (cp. an-àmatam ,immor- 
tal“ Jat. 11 56, a), but Jacobi and 
Pischel have shown that anama- 
tagga ‘must be identical with Pra- 
krit: anavadagga or anavayagga 
and have taken it .— Su. *a-namad- 
agra (ynam) „dessen Anfang sich 
nicht verändert, endlos“ (Jacobi. 
Erzähl. 33,17. Pischel, Gramm. § 251. 
cp. an-abhāvakata above). 
an-ariya, mfn. ignoble, low, m. ~o 
(anto) 66,27. 
an-alliyanta, v. alliyati. 
an-avakāsa, mfn. that cannot take 
place, impossible, not occurring, m. 
~O YO . . (w. pot.) „it cannot oc- 
cur that one should . .", 76,26. 
an-avatthita-citta, mfn. un- 
steady-minded, gen. m. ~assa, Dh.38. 
*an-avassuta-citta, mfn. whose 
mind is free from lust, gen. m. 
~assa, Dh. 39. (cp. avassuta, tisava, 
SBE. X p. 13—14). 
an-agata, mfn. future. acc. m. ~an 
(attham) 112,4; loc. (adv.) atītānā- 
gate, in the past and in the future, 
56,11; ~vamsa, q. V. 
*an-àgamana, n. not coming, not 
returning; pacchato kassaci ?-bha- 
vam fiatva „seeing no one pursuing“, 
40,11; asurānam °-atthaya, „to pre- 
vent the A's from coming back“, 
60,26. 


an-agara, m. houseless, a mendi- 
cant, instr, pl. ~ehi Dh. 404. 

an-&cara, m. misconduct, immoral- 
ity, ace. ~am 9,15. 52.30. 

an-acikkhitva, v. ācikkhati. 
an-atura, mfn. free from suffering, 

*an-adana, mfn. free from affection 
or desire, m. ~o Dh. 352, acc. 
~ai Dh. 406 (opp. sādāna). 

an-āyanta, v. ayiti. 

*an-ūlaya, m. not desiring, aversion, 
doing away with, nom. «o (tan- 
hiiya) 67,16. 

an-iivila. mfn. clear, pure, undistur- 
bed, m. ~o (rahado) Dh. 82, ace. 
eam Dh. 413. 

an-asaka, f. (sa. anàgaka, n.) fast- 
ing, Dh. 141 (ep. asa). 

*an-asava, mfn. free from passions, 
Wm. ace, eam Dh. 386, gen. «assa, 
Dh.:94, pl. wa Dh. 126. 

an-āhāra, mfn. having or taking 
no food, being without nutriment, 
m. ~o (aggi) 95,5. 

an-ukkantham«züna,v.ukkanthati. 

an-utthahāna, v. utthahati. 

an-utthiina, n. the act of not ris- 
ing, want of energy or firmness; 
mala, mfn. whose taint (fault) is 
bad repair, pl. nā ghari „houses 
are useless, if they are in bad re- 
pair^ Dh. 241 (cp. mala). 

an-uttara, mfn. best, highest, un- 
surpassed, m. <o (silagandho) Dh. 
55, acc. „ari (yogakkhemain) Dh. 

3 


an-uddhata, mfn. ‘not lifted up’, 
calm (in speech), m. ~o (bhikkhu) 
Dh. 363. 

*an-upakkamena, adv. not by at- 
tack (from external enemies) 76,37 
(opp. parupakkamena, v. upakka- 
ma). 

an-upagata, an-upagamma, v. 
upagacchati. 

an-upaghata, m. not striking, not 
abusing, nom. ~o Dh. 186. 

*an-upaddava,mfx, uninjured, safe, 
loc. n. ~e (mule) Dh. 338. 


an- 


*an-upadduta, mfn. not annoyed, 
not oppressed, x. idam . . ~am 
„here is no distress", 68,14. 

*an-upalitta, mfn. not besmeared, 
free from taint, m. ~o Dh. 353 
(anū-). 

*an-upavāda, m. not Pissing: not 
abusing, <o Dh. 185. 

*an-upassattha, mfn. not afflicted, 
not plagued, z. idar . . ~am „here 
is no danger*, 68,14. 

*an-upahūra, m. not presenting, 
aññassa ~A (abl.) „because it can 
get no other (fuel)* 95,5. 

an-upada —an-upadaya, £ an- 
upādiyāna, v. upadiyati. 

*an-upayena, adv. by misguided 
means, 34,17 (v. upaya). 

an-uppüda. m. not coming into 
existence; "-dhamma, mfn. not li- 
able to come into existence again, 
n. ~am (rupam) 95,11 (cp. dham- 
ma). 

an-usuyyam, v. usuyyati. 

an-ussuka, mfn. not eager, free from 
greed, m. pl. ~& Dh. 199. 

“an-ussuta, mfn. free from lust, 
acc. m. eum Dh. 400 (= an-ava- 
ssuta, g. v. (Fsb.); fr. sa. *an-ud- 
sruta (Child.)). 

an-üpalitta = an-upalitta, g. v 

an-uhata, mfn. not destroyed, loc. 
~e Dh. 338 (v. uhaiinati). 

an-eka, mfn. many; "-ākāra, mfn. 
multiform : °-vokara, mfn. containing 
many disadvantages, acc. m. «am 
(adinavam) 86,5; "-Adinava, mfn. 
full of dangers, m. ~o (samuddo) 
23,7; '-Jūti-samsāra, m. a course 
of many births, acc. ~am Dh, 158; 
°-nariyayena, instr. udv. in many 
ways, 69,18; °-supa-vyanjana, mfn. 
richly supplied with sauce & con- 
diments, x. ~am (bahubhattam) 
51.11. 

*an-eja, mfn. free from lust (ejā, 
f. g. v.) m. ~o (muni) 80,33, Dh. 
414; acc. ~am Dh. 422. 

an-enta, v. eti. 


an-oka, m. a houseless state, acc. 


10 


~am (adv.?) Dh. 87; ?-sárin, mfn. 
wandering about homeless, acc. m. 
wsarim Dh. 404, 
an-okkanta, v. okkamati. ——. 
*an-odaka, mfn. without water, dry, 
f. ~A (nadi) 31,13. 


amsa, m. (— sd.) !) a shoulder, 
instr. «ena paticchitum nāsakkhi 
„could not get hold of him by his 
shoulder^ (o: dropped him? or have 
we to take amsenā == in part (adv.)? 
and translate „could not thoroughly 
get hold of him). ?) (sa. amqa) a part, 
portion; v. ekathsa, sukkamsa. 

akka, m. (sa. arka) name of a 
plant (Calotropis gigantea, ,swallow- 
wort (Child.); gen. ~assa (jiya), made 
from that plant, 92,16. 

akkamati, vb. (sa. à-ykram), to 
tread apon (acc) ger. witva 3,21. 
akkamma (sa. a-kramya) 108.»s. 

akkosa, m. (sa. àkroga) abuse, re- 
proach, acc. ~am Dh. 399. 

akkosati, vb. (sa. ü-ykruc), t 
abuse (acc.) pr. 3. sg. ati (bhik hi) 
84,29; parl. au-akkosam (m. == 
~anto, not abusing) 14,4. m. pl. 
anta, 13,34. 

akkha, m. (sa. aksha) an axle (of 
a chariot), nom. ~o 98,1. 

akkhara, n. £ m. (sa. akshara, 
n.) a letter, gen. pl. —anam Dh. 352. 

akkhātar, m. (sa. akhyatr) a 
preacher, a teacher, pl. ~äro (Ta- 
thāgatā) ,(only) preachers“, Dh. 276. 

akkhāti, vb. (sa. ā-ykhyā), to 
tell, communicate; imp. ~ahi (tam 
me) 54,27; pp. akkhāta, m. <o me 
maggo „the way was preached by me“, 
Dh. 275; sv-ükkhato dhammo „well 
taught is the doctrine“, 70,16 (cp. 
su-); samma-d- akkhāta Dh, 86. v. 
samma; an-akkhata q. v. 

akkhi, n. (sa. akshi) the eye; pl. 
nom, ~ini 3,17; abl. «ihi 5,14; gen. 
inam 59,5. mandakkhi, adj. f. 
20,27. v. manda. 

agāra (£ āgūra), n. (= sa) a 
house; nom. ~am 106,31 — Dh. 14; 


11 


aggha 


pl. «àn Dh. 140. 3) a household | doctrine; nū tathāgatā (pl) the T-s 


life, acc, ~am 61,2, abl. «à 61,35, 
~asma (pabbajjā) 68,4; °-majjhe 
„amid a householders life", 46,17. 
47,24 (v. majjha). — bandhanāgāra, 
a prison, v. bandhana. — suiiiá- 
gāra, an empty house, v. suia. 
(cp. an-āgāra, an-agariyiü). 

*agārika, m. (fr. agira) a house- 
holder, a layman; °-bhito, m. „while 
he lived in his house“, 69,25 (cp. 
bhavati). 

agga, mfn. (sa. agra) 1) foremost, 
first; eam samgahath (ace) „the 
first collection“ 109,29; agga-nikkhit- 
takā (thera) „original depositaries (of 
Buddha’s doctrine)* 109,11; agga-viido 
the first or original doctrine == thera- 
vādo, 109,30. — 2) highest, topmost; 
agga-sākhā (ace. f. pl.) „the topmost 
branches“ 62,11. — *) excellent, best, 
„the chief propounder of the Dhu- 
tanga“ 109,6; agga-dhamma, agga- 
mahesī, g. v.; agga-rasa-, v. nana; 
agga-raja „the chief King“ 98,13; 
agga-santike „from the first (among 
teachers)" 109,28. — *) subst. n. top, 
tip, point; „arh (acc.) „the best part“ 
111,35; at the end of comp. : āragge 
(oc.) on the point of a needle (v. 
ara) Db. 401; kusaggena (instr.) 
„with the tip of a blade of Kusa-grass", 
Dh. 70; kupagge (loc.) on the top 
of the mast, 18,6; rukkhagge, 11,25; 
sākhagge, 13,22 and sakhaggesu (Joc. 
pl.) 125 (v. sakha); dumaggamhā 
(abl.) down from the top of the tree, 
134; -vettaggam 62,17 (v. vetta); 
labhagga-yasagga-ppatta, mfn. having 
obtained the highest gain and glory, 
18,16 (cp. patta?); rupagga-ppatta, 
mfn. of extraordinary beauty, 49,12 
(~āya, gen. f.) (cp. ajjatagge, an- 
amatagga.) 

*aggatà, f. (fr. agga w. suff. -tā) 
superiority; gunaggatam (acc.) „the 
summit of perfection" 109,5. 

*agga-dhamma, mfn. most ex- 
cellent in the knowledge of the true 


are the chiefs in the truth, 109,25. 

agga-mahesi, f. (sa. agra-mahi- 
shi) a queen, the chief-queen, 19,7. 
46.21; gen. eiyà 38,9. 

*Aggalava, (m. or n.?) nom. pr. 
a sanctuary at Alavi; doc. ~e ce- 
tiye 86.13; S-viharamh (acc) 87,4. 
A. seems to be a comp, agga -- 
Alavi (q. v.), but might possibly be 
a false etymology for *Aggiilaya (sa. 
agnyālaya ?). 

aggi, m. (sa. agni) ')fire; ~i 16,7. 
95,3. Dh. 202. 251; aggiva 26,5. Dh. 
31; acc. ~im kareyyāsi „make a fire“ 
35,8. „im jaletvā „to light a fire“ 
100.21. „im datvā „to set light to“ 
l.u; instr. „nā 16,2. 35,4; padi- 
paggi, the fire of a lamp, 101,7. — 
2) a pyre, a funeral pile; „ir pavi- 
sitvā 51,10 (as an ordeal), — *) the 
sacrificial fire; ~im paricare „to wor- 
ship Agni“ Dh. 107. — *) metaph. 
„passion“ : dosaggi, mohaggi, rāgaggi 
(q. v.) „the fire of anger, ignorance & 
lust“, 

*aggikkhandba, m. (aggi + 
khandha) a great body of fire; ~o 
26,3 (pajjalita-?). 

aggidaddha. mfn. (aggi -- dad- 
dha, pp. v. dahati) burnt by fire; 
~o Dh. 136. 

*Aggimūla,m.(?) nom. pr. (aggi 
- mala mili?) name of an 
ocean; ace. nant 26,3. — “Aggi- 
malis), m.(?) id. (== ,fire-gar- 
landed“) 26,8. 

*Aggi-Vaechagotta-suttan- 
ta, n. the title of a dialogue between 
Buddha and Vacchagotta, MN. 72. 

aggisikhà, f. (su. agni-cikha) a 
flame; °-sikh’upama, mfn. „like flam- 
ing fire“, ~o (ayogulo) 107,1 == Dh. 
308 (cp. upama). 

aggihutta, x. (sa. agni-hotra) 
oblation to Agni; acc. eam juhato, 
sacrificing to Agni, 108,8. — *) the 
sacrificial fire, Dh. 392. 

aggha, m. (sa. argha) value, price; 
in comp. an-aggha, mfn. g. v. beyond 


agghati 


all price, invaluable; appaggha, mfn. 
of little value, 26,2; mahaggha (v. 
maha) mfn. of great price, n. ~am 
25,5. 

*agghati. eb. (sa. Vargh), to be 
worth (w. acc.); pr. 3. sg. na «ati 
(mama sümikassa padarajam) 58,5; 
nágghati (kalah solasith) Dh. 70. 
caus. agghapeti, q. v. 

“agghanaka, mfn. (fr. agghana, 
n. (Vargh) valuation, w. suff. -ka) 
worth; satasahassagghanakam (mut- 
taharam, acc. m.) worth 100,000, 
64,25. 

"agghapaniya, m. (fr. aggha- 
pana, 9». (agghāpeti)) a valuer; 
*-kamma, 2, the office of a valuer, 
loc. we 24.18. 

“agghapeti, eb. caus. (fr. ag- 
ghati), to appraise; pr. à. sg. «eti 
24,20 (acc.). 

atika, m. (— sa.) a side, breast, 
hip; instr. wena uddhari (mam), lif- 
ted (me) up unto her hip, 20,95; da- 
rake ainkenādāya, with their childs 
on their hips, 21,2; loc. xe nisinnam 
puttam „a baby boy“ 38,15. 

amkura, m., (= 8a.) a sprout, a 
shoot; -nibbattana-tthina, n. the 
place where the sprout develops, 91,5. 

alkusa, m. (sa, ankuga) a hook 
to guide an elephant with, a goad; 
instr, pl. vehi 77,12, — añkusa-ggaha, 
m. (sū. añkuça-graha) an elephant- 
driver, Dh. 326, 

alga, n. (— sa.) !) a limb, mem- 
ber, a part of the body; uttamaīga, 
the head, °-ruha, mfn. growing on 
the head, pl. m. wa (9: the hairs) 
45,11; afigavijja, g.v. — *) a part or 
portion; afiga-sambhari. (abl.), bring- 
ing together the various parts, 98,30; 
sabbaüga-sampanna, mfn. complete 
in every part, 110,5. — 3) a point 
or a constituent part of a system of 
rules; uposathafigāni (pl), the holy 
day Yows, 61,7; bojjhanga, sambodhi- 
alga, & Anguttara (g. oj). — 4) a 
quality, attribute, instr. pl. dasah(i) 
aūgehi, 82,4. — 5) comp. w. num, 


— -fold. (cp. aūgika & aūgin), na- 


vanga, mfn. nine-fold, ~am Jinasā- 


sanam 109,2. — *) comp, w. vb.: 
aūgī, v. sam-aīīgī-bhūta. 

angana, x. (sa. angana) an open 
space before a house; rājaūīgana, the 
king's courtyard, loc. we 8,1. 42,39. — 
2) metaph. (only in comp. with the 
prefixes an-, nir-, sa-) the mean or 
ulgar life o: lust, sin; an-afīgana, 
mfn. (q. v.) [cp. Bēhtlingk, Ber. d. 
sichs. Ges, 1898. p. 77; Rhys Da- 
vids, JRAS. 1898. p. 198 & 462.]. 

aūga-vijji, f. (sa. aūga-vidyā) 
the science of prognostication, chiro- 
mantia etc.; loc. «ya 48,16. 

afigiira, m. (— sa.) charcoal, burn- 
ing coals, fire; Joc. we 15,32; °-gabbhe, 
amid the fire, 15,33 (v. gabbha); -rāsi, 
M. a heap of burning coals, acc. eim 
16,3. 

angika, mfn. (sa. angaka) comp. 
w. num. v. atthaūgika, paicangika 
(cp. anga 9) & next). 

aūgin, mfn. (<= sa.) comp. w. 
num. v. caturangiw (cp. afiga 5) & 
prec.). 

"Anguttara-nikaya, m. nom. 
pr. (fr. aūga + uttara 9: one part 
more, ,the add-one collection^, cp. 
Morris, preliminary remarks, AN. vol. 
I. p. IX), name of a canonical Pāli- 
work, the fourth of the five Nikayas; 
comm, Manoratha-pūranī (q. v.); ~o 
102,14. 

angula, m. (= sa.) a finger, the 
measure of a finger’s breadth, an inch; 
v. catur-aüngula, mfn. 

anguli f. (— sa.) a finger; v. 
paücangulika. | 

*Aciravatī, f. nom. pr. a river 
in India (Rapti); °-tiram, n. the bank 
of A. 28.4. 

accagama K accaga, v. ati- 
gacchati (cp. upaccagā). 

accanta, mfn. (fr. ati + anta, 
sa. atyanta), excessive, perpetual; adv. 
~am, in perpetuity, absolutely : nic- 
canta[m], not always, 5,91. — °-sukhu- 
mala, m. „an exceedingly delicate 


wince“ 97,34. — %dussilya, n. „very | 
p ’ ’ „very | 


great wickedness“ Dh. 162. 
accaya, m. (sa. atyaya, cp. ati- 
gacchati). ') passing away, lapse (of 
time), end, death; instr. adv. «ena 
„at the end of“ (w. gen. or in comp.): 
pitu «ena „when his father died“ 
2413; mam” accayena 79,5; tassā 
rattiyā a-° „at the end of the night“ 
78,1; ekāha-dvīha- „in one or two 
days“ 32,24; katipuha-° „a few days 
later“ 49,22;  satt’-attha-divas’-a° 
yseven or eight days later* 35,1; mā- 
saddhamasa-° „at the end of one and 
a half month* 20,11. — *) transgres- 
sion, sin; ~0 Mam accagumā ,trans- 
gression has overcome me“ 75,23; tassa 
me Bhagavā aecayam accayato pa- 
tiganhütu „may Bh. accept the con- 
iession I make of my sin* 75,25; the 
words accayam accayato (acc. £ abl.) 
may originally be due to phrases like 
eum «ato passati (Vin. 1, 315) „to 
see the sin in its sinfullness", or ~am 
~ato deseti (SN. T, 239) „to confess, to 
apologize. — ?) overcoming, conquer- 
ing; dur-aecaya, mfn. difficult to be 
conquered, acc. f. ~am (tanham)108,:. 
* acci, f. (sa. arci(s), m. n.), a flame; 
nom. ya acci 99,21. 
acchati, vb. (sa. yis) to sit, stay, 
remain; pr. 3. pl. «anti 76,29. The pr. 
acchati seems to be a later formation 
from aor. acchi (sa. *atsit) cp. Tr. 
PM. 61,3; K. F. Johansson, Idg. F. LI 
205, (== sa.rcehati, Pischel, Gr. § 480.) 
*accharā, f. a snap with the fing- 
ers; Ü"-gadda, m. ~ena (instr.) „at 
the snapping of the fingers“ 18,17. 
acchariya, mfn, (sa. āçcarya) 
marvellous, wonderful, astonishing; f. 
«à (Buddhanam katha) 86,24; n. 
~am (in exclamations) how wonder- 
ful! 79,25. 98,53; 8. n. a wonder, a 


l 


marvel; acc. ~am 3,22. 5,19; pl. acc. : 


~ani 25,9. (cp. accheraka). 

acchadana, x. (sa. acch-°) cover- 
ing, clothes; ~ar 31,2-9. — sámika-? 
the protection of a husband, ~am (acc. ) 
31,78, 


à ajjhavüsayi 

acchadeti,vb.caus. (sa.a-ychad) 
to array in (acc. £ instr.), to put on 
(clothes, acc.) ; ger. ~wetva (tam dib- 
bavatthehi) 20,5; «^ (ahatavatthini) 
33,3. 

*vecheraka, mfx. (fr. acchariya 
w. suff. -ka). ati-acch-? mfn. admi- 
rable, extraordinary; #. manī 3,23. 

aja, m. (= sa.) a goat, a ram; 
~o 54,8; voc. aja, 54,12; pl. wit 54,0. 
— aja-rūja (voe.) 54,26. — ajikā, f. 
a she-goat; ace. ~am 54,5, (cp. ajina). 

Ajiitasattu, m. nom. pr. (sa. À- 
jita-catru o: having no enemy) a 
son of king Bimbisāra (g. e). "-ku- 
mira, m. the prince A. «o 75,1; 
nam (ace.) 75,2. 

ajika, v. aja. 

ajina, n. (== Su.) a skin (of a 
goat (?) esp, of the black antelope, 
used by ascetics). °-sati, f. a garment 
of skins; instr. iyu 106,10. =- Dh. 
394. 

ajja, adv. (sa. adya) to-day, now, 
2,30. 3,14; ajjāpi tiiva „until this day“ 
(w. pr. of the verb) 10,13; ajj eva „this 
very day“ 65,13; ajjaham Dh. 326. 

*ajjatagge, adv. (fr. ajjato [sa. 
*adya-tas| + agge, v. agga*)) from 
this day forth, henceforth, 69,20. (cp. 
Weber, Ind. Str. III. 150.). 

ajjatana, mfn. (sa. adyatana) of 
to-day, modern (opp. porana); n. ~am 
Dh. 227 (metri causa eim). nāya, 
adv. (dal. or loc. f.?) to-day 70,10. 

ajjhaga, ajjhagu, v. adhi-gac- 
chati. 

ajjhatta, n. (sa. adhy-ātman) the 
soul, individual thought. °-samutthana, 
mfn. originating from internal (intel- 
lectual) cultivation, f. à (hiri) 10,16 
(opp. bahiddhā-samutthana).— °-rata, 
mfn. delighting inwardly, m. ~o Dh. 
362. 

ajjhattika, mfn. (sa. adhy-āt- 
mika), belonging to the soul or to the 
individual». pl. ~ani āyatanāni, the 
‘internal senses, 82,11. 

ajjhabhāsi, v. adhi-bbāsati. 

ajjhavüsayi, v. adhi-vaseti. 


= 


ajjhāya 


ajjhūya,m. (sa. adhyaya) reading, 
v. sajjhaya. 

ajjhā-vasati, vb. (sa. adhy-a- 
yvas) to inhabit (acc.); fut. 3. sg. 
vissati (agāram) „to live a household 
life“ 61,21. 

*ajjhāsaya, m. (fr. sa. adhi + 
ācaya (yçi)) meaning, intention; sab- 
besam °-gahanattham (cp. attha), in 
order to hear the meaning of the as- 
sembly, 11.4. 

*ajjhokāsa, m. (fr.adhi-+ okasa, 
g. 9.) the open air, an open place; Joc. 
~e (cankamati) 68,3. 

*ajjhottharati, pr. (fr. *adhi- 
ava-ystr) to strew about, to throw 
on the ground (acc.) ger. ~witva (tu- 
riyani) 65,3, 

*ajjhoharati, vb. (fr. adhi-ava- 
Vhr) to eat, to swallow (acc.) inf. 
etum (ambaphalam) 37,25. 

añjana, n. (== sa.) black pigment. 
0-vanna, mfn. black-coloured, gen. pl. 
„ānam (kesanam) 44,2. 

atijali, m. (= sa.) the two palms 
joined; acc. „īri paggayha, raising 
(their) joined hands (as a mark of sup- 
plication) 22,4; ~im pagganhitva, id. 
(respectfully) 30,6; ~im panūmetvā, 
id. 74,20. 

añ ña, pron. (sa. anya) m. <o, f. 
wi, n. am, acc. mfn. «am, instr. 
M. N. «ena, gen. m. ^. «assa, f. 
«1883; pl. m. ~e, instr. m. n. wehi, 
gen. m. n. „esam, loc. m. n. «esu. 
!) other, another (not the same, diffe- 
rent or similar) 6,35. 7,8. 61,28. 74,5; 
7.9 (wassa, opp. ekassa), 99,2 (<o, 
opp. so eva); Dh. 158 (~am, opp. 
attanam), cp. Dh. 252. 355; aiio 
pi, 5,31; assa purisassa (a paramour) 
9,13, ~am (sc. purisam, id.) 9,28; 
wena pariyayena, 91,1 = „enākā- 
rena, 91,32 (in another way 9: wrong); 
comp. aiina-purisam 48,12. — °?) an- 
other, a second, a new (by way of 
addition) 4,25. 18,9; wehi dvīhi (still 
two) 34,9. — 3) the rest, the others 
(pl. & n. sg.) 33,16, 34,04; „esu di- 
vasesu (on the preceeding days) 13,10. 


— — 
— 


14 


65,21; aie satta (other mortals) 62,35; 
n. aññam (everything else, opp. idam 
eva) 89,25. — *) with a negation: the 
only one, none but; ~o gamanamaggo 
n'atthi, 3,14; «à patitthà n’atthi (tha- 
petva tini saranani) 28,5. — 5) pleona- 
stically: ~ar samvaccharam (a whole 
year) 33,17; ~am aphasukam n'atthi 
(no sickness) 49,28. — *) repeated: 
a) one, . . another (in different way) 
67,29. 67,30. 99,10; ~am jivam ~ai 
sariram (opp. tai) 89,28. cp. Dh. 75. 
P) reciprocally: one-another (one to- 
wards or with another etc.) ~o «um 
Dh. 165; often comp.: aünamaünam, 
adv. 11,20. 11,27. 19,14. 33,20-21. 74,5. 
— 7) combined with other pron.: yo 
añño (every other who) 34,21; «ain 
kim (anything further) 41,7; na aiio 
koci (nobody else) 51,5; ~am kiūci 
kathetva (,told some lie“) 53,9; ma 
^am kiūci asamkittha („you ought - 
not to suppose that there is anything 
behind this“) 7,11; ~am kiiica yathic- 
chitam (,,every other service according 
to your desire“) 111,28. — cp. para, 
apara, itara, aiifiatara. 

*añña-khantika, m(fn). (fr. 
anfia + khanti) „belonging to another 
faith“; insir. m. «ena (taya) 94,26. 

aññatara, pron. (compar. fr. aa, 
sa. anyatara). 1) a certain, some; m. 
«0 32,9; acc. ~am 3,30; gen. ~wassa 
9.9; loc. ~asmim 30,29; ace. f. ~am 
30,28. — ?) one of a certain number 
(w. gen. of the numeral) Dh. 137. 157. 
— 5) another; gen. m. „vassa puri- 
sassa (another man's) 100,11; afifia- 
tara-vesena 55,29 („in disguise" cp. 
vesa; perhaps we have to read: ajifia- 
taka-° as 43,19). | 

*aūūa-titthiya, m(fn). (sa. anya 
+ tirtha), heretical; pl. mā, the 
heretics, 72,28; instr. ~ehi 74,9 cp. 
titthiya). 

aññattha, adv. (sa. anyatra) else- 
where, to another place, 12,85, 49,15 
(cp. next). 

aiifiatra, ')adv.(—prec.)elsewhere, 
except, save; aniiatra Tathāgatassa 


(„save by the T.*, the gen. being due 
to the prec. tassa) 78,1. — ?) prp. 
besides (it. acc.) 97,38. — *aiinatra- 
yoga, m(fn). having another disci- 
pline; instr. m. ~wena (taya) 94,27. 
(cp. yoga). 

adiliathatta, n. (sa. anyathatva 
cp. next) variation, difference; „am 
114,29, 

aūūiathā, adv. (sa. anyathā) other- 
wise. — “*ajifiathacariyaka, m(fn). 
having another teacher (cp. ācariya); 
wena (taya) 94,27. 

*afitia-ditthika, m(/n). belonging 
to another sect (cp. ditthi); «ena 
(tayā) 94,26. 

aññamaññam, adv. v. aiiiia®) 

*aūūa-rucika,m(/x). having an- 
other inclination (cp. ruci); «ena 
(taya) 94,26~27. 

añ ña, f. (sa. ajfia) knowledge. — 
samma-d-aiina-vimutta, mfn. who has 
become free through perfect knowledge; 
gen. «assa Dh. 96. pl. „ānam, Dh. 
57. (cp. ajanati). 

anüisya, aññasi, v. ājānāti. 

atavi, f. (== sa.) u forest; loc. 
eiyam 30,30; ~i-mukhe „on the out- 
skirt of a forest 30,29. (cp. mukha). 

atta, mfn. (sa. arta, cp. attiyati, 
yard.) afflicted, pained, suffering, — 
attassara, m. a cry of pain or distress, 
eum (acc.) 40,21 (cp. sara?). — veda- 
natta, mfn. oppressed by pain, m. 
~0 50,20. 

atta’, m. (sa. artha, cp. attha * & 
attha?), case, cause, lawsuit, litigation; 
acc. eam 59,4; attatthaya (uparavo) 
on account of litigations 42,30. — ku- 
tatta, false suit (g. v.). 

attaka, m. (dimin. fr. atta, a watch- 
tower, == 84.) a tower, a platform; 
acc, wath 73,32. cp. Morris, JPTS. 
"86,104. | 

*attiyati, vb. (also written atti- 
yati or addh'-, add?-, denom. fr. 
atta’, cp. yard d vrt) to feel an- 
noyed or bored, to be incommodated 
or tormented; part. f. ««mānā 50,1. 
[cp. Morris, JPTS. '86,104-o5.]. 


15 


>> —— al a — 


atthi-karoti 


attha!, num. (sa. ashta-) eight. 
1) indecl. 23,22. 82,12. — 2) comp. atthu- 
sabha-matta, mfn. of a measure of 8 
usabhas (g. v.) ~ar thanam 27,27 (acc.). 
— satt'-attha-divas'-accayena (seven 
or eight days) 35,1. (cp. atthangika, 
atthama, attharasama). 

attha?. -attha! (g. v.) in the comp. 
*attha-kathā, f. a commentary, the 
commentary on the Buddhist holy serip- 
tures; vom. «à (opp. Pāli) 113,26; 
acc. mam 114,5; instr. Aya 114,435. 
— comp. w. the prefix sa- (nd).) : sàt- 
thakathā pāli (the text with the com- 
mentary) 102,3. — parittatthakatham 
(acc. a concise or compendious com- 
mentary) 113,24. — Sīhalatthakathā 
(the Sinhalese A.) 113,28; acc. pi. 
„ā (sabbā) 114,27. (cp, atta?). 

*atthangika, m/n. (fr. attha! + 
anga w. pref. -ka, ep. sa. ashtánga) 
consisting of 8 parts, eightfold; m. 
e 0 (maggo) 67,. 82,12. Dh. 273; 
acc. eam (magganr Dh. 191. 

atthama, mfr. (sa. ashtama) the 
eighth; m. ~o 103,28 (o: atthami (f.) 
senii Mārassa). 

attharasa, num. (sa. ashtadaca-) 
eighteen, — attharasama, mfn. (sa. ash- 
tadaca) the eighteenth; m. ~o (Ma- 
lavaggo) Dh. XVIII. 

atthi, x. (sa. asthi) !) a bone; 
nom. ~i 13,11; coll. (bones) 82,5 - 
97,20; acc. xim 13,4; pl. ~ini Dh. 
149; gen. ~inam Dh. 150. — ?) the 
stone of a fruit; ~i 97,6; acc. -im 
36,35; abl. ~ito 37,5. — atthi-koti, f. 
the end of a bone; acc. ~im 13,20. — 
atthi-mitijā, f. (g. v.) (cp. next). 

atthika, n. (sa. asthika) a bone; 
hanukatthikena (instr.) by the jaw- 
bone, 40,18 (v. hanu(ka)). 

*atthi-karoti, vb. (perhaps fr. 
artha, cp. sa. kad-arthi- ykr, (Tr.)) to 
attend, to pay attention to (synon. w. 
manasi-karoti, g. v.); ger. ~katva 
71,23. [cpa Morris, JPTS.'86,107; Faus- 
böll, Sn. vol. IT,28 (fr. sa. ashti (ag) 
,reaching^); Windisch, Mara, p. 100 
(= sa. asthamkrtva „Acht geben“); 


V 


— 
nd 


atthi-miājā 


Warren, Buddhism, p. 349 „to be 
convinced*], 

*atthi-minjà, f. (sa. *asthi- 
majjan) the marrow of bones, 82,3 = 
97,20. [cp. Morris, JPTS. ’85,29-s0, | 

atthusabha-matta, v. attha!. 

addha, m. £ n. (also written ad- 
dha (q. ».), sa. ardha) a half. ?-nalika- 
matta, mfn. of the measure of a half 
nàlika (g. v.), acc. m. ^am (tandulam) 
57,18. — °-ratta-samaye (loc.) at mid- 
night, 40,8. cp. upaddha, diyaddha 
d next. 

addhatiya,mfn. (a shortened form 
of addha-teyya, or from *addha-tatiya 
with elision of -ta- (like viiiiiananca-, 
g. v.)) two and a half; n. pl. ~āni 
(purisa-satani) 33,2. — addhatiya- 
sata, mfn. „250“; m. acc. pl. «e 
(jane) 34,7. 

addhateyya, mfn. (a prakritic 
formation from sa. ardha-trtiya) two 
and a half. — *-sata, mfn. „250“; m. 
pl. wa 21,1, ace. we 21,33. 

anu (or anu) mfn. (— sa.) fine, 
small (opp. thūla). *aņumthūla, (mf)x. 
small and large, Dh. 409; ~am (saii- 
iojanam) Dh. 31; n. pl. wani (pā- 
pani) Dh. 265. 

anumatta, mfn. (sa. anu-matra 
small, atomic, m. ~o pl coun 
„even the smallest“ Dh. 284 [anu-]; 
acc. ~at (dubbhasitam padam)110,12; 
instr. n. ~ena (puniena) „even the 
least (good work)“ 103,11 [but here 
the Birman reading anumatto (sc. 
attho) ought to be preferred]. 

anda, 9. (== sa.) an egg. °-bhuta, 
mfn. (cp. bhavati) fragile, weak; f. 
„ā (bhatā bhariyā) „from her child- 
hood“ 51, — Aņdabhūta-jātaka, a. 
52,11. (cp. andha-bhūta). 

ati, indecl. (before vowels usually 
acc-, v. accanta, accaya etc. = sa.) 
prefix!) to verbs, expressing , beyond, 
over“; ?) to nouns ,excessive(ly), ex- 
traordinary(-ily), too much“. (— ati- 
viya, g. €) —. | 
. *ati-accheraka, mfn, ~am (n.) 
a very wonderful thing, 3,22. 


16 


*ati-karuna, mfn. very pitiable 
or miserable; 7. ~o (ravo) 60,10; 
sara, m. (v. sara?) acc. ~am 
27,14. 

atikkama, m. (sa. ati-kramu) 


overcoming, conquering; acc. wail 


(dukkhassa) „the destruction (of pain)“ 
107,19 == Dh. 191. 

atikkamati, ob. (sa. ati- ~kram) 
l) to pass, cross, ?) to surpass, over- 
come (w. acc.). part. m. pl. „antā 
26,32; an-atikkamanto (m.) not sur- 
passing 9: accompagnying (gitassaraim 
tantissarena) 19,32. pof. 3. sg. weyya 
(saüiojanam sabbam) Dh. 221. pp. 
n. pl. atikkantāni (tini sativaccha- 
rani) 21,1. ger. «itvà (samuddam) 
26,2; (simam) 39,18; atikamma (Ka- 
sirittham) „having left“ 38,21. caus. 
atikkameti (g. v.) 

atikkamana, ». (sa. atikrama- 
na) overstepping. — *atikkamanaka, 
mfn. exceeding (w. acc.) : pannasaii- 
iam "-migo, 8,0.  . 

atikkameti, pr. (caus. atikka- 
mati) to cause to pass or to be passed 
over; imp. 2. sg. ~ehi (mayham vä- 
ram) 6,34. fut. 1. sg. «essàmi (te 
vàram) 7,2. 

*ati-khina, mfn. (fr.ati +khina, 
pp. ykshī?) destroyed, broken; capa- 
tikhīņā va (m. pl.) „like broken bows“ 
Dh. 156. 

ati-ga, mfn. (= sa.) overcoming, 
surmountiug. m.  palica-saūgātīgo 
(bhikkhu) Dh. 370; ace. saūgātigam, 
Dh. 397. 

atigacchati, pr. (sa. ati- ygam 
& ygà) to overcome. aor. 3. 8g. acc- 
a-gama (mam) 75,5; acc-a-gà (mo- 
ham) Dh. 414. 

ati-galha, mfn. (sa. ati-gadha, 
pp. Vgāh) very tight or close, inten- 
sive; f. à (kappanā) 65,2. 

*ati-citra, mfn. (sa. *ati -+ citra) 
excellent, brilliant; n. pl. ~ ani (paiiha- 
patibhānāni ,98,55. 

*ati-tutthi,f. (fr.sa.ati + tushti) 
extreme joy; instr. ~iya 10,13. 

ati-dura, mfn. (= sa.) very di- 


stant, too far; loc. n. (adv.) ~e 12,29. 
83,2 (nātidūre). 

*ati-dhona-carin, mfn. *wander- 
ing in transgression’, sinful; acc. m. 
„inam 106,20 = Dh. 240. (The ety- 
mology of this word is a little doubt- 
ful, but it seems to be preferable to 
take it — *ati-dhāvana-cārin (Ydhāv!, 
to run). Morris. JPTS. '87,100 and 
Franke, WZ. 1901 derive it from 
*dhona (pure, ydhav? to wash) sa. 
dhauta : „practising impurity, trans- 
gressing purity“, „der wider die Rein- 
heit verstüsst^). 

atipāta,m. (— sa.) neglect, trans- 
gression, injuring. pānātipāta, destroy- 
ing life (q. v.) 

*ati-bahala, mfn. (fr. ati + ba- 
hala) very thick; f. ~ii yagu? „is 
the rice-gruel thick enough?" 56,29 
(the questioner seems to think that 
the rice-gruel is very thin or weak 
(nātībahalā) and gets that enigmati- 
cal answer : udakam na laddham „it 
has not got any water“), 

*ati-bhagini-putta, m. (fr. 
ati -+ bhagini-putta, g.v.) a very dear 
nephew (ironically), ~o 5,5. 

atimafüiati, vb. (sa. ati-/man) 
to despise; pr. 3. 8g. eati Dh. 366; 
pot. 3. 8g. ~eyya Dh. 365 (w. acc. 
salabham). 

*ati-manorama, mfn. (fr. ati -+ 
mano-rama, g.v.) very charming; instr. 
n. wena (sirisobhaggena) 64,10. 

*ati-mahanta. mfn. (fr. ati + 
mahanta (sa. mahat)) very great (big 
or large); loc. m. nātimahante (sare) 
9,32. 

*atimapeti, vb. (caus. *ati-ymī 
(mapayati)) to injure, to destroy (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. ~eti Dh. 246 (panam). 

*ati-muduka, mfn. (fr. ati + 
muduka, g.v.) very soft, mild or feeble; 
m. ~o (raja) 38,24. 

atirocati, ob. (sa. ati-yruc) to 
shine forth; pr. 3. sg. wati Dh. 59. 

ativattati, vb. (ga. y vrt) to over- 
come (acc); pr. 3. sg. „ati (dittham) 
3,27. 

Pali Glossary. 


17 


A m 


atta-ghaüna 


*ati-vasa, mfn. (fr. ati + vasa 
(sa. vaga)) thoroughly subject to or 
dependent on (gen.) ; m. pl. wa (mama) 

h. 74. 

*ati-vākya, n. (fr. ati + vakya, 
cp. sa. ati-y vac) abuse; acc. ~am Dh. 
320. 

ativiya, adv. (sa. ativa) very, ex- 
cessively; ~stro hutva 38,31; ~dham- 
miko rājā 39,5; „pabbajjāya citta 
nami 65,12. 

*ati-sitala, mfn. (fr. ati -+ sitala 
(sa. gitala)) very cold; m. wo (aggi) 
16,10. 

atiharati, ob. (sa ati-yhr) to 
carry over, to bring; aor. 3. 8g. «ri 
(dhuttam māņavikāya santikam) 50,5. 

atita, mfn. (su. pp. ati-yi) !) past, 
passed away, dead; atita-jati, f. a 
former existence, loc. wiyath 85,12; 
*atita-satthuka. mfn. having no master 
more, 4. ~am pivacanam („the holy 
word has no announcer more") 79,3; 
khanatita, mfn. who allows the right 
moment to pass, m. pl. eu 108,7 = 
Dh. 315. — °) act. who has neglected 
or transgressed, m, ge^. massa (ekam 
dhammam) 10611 = Dh. 176. — 
3) subst. n. the past, an event of the 
past, a tale; doc. (udv.) atite, formerly, 
in the times of past, 1.2. 2,17 etc; 
atitānāgate (opp. etarahi) in the past 
and in the future, 56,11 (cp. an-agata); 
acc. eam ühari (told a tale of the 
past) 28,17. 

Atula, m. nom, pr. an Upasaka; 
voce. wa Dh. 227. 

atta!, mfn. (sa. atta, pp. a-yda) 
seized, v, atta-danda, atta-mana. 

atta?, in comp. == attan („self“) 
q. v. cp. sayam. 

*atta-kilamatha, m. (fr. atta? 
+kilamatha (sa. klamatha)) mortifica- 
tion; %-ānuyoga, mfn. given to mor- 
tification, m. ~ 66,27 (cp. anuyoga). 

*atta-gutta, mfn. (fr. atta? 4- 
gutta (ss. gupta, pp. vgup)) selt- 
protected; m. ~o Dh. 379. 

*atta-ghaiüüa, n. (fr. atta? + 
ghaüüa (cp. sa. ghānya, yhan)) de- 


2 


-— 
= 


atta-ja 


struction of ones self; dat. waya 
„to his own destruction* Dh, 164. 

atta-ja, mfn (fr. atta? + ja, 
ga. ātmaja) born from one’s self; x. 
eam (pāpam) Dh. 161. 

*atta-danda mfn. (fr. atta! + 
danda, q.v.) using the stick, violent 
(opp. nibbuta); m. pl. loc. „esu Dh. 
406. 

*attadattha, m. (fr. atta? + 
attha!, with d euphonically inserted) 
one's own advantage, what is useful to 
one's self (with regard to one's moral 
improvement or to the development 
of one's spiritual faculties; opp. pa- 
rattha, g.v.); acc. ~am Dh. 166 (cp. 
SBE. X 46) cp. sadattha-pasuta. 

*atta-danta, mfn. (fr. atta? + 
danta, pp. ydam) having tamed one's 
self; m. ~o Dh. 322; gen. -assa 
(posassa) Dh. 104. 

attan (in comp. atta-) m. sg. (sa. 
ātman) 1) the individual soul, self, 
person, the Ego (the real existence of 
which is denied, cp. puggala, nāma- 
rupa, jiva); nom. atta 55,2. Di. 62. 
1017180: ‘atta’ meti „a so-called 
(imagined) myself“ or ,thinking that 
I have a soul“ 96,13; instr. attana 


own welltamed self* Dh. 160. 323; 
abl. attana aūno piyataro n'atthi 
54.3. — 2) instr. attanā is frequently 
used like nom, (in apposition to the 


grammatical subject) == „himself“ 
(lit. „by himself“) : 34,16 (attanápi) 


34,25-35. 38,1. 42,1. 49,21. 54,8. Dh. 
379. — *) aec. attānaimm (contracted 
attain) and the other oblique cases 
(esp. gen. attano) are used as prom. 
reflex, veferring to the gramm, subject 
in all persons, genders, and numbers 
— myself (ourselves), yourself (~selves), 
himself (herself, itself, one’s self, them- 
selves), attinath: 3. sg. 12,27. 54.34. 
55, (attam) Dh. 159. 355 (attanai 
metri causa) 379 (attain); Z sg. 8,15. 
21,22; 3. pl. 106,28 -= Dh. 80. instr. 
attana : 3. sg. 17,4 (kata-kammarh) 
20,27 (muh uddhari); 1. sg. 29, 


18 


| 62.24. — an-attamana, mfn. displeased, 
Dh. 161; attana sudantena „by his | 


(dinna-dàne). gen. attano : 3. 8g. 2,14. 
10,5. 52,32, Dh. 160; 2. sg. 9,23. 12,35; 
1. sg. 1,9; 3. pl. 5,9. 73,24; 2. pl. Lī, 
41,2. attano attano („each . .. his 
own“) 14,11-11 (3. pl.); 41,23 (referring 
to the gramm, object). — atta-vetana- 
bhata, mfn. „supporting one’s self by 
one's own earnings" 105,5. — an-atta, 
mfn. destitute of a self (g. v.). — ojit- 
tatta, mfn. having secured one's self 
(v. ojita). — paccattam, adv. by one's 
self (g. v.). — pahitatta. mfn. whose 
mind is intent upon (v. pahita, cp. 
padhana). — bhāvitatta, mfn. having 
trained one's self (v. bhāveti). — atta- 
kilamatha etc. (gv.). — Atta-vagga, 
m. name of a chapter of Dhammapada, 
Dh. XII. i 

atta-bhava, m. (fr. atta? -} 
bhava, sa. atmabhava) ') proper or 
peculiar nature, body, figure; acc. 
wam 52,29. 64,16, — 2) birth, existence; 
nom, ~o (paiicasatimo) 17,8; paiicasu 
0-satesu „in 500 of my former ex- 
isteuces^ 17,7. 

atta-mana, mfn. (fr. atta! + 
manas, sa. attamanas) joyful, delighted, 
happy; m. ~o 93,18. Dh. 328, f. wa 


m. ~0 74,30. 

atta-sambhava, mfn. (fr. atta? 
-- sambhava, sa. ātmasambhava) 
originating from one’s self; m. wali 
(papam) Dh. 161. 

*atta-hetu, adv. (fr. atta? + hetu 
(q. v.)) for one’s own sake. Dh. 84 
(opp. parassahetu). 

*attanuyogla, mfn. (fr. atta? 
+ anuyogin) who exerts himself in 
meditation, Dh. 209 (gen. pl. inam). . 

attha!, m. (sa. artha) +*) aim, 
purpose, sake, reason; sir. yen’ 
atthena idhágato 103,13 (,the reason 
for which you have come here", corre- 
sponding to the foll attho (?); but 
„yena“ is probably an error for sena 
(sa. svenārthena)); dat. atthaya and 
acc. attham are frequently used at 
the end of comp. (adv.) „for the 
sake of, on account of, for“ : (dat.) 3,5. 


9,11. 15,30, 16,12. 21,28. 28,5. 32,29. 
41,3. 42,30. 47,5. 58,1. 60,26. 111,29. 
(acc.) 8,1. 11,4. 21,3. 31,11. 57,23. 61,15. 


62,31. 91,25; kimatthàya („why“) 33,1. 


kimattham (do.) 3,12. 15,10. 33,8; dat. 
atthāya also separately (adv. w. gen.) : 
49,11. 57,1. 60,14. 65,1. 108,21 (ep. 
5) below). — ?) need, want, desire (w. 
instr.) nom. ~o 18,9. 22,17-30. 33,2. 
35,3-4. 55,45. 83,25. 103,4. 104,31; 
usirattha, mfn. „he who wants Usira“ 
(a. v.) 108,4 (m. <o); cp. atthika & 
atthin. — °) use, utility, advantage, 
gain, wealth; acc. wath icchati 34,20; 
wall karissam 47,8; „am anāgatam 
(pekkham) „foreseeing future advant- 
age“ 112,4; bahūnam waya (dat.) 
108,21. — attha-samhita, mfn. useful, 
n. wath 93,7; an-attha-samhita, mfn. 
& an-attha, m(fn). (v. h.); nir-attha- 
(ka), mfn. useless (q. v.); sattha (= 
84 -]- attha) v. appa-sattha & satthaka. 
cp. attad-attha, m., parattha, m. & 
sadattha-pasuta, m/n. — *) thing, ob- 
ject, matter; acc. imam attham „this* 
2,8. 105,22; tam attham „the matter“ 
7,1. 13,14; gen. massa ~assa 31,10; 
atthavasam (qec.) „the meaning of 
this“ (v. vasa) Dh. 289. — uttamat- 
tham (acc.) a precious thing. 54,29, 


the best thing, Db, 386 — 403. — | 


5) = atta ?, case, cause; acc. ~am 101,9. 
Dh. 256; loc. ~amhi Dh. 331. — 
6) sense, meaning, signification; ^O 
52,7. 85,10. 89,2; acc. „an 90.30. 
113,11-15; abl. (adv.) ~to („according 
to the meaning“) 114,20. ~ attha-pada, 


^. a word of sense (opp. vaca anat- 


thapada-samhita) Dh. 100; anto- 
gadha-hetu-attha, mfn. containing a 
causative meaning, ~am padam 85,9; 
paramatthato, adv. (abl.) „in the 
absolute sense“ 98,27 (cp. Paramattha- 
dipani). For the comp. attha-katha 
(a commentary) v. attha?. — °) the 
right, the truth; acc, „am an-atthaū 
ca, right and wrong Dh. 256; ~am 
hitva, leaving the real (aim of life) 
Dh. 209; in this sense attha is often 
opp. dhamma („duty“) : sam dham- 


19 | atthi 


mai ca, ll,s. Dh. 363, cp. 58,25; 
hence the name *attha-dhammānusā- 
saka, m. of a royal counsellor or 
secretary (he must give the king in- 
formation of what is ‘attha’ (0: the 
real state of the case) and advice con- 
cerning the ‘dhamma’ (o: what ought 
to be done)), a counsellor of right 
and justice, nom. ~o 37,26, 
attha? m. (sa. asta) disappearance, 
destruction; attham (ace) gacchati, 
to disappear, to cease, to perish, Dh. 
226. 293. 384; loc. suriye attham 
gate, at sunset 32,29. (cp. next). 
attha?, pr. 2. pl. v. atthi. 
*atthagama, m. (fr. attha? + 
gama) perishing, vanishing, destruc- 
tion; rüpassa <o 941,. 
*atthangama. m. (fr. atthath, 
acc. attha? |- gama) — prec.; dat. 
e ya (dukkha-domanassanath) 90,18. 
atthato, adv. (sa. arthatas) v. 


| attha! (6). 


*attha-dhammānusāsaka, m. 
e, attha! (7). 

*attha-pada, n. v. attha! (6). 

*attha-vasa, m. (sa. “artha-vaca) 
v. attha! (4). 

*attha-samhita, mfn. v. attha! 
DAMM 
*Atthasalini, f. (sa. *artha-cii- 
lini) zom. pr. name of a commentary 
(by Buddhaghosa) on Dhamma-sai- 
gani, the first book of the Abhidham- 
ma-Pitaka; ace. ^im 113,25. 

atthi. vb. (sa. yas, pr. asti) to 
be, to exist; pr. 3. sg. atthi 2,92, 96,16; 
n'atthi 3,11. 87,32; atth’ 1,0. 43,26. 
92,30. 2. 8g. 51 2,7-13. 312-1». 4,11. 98,13; 
asi 54,20. 88,9. 1. sg. amhi 12,11. 92,10; 
"mhi 4,4. 28,11. 45,1. 88,10; asmi 16,12. 
104,31; 'smi 7,13. 49,99. 98,3. 3. pl. 
santi 11,14. 110,3». 2. pl. attha 21,9, 
73,5 (atthā ’ti), 1. pl. amha 21, 
(amhā 'ti). This verb is often used 
as copula with an adj. or subst. 2,7. 
98,13, and esp. with a pp. 2,13. 12,1. 
21,3-3. 92,10 etc, The 3. sg. atthi is 
frequently used in the sense of „to 
belong to* (gen.): 12,1. 16,1-5. 105,11 


Q* 


atthika 


(atthi sc. me), and this form may also 
be combined even with the pl. of the 
subject (= santi) : 3,25. 12,1. 18,5. 
43,2. 53,31. 82,2, 105,11. 109,11. Dh. 
255 etc. tassa kira tam divasam 
maranato mutti nama n’atthi, „she 
could not be delivered from death that 
day“ 87,32. — imp. 3. 89. atthu : namo 
ty-atthu „homage to thee“ (voc.) 13,26. 
108,11; dhi-r-atthu „shame on“ 103,33 
(acc. jīvitam), 63,13 (gen. jātiyā); 
astu (— su. astu) 114,33. — pot. 3. sg. 
siya (sa. syāt) 38,27. 79,16. 104,14; 
sakkā ~ „it would be possible“ 56,5; 
vatthabaih ~ „ought to have been 
said“ 88,6; in the phrase siya kho 
pana (to. pot. of the foll. verb) we 
have siyā used adverbially like the 
Latin forsitan „it may be that, 79,2-93. 
Besides siy& we often find an older 
form assa (sa. *asyāt?) : tad assa (w. 
dat. dukkhaya) 90,26 = bhaveyya 
91,17; avyakatam assa 92,6 foll. (cp. 
atha); suddho assa (salarukkho) 
95,244; Dh. 124 (nássa), 260; w. gen. 
tumhākam evam assa, (perhaps) you 
will think, 79,3; tatr' assa „suppose 
there were (in that town)“ 90,32 (cp. 
seyyatha). pot. 3. pl. assu (sa. *asyus) 
Dh. 74. — aor. (impf.) 1. sg. asim 
85,5. 85,17 (,asin“ti == ahosim), 
108,24. — part. 1) sat, being; loe, sati 
(in loc. abs.) : ekamsena 1naritabbe 
sati (n. sg.), if (their) death is necessary 
6,24; mahārājassa ruciyà sati, at the 
king's command 39,11; ditthiyā sati, 
if you hold that view, 92,27-30; niccam 
pajjalite sati, as (everything) is al- 
ways burning, Dh. 146. ?) santa, 
mfn. m. ~o 18,29. 94,95; loc. m. sg. 
evam sante, in this case, 6,28. 99,7; 
evam sante pi, yet, notwithstanding 
this, 37,28. 44,28. 69,50; loc. m. pl. 
„esu (khandhesu) 98.531. („when the 
groups appear to view“), *) samana, 
mfn. m. ~o (andho) 25,15. (manus- 
sabhuto) 41,33. (puttho) 94. (vutto) 
98,16-17; acc, m. pl. we (matte) 59,26. 
The part. fr. atthi is frequently used 
as adj, v. sat, santa? (santaka) & 


20 


samana, (cp. a-sal, a-santa). — atthi- 
bhava, atthità & sotthi, g. v. 

atthika, mfn. (fr. attha!, sa. 
arthika) wanting anything; rajjat- 
thika, mfn. who covets the kingdom, 
m. pl. ~a 39,17. (ep. atthin). 

atthita, f. (fr. atthi, sa. astità) 
being, existence, reality (opp. natthita); 
ace. eal Ceva natthitafi ca, to be 
and not to be, 96,7; (lokanirodhar 
passato) ya loke ~ā sā na hoti, (to 
him) there is no reality in existence 
(the world) 96,10. 

atthin, mfn. (fr. attha!, sa. ar- 
thin) desirous, wanting anything; v. 
mantatthin, vadatthin. (cp. atthika). 

*atthi-bh&va, m. (fr. atthi + 
bhava, g. v.) existence; acc. «am 
(sarassa) 4,12; „am ūatvā, having 
known this being the fact, 48,96; na 
no koci ~am jānāti, nobody knows 
that we exist, 72,31, 

atthu, imp. v. atthi. 

atha, indecl. (= sa.) !) and, further, 
Dh. 55. *) then, now (continuing the 
tale) 1,5. 3,15. 3,18 (ath’); atha kho 
66,3-5 etc. ; atha kena, why then? 54,27, 
3) then (corresp. w. a prec. yada), 
66,21. 107.19-16 = Dh, 377—79. Dh. 
69. 119-20. 384; (after prec. pa- 
thamam :) Dh. 158. 4) but, 107,25 = 
Dh. 387. Dh. 85. 136; atha kho [khv’] 
on the contrary 90,36. 91,4; atha ca 
pana, but on the other hand, 3,4 (cp. ca), 
cp. atho & next. 

athava, indecl. (= sa.) or (corresp. 
w. prec. và, q. v.) Dh. 140. 271. 

atho, indecl. (— sa.) and, also, 
likewise, Dh. 151. 234. 339. 423. 

adum, pron. n. (sa. adas) v. asu. 

addha = addha, half (q. ».); -ma- 
saccayena, at the end of a half month, 
20,11; °-yojana, #. a half yojana (q. v.) 
63,19. | 

addhagu, m. (fr. addhan + gu 
= ga, sa. adhva-ga) a traveller; nom. 
eu, Dh. 302 (sg. & pl. ?) 

addhan, m. (sa. adhvan), a road, 
a journey, life-time, time; acc. ~anam 
44,21. 110,5. Dh. 207 (addhāna). — 


*addha-gata, mfn. one who has accom- 
plished his journey 9: old, m. ~o 74, 
== gataddhin, mfn. (q. 9.). cp. addhika 
& prec. 

addhā, adv. (= sa.) certainly, 
truly; probably, 3,10. 60,20. 

*addhika, m(fn). (fr. addhan) 
travelling, a traveller; gen. pl. m. 
kapanaddhikanam, poor travellers, 
38,14 (v. kapana). 

adhama, mfn. (= sa. superl. fr. 
adho, q.v.) lowest, vilest; purisādhame 
(acc, m. pl.) low people, Dh. 78. (cp. 
next.) 

adhara, mfn. (== sa. compar. fr. 
udho, q.v.) lower. adharotthe (loc.) 
the lower jaw 13,19 (v. ottha. cp. prec.). 

adhi, indecl. (= sa.) prefix to 
verbs & nouns expressing 'above, over, 
on, at, to’; before vowels (except ,i“) 
it takes the form ajjli-, e. g. adhi- 
bhāsati, aor. ajjhabhāsi. 

adhika, mfm. (fr. adhi, sa.) 
exceeding, superior, — compar. adhika- 
tara, mfn. id.; n. „am (assum) c. 
abl. (catunnaīi samuddanam uda- 
kato) 89,14. 

adhigacchati. vb. (sa. adhi- 
Vgam) ‘to go to’, to attain, obtain, 
find, understand (w. acc.); pr. 3. 89. 
eat (ratin) Dh. 187, (samādhim) 
Dh, 365; 3. pl. „anti (saram) Dh. 
11—22; pot. 3. sg. adhigacche (padam 
santa) Dh. 368, „eyya (seyyam, 
one who is better) Dh. 61; aor. 3. sg. 
(a)dhigā (attham). could not under- 
stand, 118,15; w. augm. ajjhaga (tan- 
hànam khayam) Dh. 154; aor. 3. pl. 
ajhagu (= ~gu) (vyasanam) 34,21; 
cond. 1. sg. otaram nádhigacchissam 
„i should never find faults“, 104,12 
(cp. upessam, vicarissam, v. upeti & 
vicarati; Pan, II, 2,112 & the use of 
the Greek ésddov). 

adhigama, m. (= sa.) attainment, 
acquisition; dat, ~aya (w.gen. ūāyassa) 
90,18. | 
*adhi-citta, .‘the higher thought’, 
meditation; loc. ~e (āyogo) Dh. 185. 

adhitthati, vb. (sa. adhi-Vsthà) 


— 


— 


21 


adhiseti 


1) to stand (on); ger. ~aya 54,8. *) to 
practise, to perform, to devote oneself 
to (acc.); pr. 3. 8g. ~ati (upāyupā- 
dānam, g. v.) 96,12; ger. ~wiiya (upo- 
sathaügani) 61,7. 

adhitthāna, n. (sa, adhishthāna) 
1) determination, resolution, *) adhering 
to, clinging to the world, comp. w. the 
synon. abhinivesa (being a paraphrase 
to upāyupādāna, g. v.) : adhitthānā- 
bhinivesinusayam (cetaso), that in- 
clination (of the mind) which consists 
in clinging to the world, 96,12 (cp. 
anusaya). 

adhipa, m. (— sa.) a master, lord; 
v. adhipacca. 

*adhipanna, pp. (adhi- pad) as- 
sailed, seized; gen. M. «8S8, (antake- 
nà-? „whom death has seized“) Dh. 288. 

*adhipp&ya, m. (fr. adhi-pra-yi, 
cp. sa. abhi-praya) intention, meaning; 
nom, eo, 114. 

*adhibhāsati, ob. (adhi-ybhàs) 
to speak to, to adress (acc.); aor. 3. sg. 
ajjhabhiisi 77,2. 

adhimutta, pp. (sa. adhi-mukta 
(Ymuc)) inclined to (w. acc. or comp.); 
m. vanādhimutto, who gives oneself 
to desires, Dh. 344 (cp. vana?); gen. 
m. pl. ~anam (nibbanam) „who strive 
after Nibbana“, Dh. 226. 

adhivattha, pp. (fr. adhi-Vvas) 
living, inhabiting (loc); f. wi, 5,19. 

*adhivāsana, m. (fr. adhivaseti) 
consent, acceptance of an invitation; 
acc. eum, 70,11. 

*adhivaseti, ob. (caus. adhi- 
V vas) !)to wait, to wait for; imp. 2. 8g. 
wehi, 53,25; 2. pl. ~etha, 33,15; ger. 
„etvā (w. acc. dve savana) 11,5. — 
2) to bear, endure (acc.); ger. wetva 
(tayo pahāre) 55,15; aor. 3. sg. nesi 

tà sc. vedanā) 78,25 — ajjhavasayi 
vedanam) 80,34. — 5) to consent; aor. 

„esi, 70,10 == 77,29; esp. to accept an 
invitation to dinner (bhattar) : imp. 
8. 8g. ~etu, 70,9 — 77,98. (cp. adhi- 
vasana). — caus. II: adhivasapeti, to 
cause to wait; pr. 2. sg. nesi, 33,17. 

adhiseti, vb. (sa. adhi-Vgī) to 


adhuna 


lie upon (acc.); fut. 3. sg. ~sessati 
(pathavim) 107,5 = Dh. 41. 

adhuna, adv. (— $a.) now, °-iigata, 
mfn. 8 new-comer; m. ~o (uyyanapalo) 
91,15. 

adho, indecl. (sa. adhas) down 
(w. acc.); adho Gangam, down the 
river G. 14,21 (or perhaps better comp. 
adhogaügam, adv. ?) — compar. adhara, 
mfn., superl. adhama. mfn. (q. v.). 

an-, ana-, negative prefix, v. a-t. 

*Anagata-vamsa, m. ‘history 
of the future’, name of a non-canonical 
Pāli work („the Buddhist Apocalypse‘), 
from which an extract is given 102,2-28. 

Anāthapindika, m. nom. pr. 
(= sa.) ‘giver of food to the poor’, 
name of a rich merchant; gen. «assa, 
1 1,20. 

anlka, m. £ n. (= sa.) an army. 
balānīka, mfn. g. v. 

anu, indecl. (= sa.) before vowels 
except ,u^ usually 'anv-' (v. anvaya 
etc.), prefix to verbs and nouns, ex- 
pressing ‘after, along, near to, accord- 
ing to’ etc. Inserted in a dvandva- 
comp. of the same word repeated, v. 
khuddānukhuddaka (cp. pati). 

anu, mfn. = anu (q. v.) cp. anu- 
matta. 

anukantati, ob. (sa. anu-ykrt. 
6.) to cut (acc.); pr. 3. sg. „ati 
(hattham) Dh. 311. 

anukumpā, f. (== sa.) compassion; 
instr. „ūya (w. gen. tava) out of pity 
(for you) 55,4. 

anukkama, m. (sa. anu-krama) 
succession, order; instr. adv. «ena, 
gradually, 38,22. 48,9; ti wena „and 
so on by degrees“ 34,8. sahanukkama, 
mfn. (g. v.). 

anukkamati, vb. (sa. anu-ykram) 
to follow, to go along (acc.); part. 
med. m. ~mano (-patham) 90,34. 

anukhuddaka, mfn. v. khud- 
dánukhuddaka. 

anuga, mfn, (sa. anu-gu) follow- 
ing; sattāmacca-satānuga, mfn. fol- 
lowed by 700 companions, 110,23 
(m. ~O). 


22 


anugacchati, vb. (sa. anu-ygam) 
to follow (acc.); aor. 3. sg. ~gamāsi 
(tam yeva) 68,55; w. augm. anv-a-gā 
(tam) 111,3. 

anuggaha, m. (sa. anu-graha) 
favour, kindness, help, assistance; acc. 
wilh 6,36. 

anucara, m. (==.54.) a companion, 
follower. — sánucara. mfn. v. sal. 

anucinna, mfn. (sa. anu-cirna, 
pp. anu-ycar) having attained (acc.); 
m. pl. nā (samadhijhanam) 109,21. 

*anucchavika, mfn. (fr. anu -- 
chavi) suitable, fit; m. ~o (w. inf.) 
24.21; (w. gen. pers.) 25,3 (rañño). 

anujanaüti, vb. (sa. anu-yjiia). 
1) to permit, allow; pr. 1. sg. ~āmi 
(ekena (bhikkhuna) dve samanere 
upatthāpetum) 81.16. *)to prescribe 
(acc.) 81,20 (dasa sikkhāpadāni). (cp. 
next.) 

anuniata, mfn. (pp. anujanati, 
sa. anu-jüüta) permitted, allowed, 
having attained the permission of 
(instr.); m. ~o (ñatih(i)) 11,11. 11,15-15; 
m. pl. «à (ranis) 78,24. 

*anuinfiütatta,n. (sa. *anu-jüüta- 
tva) the being permitted; abl. «à, 
11,12 (,granting him leave to speak"). 

anutappati, vb. pass. (sa. anu- 
tapyate, ytap) to suffer, to repent; 
pr. 3. sg. „ati Dh. 67. 314. (cp. 
tapati*.) 

*anutire, adv. (fr. anu! + tira 
(/oc.)) near the banks of a river (gen.) 
104,21. 

*anutthunati, ob. (fr. *anu- 
ystan) to deplore, bewail (acc.); part. 
m. sg. ~unam (purānāni) Dh. 156 
(= anutthunanta (pl.) Comm.). The 
discordance between the sg. anutthu- 
nam and the pl. of the verb is pro- 
bably due to the fact that senti has 
been influenced by cāpā- tikhinà (like 
jhayanti in the preceeding verse); cp. 
also the use of sg. anutappati Dh. 
314.) cp. Tr. PM. 76,10. 

*anuddayā, f. compassion, mercy; 
in comp. this word generally takes the 
form anuddaya- (cp. mutta): khanti- 


mettā-'nuddaya-sampanna. mfn. (q. v.) 
7,12. 38,15. (fr. *anu + daya, although 
it is generally spelt with double ‘d’, 
perhaps from analogy with niddaya?). 

*anu-dhamma-ciirin. mfn. liv- 
ing according to the law; m. ~i Dh. 
20 (cp. dhamma-cārin). 

anudhavati, vb. (sa. anu-ydhāv!) 
to follow, pursue, seek (acc.); pr. 3. 
sg. eati (tirath) Dh. 85; aor. 2. sg. 
anu-dhavi (kalikam) 47,10. 

anupakkamena, v. 
upakkama). 

*anupakhajja, ger. encroaching 
on (acc.) 83,33 (there bhikkhu). This 
word seems to be ger. fr. *anu-pra- 
Vskand (-skadya) =~ to enter together 
with, disrespectfully pushing oneself 
forward (— anu-pavisati, comm.). Hence 
the vb. denom. anupakhajjati (Vin. 
V 168,4). Morris, JPTS. 86,115. 
89,201, derives it from ykhād. 

anupatati, vb. (sa. anu-ypat) 
to run after, to follow (ucc.); pr. 3. 
sg. „anti (sotam) Dh. 347; pp. ~ita, 
followed, m. dukkhanupatito. Dh. 302, 
pl. dukkhanupatit' (9: à addhagū) ib. 

anuparigacchati. eb. (sa. anu- 
pari-/gà) to walk (fly) round (acc.); 
aor. 3. sg. anu-pariy-agà (pasanam) 
104,15. 

*anupariyàya, m. (fr. anu-pari- 
yi) going round along; *-patha. m. 
acc. eam 90,5 = anuparlyaya-na- 
makam maggam, 91,28 (the path round 
the town). 

*anupassin, mfn. (fr. anu-ypac) 
looking after, looking for; para-va}ja-®, 
looking after the faults of others, Dh. 
253 (gen. m. ~wissa); subhá-?, looking 
for pleasures, Dh. 7 (acc. m. ~ith), 
Dh. 349 (gen. m. ~ino). 

anupucchati, vb. (sa. anu- 
Vprach) to inquire after (acc.); pr. 
2. 8g. wasi (jivam) 103,17. 

anupubba, mfn. (sa. anu-pūrva) 
regular; instr. adv. «ena, gradually, 
by and by, in course of time, 18.11. 
97,20. 42,24. 81,8. 87.4. Dh. 239. 

*anupubbikatha, f. (fr. prec. 


an- (cp. 


23 


anumodana 


+ katha, g.v.) a regulated exposition; 
acc. ~am kathesi „preached in due 
course“ 68,19. 

anuppatta, pp. (sa. anu-prapta, 
anu-pra-Vap) arrived to, having 
reached, having attained (acc.); m. 
„0 (vayo) 74,1. (Laükam) 110,28. 
acc. ^am (uttamattham) Dh. 386. 
loc. ~e (Alavim). 

anubandhati. ob. (sa. anu- 
vbandh) to follow, to pursue (acc.); 
aor. 3. 8g. ~i 11,19. 12,28; 1. 89. wim 
104,11; ger. witva 33,18. 

anubodha, m. (= sa.) comprehen- 
sion, understanding, — dur-anubodba, 
mfn. q. v. 

*anubrūheti, vb. (sa. *anu- 
vvrnh) to ‘increase’, to devote oneself 
to (acc.); pot. 3. sg. aye (vivekaii) 
Dh. 75 (cp. brüheti). 

anubhavati, vb. (sa. anu-ybhü) 
to feel, to experience, to obtain (enjoy, 
suffer) (w. acc.); pr. 3. pl. «anti 
(dukkham) 23,16; aor. 3. sg. ~i (dib- 
basampattim) 23,17; inf. itum 23,25; 
ger. witvii 23,24; part. ~anta, m. eO 
63,18; part. med. ~mana, f. nā 61.5 
(.taking part in*, -kilam); pp. anu- 
bhüta : kim me dukkhena wena 
(instr.) „why should I suffer this pain?“ 
32,32. 

*anubhavana, (fr. anubha- 
vati) partaking of (enjoying, suffering), 
— dukkhānubhavanatthāya 23,18 (in 
order to endure their punishment, cp. 
attha!); kamma-karaninubhavana- 
tthānam 23,27 (a place where one has 
to endure the results of his bad deeds), 

anubhāva, v. ānubhāva. 

anubhūta, pp. v. anubhavati. 
anumatta, mfn. Dh, 284, v. anu- 
matta. 

anumodati, vb. (sa. anu-Vmud) 
to rejoice in (acc.), to accept with 
joy, to thank; part. med. ~mana, m. 
~o (dānam) Dh. 177; pr. 1. sg. ~ami 
(„l thank you“) 29,3. 

anumodana, n. (=sa,) acceptance, 
benediction, thanks (esp, the words 
pronounced by the Buddhist priests at 


anuyuBjati 


the end of the meal, or after receiving 
gifts or offerings to the fraternity); 
acc, ~am karonto 86,15; „am karis- 
simi 87,20; %-atthāya 87,18 (in order 
to hear the benediction). (cp. Dhpd. 
(1855) p. 168,7. foll.) 

anuyuījati, vb. (sa. anu-yyuj) 
to practise, to give oneself up to (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. „ati (bhāvanam) 97,9; 3. 
pl. „anti Dh. 26 (pamadam), Dh. 
247 (surà-meraya-panam); pot. med. 
3. sg. mà pamadam „etha, Dh. 27. 
— pp. anuyutta, m. ~o „in the enjoy- 
ment of“ 74,22 (dittha-dhamma-sukha- 
vihāram g. 9.). 

anuyoga, m. (— sa.) study, medi- 
tation, application to. — kamasukh’-al- 
lika-9, mfn. whose application is wholly 
concentrated iu pleasure and lust, m. 
^. 0 (sc. anto) 66.26. — atta-kilamatha-®, 
mfn. q. v. (cp. prec.). 

anuyogin, mfn. (fr. anuyoga). 
v. attanuyogin. 

anurakkhati, ob. (sa. anu- 
yraksh). to guard, to watch (acc.); 
imper. 2. pl. watha (sacitt:ui) Dh. 
327. 

*anurakkhin. mfn. (fr. anu- 
rakkhati) watching. — vaca-°, mfn. q.v. 

Anuruddha, m. nom. pr. (— sa.) 
name of a cousin of Gotama Buddha, 
one of his great disciples; nom. ~o 
80,30. 109,17 (mahāgaņī). 109,8 (dib- 
bacakkhumhi[aggo]); acc. am 80,11; 
voc. wa, ib. 

anurüpa, mfn. (= sa.) conform- 
able, adapted to, fit, suitable; tad- 
anurūpa, mfn. 57,21. q.v. 

anulitta, pp. (fr. anu-ylip, sa. 
anulipta) anointed, scented. — nahā- 
tanulitta, 41,9. v. nahāta. 

anuloma, mfn. (— sa.) ‘with the 
hairs’, in natural order (opp. patiloma), 
— °-patilomam (adv.?) „forward and 
back" 66,6. (cp. loma). 

anuvatti n. mfn. (sa. anu-vartin) 
following. — dhammiinuvatéino (m. 
pl.) following the law, Dh. 86. 

anuvicarati, vb, (sa.anu-vi-ycar) 
to wander or roam through, to explore 


24 


LSL c f C V ——————— 


| ^ 
(acc. ep. vicāreti); pr. 3. pl. anti 
(samuddatirain) 2147; ger. ~witva 
(thala-jala-patham) 19,22. 
anuvicinteti, vb. (sa. anu-vi- 
Veint) to meditate upon (ace.); part. 
m. ~wayanto (tam eva) 47,25; ~ayam 
(dhammam) Dh. 364. 

anuvicca, ger. discovering, attend- 
ing to, observing, examining(?) Dh. 
229 (viññu pasamsanti) This word 
is generally explained in the commen- 
taries by anuviditva, janitva, etc.; 
it is perhaps ger. fr. anu-vi-Vci 
(*anuvicitya, *anuviciya. ep. Sm, v. 
530 and viceyya ib. v. 529) or fr. 
anu-yvid (= anu-vija, Tr. MN. I 
319,3 (Note p. 562) cp. Morris, JPTS. 
'86. p. 121.). but it can hardly be 
derived from anu-y1 or anu-yvrt. cp. 
Dhpd. (1855) p. 368. 

anuvijja. anuvijjati, v. anu- 
vicca. 

anusalücarati, eb. (sa. anu-sain- 
ear) to walk along (ace.); part. med. 
m. pl. «mina (kipillikā viya tham- 
bham) 60,2. 

*anusandhi, m. (cp. sa. anu- 
sandhana) application, conclusion, 
connexion; acc. «ii ghatetva (,mak- 
ing the connexion“) 82,5. cp. Faus- 
ball, JRAS. '70, p. 8. Feer, JAs. 
"15. II p. 293. 

anusaya, m. (sa. anu-caya) in- 
clination, attachment; acc. ~am 96,12 
(v. adlitthana). — tanhánusaya, v. 
tanhà. — mānānusaya. v. mana. cp. 
SBE, X p. 8l. ` 

anusāsaka, m. (sa. anu-casaka) 
a counsellor, — attha-dliammá-9, v. 
attha! (7). 

anusasati, vb. (sa. anu-Vças) 
1) to admonish, to instruct (acc.); inf. 
elitum 81,18; grd. m. witabbo 79.15; 
pot. 3. sg. ~weyya Dh. 77, 158. — 
2) to give one (gen.) advice concerning 
lee) aor. 3. 89. ~i (rafifio atthaū 
ca dhammaū ca) 58,26 (cp. attha ! 
(7)). — *) to rule, to govern (acc.); 
aor. 3, sg. ~i (vinicchayam „admini- 
stered justice“) 42,27. | 


95 antara 


anusikkhin, mfn. (sa. anu-gik- 
shin) studying, learning; ahorattánu- 
sikkhinam, gen. pl. Dh. 226 (studying 
day and night). 

anussarati, eb. (sa. anu-ysmr) 
to remember, to recollect; aor. wi 
28,26 (gune); gen. witva 17,4 (attanā 
katakammaih) 28,15 (Buddha-gune); 
part. m. „art (dhammam) Dh. 364; 
m. pl. «anta, 28,16. | 

Anotatta, m. (sa. An-avatapta) 
nom. pr. of a lake in Himavanta; 
%daham (acc.) 61,12. 

anta!, m. (£ n.) (= sa.) ') end, 
term; nom. ~o (phalànai) 1.15; ace. 
~am karissatha (dukkhassa) „make 
an end of" Dh, 275; comp. loc. vijay- 
ante, immediately after the victory, 
60,25; marananta, mfn. g. v. — 2) limit, 
boundary, border, edge; ucc. ~am 83,21. 
comp. loc. velante 20,4 (ep. vela); 
vanante, Dh. 305, v. vana; accanta, 
santika, samanta, samanta, q. v. — 
3) gide; acc. adv. ekamantam. g. v. — 
t) extreme; pl. dve anta, 66,25; acc. 
pl. ubho ante, 66,28. 96,17; eko... 
dutiyo anto, 96,16-17. cp. ekantum 
(adv.) Dh. 228, g. v. — °) nearly 
pleonastically at the end of certain 
comp., kammanta (m.). suttanta (x.) 

. V. 
anta?, n. (sa. antra) the intestines; 
wam 82,4, 97,21. anta-guna, g. v. 

Antaka, m. (fr. anta!, == sa.) 
nom. pr. the king of death (Yama or 
Māra); ^. ~o Dh. 48; instr. «ena, 
Dh. 288. 

anta-kara, m(fn). (= sa.) put- 
ting an end to (gen.); m. pl. wit 105,26 
(dukkhasssa). 

*anta-kiriyā, f. (sa. *anta-kriya) 
extinction; dat, ~aya 70,17. 

*anta-guna, n. (sa. *antra-guna) 
mesentery (Sp. Hardy, Man. of Buddh. 
p. 400: „lower intestines“); ~am 82,4. 
97,22. 

*antamaso, adv. (sa. *antama 
+ cas) even; <añjaliñ paggahetvā 
thite, even those who were standing 
with their joined hands raised, 22,7; 


^. bilàra-nisakkana-mattam (pakara- 
vivaram) even large enough that a 
cat can creep in, 90,35. (cp. antima). 

antara, ^. (— 80.) 1) the interior 
part of a thing, interval; *) as the first 
part of comp. (— anto, v. below), 
h) at the end of comp.: kalantarena 
(instr.) „by progress of time“ 99,28; 
buddhantaraih, a period between two 
Buddhas, 84.30; dant’ antara-gato 
„having got in between the teeth“ 
13,29; pl. loc. lomantaresu, in the 
coat, 16,5 (v. loma). uddhanantaresu, 
9,21 (v. uddhana); pé. abl. s&khan- 
tarehi, amongst the branches, 62,11, 
pupphantarehi. 62,12. For antaram, 
antura. antare v. separately. — °?) dif- 
ference (at the end of comp. — other): 
purisantaram, another man, 48,11. 
(cp. antarika, an-antara, santara). 

antaram, indecl. (= 8a.) ') adv. 
within; „katvā, having shut in (?) 
23,10. — 2) prp. w. gen. rarüsinam 
e pavisitva, 87,33. 

antaradhāna, m. 
dhāna) disappearance; 
102,2 (q. v.). 

antauradhāyati, vb. (sa. antar 
-Vdhā) to disappear; aor. 3. sg. nāvi, 
24,7. 72,25; (impf.) 3. sg. med. ~ayatha, 
104,18 (cp. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 110); pp. 
antarahita, g. v. — caus. antaradhā- 
peti. to cause to disappear (acc.); 
pot. 1. pl. weyyama (labhasakkaram) 
13,1. 

*antarantarā, adv. (antara (q. 
v.) repeated) now and then, 35,1. 
83,3. 

*antara-vithiyam, adv. (fr. 
antara + vithi, Joc.) in the very 
streets, 39,6. 

antarahita, mfn. (pp.antar-ydhà, 
cp. antaradhayati) disappeared, hid- 
den; f. ~ā (pasādamattā) 94,25. — 
an-antarahita. mfn. (q. v.). 

antara, adv. £ prp. (abl. fr. an- 
tara, = sa.) among, on the way, dur- 
ing; Dh. 237; comp. antarāmagge 
(loc.) on the way, 32,14, 85,2; repeated: 
antarantarā, q. v. 


(sa. antar- 
pariyatti-), 


antaraya 


antarāya. m. (= sa.) !)obstacle; 
acc, ~am akāsi, prevented, 68,3; nom. 
gaman’-antarayo, 65.33 (v. gamana). 
— °) death; acc. ~am, Dh. 286. 

*antarika. f. (fr. antara) inter- 
val; — sīmantarikā, f. a boundary 
territory, Joc. ~aya (dvinnam yak- 
khànam) 40,32. 

antare. prp. (loc. fr.antara, — 8a.) 
within, among, between, w. gen. 10,31. 
30,5. 43,6. 62,9, or at the end of comp. 
73,20 (màla-kacavara-*, „into the dust- 
heap“) cp. antara. 

antalikkha. x. (sa. antariksha) 
the sky, the air; loc. we, Dh. 127. 

antavat, mfn. (== sa.) finite, li- 
mited; m. ~va (loko) 89,28, — an-an- 
tavat, mfn. infinite, ib. 

antika, mfn. (= sa.) near, bor- 
dering upon. — maranantika, mfn. v. 
marana. (cp. santika). 

antima, mfn, (= sa.) final, last; 
m. ~0 (samussayo) 108.17 = Dh. 351. 
— *antima-sarira, mfn. one who has 
received his last body, m. nom. ~o, 
Dh. 352, acc. ~am, Dh. 400, 

antevāsika. m. (fr. ante = anto 
(sa. antar) + vasika (y/vas, to dwell)) 
a pupil; acc. ~am, 32,22; acc. pl. 
e, e, 16,21; acariyantevasike (acc. pl.) 
a teacher and his pupil, 32.21; gen. pl. 
wanam, 102,9. 

anto, prp. (sa. antar, in some 
comp. ante, cp. last) in, within (opp. 
bahi); w. gen. tassa ~ 61,15; attano 
fianajalassa ~ 86,28; w. loc. ~watavi- 
yam 30,30; in comp. anto-nagaram 
43,4 = anto-nagare „inside the town“ 
13,34 (opp. bahi-nagare); anto-gabbhe, 
within the chamber, 65,28; anto-jalam, 
into the net, 88,35. (cp. antara). 

*antogadha, mfn. (probably fr. 
anto + ogadha (pp. ava-ygàli) for 
ogāļha) included, contained in. °-hetu- 
attha, mfn. containing a causative 
meaning, 85,9 (ep. attha! (6)). 

*anto-düha, m. an intexnal flame; 
tassa ~o uppajj „he grew aflame 
within® 45,1. 

antopura, n. (often written ante- 


26 


pura, Tr. PM. 79,15, sa. antah-pura) 
a king's harem; loc, ~e 38,17. 

*antovalaijaka, m. pl. (fr. anto 
+ valahja) in-door people; gen. 
wana, 43,6 (opp. bahivalaijaka). 

andha, mfn. (= sa.) blind (also 
about mental blindness); m. ~o 25,15; 
pl. mā 88,27. — *andha-bala, mfn. 
blinded by folly; voc. m. wa 38,19; 
voc. f. me 59.1. — *andha-bhūta, 
mfn. mentally blinded; m. <o 88,29 
paiinacakkhuno abhāvena ~o, 
88,31; acc. pl. m. ~e, Dh. 59. Andha- 
bhüta-jàtaka. a later reading for 
Aņdabhūta, 52,11 (cp. 50,12-15). 

andhaka, mfn. (== sa.) blind. 
*andhaka-masaka, m. pl. gad-flies, 
104,27. 

andhakara, m. (= sa.) darkness; 
acc, ~am 19,17; loc. we 69,17; instr. 
wena, Dh. 146. 

anna, n. (= sa.) food; instr. sa 
mam „vena (sc. uddhari) 20,26. 

annaya, v. dur-annaya (= an- 
vaya, cp. anveti). 

anvàya. ger. fr. anu-yi, v. anveti. 

anvahata, pp. (anu-à-yhan) 
struck, beaten, perplexed, v. an-anvā- 
hata-cetasa. 

anveti, vb. (sa. anu-yi) to follow, 
to reach, to affect or attack (acc.); 
pr. 3. 8g. ~eti, 106,22 = Dh. 71, Dh. 
1. 2. 124; ger. ~āya (vuddhim, full- 
grown) 2,18. 18,2. 

apakkamati,vb.(sa.apa-ykram), 
to go away, to retire from (abl.); pot. 
8. sg. ~me (tamhā) 14,4; aor. 3. 89. 
emi (etto) 104,15. 

apagacchati, vb. (sa. apa-ygam) 
to go away; pp. apagata, departed, 
gone off; as the first part of adj. comp.: 
0-kāļaka, °-tacapapatika, °-phegguka, 
vattha, %-sākhāpalāsa, g. v.; dvin- 
nam itthakanam °-tthanam, the inter- 
val between two bricks, 91,29. 

apaca&yati, vb. (sa. apa-ycày) 
to honour, to respect (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
(metri causa ~ayati) 30,9. 

apacüyin, mfn. (8a. apa-cayin, 
fr. last) rendering due respect; vad- 


dhāpacāyin, mfn. „who reveres the 
aged“, m. pl. ~ino, Dh. 109. 

apaciti, f. (= sa.) honour, respect; 
acc. eim, 29,26. 30.4, 

*apajita, n. (pp. apa-yji), what 
is lost, defeat; acc. ~am (opp. jitam) 
Dh. 105. 

A pannaka-jataka, n. nom. pr., 
the title of the first tale in the Jātaka- 
book, 102,20 [a-pannaka, mfn. evident, 
certain, leading to salvation (fr. sa. 
a-parna, without leaves, opp. sa-pan- 
naka, but the semasiological process 
is unknown; Weber, Ind. Str. III, 150 
and Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it — 
*a-pracna-ka]. 

apattha, mfn. (sa. apasta, pp. 
apa-Vas?), thrown away; n. pl. ~ani 
(atthini) Dh. 149. 

apaneti, vb. (sa. apa-ynī) to 
take away, to remove (acc.); pot. 1. 
sg. ~eyyam (atthim) 13,11; aor. 3. sg. 
apānayi (putte) 13,4; ger. „etvā, 
4412, 65,32; pp.. apanita, n. «am 
etam "Tathāgatassa, T. is free from 
this, 94,7; grd. -etabba, to be re- 
moved, *-ákára-ppatta (sataka) „in- 
tolerable“, 45,1. 

*apabbühati or apaviythati, 
vb. (fr. apa-vi-Vūh) to remove by 
digging up or scraping out (acc.); 
aor. 3. 8g. apabbuhi (pamsum) 40,26. 
(cp. viyūhati). | 

apara, pron. (== 80.) another (by 
way of addition or progression in 
number, the original sense being 
»posterior, following", whilst para 
(q. v.) denotes what is opposite or 
distant, cp. aiia); acc. ~am (dipam) 
23,31; aparam pana ekadīvasaīn „and 
again on a certain day", 63,24-28; n. 
nāparam, nothing more, 71,16; instr. 
wena samayena, afterwards, subse- 
quently, 95,28. 101,16; Joc. ~asmim 
(kanakavimāne) 23,22; m. pl. ~e pi 
’ssa tayo sahāyā ahesum, further he 
had three friends, 14,9. — aparam (n.) 
is often used adverbially, esp. aparam 
pi, besides that, also, too, 34,16. 54,21. 
— aparaparam, adv. to and fro, from 


27 


aparuta 


side to side, 2,27. 40,24. — pubbā-para, 
mfn. (g. v.), aparajju, aparabhāge, 
v. below. 
aparajju, adv. (sa. apare-dyus) 
on the following day; 101,27. 
aparajjhati, vb. (sa. apa-yradh) 
to offend against (Joc.); ger. ~witva 
(parassa vatthumhi) 58,13. 
aparapaccaya. v. a- (p. 4). 
aparādha, m. (— sa.) offence, 
fault; acc. ekáparàdham. one such 


fault, 47,2. — nir-aparüdha, mfn., 
innocent, guiltless; acc. m. ~am, 
39,29. 


*aparabhāge, adv. (fr. apara 
+ bhaga, loc.) afterwards, later; 22,14. 
2413-16, 38,11. 

*aparopita, mfn. (apa + ropita, 
pp.) consumed (?). This word is only 
due to my own conjecture (see Note 
p. 126); the Colombo Edition reads 
āropita (fr. āropeti, g. v.) 87,11. 

apaviddha, mfn. (= sa. pp. 
apa-yvyadh) flung, thrown away; neg- 
lected; acc. m. eam, 34,15; n. ~am 
(kiccam) Dh. 292. 

*apasadeti, vb. (fr. apa + sadeti, 
caus. ysad) to blame, to depreciate, 
disparage (acc.); pr. 3.89. ~eti (mam) 
14.,29-30. 

*apassena, w. (fr. apà-vcri, cp. 
Sa. apāgraya) a rest, a support; 
°.phalaka, n. a bolster-slab or head- 
rest; ~am 84,16. (cy. Morris, JPTS. 
"84.71. — SBE, XX, 219.] 

*apabhata, mfn. (pp. apā-ybhr) 
brought away, stolen; s». ~am (ratti- 
bhattam) 15,19. 

apāya, m. (= sa.) !) going away, 
loss; piyāpāyo, loss of the belowed, 
Dh. 211. — ?)state of suffering (esp. 
dwelling in hell or in the world of 
animals, petas and asuras); acc. sag- 
gipayam, heaven and hell, Dh. 423. 
— apàya-gàmin, mfn. going to an evil 
state; m. pl. ~ino 88,35 (opp. saggāya 
gacchati}. 

apayin, mfn. (= sa.) going away. 
— an-apàyin, mfn. (q. v.). | 

apāruta, mfn. (sa. apāvrta, fr. 


api 


apá-yvr) open. 9-dvara. mfn. with 
open doors; loc. ~e (nivesane) 39,28. 

api. adv. (== sa.) *) generally enclit. 
= pi (q. t.) or -Api after prec. a, à. 
— *) beginning a sentence (before a 
vowel sometimes app’ or ap’) 3) even, 
Dh. 187. b) api ca.. vā.. va, whether 
.. or, 96,31 (w. foll. api ca kho. ne- 
vertheless, 97,1); api ca, nevertheless, 
101,13 (cp. kiñcàpi); api ca kho pana, 
but at all events, 82,25. °) app-eva 
nama, perhaps (w. foll. pot.) 17,26. 
69,5. 3) particle of interrogation (w. 
indic. or pot.) 18,26. 69.4. 71,31. 104,14 
(ap); api nu, 73,4. 

apekkhati, vb. (sa. apa-yiksh) 
to look for (acc.); pr. 3. sg. med. wate 
(kāme) 103,24. 

apekkha &apekha. f. (sa. apek- 
sha) desire, regard, care; Dh. 345 
(-kh-, w. loc.). 

apekkhin & apekhin, mfn. (sa. 
apekshin) looking for, regardtul of, — 
an-apekkhin, mfn. (g. v.). 

apeta, mfn. (= sa.; pp. fr. next) 
free from, deprived of (w. instr. or 
comp.); m. ~o (damasaccena) Dh. 9. 
— apeta-kaddama, mfn. without mud, 
m. ~o (rahado) Dh. 95. — %-viiitāņa, 
mfn. senseless, m. ~o (kayo) 107,6 
== Dh. 41. 

a peti, vb. (sa. apa-y/i) to go away; 
pr. 3. sg. «eti, 501; 1. pl. apema 
104,16 (nibbijjipema Gotamaih , being 
disgusted, we shall go away from Go- 
tama“, Fausboll, SBE. X*, p. 71, 
who prefers the reading Gotama, cp. 
SN. I, 124). 

app’, v. api. 

appa. mfn. (sa. alpa) small, little; 
M. ~O 88,30 (only a few = kocid eva 
satto 89,1); instr. wen’ eva (trifling) 
38,24; 12. ~ar, a little, a small portion, 
Dh. 20. 259, loc. wasmi yācito, asked 
for little, Dh. 224. — appa-kilamathena 
agato si „you had no mishap?“ 28,12 
(cp. kilamatha). 

appaka, mfn. (fr. last, sa. alpaka) 
small, little, trifling; instr. n. ~en’ eva, 


28 


—nAUH>— — a 


at a trifle, 52,6; m. pl. ~& (few) Dh. 
85. — an-appaka. mfn. (q. v.). 

*appaggha. mfn. (sa. *alpárgha, 
cp. aggha) of little value; °-bhandam 
„Wares of little value“ 26,2. 

*appabodhati. vb. (fr. appa (sa. 
alpa) -|- bodhati. a rare present forma- 
tion of ybudh, cp. bujjhati) to slight, 
disregard; pr. 3. sg. „ati (nindam) 
Dh. 143. (Weber, lud, Str. I, 137; 
others (Fausbøll € Max Müller) have 
taken it = a (9: na) + prabodhati 
(does not excite), or (Childers & Su- 
bháti) == apa-bodhati (to ward off), 
ep. the readings ap(p)abodheti and 
sa. alpabuddhi, m/n.) 

*appamaiiünati, vb. (fr. appa + 
yman. cp. last) to despise, underrate 
(w. gen.); pot. 3. 8g. med. „etha (pa- 
passa, puiifiassa) Dh. 121. 122. 

appamatta. mfn. (sa, alpa-matra) 
little, slight, mean; m. «o (gandho) 
Dh. 56. (cp. a-ppamatta, p. 5.) 

*appamattaka. mfn. (fr. last), 
of little importance; m. ~o (arakkho) 
17,16. 

*appalabha, mfn. (sa. *alpa-lā- 
bha) receiving little; m. ~o (bhikkhu) 
Dh. 366. 

*appasattha, mfn. (sa. *alpa- 
sārtha) having few companions; m. 
„0 (vanijo) Dh. 123 (cp. sattha). 

*appassada. mfn. (sa. *alpa- 
svāda) having a short taste; m. pl. 

*appassuta,mfn.(sa.*alpa-cruta) 
having learnt little; m. ~(0) (puriso) 
Dh. 152. 

appiecha, mfn. (sa. alpeccha) 
who has but few desires; acc. m, ~am., 
Dh, 404 (cp. icchà). 

*appossukka, mfn. (sa. *alpa 
+ autsukya, cp. ussuka) unconcerned, 
living at ease, with few wishes; m. 0 
(viharatu) 74,3. Dh. 330. 

abbahati, vb. (8a. à-Vvrh) to pull 
out (acc.); pot. 3. sg. abbahe (sallam) 
108,5. 

abbuda, x. (sa. arbuda) the foetus 


in the first or second month after con- 
ception; gen. «assu 99,10. 

abbha, x. (84. ablira) cloud; abi. 
„ā (mutto candima) Dh. 172, 

abbhakkhāna, x. (sa. abhy-à- 
khyāna) false accusation, calumny; 
acc. ~am, Dh. 139. 

abbhantara, x. (sa. abhy-antara) 
the inner part, interior, interval; ~am 
(opp. bahiram) 106,11 = Dh. 394, — 
loc. prp. W. gen. ee, in, with, within, 
3,25 (tuyham), 38,22 (rañño). 

abbhuggacchati, vb. (sa. abhy- 
ud-ygam) to go out, to sally forth; 
ger. ~gantva, 60,3. 

abbhuta, mfn. (sa. adbhuta) 
wonderful, marvellous; n. „am 79,27. 
98,32. — n. (subst.) one of the nine 
divisions of Buddha’s doctrine (na- 
vaūgam Satthusāsanam) 109,31 (jä- 
tak’-abbhuta-vedallam). 

abhi, prp. (—- sa.) prefixed to 
verbs and nouns, expressing the direc- 
tion „towards“ or superiority; before 
vowels it takes the form abbh- (v. 
above). 

abhikamkhati, vb. (sa. abhi- 
ykanksh) to desire, to wait for, to 
intend (acc.); part. med. m. «mano 
(dalha-ppaharam) 30,13. 

abhikirati, vb. (sa. abhi-ykr, 
kir) to pour over, to overwhelm (acc.); 
pr. 3. 8g. «ati (ogho dipam) Dh. 25. 

abhikkanta, mfn. (sa. abhikran- 
ta, pp. abhi-ykram) advanced, ex- 
cellent; n. ~am, 69,14 95,26. 

abhijanati, eb. (sa. abhi-/jīā) 
to perceive, to know, to learn, to re- 
member (acc.); pr. 1. 8g. ~ ami, 27,23; 
ger. abhinüaya (attadattham) Dh. 
166, sayah ~, Dh. 353 (as J am in- 
telligent myself); pp. abhiünata, v. 
below. 

abhiüia, f. (sa. abhijiia) super- 
natural faculty or intuitive knowledge; 
dat. ~aya samvattati, conduces to 
knowledge, 66,30, 93,8; instr. «aya 
(sāvakānam dhammam'desemi) from 
my intuitive knowledge, 90,16. — °-vo- 
sita, mfn. perfect in knowledge, m. 


—- 
= 


29 


abhinikkhamana 


~0, Dh. 423 (v. vosita). — cha-l- 
abhiüüa, mfn, having the six super- 
natural faculties, m. pl. «8, 109,20 
(cp. cha). — jūānābhmīūā, f. super- 
natural power attained by meditation 
(v. jhāna), ace. ^am, 47,33. 

abhinñata, mfn. (pp. abhijanati, 
sa. abhijüata) known, distinguished; 
m. pl. bahu-abhiününati, highly esteemed 
(sāvakā) 109,19. 

abhittharati, vb. (probably an 
old error for abhi-tvarati or abhi- 
ttarati, sa. abhi-ytvar) to make haste; 
pot. 3, sg.med. ~ etha (kalyane) „hasten 
towards the good“, Dh. 116. (cp. ta- 
rati). 

abhidhamma, m. (sa. abhi-dhar- 
ma) the higher dhamma or transcen- 
dental doctrine. — Abhidhamma-pita- 
ka, n. name of the third of the three 
great collections („baskets*, cp. pitaka) 
of the Buddhist holy scriptures, com- 
prising the following works: Dham- 
masangani, Vibhanga, Kathavatthu, 
Puggala-paiüatti, Dhatukatha. Ya- 
maka, Patthana; loc. ~e 102,13; 
gen, «assa 113,15. 

abhidhavati, vb. (sa. abhi- 
Vdhāv) to run up towards, to rush 
towards; imp, 2. pl. „atha (metri 
causa „athā) 30,19 („haste to the 
rescue“); aor. 3. sg. evi, 76,22. 

abhinandati, vb. (sa. abhi- 
Vnand) !)to rejoice at, to salute, to 
welcome (ace.); pot. 3. 8g. «eyya 
sakkiüram) Dh. 75; pr. 3. pl. „anti 
cii sotthim agatam) Dh. 219. 
— °) to applaud, to assent, to approve 
(acc.); aor. 3. 8g. ~i (Bhagavato 
bhāsitam) 93,19; inf. „itum (tad 
abhinanditun ti) 97,5. 

abhinandin, mfn. sa) re- 
joicing at; f. tatra-tatrábhinandini 
(tanhā) finding its delight here and 
there, 67,13. 

abhinava, mfn. (== sa.) quite 
new, modern; loc. pl. „esu pottha- 
kesu, in modern manuscripts, 52,12 
(opp. porana-). 

abhinikkhamana, going 


= 
— 


abhinimmināti 


forth, esp. retiring from the household 
life. — mahā-%, x. „the great retire- 
ment* 9: Buddha's leaving his house 
in order to become a monk; „am 
nikkhamitum 65,13. 

abhinimminiti, vb. (sa. abhi- 
nir-y/mà) to create, to assume another 
appearance (acc.); ger. witva (kassaka- 
vannam, the appearance of a plough- 
man) 71,28. 

abhinivesa, m. (sa. abhiniveca), 
adhering to, inclination to; upiyupa- 
dana-? 96,10 (g.v.); comp. w. the synon. 
adhitthana (v. h.) 96,12. 

*abhippakinna, pp. (sa. *abhi- 
pra- ykir) strewn with (instr.); %-sayana, 
loc. ~e (pupphānam ammanamattena) 
05,29. 

*abhippaharani, f. (adj. fr. 
*abhi-pra-yhr, traced only in the foll. 
passage) ^ni (senā Kanhassa) the 
offensive (army of Kanha) 103,51. 

abhibhavati, vb, (sa. abhi-ybhi) 
to overcome, to overpower (acc.); pr. 
3. sg. eati (paccamitte) 3,4; ger. 
e bhuyya (sabbani parissayani) Dh. 
828; pp. e bhüta, m. khuppipasabhi- 
bhūto (peto). tormented by hunger 
and thirst, 84,32. 

abhibhū, mfn. (= sa.) one who 
conquers or overcomes (at the end of 
comp.); sabbābhibhū, m. having con- 
guered all, Dh. 353; sabbalokābhi- 
bhum (viram, acc. m.) having con- 
quered all the worlds, Dh. 418. 

abhimatthati or abhiman- 
thati, vb. (sa. abhi-ymath, manth) 
to crush (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ^ ati (dum- 
medham) Dh. 161. 

abhimukha, mfn. (== sa.) turned 
towards; m. pl. ~& ahesum, they met 
with one another, 43,19; most frequently 
at the end of comp. : m. varanarukkhá- 
bhimukho, 5,; nagarābhimukho, 
43,14; f. Jetavanābhimukhī, 73,13; 
acc. m. devalokābhimukham (rathain 
akasi) 60,9. — abhimukham, adv. 
39,9-10 (matta-vāraņe ~ dgacchante, 
loc, even if a furious elephant were 
going towards them). 


30 


—ck es 


abhirati, f. (= sa.) delighting 
in, pleasure; acc. tatra wiih iccheyya 
Dh. 88. — an-abhirati, f. discontent 
(q. v.). 
abhiramati, vb. (sa. abhi-y/ram) 
to delight in, to take one’s pleasure 
with; pr. 3. sg. „ati (maya saddhim) 
46,21; 3. pl. „anti (ubho) 50,6; aor. 
3. 59. ~i (tena saddhii) 20,11; part. 
med. m. ~mano (tàya saddhith) 19,19. 
— pp. abhirata, v. an-abhirata; *abhi- 
ranta, only in comp. yathabhirantam, 
adv. as long as you like or think fit 
70,20 (v. yatha, ep. yathākāmam). 
dur-abhirama, mfn. (g. v.). 

*abhiramapeti, vb. (caus. IZ fr. 
last) ‘) to cause one to take his plea- 
sure with; pot. 1. sg. ~eyyarı (rājā- 
nam maya saddhim) 46,5. — *) to 
delight. to divert; part. f. pl. wentiyo 
(itthiyo) 64,31. 

abhirūpa, mfn. (= sa.) handsome, 
beautiful, lovely: m. ~o (mahasamano) 
76,31; acc. ~am (purisam) 10,25; f. 
nū (hamsapotika) 10,. 

abhirühati, vb. (sa. abhi-yruh) 
to ascend, to mount (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
„ati (dantam, sc. nigum) Dh. 321; 
imp. 2. sg. ~a (pitthim me) 1,19; 
2. pl. watha, 22,5; aor. 3. sg. 1,19. 
25,19 (nāvam); 3. pl. „imsu, 22,6; 
ger. *) wruyha, 20,13; >) „rūhitvā, 
21,0. 61,18 (pabbatarh). 

abhilakkhita, mfn. (sa. abhi- 
lakshita, pp. abhi-ylaksh) fixed, de- 
termined for; m. ~o (maha-uposatha- 
divaso) 22,19. . 

abhivaddhati, vb. (sa. abhi- 

vrdh) to inerease; pr. 3. sg. eati 
yaso) Dh. 24. — pp. abhivaddha, x. 
wath bīranam „the abounding Birana 
grass“, 107,32 = Dh. 335 (or have 
we to take this form as part. pr.? 
Trenckner takes it as pp. abhi-yvrsh, 
cp. the readings ~vattam & ~vuddham, 
Morris, JPTS. '86, p. 143). 

abhivadana, x. or *abhivà- 
dana, f. (sa. abhivādana, x.) re- 
spectful salutation, reverence; nā (w. 
loc. ujjugatesu) Dh. 1,8. — *abhivā- 


31 


amma 


dana-silin, mfn. (cp. sa. 9-qila) re- | anointed king“ 36,29; etassa imasmim 


gpectful; gem. m. ~wissa, Dh. 109. 

abhivadeti, vb. (caus. abhiva- 
dati, sa. abhi-y vad) to salute respect- 
fully (ucc.); ger. wetva (Bhagavantath) 
68,17. 96,3. 

abhisamkhata, mfn. (pp. abhi- 
saīnkharoti, sa. abhi-sai-s-ykr) pre- 
pared, cooked; gen. ~assa (sappi- 
madhu-sakkara-9. pāyāsassa) 61,26. 

abhisamkhara, (sa. abhisati- 
skāra) 1) preparation. *) development, 
exercise, practise; acc. «um 68,36. 
69,2. (iddha-°, v. next). 

*abhisamkhāreti, vb. (caus. 
abhi-sam-s-ykr) 1) to prepare. ?) to 
exercise, practise, effect (acc.); pot. 1. 
sg. «eyyam (iddhābhisamkhāram, 
yan exercise of miraculous power" (v. 
iddhi) 68,36; aor. 3. sg. nesi (id.) 
69,2. 

abhisajati or abhisajjati, 90. 
(sa. abhi-ysaij) to offend; pot. 3. sg. 
wsaje (yaya na .. kañci, by words) 
Dh, 408. 

*abhisambujjhati (sa. *abhi- 
. sam-ybudb) to gain perfect knowledge 
of; pp. wbuddha, part. - budhana, 
v. below. 

*abhisambujjhana, n. (fr. last) 
enlightment, gaining the perfect know- 
ledge (possessed of a Buddha); °-kala, 
m. 63,7. 

abhisambuddha, 
abhisambujjhati, sa. id.) having 
attained perfect knowledge; m. pa- 
thamabhisambuddho (Buddho) „hav- 
ing just attained the Buddhaship", 66,3. 

*abhisambudhana, mfn. (part. 
fr. abhisambujjhati, cp. 8a. part. aor. 
budhana) who has learnt, understood ; 
m. ~o (kàyah maricidhammam) 
Dh. 46. 

*abhisambhava, m. (fr. abhi- 
sambhavati, sa. abhi-sam-ybhū), 
reaching, attaining. — dur-abhisam- 
bhava, mfn. (g. v.). 

abhiseka, m. (sa. abhisheka) 
anoint*ng, inauguration of a king; acc. 
~am kāretvā caused himself to be 


min. (pp. 


rn M M ——— U M 


rajiibhisekakale, now when he is being 
anointed king, 11,6. 

abhisecana, x. (sa, abhishecana) 
= prec. vam (ulukassa) 11,16. 

amacca, m. (sa, amatya) a com- 
paniou or minister of a king, courtier; 
~0, 38,17; pl. ~a, 40,9; acc. pl. ne, 
40,7; instr. pl. chi, 39,31. — *-adayo, 
the courtiers and others, 102,5 (cp. 
adi). sesimacce (acc. pl), all his 
courtiers, 40,5 (v. sesa). mittamacca 
(pl.) friends and companions, 92,. 
o-bràhmana-gahapatike (acc. pl.) ə: 
all people of higher rank (opp. sabba- 
seniyo) 42,2 (cp. Fick, Soc. Glied. 
p. 93 & 164). °~sahassena (instr.) 
a thousand courtiers, 39,26. 62,8. °-pa- 
rivuta, mfn. 40,30. °-gana-parivuta, 
mfn. 39,28. "-parivarita, mfn. 112,26. 
sattāmacca-satānuga, mfn. v. anuga. 
siimacca, mfn. (g. v.). 

amuka, mfn. (fr. the pron. base 
amu-, =: sa. cp. asu & asuka) this or 
that, such and such a person (or thing) 
referred to without name; loc. m. ~as- 
mim okase, 75,6. (cp. ayam, 4.) 

amba, m. (sa. dura) the mango 
tree (Mangifera Indica); ~o. 37,22; 
gen. Assa, 37,1; pl. ea. 100,13; acc. 
pl. we, 100,4; instr. pl. wehi, 2,10. 
— -pakka, ». (se. *imra-pakva) a 
mango fruit; eam. 36,31 = ambapha- 
lam, 36,34. °-panas’-Adihi, 2,20 (v. 
panasa & adi). ?-pindi, f. (sa. *āmra- 
pindi) a bunch of mangos, acc, eim, 
15,2. °-labujidinam, 1,14 (v. labuja). 
avana, a mango grove, loc, ~e, 77,20; 
45,4 (Makhddeva-®, g. v.) 45,7 (Mw 
uyyāne). %samika, m. the owner of a 
mango tree, ~0, 100,19. 

*ambho, indecl. (fr. ham + bhos, 
cp. hambho & bho) !) a voc. particle : 
Hallo! (w. voc.), «sārathi, 43,21. *) 
exclamation expressive of anger or in- 
dignation (w. voc.) ~duttha-brab- 
mana, 33316; ~purisa, 101,18. 

amma, indecl. (used in addressing 
a woman), V. next, 

amma, f. (sa. amba) a mother; 


ammana 


32 


gen. waya. 46,8; voc. amme is usually | that, 31,6 (imam acchddanam); 2, 


shortened to amma: 4) used by children 
addressing their mother, 9,19. 22,17; 
2) by any person addressing one (or 
more) women, 49,53 (a maid to her 
lady); 87,10 (a father to his daughter). 
ammana, ^. (sa. armana ? cp. 
Childers 8. v.) a certain measure of 
capacity, a trough, a canoe; °-mattena 
(instr. v. matta?) in a measure of au 
a- (pupphānar ~ abhippakinna-saya- 
na) 65,29. 
amha, amhi, v. atthi. 
amha(n), n. — asman (sa. açman) 
a stone; instr. „anā, 104,6 (cp. Win- 
disch, Mara, p. 8 & 12). — amha-maya, 
mfn. (sa. açma-maya) made of stone, 
hard; ace. ~am (manim) Dh. 161. 
amhākam, amhe, ete., v. aham. 
ayam, pron. m. d£ f. (sa. ayam, 
f. iyam) n. idari (sa. idam). The 
other forms are taken from the base 
ima- or a- : nom. sg. M. ayam, 3,1. 
6,3; by contraction with a preceeding 
a-sound : cáyam, 66,26; by elision : 
'àyam 17,28. 37,30; Dh. 56, or "yam, 
108,17; before palatals : ayañ, 74,31. 
— f. ayam, 21,7. 9,18 (ayaū ca). — 
n. idam, 15,5; didam, 67,3; imam, 
100,1. — acc. imam 2,8 (m.); 3,25 (f.); 
17,1; Dh. 196 (im) (x.). — instr. m. 
n. imina, 3,22; 54,15. f. imāya, 42,18; 
75,25. — gen. (dat.) m. (m.) imassa, 
2,29; 4,31; assa. l,5; 'ssa. 3,11; f. 
jmissà. 3,3; 31,4; assi, 48,26; 73,29 
(assa = assa ?); 87,10. — abl. m. asmā, 
Dh. 220, — loc. m, (n.) imasmim, 1,15; 
3.23; asmnn, Dh. 242. — pl. nom. m. 
ime, 4,6; 66,25 (me); 60,17 (mà-y-ime). 
— acc. m. ime. 41,22; f. ima, 2,9; m. 
imāni, 81,27. — instr. m. imehi, 55,25. 
— gen. m. imesam, 2,6; 14,26. — loc. 
m. n. īmesu, 31,16; 81,87. — !) this, 
this here (referring to a person or 
thing present or in question) opp. 
pāra, Dh. 220. 410. — *) referring to 
the preceeding, 67,5 (ayar kho sā); 
73,23 (ime divase, acc. pl. „the last 
few days“). — 3) referring to the follow- 
ing, 67,3-10; 85,29. — 4) == such, like 


(imesam sattānam, like us), 54,33 
(id.); repeated : ayañ ca ayaū ca, 43,33; 
idaü e'idaü ca, 44,13 (cp. asuka, a- 
muka). — *) combined w. pron. velat.: 
y ayam (= yo ayam) Dh. 56; yayam 
(f-) 67,12; yad idam, 97,2. — °) ayam 
is sometimes used as pron, 3. pers., 
esp. the gen. sg. assa, assà, enclit, = 
tassa, tassi (v. ta-). cp. eta- (esa). 
ayana, n. (== sa. cp. eti) walking, 
road. — ekiiyana, mfn. (g. v.). 
ayas, m. (comp. ayo. nom. ayo, 
sā. ayas, n.) iron; instr. ayas& (== 
ayato, Comm.) 106,19 — Dh. 240. 
(cp. ayasa. mfn.) | 
ayo-guļa, m. (sa. ayo-guda) an 
iron-ball; ~o. 107,1 — Dh. 308. 
ayya, mfn. (sa. arya, cp. arya) 
honorable, worthy; m. ~o Devadatto, 
75,4. — The voc. ayya is frequently 
used in respectfully addressing a 
person : 2,29. 4,3 etc. 33,1 (ayya ti); 
pl. ayyā (by addressing more persons) 
21,10. 73,4; and even the nom. 8g. 
ayyo is used as voc, particle (in both 
genders and numbers) : 18,8-21-25. (cp. 
ariya.) | 
ayya-putta, «m. (sa. arya-putra) 
the son of an honorable man, master; 
nom. ~O, 65,22; voc. wa, 65,15 (de- 
signation of a master by his servant). 
ayyikā, (fr. ayya. sa. āryikā, 
āryakā) grandmother; nā, 108,15. 
ayyo, 9. ayya. 
araliia, n. (sa, aranya) a forest; 
acc. ~am, 6,7; abl, ~ato, 6,15; loc. 
we, 5.30; pl. ~ani, Dh. 99; loc. „esu, 
73,34. — *-ayatana, ^. a forest haunt; 
loc. we, 1,4. 3,30. — *%-tthāna, m. a 
place in a forest; loc. we, 32,14. 
araha, mfn. (sa. arha) deserving, 
worthy; m. pl. wa („holy men“) 109,5. 
— püjàraha, mfn. (sa. pūjārha) de- 
serving hommage; acc. m. pl. we, Dh. 
195. — maharaha, mfn. (sa. mahārha), 
very valuable, precious, splendid; m. 
„0 (manto) 32,10; acc. am (utta- 
maratham) 63,4; (sayanam) 112,2; n. 
pl. „vāni (āsanāni) 61,25. (ep. next.) 


33 


arahat, m. (sa. arhat) a venerable 
person, a saint, an Arhat, who has 
reached the highest stage of sanctifica- 
tion from which he can enter Nirvāna: 
nom. sg. arahā (dasah’ angehi sam- 
annagato) 82,14; gen. ~ato (Sam- 
masambuddhassa) 81,5; acc. ~antam, 
Dh. 420; pi. ~anto (satta) the first 
seven Arhats, viz. Buddha himself, the 
paūcavaggiyā bhikkhü (g.v.), and Yasa, 
70,18; gen. pl. ~atam, Dh. 164. (cp. 
arahatta.) 

arahati, vb. (sa. Varh) *) to be 
worthy of (acc. or inf.); pr. 3. sg. 
eal (kāsāvarn, metrically = arhati) 
Dh. 9; 2. sg. „asi (mama vijite 
vasitum) 38,20; part. arahat (v. h.). 
— *) to be obliged to, to be able 
to (inf.); ko tam ninditum „ati, 
„who would dare to blame him?* 
Dh. 230. 

arahatta, n. (sa. arhatva) Arhat- 
ship (cp. arahat); acc. ~am, 89,16. 

*Arahanta-vagga, m. name of 
the seventh chapter of Dhammapada. 

ariya, mfn. (sa. arya, cp. ayya) 
honorable, noble; elect, holy; m, ~o, 
Dh. 270; acc, ~am (= dryam) Dh. 
208; gen. pl. ~anam (== aryānam) 
Dh. 22. 164. 206; instr. pl. ~ebhi, 
Dh. 162 bis; ~o atthangiko maggo, 
67,5. 108,14; acc. 107,20. — *°-ppave- 
dita, mfn. preached by the elect; Joc. 
~e (arya, dhamme) Dh. 79. — 
*0.bhūmi, f. the world of the elect; 
E = Dh. 236, — an-ariya, mfn. 
g. v.). 

arlya-sacca, (sa. ārya-satya) 
sublime truth; ~am (dukkharh) 67,8 
(the sublime truth [concerning] the 
pain); 67,12 (dukkhasamudayam, q. 
v.); pl. «Ani (cattāri) 82,10. 107,18. 

*ariya-sāvaka, m. an elect or 
holy disciple; «vo, 28,3. 71,5; acc. pl. 
we, 19,22. 

aru, n. (8a. arus) 8 wound; *aru- 
kaya, m. a wounded body (or mfn. 
covered with wounds?) acc. „am, 
Dh. 147. | | 

aruna, m. (= sa.) the dawn, the 

Pali Glossary. | | 


— € ——M——— 


alika 


sun, — *arunuggamana, m. sunrise; 
abl. «à, 12,18. — *aruna-vela, f. (id.); 
loc. ~aya, in that very moment when 
the sun was rising, ib. (cp. vela). 

arhati, v. arahati. — 

ala, n.(?) (sa. ala, cp. ada) the 
claw of a crab; instr. wena, 4,35; 
instr. pl. ~ehi (kammāra-sandāsena 
viya) 5,2. 

alam, indecl. (-— sa.) enough: 
1) w. voc. ~ Devadatta, 74,21; ~avuso, 
75,31. — *) w. gen. pers. ~mayham, 
I have had enough, 28,24. — ?) w. instr. 
~ (vo ratanehi) 27,29; sometimes de- 
noting what a person don't care for : 
~etehi ambehi, 2,10. — *) w. dat. final. 
„hi te anüanaya ~sammohaya, no 
wonder that you feel ignorant and 
confused, 94,24. 

alamikata, mfn. (pp. fr. next., sa. 
alam-krta) adorned, decorated; m. ~o, 
45,30. Dh. 142; °-sirigabbhe, 41,24 
(g. v.); °-patiyatta, mfn. splendidly 
dressed or decorated (g. v.). 

alamkaroti, vb. (sa. alam-ykr) 
1) to adorn; ger. witva (acc.) 20,9. 
58,19. 63,4. — ?) to adorn oneself; nitvā, 
19,13. — pp. alamkata, v. above. — 
caus, ~karapeti, q. v. 

alamkāra, m. (== sa.) ornament, 
decoration; instr. sabbālamkārena 
alamikaritvà, adorning it richly, 63,4; 
instr. pl. sabbilamkarehi, 58,18. 
— sabbālamkāra-patimandita, mfn. 
n (q. v.); %-vibhūsita, mfn. 61,7 
g. v.). 

osi aad vb. (caus. II. 
alamkaroti) to cause to be decorated 
(acc.); ger. ~ctva (maggam) 62,7. 

alāpu, n. (sa. alabu) a gourd; 
pl. „ūni, Dh. 149. 

alika, mfn. (sa. alika) false, dis- 
pleasing. — n. falsehood, untruth; 


~an bhanam, speaking a falsehood, 


Dh. 264; na tassa «am bhanitam 
(sc. maya) I did not tell him a lie, 
108,30; ~am bhāsasi, 97,51 (== musa- 
vada). — alika-vādin, mfn. lying, 
speaking a falsehood; acc. sm. «inam 


44.9. 
3 


allāpa 34 


allapa, m. (sa. ālāpa) speaking | (Māra-jālena) when they have been 
to; %sallapa. m. conversation; „am | caught in Mara’s net, 88,35. 
katva, 56,22. cp. alapati. | avadharana, 9. (= sa.) ascer- 
*allika. mfn. (probably fr. ā-Vlī, | tainment, emphasis; „am, the signi- 
*alayaka-"alyaka) adhering, devoted | fication of the particle „kho“, 85,34. 
to, only comp. w. sukha-, v. kāma- avasakkati, v. osakkati. 
sukhallika-. avasarati, vb. (sa. ava-ysr) to 
alliyati, vb. (sa. à- l1) to adhere; | proceed towards, to come (down) to; 
part. m. an-alliyanto, careless of (w. | aor. 3. sg. tad avasari, 77,19. 81,5. 
acc. kilesaratim) 46,19. .|  &vasüna, m. (= sa.) conclusion, 
ava, indecl. (== sa.) prefix to verbs | termination, end; Joc. adv. ~e, at last, 
and nouns expressing „down, back, | 34,8; comp. bhattakiecà-9, 86,15; 
aside, away“, This prefix is very fre- | gathá-9, 87,1; desand-°, 89,2. Con- 
quently contracted to „o“, both after | tracted : osāna, °-gatha, f. a final 
another prp. (ajjh-o-harati) and before | stanza, acc. eam, 27,21. cp. pariyo- 
a single or double consonant (okasa, | sana. 
okkamati); but after „vi“ we find it avasittha, mfn. (sa. avagishta, 
sometimes uncontracted (vavatthapita, | pp. ava-ygish) left, remaining; n. 
ep. vohāra etc.) and in comp. like | ~ar (sukaramaddavam) 78,14; ~an 
an-avakāsa, likewise before vowels | hoti (ayum) 44,98; m. pl. à ahesuih 
(avekkhati). cp. ora, orima. | (dve janà) 33,2. 
avakāsa, v. okāsa. | avasesa, mfn. (sa. avagesha, m.) 
avaca, mfn. (— sa.) low (opp. | left, remaining; m, pl. «X. 7,14, 86,23 
ucca) v. uccávaca. | (opp. eka); gen. (dat.) pl. «anam, 
avacara, m. (== sa.) only at the | 145. — avasesa-sigālā (m. pl.) 40,21. 
end of comp. = the sphere or dominion | *avassuta, mfn. (sa. ava-sruta 
of, v. a-takkavacara. | or *ava-&-sruta. Vsru) ‘rotten, leaky’; 
*avajalla, v. rajovajalla. — ^ — : metaph. lustful (cp. Jat. IV 20,22 : an- 
avajānūti, eb. (sa. ava-yjfid) to ' avassutā navi (watertight) and SBE, 
despise (acc.); pr. 3. sg. „vati (metri ' X,13). — an-avassuta-citta, mfn. (q.v.), 
causa) 103,20. | cp. an-ussuta & āsava. 
avajiyati, vb. (sa. pass. ava-yji) avaharati, vb. (sa. ava-yhr) to 
to be conquered; pr. 3. sg. „ati, | take away (acc); pr. 1. sg. «umi 
Dh. 179. (niham ambe ~, I did not take away) 
avatthita, mfn. (pp. fr. avati- | 100,4; pot. 8. sg. ~eyya (ambam) 
tthati, sa. ava-ysthā) firm, steady. — | 100,12. — pp. avahata, m. pl. «à, 
an-avatthita-citta, mfn. (g. v.). | 100,15. 
avattharana, n. (sa. avastarana) *avāpurūpeti, vb. (caus. II. 
spreading; deploying an army; raūūo | avāpurati = sa. apā-yvr & apa-y/vr) 
Cbhavam ñatvā. „when he saw that | to cause’ to be opened; ger. «etvà 
the king had deployed his forces“ 36,24 | (nagaradvārāni) 39,5. cp. apāruta. 
(cp. bhava). | Avici, n. (or f.) nom. pr. (= sa. 
avattharati and ottharati, | m.) the last (lowest) of the eight great 
vb. (sa. ava-ystr) to spread, scatter | hells (cp. niraya); Joc. ~imhi, 27,14. 
about, overturn; to overspread, over- avekkhati, vb. (sa. ava-yiksh) 
whelm (acc.); ger. e itvà (bhatta- | to look at, to look down upon (acc.); 
pātim) 34,13; (turiyabhandani) 65,5; | pr. 3. sg. ati (bale) Dh. 28; pot. 3. 
ottharitvā (sc. jalam, referred to the | sg. ~eyya (attano katàni) Dh. 50; 
agens sakunikena) 88,34. — pp. otthata, | part. acc. m. ~anta (lokam) Dh. 
overwhelmed, caught; loc. pl. nesu | 170. | 


3 


avhaya, m. (sa. āhvaya) appella- 
tion, name; only at the end of adj, 
comp., v. savhaya. 

asani, f. (sa. agani) a thunderbolt, 
lightning; nom. sg. ~i (patita) 17,22; 
loc. wiya (sise patantiyā) 39,10; 
-vegena (instr.) hastily like a flash 
of lightning (cp. vega) 12,22. 

asil m. (sa. asi) a sword; acc. 
wim, 111,25; instr. wind, 33,17; asi- 
satti-dhanu-ādīni (āvudhāni) 6,12; 
0-cammam, n. sword and shield, 75,15. 

asi*, pr. 2. sg. atthi (g. v.). 

asīti, num. (f.) (sa. agīti) eighty; 
caturāsīti 84 (sa. catur-agīti), 
0-vassa-sahassani, 44,20. — *asīti-koti- 
vibhava, mfn. very rich, gen. m. wassa 
(setthino) 22,13. — 9-sahassà, m. pl. 
(bhikkhū) 80,000, 97,4. cp. āsītika. 

asu, pron. mf. (sa. asau) n. adum 
(sa. adas) that; the other cases are 
formed on the base amu- (cp. amuka). 
“asuka, mfn. (fr. last. cp. sa. 
amuka) this or that, such and such 
a person (or thing); loc. m. —asmim 
(game) 92,14. — comp. %-kāle, 88,25; 
0-gehe, 58,3. cp. amuka and ayam), 

asura, m. (= sa.) an evil spirit, 
demon; pl, the opponents of the gods; 
nom. pl. wa, 59,24; acc. ne, 59,25; 
gen. ~anam,. 60,11; loc. esu, 60,17. 
— *O_kania, f. daughter of the Asuras, 
acc. ~ai (Sujam) 54,7. — *9-bhava- 
nam, n. the world of the A. 59,27. 

astu, asmi. v. atthi. 

assal, m. (sa. açva) a horse; acc. 
~am, 65,17; pl. nā, Dh. 94; acc. pl. 
ee, 44,11; mangalasso, a horse of 
state (v. mangala) 24,29; valāhassa-, 
a flying horse (v. valāha) 21,34 (%-yoni); 
sighasso „a racer“ (v. sīgha) Dh. 29 
(opp. abalassa „a hack“, v. a-bala). 
— -dūta, m. a messenger on horseback, 
68,31. — *°-pota, m. a foal, 2,18 (°-ppa- 
mana, mfn.); — *-bhandaka, horse 
trappings (saddle and bridle) 65,17. — 
0-ratana, m. (coll) valuable horses, 
24,19. — %-rājam, m. ‘king of horses’ 
(Kanthaka) 65,19. — °-sala, f. a stable 
for horses, 65,17. cp. assatara below. 


aham 


assa’, pot. 3. sg. v. atthi. 

assa*, assā, pron. gen, v. ayam. 

assatara, m. (sa. acvatara) a 
mule; pl. wa, Dh. 322. 

assama, m. (sa. ügrama) the hut 
of an ascetic; loc. ~e, 36,6. — 9-pada, 
n. a hermitage, a place where ascetics 
have made their huts; acc. ~am, 36,6. 

assava, mfn. (sa. ūigrava) com- 
pliant, obedient; f. ~iù (gopi) 104,33; 
n. ~am (cittam) 105,2; pl. ~ii, 105,25. 

assada, m. (sa. āsvāda) enjoy- 
ment, delight; a delicacy; acc. ~am 
47,29 (opp. "rr 104,15. 

*assādanā, f. (cp. sa. asvadana, 
n.) a delicacy, 104,11. 

assasa, m. (sa. àgvisa) breathing, 
inhaling; -passāso, inhaling and 
breathing forth, 80,32. 

assāsēti, vb. (sa. caus. ā-ygvas) 
to cause to take breath, to comfort, 
to encourage (acc.); ger. „etvā, 20,6. 
40,29. 

assu, n. (sa. agru) a tear or coll. 
tears; nom. sg. wu, 82,5. 97,23; num, 
89,14; instr. unà (akkhīhi paggha- 
rantena) 5,44. — °%mukha, mfn. 
with a tearful face, m. ~o (rodam) 
Dh. 67. 

aha, n. (sa. ahar & ahan) a day. 
1) at the end of comp. ekithen’ (instr.) 
in the course of one day, 57,8; ekāha- 
dviha’-ccayena, in a day or two, 32,24 
(cp. accaya); ekahadvihamh (acc.) one 
or two days, 50,6; katipaham (q. v.) 
a few days, 7,27 etc.; dviha-tiham, 
two or three days, 36,6; sattāham, 
seven days, 23,16. 60,1. — In some 
few cases we find -anha (fr. the weak 
stem ahan) v. pubbanha, sāyanha. 
— *) as the first part of comp. ‘aho’ 
(fr. sa. ahar) v. aho-ratta, aho-ratti. 

aham, pron, 1. pers. (sa. aham) 
‘I’; nom. ahah (aham, ahan) 1,7. 2,2. 
65,15; by contraction or elision : ham, 
‘ham, 1,21. 7,9. 104,21; after the verb: 
janeyyaham, 94,31; labhāmi'ham, 
108,25; patam’ aham, 108,26. — acc. 
1) mam, 2,3. 13,15 (man’ti) ; ?) mamam, 
16,2. 47,10 (mamaii ca). — instr. (abl.) 


8* 


ahimkāra 


mayā, 3,14. 4,26. — gen. (dat.) !) may- 
ham, 2,11-29. 3,9. 4,19 ete. ?) mama, 
1,17. 71,32 (mam?) 72,20 (mama-y-idam). 
3) mamam, 72,20. *) me, 1,19. 2,2. 
112,20 (m’); this form is also often 
substituted for other cases : — instr. 
4.23. 45,5. 66,25. 90,25. — abl. 72,1. — 
loc, mayi, 19,29. — pl. nom. !) mayam, 
1,8. 56,92 (== sg.). ?) amhe, 21,30. — 
acc. ambe, 4,19. 73,5, — instr. (abl. 
amhehi, 6,15. 74,12. — gen. (dat.) 3 
amhakash, 1,24 4,4. ?) no, 11,3. 12,3. 
56,33 (= sg.); substituted for instr. 
54,15. — loc. amhesu, 4,11. — Com- 
bined w. pron. demonstr. es'aham, 
69,19; acc. tam mam, 103,2; gen. 
tassa me, 103,23; w. prom. rel. pl. 
ye mayam, 105,23; gen. (daf.) yesan 
no, Dh, 200. — Constructions to be 
noticed: na te aham, I am not among 
those, 72,22; tumhe mam... janatha 
(sc. pesakarasalam gacchamanazi) 
88,13; mama rattindivam . . . na 
jānāmi (sc. maranabhavaih) 88,22. 
cp. next, 

*ahimkāra, m. (fr. aham & ykr, 
sa. aharnkāra) the false view that there 
is an Ego, the first of the three anu- 
sayas (g. v.), explained in the comm. 
by ‘ditthi’ (4. 9.); 94,11 : sabba-ahim- 
kāra - mamimkara - mānānusayānam 
khayā. Some Mss. have here and in 
parallel passages the reading ahainkara 
(= sa. cp. SN. III 32,1-2 (vol. I p. 
132)), which generally means , selfish 
ness, pride“, 

aho, indecl. (= sa.) an exclama- 
tion (w. nom. or a full sentence) 
expressive of satisfaction or enjoyment, 
42,17 (aho vata bho), 58,12 (~ puūiā- 
nam phalai), 86,24 (~ Buddhānam 
kathā nama acchariyā), or of re- 
proach, 59,31 (~ andhabūlāsi). 

, &horatta, m. (sa. ahorātra) day 
and night; °-anusikkhin, mfn. study- 
ing day and night, gen. pl. ~ina, 
Dh. 226. cp. aha. ° 

*ahoratti, f. (sa. *ahoratri) = 
prec.; acc. sabbaih with, through the 


36 


A. 


ā, prp. (— sa.) near to, towards, 
until; generally prefixed to verbs and 
their derivatives, but shortened to ‘a’ 
before more consonants, e. g. acchā- 
deti, assāseti, allāpa, etc. 

ākamkhati, vb. (sa. a-Vkaüksh) 
to wish, to desire (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
„ati (pacchasamanam) 82,26; part. 
med. m. „amāno, 79,11 („if it should 
so wish“); ger. ākamkha (virāgam) 
Dh. 343. 

akaddhati, vb. (sa. &-ykrsh) to 
draw to or away with one's self; ger. 
ewitva (hanukatthikena, by the jaw- 
bone) 40,18; 59,8. 

ükappa. m. (sa. akalpa) gestures, 
manners; instr. «ena, 49,. 

aikara, m. (= sa.) plenty, multi- 
tude; a mine; ganthakara, g. v. 

ākāra, m. (== sa.) form, appearance, 
condition; sign, token, hint; manner, 
way; anekàkara, mfn. multiform (v. 
an-eka); apanetabbakara-ppatta, mfn. 
intolerable (v. apaneti); patanakara- 
ppatta, mfn. being on the point of 
falling out, 12,31; sabbākāra-pari- 
punna, mfn. altogether perfect, 10,26; 
sabbākāra-varūpeta, mfn. endowed 
with every grace, 81,4 (cp. vara); 
dvattimsakara, g. v.; chātakākāra, 
sign of hunger, 41,5 (v. h.); olokita- 
kārenēva (instr.), at the first sign of 
her being looked at (?) 87,25; agama- 
nākāra, 41,31 (how he had come back); 
aūūenākārena (instr.) in another way 
(9: wrong) 91,32. 

akasa, m. (sa. akaga) the air, 
sky; space; acc. eam, 14,16; instr. 
«ena, through the air, 19,17. 36,10; 
abl, «à, 33,6. ~ato, 32,11; loc. we, 
11,19. 17,25. Dh. 254—5 (cp. bāhira 
& SBE. X, p. 64 Note). — ?-cárika, 
mfn. going through the air, 35,35 (m. 
0). — '-ānaūcāyatana, n. 80,5 (v. ].). 
. Akificaiifia, n. (sa. ākimcanya, 
fr. a-kificana, g. v.) want of any 
possession, nothingness, °-Ayatana, x. 


whole day and night, 107,25 — Dh. 387. | the abode of nothingness, non-existence, 


ace. ~am, 80,7; ° -samāpatti, 80,s 
v. h.). 

akirati, vb. (sa. ā-ykir) to scatter 
or sprinkle over (acc.); ger. witva 
(parhsuri, filled.them up with earth) 
40,6; (pādapamsūni upari muddhani, 
the dust at his feet over its head) 77,8; 
pr. 3. sg. med. „vate (rajam) Dh. 313. 

*akoteti, vb. (sa. *ā-ykut, caus. 
cp. kotteti) to beat, to trample in 
(acc.); ger. ~wetva (parum) 40,6. 

agacchati, vb. (sa. ā-ygam & 
gà) to go, come, approach, arrive; to 
return, come back; pr. 3. sg. mati, 
12,2;,1. sg. ~ami (pàdena) 98,2; 1. 
pl. ima, 23,19; — imp. 3. sg. watu, 
4,23; 2. sg. na, 75,7; 2. pl. natha, 
75,9. 76,25; — pot. 3. pl. ~weyyum, 
101,9; — fut. 3. sg. āgacchissati, 15,6, 
and agamissati, 22,27. Dh. 121; 1. pl. 
āgamissāma, 23,19; — aor. 3. sg. 
Agama, 18,54. agami, 57,1. aga, 114,2; 
2. pl. àgamittha, 39,2; 3. pl. āga- 
mimsu, 73,31; — part. m. agacchanto 
(maggam) on the way, 28,12; 57,32; 
acc. ~antam, 2,31; acc. f. „antim, 
494; — ger. agantva, 6,30. 7,5. 9,24. 
10,5. 31,55; agamma (sa. ūgamya) 
Dh. 87. 192 = 107,22. 61,19. 110,28; 
— pp. agata. g. v. 

agata, mfn. (== sa. pp. fr. agac- 
chati) !) come, arrived, returned; m. 
m0, 4,24. 16,12; acc. ~am, 9,22; fre- 
quently used as finite tense : 9,27 (0), 
57,33 etc. āgato'smi, 98,2; āgat'amhi 
(f.) 73,18; — comp. mam tava santi- 
kam āgata-kāle ganhāhi (when I have 
returned) 3,17; ?-velàya (loc.) when 
he returned, 20,10; agatagata (m. pl. 
ratthavāsino) who from time to time 
came, 18,5; bhava, m. coming, ar- 
riving, coming near, acc. wath, 40,17. 
88,5; 9-tthàna, n. = agatabhava 
(cp. thāna) acc. ~am, 19,18; °-matta, 
mfn. at one's arrival, ace. m. tam 
~am, 83,28; adhunāgata, mfn. a 
new-comer, 37,15 (cp. adhunā); cirā- 
gata, mfn, long absent, m. ~o (na 
cirāgato == adhunāgato?) 9,5. — 
2) occurred, related (in quotations): 


37 


— A NT 


ācikkhati 


Mahāpadāne °-nayena „in the man- 
ner related in M.“ 68,12. — *) known; 
agatagama, mfn. (= sa.) acquainted 
with the agamas (g. v.), m. pl. «à, 
109,26. — an-āgata, g. v. 

agama, m. (= sa.) !) arrival. 
2) knowledge, science, esp. a sacred 
work containing traditional doctrine, 
the five Nikūyas or Sutta-pitaka thus . 
called by the northern Buddhists (who, 
however, know only fragments thereof); 
°-pitakam (suttasammatam) 110,3 = 
Sutta-pitaka. — agatagama, mfn. v. 
above. 

 ügamana, n. (= sa.) coming, 
arriving, returning; acc. «am, 22,28. 
33,29. 87,6-26; °-bhava, m. the having 
arrived, acc. ~am, 9,14; %-ākāra, way 
of returning, 41,31 (g. v.). 

āgāmin, mfn. (-= sa.) coming, 
returning; v. sakad-āgāmiu. | 

āgāra, n. (= sa.) a house, v. 
agara, cp. an-āgāra. 

aghata, m. (= sa.) ‘striking, 
killing’; ill-will, malice; ~o (Deva- 
dattassa Bhagavati) 74,32; 9-matta, 
^. «Am pi nàkasi „not so much as 
an angry thought", 40,1 (cp. matta?). 

ācariya, m.(sa. ūcārya) a teacher; 
~0, 16,23 (disāpāmokkho, brāhmano); 
0-antevāsike (acc. pl.) a teacher and 
his pupil, 32,21. — *acariya-bhaga, 
m. a teachers fee, 64,21 (x 0). — *āca- 
riya-vàda, m. pl. ~a, the doctrines 
of old teachers, 113,27. — cp. anfia- 
thacariyaka. 

ācāra, m. (= su.) good conduct, 
morality; sīlācaro, „virtues“, 43,33; 
sila-gunácaro, a holy life, 28,34. — 
*acara-kusala, mfn. perfect in beha- 
viour, m. ~0, Dh. 376. — an-ācāra, 


g. 9. E 

&cikkhati, vb. (sa. ā-ycaksh) 
to tell, communicate, explain, point 
out’ (acc.); to instruct (gen.); pot. 3, 
8g. ~eyya (maggarh mūļhassa) 69,16; 
— aor. 8. sg. wi (atthath) 13,14; — 
fut. 1. sg. „issāmi (cittarucitam 
tumhakam) 55,27; — imp. 2. sg. wa 
(maggam no) 56,33; — part. m. —an- 


ācinati 


to (karana) 37,2; — ger. witva, 
53,13. 56,31. 58,2 (w. gen. -bhariyaya); 
an-ācikkhitvā (tesam) without telling 
them anything about it, 25,34. 

ācinati ācināti, vb. (sa. a- ci, 
-cinoti) to gather, accumulate; part. 
m. ācinam (ācinanto) Dh. 121-22 
(thokathokam). 

üchanna, mfn. (sa. ācchanna, 
pp. ā-ychad) = acchanna, pp. accha- 
deti (q. v.) covered; m. bhasmāchanno 
(pāvako) covered by ashes, 106,22 
== Dh, 71. 

*ājaiiūa, mfn. (— ājānīya, cp. sa. 
ājāneya) of noble birth, v. puri- 
sajañña, 

*ājāna, mfn. only in the comp. 
dur-ājāna, g. v. 

ājānāti, vb. (sa. ā-Vjūā) to un- 
derstand, to perceive; pr. 3. pl. „anti 
(attham) 90,30; aor. 3. sg. afifiasi, 
57,2. 65,21. 87,25; 68,231 (w. double 
acc.); ger. afinaya, Dh. 275. 411; 
caus. ānāpeti, g. v. — cp. alta, f., 
ana, f, dur-àjàna, mfn. 

ājānīya, mfn. (sa. ājāneya) of 
noble birth, of good breed (as a horse); 
m. pl. „it sindhavā „noble Sindhu 
horses“, Dh, 322. 

ājīva, m. sa.) livelihood; 
sammā-iijīvo, the right way of suppor- 
ting life, 67,4. — suddhājīva, mfn. & 
suddhájivin. mfn. (q. v.). 

ana, f. (sa. ūjīā) ') order, com- 
mand; acc. «am. 39,5; — *°-sam- 
panna, 2/2, authoritative, acc, m. eam 
(purisam) 10,26. — 2) sentence of death, 
capital punishment; ~am katvi, hav- 
ing passed sentence on (gem.) 42,7. — 
cp. anna, f. 

ānāpeti, vb. (denom. fr. ana, cp. 
sa. àjiüpayati, caus. a-Vjūā) to com- 
mand, to give orders (acc.); imp. 2. 
sg. ~ehi (purise) 75,5; aor. 3. sg. 
esi (manusse) 75,4. ` 
| *atappa, n. (fr. a-ytap, cp. *atapa, 
m. exertion) perseverance; am kic- 
cam „you must make an effort“, Dh. 
276. cp. ottappa, x. | 

ātāpin, mfn. (fr. átapa, sa. ātāpin) 


38 


— NS A — —( 


ardent, strenuous; used in connection 
with jhayin (g. v.), gen. m. ~ino 
(bráhmanassa) 66,20; m. pl. ~ino, 
Dh. 143. 

ātura, mfn. (— sa.) suffering, 
ailing; acc. m. „am (arukāyam) Dh. 
147; loc. pl. „esu (manussesu) Dh. 
198. — an-ātura. g. v. 

ādāna, n. (= sa.) 1)taking, seizing; 
ā-dinnādānā (abl.) from taking what 
is not given to you 9: stealing, 81,22. 
— *) affection, greed; °-patinissagga, 


gn. abandonment of affection, Dh. 89. 


cp. an-ādina, sādāna. 

ādāya, ger. v. adiyati. 

adi, m. ( sa.) *) beginning, start- 
ing-point; nom, tatráyam adi bhavati, 
Dh. 375; adithkatva (dovarike, acc. 
pl.) from (doorkeepers) and upwards, 
58,21 (cp. karoti); *ādi-brahmacari- 
yika, mfn. belonging to the principles 
or fundamentals of a religious life, n. 
~ari, 93,7-14. — ?) This word is very 
often used as the last part of comp. 
expressing „et-cetera, and so on, and 
the like“, 5) subst. pl. n. kasi-gora- 
kkhádini 21,3; naccádini, 65,1. etc. 
instr, °-iidihi, 18,28; 61,28 bii 
loc. %-ādisu, 64,29; rattin-divam-pu 
banhádisu, whether at night, day, 
morning or at other times, 88,23; m. 
pl. %-ādayo, 6,11; amaecádayo, 102,5; 
f. gen. pl. khattiyakaüiüádinam, 47,15. 
Such comp. occur also as the first part 
of a greater comp., 6,7 (muggarádi-), 
47,13 (nīluppalādi-), 65,22 (uyyanaki- 
ladi-), 88,32 (aniccádi-vasena), 113,30 
(Sariputtadi-). — P) adj. n. sg. tandu- 
lādi (navattham) 111,31; %. pl. -àdini 
(avudhani) 6,12; (puiifiani) 17,5; 
instr. m. pl. %-ādīhi (phalarukkhehi 
2,20; gen. n. pl. -adinam (phalānan) 
1,14. — 5) Similarly used, but uncom- 
pounded after „ti“ (or ti evam) 21,4, 
73,50 (m. pl. ādīni). In this way it 
is to be found even as adj, (tam 
yeva) ,sassato loko" ti üdinà (instr.) 
nayena puttham pafiham, the question 
asked in that way by the words ,sas- 
sato loko“ ete., 91,31. 


? 


adicca, m. (sa. āditya) the sun; 
~0, 107,23 = Dh. 887. — °-patha, 
m. the path of the sun, the sky, at- 
mosphere; Joc. ~e, Dh. 175. — ?-ban- 
dhu, m. a member of the Adicca- 
family, name of Gotama Buddha; instr. 
ewuna. Dh. P. 94, V. 3. 
.  Ff&dinnavaf, mfn. (sa. *a-dirna- 

vat, fr. à-y/dr, to split) one who has 
torn asunder; m. «và (narindo) w. 
acc. (siham), 112,1. 


39 


aditta, mfn. (sa. adipta, pp. a-. 


Vdīp) set on fire, burning; m. ~o 
(cakkhusamphasso) 70,26; n. ~ar, 
ib; m. pl. ~ā (ras) 70,». 
°.ceha-sadisa, mfn. like a burning 
house, 65,11. (m. pl. nā). — ?-panna- 
salam (acc.) a burning hut of leaves, 
44,29. — Ü-pariyaya, n. name of a 
chapter in Vinaya-Pitaka, the Fire- 
Sermon, 71,18. 

*adiyati, vb. (sa. à-Vd&) to take, 
seize; to accept, choose; to take along 
with, carry off (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ati 
(adinnam) 97,1. Dh. 246. 409 (ādi- 
yate, med.); the formation üdiyati 
(ādeti is also to be found), which 
occurs only in comp. w. prp. à, upā 
ele, is possibly an old denominative 
form from ger. ādāya (or perhaps we 
have to suppose a weak form of the 
root; confusion w. sa. adriyate may 
also be admitted in some instances) cp. 
dadati & upadiyati. — ger. ādāya, 
often used almost like a prp. w. acc. 
== with, together with etc. 2,4. 6,7. 
12,28-29. 32,13. 48,30. 101,5. 106,3 
Dh, 49. Dh, 287; varam x, choosing 
the best, Dh, 268. — pp. atta (sa. 
atta) g.v. [The passive form is always 
-diyati or -diyyati etc.] 

ādīnava, m. (== sa.) distress, mi- 
sery, evil result, disadvantage, danger; 
~0, 67,31 (the evils of life); ace. 
„vāli, 47,28-29 (opp. assada); 68,20 
(kamànam); 86, (opp. anisamsa). 
— *anekādīnava, mfn. full of dangers, 
23,7. "uL T 

adhipacca, x. (sa. adhipatya, 
fr. adhipati) sovereignty, lordship; 


— 


ānubhāva 


sabbalokādhipaccena (instr.) „the 
lordship over all worlds“, Dh. 178. 

ànaica, n. (sa, anantya, fr. an- 
anta, q.v.) infinity; akasánaiica, the 
infinity of space, °-ayatana, x. the 
abode (state af mind) of the infinity 
of space, 80,5-6; viññanañoea, the in- 
finity of consciousness, 80,6-7. (con- 
tracted fr. viññana + anaiica) ep. 
ayatana. 

anantarika or ānantariya, 
mfn. (or ànantarlya, n. == sa. anan- 
tarya, n., immediate succession, fr. 
an-antara, g. v.) immediately follow- 
ing; *"-kamma, n. a deed which will 
bring retribution immediately (in this 
life) (— anantare yeva attabhave 
vipaccanakam kammam, Ss), „am 
(pathamam Devadattena upacitari) 
76,5. — paiicinantariya-kamma, m. 
sg. (coll.) the five crimes that con- 
stitute „proximate karma", ~an (acc.) 
97,12; such crimes are killing one’s 
father or mother, an Arhat or a Buddha; 
cp. SBE, XX, 246. 

ananda, m. (= sa.) *) joy, plea- 
sure; <o, Dh, 146. — °) Ananda, 
m. nom. pr. the (younger) cousin of 
Gotama Buddha, his favorite di- 
sciple; ~o (āyasmā) 77,17. 90,28; 
(bahussutānam [aggo]) 109,7; (ba. 
hussuto) 109,18; voc. wa, acc. ~am, 
11,6; gen. ~wassa, 90,23; "-savhaya, 
m. (g. v.) A. by name, acc. ~am, 
109,15. — 5) FAnanda, m. nom. pr. of 
a mythical fish, the king of the fishes; 
acc. «am nama maccham, 10,28; 
9-maccham, 10,s. 

*anapeti, vb. (caus. II fr. aneti, 
g. v.) to cause to be brought or fetched; 
ger. „etvā (Bodhisattam) 45,25. 

*anisamsa, m. (fr. *ā-ni-y/gams) 
blessings, profit, advantage; acc. ~am 
(w. loc. nekkhamme) 68,20; (vacisu- 
caritapatisamyuttam) 86,9 (opp. adi- 
nava). — silanisamsa-jataka, the tale 
of the blēssings of virtue, 28,1. 

*ānubhāva, m. (fr. anu-bhāva) 
power, extraordinary ability, esp. 
supernatural or magic power; acc. 


aneti 
wath, 37,13; instr. wena, 16,3; m’ 
[== me] wena, 112,20; iddhānubhāv- 
ena, 27,26 (v. iddhi); devatá-9, 17,25; 
devà-9, by the power of the gods, 
63,33. — mahānubhāva. mfn. of great 
might, ~o (Bhagavā) 75,30; gen. 
~assa (rañño) 62,14. — °-sampanna, 
mfn. possessed of magic power; ~am 
(manikkhandham) 35,23. 

aneti, vb. (sa. ā-Vnī) to bring, 
to bring back (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 
6,19; 1. pl. ~ema, 55,24; imp. 2. sg. 
bi, 111,30; 2. pl. etha, 16,26. 
57,4; pot. 1. sg. ānaye (to recover) 
31,35; aor. 3. pl. ~esum, 24,21; nay- 
imsu, 24,29; 1. pl. ānāyimha (probably 
incorrect for anayimha) 18,5; inf. 
wetum, 49,34; ger. „etvā. 4,17. 6,15. 
20,30; pp. anita. m. <o, 18,22. 22,29; 
f. nā, 112,14; n. ~am, 49,20; 113,26 
(idhánitam „extant here“); caus. 
ānāpeti, g. v. 

iipajjati, vb. (sa. ā-/pad) to get 
in, to fall into (acc.); pr. 3. sg. „vati 
(metri causa ~1) Dh. 309; aor. 2. sg. 
mā āpajji (vissāsam) „do not trust“, 
30,12; apadi, Dh. 272 (vissāsa-mūpādi); 
1, sg. āpādim, 94,21 (afifianam „I am 
at a loss“); 94,22 (sammoham „l have 
become greatly confused“); ger. witva 
(sarhvegari „in deep emotion“). 

apana. m. (= sa.) a shop; abl, 
8, 49,5; loc. «e, 30,10. — sabba- 
gandhápana, m., a perfumery shop, 
acc. ~at, 48,31. — °-samipena (instr. 
near the shop, 49,3. — °-dvaram (aces 
the entrance of the shop, 49,23. 

apatti, f. (= sa.) ') misfortune. 
2) fault, transgression, offence; °-sa- 
manta bhanamano, Jit. speaking from 
the neighbourhood of ~ 9: „when he 
is in danger of committing an offence 
by the words he says“, 83,4 (ep. 
sāmanta). pO 

apana, n. (= sa.) drinking, ban- 
quet. °-mandala, n. a banqueting 
| pavillon; 62,14. — y 

&üpucchati, vb. (sa. &-yprach) 
1) to ask, to offer (cp. pucchati). 2) 
to take leave, to bid farewell (w. acc. 


40 


—. .. U € pS à € À— € a — a 


pers); ger. ~witva 
(brahmanam) 9,34. | 
abadha, m. (= sa.) pain, sickness; 
„0 (kharo) 78,24; acc. ~am, 78,30. 
Dh, 138. | 
abharana, n. (= sa.) decoration, 
ornament, — sabbabharana-bhusita, 
f. (adj.) decorated with every kind o 
ornaments, 112,1. | 
ābhassara, mfn. (sa. ābhāsvara) 
shining, bright; m. pl. ~a devā, name 
of a class of gods, Dh. 200. 
ābhāti, vb. (sa. ā-/bhā) to shine; 
pr. 3. sg. ~&ti (rattim candima) 
107,23 = Dh. 387. 

*amal, indecl. (cp. sa. ām) yes; 
~ deva, yes sire! 31,8; ~ bhante, 
99,18; āmāti, 44,5. — After a negative 
question : no, 31,30 (ama na sakkomi). 

ām a*, mfn. raw, uncooked, unbaked, 
unripe; n. ~am (pattam) 104,6. — 
āmaka, mfn. id. (v. next). | 

*amaka-susána, n. a cemetery 
where the dead bodies are left unburned; 
nom, eam 65,10; acc. ~arn, 39,32. 

āmanteti, vb. (sa. ā-/mantr) 
1) to address, to call, speak to, tell, 
command (acc.); aor. 3.89. «esi, 82,34, 
44,29. 66,24. 80,1; "ger. netvā, 9,1. 
53,1. 63,3. — *)to bid farewell, to 
take leave (w. gen.); pr. 1. sg. ~ayāmi 
(vo) 80,1. | 

amisa, n. (sa. āmisha) ') flesh, 
meat, food, — ?) carnal lust. lokamisa, 
n. „the baits of the world“; vanta- 
lokamisa, mfn. (g. v.). 

ayatana, n. (= sa.) +) dwelling- 
place, home, abode; araññâ-°, abode 
in a forest, loc. we, 1,4. 3,30. — °) 
the six senses (v. saļāyatana) each 
of which containing *) the organ of 
sense (viz. cakkhu, sota, ghana, jivhā, 
kaya, mano) P) the contact with the 
object of sense (samphassa) 9) the 
perception by means of the conscious- 
ness (vifiiana); cakkhu-samphassa- 
viüüanáyatanam, the sense of sight, 
72,1; sota-s. ete. 72,9. 19. 15. 16. 17, 
the sense of hearing etc. — 5) stage 
(state of mind) of ecstasy or religious 


(rajanam) 6,17; 


meditation; àakasánaücá-9, the abode 
of infinity of space, 80,5; viññānañcâ-?, 
the abode of infinity of consciousness 
(cp. ānaūca) 80,6; akificania-° (g. v.), 
~ of nothingness, 80,7; neva-saiiüà- 
násaiüá-" (g. v.), ~ of neither per- 
ception nor non-perception, 80,. 
ayati, f. (== sa.) the future; acc. 
adv. «im, in the future, 75,26. 95,11. 
ayasa. mfn. (= sa.) made of iron; 
n. wath (bandhanam) Dh. 345. cp. 
ayas. — 
āyasmat, m(fn). (sa. ayushmat) 
‘possessed of long life’, used in ad- 
dressing or mentioning an older vene- 
rable person, esp. an Arhat or Thera 
(q. v., cp. 79,10); m. nom. «mà, 77,1. 
06,2-34; voc. „mā, 79,10; acc. ~man- 
tam, 77,15-16; instr. natā, 96,25; gen. 
~ato, 70,17 (tassa ~ato, without 
nom. pr.); cp. üyu. | 
āyāti, vb. (sa. &-Vyà) to come, 
to return; imp. 1. pl. ayama, come! 
let us go (in summoning a single or 
more persons), 77,16 (ayam’ Ananda); 
part. dyanta : an-āyanta, mfn. not 
returning, loc. pl. «esu, 111,15. 
Ayu, n. (sa. ayu & Ayus) life, 
duration of life; nom. ~u, Dh. 109; 
eum avasittham, the rest of his life- 
time, 44,28; acc. «um, Dh. 135. ep. 
āyasmat d next. | 
*ayuka. mfn. (fr. àyu) living (at 
the end of comy.). yavatayukam, 
adv. (g. v.). 
āyudha, n. (= sa., cp. āvudha) 
a weapon, — naddha-paiiciyudha, 
mfn. „equipped with the 5 weapons 
of war“, m. «o, 111,16: ` 
àyoga, m. (= sa.) employment, 
occupation (w. loc:); «o epp 
Dh. 185. (cp. Fausbóll, Bem. p. 36. 
aragga, v. ara}, 
arakkha, m. (sa. āraksha)a guard, 
protection; «o, 17,17; acc. ~am (te 
gahetva, protecting you) 17,15; ~am 
(galham) a close guard, 48,15; ~am 
thapesi, 60,3. — *ārakķhitthī, f. a 
woman on guard, loc. wiya, 49,56. — 
*O.manussa, m. a watchman, ésir. 


41 


arama 


pl. ~ehi (nirokāse thane) 41,29. — 
*gahitàrakkha, mfn. carefully guarded, 
loc. n. we (bhavane) 41,28; m. pl. 
nā (maya) 42,6. 

araddha, mfn. (sa. arabdha, pp. 
arabhati, g. v.) begun, undertaken. 
— *virlya, mfn. exerting one’s 
strength, energetic; acc. m. «am, 
Dh. 8; ace. pl. m. ~e (sāvake) 108,19. 

arabbha, ger. (fr. ārabhati, sa. 
arabhya) having begun; generally 
used as prp. w. acc. — about, con- 
cerning, 28,3. 84,28; santim ~, keep- 
ing the tranquillity (of Nibbana) in 
view. 

ārabhati, vb. (sa. à-yrabh) to 
begin, to undertake (w. inf.); aor. 3. 
sg. ~bhi, 10,15. 113,24; 3. pl. ~imsu, 
28,9; — ger. ürabbba (g. v.) — pp. 
üraddha, began, m. ~o, 17,21; f. «it, 
51,9; — part. gen. m. arabhato (vi- 
riyam dalham) Dh. 112 (cp. araddha- 
viriya). 

àrammarna, n. (probably another 
form for àlambana, g. v.) base, sup- 
port; object of sense or thought. — 
*buddhārammaņa, mfn. having its 
support in Buddha, f. ~a piti (q. v.), 
delightful thinking on or putting 
confidence in B., 28,5; acc. ~am pi- 
tim, 28,6-9. 

ara! f. (= sa.) an aw), needle; 
āragga, m. (sa. ārāgra), the point of 
an awl or needle, loc. ~e, Dh. 401; 
abl. nā, Dh. 407. (cp. agga.) 

arà?, ade. (sa. ārāt) far, far off; 
Dh. 253 (w. abl. āsavakkhayā). 

aradheti, vb. (sa. ā-/rādh, caus.) 
1) to conciliate, propitiate (acc.); aor. 
8. sg, nesi (rañño cittam, „won the 
heart of the king“) 96,37. — *) to gain, 
achieve (acc.); ellipt. to be done for; 
pot. 3. sg. ~aye (maggam) Dh. 281; 
ārādhe = aradheyya (w. abl. kakka- 
taka) 5,22. 

arama, m. (= sa.) a grove, a 
pleasure farden, a monastery; Joc. ne, 
(Anathapindikassa) 71,31; %-rukkha- 
cetyāni, „groves and sacred trees", 


Dh. 188 (ep. cetiya). — titthiyārāma, 


ariya 


the heretics’ grove, acc. „am, 73,3. 
— paribbajaki-°, the grove of the 
mendicant friars, abl. ~a, 29,23. 

āriya. mfn. (Dh. 208) v. ariya. 

aruyha, ārūļha, v. ārohati. 

arogya, n. (= sa. fr. a-roga, 
g. v.) health; ārogya-paramā lābhā, 
health is the greatest profit, Dh. 204 
(cp. labha). 

*aroceti, vb. (caus. ü-yruc) to 
tell, communicate, explain (acc., gen. 
pers.); to speak to, say to (gen.); 
aor, 3. sg. wesi, 0,23. 7,4. 62,4; 3. pl. 
e.esum, 8,2; ~ayimsu, 73,28; — imp. 
8. sg. ~etu, 79,25; 2. sg. wehi, 15,32. 
98,3 (me ratham); — ger. netvā, 
58,18; — pp. ārocita; tumhehi °-saiifiaya, 
on account of your application to me, 
25,18 (cp. saūūā). — caus. II. "àro-. 
cāpeti, to cause to be told or announ- 
ced, to make known, publish; aor. 3. 
sg. pesi (manussanam) 8,6; (Bha- 
gavato kālam, announced the hour 
(for the meal)) 78,3; — ger. ~āpetvā 
(raüio) 37,11. 

üropeti, vb. (caus. II. ā-yruh, 
cp. ārohati) !)to cause to ascend, to 
cause to be placed (w. double acc.), 
to put on board; ger. wetva (tam 
mama pitthim) 1,18; (tam [sc. nàvam]) 
19,27. 29,1. (maūcakam [sc. nam]) 
73,26 (having placed her on a hand- 
barrow). — *) to cause to increase; 
inf. ~etum, comp. eetu-kama, mfn., 
instr, pl. ~ehi (avannam Gotamassa, 
„wanting to bring disgrace upon G.") 
74,12. — pp. āropita, undertaken, be- 
gun(?), m. ~o (satako) var. lect. 
(Colombo Ed.) 87,11. 

ārohati & ārūhati (aruhati), 
vb. (sa. &-yruh) to ascend, mount, 
to climb up on (acc.); ger. *) aruyha 
(ratham) 7,5; (sayanam) 53,33. P) ā- 
rohitvā (suvaņņa-pādukāyo „putting 
on his gilt slippers*) 68,2. — pp. 
ārūļha, *) having ascended, pl. nā 
(manussā) 76,29; acc. m. Sg. ~am 
kathamageam, the exposition of the 
doctrine contained in (acc. saūgīti- 
ttayam) 113,29. P) ascended (pass.); 


42 


tena °-navaya (gen.), a ship with him 
la board, 24,15. — caus, II. ūropeti 
g. v.). 

ālapati, vb. (sa. ā-ylap) to ad- 
dress, to speak to (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
«ati (theram) 85,28; aor. 3. pl. 
wimsu, 73,3. cp. allapa. 

ālambati, vb. (sa. ā-/lamb) to 
cling to, to lean upon, to support one's 


| self on; ger. wiya (pàninà bhümim) 


112,25. 

ālambana, n. (= sa., cp. aram- 
mana) depending on, supporting; ob- 
ject of sense. "aülambani, f. (adj.), 
hanging down; rajju válambani, like 
a rope for clinging to 9: a weak sup- 
port, 47,27. 

alambara, m. (sa. adambara) a 
sort of drum; acc. ~am, 67,29. 

alaya, m. (— sa.) 1) house, 
dwelling. — 2) longing, desire; pl. wi, 
Dh. 411. — an-àlaya, m. (g. v.). — 
3) dissimulation, pretence; acc. gilàn'- 
ālayam katvā, pretending to be ill, 
49,22. — cp. allīyati.. 

Alavi, f. (sa. Atavi) mom. pr. 
of a town; acc. eim, 86,14. 9-vasino 
(pl.) the inhabitants of A. (cp. vāsin). 

alasiya, n. (sa. alasya) sloth, 
want of energy; acc. ~am, Dh. 280, 

alikhati, vb. (sa. a-ylikh) to 
delineate, to paint; ger. witva (sasa- 
lakkhanam) 16,17. 

alingati, vb. (sa. ā-yling) to 
embrace; ger. «tva (aiifiamainam) 
49,11. 

āloka, m. (= sa.) light; instr. 
~ena, 101,7; dīpālokena, by the lamp- 
light, 41,27 (cp. dīpa'). — *āloka- 
sandhi, m. a window, casement; 
“-kannabhaga, 84,19. 

āloleti, ob. (sa. ā-y/lud, caus.) 
to stir up, to agitate, shake (acc.); 
ger. ~wetva (ghatam) 56,28. 

*alha, f.(?) a rope or cord(?) cp. 
Mahratt. adhā (or agan); this word 
is probably akin to āļhaka (or alha) 
m. (== sa. ādhaka), 1) a post to 
which an animal is bound, *) a measure 
of capacity. — *alha-baddha, mfn. 


43 


(or alha.-+ ābaddha?) secured to a 
post by a cord, „spell-bound* (?), m. 
„0 (naro) 111,10. 

āvajjati, vb. (sa. a-yvr]) +) to 
reflect, consider, to think about (acc.); 
part. m. gen. ~wantassa, 44,32 (pha- 
lita-pātubhāvam); part. med. m. 
e Amano, 15,8. — *) to observe, main- 
tain; part. ~anto ies silam) 15,1. 
caus, v. next. 

āvajjeti, vb. (caus. avajjati) to 
turn over (acc.); fut. 2. pl. wessatha 
(imam (dadhighatam)) 35,18. 

āvattati, vb. (sa. ā-yvrt) to re- 
turn; ger. ~itvā (hinayá-?) returning 
to the world (cp. hina) 69,2. 

avaha, mfn. (= sa.) bringing, 
producing; sukhavaha, mfn. bringing 
happiness, X, ~am (cittam guttari) 
Dh. 35; *hitavaha, mfn. id, f. 
sabbaloka-hitavaha, 113,55. 

*avata, m. (cp. sa. avata) a hole 
in the ground; acc. pl. ~e (khanitva) 
89,32, . -mukha-vattiyam, 40,28 (v. 
vatti). 

àvàsa, m. (= sa.) 1) dwelling, 
living; gharāvāsa, the household life, 
acc, wath, 64,93; pl. sattāvāsā (nava) 
the 9 forms of existence, 82,13 (v. 
satta *). — ?) intercourse; manussfivasa- 
kāranā „because I have had to do 
with men“ 112,10, — 5) a convent (vi- 
hara), loc. pl. „esu, Dh. 73. — dur- 
āvāsa (g. v.). 

āvāha, m. (— sa.) marriage, giv- 
ing a son away in marriage (opp. 
vivaha, g. o); acc. wath, 55,21. 
O-mangala, n. nuptial festival, Joc. 
we, 112,15. 

avi-karoti, eb. (sa. āvish-ykr) 
to reveal, disclose; part. m. ~kubbam 
(rahokammarn) 54,17. 

āvijjhati, vb. (sa. ā-yvyadh) to 
encompass, to mark the boundary of 
(ace.); ger. (used adverbially w. ace. 
== all round) «itvà (khettam) 8,8. - 

avila, mfn. (— sa.) turbid, not 
clear; an-āvila, mfn. (g. v.). 

āvuņāti, vb. (sa. ā-yve, but con- 
founded with à-yvr) to string (as 


āsava 


beads); ger. ~itva (macche valliyā) 
14.23. 

āvudha, x. (sa. ayudha) weapon; 
nom. ~am, 112,20; acc. ~am, 36,27; 
pl. ni, 6,12. — %-hattha, mfn. armed, 
m. pl. à, 6,7. — paññavudha, the 
weapon of knowledge, insfr. wena, 
Dh. 40. A younger sanskritizised 
form is āyudha (q. v.). | 

*āvuso, indecl. a voc, particle 
used in addressing equals or inferiors : 
friend, brother! (also to more persons); 
29,29. 75,6 (gacchávuso). 80,12. 90,29. 
— *āvusa-vāda, m. addressing a per- 
son by the word avuso, instr. wena, 
79,1-9. — āvuso ie porhape an old voc. 
fr. sa. āyushmat (*avusu fr. āyush- 
man ? Tr.), cp. ayasmat. 

isa, m. (sa. aga) food, eating; 
pātarāsa, sāyamāsa (g. v.) — an-asaka, 
f. fasting (g. v.). 

āsamkati, eb. (sa. ā-ycaīk) to 
doubt, fear, suspect; aor. 2. pl. wittha 
(mà aiiüam kiūci, cp. añña) 7,1. 

àsamka, f. (sa. agaika) suspicion; 
kaham vo mā, where does your su. 
spicion point to? 73,22. 

isaiga, m. (= sa.) clinging to, 
attachment; uttarasafiga, m. (g. v.). 

āsajja, ger. v. üsidati. 

sada. m. (— sa.) approaching, 
attack; nāga-m-āsado, approaching 
an elephant (with ‘m’ euphonically 
inserted) 77,3. cp. &sidati. 

üisana, n. (= sa.) a seat; acc. 
~am, 22,28; instr. wena, 83,34; abl. 
eA (utthāyā-) 70,12; loc. ~e (paii- 
fiatte) 68,11; pl. ~ni, 61,25. — cp. 
ekāsana, pacchāsana, silāsana, senā- 
sana (g. v.). 

āsanna, mfn. (= sa. pp. āsīdati, 
q. V.) near; m. «o (kalo) 63,7. — 
accasanna, mfn. too near (opp. ati- 
dūra, v. ati), loe. (adv.) ~e. (gan- 
tabbam) 83,2; nātidūre náccasanne 
gacchanto, 12,29. 

āsaya,*m. (sa. acraya or acaya), 
1) refuge, shelter, *) meaning, intention. 
— nirasaya, mfn. (g. v.). 


āsava, m. (sa. āsrava) probably 


isi ` 44 


‘foam, dirt’; sin, passion, desire (synon. | 64,5. Dh. 345; ahamsu, 4,19. 54,16 
kilesa); pl. nā, Dh. 93. 253. 292; | (bhastam bālo'ti). 
abl. pl. wehi, 69,23. ""-kkhaya, m. | āharaņa, n. (= sa.) fetching; 
destruction of passions, acc. «am, | dhanaharanatthaya, in order to fetch 
Dh. 272; abl. mā, Dh. 253. — khi- | the money, 32,17 (cp. attha?). 
nasava, mfn. having subdued the pas- āharati, vb. (sa. ā-yhr) !) to 
sions, pl. ~a, 109,5. Dh. 89. — an- | bring, fetch, take along with (acc.); 
āsava, mfn. (g. v.) cp. SBE. X p. | pr. 3. sg. «vati, 6,20; — imp. 2. sg. 
13—14. ~a, 36,12. 50,20 (te hattham); 2. pi. 
isa, f. (sa. aca) Í!) wish, desire; | watha, 41,16; — pot. 2. sg. ~weyyasi, 

pl. wa, Dh. 410. — vantāsa, mfn. | 87,12; — aor. 3. sg. ~i, 36,13; 1. 8g. 
having renounced desires, m. ~0, Dh. | eim, 29,1; 3. pl. „imsu, 25,2; — fut. 
97 (cp. vanta). — 2) hope, expectation; | 3. sg. ~wissati, 35,6; 1. sg. ~issimi, 
%cchedam a-katvā, without relin- | 48,16. 92,9 (take out); 3. pl. „issanti, 

| 

| 


quishing all hope, 42,13 (cp. cheda). | 53,25; — ger. ~witva, 15,2. 32,19. 33,23. 

āsāļha, m. (sa. āshādha) name | 41,5; — pp. ahata; āhatāhatam, m. 
of a month (June—July). — uttarā- | (everything) brought, 57,6; āhata-dha- 
sálha, m. one of the 27 lunar man- | nam, the money brought along from 
sions (the 15th, cp. nakkhatta); | home, 57,36; — pass. part. ahariya-. 
C-nakkhattena, at the moon's conjunc- | mana, loc. an-ahariyamane (tasare) 
tion in the second half of the month | 87,15. — *)to tell, recite; aor. 3. sg. 
Asülha. cp. next. „i (atitam) 28,17; — ger. witva 

asalhi, f. (sa. āshādhī), the day of | (dhammadesanam) 29,16; grd. ahari- 
full moon in the month Asülha. —%-na- | tabba, n. ~am (suttam) 31,14. 


kkhattam, the midsummer festival āhāra, m. (== sa.) food; acc. 
(held on that day) 61,2. am, 15,1; abl. ~ato (tumhehi 


āsimsati, vb. (sa. a-\/caris) to 
hope, trust; to strive; pot. 3. sg. med. 
weth(a), 42,16 (opp. nibbindati). 

*asitika, mfn. (fr. asiti) being 
eighty years of age; acc. f. ~am 
(nàrim) 47,21. 

āsīdati, vb. (sa. à&-ysad) to 
approach; to attack, to lay hands on 
(aec.); ger. āsajja (selam) 104,16. — 
aor. 2. sg. asado (nagam) 77,3. — 
pp. āsanna (4. v.) ep. asada. 

asina, mfn. (== sa., part. yàs, 
cp. acchati) sitting; acc. m. ~am, 
Dh. 227. 386 („settled“). 

āsīvisa, m. (sa. acivisha) a 
venomous serpent; acc, ~am, 86,18. 

aha, vb. defect. (= sa., perf. Vah) 
to say, speak (generally used in hi- 
storical exposition with the significa- 
. tion of pret.); 3.sg. aha, 75,5; con- 
tracted : 15,17 (evāha), 142,18 (ahâ- 
dissamāne); — pr. 3. sg. (says) 74,1; 
w. acc. gatham aha 3,25; w. acc. pers. 
2,28. 14,17. — 8. pl. shu (panāhu, say) 


khaditabba-°) 14,19; loc. ~e, Dh. 93. 
— atthiiya, for food, 15,30 (cy. 
attha 1). — an-ahara, mfn. being with- 
out nutriment, ~o (aggi) 95,8. — 
āhāra-tthitīka, mfn. living by food, 
pl. ~ii (sabbe sattā) 82,8. 

*ihindati, vb. (fr. ā-yhind, cp. 
sa. āhiņdaka) to wander, roam through 
(acc.) (to search for); imp. 2. pl. 
watha (nagaram) 73,29. 74,11. — part. 
santa, m. ~o (pavadino, in search 
for disputants) 113,5. 

āhita, mfn. (— sa. pp. ā-ydhā) 
put on, added; m. ~o (gini, „kind- 
led“) 104,22. EM 


OK. 


*ifigha, indecl, a particle of in- 
vitation or permission : well! come! 
ete.; 12,5. | 

icc’ = iti (q. v.). 


—— UD OAAEEARMI!N Ə—.—>—.,ə.,.—.-—- ->=>əÀ—ç—=sa>—-—əƏ—o—— əy R P . s n - e.— °> —,p  ÀÓ n  OOT- 


45 


icchati, vb. (sa. yish) to wish, 
like, want; to seek for (acc.); pr. 3. 
sg. māti, 34,20; 2. 89. wasi, 31,16; 1. 
sg. „sāmi, 50,11 (w. inf.). 62,4 
(iceham'aham); — pot. 3. sg. «e, 
Dh. 84; weyya, 79,14. Dh. 73; — 
part. nom. m. iccham (vānaro) 107,30; 
part, med. icchamana, pl. nā, 35,18; 
— aor. 3. 8g. icchi, 18,30. 58,6 (na 
icchi, refused); 1. sg. with, 42,16; 
— ger. witva, 94,5; — pp. ~ita, 
yathicchitam, adv. according to one's 
desire, 111,28 (ep. yathii); icchiti- 
cchitam, acc. n. „whatever she 
wants", 88,4. 

iccha, f. (= sa.) wish, desire, 
lust; Dh. 74; acc. wath, 67,0. — 
°-lobha-samapanna, mfn. Dh. 264. — 
€-dosa, mfn. „damaged by lust“, f. 
~ā (paja) Dh. 359 (cp. dosa!) — 
vigaticcha, mfn. free from lust, loc. 
pl. „esu, Dh. 359 (cp. vigata). — 
appiccha, mfn., yenicchakam, adv. 


g. v.). 

ijjhati, vb. (sa. yrdh) to prosper, 
succeed; pr. 8. sg. „ati (paniavan- 
tānam kiriyā) 57,6. cp. iddhi. 

*injita, n. (cp. sa. ingita) motion, 
emotion; n'atthi Buddhanam „arm, 
Dh. 255. 

itthakā, f. (sa. ishtaka) a brick; 
gen. pl. «anam, 91,29. 

itara, mfn. (= sa.) +) the other 
(of two); m. ~o, 24,7. 43,22. 101,17; 
f. ~&, (of two women) 46,10. 59,1; 
(not of two women, but of two per- 
sons mentioned) 47,3. 57,15. — *) se- 
cond, next, following; instr. m. ~ena, 
35,15. pl. f. acc. itarā (dve gāthā) 
13,80. — °) other, pl. the rest; m. ~o 
(‘taro jano, other people) 106,34 — 
Dh. 222; f. ~& paja, Db. 85; pl. m. 
acc. itare (tayo) 14,17. — cp. aūia 
& apara (para). 

itaritara, mfn. (sa. itarétara) 
whichsoever (whatsoever), the first 
comer; instr. n. (adv.?) ~wena:(tutthi 
sukhā ya ~ „enjoyment is pleasant 
whatever be the cause“) Dh. 331; it 
is questionable whether this word, in 


itthi 


Pāli, can have the signification „mu- 
tual“ or adv. „mutually*, it seems 
everywhere to mean „whichsoever" ; 
the instr. ~ena is probably governed 
by tutthi, cp. Sn. v. 42 : santussamāno 
itarītarena. 

iti, indecl. (= sa.) thus, in this 
manner (usually shortened to ‘ti’ by 
contraction or elision, and before vo- 
wels sometimes taking the form icc-) 
v. ti. 

*Itivuttaka, x. (fr. iti + vutta, 
g. v.) nom. pr. of a canonical Pāli 
book, the fourth part of Khuddaka- 
Nikāys, thus named, because every 
chapter begins with the words *vuttam 
hetam Bhagavatā'; 109,5: (gāth'- 
udān'-itivuttakam) a part of 'navaī- 
gam Satthu-sasanam’. 

ito, adv. (sa. itas) !) hence, from 
hence; 77,4 (~ param yato); 95,4 
(~ katamam disam gato); ito c'ito 
Cà „up and down“, 36,2. — *) here, 
to this place, in this direction; 5,5. — 
3) from this time, 33,14. 87,7; ~ pa- 
tthaya, henceforth, 6,16; ~ dani pa- 
tthāya, id. 39,2. — itoparam, adv. 
later, afterwards (opp. ajja) 112,17. 
cp. tatoparam. 

ittara, mfn. (sa. itvara, but often 
confounded with itara, g. v.) hasty, 
inconstant; low, vile. *-dassana, x., 
a hasty glance; instr. «ena, at first 
sight, unconsiderately, 30,12. 

*itthatta, x. (sa. ittham + suff. 
-tva) this condition, the speaker's 
own existence; dat. ~aya (nāparam 
„vājāti pajānāti, he understands that 
there is nothing more for him in this 
world, he has done with this world) 
11,16. 

itthi, f. (incidentally also ‘thi’, 
sa. stri) a woman; „ī(ekā) 31,3; acc. 
wim, 31,22; instr. ~iyã, 48,25; gen. 
wlya, 31,9; pl. ~iyo, 46,9; gen. pī. 
eAnam, 46,9; thinam, 51,5. — āra-. 
kkhitthiy& loc. a woman on guard, 
49,36. — janapaditthim, acc. a country- 
woman, 30,28. — duggatitthim, a poor 
woman, 48,16. — sabbitthiyo, pi. all 


idam 


women, 48,7. — *-kicca, x. (cp. sa. 
stri-krta) sexual intercourse, «am 
(acc.) lll,s. — *-kutta- (g. v.) 
women's wiles, 21,13. — *"-gabbha, 
m. 8 female child, 61,81. — 9-lola, mfn. 
desirous of women, 50,16, — -vesa, 
i. disguise of a woman, 58,31. 

idam, pron, n. (= sa.) v. ayam. 

idāni, adv. (sa. idānīm) now; 
3,1. Q3 99,5. 47,24. 65,2. — When 
used without emphasis, this word 
usually is shortened to ‘dani’; 2,13. 
3,11. 35,95. 74,22. 80,1. Dh. 235; — 
with a negation == no more, no 
longer; 41,34 (na dan’); 108,:s (m a- 
tthi dāni); cp. ito dāni patthaya, 
39,2 (v. ito). 

iddhi, f. (sa. rddhi) magic or 
supernatura! power; instr. wlya, Dh. 
175 (miraculously), — iddhānubhāva, 
m. id. instr. wena, 27,25. — iddhā- 
bhisamkhara, m. an exercise of mira- 
, culous power, acc. eam, 68,35, cp. 
ijjhati. 


46 


| gen. assa, 2,29 (cp. vanara 


*iddhika, mfn. (fr. iddhi) ouly | 


in comp. w. maha: mahiddhiko, m. 
of great miraculous power, 75,30; pl. 
wil, 109,20. 

iddhimat, mfn. (sa. rddhi-mat) 
possessed of magical power; m. nom. 
„mā (viya, like a person endowed 
with magical power) 27,25. 

idha, adv. (sa. iha, by contraction 
or elision ; idhà-, -idha, idh', 'dha) 
1) here, in this place; 7,7. 36,85. 68,56. 
85,22 (in the context); idh'eva, this 
very moment, 49,30. — *) in this world; 
107,26 = Dh. 18, (opp. pecca); 108, " 
(idha jivitun); Dh. 402 (idh’eva, 
even in this existence). — ?) here, to 
this place; idhagata, mfn. 21,s. 103, 13, 

— *)unaccented (sometimes without 
any pregnant meaning) 30,17 (idha, 
voilà); 90,29 (idh’ekacce, ‘occasion, 
ally’); 105,15; 106, = Dh. 267; 
tattha ... idh’ anita, brought thither 
112,14; '(tattha)idhāpi, accordingly 
(igitur), 112,15, 

inda, m. (sa. indra) chief, lord, 
king; ~o (devānam = Sakka) 80,26. 


— comp. : janinda, m., a king, 55,1 
(voc. ~a, cp. jana). — devinda, m. 
the lord of Devas (Sakka) 110,24 (voc.). 
— narinda, m. a king, 7,15 (voc. cp. 
nara) — vünarinda, m. a king of 
monkeys (= kapirajan); voc. wa, 1,13; 
). S Ma- 
hinda, m. nom. pr. (g. v.). M 

indakhila, m. (sa. indrakila) a 
threshold (ummāra); ?-üpama, mfn. 
like a threshold, m. ~o, Dh. 95. (cp. 
upama.) 

indanila, m. (sa. indranila) a 
sapphire; °-mani, (g. v.) 28,3». 

indriya. n. (= Sa.) sense, organ 
of sense; pl. „vāni, Dh. 94; loc. pl. 
wesu, Dh. 7. %-guttī, f. „watchfulness 
over the senses“, Dh. 375. 

ima, base of the pron. demonstr. 
v. ayam. 

iva, indecl. (= sa.) like, as if, 
as it were; *) with an euphonical 
letter inserted : kakkataka-m-iva, 5,22; 
usabho-r-iva, 105,19; cp. yad-iva, 
Dh. 195. P) contracted with a prec. 
a : macchasséva, 51,4 (°-évodake); 
bahutinassira, 51,33; amittenéva, Dh. 

. 907. °) shortened to va (Q. v.). 
i) by Hb s = viya (q. v.). 

isi, m. (sa. rshi) & saint or sage, 
an ascetic or hermit; ?-pabbajjam 
pabbajitva, 34,5 (having left the 
world and become hermit, v. pabba- 
jati); °-ppavedita, mfn. taught by the 
wises, acc. m. ~am (maggam) Dh. 
281. — mahesi (g. v.). 

Isipatana, n. nom. pr. (sa. rshi- 
patana) a forest near Benares; mom. 
~ai (migadāyo) 68,7; loc. we, 66,24. 

issara, m. (sa. igvara) master, 
lord; eO, 11,10. i 

issariya, x. (sa. aiçvarya) lord- 
ship, sovereignty, empire; ~ar (acc.) 
60,13. Dh. 73. 

*issukin, mfn. (fr. iss& — sa. 
irshà, īrshyā, by confusion w, ussuka 
(g. v.) cp. sa.'irshu, mfn.) envious; 
nom. m. ~i (naro) Dh. 262. 


AT 


"a | 
I. 
idisa, mfn. (sa. idrga) such; m. 
~o pati) 64,15. 
isa, /. (sa. isha) the pole of a 
chariot or plough; 98,4-7. °-mukhena, | 


by means of the pole, 60,16 (cp. 
mukha). 


U. 

ukkamsati, vb. (su. ut-ykrsh) 
to raise, elevate; to praise; exto', exalt 
(acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~ati (opp. apasa- 
deti) 74,30. 

ukkanthati, vb. (sa. utkanthate) 
to be distressed, weary or disgusted 
(sa. ‘to raise the neck’ — to long for, 
sorrow for etc,); part. med. an-ukkan- 
thamana, m. <o, 23,19; pp. ~ita, 
m. WO, 46,18. 

ukkamana, ^. (sa. utkramana) 
going out, getting out; rathassa 
°-tthinath, n. room for a carriage to 
pass another; 43,19. 

*ukkamāpeti, vb. (caus. II. fr. 
sa. ut- V kram) to let (a carriage) drive 
out of the way; imp. 2. sg. „ehi 
(ratham) 43,20; ger. „etvā, 43,24. 

ukkalāpa, v. uklapa. 

ukkāra, m. (sa. utkāra, cp. ut- 
kara, uccara & avaskara) feces, dung; 
C-bhümi, f. a dunghill, loc. wiyam, 
18,51. 

*ukkujjati, vb. (probably denom. 
fr. sa. kubja (cp. Vubj, ykuc, kuiic)) 
to set up what has been overturned, 
or, to straighten what has been 
crooked (?); pot. 3. 89. ~eyya (nikkuj- 
jitam, uparimukhari kareyya, Comm.) 
69,16. cp. nikkujjati. | 

ukkutika, mfn. (sa. utkutaka) 
sitting on the hams; %ppadbana, x. 
the sitting motionless (as a kind of 
ascetic exertion) ~am, Dh. 141 (cp. 
padhàna) =. - 

ukkhitta, mfn. (sa. utkshipta, 
pp. ukkhipati) raised, removed; ?-pa- 


km 


ucca 


ligha, mfn. „who has destroyed all 
obstacles"; acc. m. ~am, Dh. 398. 

ukkhipati, ob. (sà. ut-ykship) 
to lift up, raise, reach out, draw up 
(acc.); part. ~anta, m. <o, 49,5; pl. 
~ü (jalar) 36,32; — inf. itum (avu- 
dham) 36,27; (hattham) 39,55; — ger. 
evitva, 5,6. 12,31. 17,20 (givam). 23,30 
(supporting, khura-cakkam), 40,26. 
50,21. 61,10. 111,25 (asim). — pp. 
ukkhitta, g. v. — caus. II. *ukkhi- 
papeti, to cause to be lifted up (acc.) ; 
ger. ~etva (devim) 62,8; (Sundarim) 
14,10. 

*uklapa, mfn. dirty; m. <o (deso) 
82,23; (sometimes written ukkalapa). 

uggacchati, vb. (sa. ud-ygam) 
to come forth, to rise; pr. 3. sg. mati, 
27,2 (udakam); — pp. uggata, ugga- 
todakam, x. the water that rises, 
27,2-3; loc. f. ~aya (ūmiyā) 27,4; — 
pathamuggata, mfn. newly come out, 
in spring, m. ~o (kaļīro) 47,9. cp. . 
uggamana. 

ugganhati, vb. (sa. ud-ygrah) 
to lift up; to acquire, to study, learn 
(acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~āti (sippam) 82,12; 
— aor. 3. sg. e (Pitakattayam) 113,18; 
— ger. witva (sabbasippāni) 45,27; 
uggahetvàna (Jinasāsanam) 109,23. 
cp. uggahana. 

uggamana, x. (sa. udgamana) 
rising, sunrise; abl. arun’-uggamana, 
12,18 (v. aruna); suriy -uggamana- 
kale (7oc.) at sunrise, 72,29. 

uggahana, n». (sa. udgrahana) 
lifting up; *-rajjuka, m. a rope or 
string for lifting, acc. ~am, 14,33. 

uggirati, vb. (sa. ud-Vgr?) !) to 
spit out. ?) to draw (a sword); ger. 
eva (āvudhāni) 6,12. 

ugghoseti, vb. (sa. ud-yghush, 
caus.) to cry out, exclaim, declare 
aloud; aor. 3. sg. wayi, 114,5. 

ucca, mfn. (= sa.) high, lofty, 
tall; Joc. n. ~e (thane „to a high 
position“).,76,11. — compar. uccatara, 
mfn. M, ~O, 3,1. — uccà, adv. as the 
first part of comp. v. below. — ucca- 
vaca, mfn. g. v. 


uccaya 


uccaya, m, (= sa.) gathering, 
accumulation; ~o (papassa) Dh. 117. 
cp. uccinati. 

ucca, indecl. (= sa.) high, above, 
upwards; as the first part of comp.: 
ucca-sayana, n. a high or honorable 
seat or couch; °-mahasayana vera- 
mani, one of the ten precepts, 81,26. 

uccavaca, mfn. (== sa., dvandva- 
comp. of ucca & avaca) high and low, 
various; acc. n. ~am (na... dass- 
ayanti, „never appear elated or de- 
pressed“) Dh, 83. 

uccinati, vb. (sa. uc-yci) to 
gather, collect; to choose, select; ger. 
oie (varam) 109,1. — uccaya, m. 
q. v.). 

ucchanga, m. (sa. utsaiiga) lap, 
bosom; embrace; loc. ~e (me putto) 
31,4; instr. wena (pannam adaya) 
57,12. 

ucchindati, vb. (sa. uc-ychid) 
to cut out or off; imp. 2. sg. ~a 
(sineharn) Dh. 285. | 

ucchinna, mfn. (= sa.; pp. uc- 
chindati) cut off, extirpated; *°-mila, 
mfn. uprooted, n. „am (rūpam Ta- 
thāgatassa) 95,11. 

ucchu, m. (sa. ikshu) sugar-cane; 
acc. ~um, 100,23. 

uju, mfn. (sa.rju) straight, upright; 
right; acc. n. sum (karoti medhāvī) 
Dh. 33. — *ujuka, mfn. id., acc. m. 
~am (matamanussam thapāpetvā) 
41,1. 

ujju, mfn. (== uju). — ujju-gata, 
mfn. righteous; loc. pl. „esu, Dh. 108. 

*ujjhāna, w. (fr. ujjhayati) com- 
plaining of, being offended; *0-saññin, 
mfn. inclined to be offended, gen. m. 
~ino, Dh. 253. 

*ujjhayati, vb. (sa. *ud-ydhyai) 
io be irritated or offended, to mur- 
mur, to complain of; pr. 2. pl. ~ath(a), 
88,26; — aor. 3. sg. ~i, 88,2. 

ujjhita, mfn. (= sa.; Vujjh) left, 
abandoned; loc. n. ~asmim {samkara- 
dhānasmim) Dh, 58. 

utthahati & utthāti, uttheti 
(uttitthati). vb. (sa. ud-/sthād to stand 


48 


nn i ae e ——À—— 


up, rise (from, abl.) to spring; to climb 
up (acc.); to rouse oneself, to make ef- 
forts; aor. 3. sg. utthāsi, 12,12; utthahi, 
82,51. 50,20; 3. pl. ~imsu (Sinerum). 
60,2; — pot. 3. sg. uttitthe, Dh. 168 
(opp. pamajjeyya); — imp. 2. sg. utthehi, 
7,13. — part, med. utthahāna; an-uttha- 
hāno („who does not rouse himself“) 
Dh. 280; — ger. utthāya, 7,25. 61,5. 
70,12 (āsanā); tad-utthaya, because it 
springs from it, 106,19 == Dh, 240; 
utthahitva (tato) 10,22. — pp. utthita, 
pl. ~& (asura) 60,3; loc. sg. m. ~e 
(suriye) 42,1. — caus. utthāpeti, to 
cause to stand up, awaken; to erect, 
raise, construct; ger. ~etva (nāvam) 
23,4 (var. lect. for upatthapetva, cp. 
corrections). cp. utthana. 

utthāna, n. (sa. utthāna) !) stand- 
ing up, rising; *°-kala, m. time to rise, 
loc. „amhi, Dh. 280. — *) yield, 
revenues; sata-sahassutthāna, mfx. 
yielding 100,000, acc. m. ~am (gā- 
mavaram) 45,3. — 5) effort, exertion; 
instr. wena, Dh. 25; an-utthāna 
(g. v.). 

utthānavat, mfn. (sa. utthāna- 
vat) possessed of effort, zealous; gen, 
m. ~ vato, Dh. 24. | 

*utthitatta, x. (fr. utthita, pp. 
utthahati, sa. *utthita + tva, cp. 
utthita-tā) the state of having risen; 
abl. «à Parente) 60,25. 

unha, mfn. (sa. ushna) hot, warm; 
n. acc. ~am, 16,8. 83,26 (sc. udakam); 
instr. wena, ib.; loc. ~e „in a hot 
place“, 83,5-9; loc. f. „vāya (vālikāya) 
97,55. — ""-kara, m. signs of heat, 
acc, ~am, 15,8. 

utu, m. (sa. rtu) 1) season. *)a 
woman’s menstrual discharge, the mucus 
etc, secreted at a woman’s delivery; 
acc. «um (gàhapesum) 62,52. 

uttatta, mfn.(sa. ut-tapta) heated, 
glowing; shining; °-kanaka-sannibha, 
mfn. like shining gold, m, ~o (kayo) 
85,7. cp. ottappa. | 

uttama, mfn. (— sa.) highest, 
extreme, principal; best, excellent; 
M. 0: 95.35: voc. wa. 108.11: acc. 


m. n. wath (puccham) 91,5; (sara- 
nam) 107,21 = Dh. 192; (dhamman) 
Dh. 115; — comp. uttamattham (acc.) 
54,29 (an excellent thing), Dh. 386 (,,the 
highest end“); uttama-porisa, m. the 
best or greatest man, ~o, Dh. 97 — 
purisuttama, Dh. 78 (acc. pl. xe); 
°vobbana-vilasa-, 47,14; °-ratham, 
63,4; ?-rupa-dhara, mfn. 19,7; ?-ve- 
danam, 103,5. — uttamanga, n. (== 
sa.) the head; wath, 47,7; «ruha, 
mfn. (v. afiga). — saūgūmajuttama, 
v. saūgāma. — Saññatuttama, v. saň- 
ñata. 

uttara, mfn. (= sa.) *) upper, 
higher, superior; uttarottha, m, (sa. 
uttaroshtha) the upper lip or jaw, 
loc. ~e, 18,19. — °?)later, last (opp. 
pubba); 9-ásalha, m. (sa. uttarasha- 
dha, f.) a lunar mansion, the last half 
of the month asalha (q. v). — ?) 
northern; acc. wim (disah) 95,5; 
0-disato (abl. from the North) 61,18; 
9-dvara, n. the northern door or gate- 
way, instr. «ena, 55,30; *-yavamaj- 
jhaka, m. nom. pr. of a village or a 
country district, acc. ~am, 55,30. — 
an-uttara, mfn. (g. v.), cp. Anguttara 
& uttarasanga. 

uttarati, vb. (sa. ut-ytr) to step 
out (of the water), to disembark; 
aor. 3. pl. withsu (nagarasamipe) 
21,18; ger. gitvā, 84,2; pp. uttinna, 
9-padam («ģc.) footsteps of those who 
had gone out of the water (? perhaps 
an error instead of otinna-padam) 
111,17. 

uttarāsaūga, m. (= sa.) the 
upper robe; acc. eam, 74,19. 82,18; 
loc. pl. „esu, 33,7. 

*uttarim, adv. (cp. uttara) further, 
again; 88,12-17-21. 

*uttari-bhaveti, vb. (fr. uttara 
+ caus. y bhii) to devote oneself espe- 
cially to, or (perhaps better) to subdue 
completely, pot. 3. sg. vuttari-bhavaye 
(paūca) „rise above“ Dh. 370. cp. 
Morris, JPTS. '87,116. 

uttarottha, m. v. uttara. 

uttāna, mfn. (— sa.) lying on 

Pāli Glossary. 


49 


udaya 


the back; °-seyyaka, mfn. id. (cp. sa. 
"uttāna-gaya) m. <o, 99,5. 
uttinna, mfx. pp. uttarati, g. v. 
uttitthati, v. utthahati. 
*Uttiya, m. nom. pr. of a wan- 
dering ascetic; ~o (paribbajako) 
89,19; voc. wa, 89,21; acc. ~am, 90,28; 
gen, «assa, 90,27. 
| utrasta, mfn. (a sanskritizised 
form for uttasita, sa. uttrasta, fr. 
ut-ytras) frightened, alarmed; m. <0 
| (puriso) 75,17; aec. ~am, 75,19, 
ud-°, (= sa.) prefix to verbs and 
nouns up, out) variously assimi- 
| lated with a following consonant, but 
| before h sometimes taking the form 
| ú (v. uhaiinati). cp. uttama. uttara. 
uda, n. (= sa.) water (only in 
comp.) : -kumbho, m. a water-pot, 
| Dh. 121. — ?-bindu, m. a water-drop, 
| 108,2; %-bindu-nipātena (ixstr.) by 
| the falling of water-drops, Dh. 121. 
| udaka, x. (= sa.) water; nom. 
| acc, wam, 3,32. 5,18; abl. wa, 15,14; 
| ~ato, 11,31. 89,14; loc. we, 1,20; 51,31 
(macchassévódake); ~amhi, 28,6. — 
| uggatodakain „the water thus sucked 
away", 27,3. — khirodakena (instr.) 
with milk-water, 36,35. 38,3 (khiro- 
daka-). — gandhodaka-, scented water, 
38,3. — dartidaka-, wood and water, 
20,12. — padodakam, water for wash- 
ing the feet, 83,5. — *mahódaka, mfn. 
abounding with water, deep, f. nikā 


| 
(Gaīgā) 1,16. — mukhodakam, water 


=== 


for rinsing the mouth, 82,18. — sakkha- 
rodaka-, sweet water, 38,3. — **-kila, 
f. 52,28 (g. v.). — %-dhārā, f. (= sa.) 
a gush or flow of water, pl. nā, 62,32. 
— *0.pariyanta, m. the edge of the water, 
loc. me, 4,2. — *-ppumāna, x. the 
altitude of the water, „am, 8,2. — 
*0_sappa, m. a water-snake, acc. ~M, 
52,28. — cp. odaka, vodaka, sa-uduka. 

udagga, mfn. (sa. udagra) !) 
high, elevated. °?) joyful, elated; m. 
0, 68,16 — °-citta, mfn. elated, acc. 
m. wat, 68,22. 

udapādi, v. uppajjati. 

udaya, m. (— sa.) rising, origin; 


4 


udara 


0-vyayath (acc.) origin and destruction, 
beginning and end, Dh, 113. 374. — 
cp. ñanodaya. 

udara, n. (== sa.) belly, stomach; 
acc. wath, 41,26; loc. ne, 1,24. 

udariya, x. (sa, udarya) the sto- 
mach; „am, 82,4 == 97,22. cp. 80- 
dariya. 

udàna, n. (= sa. fr. ud-yan) 
1) ‘breathing upwards’, heart’s joy, a 
song of joy, a solemn utterance; «om. 
eam, 65,12; acc. enm, 42,18. 64,13. 
66,19. — °-vasena, 42,11 (v. vasa). — 
2) nom. pr. of a buddhist canonical 
work, a part of 'navangam Satthu- 
sasanam’, 109,33 (gath’-udan’-itivut- 
takam). 

udáneti, vb. (sa. udanayati, de- 
nom. fr. udāna) to disclose (the joy 
of one’s heart); aor. 3. sg. „esi (udā- 
nam) 64,13. 66,19; — ger. netvi, 
42,18. . 
udāhu, adv, interr. (sa. uta & 
utiho) or (latin ‘an’, at the begin- 
ning of the second part of a double 
interrogation), 59,12 (without interr. 
particle at the first part); 98,1 (kin 
nu.. 
udāhu aiio). 

udireti, ob. (su. ud-Vir, caus.) 
to utter, speak; pot. 3. sg. «aye 
(giram saccath) Dh, 408. cp. ereti. 

udumbara, m. (sa. udumbara 
(udumbara)) name of a tree, Ficus 
Glomerata; ~o, 2,1; acc. eun, 1,26. 
— %rukkha, m. loc. we, 2,5. 

*Udumbarà, f. nom. pr. name 
of a queen, the mother of Mahosadha 
(Bodhisatta), 55,20 (~devi). 

udda, m. (sa. udra) a kind of 
aquatic animal, an otter; «o, 14,10; 
gen. ~wassa, 15,9. 

uddapa, m. (sa. udvapa ?) the 
foundation of a wall; %-ādīni (v. adi) 
91,18. — dalhuddapa, mfn. n. ~am 
(nagaram) 90,31 = thira-pākāra-pā- 
dam 91,20 (ep. dalha). ° 

uddisati, vb. (sa. ud-ydic) *) to 
show, point out, declare; pot. 1. sg. 
e,eyyam (kam ... „whom should I 


. udahu); 99,2 (so eva so, | 


50 


indicate (as my teacher)") Dh. 353. 
?)to explain, teach (cp. next). 
*uddisāpeti, vb. (caus. II. ud- 
disati) to cause to teach or give in- 
struction; ger. ~etabba, who is to be 
called upon to give instruction, m. 
m0, 84,6. — fut. etum, comp. ~etu- 
kama, mfn. wanting an occasion to 
give instruction, m. ~0, 84,6. 
| uddesa, m. (— sa.) !) illustration, 
enunciation, ?) region, place. — udde- 
| sika, mfn. (at the end of comp., cp. 
| sa. uddesaka) : soļasa-vass-uddesikā, 
f. about sixteen years of age, 86,23. 
uddham, adv. (sa. ūrdhvam) up- 
wards; ~ulloketva, 76,2. — uddham- 
| sota, mfn. (sa. Urdhva-srotas) whose 
stream of life tends upwards, m. «0, 
Dh. 218. 
uddhata, mfn. (= sa. fr. ud- 


| Vhan) lifted up; v. an-uddhata. 

uddhana, n. (sa. uddhàna, ud- 
dhiniina) an oven, a fireplace; V-an- 
taresu (loc. pl.) „into the oven“, 9,24 
| (cp. antara). 

uddharati, vb. (sa. ud-yhr) to 
take out or up, to lift up, gather; pull 
out, draw out, take away, remove 
| (acc.); imp. 2. pl. —ath(a) (attānam 
| duggi) Db. 327; — aor. 3. sg. ud- 


—Á— — — 


| dhārī (mai amkena) 20,5; — ger. 
| „itvā 14,23 (macche). 26,1. 34,6 (dā- 
rūni). 40,30. 44,26 (phalitam); — grd. 
| witabba, s. ~am (āsanam) 82,22. — 
| caus. v. next. 
| uddharàüpeti, vb. (caus. II. ud- 
| dharati) to raise, to cause to be pulled 
| up (out); ger. „etvā (mulani) 38,2. 
| uddhumayati, iios ud-ydhmà) 
| to swell; aor. 3. sg. wayi (galo) 18,11. 
| unnadati, vb. (sa. ud-Vnad) to 
| cry out, roar, make a noise; aor. 3. 
pl. „imsu, 8,24. — caus. v. next. 
*unnādeti, vb. (caus. unnadati) 
to cause to resound, echo, ring (acc.); 
ger. ~wetva (vanam) 34,26; — part. 
med. wayamiina, f. «à (devatà va- 
nam) 5,2. : 
*unnala, mfn. evildoing, arrogant, 
insolent (?); gen. pl. «nam (opp. 


fw 


51 


pamattaànam) Dh. 292 (cp. the 
expression ,akiccam pana kayirati“, | 
ib.). | 

: prp. (== sa.) prefixed to verbs | 
and nouns — near to, with (opp. apa). | 

upakaddhati, vb. (sa. upa-ykrsh) 
to draw towards; pr. 3. sg. „vati (ni- 
rayāya „leads to hell“) Dh. 311. 

upakarana, n. (= sd.) instru- 
ment, implement; pl. tunnavaya-upa- 
karanāni, the implements of a tailor, 
55,29. 

upakara, m. ( sa.) help, use; | 
bahūpakāra, mfn. very useful, m. <o | 
(sakuņo) 18,12; — nir-upakàra, mfn. ' 
useless, m. ~o (manusso) 35,29. 

*"upakülita. mfn. (fr. sa. *upa- : 
vkud (cp. yküt. kund)) half-burnt, : 
almost burnt up; m. ~o, 9,32. 

upakkama. m. (sa. upakrama) 
) beginning. *) mode of proceeding. ' 
3) treating, cure. *) intervention, coo- 
peration, influence, action. v. an- . 
upakkamena, parüpakkamena. 

upakkilesa, m. (sa. upaklega) | 
a bad (depraving) quality, depravity; : 
acc. pl. «e (cetaso) 91,7. 

upaga, mfn. (= sa.) approaching; 
m. pl. jati-jar’-tipaga (nara) under- 
going (again and again) birth and | 
decay, Dh. 341. | 

upagacchati, vb. (sa. upa-ygam) | 
to go near, to enter, approach (acc.); 
aor. 8. sg. ~gañchi, 40,15. 62,18; 
upāgami, v. upagacchati; — inf. | 
e.gantum, 8,22; — ger. upagamma; | 
an-upagamma, avoiding, 66,28 — 96,17; 
— pp. upagata, m. ~o (niddam, fell 
asleep) 65,2; an-upagato (ditthiga- | 
tini) has not adopted them, 93,33. — 
cp. upāgacchati. 

upaghata, m. (= sa.) stroke, 
violation, injury, damage; an-upa- 
ghāta, m. (g. v.). 

upaghatin, mfn. (== sa.) injuring; 
parüpaghatin, mfn. who strikes others, 

upacara, m. («= sd.) proceeding, 
practice, custom; m. ~o (sippassa, 
„it is the way of the craft) 55,7; acc. 


upatta 


eum karohi, „go through the usual 
custom“, 55,11. 
upacita, mfn. (= sa. pp. upa- 
cināti, upa-yci) heaped up, increased; 
n. wai (kammari) 76,6. 
*upaccagā, aor. 3. sg. (upati- 
gacchati) (sa. *upa -} ati-Vgà) = 
to escape, to pass, overcome (acc.); 
khano mà ~ „no moment should 
escape“ 108,6; sangam ~ („has over- 
come, subdued“) Dh. 412. 
upajjhāya, m. (sa. upādhyāyu) 
a teacher, preceptor; ~0, 82,23. 97,16; 
gen. e assa, 83,1; loc. wamlu, 82,16. 
upatthapeti & nāpeti. vb. caus. 
(sa. upa-ystha) !) to procure, provide 
(acc.); pot. 3. pl. „apeyyuri (bhisak- 
kam) 92,5; — ger. ~apetva (dhitim) 
41,27 („summoning his courage“); 23,4 


t. corrections. — *) to ordain (acc.); 


inf. ~apetum, 81,17; — grd. ~ape- 


. tabba, m. pl. «à (simanera) 81,14. 


upatthahati & upatthati 


| (-titthati), vb. (sa. upa-ysthā) to 


appear, to come near, to wait upon 
(ucc.); part. m. wtthahanto (Kosala- 


_rajanam) 38,22; — aor. 3. sg. upa- 
' tthasi, appeared as, 28,28. 65,11; — pp. 
. upatthita, m. pl. (tam, have come 


near to thee) Dh. 235. caus. v. above. 
*upatthāka, m. (ep. sa. upa- 
sthatar) a servant; acc. pl. ~e, 73,35. 


|! — %-kula, n. „am (Süriputtassa „a 
' family devoted to the service of S,*) 


81,11. 
upatthana, x. (sa. upasthina) 
attendance, waiting on, help, service; 
acc. wath kurumani, a waiting wo- 
man, 49,13; tesam „am gacchanto, 
in order to help them, 35,2; — instr. 
wena (kim me evarüpena ràjü<) 
„why should I serve such a king?“ 
25,11. — ii 
upatthāpeti, v. upatthapeti. 
upaddha, mfn. (sa. upàrdha, n.) 
half; m. ~o (loko) 90,22. cp. addha. 
upatitthati, v. upatthahati. 
upatta, mfn. (sa. upásta, up-Vas?) 
cast down, thrown down; v. haritu- 
patta. 


4* 


upaddava 


upaddava, m. (sa. upadrava) 
attack; misfortune, calamity; nom. 
.corupaddavo, attack from robbers, 
42,5 (cp. cora). — an-upaddava, mfn. 
uninjured, Db. 338 (g. v.) — nir- 
upaddava, mfn. without mishap, 25,20 


. v.). 

upadduta, mfn. (sa. upadruta, 
pp. upa-ydru) annoyed, oppressed; 
m. ~o (hatthihi) 35,11; s. xar vata 
bho! „how oppressive is it all“, 65,11. 
— an-upadduta, mfn. not oppressed, 
68,14 (g. v.). — cp. upaddava. 

upadhina, x. (== sa.) the act 
of placing upon; para-dukkh -üpadha- 
nena (instr.) „by causing pain to 
others^, Dh. 291. 

upadhareti, vb. (sa. caus. upa- 


52 


vdhr) to consider, regard; to reflect : 
or meditate on; pr. 1. sg. emi, 55,25; ` 


parl. m. ~ento, 86,29. 

upadhi, m. (= sa.) ‘adding, addi- 
tion’ (increase, substance ?); pl. pas- 
sions, affections (technically : the four 
upadhis, viz. khandha, kama, kilesa, 
kamma, cp. SBE, X 95, Note); pl. 
m~i, 105,29 (narassa nandana). — nir- 
upadhi, mfn. „free from all germs 
(of renewed life)“, acc. m. wim, Dh. 
418. 

upanayhati, vb. (sa. upa-ynah) 
to tie or bind to, to put on; pr. 3. pl. 
upanay(ī)hanti (ye tam ~) „who 
harbour such thoughts", Dh. 3—4. 

upanāmeti, vb. (sa. caus. upa- 
ynam) to reach, hand to; to offer, 
present; ger. „etvā, (tassa bherim) 
35,13; — part. gen. f. ~entiya (tassa) 
89,5; — grd. ~wetabba, m. «o, 83,13. 

upanikkhipati, vb. (sa. upa- 
nih-ykship) to throw, cast down; to 
place (down before), to procure; grd. 
««khipitabba, x. «am, 83,6. 

*upanibha, mfn. (sa. *upa -+ 
nibha, cp. saunibha) almost like; f. 
veluriya-vann-üpanibha (gīvā) re- 
sembling the colour of japis-lazuli, 
10,19. 

upanisa, f. (sa. upanishad) the 


! comp. 


thing; lābhūpanisa, mfn. (?) „leading 
to wealth“, f. nā (sc. patipada?) 
Dh. 75. 

*upanissaya, prp. (ger. sa. upa- 
ni-Veri) near to (acc.); Rājagahan 
`, 84,26. 

upanita-vaya,mfn. (sa. upanita 
(brought near, upa-y/nī) + vayas) 
whose life has come to an end; m. ~o, 
Dh. 237 (cp. vayas). 

upapajjati, vb. (sa. upa-ypad) 
to approach, obtain; to appear; to be 
produced, esp. to be born again; pr. 3. 
sg. eati, 94,11; 3. pl. „anti (w. ace. 
gabbham, nirayam), Dh. 126; 3. pl. 
med. upapajjare (nirayam) Dh. 307. 
— pp. upapanna, g. v. 

upapatti, f. (— sa.) appearing, 
the being born again; acc. «im (satta- 
nam) Dh. 419. 

upapanna, mfn. (= sa, pp. 
upapajjati) having approached, reached, 
obtained; acc. m. jàti-mant'-üpapan- 
nam (brahmanam) possessed of high 
birth and holy wisdom, 30,5. 

upama, mfn. (-— sa., at the end 
of comp.) like, resembling; aggi-sikh’- 
ūpama, m. <o (ayogulo) „like flaring 
fire“, 107,1 — Dh. 308; — indakhil’- 
üpama, Dh. 95; kumbh'-üpama. Dh. 
40; nagar'-üpama, Dh. 40; phen'- 
üpama, Dh. 46; rājarath'-ūpama, 
Dh. 171 (v. h.), cp. next. — 

upaimà, f. (= sa.) resemblance, 
comparison; a simile, example; acc. 
eam (te karissāmi) 90,29; attanaii 
~am katvā, supposing that it is your 
case, Dh. 129; — loc. ~ayam (bhāsi- 
tassa attham) 90,29. — At the end of 
: upama, mfn. (g. v.), cp. 
opamma. 

uparava, m. (= sa.) noise (or 
bustle); ~o (rājaūgaņe attatthaya) 
42,30. 

uparàjan, m. (= 8d.) a viceroy; 
nom, «à, 45,37. cp. oparajja, n. 

upari, indecl, (= $a.) !) prp. = 
above, over, upon, against; *) w. gen. 
aññassa <, 7,9; corarañño ~, 40,7; 


secret art of doing or obtaining some- | ^) w. loc. arakkhitthiya ~, 50,1;, 


e muddhani, 77,8. — °) adv, — further, 
moreover; 47 17. — 5) comp. 0-pāsāda- 
vara-tala- -gati, f. „having Dod 


to the roof of the palace", 64,12; c 
next & uparima, mfn. 
uparibhāga, m. (= sa.) the 


upper part or portion of something; 
loc. uparibhage (prp. w. gen.) = 
above, 13,23 (tassa ~), cp. uparima. 

*uparima, mfn. (fr. upari) upper- 
most, topmost; °-bhaga, m. == upari- 
bhāga; loc. (prp. w. gen.) ~e (raiiio) 
above, 40,25. 


upaladdhi, f. (sa. upalabdhi) 
supposition, false opinion; sattiipa- 


laddhi (g. v.) 91,13-32. 

upalabhati, vb. (sa. upa-ylabh) 
to find, to perceive; pass. upalabbhati, 
pr. 3. sg. „is to be found", 97,3. (u'üpa- 
labbhati) 97,7. — upaladdhi, f. (g. v.). 

upalitta, mfn. (sa. upalipta, pp. 
upa-ylip) besmeared, anointed; an- 
upalitta, «fn. (q. ».). 

upavana, (= sa.) a small 
forest, a grove, garden; ° -araññesu 
(loc. pl. dvandva-comp.) sin the parks 
and in the woods“, 73,314. 

upavisati, (or upåvisati) vb. (sa. 
upa-yviç) to sit down; aor. 3. sg. 
upāvisi (w. acc. rukkhamülam) 110,20. 

*upasamvasati, vb. (sa. *upa- 
sam-yvas) to live together with, to 
keep company with (acc.); pot. 2. sg. 
vase (Sükham) 7,33. 

upasamhita, mfn. (— sa., pp. 
upa-sam-ydhà) connected with, ace 
companied by; sacc-ūpasamhita, mfn. 
true, n. ~am, 9,31. 

upasagga, m., V. upassagga. 

upasamkamati, vb. (sa. upa- 
sarn-Vkram) to go to, come near, 
approach (acc.); pr. 3. ol. „anti, 
21,2; — pot. 1. sg. ~eyyam, 71,27; — 
aor. po 68,2; — inf. «itum, 8,19; — 
ger. ewitva, 6,14. 19,25; — pp. m. 
«kanto (idh’) 75,25. 

upasanta, mfn. (sa. upagānta, 
Dp. upa-Vçam, cp. upa-sammati) 
calm, tranquil; m. ~o, Dh. 201. 378; 
gen. «assa, Dh. 96. 


59 


4 


upahata 


upasama, m. (= sa.) becoming 
quiet, tranquillity of mind; gen. ~wassa, 
| Dh. 205; dat. ~āya (samvattati) 
| 66,29. 93,8; dukkh’-tipasama-, „guiet- 
ing of pain“, 107,20 == Dh. 191 (°-ga- 
minam maggam); nekkhamm'-üpa- 
same, /oc. ,in the repose of retirement 
(from this world)“, Dh. 181; vitakk’- 
üpasame, doc. „in quieting doubts“, 
Dh. 350; samkhār-ūpasamam, acc. 
cessation of existence, Dh. 368. 

*upasampadà, f. (fr. upa-sam- 
ypad) 1) taking, acquiring; Dh. 183. 
2) acquiring a priest’s order, ordination 
of a priest; 70,17. 97,16; acc. eam, 
70,15. — Jaddha-pabbajj’-fipasampada, 
mfn. having obtained admission to the 
order and ordination, m. 89,16 
(cp. pabbajja). 

upasammati, vb. (sa. upa-cam- 
yati, ycam) to become quiet; pr. 3. sg. 
evati, Dh. 4. (tes ūpasammati ~- tesari 
upa-?), Dh. 100; pp. upasanta (g. v.), 
cp. upasama. 

upasussati, vb. (sa. upa-ycush) 
to dry up (by degress); pot. 3. 8g. 

eye (n'üpa-?) 103,19. 

upasevati, vb. (sa. upa-ysev) 
to frequent, visit; to serve, worship; 
= have sexual intercourse with (acc.); 

. 3, sg. eati, (aiia) 9,28. 

2 mfn. (= sa.) serving, 
worshipping; devoted to, coveting; m. 
para-darfipasevi, „who covets his 
neighbours wife*, Dh. 309. 

upassagga, m. (= upasagga, 
$a. upasarga) an accident, misfortune; 
acc. eam (ear. upasaggaih) Dh. 139. 

upassattha, mfn. (sa. upasrshta, 
pp. upa-ysrj) afflicted, plagued; m. 
„am vata bho! „how stifling i is it all!“ 
65,12. 68,12. — an-upassattha, mfn. 
(q. v.). 

upahaiiünati, vb. pass. (sa. upa- 
Vhan, pass.) to be afflicted, oppressed; 
pr. 3. sg. eati (cittam) 97 36; Dp. v. 
ned. ° 

upahata, mfn. (sa. pp. upa-yhan) 
struck, beaten; injured, afflicted, pained; 
M. ~O (karso, „broken“), Dh, 134. 


~0, 


upahira 


upahara, m. (= sa.) !) receiving, 
acquiring. 7) offering; present, obla- 
tion; an-upahara, m. (g. v.). 

upagacchati, vb. (sa. upā-ygam) 
to come near, approach (acc.); to re- 
turn; aor. 3. sg. ~gañchi, 112,1; 
wgainl, 103,4. 112,24. 114,52; — pp. 
upāgata, m. ~O, „rushed at her", 
111,22. 

upādāna, n. (= sa.) 1) taking, 
grasping, clinging to existence, the 9th 
link of the paticcasamuppada (q. v.), 
originating with tanha, 66,9 (tanha- 
paccayū ~ar) and causing bhava 
(~paccaya bhavo, ib.). — pañe' upa- 
dāna-kkhandhā (m. pl.) „the fivefold 


clinging to existence“, 67,11 (v. khan- ' 
dha). — upādāna-nirodha, m. 66,16 | 
(cp. corrections), — upay’-upadana, | 


96,10-11 (q. v.). — *) fuel; tina-katth'- 
upādānarh (acc.), the fuel of grass 
and wood, 94,36. cp. mert. 
upādiyati, vb. (sa. upā-ydā) !) 
to take with, include, comprise. *) to 
grasp at, cling to the world; pr. 3. 89. 
wdiyati (upayupadanam, g. v.) 96,12; 
— part. med. upādiyāna, m. an-upa- 
diyàno, „caring for nothing^ Dh. 20 
(cp. SBE. X, 8.); — ger. upādāya 
[often used as prp. —- including, on 
account of, in comparison with, etc.]: 
an-upādāya, having become free from 
attachment, 69,23; Dh. 89 (rata), 414 


(nibbuto); anupadaya is sometimes | 


shortened to anupitda (adv.) == abso- 
lutely, completely, 94,12 (vimutto). 
[The passive form is upadiyati or 
upadiyyati, cp. adiyati. | 

upaya. m. (= sa.) means, expe- 
dient, way; ~o 1,10. 43,26; instr. 
wena, by some means or other, 25,35. 
26,16. 33,23 — eken’ upāyena, 4,1; 
iminā (eten’) upayena, by these means, 
55,8. 58,23; ten'eva (eten'eva) upā- 


54 


—— — M ——— -— —— À— —— —— —— — — —— — — —— sn i. A 5€ 


| 
x 


yena, in the same way, 2,24 23,3; 


yena tena upàyena, anyhow, at any 
prize, 1,9; an-upayena, „by ‘misguided 
means", 34,17-20. — *upāya-kusala, 
mfn. skilful, clever; m. ~o, 25,14. 40,16. 
— *upayupadana, x. (d£ m. pl.) seems 


to denote the coveting and grasping of 
(wordly. things), acc. warm (na upeti 
na upiidiyati) 96,11; upāyupādānā- 
bhinivesa-nibandho (adj. ayam loko 
yebhuyyena) 96,10 ə: (upon the whole 
this existence is only) a chain of cove- 
ting, grasping, and clinging to (the 
world), cp. abhinivesa. 

*upāyāsa, m. (cp. sa. āyāsa) 
despair; pl. (dvandva comp.) nā, 
66,11-17; instr. pl. ~ehi, 70,30. — sa- 
upayasa, mfn. coupled with despair, 
n. eum. 94,2. 

Upāli, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. of a 
thera; °-pandito (aggo vinaye) 109,7; 
acc. wim, 109,5; °%-thero satima, 
109,18. 

upāvi8i, v. upa-visati. 

upasaka, w. sa.) a faithful 
layman, a lay disciple of Buddha; voc. 
wa, 28,14; acc. ~am, 28,3. 69,20; pi. 
~à, 28,15. 

upāhanā, f. (sa. upanah) a shoe, 
sandal; acc. pl. ea, 82,17. 

upeta, mfn. (= sa.; pp. fr. next) 
who has arrived at, entered into; pos- 
sessed of, endowed with (w. acc. or 
instr. or at the end of comp.); m. «o 
(alasiyam, ,full of sloth“) Dh. 280; 
(damasaecena) Dh. 10 (opp. apeto); 
— piünupeta, mfn. lifelong, v. pana; 
vanna-gandha-ras upeta, mfn. endowed 
with beauty, odour, and flavour, m. 
e» 0 (ambo) 37,30; sabbakaravar'upeta, 
mfn., v. akara. š 

upeti, %b. (sa. upa-Vi) to go to, 
approach, enter into (acc.); abs. to fit 
the case; pr. 3. sg. ~eti (nirayam) 
74,1; (upàyupadanam) 96,12; (gab- 
bham, to the born) Dh. 325; na 
upeti, 94,14 (,it would not fit the 
case“); pr. 1, pl. ~ema (saranam tam, 
take refuge in thee) 105,24; — fut. 2. 
sg. upehisi (jatijaram) Dh. 238 += 
348; 1. sg. upessam (gabbhaseyyam) 
105,20; — ger. upecca, 110,80; — pp. 
upeta, g. v. (cp. upaya). 

uposatha, m. (sa. upavasatha) 
fast, fast-day; holy day, sabbath (oc- 
curring four times in the month), «o, 


— 
— 


14,17 = *%-divaso, 14,16; maha-°, 
22,20; punnamuposathadivaso, 22,19 
the fullmoon-holiday); acc. «am, 
22,20. *°-kamma, n. the fast-day ser- 
vice, nom, ace. eam, 14,13. 22,16. 
*O-afigani (pl) the holy day vows, 
61,7 (cp. Sp. Hardy, Eastern Mona- 
chism). 

*uposathika, mfn. (fr. uposatha) 
one who observes the sabbath, fasting; 
m. pl. wa, 14,18. 

uppajjati, vb, (sa. ut-ypad) to 
arise, originate, begin, appear; to be 
be produced, to be found; pr. 3. sg. 
e ali, 19,1 (yàva ~, until he appeared); 
25,52; 27,4 (saddo); 35,12 (me duk- 
kham, I am annoyed); 53,10 (me 
bhayam, I fear); 70,27 (-paccayā, 
from); 96,13; 99,2 (is born); part. 
med. ~mana, ». dukkham uppajja- 
manam uppajjati, whenever something 
arises, then it is pain that arises, 
96,13; aor. 3. sg. udapadi, 8,9. 68,26. 
78,31; uppajji, 25,21. 45,1. 78,21. 89,10; 
— ger. witva, having been produced, 
80,29; — pp. uppanna, g. v.; — caus. 
uppādeti, g. v. (cp. upapajjati & 
next). 

uppatati, vb. (sa. ut-ypat) to 
fly up, leap up; to rise, ascend; aor. 
3, sg. uppati (ākāse) 11,19; — ger. 
ewitva, 2,5-21. 21,36. 35,24; — pp. «ita. 
M. ~O, 3,20; acc. ~ari (kodham) 
106,38 = Dh. 222. 

uppatti, f. (sa. utpatti; fr. uppaj- 
jati) arising, origin; thanuppatti, g. v. 

uppada, m. v. uppada. 

uppanna, mfn. (pp. uppajjati, 
sa. utpanna) arisen, produced, born; 
M. ~O, 1,23. 2,80 (dohalo); 42,5 (coru- 
paddavo); 62,24 (putto); loc. m. we 
(lābhasakkāre) 72,28. 

uppala, n. (sa. utpala) a lotus- 
flower, esp. the blue lotus; ~am, Dh. 
55; niluppaládi-kusuma-, 47,13. 

*Uppalavanna, m. (sa. *Utpa- 
lavarna) nom. pr. of a deva in Sakka's 
heaven; gem. ~assa (devassa) 110,27. 

uppada, m. (sa. utpada) arising, 
appearance, coming into existence, 


55 


ubhayattha 


birth; <o (Buddhānam) Dh. 194; 
182 (metri causa: uppado); abl. nā 
(phalitass’) 44,1; — *uppada-vaya- 
dhammin, mfn. subjected to genesis 
and destruction, m. pl. «ino (sam- 
khārā) 80,5. — anuppādadhamma, 
mfn. (v. an-uppada. — Buddhuppāda, 
m. (q. v.). 

uppadeti, vb. (caus. uppajjati. 
sa. utpadayati) to give rise to, to con- 
ceive, feel; to bring forward, produce, 
obtain, gain (acc.); aor. 3. sg. „esi 
(ruciii tayi, „fixed her choice on you“) 
10,12; (visam satasahassai, „gained 
two millions“) 23,5; 57,9; (ruhiram, 
„made to bleed“) 76,1; 2. sg. «esi 
(id.) 76,4; — ger. ~wetva (dohalum. 
having conceived a longing for (/oc.)) 
1,6. 2,28; (karuññam, „felt compassion 
with“ (/oc.)) 16,31; (rucim pabbajjitya) 
64,2; (avannam Gotamassa, „bring- 
ing reproach on (G.*) 79,5; — pp. 
uppadita, 72. „am (ruhiram) 76,7; 
%dhanam (acc.), the money which he 
had earned, 57,35. 

ubbigga, mfn. (sa. udvigna; pp. 
ubbijjati, sa. ud-yvij) frightened, 
anxious; m. eO, 15,17; acc. ~at, 
15,18. 

*ubbedha. w. (cp. sa. udviddha, 
mfn. & vedha, m. depth) height; 
yojana-sahass'-ubbedha. mfn. 1000 
leagues high, m. ~o, 60,24. 

ubbhata, mfn. (sa. udbhrta, pp. 
ud-ybhr) carried away or out, drawn 


up; m. ~, (vārijo okamokata) Dh. 
34; pl. nā (maccha udakā thalam) 


15,14 (cp. uddharitvā, 14,23). 

ubbhijjati, vb. (pass. ubbhin- 
dati, sa. ud-ybhid) to break out, to 
sprout; ger. ubbhijja (titthati ,stands 
sprouting“ (latā)) Dh. 340. 

ubhaya, mfn. (-= sa.) both; instr. 
M. «ena (saūiiamena, on account of 
both sorts of abstinence 9: abstinence 
and non-abstinence) 85,19; n. „ari, 
adv. both, Dh. 404 (c’ubhayam); 
comp. ubhaya-nagara-vasinam (gem. 
pl.) 62,9. . 

ubhayattha, adv. (sa. ubhayatra) 


ubho 


in both places, in both cases; 107,26 
= Dh, 15—18. 

ubho, mfn. pl. (sa. ubhau) both; 
m. ubho pi, 5,12. 43,18; ubho pi te, 
74,2 == Dh. 306; ubho (gihī pabba- 
Jitu) Dh. 74; n. ubho „both sides", 
Dh. 269; acc. m. ubho (ante) 66,28 
== 96,17; ubho sangam (puiiiaü ca 
pāpaī ca) Dh. 412, cp. sanga (Tr. 


P. M. p. 82); ubho (attham anatthai | 


ca) Dh. 256; instr. m. ubhohi (hat- 


thehi) 27,19; gen. mn. ubbinnam, | 


43,29. 58,9; loc. mn. ubhosu (passesu) 
40,5. 
ummara, m (sa. umbara, cp. 


mahratt, umbarā) a threshold (cp. | 


indakhīla); Zoe. we, 65,15. 


ummujjati. vb. (sa. ud-Vma))) | 
to emerge; pr. 3, pl. „anti, 25,26, — | 
ummujja-nimujja, m(?) emerging and | 


diving; acc. „am karonti (udake) 
25,23 (cp. sa. unmrjūvamrjā). 


uyyati, vb. (sa. ud-Vy&) to go | 


out (away); imp. 2. sg. ~yahi (magga, 
make way!) 44,3-10. 

"uyyàna, n. (sa. udyana) a park, 
a (royal) garden; acc. wath, 6,17; 
gen. «388a, 37,18; loc. we, 6,4. 36,35; 
Makhadev’-ambavan’-°, 45,7. — 9-à- 
bhimukha, mfn. turned towards the 
garden, m. ~o, 68,6. — *-kila & 
-kīļikā, g. v. — pala, m. a garde- 
ner, ~0, 37,11; ace. eam, 37,8-17; 
gen. wassa, 37,14. — °-palaka, m. 
id. gen. „ass, 38,5. — *°-bhumi, 
f. the garden-ground, ace. ~it, 
63,2. 

uyyuijati, vb. (sa. ud-yyuj) to 
go away, depart, leave one's house 
and family; pr. 3. pl. „anti (traced 
only once) Dh. 91. — caus. uyyojeti 
(g. v.) cp. neat. 

. uyyoga, m. (sa. udyoga) depar- 
ture; ?-mukhe, at the threshold of 
death, Dh. 235 (cp. mukha). 

uyyojeti, vb. (caus. uyyuiijati, 
sa. udyojayati), to send away, to send 
out for some purpose, to take leave of 
(acc.); aor. 3. sg. „esi, 19,22. 51,1. 
59,22; — ger. ~wetva, 48,18. 


56 


ura & uras, m. (sa. uras, x.) the 
breast; loc. we, 23,31. 89,7. (cp. orasa.) 
uracchada, m. (sa. uragchada), 
a breastplate, armour; °-pasddhanam 
(g. v.) a splendid armour, 23,32. 
Uruvelà, f. (sa. Uruvitva) nom. 
pr. of a town in the Magadha country, 
| near the river Neraūjarā; loc. ~āyaih, 
| 66,2. 
. ulumpa, m. (sa. udupa) a raft, 
| a float; acc. eam, 23,18. 
| ulüka, m. (= sa.) an owl; <o, 
| 11,19; acc. nam, 11,2; gem. «assa, 
| 11,16. — "-Jātaka. m. 10,25 ff. 
| *ulloka, m. (fr. next) perceiving, 
| observing, sight; abl. nā pathamath, 
' as soon as it is seen, 84,18, 
| *ulloketi, vb. (sa. *ut + ylok) 
| to look at, look up; aor. J. sg. „esi 
 (ākāsam) 33,5; (Bhagavantam) 69,33; 
| — ger. ~etva (uddham) 76,2; — pp. 
eta, loc. abs. aküse ~e, 32,11. 
| usabha!, m. (sa. rshabha) a bull; 
! 0, 105,12-19; ace. ~am („the manly“) 
| Dh. 422. 
| *usabha?, 2, a certain measure 
of length 20 yatthi (q. v.), about 
70 meters; atthüsabha-matta, mfn., 
^. eam thanam, a space of eight 
usabhas, 27,27. (cp. yojana.) 
usira, ». (sa. ugira) the root of 
a fragrant grass (bīraņa, q. v.); *°- 
attha, mfn. wanting usira, m. ~O 
108,4 — Dh. 337. (ep. attha! (2)) 
usu, m(& f.) (sa. ishu) an arrow, 
— usu-kāra, m. (sa. ishu-kāra) an 
arrow-maker, a fletcher; ~o, Dh. 33; 
pl. wit, 106,27 — Dh. 80. 145. 
usuyyati, vb. denom. (sd, asuyati, 
fr. usūyā, usuyyà (= sa. asūyā) 
envy, jealousy) to envy, to be jealous; 
part. m. usuyyam, 14,4 (an-usuyyam, 
not envying). | 
*ussafikin, mfn. (fr. sa. ut + 
Vgamk) distrustful, anxious; m. <1, 
75,17; acc. «im, 75,18. 
*ussada, m. (probably fr. ut-/sad) 
1) abundance, swelling, tumor. ?) name 
of a certain hell; °-nirayo, 23,26. (cp. 
sa. ud-ychad £ next). 


— 


? 
. 


ussanna, mfn. (sa, utsanna, pp. 
ut-ysad) extensive, abundant; 7, ~am 
suvannam, „abundance of gold“) 26,9. 
A sa. ucchanna). 

ussava, m. (sa. utsava) feast, 
merriment; «o mahi, 112,15. 

ussahati, eb. (sa. ut-Vsah) to be 
able to, to dare, venture (w. inf.); 
to bear, endure; pr. 3. sg. «ati 50,3. 
81,17. 83,31. 

ussapeti, vb. (su. ucchrapayati, 
caus. ud-Veri) to raise, to lift up 
(acc.); ger. „etvā (sondam), 76,21. 

ussāreti, vb. (sa. ut-sarayati, 
caus. ut-Vsr) to cause to go away; 
ger. eetvà (caturangulam kannam 
eetvà civaram samharitabbam, the 
robe ought to be folded up so that 
a corner of four inches more is hang- 
ing over) 83,10 (cp. SBE. XIII, p. 156). 

ussisaka, x. (sa. ucchirshaka) 
a head-pillow, a bed’s head; loc, ne, 
41,16. 

ussuka, mfn. (sa, utsuka) zealous, 
desirous, eager for, longing for, greedy; 
loc, pl. mesu an-ussuka (pl) „free 
from greed among the greedy*, Dh. 
199; n. ~am (na Tathāgatassa hoti, 
T. does not care about it, lays no 
stress upon that) 91,3. (cp. ossukka.) 

*ussuta, mfn. == avassuta (g. v.). 
— an-ussuta, mfn. (q. v.). 


U. 


ūkā, f. (sa. yūkā) a louse; acc. 
pl. ~ā (vicinanti, rafifio sise, being 
about to louse the king's head) 46,26. 

üna, mfn. (= sa.) wanting, defi- 
cient, less than, minus (w. dxstr.); n. 
~am (dvihi ~am purisa-sahassam 
9: 998 men = 500 + 250 + 125 + 
62 + 31 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2, who 
had successively been killed by their 
comrades) 34,9; loc. pl. „esu (eken' 
ūnesu pafieasu attabhava-satesu, in 
500 existences but one) 17,7; comp. 
ekünavisati (q. v.). 


57 


eka 


ūmi, f. (& m.) (sa. ūrmi) a wave; 
loc. wiya uggatāya, when the wave 
rises, 27,3, 

Uru, mn. 
eumhi. 29,27. 

ūhaūūati, vb. (pass. ūhanati, 
ūhanti, sa. ud-yhan) to become de- 
stroyed, disordered, soiled; aor. 3. 89. 
mā viharo rajena uhaññi „in order 
that the vihāra may not become dusty*, 
84,23; — pp. tihata, destroyed, v. an- 
ühata (cp. (an-)uddhata). 


== sd.) the thigh; /oc. 


EK. 


eka, mfn. (num, & pron. indef. 
= sa.) !) one; n. wath, 56,15. 82,8 
(ekan); gen. eassa, 56,16; instr. m. 
vena, 81,11; eken’ ūnesu, 17,7 (v. 
una). — *) only, single, that one only; 
m. ~o (elako) 30,5; acc. wath (dham- 
mam) 106,11; (attanam, oneself only) 
107,4; gen. «assu (elakassa) 17,6; 
n. ace. eam (palitam) 46,27; — comp. 
ekāparādhar, 47, (v. aparadha); 
eka-panam, 27,23; eka-puttako, 23,6; 
eka-purisikii, f. (v. separately); eka- 
maccham pi na, not one single fish, 
4,35; eka-vacanena (instr.), lit. at 
the word once spoken o: directly, 
immediately, 57,31; — eka-ratti-vāsa, 
mfn. abiding for oue night, m. O, 
104,24; — eka-dvara, mfn. having 
only one gateway, ^. wart (nagarar) 
90,31. 91.22; — eka-samgahita, mfn. 
unified, m. pl. «à, 99,16. — *) united 
continual; comp. eka-pallankena (instr. 
v. pallankā) 66,4; eka-ppaharen’eva, 
with one blow, with one voice, 27,14. 
40,10. 74,6 (cp. pahara); eka-phāli- 
phullam, 62,11 (v. h.); eka-viravam, 
60,11. — *) the same, one and the same; 
eka-divase (/oc.) 45,24. — 5) alone, 
solitary; acc. m. ~am, 106,13 = Dh. 
395; gen? ~assa, Dh. 330; ekacara 
(g. v.). — 9) some (. . . or other), one 
or other, a certain; pl. some; m. ~O 


(upàyo) 1,10; (bako) 4,; (Vijayo) 


ekamsa l 58 


110,23; acc. „am (udumbarar) 1,26; | *ekatra, *ekatya, cp. Tr. PM, p. 56) 
instr. ~ena (eken’ upāyena) 46,24; | one of two, a single; pl. some (... 
loc, m. n. wasmit, 3,30. 8,20; ekas- | others); m. pl. we, 18,4 (vanija), 90,29 
mini samaye, once upon a time, 30,28 | (viññu purisā); repeated : 22,5-6; pl. 
= ekam samayari, 66,23; comp. eka- | f. mā, 65,5-1. 
divasam (acc.), one day, 6,31. 18,22; ekato, adv. (sa. ekatas) ') on the 
eka-bhikkhussa (gen.), 79,17; — pl. | one side (on the other side), 14,. 
m. eke, 77,12. 104,1. — 7) in the same | 27,4, — *) together; at once, simultane- 
sense used as an indefinite article — | ously; ~vasanta, 14,10; ~sannipatati, 
a, an; m. ~o (suthsumaro) 1,5; (di- | 14,12. 72,29; tena saddhim ~, 45,25; 
pako) 2,19; acc. ~am (assam) 65,16; | kena saddhim ~ hutva (by help of 
gen. f. ekissā, 6,32; comp. eka-pali- | whom?) 72,32; — tini pi ~ madditva, 
tam, 46,25; eka-migam (ace.) 6,19; | 57,28; vacayimsu potthakattayam <, 
eka-gandhakutiyarh (Joe 73,11. — 9) | 114,19. 
repeated or corresponding w. aiia or ekantam (& ekantena), adv. (sa. 
dutiya = the one... the other; m. | ekāntam) absolutely, exclusively, at 
eko...eko, 33,24-95; instr. ekena... | any rate, always; ~ nindito, Dh. 228. 
ekena, 83,17; comp. eka-divasam ... | (cp. ekamsena.) 
eka-divasath, 6,25-26; gen. ekassa... *eka-purisikā, f. (adj.) (fr. eka 
aññassa, 7,9; eko... dutiyo (anto) | -} purisa) true to one man; acc. ~am, 
96,16. (cp. an-eka, ekamsa etc.) | 48,15; instr. ~āya (itthiyā), 48,25. 
ekamsa, ') mfn. (sa. ekiunga) *ekamantam, adv. (fr. eka + 
‘with one shoulder, belonging to one | anta) on one side, apart, aside; by 
shoulder’, only constructed with ci- | one's side, near; < nisidi, 28,11. 35,5. 
vara or uttarüsanga, acc. m. ~am | 68,17; ^ thatva, 49,7; ~ atthasi, 
uttaràsangam karitvi, arranging the | 87,31; ~ karitva (acc. laid aside) 75,20; 
upper robe over one shoulder, 74,19. | ~ nikkhipitabbam (civaram) 83,29. 
82,18. — *) m. (sa. ekārnsa) one part, *ekarajja, v. (sa. *eka + rājya) 
totality (?); nom. ~o (tava jivitam | sole sovereignty; instr. «ena, Dh. 
„only one part of thee is life“ (Fsd.), | 178. 
but perhaps we have to read ekathse *ekavāciya, n. (sa. *eka + vā- 
(adv.)) 103,6; instr. ekamsena, adv. | cya) a single remark or objection, 
(& loe. ekamse, adv.) = in whole, | private opinion; acc. ~am, 11,11. 
upon the whole, entirely, totally, ab- | ekavaram. adv. (= sa.) once; 
solutely, undoubtedly, inevitably, 6,24. | 50,16 (cp. vāra). 
| 
| 
| 
x 
| 
| 
x 


— - 


86,3 (cp. ansa). ekavisam & ekavisati, num. 
ekaka, mfn. (== sa.) single, alone, | (sa. eka-vimgat[i]) twenty. — ekavi- 
solitary; m. ~o va (quite alone) 33,31; | satima, mfn. (sa. ekavimqatama) the 
acc. m. eam, 22,28; acc. f. ekikam, | 21th; m. ~o (vaggo) Dh. 305. 
31,20. *ekasadisa, mfn. (sa. *eka + 
*ekaghana, mfn. (su. *eka + | sadrga) fully alike or resembling, 
ghana) compact, solid, hard; m. ~o | identical; pl. ~ā (mataputta) 49,s. 
(selo) 106,29 — Dh. 81. *ekaseyyā, f. (sa. *eka + cayya) 
- ekacara, mfn. (= sa.) wandering | lying, sleeping alone; acc. (adv.) ~am 
or living alone, solitary; m. ~o, 2,19; | (eko caram) Dh. 305. 
ace, mam, Dh. 37. ekādasa, num. (sa. ekadaca) 
*ekacariyā, f. (sa. *eka + car- | eleven. — ekadasama, mfn. (sa. ekà- 
ya) walking alone; acc. ~arn, Dh. | dagama) the eleventh; m. ~o (vaggo) 
61 (metri causa read : ekacaryam). Dh. 156. ` 
ekacca, mfn. (fr. sa. ekatara, | ekāyana, n. (== sa.) & narrow 


ct 
ee 


ettha 


way, the only way to salvation; mfn. 
leading to salvation, m. ~o (maggo) 
113,19. x 
*ekāsana, ^. (sa. *eka + āsana) 
sitting, living alone; acc. (adv.) „am 
(eko caram) Dh. 305. 
ekāha, n. (sa. ekaha[n]) one day, 
v. aha; mfn. lasting one day, n. ~am 
(jīvitam) Db. 110. 
ekikā, f. v. ekaka. 
ekünavisati, wwm. (sa. ekona- 
vimgati) nineteen, — ekunavisatima, 
mfn. the 19th, m. ~o (vaggo) Dh. | return; pr. 3. sg. eti (w. acc. catu- 
212. | bhagath, is worth) Dh, 108; (pativa- 
ekeka, mfn. (sa. ekaika) one by ! tan) Dh. 54; 1. sg. emi, 108,28; J. 
one, several, each; acc, ~am, 4,8-24; : pl. enti (return) 56,18; — imp. 2. sy. 
t. loc. ~am (amhesu) 4,11. ; ehi, 1,19. 9,21. 57,31. 68,14. 108,28; 2. 
ekekaso, adv, (sa. ekaikacas) | pl. etha, 21,30. 73,21; Dh. 171; — 
one by one, severally, 111,14. | fut. 3. sg. essati. 56,20; Dh. 369; 
*ejā, f. (fr. yej) lust, desire, | ehiti, 12,6; 2. sg. essasi, 56,20; ehisi, 
craving; an-eja, mfn. (g. v.). | Dh. 236. 369; 7. sg. essāmi, 56,20; 
etam, pron. demonstr. n. nom, acc. | 3. pl. essanti, Dh. 86; — part. enta, 
(sa. etad), 8,27 etc.; etan, 1,21. 16,11; | Joc. abs. ente (udake), 56,21; an-ente, 
| 
x 
| 
| 


parihare, 103,33; — ete te ubho ante, 
96,7. — es& ya rati, 47,7. — ep. 
ayam (idam), enar. 

etarahi, adv. (sa. etarhi) now, 
at present; 29,30. 30,21. 56,11 (opp. 
atītānāgate, cp. Dh. 228), 94,23. 99.5. 
— cp. tarahi, carahi. 

etādisa, mfn. (sa. etiidrga) such, 
of this kind; m. ~o, 44,3. 80,24. 85,20. 
cp. tūdisa. 

eti, vb. (sa. ā-,/1) to go, to come, 
go to, reach (acc.); to come back, 


==: — — — — € —— — —HáÀ A S U U. w MÀ €— Ó— 


etad (the original form, used in some | ib. — cp. yiiti. 

cases of Sandhi before a word begin- etta, mfn. v. ettaka. 

ning with a vowel) 3,3, 23,» 64,19 *ettaka, mfn. (fr. *etāvataka, 
(etad-ahosi), 68,13 (etad-avoca), 103,12 | cp. sa. iyattaka, "Tr. PM. p. 80) so 
(etad-abravi) Dh. 390; — m. esa ' great, so much; pl. so many; acc. m. 
(sa. eshas) 1,8. 3,14; 5,1 etc. eso (with | „am (kalah, all this time) 46,32; 
more emphasis) 59,2; 114,6; — f. esā | (allapasallüpam) 56,28; n. ette 
(sa. esha) 31,6. 87,28. 103,51; — acc. | (contracted fr. ettakari) Dh. 196 
m(f.) etam, 24,21 ete.; — instr. m(n.) | (im' ettam pufitiamh); instr. n. „enāpi, 
etena, 4,21. 33,11 (eten’); — gen. (dat.) | notwithstanding this, 39,4; pl. m. nā 
m(n.) etassa, 1,7. 11,5; f. etissā, 55,5; | (tumhe, all of you) 88,25; (pina) 
— pl. n. etāni, 2,1; pl. m. (nom. acc.) | 90,55; instr. n. wehi (ratanehi) 27,29; 


ete, 3,26. 5,9 etc.; f. eta, 21,31; — ` gen. m. —anan (all these) 10,12. 30,5. 
gen. (dat.) etesam, 7,17. 60,15. 102,6; | 54,14. cp. neat. 
— instr. (abl.) etehi, 2,10. Otherwise | *ettāvatii, adv. (fr.etta = ettaka, 


the declension is that of tam (g. v.). | cp. kittaka & kittāvatā) thus, so far, 
— 1)this, this here (what is nearest | to that extent; ~ sammāditthi hoti, 
to the speaker) 33,11. — *) referring | 96,15. 

to the preceeding, 66,18. 103,31. 107,21. | — *etto, adv. (fr. etam, through 
— 5) referring to the following, 3,26. | *etato ? cp. ito, tato) from thence, 
23,3. — *) = such, like that, 31,5; | hence; over there; 104,15; 87,28; 5,5 
no h'etam „not so“, 70,2. — 5) com- | (opp. ito). 

bined w. other pron. (with an empha- |  ettha, adv. (sa. atra > "attha, 
, Bis) : es'&harh, 69,19; sometimes plainly | phoneticaily influenced by etam, cp. 
constructed with the 2. pers. of the | etta etc. above) !) here, in this place; 
verb. esa te sīsam chinditva bhü- | 85,29. 88,29 — Dh, 174 (in this 
miyath khipissāmi, 5,12; esa muiijam | world); 104,1 (~ pagalha o: saūgāme; 


etha 60 


Fausbøll, SBE, X? p. 70 : plunged 
into this world ?); etth'eva — this 
very moment, 46,3. 56,25. — ?) there, 
in that place; 3,5-12-32. 65,14. 112,24; 
ettha ce te mano atthi, 72,21 (ettha 
refers both to yarn vadanti and to 
ye vadanti : if your mind inclines to 
that about which people say ,it is 
mine“, or to those who say so, then 
you shall not escape me). — *) there, 
to that place; 2,3 (~ nehi mam). — 
*)in this case, in this matter, in that 
particular; 37,7. 73,7. 79,30. 91,1. 94,21. 
96,15. — If attha — atra can be traced 
in the Pali texts (it is found in Abhi- 


and consequently to be rendered diffe- 
rently according to its different construc- 
tions). Besides eva we find also the 
forms yeva and fieva, but their use 
in the texts is not strictly conformable 
to phonetical principles. 1) eva: phala- 
phalam tam eva (those fruits) 2,7; 
sariram eva (it is true) 2,8; attano 
„.. eva (his own) 2,15; iigacchantam 
eva (as soon as) 2,31; ten’eva (the 
; same) 2,4; eten'eva, 23,2; so eva 
(id. opp. aiio) 99,2; tass'eva, 11,25 
(id.); tass'eva (to him alone) 37,18; 
tath'eva (likewise) 2,25. 105,28; tatth’- 
eva (on that very spot, that very 
dhüna), then we could possibly take ; moment) 3,6. 9,3 e/c.; aham eva (just 
"tha in the phrase: kaya nu'ttha | 1) 29,19. 51,5; imam eva (id.) 65,20; 
bhikkhave etarahi kathaya sanni- | ‘ti... eva (just therefore) 47,4; ekam 
sinnā in the sense of „here“; but | eva (only) 12,9; gunakatham eva 
attha is more likely pr. 2. pl. of the : (¢d.) 43,7, cp. 49,1; ujjhayath'eva 
verb atthi (q. v.) 29,30. 31,23. (id.) 88,26; kocid-eva (only few) 88,34, 
etha, imp. 2. pl. v. eti. but 99,17 („ganz beliebig“); yen’ eva 
edhati, vb. (sa. Vedh) to prosper, | (by which verily) 96,27; ajj' eva (this 
to succeed in; pr. 3. sg. „ati (su- | very day) 65,13; atth' eva kahapane 
khari) Dh. 193; w. instr. (nikatyā | (again, as before) 24,33, cp. 86,25-27 
sukham ~) 5,2. (constantly); — but, on the contrary : 
enam, pron. demonstr. (su. ena, | 96,13-15; 74,30 (Sariputta-Moggalla- 
substituted for etam as nari (q. v.) | nóva); eva... pana («ér—de) 88,29-23. 
for tari) this, that, it; acc. m. tam | These examples, indiscriminately cho- 
enam („the same“, that person in | sen, may easily be increased by others, 
question) 100,12; acc. f. tam ena | — *) yeva, most frequently after words 
(metri causa for enam) 47,21; acc. x. | ending with palatal vowels (e, i, 1), 
enam, Dh. 118. 313. but also often after m and even after 
enta, mfn. (part.) v. eti. | &, 0, u. *)after e: 14. 7,16. 9,3, 12,8 
Erāvaņa, m. nom, pr. (sa. Airā- | etc. P) after i (1) : 81,26. 39,7. 86,2; 55,20. 
vana) name of Sakka's elephant; °-pa- | €) after m : 10,21. 17,16-21. 23,20. 28,23. 
tibhaga, mfn. equal to E., gen. wassa, | etc. 9) after a: 21,12. 43,25. 48,2. 
45,30. | 9) after o : 43,15 50,81. 88,17. 97,50. 
ereti, vb. (= īreti, caus. yir, sa. | f) after u: 22,7. — ?) fieva, only after 
lrayati) to move, to raise one's voice; | words ending with rh, which often, 
pr. 2. Sg. «esi (sace n'eresi attanam) | through assimilation, is altered to ñ : 
Dh. 134 (cp. Tr. PM. p. 76; Morris, | tvam fieva, 28,14. 54,32. 77,6; itthi- 
JPTS. '87. p. 146). nam iieva, 48,33; passantanam iieva, 
elaka, m. (sa. edaka) a ram, a | 54,14; tañ fieva, 5,10; tasmiū fieva, 
goat; ~o, 16,27. 29,26; voc. wa, 17,13; | 45,14; ahaū ieva, 99,16. — *) After 
acc, ~am, 16,24; instr. ~ena, 17,19; | long vowels eva is very often (by eli- 
gen. pl. —anam, 29,24 (cpe menda). | sion of e) shortened to va (v. h.). — 
eva, indecl. (== sa.) just, even, | 5) eva- as the first part of comp. °-rupa, 
only (mostly used to strengthen or | mfn. (g. v.), identical with evar (v. 
limit the idea of a preceeding word | next). 


sa ——T r — 


evam, adv. (= sa.) thus, in this | 


way; *) thus (as follows): 1,13. 3,15 
(evam aha); 66,23. 93,21 fevam me 
sutam „thus I have heard“); — ») thus 
(as mentioned before): 3,25. 4,29. 6,28. 
7,16 etc.; evam hoti, 66,1; evan 
passam, 71,4; yadi evam (if so) 5,15; 
evar jānāhi („thus I declare thee“) 
72,23; evar bhante (yes) 76,11; evam 
eva (even so) 91,3. 68,25 (corresp. w. 
seyyathā); na evam (not so, corresp. 
w. yathā) 62,26; evam ete (only in 
this way and only those) 91,8; evarh 
= therefore, referring to a prec. part. 
denoting the cause (adinavam sam- 
passamāno, because you consider it 
dangerous) 93,32. 

*evam-gotta, mfn. (sa. *evaii 
+ gotra) belonging to that family; 
m. ~0, 92,12. 

evam-nàma, mfn. (sa. evam- 
niiman) having that name; m. ~, 
92,12. 

*evam-ditthi, mfn. (sa. *evai 
-- drshti) having that view; m. ni, 
93,21-21. 

evarupa, mfn. (sa. evamrüvoa) 
1) such, like that; 2. eam 51,28; mà 
eam karittha („do not do the like 
again“) 39,2; (mukham) 11,6; (pa- 
pakammam) 51,7; abl. wii, 16,28; 
loc. m. we, 41,35; instr. f. waya rat- 
tiyā (in the dead of night) 41,28; 
loc. f. ~wayath (parisayam) 87,25, — 
?) of such a form, beauty or virtue; 
m. ~o, (mānavo) 19,11; acc. ~am 
(mātugāmam) 51,20; ~am (attabha- 
vam, ,such a handsome figure“) 
64,16. 

esa, pron. (sa. esha) this; m. esa 
& eso, f. esa, v. etam. 

esati, vb. (sa. ü-yish) to seek, 
search, to strive to obtain; part. m. 
med. esino (sukham) Dh. 131. 132. 
cp. gavesati, gavesaka £ next. 

esin, mfn. (sa. eshin) seeking, 
desiring; v. dhanesin, sukhesin; cp. 
gavesin d£ prec. 

 essati, fut. v. eti. 

ehi, ehiti, etc. v. eti. 


61 


| 
| 
x 


OQ. 


o, indecl. — ava (g. v.). 

oka!, n. (sa. oka, m. & okas, m.) 
house, dwelling-place, home, asylum; 
abl. ~a, Dh. 87; repeated : okam- 
okam (ace.) jahanti, „they leave their 
house and home*, Dh. 91 (cp. next). 
— an-oka, q. v. 

oka?, n. (contracted fr. udaka or 
odaka, g. v.) water; okamokata 
ubbhato (vārijo) o: oka-m-okato, 
with m inserted, abl. „from his watery 
house“, Dh. 34 (cp. oka’). 

*okara, m. (fr. ava-y/kr) ep. sa. 
apakara) 'worthlessness; ace. ~ai 
(kamana „the vanity of desires“ 
68,20. cp. vokāra. 
okisa (or avakāsa), m. (sa. ava- 
kaca) 1) place, room; acc. ~am (dehi, 
give place) 43,21; loc. ~e, (amukas- 
mii at such and such a place) 75,6; 
yumh' okāse (...tattha) 108,26. — 
2) occassion, opportunity, permission; 
ace. eam (dento) 40,17; „ari (la- 
bhati) 87,19; Joc. abs. ~e laddhe, 
87,20; — katokāsa, mfn. having got 
the opportunity or one's permission; 
m. pl. «à (maya, ,you have my 
leave“) 49,34; — hatāvakāsa, mfn. 
(g. v.) cp. an-avakasa, nir-okāsa, 
okkamati, eb. (sa. ava-ykram) 
to go down, to descend, to enter into; 
aor. 3. sg. okkami (niddam, fell as- 
leep) 35,28; niddit okkami (Yasassa) 
id. 67,96; — part. f. med. ~mana 
(niddam) 61,9; — ger. ~itvā (id.) 
22,25; — pp. okkanta : an-okkanta- 
mattain, acc. m. adj. (before he has 
passed (the boundary ofthe kingdom, 
rajja-simam)) 39,15. 
ogadha, mfn. (= ogalha, sa. 
avagādha, fr. ava-ygāl, confounded 
with ygādh?) immersed, plunged into; 
antogadha (g. v.) % amatogadha 
(v. a-mata). 

ogha, m. (= sa.) stream, torrent, 
ood; <o, Dh. 25. acc. wath (vineyya 
„having overcome the torrent of pas- 
sions“) 104,30; — *°-tinna, mfn, „saved 


ojita 62 
from the flood", m. ~o, Dh. 370; — 
mahogha, m. (sa. mahaugha, mfn.) 
a mighty flood, inundation; ~o, Dh. 
47. 287; acc. ~am, 35.19; "-sadisa, 
mfn. like a mighty flood, loc. m. «e 
(labhasakkare) 72,27. 

Ojita, mfn. (sa. ava-jita, pp. ava- 
yji) won, conquered, recovered; *oji- 
tatta, mfn. (fr. attan) whose life is 
secured, instr. ~ena, 55,2. cp. ava- 
Jīyati. 

ottha, m. (sa. oshtha) a lip (or 
jaw); loc. adharotthe ca uttarotthe 
ca (between his lower and upper jaw) 
13,19; — *vathkottha, mfn. (cp. sa. 
vakroshthi) „whose jaw is wrenched“ 
m. ~0, 54,20 (v. vaka). 

*oddeti, vb. (fr. ava- or ud- + 
Vdā (to bind) or ydhā?) to set up, 
arrange (as snares cíc.); ger. „etvā 
(pāsarh) having laid a snare, 11,2. 

onamati (or onamati) vb. (sa. 
ava-ynam) to bow down, bend down; 
ger. witva, 62,18. 

otata, mfn. (sa. avatata, pp. ava- 
Vtan) overspread, covered; māluvā 
salam ivotatar (acc. m.) yas a 
creeper (does with) the tree which it 
surrounds” Dh. 162. 

otarati, vb. (sa. ava-ytr) to de- 
scend (from : abl., upon : acc. or loc.); 
aor, 3. sg. otari (rukkhā) 12,32; 
(ukkārabhūmiyarii, Joc.) 18,31; (nadim) | 
28,6; (pāsādatalato) 65,34; — part. | 
m. wanto, 62,97; — ger. nitvā (saram) | 
5,16; — pp. otinna, m. pl. «à (nā- 
vaya bhumii) „landed“, 112,27; — 
caus. otāreti (g. v.) cp. otāra. 

otāpeti, vb. caus. (sa. ava-ytap) 
to dry, evaporate (as clothes); grd.. 
wetabba, n. «am (civarat) 83,8. 

otara, m. (sa. avatiira) ‘descent, 
point of attack (for temptations)’, 
offence, fault; acc. ~am, 104,12. 

otūreti, vb. (caus. otarati) 1) ‘to 
cause to descend', take down, set down 
(acc.); imp. 2. pl. ~etha, 41,33; — 
aor. 8. sg. cesi, 56,24; — ger. wetva, 
8,17, 33,33. 40,6. — ?) to lay down, 
expose, explain; aor. 3, sg. resi 


| 


—— U M — — — —— — À —— —— —— — —MÀ -— TU 


KC 


(sakam matam) 113,12; — imp. 2. sg. 
„ehi (sakath vadath) 113,14. 

*ottappa, n. (fr. apa-ytrap, sa. 
*apatrapya > apatrapa (Tr.); this 
etymology must be preferred to that 
of Childers : *auttapya > uttapa, 
ut + tap) tact, decency (in behavi- 
our), conscientiousness; «am (bahi- 
ddhasamutthanam, g. v.) 10,17. — 
hirottappa, x. & bhinnahirottappa, 
mfn. v. hiri; cp. SBE. XI. p. 8 & 
Dhamma-Sangani, transl. by Caroline 
Rhys Davids, p. 20. 

ottharati, vb., & otthata, pp. 
v. avattharati. | 

odaka, x. (= udaka, sa. audaka, 
odaka, mfn.) water; „ari (sitam) 
15,5. — an-odaka, mfn. (g. v.). — 
khīrodaka, gandhodaka, efc. v. udaka. 

odana, m. ( n.) (= sa.) rice, 
boiled rice; pakkodana, mfn. one who 
has his rice boiled, m. ~o, 104,21 
(cp. pakka). Suddhodana, nom. pr. 
. 9.). 
onaddha, mfn. (pp. ava-ynah, 
sa. avanaddha) covered, enveloped, 
surrounded; m. pl. mā, 37,21 (sā- 
khāhi sākhā), Db. 146 (andbakār- 
ena). 

opamma, ^. (fr. upamā, sa, au- 
pamya) a simile, an example; acc. 
~am (karohi „give an illustration*) 
99,3; panditabhavassa °-attham, in 
order to give an example of prudence, 
91,24. 

oparajja, m. (fr. uparajan, sa. 
*auparājya) viceroyalty; acc. wath 
(katvā, ruling as viceroy) 44,21. 

opayika, mfn. v. tad-ūpika. 

*opāteti, vb. (fr. ava-ypat) ‘to 
throw down’, to mterpose, insert; na 
... bhanamanassa antarantarā kathā 
opatetabba (grd. f.) let him not be 
interrupted, 83,4. i 

*opunāti, vb. (== avāpurati, fr. 
sa. apü-yvr (?) but probably con- 
founded with ypū) to uncover, Jay. 
bare (? opp. chādeti) or to scatter, 
disperse; pr. 3. sg. „vāti (paresam 
vajjani ~ yatha bhusam, the faults 


63 ovadati 


of others like chaff) 106,17 — Dh. 252. | *orima, mfn. (fr. ora) being on 
cp. Tr. PM. p. 63; Childers, JRAS. | this side (nearest to the subject); 
1871; Morris, JPTS. '87. p. 153; į "tīrato, abl. from this bank (of the 
avapurapeti & āvuņāti above. | river) 2,21 (v. tīra). 
obhagga, mfn. (sa. avabhagna,: oruyha, ger. & oropeti, caus. 
pp. ava-\/bhaiij) broken, bent down; | v. next. 
V-sarira, mfn. 63,9 (acc. m. wath). | — orohati, vb. (su. ava-yruh) to 
obhàsa, m. (sa. avabhasa) splen- | descend (from abl.); pr. 3. sg. ati 
dour, radiance; acc. arh (muiicanto) | (pasada) 67,21; ger. itvā (enūkamā 
26,4. | „left*) 68,10; (suvannapadukahi „put 
obhasati, vb. (sa. ava-ybhās) | off?) 68,16; oruyha (tato) 6148. — 
1) to shine forth, to gleam; part. m. | caus. IL, oropoti (sa. avaropayati) 
acc, ~antam, 26,12; part. med. ~ma- | to let down, to put away; ger. „etvā 
nam (samuddam) 26,18. — °?) to light | (sondam) 76,35. 
up, illuminate (acc.); pr. 3. sg. med. olambati, vb. (sa. ava-ylamb) 
wate (sabba disi) 85,4 =- caus, to hang down, to be suspended, to 
obhaseti, 85,8. . hang (on, loc); pr. 3. pl. «anti 
*obhoga, m. (fr. ava-ybhuj, ' (udumbare) 2,2; part. n. ~antam 
*avabhoga) a curve or fold, the part , (se. hadayam) 2,4. 
of a cloth where it is folded (perhaps | — *olürika. mfn. (fr. ulàra. sa. 
the inner side of the fold, opp. bhoga); . udāra, *audārika) large, gross; mate- 
loc. we, 83,11. cp. Morris, Academy ; rial, corporeal (of a rather consi- 
1882 (July 8. p. 33) and SBE. XIII, | derable greatness ?); m. pl. nā (pana) 
p. 156. 9141. 
omasati, eb. (sa. ava-Vmrç) to *olubbha, ger. (sa. *avalabhya, 
touch; to prick, pierce; to gnaw off, ; Ylabh, but pr. olubbhati (a younger 
gnaw all over (eating only a little); ; formation) agrees with ava-ylubh) 
pr. 3. sg. „anti (gàvo bahutinassa | clutching, taking hold of, leaning on 
varam .varam) 51,33; = khādanti, | (w. ace. or loc.) : ivata-mukhavatti- 
52,3. yam ~, 40,28. cp. Morris, JPTS. 
omuūcati, vb. (sa. ava-ymuc) | '87. p. 156. 
to loosen, take off (acc.); ger. witva oloketi, vb. (sa. ava-ylok) to 
(muttaharam) 64,25; (upāhanā) 82,17. | look; . to look at, regard, observe, 
ora-, (sa. avara, fr. ava) ‘inferior’, ; watch; to look for, search for (w. 
on this side; v. orapāram, orima £ | acc.); part. med. ~ento, 6,18. 12,25. 
next, 87,26; 54,5. 86,28 (lokam, observing 
orato, adv. (sa. avaratas) on this , the world); 33,29 (waiting for); 36,5 
side (turned towards the subject); 2,22 ; (olokento tam disvā); f. ~enti, 10,9; 
(w. gen. dipakassa); 21,16 (opp. pa- ! pl. loc. m. „entesu (tumhesu) 50,12; 
rato); 83,21 (opp. pārato). | part, med. pl. ~ayamānā, 11,2; — 
*oraparam, adv, (fr. sa. avara | pot. 2. pl. ~weyyiitha, 9,13; — fut. 1. 
+ pāra) from one side to the other; | sg. ~essami, 46,1; — aor. 3. sg. vesi, 
108,26. This word is acc. of the | 19,14. 87,24; — ger. wetva, 3,1. 14,16. 
dvandva-comp. ora-para, n. == this | 42,10. 65,31; — pp. ~ita, m. pl. ~ita, 


and the further shore, and consequently | 11,7; °-akarenéva, 87,25 (v. akira); 
it means „to both shores“ o: to and | 9-saüüanenéva, 87,32 (v. saññana). 
fro (cp. aparaparam, v. apara). 'ovadati, vb. (sa. ava-yvad) to 
orasa, mfn. (sa. aurasa, fr. uras) | exhort, admonish (acc.); pr. 2. sg. 
own, produced by one's self, legitimate; | „asi (mam) 9,25; — part. m. «anto 


acc. m. ~ar (puttam) 20,25. (attānam) 46,31; f. „antī (cp. cor- 


ovāda 64 


rections) 7,32; — pot. 3. sg. ~eyya, c "AE 
Dh. 77; — aor. 3. sg. ovadi, 40,8; I 
— inf. aitu, 81,17; — ger. nitvā, ka-, base of pron. interr. m. ko, 
8,11; — grd. m. „«itabbo, 19,15. f. ka ete. v. kim. 
ovada, m. (Sa. avavüda) instruc- kamsa, m(d n.) (sa. kaisa & 


tion, admonition; nom. ~o (Bodhi- | kathsya) a basin made of bell-metal 
sattato laddha-®) 8,11; acc. ~ar | and used like a drum or gong; ~o 
dadamano, 12,33; ~am datva, 7,28. | (upahato) Dh. 134. 


44,13; mar dento, 85,24; — ovāda- kakkataka, m. (sa. karkataka) 
vasena »by way of admonition“, 14,13; | a crab; <o, 4,25; voc. wa, 4,26; abl, 
— rājovāda-jātaka. 42,20. 8, 5,23. 

osakkati, vb. (sa. apa-Vsrp) to kakkasa, mfn. (sa. karkaga) 
draw back, give way; to go back == | rough, harsh, cruel, violent; a-kakkasa, 
to be reduced; pr. 3. sg. māti (metri | mfn. (g. v.). 
causa : avasakkati, read : osakkati) "kakkareti, vb. (caus. sa. khāt- 


80,13; — part. acc. m. —antam, 30,4; | ykr, cp. kāt- -Vkr) to cough up, hawk 

part, med. acc. m. manam Miis | up; ger. ~etva (ambaphalam) 37,25. 

45,17; — aor. 3. sg. osakki, 29,25. c d kakkhala, mfn. (also written 
| 


Tr. PM. p. 60. wala, sa. kakkhata & karkara) hard; 
osāna, m. (sa. avasüna) end; v. | fierce, cruel; instr. m. pl. wehi (yak- 
avasana. khehi) 41 " 


kaka, m. (== sa.) a certain bird, 
a heron (or a vulture, Burnell: Ind, 
Stud. XIII, 264); gen. ~assa, 92,20. 
kam khati, vb. (sa. ykānksh) to 
doubt; pr. 3. sg. eati, 96,14. 
kamkha, f. (sa. kanksha) doubt; 
nom. sg. ES 79,17; nom, pl. «à, 
66,21. | 
*kacavara, m. (cp. sa. kaccara 
& kavara, mahratt. kacar&) sweepings; 
acc. wai, 50,2. — °-chaddana-pacchi, 
f. a basket for removing of sweepings, 
48,44. — mālā-kacavara-, a dust-heap, 
73,20 (-antara). 
Kaccā yana, m. (contracted : 


osīdati, vb. (sa. ava-ysad) to 
sink (into, /oc.); aor. 3. pl. wimsu 
(udakamhi) 28,7; -- inf. «itum, 
28,8; — ger. witva, 36,25. — cais: 
osidapeti, to cause to sink; pr. 

c. esl unir maii), 1,21; aor. i KA | 
wesi, 1,20; fut. 3. pl. ` wessanti (na- | 
varh) 25, 34, | 

ossukka, n. (sa. autsukya) eager- | 
ness, desire, longing for; appossukka, | 
mfn. (q. v.) cp. ussuka. 

*oharin, mfn. (sa. *ava-harin, 
fr. ava- y hr) dragging down; z. „inarit 
(bandhanam) Dh. 346. cp. ‘avaharati, 

oh&reti, vb. (caus. avaharati) to 
cause to be taken away, remove; grd. | Kaccina. sa. Kātyāyana) nom, propr. 
n. vetabbam, 84,18. of a thera, one of Buddha’s chief di- 
ohita, mfn. (sa. avahita, pp. ava- | sciples; voc. ~a, 96,6; Kaccāno 


Vdhā) put down, placed into; turned | ([aggo] vibhajjanamhi) 109,10. — 
downwards, downcast; m, ~o, Dh. | *Kacciyana-gotta, m. (sa. °-gotra) 
150. — *ohita-sota, mfn. „with atten- | ‘member of the K.- family’, name of 
tive ears“, m. pl. ~ā (bhikkhu dham- | the same person, also often called 
mam sunanti) 71,4. — *ohitā-mukha, | Mahā-Kaocāyana; ~o (ayasma) 

mfn. with downcast face, m. ~o, 54,20 | 96,2. 
(with à metri causa, cp. Notes). kacci, indecl. (sa. kac-cid) a 
*ohinaka, mfn. (fr. ohina, sa. | particle of interrogation (latin : num, 
avahina, pp. ava-yhà) remaining, | nonne) 28,12; often combined with nu 
left; ace. m. pl. we, 22,10. and sometimes so that the old form 
kaccid is preserved by sandhi : kaccin- 


65 


nu, 9,5; kacci nu kho (should it 
really be ?) 3,5. cp. kim, kiūci etc. 

kaccha!, mfn. (sa. kaccha, fr. 
kaccha, or = *kakshya. fr. kaksha ?) 
growing wild, or made of a plant 
that grows wild (Tr.), grown in the 
water, on marshy ground (?); n. wari 
(kaņdam) 92,18 (opp. ropima, g. 2.) 
cp. next. 

kaccha?®, m. !) (sa. kaksha) arm- 
pit; abl, ~a, 104,17; loc. we, 67,29. 
— *) (sa, kaccha) a meadow, swamp, 
fen, marshy ground; loc. we (rūļha- 
tine „abounding with grass“) 104,27. 

kacchapa, m. (= sa.) a tortoise; 
0, 11,26; acc. warm, 11,32; voc. wa, 
12,5; instr. wena, 12,20; gen. «assa, 
12,26. cp. kaccha?. 

kaficana, x. (sa. kāūcana) gold; 
%patta-sadisa, mfn. like a plate of 
gold, 46,31; — °pallamke, doc. on a 
throne of gold, 42,9; — °-rupaka-, a 
golden statue, 47,14. 

kaūūa, f. (sa. kanyi) a girl, 
virgin; daughter; asura-?, 54,7 (~am, 
acc.); khattiya-°, 64,11. 47,15; deva-', 
64,30 (nā, pl. „celestial nymphs“). 

kata = kata (g. v.). 

katacchu, x.(?) (sa. katacchu, 
f. ?) a ladle, a spoon; suvanna-?, a 
golden spoon, acc. „uh, 53,32. | 

katuka, mfn. (= sa.) bitter, of 
a sharp, unpleasant taste; °-pphala, 
1) n. a bitter fruit (or perhaps name 
of a certain plant) 73,11 (-katuka- 
pphalādīni, cp. phala); ?) mfn. with 
bitter fruit, 37,3 (m. ~o ambo); 
Dh. 66 (x. „arh, kammam). — *ka- 
tuka-pabhedana, adj. having pungent 
juice (flowing from the temples, as 
elephants), m. ~o (kuūjaro) Dh. 324. 

kattha, x. (sa. kashtha) a piece 
of wood, stick; wood in general; — 
tina-katth'-upadanam, 94,36. — dan- 
ta-°, x. a small piece of wood for 
cleaning the teeth, a tooth-pick; — am, 
82,18. — kattha-maya, mfn., made of 
or consisting of wood, ~A (vana) 
48,6, cp. vana, ^. 

katthaka, m. (sa. kāshthaka, 


Pāli Glossary. 


à || || TTITO — M —— S € — HÀ M ———— ——— 


kannakita 


m. £ n.) a kind of plant (probably a 
certain reed); gen. «assa, Dh. 164. 

kathala, m. (sa. kathalya & ka- 
thalla) gravel; sakkhara-kathala-va- . 
lika, pl. 97,25. 

kathalika (or kathalika), v. 
(pāda-)kathalika. 

kathina, mfn. (= sa.) hard, cruel; 
f. pl. nā, 51,34; (= thaddha-hadaya, 
hardhearted) 52,5, 

kaddhati, vb. (sa. ykrsh, kar- 
shati) to draw, drag, pull (ace.); part. 
m. pl. ~anta (matamanussam pade 
gahetva) 40,35; — aor. 3. sg. kaddhi 
(vemam) 89,7; 3. pl. witisu, 59,5; 
— inf. «itum, 59,8; — ger. witva 
(lekham) 59,7; kaddhitvā kaddhitva, 
by constantly sucking up, 27,1. — pass, 
kaddhiyati, part. m. ~iyamano, 59,10. 
— cp. kasati, a-kaddhati, upa-kad- 
dhati & (sam)uk-kamsati. 

kanika, /. (== sa.) ‘a small par- 


.ticle’, meal or flour (of rice)? instr. 
pl. ~ahi (pūvam pacitva) 57,21. cp. 


tandula. 

kantaka, m. (—- sa.) a thorn, a 
fish-bone; instr. mandu-kantakena, 
37,6 (v. mandu); acc. pl. we, 4,22. 
— *0yasi, 5,8 (v. h.). 

kantha, m. (— sa.) the neck; 
loc. we, 10,5; abl. «to, 64,55. — 
kasava-°, mfn. Dh. 307 (g. v.). ` 

kanda. m. & n. (sa. kinda & 
khanda) !)a part, portion (esp. of a 
book); acc. wam (Dhammasanganiyi, 
Atthasilinim) 113,23. — *) an arrow 
or the shaft of an arrow; acc. «am, 
92,18; instr. wena, 6,24. 

kanna, m. (sa. karna) !) the ear; 
ace. wam, 22,24. — pahattha-kanna- 
vala, mfn. 76,21 (g. .). — 2) a. corner 
(of a room or of clothes); acc. ~am 
(eaturangulam) 83,10; gehassa kanna- 
kannehi (abl. pl.) „in the house from 
top to bottom", 49,35; -kanna-bhaga 
(m. pl.) „the corner of the room“, 
84,19. — 2p. kannika, kalakanni. 

kannakita, mfn. (sa. karnakita, 
fr. karnaka) dirty, musty (on ‘account 
of mould or rust etc.); f. ~& (bhitti) 


5 


Kannamunda 


66 


84,20; (bhūmi) 84,21. cp. Vin. H, 115,1 | 


fr. b. III, 198,5. 

*Kannamunda, m. nom, pr. of 
a certain (mythical) lake; %daha, m. 
abl. ^to, 36,31. 

kannika, f. (as first part of comp. 
also kannika-. sa. karnika) ‘an ear- 
ring’; the pericarp of a lotus; *pup- 
pha-kannika-sadisa, mfn. „fair as the 
opening bud of a lotus“, acc. m. mam 
(puttam) 7,29. 

kanha!, mfn. (sa. krshna) black, 
dark; metaph. bad; ace. m. ~am 
(dhammam, opp. sukka) Dh. 87. 
^ Kanha?, m. (sa. Krshna) nom. 
pr. a name of Mara (q. v.) ,the black 
one“; gen. massa, 103,31. 

kata, mfn. (sometimes also written 
kata, pp. karoti; sa. krta, ykr) done, 
made, performed, prepared etc.; !) 
Used as finite tense: m. ~o, 11,10; 
25,3 (ratho); ». wath, 1,21. 3,23. 107,27 
— Dh. 18; Dh. 74 (kata — katam). 
— ?) adj. as the first part of comp. 
(w. instr. of the agens) : kata-kam- 
mai, 17,4. 85,2; kata-parakkamena, 
12,5; kata-papam, 17,17; kata-pápa- 
kammam, 73,27 etc. — *) subst. n. gen. 
~assa a-ppatikarakam (g. v.) 14,1; 
katākatam, ». what has been committed 
and omitted, Dh. 50. — *) as the last 
part of adj.-comp. : an-a-bhava-kata, 
a-vatthu-kata, g. v.; kāla-kata, dead, 
22,15 (v. kala, cp. kālam karoti); 
kala-vanna-kata, blacked, 84,21 (opp. 
a-kata, not prepared, not blacked, 
84,22); citta-kata, variegated, Dh. 147 
(cp. citta?); parikamma-kata, pre- 
pared : lakha-°, 5,28; geruka-?, 84,20; 
vatta-kata, open, 5,13; sayam-kata, 
made by one’s self, Dh. 347; cy. 
a-kata, dukkata (or dukkata), sukata 
(or sukata). — *) as the first part of 
adj.-comp., v. kata-kicca etc. below. 

kata-kicca, mfn. (sa. krta-krtya) 
one who has done his duty, dutiful; 
acc. m. «am, Dh. 386; snsir. pl. 
evehi (therehi) 109,12. 

kataūūū, mfn. (sa. krta-jüa) 
grateful; a-kataüium (acc. m. [sc. 


na seveyya] niratthà tassa sevanā) 
ingrate, 14,1, | 

kataūūutā, f. (sa. krtajūutā) 
gratitude; 14,2. 

kata-puiia, mfn. (sa. krta- 
punya) one who has done good (me- 
ritorious) works, virtuous; m. ~o, 
107,26 — Dh. 18; acc. «am, Dh. 
220. 

katama. mfn. pron. interr. (= 
sa.; fr. the base ka-. v. kim) who, 
which (of two or many); m. ~o (ayam 
samuddo) 25,31; ~o ettha Nagaseno, 
97,18; acc. ~ar (whom of three) 31,16; 
m. pl. ~e dve (anta) 66,35; — f. nā, 
66,30; acc. ~am disam, in which di- 
rection, 95,4. 

*kata-mangala-sakkara, mfn. 
festively prepared; f. loc. sg. ~waya 
(bhumiya) 61,25. cp. mangala, sak- 
kara. 

kata-viriya, mfn. (sa. krta-virya) 
energetic; gen, m. ~wassa, 42,13. 

kati, pron. interr. (= sa.; nom. 
acc. mfn. kati, instr. abl. ihi, gen. 
einnam) how many; ~ nu kho amha- 
kam sikkhāpadāni (x. pl.) 81,19. cp. 
next. 

katipaya, mfn. (= sa.) so many, 
a certain number, some (latin aliquot); 
instr. m. pl. ~ehi (paharehi) 55,7. 

*katipaham, adv. (fr. katipaya 
-+ alan, by elision of y) a few days, 
7,27. 36,15. ll2,4 (vasitvā); 57,17 
(vasi). — katipahaccayena, a few days 
later, 49,22 (v. accaya). 

*katokasa, mfn. (sa. *krta + 
avakaga] who has got opportunity or 
permission, v. okāsa. 

kattabba, grd., v. karoti. 

kattar, m. (sa. kartr) ') a doer. 
maker; nom. kattà (kammānam) 
97,13. — ?) a benefactor; v. a-kattar. 

kattarikà (or kattari), f. (sa. 
kartari, f.) scissors; instr. ~kaya, 
5,17. | 

kattha, adv. interr. (by assimila- 
tion fr. kuttha, sa. kutra) where, 
where-in, where-to, wherefore? ~ am- 


hehi sikkhitabbam, 81,19 (in what 


== kasmim atthe); ~ gamissasi, 87,36 
== kaham gacchasi, 88,5. — *kattha- 
vasika, mfn. living where? m. pl. 
tumhe wa, 21,8. — cp. kuto. 

katthaci, ade. (sa. kutra-cid) 
somewhere; 52,12. 

katva, katvana, ger., v. karoti. 

katham, adv. interr. (= sa.) 
how? 1,17. 4,28. 11,17 ete. katham 
nama, how then? 41,30, 

kathamkatha, f. (= sa., cy. sa. 
kathamkathika, fr. katham) doubt, 
uncertainty. — vigata-kathamkatha, 
mfn. free from doubt; m. ~o, 69,15. 
— a-kathamkathin, mfn. id. (v. h.). 

*kathalika, x. (= kathalīkā f.?) 
probably a foot-stool, or another im- 
plement, used by washing the feet (a 
towel? Eh. Davids & Oldenberg, SBE. 
XIII, 92); nom. pāda-kathalikam, 
83,6 (cp. the foll. quotation : imesari 
yeva pàdanam candimasuriye pada- 
kathalikam katva nisidim, Ps. on MN. 
ch. 77; kathalikam (acc.) v. Dham- 
mapadatthakatha (Colombo '98) p. 161,5 
fr. b.). 

bākā f. (= sa.) +) speech, talk, 
words; nom. «à, 24,33, 83,4. 86,24 
(Buddhānam acchariya); acc. ~ar, 
4,18, 33,4. 73,9. 89,20 (sammodaniyam, 
g. v.); — guna-katha, f. praise; loc. 
ewaya, 31,25; — sarambha-katha, f. 
angry speech, Dh. 133. — ?) speaking 
about, conversation; acc. «am (sam- 
utthāpesurn) 29,28; loc. waya, 29,31. 
91,24; — *katha-sallapa, m. conversa- 
tion, instr. Aena, 94,22; — *°-samut- 
thāpana, n. starting a conversation, 
54,10 (°-attham). — ?) exposition, ex- 
planation; dhammi katha, a sermon, 
religious discourse, instr. dhammiya 
ewaya, 71,28; — attha-kathā, anama- 
tagga-kathā, anupubbi-katha, dana-®, 
sagga-', sila-° (q.v.); cp. Dhatu-katha 
d next. 

*kathā-magga, m. (sa. *katha 
+ mārga) way or method of exposi- 
tion, explanation; acc. ~am, 113,30. 
*Kathā-vatthu, n. (sa. katha 
+ vastu) nom. pr., name of a cano- 


67 


kanaka 


nical Pāli-book, the Bth part of the 
Abhidhamma-pitaka; 102,12. 

kathika, mfn. (= sa.) a speaker, 
narrator; dhamma-kathika, g. v. 

kathita, mfn. (pp. katheti) spoken, 
told, answered, pointed out; m. ~o 
pucchitapaiīho) 88,21; acc. f. ~am 
gatha) 102,21; s. ~am, 88,26; m. 
pi. nā (guna) 44,5; — taya kathita- 
maggena, 56,34. 

*kathin, mfn. (fr. katha) at the 
end of comp. — kathika, v. vicitra- 
kathi». 

katheti, vb. (sa. ykath, kathayat?) 
to tell, say, speak of (acc.); to speak 
with (saddhni); to mean, refer to 
(acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 24,27. 31,7. 88,4; 
2. Sg. nesi, 49,26; 1. sg. wemi, 85,28; 
3. pl. „enti, 9,50; — part. m. «ento, 
3,6; instr, e,entena, 1,24; gem. ~en- 
tass(a), 20,28. 30,4; part. med. f. 
„ayamānā (gunam, praising) 29,9; 
— imp. 2. sg. ~wehi, 54,32; — pot. 2. 
Sg. e,eyyüsl, 49,28; — fut. 1. sg. ~es- 
sami, 25,33; — aor. 3. sg. „vesi, 12,19. 
68,19 (anupubbikatham); inf. 
wetum, 49,27. 55,17; — ger. wetvii 
(rañño gune) 42,4; a-kathetva, 49,27; 
— pp. kathita (g. v.). 

kadariya, mfn. (sa. kad-arya) 
*not liberal' mean, niggardly, avari- 
cious; acc. m. «am (danena jine) 
44,9 — Dh. 223; m. pl. ~a, Dh. 177. 

kadali, f. (sa. kandali & kadalī) 
1) a sort of deer; ?) a flag, banner; 
3) the plantain or banana tree (Musa 
sapientum); °-punna-ghata-, 62,6. 

kadā, adv. interr. (== sa.) when? 
ep. next, 

kadaci, ade. (sa. kadācid) !) 
sometimes, 6,19. ?) perhaps, 55,24. cp. 
kudacanam. 

kaddama,m. (sa. kardama) mud, 
mire, dirt; °-makkhita, mfn. mud- 
stained (wehi pādehi) 71,29; apeta- 
kaddama, mfn. Dh. 95. 

kangka, n. (= sa.) gold; *°-yi- 
mana, ^. a golden palace; ~am, 61,15; 
loc. ~e, 23,5. — uttatta-kanaka-san- 
nibha, mfn. 85,7. 


5* 


kanittha 


kanittha, mfn. (sa. kanishtha) 
the youngest, yonger born; m, a younger 
brother or the youngest son (opp. 
jettha(ka)); ~o, 35,21. 55,20; gen. 
wassa, 35,15; — 9-bhata, 9,7; — jet- 
thaka-kanitthe (acc. pl.) an elder 
and a younger brother, 32,21. — ka- 
nittha-bhaginī, f. a younger sister, 
instr, ~wiya, 56.6 (cp. bhaginī). 

kantati, vb. (sa. ykrt, krnatti) 
to spin; part. f. ~anti (tapas) 111,6. 

kantara, x. (£ m.) (sa. kāntāra) 
& forest, wilderness; a difficult road; 
ditthi-kantāram, 94,1 (g. v.). 

Kanthaka, m. (sa. Kanthaka) 
nom. pr. of the horse of Bodhisatta 
(Siddhattha); acc. ~am, 65,19-20. 

kandati, vb. (sa. ykrand) to cry, 
weep; pr. 3. sg. mati, 30,19; aor. 2. 
sg. ma kandi, Dh. 371; ger. nitvā, 
49,10 (~ roditvā). 

kapana, mfn. (sa. krpana), mise- 
rable, poor; *-addhika, 38,14 (q. v.). 

kapāla, x. (= sa.) a shell, the 
skull; a bowl or pan; tatta-kapāle, 
loc. „on a hot plate“. 11,7. ` 

kapi, m. (= sa.) un ape, monkey; 
108,24. — *°-yoni, f. 1,3. 2,17 (v. h.). 
— "-rājam, m. ly (v. h.). 

kapila, mfn. (= sa.) brown, 
tawny, reddish; °-gavi, 61,28. 

Kapilavatthu, x. (sa. Kapila- 
vastu) «om. pr. of a town in which 
Gotama Buddha was born (within the 
frontier of Nepal, cp. JRAS. 1897 & 
1898); abi. ~uto, 62,5; loc. wusmim, 
81,7; ?-nagare, 61,2. 

kappa, m. (sa. kalpa) !) age, any 
one of the ages of the world; acc. 
sakala-kappam, throughout the whole 
kalpa, 16,15; Joc. pathama-kappe, in 
remote antiquity, 10,2. — *) mfn. (at 
the end of comp.) almost like or equal 
to; m. pl. Satthu-kappa, similar to 
the Master, 109,27. — cp. kappatthiya, 
kappika. 

kappaka, m. (sa. kalpaka) a 
barber; ~o, 44,23; voc. ~a, acc. ~am, 
44,22, | 

*kappatthiya (& ~ika), mfn. 


68 


(sa. *kalpa-stha, w. suff. -ka) lasting 
for a whole kalpa; °-rukkha, 59,29. 

kappanā, f. (sa. kalpana) ‘pre- 
paring, arranging’, esp. caparisoning 
of a horse or an elephant, tightening 
of the saddle-girth; wa (atigalha) 
65,2122, 

kappara, x. (sa. kūrpara) the 
elbow, the forearm; instr. „sena (sise 
pahari) 50,19. 51,1. 

kappika, mfn. (sa. kalpaka, & 
~ika) at the end of comp. = belong- 
ing to a certain kalpa : — pathama- 
kappikā, m. pl. the first people of 
this kalpa (g. v.) 10,25; pathama- 
kappikato, abi. n. (P) from the be- 
ginning of this world, 4,10. 

kappüra, m. £ ». (sa. karpura) 
camphor; -kappura-, 48,30. 73,11. 

kappeti, vb. caus. (sa. ykļp, 
kalpayati) 1) to arrange, prepare; 
imp. 2. sg. ~wehi (assam saddle“) 
65,17; — inf. wetum (id.) 65,20; — 
aor. 3. 8g. wesi (id.) ib. (cp. kap- 
pani); vāsam ~ („lived“) 1,4. 2,26 
(pr. 3. sg. kappeti) 11,25. 35,97; 3. 


| pl. ~esum, 34,53; jīvikarh „vesi („got 


livelihood“) 8,15; — seyyam ~eti, to 
lie, to sleep, 46,22 (ekako va); — 


| pass. part. m. ~iyam&no (whilst he 


was being saddled) 65,21. — ?) to trim, 
to cut off; part. m. «ento (kattari- 
kaya kumudanalam) 5,18; — ger. 
„etvā (givam) ib. cp. kappaka, m. 
kamati, vb. (sa. ykram) to walk, 
to go; intens. caünkamati, g. v. 
kabala, m. (sa. kavala) a mouth- 
ful, morsel; acc. ~am (na bhuiijati, 
kuūjaro baddho) Dh. 324. | 
kampati, vb. (sa. ykamp) to 
tremble; part. m. ~amano, 36,2. 
kambala, m. $£ n. (= sa) a 
woollen cloth or blanket; ""-ratana, 
n. „precious rug“, 25,5 (acc. mam 
mahaggham). — ratta-?, scarlet cloth, 
5,27. — pandu-', 15,8 ("-silasanam) 
g. t. 
kamma (& kamman) x. (sa. 
karman), nom. acc. sg. ~ai & ~a. 
1) what has been done, deed, act; nom. 


69 


~am, Dh. 67; ~a, Dh. 96; acc. 
wam, 51,19. 73,30. — raho-kammam, 
54,17 (what is to be done in secret). 
— *) doing, action, work, labour; 6,15; 
— *kamma-ccheda, m. interruption 
of one’s labour, 6,1; — karana-kam- 
mam, 9,13 (what she is doing); — 
pana-vadha-®, 60,13 (killing of living 
beings); — papa-°, 9,18 (wickedness, 
cp. papa); — vicakkhu-kammiya, 
dat. in order to make (him) perplexed, 
71,27; — mülena ~am n'atthi, 57, 
(,gratis’ or „there is no need of 
money^?); — duty, errand; Dh. 217; 
kena kammena (instr.) 21,8; uposa- 
tha-°, 14,13 (g. v.); — business, occu- 
pation, vocation; kasi-kamma, agri- 
culture, tillage, 8,15 (instr. ~ena); — 
tunna-kamma, trade of a tailor, 57,8; 
— niyyàmaka-kamma, a mariner’s 
vocation, 24,14. -- 5) (in the dogmatics) 
good or bad deed, past deeds, esp. the 
influence of past deeds on one’s future 
destiny — merit, deserts, karma; „sam, 
24,1. 100,5; instr. wena, 100,6; gen. 
~assa (vipākavasena) 84,5»; abl. pl. 
~ehi (päpakehi) 100,5 gen. pl. 
wanam, 97,3; attano pubba-kam- 
math, 16,27 = attana kata-kammam, 
17,4 (his own past deeds); pāpa- 
kammā (abl.) Dh. 127; saka-kam- 
mani (n. pl.) one's own deeds, 106,20 
= Dh. 240; anantarika-®, 76,5 (g. v.); 
yatha-kammam, adv. (g. v.); 
*kamma-kilittha, x. evil karma, opp. 
*kamma-visuddhi, f. good karma, 
Dh. 15. 16; — kamma-patha, m. way 
of action, acc. pl. we (tayo) Dh, 281. 
— S)mfn. at the end of comp. nihina- 
kamma, suci-kamma (q.v.). — danda- 
kamma, parikammakata £ nezt. 
kamma-kara, m. (sa. karma- 
kara) a labourer, a servant; «o (nā- 
vikanam) „a sailor’s drudge“, 35,830. 
*kamma-karana, f. (cp. sa. 
kāranā) punishment, pain, torture; 
9-anubhavanatthànam, 23,37 (v. h.). 
kammaja, mfn. (sa. karma-ja) 
‘caused by karma’, inborn. — *°-vata, 
m. pl.. pains, birth-throes; assa ~ 


aeree r n nT - — — 


karuna 


calimsu (came upon her) 62,19. (cp. 
vata). 

kammanta, m. (sa. karmānta) 
action, work, business; sammā-kam- 
manto, right conduct, 67.4. 

kammāra, m. (sa. karmāra) a 
smith (blacksmith or goldsmith); ~o, 
Dh. 239; gen. ~assa, 78,29. — *°-putta, 
m. by family a smith, ~o, 77,20. — 
*0_sandisa, m. a smith's tongs; instr. 
wena, 5,2. 

kam min, mfn. (sa. karmin) acting 
(only at the end of comp.); m. pl. 
pāpa-kammino, evil-doers (upapaj- 
janti nirayam) Dh, 126. 

kayirati, kayira (kayra) ete. 
v. karoti. 

kara, mfn. (= sa.) doing, making; 
v. anta-kara, takkara, dukkara, pa- 
bhati-kara, vacana-kara, su-kara. 

karana!, mf(1)n. (= sa.) making, 
effecting, causing; cakkhu- nī (pati 
pada) leading to insight, 66,29; nana- 
wi (id.) leading to wisdom, ib. 

karana?, n. (= sa.) the act of 
making; *"-kammath, 9,13 (v. h.); 
a-karana, n. avoiding (g. v.); cp. 
dvidha-°, vak-°, vohāra-'. 

karana, f. (ep. sa. karana), v. 
kamma-karaná. 

karaniya, n. (grd. karoti, == sa.) 
‘to be done’, duty, business; katam 
eam, „the duty is fulfilled", 71,16; 
instr. kenacid-eva ~iyena „on some 
business“, 32,15. 

karandaka, m. (= sa.) a basket 
of hurdle-work; *jala-karandaka, m. 
probably a fence or enclosure of net- 
work, used as a sort of bathing-house 
in the river (Tr.), doc. ~e kilantassa, 
36,30 („casting nets and weels in the 
river for sport“? Fausbøll, Five Jit. 
p. 27). | 

karavīra, m. (= sa.) name of a 
fragrant plant, Oleander; *°-patta, n. 
name of a sort of arrow, mam, 92,24 
(cp. patta'). 

karisa, x. (sa. karisha) feces; 
~am, 82,4 = 97,22. 

karuna, mfn. (= sa.) 1) miserable, 


karunā 


pitiable, v. ati-karuna. — *) compas- 
sionate; acc. f. ~am (vācam), 103,4. 
cp. kāruñña, nikkarunatā d next. 
karuņā, f. (= sa.) pity, com- 
passion, mercy; instr. ~waya, 22,2. 
karoti, vb. (sa. ykr) !) w. acc. 
to do, make, perform, accomplish, 
finish, esp. kālam ~, to die (g. v.); 
to execute (vacanam); to effect, pro- 


duce, 6,3. 47,4. 89,6. etc., very often 


periphrastically : kopam <, 40,7 (to 
become angry); sathh ~, 63,18 (to 
think of); saññam ~, 5,7 (to imagine) 
etc.; to put, place, direct, 6,10. 15,32. 
60,19. 65,15. 71,28, 83,11-21; to treat, 
57,26. — *) w. double acc. to make 


10 


(adj.) 73,6; to elect (subst.) 10,2. — | 


3) w. adv. to act, behave, 58,5; to 
manage, arrange, 12,2. — The usual 
present formation is karoti, but besides 
this we find kubbati (1. sg. also 


kummi), and even *karati must be 


supposed as base for certain forms of 
part., imper., pot. (kayirati is found 
at the grammariaus) : 3. sg. „voti 
(tath’ eva) 2.25; 2. sg. ~osi (saiifiam) 
5,7. (papakammam) 9,20; 1. sg. ~omi 
(evarupam, = fut.) 51,28; naw, 74,1 


(1 did not do it); 7. pl. ~woma, 4,7. | 


60,13 (= fut.); — pr. med. 3. sg. 
kurute (vasam, subdues) Dh. 48. 
(piyam) Dh. 217. — part. *) m. ka- 
ronto (voharam) 8,16. (sotthim) 54,51; 
loc. ~e, 19,9. (virlyam akaronte) 
42,11; acc. pl. ~e, 21,3; gen. sg. 
karoto, Dh. 116; acc. f. ~ith (anā- 
caram) 52,31; pl. ~iyo (kalaham) 
59,5. >) gen. sg. m. kubbato, 13,38. 
Dh. 51—52; med. 1) kubbana, acc. 
m. ~am, Dh. 217. 2) kurumana, f. 
wi, 49,13. 89,6; pl. f. wa, 51,28. 9) m. 
karam, Dh. 136. — imp. *) 2. sg. 
karohi, 19,28. 73,9. 86,1; 2. pl. ~otha 
(mama vacanam) 32,25. 75,5. 108,6; 
8. pl. wontu, 8,7. b) 2. sg. kara, 22,16. 
— pot. *) 3. sg. kareyya (kālam) 92,6; 
2. sg. ~weyyasi, 15,34. 35,8 (aggim). 
86,3 (papam); 1. sg. —eyyam, 15,12; 
. 8. pl. weyyum, 17,26; 2. pl. weyyatha, 
4,8. P) 3. sg. kare, Dh. 42—43; 3. 


pl. (?) 48,7 (perhaps we have here an 
old form of pr. 3. pl. med., cp. Kuhn, 
Beitr. p. 94; but kare is also pr. 7. 
sg. med. == karomi, Jat. II 138,13.). 
°) 3. sg. kayirā (fr. *karyat), Dh. 42. 
53. 105. 117. 159 (kayra); 2, sg-med, 
kayiratha, Dh. 25. 117. 313 (kayrā- 
tha). 9) 2. pl. kubbetha, 29,12. — 
fut. *) 3. sg. karissati (mukham) 11,17. 
satim) 63,18; 2. sg. ~wissasi, 15,31 
imper.), 77,6 (id.), 54,5» (cp. the 
use of fut. bhavissati. v. bhavati); 
1. sg. „vissāmi, 9,21. 12,2. 47,4 (lv- 
bharh imassa); 3. pl. ~wissanti, 4,6. 
7,15; 2. pl. ~wissatha, Dh. 275. b-e) kā- 
hami & kassūmi ete.; 2. sg. kühasi, 
103,7 (puūiāni), Dh. 154 (geham). 
— aor. *) 3—2. sg. akāsi, 19,38. 57,26. 
60,19. 86,1; 1. sg. akas’ aham, 108,80; 
8. pl. akamsu (siham rajanam) 10,2. 
13,2. 21,22. 109,5. *) 3. sg. akari, 80,33. 
85,5 (= akāsi, 85,13); 2. sg. mā kari, 
53,8; 1. sg. karim, 47,4 (karin ti); 
3. pl. karimsu, 10,27, 24,12 (namam 
assa). 58,5; 2. pl. mà evarupam 
karittha, 39,2. *) 3. sg. aki (Visud- 
dhimaggain nama, composed) 114,12; 
1. pl. med. akaramhase, 13,95. — inf. 
katum, 1],s. 27,16. 5l,u ete. — ger. 
^) katva, 4,3 (givam sugahitam). 
6,2-10. 40,24 (dalham ~, with a strong 
grasp). 58,12 (kusalam ~, sc. taya). 
65,15 (ummāre sisam). 82,21 (nicam 
c, holding down); a-katva, 24,17. 
34,3. 40,7. 42,13; adim-katva, v. adi. 
b) katvāna, 112,5. °) karitvā, 42,18. 
71,5 (nangalam khandhe, „having 
shouldered“). 73,6. 74,19; vasim ~, 
g. v. (cp. sakkaccam). — pass. kayi- 
rati, Dh. 292 (== kayrati) — pp. 
kata, mfn. (g. v.). — grd. *) kattabba, 
mfn. what is to be done; ^. ~am (sa- 
hāyassa, „a friend's part“) 12,54, (vi- 
riyam) 42,15. 54,13. Dh. 53; 9-kicca 
(v. h.); 9-yutta. mfn. what ought to be 
done, n. ~am, 54,32. ^) kātabba, mfn.; 
M. ~o (samsaggo) 29,7; n. ~am (kin 
nu kho <) 11,5; m. ~o (brahma- 
dando, to be imposed) 79,15; °-yut- 
takam (etesam karissanti, shall do 


for them) 39,4. °) kicca, mfn. (v. 
separately). 3) kariya, mf*.; a-kāri- 
yam, x. 106,15 = Dh. 176. °) kayira, 
mfn. (= karya, fr. sa. karya); m. 
~ ahi ce, Dh. 313. f) karaniya, mfn. 
(v. separately). — caus. kareti (q. v.). 
— atthi-%. alam-?. avi, manasi-0, 
sacchi-karoti (v. h.), cp. kattar, 
kamma, kara, karana. kara(ka), 
karana, karin, kiriya. 

*Kalandaka-nivapa, m. nom. 
pr. of a garden at Veluvana near Rā- 
jagaha (lit. ‘an offering to the squirrels’, 
Sp. H. Man.? 198); loc. we, 84,27. 

kalala, x. (= su.) ') the embryo 
a short time after conception; gen. 
massa, 99,10. — *) mud, mire; ace. 
e. ai, 46,33; loc. kama-kalale, „in the 
mud of desire“, ib.; gūtha-kalale 
(nimugga-gāmasūkaro) in the dung- 
hill-pool, 40. 

kalaha, m. (= sa.) strife, quarrel; 
acc. ~ai (karontiyo) 59,3; ~ai 
(aññamaññam karonti) 74,5.—*°-sadda, 
m. brawl, aec. ~am, 59.4. 

kala. f. (= sa.) !)a part, portion 


(esp. the sixteenth part of the moon’s 


DN 


kala-vedi). 

kalāpa, m. (= sa.) 1) a bundle; 
acc. daru-kalapam (sisena adaya) a 
bundle of fire-wood, 57,12. — °? a 
quiver; acc. dhanu-kalapam, bow and 
quiver, 75,15. 

kali, m (= sa.) the unlucky 
die, loss at game, misfortune; sin, 
vice; n'atthi dosasamo ~, Dh. 202 
== sin? cp. SBE. X, 55); acc. ~im 
ns bad die) 106,18 == Dh. 252 


71. 


[kali, opp. kata (sa. krta) v. Jat. VI, 


228,19. 282,17. 357,5]. 

*kalingara, m. £ n. (also spelt 
with ], Burm. read. kalinkara) ') a 
log of wood (explained by comm. by 
katthakhanda, khāņu); ”. ~ar (nir- 
attham) Dh.,41 (cp. Thi, 468, MN. 
I, 449,16). — *) (sa. kadangara & ka- 
daükara) straw, chaff (Abidh. 453). 


kasava 


kalira, m. (sa. karira) the top- 
sprout of a plant: ~o (pathamuggato) 
47,9. 

kalyāņa, mfn. (= sa.) beautiful, 
good; loc. n. ~e, Dh. 116 (opp. papa); 
acc. m. pl. ~e (mitte, opp. pāpake 
mitte) Dh. 78. 375. — *9-rūpa, mfn. 
beautiful, m. ~o (catuppado) 30,s. 

Kalyani, f. (= sa.) mom. pr. 
of a river in Ceylon; ace, wim, 21,16. 

kalla, mfn. (sa. kalya) healthy, 
salutary; able, clever; ready, prepared, 
perfect; n. wath (kallan nu kho tad 
abhinanditum) 97,5; m. kallo si 
bhante, 99,35. — *9-citta, mfn. whose 
mind is prepared, acc. m. wath, 68,21. 

kavata, m. (sa. id. & kapata) a 
door (not the aperture, dvāra, q. v., 
but that by which the aperture could 
be closed, ep. SBE. XX, 160). — 
*O-pittha, 2. the backside of the door 
(„door & doorpost^, SBE. XIII, 159), 
acc. wali, 84,12 (ep. pittha & Vin. 
I, 868,5; SBE. XX, 105). 

kasata, mfn. (probably by meta- 
thesis fr. sa. sakata, which also is 
found in the mss, cp. sa. cata & 
kashta) bad, vile, nasty; a certain 
taste : sour, bitter, acrid, or: insipid, 
tasteless = niroja, niyyūsa; subst. 
m. fault, vice; bitter juice, sediment, 
dregs (2); — kasata-phalani (m. pi.) 
1,13; — nimba-kasatam (acc.) bitter 
nimba-juice, 37,95. 

kasati, vb. (sa. ykrsh, krshati, 
cp. kaddhati & (sam)ukkamsati) to 
plough; pr. 3. sg. eati, 56,16; 3. pl. 
anti, 30,29. cp. kasi, kassaka £ 
next, 

*kasana, n. (fr. kasati, sa. kar- 
shana) the act of ploughing; „ari, 
56,16. °-tthanam, x. the place where 
one is ploughing, 56,1. 

kasā, f. (sa. kagā) a whip; acc. 
kasam-iva (= kasam viya) Dh. 143; 
acc. pl. «à, 55,14; instr. pl. «ahi, 
77,12. — *°-nivittha, mfn. touched by 
the whip, m. ~o (asso) Dh. 143°, 

kasāva, m. £ n. (sa. kashāya) 
dirt, impurity; fault, sin. — vanta- 


kasi 


kasāva, mfn. one who has thrown 
away sin, m. e[o] Dh. 10. — a-nik- 
kasāva (g. v.), cp. kasava. 

kasi, f. (sa. krshi) ploughing, 
agriculture; ?-kamma, x. id; instr. 
nena, 8,15. — "-gorakkhādīni, 21,5 
(ploughing, tending cattle &). 

kasmā, ade. why? (pron. interr. 
abl.) v. kii. 

kassaka, m. (sa. karshaka & 
krshaka) a ploughman, farmer; pl. 
wa, 31,1. — *%-kula, 7. the family of 
a farmer, loc, «e, 8,14. — *°-vanna, 
m. the appearance of a ploughman, 
ace, eam, 71,927. 

Kassapa, m. (sa. Kagyapa) !) 
nom. pr. of the Buddha before Gotama; 
gen. «assa (Bhagavato) 84,28. 9-da- 
sabala, gen. ~wassa, 22,12. °-samma- 
sambuddha, 28,18. — *) nom. pr. of 
a thera, one of Buddha’s great disciples, 
president of the first council; <o 
(dhutavadanath aggo) 109,6; = Ma- 
hākassapathero, 109,17. — *) Kumāra- 
kassapa, q. v. 

*kaham, adv. interr. (cp. kattha, 
kuhith & sa. kuha) where? whereto? 
1,25 (~ thapetha), 21,s (gacchissatha), 
34,10 (kahan nu kho), 49,6 (~ ga- 
tāsi), 73,1» (gacchasi), 88,5 (id. = 
kattha gamissasi, 87,36). 

kahapana, m. (£ n.) (sa. kār- 
shàpana) a certain weight of gold, 
Silver or copper, a coin, a piece of 
money, money in general; instr. ~ena, 
18,10; acc. pl. ~e (attha) 24,28; 
dhuttanam we datva, hiring some 
villains, 73,19; instr. pl. ~ehi (suram 
pivantā) 74,4. — *°-vassa, n. a shower 
of money, insir. «ena, Dh. 186. — 
0-satam,, x. 100 k.s, 18,13. — -sa- 
hassena (instr. n.) 1000 k.s, 57,23. 

kà, pron. interr. f., v. kim. 

kaka, m. (= sa.) a crow; ^0, 
11,5. 18,16; acc. „am, 18,8. — *9-sisa, 
mfn. having a head like a crow, m. 
ev 0, 21,34. — *"-sura, m. „a crow hero", 
designation of a cowardly or impudent 
fellow, instr. ~ena, Dh. 244. — disa- 
kaka, m. q. v. 


12 


*kākacchati, vb. onomat., to 
snore; part, f. pl. «antiyo, 65,6, 
This word is said to be akin to ykās, 
to cough, cp. Fausbøll, Bem. 1888, 
p. 38 (44), but Kern and Trenckner 
derive it from ykrath, v. Mil. 85,22 
Note. 

kaka, indecl. (= sa.), „caw, caw“, 
onomat. fr. the cawing of a ‘crow, 
18,30. 

kāja, m. (sa. kaca) a yoke to 
support burdens; v. khāri-kāja. 

kana, mfn. (= sa.) one-eyed, 
blind of one eye; ?-mahá-macchaim, 
acc. m. 4,15. 

katabba, grd. & kütum, /nf., 
v. karoti. 

kāpotaka, mfn. (sa. kapota & 
kapotaka) pigeon-coloured, grey, white; 
n. pl. ~ini (atthini) Dh. 149. 

kama, m. (== sa.) 1) wish, desire; 
most frequently pl. — desires, (sen- 
sual) pleasures, (sensual) love; acc. 
(adv.) ~am, g. v.; abl. ~ato (jayati 
soko) Dh. 215; pl. «à, 20,17. 45,5 
(manusaka, opp. dibba-kame, ace. 
(ib.)); 103,25 (te |Mārassa] pathamā 
sena); acc. pl. we, 46,18. 69,27. 108,24. 
Dh. 88. 383. 415; instr. sabba-kām- 
ehi, 61,29; gen. «nam, 68,20; loc. 
„esu, 47,29. 52,24 (atittam), Dh. 48 
(id); 65,9 (viratto); 97,1 (micchà 
carati, „commits immorality“); Dh. 
186 (titti) 218. 401. — *-kalala (v. 
h.). — *°-tanha, thirst for pleasure, 
67,14 (in the series : kama-, bhava-, 
vibhava-). — *kāma-rati (dvandva 
comp.), love and lust; "-santhava, 
m. familiarity with ~, acc. ~ai, Dh. 
27. — yattha-kama(m), q.v. -- kāma- 
kama, etc. v. below. — *) mfn. (at the 
end of comp.) desiring, longing for, 
intending; a-kama, mfn. (g. v.) 
sukha-kama, mfn. longing for happi- 
ness, %. pl, „vāni (bhūtāni) Dh. 131; 
very frequently comp. w. inf. in tu-: 
aropetu-°, 74,12. uddisapetu-°, 84,6. 
khadapetu-®, 1,23. khaditu-°, 1,7. 4,11. 
ganhitu-°, 55,16. gantu-°, 4,18. 22,2. 
50,9 (brahmanam paharitvā <o, 


kama- is here logically to be com- 
bined with paharitva). caritu-°, 36,10. 
jivitu-°, Dh. 123. datthu-°, 19,12. 
(datu-^, v. a-dātu-kāmatā). nahāy- 
itu-°, 83,2. nikkhamitu-°, 65,16. 
paripucchitu-?, 84,7. pavisitu-°, 82,24. 
83,27. paharitu-°, 29,25. bhuijitu-?, 
88,12. māretu-', 9,20. vaiicetu-°, 5,1. 
51,16. sotu-°, 87,13. 

kāmam, adv, (acc. sg. fr. kiima, 
= 84.) willingly, readily, with pleasure 
~ cajama asuresu pànam, 60,17. 

kāma-kāma, mfn. (= sa.) desi- 
rous of lust, having desires; m. pl. 
na «a (lapayanti santo) Dh. 83. 

*kama-gavesin, mfn. looking 
for pleasures; m. pl. ~ino, Dh. 99. 


) 


kama-guna, m. (= sa.) passion, ' to or concerning the body; 


affection; object of sense, pl. the pas- 
sions, taken as five different kinds, 
according to the five external senses; 
acc. pl. ne. Dh. 371; instr. pl. wehi 
(paücahi samappitassa) 67,5. 

*kāmatā, f. (cp. kima, *)) in- 
clination to; comp. w. inf. in tu-: 
kilitu-° (sālavana-kīļam, deviyā uda- 
padi) 62,15. cp. a-datu-kamata, 16,14. 

*kama-bhava, m, v. kama- 
bhava. 

*kāma-sukha, %. sensual plea- 
sure, the pleasure of love; acc. ~am 
(pahāya) 47,38 = Dh. 846—47. — 
*kamasukh'allika, mfn. (?),%-anuyoga, 
min. 66,26 (v. h.). 

*kamabhava, m. (== kama-bhava, 
with a lengthened metri causa) *) sen- 
sual existence in one of the eleven 
Kāmalokas. *) rise or origin of lust; 
9-parikkhīņa, mfn. one in whom lust 
can rise no more, acc. m. «am, Dh. 
415 (,in whom all concupiscence is 
extinct“). cp. tanha-bhava, nandi- 
bhava. 

kaya, m. (= sa.) the body; ~o, 
70,82. 107,5 = Dh. 41; gen. «assa, 
7,26; instr. «ena (saiifiato) 84,29; 
(sarnvuto) Db. 231—234 (in the 
series : kāyena, vacaya, manasa); 
wena dhammam passati, „sees the 
law bodily“, Dh. 259 (cp. SBE. X, 


73 


ee À—— M —À— — M M — —— 


kürana 


65); loc. ~asmim, 71,10; acc. pl. we, 
112,20. — aru-kāya, m. or mfn. (2) 
v. h. — santa-kaya, mfn. whose body 
is quieted, m. ~o, Dh. 378. — *"-gatà, 
adj. f. directed to the body (sati, 
g. v.) Dh. 293. — *°-duccarita, m. 
the bad deeds of the body, acc. ~am, 
Dh. 231. — *"-ppakopa, m. bodily 
anger, acc. eun, Dh. 231. — 9-ban- 
dhana, ». a girdle, ~am, 82,25. — 
*o-virniàna, x. body-consciousness, the 
sense of touch, «am (dukkha-saha- 
gatam, a painful perception) 98,1. — 
*0_sainphassa-viina 
sense of touch, Aui, 72,16 (cp. āya- 
tana). 

kayika, mfn. (= sa.) belonging 
instr. 
m. «ena (saüüamena, samvarena) 
85,17-18, 

kara, mfn. (= sa.) doing, making 
(at the end of comp.), v. andha-', 
ahim-?, unla-9, usu-°, mamim-®, 
sadhu-°, cp. purekkhara, sakkara. 

karaka, m(fn). doing, making; 
a maker, doer (at the end of comp.), 
v. kutatta-°, gaha-*,  pesuiina-?, 
bhatta-9, sussa-?, sasana-®. 

karana, x. (= sa.) ') cause, 
reason, motive (means); mom. ~am, 
8,1. 7,4. 29,1 (tam ~am, that is why). 
87,7. pabbajja-° (tumhakam), 45,9; 
acc. eam (imam, the cause of that) 
15,3. ~am katva, giving as cause, 
85,24; instr. kena «ena, for what 
reason? 16,33. 100,17; kin te mama 
hasita-karanena, ,what is that to 
you why I laugh“, 53,4; a-kara- 
nena, q. v.; abl. ~a, often in comp. 
w. kim-°, why? 9,20. 28,34. 53,34; 
manussávasa-karana, „because I have 
had to do with men“, 112,10. — ?) 
event, affair, the state of the case, 
circumstance, fact; acc. ~am (asal- 
lakkhetva) 3,18; (sutva) 24,28; (ñatva) 
35,1; kiūici ~am ajananto, unsuspect- 
ing, 50,177 — ?) doing, making (at the 
end of comp.; sometimes written -kā- 
rana); asanta-paggaha-°, 29,27 (v. 
a-santa). 


kāranā 


kāranā, f. (= sa.) punishment, 
pain, torture (in comp. often shortened 
to kāraņa-); *karana-ghara, m. £ m. 
house of torment, loc. we, 21,15. cp. 
(kamma-) karana. 

karin, mfn. (= sa.) doing, mak- 
ing (at the end of comp.), v. nisamma-°, 
pàpa-?, satacca-?. 

kariya, mfn. (sa. karya) grd. v. 
karoti & a-kariya. 

karuñña, x. (fr. karuna, sa. 
kārunyā) compassion; acc. eam (w. 
loc. brahmane) 16,31; instr. wena 
(tayi) 17.13. 58,14. cp. karuna. 

kāretar, m. (sa. karayitr) one 
who causes something to be done; 
nom. sg. «tà (kammanam) 97,13. 
cp. kattar. 

kāreti, vb. (caus. karoti, sa. 
karayati) to cause to do or to be done 
(acc.), to cause another (acc.) to be 
(acc.), to cause another (acc.) to per- 
form (acc.); periphrastically : rajjam 
~, to reign, to be king (cp. karoti : 
rajjam karotha, 42,6); part. loc. m. 
„ente (rajjam) 1,2; part. med. loc. 
m. kārayamīūne (id.) 5,4; — imp. 2. 
sg. ~ehi (id.) 47,10; — aor. 3. sg. 
esi (rajjam) 19,6; (mangalam) 58,20; 
a-kārayi (yakkhith sapatham) 111,29; 
— ger. „etvā (dānasālā) 38,13; (pu- 
rohitam rājānam) 46,16; (abhisekam, 
g. v.) 36,29. — subst. karetar, m. (v. 
h.); cp. kakkāreti. 

kala, m. (= sa.) time, space or 
point of time, right or proper time; 
death (in the phrase: kālam karoti, 
to die); nom. ~o bhante! the time 
has come, sir! 78,5; abhisambujjhana- 
kalo, 63,7; nekkhamma-kalo, 45,6; 
acc. ~am (ārocāpesi) 78,3; „am 
(akari, died) 80,33; ~am (katvā) 34,55. 
84,30 (cp. kāla-kata, kāla-kiriyā); 
gen. «assa (ass'eva, betimes) 82,17; 
abl. ~ato, comp. tass’ agata-kalato 
patthaya, ,from the day of his com- 
ing“, 18,29; Gotamassa «uppanna- 
kalato patthaya, 72,30; tassa nikkhan- 
ta-9, 9,15; loc. kale (or kalamhi) in 
time, seasonably (opp. vikāle) 9,12; 


74 


kale gacchante, in the course of time, 
14,15. 102,4; tasmin kale, 2,26; pac- 
chime kale, in the hour of death, 
86,18; hemantike kale, in the winter- 
time, 100,24; very frequently in comp. 
w. verbal nouns or pp. : rajabhiseka-°, 
11,6; suriyuggamana-!, 72,29; mahā- 
janassa nagaram pavisana-kāle, 73,12; 
dhītu marana-kāle, 89,15; tava san- 
tikan āgata-kāle (mam ganhāhi) 
3,17; asuka-kāle, 88,25 (v. h.); utthana- 
kalamhi (time to rise) Dh. 280. — 
kalantarena (= sa.), v. antara. — 
kalika. mfn. (g. v.) — a-kāla, m. 
sa.) wrong time; *-pupphani 
(n. pl.) flowers out of season, 37,16; 
*0_vātan, ^. unseasonable wind (con- 
trary wind?) 25,2. 

kala (or kala), mfn. (sa. kala) 
black; m. ~o (puriso) 92,5; ^. pl. 
„jāni (kesani) 47,1. — %-pāsāna-, a 
black rock, 24,3. — *°-vanna-kata, 
mfn. blacked, f. mā (bhūmi) 84,31. 
cp. next & kala-kanni. 

kalaka, mfn. (sa. kalaka) black; 
subst. n. (?) dirt, speck, stain : *apa- 
gata-kalaka, mfn. free from dirt or 
black specks, %. „am (vattham 
suddham) 68,25. 

kāla-kanņī, f. (sa. kāla-karņī) 
ill luck, misfortune; a fatal or ill- 
boding person or thing, a fury; — 
*~i-sakuna, m. a bird of ill omen, 
instr. ena, 12,10; — *-i-salakà, f. 
the lot which points out the guilty 
or fatal person, 23,19. 

*kala-kata, mfn. (= kata-kāla, 
sa. *kāla-krta, cp. kāla-gata) dead; 
acc. M. ~a, a dead person, 63,25; 
loc. „ve (pitari) 22,15. 

kāla-kiriyā, f. (sa. kāla-kriyā 
death; puthujjana-kalakiriyam tē 
katvā, having died like common people, 
87,29. 

kala, f.(sa. kala) name of a certain 
plant, a climbing or creeping plant 
(= kāļa-valli, Comm.); *°-pavala, f. 
a tender stalk (said of a tender maiden), 
47,20. 

kalika, mfn. (== sa.) ‘depending 


15 


on time', future 9: which will not come 
before long (opp. sanditthika, MN. 
I 474,6. SN. I 117,26); ». mà wath 
anudhāvi, 47,10 (cp. bhavitabbam 
ev'etam kathesi, 47,11). 

kāsāva, mfn. (sa. kāshāya, cp. 
kasava) yellow, dark-yellow; x. the 
yellow robe of the Buddhist monks; 
ace. ~at (vattham), Dh. 9—10, — 
*0_-kantha, mfn. ‘yellow-necked’, wea- 
ring the yellow robe; m. pl. «à, Dh. 
307. (cp. SBE. X. 6 Note.) 

Kasi, m. (pl) (sa. Kaci) nom. 
pr. of a country and its people, whose 
capital was Benares (Bārāņasī, g. v.); 
Crattha, m. the kingdom of K., acc. 
eum, 38,21; loc. we, 34,31; °-rattha- 
vasi-manusso, m. a man from K. 35,28. 

Kasika, mfn. (sa. Kacika) com- 
ing from Kasi or Benares; 9-vattha, 
n. Benares-cloth, a sort of fine cotton 
cloth; loc. ~e, 62,29 (cp. Fick, Soc. 
Glied. p. 176). 

kim, pron. interr. m. sa.) 
what? mf. ko, kā. who? which? — 
kim, *) nom. n. 13,13 (~dukkham); 
16,11 (kim nam’ etam); 93,9 (kiñ ca, 
and what?); constructed w. gen. pers. 
& instr. rei == what is one (gen.) 
to do with (instr.) : 31,31 (kin te bhā- 
tara); 32,53 (kim me dukkhena); | 
49,14. 53,34. 59,25. 79,51. 106,10 cte., or | 
only w. instr. 20,29. 111,20; — comp. | 
*kimsaddo nām'esa, „what sort of | 
noise is this“, 60,9; knnsaddo iti 
(apucchi) 112,5; kikāraņā (abl.) 
why? 9,20; kinnāma, mfn. (g. v.); 
kimattham % kimatthaya, v. attha j 
— b) acc. n. kim (cintento) 4,5; (ka- 
rissanti) 7,16; (karomi) 55,6; (mai- 
fiasi) 69,34; kin'ti vyākareyyāsi, 95,6; 
— °) kir (adv.) v. below. — m. nom. 
ko (si tvam) 3,12; (janati) 13,17; 
(ettha) 65,14; (pan’ ettha Nagaseno) 
97,81; (~ nu dipo) 110,31; (< nu 
hāso) Dh. 146; — acc. kam, 254. 
Dh. 353. — f. nom. kā (nama tvar) 
56,10. — instr. *) (m.) n. kena, 16,55. 
35,8. 70,98; ^) adv. why? 22,29. 54,27. 
— instr, (etc.) f. kaya, 29,30 (kathāya). 


kicca 


— gen. m. *) kassa, 98,13; b) kissa, 
36,33 (phalam, scil. rukkhassa). — 
gen. n. (adv.) kissa, why? 101,6. — 
abl. n. (adv.) kasmā, why? 7,7. 87,28. 
— As to the rest the declension is that 
of tain and other pronouns, e. g. instr. 


pl. m. kehi, 74,9. An old neuter form 


kad- has been preserved in kac-ci & 
kad-ariya (g.v.). — kiü carahi, ko 
carahi, v. earahi. — cp. kinca, kiñ- 
cana, ktūcūpi, kiücl, koci etc. 

kim*, adv, interr, (= prec.; in its 
different meanings often combined with 
other particles), — ') = how? 1,5 (kin 
ti); 70,91 (kin ca sabbam adittam); 
74,28 (kim pana, ,how much less“); 
86,29 (kin nu kho bhavissati, how is 
she now, I wonder?); 87,13 (kin nu 
kho); Dh. 146 (kim ānando). -- *) 
= why? l,m. 3,8. 85,32. 88,4 (kim 
nama, why then?). — *) interr. particle 
(introductory of a full sentence) : *) = 
latin. -ne, num; kin jūnāsi, do you 
know? 113,1; kim so sabbarattih 
dipeyya (pof.) 99,18; kim bhavissati, 
Dh. 264; kin nu kho, 38,27 (w. pot. 
siya, should he possibly be?); 89,22. 
97,18; kim pana (by putting forth a 
second question) 89,25. 97,26; kith pana 
(expressive of astonishment) 44,4. — ") 
== latin nonne (w. foll. ‘na’); kin 
te... na vattati, had you not better...” 
1,15; kim na passasi, 111,19; ki ca 
lohitam n'ūpasussaye (pot.) 103,19. 
— °) kih...na... (disjunctive, = 
utrum . . an), 9,24 (kim mata vo anā- 
cāram karoti na karotiti). — *) used 
as a mere interjection, by calling one’s 
attention to a question (without full 
sentence) — now! look here! halloh! 
3,11 (kim bho vanarinda!); 73,16 (kim 
Sundari, kaham gatási). 

kicca, +) mfn. (grd. karoti, sa. 
krtya) to be done or made; n. ~am 
(atappam) Dh.276; kiccar, a-kiccam, 
Dh. 292; kiceákicca, Joc. pl. „esu, 
Dh. 74. — *) x. duty, service, kindness; 
business, purpose, cause, motive, use, 
need; nom. tumhakam vināsena „arh 
n'atthi, „there is no need for“ (instr.) 


kiccha 16 


55,7; acc, eam, 13,25 (service); sa- | gambler, 106,18 = Dh. 252, which 
kicca-ppasuta, mfn. intent upon one's | probably ought to be written kitava 
own business, m. pl. «à, 86,23; kat- | satho, kitavā being nom. (= sa. 
tabba-kicea, ». pl. „the objects of | kitavah) after the analogy of words 
one's mission“, loc. «esu, 114,31. — | ending with -vat (Tr. cp. Jat. VI, 
itthi-°, kata-®, kilamana-%, bhatta-°, | 228,19: kitava sikkhito yathā, in both 
. 2. | instances before ‘s’; gen. ~wassa, SN. 
kiccha, mfn. (sa. krcchra) pain- | I, 244 = Vin. III, 90.) The Comm. 
ful, attended with pain or labour; m. | takes kitavā = kitavāya, but Weber 
„0 (Buddhānari uppado) Dh. 182; | (Ind. Str. I, 158) and Maz Müller 
^. wath (saddhammasavanam) ib. SBE, X, 63) take it for an abl. = 
kiüca, n. pron. indef. (= sa. cp. | vor dem Spielgegner, from the player. 
kiūci) anything; afifiarh kifica yathi- | *kittaka, mfn. (formed after the 
cchitath, whatever else you might wish, | analogy of ettaka ete. Tr. PM. p. 
111,28, | 80, cp. sa. kiyat), how much? how 
kiūcana(m), x. pron. indef. (sa. | many? n. „arh pacāmi, how much 
kim-cana) anything; na wath, nothing, | have I to cook? 57,10. cp. next. 
Dh. 200. 421. — a-kiücana, mfn. | *kittāvatā, adv. (cp. ettāvatā & 
(q. v.). — cp. ākiūcaūīa, n. & sa- | prec.), how far? to what extent? 96,5. 
kiūcana, mfn. kinnara, m. (= sa.) a kind of 
kiūcāpi, indecl. (= så.) certainly, | mythical being, a male fairy, f. ni; 
although, in spite of; ~ na janati (w. | the kinnaras are of extraordinary 
foll. pana) 63,31; ~ so evar vadeyya, | beauty, celebrated dancers and musi- 
100,17 („in spite of what he might | cians (cp. Jat. IV, 252 & 438). — 
say“), | *0.līļhā, f. the grace of a kinnara, 
kifici, P)». pron. indef. (sa. kirn- | instr. waya, 49,12. 
cid) something, anything (whatever); | kinnāma, mfn. (sa. kim-nāman) 
w. foll. negation — nothing; nom. | having what name; m. ~o si bhante, 
yam kifici. .. sabbath taxi (whatso- | what is your name? 96,29, 
ever) 68,27; adj. ~ ditthigatam, 94,6; | kipillika, m. (sa. pipilika, cp. 
acc. api kiūci labhamase (any reward) | pipīlikā) an ant; pl. wa, 60,1. 
13,26; aniiam ~ (v. h.) 7,11; mā kiūīci kimattham & kimatthaya, ». 
vadetha, 55,26; ~ vattum na visahati, | kim & attha 4). 
87,1; adj. na kiūci papam, 104,34; kira, adv. (enclit. — sa. kila) 
na... anumattam ~ dubbhasitam | indeed, really, probably; namely, often 
padam (not even the smallest) 110,12; | to be rendered by „you know“, „you 
instr, kenaci, 73,4; kenacid-eva | see“; „we hear“, „it is said“; or in- 
(karaniyena) 32,13; loc. kismici, Dh. | dicating what the subject concludes 
74. — °) adv. altogether, w. foll. | from facts mentioned or imagined; — 
negation == not at all; sace kiūci | 87,6; evam kir’, 40,5. 51,26; saccam 
āhāram labheyyam, 15,1; na kiūci | kir’ evam, 54,16; na kir’, 31,6; ex- 
abhavissa, 42,11; ~ kàaranam a-ja- | pressive of astonishment: 54,15; in 
nanto, 50,17. — koci, m. (v. h.) cp. | interrogative sentences : 51,7. 68,15. 
kacci & kiūca above. 69,7 (kiráham); after a question : 32,17. 
kinati, vb. (sa. ykri) to buy; | 87,28; — 3,2. 18,5, 28,26. 29,22. 32,9; 
pr. 1. sg. „sāmi (dadhim tava hat- | — 8,8. 11,10. 31,8. 39,14. 54,19. 60,2. 
thato) 101,29 (= I dide not buy); | 61,2-9. 72,37; — ayam pi kira raja 
ger. kinitva, 101,26. yeva, 43,25. 
kitava, m. (= sa.) a gamester, |  kiriyà, f. (sa. kriya) doing; work, 
gambler; kitavüsatho, a fraudulent | undertaking; nom. «à (paññavanti- 


num ijhati) 567,6. — anta-'. kala-, 
sacca-", g. v. 

kilanta, pp. v. next. 

kilamati, eb. (sa. yklam) to 
grow weary, to become tired, to be 
troubled or exhausted; pr. 3. pl. 
anti, 6,21; 7. pl. kimattham ~āma 

(why weary ourselves) 65,2; imper. 3. 
pl. wantu, 60,12. — pp. kilanta, m. 
pl. ~a, 112,28. cp. next. 

kilamatha, m. (sa. klamatha) 
fatigue, exhaustion, suffering; instr. 
appa-kilamathena, 28,12 (v. h.). — 

*atta-° (v. h.) 

*kilamana, n. = prec. — %-kic- 
cam (n'atthi aūūesari, „none shall 
suffer“) 39,16 (cp. kicca). 

kilittha, mfn. (pp. yklig, sa. 
klishta), impure, dirty; ^. impurity; 

*kamma-kilittham, evil karma (opp. 
€-visuddhi) Dh. 15. cp. kilissati & 
kilesa. 

"kilinna, mfn. (pp. yklid, sa. 
klinna), moistened, wet; lālā-kilinna- 
gutta, adj. 65,5. 

kilissati, eb. (sa. yklig) ') to be 
tormented, feel pain, suffer; pot. 3. sg. 
~eyya, Dh. 158. — ?)to be impure 
(through sin); pp. kilittha (g. v.) cp. 
next, 

kilesa, m. (sa. kleca) pain; de- 
pravity, passion; acc. pl. ~e (jahitum) 
44,31; loc. pl. „esu (virattamanasassa) 
64,19-32; sabba-kilesa-darathesu (Joc. 
pl.) „all passions and torments“, 64,21; 
kilesa-vasena, „under the influence of 
passion“, passionately, 20,11; *°-rati, 
f. sensual pleasure, love, acc. «i, 
46,18; instr. wiya, 53,21. 78,18. — 


*eitta-klesa, m. (= °-kilesa), depra- | 


vity of mind, abi. pl. ~wehi, Dh. 88. 
kiloma % kilomaka,x.(sa.kloma 


& kloman) any kind of membrana- | 
ceous tissue, esp. the peritoneum, 


abdomen or paunch; nom. «kan, 
82,3 = 97,21 (cp. Jāt. IV, 292,13. III, 
49 25-25). 

kisa, mfn. (sa. krga) lean, ema- 
ciated; m. ~o (tvam asi) 103,5; acc. 
~am, 106,12 — Dh. 395. 


7 


"nakkhatta-ki 


kiva 


*Kisagotami, f. nom. pr. of a 
therī, a relative of Gotama; nom, ~i 
(khattiyakañña) 64,1; gen. (dat.) 
wlya, 64,25. 
kismici, loc. sg. n., v. kiūci. 
kissa, !) gen. pron. interr. *) adv. 

why, 101,6. v. kim! 
kidisa, mfn. (sa. kidrga) of what 
kind? what like? m. ~o (silacáro) 
43,33; n. ~ai (kammam) 85,12. 

kilati, vb. (sa. ykrīd) to play, 
to sport, to amuse one's self in or by 
(w. loc. or ace. of the name of the play, 
very often a comp. ending with -kila, 
g. v.); pr. 3. sg. „vati (jütam Tam- 
barajena saddhim, plays at dice) 19,10. 
48,5; (nakkhattam, enjoys the festival) 
61,3; 1. pl. wama, 48,23; — part. m. 
~anto, 48,5; gen. nantassa (w. loc. 
jàla-karandake, g. v.) 36,30; part. 
med. m. ~ amano, 7,29; — aor. 3. 
sg. kili (rañña saddhim) 48,21; (pok- 
kharaniyam udaka-kīlain, amused 
himself in the lotus tank) 52,35; — 
inf. ~witum (jutath) 20,4; comp. kilitu- 
kamata, /. 62,5. — caus. kīļāpeti 
(g. v.); cp. next & kila, kīļikā. 

kilana, 2. (sa. kridana) playing; 
C-kile (amhakaii pokkharaniyam) 
53,6; juta-kiluna-, playing at dice, 
20,14. 

kila, f. (sa. kridi), play, sport, 
amusement; frequently last part of 
comp. (object of the verb kīļati): 
udaka-kīļar kili (amused himself by 
bathing) 52,28; uyyāna-kiļādi-gamana, 
n. riding in the park etc, 65,22; ku- 
te kilitva} 44,20 (v775); 

am (anubhavamana, the 

festivities) 61,5; sdlavana-°, 62,15. 
kilapeti, vb. (caus. II. kilati) 
to cause to play, to play with (acc.); 
ger. wetva, (tam, sc. darakam) 58,55. 

*kilika, f. (dimin. fr. kīlā) 
pleasure, excursion; acc. uyyana-kili- 
kam gacchanto (taking a walk in the 
park) 52,18. 

*kīva, indecl. (correl. of yava, cp. 
sa. kiyat & ved. kivat) how much? 
(quanto), w. foll. pi — how much 


— 
— 


ku- 


soever (quamvis); — °-mahanta, mfn. 
how great, acc. n. ~am pi (papakam- 
mam) 51,27. 

ku-, indecl. (— sa.) prefix, im- 
plying deterioration, contempt etc. 
(originally pron. base, cp. kuto). — 
ku-samudda, m. the dreadful or fatal 
sea, ~0, 20,16. (cp. kim, kimsadda). 

kukkuta, m. (= sa.) a cock; 
panjare pakkhitta-kukkuto, a cock 
in a cage, 46,20. 

kucchi, m. & f. (sa. kukshi, m.) 
the belly, womb, uterus; acc. ~it, 
61,21; — abl. màtu-kucchito, 62,25; 
abl. m. ~imhii, 42,23; — loc. m. ~is- 
mim, 38,9; „imhi, 61,31; — instr. f. 
wiya (pariharitva) 62,2; — loc. f. 
Ayam (pakkhipitva, „even if you 
had her inside you“) 50,34. 

kujjhati, vb. (sa. ykrudh) to be- 
come angry; pot. 3. sg. na kujjheyya, 
Dh. 224; aor. 2. pl. mà mayham 
ewittha, 19,31; ger. ~itvā, 33,16; a- 
kujjhitva, 57,25. — pp. kuddha (g. v.), 
cp. kujjhana, kodha. 

*kujjhana, ». becoming angry. 
— °-sila, mfn. prone to anger, irascible; 
f. pl. nā, 52,6. 

kuiüjara. m. (= sa.) an elephant; 
voc. wa, (1,3-4; pl. mā, Dh. 322. 

kuti (& kuti), f. (sa. kuti) a hut, 
a house; nom. ~i (channā) 104,22-25; 
loc. wiyar, 14,29; (eka-)gandha-kuti- 
yam (g. v.) 73,17. 

kutumba, x. (= sa.) household, 
family; acc. wat (vicārentī) 22,15; 
(santhapetum) 56,6. 

kutumbika, m. (— sa. cp. ku- 
tumbin) a householder, paterfamilias 
(esp. of the middle class, cp. Fick, Soc. 
G1. 166); *nahapita-°, m. 28,19 (v. h.). 

kunapa, n. (= sa.) a corpse, a 
dead body; vippaviddha-nana-kunapa- 
bharita, mfn. 65,10. 

kundala, n. (= sa.) a ring, ear- 
ring or bracelet; loc. pl. mani-kun- 
dalesu, precious stones and rings, 
Dh. 346. 

kundika, f. (= sa.) the water- 
pot of an ascetic; loc, wayam, 110,ss. 


78 


kuto, adv. interr. (sa. kutas, cy. 
ku-) !) whence? from where? 21,s. 
55,3. 59,2. 87,35. — *) how much less? 
(latin nedum) : na soko kuto bhayam 
(neither — — nor) Dh. 212. — a-kuto- 
bhaya, mfn. (g. v.). 

*kutta, x. (?) at the end of comp. 
— acting or performing the part of (?). 
— itthi-kutta- „women's wiles“, 21,13. 
(kutta is explained in the commen- 
taries by -katari or kiriya, and is 
synon. w. kutti. f. (sa. krti?); accord- 
ingly it is possibly derived from sa. 
suff. krt). 

kudacanam, adv, (sa. kadā cana) 
ever, at any time; w, negation = 
never at any time; na <, 106,5 — 
Dh. 5; mà ~, 106,5 = Dh. 210. 
cp. kadaci. 

kuddha, mfn. (sa. kruddha, pp. 
Vkrudh, v. kujjhati) angry; m. «o. 
57,28; instr. ena, 11,7; gen. «assa, 
ll,. — a-kuddha, mfn. (g. v.); cp. 
kodha. 

kupita, mfn. (= sa.; pp. kuppati, 
Vkup) offended; angry; m. <o, 74,30. 
cp. kopa. 

kubbato, kubbanam, kubbe- 
tha, v. karoti. 

kumara, m. (= $a.) a son, a 
young man, prince; *-kilam [katvà] 
(having amused himself as prince, cp. 
kila) 44,20; *°-pafiha, x. the novice's 
questions, 82,14; deva-kumara, a son 
of a god, ~ vannin, mfn. 45,26 (v. h.). 
— kumara is often used as last part 
of a mom. pr. == younger, junior, v. 
Ajatasattu-, Brahmadatta-, Siddha- 
ttha-, Sīlava-, Suppāraka-, Susima-. 
cp. kumar. 

*K umara-kassapa, m. nom. pr. 
of a thera; ~o (vicitrakathi) 109,9. 

kumà&ri, f. (= 84.) a young girl; 
acc. «im (daharim) 47,19. ep. ku- 
māra. — dimin. kumārikā, f. (= sa.) 
id. —8, 86,26. 112,14; voc. we, 87,35; 
acc. ~am, 48,19; instr. aya, 86,30. 

kumuda, n. (= sa.) the white 
lotus; acc. „varā (saradikam) Dh. 285. 
— *0-naļa, m. a lotus-stalk, acc. ~am, 


79 


5,18. — *-natta-vanna, mfn. having | 
the colour of the petals of the white 
lotus, acc. pl. ~e (mangala-sindhave) 
63,4. 

kumbha, m. (= sa.) 1) a jar, 
pitcher; *'-"ūpama, mfn. like a jar 
(fragile), acc. wath (kayar) Dh. 40; 
— uda-°, m. a water-pot, —o, Dh. 121. 
?) one of the frontal globes of an ele- 
phant; acc. wath (hatthissa) 77,1. 

kumbhila, m. (sa. kumbhira) a 
crocodile (of the Ganges); <o, 2,26. 
108,27 (ruddadassano); gen. pl. ~a- 
nam, 3,17. — *-raja, m. 1,16 (voc.) 
cp. ràjua. 

kuruüga, m. (sa. kuranga) a kind 
of antelope; *°-miga, m. the k.-deer, 
~o, 11,24; «jataka, p. 11—18. 

kurute, kurumana, v. karoti. 

kula, ». (= sa.) a family, house- 
hold; class or caste in general (v. Fick, 
Soc, Gl, 22, cp. jāti), and more espe- 
cially designation of a family of the 
numerous castes of the middle class 
(merchants and tradesmen, v. kula- 
dhitar & °-putta below); nom. tam 
kulam, Dh. 193; jati-gotta-kula-pa- 
desa, m. 43,30 (v. h.); para-kulesu 
(loc. pl.) „among other people“, Dh. 
73; rāja-kula, x. the king's palace, 
acc. ~am (pavisitva) 58,17; abl. ~ato, 
48,15; loc. ~e, 53,30. — kassaka-', 
8,15; vànija- 30,2; purana-setthi-°, 
55,3 (v. h.). cp. upatthaka-9, 81,11. 
kulin, mfn. (q. v.). 

kula-dhitar, f. (sa. kula-duhitr) 
.the daughter of a respectable family 
(esp. of the middle class); acc. ~aram, 
87,18. cp. next, 

kula-putta, m. (sa. kula-putra) 
a young man of respectable family 
(esp. of the middle class, cp. Fick, 
Soc. Gl. 164); ~o (setthi-putto) 
67,31; acc. ~am, 68,10; gen. ~assa, 
67,25. 

*kula-santaka, mfn. belonging 
to one's family; acc. m. ~am (naga- 
ir 62,4. 

*kulala,m. (cp. sa. kurara & krüra) 
a hawk or falcon; gem. ~assa, 92,20. 


kuhim 


kulàvaka, ». (sa. kulāya, m. + 
-ka) a nest; ~ka, f. (or pl.?) brood 
of birds (=: supanna-potaka, Comm.) 
60,16 (cp. SN. I, p. 8,1 ff.) — viku- 
lāva, mfn. (g. v.). 

kulin, mfn. z sa.) belonging to 
a noble family; *a-kulin, of base ex- 
traction, 102,1 (g. v.). 

*Kuvenī, f. nom. pr. of a female 
yakkha; ~i nama yakkhini, 111,5. 

kusa, m. (sa. kuga) the Kusa-grass 
(Poa Cynosuroides); <o, 26,90; Dh. 
311 (duggahito hattham anukantati); 
nila-kusa-tina, n. dark K.-grass, ~am, 
26,18. 

kusagga, ^. (sa. kugāgra) the 
sharp point of a blade of Kusa-grass; 
instr. ~ena (bhuijetha bhojanai, 
like an ascetic) Dh. 70. 

*Kusamāla, m. (?) nom. pr. of 
an ocean; acc. vam (nama samuddain) 
26,19. = Kusamālin, m. (?), 26,22 (~ 
militi vuccati). cp. Aggimala. 

kusamudda, m. v, ku-. 

kusala, mfn. (sa. kugala) good, 
right; clever, skilful; m. ~o, Dh. 44; 
^. wam, 4,32 (sace..., lee-etam ku- 
salam); ācāra-kusala, mfn. perfect in 
behaviour, m. ~o, Dh. 376; para- 
ppavada-°, skilled in disputation, m. 
~0, 110,5; gen. pl. kusalā-kusalānam 
kammiinam, good and bad deeds, 97,13. 
— subst. n. a good thing, good things, 
good deeds, merit; nom. eaim, 97,12; 
~am bahum, Dh. 53; acc. «un 
katvā, 58,13; instr. wena, Dh. 173; 
gen. ~wassa, Dh, 183. — a-kusala, 
mfn. (g. v.). | 

Kusinara, f. (sa. Kuginagara) 
nom. pr. of a town in Northern India, 
the capital of the Mallas, where Buddha 
died; nā, 78,27; acc. „ari nagaram, 
18,32. 

kusīta, mfn. (sa. kusīda) idle, 
lazy; m. ~o (synon. hinaviriyo) Dh. 
112. 280; acc. ~am, Dh. 7. ‘ep. 
kosajja. 

kusuma, n. (= sa) a flower; 
nīluppalādi-kusuma-dāma-, 47,15. 

*kuhim, adv. interr, (cp. kahan 


Y 


kuhiüci 


& sa. kuha) 1) whereto? ~ me puttam 
nesi, 59,1; ~ gantva, 72,1. — *) where? 
46,5 (~ me mata); 94,15 (~ upa- 
pajjati). 

*kuhitici, adv. (fr. last, cp. sa. 
kuhacid) to any place; na ~. nowhere, 
Dh. 180. 

küta!, mfn. (-= sa.) false, deceit- 
ful. — *kūtatta, m. false suit (cp. 
atta*); °-kiraka, m. a false suitor, 
pl. wa, 42,29. 

kūta* m. & n. (= sa.) summit, 
peak; kāļa-pāsāna-kūta-vanņa, mfn. 
24,31; gaha-kutam, n. Dh. 154; pab- 
bata-kūtā, m. pl. 75,36. cp. Gijjha- 
kuta. 

kūpa!, m. (= sa.) a hole. — loma- 
kūpa, m. a pore of the shin; %-mattam 
pi, 16,10 (v. matta?). 

küpa? & kupaka, m. sa.) 
the mast of a ship; kupagge. on the 
top of the mast, 18,6 (v. agga); pl. 
kūpakā (tayo) 28,29. 

kūla, n. (= sa.) the bank of a 
river; doc. nadī-kūle, 108,24; para- 
kūle, on the opposite bank, 108,29. — 
pamsu-kūla, x. (v. h.). 

kedāra,m. (= sa.) a field; instr. 
pl. wehi, 56,30. 

kevala, mfn. (= sa.) !) alone, 
only. 2) whole, entire, all; ace. m. 
~ai (dhammam) 109,25; gen. wassa 
(dukkhakkhandassa) 66,11-17. 

kevalam, adv. (= sa.) only, 
merely; if only; 88,26; 11,13. 

kesa, m. & n. (sa. keqa m.) the 
hair of the head; acc. «am (ekam) 
46,28; pl. m. wa, 63,11. 82,2. 97,18; 
pl. n. mani (kāļāni) 47,1; gen. ~a- 
nam, 44,24; loc. nesu (gahetvā, by 
the hair) 111,24. — palita-kesa, mfn. 
63,9; muiija-kesa, mfn. 21,5; hata- 
hata-kesa, mfn. 71,29 (q. v.) cp. vi- 
kesika. 

ko, pron. interr. m., v. kin. 

koci(d), pron. indef. m. (subst. 
or adj. = sa. kac-cid) [s. kiüci, q. 
v.| some, any, anybody; w. negation 
== nobody; koci (agunavadi) 43,5; 
kocid eva, only some few, 88,34; 


80 


ŘS MM MM... — .'. lC IM UCM) C AMAASAE£EEESE&A&EEZMAAZZEZESEEEAAMAAMAAAWMAAZA^AzAW2"22«—"————————A——— JA: 


kocid eva satto, id. 89,1; kocid eva 
puriso, some man or other, 99,17. 
100,11; koci (puriso) few persons = 
nobody, Dh. 143; — na koci, nobody, 
8,3. 72,51; koci na, 18,29; ma koci, 
68,3; koci kiñci vattum na visahati, 
87,1; — acc. kajici (a-passitva, a- 
disvā) 13,5. 42,31. 43,6; mā ~, Dh. 
133; — instr. kenaci (asucinā) a-mak- 
khito, 62,29; ~ (na sakkā puiifiam 
samkhātum) Dh. 196; — gen. kassaci 
(pi na) 17,18; ~ an-àgamanabhàvar, 
40,11; na ~, 65,25. 105,8; — combined 
w. other pron. : na añño koci, nobody 
else, 51,8. yo koci (samano) which- 
soever, 110,5; pl. ye keci pana... te 
sabbe, 91,1; ye keci pathavitthita, 
,any earthly being“, 110,11. 

*koūca!, m. or n.(?) name of a 
certain sound, a cry, roar, esp. the 
roaring or trumpeting of an elephant 
(also written kunca (& kunja) cp. 
Vkuc & ykūj & kuñjara; Jat. VI, 
581,1. V, 49,15. VI, 538,8); koiica- 
nada, m. the trumpeting of an ele- 
phant, acc. „am naditva, 61,19. 

koica?, m. (sa. krauiica) a kind 
of heron; pl. jinna-kofica, old herons, 
Dh. 155. 

koti, f. (= sa.) !) end, top, point; 
loc. wiyam thito. last, 17,8. — *atthi- 
koti, the end of a bone, acc. ~it, 
13,20. — vema-®, the part of a loom 
that is moved, loc, wiyam, 89,6. — 
2) the highest number (10 millions); 
asiti-koti-vibhava, mfn. (g. v.). 

kotteti, vb. (sa. Vkutt) to crush, 
pound, grind; ger. ~wetva (tandule) 
57,20. (cp. ākoteti). 

*kottha(ka)!, m. (Birm, read. 
kottaka, which is probably the true 
spelling, cp. kotteti) & certain bird, 
a woodpecker, v. rukkha-kotthaka 
(cp. Jat. VI, 539,9; Ind. Stud. III, 
128; Five Jat. p. 36). 

kotthaka*, m. n. (sa. koshta(ka)) 
8 surrounding wall, any enclosed space, 
reservoir, receptacle for, store-room; 
dvāra-kotthaka, 48,59 (v. h.). 

*kotthāsa, m. a part, portion; 


81 khanti 


ace. wath (ekam, one half part) 58,23, | — *khajjopanaka, m. (akin to sa. 
pl. «à (dve, two companies) 33,20; | khajyotis, khadyota etc.) a firefly; 
ib. 30 (== two portions); acc. pl. we, ; %-sadisā, m. pl. like fireflies, 72,39. 
41,18. '  khaņa.m.(sa.kshaņa) !)an instant, 
*Kotthita, m. nom. pr. of a thera; | moment, the right moment, ~o, 108,6 
„0 (patisambbida [aggo]) 109,10. | (mà upaccagi); acc. tan khanath 
kodanda, m. (= sa.) a kind of | yeva, just at that moment, instantly, 
bow; <o, 92,15. | 17,21. 32,30. 53,12; loc. tasmith khane, 
kodha, m. (sa. krodha) anger; | by this time, 12,20; khane khane, from 
acc. ~ari, 44,8. 106,33 = Dh. 222. — ; time to time, Dh. 239; comp. w. vb. 
a-kkodha, m. mildness (g. v.). — ; nounsor parl.: vanditvà thita-kkhane, 
kodha-vagga, m. the X Vllth chapter | 87,55; khanátita, mfn. who allows the 
of Db, ep. kujjhati. | right moment to pass, pl, nā, 108,7. 
kodhana, mfn. (sa. krodhana) | — *) leisure, state of rest; acc. ~am 
angry. — a-kkodhana, mfn. free from | param, 110,18 (synon. santi). 
anger (4. v.). khanati, vb. (sa. ykhan) to dig, 
kopa, m. (= sa.) anger; acc. ' dig up; pr. 3. sg. wati (mulan) Dh. 
wath akatvā, without getting angry | 247; imp. 2. pl. „atha (do.) 108,1; 
(opp. metta) 40,7. cp. kupita. | ger. witva (āvāte) 39,32. This verb is 
kolāhala, m. (= sa.) uproar, | sometimes written khanati, cp. Olden- 
turmoil; acc. eam (katvā) 73,22. berg, KZ. XXV (1881) p. 326. 
kovida, mf». (== sa.) skilled, Khanda, !)m. n. (= sa.) a piece, 
learned in (gem. or comp.); acc. m. | fragment, section of a book; x. pūva- 
~am (maggamaggassa) Dh. 403; | khandath, a morsel of cake, 53,18. — 
Sambuddha-mata-? (samgham) ex- | 2) mfn. broken; *°-danta, mfn. „bro- 
perienced in the doctrines of Buddha, | ken-toothed", acc. m. «am, 63,8. 
114,13; nirutti-pada-kovida, Dh. 352. | khandeti, vb. (denom. fr. prec., 
(q. v.). | sa. khandayati) to break, to inter= 
kosajja, n. (sa. kausidya; cp. | rupt; — to renounce, to remit (acc.); 
kusita) indolence, sloth; „am, Dh. ger. vetanam wetvit (in stead ot), 
241. 9,25. 
Kosala, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. of | khattiya, m. f. (subst. £ adj., 


a people and its country (north of the | sa. kshatriya) one who belongs to the 
Ganges). — °-rattha, n. the kingdom | warrior (or royal) caste; ~o, 92,10. 
of K, loc. we, 30,29. — %-rājā, m. the | 107,24 — Dh. 387; rājāno khattiye 
king of K.-43,15; gen. -raiifio, 31,1. | (ace. pl), „valiant kings“, Dh. 294. 
— 9-rajja-sannko, id. 43,23. — *C.kaiüna, f. a maid of that caste, 
kosiya, m. (sa. kaugika) an owl | 64,11; „vādīnam, 47,15. — *%-sukhu- 
(= ulüka); ~o, 11,10. māla, m. „a delicate prince“, 97,35. 
klesa, v. kilesa. khattum, indecl. (sa. krtvas) a 
suffix of numeral adverbs, implying 
multiplication („times*); v. ti-kkhat- 
tum. 
khanati, vb., v. khanati. 
khanti, f. (sa. kshānti) !) patience, 
forbearance, forgiveness; "-mettánud- 
daya-sampanno, 7,12. 38,15; nom, 
khanti, Db. 184. — *-bala, mfn. 


Kh. 


khagga, m. (sa. khadga) a sword; 
acc. ~am (gahetvā) 33,4; ?-talena, 
with the flat of the sword, 41,26. — 
mangala-9, a sword of state, acc. | whose strength is patience, acc. m. 
eam, 41,16. wam, Dh. 399. cp. khamati. — ?) 


Páli Glossary. 4 a 


khandha 


acquiescing in, belief, faith, v. aūūa- 
khantika, mfn. 

khandha, m. (sa. skandha) !) the 
shoulder; loc. «e (karitvā) 71,8; 
(-varanassa) 45,31; hatthi-°, on the 
back of an elephant, 102,5. — °) a 
stem, a mass, multitude; v. aggi-kkhan- 
dha, mani-kkhandha. — ?) in the dog- 
matics : *) aggregation; dukkha-kkhan- 
dha, aggregation of misery, acc. ~am, 
108,22; gen. ~assa (samudayo, niro- 
dho) 66,11-18; — b) pl. wa, the five 
constituent elements of a human being, 
viz, rūpa, vedanā, sañña, samkhārā, 
viññana (g. v.) 94,8-10. 95,9. 15. 18. 19; 
99,27 (in one comp.); paüc' upadana- 
kkhandhā, „the fivefold clinging to 
existence", 67,11. 82,10; Joc. „esu, 
98,31 (santesu, q. v.); gen. ~anath, 
Dh. 374 (udayavyayath); — *khan- 
dhā-disa, mfn. like the elements of 
the body, pl. ~a (dukkha, q.v.) Dh. 
202 


khamacti, ob. (sa. yksham) !) to be 
patient, endure; to forgive anything 
(acc.); imp. 2. sg. khama (ekāparā- 
dham) 47,8. — ?) to be fit, to seem 
good to (gen.); yatha te khameyya 
(pot. 3. sg. ,as may seem good to 
you“) 94,28. — caus. v. next. (cp. 
khanti, f.) 

khamapeti, vb. (caus. II. kha- 
mati) to propitiate, conciliate; to ask 
one's (gen.) pardon; ger. wetva (ra- 
Janam) 41,36. 

khaya, x. (sa. kshaya) loss, de- 
struction, extinction; acc. eam (tan- 
hanam) Dh. 154; abi. <à (sabba- 


maññitanam etc.) 94,3. — āsava- 


kkhaya, jati-°, jivita-° (v. h.); tanha- 
kkhaya (v. P cp. khiyati. 

khara!, mfn. (= sa.) hard, rough, 
sharp, painful; m. ~o (ābādho) 78,24; 
f. pl. wa (vedana) 13,12; (sakkhara- 
kathala-valika) 97,55. 

khara?, m. (= sa.) a donkey (= 
gadrabha), a mule, — *°-putta, m. a 
derisive name of a sindhava (q. v.), 


54,19 (voc.); Khara-putta-jātaka, n. 
p. 52 ff. 


82 


khalu, indecl. (== sa., generally 
contracted to kho, g.v.) indeed, surely; 
111,18. 

khāņu(ka), v. khānuka. 

khadaka, m. (= sa.) an eater, 
eating (at the end of comp.); instr, pl. 
lohita-mamsa-khadakehi, 41,34. 

khadati, vb. (sa. ykhad) 1) to eat. 
?) to chew (e. g. tambulam), to gnaw 
(asunder), to grind one's teeth (dante). 
3) to destroy. — pr. 3. sg. wati, 13,23 

vana-mahisam); 106,9 — Dh. 240 
destroys); 1. sg. ~ami, 13,16 (= fut.); 

8. pl. „anti (sassāni) 7,96; — imp. 
2. sg. khada ER 57,26; 2. pl. 
~atha, 6,16 (mamsam), 21,5 (khā- 
daniyam); — part. gen. m. ~antassa, 
53,18; f. pl. —antiyo (dante) 65,6; — 
pot. 3. sg. ciram khādeyya (might long 
have eaten) 9,1; 2. sg. weyyasi, 13,15; 
2. pl. weyyatha, 14,20; — fut. 1. sg. 
ewissami, 4,2-12; 3. pl. ~issanti, 21,30; 
— aor. à. pl. wimsu, 22,1; — inf. 
etum, 1,16. 12,7 (camma-varattam); 
— ger. ~witva, 2,21 (phalani); 41,14 
(tambūlarn). — grd. *) khaditabba; 
tumhehi khāditabbāhārato datva, 
„giving food from your own table“, 
14,19; b) khādaniya (g. v.); — pp. 
khādita (g. v.); — caus. khādāpeti 
(g. v.) cp. khadaka, m. 

khadaniya, x. (sa. khādanīya, 
grd. fr. khadati) hard or solid food 
(opp. bhojaniya, g. v.); acc. ~am 
(khadantassa) 53,17; 78,1; khadaniya- 
bhojaniyam, 18,0. 

khadita, mfn. (pp. khādati) 
eaten, gnawed asunder; m. pl. mā 
(maccha) 5,5; f. pl. nā (varattā) 
12,20. — ""-tthàna, x. eating-place, 
ACC. eam, 52,2. 

*khanuka, m. (often written kha- 
nuka, fr. khāņu or khanu (ykshan?) 
cp. Prākr. khanu, sa. sthanu, Tr. PM. 
58, Note 6, Pischel. Gr. § 309.) a 
stump or trunk; loc. we, 12,25. 

khayati, vb. (pass. ykhyā, sa. 
khyāyate) to seem to be (nom.), to 
have the aspect of, to appear as (viya); 
pr. 3. sg. „ati (uccataro) 3,1; part. 


83 Khuddaka-Pātha 


med. wmana, acc. m. ~am (veluva- 


| (mamsesu) 103,21; fut. 3. sg. ~issati 
nam viya) 26,25; aor. 3. pl. ~ihsu 


| (dhanarir) 48,11.— pp. khina, v. above. 


(aditta-geha-sadisa viya) 65,1. | subst. m. khaya, q. v. (cp. khepeti). 

khāri, f. (= sa.) a certain measure | khira, w. (sa. kshira) milk; nom. 
of capacity (of grain efc.); the provi- | acc. wath, 26,t1-13; (matu ~) 24,32; 
sions of an ascetic, worn by means of | (duyhamanam) 99,28; 106,21 == Dh. 


a yoke (*khāri-kāja, m. (or -kaca, cp. | 71; — *duddha-khira, mfn. one who 
sa. kāca)) = *khari-bhara, m. 30,17 | has milked, 104,21 (m. <o). — khiro- 
(vattito ~o) cp. SBE. XIII, 132. | daka, x. milk-water (v. udaka). — 
khitta, mfn. (pp. khipati, sa. | *°-ghata, wi. a pot of milk, acc. ~at, 
kshipta) thrown, cast; m. ~o (rajo ; 101,26. — *°-paka, mf». drinking milk, 
pativàtam) Dh. 125.  ratti-khitta, | sucking, m. ~o (vaccho mātari) Dh. 
shot by night, m. pl. «à (sara) Dh. | 284 (var. khīra-pāno). %-panņiu, 
304. | m. (sa. kshira-parnin) name of a tree 
khipati, vb. (sa. Vkship) to throw, | whose leaves contain a milky sap, 
cast; pr. 3. sg. ~wati (pasake) 48,8; | Calotropis gigantea, gen. ~ino, 92,17. 
(dalham dalhassa, to repel force by khila, m. (sa. kila & khila) a 
force) 44,1; — fut. 1. sg. „visšāmi | pin, stake, post; pl. ~a (nikhata) 
(bhümiyam sisam te) 5,13; — aor. 3. | 105,17. inda-khila, g. v. 
sg. khipi (khuracakkam tassa sise) khudā, f. (sa. kshudh & kshudhà) 
244; lll,s-14; 3. pl. ~imsu (tam | hunger; v. khuppipāsā. 
samudde) 23,14; — ger. witva, 59,52; khudda & khuddaka, mfn. (sa. 
— pp. khitta (g. v.); — caus. khepeti | kshudra(ka)) small, little, low; trifling, 
& khipapeti (g. v.) cp. khipana, | insignificant; gen. masc. ~kassa (mata, 
hepa. mother of the little child) 99,11. — comp. 
*khipana, x. (fr. khipati) the | O-maiicaka, m. a small or low bed, 
act of throwing or the state of being | loc. we, 42,1; repeated in a dvandva- 
thrown; raūūā (instr. pasaka-khi- | comp. w. anu inserted : khuddānu- 
pana-kàle, when the king was throwing | khuddaküni (x. pl) sikkhāpadāni 
the dice, 48,23. samühantu (samgho), the order may 
*khipapeti, vb. (caus. II. khi- | in the course of time abolish some 
pati) to cause to be thrown or cast; | precepts or other that are of minor 
aor. 3. sg. ~esi (asure Sineru-papate) | consequence, 79,12. | 


59,26; ger. „etvā (jālam, „lowered a *Khudda(ka)-Nikāya, m. name 
net“) 26,1. of a collection of canonical books (the 

khippam, adv, (sa. kshipram) | fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising 
quickly; 27,17. Dh. 137. the foll. books : Khuddaka-Pātha, 


khila, m. (= sa.) stubbornness, 
obduracy; vigata-khila, mfn. free from 
stubbornness, m. ~0, 104,24. 

khina, mfn. (sa. kshīņa; pp. 


| Dhammapada, (Udana), (Itivuttaka), 
Sutta-Nipata, - (Vin ana- Vatt 
(Peta-Vatthu) Thera-Gāthā, Theri- 
Gatha, Jataka, (Niddesa), (Pati- 
khiyati) destroyed; exhausted, sub- | sambhida-Magga), (Apadana), (Bud- 
dued; ^. „arh (mayharh kammam) | dha-Varhsa), Cariyā-Pitaka. Spe- 
241; f. ~a (jāti) 71,15. — khīņāsava, | cimens of these books are found in 
mfn. having subdued the passions (v. | the Reader, except those put within 
asava). — "9-maccha, mfn. without | parentheses, The name Khuddaka- 
fishes, loc. ^. ~e (pallale) Dh. 155. | Nikāya is ‘probably due to the title 

khiyati, vb. (pass. ykshi, sa. | of its first section, viz. Khuddaka- 
kshiyate) to perish, to waste away; | Patha; nom. Khuddanikāyo, 102,16. 
part. med. ~mana, loc, pl. n. mesu *Khuddaka-Pātha, m. name 


6* 


khuppipāsā 84 


of the first section of Khuddaka-Nikāya; 
specimens thereof p. 82,2-11. yoga-kkhema, n. (v. h.). 
khuppipāsā, f. (sa. kshut-pipasa, | khemin, mfn. (sa. kshemin) en- 
cp. khudi) hunger and thirst; wa | joying security or peace; m. ~i, Dh. 
(tatiya senā Mārassa) 103,2. *°-Abhi- | 258. 
bhüta, mfn., v. abhibhavati. | kheļa (or khela), m. (sa. kheta, 
khura, m. (sa. khura & kshura) | cp. kshveda) phlegm, saliva; ~o, 
| 
| 
| 


tranquillity, happiness (of Nibbana); 


1) the hoof of an animal. °) a razor; | 82,5 — 97,25; instr. wena, 57,24. — 
*0.cakka, n. a wheel sharp as a razor, | paggharita-°, mfn. „with trickling 
nom. acc. «am, 23,30-36; — *khura- ! phlegm“, f. pl. wa, 65,5. — *%-mal- 
näsa, mfn. (ep. sa. khura-nasa) having | laka, m. a spitting-box, ~o, 84,15. 


a nose like a razor, m. pl. ~ā (macchā) : — vi-kkhelika, mfn. (g. v.) cp. lala 
25,23; %-nāsika, mfn. id, pl. wit (ma- | & neat. 
nussa) 25,26. cp. next. ' *khelàpaka, m. (var. kheļāsika, 


kshurapra) a kind of arrow; acc. wath, | teeth water’, or ‘eating spittle’ o: a 
92,25. | covetous person or a lick-spittle (?), 
*Khuramāla, m.(?) name of an | used as a term of abuse of Devadatta; 
ocean; °-samudda, m. 25,22 (acc. wath). | gen. «assa, 74,28. %-vāda, m, use ot 
— *Khuramāli(n), m. (?) id. 25,31 | the abusive term khelipaka, calling 
(cp. Aggimāla). one by that name; instr. ~ vüdena, 
khetta, n. (sa. kshetra) a field; | 74,29. (cp. SBE. XX, 239; Dhp. (1855) 
~am, 100,27 (daddham); acc. „ari, | p. 143.) 
8,7; 100,26 (daheyya); pl. ani (tina- kho, adv. (before vowels sometimes 
dosāni) Dh. 356; loc. „esu, 8,9; | khv'-, sa. khalu) an enclitic particle 
sili-yava-khettesu, 8,18. — *khetta- : of ascertainment or emphasis : indeed, 
gopaka, m. a field-watcher; gen. : verily, truly; kho "ti avadhāraņam, 
wassa, 14,5. — khetta-pāla, s. id. | 85,34; abhabbo ~, 69,27; pasada ~, 
gen. ~wassa, 15,19. — "-rakkhaka, m. | 79,29; avyakatam <, 89,23; — after 
(sa. kshetra-raksha) id. pl. wa, 8,18. | pron. : mayhath ~, 2,29; ete ~, 66,28; 
— *0simika, m. the owner of the field, , idam ~, 67,8; so ca <, 61,31 (et 
~0, 100,26. ; quidem); yo ~ evam vadeyya, 92,2; 
khepa, m. (sa. kshepa, cp. khi- | — after a negation: na ~, 28,11; no 
pati) ‘throwing, casting’; loss; *crtta- | ca khv'ūssa, 90,35; mā ~, 92,26; 
kkhepa, m. (cp. sa. manah-kshepa) | mā lrevam ~, 90,24; — combined w. 
loss of mind, perplexity; acc. «am, | foll. pana: na sakkā kho pana, 7,3; 
Dh. 138. | na ~ pana, 9,31. 79,4; api ca kho 
khepeti, vb. (caus. khipati, Vkship) | pana, 32,25; yatha ~ pana, 79,6; siya 
l) to throw away, to do away with | ~ pana, 79,3; — following other par- 
(ace.). *) to pass or while away (kalam, | ticles (atha, pi ete.) esp. in historical 
īyum efc); ger. „etvā (digham | exposition = now, now further : atha 
addhanam), having grown old (?) | kho, 66,3. 76,9. 89,19; tatra kho, 66,24; 
or long time after, 44,21-a3. In ! tipi kho, 22,10; te pi kho, 74,4; Bo- 
this sense Zyenckner takes it = sa. | dhisatto pi kho, 34,1; api ca kho, 
kshapayati, ykshi, PM. 76,2. (cp. x 97,1; evam bhante ti kho, 76,14; — 
x 
i 


khurappa, m (sa. khurapra & x fr. khela + Vāp or à- ypà) lit. ‘whose 
| 
| 
| 


—— —M -—— - -- e n — — — — a UU e e: 


khiyati.) l in interr. sentences (after nu) : kin 
khema, mfn. (sa. kshema) safe, | nu kho, 1,21. 89,22; kacci nu ~, 3,5; 

giving tranquillity, security & happi- | atthi nu ~, 14,26; kahan nu ~, 34,11. 

ness; ^. eut (saranaih) 107,21 = | (cp. khalu.) 

Dh. 189—92. — subst. n., safety, 


8 


G. 


ga, mfn. (= sa., only at the end 
of comp.) going; v. atiga, anuga, 
dugga, paraga. 

(Tanga, f. (= sa.) nom. pr., the 
river Ganges; 1,16; acc. ~am (adho 
ev, q. 9.) 14,34; loc. aya, 1,5; pāra- 
Gangaya. on the other side of the G., 
1,14; — *-nivattane, loc. in a curve 
of the river, 1,1, 

gacchati, vb. (sa. /gam) to go, 
to move, start, go away; to go to (w. 
ace, or adv, (tattha etc. or santikam 
w. gen.); gahetva ~, to go away with; 
— pr. 3. sg. «ati, 6,2 (migavam); 
6,31 (gahetva); 7,30 (santikamh); 47,20 
etc,; 2.59. easi, lu: (= M 88,14 
(gacchasiti janatha, you know where 
l am going); 1. sg. —umi 1,22. 9,12. 
69,19 (Bhagavantam saranam); 78,32 
(~am’aham); 3. pl. «anti, 19,24; 
104,2 (yena, se. maggena); 1. pl. 
„āma (let us go) 39,14; — part. m. 
~anto, 9,11. 34,4 (on his way); ace. 
wantam, 2,27; loc. „ante (kiile) 14,15. 
102,4; f. „antī, 49,5; m. pl. ~ant, 
6,14; gen. m. pl. „antānam, 9,16; 
part. med. f. ~amana, 87,23; f. pl. 
(id.) 23,18; — imp. 2. sg. *) gaccha, 
2,13. 7,1 (wtvam); 75,6 (gacchávuso); 
h) gacchahi, 4,19. 6,35; 2. pl. ~watha, 
4,15. 8,3; — pot. 3. sg. ~weyya (naga- 
ram pattharitvā („would spread 
through the town“) 65,24; parinamam 
~ (yassa), could be digested (by) 78,17; 
2. sg. ~eyyäsi, 7,33; — fut. *) 3. sg. 
gamissati, 58,14; 2. sg. „asi, 7,26. 
77,6. 87,36; 1. sg. ~ami, 1,17. 4,56. 
23,7 (~am’eva); 101,27 (sve gahetva 
m~ „i will come to-morrow and take 
it^); 3. pl. „anti, 104,10; 1. pl. ~ama, 
6,5. 22,4; — >) 2. pl. gacchissatha, 
21,8; — aor. *) 3. sg. a-gama (na- 
bhasā-) 111,1; — *) 3. sg. a-gamasi, 
24. 87,4; 3. pl. a-gamamsu, 8,30. 
23,20; — °) 2. sg. ma gami, 23,7; 2. 
pl. mā gamittha, 39,17; — 4) 3. sg. 
a-gaiichi (nâgañchi, 20,30, probably 
from ā-gacchati, g. v.) cp. Tr. PM. 


w 


0 


| 
x 
x 


— F. F no Ë F c Dn, - 


ganhati 


p. 71—74; — inf. gantum, 35,36. 62,5; 
comp. gantu-kama, mfn. desiring to 
go; m. «0, 50,9 (cp. kama); pl. nā, 
4,18; — ger. gantva, 1,13. 89,7 (moving); 
104,10; a-gantva (not going) 39,6. 
49,7; — grd. gantabba, mfn. ~ai 
(n.) 83,2; — pp. gata (v. h.) cp. ga, 
gati. gama, gamana, gamika, gamin. 

gana, m. (== sa.) a flock, com- 
pany, multitude, number, (herd, swarm); 
mostly at the end of comp. amacca-®, 
39,28; go-gane (ucc. pl.) 21,4; dasi-®, 
21,1; deva-ganena (instr.) 60,23; dvija- 
gani (mom. pl.) 7,20; — bhamara- 
gani (do.) 62,12; miga-gaņam (acc.) 
6,11; sakuna-ganà (pl.) 10,7. cp. nert. 

ganin, mfn. (== sa.) one who has 
attendants; m. maha-gani, a great 
teacher, 109,17 (Anuruddho); m. pl. 
gani (thera), teachers, 109,31. 

ganeti, vb. (sa. Vgan) to count, 
number, reckon; part. m. sg. ganayam 
(gāvo) Dh. 19. 

*ganthika, f. (fr. sa. granthi, 
m.) a knot, tie; acc. „am (patimuī- 
citvā) 82,28. cp. gandiki. 

ganda, m. (— sa.) !) the cheek. 
?) a boil, pimple; a bamp; ~o (utthahi) 
50,20. 

*gandiki, f. (or gandi, also written 
ganthi & ganthika, cp. sa. gandi(ka)) 
a block; dhamma-gandika, f. a block 
for execution, shambles; loc. „āva, 
(sisam thapetva) 6,27; °-tthana, x. 
the place of execution, loc. we, 6,25. 

ganhati (& ganhati), (sa. ygrah) 
to take, seize (acc.) ; to catch, capture, 
14,24. 32,20. 39,15; to acquire, obtain, 
get, 33,25. 52,17. 55,16; to take pos- 
session of, to conquer, win, 35,19. 39,5. 
59,532; to keep, retain, 33,2. 49,21; 
to receive, adopt, 113,19; to assume, 
put on, 58,16; to follow, obey, 9,19. 
52,33; to choose, 1(),s-26; to take upon 
one's self, 7,10. 17,16. — pr. 2. pl. 
ganhatha, 33,9; 1. pl. ~ama (let us 
capture) 39,15; — part. m. ganhanto 
(macche) 14,21; (gocaram, seeking 
food) 52,17; acc. f. ~wantim (attano 
vacanam a-ganhantim, disobeying) 


ganhāpeti 


52,33; — imp. 2.sg. ganha, 1,9; gan- ; 
hāhi, 3,17; 3. sg. «vatu, 10,8. 102,25; 
2. pl. „atha (mūlena, buy it) 18,10; | 
3. pl. mantu, 39,17; — pot. 3. sg. | 
ganheyya, 12,35; 1. sg. ~eyyam, 33,32; : 
— fut. *) 1. sg. gahessami, 39,8; ») 3. | 
sg. ganhissati, 55,8; 2. sg. ~issasi, | 
4,28. 22,32; 1. sg. wissitmi, 2,31. 29,4. 
39,14. 65,32; 1. pl. wissaina, 6,8. 36,22; 
— aor. *) 3. sg. aggahi, ene 3. pl. 
aggahum, 114,30; 5) J. sg. 


86 


vggahesi, ; n 


bhava, 19,18 (v. thāna); gata-gata- 
tthiine (oc.) wherever he went, 8,17; 
gata-gata-kiile, whenever he went, 


| 204. — comp. v. addha-gata, Qu 


(cp. gataddhin below); ujju-°, Dh. 
108; kaya- Dh. 293; ditthi-°, 90,25; 


| nitthaū-gata, Dh. 351 (v. nitthā, f); 


para-°, 104,30;  piirami-°, 109,21; 
Buddha-!, Dh. 296; visathkhara-° 

Dh. 154, -- a-gata, mfn. not gone to. 
not yet frequented; acc. f. wath disam 


62,19; °) 3. sg. ganhi (p: sardu, | (Nibbāna) Dh. 323; purisantaram 


was born) 5,25; (minavikath hatthe) 
51,21; 40,19. 59,2; 2. sg. ganhi, 59,20; 
2. pl. withsu. 18,26. 22,6. 33,8; 2. pl. 


(sa. grahitum) 4,34. 36,8; >) ganhitum, 
1,9. 13,11 (gocarath, to eat); — ger. *) 
gahetvà (sa. grhitvi) 1,22. 4,8. 15. 28. 
7,10 (tassā santakam marana); 8,20 
(nivasam); 12,5 17,16 (arakkham 
(te, gen.) to guard); 22,32; 24,27 | 
(hatthi ~ agate, those who had | 
brought the elephant); >) ganhitva, 
4,19; — pass. (gayhati), part. gayha- 
mana; «ka, mfn. being captured, 
loc. pl. esu (vattakesu) 88,31; 
pp. gahita & gahīta (v. h.). — caus. 
v. ganhapeti & gāhāpeti. cp. gaha”, 
gahana. gāha, gāhin. 

ganhapeti, vb. (caus. II. ganhati) 


to cause to be taken or seized; to pro- 


| 
| 
x 
| 
| 


eure (acc.); part. m. «ento (akiila- : 


phalani) 37,16; ger. ~etva, 39,30. cp. 
gāhāpeti. 

gata, mfn. (pp. gacchati) gone 
. (away), arrived at, directed towards, 
fallen into (acc. or comp.), often used 
as finite tense — went, has gone; m. 
gato. 2,15. 3,38; f. mā (kaham gatāsi) 
49,6; upani- pasada - vara -tala.- gata, 


a-gatam matug&mar „a maid that 
has not seen another man", 48,11. cp. 


| duggata, -saha-gata, su-gata, sugatin. 
~ittha, 18,23. 33,1; — inf. *) gahetum | 


*gataddhin, mfn. (cp. sa. gata- 
dhvan) one who has finished his jour- 


| ney (= addha-gata, v. addhan); 


gen. m. «ino, Dh. 90. 

gati, f. (— sa.) going, moving; 
course, way, esp. the course of fate 
(the five gatis are the several modes 
of receiving existence after death, viz. 
in hell, among animals, petas, men, or 
devas, cp. next); mom. ~i (sakuntā- 
nam ākiise) Dh. 92; atta hi attano 
gati, Dh. 380 (refuge); gati papika, 
the evil way (hell Dh. 310; acc. 
wim, Dh. 420. — a-gati, f. not ad- 
mission; ~ tava tattha, there you 
cannot come, 72,8. — vamka-gatī, 
adj. f. 48,6 (v. h.). cp. duggati, su- 
gati (suggati). 

gatika, mfn. (sa. gatika, n.) at 
the end of comp, = having a certain 
gati (g. v.); niyata-°, mfn. whose 
path is certain, f. nā, 87,30; a-niyata-9, 
87,29 (v. h.). 

gatta, x. (sa. gātra) the body; 
acc. ~am, 84,2; abl. ~ato, 84,3. — 


| lālā-kilinna-”, mfn. 65,6 (v. h,). 


ascended on, 64,12; 7. „arh (patitva : 
ru, fell away) 13,20; subst. n. gatah | 
= gamanam, 51,31, 52,1; instr. wena - 
(kin te afifiattha ~ „why go else- , 
where for that?“) 49,15; loc. m. ee | 
poen *0 -bhāva, m. the being an ass (ep. 


(suriye attham) 32,9; m, pl. nā, 
26,3. 109,5 (gunaggatarm, g. v.); loc. 
pl. «esu (parinitthitim, fullfilled) 
114,31; — gata-tthana, n. = gata- 


| 


gadrabha, m. (sa. gardabha) an 
ass, donkey; m~o. 8,24; acc. ~am, 
8,17; gen. cassa, ib.; gen. pl. Anam, 
113,11; — *0-bhāraka, m. goods car- 
ried by a donkey; imstr. wena, 8,16. 


bhava), acc. ~am, 8,25. — *9-rava 
(or -rava) m. the braying of an ass; 


| ace, ~am, 8,25; instr. -rāvena, 113,10. 


gantabba, gantu-, gantum, 
gantvā, v. gacchati. 

gantha, m. (sa. grantha) ') a 
band, fetter; pl. ~a, fetters (o: desires) 
Dh. 211; sabba-gantha-ppahina, 
mfn. „who has thrown off all fetters", 
gen. m. «assa, Dh. 90. — 2) composi- 
tion, text, book; often opp. to attha : 
abl. ~ato atthato, 114,20 (cp. attha ?). 

*Ganthakara, m. (sa. *grantha 
+ ākāra, lit. a mine of books) nom. 
pr. of a vihāra at Anurüdhapura in 
Ceylon; loc. we, 114,26. 

gandha, m. (— sa.) odour, scent, 
perfume; ~o, 20,16; Dh. 56; pl. nā, 
70,31; acc. pl. we, 41,5. 53,25; instr. 
wehi, 33,3; loc. nesu, 71,9; — maccha- 
gandham (acc.) scent of fish, 14,35; 
catu-jati-°, the four kinds of scent, 
41,5; 9-dhüpa-, 48,0; °-malidini, 
49,14; *-cunnam, 53,26; mala-°, 61,4. 
78,11;  vanna-°, 106,2. 37,30; 
*(sabba-)gandh’apana, m. a perfu- 
mery shop, 48,3; — gandhódaka, x. 
scented water, instr. wena, 20,8 
(dibba-); 38,3; — °-kuti, f. v. sepa- 
rately; — °-jata, n. a sort of perfume; 
gen. pl. ~anam, Dh. 55; — °-tela, n. 
scented oil; instr. ~ena, 37,2; °-tela- 
ppadīpā, 65,3. — *°-paficaiigulika 
(v. h.); — dibba-gandha-puppha, x. 
a flower of heavenly perfume; instr. 
pl. „eh, 20,9. — puppha-®, sīla-0, 
suci-? (g. v.) ep. su-gandha, a-gan- 
dhaka, sa-gandhaka & gandhin. 

gandha-kuti, f. (sa. °-kuti) ‘a 
perfumed house or room', name of a 
room or house occupied by Buddha, 
esp. that made for him by Aniitha- 
pindika in Jetavana; Gotamassa ~- 
samipe, 73,2; Gotamena saddhim 
eka-gandha-kutiyarh (loc.) vasitvā, 
dwelling in private with G., 73,14-17 
(cp. eka^9). (cp. Jat. T, 92,25. Ind. 
Ant. XIV, 140. ZDMG. XL, 65.) 

gandhabba, m. (sa. gandharva) 
!) a Gandharva or heavenly musician; 
«0, Dh. 105; °manusa, pl. Gan- 
dharvas & men, Dh. 420. — *) a singer 
or musician in general; „vo, 19,20; 


T 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


gamana 


acc. wath, 19,21. — 3) x. (9) (sa. gān- 
dharva) music, song; acc. eam (ka- 
roti) 19,26-28. 

gandhin, mfn. (= sa.) fragrant, 
odoriferous; f. candana-gandhini. 
having a scent of sandal wood, 20,21. 

gabbha, m. (sa. garbha) !) em- 
bryo, foetus, child; ~o (kucchimhi 
patitthito) 61,53; itthi-gabbho, a 
female child, id.; purisa-gabbho, a 
male child, ¿b.; paripuņna-gabbhā, 
adj. f. ready to be delivered, 62,3; — 
*gabbha-parihara, m. ‘protection of 
the embryo', a certain ceremony per- 
formed when a woman became preg- 
nant; laddha-9, mfn. duly protected 
while being in the womb, m. ~o, 
42,22 (cp. pariharati); — *gabbha- - 
vutthana, x. delivery; wath, 62,21. — 
?)the womb (cp. kucchi); acc. ~am 
(upeti, to be born) Dh. 335; (upa- 
pajjanti, are born again) Dh. 126; 
abl. ~ato (patthiiya) 48,13. 50,32; — 
gabbha-seyy:i, f. the womb, acc. ~am 
(upessai) 105,20. — °) the interior of 
anything; /oc. gabbhe. at the end of 
comp. : aiigara-°, amid the flame, 15,33. 


| — f) a bed-chamber, any interior cham- 


ber; acc. eai, 53,3; loe. anto-gabbhe, 
65,28; gabbha-dvāra, n. the door of 
the bed-chamber, „am, 65,27; 
sayana-9, siri-? (v. h.) cp. next. 

gabbhini, f. (adj. sa. garbhini) 
pregnant; acc, «im (duggatitthim) 
48,17; 9-migi, f. 6,32. 

gama, (at the end of comp. 
sa.) 1) mfn. going, able to go; v. dü- 
raūgama, mano-pubbaüngama, vehā- 
sangama. °) m. going, course; v. 
atthagama, atthaūgama. 

gamana, ^». (= sa.) going (to or 
away); «am (= gatam) 52,1; acc. 
am (na labhiimi) 108,25; instr. wena 
(saggassa) Dh. 178; loe. uyyānaki- 
ļādi-gamane, 65,22; nibbāna-gamana, 
mfn. leading to Nibbàna, acc. m. ~am 
(maggam) Dh. 289; — *-antarāya, 
M. ~o (me, hindrance to my depar- 
ture) 65,55; — *"-bhava, m. the having 
departed, going away, acc. „arh (aii- 


—— 


gami 88 


ñassa purisassa) 9,13; — *-magga, | gava-, base of the subst. m. f. 
m. way; alio me ~o n'atthi, 3,14; | go, a bull, cow; sometimes used in 
loc. tassa ~e, along his way, 60,6. | comp. (v. below). 
gami, gamittha, gamissati, gavampati, m. (fr. go, gen. pi. 
elc. v. gacchati. | + pati, sa. gavampati) ‘lord of cows’, 
gambhira, mfn. (sa. gabhira & | a bull; 105,12 (usabho „patī). 
gambhira) deep, profound; difficult *gavesaka,mfn.(fr.next) seeking, 
to be perceived; m. ~o (dhammo) | searching; a-guna~°, mfn. 43,16 (v. h.). 
94,24; (Tathāgato) 95,12; — *°-gho-' gavesati, vb. (sa. gaveshate) 
satta, n. (sa. *%-ghoshatva) ‘the having | to seek, search for (acc.); part. m. 
a deep voice’, the being profound in | ~anto (nibbanam) 64,23; Db. 153; 
predication; abl. ~ii, on account of | fut. 2. pl. ~essatha, Dh. 146; inf. 
his profundity (eloquence?) in prea- | wituth, 64,21; adj. gavesaka, gavesin 
ching the law, 113,20; — *°-paiifia, | (9. v.). 
mfn. one whose knowledge is deep, | gavesin, mfn. (sa. gaveshin) 
acc. m. «am, Dh. 403. | seeking, looking for (at the end of 
gamma, mfn. (sa. grāmya, cp. | comp.); kama-?, Dh. 99; para-°, Dh. 
gama) ‘relating to villages’, relating | 355; suci-^, Dh. 245. 
to common people or to sensual plea- ' gaha', x. (sa. grha, cp. geha & 
sures, mean, sensual; m. ~o (anto) | ghara) a house; loc. we („the lay- 
66,26. | man’s life“) 47,26. — gaha-karaka 
Gaya, f. (= sa.) nom. pr. of a , elc. v. below; cp. gihiu. 
city in Behar; Joc. ~āyam (viharati) gaha*, mfn. (sa. graha) seizing, 


10,23. | holding (at the end of comp.), v. am- 
Gayüsisa, x. (sa. Gayāgīrsha) | kusa-ggaha. 

nom. pr. of a mountain near Gaya; gaha-kāraka, m. (sa. grha-ka- 

nom. eam, 70,21; loc. ne, 70,23. raka) ‘a house builder’, metaph. the 


*gayhamanaka, mfn. v. gan- | cause of existence; acc. ~am, Dh. 
hati, pass. ; 153 (Comm. imassa attabhava-gehassa 

garahati, vb. (sa. Vgarh) to re- | kārakam tanhavaddhakim); voc. ~a, 
proach, blame; pp. garalita, m. ~o | ib. 154, (cp. SBE. X. p. 43.) 
(pamado, is blamed) Dh. 30 (gar- | *gaha-kūta, n. (sa. *grha-kuta) 
hito). the peak of a house, roof, ridge; ~am, 

garu, mfn. (sa. guru) heavy; valu- | Dh. 154 (,ridge-pole*, SBE, X, 42). 
able; reverend; m. pl. nū, 109,27. | gahattha, m. (sa. grha-stha) a 
cp. garava & next. | householder, one who leads a layman's 

garuka, mfn. (sa. guruka) heavy, | life; instr. pl. wehi, Db. 404 (opp. 
hard, serious; acc. m. ~ar (abadham) | an-āgāra). 


Dh. 138; (dandam) Dh. 310. gahana, x. (sa. grahana) seizing, 
garhita, v. garahati. catching, getting; grip, hold; ~am 


gala, m. (== sa.) the throat, neck; 


(amhakai su-gahanam, „we have 
e0, 13,11; abl. ~ato (patthaya) 85,30; 


got a very tight grip“) 4,55; °-atthaya, 
loc. we, 13,11; — *°-pariyosana, mfn, | 3,5 (v. attha!); ajjhasaya-gahana- 
forming the end of the throat, n. ~am | ttham, 11,4 (v. 4.); — darudaka-®, 
(mukbatundakam) 18,7; — *-ppa- | 20,18; — nāma-gahaņa-divase, 38,9; 
| 
| 


mana, mfn. going up to the neck, | — maccha-°, 25,35; — hattha-®, 51,14. 
acc. m. pl. we (ūvāte) 39,32. gahana, n. (= sa.) an impervious 

galati, vb. (sa. ygal)'to drip; | wood or thicket, abyss; metaph. im- 
part. galanta, mfn. dripping, n. ~am | purities; ~ar (abbhantaran te) 106,11 
(lohitam) 23,32. = Dh. 394; ditthi-°, a jungle of 


89 güha 


theories or heresy, 94,1; — *9-tthàna, | (loc.) before a v., 8,20; — *9-vara, m. 
^. a place or lair in the jungle, abl. | the best of villages, an excellent v., 
~ato, 6,12; loc. «e, 33,21. acc. eam datva, 45,5; — °-vaisin, m. 

gahapati, m. (& gahapatika, sa. | the inhabitant of a v., pl. ~ino, 8,23-29; 
grhapati) a householder, esp. designa- | — *°-samipe, near a v. 33,23; — 9-sü- 
tion of a man of higher rank within | kara, m. a village pig, ~o, 46,33 
the third caste (cp. kutumbika); | (gutha-kalale nimugga-). — dvara-°, 
setthi ~, 68,31; gen. wissa, 69,9; | paccanta-", matu-° (v. h.) cp. gamma, 
brahmana-gahapatikesu (loc. pl. | nigama. 


dvandva comp.) T5; amacca-brith-. giimika, mfn. (e. c. — sa.) going, 

mana-gahapatike (acc. pl. v. amacca) | wandering, travelling; m. a traveller; 

42,2. cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 165. | pl. ~ii, (Jambudipa-, „passengers 
gahita & gahita, mfn. (pp. i for India“) 28,31. 

ganhati, sa. grhita) seized, taken, . gamin, mfn. (e. e. = sa.) going, 


captured; m. ~o (hatthe) 23,9; pl. | leading to; acc. m. «inam (dukkl- 
eA (-ī-) 111,18; n. pi. gahita-gahi- | ūpasama-/, maggam) 107,20 == Dh. 
tani turiyāni, the various instruments | 191; f. ~ini (dukkha-nirodha-®, 
which they held in their hands, 65,2; í patipadā) 67,17. — apāya-, nibbana-°, 
— "-ārakkha, mfn. carefully guarded ! piira-° (g. v.). 
(v. h.); — n. a grasp, tug; "—-nimit- | gūyati, vb. (sa. ygai) to sing; 
tena, by a tug (v. nimitta) 89,7; — | recite; pr. 3. pl. «anti, 77,1; part. 
dalha-°, duggahita, su-gahita (g. v.). | m. ~anto, 48,5; ger. ~itvā, 48,23; 

| gahetum, gahetva, gahessa- | pp. gita (g. v.) ep. gāthā, geyya. 
mi, v. gaņhati. | girava, m. & m. (fr. garu, sa. 
gatha, f. (= sa.) a verse, stanza; | gaurava, n.) venerableness; reverence, 

| 

| 

| 

| 


„ā (catuppādikā) 102,22; acc. ~am, | respect; Satthu-garavena (instr.) out 
3,25; osana-°, the final stauza, 27,21; | of respect to the teacher, 79,24. 
instr. Aya, 42,18; anantara-gathaya, g alha, mfn. (sa. gadha, pp. ygah, 
in the stanza next following, 26,7; pl. | as to the signification confounded 
nā (satam) Dh. 102; ace. pl. wit, | with ygadh) tight, close, fast; acc. 
2,9. 103,11; ~ayo, 80,80; instr. pl. | m. wath (arakkhath) 48,15; *"-pale- 
wahi, 77,3; — comp. (also shortened | pana, mfn. thickly smeared, 92, 
to gātha-) : *°Avasine, after the: («ena sallena); — *9-bandhana, mfn. 
stanza has been ended, 87,1; — *"-pada. | firmly tied down, acc. m. „am (ban- 
^. & word of a gāthā, „am (ekam) | dhitvà) 39,51; — ati-galha, mfn. (q. 
Dh. 101; — gath’-udan’-itivuttakam | v.) — galham, galhakath, adv. tightly, 
(parts of navangam Satthu-sasanam) | 49,6; 40,19. 
109,55; — *gatha-dvayam, two gathüs, | *gāvī, f. (a younger form of go, 
47,28-29; 114,» (gāthā-); — catuppā- | pl. gāvo) a cow; kapila-gāvi-dāna, 
dika-gātha-jānanaka, m. 102,2. — | n. a gift of tawny cows (to Brahmans), 
Thera-°, Theri-gathà (g. v.). | 61,28. 

gama (& gāmaka), m. (sa. gra- gāvuta, x. (sa. gavyuta) a mea- 
ma(ka)) a village; acc. ~am, 82,23; | sure of length, a quarter of a yojana 
luddassa vasana-°, 12,8; gen. ~assa, | (g. v.) = 80 usabhas (about 5,6 Kilo- 
95,21; loc. ~e, 57,7 (sakala-); 32,8 | mètres); ti-gavuta-ppamana, mfn. 
(gamake); „amhi, 111,4; — *°-jana, | having an extent of three gāvutas, Joc. 
m, the people. of the v., 101,5 (<o); | ~e (padese) 63,23. 
— purāna-gāma-tthāna, x. a ruined gàvo, v. go. 
v. 35,22 (loc. ~e); —.*%-dārakā (m. |  güha, mfn. (e.s. sa. graha) seizing, 
pl.) the village boys, 62,17; — *°-dvare | holding; v. rasmi-ggāha, m. 106,34. 


gāhāpeti 


gāhūpeti, ob. (caus. II. ganhati) 
to cause to take; to cause to be taken, 
seized or fetched: to remove (acc.); 
aor, 8. pl. vesum (uturū sarīre) 62,33; 
ger. ~etva, 16,24. 21,1. 55,14; 59,8 
(darakam mātarā pādesu); w. double 
acc. mahajanam tava katham netvā 


(having caused people to believe your | 


words) 73,9. cp. ganhāpeti. 

gāhin, mfn. (c. c. sa. grāhin) 
grasping after; m. piya-ggahi, Dh. 
209. 

gijjha, m. (sa. grdhra, cp. grdhya) 
a vulture; gen. wassa, 92,19. 

Gij jhakūta, m. (sa. Grdhra-kiita) 
‘the Vulture’s Peak’, nom. pr. of a 
mountain near Rajagaha; 
(pabbatam) 75,31; gen. wassa, 75,33; 
loc. we (Rajagaha-samipe) 84,31. 

gini, m. (= aggi, sa. agni) fire; 
nom. ~i (ahito, nibbuto) 104,22-25. 


gimha, (m.) (sa. grishma) the hot 


season, summer; doc. pl. hemanta-gim- 


hisu (metri causa for -gimhesu 2) in | 


Dh. 286. 


winter and summer; 
next, 


cp. 


*gimhika, mfn. (fr. prec.) relating 


to the summer, made for the summer; 
m. ~o (pasado) 67,25. 

gira, n. & gira, f. (sa. gir, R 
speech, words; nom. „arh (subhanam 
9,31; acc. f. mam (saccam ... yaya) 
Dh. 408. 

girl, m. (== sa.) & mountain; v. 
Nālagiri. 

gilati, vb. (sa. Vgī) to swallow, 
devour; aor. 2. sg. (mā) gilī - 
gu]ain) Dh. 371. 

gilina, mfn. (sa. plāna) sick, ill; 
f. nā, 46,5; m. pl. wa, 6,22; — *ālava, | 
m. (v. h.); — ?- paccaya-bhesajja-, me- 
dicine for the help of the sick, 97,s. 

gihin, m. (sa. grhin) a householder, ' 
one who leads a domestic life; mom. 
pl. gibi (laymen, opp. pabbajita) Dh. 
74. cp. gaha, geha. 

gita, mfn. (== sa, pp. gayati, 

gai) sung, recited; acc, m, ear 
Jesi. mue, a Sriputtádi-?, pro- 
pounded by Š. and others) 113,30. — 


ACC, «am 


90 


n. singing, song; *0_rava, m. sound of 
song, acc. eaim, 112,7; — *"-sadda, 
| fh. id. o (madhura-) 23,33; — *0.ggara, 


m. id. acc. ~am, 19,32; — dvandva- 
comp. nacca-gita-, 64,29. 81,24. 
juta-°, 48, (g. v.). 

gīvā, f. (sa. grīvā) the neck, 
throat; 10,19; acc. ~ar, 4,33; (ukkhi- 
pitva) 40,17. 87,21; loc. waya. ed 
40,18. 111 23; 17,29 (pasarita-°) ; 
mani-vanna-", mfn. „with a neck of 
jewelled sheen“, acc, m. «am (morar) 
10,9. 
| guna, m. (= sa.) kind, quality; 

mi quality, advantage ; virtue, merit; 
| ~w0, 16,15; ace, „arh, 29,9. 30,6. 41,5; 
abl. «ato, („as though they were 
virtues*) 43,1; pl. mā, 41,34; acc. 
EA ee, 424; pabbajita-gune, 63,32; 

Buddhan, 28 15; loc. pl. „esu (vat- 
| tissāmi, to live à good life) 48,1; — 
| sīla-guņācāro, 28,34 (4. v.).— *°-katha, 
f. praise, 31,23 (loc. „āya); 43,6 (acc. 
vat); — anta-°, kima-®, mālā- (4. 
v.) cp. a-guna, sa-guna. 

*gunag gata, f. (sa. *gunāgratā) 
the state of having the best qualities, 
perfection; acc. ~am (gatit) 109,5. 

gutta, mfn. (sa. gupta) guarded, 
protected; m. ~o (dhammassa = 
dhamma-gutto, law-protected, one who 
is well-guarded with respect to the 
| law) Dh. 257 (cp. uratthikassa bhin- 
no, Jat. I 317,21 and the curious 
reading udarassa phaletva, Jat. III 
297,27, 9: udarath assa (?). Otherwise 
Fausbøll & M. Müller who take 

gutta == sa. goptr („guardian of the 
P . n. ~ar (cittam) Dh. 36; 
(nagaram) Dh. 315. — atta- (g. v.) 
cp. gopeti & next. 

gutti, f. (sa. gupti) guarding, 
protecting, protection; mom. indriya- 
gutti, Dh. 375 (v. h.). 

gumba, m. (sa. gulma) a bush; 
a thicket, jungle: the lair of an animal 
in a thicket; rukkha-gumbādayo (pi. 
v. adi) O u: loc, «e, 11,24. 15,4; 
pasdnapittharh nissaya jāta-0, 17,20; 
nivàsa-?, vasana-°, sayana-°, the 


| 


! 


— — ——— —— —— — 


thicket where one is dwelling, 14,15- 
27-38; vana-°, 16,18. 

gula, m. (sa. guda) a globe, ball; 
ayo-gulo, 107, (g. v.) = loha-', 
Dh. 371; mani-°, a jewel, pearl, 5,26. 
18,. 


91 


guhà, f. (= sa.) a hiding-place, | 


cave; the heart; ?-saya, mfn. being | 


hiding in the heart, 2. „ar (cittati) 


gu, mfn. (e. c. = sa.) going; v. 
addha-gu, püra-gü. 


gütha, m. n. (= sa.) feces, dung; | 


*O-kalala, n. 46,33 (9. v.). 


geyya, ^. (sa. geya) a certain | 


kind of the holy scriptures (navafigath 


verse; „am, 109,33. 


geruka, n. & geruka, f. (sa. | 
gairika, ~ka) red chalk; °~a-pari- ; 
kammakata, mfn. „coated with red | 


chalk", f. nā (bhitti) 84,19. 

geha, m. (== sa.) a house; nom. 
~ar, 48,31; dec, ~am (home) 8,23. 
13,6; abl. ~ā, 35,29; ~ato (pesakara-?) 
88,5; loc. ne, 41,23; asuka-?, 58,5; 
9-patana-, falling of the house, 19,16; 
aditta-geha-sadisa, mfn. 65,11 (g. v.) 
cp. gaha, gihin. 

go, m. f. (= sa.) an ox, cow; pi. 
cattle; gen. gavassa, 92,21; nom. pl. 
gāvo, 51,33. 104,27; instr. gohi, 105,28; 
gen. gavai, v. gavampati. cp. gave- 
sati, gāvī & next. 

gogana, m. (= sa.) a herd of 
cattle; acc. pl. we, 21,4. 

gocara, m. (= sa.) !) pasture- 
ground, hunting-ground; pasture, food ; 
nom. ~O (mando) 4,5; ace. «ai, 
18,11; Dh. 135; — *°-tthana, x. id. 
14,11 (loc. ~e); — ""-pasuta, mfn. 
intent on seeking food, m. ~o, 13,13; 
— jala-9, mfn. 1,8 & thala-°, mfn. ib. 
(g. v.). — *) sphere of perception, 
object of sense; ^o, Dh. 92; loc. ~e 
(ariyanam) Db. 22; — ananta-°, mfn. 
Dh. 179 (v. an-anta); — micchà- 
samkappa-9, mfn. & sammā-sam- 
kappa-9, mfn. Dh. 11—12 (v. h.). 

Gotama, m. (sa. Gautama) nom. 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


gopeti 


pr. of Gotama Buddha, by non-Bud- 
dhists mentioned as samano Gotamo, 
71,35. 93,0 etc, and adressed as 
bhavaii Gotamo (mom, in stead of 
the pron. of the second person) 93,27, 
or bho Gotama! (voc.) 89,3; instr. 
bhota Gotamena, 90,15. His mother 
was Miyā: Maya janayi Gotamam, 


| 108,21, his father Suddhodana (64,5), 
Dh. 37. cp. Sattapaņņa-guha, 109,51. | 


and his son Rāhula (64,7). — mahā- 


' Gotama-buddho, 87,7. — *Gotama- 


savakit, m. pl. the disciples of G. 

Dh. 296; gen. wanam, 74,3. cp. 

Bhagavat, Satthar, Sugata. 
Gotamī, f. (sa. Gautami) nom. 


| pr., v. Mahāpajāpatī. 
Satthu-sāsanarmn) mixed prose and | 


gotta, n. (sa. gotra) family, race 


| (more comprehensive than ‘kula’, but 


not so extensive as 'jāti”); instr. wena, 
by family, 106,8 == Dh. 393; 79, 
(by the family name); — evaii-gotta, 
mfn. 92,13 (q. v.); — jati-gotta-kula-, 
43,30. — cp. Kaceāyana-gotta, Vaccha- 
gotta. i 

*godharaņī, f. (adj.) being able 
to be paired (said of a young cow) 
or : being with calf (?); pl. wiyo (pa- 
veniyo) 105,11-11. 

godhā, f. (= sa.) a kind of great 
lizard (which is eaten by poor people); 
nom. sg. —8, 15,20; acc. ~am, 14,30-32. 

gopa, m. (-- sa.) a cowherd, 
herdsman; ~0, 104,20; Dh. 19. ep. 
gopi, f. ` 

gopaka, m. (e. c. — sa.) a guar- 
dian; v. khetta-gopaka. 

gopünasl, f. (= sa.) the wood 
of a thatch; *9-bhogga-sama, mfn. 
„bent like rafter-tree“, acc. f. ~am 
(narim) 47,2. 

gopàla(ka), m. (= sa.) a cow- 
herd; „lo, Dh. 135; gen. ~lakassa, 
101,25. 

gopl, f. (= sa.) a herdsman's 
wife; 104,33. 105,25. cp. gopa, m. 

gopeti, vb. (su. gopayati) to guard, 
protect; pot. 3. sg. (med. or imp. 2. pl.) . 
„ethā (attānam) Dh. 315; pp. gopita, 
mfn. 58,3 (rakkhita-gopita-vatthu). 
cp. gutta. 


gomika 


*gomika, m. (cp. sa. gomin) the 
owner of cows; ~o, 105,28. 


gorakkha, f. (sa. gorakshā) 


. 92 


ghataka, mfn. (= sa.) killing, 
murderer; manussa-°, 76,9 (g. v.). 
*ehatitatta, n. (fr. ghātita, pp. 


cow-keeping, tending cattle; kasi-go- , ghateti; sa. *ghatitatva) the having 
rakkhadini, 21,5. | killed; abl. nā (because I had killed) 
lu.” 


Gh. 


ghacca (grd. = sa. ghatya ?) to 


be killed or destructed; mūla-ghac- | 


cam, adv. (g. v.) cp. ghāteti. 
*ghaüna, x. (fr. sa. ghana, cp. 
hatya & ghānya) killing, destruction; 
atta-ghafifia (g. v.). 
ghata, m. (= sa.) a jar, pot; 


acc. wath, 16,29; kadali-punna-gbata-, | 


plantaintrees set in pots, 62,6; *°-ppa- 
mana, mfn. as large as a waterpot; 
n, wam (ambapakkath) 36,55; khira-®, 
dadhi-?, yagu-?, g. v. 

ghateti, vb. (sa. ghatayati, yghat) 
to connect, unite; ger. ~etva (anu- 
sandhim, q. v.) 32,5; ~etva (vamsam 
osakkamanamh, to restore) 45,17. 

ghata, n. (sa. ghrta) clarified 
butter; acc. ~at, 99,29. 

ghana, 1) mfn. (= sa.) compact, 
hard, firm, dense, thick; acc. ~am 
(pamsum ākotetvā) 40,6; °-sataka, 
m. a thick cloth; acc. ~am, 50,13; 
ekaghana, mfn. (g. v.). — *) m. (= 
sa.) the foetus at a certain stage (the 
last before birth?); gen. «assa, 99,11. 

ghara, n. (sa. grha; cp. gaha & 
geha) a house; nom. „am, 101,5; 
acc, eam, 55,28; abl. «ato, 48,30; 
loc. we, 23,6. 48,19 (We karissami, 
„to keep under lock in the house“); 
pl. <a (= gharani) Dh. 241. 302; 
— '-dvāra, n. a house-door; loc, ne, 
27,27; — *-avaisa, m. (v. h.). -- kā- 
rana- (v. karana); — ñati-% g. v. — 
cp. jantaghara, sayanighara; Maha- 
padhana-ghara. 

ghasa, m. (= sa.) an eater; v. 
mahagghasa. 

ghàna, v. ghàna. 

ghata, m. (= sa.) killing, murder; 
pantha-ghata, m. 32,15 (q. v.). 


ghatin, mfn. (= sa.) killing, 


` murderer; pāņa-ghātī, m. 17,29 (q. v.). 


ghateti, vb. (caus. yhan, gha- 
tayati; cp. hanti) to cause to be killed; 
to slay, kill, slaughter (acc.); pr. 3. 


' 8g. ~eti, Dh. 405; imp. 2. sg. ~ehi 
i (yakkhe) 112,17; ghataya, 112,19; 
: pot. 3. sg. «aye, Dh. 129; 1. sg. 


weyyam, 33,98; ful. 1. sg. essūmī, 
112,18; 3. pl. wessanti, 112,10; aor. 
3. sg. aghatayi, 112,21; 3. pl. gha- 
tayithsu (aññamaññam) 38,22; ger. 
„etvā, 16,30; ghatiya (sabbe yakkhe 
ca ~) 112,9, is probably a modern 
formation (cp. cintiya, fr. cinteti) 
which however more likely ought to 
be corrected thus: sabbe yakkha ca 
ghatiya (m. pl. grd., sa. ghātya). 
cp. ghacca, ghāta etc. 

ghāna, x. (sa. ghrāna) smelling, 
the nose (as the organ of smelling, cp. 
nisi); eam, 70,31; instr. wena (spelt 
ghinena) Dh. 560; Joc. ~asmim. 
71,3. — °-samphassa - vififiandyata- 
nam, the sense of smelling, 72,12 (v. 
āyatana). | 

ghayati, eb. (sa. yghrā) to smell, 
scent; ger. ~witva (maccha-gandhanit) 
14,25. ghina, n. (g. v.) ` 

ghuttha, mfn. (sa. ghushta, pp. 
Vghush; ep. ghoseti) proclaimed; x. 
«an (āsāļhi-nakkhattam ~ ahosi) 
61,2. | 

ghosa, m. (sa. ghosha) sound 
(of speech etc.) v. Buddha-ghosa. 

*ghosatta, x. (fr. prec.; sa. 
*ghoshatva; only e. c.) the having a 
certain sound; gambhira-°, 113,20 
(v. h.). 

ghosavat, mfn. (sa. ghoshavat) 
sounding, roaring; m. ~va (kusam- 
uddo) 20,16. 

ghoseti, vb. (sa. ghoshayati, 


; caus. yghush) to cry aloud, pro- 


claim; aor. 3. sg. „esi, 28,31; ger. | 


„etvā (tikkhattum) 14,26. cp. ghu- 
ttha, ghosa, etc. 


C. 
1) = ti (after prec. -i and be- 


C; 


fore a vowel; sa. -ty-) 74,1; — ?) by | 


elision == ca or ce (v. h.). 

ca, ind. enclit, (= sa.), by elision 
and contraction before vowels: c’ or 
Cā-. 1) and; also (connecting two 
words, whole sentences, or parts of 
sentences) : attham anatthaii ca, Dh. 
256; after a dvandva-comp. pubba- 
parāni ca, Dh. 352; c'ettha, 3,32; 
c'assa, 5,26; only after the third or 
fourth word of a series: 2,10; 114,21; 
after the third and second word: 4,5; 
tato... ca (also) 102,5; in historical 
exposition : tadà ca, now at that time, 
19,4. — *) ca... ca, both... and, 
3,2. 7,15 etc. ; ceva... ca, 16,32. 18,14. 
30,8. 63,10; 107,17 (thrice); connecting 
whole sentences (or parts of sentences) : 
'ti sampaticchitvà ... 'ti ca vutte, 
1,19; 42,12 etc; yo cāyam... yo 
cyan, 66,26; hoti ca na ca hoti, 
89,50; api ca...api ca kho, 96,31 
(v. api); anacoluthic ca... ca, 112,9 
(but see corrections), — *) =: but, 9,2. 
18,31. 108,1 (yo c’etam); often after 
a negation : 2,12, Dh, 54. 190. 256. 
— 4) sometimes = ce, if (g. v.): 96,11 
(tai c'āyam). cp. kiiica. 

cakka, n. (sa. cakra) a wheel; 
pl. „sāni, 98,5. — khura-°, n. (v. k.). 

cakkavattin, m. (sa. cakra-var- 
tin) a sovereign of the world, universal 
monarch; nom. sg. wi (raja) 61,32. 

cakkavala, m. (sa. cakra-vala 
& -vada) a mythical range of moun- 
tuins supposed to encircle the world; 
pl, worlds or spheres (thus encircled) 
of which an infinite number is supposed 
to exist through the space; abl. pl. 
„ehi (aüüehi, from other worlds) 
60,20. 


93 


catu 


| cakkhu, x. (sa. cakshus) the eye; 
| sight, insight (esp. e. c.); nom. sg. 
| wum, 70,25. 71,52; instr. una, Dh. 
! 360; loc. wusmim, 71,5; pl. «uni, 
x 24,16; — dibba-9, ». supernatural vision, 
loc. ~umhi, 109,5; — dhamma-®, n. 
| knowledge of the truth, nom. «um, 
| 68,26; — paūā-", x. intellectual fa- 
| culty, nom. ~um, 88,27; gen. «uno, 
| 88,51; — *"-karani, adj. f. v. karana'; 
— "O-viüiaüna, 2, & *"-samphassa, m. 
| (v. h.); "*9?-samphassa-viüiianáyata- 
| nam, the sense of sight, 72, (cp. 
āyatana). vicakkhu-kamma, g. v. 
cakkhumat, mfn. (sa. cakshush- 
mat) having eyes, seeing, clear-sighted ; 
m. Sg. «mā, Dh, 273; voc. «ma 
| (Buddha) 105,4; pl. ~anto, 69,17. 
| 88,28. 
| cafikama, m. (sa. caükrama, m. 
& wi, f.) walking about; the place 
where one is walking, esp. a covered 
walk or portico; abl. «à (orohitvā) 
68,10. | 
caükamati, ob. (intens. ykram, 
sa. ca kramyate) to walk about, walk 
| up and down; pr. 3. sg. ati, 68,9. 
| 75,33. 
| *camgota(ka), m. a casket, box; 
suvanna-camgotake, loc, in a golden 
casket, 102,24. 
cajati, vb. (sa. ytyaj) to leave, 
abandon, give up, offer; pr. 1. pl. 
ema (asuresu panam) 60,17; pof. 
3, sg. caje (mattasukham) Dh. 290. 
| Cp. caga. 
canda, mfn. (— sa.) fierce, violent, 


passionate; m. ~o (hatthi) 76,3. 

catasso, f. pl. v. catu. 

catu (in comp. also catur) base 
of the numeral pl. m. cattaro, caturo, 
f. catasso, n. cattāri (sa. catvaras 
(acc. caturas), catasras, catvari) = 
four; nom. m. cattaro, 14,10; Dh. 109; 
caturo, 3,26; Dh. 273; acc. cattaro, 
25,21. 45,15; instr. ~uhi, 3,23; gen. 
wunnam, 89,4; — f. catasso, 38,13 
(dānasālā); — x. cattāri, 61,6. 82,9; 
loc. „ūsu, 38,2. 86,32. 91,7. The 
instr. £ loc. — hl, „ūsu are very 


catuttha 94 


frequently spelt x uhi, ~usu; the base caturāsīti, num. f. (sa. catur- 
catur is catur- in comp. w. foll. | aciti) — 84; '-vassa -sahassāni, 
vowel, before cons. the r drops through | 84,000 years, 44,20. (cp. asīti.) 

assimilation, e. g. catuddasa (sa. ca- catu-visati, num. f. (sa. catur- 


tur-daca) which generally (through | vithcati) = 24. — catu-visatima, mfn. 
elision of t) is shortened to cuddasa | the 24th; m. ~o (vaggo) Dh. XXIV. 
(g. v.). — catu-jati-gandha-, the four catu-satthi, num. f. (sa. catuh- 
kinds of scent, 41,5 (cp. corrections). | shashti) = 64; °-matta, mfn. (sa. 


— catuttha, mfn. (v. h. etc.). “matra) being 64 in number; acc. 
catuttha, mfn. (sa. caturtha) | m. pl. ~e, 61,25. 

the fourth; m. loc. we (vāre) 58,7; f. cattāri, cattāro, v. catu. 

nā 8 nl; nom. f. ~i (senā) 108,36; cana & canam, indecl. (sa. cana) 

acc. eai (gātham) 15,35; n. ~ar | a suffix added to interrogatives, mak- 

(adv. = the fourth time) 88,25. — | ing them indefinite; v. kiūcana, ku- 


Ojjhana, 80,1 (v. jhana). 
catuddisa, adv. (abl. loc. sg. = 
aya, or acc. pl. ? cp. sa. catur-digam) 
in or towards the four quarters (of 
.the horizon); 68,31 (assadute uyyo- 
jetvā). cp. disā. 
catu-dvāra, mfn. (sa. catur- 
dvāra) having 4 doors or gates; n. 
~am (nagaram) 23,26; °-jataka, p.22. 
*catu-parisā, f. (sa. *catush- 
parishad) the fourfold assembly, sc. 
of male and female bhikkhus and 
upāsakas; catuparisa-majjhe, amidst 
of an assembly (thus compounded) 86,6. 
catuppada, m. (sa. catushpada) | candanin, mfn. (g. v.). 
a quadruped; <o, 30,8; pl. wa, Tas. candimā, f. (?) or candimas, 
catuppadaka, mfn. (sa. catush- | m. (sa. candramas, m. & candrima, 
padaka) consisting of four parts; f. | f. cp. pūrnimā) the moon; nom. „mā, 
wika gāthā, a four-line stanza, 102,22; | 107,23. Dh. 172. 208. 382. 387. cp. 
catuppādika-gātha-jānanaka, m. one | canda. 


dacanam; shortened to ca, v. kiūca. 
canda, m. (sa. candra) the moon; 
ACC, ~am, 14,16; — °-mandala, n. the 
moon-dise; ~am, 32,31; loc. we, 16,16; 
— punna-°, m. the full-moon; acc. 
~am, 42,3; ?-mukha, mfn. with a 
face like the full-moon, m. <o (Go- 
tamabuddho) 87,6. cp. candima. 
candana, m. £ n. (= sa.) san- 
dal-tree or -wood; n. ~am, Dh, 54— 
55; — *%-gandhin, mfn. having a 
scent of sandal wood; f. ~ini, 20,24; 
— *vilepana, n. perfumed powder 
of sandal wood, ~ar, 23,33. — tagara- 


—.'—— n > —Ə—əə—— ————ə—F aao M 


who remembers one single four-line capala, mfn. (= sa.) trembling, 
stanza (of the holy scriptures), acc, | unsteady; n. ~ar (cittam) Dh. 33, 
~am, 102,27. camara, m. (= sa.) & kind of 

catu-bhāga,m. (sa. caturbhāga), | ox, the Yak; gen. ~assa (vāladhi) 
the fourth part, quarter; acc. ~am | 5,28. 


eti, is worth a quarter, Dh. 108. |, camma, s. (sa. carman) !) skin, 
catur-aūgin, mfn. (= sa. | leather; nom, ~am, 29,9; siha-°, a 
‘having four limbs’, comprising four | lion’s skin, 8,30; instr. wena, 8,18; 
parts; f. ~ini (senā) an army consist- | °-jataka, p. 8; — *°-varatta, f. a 
ing of elephants, chariots, cavalry, | leather-thong, acc. «am, 12,1; — 
and infantry, 36,23; instr. winiya | ""-sataka, m. an ascetic wearing 
senàya, 35,14. (cp. Jat. VI, 275,25.) | clothes of skin; acc. ~am (nama 
catur-aūgula, mfn. ‘(= El paribbajakam) 29,22; "-jātaka, ib. — 
four fingers or four inches broad; m. | ?) a shield; asi-cammar, sword and 
~am kannam (ussāretvā, v. ussāreti) | shield, 75,15. 
83,10. cara, mfn. (= sa.) going, wan- 


95 


dering; v. eka-cara, saddhim-cara. 
(cp. gocara.) 

carana, n. (= sa.) acting, be- | 
haviour; good conduct, virtue; sam- | 
er mfn. Dh. 144 | 
v. h.). | 

carati, vb. (sa. year) ') to go, | 
walk, wander about (w. acc. enrikarn) | 
travel; dwell, live. *)to behave, con- | 
duct one’s self; to practise, exercise, | 
commit (acc. dhammam, anācāram 
ete.) — pr. 3. sg. «ati (gocaram | 
ganhanto) 52,17; (viravantī) 58,21; | 
(kāmesu micchā ~, commits immora- | 
lity) 97,11; 2. sg. nasi, las; 1. sg. | 
e.àmi (sabbaloke) 105,5; (gavesanto | 
~, I am looking for) 64,5; 3. pl. | 
wanti, 104,27; 1. pl. med. carāmase, 
105,25; — part. m. *) caram (nom.) 
travelling, Dh. 61 (caraū ce); Dh. 
305 (eko ~); gen. m. carato, 103,5; 
b) ~anto (dhammam, walking in 
righteousness) 7,25; (samah, g. v.) 
7,26; (bhikkhāya ~, wandering about 
for alms) 29,34; f. acc. —antim, 47,22; 
gen. pl. w~antanam (amhākam) 1,25; 
part, med. m. caramano (carikam, 
wandering) 81,8; — imp. 2. sg. cara 
(dhammam) 7,4; 47,2 (cara, with 
à metri causa); (brahmacariyam, 
lead a holy life) 70,16; — pot. 3. sg. 
2) care (game, dwell) 106,5 = Dh. 
49; (eko ~) Dh. 329; (náiüüesam 
pihayath ~, let him not envy others) 
Dh. 365; (dhammam sucaritam ~, 
practise virtue) Dh. 168; (kāyena 
sucaritam ~) Dh. 231; ») careyya 
(samam) Dh. 142; Dh. 328; — fut. 
1. sg. carissāmi, 92,5; — aor. 3. sg. 
^) a-cari (cārikam) Dh. 326; ")cari 
(anācāram) 9,15; — inf. caritum; 
comp. ~itu-kama, mfn. wanting to 
go (m. ~0, ākāsena, through the air) 
36,10; — ger. e itvà, 2,32. 61,18. 86,5 
(pindaya); a-caritva, Dh. 15b; — 
pp. v. carita. & cinna; — caus. II. 
carāpeti (g. v.) cp. cara, carana, 
cariya; cāraka, carika, carin. 

carahi, indecl. — tarahi (sa. 
tarhi) combined esp. w. interrogatives, 


SS, 
— € pH 


; acting, behaviour, 


cāti 


and also other pron. & adv, — then, 


; in that case; kiñ ~, 90,15; ko a, 97,7. 
| The change of t into c is probably 


due to the frequent combination with 
interrogatives (analogy of kiiica, kiiici, 


; koci etc.) cp. etaralu. 


caràpeti, vb. (caus. II. carati) 
to cause to move; bheriti ~, to beat 


| the drum; ger. wetva, 42,2. 102,26. 


carita, ^». (== sa.; fr. carati) 
conduct; living; 
ekassa caritam, living alone, Dh. 330. 
— duccarita, sucarita (q. v.). 

carima, mfn. (sa. carama) sub- 
sequent, last (opp. pubba); a-carimā, 
mfn. (q. v.) cp. a-pubba. 

cariya, n. & cariyā, f. (mostly 
e. €.; sa. Carya & carya) wandering; 
conduct; — eka-%, f. (v. h.); — kapi- 
raja-°, x. a chapter of Cariyā-pitaka 
(g. v.) 108,23; — nagga-°, f. naked- 
ness, Dh. 141; — brahma-®, x. (v. h.), 
— sama-°, n. (v. h.). 

Cariya-pitaka, n. nom, pr. 
name of the last book of Khuddaka- 
nikaya; specimen thereof 108,25 ff. 

cala, mfn. (= sa.) moving, trem- 
bling, unsteady; a-cala, nic-cala 
(v. h.). | 

calati, vb. (sa. ycal) to be moved; 
to tremble, to be agitated, excited, 
confused, or frightened; fut. 3. pl. 
eissanti (maccha) 19,29; aor. 3. pl. 
eimsu, 19,55; assā kammajavātā ~, 
62,19 (came upon her), — cala, calana, 
cāla (g. v.). 

calana, n. (= Sa.) trembling, 
excitement; «am (macchanam) 19,31. 

cavati, vb. (sa. yeyu) to fall, 
fall away, disappear; to die, esp. to 
pass (through re-birth) from any exi- 
stence into another; ger. ~itva (tato) 
84,3; pp. cuta (g. v.); caus, cāveti 
(Q. v.) cp. cuti. 

cāga, m. (fr. cajati; sa. tyaga) 
leaving, abandoning, giving up; re- 
signing, 'devotedness,  self-sacrifice; 
„0 (tanhaya) 67,16; abl. wa, 94,12; 
gen. ~assa, 29,10. 

*cati, f. a vessel, jar, waterpot; 


cāpa 


madhu-?, a honey-jar, 53,20. cp. Hindi 
cata. 
capa, m. & n. (= sa.) a particular 


kind of bow (dhanu); nom. m. «o, | 


92,15; abl. ~ato, Dh. 320 (metri 
causa ciipato); pl. capa (atikhina, 
q. v.) Dh. 156. 

cāra(ka) % cārika, mfn. (e. c. 
— sd.) wandering about; v. vana- 
ciraka, ākāsa-cārika. 

*cārikā, f. (fr. year) wandering; 
acc. ~ali carati, to wander about 
(said of the mendicant friars) 81,8. 
Dh. 326; ~am pakkāmi (yena Gaya- 
sisam tena, went forth to G.; other- 
wise w. acc. Vin. 1, 80,2) 70,21. 

carin, mfn, (e. c. — sa.) wan- 
dering, living; v. atidhona-°, anu- 
dhamma-?, dhamma-0, bála-sangata-^, 
brahma-?, pamatta-°, saññata-°, 

cala, m. (= sa.) moving, trem- 
bling; v. bhūmi-0. 

cāveti, vb. (caus. cavati; sa. 
cyavayati) to cause to fall (acc.); to 


drive away from (abl.); aor. 3. sg. | 


——— ———————————————— —Ó ÁÀ— 


duttha-°, namita-°, nana-°, patibad. 
dha-°, pamudita-?, pasanna-?, mudu-', 
metta-°, vadhaka-°, vinivarana-^, 
vimutta-°, viratta-°. santa-°, su- 
patitthita-?, suddha-?; — sacitta, x. 
(sa. sva-citta) one's own thought or 
mind, acc. ~am, Dh. 327; °-pariyo- 
dapana, Dh. 183 (v. h.) cp. sa. — 
citta-k(i)lesa ete. (g. v.) cp. cinteti, 
cetas. 

citta? & citra, mfn. (sa. citra) 
variegated, manifold; bright, brilliant, 
excellent; acc. m. „arh (imam lokam) 
Dh. 171; su-eitta, mfn. very brilliant; 
m. pl. ~a (rajaratha) Dh. 151; — 
*citra-pekkhuņa, mfn. having a varie- 
gated tail; acc. m. «am (moram) 
19,10. cp. ati-citra, vi-citra; citta- 
kata cíc. 

*cittakata, mfn. (fr. citta? + 
kata) adorned, decorated, dressed up; 
acc. ~arn (bimbam) Dh. 147. 

*cittak(i)lesa, m. (fr. citta?) 
v. kilesa. | 

*cittakkhepa, m. (fr. citta?) v. 


a-cāvayi (mà mam thànà x, that | khepa. 


he may not drive me away from my 
place) 10444. 

ci, ind. (sa. cid) suffix to inter- 
rogatives, rendering them indefinite; 
v. kacci, kadiici, kiüci, koci; cp. ca, 
cana(m). 


cinna, 1) mfn. (pp. carati; sa. | 


cirna) that has been wandered over; 
practised, performed; cinna-tthāne 
yeva, ,in this old familiar place“, 
1,14. — *) n. deed, good deed; v. sam- 
mukha-^. 


citaka, m. & citaka, f. (sa. | 


Citā, citikā) a heap, pile; a funeral 
pile, pyre; acc. „arh, 34,6. cp. cetiya, 
cīyati (vci). 

citta!, n. (= sa.) thinking, 
thought, intention; mind, heart; «om. 
am (pabbajjaya nami) 65,15; acc. 
~am, 96,27; instr. ~ena (mettena) 
76,34; 80,94; pl. „āni, 7153s. Very 
often used at the end of adj. comp., 
v. an-avatthita-°, an-avassuta - °, 
udagga-', kalla-°, thita-°, tuttha-°, 


*Cittapatali, f. (fr. citta? + 
pātalī) «om. pr. ‘the pied trumpet- 
flower’, name of a tree (kappatthiya- 
rukkha) in the world of Asuras, 59,29; 
loc. ~iyā, ib. 

*cittarucita, mfn. (fr. citta! 
+ rucita) being after one's heart; 
acc. m. ~am (sāmikam) 10,5. 

*Cittalata, f. (fr. atta? + lata) 
nom. pr. of Sakka's garden; -vana- 
sadisa, mfn. equal to the C.-grove in 
Sakka's heaven, 62,14. 

*cittavagga, m. (fr. citta! + 
vagga) name of the third chapter in 
Dhammapada. 

citra, mfn. (= sa.), v. citta*. 

cintana, n. (= sa.) thinking, 
reflecting; care. — *cintanaka, mfn. 
thinking for, taking care of; maccha- 
nam °-bako, 4,10. 

cinteti, vb. (sa. Vcint.) to think, 
reflect; to care for (gen.); pr. 2. sg. 
„esi (amhakar) 4,4; part. m. ~ento 
(nisidi) 4,2; (tumhakam) 4,4; aor. 


97 


3. sg. ~esi, 3,2; 2. sg. ma cintayi 
(etam nissiiya) , „don't worry yourself“, 
49,31; 61,30 (be not anxious); 3. pl. 
~esuil, 6.3; ger. *) netvā, 3,1; P) 
cintiya, 111,18. 112,11. -- cintana (g. 
v.) cp. citta !, cetas. 

cira, mfn. (= sa.) long, lasting 
a long time; acc. m. ~ai (addhanam) 
110,5; — m. adv. ciram, long, for a 
long time; 9,1; 23,34 (long enough); 


59,93 (~jiva); Dh. 248; — dat. adv. | 


cirāya, id. Dh. 342; — *ciragata, 
mfn. v. agata; — cira-ppavasin, mfn. 
long absent; acc. m. ~ vàsim A 
Dh, 219; — a-cira, mfn. (g. v.) cp. 
next, 

cirassam, adv. (sa. cirasya, gen.) 
after a long time, at last; ~ vata bho 
nago nagena sarag:imessati, at last 
we shall see an elephant (sc. of men) 
that can fight a fight with (this) ele- 
phant! 76,33; na cirass'eva or naci- 
rass'eva, shortly after, until in no 
long time, 23,3. 89,1. 

cīyati, vb. (pass. cināti, sa. vei) 
to be gathered, heaped up, acquired, 
constructed; pres. 3. sg. ciyate (= 
sa.) 103,9 (pahūtam (te) ~ puññam). 

civara, n. (== sa.) the robe of 
a Buddhist monk; nom. ~am, 83,8; 
acc. 83,20; patta-civaram, bowl and 
robe, 76,16; civara-° 97,8; — *0-rajju, 
f. a rope for hanging up a robe, acc. 
eum, 83,21; — *°-vamsa, m. a bamboo 
peg for hanging up a robe, acc. ~am, 
83,20. 

cunna, !) mfn. (sa. cürna) pul 
verised, grinded, crushed; cunna- 
vicunna, mfn, severely hurted or in- 
jured, ». ^am (hadayam) 1,85. — °) 
n. aromatic powder; „am, 83,27; 
gandha-°, id. 53,26; gandha-dhūpa- 
cunna-, 48, 30. 

cuta, mfn. (pp. cavati; sa. cyuta) 
fallen; having died or passed from 
one existence into another; m. „O 
(tato) 45,16. — a-ceuto, mfn. (g. v.). 

cuti, f. (sa. cyuti) falling down; 
destruction; acc, ^im (sattānam) Dh. 
419 (opp. upapatti). 


Páli Gloaaarv. 


codeti 


cuddasa, num. (contracted fr. 
catuddassa (v. catu); sa. catur-daca) 
== 14; — cuddasama, mfn. the 14th, 
m. ~o (vaggo) Dh. XIV. 
*Cunda. m. nom. pr. 
(kammāraputta) in 


of a smith 
Pāvā, whom 


Buddha visited before his death; nom. 
~O, 77,30; «cc. mam, 77,21; gen. 


wassa, 77,20. 

ce, ind. (sa. ced) if; most frequently 
combined with other particles (v. sace, 
noce, yalice) and never found at the 
beginning of a sentence; ettha ce te 
mano atthi, 72,21; taŭ c'ayam, 96,11 
(cp. ca); attha ce patthayasi, 104,92 
$4.; puññañ ce puriso kayira, Dh. 118; 
passe ce vipulam sukhai, Dh. 290; 
yañ ce viñňū pasaiisanti...ko tam 
etc. (si quem ..., quis eum...) Dh. 
229: yan ce — than if, 107,3. Dh. 
106, v. yañce; -- api ce or pi ce, 
even if; sakalo pi ce... (n'eva) 16,13; 
alaikato ce pi, Dh. 142 == almikato 
pi ce or: sace alatikato pi; — ti ce 
(in commentaries --- if you ask so) 
835,5: (kim idan ti ce ti aha = viz. 
with the following words; cp. cor- 
rections). 

ceta & cetaka, m. (— sa.) a 
servant, slave; acc. pl. «ke, 55,13. 

cetas, m. n. (?) ( « sa.) mind, 
thought; instr. „asā (vippasannena) 
Dh. 79; gen. ~aso, 80,35. 91,6. 96,12; 
sabba-cetaso, gen. adv. with all one's 
mind, 71,2; («samannāharitvā dham- 
mai 'sunanti). — an-anvahata-cetasa, 
mfn. (g. v.). 

Cetā, m. pl. (sa. Cedi) nom. pr. 
of a people and its country, south of 
the Ganges; ~a, 34,31. cp. next. 

Cetiya!-rattha, n. (cp. sa. 
Cedika) = == prec; acc. eam, 392,14. 

cetiya?, n. (sa. caitya) a sepulehral 
monument, sanctuary, temple, place of 
worship; loc. «e P» pat 86,13; 
pl. „āni, Dh. 188 (ar&ma-rukkha-?). 

codet?, eb. (sa. codayati, caus. 
Veud) to exhort, correct, punish, re- 
prove; to request, ask; imp. 2. sg. 
codaya, Dh. 379 (coday’ attānari, 


P? 


cora 


synon, patimase, ib. & saññamaya, 
380); pp. m. codito, 113,14. 

cora, m. (sa. cora & caura) a 
thief, robber; acc. ~am, 36,22; pi. 
^d, 30,30; acc. pl. ne, ib.; — payut- 
taka-", pesanaka-" (v. h.). — cora- 
rajan, m. gen. —rañño („the ruffianly 
king“) 39,5; — corupaddava, m. 
attack from robbers, ~o, 42,5. 

cori, f. (sa. cori & caurī) a female 
thief; as adj. == thievish, deceitful ; 
pl. «iyo, 51,34. 52,4 (== prodigal, 
extravagant?); gen. pl. „īnam (thi- 
nam) 51,30; — dàraka-", f. a female 
kidnapper, acc. «im, 59,15. 

colaka, m. (sa. coda(ka) & cola- 
(ka)) cloth, rag, esp. a rubbing-cloth 
or mop; acc. ~am, 84,20. 


Ch. 

cha, mfn. (nom. acc. pl.) num. 
(sa. shash (shat)) == 6; 38,13. 82,11; 
the declination is : instr. abl. chahi, 
gen. dat. channam; loc. chasu or 
chassu. cp. mert & chattimsati, 
chabbanna, chabbisati, chalabhinña, 
satthi, solasa. 

chattha, mfn. (sa. shashtha) the 
sixth; f. ~a (sena) 103,2. 

chatthama, mfn. (sa. shash- 
thama) = prec.; acc. f. ^am (gā- 
tham) 54,5. 

chaddana, x. (sa. chardana) 
throwing away, ejecting; kacavara-', 
v. h. 

chaddapeti, vb. (caus. IT. Vchrd) 
to cause to be thrown away; aor. 5. 
sg. nesi (appagghabhandam) cást 
overboard, 26,2. 

chaddeti, vb. (sa. chardayati, 
caus. ychyd) to fling, throw away, 
eject, vomit; to leave, quit, expose, 
reject (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (kaca- 
varam, tassā upari) 50,2;' part. m. 
pl. „entā (matamanussam amaka- 
susane) 40,51; aor. 3. sg. nesi, 50,1; 
8. pl. «esum, 40,32; ger. netvā 


98 


| 


(brāhmaņam magge) 33,18; (sirivi 
bhavath) 47,32; 52,2-4 (rejecting); 
64,23 (gharavasam); 86,21 (āsīvisam 
dandakena); grd. ~etabba, n. ~am 
(samkaram) 84,24; %-bhivam pāpuni, 
42,32 („was deserted“, cp. bhava). — 
| caus, TI. chaddapeti (g. v.) cp. chad- 
dana, x. 
chatta, n. (sa. chattra) a parasol, 
| umbrella, canopy (ensign of royal 
| power); gen. seta-cchattassa hettha, 
under a white canopy, 42,8. cp. cha- 
deti (chad) ete. 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


chattimsati, f. num. (sa. shat- 
trirnĢat) thirty-six; Dh. 339 (Ati 
sota). | 

chadana, x. (= sa.) a thatch, 
roof; loc. pl. „esu (ārūļhā) 76,29. 

chadda, x. (sa. chadman ?) a 
thatch, roof (Abhidhüna.); only in the 
comp. vivatta-cchadda (g. v.). 

chanda, m. (=- sa.) delight, wish, 
will, desire; acc. ~am (na tamhi ~ 
kayirātha, let him not delight in it) 
Dh. 117; chandādi-vasena, according 
to one's will etc. (by chandádi is 
probably meant chanda, dosa, moha, 
bhaya, or the four wrong courses 
(modes of proceeding, agati)) 42,27 (v. 
vasa); — *chanda-jata, mfn. in whom 
desire has sprung up, m, ~o (anak. 
khate) Dh. 218. 

channa!, mfn. (— sa., pp. Vchad, 
cp. chadeti) covered, thatched; f. nā 
(kuti) 104,22 (opp. vivata) — duc- 
channa, mfn. &succhanna, mfn. (g. v.). 

*Channa*, m. !) nom. pr. of 
Buddha’s servant; ~o, 65,15; acc. 
~am, 65,26. — 2) nom. pr. of a certain 
bhikkhu; ~0, 79,14; gen. ~wassa, 79,12. 

*chabbanna, mfn. (fr. cha + 
vanna; sa. *shad-varna) six-coloured; 
gen. pl. —&8nam (ramsinam, the six- 
coloured rays of light emitted from 
Buddha’s body) 87,55. 

chabbisati, f. num. (sa. shad- 
vimgati) = 26; ~ti vagga, Dh. p. 
94, v. 3. — chabbisatima, mfn. the 
26; ~o (vaggo) Dh. XXVI. 

.ehalabhiüüa, mfn. (fr. cha + 


abhiūūā, sa. shad-abhijiia) possessed 
of the six abhijūas, v. abhiūnā. 

chava, !) m. n. (sa. gava) a corpse, 
dead body. — ?) mfn. low, vile, con- 
temptible; gen. m. ~wassa (kheļāpa- 
kassa) 74,98. 

chavi, f. (==: sa.) skin, colour, 
splendour; *chavi-vanna, m. beauty; 
acc, wath, 18,6; — *chavi-santhana, 
n. the appearance of the skin; Joc. 
~e, 85,23 (vannasaddo idha ~ va 
datthabbo, the word vanna is here to 
be understood as complexion); — man- 
gura-cchavi, mfn. (g. v.) cp. anu- 
cchavika, mfn. 

chata, mfn. (== sa., cp. sa. psāta) 
emaciated, hungry; m. pl. <a, 111,31 
(cp. Pischel, Gr. d. Prakr. Spr. 8 328 
& next.) 

*chataka, x. (fr. prec.) hunger; 
"-akara, m. sign of hunger; acc. ~am 
(dassesi, gave them to understand 
that he was hungry) 41,8, 

chadeti, vb. (sa. chadayati, caus. 
ychad) to cover, hide (acc.); pr. 3. 
sg. ~eti (attano vajjani) 106,18 = 
Db. 252; aor. 3. pl. esum (devatii 
potthakamh, rendered the book invisible) 
114,16. cp. chatta, chadana, channa. 

chāyā, f. (= 8a.) shade, shadow; 
nom. «à (anapāyinī) Db. 2; gen. 
~āya (abhavena, on account of the 
absence of shadow (sign of being a 
Yakkba) 59,18; — *sīta-cchāya, mfn. 
(q. v.). 

chijjati, vb. (pass. chindati, 
ychid) to be cut off, to be split, torn, 
destroyed; pr. 3. sg. „ati (vanatho) 
Dh. 284; 3. pl. „anti (hatthapada) 
99,15; ger. ~itva 17,22; repeated : 60,7 
(being mowed down everywhere); pp. 
chinna (q. v.). 

chidda, x. (sa. chidra) a hole, 
leak; fault, defect; acchiddavutti, v. 
a-cchidda, mfn. 

chindati (& a-cchindati), vb. 
(sa. Vehid & à-yechid) to cut off; to 
tear, split, cleave, destroy (acc.); imp. 
2. sg. chinda (pasam) 12,1; 2. pl. 
watha, Dh. 283; — pot. 3. sg. chinde, 


99 


_— MH a — — —  — —— ...... m 


—— rR. — — e —— a... 


ja 


Dh. 370; -- fut. 3. sg. checchati, Dh. 


| 350 (esa-cchecchati, probably fr. 


a-cchindati); — aor. 3. sg. acchidda 
(— acchida, B. acchindi, fr. chindati 
or a-cchindati) Db. 351; — inf. chet- 
tum, 105,15; — ger. *) chinditva (givam) 
4,33; (sisam) 5,12; (dvidhā <. to cut 
in two) 33,18; a-chinditva (vissasam, 
„in unbroken amity“) 13,7; — >) chetva, 
33,31. 105,19; Dh. 283. 369: — °) chet- 
vāna, 47,25; Dh. 346; -- caus. IT. 
chindāpeti, pass. chijjati, pp. chinna 
(g. v.) ep. chidda, cheda. 

chindapeti, vb. (caus. IT. chin- 
dati) to cause to be cut off, to let be 
removed (acc.); ger. ~etva, 36,19. 38,1. 

chinna, mfn. (-- sa., pp. Vchid) 
cut down, torn, split; m. ~o (rukkho) 
Dh. 338; acc. am, 3445; n. ~an 
(musika-cchinnam — thánmi) 25,7; 
chinna-pasibbaka, 18,5; chinna-tata-, 
a sheer precipice, 27,3; chinna-tthana, 
n, a crack, fissure, 91,30; vata-cchinna, 
mfn. driven away by the wind, °-vala- 
haka, m. 40,28 (v. h.). 

chuddha, mfn. (sa. kshubdha, 
Vkshubh) thrown away, rejected; m. 
~0 (kayo) Dh. 41 (Comm. == apa- 
viddho; cp. Jat. V, 302,1. 3084 == 
chaddita). Fausbøll (Bem. p. 19) & 
Trenckner (Mil. p. 422—23) refer it 
to ykshiv —.: Vshthiv; cp. Pischel, Gr. 
d. Prakr. Spr. 8 66 & 120. v. nitthu- 
bhati & nutthubhati below. 

cheka, mfn. (= sa.) clever, 
shrewd ; skilful, skilled in (doc.); instr. 
m. wena (sakunikena) 88,33; mom. 
„0 (anga-vijjàya) 48,16. 

checchati, chetvā, chetvana, 
chettum, v. chindati. 

cheda, m. (— sa.) cutting off; 
interruption, abandonment; āsā-ccheda, 
m, kamma-°, m., sandhi-9, mfn., 
sisa-°, m. (v. h.). 


J 


J. 


ja, mfn. (e. c. sa.) born; v. 
atta-ja, daru-°, dvija (dija), pabba-®, 


7* 


jagati 


yoni-°, vari-°, Sīhabāhu-narinda-. 
cp. jayati. 

jagati. f. (== sa.) the earth, 
world; *jagati-ppadesa, m. a spot in 
the world, ~0, Dh. 127. 

jacca, instr. == jātiyā, v. jati. 

Jaggati, vb. = jagarati (g. v.). 

jajjara, mfn. (sa. jarjara) infirm 
from age, decayed, old; jara-°, mfn. 
(v. h.) cp. jara etc. 

Jañña, mfn. (sa. janya) ‘to be 
born or produced', charming, excellent 
(? cp. MN. I p. 528, ad p. 29,19); 
V. 4-jaūīa & purisājaūa, 

jaūūā, pot. v. janati. 

jata, f. (^^ sa.) the platted or 
matted hair (of an ascetic); Dh. 141; 
instr, pl. «ahi, 106,8 -= Dh. 393. 
cp. next. 

jatila, m. (-- sa.) an ascetic 
(wearing matted hair); instr. pl. 
purana-jatilehi (who had been Jatilas 
before) 70,22. 

jana, m. (== sa.) people (coll. 
sometimes constructed w. pl. of the 
verb), pl. men, persons; nom. ~o, 
106,34 = Dh. 222; Dh. 249 (w. pl. 
dadanti); bahu-jano, many people, 
a multitude of people, the vulgar, 
88,32; bahujjano, id. Dh. 320; maha- 
jano, id. 17,25; mahājana-majjhe, 
before all the people, 61,16; loka- 
mahajano = loko (q. v.) 88,1; acc. 
janam (aūūam  bahukam) 108,19; 
maha-janam, 88,6; gen, janassa. 
110,16; mahā-janassa, 73.13. 87,2; 
loc. maha-jane (among men) 114,15; 
— pl. dve jana, 6,35. 37,15; gen. pl. 
tinnam jananam, 14,13; — gama-jana, 
puthujjana (v. h.) cp. janapada, 
janinda. 

janana, mfn. (e. c. — sa.) pro- 
ducing, causing; bhaya-?, mfn. terrific ; 
m. ~0 (saddo) 27,4. 

janapada, m. (== sa.) !) an in- 
habited country, the country (opp. 
the town), the continent; atc. ~am, 
22,3 (opp. Tambapannadipa); 43,10 
(opp. nagara); rattha-janapada-và- 
sino, m. pl. ,the country people of 


ETT EET ————— —M À—— ——————————— ——————————————————————————————- 
——— MM - 


———————— — -— 


100 


the kingdom", 102,5. — *) a nation, 
tribe; subjects. cp. jànapada. 
janinda, m. (fr. jana + inda; 
sa. janendra) a sovereign, king; voc. 
~a, 47,10 (janiada’ti); 55,1. 
janeti, vb. (caus. yjan, sa. ja- 
nayati, cp. jayati) to bear, bring 
forth (acc.); aor. 3. sg. janayi (Maya 
Gotamam). 108,21. cp. jana, janana. 

*jantaghara, n.a bathing place 
for hot sitting baths; «om. acc. ati), 
83,27-31; abl. nā, 83,35; loc. ne, 83,51; 
°-pitha, x. the chair belonging to the 
jentāghara, acc. „am, 83,28. The 
etymology of this word is not clear; 
Biihler (& Oldenberg) take it — su. 
yantra-grha (an oil-mill) KZ. XXV 
(1881) p. 325, but the prakritizising 
of ya (into ja) is upon the whole very 
questionable and esp. in this case, be- 
cause yanta (sa. yantra) frequently 
occurs in Pali-texts. E. Hardy, (Deut- 
sche Litt. Zeit. 1902 p. 339) refers 
to sa. jentaka (a dry hot bath) the 
etymology of which is likewise un- 
known. cp. SBE. XIII p. 157. 

jantu, m. (= sa.) a creature, 
man, person; nom. ~u, Dh. 107; acc. 
Aum, 106,12 -= Dh. 395; gen. uno, 
106,14 == Dh. 176; Dh. 105. 341. 

Jambu, f. n. (= sa.) !) f. the 
rose apple tree (Eugenia). *) n. the 
fruit of the Jambu tree; instr. pl. 
^ hi, 2,10. 

Jambudipa, m. (sa. Jambu- 
dvipa, the central one of the seven 
continents — the known world) nom. 
pr. of India (sa. Bharata-varsha) ; 
acc. ~ari, 114,32; loc. sakala-Jam- 
budipe, 39,11. 98,13; *°-gamika, mfn. 
(v. h.). 

jambonada, x. (sa. jāmbūnada) 
a kind of gold (from the Jambi river);. 
gen. «assa (nekkham) Dh. 230. 

jamma, mfn. (sa. jalma) !) con- 
temptible, poor, .miserable; m. «o 
(gadrabho) 8,28. *) cruel, fierce; f. 
^1 (tanha) 107,5; acc. «im, 108,1. 

jaya, m. (= 84.) victory; jaya- 
parajaya, m. victory and defeat, acc. 


101 


~am, Dh. 201. — jayam (Dh. 201) 
part. m., v. (jināti &) jeti. 

jara, mfn. (only as first part of 
comp. = sa. jarat) old (an epithet 


implying contempt or vexation); jara- | 


Sakko, 59,31. cp. jirati, jinna d next. 

Jara, f. (+= sa.) old age, decre- 
pitude, decay; «om. nā, 63,13. 67,8; 
instr. «aya, 70,29; — "9-jajjara, m. 
a decrepit old man; acc. «um, 63,8; 
— *jarappatta (sa. *jara-prüpta) mfn. 
decrepit, decayed; gen. f. pl. ~anam. 
47,5; — ?-maranam, n. old age and 
death, 66,10-16; — jāti-jarā, f., jati- 
jarüpaga, mfn., yava-jara, adv, (v. h.). 
— Jarū-vagga, m. the 11 chapter 
of Dh, 

jala. n. (+= sa.) water; instr. 
wena, 110,5; loc. «e (samattho. 


g. V.) 4,11; — *"-gocara, mfn. living ; 
in the water; m. pl. ^a, 1,5; — thala- , 


jala-, 19,22, lona-jala-, 24,16 (v. A.). 
jalati, eb. (sa. yjval) to burn, 
shine; pr. 3. Sg. «ati (aggi) 94,30; 


part. loc. pl. «antesu (padipesu), | 
65,18; pot. 3. sg. ~eyya, 94,9; aor. | 


3. sy. a-jali, 95,7; caus. jaleti & jaleti 
(g. v.). 

jaleti, vb. (caus. fr. prec.) to set 
on fire, light, kindle (acc.); ger. 
„etvii (aggim) 100,34. cp. jaleti. 


java, mfn. (== sa.) quick; Java- | 
sakuna-Jataka, x. (the tale of the | 


dexterous bird) 13,8 (if not java is 
the name of a bird; Z'renckner refers 
to sa. Cavya — vaca, but this seems 
not to agree with rukkha-kotthaka, 


13,10, which is = sa. gatapattra, | 


Jatakamálà p. 235,20). — m, speed; 
instr. wena, quickly, 23,14. 

jaha, mfn. (e. c. — sa.) leaving, 
abandoning; v. sabbafijaha. cp. next. 

jahati (& jahati), vb. (= sa. 
Vhā) to leave, abandon (acc.); pr. 3. 
pl. „anti (okamokam) Dh. 91; pot. 
3. sg. jahe, Dh. 221. 370 (cp. vippa- 
jaheyya); 1. sg. jaheyyam (rajjam) 
8,5; fut. 3. sg. jahissati (attanam, 
will loose his life) 54,30; inf. jahitum, 
44,3. 46,34; ger. hitvā (abalassam, 


jataka 


leaving behind) Dh. 29; (kame) Dh. 
88; Dh. 91. 231. 417; pp. hina (v. 
| h.); caus. hāpeti, pass. hayati (q. v.) 
| 
| 


cp. jaha, mfn. 

jagarati (& jaggati), vb. (sa. 
Vjāgr) to be awake; part. gen. m. 
| Kato, 107» =. Dh. 60; part. med. 
| jāgaramāna, gen. pl. ~anam (sada 
| av, ever watchful) Dh, 226. cp. pati- 
| jaggati & bahujagara. 
| jāta, !)mfn. (-. sa. pp. yjan, cp. 
| jayati & Janeti) born, grown, produced; 
x become (in this sense often used as 
| 
| 
| 


I 
D 
H 


finite tense); m. ~0, 18,28. 34,34. 45,21. 
113,2; instr. «ena (maccena) Dh. 
58; gen. ~assa (,every one that is 
born“) 63,13; loc. „ve (varanarukkhe) 
4,21; ~amhi (atthamhi) Db. 331; 
f. nū, 28,8; acc. ~am, Dh. 340; 
Yakkhinī jatāsi (you have been born 
a Yakkhin) 59,21; 32. wath, 31,234. 
| 49.24; m. pl. ~a (dantā) 12,1; m. 
pl. ~äni (kesani, sisamhi) 47,1; 
comp. piti-somanassa-jatà, adj. f. 
| filled with pleasure and satisfaction, 
i 64,18; pasanapittham nissaya jata- 
| (gumbe) 17,20; -- *jata-divasa, m. 
| birthday, Joc. we, 24,51. 45,21; — 
| chanda-°, mfn., sayai-9, mfn. (g. v.). 
| — ?) n. a kind, sort; gandha-° (v. h.) 
| cp. Jatarüpa & nezt. 

jataka, !) mfn. (== sa.) born; m. 
| a child; nahāpitassa ~o, 25,10 (a 
| bastard). — *) x. *) nom. pr. name of 
| a Pali work, the 10 section of the 
| Khuddaka-nikaya; acc. ~am, 102,16; 
| loc. ~e, 102,20; comp. jatak’-abbhuta- 
| vedallam (parts of the navangam 
| Satthusāsanam) 109,4. The Jātaka 
| is the Book of Birth-Stories, containing 
| 547 tales of the anterior existences 
of Gotama Buddha (jātakāni) and an 
introduction (nidāna-kathā) about the 
legendary history of the Buddhas; cp. 
L. Feer, Étude sur les Jūtakas, IAs. 
| (1875) sēr. 7. vol. V—VI; a useful 
bibliogrāphy is given by II Wenzel, 
JRAS. 1893, p. 351. Specimens are 

found p. 1—60, 72—74; of Nidāna- 

kathā p. 61—65. — ») a tale of the 


jatarüpa 


Jataka-book, consisting of two chief 
parts, viz, paccuppanna-vatthu (story 
of the present) generally in prose only, 
and atita-vatthu (story of the past 
in mixed prose and verses Mw 
together with a verbal commentary 
(atthavannana or atthakatha); the 
tale concludes in a short summary 
(samodhana, identification of the ac- 
tors in the atita-vatthu). Jātaka-tales 
are also found in Cariya-pitaka, 
Buddha-vamsa and passim in other 
holy scriptures (cp. Rhys Davids, 
Buddhist Birth Stories, Introd.), with 
the northern Buddhists in Maha-vastu, 
Jātaka-mālā, Divyāvadāna, Avadana- 
cataka efc. ; numerous scenes of Jataka- 
tales are figured on the Bharhut-Stüpa, 
Boro-Boedoer, and Mangala Cheti Da- 
gāba (cp. the notes of Part I). Spe- 
cimens of Jātakas in their whole ex- 
tent (without commentary) are found 
p. 28-32, a little proof of the verbal 
commentary p. 52,1-7. wath samo- 
dhanesi („identified the birth“) 29,16. 
30,21. 32,5. 

jātarūpa, n. (= sa.) gold; jāta- 
rüpa-rajata-patiggahana, n. accepting 
gold and silver, abl. wii, 81,26. 

jati. f. (- sa.) 1) birth, re-birth, 
(former) existence; nom. wi, 66,10. 
67,8; instr. ~iyā (or jacea, v. below) 
70,29; gen. wiya, 63,13; loc. „iyam 
(atita-°) 85,12; — *°-kkhaya, m. end 
of births, acc. ~am, Dh. 423; — 
*0.jara, f. birth and decay, acc. „ari, 
Dh, 238. 348; °-jar’-upaga, mfn. (v. 
upaga); — *-nirodha, m. cessation 
of births, ~o, 66,16; abl. wa, ib.; 
- *0-paccayā (v. h.); — *°-marana, 
n. birth and death, gen, ~assa, 105,26; 
— *U.samsara, m. the revolution of 
being, 108,18; — *-sambhava, m. 
existence, 17,33; — -ssara- (sa. jāti- 
smara), remembering one’s former 
existences; *°-fiana, n. the power of 
remembering one’s former existences, 
instr, wena, 17,4; — paiica-jati-satani 
(acc. through 500 births — 500 times) 
17,10. — 7) age; instr. jacca == jatiya, by 


102 


age, 47,21. — ?) caste; acc. «im, 111,2: 
(mama jatin ti, my royal lineage); 
instr. jaccā, by caste, 106,5 = Dh. 
393; — °-gotta-kula-padesa, m. posi- 
tion with regard to caste, race and 
family, acc. ~am, 43,30; — °-mant’- 
Upapanna, mfn. (v. upapanna). cp. 
Fick, Soc. Glied. p. 22. — ^) kind, 
sort; catu-jāti-gandha, m. (v. catu, 
cp. jāta, n.). 

jàtu, ade. (= sa.) at all, ever 
(generally explained by ekamse(na) 
or kadāci); tasu ko < vissase, 51,4. 

*janana, x. (nom. act. fr. jānāti) 
knowing, knowledge; °-manta, m. a 
spell of knowledge, acc. ~am, 53,36; 
sabba-ruta-janana-manta, m. 53,14 
(v. ruta). 

*jananaka, mfn. (fr. prec.) know- 
ing, a knower; catuppādika-gātha-', 
v. catuppadaka, 102,97. 

janapada, mfn. (= sa.) living in 
in the country; m. pl, country-people; 
acc. pl. ~e, 6,2 (negama-?); — *jāna- 
paditthi, f. & country-woman, acc. 
eim, 30,28. 

jānāti, eb. (sa. Vjīā) to know, 
understand, learn (acc.); perceive, ob- 
serve; recognize; be aware, find (find 
out); experience (suffer); pr. 3. sg. 
eti (ko ~ kim karissati) 13,17; 
30,6. 32,9. 72,24. 102,25; 2. sg. "asi, 
5,1; 1. sg. wami, 41,33. 51,10. 87,56. 
92,10; 1. sg. med. jane, 113,12; 2. pl. 
witha, 59,15; 3. pl. wanti, 51,35. 
59,30. 104,2; — part. *) (Janam) gen. 
m. jānato, Dh. 384; a-jānato (te) 
101,30; >) m. jànanto, 57,3; pl. nā 
(nama náhesum, no one knew) 19,19; 
a-jananto, not knowing, unaware, un- 
suspecting, 5,1. 50,17; pl. ~a, 21,6; 
f. wanti, 57,24; °) med. pl. m. jàna- 
mana, 17,26; — imp. 2. sg. jānāhi, 
46,8. 72,25 (eva); Dh. 248; 2. pi. 
~watha (find out) 74,5; — pot. *) 2. 
sg. jāneyyāsi, 94,29; 1. sg. jāneyya 
(~ahath) 94,51; 3. pl. „eyyum, 17,28; 
2. pl. weyyatha, 9,14; b) 3. sg. jaūnjā, 
Dh. 157. 352; — fut. 3. sg. „issati, 
56,8; 2. sg. ~issasi (tuyham pattam, 


103 jiva 


old, decayed; m. ~o, 74,20; acc. na 
see to it afterwards) 15,16; — aor. *) 3. | (purisam) 63,15; — °-konca, m. pl. 
sg. aññāsi, v. ajanati; ") 3. pl. jā- | Dh. 155. — mogha-°, m. Dh. 260 
nimsu (tam karanam) 37,5; — ger. *) | (v. h.) cp. parijinna. 

fiatva, 8,20. 8,35. 12,9-26. 33,5. 34,14 | jinnaka, mfn. (sa. jirnaka) old, 
(sabbam). Dh. 12. 22 etc.; ») janitva, | worn out; 7. pl. ~ini (pilotikani) 
50,31; a-jànitva, 53,1; — pass. ñayati, | 57,5. 

pp. ūāta, caus. ūāpeti & jānāpeti | jita, mfn. (pp. jeti & jināti; — 

| 


suffer) 6,35; 1. sg. ~issami (paccha, 


(g. v.) ep. ñana, ūātaka, nati, iiu, | sa.) conquered; atta jitan seyyo 
& janana(ka). „one’s own self conquered is better“) 
jànapeti, eb. (caus. II. janati) | Dh. 104 (where jitam is an old 
to let know, to inform any one (acc.); | nasalized form instead of m. jito, cp. 
imp. 2. sg. ~ehi (nam) 55,23; ger. | Dhpd. (1855) p. 287; Kuhn, Beitr. 
„etvā (tam) ib. cp. ūāpeti. p. 59); acc. m. wah (Maran) Dh. 
jāni, f. (sa. jyāni; fr. japeti, yjyā) | 40; — subst. n. victory; Dh. 179; 
1) loss (of property), amercement. ?) | acc. wah, Dh. 105 (opp. apajitaiit). 
growing old, infirmity; acc. ~im, Dh. Jina. m. (:.: sa.) ‘victor’, epithet 
138. l of the Buddha; °-sasana, x. the doc- 
jayati, vb. (= sa. yjan) to be | trine of Buddha; acc. wam (navaiigaih) 
born; pr. 3. sg. —ati, Dh. 193; «ati, | 109,22 (--- Satthu-sāsanari, 109,32); 
Dh. 212 foll. Dh. 282 foll. (birm. | loc. ~e, 109. 
read. ete); pot. 3. sg. med. ~etha, | jiniiti (& jeti, g. v.) vb. (sa. Vjyā 
Dh. 58; aor. 3. sg. jāyi, 45,22; pp. | & yji) to win; to conquer, overcome 
jata, grd. jañña (v. h.); caus. janeti | (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~māti (niccam) 
(q. v.) cp. jataka, jati, jana ete. | 48,9; Dh. 354 (sabbadānari, exceeds); 
jara, m. (= sa.) a paramour, lover; | 103,32 (nai); — pot. 3. sg. jine 
acc. eam, 51,1. (kodham) 44,5; 107,5 = Dh. 103; 
jala, n. (= sa.) a net, snare; | aor. 3. sg. a-jini, Dh. 3; pass. jiyati, 
cob-web; wire-net, lattice; acc. ~am | v. parājiyati. 
(khipāpetvā) 26,1; Dh. 347 (cob-web); jiyā, f. (sa. jyā) a bow-string; acc. 
antojālam, 88,55 (v. anto); suvanna-°, | ~am, 92,15. 
a golden net, 62,925 instr. ~ena, 88,31; jivha, f. (sa. jihvā) the tongue; 
62,2; (suvanna-°); 88,5 (Mara-°); | 70,3. Dh. 65; instr. aya, Dh. 360; 
abl. ~ato (muecati) 88,31; "-mutto | loe. waya, Tl, ; — "-samphassa-viii- 
(sakunto) 88,30; — *ūāna-jāla, n. the | ūāņāyatanari, 72,15, the sense of taste 
limits of one's perception; gen. ~assa | (cp. ayatana). 
(anto pavittham disva, calling her jiyati, vb, !) . jirati (g. v.) — 
into his mind) 86,28; — ""-karandaka, | *) pass. jinati & jeti, v. parajiyati. 
m. (v. h.). jirati, vb. (sa. yjr, jiryati) to 
jalin, mfn. (= sa.) ‘having a net’, | grow old, become decrepit; pr. 3. sg. 
ensnaring, deceptive, fascinating; f. | „ati, Dh. 152; 3. pl. „anti, Dh. 


~ini (tanhā) Dh. 180. 151 (are destroyed); pp. jinna (q. v.) 
jaleti, vb. (caus. jalati) to cause | cp. jara, jara, jajjara. 

to burn or shine (acc.); pr. 3. pl. jiva, m. n. (= sa.) !) n. life, soul; 

~wenti (dipam) 37,2 (cp. jaleti). nom. ~ar, 89,28-as (opp. sariram); 


ji, mfn. (e. c. — sa. jit) winning, | acc. ~am, 103,17; — yavajivam, adv. 
victorious; v. saiigāmaji (cp. jināti). | all the life long, 13,7. Dh. 64; — 
jigacchā, f.(sa. jighatsā) hunger; | dujjiva, sujiva, mfn. (g. v.). — ?) m. 
Dh. 203 (var. B. digacchā). a living being; ?-loka, m. living beings; 
jinna, mfn. (pp. jirati; sa. jirna) | <o, 47,17. 


104 


jīvati 


| jivàti, vb, (sa. yjiv) to live: to | 


Jive by, subsist on (nissāya); pr. +: 
sg. nasi, 13,29; 1. sg. med. (or pot.) 
jive. 103,34; 1. pl. nama, Dh. 197; 
part, m. jivam, 108,7; f. med. jiva- 
mana, 31,17; pot. 3. sg. jive, Dh. 110 
(4. sg. 103,4 ?); imp. 3. sg. jiva 


1. sg. wissami (rajanari nissdya „n 
the king's service“) 24,18; inf. itum 


(asakkonta) 39,1; jivitu-kāma. mfn. : 


loving life, m. ~o, Dh. 123. ep. jiva, 
jivika, jivita, jvim. 


jīvikā, f. (= sa.) livelihood: ace. . 


eam (kappesi, kasikammena) 8.15. 


jivita, x. (=: sa.) life; nom. wal, | 


86,15; acc. eam, 4,33; abl. nā, 75,3; 


— -kkhaya, m., death; ace. ~am, 4,22} ` 
— *9-dāna, n. saving one’s life; ace. ' 


„arh (dassāmi) 12,26; 42,12. — *°-pa- 


*letthaka, mf(n) -= pree p 
niyyamaka-jetthako, 24,11; -kanitth, 


| (C. pl. m, two brothers, 32,21 (y 


kanittha); ?-tapasa, m. ace. Kau 
35,2; "-bhatika, m. aec. ^am, 32; 

Jetavana, n. nom. pr. of a garde: 
near Sivatthi, bought from prince Jet; 


— . 11 „1033; fut. : (a son of Pasenadi) by Anathapindik: 
(cina) iiu Ms ne ; : who built a monastery there and pre: 


' sented it to Buddha (Jat. 1 p. 9» 


II, 216); acc. ~a, 86,26; abl. «à 
87.3; loc. we, 28,2; — "-Abhimukhi 


_ f. 73,13 (v. abhimukha): — 9-magga 


m. the road from J. acc. ~am, 73, 

jeti, vb. (sa. jayati, yji; cp. jināti) 
to win; to conquer, overcome, exceed 
(aev.); pr. 3. sg. jeti (sādhum sādhuna) 
„pays good with goodness“, 44,2; part, 
m. jayaih (the victor) Dh. 201; pot. 
3. sg. jeyya (jeyya-m-attānari, con- 


tilabha, m. rescue, escape, ~o, 42,10; | | 
— "C.pariyosana, ». the end of life, , jetva, 103,32; pp. jita (v. A.) ep. jaya. 


loc. ne, 34,99; — ""-sunkhaya, m. <= 


jivita-kkhaya; loc. ~ambi, Dh. 331. ; 


Jīviw, mf». (e. c. : sa.) living, 
v. dhamma-jivin. 

juti, f. (sa. dyuti) splendour; — 
*jutin-dhara, mf». bright, splendid; 
m. pl. wit (pakkhi) or voc. ~a (?) 
11,4; — jutimaf, mfn. (= sa.) id., 
m. pl. «manto, Dh. 89. cp. jotati. 

juhati & juhati, vb. (sa. yhu, 
juhoti) to offer; to sacrifice to, wor- 
ship (acc.); part. gen. m. juhato 
(aggihuttam) 103,5; pp. huta (q. v.). 

Juta, n. (d m.?) (sa. dyuta) 
game at dice; acc. ~am kilati, plays 
at dice, 19,10. 48,5; — *9-gita, n. a 
verse sung for luck in game; acc. ~am 
(gayanto) 48,4; 50,29; — °-mandala, 
^. a game-chamber or dicing-table; 
acc. eam, 19,13; 50,28. 

juhati, vb. = juhati (g. v.). 

jettha, mf(n). (sa. jyeshtha) first, 
chief; first born, elder brother or sister; 
m. gen. (dat.) «assa (yakkhassa) 
112,13; myyamaka-?, 24,104 °-putta, 
m. dcc. ~am, 45,3; "-bhātā, 34,5; 


e Fer ccm 


| 
| nam viya) 62,30. ep. juti, f. 


quers himself) 107,+-.: Dh. 108; ger. 


, m. ji, mfn. & Jina, m. 


Jotati, vb. (sa. dyotate, ydyut) 
to shine; part. m. anto (manirata- 


Jh. 


jhàna, ». (sa. dhyana) abstract 
religious meditation, eestasy, divided 
into four stages, through which the 
mind comes into a state of complete 
indifference; nom. «am, Dh. 372; 
acc. pathama-, dutiya-, tatiya-, ca- 
tuttha-jjhanam, 89,5-5; abl. wa, ib.; 
loc. a-parihīna-jjhāne, 45,15; — *jha- 
nábhiüna, f. (v. abhiūiā); — *%-pa- 
suta, mfn. given to meditation, m. pl. 
wa, Dh. 181; — *samadhi-jhana, 
^. the ecstasy of self-concentration, 
acc. eam, 109,21. 

jhāpeti, vb. (caus. jhayati!) to 
burn, set on fire (acc); pr. 2. sg. 
~esi (gamar) 101,6; 1. sg. emi 
(náham khettam ~, I did not set the 


°-yakkhini, f. 21,21; *-vànija, m. acc. | field on fire) 100,28; pot. 3. sg. weyya, 


^J am, ib. 


101,4; aor. 3. sg. „esi (ayarı aggi 


105 


mā mai ~) 51,18; ger. wetva, 34,6; 
pp. jbāpita, m. ~o (gāmo) 101,5. 

jhāyati', vb. (sa. kshāyati,ykshai) 
1) to burn (intr.); pr. 3. sg. ati, 
65,28; 3. pl. „anti, 65,3; part. med. 
Amana, M. ~o, n. ~am, 101,4. — 
2) to waste away, dry, up, to be 
emaciated, perish; pr. 3. pl. ~anti, 
Dh. 155. cp. Bollensen, ZDMG, 
XVIII, 834; Weber, Ind. Str. I, 143; 
Pischel, Gramm. $ 326. Fausbøll, 
‘Dhpd. (1855) p. 323 refers to yjyà, 
Trenckner to ydah (cp. PM. p. 65,25), 
but jbāma, mfn. (burnt, scorched) 
must be identical with sa. kshama. — 
caus, jhāpeti (sa. kshapayati) v. h. 

jhāyati*, vb. (sa. dhyāyati,/dhyai) 
to contemplate, meditate; part, m. *) 
acc, wantam, 103,3; 106,5 :.. Dh. 
395; gen. nato, 66,20; a-jhūyato, 
Dh. 372; — b) nom. «anto, Dh. 27; 
— imp. 2. sg. jhaya, Dh. 371. jhāna, 
n. (q. v.) ep. next. 

jhayin, mfn. (sa. dhyàyin) re- 
llecting, thoughtful, absorbed in medita- 
tion; nom, m. ~i (brahmano) 107,24 
.— Dh. 387; acc. „im, Dh. 386; 
gen. ~ino, Dh. 110; m. pl. «ino, 
Dh. 23. 276. 


œ 


N. 


ñatta, n. (su. jūātra) the intellec- 
tual faculty; nom. ~am (bālassa 


be su. jnapta, Max Müller, SBE. X, 
p. 22; ñatte (loc.) Jat. V, 26,6 K 
486,13 (= santike, near) stands for 
lante, sa. ny-ante). 

ñatva, ger. v. janati. 

ñana, n. (sa. jüàna) understanding, 
knowledge, intelligence; nom. „am, 
71,13; 79,80 (opp. pasada); 90,35 (assa 
evar ~ hoti, he reasons that); 96,14; 
instr. ~ena (sekhena) 69,34; jatis- 
sara-0, 17,4; —*°-karana, mfn., *°-jala, 


n. (g. v.); — ""-sampanna, mfn. full, 


thapāpeti 


of intelligence, m. 
a-liflana, x. (v. h.). 

*Nāņodaya, m. (*sa, jiiana + 
udaya) nom. pr. of a work by Buddha- 
ghosa; acc. ~am (nama pakaranam) 
113,22. 

ñata, mfn (pp. jānāti; sa. jūāta) 
known; pl. m. wa (guna) 41,34; gen. 
wanam, 90,33. a-ññata & a-ññataka, 
mfn. (v. h.). 

*nataka, m. (fr. *hatika, cp. sa. 
jüati & next) a relative, kinsman; pi. 
~ii, Dh. 43; ràja-9, 76,1. (cp. Tr. 
PM. p. 764.) 

iati, m. (sa. jūāti) a relative, 
kinsman; pl. nom, ^1, Dh. 204; instr. 
mh, 11,10; gen. «inam, Dh. 139. 
207; loc. isu, Dh. 288; jiāti-mitta- 
etc. 47,31; ūāti-mittā, m. pl. kinsmen 
and friends, Dh, 219; — *°-gharam, 
„home to her relatives", 62,3; — °-sa- 
lohitā, m. pl. 92,8 (v. h.). 

izpeti, vb. (caus. jūnāti, sa. 
jüàpayati) to make known, explain; 
part. m. «ento (iti ~) 9,0. cp. 
jānāpeti. 
ūūya, m. (sa. nyāya) !) method; 
2) right manner, fitness; the right path 
(— ariyo atthangiko maggo. 67,3); 
gen. massa (adhigamaüya) 90,18 (cp. 
Tr. PM. 58,15). 

üayati, vb. (pass. janati) to be 
called, named; pr. 3. sg. «ati (katham 
bhadanto ~) 96,29; 1. sg. „āmi, 
(Nagaseno ti ~) 96,30. 

iieva, indecl. (after a nasal 
v. eva), 

OB ñu, mfn.(e.c.,sa. jiia) knowing; 
v. a-kataūūū, mattaūūū; cp. viniu. 


24,11; — 


~O, 


: yeva), 


Th. 


thatva, ger., v. titthati. 
 thapapeti, vb. (caus. II. titthati) 
to cause te stand, to cause to be placed; 
ger. ~etva (matamanussam ujukam, 
setting the dead body upright) 41,17; 
102,24. | 


thapita 

thapita, mfn. (pp. thapeti; cp. 
sa. sthapita) placed; left at one’s 
disposal, prepared for; mukhe thapita- 
mattā (yügu, as soon as it had come 
into her mouth) 57,» (cp. matta*); 
%-vāsita-udakam, 41,2; like thita this 
word is often combined with a pre- 
ceeding ger. : samharitva thapite (sū- 
take, acc. m. pl., the clothes that were 
lying folded up) 41,4. 

thapeti, vb. (caus. titthati; sa. 
sthipayati) ‘to cause to stand’, to 
place, set, lay (acc. & loc.); to fix, 
make firm (acc.); to appoint (to any 
office, Zoc.); to place aside, save, except 
(acc.); pr. 2. sg. kim thapesi (why do 
you except her?) 50,31; 2. pl. ~etha, 
1,26; -- imp. 2. sg. ~ehi, 44,26; — 
aor, 3. Sg. „esi, 5,17, 75,8; 3. pl. 
«esum, 16,37; — inf. «etui (nica- 
thaniyaih ucce thane) 76,11; — ger. 
~etva, 1) 6,97. 9,10 (te putta-tthane) ; 
13,19; (pitu yagum ~, having saved 
a portion for her father) 56,31; 57,23. 
65,50-31; 87,27 (laid aside); (cittam 
idam ~, making firm) Dh. 40; a- 
thapetva (hatthe) 56,27; — °?) used 
like a prp. w. acc. (before or after) 
- except, but; ekam eva vaddhar 
~, 12,20; ~ mah (except me) 27,15; 
~ mama mānņavikam, 48,4; tumhe 
^. 51,9; Savatthi-vasino ~, 73,33; — 
grd. *) thapetabba, °-yuttakam (acc. 
m., rāja-tthāne) 11,1; —*) thapaniyam 
(paiüham, ace. m., a question not to 
be asked) 91,31; — pp. thapita (q. v.) 
cp. thapapeti. 

thassati. fut., v. titthati. 

thahati & thati, vb. =- titthati; 
t. utthahati, adhitthāti. 

thāna, ». (sa. sthāna) ') place, 
spot, locality, dwelling-place; mom. 
~am, 25,7; abl. nā, 104,4; loc. ne, 
17,4; cmna-tthane, 1,4 (v. R); 
phisuka-°, 35,26; a-vijjamana-°, 18,15 
(v. vijjati) loc. pl. saka-saka-tthanesu. 
22,9, paūcasu „esu, 60,2; — apa- 
gata-°, 91,9 (g. v); — araiifia-°, 
32,114; — gata-", gata-gata-^, gahana-° 
(g. v.) — chinna-° (= vivara) 91,30; 


106 


— dhamma-gandika-9, 6,25 (v. gan- 
dika); — nivesana-°, 2,15; — purana- 
gāma-', 35,23 (v. gama); — yujjhana-®, 
29,04; — vasana-), 2,24. 6,10. — 2 
place or room for; rathassa ukkamana- 
tthanam, 43,19. — *) space, extent; 
ace. eam (yojanamattam) 6,9; (atthu- 
sabhamattath) 27,27. — *) case, circum- 
stance, point, occasion; Joc, pl. catusu 
„esu, 86,32. — 5) state, condition (e. 
c. = bhava); acc. ~am, Dh. 137; 
acc, pl. «ani (cattari) Dh. 309; 
— agata-tthanam va gata-tthinam 
va (her coming or going) 19,18; — 
loc. (e. c.) = instead of: putta-tthāne, 
9,9. — ^) position, office, rank; Joc. 
raja-tthane, 11,1; ucce thane, 76,11 
(cp. nica-thaniya, mfn.). — ") cause, 
object, thing, means (e. c. — things 
that serve to or cause); instr. pl. 
tihi thanehi, Dh. 224. 391; °-pamada- 
tthana, abl. (veramani, which cause 
indifference) 81,23; "-vibhüsana-tthana 
(id. which serve to decoration etc.) 
81,25. — a-tthāna, n. (g. v.) cp. neat. 

thāniya (or thaniya) m/n. (sa. 
sthanika & sthānīya) e. c. — having 
a certain position; v. nica-thaniya. 

*thānuppatti(ka), mfn. (fr. 
thāna -|- uppatti) ‘arisen on the spot’, 
immediate; (or : resulting from one’s 
office (o: practice or competence ?)) ; 
instr, f. wiya (medhaya samanna- 
gato, comm. on ‘medhavi’) 91,27. cp. 
Jat. VI, 304,16 & 308,2. 

thita, mfn. (pp. titthati; sa. sthita) 
standing; m. «o (dipake) 2,32; (ko- 
tiyam, g. v.) 17,5; kimattharh ~o’si, 
why do you stand there? 15,1; acc. 
~ari, 65,19; loc. ~e (saram nissaya) 
8,31; acc, m. pl. ~e (mige) 6,8; often 
combined with a preceeding ger. (cp. 
thapita) : nahatva «assa, gen. m. sg. 
(when he had finished his bathing) 
41,5; nivasetva ~, 41,1 eíc.; also 
comp. w. kale, khane : 41,7-14; 87,35; 
dārakam gahetvā «à, f. (she who 
has taken the child) 59,14; ~puriso, 


.86,21 (like a man who, having seen a 


snake from afar, has cast it away by 


107 


means of a stick). -- *-citta, mfn. 
. whose mind is firm or constant, gem. 
M. «8858, 80,32; — pathavi-, yattha-°, 
mfn. (g. v.). | 
"th hitaka, mfn. (== prec.) standing; 
m. ~o (pade pasāretvā) 62,28; 65,31. 
thiti, f. (sa. sthiti), *standing, 
remaining’; continuance, steadfastness; 
Dh. 147. 

*thitika, mfn. (e. e, fr. prec.) 
standing, remaining, lasting; existing 
or living by, depending on; v. ahara-°. 

0-ttha, mfn. (e. c. == sa. stha) 
standing; v. gahattha, dhamma-?, 
nàva-?, pabbata-°, bhaya-°, samipa-?. 
cp. kappatthiya. 


D. 


dayhati, vb., pass. dahati (q. v.). 

dasati. vb. (sa. dagati, dame) 
to bite; part. acc. m. (med.) manam 
(givaya) 40,18; inf. „iturh, 40,17; 
ger. eva, 4,28; 14,97 (valliyam); 
35,4 (manikkhandhai mukhena). 
cp. sandasa. 

dahati, vb. (sa. dahati, ydah) 
to burn (trans.); pr. 3. sg. «ati 
(agarani) Dh. 140; part. nom. m. 
daham, Dh. 31; nom. n. «antam 
(papam kammath) 106,22 =- Dh. 71; 
pot.. 3. sg. ~weyya (khettam) 100,26; 


‘d’, which occurs also in the other 
forms) v. aggi-daddha; pass. dayhati 
(sa. dahyate & ~ti); part. m. ~mano, 
Dh. 371. cp. mext. (Pischel, Gr. 
§ 299.) 

daha, m, (sa. daha) burning, 
heat; v. anto-daha. 


T. 


tam!, pron. demonstr. (sa. tad). 
n. tam, 13,29. 29,31 etc,; by sandhi: 
tam, 26,18 (tam pi); 97,29 (tam aham); 
tan t'aham, 85,25; tañ ñeva, 5,10; 


tam 


the older form tad is also to be found 
before vowels : tad avasari, 81,9; tad 
eva, 91,0; tad abhinanditum, 97,5; 
tad ajj'aham (cittam) Dh. 326. and 
in some comp. (v. below; cp. takkara) ; 
— m. so or sa: 1,18. 2,4. 7,9 (sv-aham 
--. so aham); 106,7. 107,4. 114,s etc. ; 
— f.sā:2,ar efe.; — except the nom. 
sg. the declension is a regular pron. 
inflexion of the base ta- : ace. m. tam, 
1,8. 54; f. tun, 58,17; — instr. m. n. 
tena, 1,9. 2,24 (teneva); 50,1; f. taya, 
19,19; — gen. (dal.) m. n. tassa. 1,6-11 
etc.; f. tassa, 2,19. 7,10 etc.; — abi. 
m. m. tasma, |7,1; tamhi, 14,. 
108,2; — loc. m. n. tasmim, 2,22 ctc. ; 
tamhi, Dh. 117; — plur. m. nom. acc. 
te, 3,24. 21,30 etc.; f. nom. acc. tā, 
20,33. 59,8-4; — instr. m. m. tehi, 
25,28; f. tahi, 21,6; — gen. m. m. 
tesar, 4,17 ete. Dh. 4 (tes’); f. tasai, 
2147; — loc. m. m. tesu, 14,21; f. 
tasu, 51,1. — !) =< it, that, this; m. 
he; f. she; (subst. & adj.) : 25,97, 29,27. 
58,17 etc. — *) corresponding w. prec. 
pron. rel. (cp. yam): 68,23 (yi... 
tam); 84,-s (yasmim . . . so); 99,30; 
107,4; and sometimes combined w. 
pron. rel, in the sense of a pron. 
indef. :-: whichsoever, whatsoever; n. 
yan tam, Dh. 42 (quicquid); instr. 
yena tena upayena, 1,9; pl. m. ye 
te manussa, 76,30. — *) repeated : 


pp. daddha (always spelt with initial acc. m. taù tar (bhaccat, each) 


112,23; loe. m. pl. tesu tesu (kathen- 
tesu, all of them constantly) 49,9; 
tarı jivam taii sarirai (== the same, 
opp. aūūam ... aññam) 89,5. — ‘) 
emphatically, *) before subst. or nom. 
pr.:tassa sā bhariya, 2,7; ayam 
kho sā majjhimā patipadā, 67,5; 
so Kassapo, 109,6; — *) before pron. 
1. pers. : svāham, 7,9; acc. tam mam, 
103,2; gen. tassa me, 103,25; — °) 
before pron. 2. pers. : tassa te, 97,31; 
cp. so karohi, Dh. 236. — *) pleonasti- 
cally: m. pl. te (pamattā) 77,5 (or 
corr. w. a prec, ye that has dropped). 
— 5) several cases are used adverbi- 
ally : tam (ace. n.), tena (instr. n.), 


tam 


tasma (abl. n.) v. separately. — ?) 
comp. v. tad-, takkara, tari-nāmaka. 
tam, adv. (by sandhi tad == tam!, 
acc. n.) 1) — there, to that place: 
tad avasari (corr. w. yena — where) 
77,19. 81,9. — *) == now, then, in that 
case; thereafter; tad eva (corr. w. 
yad eva) 91,40; tam kim maiiiasi, 
94,29. 99,1; tam aham, 97,29. 98,10; 
tam enam, 47,21. 100,12. — *) there- 
fore; tañ c'ayam, 96,11. 
tam’, pron. 2. pers. acc.; v. tvam. 
takka, m. (sa. tarka) reasoning, 
speculation; v. a-takkavacara, mfn. 
takkara, mfn. (sa. tat-kara) 
doing that; sm. ~o (naro) Dh, 19. 
Takkasilā, f. (sa. Takshacila) 


nom. pr. of a city in the Gandhara- 


country (Zaseda in Panjab); ace. ; 


~am, 42,25; loc. «aya, 45,26. 
takkola(ka), x. (sa. kakkola, 

cp. takkola) a sort of perfume, Bdel- 

lium: tambūla-takkolakādīni, 49,16. 


tagara, n. (= sa.) a kind of tree 
and a sort of perfume or fragrant 
powder prepared from it; ~am, Dh. 
55; — *-candanin, mfn. prepared 
from Tagara and Candaua (g. v.); m. 
mī (gandho) Dh. 56; — *°-mallika, 
Tagara and Mallika (q. v.) Dh. 54 
(cp. SBE. X p. 18). 

taca & tacas, m. € n. (sa. tvac. 
tvacā, f. & tvaca (comp. -tvacas) n.) 
1) skin; nom. ~o, 82,2 — 97,20. *) bark; 
*€-papatika, pl. f. „loose shreds of 
bark", 95,22; apagata-°, mfn. free from 
that, m. ~o (salarukkho) 95,2524. 

tacchaka, m. (sa. takshaka) a 
carpenter; pl, wa, 106,28 — Dh. 80. 

‘tajjita, mfn. (sa. tarjita, pp. 
tajjeti) frightened; m. pl. x ā (marana- 
bhayena, struck with horror of death) 
6,21; marana-bhaya-tajjito, m. 5,14; 
bhaya-tajjitii, m. pl. („driven by fear“) 
Dh. 188. 


tajjeti, ob. (sa. tarjayati, ytarj) 
to threaten, frighten, scare; ger. ~etva 
(niraya-bhayena) 17,30. 

tata, m. (== sa.) a shore, bank, 


T—— e... -———. — —M 


| 


— Le ——— —— 


| 


108 


slope; precipice; chinna-?, a sheer 
precipice; 27,3. 

tandula. m. (== sa.) rice-grain; 
acc, ~am, 57,18; pl. nā, 16,1; acc. 
pl. we, 38,25. 57,20; instr. pl. mūla- 
tandulehi, the most coarse-grained 
rice, 57,20; majjhima-°, the middle- 
sort of the rice, ib., opp. kanika, the 
finest grains or flour, 57,21; — tan- 
dulādi, adj. x. (nāvatthar) consisting 
of rice etc. 111,51; tila-tandulādayo, 
15,6. 

tanha, f. (rarely tasiņā, sa. 
trshna) ‘thirst’, desire, craving; <À 
(vedanā-paccayā, originating from 
vedana and causing upādāna, g. v.) 
67,13; 107,2; Dh. 180; catutthi 
(senā Miürassa) 103,26; wee. mani, 
108,1; gen. «aya, 67,15. 108,4; abl. 
waya, Dh. 216; gen. pl. anam 
(khayari) desires, Dh. 154; — *°-finu- 
Saya, m. the attachment to desires, 
loc. ~e, Dh. 338; — tanhakkhaya, 
m. (tanha + khaya) destruction of 
desire, loc. ~e, Dh. 353; Arata, 
mfn. delighting in that, m. ~o, Dh. 
187; — *?-bhava-, Dh. 416 (ep. kama- 
bhava); — *°-vasika, mfn. being in 
the power of desires, enslaved by 
desire, m. ~o, 23,20; — *"-vagga, m. 
the XX1Vth chapter of Dh.; — kama-®, 
bhava-9, vibhava-tanhà, f. 67,14; 
hetu-°, f. 108,13 (v. h.); — vita-tanha, 
mfn. who is without desire, Dh. 351 
—52 (m. ~o). cp. pipasa. 

tatiya, mfn. (sa. trtiya) the third; 
ace. f. ~am, 11,15; Dh. 309 (tatiyat); 
loc. m. ~e (vāre, for the third time) 
114,17; acc. n. adv. ~am, thirdly, 
for the third time, 74,25. 79,22 (~am 
pi kho); yava-tatiyam, up to the 
third time, 3,7 (cp. 102,26); — %-jjhāna, 
n. 80,4 (v. jhàna); — °-savana, f. 


| (v. h.) cp. addhatiya, addhateyya, 


& ti? (tayo, tini). 

tato, ade. (sa. tatas) !) thence, 
from that place; 2,25. 3,21; ~ yeva, 
from the same source, 101,13. — ?)there- 
upon, then, afterwards, further; 6,18 


| (~ patthāya, g. v.); 63,4 (< va); 


109 


101,16. 103,16; Dh. 42 (piipiyo <); | 


tato tato (corr. w. yato yato, as soon 
as, the more... the more) Dh. 390. 


— °) for that reason; 112,30 (corr. w. | 


yato). 

tatoparam, adv, (sa. tatahparam 
& tato 'param) then, afterwards, im- 
mediately after; 55,15 (cp. itoparam, 
para & apara). 


tatta, mfn. (sa. tapta; pp. tapati) | 


heated, hot, red-hot; m. <o (ayogulo) 
107, -- Dh. 308; 
(bhūmiyā) 97,4; — °-kapala, x. 
(v. h.). 


tattato, adv. (sa. tattvatas, fr. | 


tattva) according to the truth, really, 


loc. f. waya | 


accurately; ~ ajānitvā, „uot knowing ' 


the truth", 53,1. 

tattha (& tatra, v. next) adv. 
(sa. tatra) !) there, on that (this) 
place; 2,2s-25, etc.; 108,27 (tatth’); 
tatth’eva, *) on the same place, 8,6. 
12,21, >) on that very spot, straightway, 
72,25. 104,18; — tattha tattha, here 
and there, 21,3; yattha . . . tattha, 
72,7-s; tattha idhápi, both there and 
here, 112,15; — very frequently used 
at the begin of commentaries : 85,6- 
17-27. — ?) there, to that place; 1,5 
(~ gantvā) 1,17. 2,5; 111,14; tatth'- 
eva, to the same place, 58,15; tattha 
tions) 11,8. — 5) then, therefore, thence; 
Dh. 249; 112,16 (tattha saddo'yam). 

tatra, adv. (— prec.) 110,21; 
tatr’assa, 73,23. 90,32; tatrāpi, 43,8-9; 
tatriyam, 82,17; tatra kho, 66,9. 
70,23; — tatra-tatrabhinandin, mfn. 
67,13 (v. abhinandin). 

tathā, ade. (= sa.) so, thus; 
tath'eva, in the same way, likewise, 
2,25. 89,5. 105,28; 44,20 (id. without 
eva); tathā...ceva...ca, 10,30; 
tathà ... ca... na, nor, 113,27; often 
corr. w. yatha, so... that, 12,2-6; 
Dh. 282; yathà...tath'eva, as... 
so also, 5,8; corr. w. yena, so... that, 
77,6. comp., v. next, 

Tathā-gata, m. (= sa.) ‘who 
comes and goes in the same way’ [as 


—  . '—— .. 


tad-utthaya 


the Buddhas], probably orig. a designa- 
tion of an Arhat, afterwards esp. of Go- 
tama Buddha (as Sammasambuddha, 
while still living as a human being, 


| preaching the truth), used in the holy 


scriptures when Buddha is represented 
as speaking of himself in the third 
person; hence pl. wa appellatively —: 
the Buddhas (cp, the most important 
note by Rhys Davids & Oldenberg, 
SBE. XIII, p. 82; E. Sinart, JIRAS. 
1898 p. 865; R. Chalmers, ib. p. 103; 
Böhtlingk, Ber. d. Sūchs, Ges. 1898 
p. 78; Dhammasaigani, transl. p. 294). 
— nom. ~0, 80,25. 94,10; hoti «o 
parammarana, does T. exist after 
death? 89,29; rūpasamkhāvimutto 
T-o, gambhiro appameyyo duppa- 
riyogaho seyyatha pi mahisamuddo. 
95,12; acc. eam, 76,27; instr. «ena, 
66,25. 94,8; gen. «assa, 76,1. 94,7. 
110,26; pl. ^ (anupakkamena ~ 
parinibbāyanti) 76,28; aggadhammā 
„vā, 109,28 (v. h., otherwise Geiger, 
Dipavainsa u. Mahāvarmsa, 1905, p. 5): 
akkhātāro <a, Dh. 276 (the T.s are 
only preachers); nippapaīcā nū, Dh. 
254 („free from vanity“). 

tatha-bhava, m. (= sa.) the 
being so; acc. eam (jiatva) 3,20. 

tathā-rūpa, mfn. ( sa.) such, 
like that; pregnantly ~. so great, im- 
portant, efc.; acc. m. «am, 68,35 (w. 
foll. yatha); gen. m. ~assa, Dh. 105; 
gen. f. ~waya (parisaya) 87,31. (cy. 
eva-rüpa). 

tad-, pron. demonstr. n., used by 
sandhi instead of tam (v. tam '?) & 
comp. (v. tad-anurüpa, tad-utthaya, 
tad-üpika). 

*tad-anurupa, mfn. conformable, 
suitable to that; acc. n. ~am (vyai- 
janam) 57,21. 

tada, adv. (= sa.) at that time, 
then; 1,5; 29,18. 30,24 (cp. tena sam- 
ayena, 32,6); tadási, 81,5 (— tada 
asi). ° 

? ad-utthaya, (fr. ger. utthahati) 
— having sprung from that, 106,19 
= Dh, 240; tad- stands possibly for 


tad-ūpika 


tat? (Comm. tato utthahitvā, Dhpd. 
(1855) p. 370). 

*tad-ūpika (or °-upiya) mfn. 
(fr. tad- + opàyika == sa. aupayika) 
conformable, suitable to that, answer- 
ing; f. nā (pañña) 2,12. (Trenckner, 
PM. p. 78, takes it — sa. *tadopya, 
fr. à -- Vvap). 

tanaya, m. (=. sa.) a son; nom, 
rāja-tanayo, 112,1 (a prince). 

tanu, mfn. (= sa.) thin, little, 
small; *-bhuta, mfn. id.; soka, 
mfn. whose mind has been relieved, 
light-hearted, comforted, m. <o, 89,15. 
cp. su-tanu. 

tanuka, mfn. (== sa.) == prec.; 
m. ~o (tanuk ettha vipassati. few 
only) 88,29 =: Dh. 174; 88.5» (= na 
bahujano). 

tanti, f. (=: sa.) a string (of a 
lute); *®-ssara, m. the sound of the 
strings; instr. wena, 19,33 (cp. sara). 

tantu(ka), m. (= sa.) a thread; 
tasara-° (g. v., cp. corrections). 

tandita, mfn. (sa. tandrita; fr. 
tandi, drowsiness, lassitude, sloth, ::. 
sa. tandrā & tandri) only comp. w. 
the negative prefix a- (v. h.) cp. 
dandha. 

tam-nàmika, mfn. (sa. tan-nà- 
mika) named thus; f. wika, 56,1. 

tapa, m. & tapas, x. (sa. tapas, 
n.) +) religious austerities, penance, 
devotion; nom. ~o (sukho) Dh. 194; 
„0 (paramam) Dh. 184. — °) virtue, 
chastity; ~o (bhinno, māņavikāya) 
50,32; gen. «assa, 50,29. cp. tapasa, 
tāpasī. 

tapati, vb. (sa. Vtap) ') to shine 
(as the sun), to be bright; pr. 2. sg. 
eati, 107,23-24 — Dh. 387. -- ?) to 
burn -=- to cause pain or repentance; 
paccha tapati dukkatam, Db. 314. 
— pp. tatta, pass. tappati (q. v.) cp. 
tapa etc. 

tappati, vb. 1) (pass.«tapati; sa. 
tapyate) to be burnt, tormented; to 
suffer; pr. 3. sg. mati, Dh. 17. 136 
(sehi kammehi dummedho). — ?) (sa. 


110 


Vtrp) to be satisfied or weary; pp. 
titta (v. h., cp. titti.) 

tamba, mfn. (sa. tāmra) red, 
copper-coloured; °-bhumi-, 112,29; — 
tamba-panni, 112,29, is probably a 
pun (== tambu-pānayo, adj. m. pl. 
with red hands, cp. pani) in order to 
make the etymology of the nom. pr. 
Tambapanni to agree with the tale. 

Tamba, m. nom. pr. of a king; 
voc. wa, 20,17; -ràja, 19,6; instr. 
eràjena, 19,10. 

Tambapanni, f. (sa. Tamra- 
parņī) nom. pr. of a city in Ceylon 
and of the island itself, 112,30; acc. 
wim — )-nagaram, 112,4-5; — 
%-dipa, m. the island C., loc. ne, 
20,32; — Ji-sara, m. ^. a lake in C., 
loc. we, 21,36. cp. Lanka. 

tambüla, x. (sa. tāmbūla) betel 
or betel-leaves (to chew after the meal); 
acc. eam, 41,14; °-takkolakadini, 
49,16; — *°-pasibbaka, m. a betel-sack; 
loc. «e, 51,23. 

taya, n. (sa. traya) a triad; e. c. 
-ttaya, v. Pitaka-°, potthaka-", San- 
gīti-0. 

tayo, num, mf. (sa. trayas) v. ti”. 

tarati, vb. ') (sa. vtr, tarati) to 
cross over (acc.); aor. 2. sg. atari 
(samuddam) 20,19; pp. tinna (q. v.) 
cp. su-duttara, mfn. — ?) (sa. ytvar) 
to make haste; v. abhi-ttharati. 

tarahi, adv. (sa. farhi) then, at 
that time; 74,31; cp. carahi & etarahi. 

taruna, mfn. (== sa.) young, 
tender; new, fresh; m. ~o, 46,22. 
99,4; f. ~i (dārikā) 101,19; taruna- 
kale yeva, while (they were) yet quite 
young, 9,5; °-dabba-tina, x. young 
Kusa-grass, 16,17. 

"taro, v. itara. 

tala, n. (= sa.) level, surface, 
bottom; side, end, flat, roof etc.; loc. 
imasmim we, on this side, 35,13; . 
pathavi-°, 28,7; pasana-°, 10,7; bheri-°, 
85,21; Manosila- 61,11; mahi-°, 
113,21; hetthima-°, on the lowest 
level, 59,27; — instr. khagga-talena, 
with the flat of the sword, 41,26; — 


111 távatá 


abl. pāsāda-talato, down from the | (vanno); acc. ~am, Dh. 76. 208; 
palace, 65,4; — pāsādavara-tala-, | acc. m. pl. xe, Dh. 196. cp. etadisa. 
the roof of the palace, 64,12; — mahā- | tāpasa, m. (== sa.) a hermit, 
tala, ». (v. h.). | ascetic; ~0, 35,6; panduroga-®, 35,4 
tasa, mfn, (sa. trasa) moving, | (v. h.); acc. jetthaka-tapasarh, 35,2; 
trembling; feeble; Joc. pl. „esu | gen. «assa, 36,7. 
(bhūtesu) Dh. 405 (opp. thavara). tapasi, f. (-— sa.) a female ascetic; 
tasati, vb. (sa. ytras) to tremble, | 111,6; acc. ~it, 111,7. 
to be afraid of (gen.); pr. 3. sg. anti | tala, m. (== sa.) the Palmyra or 
(dandassa) Dh. 129; tasa, mfn. (q.v.). | fan-palm; °-vanta, 72. (sa. "-vrnta), 
tasara, m. (sa. id. & trasara) a | the leaf of P. used as a fan; loc, pl. 
shuttle; acc. ~am (vaddhetvā) 87,12; | «esu (mani-, „upon jewelled fans“ 
— *"'-tantuka, m. 87,11 (v. corrections); | 41,5; — °-vana, x. (— sa.) a grove 
— *O-paccli, f. a basket or box with | of P.-trees; acc. ~am, 60,7; — *tali- 
a shuttle, 89,5; acc. wim. 87,27. 89,3. | vatthukata, mfn. (= tāla -|- a-vatthu- 
tasina, f. (= tanha, q. v.; sa. | kata) ,pulled out of the grouud like 
| 
| 
x 
| 


M M —— 


trshnà) acc. wam, Dh. 343; instr. | a P.", n. «iun (rupam Tathagatassa) 
witya, ib. 95,11. 


tasita, mfn. (pp. tasati; sa. 
trasta) trembling, frightened; m, pi. 
bhita-tasita, 27,5. | 

tasma, adv. (abl. n. pron. tam; 
sa. tasmat) on that account, therefore; | tūvad-; sa. tāvat) ')so much (before 
12,35. 86,22. 110,25. Dh. 211 efc.; | adj.); ~ mahato, 10,1. — 5") so 
whi, Dh. 356; — tasmā ti ha, 'there- | long, until; pato va ~, until to-mor- 
fore just so', accordingly (pointing to | row, 15,16; ajjāpi ~ na, never before 
the following) 93,2. | | to-day, 10,13; often corr. w. yava: 
*tahim (or *taham), adv. (formed | 33,21; 102,. Db. 284; na ~, ... yava 


taleti, vb. (sa. tādayati, tad) 
to beat, strike (ace.); ger. ~etvä, 
61,21. 

tava, adv. (before vowels sometimes 


after the analogy of kuhi, kaham) | na, not... until, 92,2. — *) mean- 
== there, thither; 112,25 (~ vasi); | while, 37,32. — °) now, first (w. fut.) : 
114,18 (~ santhapesum). vimamsissáàmi ~, 3,6. 38,31; 41,. 
tana, x. (sa. trana) protection; | 65,26; likewise w. pr. 1. sg. 55,95. 
dat. —aya (na santi putti, „are no | — 9) tavad-eva, at once, immediately, 
help“) Dh. 288. | straightway ; 7,5. 23,14. 33,5. 62,19. 64,29. 
*tanata, f. (fr. tana w. suff. -tà) | 105,21. — *) well, indeed, really; well 
protection; Dh. 288. and good, be it then (often w. imp. 
tata, m. (= sa.) a father; voc. | or fut.) 7,18-21. 44,6; w. foll, pana: 
tata & pl. tata is very frequently used | aham <... ayam pana (quidem, uev) 
as a term of affection to one or more | 17,10; — yasmü taya ~ dittham, 
persons (esp. to younger or inferior | tasmā .. 85,21; yakkhini ~ jānāti, 
persons) = friend, my dear etc.; tata, | 111,21. — ^) emphatically in exhorta- 
9,21. 15,32. 69,31 (tata Yasa); to two | tions (w. imp.) : ehi ~, 9,22; tittha 
persons : 9,13; — tata, 16,24. 25,15. 38,33. | ~, 11,5; gaccha ~, 19,21; tam tava 
tadi, adj. m. (sa. tadrg) such, | me detha, 22,31; adhivasehi ~, 53,25; 
like that; often pregnantly said of | kathehi ~, 54,32. cp. next. 
Buddha’s holy disciples (‘like him’) *tāvataka, mfn. (fr. prec.) so 
and even of the Buddha himself; gen. | much; p?.2s0 many; acc. pl. m. ne 
m. «ino, Dh. 94, 95. 96; 80,32. (corr. w. yavatake) 81,1. 
tadisa, mfn. (sa. tādrga) such, tāvatā, adv. (= sa. tāvatā, instr.) 
like that; m, <o, 7,12. 55,1; 85,16 | ") so long; 110,5 (corr. w. yaya). — 


tāvatimsa 


2) on that account, for that reason; 
106,5 (na tāvatā, scil. yavatà bhik- 
khate pare — Dh. 266). 

tivatimsa-°, 1) num. (sa. trayas- 
trimcat) 33, only at the beginning of 
comp, === the 33 gods, whose chief is 
Sakka (while the mum. 33 always is 
tettithsa); "?-bhavana, x. Sakka’s 
devaloka on the mount Sineru (Meru), 
loc. ~e, 59,21; — "0-devaloka-ppa- 
mana, mfn. „equal in extent to the 
realm of the Thirty-tree“, n. ~am, 
59,28. — 2) mfn. id., frequently m. pl. 
~& (devā). cp. Pischel, Gr. $ 254 
& timsa below. 

til, indecl. (sa. iti) thus, so; besides 
ti we also meet with the full form iti 
which is contracted to -iti with a prec. 
1, 1,16-17, and before a vowel is changed 
into icc’, 4,32; but generally the first 
i drops by elision, and a prec. short 
vowel (a, u) is lengthened, 1,9-18-19 
etc., while prec. mm is changed into 
n, 1,8-21. 3,1 eíc.; instead of the final 
i we find also y : ty'aha, 111,20 (== 
C' after prec. l: na karomi c'āha, 
74,1 — Dh. 306) and even v : tv'eva, 


42,24. 60,25, or the i drops before | 


e:t'eva, 32,18. — !) The full form 
iti is used *) at the beginning of a sen- 
tence — thus, in this manner (as told 
before) 30,35. 47,23. 88,2. 110,38. 112,11. 
Dh. 62. 74. 186. 286; dittham h'etam 
Tathagatena : iti rūpam etc., thus 
(is) form — this is the nature of form, 
94,3. — P) after evam, 47,26, cp. 
evamgotto iti, 92,13. — °) after an- 
other (i)ti: mogham aūian ti iti 
puttho (iti perhaps = etc, cp. 5) 
below) 90,4. — 3) in the apodosis : 
sace .... icc'etam kusalam, 4,32. — 9) 
metri causa like the ordinary ti : 98,50. 
111,1. 112,31. (v. below). — *) ti (iti) 
is most frequently used by quoting in 
oratio directa one's words uttered or 
the contents of one's thoughts, emo- 
tions, or judgements, preceeded or 
followed by a verbum sentiendi et 
declarandi : 1,8-16 (after aha); 3,5 
(after ten'assa etad ahosi); 1,18 (ti 


112 


sampaticchitva); 1,19 (ti vutte); 1,21 
(ti dha); 3,1 (ti cintesi), but also 
without a such word preceeding or 
following : 3,6-9-12. 35,9. efc. etc. 
Of such quotations we find often one 
included within another : ti sail 
ahosi, 2,6 etc. Verses quoted end 
always with ti which stands without 
the metre : 2,13. 3,27 etc., but in poetic 
style it is often omitted, 103,10 (followed 
by ima gāthā bhanam); 104,16 elc. 
(ep. 111,1. 118,17, where iti forms the 
half of the last foot), and even in 
prose ti may be omitted by very 
short sentences (questions and answers) 
and generally before maūiie (q. v. 
8,25. 5,7. 35,35 (cp. 50,33. Dh. 74). 
Useful examples illustrative of the use 
of ti are also found on p. 88. — *) ti 
after single words or names (in nom.) : 
mata ti, such a thing as a mother, 
99,7; pita ti, 99,5; ditthigatan ti. 
94,7; saddo ratho iti, the sound 
(word) ‘ratha’, 98,30; satto ti sam- 
muti, the phrase ‘a living being’ 98,51; 
Nagaseno ti, 96,29 etc.; balo ti 
vuccati, Dh. 63. cp. Dh. 218. 257. 
367. 370. 388; likewise by glosses in 
commentaries : ‘me’ ti mayham, 85,20; 
‘tan’ tī tasmā, 85,97 etc.; cp. above 
under iti 1). — *) ti is sometimes used 
to connect two sentences (coordinate) 
== in this way, by means of, for this 
reason, etc. : atth' eko upāyo ti kha- 
dapessami tam..., 1,10; abhirūpā 
ahositi so tassā varam adasi, 10,+; 
puññam me katan ti nandati, 107,27 
=: Dh. 18; so sīham ādinnavā iti 
Sīhalo, for that reason (he was called) 
Sīhala, 112,31. — 5) = and, and so on 
(w. foll. adi): 73,30 (cp. adi 4)); 
ti anukkamena, and so on by degrees, 
34,8; ti iti, 90,4. v. above be). — 
9) ti is sometimes strengthened by a 
foll. eva or evam : 32,18. 42,24. 
60,25; 86,17. — 7) emphatically after 
other adv. : kin ti, how? 1, ( 
kim*); tasmā ti ha, accordingly, 92,2 
(v. tasmā). ep. Franke, ZDMG, vol. 
48, p. 87. 


— ns 
— 


113 


ti?, num. (sa. tri) three; m. tini, | 
nom. 21,11. 82,9; acc. 28,25 (saranāni); | 
57,28, 86,26; — m. tayo, nom, 14,9 | 
ieej 65,11 (bhavā); acc. 6,21 | 
(pahāre); — f. tisso, nom. 82,9(vedana); | 
acc. 20,2 (gāthā); — instr. tihi, Dh.. l 
224, 391 ; — gen. tinnam, 14,13. 28,26 | 
(ratanānan); Dh. 157; — loc, tīsu, 

31,16. 114,22. — comp. v. ti-kkhatturh | 
ete., tiha, te-pitaka, etc., cp. tatiya, | 
| 
| 
| 


taya, tāvatimsa (tettimsa), timsa, |. 


terasa. | 
timsa (& timsati), num. (mom. | 
timsu or tirs; sa. trimcat) thirty; 
tirüsa-yojana-maggau, acc. (agato) 
87,19. cp. tavatimsa (tettimsa), dvat- 
timsa & chattimsati. 
ti-kkhattum, adv, (sa. tri-krtvas) 
three times; 11,4. 
tikhina, mfn., v. tinha. | 
ti- -güvuta, v. gāvuta. 
titthati (& thāti, comp. w. prp. | 
also thahati; sa. tishthati, ysthā), | 
to stand; to stay, remain, stop; to be ; 
present, 'be alive; to abide by, acqui- | 
esce in, etc.; . pr. 3, sg. eati, 102, | 
(pali, is extant); 103,22 (bhiyyo T | 
“gets more steadfast”); 110,5. b. | 
340; 2. sg. „asi, Dh. 235; 3. j^ 
— anti, 110,4; — part. med. gen. f. | 
titthamanaya (sakham gahetvā) 62,20; 
| 
x 
x 


— imp. 2. sg. tittha, 11,5. 16,15. 111,10; 
— pot. 3. sg. tittheyya, 98,33; — fut. 

2. pl. thassatha (mama vinicchaye) 
59,6; 1. pl. ~ama, ib.; — aor. 3. sg. 
s) atthā, 103,11, b) atthasi, 3,22. 15,10. 
26,4. 41,20; pharitvā ~; pervaded, 
57,93; 3. pl. wamsu, 22,7. 87,18; — 
ger. thatvā, 8,6. 8,15 (Bodhisattassa 
ovāde); 17,33 (id.) 84,29 (yāvatāyu- 
kam); 36,20. 46,1. 108 36; — pp. 
thita; caus. thapeti & thapapeti (v. 
h.) cp. -ttha, mfn., thāna, n., thiti, 
f. ete. 

tina, n. (sa. trpa) grass, straw 
(of a thatch) ; herb, weed; acc. ~am 
(the thatch) 101,4; gen. bahu-tinassa, 
51,5. 52,2; pl. sāni, 15,5; comp. 
tina-', 94,36; tina-dosa, mfn. “damaged 
by weeds", n. pl. wani (khettani) 


Pali Glossary. 


tibba 
Dh. 356; dabba-9, nivāpa-", nila- 
kusa-°, rülha-^ (v. h). 

tinna, mfn. (pp. tarati, sa. tirna) 
who has crossed, gone through, passed 
over to, overcome; 9. ~O (*1 have 
passed over to Nibbana”) 104,30 ; 
*0_vicikiccha, mfn. having overcome 
uncertainty, m. ~0, 69,13; *%-soka- 
pariddava, mfn. “who has crossed the 
flood of sorrow", acc. m. pl. we, Dh. 
195; ogha-? (g. v.). 

tinnath, gen. pl, v. ti”. 

tinha, mfn. (generally tikhina, 
$a. tikshna) sharp; instr. m. ~ena 
(asinā) 33,17. 

titikkhati, vb. (sa. titikshate, 
desid. tj) to bear. endure (ace.); 


pr. 3. sg. ~ati (ativakyath, akkosan) 


Dh. 321. 399; cond. 1. sg. ~issam 
(I had to endure) Dh. 320 (ep. adhi- 
gacchissam, sandhavissam etc.). 

titikkha, f. (sa. titiksha) endu- 
rance, forgiveness, long-suffering; Dh, 
184 (synon. khanti). 

titta, mfn. (pp. tappati*; sa. 
trpta) satisfied; v. a-titta, cp. titti. 

tittaka, mfn. (sa. tiktaka) bitter; 
"Cbhava. m. a bitter flavour, acc. 
~ai, 37,9. 

titti, f. (sa. trpti) satisfaction; 
Dh. 186 (kāmesu). 

tittha, n. (& rarely m.) (sa. tirtha) 
a landing-place (on the shore of a 
river), a bathing-place; a ferry or 
harbour, metaph. religious persuasion; 
loc. ~e, on the shore, 28,5. —*paniya-®, 
a watering-place; loc. me, 11,28. cp. 
next. 

titthiya, m. (sa. tirthya & tir- 
thika) an adherent of another sect, 
a heretic; pl. wa, 73,21; gen. ~ anal, 
19,4. — *aūna-), v. h. — *titthiyārāma, 
mM., v. arama. 

ti-pitaka, x. (sa. tri-pitaka) 
‘the three baskets’, the three collections 
of the Buddhist sacred books (cp. 
pitaka efe). — tepitaka, mfn. (v. h.). 

tibba, mfn. (sa. tivra) sharp, 
strong, violent; *°-raga, mfn. full of 
strong passions, gen. m. ~assa, Dh. 349. 


R 


ti-bbāga 


ti-bhāga, m. (sa. tri-bhaga) the 
third part; <o, 90,22. 

*ti-maņdala, n. (sa. *tri-man- 
dala) ‘the three circles’, viz. the navel 
and the two knees; acc. ~am, 82,27 
(cp. SBE, XIII, 155). 

timīra, m. (= sa.) name of a 
tree; gen. pl. ~anam (gandho) 20,16. 

*ti-yojana-satika, mfn. (sa. 
*tri-yojana-gataka) 300 yojanas long 
(cp. yojana); gen. n. ~assa (rajjassa) 
48,21. 

tila, m. (= sa.) sesame, sesame 
seed; pl. nā (tatta-kapāle pakkhit- 
ta-") 11,7; %-taņdulādayo, 15,6. cp. 
tela. 

tisso, tini, v. ti? 

tira, n. (= sa.) a shore, bank; 
ACC, ~am, Dh. 85 (anudhavati, “runs 
up and down the shore”, 7. e. without 
reaching the other shore (Nibbana)); 
4,20 (sara-°); 21,17 (samudda-°); 28, 
(Aciravati-°); ioc. ~e, 66,3; 1,12 
(Gafigd-°); 2,19 (nadi-°); 3,21 (para-°, 
on the opposite bank); abl. orima- 
tirato (v. À.) cp. anutire. 

tiha, x. (sa. tryaha) three days; 
dviha-tiham, two or three days, 36,6 
(cp. aha). 

tihi, instr, v. ti”. 

tuccha, mfn. (= sa.) empty; 
°-patim (acc.) the empty bowl, 56,27. 

tuttha, mfn. (pp. tussati; sa. 
tushta) pleased, satisfied; m. <o, 
24,28; *-citta, mfn. id.; m. <o, 32,1; 
pl. nā, 41,21; — *°-manasa, mfn. id.; 
m. ~0, 65,23; f. wa, 87,7; — *°-hattha, 
mfn. pleased and rejoicing, m. «o 
(samgho), 114,2. 

tutthi, f. (sa. tushti) joy, enjoy- 
ment; nom. tuttbī, Dh. 331; ace. 
„im (“the glad news") 64,6; instr. 
ati-tutthiya (“by his extreme joy”) 
10,13. 

tunda, n. (= | a beak; instr. 
wena, 4,1, — *tundaka, x. (?) id.; 
mukha-°, 4,8. 18,7, ` « 

tun hi, indecl. (sa. ttishnim) silently; 
^ ahosi (Bhagavad, remained silent) 
90,23; ~ ahesum, 79,21; by sandhi: 


114 


tunhim āsīnam, Dh. 227; — comp. 
tunhī-bhāva, m. the being silent; 
instr. ~ena (adhivāsesi Bhagavā) 
70,1 = 77,29; — tunhi-bhuta, mf». 
silent; m. ~o (nisidi) 87,20; acc. ~am, 
87,21. 

tudati, vb. (sa. ytud) to strike, 
torment; pr. 3. pl. „anti (mam, 
kama) 20,17; pp. v. next. 

tunna, mfn. (pp. tudati) struck, 
hurt; gen. pl. vyādhi-maraņa-tunnā- 
nam, suffering from disease and death, 
108,82. 

*tunna-kamma, n. the trade of 
a tailor; acc. „am, 57,8. 

tunna-vàya, m. (— sa.) a tailor; 
~0, 57,3; *-upakaranani, w. pl. 55,29 
(v. upakarana); *-vesam gahetva, in 
the disguise of a tailor, 58,16. 

tumhe, prom. pl. & tuyham, 
gen. sg., v. tvam. 

turiya, n. (sa. türya) any musical 
instrument; pl. ~ani (gahita-gahitani) 
65,2; nana-°, all kinds of musical 
instruments, 64,30; instr. ~ehi (nip- 
purisehi) 67,23; *°-bhandani, x. pl. 
musical instruments or implements, 
65,4; *%-sadda, m. sound of music, 
acc. eam, 112,. 

tula, f. (= sa.) a balance; acc. 
~ai va paggayha (“as with a ba- 
lance") Dh, 268; a-tula, mfn. (v. h.). 
tuvam, pron, in the gāthās — 
tvam, 47,9. 54,19, 105,94. 

Tusita, m. nom. pr. (sa. Tushita) 
pl. nā (deva) a class of celestial 
beings; °-vimana, x. the residence of 
the T.-angels (the fourth devaloka), 
loc. ee, 81,2. 

tussati, vb. (sa. ytush) to be 
satisfied or pleased; ger. ~itva, 24,53. 
55,3; pp. tuttha (v. h.) cp. tutthi, f. 

te, pron. 1) gen. sg., v. ivam; 
2) m. pl, v. tam? 

teja & tejas, m(n). (sa. tejas) 
splendour; power, efficacy; instr. ~asa 
(tapati Buddho) 107,25 — Dh. 387; 
wena, 15,7 (sila-°); 111,11 (paritta- 


| sutta-°). 


115 


tejana, n. (= sa.) an arrow; 
acc. eam, 106,27 — Dh. 80. 145. 

tena, adv. (instr. fr. tar !; — sa.) 
1) in that direction, there (corr. w. 
yena):68, (yena nivesanadvaram 
ten’ upasamkami); 68,5 cfc. 74,20. 
2) for that reason, therefore, now then 
(in this sense often comb. w. hi): 
3,3. 7,13. 54,30. 106,4; tena hi : 1,10-19. 
2.3. 19,31. 22,80. 41,21. 118,14. 

*tepitaka, mfn. (fr. tipitaka) 
belonging to ‘the three baskets’ (cp. 
pitaka); x. loc. ~e Buddhavacane, 
the word of the Buddha contained in 
the holy scriptures, 102,2. 

*temeti, vb. (caus. ytim) to wet, 
moisten; grd. temetabba, f. nā (mat- 
tika) 83,28. 

terasa, num, (sa. trayodaca) 13; 
terasama, mfn: the 13%; m. no 
(vaggo) Dh. XIII. 

tela, x. (sa. taila) oil (prepared 
from the seeds of the sesame plant); 
ace, eam, 50,4; instr. wena (gan- 
dha-9, with scented oil) 37,2; — %-ppa- 
dipa, m. an oil-lamp; «o, 67,27; pi. 
„ā (gandha-?) 65,3; — °-pajjota, m. 
id. acc. mam, 69,17. cp. tila. 

*tevacika, mfn. (sa. *traivācika, 
cp. trivacika) effected by the three 
words or the triple formula, viz. Bu- 
ddham saranam gacehāmi ete. (v. 
sarana); m. ~o (upāsako, a lay- 
discipel by the triple formula) 69,2. 

tevisati, num. (sa. trayovimgati) 
28; «ima, mfn. the 23; m. ~o 
(vaggo) Dh, XXIII. 

torana, n. (== sa.) an arch, portal, 
gateway; dalla-pakara-°, mfn. 90,31 
(n. ~am, nagaram); 91,21 (dalha- 
toranam = thira-pitthasamghatakam). 

ty’, U = ti! (iti), 111,20; cp. ©, 
74,1. — ?) — te (gen. tvam) 13,26. 

tv’, = ti! (iti); 42,24. 60,25. 64,9. 

tvam, pron. 2. pers. (= sa.) thou; 
nom. *) tvah (tam) 1,4. 3,12 (tvan 
ti); >) tuvām, 47,9. 54,19. 105,24; — 
acc. tam (tvam) 1,11-17-21. 2,3. 4,27 
(tam pi); 5,10 (tañ eva); 94,27 (tam 
yev’); 94,9. 105,4; — instr. (abl.) 


— V M nm T 


thala 


taya, 4,29. 5,9; — gen. dat. *) tuyham, 
8,16. 3,5 (~ abbhantare); 7,13; ") 
tava, 1,22. 3,16 (~ santikam); 12,1. 
55,4; °) te, lus (vattati); 2,3 (das- 
simi); 2,8 (atthi); 7,13 (pasanno); 
13,26 (ty’ atthu); 78,13. 85,4 efc.; te 
may also be used for instr. (and acc.) : 
kathentena te sundaram katam, 1,21; 
78,7 (?); cp. taham == te ahah 
(acc.?) 85,27 [Pischel, GGA. 1877, 
p. 1066; ZDMG. 35, p. 714]. — loe. 
tayi, 10,13. 17,14; — pl. nom. tumhe, 
1,26; to a single person : 25,17. 35,18; 
— acc. tumhe, 4,11. 12,33; 97,15; — 
instr. tumhehi, 12,55; — gen. dat. 
a) tumhakath. 4,4. 6,15. 35,13. 97,7; 
b) vo, 9,25. 108,5; dat. ethicus : 42,16; 
47,19 (id. or gen. partitivus); vo may 
also be used for acc. 4,8. 108,5; — 
loc. tumhesu (= sg.) 50,10. 


Th. 


thandila, x. (sa. sthandila) an 
open place, bare ground; °-sayika, f. 
the act of lying on the bare ground 
(as a penance), Dh, 141. 

thaddha, mfn. (sa. stabdha) firm, 
hard; m. ~o (pahāro) 50,22 (opp. 
muduko); — *-hadaya, mfn. hard- 
hearted; f. pl. ~i (comm. on kathinā) 
52,5. 

thambha, w. (sa. stambha) a 
post, pillar; metaph. insensibility, stu- 
por; ~0, 103,28; acc. ~am, 60,2. 

tharana, x. (sa. starana) the act 
of spreading, v. bhumma-ttharana, 
which is probably %-attharana (sa. 
astarana, à + ystr) a carpet, 
84,17. 

thala, m. (sa. sthala) the land, 
dry land, firm earth; acc. ~ar, 15,14. 
105,21 (opp. ninnam); loc. ~e (opp. 
jale) 4,14; 27,27. 52,16; Dh. 98 (opp. 
ninne); *Yegocara. mfn. living on land, 
M. ~o, 1,8; — ?-patha, m. a road by 
land; acc. °-jala-patham, everywhere 
by land and water, 19,22, 


— 
— 


Ok 


thavika 


*thavikā, f. a purse; acc. sahassa- 
thavikarh, a purse containing a 1000 
pieces of money, 102,21. 

thavira, v. thera. 

thāma, m. (sa. sthāman, x.) 
strength, power; *~sampanna, mfn. 
strong; M. ~o, 1,3. 40,27. 

thavara, mfn. (sa. sthavara) im- 
moveable, firm, strong; loc. pl. „esu 
(bhūtesu) Dh. 405 (opp. tasa). 

thira, mfn. (sa. sthira) firm, hard, 
solid, strong; n. pl. ~ani (uddāpā- 
dini) 91,18 (opp. dubbalāni); *thira- 
pākāra- etc. mfn. 91,20-21 (comm. on 
dalha-°). 

thi, f. (sa. stri) = itthī, a woman 
(v. h.); gen. pl. thinam, 51,31. 

thina, w. (sa. styāna) sloth, in- 
difference; *"-middha, x. “sloth and 
drowsiness” (paiicami sena Marassa), 
103,27. 

thula (& thulla), mfn. (sa. sthula) 
large, thick, coarse; v. anumthüla. 

thera, m. & (nī) f. (sa. sthavira) 


old, venerable; an *Elder' (said of 


venerable bhikkhus); m. nom. ~o, 
81,12. Dh. 260; Dh. 261 (to be scan- 
ned. thaviro); maha-thero, 113,5; 
instr. wena, 85,3; pl. «à, 109,22; 
maha-°, 109,1; acc. ~e (bhikkhū) 
83,33; instr. „ehi, 109,12; gen. ~anam, 
109,5; added to a nom. pr. : Upali-®, 
109,18; Mahakassapa-°, 109,17; — 
dhamma-kathika-?, m. (v. h.) — com- 
par. theratara, m. ~o (bhikkhu) 79,10; 
instr. ~ena, 79,8. cp. next. 

Thera-gatha, f. pl. name of a 
canonical book, a section of the Khud- 
daka-Nikaya; specimen thereof ; 107,28 
segv. 

*thera-vàda, m. the doctrine 
of the Theras, the orthodoxe Buddhist 
doctrine; <o, 109,14 (therehi kata- 
samgaho); = aggavādo, 109,30; acc. 
~am, 114,5; instr. pl. ~ehi, 114,21. 

*theriya, mfn. (fr. thera) be- 
longing to the theras; m. pk 9-&cariyà, 
the old teachers or, the propounders 
of the thera-vada, 114,3. 

Theri-gatha, f. pl. name of a 


116 


eanonical book, a section of the Khud- 
daka-Nikāya; specimen thereof : 108,10 
sequ. 

thoka, mfn. (sa. stoka) little, 
small, short; acc. ~ar (adv.) a little : 
~ netva, 1,20; ~ gantvā, 36,11; ~ 
sayitvā, 12,1; ~ kīlāpetvā, 58,33; 
f. ~a (yagu) 57,1; — *thoka-thokam, 
adv, little by little, Dh. 121—22 

*thokaka, mfn. (fr. prec.) small, 
short; f. ~ika (rati, a short pleasure) 
Dh. 310. 

thometi, vb. (denom. fr. *thoma, 
sa. stoma, stomayati) to praise (acc.); 
ger. ~etva (panditam) 59,23. 


D. 


-d-, sandhi-consonant, inserted in 
attadattha, sadattha-pasuta (g. v.); 
likewise in samma-d-eva etc. (v. 
sammā). On account of sandhi an 
old ‘d’ is often preserved in some 


pron. : tad-, yad- (v. tam, yam), 


kocid- (= koci) etc. [Kuhn, Beitr. 
p. 62—63; Tr. PM, p. 82; Windisch, 
Ber. d. siichs. Ges. 1893. p. 228 seqv.] 

*dakkhati & dakkhiti, vb. 
(ydrg) to see, perceive; pr. (fut.) 2. 
Sg. „asi (na me maggam ~, “the 
path I tread you never can find” 
72,23; 3. pl. «inti, 69,18 (cakkhu- 
manto rūpāni ~); — aor. addakkhi, 
3. Sg. 77,8; 2. sg. 20,19. Formally 
dakkhati & dakkhiti look like fut. 
fr. ydre (sa. drakshyati), but really 
these forms may have sprung either 
from aor. addakkhi (sa. adrakshit) 
or from an old base *drksh-° [Kuh», 
Beitr. p. 116; Tr. PM. p. 61; Pischel, 
Gr. S 554] cp. dissati. 

dakkhina, mfn. (sa. dakshina) 
1) right, on the right hand; instr. m. 
wena (hatthena) 77,1. 111,4 (opp. 
vàma-hatthena); °-passam, the right 
side, 61,21. — *) southern; acc. f. 
wath (disah) 95,5; °-samudda, m. 


117 


dadhi 


the southern sea, gen. wassa, 60,4. | — 5) to permit, allow (acc. d inf.) 


cp. padakkhina. 

dajjà, pot., v. dadati. 

datthabba, grd. & datthum, 
inf., v. dissati. 

daddha, mfn. (pp. dahati, q. v.) 
burnt; %. «am (khettam) 100,27; 
aggi-9, mfn. (v. h.). 

danda, m. (= sa.) !)a stick, 
staff; a handle; acc. ^am (gahetva, 
“staff in hand”) 47,22; instr. wena, 
77,12; loc, ~e (the handle) 35,5; — 
0-hattha, mfn. leaning on a staff; 
acc. m. wam, 63,9; — a-danda, atta- 
danda (g. v.). — ?) punishment; acc. 
^am, Dh. 310. 405; instr. wena, 
Dh. 181; purisa-vadha-?, punishment 
for murder, 74,4; gen. «assa, Dh. 
129; — '-kamma, x. fine, mulct, 
penalty; idam me ~am, “in this way 
I make amends”, 53,13; — "?-ppatta, 
mfn. liable to punishment; m. ~o, 
100,15; — patidanda, brahma-danda 
(g. v.). — Danda-vagga, m. the 10th 
chapter of Dh. 

dandaka, m. (= sa.) a stick, 
staff; acc. ~am, 13,19; 36,1 (a twig 
from a tree); instr. ~ena, 86,21; — 
*ratha-%, m. (g. v.). 

datta, mfn. (e. c. = sa.; pp. 
dadāti, cp. dinna) v. Devadatta, 
Brahmadatta, cp. atta! 

datvā, ger., v. next. 

dadāti, eb. (sa. ydà) !) to give 
(w. gen. pers. & acc. rei) 29,5. 31,16 
etc.; to hand, deliver, give in charge, 
pay (do.) 82,18; 31,2; 39,20. 111,12; 
37,18; 102,5; to offer (an oblation, 
acc.) 17,6 (elakam); — *) variously 


constructed w. acc. : okasam ~, to 


give an opportunity to (inf.) 40,17; 
ovādarn, to admonish, 85,24; danam, 
to make gifts, give alms, 14,12. 86,14; 
jīvita-dānam, to spare one’s life, 12,26; 
pativacanam, to answer, 3,9; phalam, 
to bear fruit, 36,36; maggam, to give 
place to, 44,12; matakabhattam, to 
offer an oblation to. the dead, 16,23; 
saliüam, to make a sign, communicate, 
55,29; sādhukāram, to applaud, 5,19; 


| D,10. 12,17. 17,19. 39,24. 48,19. 52,2; 


— *) constructed w. ger. of another 
verb = to do that to any one : dārūni 
āharitvā ... dassati, 35,9; rajjam 
gahetva datum. 35,9; āharitvā 
adamsu, 41,4; vibhajitvā adasi. 41,19. 
— ^) pr. 1. sg. dadāmi, 10,20; 3. pl. 
dadanti, Dh. 249; part. gen. m. da- 
dato, Dh. 242; part. med. m. dada- 


-mano, 12,33; f. nā, 5,20; pot. 3. sg. 


1) dadeyya, 98,31; 2. sg. „āsi, 53,15; 
1, sg. „am, 33,13. 41,1; 2) 3. sg. dajja, 
Dh. 224; — b) pr. 1. sg. dammi, 
7,14. 15,24. 29,5; — °) pr. 3. sg. deti, 
12,17. 28,24. 98,8; 2. sg. desi, 3,9; 1. 
sg. demi, 31,16; 3. pl. denti, 37,2; 
2. pl. detha, 18,11. 52,20; 1. pl. dema, 
18,11. 39,24. 114,10 (dema’ti); imp. 
8. sg. detu. 36,21. 39,20; 2. sg. dehi, 
5,15. 69,53. 101,98. 111,97 (read : jivi- 
tain dehi); 2. pl. detha, 18,9. 31,3. 
114,8; part. m. dento, 40,17. 85,24; 
— (4) rare or ficticious present-forma- 
tions are: dajjati (cp. pot. dajjii) & 
dati]; — fut. 3. sg. dassati, 3,8. 30,13; 
2. sg. nasi, 2,2; 1. sg. 2,4, 5,10; 15,12 
etc.; 1. pl. «ama, 17,19. 60,14; — 
aor. 3. sg. *) adàsi, 3,11. 6,18. 36,36; 
dasi, 114,9; 1. sg. adāsim, 17,6. 42,13; 
8. pl. adamsu, 4,15. 31,3. 41,4 etc.; 
b) ada (3. sg.) 111,12 (nada), 114,25; 
— inf. datum, 15,5. 81,s0. 102,8; 
a-dātu-kāmatā, f. (g. v.; — ger. 
datvā. 7,28. 16,26; a-datvā, 48,19. 55,29; 
— grd. =) dātabba, n. ~am. 14,19. 
82,18; P) deyya, n. ~am. 112,5; — 
pp. dinna (& datta, e. c.) v. h.; — 
[pass, diyati, cp. à-diyati]; — caus. 
dapeti (v. k.) cp. dina, daya, dāyaka. 

dadhi, x. (= sa.) sour milk, curd; 
nom. dadhi, 99,28-30. 101,27; dadhim, 
20,15; acc, eim, 26,1. 35,22. 101,28; 
instr, wind, 35,17; loc. ~imhi, 36,25; 
— *'-ghata, m. a milkbowl, acc. wath, 
35,17; — *°-mala, m. n. pr. of an 
ocean; ace. eam, 26,12; %-mālin, id. 
26,15 (%-māliti) cp. Aggimāla; — 
*0_vāraka, m. a pot of milk-curd, acc. 
wam, 14,30; gen. ~wassa, 14,31; — 


danta 


0-vāhana, m. n. pr. of a king; NO 
nama raja, 36,29; °-jataka, n. 34,30. 

danta!, m. (= sa.) a tooth; nom. 
pl. nā, 12,1. 82,2 — 97,20; ace. pl. 
65,6; instr. pl. wehi, 
khanda-°, mfn. (g. v.); dantantara- 
gata, v. antara; — °-kattha, x. (v. h.). 

danta?, mfn. (pp. ydam, sa. 
danta) tamed, subdued; tame, mild, 
patient; m. ~o., 77,10-13; Dh. 321; 
acc, m. ean, ib.; n. ~am (cittam) 
Dh. 35; pl. m. nā. Dh. 322; — *atta- 


danta, mfn. & sudanta, mfn, (v. h.) 


cp. dameti. 

*dandha, mfn. slow, slothful, in- 
docible; „am, adv. slothfully, Dh. 
116. The etymology of this word is 
doubtful; Fausbøll & Weber, ZDMG. 
14. p. 48 refer to sa. *tandra (cp. 
a-tandra); Trenckner, PM. p. 65 to 
drdha (& dhandha), but cp. tandita 
& dalha. According to Müller, PGr. 
p. 22 we ought to look for something 
like *dardhra or drdhra (cp. Lüders, 
ZDMG. 58 p. 700). 

dabba (& dabbha), m. (sa. dar- 
bha) the Kuga-grass; — *°-tina, n. 
id, pl. „āni, 15,4; %-sayana, m. a 
lair of K,-grass, abl, ~to, 16,4. 

dabbi & dabbī, f. (sa. darvi & 


nī) a ladle, spoon; nom. ~i, Dh. 64. 


dama, m. (= sa.) moderation, 
self-command (synon. safifiama); «vo, 
Dh. 261; instr. wena, Dh. 25; 
O-sacea, n. temperance and truth, 
instr. ~ena, Dh. 9; duddama, mf». 
g. v.). 
l damatha, m. (= sa.) self-com- 
mand; ~o (cittassa) Dh. 35. 
dameti (& damayati), vb. (sa. 
damayati, caus. ydam) to tame, sub- 
due; to convert (acc.); pr. 3. pl. 
damayanti (dandena) 77,12; (attānam 
panditā) 106,28 = Dh, 80; part. 
nom. m. damayath (attanam). Dh. 
305; inf. dametum (vattati, g. v.) 
to convert, 113,9; cp. danta & prec. 
dammi, pr. 1. sg, v. dadati. 
dara, m. (= sa.) fear; v. niddara 
& Yīta-ddara. 


12,5; | 


118 


daratha, m. (= sa.) pain, suffer- 
ing; Joc. pl. sabba-kilesa-darathesu, 
64,21. 

darī, f. (— 84.) a cave, hole, 
cleft; *%saya, m. a lair in a hole or 
cleft, Joc. ~e, 108,24 (if not to be 
corrected into darīsayo (mfx.) ‘baving 
my lair in a hole on the bank of a 
river’, cp. Jat. I, p. 18. v. 106, & 
daricara, mfn. Jat. V. p. 70,15). 

dalha, mfn. (sa. drdha) firm, 
hard, strong, fast; f. «à (bhūmi) 
110,; n. wath (viriyam) Dh. 112; 
~am dalhassa khipati (v. h.) 44,1; 
-ppahāra, m. a violent stroke, acc. 
~am, 30,13; — ""-parakkama, mfn. 
undaunted, firm, energetic; m. pl. nā, 
Dh. 23; acc. ~e, 108,19; — *°-pa- 
kara-torana, mfn. having strong walls 
ete., strongly fortified; x. ~am (na- 
garam), 90,5. 91,21; — *°-uddapa, 
mfn. having a strong foundation; n. 
am, 90,31. 91,20. — dalham, adv. 
firmly, strongly; Dh. 61. 313; «am 
katvā (gahita-sigale) with a fast hold, 
40,4; dalha-gahita-, 40,20. (c>. 
dandha). 

dasa!, mum. (sa. daga) ten; 31,13 
(bhataro); 81,21:  (sikkhapadani); 
0.māse (acc.) 62,2; instr. dasahi, 
18,16, 82,14; gen. dasannam, Dh, 137 
(dasann’). At the end of comp. num. 
‘d’ is often changed into ‘r’ (or |) 
cp. atthārasa, ekādasa, cuddasa, 
terasa, pannarasa, solasa. 

dasa?, mfn. (e. c., sa. drca), v. 
duddasa, sududdasa. (cp. dassa). 

dasabala, m. (sa. daga-bala) 
*possessing 10 powers! — Buddha; 
Kassapa-? (g. v.). 

dasama, mfu. (sa. dagama) the 
10%; ~o (vaggo) Dh. X. 

dassa, mfn. (e. ¢., sa. darca), v. 
sudassa. (cp. dasa?). 

dassati, fut., v. dadati. 

dassana, ^. (sa. dargana) seeing, 
looking; perception, intelligence, in- 
sight; religious persuasion; „arh 
(appiyanam, to see what is unpleasant) 
106,26 = Dh. 210; (ariyanam, “the 


. -— 


119 


sight of the elect”) Dh. 206; instr. 
vena (sekhena) insight, 69,35; ittara-°, 
80,12 (v. h.); abl. «à (°-vistka-, 
seeing spectacles etc.) 81,4; gen. 
~assa (visuddbi) Dh. 274; — sila- 
dassana-sampanna, mfn. (g. v.); cp. 
a-dassana. 

dassaniya, mfn. (sa. darganiya) 
visible, fair to see, beautiful; m. KO 
(raja) 47,9. 

dassayati, vb., v. dasseti. 

dassin, mfn. (e. c., sa. dargin) 
seeing, finding; v. bhaya-°, vajja-°. 

dassivas, mfn. (e. c., sa. dargi- 
vas) seeing; v. bhaya-0. 

dasseti, vb. (caus. ydrg. cp. 
dissati) to cause to be seen or to 
appear, to show, point out, produce, 
manifest, give to understand (acc.); 
to show to, present to, to bring be- 
fore (acc, & gen.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti 
(mayham apacitim) 29,26; 3. pl. 
venti, 21,4; dassayanti (uccivacam, 
g.v.) Dh. 83; part. m. dassento, 2,1; 
imp. 2. sg. ~ehi, 114,10; 2. pl. — etha, 
24,28; pot. 3. sg. weyya, 100,19; fut. 
1. pl. ~essima (pubbanimittam) 63,5; 
aor. 3. sg. ") „esi (attanath) 12,27; 
(unhakaram) 15,5; (chatakakaram) 
41,8; (pahāram, g. v.) 52,55; (soņi- 
rūpena, scil. attànam, presented her- 
self) 111,2; 5) dassayi, 1l3,s. 3. pl. 
sum, (core rañño) 38,33. 74,8; 
63,10; inf. dassetum, 91,5; ger. 
„etvā, 4,16. 36,9. | 

daha, m. (sa. draha, by metathesis 
= hrada) a lake, pond; acc. Ano- 
tatta-daham, 61,15; «bl. Kannamunda- 
dahato, 36,31. 

dahati, vb. !) (sa. dadhāti, ydhā 
to put, hold, consider; pp. hita (g. v. 
cp. dheyya; antaradhāyati, pidahati, 
samvidahati, saddahati, sandahati. 
— ?) = dahati (g. v.) ` 

dahara, mfn. (= 8a.) young; m. 
~0, 46,22. 99,4; (bhikkhu) Dh. 382; 
pl. wi (pakkhī) 11,4; f. wl (darika) 
101,19; acc. «im, 101,15; 47,19 (ku- 
marim); — daharitthi, a young wife, 
gen. ~iya, 49,13; — compar. dahara- 


diraka 


tara, mfn. the younger of two, gen. 
M. ~assa, 43,36. 

ditabba, datum, v. dadāti. 

dana, n. (= sa.) giving, gift, 
esp. alms, almsgiving, liberality; nom. 
eum (databbam) 14,12; Dh. 177; 
dinna-°, almsgiving, 14,18; acc. ~ath, 
86,14 (Satthari Alavith anuppatte ni- 
mantetvā ~ adamsu); maha-?, 61,6; 
instr. «ena, 16,13. loc. ~e (attana 
dinna-°) 29,2; — dānādīni puiiiiani, 
17,33; dānādīhi, 22,17; — *dāna-kathā, 
f. talking about (the duty and profits 
of) almsgiving, acc. ~am (pakāsesi) 
68,19; — 9-sala, f., a hall for alms- 
giving, pl. wa, 38,15; — jivita-°, 
dhamma-? (v. À.). 

dàni, adv. = idani (g. v.). 

dapeti, vb. (caus. dadati, sa. 
dapayati) to cause or order to be given 
(acc. £ gen.); aor. 3. sg. ~esi (tassa 
attha kahapane) 24,28; fut. 1. sg. 
e.essami, 43,27; pp. dāpita, n. ~am 
(aggam) 111,35. 

dāma, n. £ m. (sa. dàman, n.) 
a rope, cord; a chain, wreath; m. pl. 
^ (muiijamayā) 105,17; n». pl. ~ani 
(mala-°) 37,2; kusuma-dàma-sadisa-, 
mfn. 47,13; rajata-dama-vanna, mfm. 
61,19 (v. h.). 

dāya!, m. (= sa.) a gift, dona- 
tion; ~o, 25,10; nahapita-®, ib. (a 
barber’s fee). 

dàya?, m. (sa. dava) a forest, 
grove; v. miga-daya. 

dayaka, mfn. (= sa.) giving; v. 
paccaya-dayaka. 

dara, m. sg. (sa. dara, m. pl.) a 
wife; loc. pl. „esu, Dh. 345; para-^, 
another man's wife, acc. ~am, Dh. 
246; paradaripasevin, mfn. one who 
covets , another man's wife, nom. m. 
~i, Dh. 309; puttadara, m. sg. wife 
and children, acc. ~am, 38,20. 

düraka, m. (= sa.) a child, son, 
boy; ~o, 58,32; acc. mam, 58,30. 
81,11; Joc. e, 59,12; pl. wa (gāma-0) 
62,17; acc. pl. we, 21,1; "9-cori, f. 
(g. v.); %-mātar. f. nom. «à, the 
child's mother, 59,35, 


darika 


dārikā, f. (= sa.) a daughter, 
girl, young maid; wa, 101,19; acc. 
~am, 55,27. 101,15. 

dāru, n. (= sa.) wood, timber; 
a stick, log of wood, pl. fire-wood; 
acc. ~um, 106,28 = Dh. 80; pl. acc. 
Ani, 15,32. 35,6. 57,13; instr. „ūhi, 
35,7; ""-kalapa, m. (g. v.); "9-ràsi, 
m. (q. v.); dārūdaka-, 20,13 (fire-wood 
and water). 

daruja, mfn. (= sa.) made of 
wood; n. wath (bandhanam) Dh. 345. 

dàruna, mfn. (== sa.) horrible, 
dreadful; acc. n. wath (abbhakkha- 
nam) Dh. 139. 

daleti, vb. (sa. dālayati, dal) 
to cause to burst, to break through 
(acc.); ger. dālayitvā (pitilatam), 
105,19. 

dasa, m. (= sa.) a slave, servant; 
~O, 5,7. 

dāsī, f. (= sa.) a female servant 
or slave; voc. ~i (term of abuse) 
111,25; dāsi-gaņa-, 21,1 (a troop of ~). 

di-°, at the beginning of comp. 
— dvi (two, double), v. dija, dipada, 
diyaddha. 

digaechà = jigacchā (g. ».). 

dija, m. (sa. dvija) a bird; pl. 
e, 60,17. cp. dvija. 

dittha!, mfn. (pp. dissati, /drç; 
sa, drshta) !) seen, perceived; m. «o, 
19,4. 108,17; n. ~am, 85,5; instr. 
~ena (iminā, what we have seen here) 
54,15; °-pubba, mfn.; yatha-°, mfn. 
(v. h.); — *) known, understood; n. 
~am (h'etam Tathagatena) 94,8; 
— 5) belonging to this world (cp. di- 
ttha-dhamma below); loc. ~e va 
dhamme, in the present life, 92,53. 
dud-dittha, mfn. (v. h.). 

dittha?, m. (sa. dvishta, mfn.) 
an en$Ņemy; acc, eam, 3,27. | 

dittha-dhamma, (sa. drshta- 
dharma) !) mfn. having seen the truth; 
M. ~O, 69,12. — 2) m. this world, the 
present life; -sukhaviharam anuyutto, 
“in the enjoyment of happiness reached 
even in this world", 74,23; cp. dhamma 
& dittha! above. 


120 


ditthi, f. (sa. drshti) view, belief, 
doctrine, theory, esp. false theory; 
acc. ~im (papikam) 91,16. Dh. 164; 
loc. (iti ditthiyā sati, even if we 
suppose that, 92,27; — °-gata, n. (false) 
theory or doctrine; „arh (pāpakam) 
90,24; (sassato loko ti) 93,33; (uppan- 
na-°) 91,17; 94, (apanitam etar 
Tathāgatassa); pl. ~ani, 93,33; — 
*0-cahana, -kantāra, -visüka. -vi- 
pphandita, -samyojana (v. à.) 9441-3; 
— sammà-, f. right belief, right views, 
67,4. 96,5; — miccha-°, f. false doc- 
trine, acc. ^im, Dh. 167; %-samādāna, 
mfn. (g. v.) Db. 316. — cp. evam- 
ditthi, mfn. & aūūa-ditthika, mfn. 

*dinna, mfn. (pp. dadati) given, 
presented; ». ~am, 21,6 (tahi); 49,21 
(mulam); Dh. 356 (vitaragesu, a 
gift bestowed on...); as finite tense: 
M. ~O, 8,2; f. nā; 57,1; ^. ~am, 
7,7; — dana, n. almsgiving, 14,18; 
9-suūkā, f. (maya) 101,21 (v. sunkā). 
cp. a-dinna. I 

dipada, m. (sa. dvipada) a biped, 
a man; gen. pl. ~anam, Dh. 273. 

dibba, mfx. (sa. divya) heavenly, 
divine; charming, beautiful; acc. m. 
wath (yogam) Db. 417; f. ~am 
(ariyabhūmim) Dh. 236; Joc. pl. m. 
~esu (kāmesu) Dh. 187; comp. dibba- 
kame (acc. pl. m.) 45,5; °-gandha-, 
20,8-0; -cakkhumhi (7oc.) 109,5; -pa- 
nam, 59,25; -pupphani, 61,14; -bho- 
janam, 20,7; -vattha, n. 20,8. 61,13; 
-sampatti, 23,17; -sayana, n. 20,9. 
61,16. 

diyaddha, mfn. (sa. dvyardha) 
11/,; %-yojana-satika, mfn. 150 yo- 
janas long, instr, m. ~ena, 60,4. cp. 
addha. | 

divasa, m. d n. (= sa.) a day; 
nom. m. ~O (uposatha-°, fastday) 
14,16; acc. ~am, by day, in the course 
of the day, 2,82; tam „am, on that 
day, 87,31; ~am pi, ‘all day long’, 
42,50; ~am pi sapatham kurumānā 
nānācittā va honti, even on that same 
day they will change their minds and 
take their oath..., 51,as; eka-°, one 


121 


day, 13,22. 63,2; instr. ~ena (eka-°, 


Dipavamsa 


dissamāne, invisible) 112,18; pp. 


on one and the same day) 64,5; abl. | dittha, seen (v. h.); grd. datthabba, 


~ato (sattama-° patthaya) 61,5; 
(dhammadesanam suta-°, from the 
day on which she had heard) 86,30; 
loc. ~e (puna-, next day) 2,25; (jata-°, 
on his birthday) 24,51. 45,21; (eka-°, 
on the same day) 45,2; acc. pl. m. 
ime «e, “the last few days”, 73,23; 
^». „vāni. 25,20; loc. „esu (aiifiesu, 
g. v.) 8,10. 65,21. cp. devasikam, 
adv. & next. 

diva. adv. (= sa.) by day; ~ 
tapati ādicco, 107,25 — Dh. 387; 
rattim pi dīvāpi, night and day, 9,16; 
~ và rattim va, Dh. 249; ~ ca 
ratto ca, Dh. 296. cp. rattindivam, 
adv. 86,25. TUR 

disa!, mfn. (e. c.; sa. drga) like 
that; v. īdisa, eta-°, ki-°, ta-°, sa-'; 
khandha-disa, v. khandha. cp. dasa °, 

disa*, m. (sa. dvisha) an enemy; 
^0, Dh. 162; acc. ~ar, Dh. 42. 

disa, f. (sa. dig & digā) quarter, 
direction; region, country; acc. «am 
(katamam, in which direction) 95,5; 
(agatam ~, “the untrodden country" 
= Nibbana) Dh. 323; abl. ~ato 
uttara-9, g. v.) 61,18; acc. pl. nā 
teabba) 85,4. Dh. 54; loc. pl. wasu 
(sabba-?, in each direction) 63,19. cp. 
catuddisa & next. 

*disā-kāka, m. a crow kept on 
board ships in order to search for land; 
acc. eam, 18,4. (cp. Fick, Soc, Gl. 
p. 178; E. Hardy, Buddha, p. 18.) 

*disa-pamokkha, mfn, world- 
famed, very celebrated; m. ~o (āca- 
riyo) 16,33. 

*disva, *disvana, ger., v. next. 

dissati, vb. (sa. ydrq, pass. 
drgyate) 1) pass. to be seen, appear; 
pr. 3. sg. wati, 44,25. 52,1; na „ati 
has disappeared) 68,30; 3. pl. „anti 
na, are not seen, opp. pakasenti) 
Dh. 304; 104,1 (ettha [scil. sangame] 
na ~, don't devote themselves to this 
battle, cp. Windisch, Mara, p. 27; the 
‘na’ is perhaps interpolated); part. 
dissamāna, acc. pl. m. ~e ( 


= A= 


mfn. to be regarded or understood, 
M. ~0 (attho) 85,10-28, N, wal, 19,4. 
— *) act. to see, regard, understand 
(acc.) (the suppletive verb is passati, 
g. v.); aor. 3, sg. *) addasa, 4,5 
E ito 23,16; addasā, 75,18. 76,20 
~ā kho); 2. sg. addasa or addasa, 
71,31 (addasā ti); 3. pl. addasāsurh, 
76,18; 1. pl. addasāma, 105,23; *) ad- 
dakkhi. v. dakkhati; fut. v. dakkhati; 
inf. datthum, 48,19. 87,9; comp. 
datthu-kama, mfn. wishing to see, f. 
8 (tam) 19,12; ger. *) disva, 1,6 ete.; 
b) disvana, 67,31. 68,10. 76,19 (at the 
beginning of a sentence). cp. dasa’, 
dassa etc.; ditthi, disa‘. 

digha, mfn. (sa. dirgha) long; 
m. ~o (puriso, tall) 92,13 (opp. rasso); 
f. mā, 107,9 = Dh. 60; n. ~am, 
Dh. 409; acc. ~ar (addhanam) 44,21; 
(pàcanayatthim) 71,29. 
*Dīgha-nikāya, m. name of a 
Pāli work, the first of the 5 Nikāyas 
(4. v.); ~o, 102,15. Specimens thereof: 
p. 77,4-81,4. 

*Dīgha-bhāņaka, m. a repeater 
(expounder or follower) of Digha- 
nikāya; pl. nā, 64,2. 


. cp. padipa. 

dipa?, wm. (& n.) (sa. dvipa) !) 
an island; land, continent; ~o, 110,51. 
112,30; acc. mam, 114,2; loc. we, 
19,9; sabba-dipamhi (over all Jam- 
budipa) 113,5. — ?) metaph. a support, 
refuge; karohi dipam attano, Dh. 
236. cp. Jambu-dipa, Naga-°, Lanka-", 
Seruma-?, z, pr. 

*dipaka, m. (fr. prec.) a little 
island; «0, 2,20; gen. «assa, 2,22; 
abl. nā, 3,20; ~ato, 2,31; loc. we, 2,29. 

dipana, mf(~i)n. (= sa.) ex- 
plaining, illustrating; v. Paramattha- 
dīpanī, 

*Dīpavamsa, m. (fr. dīpa') 


dipi» 


name of a Pāli work, the oldest chronicle 
of Ceylon; Specimen thereof: p. 109— 
110,16. 

dipin, m. (sa. dvīpin) a panther 
or leopard; gen. ~ino, 8,37. . 

dipeti, vb. (caus. ydip) 1) to 
illustrate, explain, teach (acc.); pr. 
3. sg. ~eti (attharh dhammaī ca) 
Dh. 363; — *) intr. to emit light, 
shine; pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (sabbarattim) 
99,18. 

du-, indecl. (sa. dus-) prefix to 
nouns (subst. & adj.) implying ‘evil, 
bad, difficult’ (opp.su-). Before vowels 
the old form dur- is preserved, e. g. 
dur-accaya, ete.. before consonants 
du- with the foll. cons. doubled, e. g. 
dukkata, ducchanna, dummana, etc. 
(V becomes bb : dubbaca, dubbanna), 
except before r, where the u is length- 
ened, e. g. dū-rakkha. By vrddhi 
we have do-°, e. g. domanassa (cp. 
dohala). 

dukkata & dukkata, w. (sa. 
dush-krta), evil deed, sin, offending; 
~am (akatam) Dh. 314; (-t-, manasa) 
Dh. 391; sukata-dukkata, mfn. good 
and evil, gen. pl. ~anam (kammā- 
nam) 97,14. 

dukkara, mfn. (sa. dush-kara) 
difficult to do, difficult; m. ~o (maggo 
padhanaya) 103,10; ». parama-dukka- 
ram, very d. Dh. 163. 

dukkha, 1) mf». (sa. duhkha) 
unpleasant, painful (opp. sukha); m. 
~0, 66,27, 67,10, Dh. 117; f. wa, 67,8; 
n. ~am, 67,9; 70,27; a-dukkham- 
asukham, neither pleasant nor painful, 
70,27; — dukkharm, adv. Dh. 201 
(~ seti, “is unhappy"). — 2) n. (some- 
times written dukha metri causa, Dh. 
83. 203) pain, misery; grief, suffering; 
mom, ~ai, 35,12. 77,5; kin te a, 
“what ails you?” 13,18; dukkh’, 17,38; 
^. ariyasaccam (g. v.) 67,8; sabba-^, 
108,13; acc. ~arn, 16,30. 23,16. 107,19; 
(marana-°) 7,9; (sisaccheda«?) 17,19; 
instr. «ena (-kh-) Dh. 83; dat. 
e ya, Dh. 248; gen. wassa, 70,17. 
107,19; abl. a) nā, 16,28. 107,22 = 


122 


Dh. 192 (sabba-°); *) ~ato, 31,20; 
loc, we, 107,12 == Dh. 277; pl. nā 
(= nāni, cp. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 72) 
Dh, 202. 203 (-kh-). 221; instr. pl. 
~ehi, 70,30; — comp. *dukkhánupatita, 
mfn. “beset with pain", Dh. 302; — 
*0-Anubhavana-, 23,18 (v. anubha- 
vana); — ""-üpadhàna, x. causing 
pain; Dh. 291 (para-', v. upadhāna); 
— *0-ūpasama-gāmin, mfn. leading to 
quieting of pain, acc. m. ~inam (mag- 
gam) 107,20 == Dh. 191 (v. upasama); 
— *0-kkhandha, m. (v. khandha); — 
9-domanassa, n. pl. o comp.) 
90,18; — *°-nirodha, m. cessation or 
destruction of misery; ~am (ariyasac- 
cam [q. v.] adj. n., a scholastic ex- 
pression = concerning the cessation 
of misery) 67,15; °-nirodha-gamini 
(adj. f. leading to that) 67,17; — 
*O-ppatta, mfn. afflicted by pain, m. 
m0, 59,10; — *°-samudaya, m. (v. h.); 
„am (adj. n. cp. dukkha-nirodha 
above) 67,3; — *°-samuppada. m. 
107,19 (v. h.) cp. sa-dukkha, mfn. & 
next, . 
dukkhin, mfn. (sa. duhkhin) 
pained, afflicted, sorrowful; m. ~i, 
2,14. 72,95. 

dukha, ». — dukkha. 

dugga, mfn. (sa. dur-ga) difficult, 
impassable; painful, evil; m. ~o 
(maggo) 103,10; acc. „am (samsa- 
ram), Dh. 414; abl. n. nā (“out of 
the evil way") Dh. 327. 

duggata, mfn. (sa. dur-gata) 
unfortunate, miserable, poor; -itthī, 
f. a poor woman, acc. with, 48,16; 
— *0bhava, m. poverty; acc. ~am, 
57,2. , 

duggati, f. (sa. dur-gati) ‘evil 
path’, hell, unfortunate existence; acc. 
wim, Dh. 17; 106,0 — Dh. 240. 
(cp. suggati). 

*duggahita, mfn. badly grasped; 
m. ~0 (kuso) Dh. 311. 

duccarita, !)mfn. (sa. duc-carita) 
evil; acc. m. ~am (dhammam, == 
sin) Dh. 169; — ?) ». ill-conduct, sin; 
kaya-°, mano-°, vaci-? (v. À.). 


123 


*ducchanna, mfn. ill-thatched; 
n. ~ar (agaram) Dh. 13. 

*dujjana, mfn. (cp. sa. dur- 
jūāna & janana above) difficult to be 
understood; m. ~o (dhammo, tayā) 
94,26. 

dujjīva, mfn. (sa. dur-jīva) dif- 
ficult to live; n. „am (jivitam) Dh. 
245 (w. instr.). 

duttha, mfn. (sa. dushta) bad, 
evil, malignant; f. pl. mā, 52,6; 
°-brahmana, voc. 33,16; *°-citta, mfn. 
evil-minded, with evil intention; m. 
~0, 75,24. cp. a-duttha, paduttha & 
dussati. 

dutiya, mfn. (sa. dvitiya) the 
second (cp. añña, itara) acc. m. „am, 
35,10; f. ~am (gatham) 8,31; °-jjhana, 
n. (v. jhāna); — dutiyam, adv. for 
the second time, „am pi (kho) 74,25. 
79,21. 88,17; yāva ~am pi, up to the 
second time, 102,26. cp. dvi (dva). 

duttara, mfn. (sa. dus-tara) dif- 
ficult to be passed; v. su-duttara. 

duddama, mfn. (sa. dur-dama) 
difficult to be subdued; m. ~o (atta) 
Dh. 159. 

duddasa, mfn. (sa. dur-drga 
difficult to be seen; m. ~o (dhammo 
94,25; n. «am, 106,16 == Dh. 252 
(opp. su-dassa); su-duddasam, Dh. 36. 

duddittha, mfn. (sa. dur-drshta) 
confused, misguided; cc. m. ~am, 
Dh. 339. 

duddha, mfn. (pp. dohati, duhati 
(-ū-); sa. dugdha, yduh) milked; 
*0.khīra, mfn. (v. h.) cp. duyhati, 


dundubhi, m. (= 
drum; deva-°, m. & f. thunder, pi. 
m~iyo (f.) 80,20. ` 

dunniggaha, mfn. (sa. dur-ni- 
graha) difficult to be restrained; gen. 
^. ~assa (cittassa), Dh. 38. 

dunnivaraya, mfn. (sa. dur-ni- 
varya) difficult to be kept back or 
restrained; n. „am (cittam) Dh. 
33; m. ~o (kufjaro) Dh. 324. cp. 
nivārēti. | 

duppaiifia, mfn. (sa. dush-prajiia) 


dummana 


stupid, foolish, ignorant; m. ~o, Dh. 
111. 140. 

*duppabbajja, x. the painful 
life of a pabbajita (g. v.); nom. ~am 
(durabhiramain) Dh. 302 (differently 
Max Müller, SBE. X. 73). cp. pab- 
bajja, f. 7 

*duppamuiica, mfn. difficult to 
be loosened; n. „ari (bandhanari) 
Dh. 346. (cp. pamuiicati). 

*dupparamattha, mfn. badly 
practised; 4. «am (samaññam) Dh. 
311. (cp. par&masati). 

*duppariyogaha, mfn. difficult 
to get at the bottom of, unfathomable; 
m. ~o (Tathagato) 95,13. (cp. pari- 
yogāha). 

dubbaca, mfn. (sa. dur-vacas) 
abusive, unruly; difficult to reason 
with, self-willed; *°-bhava, m. self-will, 
instr. ~ena, 34,16. (cp. vacas). 

dubbanna, mfn. (sa. dur-varna) 
of a bad colour, ill-favoured; m, ~O, 
103,5. 

dubbala, mfn. (sa. dur-bala) 
weak, feeble; m. ~o, 12,27; acc. ~am, 
Dh. 7; n. pl. ~ani (uddapadini) 
91,19. 

*dubbalatta, x. (sa. *dur-ba- 
latva) weakness; abl. mā, 12,21. 

*dubbali-karana, mfn. who 
causes weaknees; acc. pl. m. ~e (w. 
gen. paññaya, scil. paūca nivarane) 


1,7. 
dubbuddhin, mfn. (sa. dur- 
buddhi) foolish, without insight; m. 


pl. «ino, 76,30. 


dubbhati, vb. (sa. ydruh, druh- 
yati) to be hostile to, plot against 
(loc.) ; fut. 1. sg. wissami (tayi) 41,35. 
cp. dūbha. | | 
dubbhāsita, mfn. (sa. dur-bha- 
shita) badly spoken; n. „am (padam) 
110,12. "EL | | 
duma, m. (sa. druma) a tree; 
dumagga, n. the top of a tree, abl. 
„amhā, 13,4 (cp. agga*). | 
dummati, m. (sa. dur-mati) a 
fool; nom. ~i (aham) 30,33. 
dummana, mfn. (sa. dur-manas) 


dummedha 


dejected, in bad spirits; m. «o, 2,14. 
12,25. 104,18. 

dummedha, m. (sa. dur-medha) 
a fool; nom. ^o, Dh. 136; voc. wa, 
106,10 == Dh. 894. cp. next. 

*dummedhin, mfn. foolish, stu- 
pid; m. pl. ~ino (jana) Dh. 26. 

duyhati, vb. (pass. dohati, yduh) 
to be milked; part. n. ~ manam 
art new milk, 99,28; pp. duddha 
(q. v.). 
. duraccaya, mfn. (sa. dur-atyaya) 
difficult to be conquered; acc. f. ~am 
(tanham) 108,1 == Dh. 336. 

duranubodha, mfn. (= sa.) 
difficult to be comprehended; m. ~o 
(dhammo) 94,5. 

durannaya, mfn. (sa. pe 
difficult to be fathomed; f. nā (gati 
Dh. 92. 

*durabhirama, mfn. difficult to 
be enjoyed; n. ~ar (duppabbajjam) 
Dh. 302. 

durabhisambhava, ' mf». (= 
sa.) difficult to reach or enter upon; 
m. wo (maggo) 103,10. 

*durajana, mfn. difficult to be 
understood; m. ~o (bhavo thinam) 
51,31. | 

*durāvāsa, mfn. difficult to dwell 
in, d. to be lived or led; pl. (x. 
~a (ghara, the household life) Dh. 302. 

dullabha, mfn. (sa. dur-labha) 
difficult to be found or obtained; m, 
ru (0), 31,18. Dh. 193; acc. e Am, Dh. 
160; x. su-dullabham (saccam) 51,80; 
^ — Ü-manussattar, x. the state of man 
which is one difficult to obtain, 29,15. 

dussa, 15,19, according to the 
Comm. gen. pron. demonstr. == amussa 
(cp. asu, amuka), but this can hardly 
be correct; the reading dussam which, 
in spite of the Comm., has been main- 
tained by the Cingalese Mss., ought no 
doubt to be preferred; dussa, n. (sa. 
dūshya, dügya or dūrga) a kind of 
woven stuff, occurs frequenély in the 
Pāli texts; hence *dussika, m. a ma- 
nufacturer of that stuff, or a cloth-seller 
(Jat. VI, 276,35. Mil. 262,14, 333,12); 


— 


194 


but 1 think that in this case dussa 
must be adj. = sa. dushya, corrup- 
tible, easily to be spoiled or damaged, 
n. ~am (khettapalassa rattibhattam). 
Francis & Neil, Jat. IIT. p. 16, trans- 
late “wrongfully” (dussam, adv., cp. 
dussati below) and it is perhaps in 
order to avoid this interpretation 
(which does not agree with the ten- 


. dency of the prose tale) that the Comm. 


has taken it for gen. pron. Trenckner 
accepts the gen, dussa (== amussa) 
although that form is not found else- 
where. Henry (Prēcis de gramm. Pālie, 
p. 94) corrects dussa into amussa. 

dussati, vb. (sa. dushyati, Vdush) 
to sin, offend (against, gen. or loc. 
pers.); pr. 3.sg. „ati (appadutthassa) 
Dh. 125; (appadutthesu) Dh. 137; 
pp. duttha (v. h.); caus. dūseti (9. v.) 
cp. dussa above. 

dussila, mfn. (sa. duh-cila) ill- 
natured, bad, wicked, vicious; m. ~O, 
107,2 = Dh. 308; Dh. 110. 320; f. 
wi, 9,11; instr. f. nāya, 20,2. 

*dussīlya, m. (fr. prec.) wicked- 
ness; “om. „am (accanta-°) Dh. 162. 

duhati, vb., v. dohati (dūhati). 

dita, n. (= sa.) a messenger; 
pl. ~a (deva-°) 45,12; acc. pl. ~e 
(assa-?) 68,31. 

*dübha, m. (fr. dubbhati, ydruh; 
base of dübhati, vb. — dubbhati; cp. 
sa. droha) malice, perfidy, treachery; 
only in comp. a-dūbha (g. v.) cp. a- 
dūbhāya (dat.) Jat. I, 180,22; a-drū- 
bhāya, Vin. I, 347, tr. b. 

dūra, mfn. (= sa.) distant, far 
(opp. vidūra); — diiram, adv. far 
away, 12,29; dūraū-gama, mfn. going 
far away, acc. m. ~am, Dh. 37; — dù- 
rato (abl.) adv. from afar, 68,10. 76,20. 
86,20. Dh. 219; — dūre (Joc.) adv. R 
prp. w. abl., far, far away; ~ thito, 
56,8; ~ pakasenti, Dh, 304; dumag- 
gamha ~, 13,4; ~ito, 20,17; cp. ati- 
dūra. 

dūrakkha, mfn. (sa. du-rakshya) 
difficult to be guarded; n, ~ar (cit- 
tam) Dh. 33. 


125 


duürangama, mfn. (= sa.) v. dūra, 

*dūrama, mfn. difficult to be en- 
joyed; yattha ~am (x.), where enjoy- 
ment is difficult. 

düseti, vb. (caus. dussati, sa. 
dūshayati) to spoil, destroy, infest 
(ace.); aor. 3. sg. düsayi, 9,2 (without 
obj. == spoiled the game; = attānam 
dusayi, Comm.). 

deti, vb. & dey ya, grd., v. dadāti. 

deva, m. (— sa.) !)a god, deity; 
mostly pl. the gods, esp. the Devas 
(opp. Asuras) or inhabitants of the 
Devaloka, whose chief is Sakka; nom. 
„0, 110,11; Dh. 105; gen. ~wassa, 
110,27; pl. nā, Dh. 94. 181. 230. 366. 
420; <š ābbassarā (v. h.) Dh. 200; 
gen. pl. ~anam, 59,28. 80,26; Dh. 30. 
224 (devana); loc. „esu, Dh. 56; — 
comp. (often implying the sense of 
‘celestial, superhuman’, etc.) : *devā- 
nubhāvena (instr. by the power of 
the gods, 63,32 (v. ānubhāva); devinda, 
m. the lord of the Devas (Sakka), 
110,24-26; °-kaiifia, f. a celestial nymph, 
pl. ~a, 64,30; *°-kumara, m. a son of 
a god, "-vannin, mfn. beautiful like 
that, pl. m. ~ino, 46,6 (cp. "-putta); 
0-gana, m. a class or troop of gods, 
instr. — ena, 60,23; %-tthāna, n. place 
or seat in heaven, 16,18; ""-nagara, 
n. = pura, ^. the city of the Devas, 
17,31. 59,55; 27,31; °-putta, m. (= 
°-kumara) acc. ar, 63,8 (cp. putta) ; 
O-rajan, m. (= devinda), nom. nā, 
45,50; °-loka, m. the world of the 
Devas or any superior world, heaven, 
nom. ~0, 59,30; acc. ~am, Dh. 177; 
loc. ~asmim, 59,30; loc. pl. „esu 
(dvisu, viz. Sakka’s and Brahma’s 
worlds) 60,25; %-ābhimukha, mfn. (v. 
abhimukha); tavatimsa-°, 59,28 (v. h.); 
— *0_vimana, n. the palace of the gods, 
0-sadisa, mfn. like that, acc. m. ~am 
(ratbarh) 68,6; — *°-samkhalika, f. 
a magic chain, instr. „vāja, 21,14. — 
2) the sky, atmosphere; the rain-god; 
„0 (na vassati) 102,6; voc. wa, 104,23; 
gen. ~assa (vassato) 105,22; ?-dun- 
dubhi (v. h.). — 3) the god of death; 


NI] — a eWIW,I!H:ILIÉIII€IIIwWMÉWa,IIIIIII€IŠI€IIzIIÉIIOI|H€IEDIç M a M ——————À MÀ — —  — e 


desanā 


deva-dūta, m. a messenger of death; 
pl. „vā (uttamaūgaruhā) 45,13. — $) a 
lord, voc. deva frequently used in 
addressing a king (‘sire, your majesty’) 
6,14. 31,9-19. 65,17; Makhādeva, m. 
nom. pr. (g. v.). cp. dibba, mfn., devi, 
f., sadevaka, mfn. & next. 

devatā, f. (& m.), (= sa.) a god, 
deity; a spirit, ghost; in sg. often 
used instead of deva (cp. deva-putta); 
nom. ~& (varanarukkhe adhivattha) 
5,19; pl. wa, 63,7. 65,24. 114,15; instr. 
~āhi, 63,20; loc. māsu, 34,26; — 
rukkha-°, a dryad, 3,31; — samudda-?, 
a spirit of the sea, 28,28; — devatānu- 
bhāvena, instr. 17,25 (v. ānubhāva); 
— *O-paribhoga, mfn. fit to be enjoyed 
by the gods, n. ~am (ambapakkam) 
36,31; — ""-sannipàta, m. an assembly 
of gods, loc. ~amhi, 110,20. 

Devadatta, m. (— sa.) nom. pr. 
of a relative (cousin) and enemy of 
Gotama Buddha; «o, 74,19, seqv. 


*Devadaha, n. nom. pr. of a 
town, near the Lumbini-Grove, be- 
longing to the family of Gotama Bu- 
ddha's mother; ?-nagaram,  62,5-e. 
[cp. Lassen, IA. II. p. 66 & XXXIIL] 

*devasikam, adve. (fr. divasa, 
cp. sa. daivasaka, mfn.) daily, every 
day; 6,2. 

devi, f. (= sa.) 1) a goddess; 
pl. wiyo, 61,12. — ?) a queen; nom. 
el, 61,23; voc. devi, 85,26; acc. ~it, 
19,14; gen. mijā, 19,21. 61,30; comp. 
w. nom. pr. Amara-°, the wife of 
Mahosadha, 55,32. 56,23; = Amara, 
56,12; — Udumbarā- (q. v.). 

desa, m. (sa. deça) region, place, 
country; part, portion; nom. <o, 82,25. 
112,30; acc. „am, 31,5; loc. «e 
majjhima-°) 91,18. cp. padesa, vi- 

esa. 

desana, f. (sa. deganà) a sermon, 
discourse, lesson; nom. <à, 86,9. 87,2; 
acc. eam, 30,4; Ü-Avasane, at the 
end of the discourse, 89,2; — dham- 
ma-', f. id.; instruction in the sacred 
doctrine; 68,23 (buddhanam); acc. 


desita 


~am, 17,31. 29,16; — saddhamma-®, 
f. id. Dh. 194. 
desita, mfn. (pp. deseti, sa. de- 
cita) shown, set forth, taught; m. ~o 
(dhammo) 79,5; n. ~am (nibbanam) 
Dh. 285; acc. m. ~am (Buddha-®, 
taught by the B.) 109,5; (Sammā- 
sambuddha-°, kathamaggam) 113,29; 
m. pl. wa (vagga) Dh. p. 94. v. 3, 
su-desita, mfn. (g. v.). 
deseti, vb. (sa, decayati, caus. 
/dig) to show, set forth, teach, preach 
o pr. 1. sg. e, emi (dhammam 
90,17; parl. m. «ento (dhammam 
17,27. 47,18. 74,18; aor. 3. sg. «esi, 
17,90; fut. 1. sg. ~essami, 68,15; ger. 
netvā, 7,97; part. pass, desiyamana, 
loc. m. ~e (dhamme) 69,22; pp. 
desita (g. v.), cp. desanā. 
deha, m. (= sa.) the body; nom. 
m0, 85,6 (comm. on kaya). 
domanassa, x. (sa. daurmana- 
sya) dejectedness, despair; grief; instr. 
pl. wehi, 70,0; gen. pl. ~anam 
(dukkha-° dvandva-comp.) 90,18; 
66,10-17 (do.); °-ppatta, mfn. sorrow- 
ful, m. <o, 13,6. cp. dummana, mfn, 
. dovarika, m. (sa. dauvarika) a 
door-keeper, porter; eo, 90,82; acc. 
~am, 91,25; gen. ~assa, 58,1; acc. 
pl. we, 58,21 (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 
102); instr, pl. „ehi (pandita-°) 
91,23. cp. dvāra. 
dosa!, m. (sa. dosha) fault, guilt; 
m0, 74,18; e. c. mfn. (damaged by) 
v. iccha, tina, dosa?, moha, raga. 
dosa*, m. (sa. dvesha) hatred; 
acc. ~am, Dh. 20 (in the series: 
raga, dosa, moha); *-aggi, m. the 
fire of hatred, 64,20 (do.); *9-dosa, 
mfn. (sa. *dvesha-dosha) damaged 
by hatred, f. ~ā (ayam paja) Dh. 
357; *0-sama, mfn. like hatred, m. 
„0 (kali) Dh. 202; vanta-°, vita-°, 
mfn. free from hatred, Dh. 263, 357. 
(cp. Pischel, Gr. § 129). 
. dohati (& duhati) eb. (ea. / duh) 
to milk; pass. duyhati, pp. duddha 


g. v.). 
dohala, m. (sa. dohada, m., ep. 


126 


sa. daurhrda, m.) wish, desire, esp. 
the morbid longing of pregnant women 
(w. loc.); nom. ~o, 1,25; acc. ~ar, 
l,e (hadayamamse); hence the fre- 
quently occurring adj. f. dohalini, 
1) pregnant, *) desiring, longing for 
(w. loc. or comp.) : Jāt. IV, 334,21. 
VI, 484,26; III, 27,29. VI, 326,15 ete. 
The sanskritic etymology dohada — 
daurhrda has been called in question 
by Lüders (Gött. Nachr. 1898,1: fr. 
*dvibrd); likewise Jolly, Idg. Forsch. 
X, 218 and Pischel, Gr. § 436; but 
Béhilingk, ZDMG. Vol. 55,98 takes 
it — doha-da (“das Verlangen nach 
dem, was Milch erzeugt", scil. kāma?) 

dva-, dvà-, in comp. = 2; v; 
mext (cp. dvi (dve)). 

dvattimsa, num, (sa. dvatrim- 
gat) 32; 23,25 (petiyo); *°-akara, n. 
name of a chapter of Khuddakapātha 
(the 32 parts of the body) 82,6. 

*dvattikkhattum, adv. (sa. 
*dva-tri-krtvas) for a second and third 
time; 114,16. cp. khattum & tikkhat- 
tum. 

dvaya, 1) mfn. (= sa.) twofold, 
double; loc. pl. „esu (dhammesu) 
Dh. 384. — ?) n. a pair, couple; two 
(opposite) things; acc. ~am (nissito 
loko) 96,6; gatha-dvayam, two gāthās, 
47,5. 114,9; potthaka-°, 114,18 (two 
copies). | 

dvadasa, num. (sa. dvadaga) 
twelve; dvādasama, mfn. the twelfth, 
m. ~0, Dh. XII. 

dvara, n. (= sa.) door, gate, 
entrance; nom. wai (nivesana-?, 
nagara-°) 68,2-5; acc. ~am, 6,5. 68,5; 
instr. ~ena, by the door or gateway, 
12,10 (pure-°, the front door); 12,15, 
57,18 (pacchima-?, the back wa 
55,30 (uttara-°, the northern gateway); 
59,8 AND q. v.); loc. we, 57,18 
(pure-9); often e. c. — at, before: 
gama-°, 8,90; ghara-9, 27,27; acc. pl. 
„vāni (nagara-°) 39,25; loc. pl. „esu, 
38,12. 43,9; comp. gabbha- (g. v.); 
9-samipar (v. h.); — dvāra-kotthaka, 
m. a gateway; loc. pl. „esu, 48,53; 


127 


satta-dvāra-kotthaka, mfn. having 7 
gateways, acc. ~am (geham) ib.; — 
*dvāra-gāma, m. a suburb; abl. ~ato, 
19,28; %-gāmaka, m. id., acc. pl. we, 
48,9; — aparuta-dvara, mfn. (v. h.); 
eka-dvāra, mfn. (v. eka?); catu-°, 
pihita-°, bahu-°, mfn. (g. v.) cp. 
dovarika. 

dvavisati, num. (sa. dvāvimgati) 
22; dvavisatima, mfn. the 22; m, 
^ 0 (vaggo) Dh. XXII. 

dvi-, (= sa.) base of the mum. 
dve (nom. acc. mfn.) — two; nom. 
6,33 (jana); dve pi, both, 19,14; 24,16 
thatthey Sa acc. 6,18 (mige); 62,28 
hatthe); ekarh dve karoti (= ka- 
sati) 56,15; insír. dvihi, 7,14; 12,2; 
gen. dvinnam, 12,82; 40,51; Zoe. dvisu, 
60,22. cp. di- (dija, dipada, diyaddha); 
dutiya, mfn.; dva-, dvà-; dvaya, 
mfn. & next. 

dvija, m. (= sa.; cp. dija) a bird; 
*0-gaņa, m. a flock of birds; pi, 
nā, 7,20. 

dvidha, adv. (= sa.) twofold, 
divided in two; 33,18 (chinditvā); 
58,22 (bhinditvā); — °-karana, x. the 
dividing in two (= kasana), 56,16. 
cp. dvedha. 

dvīha, x. (sa. dvy-aha, m.) a 
period of two days; v. aha, cp. tiha. 

dve, num. nom. acc., v. dvi- 

dvedha, adv. (= sa.; cp. dvidhā) 
twofold, divided in two; *®-patha, 
m. a double path, cross-way; doubt; 
ace. ^AI, Dh. 282. 


Dh. 


dhamsin, mfn. (rather = sa. 
dharshin than sa. dhvamsin (Tr.); cp. 
Dhpd. (1855) p. 372-3) audacious, 
obtrusive, importunate; «instr. ` m. 
wind, Dh. 244 (cp. MN. I p. 236,1). 

dhaja, m. (sa. dhvaja) a banner, 
flag or standard; °-patakadihi, 62,7. 

dhajini, f. (sa. dlivajini) an army 
(arrayed); acc. wim, 104,5. 


dhamma 


dhana, n. (= sa.) wealth, pro- 
perty; money; nom. ~am, 23,6. 48,11; 
acc. «am, 29,6. 38,30. 48,18; gen. 
wassa, 52,5; — Jāharaņatthāya, 32,17 
(e. āharaņa); dhanatthaya, 32,29 (v. 
attha!); 9-lobha, m. desire of money; 
instr, ~ena, 22,22; *'-vassa, ^. & 
*0_vasapanaka, mfn. (v. h.); °-santike, 
83,26 (g. v.); — mahad-dhana, mfn. 
(g. v.); ep. nid-dhana, sa-dhana & 
dhanesin. 

*Dhanapalaka, m. nom. pr. of 
an elephant (said to be identical with 
Nālāgiri, g. v.); nom. ~o nama 
kuüjaro, Dh. 324 (cp. Jat. V, 337,1). 

*Dhaniya, m. nom. pr. of a 
herdsman; ~o (gopo) 104,20. 

dhanu, x. (& m. ?) (sa. dhanus 
& dhanu, m.) a bow; acc. ~um, 61,20. 
92,15; asi-satti-dhanu-adini (avudhani) 
6,12; dhanu-kalāpa, (m. ?) bow and 
quiver, 75,15. 

dhanesin, mfn. (sa. dhanaishin) 
longing for riches; gen. pl. ~inam 
(vanijanam) 20,22 — 25,0. 

dhamani, f. (— sa.) a vein, nerve; 
°-santhata, mfn. (g. v.) covered with 
veins (said of an emaciated person); 
^. ~am (jantum kisam) 106,12 = 
Dh. 395 (cp. Weber, Bhag. II. 289,2-s). 

dhameti, eb. (caus. dhamati, to 
blow; sa. ydhmà) to blow (any iu- 
strument, acc.); part. m. pl. „entā 
(sarnkhe) 8,25. 

dhamma!, m. (rarely n.) (sa. 
dbarma) 1) oxdi right, 
duty; som. ~o (sanantano) 106,24 
= Dh. 5; acc. ~am (ekam) 106,14 
= Dh. 176; (vissam, the whole law) 
106,5 — Dh. 266; gen. ~assa (anu- 
dhammacārī, g. v.) Dh. 20; n. pl. 
„vāni, Dh. 82; samana-°, priestly 
duties, 15,12; often opp. attha (v. h.). 
- ri Bà... morallty;...yirtue, 
good quality; ~o, 106,» — Dh. 393; 
3,27; Dh. 261; „am (cara) 7,24, cp. 
Dh. 169» instr. ~ena, righteously, 
36,29. 42,26. Dh. 257; «assa (gutto, 
q. v.) Dh. 257; loc. we (with honour- 
able intentions) 1,21; pl. «à (caturo) 


dhamma 


8,36; (cattāro) Dh. 109; (pāpakā, sins) 
Dh. 242; instr. wehi, 3,4; gen. 
Anam, Dh. 273. cp. a-dhamma, 
m. — *) “the trutb?; *) any religious 
doctrine or philosophical system, esp. 
that taught by Buddha (the Four Truths 
etc.); preaching of that doctrine; ~o, 
94,25; wath (sunahi) 22,17; (sossami 
87,16; (deseti) 7,97. 51,5; (uttamam 
Dh. 115; (kanham, g. v.) Dh. 87; 
vara-?, 87,9; Satthu ~am, 87,13; loc. 
^6 (desiyamane) 69,22; — P) the 
second great collection of the Buddhist 
sacred books (tipitaka, also named 
sutta-pitaka) opp. vinaya (q. v., cp. 
abhidhamma) : ~o ca vinayo ca, 
79,5; ~am, 109,15; "-vinaya-samgaha, 
m. 109,15; — °) in the triple formula: 
Buddha, dhamma, samgha, 69,19. 
107,17 — Dh. 190 (cp. tevācika & 
sarana). — cp. sad-dhamma, a-sad- 
dhamma (v. a-saf); at the end of 
adj. comp. v. agga-dhamma, dittha~®, 
patta-°, pariyogalha-", vidita-°, sam- 
khata-°, — 4) In the psychology = 
nature, character; condition of being, 
condition of life; thing; in pl. dhamma 
is often — mental objects in general, 
phenomena (just as rupa are the objects 


of sense to the eye, 70,35), sometimes. 
taken as identical with samkhara (g. 


v.); Joc. ditthe VA dhamme, in this 
world, in the present life, 92,3» (cp. 
dittha-dhamma); sahetu-dhamma, 
m. the effect together with its cause, 
acc. ~am, 66,21; pl. —8, 66,20; 70,83; 
sabbe <à anattā, 107,15 = Dh. 279; 
manopubbaūgamā „nā, the states of 
mind are the result of thought (?) 
Db. 1 (cy. manas); Joc. pl. «esu 
(sabbesu) Dh. 353; dvayesu „esu 
(in two things; i. e. samatha % vipas- 
sana, Comm.) Dh, 384. — The deno- 
tion of "nature, state, condition" may 
be seen in many comp. (subst. & adj.) : 
mitta.dhamma, m. friendship, 14,3; 
methuna-°, m. love, 64,11;e more fre- 
quently at the end of adj. comp. = 
having the nature of, being subject to : 
a-nivattana-dhamma, a-vinipata-®, 


128 


an-uppada-°, nirodha-°, papa-°, ma- 
rici-°, vaya~-°, samudaya-?, mfn. (v. 
h.). As to the different explanations 
of the meaning of the word. dhamma 
cp. Max Müller, SBE. X. p. 3—4; 
Caroline “Rhys Davids, Trausl. of 
Dhamma-Sangani, Introd. p. XXXII 
seqv., p. XLI. cp. next. ete. 
dhamma?, mf(i)n. (sa. dharma) 
belonging to dhamma?; instr. f. wiya 
(kathāya, by a sermon or religious 
discourse) 71,22 — 77,35. 
dhamma-kathika, m. (sa. dhar- 
ma-kathaka) a preacher or propoun- 
der of the dhamma; «o, 22,29. 62,27; 
instr. wena, 22,30; gen. pl. ~anam, 
109,9; *%-thera, m. the elder who 
preaches the dhamma, acc. ~am, 22,27. 
*dhamma-gandika, f. a block 
for execution; 6,25-s7 (v. gandikā). 
*dhamma-gata, mfn. directed 
to the law; f. ~ā (sati) Dh. 297. 
dhamma-cakkhu, x. (sa. dhar- 
ma-cakshus) the eye of the truth; 
nom. «um (udapadi, Yasassa) 68,36. 
dhamma-carin, mfn. (sa. dhar- 
ma-cārin) observing the law, virtuous, 
dutiful; nom. m. ~i, Dh. 168 (cy. 
anudhammacārin). 
*dhamma-jivin, mfn. virtuous, 
dutiful; gen. m, ~ino, Dh. 24; gen. 
pi. «inam, Dh. 164. 
dhamma-ttha, mfn. (sa. dhar- 
ma-stha) just; m. ~o, Dh. 256. 257; 
acc. m. «am, Dh. 217. — %-vagga, ` 
m. Dh. ch. XIX. 
dhammata, f. (sa. dharmatā) 
inherent nature; manners, practice, 
habit; 21,17. cp. su-dhammata, f. 
dhamma-dana, n. (sa, dharma- 
dàna) the gift of the law (or the truth); ^ 
Dh. 354. | 
dhamma-desanā, f. (sd, dhar- 
ma-deganà) instruction in the truth 
(or in the four truths); a sermon, 
religious discourse; ~â (Buddhānam) 
68,25; acc. „am, 17,31. 
dhamma-dhara,m, (sa. dharma- 
dhara) ‘a supporter of the dhamma’, 


129 


one who knows the sacred doctrine; 
~0, Dh. 259; pl. nā, 109,36. 
*dhamma-pada, n. a word or 


verse of the sacred doctrine, also nom. : 


pr. of & canonical book, being a col- 
lection of moral sentences; nom. & acc. 
eam, Dh. 102; 44. 45 (sudesitam); 
ekam pi ~ar, one single word of the 
sacred doctrine, 22,23. cp. Max Müller, 
SBE. X, Introd, p. LIII; Weber, Ind. 
Str, I, 125; Franke, ZDMG. XLVI, 
734, Specimens thereof p. 106—107. — 
Dhammapadatthakatha, f. the Com- 
mentary on Dh.; specimen p. 86,12— 
89,17. 

*dhamma-pitin, mfn. drinking 
in the law; m. «1, Dh. 79. — ?-rasa, 
m. the sweetness of drinking in the 
law; acc. ~am, Dh. 205. 

dhamma-rata, mfn. (sa. dhar- 
ma-rata) delighting in the dhamma, 
virtuous; m. ~0, Dh. 364. 

dhamma-rati, f. (sa. dharma- 
rati) delight in the dhamma; nom. 
wl, Dh. 354. 

*dhamma-rasa, m. the sweetness 
of the dhamma; ~o, Dh. 354. 

dhamma-raja(n), m. (sa. dhar- 
ma-rāja) a righteously ruling king; 
‘the king of truth’ (epithet of Buddha) ; 
nom. «à, 38,12; Buddho «à, 19,1. 

*dhamma-vinicchaya, m. in- 
. vestigation of what is right, righteous 
decision; ixsfr, ~ena, Dh. 144. 

dhamma-samgaha, m. (sa. 
dharma-samgraha) the collection of 
sacred books, called Dhamma-, or 
Sutta-pitaka; acc. «am, 109,16. — 
dhamma-vinaya-samgaho, the collec- 
tion of Dhamma & Vinaya, 109,13. 
cp. dhamma. 

*Dhamma-sangani, f. nom. pr. 
of a canonical Palibook, the first part 
of the Abhidhamma-pitaka, being a 
compendium of psychology; 102,12; 
gen. e iyà, 113,25 (commentary there- 
on: Atthasālinī, g. v.). 

*dhamma-santati, f., the con- 
tinuity or serial succession of the liv- 
ing beings, 99,25 (~ sandahati). 

Pili Glossary. | 


dhātuka 


dhamma-sabhā, /. (sa. dhafma- 
sabhā) a place or hall of religious 
meeting; loc. ~wayam, 29,28. 

dhamma-savana, n. (sa. dhar- 
ma-gravana) the hearing of a sermon, 
attending divine service; °-atthaya 
(gate), in order to attend service, 
28,5. 

dhammassami(n), m. (sa. dhar- 
ma-svamin) ‘lord of Dhamma’, 4. e. 
Buddha; gen. «ssa, 114,6. 

*dhammānuvattin, mfn., follow- 
ing the law (cp. anuvattin); m. pl. 
~ino, Dh. 86. 

*dhammàrama, mfn. ‘one who 
has Dhamma for his pleasure garden’, 
dwelling in the law; m. ~o, Dh. 364 
(cp. arama), 

dhammasana, x. (sa. dharmā- 
sana) a cathedra, preaching-seat; abl. 
wato, 62,27. 

dhammika, mfn. (sa. dhārmika) 
righteous, pious, religious; m. „0 
(dhammarājā) 38,12; 39,8. cp. a- 
dhammika, a-dhammikatā. 

°dhammin, mfn. (sa. dharmin) 
having the nature of, subject to; uppada- 
vaya-° (v. uppada, cp. dhamma!), 

0,28. 

dhammī, adj. f., v. dhamma. 

°dhara, mfn. (e. c. = sa.) holding, 
wearing; possessing; jutin-? (v. juti); 
dhamma-?, pamsukula-?, vinaya-? 
(g. v.); uttama-rupa-" (v. rupa) cp. 
dhàreti. 

dharani, f. (— sa.) earth, land, 
kingdom (orig. adj. f. bearing, sup- 
porting); godharani, f. (v. h.). 

dhati, f. (sa. dhatri) a nurse; 
acc. pl. wiyo, 45,25. 

dhātu, f. (ém.), (= sa. dhātu, 
m.) a primary element (e. g. a verbal 
root); the property of a primary ele- 
ment (colour, etc.); any constituent 
part (esp. of the body); a sacred relic; 
*pācīna-loka-/, the eastern quarter 
(or horizon), abi. ~to, 32,9. 

dhatuka, mfn. (e. c. = sa.) 
having the qualities of, affected with; 
panduroga-°, having jaundice, m. wo, 


a 


Dhātukathā 


35,16; — vamanaka-°, “having the 
qualities of one that is deformed", m. 
~o (paccha-°) 24,94, 

Dhatukatha, f. nom. pr. of a 
canonical book, the third part of the 
Abhidhamma-Pitaka; 102,19. 

dhana, n. (= sa.), only e. c. = 
a receptacle for, a heap of, v. sam- 
kāra-'. 

dharana, n. (= sa.) holding, 
wearing (of ornaments); mālā-gandha- 
vilepana-°, 81,25. 

dhārā, f. (= sa.) stream, current; 
-udaka-9, 62,52 (g. v.). . 

dhareti, vb. (caus. ydhr; sa. 
dhàrayati) !) to hold, bear, wear; 
carry, bring (acc.); pot. 3. sg. weyya 
(andhakare telapajjotam) 69,17; pp. 
~ita, n. ~am (padumam) 23,35. — 
2) to hold back, restrain (acc.); pot. 
3. sg. dharaye (kodham) 106,55 = 
Dh. 222. — *) to bear in mind, re- 
member (by tradition); to hold, con- 
sider, understand (acc. or acc, & abl.); 
aor. 3, pl. «esum (Jinasāsanam) 
109,23; fut. 3. pl. wayissanti (Jàta- 
kam) 102,17-21; inf. wayitum, 102,18; 
— imp. 2. pl. „etha (vyakatam me 
vyakatato, consider only that elucidated 
what has been elucidated by me) 93,9-s. 
— *) to admit, receive, take up, sustain 
(a cause, acc.); imp. 3. sg. ~etu 
(upasakam mam) 69,20; pot. 2. sg. 
e,eyyàsi (kassa attham) 101,9. cp. 
dhara, dharana, etc.; dhiti. 

dhavati, vb. (sa. Vdhāv) to run; 
pr. 3. sg. «ati (vanam, g. v.) Dh. 
344; part. gen. f. dhavantiya (pathe) 
91,34; ger. witva, 59,1. 

dhi (or dhi), indecl. (sa. dhik) 
interj. of reproach or displeasure : fie! 
shame on, woe upon (commonly w. 
acc. or gen); dhi ID: 
hantaram) Dh. 389; dhi (y'assa 
muicati) ib.; very often combined 
with imp. atthu before which an 
euphonie ‘r’ is inserted : dhi-r- 
atthu (idha jivitam) 103,5; ~ (ja- 
tiyā) 63,13. 

dhiti, f. (sa. dhrti) firmness, for- 


130 


titude, courage; mam. wi, 3,27; acc. 
eim (upatthapetvā) 41,27. 

dhir- & dhi, v. dhi. 

dhitar, f. (sa. duhitr) a daughter; 
nom. dhītā, 10,4; 10,11 (raja-°); 86,24 
(pesakara-°); acc. ~aram, 10,9; 86,13; 
gen. dhitu (later dhitaya, v. below.) 
57,1; pl. ~aro, 32,20 (matu-°, i. e. 
mother and daughter), Besides dhītar 
we find also the base dhītā (esp. in 
younger texts & at the end of comp.): 
gen. waya (pesakara-°) 89,17; loc. pl. 
„āsu (putta-9, dvandva-comp.) 7,25. 
— kula-dhitar, f. (v. h.). 

dhira, mfn. (=: sa.) constant, 
firm, energetic; wise, thoughtful; m. 
~O (i. e. Buddha) 78,50; Dh. 28 etc. 
m. pl. wa, 47,28. 109,20; Dh. 23 cte. 

dhuta, mfn. (sa. dhuta & dhuta, 
‘shaken’) ‘one who has shaken off his 
sins’, dutiful (?) cp. Vin. II. 197,1; 
dhuta, n. == dhutaiiga, x. is a desig- 
nation of certain priestly duties; hence 
dhutavada, m., 4) the doctrine of 
Dhutanga, the Dhutaiga precepts, cp. 
Dh. (1855) p. 259,7; *) a teacher or 
propounder of those precepts (— dhu- 
tavadi(n), Jat. I. 130,22), gem. pl. 
eAnam (aggo, Kassapo) 109,6, cp. 
AN. I. p. 23; ?) adj. — dhuta (Mil. 
380,20, “pure in speech") cp. dhona 
below. 

dhutta, m. (sa. dhūrta) a frau- 
dulent fellow, gamester; scoundrel, 
villain; scamp, rogue; ~0, 49,22; acc. 
~an, 48,27; gen. «assa, 49,3; pl. 
nā, 14,4; acc. ee, 74,7; gen. nam, 
19,19. 

dhura, m. (= sa.) the foremost 
or chief part of anything, a yoke, the 
fore end of a ship; loc. ~e (navaya), 
18,19. 27,19. cp. dhorayha. 

dhuva, !) mfn. (sa. dhruva) fixed, 
permanent, certain; %. „arh (mara- 
nam), 86,16. a-ddhuva, mfn. (v. h.). 
2) %. permanence, durability; „am, 
Dh. 147. | 

dhüpa, m. (= sa.) incense; gan- 
dha-dhupa-? etc. (dvandva comp.) 
48,30. 


131 


dhenu, f. (= sa.) a milk-cow; 
*miga-°, a female deer, hind, doe; 
7,29. 

*dhenupa, m. a calf; pl. «à, 
105,11. 

°dheyya, x. (sa. dheya) realm, 
region; v. Maccu-?, Māra-'. 

*dhona, mfn. (probably = dhota, 
pp. dhovati, to wash; sa. dhauta, 
vVdhāv*) pure, purified from sin. The 
commentators agree in explaining this 
word by dhuta-pāpa (v. dhuta, ydhu, 
dhunāti) or by dhuta-kilesa — bud- 
dha (Pj. ad Sn. v. 834 & Ps. ad MN. 
ch. 56). Fausbøll, Gloss. Sn. p. 203 
refers it to ydhu, to shake, which 
after all may be closely related to 
dhovati; but it is questionable whether 
this word is contained in the comp. 
ati-dhona-carin (g. v. Dh. 240). I 
think it better to take atidhona = 
sa. atidhavana fr. vb. atidhāvati, to 
transgress. A subst. ». dhona is men- 
tioned in the Comm. on Dh. v. 240 
( the 4 paccayas, v. Childers) and 
on MN, ch. 56 (= ñana; hence dhona, 
mfn. ‘tena samagato"). 

*dhorayha, m. (fr. “dhorvayha, 
sa. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhūrvaha) 
a beast of burden. — °-sila, mfn. having 
the virtue of a (good) draught-cattle, 
“much enduring"; acc. m. eam, Dh. 
208. 

dhovati, vb. (sa. dhavati, ydhàv?) 
to wash, to clean by rinsing or rubbing 
(acc.); aor. 3. sg. dhovi (pade) 57,16; 
ger. witva, 22,25 (mukham); 41,19 
(khaggam); 82,31 (bhājanam); a- 
dhovitvā (pātim) 56,35; pp. dhota 
or (more rarely) dhovita : hatthe 
dhovita-kāle (“when he was washing 
his hands") 41,15. cp. dhona & neat. 

dhovana, m. (sa. dhavana) wash- 
ing; mukha-dhovanatthāya gantvā 
(“when he went to wash his face”) 
21,28; hattha-°, 56,25 (washing the 
hands, or: water for washing?). 


—— A n ———————————————————————— —————— UU — a 
e. 


nam 


N. 


na, adv. (--- sa.) not; before vowels 
‘a’? may be dropped (n’atthi, 1,15; 
n'etar, 8,27) or contracted with a foll. 
‘a’ (niham, 1,21); before ‘i’ we find 
sometimes ‘y’ inserted (na-y-idam, 
23,55). — !) na is the usual negation 
before verbs : 1,9. 16. ete., but it occurs 
also often before other words : na 
Sakham upasamvase, 7,33 (cp. mà); 
na gahe rame, 47,26; nitidure, 83,2; 
na tāvatā, 106,5, and especially at 
the beginning of a sentence : nà)an, 
1,21; na koci, 8,3 etc. — °) in questions, 
used like the English ‘not’; *) ki na 
passasi (have you not seen?) 111,19; 
kaccin nu . . . na, 9,38; ") in disjunc- 
tive questions : kim... karoti na ka- 
roti (== or not) 9,25. — ?) repeated : 
a)n’... na...na (neither... nor... 
nor) 8,27. 94,3. Dh. 127; n'eva .. . na, 
8,3. 10,16. 74,12 (id.); n’eva upapajjati 
na na upapajjati, 89,51. 94,18; cp. 
neva-saina-nisannayatana; na ca... 
na ca (id.) 99,5; ^) na kiüci na (all, 
every) 51,5, cp. na... akiūci (“not 
a little”) Dh. 390. — *) comb. w. 
other particles : *) n'eva, not for all 
that (after ‘pi ce’) 16,14; meva... na 
(v. above); ") na kho (pana), verily 
not, 9,31. 93,27; °) na ca == than, 8, 
(rajjam jaheyyam na ca tam patiū- 
iiam); ca na ca (both... and not) 
89,50. 94,16; na ca... na ca (neither 
„nor, v. above); d) na hi (non 
enim) Dh. 5; in answers — no, nay 
verily, 97,19. — 5) negative prefix in 
comp. = a- (cp. nir-, vi-) v. na-cira, 
na-nikama-seyyà (natthitā, f. (q. v.) 
is abstr. fr. the phrase n'atthi). cp. 
nanu, nüna, no & mà. 
*nath, pron. demonstr. (in several 
cases besides mom. substituted (encli- 
tically) for tam, cp. enam & the base 
ana-, sa, instr. anena etc.) him, her, 
it; acc. mfn. nam : m. 4,38, 7,30. 16,15 
etc. 103,5». 113,20; nan (ti) 3,6. 12,98; 
f. 55,16. 88,2; nan, 9,18; n. 94,28; — 
acc. pl. ne, 74,8; gen. pl. nesam, 


Mae 


nakkhatta 


8,10. 73,1. — nam is also sometimes 
pleonastically inserted, e. g. 78,18 (cp. 
tam, 9,1; Cinghalese reading : nam). 
In such cases the commentaries explain 
it as a particle (nipata) or as a 
shortened form of nama (?); cp. 
Pischel, Gr. § 150. (431). 


nakkhatta, x. (sa. nakshatra) 
1) an asterism or constellation, a con- 
junction of stars (esp. that of the moon 
with any constellation, a lunar man- 
sion); acc. ~am (oloketi, to read 
the HY 32,1; — yoga, m. id., 
loc. ~e laddhe, (“at a certain con- 
junction of the planets") 32,10. — ?) 
a festival; ~am (kilati, to enjoy the 
festival) 61,3; — *0-kīļā, f. “the festi- 
vities" (v. h.) 61,5; %-patha, m. ‘star- 
path’, the starry sky, acc. ~am, Dh. 
208. — &asalhi- 61,2 (v. h.) cp. 
āsāļha, 

nakha, m. (= sa.) a nail; pl. 
wa, 82,2 === 97,20. 

nagara, n. (= sa.) a town, city; 
a fortress; nom. wai (yakkha-°) 
20,5; (atthīnam, “a stronghold of 
the bones") Dh. 150; acc. ~am, 58,24 
(the inhabitants of the city); anto-? 
(v. h.); saka-°, to his own city, 44,16; 
loc. we, 19,15; 61,2 (Kapilavatthu-?); 
77,15 (Bhoga-°); comp. *-àbhimukha, 
mfn. (v. abhimukha); nagarūpama, 
mfn. like a fortress, n. ~am, Dh. 40 
(cp. upama). °dvara (v. h.); 9-sa- 
mipe, 21,18; ?-vithisu, 73,29; °-vasin, 
mfn. (v. h.); — *deva-° — deva-pura, 
n. (g.v.); anto-nagare & bahi-nagare 
(inside & outside the town) q.v. cp. 
nagara. 

nagga, mfn. (sa. nagna) naked; 
f. wa, 91,0-15; n. „am, 31,12. — 
O-carlyà, f. going naked; Dh. 141. 

naūgala, x. (sa. langala) a plough; 
acc. ~am (mahantam) 71,28. 

nacira, mfn. (= sa.) not of long 
duration; nacirass'eva (ado) v. ci- 
rassam. 

nacca, x. (sa. nrtya) dancing; 
instr. ~ena, 10,20; "-jūtaka, x. 10,1; 


132 


dvandva-comp. ^ ádini, ~Adisu, 65,1. 
64,32; %-gīta-, 64,29. 81,21. 

naccati, vb. (sa. nrtyati, ynrt) 
to dance; pr. 3. sg. ati, 18,18; part. 
m. ~anto, 10,15; imp. 2. sg. «assu, 
50,11; fut. 1. sg. wissaimi, 50,13; aor. 
8. sg. nacci, 18,20; inf. itum, 10,15; 
comp. naccitu-kama, mfn. wishing to 
dance, 50,55 (°-kam’amhi, I (f.) wish 
to dance). cp. nacca & nataka. 

nattha, mfn. (pp. nassati; sa. 
nashta) lost, perished; acc. m. ~am 
(yasam) 42,1. 

nattar, m. (sa. naptr) a grandson; 
gen. nattu, 64,9. 

natthita, f. (sa. nāstitā; fr. 
n'atthi) non-existence, non-reality; 
acc. eam, 96,7 (cp. atthitā). 

nadati, vb. (sa. ynad) to cry, 
roar; to make a noise (acc.); pr. 3. 
Sg. «ali, 8,286; part. m. pl. Qanta 
mahanadam) 6,13; aor. 3. sg. nadi 
sihanadam) 16,14; ger. ~itva (koiica- 
nidaih) 61,20; pp. nadita (v. next); 
cp. nada. 

nadita, x. (pp. fr. prec.; cp. sa. 
nadita) roar, noise; „arū (sihassa) 
8,27. 

nadi, f. (= sa.) a river; nom. 
e, 14,9; 35,18 (maha-°); acc. „im, 
16,25. 103,2; instr. wiya ("upstream") 
29,5; gen. nuiyā, 2,19-21; tassà nadiya 
vasāti, 2,26 (tassa must here be taken 
as loc. f., cp. Jat. I. 170,11; MN. I. 
385,9); loc, ~iyam (maha-°) 36,30; 
gen. pl. inam, 103,18; 72,27 (maha-°); 
— %-kūla, x. == %-tīra, n. the bank of 
a river, loc. ~e, 2,19. 108,24; — %-pāre, 
on the opposite side of the river, 56,21; 
— *-majjhe, in the middle of the river, 
2,22. 

naddha, mfn. (pp. nayhati (nan- 
dhati); sa. naddha, ynah) tied, bound, 
put on; "-paūcāyudha, mfn. 111,16 
(v. ayudha). cp. onaddha, sannaddha. 

*nanikama, mfn. (fr. nikama, 
m.) disagreeable; "-seyyà, f. "an un- 
comfortable bed", Dh. 309 (aec. wath). 

nanu, indecl. (== sa.) 1) particle 
of interrogation (latin: nonne); ~ 


133 


maya tuyham abhayam dinnam, 7,6; 
~ brahmacariyassa te kilo, 46,34; 


„so mutto bhavissati, 100,7. — *) | 


particle of affirmation 
tainly; ~ na sakka, 91,16. 
nandati, vb. (sa. ynand) to re- 
joice; to delight in, to be glad of 
(instr.); pr. 3. sg. „ati (puttehi) 
105,28; 107,26 — Dh. 18. cp. next. 
nandanā, f. (== sa.) delight; 
105,29. — raja-nandana, m. a prince 
(poetically); acc. ~am, 112,1. 
nandi!, m. & nandi, f. (sa. nandi, 
m.) joy, pleasure; °-raga-, pleasure 
and lust, 67,13 (-sahagata); *nandi- 
bhava, m. rise of pleasure; ?-parik- 
khina, mfn. “in whom all gaiety is 
extinct”, Dh. 413 (acc. m. wath) cp. 
kāmābhava. — nandi?, f., v. neat. 
nandhi, f. (sa. naddhri) a leathern 
strap or thong (often spelt nandi); 
acc. ~im (chetva) Dh. 398. 
nabha(s), x. (sa. nabhas) sky, 
atmosphere; instr. „asā (°-Agama, 
“departed through the air”) 111,. 
namati, vb. (sa. ynam) to bend 
or bow to (inír.); aor. 3. sg. nami 
(cittam, pabbajjaya) 65,13; pp. na- 
mita, bent; °-citta, mfn. 46,18 (m. 
~0, pabbajjāya, one whose mind has 
turned to retiring from the world). — 
caus. namayati (& nameti), to bend 
(acc.); pr. 3. pl. wayanti, 106,97 = 
Dh. 80. cp. an-amatagga. 
namassati, eb. (denom. fr. na- 
mas (v. namo below); sa. namasyati) 
to pay honour to (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
mati (apujjam) 30,21; pot. 3. sg. 
weyya, Dh. 392. 
namita, mfn. (pp. namati, q. v.). 
Namuci, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. of 
a demon (identical with Mara, q. v.); 
nom. wi, 103,4; voc. ni, 103,31. 
namo, indecl. (sa. namas, n.) an 
exclamation of adoration or homage 
(w. gen. pers.; also often combined 
with verbs, as karoti, dadati); ~ 
ty’atthu (“homage to thee") 13,26. 
108,11; ~ tassa Bhagavato Arahato 


: surely, cer- | 


navanita 


formula at the beginning of a Pali 
book). 

naya, m. (- sa.) ‘leading’, in- 
struction, plan, method; way, manner; 
instr. ~ena (Mahāpadāne àgata-^, 
“in the manner related in M.”) 63,13; 
ti Adina x, 91,81 (v. ādi”); purima- 
nayen’eva, in the same manner as 
before, 26,10. 63,21; hetthavutta-°, id. 
63,22. 

nayati, vb. (sa. yni) v. neti. 

nayhati (or nandhati), vb. (sa. 
ynah) to bind, tie; only comp. w. 
prep, v. upa-nayhati, pilandhati; 
pp. naddha (4. v.) cp. nandhi (nan- 

i) f. 

nara, m. («= sa.) a man; nom, 
~0, 111,10; acc. «ari Dh. 47; gen. 
wassa, 105,29; loc. pl. mesu, 47,20. 
— f. nari (v. h.) — narinda. m. (sa. 
narendra) ‘man-lord’, king; ~o, 112,31; 
voc. wa, 7,15; Sibabahu-narinda-ja, 
m, son of S. (Vijaya) 110,28 (nom. 
Jo). 

nala or nala, m. (sa. id. & nada) 
name of a species of reed; a reed or 
stalk in general; nom. ~o, 26,27; 
acc. ~am (-1-) 108,5 Dh. 337; 
5,18 (kumuda-°); — °-vana. n. a 
thicket of reeds, 26,25. cp. nāļikā. f. 

Nalamala, m. (sa. Nalamalin) 
‘reed-garlanded’, nom. pr. of an ocean; 
acc. «am, 26,25. — Nalamali(n), m, 
id. 26,0. 

nalata, n. (sa. lalata) the forehead; 
loc. ~e (seda muccimsu) 46,31. 

naval, num. (= sa.) nine; 82,13. 
— *navaiiga, mfn. ninefold (v. añga). 
navama, mfn. the ninth, m. ~o (vaggo) 
Dh. IX. cp. navuti, nāvutika. 

nava?, mfn. (— sa.) new, young; 
m. pl. „sā (dama) 105,17; (bhikkhū) 
83,38. cp. abhinava & next. 

navaka, mfn. (== sa.) new, young; 
compar. «Xara, younger (opp. thera- 
tara), m. wo (bhikkhu) 79,5; instr, 
wena, 79,9. 

navanita, n. (= sa.) fresh butter; 


Sammāsambuddhassa, 81,5 (the usual | nom. ~am, 99,29; abl. ~ato, ib. 


navuti 


navuti, num. (sa. navati) 90; v. 
navutika, mfn. 

nassati, vb. (sa. nacyati, ynag) 
to perish, to be destroyed; pr. 3. sg. 
wanti, 6,24; aor. 3, pl. ~imsu (tassa 
cakkhūni ~, “lost their sight”) 24,16; 
cond. 3. sg. nassissa, 29,5 (he would 
have perished); pp. nattha & caus. 
naseti (g. v.) cp. nūsa, m. 

nahata, mfn. (pp. nahayati, g. v.). 

nahataka, m. (sa. snātaka) ‘one 
who has bathed’, a Brahman who has 
finished his studies; acc. wath (metri- 
cally — nhātakam) Dh. 422 (“accom- 
plished”, SBE. X, 96). cp. MN. I, 
280,19 & Sn. v. 521 (who has washed 
away all sins). 


nahāna, x. (sa. snāna) bathing, 
bath; ~am, 88,25; °-atthaya (raūūo, 
for the king's bath) 41,3. 

nahāpita, m. (sa. nàpita) a bar- 
ber; gen. wassa (jatako, “a barber's 
brat", 4. e. bastard) 25,10; — *°-ku- 
tumbika, m. & *-dāya, m. (v. h.). — 
In the ancient times the barbers be- 
longed to the lowest castes (cp. Fick, 
Soc. Gl. p. 211); there cannot in 
my opinion be doubt about the iden- 
tity of sa. napita and nahapita, but 
if the latter is not a mere literary 
form (it is not rarely spelt nhapita 
and even nāpita), then it must be 
derived from nahapeti (v. next) 
through *nahāpitar (as salla-katta 
from galya-kartr). cp. Pischel, Gr. 

210 


nahapeti, vb. (caus. nahayati; 
sa. snāpayati) to cause to bathe, to 
wash; ger. ~wetva (elakam) 16,25. 

nahayati (or nhayati), ob. (sa. 
snayati, ysnā) to bathe; imp. 2. sg. 
nahaya, 111,20; fut. 1. sg. ~issami, 
41,1; inf. ~itum, 58,30; nahayitu- 
kama, mfn. wishing to bathe, m. «o, 
83,24; ger. nahatva, 41,3. 53,25. 111,8; 
nahayitva, 57,34. 61,6; pf. nahāta, 
one who bas bathed, instr. m. wena, 
84,1; dvandva-comp. °-dnulitto, 41,9 
(bathed and scented); caus. v. naha- 


134 


peti, cp. nahataka, nahana & nahà- 
pita. 

nahüru, m. (& m. coll.?) (sa. 
snàyu, f. m. Pischel, Gr. § 255) a 
sinew, tendon; ~u, 82,2 = 97,0; 
instr. ~uni, 92,21; gen. ~wussa, 92,17. 

naga, m. (= sa.) 1) a Naga or 
serpent-demon; *'-bhavana, x. (sa. 
nāgaloka) the world of serpents; abl. 
wa, 52,16; — *°-manavaka, m., a young 
Naga; pl. ~it, 53,10; acc. pl. we, 53,1; 
— *0manavika, f., a Naga girl; 52,27 
etc.; — %-rāja(H), m., a serpent-king; 
nom. ~a, 28,27. 52,10; instr. wena, 
52,15. — 2) an elephant (with the 
Buddhists the emblem of endurance); 
metaph. a preeminent man; om. ~o, 
Dh. 320; 105,19; acc. „am, 77,3; 
instr. «ena, 76,31; — *nāga-m-āsada, 
m. attacking an elephant, 77,3 (v. 
asada); — °-bala, mfn., strong as an 
elephant; m. ~o, 1,3; instr. wena 
(raūūā) 40,19; — *-vagga, m. the 
28'^ chapter of Dhpd.; — °-vana, x. 
the elephant grove, gen. «assa, Dh, 
324; — naga-hata, m. “he who strikes 
the elephant (of men, i, e. Buddha)" 
= *hata-naga; gen. assa, 77,4. cp. 
mahā-nāga, hatthi-nāga. (Rhys Da- 
vids, Buddhist India, p. 220). 

Nagadipa, m. (sa. Nagadvipa) 
nom. pr. of an island (i. e. the north- 
western part of Ceylon ?); ~o, 19,8 
(formerly called Seruma-dīpa, g. 2.) 
cp. Lassen, IA. I.? p. 241; Tennent, 
Ceylon I. p. 331. 

nagara, m. (fr. nagara; — sa.) 
a citizen; acc. pl. «e, 6,7. 

Nāgasena, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. 
of a Buddhist sage (thera), in the 
philosophical work Milinda-paüha dis- 
puting with King Milinda (g. v.); 
nom. ~o (āyasmā) 96,24; voc. wa, 
98,33. efc. cp. SBE, vol. XX XV. p. XXV. 

nataka, x. (= sa.) a play or 
drama; acc. pl. „sāni, 63,17. 

nātha, m. (= sa.) refuge; protec- 
tor, lord; ~o, (atta hi attano ~) 
Dh. 160. 380. 

nada, m. (= sa.) roaring, crying, 


135 


noise; acc. ~am (maha-°) 6,5; — 
koiica-9, m. (v. h.). 

nana, indecl. (== sa.) separately, 
differently, variously; this word is mostly 
used at the beginning of subst. or adj. 
comp., where it may be translated by 
‘different, divers, various, many’ etc.; 
before double cons, the final àü is 
shortened : *nanaggarasa, m. (or mfn.) 
(= nana + agga-rasa) all the choi- 
cest delicacies (of food) : acc. pl. xe, 
57,14; °-bhojanam, 41,10; — nànappa- 
kara, mfn. various, of all kinds (cp. 
pakāra); m. pl. ~ā (sakuna-samgha) 
62,12; n. pl. „ūni (phalāni) 2,23; 
instr. pl. wehi (phalarukkhehi) 2,20; 
— *nānā-kuņapa, x. (v. h.); *nānā- 
citta, mfn. of different mind, false- 
hearted; pl. f. wi (itthiyo) 51,29, — 
*nānā-turiyāni, x. pl. 64,30 (v. turiya); 
— *nana-pupphani, x, pl. flowers of 
divers kinds, 41,6. 49,16; — "nanavudha, 
n. 6,7 (muggarādi-') v. avudha. 

nama!, indecl. (fr. next; =: sa.) 
1) by name (after nom. pr. or in inter- 
rogative sentences) : Tambarājā ~, 
19,6; cp. 44,13. 102,2; nāmena N. 
nama, 5,30; kissa phalam ~, 36,34; 
kā ~ tvar (what is your name?) 
56,10; kimsaddo nam’ esa, 60,9; ko 
nām” esa puriso, 63,11 (who is this 
man?). — *) particle of affirmation or 
emphasis after subst. (adj.) pron. ete. 
== just, indeed, certainly; 2,6. 4,10. 
9,29. 88,25 etc.; tvam ~, 9,21; ekan 
~, 82,8; — app'eva nama (perhaps, 
v. api) 17,26. 69,5; seyyatha pi ~ 
(just as) 68,24. — °) im exclamations : 
aho puññanam phalam ~, 58,12; 
86,24, cp. 63,13. — *) after interr. = 
‘then’; kathan ~ (how then?) 41,30; 
ki <, 4,6. 16,11. 884. — 9) in an- 
swers : imāya <, 29,31. 31,24, — €) 
with negation = not at all; ... nama 
n'atthi, 4,52. 8,10. 10,51. 18,5 (cp. 18,24). 
19,91 (cp. 19,19). 87,5. 

nāma*, n., (sa. naman) name, 


appellation; nom. „am. 9,. 98,24; 


acc. vam (akarsu, called) 38,10. 60,25; 
96,51; (the old acc. nama is used 


nava 


adverbially, v. above); instr. nāmena, 
by name (often combined with nāma, 
before the nom. pr. or after nama, 
5,50) 112,12; — nama is often opp. 
to rupa (g. v.) cp. nàmarüpa below; 
— comp. : °-cahana-divasa, m. name- 
day, loc. we, 38,9; °-matta, 72. a mere 
name (cp. matta?) wath, 97,3; — 
evaii-nàma, kin-nama, tam-nimika, 
mfn. (g. v.); sa-nāma, x. (his name) 
111,22, v. sat. cp. next, 

nāmaka, mfn. (== sa.) named, 
called (e. c.); anupariyaya-° (g. v.) 
91,28 (~am maggam). cp. tam-na- 
mika. 

nāma-rūpa, n. (= sa.) ‘name 
and form’ — individual being; ^om. 
~am, 66,7 (viūiiāņa-paccayā, origi- 
nating from viññana and causing 
salayatanam); 100,5; Joc, —asmim, 
Dh. 367 (*mind and body", cp. SBE. 
X. p. 87); ?-nirodha, m. 66,15 (v. h.). 

nàyaka, m. (— sa.) a leader, 
chief, lord; loka-?, m. ‘lord of the 
world’, 4. e. Buddha, ~o, 110,19. 

Narada, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. of 
several persons; nom. ~o (āyasmā, 
a thera living at Gijjhakūta) 84,31; 
voc. ~a, 85,16. 

nārāca, m. (== sa.) a kind of 
arrow, an iron arrow; acc. «am, 92,24; 
— "C-yalaya, m. n. an iron ring or 
collar, instr. — ena, 111,5. 

nari, f. (= sa.) à woman; nom. 
~l, 64,15; acc. wim, 47,1; loc. pl. 
wisu, Dh. 284. cp. nara. 

Nalagiri, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. 
of an elephant; nom. ~i (nama hatthi) 
76,8; acc. eim, 76,13; gen. missa, 
77,1. cp. Dhanapālaka. 

nalika, f. (sa. nālikā & nādikā) 
1) a small tube or pipe, a hollow stalk 
or stick; *) a small measure (of capa- 
city) : addha-nalika-matta, mfn. con- 
taining as much as a half nāļikā, acc. 
m. ~am (tandulam) 57,18. 

*nāvattha, n. (sa. *nāva-stha) 
“articles from ships”, ~am, 111,32. 
(cp. Vin. III 49,11.) 

nāvā, f.(sa.nau & nāvā) a ship, 


navika 


boat; nom. cà, 23,10; acc. ~am, 19,27; 
Dh. 369 (metaph.— the human body); 
instr. gen. abl. loc. waya, 18,4; 19, 
25-27; 29,5; 112,27; 20,1; 25,19; 24,15 
(arulha-°, v. ārohati); — bhinna- 
nāva, mfn. shipwrecked (v. h.) cp. 
next & nāvattha. 

nàvika, m. (= sa.) !) a mariner, 
sailor; gen. «assa, 27,27; gen. pl. 
e.Anam, 35,0. — *) a ferryman; Joc. 
we, 28,5. 

*navutika, mfn. (fr. navuti) 90 
years old; acc. f. ~am (nàrim) 47,21. 

nasa, m. (sa. nāca) destruction, 
ruin, death; acc. „am (maha-? pā- 
puņissanti) 34,18. 

nasa, f. (= sa.) the nose; *9-vàta, 
m. the breath from the nostrils, instr. 
wena, 53,2; — khura-nàsa, mfn. & 
9-nàsika, mfn. (v. khura). 

naseti, vb. (caus, nassati, sa. na- 
cayati) to destroy, spoil; to kill (acc.); 
pr. 2. sg. „esi (mama tandule) 57,24; 
2. pl. wetha (amhakam kammam) 
6,15; 68,17; ger. wetva, 37,9; imf. 
wetum (attanam) 54,34. 

ni-, indecl. 1) (= sa.) prefix to 
verbs and nouns, implying ‘in, into; 
down’, sometimes confounded with next. 
— *) before double cons. — nir-, nī- 
(sa. nis (nir-)) prefix implying ‘out, 
away’, v. below. 

nikati, f. (sa. nikrti) wickedness, 
fraud; instr. ~iya (metri causa : ni- 
katyā) 5,1; — °-ppaiifia, mfn. versed 
in fraud; m. «0, 0,21. 

nikama, m. (= sa.) desire, 
pleasure; v. nanikama, mfn. 

nikaya, m. (= sa.) a collection 
of Buddhist Suttas, name of the 5 
sections of the Sutta or Suttanta Pi- 
taka, viz. Digha-°, Majjhima-%, Sarh- 
yutta-°, Aüguttara-*, Khudda(ka)-', 
102,14-16 (4. v.). 

niketa, m. (= sa.) a house, abode; 
loc. ~e, Dh. 91. 

nikkaddhati, vb. (sa. nigh- 


a krsh 
to*drive out, expel; pp. ~ito, m. (gehā) ` 


35,29. 
nikkarunatā, f. (sa. nish-karu- 


136 


| nata) unmercifulness, hardheartedness; 


instr. «aya, 59,18. 

nikkasāva, mfn. (sa. nish-kash- 
aya) free from dirt or sin; v. a-nik- 
kasava. 

*nikkujjati, vb. (fr. ni + kubja? 
opp. ukkujjati, g. v.) to overturn; 
pp. n. «itam, 53,20. 69,5 (Comm. 
adhomukha-tthapitam hetthamukha- 


jātam). 


nikkhanta, mfn. (pp. nikkha- 
mati, g. v.). 

nikkhamati, vb. (sa. nish-ykram) 
to go out, go away, depart, get out, 
issue (w. abi.); pr. 3. pl. „anti (mā- 
tukucchito) 62,26; 90,5 (nagaram 
pavisanti va ~ và); part. m. ~anto 
(mukhato) 13,21; acc. ~antam (pure- 
dvarena) 12,10; instr. „antena, 12,14. 
83,35; pl. m. «anta, 62,25; — aor. 
3. sg. nikkhami, 12,8. 36,23; 3. pl. 
wimsu, 19,16; — fut. 1. sg. ~issami, 
12,15; 3. sg. wissati, 12,15; — ger. 
2) nikkhamma (agara, leave the house- 
hold life) 61,33. 64,23; >) nikkhamitva, 
18,21. 40,29. 45,2 (to retire from the 
world); 86,26 (tato). 114,1 (id.); — 
inf. witumh, 12,17. 36,25; 65,13 (ma- 
habhinikkhamanam, v. abhinikkha- 
mana); comp. %itu-kāma, mfn. 65,16 
(m. ~o, id.) — grd. ~itabbam, x. 
83,36; — pp. nikkhanta, m. <o, 5,25. 
12,12; ?-kalato, 9,15 (v. kala); — caus. 
nikkhameti (& „āmeti, v. h.) cp. 
next & nekkhamma. 

nikkhamana, x. (sa. nish-kra- 
mana) going out, departing; °-bhava, 
m, 12,9 (v. h.). 

nikkhameti (& nikkhameti), vb. 
(caus. nikkhamati; sa. nish-kràmayati) 
to cause to go out, to bring forth or 
away (acc.); aor. 3. pl. ~amesum, 
39,86; ger. ~etvā (ubho pi jane sa- 
muddā, “conveyed them oversea”) 29,4. 

*nikkhittaka, m(fn). (fr. nik- 
khitta, pp. nikkhipati, g. v.) one to 
whose charge anything has been com- 
mitted; m, pl. agga-nikkhittaka 
(thera) 109,11 (v. agga). 

nikkhipati, vb. (sa. ni-ykship) 


137 


to throw, lay down or away, loose, 
drop (acc.); to give in charge of (acc. 
loc.); part. instr. m. antena, 83,17; 
— aor. 3. sg. nikkhipi (nahāpitam 
upasakassa hatthe) 28,21; 36,27; 3. 
pl. „irnsu, 78,28; — fut. 3. pl. ~is- 
santi (samussayam) 80,25; — ger. 
eAtvà, 57,13. 78,20. 75,1. 101,26; — 
grd. witabbam, n. 88,16; ^o, m. 
83,18; — pp. nikkhitta, acc. m. ~am 
(mangalakhaggam, ussisake, lying) 
41,15; comp. °-maniratanam (Kasika- 
vatthe) 62,29. cp. nikkhittaka & next. 

nikkhepa, m. (sa. ni-kshepa) 
1) throwing away, laying down; ?) 
mark, footprint; acc. ~ari (suvanna- 
padukanam) 68,05. 

nikhanati, vb. (sa. ni-ykhan) 
to dig into, bury (acc.); imp. 2. sg. 
e Ahi (tam sobbhe) 78,4; 2. pi. 
ewatha, 39,33; ger. ~witva, 78,19; pp. 
nikhata, rammed down, m. pl. nā 
(khila) 105,17. 

nigacchati, vb. (sa. ni-/gam) 
to enter, undergo, come to (acc.); pr. 
8. sg. mati (dukkham, suffers) Dh. 
69; (dasann’ anüataram thanam) 
Dh. 137. 

nigama, m. (== sa.) a little town, 
or market-place; gen. ~wassa, 95,21; 
loc. we, 92,14. cp. negama. (Fick, 
Soc. Gl. p. 104.) 

nigala, m. w. (sa. nigada) an 
(iron) chain for the feet; loha-nigala- 
sadisa, mfn. ll,» (v. h.). 

nigühati, vb. (sa. ni-/guh) to 
hide, conceal (acc.); pr. 3. pl. „anti 
(itthiyo rahassam na ~) 46,9. 

nigganhati, vb. (sa. ni-Vgrah) 
to hold back, restrain; fut. 1. sg. 
„gahessāmi (cittam) Db. 326; grd. 
niggayha (sa. ni-grhya) v. next; cp. 
dunnigaha, mfn. 

*niggayha-vādi(n), mfn. (fr. 
sa. nigrhya, grd. ni-ygrah) ‘resenting 
what is to be blamed’, censuring, re- 
proving; acc. m. „im, Dh. 76. 

nigrodha, m. (sa. nyagrodha) 
the Banian-tree, Ficus Indica; ?-ruk- 
kha, m. 20,2 (gen. ~assa). — Nigro- 


nitthubhati 


dha, m. nom. pr. of a deer; acc. ~am, 
7,33; loc. wasmim, 7,34; = °-miga- 
raja, 5,s0. 

nighata, m. (== sa.) striking 
down, suppression, destroying, extinc- 
tion; acc. ~am (yes[am] i. e. jati, 
jarà, maranam, etc.) 92,2. 

niccam, adv. (sa. nityam) always, 
constantly; ~ luddāni kubbato, 13,28; 
~ candanagandhini, 20,31; ~ jināti, 
48,9. a-nicca, mf». & a-niccata, f. 
(4. v.). 

*niccamma, mfn. (sa, *nig-carma) 
excoriated, scourged; acc. f. «am 
(pitthim kāretvā, “flogging the skin 
of her back”) 55,17. 

niccala, mfn. (sa. nig-cala) im- 
movable; f. à (nāvā atthāsi) 23,11. 

nicchareti, vb. (caus. niccharati; 
sa. nig-/car) to cause to issue or 
come forth; ger. ~etva (madhurassa- 
ram) 18,20. 

[nicchinati], vb. (sa. nig-yci) 
to decide, fix upon; to discriminate 
(acc.); to persuade oneself, be con- 
vinced, consider (tw. prec. tP); pot. 
8. sg. niccheyya (attham anatthai 
ca) Dh. 256; ger. nicchiya (ti ~) 
convinced, 114,6; pp. nicchita, do. 
111,21 (m. ~0). 

nittha, f. (sa. nishtha) firm per- 
suasion; completion, perfection; con- 
clusion, end; nitthangata, mfn. (sa. 
nishtha-gata) who has reached per- 
fection, m. ~o, Dh. 351. 

*nitthāpeti, vb. (caus. nitthati, 
nitthāyati, sa. ni-ysthā) to accom- 
plish, complete, finish, make ready; 
imp. 2. sg. nehi, 48,29; aor, 3. sg. 
„esi (āhatāhatam) 57,6; fut. 1. sg. 
Aessàmi, 87,11-12. cp. next. 

nitthita, mfn. (sa. nishthita, pp. 
ni-ysthā, cp. prec.) finished, come at 
an end; completed, ready, prepared; 
^. ~am (jātakam etc.) 52,1. 71,18; 
(bhattam) 78,5 loc. ~e (bhatte) 
33,9. aenitthita, mfn. (g. v.) cp. 
pari-nitthiti, f. 

nitthubhati & nutthubhati, 
vb. (sd, *nih + Vstubh, but as to the 


nidda 


signification equal to sa. nili-shthiv?) 
to spit out; aor. 3. sg. nutthubhi 
(kakkāretvā ~) 37,95; ger. nitthu- 
bhitvā (yagum) 57,25. [Pischel, Gr. 
S 120.] cp. chuddha. 

nidda (& other varr. niddha, nidha, 
nida = nila, sa. nīda) ^, a nest; 
place, seat; roga-niddam (idam rüpam, 
“full of sickness") 107,7 — Dh. 148. 

nidahati, vb. (sa. ni-/dhā) to 
lay down, deposit; to lay aside; grd. 
eitabbam, x. (cīvaram, unhe) 83,9; 
ger. nidhaya (dandam (q. v.) sabbesu 
bhiitesu, “without hurting any crea- 
tures") Dh. 142. 405. cp. nidhi. 

nidāgha, m. (= sa.) heat; ~o 
(mahanto) 4,5. *-samaya, m. the 
hot season, loc. ~ve, 3,32. 

niddara, mfx, (sa. nir-dara) free 
from fear; m. ~o, Dh. 205. cp. 
dara & vita-ddara. 

niddà, f. (sa. nidra) sleep; «à 
Yasassa okkami) 67,26; acc. wath 
gate, being RE, 21,25; (okkamitvā 
okkami) fell asleep) 22,24. 64,32; 
upagato, id.) 65,3. cp. next. 

niddayati, vb. (sa. ni-drayate, 
vdrā) to sleep; pr. 3. sg. wati, 41,25. 
65,30; part. m. acc. —antam, 35,32; 
gen. ~antassa, 41,26; f. pl. „antiyo 
(itthiyo) 65,5; aor. 3. sg. niddāyi, 
9,4. 

*niddayitar, m. (fr. prec.) a 
sleepy person; nom. „tā, Dh. 325. 

niddhana, mfn. (sa. nir-dhana) 
without property, poor; acc. m. ~at, 
52,4. 
niddhanta, mfn. (pp. niddha- 
mati, g. v.) blown off, driven out; 
*0.mala, mfn. one whose impurities 
are blown away, free from sin; m. 
~0, Dh. 236. 238 (synon. an-aügana). 

niddhamati, vb. (sa. nir-ydhmā) 
to blow off; to drive out, expel, re- 
move (acc.); pot. 3. sg. niddhame 
x Dh. 239; pp. niddhanta 
v. h.). e 
nidhāya, ger. nidahati (g. v.). 

nidhi, m. (= sa.) a treasure; 
gen. pl. „vīnam, Dh. 76. 


138 


nindati, vb. (= sa, ynind) to 
blame (acc.); pr. 3. pl. „anti (bahu- 
bhàninam) Dh. 227; inf. itum, Dh. 
230; pp. ~ita, mfn. blamed, m. ~o 
(poso) Dh. 228; a-nindita, mfn. Dh. 
221; cp. next. 

nindā, f. (= sa.) blame, reproach, 
reproof; acc. ~am, Dh. 143. 309; 
0-pasamsāsu (loc. pl.) blame and 
praise, 106,30 == Dh. 81. 

ninna, mfn. (sa. nimna) deep; 
loc. m. ~e (sakata-magge, a sunken 
road, defile) 43,18. — x. low ground, 
depth (of the sea); acc. ~ar (opp. 
thala) 105,21; loc. ~e (do., “on sea” 
Dh. 98. 

*nipaka, mfn. (sa. *nipaka) in- 
telligent, prudent; acc. m. „am (sa- 
hayam) Dh. 328. 

nipajjati, vb. (sa. ni-/pad) to 
lie down; pr. 3. sg. wati, 6,30; imp. 
3. sg. catu, 6,28; aor. 3. sg. nipajji, 
2,31. 3,19. 12,24. 30,16; 3. pl. *) wimsu, 
65,3; b) wisum, 112,6; ger. ~itva, 
42,1; pp. nipanna (g. v.); caus. v. 
next. 

*nipajjapeti, vb. (caus. nipajjati) 
to cause to lie down, lay down, deposit 
(acc.) ; aor. 3. pl. ~esum, 32,30. 61,16; 
ger. ~wetva, 13,17. 16,18. 20,. 41,36. 
59,7. 

nipatati, vb. (sa. ni-Vpat) to fly 
down, descend on, fall down on (Joc.); 
pr. 3.89. vati, 2,33; ger. ~itva (Bha- 
gavato padesu sirasa, “falling at his 
feet") 75,22. cp. nipāta etc. 

nipanna, mfn. (pp. nipajjati) 
lying; m. ~O, 3,5-18. 7,4. 35,31 (pha- 
lake, floating on a plank); 65,15 
(sleeping); 110,19; comp. tassa ~ttha- 
nam (where he was lying) 49,24; 
0-kāle (while he was sleeping) 53,3. 

*nipannaka, mfn. (fr. prec.) 
lying; acc. m. eam, 6,31. 

nipāta, m. (= sa.) !) falling; 
instr. udabindu-nipatena, “by falling 
of waterdrops", Dh. 121, — ?)a par- 
ticle or indeclinable word; nom. „O 
(‘ma’ti) 86,5. — 3) a section of a 
book (esp. of Jātaka or Anguttara 


139 


Nik., whose single books are arranged 
according to their length or number 
of stanzas); Sutta-°, m. nom. pr. (v. 
h.) cp. next. 

*nipātaka, mfn. (fr. nipata?) 
divided into nipütas (as Anguttara- 
Nikaya); acc. m. ~am (saddhammam 
pavibhajja) 110,2. 

nipatin, mfn. (= sa.) flying or 
falling down; yattha-kima-°, mfn. 
"rushing wherever it listeth", acc. n. 
einam (cittam), Dh. 36; gen. ~ino 
(cittassa) Dh. 35. 

nipuna, mfn, (= sa.) clever, 
skilful ; fine, subtile; m. ~o (dhammo) 
94,25; su-nipuna, mfn. (g. v.) cp. 
nepunna. 

nippapaiüca, mfn. (sa. nish- 
prapaūca) free from diffuseness, calm, 
undisturbed; m. pl. ~ā (Tathagata) 
Dh. 254. 

nip pabha, mfn. (sa. nish-prabha) 
without splendour; m. pl. «à (aiiia- 
titthiyā) 72,29; cp. pabhā, f. 

nippāpa, mfn. (sa. nish-pāpa) 
free from sin; m. «o, Dh. 205. 

nippileti, vb. (sa. nish-pidayati, 
Vpid) to press, squeeze (acc.); aor. 
3. sg. nesi (tassa givam) 5,13. 

nippurisa, mfn. (sa, nish-purusha) 
without men, female; instr. m. pl. 
„ehi (turiyehi, “a female orchestra") 
67,23 (cp. Speyer, Rem. on Divyavadana, 
Wien. Zeitschr. XVI p. 105.) 

nipphatti, f. (sa. nishpatti) com- 
pletion, perfection; acc. «im (niyyā- 
makasippe) “complete mastery”, 24,18, 

nibaddha, mf». (pp. nibandhati; 
== ga.) 1) bound (on or to), fixed; 
*. am, adv. constantly, 6,14. — *) asked, 
pressed; m. <o (punappuna, “being 
asked again and again") 53,35. 

nibandha, m. (= sa.) binding, 
chain, attachment to; continuance, 
continuity; upāyupādānābhinivesa-', 
96,10 (g. v.). 

nibandhati, vb. (sa. ni-ybandh) 
1) to bind on; *) to press, urge, im- 
portune; aor. 3. sg. nibandhi, 54,1; 
pp. nibaddha (q. v.) cp. nibandha. 


nibbāna 


nibbattati, vb. (sa. nir-Vvrt) to 
become, come forth, be born (again), 
sprout up; pr. 3. sg. „ati (dukkham) 
Dh. 338; fut. 3. sg. ~wissati (Tusita- 
vimāne) 87,31; 2. sg. ~issasi, 88,15; 
1. sg. wissiimi, 88,16; aor. 3. sg. 
nibbatti (rukkhadevata hutvā) 3,31; 
ger. eitvà (kapiyoniyam) 1,3; (ruk- 
kho) 36,36; pp. nibbatta, m. <o, 
17,24. 28,97. 84,30 (niraye). 101,11 
(aggi); nibbatt'amhi, 88,10; f. nib- 
battāsi, 88,9. caus. nibbatteti (q. v.). 

nibbattana, x. (sa. nirvartana) 
the coming forth, being born, growing, 
sprouting; rukkha-nibbattana-bhay- 
ena, for fear thut a tree would grow 
up, 37,5; amkura-°-tthana, «. (q. v.). 

nibbatteti, vb. (caus. nibbattati) 
to bring forth, produce, complete, per- 
form; ger. „etvā (jhanabhinnam) 
47,33. 

nibbana, mfn. (sa. nir-vana) !) 
without forest, woodless (Jat. IT, 358,8). 
— 2) free from desires; m. pl. wii, 
Dh. 283 (cp. vana?). 

*nibbanatha, mfn. (fr. nir + 
vanatha, g. v.) free from lust; m. 
„0 (synon. vana-mutto) Dh. 344. 

nibbāna, x. (sa. nirvana) !) ex- 
tinction, the being extinguished (as a 
fire or a lamp);” ~am (pajjotassa) 
80,35 (cp. Jat, I, 212,8). — 2) the 
Buddhist Nirvāna : *) absolute extinc- 
tion of all desires and passions, com- 
plete sanctification or Arhatship (cp. 
arahat); °) absolute annihilation of 
individual existence (7. e. in the Sarı- 
sara), release from every conceivable 
attribute of being (cp. an-abhāvakata), 
the eternal happiness attained after 
death by an Arhat or a Buddha (ta- 
thagata), whereafter he shall not be 
born or die again; ~am (Sugatena 
desitam) Dh. 285; acc. „arh, 64.3. 
89,2. Dh. 23. 134. 184. 203. 226. 369; 
dat. ~aya (samvattati) 66,50; gen. 
~assa (sacchikiriyaya) 90,18; ~ass’- 
eva santike, near to N., Dh. 32 = 
€-santike, Dh. 372; — *-gamana, 
mfn. leading to N., acc. m. „am 


nibbāpeti 


(maggam) Dh. 289; *9-gamin, mfn. 
id., f. ~ini (scil. patipada) Dh. 75; 
*0.patisamyutta, mfn. 71,22 (v. h.); 
— magga-phala-nibbānāni (x. pl., 
dvandva-comp.) “the paths, the fruits, 
and the N.”, 97,10; — The transition 
into N. is described as vimokho ce- 
taso, 80,55, which is compared with 
the extinction of a lamp (pajjotasséva 
nibbānam, cp. AN. I, p. 236; epithets 
of N. are a-kata, T 
ēčp.mittūyāti; nibbüta, parinibbana. 
[D'Alwis, Buddhist Nirvāna; a review 
of Max Müllers Dhammapada. Co- 
lombo 1871; Childers, Dictionary 
(sub voce) 1875; Dahlmann, Nirvana, 
Berlin 1896; Eklund, Nirvana, Up- 
sala 1899; Pfungst, Was ist das 
buddhistische Nirvāna in Wirklichkeit? 
(Aus der indischen Kulturwelt, Stutt- 
gart 1904, p.56); Oldenberg, Buddha, 
9. Aufl. p. 310;  Trenckner, Mil. p. 
424.] 

nibbapeti, vb. (caus. fr. next; 
sa. nir-vāpayati) to extinguish, annihi- 
late; to cool, refresh; imp. 2. pl. ~etha 
(sokam me) 89,12; inf. ~etum (do.) 
89,10. 

nibbayati, eb. (sa. nir-Vv&) to 
be blown out or extinguished; to be 
refreshed, to feel happy, attain the 
Nirvana; pr. 3. sg. ~ati (matuhada- 
yam) 64,17; pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (aggi) 
95,1; caus. nibbāpeti (g.'v.); pp. v. 
nibbuta, cp. nibbāna. 

nibbijja, ger. (fr. nibbindati; 
sa. nir-vidya) having become despon- 
dent, depressed, or disgusted with 
abl. or acc.); ger. nibbijjipema 
(Gokamasi, cp. apeti, vb.) 104,16 [or 
have we to take nibbijjāpema as pr. 
1. pl. from *nibbijjapeti, to give up 
(on account of despondency)? cp. 
*nibbejaniya, f. pl. or gen. sg. nir- 
vi? ?) SN. I, p. 1244]. | 

nibbittha, mfn. (pp. nibbisati; 
sa. nir-vishta) gained, earned; instr. 
n. wena (carami, “with what I have 
gained I wander about") 105,5. 

nibbida, m. (or nibbidā, f. (?); 


a- mata, . para, etc La 


140 


sa. nirvid, f. & nirveda, m., cp. Jat, 
IV, 471,25. 473,3) aversion, disgust, 
weariness; dat. ~aya (cittamh santhasi, 
“his mind became weary”) 67,31; ~aya 
(samvattati) 93,7 (cp. Kuhn, Beitr. 
p. 70). 

nibbindati, vb. (sa. nir-yvid, 
nirvindati & pass. nirvidyate) to be 
indifferent, to become weary of or dis- 
gusted with (/oc.); pr. 3. sg. «ati 
(rūpesu) 71,5-14; (dukkhe) 107,12 = 
Dh. 277 (metri causa ~wati); part. 
m. eum, 71,4; pot. 3. sg. ~weyya 
opp. asimsetha) 42,16; ger. nibbijja 
v. h.); cp. nibbida. 

nibbisati, vb. (sa. nir-yvic) lit. 
‘to enter into’; to earn, gain; part. 
m. nibbisam, v. a-nibbisam. 

nibbuta, mfn. (sa. nir-vrta) !) 
happy, content, free from passions; 
2) extinguished (through false etymo- 
logy combined with nibbayati, nib- 
bana); m. «o (pita) 64,14; (gini, /. e. 
the fire of passions) 104,25; (anupa- 
daya) Dh. 414; acc. ~ar (opp. atta- 
danda; *mild") Dh. 406; acc. pl. ~e, 
Db. 196; f. wa (mātā) 64,14; loc. n. 
kasmim nu kho ~e hadayam ~ar 
nàma hoti, after what having become 
extinguished does the heart feel happy? 
64,18. 

nimanteti, vb. (sa. ni-Ymantr) 
to invite; aor. 3. sg. «esi, 56,25; 3. 
pl. ~ayimhsu, 87,5; ger. ~etva (dā- 
nam adamsu) 86,14. 

Nimi, m. nom. pr. of a king (= 
$0.) ~ nama raja (Mithilāyam) 
45,16. 

nimitta, x. (= sa.) 1) sign, omen; 
pl. ~ani (cattari) 64,3; pubba-0, id. 
acc. ~am, 63,7; pl. „āni, 63,1. — 
7) cause, reason; gahita-nimittena, 
instr. ‘on account of his having taken 
hold of it’, ¿ e. by a tug, 89,7; a-ni- 
mitta, mfn. (v. %.). 

nimisa, m. (sa. nimisha) winking 
or twinkling of the eye; a-nimisa, 
mfn. not winking; subst. f. a-nimisata 
(v. h.). | 

nimilati, eb. (sa. ni-ymīl) intr. 


141 


to shut, close (as the eyes); pr. 3. pl. 
„anti (akkhini, kumbhīlānari mu- 
khavivate) 3,18; caus. nimileti. to 
close (the eyes, acc.); ger. „etvū 
(akkhīni) 3,19. 

nimugga, mfn. (pp. nimujjati; 
sa, ni-magna) sunk or plunged in 
(loc.); guthakalale 9?-gamasukaro, 

6,33. 

nimujjati, vb. (sa. ni-Vmajj) to 
sink, dive in (Joc.); pr. 3. pl. „anti, 
25,26; ger. witva (kamakalale) 46,55; 
pp. nimugga (g. v.); caus. II. nimuj- 
japeti, to cause to sink (acc.); ger. 
m etvà (nāvam) 27,12; ummujja-ni- 
mujja, m. (v. ummujjati). 

nimba, m. (— sa.) the Nimb tree, 
Azadirachta Indica (with bitter fruits); 
pl, wa, 37,20; acc. pl. we, 38,19 = 
pucimanda, 37,33. 38,1. — *°-kasata, 
n. (v. h.). — °-panna-sadisa-rasa, mfn. 
having a (bitter) taste like the leaves 
of a Nimb tree, m. ~0, 37,22. 


nimmakkhika, mfn. (sa. nir- 
makshika) free from flies; °-madhu- 
patala-°, 38,93 (v. h.). 

nimmala, mfn. (sa. nir-mala) 
spotless, taintless, sinless; m. pl. nā 
(bhikkhavo) Dh. 243. 

nimmita, mfn. (sa. nir-mita, 
yma) constructed, built, fashioned, 
created; acc. n. ~ari (uyyanam de- 
vatāhi) 63,20. 

niyata, mfn. (= sa.; yyam) !) 
held back, restrained; m. ~o (synon. 
danto) Dh, 142; — ?) fixed, certain; 
sure, insured; limited; m. ~o (bhik- 
khu) 79,34; n. ai (maranam) 86,17; 
*0_gatika, mfn. (g. v.); a-niyata, mfn, 
uncertain, unlimited (v. h.). 

niyama, m. (sa. niyama & niyama) 
1) restraining, determination etc. — 
2) practice, way, method; instr, wena 
(iminā) 2,25; maccha-gahana-? („as 
if to catch fish") 26,55. 

niyyati, vb. (sa. nir-yyà) to go 
out, depart; to get out (esp. from the 
samsara); pr. 3. pl. „anti (lokamhā) 
91,0; aor. 3. sg. „āsi, 39,9; 3. pl. 


niraya 


eimsu, 91,5; fut. 3. sg. wissati, 90,22; 
3. pl. wissanti, 91,6. 

niyyadeti, vb. (also niyyāteti; 
sa. mir-/yat, caus. niryatayati) to 
deliver, to give anything (acc.) into 
one's charge (gen.); pr. 1. pl. ~ema 
(-mige rañño) 6,5; ger. „etvā (brāh- 
manim amhākam) 9,18; 38,5. 

niyyānika, mfn. (sa. nir-yānika) 
conducing to blessing, salutary, pro- 
fitable; *a-9, mfn. (g. v.). 

niyyama(ka), m. (sa. nir-yama- 
(ka)) a navigator, master, mate; ~ko, 
25,16; acc. ~kam, 25,13; *niyyāmaka- 
kamma, x. “the mariner’s calling”, 
acc. mai, 24,14; *°-jettha, m. “master 
mariner”, gen. ~wassa, 24,10; *°-jet- 
thaka, m. id., ~ko, 24,14; *9-sippa, 
n. “the art of seamanship’, loc. we, 
24,13; *gutta, x. "mariner's lore", 
instr. wena, 25,28. 

nir- (before vowels) indecl. prefix 
(sa. nis) to verbs or nouns, implying 
“out, away’, or "without, free from" 
(cp. a-, an-, na-, vi-); before cons. 
it is always shortened to ni- (v. h. 
and the foil. cons. is doubled (nik- 
kaddhati etc.; nutthubhati), but be- 
fore r, h it is lengthened to ni- 
(niroga, niharati, cp. nibbana, niva- 
rana). 

niramkaroti (or nir&karoti) 
vb. (sa. nir-à-ykr) to. throw away, 
repudiate; to ruin, destroy; ger. ~atva 
(attam) 55,1. 

nirattha, mfn. (sa. nir-artha) 
useless, vain; f. „āū (tassa sevanā) 
14,3; n. ~am (kalingaram) 107,6 = 
Dh. 41. — niratthaka, mfn. id. (sa. 
nir-arthaka) ; °-lapana, n. 52,6 (v. h.). 

niraparadha, mfn. (= sa.) 
unoffending, guiltless; acc. m. ~am, 
39,29. 

niraya, m. (= sa.) hell; acc. 
~am, 58,14. 74,1; dat. aya (upa- 
kaddhati) Dh.311; loc. ~e (nibbatto) 
84,30; ~amhi, 108,7; ussada-°, 23,26 
(g. v.); — *-bhaya, x. fear for hell, 
instr, «ena, 17,30; °-bhaya-bhita, 
mfn, fearing hell, m. pl. «à, 17,31; 


nirasamkata 


*0.vagga, m. name of the ch, XXII 
of Dh. (cp. nerayika). 

*niràsamkatà, f. (cp. sa. nir- 
acaüka, mfn.) the not hesitating; 
instr, «Aya, 59,18 (cp. asaiika, f.). 

nirasaya, mfn. (sa. nir-āgraya) 
standing alone, supportless, who has 
no inclinations; acc. m. „am, Dh. 
410 (cp. asaya). 
 mirujjhati, vb. (pass. sa. ni- 
. yrudh) to cease, end, to be dissolved; 
pr. 3. pl. „anti, 66,17. 80,29; part. 
~māna, n. ~ar (dukkharh nirujjhati, 
opp. uppajjati, (g. v.)) 96,13. (cp. 
nirodha). 

nirutti, f. (sa. nirukti) gramma- 
tical analysis, etymology; pronuncia- 
tion, diction, dialect; instr. (or abl.?) 
~iyā (Māgadhānam) 113,32; (Māga- 
dhaya) 114,28; °-pada-kovida, mfn. 
skilled in the [interpretation of] words 
of the nirutti, 4. e. the old dialect or 
the original language of the holy 
scriptures, m. ~0, Dh. 352. (cp. SBE. 
X. p. 84. 

*nirupakāra, mfn. (cp. sa. nir- 
upakārin) useless; m. ~0, 35,28. 

nirupaddava, mfn. (sa. nir- 
upadrava) without affliction or mishap, 
happy, secure; f. ~a (nava) 25,20. 

nirumbhati, vb. (sa. ni-yrudh) 
to stop, suppress; to hush, silence 
(acc.); ger. ^ itvà (saddam) 65,25. 
(cp. Tr. PM. p. 59.) 

nirüpadhi, mfn. (sa. nir-upadhi, 
with u lenghtened metri causa (?), cp. 
Fausbøll, Dhpd. (1855) p. 433 & 
Tr. PM. p. 78) free from passions; 
105,29. Dh. 418 (v. upadhi). 

nirokàsa, mfn. (sa. nir-avakaga) 
inaccessible, impossible, inconvenient; 
loc. n. ~e (thane) 41,29 (cp. an-ava- 
kāsa & okāsa). 

nirodha, m. (= sa.) cessation, 
destruction; nom. ~0, 66,18. 108,14 
(scil. sabba-dukkhassa); sarnkhara-° 
etc. 96,13 etc. (v. h.); a-sesa-viraga-°, 
67,15 (v. h.); acc. „am (saiiiā-ve- 
dayita-°) 80,10; dat. waya, 93,8; abi. 
~ā, 94,12; *-dukkha-9, mfn. (g. v.); 


142 


— *0_dhamma, mfn. subject to destruc- 
tion, n, ~am, 68,27 (cp. dhamma ^)). 

nilina, mfn. (pp. niliyati; = sa.) 
sitting on (/oc.); hidden, concealed; 
m. ~o (sakhaya) 13,13; loc. we, 50,25. 

niliyati, vb. (sa. ni-yli) to sit 
down (esp. in order to hide one's self); 
pr. 3. sg. eati, 50,7; aor, 3. sg. niliyi 
(sakhagge, Joc.) 18,22; 50,93; ger. 
„itvā (rukkhe) 4,21; — caus. II. 
*niliyapeti, to cause one to hide one's 
self, to conceal (acc.); ger. „etvā 
(dhuttam) 50,9. 

nivattana, x. (sa. nivartana) 
turning back, fleeing; a bend or curve 
of a river; loc. ~e (Gaūgā-") 1,4. — 
a-nivattana, mfn. (g. v.). 

nivattati, ob. (sa. ni-yvrt) to 
turn back, return; to flee, disappear, 
vanish; pr. 3. sg. „vati (hirhsa-mano) 
Dh. 390; part. instr. m. „antena, 
83,5; imp. 3. sg. watu (sotthim nāvā, 
“return to safety") 27,21; aor. 3. sg. 
nivatti (nagarabhimukho) 43,15; inf. 
etum, 27,11; ger. witva, 5,16. 12,11; 
pp. nivatta, m. ~o (bhavissati) 60,21. 
— caus. nivatteti & nivattayati, to 
turn, lead back; part. acc. m. ~waya- 
manam, 60,19; imp. 2. sg. waya 
(nivattay'etam ratham) 60,14; ger. 
eelva, 60,18. 

nivattha, mfn. (pp. nivasati; sa. 
nivasita) 1) dwelling, living, inhabiting; 
2) clothed, dressed in, wearing (acc. 
or €. C.); f. ~a (satakam) 31,10; m. 
wo (sana-sati-©) 71,29; su-nivattha, 
mfn. carefully dressed; acc. m. ~am 
(pabbajitam) 63,50. 

nivata, mfn. (= sd.) sheltered 
from the wind, low (opp. pavata, sa. 
pravata); — *nivata(ka), ^. a place 
sheltered from the wind, calm, stillness; 
loc. ~e (labbhamāne) 48,7 must be 
understood in the sense of “opportu- — 
nity”, if we have not here an old error 
for nimantaka, m. (sa. nimantraka, 
cp. nimanteti) an inviter, i. e. a wooer 
or seducer, cp. the comm. Jat. V, 
437,18 (raho nimantake paribhedake) 
& Mil. p. 205. 


143 


nivapa, %. (= sa.) seed; food, a 
portion of food, gift of food; acc. ~am 
(vapitva, migānam) 6,4; — *°-tina, 
n. “grass to eat", acc. ~am (ropetva) 
6,6; *°-puttha, mfn. “fed on grains" 
m. ~o (mahā-varāho), Dh. 325. 

*nivāretar, m. (sa. *nivārayitr) 
one who holds back, who refuses to 
admit any person; «om. wa (a-üiiü- 
tānam) 90,32 (opp. pavesetar). 

nivareti, vb. (caus. ni-yvr, sa. 
nivarayati) to keep back or away from 
(abl.); to prohibit, forbid; pot. 3. sg. 
~āraye (asabbha) Dh. 77; (papa 
cittam) Dh. 116; aor. 3. sg. «esi, 
89,17-19; grd. ~etabba, m. <o, 83,4; 
nivāretar, m. (g. v.) cp. dun-nivaraya. 

nivasa, m. sa.) dwelling, 
abode; acc. ~am (gahetvā. *stopped”) 
8,20. — pubbe-?, m. (v. h.). 

nivàsana, %, (== sa.) an under- 
garment; nom. ~am (opp. parupanam) 
29,23; 82,24 (cp. patinivasana). 

*nivasapeti, vb. (caus. II. ni- 
‘vas, cp. next) to cause to be dressed 
(with double acc.); ger. ~etva (mam ' 
ahatavatthani) 27,18; (devim dibba- 
vattham) 61,15. 

nivaseti, vb. (caus. ni-Vvas, sa. 
nivāsayati) to put on (clothes, acc.), 
to dress one’s self; ger. „etvā (te, 
scil. satake) 41,4; 76,16. 78,4 (having 
dressed himself); parimandalam ~, 
82,27 (g. v.) cp. nivasana & prec. 

nivittha, mfn. (pp. nivisati, sa. 
ni-Vvig, nivishta) entered, settled 
down, founded, situated; married; 
kasa-°, mfn. touched by the whip, m. 
„0 (asso) Dh. 143^ (lit, “married 
to the whip"?). 

nivedeti, vb. (caus. ni-yvid, sa. 
nivedayati) to communicate, report, 
announce, proclaim (acc.); imp. 2. pl. 
etha (tutthim) 64,6; aor. 3. pl. 
ewayimsu, 31,6. 

nivesana, %. (sa. nivegana) !) 
‘entering’, dwelling, mansion, house, 
home; nem. ~am, 78,5; acc. «am 

gantvā, “went home") 51,6; loc. we 
(Cake) 78,1; — *-tthana, x. id. 2,15; 


3 


— 


nisidüpeti 


— %-dvāra, ^. the entrance or gate of 
a house, 68,2. 73,31; loc. ee, 38,5; 
— raja-°, the king's palace, abl. nā, 
19,16. — ?) metaph. attachment of mind 
or false opinion (Comm. = ditthi), 
v. a-nivesana, mfn. Dh. 40. 

niveseti, vb. (caus. ni-yvic, sa. 
nivecayati) to cause to enter; attanam 
ev, to place or direct one's self; pot. 
3. sg. waye, Dh. 158; ~eyya, Dh. 
282. cp. nivittha, nivesana. 

nisamma, indecl. (ger. nisameti, 
to observe, attend to; sa. ni-Ģamya, 
Vgam) carefully, considerately; *°-ka- 
rin, mfn. acting considerately; gen. 
M. ~ino, Dh. 24. 

nisificati, vb. (ni-ysic, sa. ni- 
shiūcati) to sprinkle, besprinkle (acc.); 
ger. ~iya (te jalena) 110,33. 

nisinna, mfn. (pp. nisidati; sa. 
nishanna) seated, sitting; m. ~O 
(dhanasantike) 33,26; ace. wath (kū- 
pagge) 18,6; gen. ~assa, 86,6; pl. 
<ü, (assembled) 109,32; gem. pl. wa- 
nam, 61,25; comp, °-kale, while sitting, 
lis; -pallamnkato, 65,27 (g. v.); 
rukkhe °-puriso, 36,3; as finite tense: 
nisinno’si (cintento), 4,3. cp. san- 
nisinna. — nisinnaka, mfn. (sa. ni- 
shannaka) id., m. ~o (va niddàyi) 
89,4. 

nisidati, vb. (ni-ysad, sa. nishi- 
dati) to sit, be seated, sit down; to 
dwell; part. m. ~anto (ekato), 45,38; 
imp. 2. sg. nisida (dvare) 57,29; aor. 
8. sg. nisidi, 11,26 (rukkhagge); 12,15. 
66,4; 3. pl. *) wimsu (tassā guna- 
kathāya, were lauding) 31,23; ^) isum, 
112,98; ger. *) nisiditva (rukkhe) 2,5; 
42,31. 87,34; ")nisajja, 78,6; pp. ni- 
sinna (g. v.); grd. nisiditabba, m. 
~am, 83,33; caus. nisīdāpeti (g. v.) 
cp. neat. 

*nisidana, %., a mat to sit on; 
0-paccattharanam, 84,10 (v. h.). 

*nisidapeti, vb. (caus. II. nisi- 
dati) to cause to sit down or take 
place, to cause to remain, leave; ger. 
eetvà (Bodhisattam hatthipifthe) 
45,32; 58,9-19. | 


nisedha 


nisedha, m. (sa. nishedha) keep- 
ing off, holding back, restraining, pro- 
hibition; ~o (manaso piyehi, “holding 
the mind back from the pleasures of 
life") Dh. 390; — *hiri-°, mfn. re- 
strained by shame, m. ~o (puriso) 
Dh. 143. 


nisedheti, vb. (caus. ni-ysidh, 
sa. nishedhayati) to keep off, restrain, 
prohibit, warn (acc.); part. m. „ento 
(paribbajakam) 30,10. 

nisevati, vb. (sa. ni-ysev, ni- 
shevate) to attend, follow, practise, 
cultivate; (acc.) pr. 3. pl. med. nisevare 
(sākhā sākhā, wind round one another) 
37,34. 

nissamsayam, adv. (sa. nih- 
saīngayam) undoubtedly, surely; 114,24. 
(cp. sarnsaya). 

*nissakkana, w. (fr. nissakkati, 
sa, nih-ysrp) creeping out; bilara- 
nissakkana-matta, mfn. 90,35 (v. h.). 

nissajjati, vb. (sa. nih-Vsrj) to 
let loose; give up, give over (acc.); 
imp. 3. sg. ~atu (mama bhikkhusam- 
gham) 74,23; pot. 1. sg. ~eyyam, 
74,27. 

nissadda, mfx. (sa. nih-cabda) 
noiseless, silent; acc. m. ~am (mahā- 
janam) 88,6. 
~ *nissaya, prp. w. acc. (ger. nis- 
sayati, sa. *nigrāya, vcri, lit. leaning 
on’) !) near to; padumasaram ~, 3,31; 
pasanapittham, 17,20; — *) by means 
of, by one's support; tumhe ~, 12,55; 
rajanam ~ (“in the king's service") 
24,18; tam ekikam ~, 31,20; tam ~, 
87,2; imam kayam ~, "through con- 
nection with”, 99,16; — *) because of, 
by the reason of, for sake of; Mitta- 
vindakam ~, 23,11-13; dhanam ~, 
33,36; mam ~, 39,16; etam ~, 49,31; 
amhe ~, 60,12; issariyam ~, 60,13; 
ditthim ~ papikam, Dh. 164. cp. 
next, 

— *nissita, mfn. (pp. nieygri; cp. 
sa. ū-Ģgrita) depending on, devoted to 
(acc. or comp.); m. «o (dvayam, 
ayam loko) 96,6; raga-°, mfn. devoted 


144 


to passions, m. pl. ~ā (samkappà) 
Dh. 339. cp. a-nissita, san-nissita. 

nisseni (or ~i), f. (sa. nili-greni) 
a ladder, stairs; abl, ~ito (otaranto) 
62,27. | 

nihata, mfn. (= sa., pp. ni- han) 
‘slain’, dejected; humiliated, humble; 
m. ~o (seti) 30,1; ""-mana, mfn. 
whose pride is defeated, humble; 
~mina-bhava, m. humility, acc. „arh, 
57,30. 

nihina, mfn. (= sa., pp. ni-/ha) 
low, vile, mean; *°-kamma, mfn., pl. 
m. «à (manuja) “men of evil deeds”, 
74,2. | 

*nigha (or nigha), #@. (cp. sa. 
nigha, sin) suffering, pain; *a-nigha, 
min. (q. v.). 

nica, mfn. (- sa.) low (opp. 
ucca); acc. m. n. ~ar (katva, “hold- 
ing it down, turning it downwards") 
82,1. 84,11; "-thüniya, mfn. occu- 
pying a low position, acc. m. ~am 
(ucce thane thapetum) 76,1. 

nita, mfn. (= sa.; pp. neti) led, 
brought; acc. pl. m. ~e (attano san- 
tikam) 38,30. 

niyati, 
neti. 

niroga, mfn. (= sa.) free from 
sickness; m. ~o (siho) 18,22. 

nila, n. (sa. nīda) a nest; v. 
nidda. 

nila, mfn. (== sa.) dark, blue, 
green; 9-vanna, mfn. id. acc. m. ~am 
(samuddam) 26,5; — nīluppala», 
47,13 (v. uppala); — °-kusa-tina, w, 
26,18 (v. kusa); — °-mani & inda-nila 
v. h.). 
| «A n. (& m.?) (sa. niva- 
rana % nivarana, x.) an obstacle, 
hindrance; acc, pl. paūīca ~e, 91,6 
(the five obstacles to a religious life, 
i. e. lust, malice, sloth, pride, and 
doubt, v. Childers, Dict.); vi-niva- 
rana-citta, mfn. (g. v.) cp. nivarana, 
n. fr. nivāreti (g. v.). 

niharati, vb. (sa. nir-y/hr) to 
take out, to pull or drive out (acc.); 
aor. 3. sg. nihari (kacchapam) 12,33; 


niyamana, pass. v. 


145 


50,25; ger. ~itva (migaganam gaha- 
natthānato) 6,12; 14,26; 37,17. 57,33. 
84,9. 

nu, indecl. (= sa.) 1) a particle 
combined with interrogatives, very 
frequently followed by kho (q. ».); 
kin nu kho, 1,21. 86,29 etc. (v. kim’); 
kin nu karanam, 3,1; kacci ~ kho, 
9,5; kaccin nu, 9,28; kaya nu... ka- 
thaya, 29,30; ko nu dipo, 110,31; 
kahan ~ kho, 34,11; kathar ~ kho, 
81,15; kati ~ kho, 81,19; api nu, 
73,4. — ?) particle of interrogation 
(generally = ne, num); atthi nu kho, 
14,26; bhabbo nu kho, 70,1; saddo 
yeva nu kho Nāgaseno (“is N. any- 
thing but a mere sound”) (= nonne) 
97,30; sometimes pleonastically inserted 
after a relative before the following 
interrogative sentence : yan nu aham 
bālo, atha kena... 54,36; yo nu kho 
evam vadeyya..., sammā nu kho 
so vadeyya, 99,29-31. — ?) particle of 
asseveration; at the end of a sentence: 
nū "ti eintiya (certainly, surely) 111,18. 
cp. nanu & nuna, 

nutthubhati, vb. — nitthubhati 

. 9.). 

m vb. (sa. ynud) to push, 


drive away, (acc.); pr. 3. sg. «ati 


(pamadath) Db. 28. 

nuna, indecl. (sa. ninan) t) inter- 
rogative (comb. w. yam) : yan nuna, 
“what if?" (w. pot.) 6,4. 33,27. 46,23. 
68,35. — 2) affirmative : certainly, surely; 
na nuna visahati, 90,26; nibbut& nüna 
sā mata, 64,4. cp. nu. 

nekkha, m. (or nikkha; sa. nishka) 
a golden ornament; a certain coin of 
gold; acc. ~am (jambonadassa) Dh. 
230. 

nekkhamma, n.(sa.naishkramya, 
fr. nish-ykram, cp. nikkhamati) re- 
nunciation of the world, abandonment 
of desires; loc. ^e, 68,20;' kalo, 
45,6; %-sukhari, Dh. 272, “the happi- 
ness of release", cp. SBE. X, 67; 
°-fipasama, m. (v. upasama) Dh. 181. 
As nekkhamma frequently occurs in 
the phrase ~am nikkhamati and the 


Páli Glossary. 


nerayika 


Burmese often write nikkhamma, it 
seems to be advisable to derive it 
from sa. naishkramya. The northern 
Buddhists write generally naishkarmya 
(fr. karman), but this is surely due 
to false etymology; nekkhamma is 
often opp. to kāma, wherefore Rhys 
Davids & Oldenberg (SBE. XIII, 104) 
have preferred to derive it from sa. 
*naish-kamya. cp. abhinikkhamana. 

negama, m. (= sa.) a citizen, 
townsman (opp. janapada); °-jana- 
pada, m. pl. “townsmen and country- 
folk", acc. ~e, 6,3; loc. mesu, 7,25. 
cp. nigama. 

neti (& nayati), vb. (sa. yni) 
1) to lead, guide; to bring, carry off, 
take, take with (acc.); pr. 2. sg. nesi, 
5,5; 101,18 (tava bhariyam); 1. sg. 
nemi, 101,19; 3. sg. wati (metri causa : 
eati) Dh. 257; 3. pl. anti, 106,20-37 
= Dh. 240; 80; imp. 2. sg. nehi 
(mam) 2,5; 2. pl. netha, 19,26. 58,15; 
pot, 3. sg. naye (attham sahasa, “to 
carry a matter with violence") Dh. 256; 
fut. 1. sg. nessami, 1,18; 2. pl. nes- 
satha, Dh. 179-80; aor. 3. sg. nayi 
(sā nayi, perhaps — sánayi, fr. aneti) 
111,30; 3. pl, naynnsu, 24,25; inf. 
netave (= netum) Dh. 180; — pass. 
niyati, 3. pl. „anti (lokamhā, abl.) 
Dh. 175; part. loc. pl. nīyamānesu, 
40,2; pp. nita (g. v.) cp. naya, nāyaka 
d next. 

*nettika, m. (fr. sa. netra) one 
who makes conducts for watering; 
pl. ~& (udakam nayanti) 106,27 = 
Dh. 80. 

nepuiiia, #. (sa. naipunya, fr. 
nipuna) experience, skill, wisdom; 
acc. am, 1145. — 

Neraūjarā, f. (sa. Nairafijana) 
nom. pr. of a river in Magadha, near 
Uruvelā; acc. ~am, 103,2; gen. waya, 
66,2. 

nerayika, mfn. (sa. nairayika, 
fr. niraya) belonging to hell, suffering 
in hell; *°-gatta, m. an inhabitant of 
hell or condemned to hell; nom. ~o, 
241; gen. pl. ~anam, 23,27. 


10 


neva 


neva, indecl. (sa. naiva, fr. na + 
eva) v. naj, 

neva-salnia-násaiünüa, f. (sa. 
naiva-samjiia-násam]ia) neither per- 
ception nor not perception, only comp. 
Cayatana, n. 80,8-9 (v. h.). 

not, gen. pl. pron., v. aham. 

no”, adv. (= sa.) a negative par- 
ticle, equal to ‘na’, but with more 
emphasis : 1) not (non) 10,20. Dh. 95; 
no h’etam, “certainly not so”, 70,2 
(cp. h’); no ca kho, “and certainly 
not”, 90,35 (followed by atha kho); 
’ti evam no, “in this way you cannot 
reason", 92,28; “tl evam pi no, "nor 
so”, 92,29; no yāti koci, Dh. 179 
Comm, — na uyyāti?); — ?) and not 
pen : samsadeti no  vissajjeti, 
90,26. cp. next. 

noce, ade. (fr. no + ce, q. v.; 
sa. no ced) if not (opp. sace); 4,33. 
56,20 (w. foll. fut.); no ce paragave- 
sino (v. h.) Dh. 355. 


P. 
*pal, indecl., a syllable indicating 
abbreviation == etc., sometimes used 


instead of pe (g. v.); 102,19 (cp. la). 

pa-?, indecl. (sa. pra) prefix to 
nouns and verbs, sometimes implying 
‘on, forth, away’, otherwise giving the 
verbs a certain perfective meaning or 
making them inchoative (cp. parodati) 
or intensive (cp. pamodati); in comp. 
after vowels the p is sometimes doubled, 
e. g. a-ppamada ete, 

-pa?, mfn. (== sa.) only e. c. 1) 
drinking; v. dhenu-pa; ?) guarding, 
protecting; V. gopa. 

pansu, m. £ n. (sa. pamsu, 169 
soil, dust, earth; nom, m. ~u (sithilo 
40,24; acc. —um (madhuram) 38,2-3; 
gen. «uno, 40,26; n. pl. «uni (acc. 
pada-°, “the dust at his feet") 77,7. 
— O-kula, ^. ‘a dust-heap',*a certain 
ascetic dress made of rags; *°-kula- 
dhara, mfn. “wearing dirty raiments”, 
acc, m. eam, 106,12 = Dh. 395. 


146 


pakati, f. (sa. prakrti) nature, 
natural state; at the beginning of comp. 
— natural, real; usual, ordinary; what 
has been hitherto, former; *%-samudda, 
m. (opp. the mythical or supernatural 
ocean) 25,21; ""-uyyanapalaka, m. 
(“his former gardener”) gen. «assa, 
38,5. 

pakarana, n. (sa. prakarana) 
‘production’, a literary work, book, 
treatise; Nànodayam nama ~am, 
113,28; Maha-°, (v. h.). 

pakara, m. ba prakāra) kind, 
sort; nāna-ppakāra, mfn. (v. nānā). 

pakaseti, vb. (caus. pra-ykāg, 
sa. prakagayati) !) to illustrate, ex- 
plain, declare, preach, make known 
(acc.); part.m. ~ento (imam attham) 
2,9; 30,16. 43,35. 47,24; aor. 3. 59. 
„esi (saccāni) 52,9; (anisamsam) 
68,21; inf. „etum, 11,9. 114,15; ger. 
wetva, 29,16. 47,30; pp. pakāsita, m. 
„0 (dhammo) 69,18. — ?) intr. to 
shine; pr. 3. pl. „enti (dure santo, 
opp. na dissanti) Dh. 304. 

pakinnaka, mfn. (sa. prakirnaka) 
mixed, miscellaneous; °-vagga, m. the 
XXI chapter of Dh. 

pakopa, m. (sa. prakopa) anger, 
rage; *kaya-ppakopa, *mano-®, *vaci-®, 
Dh. 231-33 (v. h.). 

pakka, mfn. (sa. pakva) !) boiled, 
roasted; acc. m. ~am (aggina) 16,2; 
loc. n. ~e (sarīre) 15,33; *pakkodana, 
mfn. (v. odana). — ?) ripe, mature; 
pakka-phala-, 2,1; n. wath, fruit (= 
phala); amba-°, mango fruit, 15,25 
(ambapakk’); 36,31. cp. paripakka. 

pakkamati, vb. (sa. pra-ykram) 
to go forth, go away; pr. 3. pl. „anti, 
42,32; pot. 3. sg. ~weyya, 100,25; aor. 
8. sg. pakkāmi, 9,4. 59,25; carikam 
m, 70,21 (v. carika); 3. pl. pakka- 
mimnsu, 6,17; pp. pakkanta, f. wa, 
went away, 73,10; loc. m. acira-ppak- 
kante, 70,13 (v. a-cira). 

pakkosati, vb. (sa. pra-ykrug) 
to call, call upon, invite (acc.); aor. 
3. sg. pakkosi (nahapitam) 28,3; 
ger. ~witva, 9,22. 19,28. — caus. II. 


147 


*pakkosāpeti, to send for (acc.); aor. 
8. sg. „vesi (dhitaram) 10,9; ger. 
„etvā, 6,23; pp. m. ~ito (tena), 37,12. 
pakkha, m. (sa. paksha) a wing; 
acc. pl. ~e (pasāretvā) 10,14; (vi- 
dhūnitvā) 18,19. cp. pakkhin & pek- 
khuņa. 
pākkhandati,vb.(sa. pra-yskand) 
to make off, spring forth (out) or over 
(acc.); aor. 3. sg. pakkhandi (navaya 
samuddarh, went to sea) 23,10; (nāvā 
samuddam ~) 23,4; 3. pl. ~imsu, 
25,20; ger. witva (thanam) 27,27; 
pp. pakkhanta, m. ~o (Simbalivanam) 
60,0; f. ~a (videsam) 27,25. cp. neat. 
pakkhandikà, f. (sa. praskan- 
dikā) diarrhoea; v. lohita-". 
pakkhandin, mfn. (sa. praskan- 
din) ‘springing forth’, attacking, in- 
sulting; instr. m. „inā, Dh. 244. 
pakkhitta, mfn. (pp. pakkhipati; 
sa. prakshipta) thrown, cast or put 
on (into); comp. °-tila (tattakapale) 
11,7; %-kukkuto (paiijare) 46,20. 
pakkhin, m. (sa. pakshin; fr. 
pakkha) a bird; «om. pl. wi, ll,u. 
pakkhipati, vb. (sa. pra-ykship) 
to throw, cast, place (acc.) on or into 
(loc.); pr. 8. pl. anti (te kürana- 
ghare) 21,5; aor. 3. sg. pakkhipi, 
9,4; inf. itum (maranadukkham 
aniassa upari) 7,9; ger. witva, 4,21. 
18,14. 39,33 (pamsum); 40,18. 50,34. 
— caus. II. *pakkhipapeti, to cause 
to put into; aor. 3. sg. „esi (tam 
nūvāya) 26.17; ger. ~wetva, 38,5. 
pagabbha, mfn. (sa. pragalbha) 
bold, arrogant; m. instr. «cna, 
244. — a-ppagabbha, mfn. (v. h.). 
pagalha, mfn. (pp. pra-Vgàh; 
sa. pragādha) sunk or plunged into, 
devoted to; m. pl. wa (ettha, v. h.) 
104,1. 
pagganhati (or < 8ti), vb. (sa. 
pra-ygrah) to stretch out, raise, lift 
up; to take, seize etc. (acc.); ger. 
=) paggayha (afijalīrn) 22,4; (baha) 
30,19; (tulah) Dh. 268; — b) pagga- 
hetvā (afijalim) 22,6; — °) paggan- 
hitvà (aijalizn) 30,6. cp. paggaha. 


paccati 


paggayha, ger.; v. prec. 

*paggava, m. a kind of creeping 
(bitter) plant (probably — phaggava, 
“a sort of pot herb", Abhidhünap., 
cp. Vin. I 201,4 & 381,17 (pakkavan 
ti latajati)); ace. pl. we, 38,1. — 
valli, f. id.; acc. pl. wiyo, 37,19. 

paggaha, m. (sa. pragraha) 
‘stretching forth, seizing’, assuming, 
accepting, friendly reception; *asanta-®, 
v. a-Santa. 

paggahetvā, ger.,v. pagganhati. 

paggharati, eb. (sa. pra-yghr) 
to flow, trickle or ooze forth; part. 
instr. n. „antena (assunā) 5,14; pp. 
~ita, n. ~am (assum) 89,15; °-khela, 
mfn. 65,5 (v. h.). 

pamka, m(d n). (= sa.) mud, 
clay; dirt, sin; Joc. ~e (sanno) Dh. 
327; °-pitthe, on the mud (v. pittha) 
5,17; pl. à (dirt) Dh. 141. 

pacati, vb. (sa. ypac) !) to cook 
(acc.); pr. 1. sg. «ami (kittakam) 
57,10; imp. 2. sg. «ahi, 57,19; aor. 
8. sg. paci, 57,1; inf. itum, 57,24; 
ger. witva, 28,23. — *) intr. to burn, 
to be tormented (in hell); ger. nitvā 
(cp. pass. paccati, q. v.) 84,30. — caus. 
II. *pacapeti, to cause to be cooked 
(acc.); part. m. ~ento (patarasam) 
8,20; inf. «etum (bhattam) 33,25. 
cp. pakka. 

pacinati, vb. (sa. pra-yci) to 
collect, pluck (acc.); part. acc. m. 
e.antam (pupphani) Dh. 47—48; fut. 
3. sg. pacessati (puppham iva-ppa- 
cessati) Dh. 44. 

paccakkhato, adv. (abl. fr. 
paccakkha, mfn. visible, perceptible; 
sa. pratyakshatas) before the eyes, 
visibly; attanā ^ natva, 38,18; O) 
passasi, 85,21. 

paccakkhati, vb. (sa. praty-ā- 
Vkhyā) to refuse, deny, abandon (acc.); 
ger. —&ya (purimam ambam a-pac- 
cakkhaya, not being able to deny the 
first mangc) 100,15. 

paccati, vb. (pass. pacati); !) 
to be cooked, ripen (metaph. of actions 
which are ripe for retribution); pr. 3. 


10* 


paccattam 


sg. „ati (papam) Dh. 69. 119. — 2) 
to burn, be tormented (in hell); part. 
paccamana, acc. m. ~am (nerayika- 
sattam) 23,30; m. pl. nā (sattā, 
Avicimhi) 27,14. 

paccattam, adv. (sa. praty-ātmam) 
singly, by one's self; suddhi asuddhi 
m~, “one is pure or impure by him- 
self”, Dh. 165. 
. *paccattharana, m. (fr. praty- 
&-Vstr, cp. sa. asturana) a carpet or 
sheet (to lay on a bed); nisidana-? 
wath, 84,10 (“the mat and the sheet”). 

paccanta, mfn. (sa. pratyanta) 
bordering on; n. „arh (nagaram, 
“frontier fort") Dh. 315; comp.°-gama, 
m. & 9-gamaka, m. a border-village, 
38,29. 14,9; 9-bhümi, f. a bordering 
country, acc. «im, 43,15; °-simato, 
abl. from the frontier, 43,4. (cp. 
sima, f.) 

paccantima, mfn. (sa. pratyan- 
tima) = prec.; n. ~ari (nagaram) 
90,31. . 

paccaya, m. (sa. pratyaya) !) 
belief, trust, confidence; ?) requisite, 
means, help, reliance; acc. pl. «e, 
102,8; gilana-° -bhesajja, 97,8 (v. h.); 
.dāyaka, m. “one who gives the re- 
liances (to the priests)", pl. «à, 102,8; 
3) cause or concurrent occasion (cp. 
hetu); vinisa-°, 34,21 (g. v.); *abl. 
paccaya (e. c.) == depending on, on 
account of, avijja-° [etc.] 66,6 ete, 
cakkhu-samphassa-9, 70,27 (g. v.)j 


a-para-ppaceaya, mfn. (v. h.) cp. pa- teli 
IE LE et) * | büharh. etc.; — 2) afterwards; ~ jānis- 


ticca; Waddell, Lamaism, p. 118. 
paccavekkhati, vb. (sa. praty- 
ava-Viksh) to look at, consider, con- 
template; part. gen. m. ~antassa 
(yathaviditam bhumim) 69,15. 
paccassosum, aor. 3. pl, v. 
patisunati. 
paccagacchati, vb. (sa. praty- 
āygam) to come back again, return; 
aor, 3. sg. ~agami, 25,12;¢3. pl. wa- 
gamimsu, 40,12. 45,27. cp. next. 
paccagamana, x. (sa. pratyà- 
gamana) coming back; na %-ttbānan, 


148 


the place from where one does not 
return, 56,18. 

paccamitta, m. (sa. praty-amitra) 
an enemy, adversary; pl. ~, 35,14; 
acc. pl. ~e, 3,24. On account of false 
etymology the ‘a’ has been lengthened, | 
as it. were derived from pacca (sa. 
praty-ā) + mitta (sa. mitra), cp. 
mitta & a-mitta. 

paccasimsati, vb. (sa. praty-ā- 
Vçams) to expect (acc.); pr. à. Sg. 
„ati (mamágamanam) 87,26-27. 

paccuggacchati, vb. (sa. praty- 
ud-ygam) to go out (towards), go to 
meet; pr. 1.89. ~ami (w. dat. yuddhaya, 
to battle) 104,4; ger. ~gantva, 83,6. 

paccuttheti [or paccutthati], vb. 
(sa. praty-ut-Vsthà) to rise, arise; 
ger. ~tthaya, 68,9. 

paccüsa, m. (sa. pratyūsha) dawn, 
daybreak; °-kiile (Joc.) at dawn, 12,8; 
samayam (acc.) & °-samaye (loc.) 
id. 68,8. 86,27. 

pacceti, vb. (sa. praty-(a-)yi) 
to go back, return; to fall back (upon, 
acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (papam; to be 
scanned : pati-eti) Dh. 125. 

*pacchato, adv. (& prp. w. gen.) 
(abl. fr. sa. pagca); behind; 83,32 (opp. 
purato); Dh. 348 (opp. pure); tesari 
~ agamasi, 33,7; ~ nisinnam, 46,2; 
~ kassaci anagamanabhavarh fatva, 
“having observed that nobody pursued 
them", 40,1. cp. next. 
 pacchà, adv. (sa. pagcāt) 1) be- 
hind; Dh. 421 (opp. pure); cp. pacchà- 


sāmi, 15,27; ~ pivissāmi, 22,32; 35,36; 
55,2; 113,19; paccha-bhattam (v. h.), 
cp. pacchima. | 
*paccha-baham, adv. (fr. bākā 
or == pacchā-baddham?) with the 
hands tied behind the back; ~ ban- 
dhitva, 39,1. 
*paccha-bhattam, adv., after 
the meal, in the afternoon; 86,5. 
*pacchā-vāmanaka-dhātuka, 
mfn. deformed behind; m. ~o, 24,94 
(cp. dhātu & dhātuka). 
*pacchā-vippatisārin, mfn. 


149 


feeling regret or remorse afterwards; 
m, pl. ~ino, 79,18. 
pacchaya, f. (sa. pracchaya, n.? 
cp. chāyā) a shadowy place; loc. 
ewayam, 75,33. 
*pacchasana, m. a back seat (on 
an elephant); loc. ~e (hatthipitthe) 
45,32, 
pacchā-samaņa, m. (sa, pagcāc- 
chramana) a junior Buddhist monk 
who accompanies a senior monk, walk- 
ing behind him at some distance; an 
attendant priest; acc. ~am, 82,26; 
instr. wena, 70,10. 83,1. 
*pacchi, f. (cp. sa. pragna, m. 
(?) & pastya (Tr.); Prākr. pacchi. 
cp. Pischel, Gr. $ 293) a basket; 
loc, ~wiyam, 50,25; puppha-?, flower- 
basket, instr. niyā, 49,36; loc. 50,4. 
— kacavara-chaddana-®°, 48,34 (v. ka- 
cavara). — tasara-°, 87,37 (v. h.). 
pacchindati, vb. (sa. pra-ychid) 
io cut off, break off, discontinue, leave 
(acc.); ger. „itvā (aharam) 46,4. — 
pass, pacchijjati, to cease; aor. 3. sg. 
pacchijji, 42,30. 
pacchima, mfn. (sa. paccima, 
cp. paccha) 1) being behind or at the 
back of; %-gehe (Joc,) behind the house, 
12,13; °-dvarena (instr.), by the back- 
door, ib.; %-pādehi (instr. pl.) “in his 
hind feet”, 24,26. — 2) last, latest; f. nā 
(vaca Tathagatassa) 80,3; Joc. m. 
we (kale) 86,18; (yàme) 99,25; %-viūi- 
iāņa-samgaha (q. v.) 99,26. — 3) western; 
acc. f. ~am (disam) 95,5. — — 
*pacchimaka, mfn. (fr. prec. 
back, last; m. ~o (bhikkhu) 79,5. 
pajahati, vb. (sa. pra-yhā) to 
leave, abandon, give up, eschew (acc.) ; 
fut. 2. pl. pahassatha (metri causa 
cà, B. jahissatha) to get rid of, 
overcome (dukkham) Dh. 144; inf. *) 
pahàtum (yasam) 54,35; P) pahātave 
(in order to escape, maradheyyam) 
Dh, 34; ger. *) pahaya, 94 (tam); 
43,4; 91,6 (paūca nivarane); Dh. 329; 
b) pahatvāna, Dh. 243. 415; pp. 
pahina (v. h.) cp. pahana. 
paja, f. (sa. prajā) offspring, race; 


paücangulika 


creatures, men, people; nom. nā, Dh. 
85. 254. 342; acc. ~um, Dh. 28; 
loc. waya, 78,16. cp. pajapati. 

*pajāna, mfn. (nom. ag. fr. next) 
possessed of knowledge; sammappa- 
jana, mfn. Dh. 20 (v. h.) cp. pañña, 

pajanati, vb. (sa. pra-yjňā) to 
know, understand, perceive (acc.); pr. 
3. sg. ~ati (sahetudhammam) 66,21; 
71,16; Dh. 402 (dukkhassa khayam); 
pass. paññayati, caus. palinüpeti (g. 
v.) cp. pajāna, panna, panna etc. 

pajāpati, m. (f. ~i) (sa. praja- 
den) lord, husband (f. lady, wife); 
ewi-hadayam, the heart of a wife, 
64,18; — sa-pajapatika, mfn. being 
together with one's wife or husband; 
m. ~o (kumbhilo) 2,26. — Pajāpatī, 
f. nom. pr., v. Mahapajapati Gotami. 

pajjalita, mfn. (pp. pajjalati, 
pra-Vjval, sa. prajvalita) flaming, 
blazing, burning; loc. ~e sati (nic- 
cam, “as [this world] is always burn- 
ing") Dh. 146; °-aggikkhandha, m. 
26,3 (v. h.). 

pajjota, m. (sa. pradyota) light, 
flame, fire; gen. wass¢va nibbanam, 
80,35 (“even as a flame dies away”); 
tela-9, m. (v. h.). 

pajjhayati, vb. (sa. pra-ydhyai, 
cp. jhàyati?) to muse, mourn, to be 
afflicted; part. m. ~anto (parajito viya 
dukkhi dummano) 2,1. 

pafica, num. (== sa.) five; nom. 
acc. ~a, 82,10; 67,11 (paūc” upada- 
hakkhandhit); 91,6 (~ nivarane); ~ 
(scil. safige) Dh. 370 (ep. paiica- 
sangátiga) ; instr. (abl.) —ahi (kāma- 
gunehi) 67,25; gen. (dat.) ~wannam 
(mahanadinam) 72,27; (bhikkhu-sata- 
nam, cp. paūcasata) 79,33; loc, wasu 
(silesu, q.v.) 7,24; (thanesu) 60,26; 
— comp. paiica-vanna-, of five colours, 
4,9. 62,12; -sugandhika-parivara, mfn. 
41,13 (v. h.) cp. next ete., paniasa, 
pannarasa & pannarasa. 

pafieaügika, mfn. (= sa.) having 
five parts, five-fold; °-bandhana, x. 
23,31. 

*paūcaūgulika (or paīcaūgula, 


paūcama 


eli), n. (cp. sa. paficangula & ~li) 
‘a mark of five fingers’, *) an ornament 
in the shape of a spread hand used as 
a symbol to avert misfortune; gandha- 
paiicangulikam (acc.) “perfumed gar- 
lands with five sprays”, 37,1 (cp. Jat. 
III 308,21; III 23,20 & 160,5; IV 
158,27; Vin. II 123,18); — >) an 
inaugural mark (consisting of perfumed 
garlands) to be placed on the neck 
of the victim; acc. «am, 16,25 (cp. 
Jat. I 192,5). [Morris, JPTS. 1884 
p. 84; Jat. transl. by Rouse, II p. 72; 
SBE. XX p. 116.] 
paiicama, mfn. (= sa.) the fifth; 
acc. f. ~am (gatham) 54,28; nom. f. 
ei (seni) 108,27; loc. we (i. e. in 
the fifth chapter of Upāsaka-vagga of 
(e AN) 91,13; veyyaggha-°, Dh. 295 
v. h.). i 
Sc VA mfn. (cp. sa. 
paüca-varga) belonging to a grou 
of five; acc. m. pl. ~e (bhikkhū) the 
five monks (i. e. Kondaüna, Vappa, 
Bhaddiya, Mahānāma & Assaji, Vin. 
I 12-13; Jat. I p. 82) 66,24. 
paūca-vīsuti, num. (sa. paíca- 
vimqati) 25; ?-visatima. mfn. the 25th, 
m. ~o (vaggo) Dh. XXV. 
*paiica-sangátiga,mfn.," escaped 
from the five fetters”, m. ~o, Dh. 370; 
v. Saga & atiga. 
paiica-sata, num., mfn. pl. (sa. 
pafica-gata) 500; m. pl, nā, 21,18. 
32,15; acc. ~e, 21,22; f. ~a, 21,21; 
instr. „ehi (therehi) 109,12; gen. 
eina, 109,5; comp. °-miga-parivara, 
mfn. 5,29; sata is often separated from 
panca, forming the last part of a subst. 
comp., paiica-jati-satani (n. pl.) 17,10; 
paiicasu attabhāva-satesu (Žoc.) 17,7; 
paūcannam bhikkhu-satānam (gen.) 
19,35. — paiica-satima, mfn. the 500" ; 
M. ~0, 17,8. 
*naficinantariya-kamma, n., 
v. ünantariya. 
paūcāyudha, n. (= sa.) five 
sorts of weapon; naddha-?, mfn., v. 
ayudha. ! 
paiijara, n. (£ m.) (— sa.) a cage; 


150 


loc. we, 18,26. 46,20; 18,14 (suvanna-?); 
— *ratha-9, n. the body of a chariot, 
~am, 98,5; — *siha-°, n. a window, 
loc. we, 46,1. 

paüia, mfn. (sa. prajiia) wise, 
prudent, intelligent; acc. m. ~am, 
Dh. 208; nikati-°, mfn. (g. v.) cp. 
a-pañña, duppafifia & pania, f. 

painnatta, mfn. (pp. pannüapeti, 
sa. prajiiapta, caus. pra-Vjīā) made 
known, ordered, appointed; prepared, 
arranged, laid down; m. ~o (dham- 
mo ca vinayo ca desito ~) 79,5; 
^. eam (sikkhāpadam) 81,13; loc. 
we (asane) 68,11; yathapaniiattam 
(bhummattharanam) 84,17 (“how it 
was spread out”). 

paüniatti, f. (sa. prajüapti) !) 
declaration, ordinance; ?) name, desig- 
nation; nom. ~i (synon. voharo) 97,2. 
— puggala-' (v. h.). 

painiapeti, vb. 
(q. v.). 

paññavat & paññavanta, mfn. 
v. pañññaval. 

pana, f. (sa. prajūā) wisdom, 
intelligence, knowledge, understanding; 
nom, mā, 2,8. 108,16; Dh. 372; instr. 
e. Aya, 91,24. 104,6. 107,11 = Dh. 277; 
gen. e üya, 91,7. Dh. 280 (maggam, 
*the way to knowledge"); — ?-cakkhu, 
n. (g. v.). — *-pāsāda, m. ‘palace of 
wisdom’, acc. ~ar (āruyha, “climbing 
the terraced heights of wisdom") Dh. 
28; — "-àvudha, n. (v. avudha); — 
9-s1la-samahita, mfn. rich in knowledge 
and virtue, acc. m. „am, Dh. 229; 
— *'-samkhāta, mfn. named paiiüà, 
instr. f. Aya (medhaya) 91,27. — 
gambhira-paiifia. mfn., mahii-paniia, 
mfn. (g. v.), sammappaūā, f. (v. 
sammā) cp. pañña, mfn. etc. 
.paüiüapeti (ç paüiiapeti) vb. 
(caus. pajanati, pra-yjūā, sa. pra- 
jüüpayati & prajüapayati) to make 
known, declare, prescribe; designate, 
predicate; to prepare, arrange, lay 
down (acc. as a seat, carpet efc.); pr. 
1. sg. ~apemi (nighātam, g. v.) 92,39; 
yena rüpena Tathagatam ~apaya- 


=  paiiiàpeti 


151 


mano (part. med. m.) paūiāpeyya 
(pot. 3. sg.) “all form by which one 
could predicate the existence of the 
saint", 95,10; ger. «,etvà (asanam) 
22,28; (dibbasayanam) 61,16; grd. n. 
wetabbam (asanam) 82,19; pp. pañ- 
ūatta (g. v.). 

paūūāyati, vb. (pass. pajānāti) 
1) to be known or seen, to be visible, 
appear, look like; pr. 3. sg. «ati 


(maha hutva) 3,4; (nahāsobbho viya) | 


27,3; 3. pl. „anti (sfse me palitāni) 
46,23; — ?) to be, exist, be found; 
pr. 3. sg. „ati (raja) 10,30; fut. 8. 
sg. wissati (Jara, “old age must come") 
63,13. 

pafiava? (or paiiiavat) & pañ- 
iāvanta (or paiinavanta), mfn. (sa. 
prajüàvat) wise, intelligent; nom. m. 
e, Y& (-a-) 99,9; pl. m. ~anto (pakkhi) 
11,14; — gen. m. ~antassa, Dh. 111; 
gen. pl. ~antanam, 57,6. 

painasa(th), num. (sa. paiicāgat) 
50; n. a collection of DU suttas in the 
Majjhima-Nikaya; paniasaka, mfn, 
ie; palicagaka) divided into pañňāūsas 
as M. N.); vagga-paiiiiisakam (sad- 
dhammarh, acc.) according to vaggas 
and pannásas, 110,5. 

paūha, m. d n. (sa. praqna, m.) 
a question; nom. ~o (maya pucchita-?) 
88,11; acc. ~ar (puttho) 90,26; acc. 
pl. ~e (cattāro) 86,53; 2. kumara-® 
(v. h); *°-patibhana, x. (g. v.) cp. 
Milinda-?. 

pata, m. £ n. (= sa.) a sort of 
cloth, dress; *°-sini, f. a curtain, veil 
or screen of fine cloth, instr. wiya 
(parikkhepo pan’assa ~ ahosi) 37,3. 
cp. patta. 

patala, x, (= sa.) a layer, cover, 
membrane; a heap, mass; madhu-®, 
a honey-comb, 38,24 (nimmakkhika- 
madhupatala-sadisam). 

pati, indecl. (= pati, g. v.; sa. 
prati) prp. (w. acc., cp. pati-lomam, 
pati-vàtam) & prefix to verbs and 
nouns implying ‘towards, near to, 
against, back, in return’ efc,; it is also 
used distributively, esp. inserted in 


patiganhati 


dvandva comp. like vatta-pativatta 
(g. v. cp. anu). Before the vowels a, 
u, e, 0 it is always contracted to 
pacc- (v. above), which still some- 
times may be metrically equivalent to 
pati, Dh. 125 : pacceti == pati-eti. 

*patikujjeti, vb. (denom. fr. 
*patikujja, mfn. (sa. *prati-kubja) 
lying flat with the face downwards, 
Jat. I 456,26; V 145,27) to cover (acc., 
as a bowl or a dish); ger, wetvit 
(-pàtiyo) 61,97; cp. ukkujjati, nik- 
kujjati; Pischel, Gr. $ 206. 

*patikutati, ob. (sa. *prati + 
Vkut) to bow, bend (towards or back); 
pp. ~ita, bowing, m. ~o (patisakki) 
77,8; (cp. Mil. 297,15 : patikutati). 

patikkamati, vb. (sa. prati- 
Vkram) to retire, turn back; imp. 8. 
sg. matu, 76,25; aor. 3. sg. mami, 
29,26. 62,20; ger. a-patikkamitva, 30,5; 
pp. m. patikkanto (pindapata-®, g. 
v.) 86,6. 

patikkūla (% patikūla) mfn. (sa. 
pratikula) ‘against the bank’, contrary, 
disagreeable; instr. n. wena (a-sucinā) 
62,25. The form with ‘kk’ relates to 
sa. *pratī-kūla, cp. Kuhn, Beitr. 
p. 19, d. 

*patikkosati, vb. (sa. prati- 
Vkrug). to contradict, reject (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. eati (sasana) arahatam) 
Dh. 164. 

patikkhipati, vb. (sa. prati- 
Vkship) to refuse, reject, repulse; ger. 
„itvā, 46,15; pp. patikkhitta, f. wa 
(pi puna nibandhi) 54,1. cp. next. 

*patikkhipana, %. (cp. sa. pra- 
tikshepana) refusing, rejection; nom. 
wan, 56,95. - 

*patigacca, indecl., only in the 
phrase patigacc’eva, previously. 67,26 
(i. e. “sooner than usual"); patigacca 
(ger.) derives from sa. pratikaroti 
(Vkr; the Birman spelling is often 
patikacc’eva) == ‘to provide against 
future events’, Tr. Mil. p. 421—22. 

patiganhati (& -ganhati), vb. 
(sa. prati-/grah) to take, receive, 
accept (dec.); pr. 3. pl. „anti (pati-0, 


patiggahana 


C; pati-? B.) Dh. 220; imp. 3. sg. 
„ātu (accayam accayato, v. accaya 
75,25; pot. 3. sg. ~eyya eiiis 
68,55; ger. patiggahetva (with the 'g' 
doubled before the weak form of the 
root) 82,21. 109,24; grd. n. ~ggahe- 
tabbam, 82,24. cp. next. 

patiggahana, x. (sa. pratigra- 
hana) accepting; abl. nā (jātarūpa- 
rajata-°) 81,26. 

paticodeti, vb. (sa. prati-/cud, 
caus. ~codayati) to exhort, admonish, 
reprove (acc.); imp. 2. pl. «etha 
(manusse) 73,86. 
A paticca, prp. (orig. ger. from 
prati-Vi) resulting from, depending 
on, on account of (w, acc.); kim ~, 
94,55; isam [etc.].. paticca . . ratho 
ti .. nāmam pavattati, “the word 
‘ratha’ is but a name for pole" [etc.] 
98,22. — °-samuppada, m. ‘origination 
by dependence’, the Buddhist chain of 
causation, or the formula explaining 
the twelve causes of existence, begin- 
ning with a-vijjā (v. 66,6 efc.); acc. 
~ar, 66,5. cp. paccaya. 

paticchati, vb. (sa. prati-yish) 
to take, receive (acc.); inf. «itum 
(etam, amsena, v. amsa) 24,25; caus. 
v. paticchāpeti. 

paticchanna, mfn. (pp. pati 
cehādeti; sa. praticchanna) covered, 
hidden, concealed; protected; %. wath, 
what has been hidden, 69,16; loc. ne 
(thane, a secluded or private place) 
33,34; paticchanna-tthane, 36,14. 64,13; 
a-ppaticchanna, su-paticchanna, mfn. 
(v. h.). 

paticchadeti, vb. (sa. prati- 
ychad, wcchadayati) to cover, con- 
ceal (acc.), to hid or cover one’s self; 
part. instr. m. ~entena (timandalam) 
82,27; fut. 1. pl. „.essāma (-papa- 
kammam) 78,27; ger. ~etva (rohita- 
macche vàlikaya) 14,24; 20,10. 83,82. 

*patiechapeti, vb. (caus. IT. pati- 
cchati) to deliver over, to charge with, 
intrust to (w. double acc.); ger. wetva 
(brahmanith sukapotake, “leaving his 
' wife in charge of the young parrots”) 


152 


9,14; (rājānam rajjam) 42,5. 47,31; 
(amacce rajjam) 43,11. 

patijaggati, vb. (sa. prati-yjagr) 
to watch over, take care of, look atter; 
to feed (acc.); intr, to be awake, be 
watchful; pr. 3. pl. „anti (uyyānam) 
37,15; part. med, f. ~mana, 20,10; pot. 
3, sg. ~weyya, Dh. 157 (intr.); aor. 
3. sg. patijaggi, 9,10; 3. pl. „imsu 
(tam, phalaphalena) 18,15. — caus. II. 
*patijaggapeti, to cause to be carefully 
tended (or fed; acc.); aor. 3. sg. nesi 
(gandhodakehi ambar) 88,4. cp. next. 

patijaggana, w. (sa. pratijāga- 
rana) watching over, attending to; 
*sarira-°, n. care of the body (washing 
one's self, etc., cp. sa. garīra-cintā) 
acc. eam (katvā) 85,1. 

*patijānāpeti, vb. (caus. pati- 
jānāti, sa. prati-yjiia) to cause to 
consent (promise or believe, acc.); 
ger. ~etva (rajànam, “make him be- 
lieve it") 46,24 (cp. Dhpd. (1855) p. 
164,2 fr.b.). 

patina, f. (sa. pratijiia) promise, 
agreement; acc. ~ar, 8,5. 

patidanda, m. (sa. prati-danda, 
mfn.) retribution; pl, mā (“blows for 
blows") Dh. 133. 

patinivattati, vb. (sa. prati-ni- 
Vvrt) to return; aor. 3. sg. wvatti, 
63,5; ger. ~witva, 63,11. 

patinivasana, m. (sa. pratinivā- 
sana) a kind of garment, a second 
under-garment (used only as a house- 
dress); acc. ~am, 82,4 (cp. SBE. 
XIII, p. 155). 

patinissagga, m. (sa. prati-nih- 
sarga) giving up, abandonment, doing 
away with; nom. ~o (tanhaya) 67,16; 
abl. ~a, 94,12; üdana-9, m. (g. v.). 

patipajjati, vb. (sa. prati-y pad, 
evpadyate) !) to go to, arrive at, reach; 
to walk on a path (acc.); aor. 3. sg. 
~pajji (tam eva maggarn) 56,2; 76,17; 
imp. 2. pl. ~atha (etan maggam) Dh. 
274; pp. m.patipanno (imam raccham) 
76,5; m. pl. nā, Dh. 275. — 2) to 
undertake, take upon one's self (acc.); 
imp. 2. sg. patipajja (rajjam) 45,6. — 


153 


5) to proceed or deal with (Yoc.); to 
behave; ger. witva (bhatte pi tath’ eva) 
57,27; grd. n. witabbam (kathai nu 
kho maya ~, “now what am [ to 
do?") 81,15. — caus. patipādeti (q. v.) 
ep. next, 

patipada, f. (sa. pratipada) the 
path to be walked; nom. ~ā (majjhimā, 
the middle path) 66,29; (dukkhaniro- 
dhagāminī, g. v.) 67,11; loc. «aya, 
79,18 (the right path, the right course 
of conduct, synon. w. magga (?) or 
— the first steps on the right path (?)). 

patipanna, mfn. (pp. prati-ypad) 
v. patipajjati. | 

*patipàti, f. (sa. *prati-pati, cp. 
paripati) order, row; instr. (or loc.) 
„iyā, "in a row”, 34,32. 

*patipada(ka), m. (sa. *prati- 
pada) that which supports the bed- 
stead; maica-patipadakà, pl. (“sup- 
porters of the bed”) 84,14. 

patipadeti, vb. (caus. patipajjati, 
sa. pratipadayati) to cause one (acc.) 
to go on a road or in a certain direc- 
tion (acc.); imp. 2. pl. „etha (ha- 
tthim, imam raccham) 76,14; aor. 3. 
pl. vesum, 76,19. 

*patipuggala, m. (sa. *prati- 
pudgala) one who is equal to another, 
a rival; a-ppatipuggala, mfn. unequal- 
led, 80,24. . 

patipucchati, vb. (sa. prati- 
yprach) to inquire, ask in return 
(acc.); fut. 1. sg. ~issaimi (tam yeva) 
94,28; imf. «itum (Bhagavantam) 
19,20. 

*patippassambhati, vb. (sa. 
*prati-pra-ygrambh) to cease, to be 
dissolved or dispersed; caus. ~eti, to 
cause to cease, put an end to (acc.); 
pot. 1. sg. «eyyam (iddhabhisam- 
khārarn) 69,29; aor. 3. sg. esi, 69,30. 

patibaddha. mfn. (sa. prati- 
baddha, pp. prati-y/bandh) bound to; 
O-eitta, mfn. whose mind is turned to, 
fallen in love (with /oc.), m. ~o (mayi) 
64,26; pl. nā (aññamaññam) 19,4; 
— *%-mana, mfn. whose mind is bound, 
M. 0, Dh. 284. 


patiyādeti 


patibala, mfn. (sa. pratibala) 
able to (inf.), competent; m. pl. «à, 
16,1; m. instr. wena (bhikkhuna) 
81,16. 

*patibaheti, vb. (caus. *pati- 
bahati; sa. prati-y/vrh, cp. prati- 
Vbādh) to repel, dislodge (acc.); grd. 
m. pl. «etabbà (navà bhikkhü; 
üsanena, with regard to their seats) 
83,34. 

patibujjhati, vb. (sa. prati- 
ybudh) to awake; ger. witva, 67,28. 

*patibhaga, mfn. (sa. *prati- 
bhāga) like, equal to; m. pendant, 
counterpart; Eravana-", mfn. equal 
to E., gen. m. nassa, 45,31; kaiicana- 
rupaka-°, mfn. like a golden statue, 
gen. pl. wanam, 47,14. 

patibhana, n. (sa. pratibhana) 
intelligence, sagacity, presence of mind, 
readiness of speech; *patiha-°, n. a 
difficult or intricate question, pl. ~ ani, 
98,33. 

patibhanavat, mfn. (sa. prati- 
bhānavat) endowed with intelligence 
& presence of mind, quick-witted; m. ` 
„vā (Vaiigiso) 109,8, 

patimandita, mfn. (sa. prati- 
mandita) decorated, adorned; f. pl. 
~ā (sabbalamküra-?) 64,29. 

*patimasati, vb. (sa. *prati- 
ymre, Cp. pari-ymrç) to examine, 
explore; pot. 2. (3.) sg. (?) patimase 
(sa.*prati-marges `= Ymrges) Dh. 379; 
cp. Pischel, Gr. § 486 (samphase); 
Dhpd. (1855) p. 424; Childers & Ed. 
Müller take it for imp. 2. sg. from 
caus. *patimüseti (not yet traced in 
Pali). 

patimuiücati, vb. (sa. prati- 
Vmuc) to put on (clothes, acc.); to 
tie; ger. witva (ganthikam) 83,1. 

patiyatta, mfn. (pp. prati-y yat, 
cp. next) made ready, prepared ; adorned, 
decorated; x. „am (sūkaramaddavam) 
78,8; alamkata-°, mfn. splendidly 
dressed $or decorated), acc. m. d m. 
~an, 39,29. 61,8, 65,9; f. pl. wa, 21,1. 

patiyādeti, vb. (caus. prati- 
Vyat, pratiyātayati) to prepare, make 


patilabhati 


ready (acc.); ger. ~etva (bhojaniyam 
22,28; grd. n. ~etabbam Merida 
83,25; — caus. IT. *patiyadapeti, to 
cause to be prepared (acc.); ger. 
e etvàa, 78,3. 

patilabhati, vb. (sa. prati- 
Vlabh) ') to receive back, recover 
(acc.); aor. 1. sg. ~labhim (nattham 
yasamh) 42,12; — ?) to take, form (as 
a dislike, or a resolution); pr. 3. sg. 
„ati (papakam ditthigatam) 90,25. 
cp. next, 

patilabha, m. (sa. pratilābha) 
recovering, obtaining, attainment; 
nom. ~o (paiiiiaya) Dh. 333; jivita-°, 
42,10; manussa-" (the conception of 
men) Dh. 182. 

patilomam, adv. (sa. prati-loma) 
"against the hairs’, contrarily, obsti- 
nately; in reverse order, backwards; 
anuloma-°, 66,6 (v. À.). 

pativacana, n. (sa. prativacana) 
answer; acc, eam (alabhanto) 3,7; 
18,4. | 

pativatta, v. vatta! 

pativatteti, vb. (caus. prati- 
yvrt) to overturn, subvert; inf. etur, 
110,10; grd. pativattiya, v. a-ppati- 
vattiya, mfn. 

pativadati, vb. (sa. prati-/vad) 
to answer, reply; pot. 3. pl. weyyu 
(tarh, ‘will answer thee in the same 
way’) Dh. 133. 

pativasati, vb. (sa. prati-yvas) 
to live, dwell; pr. 3. pl. anti, 59,24. 
_ pativatam, adv. (sa. prativātam) 
against the wind; „am (khitto) Dh. 
125; ~am (eti) Dh. 54. 

pativedeti, vb. (caus. prati-y vid) 
to make known, announce; wor, 3. sg. 
„esi (Bodhisattassa) 63,5. 

patisamyutta, mfn. (sa. prati- 
sam-yukta) connected with, concerning; 
resulting from; instr. f. «aya (nib- 
bàna-?) 71,22; acc. m. „arh (vacīsu- 
carita-°) 86,s 

patisamvedin, mfn. (ga. prati- 
samvedin) feeling, experiencing; nom. 
m. ~i (vimutti-sukha-°, “experiencing 
the bliss of emancipation”) 66,4. 


154 


patisakkati, vb. (sa. prati-\/srp) 
to go back, retire; aor. 3. sg. pati- 
sakki, 77,8. 

patisattu, m. (sa. prati-çatru) 
an enemy, adversary; acc, „um, 
39,27. 

*patisanthara, m. (sa. *prati- 
samstara, str) friendly greeting, 
conversation; acc. wath (karonti) 
21,7; 28,11. — %-vutti, mfn. (sa. *°-vrtti) 
friendly, kind; %-vutt'assa (varr. °-vu- 
ttyassa, -vuttissa) “let him live in 
charity”, Dh. 376. 

patisandahati, vb. (sa. prati- 
sam-ydhā) to be re-born (into a new 
existence); pr. 3. sg. „ati, 100,2-5; 
pot. 3. sg. ~weyya, 100,9. cp. sanda- 
hati £ neat. 

patisandhi, m. £ f. (sa. prati- 
samdhi, m.) re-birth, transmigration ; 
acc. eim (ganhi) 5,25; 42,22; loc. 
eismim, 101,12. 

*patisambhidā, f. (cp. sa. prati- 
samvid, f.) analytical science; loc. wii 
(i. e. ^ aya) 109,10; patta-°, adj. pl. 
m., possessed of analytical knowledge, 
109,20. The four patisambhidūs are : 
attha-2, dhamma-?, nirutti-) pati 
bhana-9, ¿ e. expertness in the Bud- 
dhist theory and practice, etymology, 
and dialectics, Mil. 339,7-s; cp. Chil- 
derg sub voce. 

patisammodati, vb. (sa. prati- 
sam-y mud) to exchange friendly greet- 
ings, to return one's greeting; aor. 3. 
8g. «modi, 96,27. 

patisameti, vb. (caus. prati- 
Vgam) to arrange, put in order; to 
put by, keep safe, lay away (acc.); 
grd. n. ~etabbam, 82,22. 

patisun&ti, vb. (sa. prati-yeru) 
to promise, assent (gem.); aor. 3. sg. 
paccassosi (Bhagavato), 77,18; 3. pl. 
eosum (Devadattassa) 76,15; ger. °) 
patissutvā, 78,10-18; P) patisunitvā 
(sadhu'ti) 16,26. 63,3; pp. n. patisu- 
tam (tumhehi mayham sahassam) 
22,31. 

patisedha, m. (sa. pratishedha) 
prohibition, denial; Joc. ~e (nipāto, 


155 


*mā”ti, a particle implying prohibi- 
tion) 85,33. 

patisedhana, x. (sa. pratishe- 
dhana) warding off, warning against; 
phala-patisedhana-mukhena pi hetum 
eva patisedheti, by warning against 
the results he even warns against the 
cause, 86,4. 

patisedheti, vb. (caus. prati- 
Vsidh) to prevent, prohibit, warn 
against (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (hetu) 
86,4. cp. patisedha, ~sedhana. 

patisevati (& patisevati, q.v.) 
tb. (sa. prati-V/sev) to practise, pursue; 
feel, undergo, suffer (acc.); pr. 8. sg. 
eati (vipakam) Dh. 67. 

patissutva, ger. v. patisunati. 

patihaüiüati, ob. (pass. pati- 
hanti, sa. prati-/han) to knock to- 
gether, strike against (loc.); ger. ~itva 
(vemakotiyam), 89.6. 

patta, m. (== sa.) !) a tablet or 
plate (of gold etc. for writing or pain- 
ting upon); kaíicana -patta-sadisa, 
mfn. 46,51 (g. v.) — *) a strip or slip 
of cloth (cp. pata); sumana-patta- 
vitāna, mn. 65,18 (g. v.). 

pattana. n. (sa. pattana & pattana) 
a port, seaport; acc. «am (Bharu- 
kaccha-°) 25,12; *°-giima, m. a sea- 
port-town, ^0, 24,10. 

patthána, x. (sa. prasthana) 
1) origin, cause; *sati-patthāna, x. 
(v. h.) — ?) nom. pr. name of the 
seventh (last) book (pakarana) of 
Abhidhammapitaka, also called Maha- 
pakarana, 102,11. 

patthāya, prp. (ger. patitthati, 
sa. prasthaya) beginning from, from 
(w. abl.); *) dvāra-gāmato p., 19,35; 
. Sisato p. 57,29; mūlato p., 62,10; 
galato p., 85,30; — ") pathamakappi- 
kato p., 4,10; tassa nikkhanta-kālato 
p., 9,15; dhammadesanam suta-diva- 
sato p., 86,30; ito p., henceforth, 6,16; 
ito dani p., id. 39,2; tato p., thence- 
forth, 6,18. 

pathama, mfn. (sa. prathama) 
1) foremost, first, former (cp. purima); 
f. mā (senā) 103,25; acc. f. ~am 


pandicca 


(gātham) 8,26; pathama-jjhana, n. 
80,3 (opp. dutiya etc.); pathama- 
kappa & -kappika (v. %.); pathama- 
galutà (m. pl.) “others already caught”, 
2111-19; — acc. n. eam (adv.) at first, 
for the first time, 4,19. 12,19. 15,9. 
18,22. 69,21. 102,14. Dh. 158; ~am 
eva (opp. pacchá) 35,36; 102,11 (first 
of all). — *) comp. — just, newly; 
*pathamābhisambuddha, mfn. having 
just attained Buddhaship, m. ~o, 66,3; 
*pathamuggata, mfn., newly-blown, 
m. ~o (kaļīro) 47,9. 

pathamaka, mfn. (sa. pratha- 
maka) === prec.; %-bhāņavāra, w. (v. 
h.) Dh. I-XIV. 

pathamataram, adv. (sa. pra- 
thamataram) before, first (of two) 
83,5 — 844-1. 

pathavi (or pathavi [puthuvi, 
eAvi]), f. (sa. prthivi) the earth; ace. 
wim (maddanto) 28,4; „ii (adhi- 
sessati) 107,5 — Dh. 41; gem. (or 
loc.) wiya, Dh. 178 (pathavyā); pa- 
thavi-tale (on dry land) 28,7; *pa- 
thavi-tthita, mfn. living on the earth, 
m. pl. mā (earthly beings) 110,11; 
*pathavi-sama, mfn. like the earth, 
m. ~0, Dh. 95. 

panāmeti, vb. (caus. pra-/nam) 
to bend forwards, stretch out (acc.); 
ger. ~etva (aüjali) 74,20. 

panihita, mfn. (sa. pra-nihita, 
pp. pra-ni-Vdhā) laid on, applied; 
miecháü-9, mfn. wrongly directed, n. 
~am (cittam), Dh. 42; samma-°, 
mfn. well-directed, Dh. 43. 

panita, mfn. (pp. paneti sa. 
pranita) ‘performed, finished’; excellent; 
M. ~o (dhammo) 94,5; n. «am 
(khadaniyam) 78,. 

paneti (& paneti), vb. (sa. pra- 
Vnī) ‘to lead to’, perform, execute, 
apply (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (dandatin 
PCR Dh. 310; pp. panita 
v. h.). 

pandara, mfn. (sa. pandara) 
white, pale; instr. pl. n. «ehi (-ke- 
sehi) 47,15. 

pandieca, x, (sa. panditya) erudi- 


pandita 
tion; cleverness, skill; xstr. «ena, 
91,26. 

pandita, mfn. (= sa.) wise, in- 


telligent, clever; m. ~O, 57,95; gen. 
~assa, 24,22; m. pl. mā, 9,29; (w. 
loc. appamadamhi) Dh. 22; f. nā, 
56,8; often e. c. : sasa-pandito, 14,19; 
Supparaka-°, 25,4; Upali-°, 109,7; 
— *dovarika, m. 91,23 (g.v.); *-bhāva, 
m. cleverness, skill, gen. ~wassa, 91,24; 
%mitnin, mfn. one who thinks him- 
self wise, m. ~1 (balo) Dh. 63; *°-vagga, 
m. the sixth chapter of Dh.; *%-veda- 
niya, mfn. “intelligible only to the 
wise", m. „0 (dhammo) 94,26; *°-sarh- 
sagga, m. company or intercourse with 
wise men, gen. sassa, 29,8. 
pandu, mfn. (su. pāndu) yellow, 
pale, white; °-kambala, m. a white 
woollen blanket : ?-silasanam, 15,8 (v. 
h.); °-palasa, m. a withered leaf, nom. 
~0, Dh. 235; °-roga, m. jaundice : 
C-tàpaso, m. 35,4, *°-dhatuka, mfn. 
suffering from jaundice, 35,16. 
panna, %. (sa. parna) !)a leaf 
(esp. betel leaf); acc. pl. nāni, 17,21; 
nimba-panna-®, 37,22 (q. v.) ; *0-sanna, 
f. a mark of leaves (tied up in order 
to indicate the boundary of a field), 
acc, ~am, 8,; “panna-bandhana- 
sañña, n. (= panna-saifia-bandhana?) 
tying up leaves, nom. ~am, 8,9; panna- 
sala, f. a hut of leaves and grass, 
hermitage, acc. main (aditta-9) 44,30; 
loc. māja (by the hut) 35,11; acc. pl. 
e, 34,33, Satta-°, nom. pr. (v. h.). 
— ?) a leaf for writing upon, a letter; 
a bond, deed of gift, donation; acc. 
~am (pāhesi) 36,2» (cp. next). — ?) 
a feather, wing (only e. c.) v. supanna. 
*pannak&ra, m. a present, dona- 
tion; acc. ~am, 58,21-24; acc. pl. ne, 
58,22, cp. panna °) & ākāra. 
Patanjali, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. 
of a philosopher (propounder of the 
Yoga philosophy); v. Pataijali-. 
patati, vb. (sa. \/pat) to,fly, jump, 
fall; to fall down (upon, loc. or acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. mati (dipake) 2,5; 1. sg. 
„āmi (yamh'okase thatvā orapāram 


156 


patam’aham, standing where I use to 
jump over, cp. oraparam) 108,26; 
part, m. „anto (navaya) 20,1; loc. 
f. wantiya (asaniyā) 39,10; part. med. 
samana, loc. n. «ve (pitthiyam pahā- 
rasate) 55,12; — fut. 3. sg. wissati, 
53,26; 112,20 (tesa kaye, acc. pl.); 
1. sg. „vissāmi (afigaragabbhe) 15,35; 
— aor. 3. sg. pati, 16,7. 89,6; (tassa 
hatthe, fell to bis share) 23,12; 3. pl. 
~imsu (poured down) 83,6; — perf. 
3. sg. papāta (kālam katvā) 89,s 
[but here the reading of the Colombo 
edition : papatā, aor. 3, sg. (from 
papatati, g. v.) undoubtedly ought 
to be preferred, because this formation 
is generally found elsewhere, e. g. 
Jat. VI, 566, (= patita); Vin. II, 
17,23 (cp. I], 126,3)]; — ger. ~witvii, 
13,20. 49,5. 89,5; — pp. „vita, f. nā 
(asani), 17,22; acc. m. eu (cāpāto 
saram, “sent from the bow") Dh. 
320; — caus. pāteti (g. v.) cp. patana, 
pata. 

patana, w. (== sa.) falling, ruin; 
*0-akara-ppatta, mfn. being on the 
point of falling out, m. pl. x ā (dantā) 
12,21; x. pl. „āni (akkhīni) 50,19; 
— geha-?, 19,16 (q. v.). 

pataka (& patākā), f. (— sa.) 
a flag, banner; dhaja-patakadihi, 
62,7 (cp. adi). 

patil, m. (= sa.) husband; lord, 
master; nom. ~i, 31,34. 64,15; comp. v. 
gavampati, gahapati, Sahampati. 

pati?, indecl. (sa. prati) !) prp. 
w. acc., near to, towards; nadir 
Neraūjaram ~, 103,2; ?) prefix to 
verbs % nouns, generally spelt pati- 
(g. v.) cp. next ete. 

patikāra, m. (sa. pratikara) re- 
ward, return, retribution; *a-ppati- 
karaka, mfn. (g. v.). 

patitthati, vb. (sa. pra-ysthā) 
to depart from, originate; ger. pa- 
tthāya (prp. w. abl.) v. h.; caus. pa- 
tthapeti, to set forth, propound, ex- 
plain; cp. patthana, x. 

patitthahati & patitthati, 
vb. (sa. prati-ysthà) to stand firm, 


157 


to be established; aor. 3. sg. ~tthahi 
(sotāpattiphale) 89,5; (sakadāgāmi- 
phale) 29,17; 1. sg. ~tthahim (para- 
kule) 108,29; — fut. 3. sg. *) a ttha- 
hissati, 87,3; >) ~tthissati (Laūkāyarn 
mama sasanam) 110,21; — ger. wtthaya 
(sile, “standing fast in moral practice”) 
14,18; (rajje, “became king”) 42,26; 
— pp. vtthita, m. <o, 38,11 (rajje), 
61,31 (gabbho kucchimhi), 95,24 (sire, 
“standing in its strength”); 
tthita, mfn. (g. v.) — caus. patittha- 
peti, to set or lay down, establish 
(acc.); aor. 3. sg. «esi (phalitam 
rañño pánimhi) 44,7; ger. netvā, 
22,9. 29,0; (rājānam paiicasu silesu) 
7,24; 17,32. 59,22. 

patittha, f. (sa. pratishtha) +) 
resting-place, support; acc. eam (la- 
bhitvā, to get footing) 28,13-16; — 
2) security, refuge; nom. nā, 28,5. 

patidissati, vb. (pass. patipas- 
sati; sa. prati-ydrg) to appear (as), 
to look like; pr. 3. sg. eati (yathà 
aggiva suriyo va) 26,5 etc. 

patimāneti, vb. (sa. prati-/man, 
caus.) to honour; to await, wait for 
(acc.) ; part. f. ~enti (tassigamanam) 
22,28. 

patirupa, mfx. (sa. pratirūpa) 
like, similar; suitable, fit; doc. n. ~e 
(“what is proper") Dh. 158. 

patisevati (& patisevati, g. 
v.) vb. (sa. prati- sev) to practise, pur- 
sue (acc.) ; part. m. ~anto (methuna- 
dhammam, making love) 54,11; aor. 3. 
sg. „sevi (asaddhammaih, id.) 52,2. 

*patissata, mfn. (sa. *prati- 
smrta) recollecting, thoughtful; m, pl. 
wa, Dh. 144. 

patissaya, m. ') (sa. pratigraya) 
refuge, house; **) (sa. pragraya) obe- 
dience, respect; v. next. 

patissava, m. (sa. pratigrava, 
Vgru) obedience, respect; *a-ppatisava, 
mfn. (also spelt a-ppatissaya and some- 
times shortened to a-ppatissa) dis- 
respectful; hence *a-ppatissavāsa, m. 
anarchy, 10,31. | 

patita, mfn. (sa. pratita, pp. 


su-pati-: 


patti 


prati-yi) pleased, glad; m. wo (synon. 
sumano) Dh. 68. 

patoda, m. (sa. pratoda) a goad; 
cp. °-patodaih (n., “pole, axle [ete.] 
and goad unitedly") 98,7; C-latthi, 
f. (sa. pratoda-yashti) “the goading- 
stick", 98,6. 

patta', ». (sa. pattra) a wing, 
feather; a leaf; karavira-°, n. (g. v.), 
instr. pl. ~ehi (vajtam, kandar) 
92,19; kumuda-patta-vanna, mfn. (v. 
h.); pokkhara-9, n. a lotus leaf, loc. 
we, Dh, 401, 

patta?, m. (sa. patra, n.) a vessel, 
pot, bowl, esp. the alms-bowl of a 
Buddhist monk; nom. ~o, 82,26; acc. 
eam, 87,18; (imam) 104,6; instr. 
wena, 62,2; — *-civara, m. bowl 
and robe, 76,16. 83,7; — *°-pariya- 
panna, x. (v. h.). 

patta?, mfn. (pp. pāpuņāti; sa. 
prāpta) 4) pass. attained, reached, 
acquired; *) act. one who has attained 
to, reached, etc. (w. acc. or e. c., also 
used as finite tense); m. «o (jātik- 
khayam) Dh. 423; patto si nibbanam, 
Dh. 134; f. <š (Khuramala-sam- 
uddam) 25,22; x. ~ai (vināsaai) 
34,9; tuyham pattam (pass, “the 
consequences of your own fortune") 
6,35; gen. m. „ass (uttamavedanan) 
108,23; acc. pl. m. patte (jivitakkha- 
yam) 34,; — comp. (mfn.) apaneta- 
bbākāra-ppatta, 45,1; jara-9 47,15 
(v. jarā); danda-°, 100,15; dukkha-", 
59,10; domanassa-/, 13,6; patanā- 
kara-°, 12,21; bala-9, 80,25; rūpa-', 
64,0; rūpagga-!, 49,12; labhagga- 
yasagga-9, 18,16; vajjha-°, 40,14; 
vaya-°, 8,15; vara-°, 6,27; vesirajja-°, 
69,15; vyasana-°, 8,30; samvega-°, 
53,11; santasa-°, 86,19; somanassa-°, 
15,9; hattha-°, 67,0; — *patta- 
dhamma, mfn. having mastered the 
truth”, m. <o, 69,12; *°-patisambhida, 
109,20 (v. h.); a-ppatta, mfn. (g. v.). 

pattia f. (sa. prapti) acquiring, 
gain; share, part, portion; acc. «im 
(attana ... bhāvita-bhāvanāya, etassa 
dammi) 29,5; dat. ~iya (yogakkhe- 


patthaddha 


massa, “for the sake of acquiring’’) 
108,5. 
patthaddha, mfn. (sa. prastab- 
dha) stark, stiff (as a pillar); instr. 
m. «ena (kayena) 75,17. 
patthayati, vb. (sa. prarthayate) 
to wish, desire (acc.); pr. 2. sg. „asi 
(atha ce «asi, if you like) 104,22 
etc.; part. med. m. wmiino (tava 
hadayamamsam) 3,13; pl. „mānā 
(vaddhim) “seeking gain”, 34,18. 
pattharati, vb. (sa. pra-ystr) 
to spread, extend (trans. £ intr., w. 
acc); ger. witva (sakalanagaram, 
"through the whole town") 65,24. 
patva, ger., v. pāpunāti. 
patha (or pantha, g. v.), m. (= 
sa.) road, path, way; loc. we, 31,34; 
maha-° (“on the highway") Dh. 58; 
comp. v. *anupariyaya-°, adicca-°, 
kamma-?, thala-jala-°, *dvedhā-0, 
nakkhatta-°, sagga-°, *hattha-°. cp. 
pada, palipatha, patheyya. 
pathavi, f. (— pathavī, g. v.) 
the earth; gen. ~vyia, Dh. 178. 
pada, m. £ n. (= sa., cp. pada) 
1) foot; v. catuppada, m., dipada, m. 
— *) step, footstep, trace, track; acc. 
eam (vaiiceti, g. v.) 12,30; uttinna-®, 
111,17 (v. h.); pada padam (abl. d acc.) 
“step by step", 104,11; instr, wena 
(kena, “by what track”) Dh. 179; 
*0_valaiija, m. footprint, acc. «ai, 
11,28. — *) way, path; position, stand- 
point; place, abode, home; mom. (n.) 
am (maccuno) Dh. 21; Dh. 93. 
254; acc. „arh (santam = Nibbāna) 
Dh. 368 = amatam padam, Dh. 114, 
cp. amata-pada (v. a-mata) & a-pada, 
mfn.; assama-', n., jana-9, m., sagga-°, 
n. (cp. sagga-patha) g. v. — *) a word, 
verse (or quarter of a verse), sentence; 
n. idam ~am, 85,9; acc. ~ar (dub- 
bhāsitam) 110,12; m. pl. ~a (caturo, 
saccinam ¿ e. cattāri ariyasaccāni) 
Dh. 273; attha-°, n. (v. h.); *gātha-', 
n. (v. gāthā); *dhamma-*, ng nirutti- 
pada-kovida, mfn., *sampuņna-0, 
mfn., sikkha-°, n. (v. h.). 
padakkhina, mfn. (sa. pradak- 


158 


shina) 'moving to the right'; clever, 
good, auspicious; wath, indecl. (constr. 
w. karoti, to walk round persons or 
objects, keeping the right side towards 
them as token of respect, to salute 
respectfully (acc.); to go round (a 
city, acc.) in procession; «ami katva 
(matu sayanam) 61,21; (Bhagavantam 
abhivādetvā) 70,2; ~arn kurumā- 
nassa (nagaram) 64,12; wath akāsi 
(do.) 45,3. 

padadāti, v. padeti. 

padara, mn. (sa. pradara) ') m. 
‘splitting’, a cleft (in the earth); — 
2), a piece of wood, a plank; nom. 
pl. e. Ani, 28,30. 

padeti (padati & padadati) vb. 
(sa. pra-\/da) to give away (acc.); 
fut. 3. sg. padassati (uttamattham 
bhariya) 54,29. 

padipa, m. (sa. pradipa) a lamp, 
light; nom. ~o, 99,22; 101,5; ace. 
~am, 99,18; °-aggi, m. & tela-°, m. 
v. h.). 

padipeti, eb. (caus. sa. pra-di- 
payati) to light, kindle (acc.); pot. 
3. sg. ~eyya (padipam) 99,18; pp. 
padipita, mfn. burning, shining; m. 
„0 (sabbarattim) 99,21. 
paduttha, mfn. (sa. pradushta) 
corrupt, wicked, malignant; instr. 
wena (manasa) Dh. 1 (opp. pasanna); 
a-ppaduttha, mfn. (g. v.) cp. dussati. 
*padubbhati, vb. (sa. *pra- 
vdruh) to do wrong, offend, commit 
treachery; ger. ~itvā (antopure) 38,17 
(cp. dubbhati). 

paduma, x. (& m.) (sa. padma) 
a lotus; nom. «am (hutvā) like a 
lotus, 23,31; 23,34; acc. ~ar (seta-°; 
a white lotus) 61,19; paiica-vanna-" 
(of five different colours) 4,9; *°-punja, 
m. a cluster of lotuses, loc. ne, 16,6; 
0-sara, mn. a lotus-lake, acc. ~am, 
3,30. 

padesa, m. (sa. pradega) !) spot, 
place, region, district; nom. ~o (ja- 
gati-ppadeso) Dh. 127; ace. ~am, 
43,18. Dh. 303; Joc. we, 22,4; (Hi 
mavanta-") 1,3. 13,9; — ?) extent, 


159 


distance; loc. ~e (tigāvuta-ppamāne, 
yojana-ppamàne) 63,23-28; yathā- 
padese, ado. (cp. sa. yathā-pradegam) 
all over, at all sides, 47,1; — ?) posi- 
tion, rank, order (?); acc. ~am (jāti- 
gotta-kula-9, q. y 43,30; samāna- 
bal(&di)-9, mfn. having equal position 
with regard to military force ete., m. 
pl. nā, 43,31. cp. next. 

*padesika, mfn. (fr. prec.) ‘being 
in the region', in the neighbourhood 
of (only e. c.); solasa-vassa-°, mfn. 
about 16 years old, m. ~o, 38,10. 
cp. uddesika. 

padhāna, x. (sa. pradhāna, as 
to the meaning — sa. pra-ni-dhāna, 
cp. also buddh. sa. prahana) exertion, 
profound religious meditation; instr. 
wena (kim kāhasi, “what do you 
want with exertion?") 103,9; dat. 
«ūya, 103,10; *ukkutika-ppadhana, 
n. Dh. 141 (v. h.); *9-pahitatta, mfn. 
whose mind is intent upon meditation, 
ace, m. «am, 108,2; *°-sutta, n. nom. 
pr. of a chapter of Sutta-nipāta, p. 103 
—04; cp. Mahāpadhāna-ghara. 

pana, indecl. (the enclit. form of 
‘puna’, g. v.; sa. punar) !) now! well! 
(in the continuation of a tale) : 2,19; 
2,26 (tasmim ^ kale, “now, at that 
time"); 10,3 efc, — 2) but (adversative, 
often combined with other particles) : 
1,24. 4,12. 8,8 (the preceeding sentence 
negative); 5,5. 50,32. 65,25 ete. Dh. 
252. 292; ca pana (but) 7,35. 71,17; 
atha ca ~ (nevertheless) 3,4; na kho 
pana (but certainly not) 7,8. 9,31; 
eva pana (on the contrary) 5,10; 
corresponding with a preceeding eva 
(it is true, no doubt... but, cp. 
greek wey ... ôe): maranabhavam 
eva jànàmi [maranadivasam] pana 
na jānāmi, 88,22-23; sometimes repeated 
in both sentences : eva pana... pana 
na, 2,8; — va pana (or else) 81,17; cp. 
Dh. 42 (veriva pana = veri va 
pana’); — *) then! (in interrogative 
sentences, often expressive of surprise): 
kaham a, 1,26; kim <, 44,4; aguna 
pana kidisa, 44,5; katamo ~, 79,13; 


papatati 


in a second question : kim a, 89,25; 
ko ~ ettha N.. 97,31; after a negative 
sentence : kii ~ (how much less) 74,28. 
cp. Pischel, Gr. § 342. 

panasa, m. (= sa.) the bread- 
fruit tree; instr. pl. ~ehi, 2,10; amba- 
panasádihi, 2,20. 

panudati, vb. (sa. pra-ynud) to 
drive away (acc.); imp. 2. sg. panuda 
(kame) Dh. 383. 

paneti, vb., var. lect. for paneti, 
Dh. 310 (v. h.). 

panta, mfn. (sa. pranta) distant, 
secluded, solitary; n. ~am (sayanā- 
sanam, "sleeping and sitting alone”) 
Dh. 185. 

pantha, m. (=: patha; cp. sa. 
panthan) way, road; *-ghata, m. 
murder and robbery of highwaymen, 
brigandage; acc. ~am (karonti) 32,15. 

panna, mfn. (= sa., pp. ?-pajjati, 
Vpad) fallen, gone; *°-bhira, mfn. 
“who has put down his burden", acc. 


m. ^. Am, Dh. 402. 


pannarasa, num. (sometimes writ- 
ten pannarasa = paiicadasa, sa. 
pajicadaga) fifteen; „ma, mfn. the 
fifteenth, Dh. XV. 

papaiica, m. (sa. prapaiica) 
abundance, diffuseness, error, vanity ; 
this word may also often be translated 
by ‘detriment, decay; delay, omission, 
waste of time etc.; it is generally 
explained in the commentaries by 
tanha-ditthi-mana-°; —*9-ábhirata, 
mfn. “delighting in vanity", m. pl. nā, 
Dh. 254; *?-samatikkanta, mfn. “who 
has overcome the host of evils", acc. 
pl. m. ~e, Dh. 195. — *Papaica- 
sūdanī, f. nom. pr. of a commentary 
on Majjhima-nikāya by Buddhaghosa; 
Specimen p. 61. 

*papatikā, f. (rarely papatika) 
1) a splinter, piece, fragment; nom. 
eA (-t-) 76,1; — 7) the outer dry 
bark of a, tree, falling off in loose 
shreds; taca-?, 95,22-23 (v. h.). 

papatati, vb. (sa. pra-ypat) to 
fall off; pr. 3, pl. „anti (soka tamhā) 


papatika 


108,2; aor. 3. sg. papata (Ed. papata) 
89,8 (v. patati). 

*papatikà, f., v. papatika. 

papāta!, pf. (fr. patati, to be 
corrected to papata, 89,8) v. papatati. 

papāta*, m. (sa. prapata) a steep 
rock, precipice; «o. 27,7; loc. ne 
(Sineru-°) 59,26; ?-sadisa, mfn. like 
a wall, n. «am, 27,4. 

*papupphaka, x. (sa. *pra-push- 
paka) ‘flower-pointed’, pl. the flower- 
arrows of Mara; pl. acc. ~ani, Dh. 
46 (naš A6y.). 

pappotheti (or papphoteti). vb. 
(caus. pra-\/sphut) to beat, slap, shake 
(as clothes, in order to dust them, 
acc.); to flap the wings (acc.); ger. 
„etvā (pakkhe) 12,9. 

pappoti, vd., v. papunati. 

papphāsa, x. (sa. pupphusa, m. 
& phupphusa, n.) the lungs; mom. 
~am, 82,4. 97,21. 

*pabalha, mfn. (cp. sa. badha, 
ybamh) strong, sharp; f. nā (vyadhi) 
78,31; pl. ~a (vedanā) 78,24; acc. m. 
eam (abadharh) 78,30. 

pabujjhati, vb. (sa. pra-ybudh) 
to wake up, awake (intr.); pr. 3. pl. 
„anti, Dh. 296; fut. 3. sg. issāti, 
65,32; ger. witva, 36,1. 65,4. 89,6; 
pp. pabuddha, f. nā (devi, awoke) 
61,23. cp. su-pabuddhamh, adv. 

pabbaja, m. (= babbaja, sa. 
balbaja) a sort of coarse grass; *pab- 
baja, mfn. (= pabbaja-maya) made 
of grass (hemp), #. ~am (bandhanam) 
Dh. 345. cp. Weber, Ind. Str, HI, 394. 

pabbajati, vb. (sa. pra-yvraj) 
‘to go forth’, esp. to leave the world 
in order to become a hermit, or to 
enter the order of Buddhist monks; 
fut. 3. sg. ~issati (agārā nikkhamma) 
61,33; 63,16; inf. itum, 45,2; comp. 
wltu-kama, mfn. “bent on retiring 
from the world", acc. m. „am, 45,8; 
ger. š) pabbajja, 118,17; P) pabbajitva 
(w. acc. isi-pabbajjam) 34s». 45,13; 
64,4 (nikkhamma); 113,18; — pp. 
pabbajita (m.) g. v. — caus. pabbājeti 
(g. v.) ep. next & *duppabbaja. 


160 


pabbajana, w. (sa. pravrajana) 
passing over to a religious life; a- 
pabbajanatthaya, 47,5 (v. a-pabba- 
jana). 
pabbajita, m. (pp. pabbajati) 
a monk (or hermit); ~o, 63,32; Dh. 
184; acc. „am, 63,30; instr. wena, 
66,25; pl. wa, Dh. 74; guna, m. 
g. v.). 

pabbajjā, f. (sa. pravrajyā) re- 
tiring from the world, the ordination 
of a layman wishing to become a 
Buddhist monk; acc, ~am (labheyyā- 
ham) 70,15; (yācitvā) 89,15; (isi-®, 
g. v.) 84,32. 45,15; gen. (dat. & abl.) 
eAya (namitacitto) 46,18; (satim 
na karissati) 63,18; (cittam nami) 
65,12; (antarāyam, agārasmā ana- 
gariyam) 68,4; — '-kāraņa, n. & 
O-samaya, m. 45,9-12 (v. h.); laddha- 
pabbajjūpasampada, mfn. (v. upa- 
sampada). 

pabbata, m. (sa. parvata) a 
mountain, hill, rock; nom. ~o (Hi- 
mavanto) Db. 304; acc. ~am, 16,16; 
gen. ~wassa, "75,93; pl. ~wani (with 
neuter termination by attraction to the 
foll. vanāni (?) or adj. n. = sa. pār- 
vatāni (?)) Dh. 188; gen. pl. ~anam, 
Dh. 127; — *°-kuta, m. a mountain- 
peak, pl. nā, 75,36; — ""-pada. m. 
the foot of a mountain, ~o, 14,9; 
loc. ~e, 84,1; — *-rasa, m. "the 
essence of the mountain", acc. ~at, 
16,16; Rajata-°, Suvanna-9, m. nom. 
pr. (g. v.). 

pabbata-ttha, mfn. (sd. par- 
vata-stha) standing on a mountain; 
m. «0, Dh. 28 (opp. bhumattha). 

pabbajeti, vb. (caus. pabbajati; 
Sa. pravrajayati) 1) to send or drive 
away (acc.) (from, abl.); part. nom. 
m. ~ajayam (attano malam) Dh.388; 
aor. 3. sg. „esi (ratthā). — ?) to or- 
dain (acc.), admit to the Buddhist 
monastic order (through the pabbajja, 
g. v.); imp. 3. sg. ~etu (imam dā- 
rakam) 81,12. 

pabhamkara, m., v. pabhā. 

pabhaünguna (& pabhangu), mfn. 


161 


(sa. prabhajigura?) fragile, brittle; 
frail; n. ~ai (idam rūpai, var. 
wguram) 107,7 = Dh. 148; — *pa- 
bhanguna, x. subst. fragility; destroy- 
ing, destruction, „am (bhoganam) 
Dh. 139. 

pabhā, f. (sa. prabhā) light, 
splendour; instr. „āya, 85,7; — pa- 
bharhkara, m. (sa. prabhākara) ‘light- 
maker’, the sun; epithet of Buddha; 
„0 (Buddho dhammarājā) 19,1; — 
nippabha, mfn. (g. v.). 

pabhāta, mfn. (sa. prabhāta) 
begun to become light, loc. f. ~aya 
(rattiya) “at daybreak”, 42,1. — subst. 
n. === daybreak, morning. 

pabhaseti, vb. (caus. sa. pra- 
vbhās) to illuminate, enlighten (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. ~eti (sabbā disā; tassa 
pabhaya = attano pabhāya ?) 85,8; 
(imam lokam) Dh. 172. 

pabhinna, mfx. (sa. prabhinna, 
pp. pra-ybhid) ‘burst open’, flowing 
with juice, esp. m. said of an elephant 
in rut; *hatthi-prabhinna, m. a furious 
elephant, acc. wai, Dh. 326. cp. nezt. 

pabhedana, n. (sa. prabhedana, 
cp. prabheda) the flowing of juice 
from the temples of an elephant; *ka- 
tuka-pp9, mfn. Dh. 324 (v. h.). 

pamajjati!, eb. (sa. pra-/mad) 
to be careless, negligent, or idle; 
trans, to neglect (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
wati (na-pp?) Dh. 172. 259; pot. 3. 
sg. weyya (do.) Dh. 168; ger. nitvā, 
Dh. 172; aor. 2. sg. pamado (mà ~) 
77,5 (cp. Notes); Dh. 371; pp. pamatta 
(q. v.) cp. pamāda, m. 

pamajjati*, vb. (sa. pra-ymrj) 
to sweep, rub, scour, wipe off (acc.); 
to stroke (along with the hand); ger. 
„itvā (hatthena civaravamsam) 93,21; 
grd. n, ~itabbam (udakam gattato) 
84,3; f. ~a (bhitti) 84,20; m. pl. wa 
(-kannabhaga) 84,19. 

pamatta, mfn. (pp. pamajjati 1; 
sa, pramatta) careless, inattentive, 
negligent, thoughtless, indolent; m. 
~0, Dh. 19. 309; gen. «assa, 41,25; 
pl. nā, 77,5. Dh. 21; gen. pl. . ànam, 


pamuncati 


Dh. 292; *9-bandhu, m. "friend of 
the indolent” (4. e. Māra) 103,13 (voc.). 
— "O-oarin, mfn. (cp. sa. pramada- 
cārin) acting in a careless manner, 
gen. m. «ino, 107,39 = Dh, 334. — 
a-ppamatta, mfn. (g. v.). 

pamathita, mfn. (pp. pra-/math) 
agitated; *vitakka-°, mfn. (g. v.). 

pamana, n. (sa. pramana) mea- 
sure, size, extent, length, efc.; c. c. 
(mfn.) : equal in extent to; nom. war 
(n’atthi gacchantanam, “there was no 
end to them") 9,16; acc. war (attano, 
na janasi, “you don’t know your mea- 
sure’) 9,25; izstr. ~ena (tesa, in 
proportion to them) 57,1; comp. 
udaka-ppamana, 1. 3,3; pāsāna-", n. 
ib.; — assa-potaka-°, mfn., gala-?, 
mfn., ghata-°, mfn., tàvatiiisa-deva- 
loka-°, mfn., ti-gāvuta-', mfn. & yo- 
jana-°, mfn. (v. h.). 

pamāda, m. (sa. pramāda) neg- 
ligence, carelessness, indolence; nom. 


«O0 (maccuno padari) Dh. 21; ~o 


rajo sabbadā, ~ânupatito rajo, indo- 
lence is always dirt (i, e. moral de- 
filement), dirt is the result of it (v. 
anupatati), 108,8; instr, ~ena, Dh. 
167; °-pamada-tthiina (abi) 81,23 
(v. thāna ?)). 

pamareti, vb. (sa. pra-marayati, 
caus. pra-\/mr) to strike one dead, 
to maltreat, hurt severely (acc.); pot. 
3. 8g. ~eyya (math) 87,15. 

pamukha, mfn. (sa. pramukha) 
being at the head of, chief (e. c.); 
Vijaya-ppamukhā, m. pl. “with V.at 
their head", 110,30, 112,27. cp. pā- 
mokkha, 

pamuccati, vb. (pass. pamuii- 
cati, q. v.). 

pamuiicati, vb. (sa. pra-y muc) 
to liberate, send away, shake off (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. vati (pupphāni, “sheds the 
flowers") Dh. 377; — pass. pamuc- 
cati, to be delivered (from, abi.), Dh. 
189. 192 == 107,22 (sabbadukkha); 
fut. pamokkhati, 3. pl. „anti (Māra- 
bandhana) Dh. 276; — caus. pamo- 
coti, to deliver (acc.) from (abl.); aor. 


pamudita 


2. 8 3. sg. „esi (mam dukkhā) 108,12. 
— cp. duppamuiica, mfn. 

pamudita, mfn. (pp. pamodati; 
sa. pramudita) greatly delighted, 
pleased; *9-citta, mfn. greatly de- 
lighted in his mind, m. ~o, 16,7. 

pameyya, mfn. (sa. prameya) 
measurable; v. a-ppameyya, mfn. 

pamokkhati, fut. pass., v. pa- 
muiicati. 

pamoceti, vb. (caus. pamuiicati, 
g. v.). 

pamodati, vb. (sa. pra-/mud) 
to be delighted, to rejoice greatly; 
pr. 3. sg. ati, Dh. 16; pp. pamudita 
(g. v.); cp. pamojja. 

pamohana, x. (sa. pramohana, 
mfn.) bewilderment, delusion; mom. 
~am (Marassa) Dh. 274. 

payati, vb. (sa. pra-Vyā) to go 
forth, set out, advance, proceed; aor. 
3. sg. pāyāsi (w. augm.) 54. 344. 
54,4; 3. pl. payimsu (do.) 33,7; pp. 
payata, loc. fem. ~aya (sukha-', 
navaya, “when the ship was fairly 
off") 19,27; gen. pl. m. «anam (vā- 
nijànam, Bharukaccha, who have 
come from Bh.) 25,30; Bharukaccha- 
payatanam (do.) 20,2. 

payirupāsati, vb. (sa. pary-upa- 
Vas) to sit beside, attend on (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. māti (metrically == pay- 
rupāsati) Dh. 64—65 (panditam). 

*payuttaka, mfn. (fr. sa. pra- 
yukta, cp. next) hired, bribed, sub- 
orned; m. ~0, 38,28; °-coro, 38,27; 
°dhutta, m. pl. 49,7. 

payojeti, vb. (caus. payuījati; 
sa. pra-yojayati, yyuj) to use, em- 
ploy; direct; practise (acc.); pr. 1. 
pl. payojayama (naccadini) 65,1; 
aor, 3, sg. „vesi (purise, “directed 
some men") 74,4; 3. pl. wayimsu 
(naccagitavaditani) 64,31. 

para, mfn. (= sa.) 1) other, diffe- 
rent (opp. attan, cp. añña, apara); 
m. ko... paro (“who elge?") Dh. 
160; acc. ~am, Dh. 184; (lokam) 
Dh. 220; gen. ~wassa, 58,13; parassa- 
hetu, “for the sake of others”, Dh. 


162 


84 (opp. attahetu); loe. ~amhi (loke, 
opp. asmim) Dh. 168; — instr. m. 
(adv.) parena (= aparena samayena) 
afterwards, later on, 47,21; — m. pl. 
nom. pare (others, other people; some- 
times pregnantly — bad or impious 
people) Dh. 6; acc. pare, 103,20. 
106,4. Dh. 257; gen. paresam, 8,5; 
34,25 (opp. attanā, cp. aiifiesam, 34,24); 
41,33 (paresam (= instr.) tava guna 
fata); — comp. °-santaka, mfn., (g. v., 
cp. corrections); — ?-kula, x. (v. h.); 
-kula, n. = °-tira, n. (q. v.); *9-du- 
kkh'upadhana, v. upadhana; °-loka, 
m. another world, 106,15 (vitinna-?, 
g. v.); "-vajjánupassin, v. anupassi? 
(cp. vajja); para-paceaya, v. a-para- 
paccaya; *para-ppavāda etc., v. below; 
in comp. with words beginning with 
u the final a drops and the u is length- 
ened, v. parüpakkama, parūpaghātin. 
— 2) higher, superior; highest, supreme; 
acc. M. ~at (khanam) 110,18; santi- 
para, mfn. "higher than rest”, x. 
~am (sukham) Dh. 202. — param, 
indecl. (v. next). — superl. parama 
(q. v.). — cp. parato, parattha, para, 
parato etc. 

param, indecl. (= sa.) afterwards, 
after (w. abl.) ; ito-param, tato-param 
(v. R.); param-maraņā, after death, 
89,20. 

parakkama, m. (sa. parakrama) 
exertion, effort; acc. ~am (karonto) 
84,23; instr. ena (kata-°, “when we 
do our best") 12,5; "dalha-9, mfn. 
(v. h.). 

parakkamati, vb. (sa. parā- 
Vkram) to advance, attack (acc.); to 
show courage efc.; pot. 3. sg. parak- 
kame (dalham enam) Dh. 313; ger. 
e kamma, “valiantly”, Dh. 383. 

parato, adv. (sa. paratas) *) after- 
wards, further; 26,3. 34,7 (gacchanto). 
— ?) on the other side; 21,16 (opp. 
orato) cp. pàrato. 

parattha!, adv. (sà, paratra) in 
another place, in the other world; 
74,8 (wa'ti); Dh. 177. 

parattha?, m. (sa. parartha) the 


163 


advantage or interest of others; instr. 
(for the sake of) wena, Dh. 166 (opp. 
attadattha, g. v.). 

*parappavāda, m. (cp. sa. para- 
pravadin) disputation; 9-kusala, mfn. 
110,9 (g. v.) cp. pavadin, mfn. 

parama, mfn. (= sa.) highest, 
best (or worst); f. nā (roga) Dh. 
203; n. ~am (sukham) ib. & 184; 
n. pl. à (dukhā, v. dukkha) ib.; 
abl. n. parama va seyyo (better than 
the best) 55,2; — comp. *ārogya-pa- 
rama, mfn. having health for its best, 
f. ~a (labha, v. arogya) Dh. 204; 
*vissāsa-", mfn. ib. (g. v.). — *-duk- 
kara, mfn. (g. v.); %-attha, m. the 
best sense, the whole truth (v. next); 
abl. paramatthato (adv.) v. attha °). 

*"Paramattha-dipani, f. nom. 
pr. of a commentary, by Dhammapala, 
on several books of the Khuddaka- 
Nikāya; specimen of the comm, on 
Petavatthu p. 84,25—86,10. 

paràjaya, m. (= sa.) defeat; 
jaya-°, m. victory and defeat, acc. 
am, Dh. 201. 

parajita, mfn. (= sa.; pp. parā- 
yji [& jyā]) defeated, conquered; one 
who has lost (in game, w. acc.); m. 
„0 (sahassam) 2,4; 50,31 (as finite 
tense, “he lost"); 60,4 (tehi ~o). 

parājīyati, vb. (pass. parajeti 
[& -jinati]; sa. para-yji [& jya]) to 
be overcome, defeated; to lose (in 
game); pr. 3. sg. wati (opp. jināti) 
48,9. 

parāmasati, vb. (sa. parà-ymrc) 
to touch, fee), stroke (acc.); part. m. 
~anto (hatthissa kumbham) 77,1; 
ger. «và ([tam] hatthena) 24,30. 
25,2; pp. paramattha, v. duppara- 
mattha. 

parayana, n. (sa. parayana) aim; 
refuge, resort; e. c. mfn. == destined 
for, resorting to; *Brahmaloka-°, mfn. 
47,83; *sambodhi-°, mfn. 79,34 (g. v.). 

pari-, indecl. (= sa.) prefix to 
verbs and nouns, implying ‘round, 
around; richly, fully, completely’ etc. ; 
before vowels it takes the form pariy- 


pariganhati 


(v. below), but before u also payir 
(metathesis, v. payirupāsati); it i 
sometimes changed into pali- (g. v.) 

parikamma, v. (sa. parikarman 
1) attendance, waiting upon; ~am (ka 
tabbam, w. gen.) 84,1. — *) prepara 
tion, treatment (as painting, cleansing. 
dressing etc.); *°-kata, mfn. prepared 
treated (e. c.) : geruka-°, 84,19; lūkhā-" 
5,28 (v. h.). 

parikkhaya, m. (sa. parikshaya) 
destruction, ruin, loss; acc. ~am 
(gacchati, to be lost) 48,10; (ūātīnam 
etc.) Dh. 139. cp. parikkhina. 

parikkhara, m. (sa. parishkara) 
provisions, utensils, esp. the priestly 
requisites (civara eíc.); acc. (e. c.) 
am, 97,8. 

parikkhipati, vb. (sa. pari- 
Vkship) to put, hang, or wind around, 
to surround (acc.); pr. 3. pl. «anti 
(mālādāmāni) 37,2; aor. 3. pl. wimsu, 
6,10; ger. 8) witva (thanam) 6,9; 


' (malam kanthe) 16,25; (assā sāņim) 


62,20; P) ~itvāna, 112,6; — pp. pa- 
rikkhitta, m. ~o (rajjuyā, tied with 


ropes) 54,20; n. „am (nahārunā, 


kaņdam, “wound round with sinews”) 
92,21; pakara-°, 28,26 (v. h); su- 
parikkhittam (sayanam) 112,5 (si- 
niyā). cp. parikkhepa. 

parikkhina, mfn. (pp. parikkhī- 
yati; sa. parikshīņa, pari-ykshi) va- 
nished, disappeared, extinct; m, pl. 
e. (āsavā) Dh, 93; *kāmābhava-', 
*tanhabhava-°, *nandibhava-°, mfn. 
(v. h.) cp. parikkhaya. 

parikkhepa, m. (sa. parikshepa) 
throwing about, surrounding, that by 
which anything is surrounded; ~o, 
37,3. 

pariganhati, vb. (sa. pari-Vgrah) 
1) to embrace (acc.); part. m. ~anto, 
21,26; ger. pariggahetva (bāhāhi) 
20,6; — ?) to examine, search (through); 
to try, test (acc.); part. m. «anto 
(bahivalgiijanake) 43,8; 43,5-28; 38,18; 
57,16 (tar), in order to test her); 
part. med. m. „amāno, 43,2; aor. 
3. 8g. ~i (antonagaram) 43,9; fut. 


11* 


pariggaha 


1. sg. „issāmi (janapadam) 43,11; ger. 
wgeahetva (do.) 44,5. — caus. II. 
pariganhüpeti, to cause to be ex- 
amined; part, m. «ento, 48,26. cp. 
next. 

pariggaha, m. (sa. parigraha) 
‘belonging to, dependent’, family, wife, 
property, etc.; a-pariggaha, mfn. (un- 
married) v. h., opp. sa-pariggaha, 
mfn. 56,4-7. 

pariggahetva, ger., v. parigan- 
hati. 

parighamsati, vb. (sa. pari- 
Vghrsh) to rub, scrub; part. instr. m. 
a-parighamsantena (sc. bhājanam, 
without rubbing) 82,21. 

paricarati, vb. (sa. pari-ycar) 
‘to go round’, to attend, wait on; to 
servo, worship (acc,); pot. 3. sg. «Care 
(aggin) Dh. 107. — caus. paricāreti 
(v. h.) cp. neat. 

paricārikā, f. (== sa.) a female 
attendant, waiting woman; nom. nā 
(itthi) 49,2; gen. pl. anam, 19,13; 
pada-9, f. id. & wife, instr. e ya, 
56,11; pl. wa, 21,12; *Yx ika-yakkhini, 
f. a menial Y., 111. 

paricareti, vb. (caus. paricarati; 
sa. paricarayati) to surround (aec.); 
pass. part, m. paricarlyumano (ni- 
ppurisehi turiyehi, “surrounded by") 
67,24. 

pariccajati, vb. (sa. pari-ytya)) 
to abandon, give up, sacrifice (acc.); 
fut. 1. sg. ~wissiimi (attānai tuyha1h) 
3,16; ger. ~itvāī (attanam) 15,33; 
(jivitam) 60,14. cp. neat. 


164 


sa. parijnata, /)ña) thoroughly known; 
^. «am (sabbadukkham, sc. maya) 
108,13; *9-bhojana, mfn. "living on 
recognized food", 7. e, one who has 
the right view of the food he eats 
(who exactly knows the substance of 
which it consists, that it is only vile 
and impure matter, and that there is 
no pleasure in eating it) m. pl. «à, 
Dh. 92 (cp. Dh. (1855) p. 281; Chil- 
ders Dict. pariūā). 

parinamati, vb, (sa. pari- /nam) 
to bend, change (infr.); to develop, 
ripen, become old, be digested (as 
food); part. loc. ~ante (vaye, "as 
age ripens") 47,12. cp. next. 

parinàma, m. (= sa.) change, 
development; digestion; sammā-parinā- 
marh (acc.) gaccheyya, 78,16 (can be 
fully digested). 

paritassati (& paritasati), vb. 
(sa. pari-ytras) to be frightened or 
alarmed, to tremble; pr. 3. sg. na 
„ati (sabbasamyojanam chetvā) Dh. 
397 (“after cutting all fetters he does 
not tremble”); but we had perhaps 
better to translate “he does not feel 
any desire”, and take paritassati = 
sa. pari-ytrsh, to be afflicted by thirst, 
metaph. to feel desire or longing; the 
explanation Dhpd. (1855) p. 428 : tan- 
haya na bhayati (he does not fear on 
account of thirst) and on several other 
passages in the commentaries 1s pro- 
bably due to a confusion of those two 


| verbs, of which pp. paritasita (cp. 


tasita) frequently occurs; paritassana, 


pariccaga, m. (sa. parityiga) 
leaving, abandoning, giving up; abl. 
„āū (mattasukha-°) “by leaving (a 
small pleasure)" Dh. 290. of the Buddha (1899) p. 53. 

parijana, m. (= sa.) surrounding paritoseti, vb. (sa. pari-ytush, 


x f. seems to have both significations : 
| 
or attending people, servants; acc. x caus. paritoshayati) to satisfy com- 
| 
| 
x 
| 


fear & longing; cp. Mil. p. 253,26 (gono 
chato paritasito), Rhys Davids, Dial. 


wall, 67,28; gen. «assa, 67,26. pletely, to appease (acc.); part, med. 
parijinna, mfn. (pp. parijiyati; | m. „ayamāno (amke nisinnam put- 

sa. parijirna, Vj?) worn out, decayed, | tam) 38,15 (“cherishing”). 

exhausted; n. «aii (purāņasetthiku- paritta!, mfn. (sa. paritta) limited, 

lath, impoverished, reduced) 55,31; | small, little; #. wath (udakam) 4,5; 

(ida rūpam) 107,7 — Dh, 148. parittatthakathà, f. a concise commen- 
parinnata, mfn. (pp. parijānāti; | tary, acc. ~am, 113,24. 


165 


*paritta*, w. (cp. sa. paritrāņa, 
fr. pari-ytra) protection, an amulet; 
O-sutta, n.a thread for defence, a charm- 
ing thread, 111,11 (%-tejena). 

paridahati, ob. (sa. pari-ydhā) 
to put on (clothes, acc.); fut. 3. sg. 
„«dahessati (kūsūvam vattham) Dh. 9. 

parideva. m. (== sa.) lamenta- 
tion; instr. pl. ~wehi, 70,29; gen. pl. 
ana (soka-9) 90,17; soka-? (dvandva 
comp.) 66,10-17. cp. pariddava. 

paridevati, eb. (sa. pari-ydiv) 
to lament, cry, groan; part. m. ~anto, 
30,255; f. anti, 31,3; gen. pl. wantii- 
nam, 47,31; part. med. m. ~mano, 
30,15; aor. 3. sg. paridevi, 24,7. pari- 
deva, m. & paridevana, x, (g. v.). 

paridevana, n. (== sa.) lamen- 
tation, groaning; °-sadda, m. “the 
sound of groaning”, nom. ~o, 23,33. 
cp. parideva & next. 

*pariddava, m. (sa. *paridrava, 
Vdru; this word is formed after the 
analogy of upaddava (q. v.) and may 
probably be due to an old confusion 
with parideva (v. above), by which 
it is generally explained in the com- 
mentaries (Tr.); it is only found in 
comp. with soka-") lamentation; tinna- 
Soka-9, mfn. “who has crossed the 
flood of sorrow"? Dh. 195. 

*parinitthiti, f. (fr. pari-ni- 
ystha, cp. nitthita) completion, accom- 
plishment; acc. ^im (gatesu, fulfilled) 
114,31. 

parinibbati, vb., v. parinibba- 
yāti. 

parinibbūna, x. (sa. parinir- 
vāņa) complete extinction of indivi- 
duality, so that one shall not be born 
again; attainment of Nirvüna; abl. 
wa, 80,19; °-maficamhi nipanno, 
110,19. l 

parinibbāyati & parinibbāti, 
(sa. parinirvati, yvā) to be extin- 
guished, to attain Nirvāņa; pr. 3. pl. 
„āyanti (Tathagata) 76,28; ^ anti, 
Dh. 126; aor. 3. sg. ~ayi, 29,18; 
80,19 (Bhagava); pp. v. parinibbuta, 
cp. parinibbana, x. 


| 


— —— s Vm ss — .- opn n -— v HÑ —+— n— Vn T 


paribbajaka 


parinibbuta, mfn. (pp. sa. pari- 
nirvrta, yvr, but as to the signification 
belonging to parinir-yvā, v. pari- 
nibbayati, cp. nibbuta) completely ex- 
tinguished or liberated (from the sam- 
sara); m. <o, 80,1; loc. ~e, 80,19; 
pl. m. <3 (loke, “even in this world”) 
Dh. 89. 

paripakka, mfn. (sa. paripakva) 
completely cooked; quite ripe, accom- 
plished; m. ~o (vayo) Dh. 260. 

paripucchati, vb. (sa. pari- 
yprach) to put questions to (ace.); 
inf. ~itum, comp. "-kama, mfn. who 
wishes that questions shall be put 
to himself, m. ~o, 84,7; grd. m. 
~itabbo, ib, 

paripunna, mfn, (sa, pari-purna) 
quite full; accomplished, perfect; n. 
wath (candamandalam, “the full 
moon") 32,20; “sabbakiira-°, mfn. 
altogether perfect, acc. m. em (pu- 
risam) 10,26; *-gabbha, f. adj. (v. 
gabblia). 

paripurati, vb. (sa. pari-Vpr) 
intr, to become full (completely); to 
become perfect; pr. 3. sg. ati (paū- 
ña) Dh. 38; pp. paripunna (q. v.). 

paripphoseti, vb. (caus. pari- 
yprush) to besprinkle, water (acc.); 
ger. eitvà ([bhümim] udakena) 84,22. 

pariplava, mfn. (== sa.) swim- 
ming round; unsteady; *"-pasada, mfn. 
“whose peace of mind is troubled”, gen. 
m. wassa, Dh. 38. 

pariphandati, vb. (sa. pari- 
Vspand) to tremble all over; pr. 3. 
sg. ~wati (idar cittam) Dh. 34 (ep. 
phandana). 

paribbajati, vb. (sa. pari-Vvraj) 
to wander about (esp. as a religious 
mendicant, cp. paribbaja(ka)); pr. 3. 
pl. „anti (etam [bandhanam] che- 
tvàna) Dh. 346; pot. 3. sg. paribbaje 
(kame pahatvana anagaro) Dh. 415. 

paribbaya, m. (sa. parivyaya) 
payment,*salary; travelling expenses 
or travelling cash; acc. ~am, 18,23; 
48,18. 

paribbajaka, m. (& paribbaja; 


paribhāvita 


sa. parivrāja(ka)) 8 religious mendi- 
cant, ascetic; nom. <o (Uttiyo) 89,19; 
acc. ~arn, 29,22; °-Arama, m. (v. h.). 
— '-vesenā, in the character of a p. 
110,29. 

paribhavita, mfn. (pp. pari- 
bhāveti; = sa., caus. pari-ybhū) pre- 
pared, treated; n. wal (cittam, 
“highly cultivated”) 105,2; ace. f. 
~ar (mānusivācam, karunaya, “filled 
with compassion") 22,5. 

paribhasati, vb. (sa. pari-ybhash) 
to blame, censure, abuse (acc.); pr. 
8. sg. eati (bhikkhu) 84,29. 

paribhuijati, vb. (sa. pari-\/bhu}) 
to eat, enjoy (acc.); pr. 3. sg. mati 
(dadhim) 35,22; 97,9 (“makes use of 


it”); J. pi. want, 21,6; inf. etum 


(kame) 69,27; ger. witva, 36,35; pp. 
paribhutta, x. «am (yassa, “when 
he has eaten it") 78,16. cp. next. 

paribhoga, m. (— sa.) enjoyment, 
use; *devata-°, mfn. 36,31. (v. h.). 

parimajjati, vb. (sa. pari-Vmrj) 
to cleanse, wipe; to touch, stroke (ace.); 
pr. 2. sg. „asi (bāhiram) 106,1 = 
Dh. 394; part. f. anti (pitthim) 
46,8. 

parimandala, mfn. (— sa.) round, 
circular; n, ~am, 36,33, adv. „arh, 
all around, 82,27; *su-parimandalam, 
adv. completely, 113,7. 

parimaddati, vb. (sa. pari-/mrd) 
to rub, stroke (acc.); ger. witva (ha- 
tthena tassa sarlram, “passed his 
hand over") 24,23. 

parimāņa, x. (= sa.) circum- 
ference, extent; acc. «am (rajja-°) 
43,29. 

pariyatti, f. (sa. paryapti) learn- 
ing, esp. study of the holy texts; the 
texts themselves handed down through 
oral tradition (= tipitaka); nom. ~i, 
102,10; °antaradhana, x. ‘the dis» 
appearance of learning’, name of a 
chapter of Anagata-vamsa (g. v.) 
102 TE t 

pariyanta, mfn. (sa. paryanta) 
ended, ceased; far, remote; — m. end, 
circumference, edge. border. outskirt: 


166 


acc, ~am (parisa-°, v. parisa) 87,25; 
loc. we (udaka-°) 4,2; (sara-°) 5,17; 
pl. hattha-pāda-pariyantā (the hoofs) 
5,27. | 

pariyati, vb. (sa. pari-Vyā) to 
go round (acc.); pr. 3. sg. «ati (rà- 
janivesanam) 31,s. 

pariyadana, x. (buddh. sa. pa- 
ryādāna) consuming, consumption, 
exhaustion, destruction, end; abl. «à 
(tassa, “when that has been consumed") 
95,8. 

*pariyāpanna, mfn. (fr. pari- 
à-y pad) included, contained in; patta- 
pariyapannam, x. “what has been put 
in the bowl", 83,2, 

pariyàya, m. & n. (sa. paryaya) 
‘going round’, encompassing (also a 
synonym); turn, succession, series, 
enumeration (also a religious discourse 
in general, opp. nippariyaya, a dis- 
course delivered on some particular 
occasion); way, manner, order, method, 
precision; view or point of view; nom. 
n. aditta-pariyayam (“the sermon of 
the burning") 71,18; instr. wena 
(aiifiena = aiifiendkarena, in another 
way, from a different point of view 
o: wrongly?) 91,11-32; aneka-pari- 
yayena, adv. in many ways, 69,18. 

pariyesati, vb. (sa. pari-yish) 
to seek or search for, inquire, inve- 
stigate (acc.); part. m. ~anto (goca- 
ram) 14,29; (phalaphalani) 35,32; 
part. med. m. pl. ~mana (mige, in 
order to find) 6,8; fut. 1. sg. „vissāmi, 
14,22; (dibbakame) 45,5; inf. ~itum, 
43,3; ger. ~witva (core) 30,30. 

*pariyogàlha, mfn. (pp. pari- 
yogahati, to inquire into, penetrate; 
sa. *paryava-Vgàh, cp. ava-gadha); 
C-dhamma, mfn. who has penetrated 
the truth, m. ^o, 69,13. cp. next. 

*pariyogāha, m. (fr. pari-ava- 
Vgāh) inquiring into, penetrating; 
*duppariyogaha, mfn. (g. v.). 

*pariyodapana, x. (fr. next) 
cleansing, purification; sacitta-°, Dh. 
183 (v. citta!). 

*parivodaneti. vb. (caus. pari- 


167 


ava-Vdai) to cleanse, purify (acc.); 
pot. 3. 89. ~eyya (metrically = paryo- 
dapeyya, attānam) Dh. 88. 
pariyosāna, x. (sa. paryavasāna) 
end, conclusion; loc. we, 29,17 (sacca-®, 
g. v.); 34,29 (jivita-°); e. c. mfn. = 
ending with : gala-°, 18,7; marana-°, 
86,16; vipatti-°, 47,16 (v. h.). 
parilaha, m. (sa. paridaha) burn- 
ing, heat; pain, suffering, sorrow; nom. 
„0, Dh. 90; sa-parilaha, mfn. filled 
with pain, n. ~ar, 94,3. 
parivajjeti (& parivajjayati) 
vb. (sa. parivarjayati, caus. pari- 
Vvrj) to avoid (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti 
(pāpāni) Dh. 269; imp. 2. sg. (med.) 
ewayassu (kulavaka (acc. f. or n. pl. ?) 
“dont disturb the birds’ nests”) 60,16; 
pot. 3. sg. «aye, Dh. 123. 
parivattati, vb. (sa. pari-yvrt) 
to turn, change (inír.), to change into 
(nom.); pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (khiram, 
dadhi ~) 99,28; ger. witva, 47,12; — 
caus. V. next. 
parivatteti, vb. (sa. parivartay- 
ati, caus. pari-Vvrt) ') to overthrow, 
turn topsy-turvy; also intr., to rush, 
hurtle (on account of confusion) : part. 
m. pl. „entā, 60,5. — *) to repeat, 
rehearse, recite (acc.) ; pr. 3. sg. ~eti 
(Pataijali-matam) 113,7; pot. 2. sg. 
„eyyāsi (mantam) 52,26; ger. ~etva, 
32,10. — *) to translate (acc.); imp. 2. 
sg.~ehi(tam, Magadhanam niruttiya) 
113,33; aor. 8, sg. „vesi, 114,27. 
parivara, m. (= sa.) suite, re- 
tinue, followers; e. c. mfn., surrounded 
by; instr. ~ena (mahantena) 7,5. 
62,8; paiicasata-bhikkhu-9, mfn. 87,3; 
paicasata-miga-9, mfn. 5,29; paūca- 
sugandhika-9, mfn. prepared with five 
kinds of fragrant substances, %, „arh 
(tambūlarn) 41,13; sa-parivāra, mfn. 
together with the retinue, acc. m. ~am, 
110,25. ` 
parivareti, vb. (sa. parivarayati, 
caus. pari-yvr) to surround, encom- 
pass (acc.); without obj. to stand 
around; aor. 3. sg. „vesi, 36,23; fut. 
3. pl. wessanti, 35,15; ger. ~wetva 


parissaya 


(ambarukkham, “round the Mango 
tree”) 37,19; pp. m. parivārito (amacca-") 
112,26. cp. parivara, m. & parivuta, 
mfn. 

*parivitakketi, vb. (fr. pari-vi- 
ytark) to reflect, ponder; aor. 3. sg. 
ees], 53,33. 

parivisati, vb. (sa. pari-yvish, 
but as to the formation confounded 
with pari-y vic) to serve, wait on (acc.); 
imp. 2. sg. parivisa (ma tena, “serve 
me with it") 78,5; aor. 3. sg. parivisi, 
18,1; ger. witva, 87,17; part. f. 
anti (rajanam, suvanna-katacehuri 
gahetvā) 53,32. 

parivuta, mfn. (sa. parivrta, pp. 
pari-V/vr) surrounded by (instr. or 
e. €); m. ~o (deva-ganena) 60,33; 
36,28; 74,17; 7,28 (miga-gana-?); acc. 
m. ~am (amacca-gana-°) 39,95; f. 
pl. nā (dàsi-gana-?) 21,1. 

*parisamvuta, mfn. (sa, *pari- 
samvrta) covered, hidden, guarded; 
restrained, controlled; su-parisamvuta, 
Dh. 234 (q. v.). 

parisappati, vb. (sa. pari-/srp) 
to run about; pr. 3. pl. „anti, Dh. 
342. The common form of this verb 
is pari-sakkati, cp. osakkati, nissak- 
kana etc. 

parisa, f. (sa. parishad) an as- 
sembly; multitude, group, crowd; nom. 
wa (assa, “his followers") 40,3; acc. 
~am, 88,25; insir. miya, 74,17; gen. 
dat. ~waya, 6,32; 86,10 (sampatta-", 
the assembly present); Joc. ~ayam, 
87,25; comp. catu-°, f. (v. h.); at the 
beginning of comp. generally shortened 
to parisa-, 987,5 (Ü"-pariyantam); 
0-majjhe, 10,21. 42,4. 51,15. 

parisuddha, mfn. (sa. parigud- 
dha, Ygudh) clean, pure; a-parisud- 
dha, mfn. 41,1 (g. v.). 

parissaya, n. (& m.) (sa. pari- 
graya, m. (?) Weber, Ind. Str. ITI, 
395; as to the signification nearly 


agreeing, with parissama (sa. pari- 


grama) by which it is sometimes re- 
placed in the manuscripts; Fausbøll, 
Dhpd. (1855) p. 407 & Gloss, So., 


pariharati 


derives it from sa. *parismaya, ysmi, 
which can hardly be possible) danger; 
pain, trouble, annoyance; n. pl. „āni 
(sabbani) Dh. 328. [Physically paris- 
saya seems to mean ‘the internal heat 
of the body’, as it is sometimes in the 
comm, explained by kammaja-tejo; 
perhaps it ought to be derived from 
pari + Veri = yera (or cram), 
cp. utu-parissaya-vinodana, MN. I 
p. 10,17.] 

pariharati, vb. (sa. pari-yhr) 
1) to carry (round), to wear (acc.); 
pr. 1. sg. med. «hare (muiijam, g. v.) 
103,33; ger. witva (kucchiyà Bodhi- 
sattam) 62,5. — 2) to protect, take 
care of, be the leader of; fut. 1. sg. 
„issāmi (bhikkhu-samgham) 74,23; 
inf. maitu, 74,24; cp. parihāra. 

parihāna, x. (sa. parihāņa) the 
being deprived of, falling away from; 
dat. ~aya (abhabbo) Dh. 32. 

parihayati, vb. (sa. pari-hiyate, 
pass. pari-yhà, cp. jahati) to be de- 
prived of; to fall away from (abl.), 
disappear, vanish, decrease, eíc.; pr. 
3. sg. eati (saddhamma) Dh. 364; 
aor. 3. sg. e.hayi, 18,2»; fut. 3. sg. 
eissati, 102,10; — pp. parihina, loc. 
m. ~e, 102,10; n. „am n'atthi (w. 
abl. ‘has not been neglected’) 37,27; 
a-parihina, mfn. unbroken (v. R). 

parihara, m. (= sa.) ‘carrying 
round’, protection, taking care of, the 
making much of anything; abl. ~ato 
(poranaka-°, as hitherto) 37,27; *gab- 
bha-9, m. (g. v.) 42,22 (laddha-0). 

parihina, mfn. (pp. parihāyati, 
g. v.). 

"Kādu m. (fr. para + 
upakkama) approaching or attack of 
others (external enemies); instr. ~ena, 
76,27 (cp. an-upakkamena). 

*parüpaghatin, mfn. (fr. para 
-- upaghatin) who strikes or injures 
others; nom, m. ^1, Dh. 184. 

pareta, mfn. (= sa. pp. para + 
yi) reached, approached; e. c. = fol- 
lowed by, overcome with; *soka-9, 


168 


mfn. overcome with sorrow, gen. m. 
wassa, 104,17. 

parodati, vb. (sa. pra-yrud) to 
begin to weep or lament; aor. 3. sg. 
parodi (mahantena saddena) 16,31. 

pary-, v. pariy- , 

palavati (or pilavati, plavati), 
vb. (sa. plavati, yplu) to float, swim; 
pr. 3. sg. eati (hurahuram) 107,30 
== Dh, 334 (metri causa „atī); aor. 
1. sg. a-plavim (phalakena) 20,23. 

*palapeti, vb. (caus. palayati, 
q.v.) to drive away (acc.); imp. 2. 
sg. wehi (te) 35,12; 2. pl. „etha, 
52,20; aor. nesi, ib.; inf. «etur, 8,1. 

palayati (& paleti), vb. (sa. pa- 
Jayati) to flee or fly away, escape; 
pr. 3. sg. paleti, 106,5 -— Dh. 49; 
2. sg. wayasi, 54,21; 3. pl. nāyanti, 
6,21; 1. pl. „āyāma (let us escape), 
21,30; aor. 3. sg. ~āyi, 10,23; 3. pl. 
ewayimsu, 30,50; fut. 3. pl. „issanti, 
35,14; 1. pl. „issūma, 21,32; inf. 
ewAtum, 21,27; ger. ~itva, 60,3; — 
caus. *palapeti (v. h.). 

palasa, m. £ n. (sa. palaca) !) 
m. à leaf; pandu-paliiso, Dh. 235 (g. 
v.). — ?) n. (coll.) leaves, foliage; 
sākhā-palāsam, 95,2 (g. v.); apa- 
gata-°, mfn. 95,25. 

pali- or pali, prp. = 
(q. v.) cp. next ete. 

paligha, m. (sa. parigha [& 
paligha]) a bolt or bar of a door; au 
obstacle, hindrance; *ukkhitta-°, mfn. 
Dh. 398 (v. h.). 

palita, mfn. (= sa., but often 
gpelled with ph through confusion with 
phalita, g. v.); !) grey, greyhaired; 
n. ~ath (siro) Dh. 260 (ph9); *-kesa, 
mfn. greyhaired, acc. m. „am, 63,9. 
— ?) ». grey hair (sg. & pl.); nom. 
sg. wath (ekari) 44,25 (ph); 46,24 
(eka-p°); 46,27 (ekam p°); pl. ~ani, 
46,5; 44,22 (ph); — *phalita-patu- 
bhava, m. 44,5 (v. pātubhāva). 

*palipatha, m. (read : pali-?; fr. 
pra-ylip, w. suff. -atha) mud, mire; 
acc. «am (duggam) Dh. 414 (this 
miry road, which is difficult to pass?) 


pari- 


169 


cp. Tr. PM. p. 80—81 Notes; JPTS. 
'84, p. 86. Childers 8: Fausbøll de- 
rive it from pari-patha (-pantha), 
“adversary”, 

palibuddha, mfn. (probably iden- 
tical with sa. pari-ruddha, through 
dissimilation (?) or from *pra-vi-rud- 
dha by metathesis; in palibodha, m. 
hindrance, we could suppose influence 
from sa. pari-V/bàdh (Tr. PM, p. 66) 
or pari-/bandh (Leumann); from 
palibuddha we have verb, denom. 
palibuddhati, to check, restrain; to 
urge, dun; to seize upon, usurp) 
checked, restrained; m. pl. nā (titthiyā, 
‘there was put a stop to their mischief’) 
74,14. (cp. also sa. pary-ava-rodha.) 

palujjati, vb. (pass. sa. pra-yruj) 
to be broken, destroyed; to fall off; 
pot. 3. sg. „eyya (sakhapalasam), 
95,22; 3. pl. „eyyum (tacapapatika) 
10, 

paleti, vb. = palayati (q. v.). 
 palepana, x. (sa. pralepana) the 
act of smearing; *galha-°, mfn. 92,7 
(v. h.). 

palobheti, vb. (sa. pralobhayati, 
caus. pra-ylubh) to allure, seduce 
(acc.); ger. „etvā (vanije) 21,13. 

pallamka, m. (sa. paryanka & 
palyafika) a couch or sofa; a throne 
or palanquin; the sitting cross-legged 
(as in meditation), in the phrase : pal- 
lamkena (instr.) or ~e (7oc.) nisidati, 
17,25. 65,4. 66,4 (eka-9, g. v.); 53,23 
(7oc.) ; *-majjhe, 39,26 (“on the royal 
throne”); kajicana-°, 42,9 (v. h.); 
nisinna-pallamkato, abl. “from the 
couch on which he was sitting”, 65,27 
(vutthaya). 

pallala, n. (sa. palvala) a small 
pond or lake; acc. „am, Dh. 91; 
loc. we, 21,36. 

pavaddhati, vb. (sa. pra-yvrdh) 
to grow up, increase; pr. 3. sg. eati, 
Dh. 282; 3. pl. „anti, 107,32 = Dh. 
335. 

pavattati, vb. (sa. pra-yvrt) !) 
to arise, set out, break forth; aor. 3. 
sg. pavatti (mahānadī) 36,25; (udà- 


' pavittha 


nan) 65,12. — ?)to become, appear; 
to be, exist; pr. 3. sg. ati (ratho'ti 
namam) 98,21; (Sihalesu „ati, "is 
extant among the S.") 113,51; fut. 3. 
sg. ~issati (manussesu catuppadika 
gāthā) 102,22. caus. v. pavatteti; cp. 
next. 

pavattar, m. (rather fr. sa. pra- 
vaktr than fr. pra-vartitr, cp. next) 
one who tells or relates, expounder, 
teacher; acc. e aram (nidhinam, “who 
tells of hidden treasures") Dh. 76. 

pavatti, f. (sa. pravrtti) appear- 
ance, what appears or happens, news, 
tidings, etc.; acc. „īm (ārocesi) 6,22; 
tatr’assa „im na janàma, “we dont 
know what happened afterwards”, 
73,23. 

pavatteti, eb. (caus. pavattati, 
sa. pravartayati) to cause to arise, 
send forth (ace.); ger. ~etva (maho- 
gham) 35,19. 

pavara, mfn. (sa. pravara) the 
choicest, best; noble, excellent; acc, 
m. «am, Dh. 422. 

pavassati, vb. (sa. pra-yvrsh) 
to rain, begin to rain; imp. 2. Sy. 
pavassa (deva!) 104,23; aor. 3. sg. 
pāvassi (mahamegho) 105,31. 

pavāti (& pavāyati), vb. (sa. pra- 
va) to blow through, pervade (acc.); 
pr. 8. sg. ~ati (sabba disa) Dh. 54. 

pavadin, m. (sa. pravadin) a 
disputer, polemic; ace. pl. ~ino 
(ahindanto) 113,5. cp. parappavāda. 

pavala (& pavāla), m. n. (sa. 
pravada & pravāla) !) coral; comp. 
-ppavala-, 27,28; *) a sprout, a young 
leaf or branch; kala-°, 47,20 (g. v.). 

pavāsa, m. (sa. pravasa) absence 
from home, departure; abl. nā (agato) 
9,27. cp. cira-ppavasin, mfn. 

pavijjhati, vb. (sa. pra-\/vyadh) 
to hurl or cast down (acc.); aor. 8. 
sg. pavijjhi (mahantam silam) 75,35. 

pavittha, mfn. (pp. pavisati, sa. 
pra-vishtg) entered, one who has en- 
tered or come into (acc. or abl.); m. 
„0 (himagabbham) 16,9; acc. „am 
(adittapannasalam) 44,20; mukhe 


pavibhajati 


^ Am (ambaphalam) 37,4; (ñama a- 
lassa anto ~) 86,28; comp. kucchim 
pavittha-sadiso, 61,31; gahanatthana- 
pavittha-maggam, "the path by which 
they had turned into the jungle", 34,11. 

pavibhajati, vb. (sa. pra-vi- 

bhaj) to divide, distribute, arrange 
acc.); aor. 3. pl. majjimsu (Satthu- 
sāsanam) 109,33 (incorrect spelling 
instead of pavibhajimsu); ger. wajja, 
110,1. cp. vibhajana. 

paviveka, m. (sa. praviveka) 
solitude; *?)-rasa, m. “the sweetness 
of solitude", Dh. 205 (acc. ~am). 

pavisati, vb. (sa. pra-yvig) to 
enter, go to, come into (acc. [or loc.]); 
pr. 3. pl. „anti (nagaram) 90,36; 
(antojalam) 88,5; part. m. instr. 
„antena, 83,31; imp. 2. sg. pavisa 
(udakam, dive into) 13,1; (aggith) 
61,12; fut. 1. sg. „issāmi (aggim, 
i. e. I will pay with my life for it) 
54,4; aor. 3) (w. augm.) 3. sg. pāvisi, 
13,2 (nī, metri causa), 33,25; P) 3. pl. 
pavisimsu, 53,4. 60,22; 2. pl. ~ittha 
(mā) 27,30; inf. witum, 13,15; comp. 
eitu-kama, mfn. 82,24. 83,a7 (m. ~o, 
w. acc.); ger. 3) pavissa, Dh. 127; 
b) witva, 6,7. 14,15. 37,12; grd. „itab- 
bam, x. 83,31; pp. pavittha (g. v.); 
caus, paveseti & pavesapeti (q. v.) 
cp. next. 

*pavisana, n, (nom. act. fr. pa- 
visati, cp. pavesana) entering, coming 
in; °-kale (w. acc. aggim) 51,14; 78,12 
(do. nagaram); '-velāyarh (tesar, 
“as they came in") 53,4. 

pavuccati, vb. (pass. pra-yvac) 
to be called; pr. 3. sg. dhammattho 
ti „ati, Dh. 257; tanhā „ati, 103,26, 

pavedeti (wayati), vb. (caus. 
pra-yvid, sa. pravedayati) to com- 
municate, relate, teach (acc.); pr. 3. 
pl. wayanti (sc. dhammam) Dh. 151; 
pp. pavedita, taught; acc. m. ~am 
(isi-pp®, maggam) Dh. 281; loc. m. 
we (ariya-, dhamme) Dh,.79. 

pavedhati, vb. (fr. :sg. | pra- 
yvyath, but arisen as a new ‘simplex 
to caus. *pra-vyathayati > pavedheti ; 


170 


cp. Tr. PM. 76,25) to tremble, quiver; 
part, med. acc. m. f. ~manath, 47,23. 
63,9. 

paveni & paveni (or ni), f. 
(sa. praveni) ‘a long braid of hair’, 
hence !) race, lineage, esp. breed of 
cattle, cattle for breeding; pl. ~iyo 
(godharaniyo, q. v.) 105,11-14. (Comm. 
on Sn. v. 26: vayappatta balivaddehi 
saddhiñ methunapatthana - gavo); 
2) tradition, traditional.custom or doc- 
trine (also — the holy scriptures) cp. 
Tr. PM. p. 69,7-44. 

*pavellati, vb. (fr. pra-yvell) 
to shake or swing to and fro, to sway; 
part. med. f. ~mana, 47,20. 

pavesana, mw. (sa. pravecana) 
1) entering (cp. pavisana); *) placing 
or putting on, application; dande 
pavesana-vasena (v. vasa) “according 
as you fit it to the handle”, 35,5. 

*pavesapeti, vb. (caus. IT. pa- 
visati) to cause one (acc.) to enter 
(acc.); pr. 8. sg. ~eti (mātugāmam 
aggim) 51,20. 

*pavesetar, m. (nom. agentis fr. 
next) one who allows to enter, who 
gives admittance; nom. «à (iiātānam) 
90,33. 

paveseti, vb. (caus. pavisati; 
sa. pravegayati) to cause or allow to 
enter (acc.) into (acc. or loc.), to put 
on, introduce; pr. 3. pl. ~wenti, 49,1; 
fut. 8. sg. ~wessati, 102,27; ger. netvā 
(bahumige uyyane) 6,5; (migaganam 
uyyānam) 6,13; (uggahana-rajjukam 
gīvāya) 14,953; (nagaram) 73,26; caus. 
II. pavesāpeti (g. v.) cp. pavesana, 
^., pavesetar, m. 

pasamsati, vb. (sa. pra-ygams) 
to praise (acc); pr. 3. pl. «anti 
(appamadam) Dh. 30; Dh. 229. 366; 
na-ppasamsanti, Dh. 177; ger. witva, 
8,28; pp. pasamsita, m. <o, Dh. 228 
—30. cp. next. 

pasamsā, f. (sa. pracamsa) praise; 
ninda-pasamsasu, Joc. pl. (blame and 
praise) 106,50 — Dh. 81. 

pasanna, mfn. (pp. pasidati; sa. 
prasanna) !) clear, bright; placid, 


171 


tranquil; pleased, happy (w. gen. or 
loc.); m. ~o, (te) 7,13; (tassa) 31,14; 
(Buddhasāsane) Dh. 868; 114,1; 
instr, ena, 8,2; Dh. 2 (manasa). — 
?) who is clear in his persuasion, be- 
lieving, full of faith or devotion, pious; 
M. ~0, 28,3. 102,93; eva ~o aham, 
79,21; pl. wa, 76,32 (opp. a-ppasanna, 
g. v.); ""-citta, mfn. with a pious 
mind, believing, acc. m. ~am, 68,22. 

pasavati, vb. (sa. pra-Vsu) to 
procreate, produce (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
e inn Dh. 201; pp. pasūta, 
q. v.). 

pasahati, vb. (sa. pra-ysah) to 
conquer, overcome (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
vati (metri causa ~ati) Dh. 7 (tam); 
Dh. 8 (na-ppasahati); 104,5 (tarh 
senam); pot. 3. sg. med. ~etha (na- 
pp?) Dh. 128. 

pasada, m. (sa. prasada) 4) bright- 
ness, purity; ?) favour, kindness (opp. 
kopa); ?) conviction, persuasion, faith 
(opp. ñana); abl. wa, 79,29; *°-matta, 
f. a minute portion of faith (Gota- 
massa, “on G.”) 94,23; *pariplava-0, 
mfn. Dh. 38 (v. h.). 

pasadana, n. (sa. prasadana) 
1) clearing, calming, propitiating; ?) 
— prec, *yathā-pasādanam, adv. 
according to one’s favour, pleasure, 
or faith, Dh. 249. 

pasadhana, x. (sa. prasadhana) 
decoration, vesture; ~ar (uraccha- 
da-%, g. v.) 23,32; (yakkharaja-") 
119,25; instr. pl. „ehi, 112,25. 

pasadheti, vb. (sa. pra-ysādh) 
to adorn, decorate, array (acc.); aor. 
3. sg. ~wayi (bhaccam, pasadhanehi) 
112,25; pp. pasadhita, m. ~o (man- 
dita-°, “dressed and arrayed”) 41,10, 
cp. prec. 

pasareti, vb. (sa. prasarayati, 
caus, pra-Vsr) to stretch or spread 
out, to open (acc.); aor. 3. sg. «esi 
(āpanam, "opened a shop") 48,1; 
ger. „etvā (pakkhe) 10,14; (hattham) 
62,18; pp. pasarita, outstretched, 
0-givà, f. 17,22 (v. h.). 

pasibbaka, m. (sa. prasevaka, 


passati 


cp. Fausbgll, Dhpd. (1855) p. 268; 
fr. *pra-sivyaka (?) Childers) a bag, 
sack, purse; acc. ~am, 12,31; 13, 
(chinna-?); Joc. ~e, 12,24; tambula-®, 
57,33 (q. v.). 

pasidati, vb. (sa. pra-ysad) to 
become clear, tranquil, or pleased (w. 
gen.); pr. 3. sg. „vati (cittarh) 103,21; 
ger. ~itvā (tassa) 37,17; pp. pasanna 
(g. v.) cp. pasada & pasadana. 

pasu, m. (sa. paqu) cattle; putta- 
pasu-^ Dh. 287 (children and cattle). 

pasuta, mfn. (sa. prasita, pp. 
pra-ysa, sī) intent upon, devoted to 
(gen. or loc., or e, c); m. «o (miga- 
vadha-9) 5,53; (gocara-°) 13,13; (sad- 
attha-^) Dh. 166; pl. wa (sa-kicca-°) 
86,23; (jhana-°) Dh. 181. 

pasūta, mfn. (pp. pasavati, sa. 
prasūta, ysū) procreated, brought 
forth; n. ~am (bahum apuiifiam) 76,3. 

passa, x. (sa. parcva) side; instr. 
vena (nipajjapetva, “upon his side”) 


18,17; loc. ~e (pitthi-®, brahmanassa, 


behind”) 50,18; loc. pl. wesu (ubho- 
ow 40,5; — *sammattha-°, mfn. 47,19 
v. h.). 

ok vb. (sa. ypaç) to see, 
look at, consider, perceive, notice, find 
out (acc.) cp. dissati?); pr. 3. sg. 
ati (paūūāya, understands) 107,11 
== Dh. 277; (rajanamh, comes to see, 
visits) 52,24; 2. sg. easi, 10,13. 73,6. 
85,16. 111,19; 2. sg. ~ami, 31,35. 97,30; 
42,17 (~ voham attanam, ‘an ex- 
ample thereof I am myself’ ?); 3. pl. 
„anti, 63,10. 110,12 (find); 1. pi. 
~wama, 73,22; part. m. 3) passam 
(evam, ‘considering this’) 71,4; a-pas- 
sam, Db. 114; b) passanto, 14,7. 
46,4 (a-°, not seeing); gen. *) passato, 
96,s. Dh. 114; ^) passantassa (gen. 
abs.) 17,24; instr. passata (intelligent) 
Dh. 245; pl. a-passantā, 30,51; f. a- 
passanti, 68,29; gen. ~wantiya, 64,17; 
— imp. 2. sg. passa, 2,1. 5,7 (pass’); 
11,17. 19,25. 103,4; 2. pl. watha, 
18,6. 51,16; 88,3; — pot. 3. sg. 9) passe, 
Dh. 76; 170; >)passeyya, 16,14 (find); 
69,1; 90,34 (look for); — fut. 1. sg. 


passasa 


wissami, 65,26; — aor. 3. sg. passi, 
28,s. 36,7. 54,8 (mahājano mà A); 
a-passi, 111,17; 3. pl. withsu, 27,1; 
1. pl. „imha, 54,13; — inf. passitum, 
4,13; — ger. a-passitvā (not seeing) 
13,5; — pass. v. dissati !); — caus. v. 
dasseti. 

passasa, m. (sa. pragvāsa) breath- 
ing in, inhaling; nom. ~o (assisa-®, 
g. 9.) 80,32. 

pahaiisati!, vb. (sa. pra-Vghrsh) 
to rub, stroke (acc); ger. witva 
(pharasumƏ hatthena) 35,8. cp. pari- 
ghamsati. 

[paliamsati?] vb. (sa. pra-yhrsh) 
to rejoice, be glad; pp. v. pahattha. 

pahata, mfn. (pp. paharati, q. v.). 

pahattha, mfn. (sa. prahrshta, 
pp. pra-yhrsh) erect (as the hairs of 
the body etc.) ; delighted, glad, pleased; 
-kanna-vàla, mfn. with the tail and 
ears erect, m. ~O, 76,21. 

pahata, mfn. (sa. prahata, yhan; 
sometimes confounded with pahata, 
sa. prahrta, v. paharati) beaten, killed, 
severely hurt; m. ~o, 30,2». cp. next, 

pahatvana, ger. v. pajahati (Dh. 
243.' 415-16 Sn. 639—40; the 
Birm, reading is always pahantvana, 
fr. pra-yhan). 

paharati, vb. (sa. pra-yhr) to 
beat, strike, cut; to strike at, hit, 
attack (w. acc., or rarely w. loc. or 
gen.); pr. 3.89. ~ati (kannam, “reaches 
his ear") 22,24; part. m. pl. „antā 
(bhūmim, muggarehi) 6,11; imp. 2. 
sg. wahi, 50,17; pot. 3. sg. weyya 
(brālmaņassa, B. has hareyya) Dh. 
389; aor. 3. sg. pahari (tam mukhe) 
12,10; 13,20. 50,1» (sīse kapparena); 
89,8; 1. sg. with, 51,8; 3. pē. ~wimsu, 
52,18; inf. mitum, 7,36; comp. witu- 
kima, mfn. desiring to beat, m. <o, 
29,25 (“to butt"); f. avā, 50,16; ger. 
eva; 13,21. 23,9. 36,3. 41,18. 50,9; — 
caus. II. *paharapeti, to let strike; 
imp. 2. sg. ~ehi (etai katipayehi pa- 
harehi) 55,8; aor. 3. sg. „vesi (ubho- 
su passesu) 55,14; ger. ~etvā (jàram 
tava sise) 513; — pp. pahata, m. 


— 
t — 


172 


«0, 12,1; ^. pl. ^an (lonajala-9, 
cakkhūni, "injured") 24,16; cp. pa- 
hata, pahara. 

pahassatha, pahatave, pa- 
hatum, v. pajahati. 

pahāna, x. (sa. prahina) aban- 
doning, giving up; nom. ~am (sab. 
bassa dukkhassa) Dh. 331. 

pahaya, ger., v. pajahāti. 

pahara, m. (sa. prahara) !)a 
stroke, blow; «om. ~o (thaddho) 
50,22; acc. pl. we, 55,15; instr, pl. 
„hi, 55,8; pahāra-sate (loc.) 55,12 
(a hundred stripes); eka-ppaharen’eva 
(instr.) v. eka*); daļha-pahāram 
(acc.) 30,13 == su-ppaharam, ib.; 
pāņi-ppahāra-saddena (instr.) “at 
the clapping of the hands”, 18,18. — 
2) the mark of a blow, wound; acc. 
wath, 50,24. 52,33; acc. pl. we, 6,21. 

pahinàti (& ati) vb. (sa. pra- 
Vlil) to send, send away (ace.); aor. 
a) (augm.) 3. sg. pàhesi (pannam) 
86,22; (dārakam) 81,12 [hence we have 
by false analogy a new verb paheti, 
pr. 8. sg.]; 5) 3. sg. pahini, 48,29; 
64,6 (sāsanam); 3. pl. pahinimsu 
(pannakare) 58,22; pp. v. next. 

pahita, mfn. (pp. pahiņāti, sa. 
prahita) sent, directed towards; acc. 
m. vam (pannākāram) 58,22; — pa- 
hitatta, mfn. (sa.. prahitatman, cp. 
atta?) whose mind is intent upon, 
energetic, resolute; acc. m. „am, 


103,17; padhana-°, 103,2 (v. h.); pl. 


M. mā, 104,9; acc. pl. ~e, 108,19 


(sāvake). 

pahina, mfn. (pp. pajahati; sa. 
prabina, ybā) thrown off, abandoned, 
ceased; ^. eam (tam rūpam Tathā- 
gatassa) 95,10; *pufifia-papa-°, mfn. 
“who has ceased to think of good and 
evil”, gen. m. ~assa, Dh. 39; *sabba- 
gantha-°, mfn. Dh. 90 (v. gantha); 
*O-m&na, mfn. free from pride, gen. 
m. ~assa, Dh. 94. 

pahtta, mfx. (sa. prabhūta, pp. 
pra-ybhü) much, abundant; s. ~am 
(sukaramaddavam) 78,2; (puññam) 
108,9. 


173 


pakata (or pakata) mfn. (fr. 
pakati, q. v.; sa. prakrta, cp. sa. pra- 
kata) ‘natural’, vulgar, universal; 
known, widely known, famous; m. ~o 
(sakalakappath) 16,15; 38,17; n. ~am 
(bhikkhusamghe) 29,28; comp. %-bī- 
bhaccha-sambādha-tthānā (disclosed) 
65,7. 

pūkāra, m. (& ».?) (sa. prākāra) 
a wall, rampart; wath (x.? perhaps 
we have to read: sabbaso va pana 
tesaīi: pākāro na hoti, “or else [be- 
cause] those [towns] have no fortifica- 
tion at all”) 91,19; thira-°, & dalha-? 
(v. h.); — *-parikkhitta, mfn. sur- 
rounded by a wall, 2, ~ar (nagaram) 
23,26; *°-vivara, ^. acc. «am, 90,34 
— pākārassa chinnatthanam, 91,30; 
*0-sandhi, f., acc. im, 90,34 = dvin- 
nam itthakanam  apagatatthanam, 
91,29. 

pacana (rarely pājana) n. (sa. 
prajana) a goad; *-yatthi, f. 71,29 
(= patoda-latthi, 98,6) v. yatthi. cp. 
páceti. 

pacina, mfn. (sa. pràcina) eastern; 
?-loka-dhatu, 32,30 (v. h.); *°-sisaka, 
mfn. with the head turned towards 
the east, x. «am (dibbasayanar) 
61,16. 

*paceti (& pajeti) vb. (sa. *pra- 
yaj, caus.) to drive (as cattle, acc.); 
pr. 8. sg. ~eti (gavo) Dh. 135. cp. 
picana. 

pátali, f. (— sa.) the trumpet 
flower tree (Bignonia suaveolens); 
*Citta-9, f. 59,2» (g. ».). 

pütha, m. (== sa.) reading, lec- 
ture; the text of a book, passage, 
lectio varians; Khuddaka-?, m. nom. 
pr. (q. v.). 

pana, m. (& rarely n. pl. (sa. 
prāņa) breath, life; a living being; 
pl. & sg. coll. living beings; nom. 
^0, 17,29; acc. mam, 60,17 (= jivi- 
tam, 60,4); eka-panath, 27,23; coll. 
97,10. Dh. 246; n. pl. ani, Dh. 270; 
gen. pl. —anam (sabba-°) ib.; *°-va- 
dhakamma, n. destroying life, acc. 
~am, 60,13. cp. next etc. 


pātimokkha 


panaka, m. (sa. pranaka) a little 
animal, a worm or insect; pl. «à, 
16,5. 

*pānaghātin, m(fn). (cp. sa. 
prāna-ghātaka) one who kills or mur- 
ders; m. nom. ~l, 17,29. 

pānātipāta, m. (sa. prānātipāta) 
destroying life, taking animal life; 
nom. ~O, 97,15; acc. mam, 15,31. 
17,86; abl. wii, 17,31; 81,22 (vera- 
mani), cp. pànam atimapeti, Dh. 246. 

pani, m. (= sa.) the hand; instr. 
~ini, 112,88; Dh. 285; loc. ~imlu, 
44,26; comp. °-ppahara-saddena, 18,18 
(v. h.) ep. tamba-panni (v. tamba). 

panin, mfn. (sa. pranin) living; 
subst. m. a living being; acc. inam, 
17,29; gen. pl. inum (+: panini) 
Dh, 135 (ep. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 81). 

pinupeta, mfn. (sa. prānūpeta) 
living, “while one's life lasts"; ace. 
m. sam (man, saranam gatai) 
69,20 (cp. upeta). 
pāta, m. (== sa.) falling (down 
or into); v. pindapata, m. 83,19. 

*Patanjali-mata, ». the doc- 
trine of Patanjali (g. v.); «cc. ~mi 
118,6. (Pātaūjalī- must either” be 
adj. == *Pataüjalya or subst. 
Pataijali; cp. sa. Pātafijala, m/n. & 
Pātaūjali <= Patañjali.) 

pātarāsa, m. (sa. prātar-āca) 
morning meal, breakfast; ace. ma, 
8,20; */-bhattari, 57,» (id.); bhutta-®, 
mfn. one who has eaten his breakfast, 
m. eO, 22,23. ep. pato. 

pati, f. (sa. patri) a cup, bowl; 
acc. «im, 56,5; tuccha-*, 56,27; 
punna-?, 27,18; bhatta-°, 34,13; loc. 
wiya, 56,96; pl. wiyo (suvanna-ra- 
jata-°) 61,97; instr. wili (id.) ib. 

patimokkha, n. (buddh. sa. 
pratimoksha, m., fr. prati-Vmuc, cp. 
SBE. XIII. p. XXvi) the moral law, 
the title of the oldest collection of 
moral precepts of the Buddhists; Joc. 
m~e (sarhvgro, “living restrained under 
the law") Dh. 185. 375 (cp. SBE. X. 


| p. 51 Note; Hardy, Eastern Mona- 


chism p. 8; a translation of the Pati- 


patu- : 
mokkha-precepts is given by Rhys 
Davids & Oldenberg, SBE. XIII. p. 
1-69.) 

pātu-, indecl. (before vowels: 
pātur-; sa. pradur) forth, in sight 
(only prefixed to the verbs karoti & 
bhavati and their derivatives) v. below. 

patum, inf., v. pivati. 

pātu-bhavati, vb. (sa, prādur- 
Vbhū) to become visible or clear, 
appear; pr. 3. pl. „anti, 66,20; aor. 
3, sg. pātur-ahosi, 67,31; pp. pātu- 
bhūta, n. ~am, 45,4. cp. next. 

pātu-bhāva, m. (sa. pradur- 
bhāva) becoming visible, manifestation, 
appearance; acc. wal (phalita-°) 
44.32. 

pateti, vb. (caus. patati; sa. 
pātayati) to cause to fall, let fall, 
drop, loose, throw down (acc.); part. 
m. «ento (dandakam) 13,21; aor. 8. 
Sg. ~esl, 29,27. 36,1; fut. 2. sg. ~es- 
sasi, 4,29; ger. ~wetva, 4,93. 12,81. 
23,9; pp. patita, m. ~o, Dh. 407. 

pato, adv. (sa. prātar, cp. pāta- 
rasa above) in the early morning; 
~ Và (nikkhamitva) "quite early in 
the morning", 14,31; ~ va tava hotu, 
“let it be till to-morrow”, 15,16. 

pātheyya, x. (sa. patheya; cp. 
patha) provisions for a journey, via- 
ticum; ~am, Dh. 235. 

pāda, m. (= sa.; cp. pada) !) 
the foot or leg (of a person or an 
animal), the foot (of a mountain, tree 
etc.), basis, foundation (?); nom. ~o 
(pabbata-) 14,9; instr. wena (gac- 
chantassa) 97,35; Joc. we, 76,1; pl. 
wii, 97,56; hattha-°, 99,13 (hands and 
feet) comp. 5,27; acc. pl. we, 49,6. 
57,16. 62,28; instr. „ehi, 40,25; pac- 
chima-°, 24,26 (hind feet); loc. nesu, 
59,8. 75,22 (sirasā nipatitva) cp. pā- 
da-mule (Joc.) “at one’s feet", 49,5. 
36,27; — padodaka, n., *°-kathalika, 
n., -pamsu, x, — raja, n., °-pa- 
ricārikā, f., %-pītha, m, ?-saūnata, 
mfn. (v. h.). — *thira-pakara-pada, 
mfn. whose fortifications have a strong 
foundation; n. «am, 91,30 (comment 


174 


on dalhuddapam). — *) the fourth 
part of a verse; abl. pl. ~ehi, 114,21. 
cp. catuppādika, mfn. 

padaka, mfn. (= sa.) having feet 
(e. c.); *sarabha-9, mfn. 42,9 (q. v.). 

paduka, f. E sa.) a shoe, slipper; 
acc. pl. „āyo (suvanna-°, "gilt slip- 
pers") 68,2; abi. pl. ^; &hi (do.) 68,16, 

pana, (= sa.) drinking, a 
drink; instr. wena (opp. anna) 20,26; 
comp. %-bhojana, x. (drink and food) 
loc. we, Dh. 249; dibba-°, n. 59,25 
(i. e. the liquor of the Devas); sura-°, 
surā-meraya- (q. v.). 

panaka, n. (= sa.) a drink, be- 
verage; *sakkhara-panakadihi (instr. 
pl.) “sugar-water and the like”, 18,27. 

paniya (or paniya), x. (= sa.) 
a drink, esp. water, drinking water; 
acc, ~ar, 1,12; instr. pàniyena, 83,13; 
"O-tittha, ^. a watering-place, 11,28 
(loc. ~e); vasita-°, n. 41,11 (g. v.). 

papa, mfn. (= sa.) bad, evil, 
wicked; m. ~o, Dh. 119 (opp. bhadra); 
n. subst. evil-doing, sin, crime (often 
esp, of sexual intercourse); nom. ~am 
(maya kata-°) 17,17; acc. „am, Dh. 
117 (opp. pufitia); 48,7 (unchastity) ; 
59,21; 85,26 (mukhasā); 104,34; gen. 
evassa (phalazh) 17,26; Dh. 183 (sab- 
ba-9); abl. <a, Dh. 116; loc. ~as- 
mim, ib.; pl. ~āni, Dh. 119. 265; 
gen. pl. ~anam, Dh. 265. 333 (pa- 
pan’); — cp. nippàpa, mfn., bahita-9, 
mfn. (v. h.); puūūa-pāpa-pahīna, 
mfn. (v. pahina); "-vagga, m. the 
9th chapter of Dh. — compar. ~iyo 
(or wiya) v. h. cp. next etc. 

papaka, mfn. (= sa.) bad, evil, 
wicked; f. ~ikā (gati) Dh. 310; ace. 
^Akam (ditthim) 91,16. Dh. 164; x. 
~ar (ditthigatarh) 90,24; (kammam) 
100,6; abl. pl. ~ehi (kammehi) 100,5; 
n. subst. ~am, evil-doing, 59,21. 

pàpa-kamma, x. (sa. pāpa- 
karman) wickedness, sin, crime; nom. 
~am, 51,7; acc. ^am (vācāya) 85,34; 
99,13, (Satthārā kata-°) 73,27; abl. 
"à, Dh, 127. 

papa-kammin, mfn. (sa. pāpa- 


175 


karmin) evil-doing; m; pl, ~ino, 
Dh. 126. 

pāpa-kārin, mfn. (= sa) = 
prec.; m. ~i, Dh. 15. 

pāpimat, mfn. (sa. pāpman) 
wicked, sinful; m. subst. ‘the wicked 
one’, 4. e. Māra; nom. „mā, 71,27 
(Maro); gen. ~mato (Marassa) 71,24; 
voc. ~ma, 71,51. 

papiya(s), compar. fr. papa (sa. 
pāpīyas) worse; [m. —o; n. ~am &] 
payiyo, Dh. 42. 76 (opp. seyyo). 

pāpunāti (& pappoti) vb. (sa. 
pra-Vāp) to arrive at, attain to, reach, 
obtain (acc. or gen. (dat.)); pr. 3. sg. 
pappoti (sukham) Dh. 27; 3. pl. 
papunanti (maranam) 6,3; mp. 3. 
sg. ~natu (varo, mama parisāya 
(gen. dat.) cp. 6,53) 6,26; pot. 3. sg. 
ene, Dh. 138; aor. 3. sg. ~ni, 6,32 
(w. gen. dat.); 20,5 (rukkhassa santi- 
kam); 42,32; 89,16; 1. sg. ~nim, 17,7; 
fut. 3. pl. «nissanti, 34,19; 2. pl. 
enissatha (vināsam) 32,28; ger. patva, 
17,11 (dukkham); 23,21 (dīpam); 30,4. 
38,11. 45,29. 87,23. 110,18; pp. patta 
(g. v.) as finite tense : m. «o, 30,25; 
n. ~am, 43,5 (= pāpuņi); caus. v. 
next. cp. patti, /. 

papeti, vb. (caus. pāpunāti; sa. 
prapayati) to cause one pul to reach 
or attain (acc. or gen. dat.); pr. 3. 
sg. ~eti (nāvam vināsam) 27,3; 
imp. 2. sg. ~ehi (varam aiüassa) 
7,8; fut. 1, sg. wessami (tam vina- 
sam) 5,10; inf. etum (vāram aññe- 
sam) 6,55; ger. ~etva (tam jīvitak- 
khaya) 4,32. 

pamado, aor. 2. 
jati.) 
*pāmokkha, mfn. (fr. pamukha, 
q. v.) eminent, famous; chief, principal; 
disā-%, mfn. (v. h.); brahmana-pà- 
mokkhe (acc. pl. the most eminent 
among the Br.) 61,24; Mahakassapa- 
pamokkha thera, the Theras whose 
chief was M., 110,15. 

*pàmojja, x. (fr. pamodati; cp. 
sa. pramoda) joy, delight; acc. ~am 
(piti-°, “happiness and joy") Dh. 374; 


sg. (v. pamaj- 


para-gu 


O-bahula, mfn, full of delight, m. ~o, 
Dh. 376. 

pāyāsa, m, n. (sa. payasa) rice 
boiled in milk, milk-porridge; gen. 
rvassa (vara-°, excellent milk-porridge) 
61,26. 

pāyāsi,pāyimsu, aor., v. payati. 

payeti, vb. (caus. pivati; sa. 
payayati) to give to drink (w. double 
acc.), to give suck (acc.); pr. 1. sg. 
„emi (nam) 58,33; imp. 2. sg. ~wehi, 
ib.; ger. ~wetva (asure dibbapānam) 
59,25. 

para, m. (= sa.) the opposite 
bank or shore, the other side; the 
highest end, metaph. — Nibbana; 
wai (prp. w. gen.) on the other side, 
beyond; 2,11 (samuddassa); comp. 
0-Gaiigaya (Joc.), on the other side of 
the Ganges, 1,4; nadī-pāre (Joc.) 
56,21; acc. ~ar (essanti) Dh. 86 
(perhaps to be taken as one word: 
pāram-essanti, “will pass over", SBE. 
X. p. 25); abl. (adv.) pārato, v. be- 
low; param a-pàram va, ‘neither the 
further nor the hither shore’, Dh. 385, 
& pārāpāram, ‘both shores’, ib, seem 
to be used metaph. in the sense of ‘this 
and the future existence, the whole 
existence’ (?) cp. oraparam, adv. 108,26 
(v. h.). 

para-ga, mfn. (= sa.) going to 
the opposite shore, crossing over, who 
has overcome or mastered, knowing 
thoroughly, versed in (gen. or loc.); 
m. ~O (tisu vedesu) 113,5; pl. wa 
(jāti-maranassa) 105,26. cp. pāra-gū. 

para-gata, mfn. (= sa.) who 
has reached the opposite shore (i. e. 
Nibbana); m. ~o, Dh. 414. 

*pàra-gavesin, mfn., looking 
for the other shore; m. pl. ~ino, 
Dh. 355. 

para-gamin, mfn. (= sa.) pass- 
ing over to the opposite shore; m. pl. 
~ino, Dh. 85. 

pàra-gü, mfn. (= para-ga, q. 
v.) nom. sg. m. „sū (tinnam vedānam, 
brāhmano) 16,23; (bhavassa) Dh. 348; 
(dvayesu dhammesu) Dh. 384. 


parato 


pārato, adv. (sa. paratas; abi. 
fr. pāra, g. 9.) on or to the further 
side; 83,21 (opp. orato). 

*pāramī, f. (& pāramitā, f.; 
buddh. sa. id.) perfection, accomplish- 
ment; virtue (esp. pl. ~iyo, the ten 
virtues : dana, sila, nekkhamma, 
khanti, mettā, pañňā, viriya, sacca, 
adhitthāna, upekkhā); sacca-?, 108,31; 
— paramigata, mfn. having attained 
to perfection; m. pl. nā (w. loc. 
saddhamme) 109,21. 

*Pariechattaka, m. (ep. sa. 
pārijātaka) nom. pr. of a tree in 
Devaloka, under which Sakka's throne 
(pandukambalasilisana) is placed; 
wO, 59,28. 

pāruta, mfn. (sa. prāvrta, pp. 
prā-yvr) covered, dressed; put on; m. 
„0 (sihacammena) 8,28; su-pāruta, 
mfn. duly dressed (i. e. according to 
the rules of the order) acc. m. ~ari 
(pabbajitam) 68,30. cp. next. 

pàrupati, eb. (sa. prā-Vvr) to 
cover, dress; put on (acc.); ger. witva 
(gadrabham sihacammena) 8,18; (sam- 
ghatiyo) 82,28; pp. pāruta (g. v.) cp. 
pārupana, x. |Tr. PM. p. 63; cy. 
apāruta & avapurapeti. | 

pārupana (or papurana) x. (sa. 
pravarana) an upper garment; nom. 
~am, 29,93 (cp. nivasana). 


pala(ka), m. (= sa.) guard, pro- 


tector keeper (e. c.); v. uyyàna-?, 
khetta-°, & gopala(ka), cp. Dhana- 
palaka & Smihghapàla, m. nom. pr. 

pàli (often written pali) f. (= sa.) 
a line, row, series; a holy text, reading 
or passage of the holy text; mom. 
sātthakathā pali (the text together 
with the commentary) 102,5; acc. „ir 
(viya, “as the text itself”) 114,30; 
~im (abhidhammassa, “a passage 
from the A.”) 113,15; pl. abl. «ihi 
(the verses ?) 114,21; pali-mattain, 
the text alone without the Comm. 
113,26. |Tr. PM, p. 69; Franke, An- 
zeige, BB. XXII. 296.). 

pàvaka, m. (= sa.) fire; nom. 
„0 (bhasmachanno) 106,3 = Dh. 


176 


71; aggi ~o, Dh, 140. (“lightning- 
fire” ?). | 

pàvacana, x. (sa. pravacana) 
speaking, recitation, discourse, esp. 
the words of Buddha, the holy scrip- 
tures (the suttas); mom. ~am (atita- 
satthukam) 79,3; „arh (Gotamassa) 
95,25. 

Pāvā, f. nom. pr. of a city of the 
Mallas (near Vesāli); nom. wa, 77,16; 
acc, wam, 77,21; loc. mayai, 77,19. 

pāvisi, aor, v. pavisati. 
. paisa, m. (sa. paca) 1) a snare, 
trap; acc. ~am (oddetva) 11,29; Zoe. 
ee, 11,50. — ?) = pasaka (v. next). 

pāsaka, m. (sa. pāgaka, cp. prā- 
saka) æ- die; acc. pl. wake (suvan- 
na-°, khipati) 48,5; pase = pasake, 
50,29; 9-khipana, n. throwing the 
dice, 48,23. 

pāsāņa, m. (sa. pashana) a stone, 
rock; mom. ~o, 3,1; voc. wa, 3,7; 
ace, vam, 2,32. 104,13; instr. wena, 
3,6; kala-9, a black rock, 24,21; *pi- 
tthi-° (v. .); °-tale, 10,7; °-ppamana, 
n. 8,8; %-pittha, n. 17,20; *-sakalikā, 
f. 17,22 (q. o.). 

pasada, m. (sa. prasada) a plat- 
form or terrace, the upper story of a 
house, a lofty building, palace; som. 
mo. (Vejayanta-9, g. v.) 60,24; acc. 
wath, 63,14; abl. ~a, 67,24; loc. we, 
50,6; pl. wa, 67,22; loc. pl. nesu, 
76,29; °-talato, 65,34 (v. tala); upari-", 
64,1: (v. h); metaph. paüüa-9, Dh. 
28 (v. h.). 

pasadika, mf». (sa. prāsādika; 
cp. pasada) kind, amiable; graceful, 
beautiful; m. ~o, 24,11. 

pāhesi, aor., v. pahiņāti. 

pi, indecl, (enclit. form of api. 
g. V.) 1) and, also; 2,25 (punadivase 
pi); 4,26 (tam pi); 5,31 (aiio pi); 
5,3 (so pi); 6,5 (aham pi); 7,17 
(etesam pi); 26; (tato pi); 29,5 
(pubbe pi) efc.; w. negation : nāpi, 
16,1.(negue); 97,15 (nor). — 2) empha- 
tically : very, even, although; 9,1 
(ciram pi); 7,13 (manussesu pi); 
27,27; 53,16; 68,21 (seyyathā pi nama); 


177 


106,2 (yathapi); 112,15 (idhāpi, cy. 
idha); — 20,29. 22,18. 24,17. 31,13. 
41,33. 57,3 etc.; pleonust. repeated 
114,23 (potthakesu pi tisu pi); w. 
negation : 4,25 (eka-maccham pi na); 
16,10. 17,18. 18,30. 27,23. (cp. kiūcāpi). 
— 5) Similarly used after word express- 
ing ‘quantity’ (numerals etc.) implying 
the notion of totality : sabbe pi, 3,24; 
ubho pi, 5,12; tayo pi, 11,26 (cp. te 
pi tayo, 13,6); dvihi pi, 12,2; cattaro 
pl, 14,10; sakalo pi, 16,13 ete. — *) 
but (vero; after a new subject at the 
beginning of a sentence): 9,3. 10,23. 
13,6. 23,15. 79,24 (but then). — 5) per- 
haps, probably, may be (w. foll. fut. 
or pof.): 7,16. 35,19; 18,15. 87,15. — 
9) repeated : š) both - - and; 4,14 (jale 
pi thale pi); 9,16. 67,8. 76,12; P) either 
- - or : 6,92, 35,5; 17,14 (whether - - or). 
— 7) prp. (prefix to verbs) v. pidahati 
(pithiyati), pilandhati (~apeti). 

pimsati, vb. (sa. ypish, pinashti) 
to crush, pound; to hurt, injure (acc.) ; 
part. med. n. ~ mánam (tassa ma- 
tthakam) 24,5. 

pitaka, n. (= sa.) a basket; a 
collection of sacred books (‘a basket 
of oral tradition’, cp. Tr. PM. p. 67 
—68). The Buddhist canonical works 
are divided in 3 great collections : 
ti-pitaka, x. (g. v., cp. tepitaka) viz. 
a) Vinaya-pitaka, 102,16-17; P) (Sutta-) 
or Suttanta-p. 102,13 (which is also 
named àgama-p. 110,5); °) Abhi- 
dhamma-p. 102,13 (cp. dhamma?*)). 
The term pitaka is also applied to 
the last book of the Sutta-pitaka : 
Cariyā-pitaka (g. v.). — *Pitaka-ttaya, 
n. = ti-pitaka, acc. „am, 113,18. 
114,11; loc. we, 114,25. 

pittha, w. (& pitthi, f., v. next) 
(sa. prshtha) the back; the hinder 
part or upper side of anything, top, 
surface; pasana-°, x. the top of a 
rock, acc. «am, 17,0; kavata-°, n. 
84,12 (v. h.; in this comp. and in 
pittha-samghata(ka) n. 91,21 (comm. 
on torana) pittha seems to have the 
signification of ‘post, door-post’; cp. 

Pāli Glossary. i: 


AU! U U U U U U U U u... ............ ... .. ...... .............. . . .. ............... .... ... . U u. ...... ..... ..  ............ 9 T Éas!t& 


pitta 


sayana-pittham, ‘bed-side’, 41,30); 
instr. & loc. (at the end of comp.) 
are often used prepositionally — along, 
over; beside, on efc,; instr. wena 
(samudda-? gacchanto, “passing the 
ocean") 23,21. 60,6; (udaka-?) 28,10; 
loc, pitthe, 5,17 (paiika-°); 16,18 (ta- 
runa-dabbatina-?); 20,7. 41,95. 65,4 
(sayana-°); 23,11. 59,33 (samudda-'); 
45,52 (hatthi-"). cp. SBE. XX. 105. 

pitthi. f. (sa. prshtha & prshthi) 
== pittha [cp. Tr. PM. p. 55; Franke, 
Anzeige DB. XX. 287]; nom. ~i 
(rucirā) 10,19; acc. with, 1,17. 46,5; 
abl. ~ito, 2,5. 8,17; adv. ~ito «ito 
(upajjhayassa, ‘hot-foot upon’) 88,23; 
loc. ~wiyam, 52,33, 55,12; *°-passe, 
behind (w. gen.) 50,18 (v. passa); 
*.pásana, m. a rock in the surface 
of the water, or a flat rock, a bare 
rocky ground; ~o, 2,22; loc. ne, 2,31. 
10,29 (cp. pasana-pittha, 17,20). 

pinda, m, (= sa.) a lump of food, 
alms of food (received by the Buddhist 
monks in their alms-bowl); acc. ~am 
(rattha-°, “the charity of the land") 
107, = Dh. 308; dat. vaya (for 
alms) 76,17. 86,5. — *pinda-cāra, m. 
wandering about for alms, 85,2 (°-a- 
tthāya). — pinda-pàta, m. the food 
received in the alms-bowl, 83,12. 97,8; 
0-patikkanta, m. one who has returned 
from seeking alms, 86,5 (~0). cp. next. 

pindi, f. (sa. pindi) a ball, lump; 
a cluster or bunch of fruits; acc. ir 
(amba-°) 15,2; comp. pakka-phala-®, 
2,1. 

pitar, m. (sa. pitr) father; nom. 
pita, 87,10. 108,15; (acc. ~aram, loc. 
~ari); the weak stem is pitu (or piti), 
hence gen. (dat.) sg. pitu, 24,13. 56,31. 
87,14 & pituno, 69,22 (after the ana- 
logy of u-stems); pl. nom. acc. ~aro, 
22.13 (mata-°, parents); gen. ~unnam 
(do.) 31,18; loe. usu (do.) 7,24; pitā- 
putte, acc. pl. a father and a son, 
32,18; pity-hadayam, a father’s heart, 
64,17. cp. petteyyatā, f. 

pitta. n. (= sa.) bile; nom. „art, 
82,4 == 97,22; 108,2. 


19 


ad 


pithiyati 


pithiyati, vb. (pass. pidahati; 
sa. (a)pi-Vdhā; the Burmese write 
pidhiyati, v. Tr. PM. p. 6207) to be 
covered or shut; to shut, close (inér.); 
pr. 3. sg. mati, Dh. 173; aor. 3. pl. 
„imsu (akkhini) 3,19. 

pidahati, vb. (sa. (a)pi-ydhā) 
to cover, conceal; to shut, close (acc.); 
part. med. f. ~mana (tassa akkhini) 
50,14; inf. itum (mukham) 13,18; 
ger. pidhaya (dvaram) 6,14; pass. 
pithiyati, pp. pihita (g. v.). 

pipati, vb., v. pivati. 

pipasa, f. (= sa.) thirst; v. khu- 
ppipasa. 

pipilika, f. (= sa.) an ant; nom. 
nā (eka) 53,19; pl. mā, 53,30; gen. 
pl. „ānam, 53,16. cp. kipillikā. 

piya, mfn. (sa. priya) beloved, 
dear; pleasant, agreeable; n. ~am, 55,1; 
abl, ~ato, Dh. 212 ("from pleasure”); 
n. pl. vāni (beloved objects or plea- 
sures) 55,1; piya == piyāni, 55,9; 
instr. abl, —ehi, 67,10. 106,25 = Dh. 
210; gen. ~anlam] 106,26; — subst. 
m. == friend, acc. „am, Dh. 220; — 
comp. piyāpāya, m. (v. apāya); piya- 
ppiyam, ^. pleasant and unpleasant, 
Dh. 211 (cp. a-ppiya, mfn.); piya-ggà- 
hin, mfn. grasping at pleasure, m. 
el, Dh. 209; °-bhanda, 54,34; °-ma- 
tulaka, 5,5; "-samvasa, 11,27 (v. h.); 
Piya-vagga, m. the XVI‘ chapter of 
Dh. — compar. piyatara, mfn. 54,5 
(m. ~0) cp. next. 

piyayati, vb. (denom. fr. piya; 
sa. priyàyate) to be fond of, love, 
fondle; part. med. f. ~mana, 9,2. 

*pilandhati, vb. (denom. fr. pi- 
landha = sa. pi-naddha, api-Vnah) 


to dress, deck, decorate (w. double | 


acc.); to deck oneself with (acc.); 
ger. „itvā (pupphani) 41,7. ~ caus. 
*pilandhāpeti; ger. ~etva (mam pu- 
pphāni) 33,s. cp. onaddha, upa-nay- 
hati, san-nayhati. (Tr. PM. p. 55.) 
pilavati, vb., v. palavati. 
*pilotikā, f. (rarely x.) cloth, 
stuff (made of hair, worn by poor 
people; felt?) x. pl. „āni (jinnakani) 


178 


57,5. If this word is not a loanword 
[Trenckner refers to Syriac piloto fr. 
Greek adwrtvs (?)] then it is probably 
derived from sa. plota = prota, mn. 

pivati (or pipati) vb, (sa. ypà, 
pibati) to drink; pr. 3. sg. ~ati (maj- 
jam) 97,11; 2. sg. „asi (suram) 74,7; 
part, nom. m. 2) pivam, Dh, 205; 
b) pivanto, 45,28; pl. „antā, 74,4; 
imp. 2. sg. piva, 22,30. 111,20; 2. pē. 
watha, 21,5; fut. 2. sg. ~issasi, 56,22; 
1. sg. „issāmi, 22,32; inf. pātum, 
11,30; ger. *) pitva, Dh. 205; P) pi- 
vitvā, 1,12 etc.; pp. pita (g. v.); caus. 
pāyeti (g. v.) cp. pana, pānīya, pitin, 
pipāsā. . 

pihaka, x. (sa. plihan, m.) the 
spleen; nom. ~am, 82,3 — 97,21. 

pihita, mfn. (pp. pidahati; sa. 
pihita) covered, shut, closed; *°-dvara, 
mfn. whose doors are barred, loc, m. 
~e (bhavane) 41,29. | 

piheti (or pihayati) vb. (sa. \/sprh, 
<a to desire (acc. or gen.); 
to envy (gen. pers.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti 
(pihet’attanuyoginam, gen. pl.) Dh. - 
209; 3. pl. ~wayanti, Dh. 94; Dh. 
181 (according to the metre : pihenti); 
part, nom. m. -ayam (aūiiesam) 
Dh. 365. | 
. pitha(ka), n. (= sa.) a chair, 
stool; nom. «am, 84,15; .acc. ~am, 
83,18 (hettha-9, v. h.); 83,29 (janta- 
ghara-9 v. À.); ioc. wake, 87,17; — 
pàda-9, x. a foot-stool, «om. ~am, 
83,6. 

pinita, mfn. (pp. pineti; sa. caus. 
prinayati, pri) satisfied, pleased, de- 
lighted; f. ~ita (yakkhī) 111,35. cp. 
piya, piti. 

pita, mfn. (pp. pivati; = sa.) 
drunk or having drunk; gen. m. ~wassa 
(yaguin) “when he has drunk it”, 
82,20. 

piti, f. (sa. priti) pleasure, joy; 
acc. «im (buddharammanam) 28,6 
(cp. ārammaņa); ?-p&mojja, x. Dh. 
374 (v. h.); *%-bhakkha, mfn. “feeding 
on happiness”, pl. m. ~& (devā yathā) 
Dh. 200; *°-somanassa-jata, mfn. 


179 


64,13 (v. jàta); — *dhamma-piti, f. 
delighting in the dhamma, Dh. 205 
(°-rasamh); *dhamma-piti, m(fn). id. 
Dh. 79 (so all Mss; the comm. takes 
it — dhamma-pitin (i. e. payako, 
pivanto), but I dont know whether 
the word pitin (drinking) is found 
elsewhere in the Pali texts), 

pitin, mfn. (sa. pitin, e. c.) drink- 
ing (v. piti & dhamma-?). 

pileti, vb. (sa. ypid, pidayati) 
to press, squeeze, wring; to hurt, an- 
noy, oppress (acc.); ger. ~etva (pab- 
batam) 16,16; (colakam) 84,21; 45,1 
(without obj. oppressing); pp. pilita, 
vexed, annoyed, m. ~o (surhsumārena) 
108,25. 

puggala, m. (sa. pudgala) a per- 
son; personality, individuality, the Ego 
or individual soul; vom. ~O, 3,94. 
92,0; na h'ettha ~o upalabbhati, 
97,2. cp. patipuggala & next, 

Puggala-paniüatti, f. nom. pr. 
of a canonical Pāli work, the 4* part 
of the Abhidhamma-pitaka; 102,12. 

pucimanda, m. (sa. picumanda 
or °-marda) another name of the Nimb 


tree (v. nimba); ace. pl. ~e, 38,1; | 


*0_narivara, mfn, surrounded by Nimb 
trees, m. ~o (ambo) 37,33. 
pucchati, vb. (sa. yprach, prc- 
chati) to ask, question (acc. pers. d 
rei); pr. 3. sg. mati, 91,4; 8. pl. 
wanti, 21,9; 2. pl. watha, 88,9; part. 
m. ~anto, 9,25; pl, „antā (Maha- 
sattam samuddassa namam) 25,24; 
imp. 2. pl. watha, 79,18; pot, 3. sg. 
eweyya, 94,s9-34; 2. pl. weyyatha 
(mam imam kāranam) 17,1; 79;24; 
fut. 1. sg. wissami, 56,7; aor. 2.—3. 
sg. apucchi, 91,10 (Bhagavantam 
paüham); 112,8; pucchi, 9,17; 3. pl. 
apucchisum, 110,30; pucchirsu, 4,5; 
ger. witva, 29,531; 43,26 (vayarh); 86,52 
(kumārikam paūhe); 109,15; grd. m. 
ewitabbo (upajjhāyo pāniyena, he 
ought to be offered water to drink 
83,13; cp. a-puccha, mfn.; — pp. ° 
puttha, m. ~o, 25,26 (evar tehi ~); 
85,14 (katakammam); 90,26 (pañham); 


putta 


f. mā, 73,13; P) pucchito, m. 54,27; 
91,15; comp. maya pucchita-paiiho, 
88,11. cp. paüha & next. 

puccha, f. (sa. prechā) question; 
acc. «am, 91,15; gen. pl. „ānam 
(sabba-?) 91,14. 

pujja, mfn. (grd., v. pujeti). 

puija, m. (= sa.) a heap, mass, 
quantity, multitude; loc. ~e (padu- 
ma-°) 16,7; comp. ratta-kambala-^, 
5,27. 

puiiia, n. (sa. punya) virtue, good 
work, moral or religious merit (opp. 
papa); nom. acc. ~am, Dh. 196. 331; 
103,9; 107,87 = Dh. 18; 106,6 == Dh. 
267; instr. wena, 103,4; pl. nāni 
(katvā) 8,15; dānādīni ~, 17,34; 103,7; 
gen. pl. „ānari (phala) 58,12; 103,15 
(read : puiifiena ?). — comp. kata-puiina, 
mfn. one who has done good, virtuous, 
M. ~0, 107,26 — Dh. 18; acc. ~am, 
Dh. 220; — %-pāpa-pahīna, mfn. (v. 
pahina); — *°-pekha, mfn. (v. h.). 

. puññavat, mfn. (sa. punyavat) 
full of merit, virtuous, fortunate; f. 
nVātī, 56,1. 

puttha!, mfn. (pp. v. pucchati). 

puttha?, mfn. (sa. pushta, pp. 
vpush; cp. posāpeti) nourished, fed; 
m. ~o (nivapa-®, g. v.) Dh. 325. ep. 
phuta & phuttha. 

punna, mfn. (pp. pürati, pureti; 
sa. pürna) full; %-ghata, 62,6 (g. v.); 
pati, 27,18. 

Punna, m. nom. pr. of a thera; 
nom. ~o (dhammakathikānam [aggo]) 
109,9. 

punna-canda, m. (sa. purna- 
candra) the full moon; acc. «ai, 
42,5; *%-mukha, mfn. with a face 
splendent like the full moon, m. ~o 
(Gotamabuddho) 87,6. 

punnama, f. (sa. pürnimà (pur- 
ņamā)) the day of full moon; gen. 
nūya, 61,5; punnamuposathadivasa, 
22,19 (v. uposatha). 

putta, m. (sa. putra) a son, pl. 
children (also the brood of animals); 
acc. ~ar, 7,29; pl. nom. «a, 105,5; 
acc, ee, 13,4; instr. ~ehi, 105,28; at 


12* 


puttaka 


the end of comp. it is often used as 
designation of family or caste, as me- 
tronymic or patronymic, v. kammara-®, 
kula-°, khara-°, deva-®, raja-°, ludda-®, 
setthi-°, Maluükya-^; cp. ayya-putta, 
bhagini-putta; dvandva : °-dara, m. 
(q. v.); °-dhitasu (Joe. pl; v. dhītar); 
€.pasu-, Dh. 287; pitā-putte, acc. 
pl. 32,18. | 

puttaka, m. (sa. putraka) a little 
son or child; nom. ~o (eka-9, an only 
son) 23,6; acc. ^am, 6,33; acc. pl. 
we, 12,55 (young ra 

*puttimat, mfn. (probably arisen 
by confusion between sa. putrin & 
*putra-mat = putravat) having sons; 
nom, m. ~ma, 105,28-31. 

puthu, 1) mfn. (sa. prthu) exten- 
sive, broad, large; manifold, diverse, 
common, general; acc. m. pl. ~U (sa- 
mana-brühmane) 19,2. — *) indecl. 
(adv.) extensively, far and wide, all 
round; 104,5 (cp. sa. prthak & next.) 

puthujjana, m. (sa. prthag-jana) 
a vile or ignorant person, a fool; coll, 
common people, the vulgar; loc. we 
(andhabhūte) Dh. 59; a-puthujjana- 
sevita, Dh. 272 (q.v.); 9-kalakiriyà, 
f. 87,29 (g. v.) cp. pothujjanika. 

puna (& punar) adv. (before 
. vowels also pun' or punar-, punad-; 
sa. punar) back, again; ~ gantvā, 
4,25; ~ ānetvā, 4,17; at the beginning 
of a sentence: 53,29; 63,19 (pun'eka- 
divasaih); puna pi, again, once more, 
8,8. 53,31; punar eva (do.) Dh. 338; 
puna...va, again as before, 38,4; 
w. negation: na punam, not again, 
no more, Dh. 238. 348; puna-násak- 
khi, 55,17; na... và puna (nor yet) 


Dh. 271; puna asūrānam an-agama- 


nattbāya, in order that they might 
not come back again, 60,26. The en- 


clitic form of this word is pana (4. t.) . 


cp. next etc. 
*puna-divasa, m. the next day; 
loc. we, 2,25. é 
punappuna(m), adv. (sa. punah- 
punar) again and again, repeatedly; 
25,18. 73,4; ~am, 52,23. 108,5. 


180 


punabbhava, m. (sa. punar- 
bhava) new birth, transmigration; 
nom, ~0, 108,18. cp. pono(b)bhavika. 
*punā-vāre, adv. (loc., cp. vara) 
another time, the next time; 18,17. 
puppha, x. (sa. pushpa) a flower; 
acc, ~ar, 106,» = Dh. 49; pl. ~ani, 
33,8; 37,16 (akala-°); 41,6 (nana-°); 
Dh. 47 (~dn’eva); instr. ~ehi, 20,9 
(dibba-gandha-?); 34,6 (vana-°); gen. 
wanam, 65,29; — comp. pupphanta- 
rehi, 62,12 (v. antara); *°-kannika- 
sadisa, mfn. 7,29 (v. kannika); *°-gan- 
dha, m. the scent of flowers, ~o, Dh. 
54; *0-rāsi, m. a heap of fl, Dh. 53 
(abl. wimha); *°-vagga, m. the IVth 
chapter of Dh, 
pupphati, eb. (denom. fr. pu- 
ppha; sa. pushpyati) to flower, blos- 
som; pr. 3. 89. eati, 59,31; pp. ~ita, 
gen. f. ya, 59,29; — caus. *puppha- 
peti, to cause to flower or blossom; part. 
m. «ento (akāla-pupphāni) 37,16. 
pubba!, m. (sa, püya) pus, puru- 
lent matter; nom. ~0, 82,4 — 97,22. 
pubba?, mfn. (sa. pūrva) first, 
former; except loc. pubbe (adv. q. v.) 
it is only used in comp. like "-kamma, 
n. & %-nimitta, x. (g. v.) and esp. at 
the end of adj. comp. whose first part is 
a past participle, implying the sense 
of ‘before’, with a negation : ‘not be- 
fore, never’: dittha-pubba, mfx. seen 
before, m. ~o (na maya, 1 have never 
seen (before this day)) 7,13; ito me 
tinnah samvaccharānam matthake 
Satthā ~o, it is three years since I 
saw the master, 87,8; the same comp. 
is also used in an active sense (w. obj. 
acc.) : aliiapurisam ditthapubbam 
itthim, a woman who has seen another 
man before, 48,13 (but this construc- 
tion may probably have arisen through 
a dissolution of a longer comp. *añña- 
purisa-dittha-pubba, mfx.); dinna- 
pubba, mfn. given before, v. a-dinna; 
cp. a-pubba, anu-pubba & next. 
pubbangama, mfn. (sa. pürvam- 
gama) preceeding, going before, leading, 
chief; v. mano-°, 


181 


purohita 


pubbanha, w. (sa. pürvahna) | comp. °-bhave, in a previous existence, 
morning, forenoon; *°-samaya, m. id.; | 58,11; °-nayen’eva, v. naya; °-sadisa, 


acc. ~am, in the morning, 76,15; rat. 
tindivam-pubbanhádisu (Zoc.) 88,22. 

pubbapara, mfn. (sa. pürvapara) 
being before and after; successive; m. 
pl. acc. „āni (scil. akkharani, in the 
right order) Dh. 352; °-vasena, ac- 
cording to the consecutive order, 114,20 
(cp. vasa). 

pubbe, adv. (loc. fr. pubba, cp. 
sa. purvam) before, formerly, in times 
past; 28,15 (~ pi); 54,12; 69,28; 85,19; 
86,7 (~ va). — *9-nivāsa, m. (cp. sa. 
pūrva-nivāsa) ‘former habitation’, i. c. 
former existences, acc. ~am, Dh. 423. 

pura, n. (= sa.) a city, town; 
nom, ~am (yakkha-°) 112,12; acc. 
~am (deva-°) 27,31. cp. antopura. 

pura(s), indecl. (sa. puras) at the 
beginning of comp. pura-? or puro-° 
(v. below) = pure (g. v.) cp. purato, 
purima. 

purakkhata, mfn. (sa. ` puras- 
krta) ‘placed before’, followed by, 
filled with, attacked or injured by 
(gen. or instr.); f. nā (paja, tasinaya) 
Dh. 342. 


purato, adv. & prp. (w. gen.) (sa. 
puratas) before (of place), in front 
of; forward, further; ~ thapetva, 
35,27; ~ paticchadetva (opp. pac- 
chato) 83,32; after gen, assa ~, 23,1; 
tesam ~, 425; rathassa ~, 54,9; 
mātu ~, 62,23; 76,36. 94,29. 
puratthā, adv. (sa. purastāt) 
before, in front; hence : *puratthima, 
mfn. eastern; acc. f. ~am (disam) 
95,5 (opp. pacchimari). | 
puràna, mfn. sa.) ancient, 
old; —-gàma, m. 35,22 (a ruined vil- 
lage); °-jatila, m. who has been Jatila 
before, 70,22; %-setthikula, x. 55,5 
(g. v.); n. pl. purāņāni, events of the 
past, Dh. 156. cp. poranaka. 
*purima, mfn. (fr. pura(s), cp. 
pure) former, previous, first; the same 
as before; instr, m. ~ena (kathasal- 
lapena) 94,22; gen. «assa, 101,22; 
loc. we (yame, the first watch) 99,19; 


mfn. happening as before (or above), 
^. vam (sabbam) 31,28. 

purisa (rarely pūrisa), 1. (sa. 
purusha) a man, person; nom. ~O, 
92,7; Dh. 117 (pūriso); 36,3 (rukkhe 
nisinna-9) ; 86,19 (bhita-°); sap-puriso, 
Dh. 54 (cp. sat & santa?); voc. ~a, 
23,31. 101,6; 76,3 (mogha-°); ace. 
~am, 10,26; gen. ~wassa, 9,13; pl. nā 
(raja-°, royal servants) 40,3. 74,7; Dh. 
235 (Yama-°, g. v.); acc. pl. we, 
74,4; — comp. purisādhama, m. acc. 
pl. «e, low people, Dh. 78 (cp. 
adhama); *puris@jaiiia, m. a remark- 
able man, supernatural person (i.c. 
Buddha) Dh. 193 (cp. ajañña); puri- 
suttama, m. acc. pl. ~e, the best 
people, Dh. 78 (cp. uttama); puri 
santara, m., v. antara*; *-gabbha, 
m. (g. v); 9-vadha, murder, 74,14 
(9-danda, g. v.); 9-sahassam, x. a 
thousand men, 34,9; — eka-purisika, 
f. & nip-purisa, mfn. (v. h.) cp. po- 
risa & posa. 

pure, adv. (sa. puras) in front, 
before, formerly; ~ ca paccha ca 
majjhe ca, Dh. 421; munca « (“give 
up what is before") Dh. 348; of time : 
37,30. 47,1. 61,5. Dh. 326 (once, for- 
merly); 108,15 (in former births); 85,5 
(id. = pubbe atitajatiyam, 85,12). 
cp. pura(s) (pura-, puro-) & next. 

purekkhāra, m. (sa. puraskāra) 
‘placing before’, intention; giving pre- 
ference to, preference, precedence; acc. 
e Am (bhikkhusu) Dh. 73. cp. pu- 
rakkhata, 

*pure-dvāra, n. the front door 
of a house (opp. pacchima-dvāra); 
instr, ~ena (nikkhamantam, by the 
front door) 12,10; Joc. we (dārūni 
nikkhipitva) 57,13. 

purohita, m. (= sa.) a family 
priest, a king’s domestic chaplain; ~o, 
48.9; instr. wena, 48,5; gen. ~assa, 
45,21; *°-brahmana, m. id.; gen. wassa, 
51,19; *%-tthāna, x, the rank or situa- 


pūjana 


tion of a p., loc. we, 45,29 (cp. Fick, 
Soc. Glied. p. 107—117). 

pūjana, x. & pūjanā, f. (sa. 
pūjana, s.) worship, homage, adora- 
tion; nom. ~a (sa) Dh. 106. 

puja, f. (= sa.) worship, honour, 
care, €(c.; acc. «am, 37,31; acc. pl. 
wi, Dh. 73; — pūjāraha, mfn. (sa. 
pūjārha) deserving homage; acc. pl. 
m. ~e, Dh. 195 (cp. araha). 

pujeti, vb. (sa. pujayati, ypūj) 
to honour, worship, revere (acc.); part. 
gen. m. ~wayato (pujarahe) Dh. 195; 
pot. 3. sg. waye (bhavitattanam) Dh. 
106; aor. 3. pl. a-pūjesum (kākam 
mamsena) 18,5; ger. netvā, 34,7; 
pp. pūjita, m. «o, Dh. 303; grd. 
pujia, mfn., v. a-pujja. cp. pujana 
(nā), puja. 

puti, mfn. (= sa.) stinking, foul, 
putrid; f. stink, stench; *9-sandeha, 
m. a heap of corruption, ~o, 107,8 = 
Dh. 148. | 

*pūti-latā, f. name of a certain 
kind of creeper or shrub; acc. ~am, 
105,19; according to the comment Jat, 
I. p. 177,6 & Dhpd. (1855) p. 313,5 
[read : taruna pi galocilata putilatà] 
it is another name of the young (or 
soft) galoci-creeper. 

pūrana, mf(~i)n. (= sa.) filling, 
completing; v. Manoratha-purani. 

purati, vb. (pass. Vpī, pūr, sa. 
püryate & ~ti) to be filled; pr. 3. 
sg. ~ati, Dh. 121-22; pp. punna & 
caus. püreti (q. v.). | 

pürisa, m. = purisa (g. v.). 

vūreti, vb. (caus. ypr, pir, sa. 
pürayati) to fill (acc.) with (gen. or 
instr.) ; to fulfill, complete (acc.); part. 
m. wayanto, 105,21; part. med. m. 
„ayamāno (saggapatham) 34,29; aor. 
3. sg. „esi (tuccha-patim yaguya) 
56,28;  devanagaram, devapuram, 
saggapadam (or saggapatham) pū- 
resi is a frequently occurring expres- 
sion for ‘going to heaven’, ox ‘attaining 
heavenly bliss’: 17,34. 27,31. 44,15 
(34,29); aor. 3. med. (= aor. 3. pass.) 
pūrayittha (“was filled with”, instr.) 


aaa A MM ————————————— a M = 


182 


28,29; ger. wetva (pātiyo pāyāsassa) 
61,27; (siam, “fulfilling the moral 
law") 16,19; pp. purita, filled, n. ~ar 
(uyyānam) 6,16; pass. pūrati (v. 
above). 

pūva (rarely pūpa), m. (£ n.) (sa. 
pupa, m.) a cake; acc. ~am (a rice- 
cake) 57,19-21; °-khanda, m. n. 53,18 
(v. h.). | 

pe, indecl, a syllable indicating 
abbreviation == ‘and so on’ (in the 
same way); 92,4 (cp. 89,25, etc.); 
92,s2-s3. 93,1-5 (cp. 89,28-29, v6 
93,29-51. 94,4 (do.); 96,19-21 (= 66,13); 
100,23-24 (== 100,12); instead of pe 
we find also frequently pa or la (g. v.), 
and in the Birm. Mss, gha is similarly 
used (probably arisen Širšugh corrup- 
tion of the letters pe or pa-la). Ac- 
cording to the nati¥é comm, pe is an 
abridgment of peyyāla, m. n., which 
most likely is another form of pari- 
yaya (g. v.) i. e. ‘repetition’ Spal 
yaya, *payyāla| cp. Oldenberg, KZ. 
25,9321; Tr. PM. p. 66. Buddh. sa. pe- 
yāla & preyāla, v. Windisch, Māra 
und Buddha, p. 315. 

pekkha(ka), mfn. (e. c. = sa. 
preksha, f. & prekshaka, mfn.) see- 
ing, regarding, looking at; *puñña- 
pekha, mfn. aiming at merit, Dh. 108. 

pekkhati, vb. (sa. pra-yiksh) 
to look at, regard, wiew (acc.); part. / 
nom. m. «am (attham anāgatar, 
foreseeing) 112,4; part. med. m. 
emàno (ti ~) 47,26. cp. prec. 

*pekkhuņa (or pekhuna), n., a 
tail feather (esp. that of a peacock); 
pl. àni (vyāmamattāni) 10,20; citra-°, 
mfn. 10,10 (v. h.). — The etymology 
of this word is unknown; but it may 
be akin either to pakkha (g. v.), or 
to piñja, x. (cp. sa. piccha), by which 
it i ud "in the ARN Jüt. I, 
207,27 & VI, 218,29. Pischel, Gr. § 89, 
refers to sa. prenkhana, Prákr. pe- 
huna; cp. Weber, Ind. Str. III, 396. 

pekha, pekhuna, v. pekkha, 
pekkhuna. 

pecca, adv. (orig. ger. fr. pra- 


183 


Vi, sa. pretya) after death, in the 
next world; 74,2; 107,26 — Dh. 18 
(opp. idha). cp. next. 
peta, mfn. (sa. preta, pp. pra-y1) 
dead, deceased; m. the spirit of a dead 
person, a ghost, demon; nom. ~o, 
84,32; acc. ^, am, 85,2; *sükara-mukha-^, 
a peta with a pig’s mouth, 84,27; *sū- 
kara-peta-vatthu, the story of that 
peta, 86,10. peti, f. (g. v.). 
Peta-vatthu, n. nom. pr. of a 
canonical Pali-book (a section of the 
Khuddaka-Nikaya); specimen thereof 
(with the comm. of Dhammapāla [Para- 
mattha-dipani]) p. 84,25—86,10. 
*peti, f., a female peta (q. v.) ; pi. 
ACC. wly0, 29,16-35. | 
*petteyyatā, f. (fr. pitar through 
*petteyya, mfn.) the state of a father; 
Dh. 332. cp. matteyyata, f. | 
pema, n. (sa. preman, m. n.) love, 
affection; abl. ~ato, Dh. 213. 
peyyala, m. n., v. pe. 
*pesakara, m. (fr. sa. *pegas- 
kāra?) a weaver; °geha, n. 88,5; 
0-dhitar, f. 86,15; %-sālā, f. 88,5 (v. 
h.) cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 211. 
*pesanaka, mfn. (fr. pesana, x. 
‘sending’, errand, commission; 8G. 
preshana) one who sends a message; 
only in the comp. °-cora, m. pl. robbers 
who use to despatch one to fetch the 
ransom, 32,15, ete. 
pesala, mfn. (sa. pecala), beauti- 
ful, lovely; skilful, clever; su-pesalo, 
m. (catuppado) 30,s. 
pesi, f. (sa. peçi) a small piece 
of flesh or meat; the foetus shortly 
after conception; gen. ~wiya, 99,1. 
pesikà, f. (sa. pegika) a piece, 
stick (esp. of bamboo); instr. „vāja 
(velu-°) 52,31. | 
pesuiia, n. (sa. paigunya) back- 
biting, calumny; *°-karaka, m. a slan- 
derous person, gen. ~assa, 42,7. 
peseti, vb. (sa. preshayati, caus. 
pra-yish) to send, send forth or away 
(acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (pannakaram) 
64,27; 3. pl. wenti, 32,18; imp. 2. 


porisa 


ento, 37,4; aor. 3. sg. „vesi, 24,30; 
ger. ~wetva, 65,26. cp. pesanaka. 
pokkhara, v. (sa. pushkara, cp. 
paushkara) a lotus-flower, esp. the 
blue lotus; acc. pl. ~e (= pokkha- 
rani?) 111,9; °-patta, x. a lotus-leaf, 
loc. ~e, Dh. 401. 
pokkharani, f. (sa. pushkarini 
& paushkarini) a lotus-tank; ace. 
eim, 58,98. 111,7; loc. wiyam, 52,28. 
*pokkharatā, f. (fr. pokkhara) 
beauty; instr. ~aya (vanna-°, beauty 
of complexion) Dh. 262. 
Potthapada, m. (cp. sa. proshta- 
pada) wom. pr. of a parrot; nom. ~o, 9,8. 
pota(ka), m. & potikā, f. (= 
sa.) a young animal; assa-pota-°, 2,18; 
assa-potaka-°, 5,29; suka-potaka, m. 
acc. pl. ~e, 9,11; supanna-potaka, 
pl. 60,8; hamsa-potakassa, gen. m. 
10,21; %-potikā, f. 10,1. 
potthaka, m. n. (sa. pustaka) a 
book or manuscript; acc. «an, 114,16; 
acc. pl. «e, 114,8; loc. pl. „esu, 
52,1 (porana-°); 52,14, 114,92; °-dva- 
yam, 114,18 (two books); °-ttayah, 
114,19 (three books). 
*pothujjanika, mfn. (fr. pu- 
thujjana) vulgar; m. ~0, 66,26 (synon. 
hina, gamma). | 
potheti, vb. (sa. yputh, caus. 
pothayati) to strike, beat, cudgel 
(acc.); pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (mam) 87,15; 
ger. ~etva, 8,29. 39,15. 51,26. 
pono[b]bhavika, mfn. (sa. pau- 
nar-bhavika) causing new births; f. 
„ā (tanha) 67,13 (cp. punabbhava). 
porana, mfn. (sa. paurana) re- 
lating to the past, ancient; s. (subst.) 
~am, “an old saying", Dh. 227 (opp. 
ajjatana); °-potthakesu, Joc. pl. iu 
the old manuscripts, 52,11. cp. purana 
& next. 
porāņaka, mfn. (sa. pauranika) 
ancient, former, old; what has been 
hitherto, usual; comp. %-uyyānapāla, 
m. 37,17;,%-parihāra, m. 37,21. 
porisa, m. (fr. purisa; sa. pau- 
rusha) a man; “om. ~o (uttama-®, 


. pl. wetha (macchath) 4,14; part. m. | g. v.) Dh. 97. cp. next, 


posa 


*posa, m, (== purisa, porisa; 
arisen by contraction, perhaps influen- 
ced by the verb poseti, v. next) a 
man; nom. ~O, Dh. 228; purisa 
(metrically — posa) voc. Dh. 248; 
gen. «assa, Dh. 104. 

*posapeti, vb. (caus. IT. poseti, 
to feed, nourish; sa. poshayati, push) 
to rear, bring up (acc.); ger. ~wetva 
(kumārikam) 48,20. cp. puttha, mfn. 

plavati, vb., v. palavati (pilavati). 


Ph. 


phandana, mfn. (sa. spandana) 
moving (suddenly), quivering, trem- 
bling; n. „am (cittam) Dh. 33 (synon. 
capala). cp. pari-phandati. 

pharati, vb. (sa. Vsphar (sphur)) 
to spread, extend (trans, & intr.); 
to pervade, suffuse, fill up (acc.); aor. 
3. sg. phari (hatthim mettena cittena) 
76,34; ger. ~witva (rasaharaniyo) 57,23; 
pp. phuta & phuttha (g. v.). 

pharasu, m. (sa. paraqu) an axe; 
nom. ~u, 35,5; acc. «ul, 35,7; — 
mer *pharasuka, m. 35,5 (vasi-°, 
g. v.). 

pharusa, mfn. (sa. parusha) harsh, 
cruel; acc. f. ^am (vedanam) Dh. 
138; x. ~am, Dh. 133 (of speech); 

instr, m. pl. ~wehi (yakkhehi) 41,34. 
|». phala, x. (= sa.) fruit; metaph. 
consequence, result (good or bad), re- 
tribution, reward, advantage; 1) pi. 
wani, 2,5; 1,13 (kasata-°); gen. pl. 
enam (madhura-°) 1,5; pakka- 
phala-°, ripe fruits, 2,1; 9-rukkha, m. 
a fruit tree, instr. pl. ~ehi, 2,20; cp. 
phalàphala below; — 2) nom. acc. 
~at, 17,26 (papassa) ; 29,10 (silassa); 
58,12 (puūūānam); 42,4 (kataviriy- 
assa, samijjhati); 42,18 (viriya-°); 
*0.patisedhana, x. (g. v.); sakada- 
gāmi-', 29,17 & sotapatti-©, 87,1 (v. 
h.); magga-phala-nibbānāni, 9. pi. 
(dvandva comp.) v. nibbāna; — at 
the end of adj. comp. phala is often 


184 


spelled with ‘pph’, v. katuka-pphala, 
madhura-°, maha-°, cp. a-phala & 
sa-phala, mfn. 

phalaka, n. (= sa.) a board, 
plank; «om. „arh (apassena-®, g. v.) 
84,16; insir. ~wena, 20,23; loc. «e, 
20,1; 48,8 (*rajata-°, a silver table 
for dicing). 

phalati, vb. 1) (sa. yphal) to 
burst open, split asunder; aor, 3. pl. 
eimsu (devadundubhiyo) 80,20; pp. 
phalita (g. v.); caus. phiileti (q. v.). 
— ?) (sometimes written phallati; sa. 
phalati, „te, denom. fr. phala) to 
bear fruit, ripen; pr. 3. sg. phallati 
(dummedho, phalāni katthakasséva) 
Dh. 164. 

*phalaphala, x. (sg. & pl.) va- 
rious kinds of fruits (cp. phala); ~am, 
1,15; 2,7 (tava ~ tam eva hotu, ‘only 
keep all those fruits to yourself’); 
instr. wena, 18,15. cp. maggāmagga 
[Tr. PM. p. 74]. 

phalika, m. (sa. sphatika) crystal; 
*0.vimāna, ^. a crystal palace, 23,15. 

phalita, mfn. 1) (pp. phalati; = 
sa.) burst, split; bearing fruit; instr. 
n. wena (hadayena) 59,10. — 2) grey; 
n. grey hair (through confusion with 
palita (g. v.), because the grey hairs 
split and fall off), 

phallati, vb, v. phalati. 

phassa, m. (sa. sparga) touch, 
contact; nom. ~o, 66,8 (salayatana- 
paccaya); 9-nirodha, m. 66,14 (v. A); 
°-paccaya, 66,8 (v. paccaya). cp. phu- 
sati. 

phanita, n. (= sa.) the juice of 
the sugar cane, molasses, sugar; *-bin- 
du, x. a drop of molasses, 53,18; *°~sa- 
kata, ^. a cart-load of m., 53,20; 
dvandva-comp. madhu-phanitehi (in- 
str. pl.) 53,17; madhu-phāņita-pūve 
(acc. pl.) 53,21. 

*phàli-, only in comp. phāli-phulla, 
mfn., which seems to be either an 
intensive formation of vb. phalati, or 
a dvandva-comp. phalin (= sa. phalin, 
bearing fruit) -+ phulla (= sa, flowery); 
at any rate, preceeded by words like 


185 


sabba or eka as it is always found, 
it means ‘flowery all over’, or ‘with 
fruits and flowers all over’; sabbam 
eka-phāliphullari [scil. Lumbini-va- 
nam| ahosi o: it was in full blow 
62,11. 

phaleti, vb. (caus. phalati; sa. 
phālayati) to split, break (trans, w. 
acc); part. m. ~ento (hadayam) 
27,5; ger. wetva (pasibbakam) 12,51. 

*phāsu, x. [& adj. ?] (either from 
*prāsu, ¿ e. pra + asu, or from ved. 
sa, prācu, quick) health, healthiness; 
ease, comfort; Vin, I, 99,24. Jat. IJ, 
394,18. cp. next. 

*phāsuka, mfn. (fr. last) agree- 
able, comfortable, pleasant; "-tthāne 
(loc.) on a pleasant spot, 35,26; a- 

phàsuka, mfn. (v. h.). The etymology 
of phàsu & phasuka has often been 
discussed; Childers derives it from sa. 
sparha (ysprh), but see the objections 
of Weber, Ind. Str. III, 396, and 
Sénart, Journ, As. 1876, II, 485 (re- 
ferring to Duddh. sa. sparca); Trenck- 
ner, PM. p. 81,90, takes it — ved. 
sa. praqu; Jacobi refers to Prákr. 
phasuya, sa. prāsuka (from pra + 
asu) ZDMG. 34, p. 311; Pischel, Gr. 
Š 208, to Vsprg, *sparcuka. 

phāsukā, f. (sa. parquka, pār- 
gukā & pārgvaka, m.) a rib; pl. nā, 
Dh. 154 (metaph. said of the rafters 
of a house). 

phuta, mfn. (pp. pharati, cp. sa. 
sphuta; it is often written puttha & 
phuttha, g. v. cp. MN. I, 276, Note) 
thrilled, pervaded, filled with (ixstr.); 
m. ~o (manasa, thoughtful? — pü- 
rito, Comm.) Dh. 218. 

phuttha, mfn. 1) = phuta (v. 
above); m. ~o (mettena cittena) 
76,35. — ?) = phusita (pp. Vspre, 
sprshta) touched; m. pl. ~a (sukhena) 
Dh. 83; tamba-bhūmi-rajo-/, 112,29 
(v. corrections). cp. phusati, pho- 
tthabba. 

phulla, mfn. (= sa.) blown (as 
a flower); v. phàli-? above, cp. pha- 
"lati. x 


3 


E aa a a €—À € á  — M Ba ——— HM — —— ————— M ————————MonMT 
. 


bandhati 


phusati, vb. (sa. Vsprc) to touch; 
to reach, attain (acc.) ; pr. 1. sg. —&mi 
(nekkhamma-sukhari) Dh. 272; 3, pl. 
„anti (nibbanam) Dh. 23; pot. 3. 
pl. weyyu, Dh. 133; pp. v. next; 
grd. v. photthabba; cp. phassa & 
phuttha. 

phusita, mfn. (— phuttha, pp. 
phusati, q.v.) touched, reached, attained; 
m. ~o (maya, maggo) 108,1. 

pheggu, f. (? == sa. phalgu; cp. 
sa. velli = valli, Tr.) brittle or weak 
wood, fibrous wood, bast (?); mom. 
mU, 95,22; apagata-phegguka, mfn. 
“free from the unsound wood", m. 
m0, 95,24, 

phena, m. (sa. phena & phena) 
foam, scum; phenupama, mfn. (sa. 
phenopama) resembling scum; acc. 
m. eam (kayam) Dh. 46. 

photthabba, m. (d£ x.) (orig. 
grd. fr. phusati, g. v.; sa. sprash- 
tavya, n.) touch, contact; pl. the ob- 


‘jects of contact; nom. pl. nā, 70,39; 


loc. „esu, 71,10. cp. phassa. 


baka, m. (= sa.) a heron, crane; 
nom. ~0, 4,1 ete. — 9-jataka, n. 3,29. 

bajjhati, vb. (pass. bandhati; 
sa. badhyate) to be bound or tied, 
to be ensnared or caught; ger. witva 
(pase) 11,30. 

baddha, mfn. (pp. bandhati; = 
Sa.) bound, tied; ensnared, caught; 
m. ~o (bandhanāgāre) 46,20; Dh. 
324; f. mā, 104,30; *%-rūva, m. the 
ery of one who has been caught, acc. 
~ar (ravi) 11,30; *alha-°, mfn. 111,10 
(q. v.); *bhandika-°, mfn. 34,12 (q. v.). 

bandha, m. sa.) binding, 
bond; emprisonment; vadha-°, Dh. 
399 (v. h.); hatthi-bandha, v. bhanda. 

bandhati, vb. (sa. ybandh) to 
bind, tie; catch, ensnare; to bind round, 
put on (acc.), bandage (acc. & instr.); 
imp. 3. pl. «antu (pannasaüüam) 


bandhana 


8,8; aor. 3. sg. bandhi (mukham) 
50,14; 3. pl. nisu (veram, aiiia- 
maiiarn, “nursed enmity”) 11,20; ger. 
„itvā (dvaram) 6,5; (te devasam- 
khalikāya) 21,14; (rajanam galhaban- 
dhanam) 39,31; (mukham satakena) 
50,12; (kayabandhanam) 82,55; caus. 
II. bandhāpeti, pass. bajjhati, pp. 
baddha (q. v.) cp. bandha, bandhana, 
etc. 

bandhana, x. (= sa.) binding, 
bond, fetter; nom. ~am, 64,7; 23,39 
(paücangika-9, g. v.); abl. nū, 33,2; 
Dh. 276 (Mara-°); pl. wani, 105,19; 
kaya-°, n. (g. v.); *galha-°, mfn. (g. 
v.); *panna-bandhana-sajiia, n. (v. 
panna); bandhanagara, n. a prison; 
abl. ~ato, 32,1; loc. ~e, 46,20. 

bandhava, m. (sa. bandhava) a 
kinsman, relative; pl. ~a, Dh. 288. 

*bandhāpeti, vb. (caus. II. ban- 
dhati) to cause to bind or bandage 
(acc.); ger. ~āpetvā (mukharh) 50,15. 

bandhu, m. (= sa.) a kinsman, 
relative; a friend; voc. wu, 103,15 
(pamatta-°, g. v.); instr. ~una, Dh. 
p. 94, v. 3 (ādicca-%, g. v.). 

babbaja, m., v. pabbaja. 

bala, n. (= sa.) power, strength, 
force; military force, army; nom. ~am, 
Dh. 109; 13,5 (yam wath ahuvam- 
hase, "according to what power we 
had"); acc. eai, 10,13; 60,20 (rein- 
forcement); instr. ~ena (mahantena) 
90,28; e. c. mfn. v. khanti-9, naga-°, 
cp. a-bala, dub-bala, etc. — *bala- 
ppatta, mfn. mighty (i. e. by wisdom), 
m. ~o (Tathagato) 80,25; — balānīka, 
mfn. ‘who has strength for his army’, 
strongminded; acc. m. ~ar, Dh. 399. 
cp. next etc. 

*bala-vahana, m. military force, 
army; acc. ~am, 39,8; instr. «ena, 
38,24. 

balava (& balavat), mfn. (sa. 
balavat) powerful, strong; „arh (maya 
katapapam) 17,17. 

balin, mfn. (= sa.) 
strong; m. ~1, Dh, 280. 

balivadda, m. (sa. balivarda) a 


‘powerful, 


< 


186 


bull, ox; nom. ~0, Dh. 152; acc. pl. 
we, 71,31; instr. pl. wehi, 71,32. 

balya, x. (sa. balya) foolishness, 
stupidity; mom. acc. wam, 54,21. Dh. 
63. cp. bala. 

bahala, mfn. (= sa.) thick (of 
consistence), dense, compact, firm, deep 
(as water) etc.; ati-bahala, mfn. (q. v.). 


bahi, adv. (sa. bahis) out, outside; 
e nikkhante, 50,6; 52,2 (apart from 
that place, viz. khaditatthanam; but 
here bahi is perhaps an error for bahu, 
cp. bahu-tinassa, 51,33); comp. bahi- 
nagare (Žoc.) outside the city, 39,20. 
43,9. 78,34 (opp. antonagare); *bahi- 
valaüjanaka, m. pl. out-door people, 
acc. ~e, 43,8 (v. valaiija). cp. bahira 
& next, 

bahiddha, adv. (sa. bahirdhā) 
outside (ab?.), from outside; *°-samu- 
tthana, mfn. ‘originating from out- 
side’, resulting in outward behaviour 

i. e. in good manners); 2, „arh 
pra 10,16 (opp. ajjhatta-°). 
bahu, mfn. (= sa.) much (many), 
great, frequent, abundant; ». ~u & 
eum, Dh. 258 (bahu bhasati); «ui 
(dhanam) 23,6; (apuūiam) 76,3; 
(nàvattham) 111,32; tam ~ yam hi 
jivasi, it is a wonder that you are 
still alive, 13,29; instr. m. „unā, Dh. 
166; n. pl. wtini, 49,16; m. pl. nū 
(macchā) 3,32; ~avo, Dh. 307; instr. 
pl. uhi, 91,22; gen. pl. „unnam, 
23,27; «unam, 108,21; comp. bahu- 
mige, 6,5; 9-bhattam, 57,11, etc. (v. 
below); cp. bahuka, bahula, bahu-°, 
bhiyyo (compar.), bhiyyoso, yebhuy- 
ena. 

*bahu-abhiiiiāta, mfn. highly 
esteemed; m, pl. nā (sāvakā) 109,19. 
bahuka, mfn. (= sa.) much, 
many; acc. m. «am (janan) 108,12. 
bahu-jana, m. (= sa.; some- 
times written bahujjana, metri causa 
or after the analogy of puthujjana; 
Fausbøll, Das. Jat. p. 28) many people; 
nom. ~0, 88,32; Dh. 320 (-jj-). 
*bahu-jāgara, mfn., very watch- 


187 


bāhusacca 


ful, awake; M. «o (opp. sutta) Dh. | carin, mfn. “walking in the company 


29. cp. jagarati. 

bahujjana, v. bahu-jana. 

bahu-tina, x. (sa. bahu-trna) 
abundant grass, beautiful pasture; gen. 
wassa, 51,33 (== manüpassa tinassa 
52,3). 

*bahu-dvara, mfn., having many 
doors or gates; loc. n. ~asmim (na- 
gare) 91,22. 

*bahu-buddhi, mfn., wily, cun- 
ning, crafty; f. gen. pl. «vīnarh (thi- 
nam) 51,30. 

*hahu-bhinin, mfn., who speaks 
much; acc. m. «inam, Dh. 227. 

*hahu-bhava, m., quantity, abun- 
dance; acc. „arm, 49,19. 

bahula, mfn. (= sa.) much, large, 
abundant; e. c. abounding in; pā- 
mojja-9, mfn. full of delight, m. <o, 
Dh. 376. cp. sambahula. 

*bahu-saiikappa, mfn., having 
many purposes, full of schemes; acc. 
„ari (kayani) Dh. 147. 

bahussuta, mfn. (sa. bahu-cruta) 
very learned; m. ~o (Anando) 109,18; 
acc, «am, Dh. 208; gen. pl. m. ~à- 
nam, 109,. cp. bahusacca. 

*bahūpakāra, mfn., very useful 
(v. upakara); m. ~o (amhākam, 
sakuno) 18,12. 

bādhita, mfn. (= sa.; pp. ba- 
dhati, ybādh, to press, pain, vex) 
pained, oppressed; m. ~o (saso, “a 
snared hare") Dh. 342. cp. bibhaccha. 

Bārānasī (& ~i), f. (sa. Vara- 
nasi) now, pr. of the city Benares; 
abl. ~iyā (avidūre) 36,20; loc. wiyam, 
1,2; %-rājā (~i) the king of B., 5,39, 
etc.; %-rajja, n. (<j) the kingdom of 
B., 38,23; °-rajja-simika, m. king of 
B., 43,22. 

bala, mfn. (= sa.) ignorant, foo- 
‘lish; m. eo, 2,7. 54,16; voc. wa, 44,50; 
acc. eam (yathā) 75,25; 106,22 = 
Dh. 71; pl. wa, 54,12; gen. pl. wa- 
nam, 107,10 = Dh. 60; comp. °-sum- 
sumāra (voc.) 2,5; ?-rajà, 54,6; °-ma- 
hājano (many unconverted) 74,14; 
*andha-%, mfn. (v. h.); *°-safigata- 


of fools", m. mī, Dh. 207; ?-vagga, 
m. the fifth chapter of Dhpd. — com- 
par. balatara, mfn. 54,3 (m. ~o) 
cp. next & balya, n. 

balata, f. (== sa.) stupidity, foo- 
lishness; instr. aya (attano, on ac- 
count of their foolishness) 5,9. 

*balisika (& bāļisika), m. (fr. 
balisa or balisa, m. a fish-hook; sa. 
badiga & vadiga) a fisherman, angler; 
nom. ~0, 14,29. | 

*Baveru, f. (?) nom. pr. of a city 
(perhaps — Babylon, cp. Minayeff, 
Bull. de l'Acad. de St. Pētersbourg, 
T. 17. p. 70 (Mél. As. VI 591); Morris, 
JPTS '91—93. p. 25; Franke, ADMG. 
47. Bd. p. 606); acc. ~um, 18,34; 
C-jataka, n. 18,1; °-rattha, s» the 
kingdom of B. 18,1-5. 

baha, f. (== bahu, sa. bahu, m.) 
the arm; pl. acc. «à, 30,19; instr. 
mhi, 20,6; *paccha-biham, adv. (v. 


hi.) ep. Franke, Pali u, Sanskr. p. 102. 


bühita, mfn. (pp. bāheti, g. v.) 
removed; *)-paàpa, mfn. ‘who has got 
rid of evil”, m. ~o ti brihmano (in- 
tended to be the etymology of the 
word brahmana, cp. Franke, Pali u. 
Sanskr. p. 117) Dh. 388. 

bahira, mfn. (fr. bahi; sa. bahya, 
cp. bahika) being outside (one's self, 
one's body, house, or family); being 
outside the Buddhistic order, non- 
Buddhistic; $5. ~am, the exterior 
(opp. abbhantaram) 106,11 — Dh. 
394; m. ~o (samano n'atthi, “there 
is no Samana beyond the order” [just 
as there is no path through the air]) 
Dh. 254-55 (var. bahire, loc. adv.) 
cp. bahiya (~ika), Jat. I 421,25 & 
III 432,25, which probably is a «om. 
pr. (cp. Müller, Pali Gr. p. 31.) 

bahu, m. & f. (also baha, f. (q. 
v.); sa. bāhu, m.) the arm; v. Siha- 
bahu, «om. pr. 

*bihpsacca, x. (fr. bahussuta, 
sa, bahu-cruta, rather than fr, *bahu- 
sati (sa. *bahu-smrti) which is not 
found in Pali) much learning, erudi- 


baheti 


tion; instr. e ena, Dh. 271 (cp. Dhpd. 
(1855) p. 381; Tr. PM. p. 75, cor- 
rections). 

baheti, vb. (sa. barhayati, caus. 
ybrh (Tr), if not demom. fr. bahi 
(Weber, ZDMG. 14,82) cp. also ybādh 
& yvāh) to tear out, eradicate, remove 
(acc.); ger. „etvā (puññañ ca papali 
ca) 106,6 — Dh. 267; pp. bahita 
q. v.). 
bindu, m. & n. (= sa.) a drop; 
nom, ~u (uda-?) 108, — Dh. 336; 
eum (madhu-®, phanita-°, g. v.) 53,18; 
uda-bindu-nipatena, Dh. 121. 

bimba, m. n. (= sa.) an image 
(as a picture or statue); acc. ~am 
(said of the human body) Dh. 147. 

bilara, m. (sa. bidala) a cat; 
*0_nissakkana-matta, mfn. just large 
enough that a cat can sneak out through 
it, 2. am (pakara-vivaram) 90,55. 

bibhaccha, mfn. (sa. bibhatsa) 
loathsome, disgusting; °-sambadha- 
tthāna, n. 65,7 (g. v.). 

birana, x. (sa. vīraņa) name of 
a fragrant grass (Andropogon Muri- 
catum); ~am, 107,» — Dh. 335 
(its root is called usira, 108,1). 

bujjhati, vb. (sa. ybudh) to 


know, perceive, understand (acc.), to 


be conscious of; pr. 3. sg. eati (w. 
part. pàpàni kammani karam, "when 
he commits evil deeds") Dh. 136; 
(do. rahokammam avikubbam, “when 
he openly does what ought to be secret") 
54,17; (antarayam) Dh. 286; pp. bud- 
dha, mfn. intelligent, wise, enlightened 
(esp. subst. m. & nom. pr., v. next); 
acc. «am, Dh. 398. cp. buddhi, 
bodhi, eic. 

Buddha, m. (— sa; pp. bujjhati, 
q. V.) & Buddha, i. e. a person who 
has attained to infinite knowledge, and 
who is liberated from all existence, so 
that he shall not be born again; nom. 
pr. the Buddha’ (i. e. Gotama, g. v.) 
mostly mentioned by epithets like 
Bhagavat, Satthar, Sugata (g. v.) cp. 
Tathagata & Sammasambuddha; ~o 
(viya) 113,1; yadi ~o tittheyya (“if 


| 


188 


the B, were alive") 98,33; ~o bhagavā, 
66,2; ~o dhammaraja pabhaikaro, 
19,1; ~o bhavissati loke vivatta- 
echaddo, 61,33; ~o tapati tejasā, 
107,25 = Dh. 387; mahā-Gotama-', 
87,8; acc. ~am (anantagocaram) Dh. 
179; gen. ~wassa (viya) 113,20; loc. 
we (in the formula B. dhamma, 
sampha, cp. 107,17) 79,17; pl. instr. 
wehi, 102,24; gen. wana, 68,22. 74,15. 
86,24, 108,20 (metri causa: Buddhana). 
comp. v. next etc. 

*Buddha-gata, mfn., directed 
to Buddha; f. nā (sati) Dh. 296. 

*Buddha-ghosa, m. nom. pr. 
of a Buddhist teacher, author of several 
commentaries on canonical books (liv- 
ing about 420 A. D.); nom. ~o (ti 
nam viyakarum, Buddhassa viya 
gambhiraghosatta) 113,21. 

*Buddha-desita, mfn., taught 
by the Buddha; ace. m. ~am (dham- 
mai ca vinayaii ca) 109,25. 

*Buddhantara, n., a period be- 
tween two Buddhas; acc. ~am (ekari) 
84,30. (cp. antara.) 

Buddha-manta, m. (sa. °-man- 
tra) a sacred text of the Buddha; ~o, 
113,16. 

*Buddha-lilha, f. the grace 
or charm of a Buddha; instr. aya 
(dhammam desetvā) 7,97. 47,17. 

*Buddha-vagga, m., the title of 
chapter XIV, of Dhpd. 

Buddha-vacana, x. (= sa.) 
the word of the Buddha, the holy 
texts; acc. ~ar (karotha) 108,6; loc. 
we (tepitake) 102,2. 

*Buddha-vīra, m., ‘the enligh- 
tened hero’ (Buddha); voc. ~a, 108,11. 


*Buddha-settha, m., ‘the best 
of Buddhas’ (Buddha); gen. ~assa, 
109,23. 

*Buddhārammana, 
arammana. 

buddhi, f. (= sa.) intelligence, 
insight; v. dubbuddhi & bahubuddhi, 
mfn. cp. next. 

buddhimat, mfn. (= sa.) en- 


MfN, v. 


189 


dowed with insight, wise; m. «Mā, 
113,24; pl. «manto, 76,32. 

*Buddhuppāda, m., the appear- 
ance or birth of a Buddha, the period 
after the appearance of a Buddha; gen. 
~assa abhavi, because the Buddha 
had not appeared, 63,31; loc. we 
(imasmim) in the present Buddha- 
period, 84,31. 

bubbula, m. d x. (sa. budbuda) 
a bubble; dimin, bubbulaka, m. & n., 
id., acc. ~am, Dh. 170; (ep. Morris, 
JPTS. '84,8). 

bojjhanga, m. (sa. bodhy-anga, 
`n.) one of the seven faculties neces- 
sary for attaining perfect knowledge 
(or Buddhahood), viz. sati, dhamma- 
vicaya, viriya, piti, passaddhi, samii- 
dhi, upekha; pl. ~a (satta) 82,12; 
acc. pl. we, 91,8. cp. sambodhi- 
anga. 

bodhi, m. £ f. (=: sa.) 1) f. per- 
fect knowledge (possessed by a Bud- 
dha), Buddhahood; v. bojjhanga, cp. 
sambodhi; *) m. the sacred tree under 
which Buddhahood is achieved, a Bo- 
tree; °-rukkha-mule, Joc. at the foot 
of the Bo-tree, 66,3; cp. Mahabodhi 
& next, 

*Bodhimanda, m. or x. (?) the 
terrace of the great Bo-tree in Maga- 
dha; -samīpamhi (/oc.) near B., 
113,2. 

Bodhisatta, m. (sa. Bodhi- 
sattva) one who is destined to be- 
come a Buddha, the Buddha in any 
of his anterior births; ~o, 1,3; acc. 
~ai, 2,97; gen. «assa, l,e; abl. 
~ato, 8,10. 

*bondi, f.(& m.) (probably akin 
to sa. budhna) the body; nom. wi 
(mahati) 2,12 (= sarira, 2,7). cp. 
Prákr. bondi, bumdi; Kuhn, Beitr. 
p. 41; Morris, JPTS. '89,20r. 

bya- etc., v. vya-. 

brahma-cariya, n. (sa. brahma- 
carya) a holy or religious life, holi- 
ness, purity, chastity (sometimes — 
the Buddhism or the Buddhist reli- 
. gious system and practice); nom. «am 


brühmana 


(vusitam) 71,15; acc. eam, (cara, 
“lead a holy life”) 70,16. 92,3; *°-vasa, 
m. the living a religious life; som. 
«0, 92,27; gen. massa (kilo) 46,35. 
— *ādi-brahmacariyika, mfn. (v. 
ādi')) cp. next etc. | 
brahmacariyavat, mfn. (sa. 
brahmacaryavat) who leads a holy life, 
practising chastity; nom. m. Va, 
106,6 =: Dh. 267. 
brahmacūrin, m. (== sa.) one 
who leads a religious life, who prac- 
tises chastity, a priest; nom. ~1, 30,19. 
Dh. 142; sa-brahmacārī (m. pl.) 
96,30 (*fellow-priests"). 
brahmaūūatā, f. (sa. brahma- 
nyatà) !) friendliness towards Drah- 
mans; ?) the state of a Brahman; 
nom. «ta, Dh. 332. 
brahma-danda, m. (== sa.) 
name of a certain kind of punishment 
imposed by the order on a Bhikkhu; 
nom. ~0, 79,13-14 (“the Bhikkhus 


Should neither speak to him, nor ex- 


hort him, nor admonish him”, 79,15) 
cp. Vin. II p. 290; Kern, Manual of 
Indian Buddhism, p. 87. 

Brahma-datta, m. (= sa.) 
nom. pr. of several mythic kings in 
Benares; loc. we, 1,2. 2,17, etc.; ?-ku- 
māro, 42,24; °-maharaja, 43,22. 

Brahman, m. (= sa.) the god 
Brahma; nom. <à, 110,11; ~ Saham- 
pati, 80,21; instr. wuna, Dh. 105; 
Maha-®, id. (v. h.) cp. sa-brahmaka, 
mfn. & next. 

Brahma-loka, m. (= sa.) the 
world or heaven of Brahma; loc. we, 
45,16; *%-ūpaga, mfn. going to B.; 
fh. ~O, 45,18 (cp. upaga); *-parā- 
yana, mfn. destined for B.; m. «o, 
47,33. 

brahma-vihāra, m. (= sa.) 
one of the four perfect states of mind 
(viz, mettā, karuna, mudita, upekhā); 
acc. pl. we (bhāvetvā) 45,15-18. 

brākmaņa, m. (= sa.) a man 
belonging to the priestly caste, a Brah- 
man; nom. ~O, 9,9. 92,10; 106,8 = 
Dh. 393 etc. (in a moral sense); acc. 


brāhmaņī 


"mam, 30,9; gen. «assa, 9,9. 66,20; 
voc. mā (metri causa), 30,12; pl. wa, 
61,30; gen. ~anam, 61,26; purohita-°, 
51,19 (g. v.); *"-pamokkha, mfn. (g. 
v.); *°-manava, m. a young Br., nom. 
~0, 113,2; *°-vesena (instr.) in the 
disguise of a Br., 15,10; *°-vagga, m. 
title of Dhpd. ch. XXVI; — dvandva 
comp. samana, 19,2; amacca-^-gaha- 
patike, 42,3; °-gahapatikesu, 7,25 (cp. 
gahapati); sa-ssamana-brahmana, 
min. (g. v.). 

brāhmaņī, f. (= sa.) a Brāh- 
man's wife, 9,10; acc. with, 9,14. 

bruti, vb. (sa. brite & braviti, 
Vbrū) to say, reply; to speak to (acc.); 
to tell (acc. & gen.); to call (w. double 
acc.); pr. 1. sg. brūmi (tan te, = 
kathemi) 85,25-28; 106,13 (tam brah- 
manam) — Dh. 395; 106,34; aor. 3. 
sg. 9) a-bravi (Maram) 103,5; b) a- 
bruvi, 110,31; 111,9. 

brūheti, vb. (sa. brmhayati, 
caus. brmbh) to increase, further, 
promote, cherish, practise (acc.); imp. 
2. sg. waya (santimaggam) Dh. 285. 


Bh. 


bhakkha, 1) mfn. (e. c.; sa. bhak- 
sha) eating or drinking; *lohita-°, 
mfn. blood-drinking; gen. «assa, 
13,28; *piti-°, mfn. (g. v.). — ?) m. 
(sa. bhaksha, m. or bhakshya, grd.) 
food; ~o si mama (“thou art my prey") 
111,10. 

bhakkheti, vb. (sa. bhaksha- 
yati, Vbhaksh) to eat, devour; inf. 
e.etum, 111,11; pp. ~ita, m. gen. pl. 
~ānam (vanijanam) 111,32; bhakkha, 
mfn. (v. above). 

bhagavat, mfn. (— sa.) illu- 
strious, venerable, holy; esp. m. used 
as a term of veneration by Buddhists 
when speaking of Buddha, *the Bles- 
sed one”; mom. Buddho bhagava or 
only Bhagava, 66,2-3-5. 104,23, 108,17; 
acc. ~vantam, 68,17. 104,11; énsér. 


190 


A vata, 69,18; gen. abl. «vato, 76,1; 
68,11; loc. «vati, 74,52; 92,2 (“under 
the Blessed one”), | 

bhaginī, f. (= sa.) a sister; also 
used as a term of address to any woman 
(or said of a woman of the order); 
voc, ~i, 73,5; instr. wiya (kanittha-°) 
56,36; *°-~i-putta, m. a nephew; v. 
ati-bhagini-putta. cp. bhagineyya. 

bhagga, mfn. (pp. bhaūjati; sa. 
bhagna) broken; n. „am, 30,17. 53,30; 
f. pl. wa, Dh. 154. 

bhafiga, m. (= sa.) breaking, 
breach; bending, fold; nom. <o, 83,11; 
acc. ~am (sarira-°) 47,16. 

bhacca, m. (sa. bhrtya, grd. ybhr) 
a servant, attendant; acc. wath (tam 
tam) 112,23; pl. wa, 111,18; acc. pl. 
ewe, 111,19; instr. pl. „ehi, 111,20. 

bhajati, vb. (sa. ybhaj) to par- 
take of, recur to, keep company with, 
frequent, follow, practise (acc.); pr. 
3. sg. „vati (padesam) Dh. 308; part. 
med. gen. m. sg. ~manassa, Dh. 76; 
imp. 2. sg. med. ~assu (mitte) Dh. 
375; pot. 3. sg. bhaje, Dh. 76. 78; 
8. sg. med. ~etha, Dh. 78. 208; caus. 
bhajeti (9. v.). 

bhaiijati, vb. (sa. ybhaūj) to 
break, bend; to defeat (ucc.); pr. 1. 
sg. ~ami (senam) 104,6; part. m. pl. 
„antā (atthīni) 8,29; aor. 3. sg. (mā) 
bhaüji (vo) 108,5; pp. bhagga (q. v.) 
cp. bhanga, m. 

bhaūūati, vb. (pass. bhanati, 
g. ?.). 

bhanati, vb. (sa. ybhan) to speak, 
say; to recite, propound (acc.); pr. 3. 
sg. „ati (musā) 97,11; 1. sg. ~āmi 
(do.) 98,21; 1. sg. med. bhaņe (v. 
next); part. m. eam, 103,1 (ima 
gāthā); Dh. 264 (alikam); part. med. 
fh. ~ mano, 83,4; gen. ~ manassa, 
83,5; imp. 2. sg. bhana, 11,13; pot. 
8. sg. bhaņe (saccam) Dh. 224; 1. 
sg. bhaneyy’aham, 11,11; aor. 1. sg. 
abhāņim (an old augmented formation) 
47,5; pass. bhaiifiati, loc. m. part. 
bhaüiiamane(veyyakaranasmim) 71,17; 


191 


pp. n. bhanitam (alikam tassa, scil. 
maya) 108,30. cp. bhanaka, bhāņiu. 

bhane, indecl. (orig. pr. 1. sg. 
med. fr. bhanati) Zit. ‘I say’, look 
here! my friends! a term of address 
used by a superior to inferiors (the 
latter answer with ‘bhante’, g. v); 
mayam kho a, 76,10; tena hi ~, 
16,12. 

bhanda, !)». (sa. bhanda) sg. 
& pl. goods, wares, things; utensils, 
implements, instruments, ornaments, 
etc.; nom. «am, 30,17; acc. «am 
(appaggha-°, “wares of a little value" 
26,2; (piya-°, “anything that is iow 
54,4; pl. «ani (turiya-°, “musical 
instruments") 65,5. — ?) m. (e. c. == 
bandha) a keeper, groom (cp. sa. 
banda; *hatthi-°, m. an elephant- 
keeper (== *hatthi-bandha, cp. sa. 
acva-bandha) pl. na, 76,15; acc. pl. 
«e, 76,10. cp. SBE. XVII, 141, 
Note?, | 

bhandaka, x. (sa. bhāņdaka) 
== bhanda, ».; *assa-°, 65,17 (horse- 
trappings). 

bhandika, f. (sa. bhāndikā) a 
bundle, a.small packet; acc. „am, 
8,17. 33,7; sahassa-0, a purse of 1000 
pieces, 23,1 (cp. sahassa-thavika, 
102,24); — *bhandika-baddha, mfn. 
packed, bundled up; gen. ~assa (dha- 
nassa) 34,12. : 

bhata, mfn. (sa. bhrta, pp. bha- 
rati) ‘born’, brought up, reared, sup- 
ported; f. ~ā (bhariyā) 51,4; *atta- 
vetana-°, v. attan. 

bhataka, m. (sa. bhrtaka) a ser- 
vant; nom. ~o, 105,8. 

bhati, f. (sa. bhrti) wages, hire, 
support; service for wages; instr. ~1ya, 
105,53. 

bhatta, n. (sa. bhakta) a meal, 
ration; food, esp. boiled rice; mom. 
acc. eam, 78,3; 21,5. 33,25, 53,30. 
70,10. 76,11; balu-%, 57,11; *paccha-°, 
86,5; “patarfsa-°, 57,9; *mataka-°, 
16,23 (v. h.); *ratti-°, 15,9; loc. we, 
57,5; wasmim, Dh. 185; pl. „vāni, 
111,33; — comp. *bhatta-kāraka, m. 


bhante 


(sa. bhatta-kāra) a cook; nom. <o, 
6,20; — bhatta-kicca, x, preparations 
for a meal; 9-ávasüne, loc. (v. ava- 
sana) after the meal, 86,15; — *bhatta- 
pati, f. a rice-bowl, acc, with, 34,13; 
— *bhatta-sakata, %2. a cart-load of 
rice, 53,30. 

bhadanta, m. (=- sa.) a vene- 
rable person, a term esp. used in ad- 
dressing (or mentioning) a Buddhist 
priest, often equal to prom. 2. pers. 
(but with the verb in 3. sg.); kathai 
~0 iiāyati, “how is your reverence 
named“, 96,29. [bhadanta (also often 
written bhaddanta) seems to be a 
later formation from the voc, bhadante, 
which has probably arisen from thie 
phrase bhaddam (or bhadram) te. 
(g. v.) and has been contracted into 
bhante (v. below); cp. Windisch 
Mara und Buddha, p. 68; Tr. PM. 
p. 69—70; Weber, Bhag. II, 155 & 
I, 418; Sénart, Kace. p. 115 (11, 4,35); 
Pischel, Gr. Š 366°.] 

bhadda (& bhadra), mfn. (sa. 
bhadra) happy, good, pleasant, beauti- 
ful; m. ~ro (a good man, opp. papo), 
Dh. 120; acc. ~ram (assam) Dh. 
380; f. ~a (mata) 20,25; voc. f. we 
(my dear!) 1,8; n. „ram, happiness, 
Dh. 119; pl. ~rāni (good things) 
Dh. 120; n. ~am is often used with 
gen. pron. 2. pers, parenthetically in 
a sentence, meaning ‘if you please, 
‘let it be said with all deference’, ‘sit 
venia verbo and the like: na me 
ruccati bhaddam vo, 11,16; tam vo 
vadami bhaddam vo, 108,3 (cp. sa. 
bhadram te (val) & bhadanta above). 

bhaddaka, mfn. (sa. bhadraka) 
== bhadda; m. su-bhaddako (catu- 
ppado), very pleasant or lovely, 30,8. 

bhanta, mfn. (pp. bhamati; sa. 
bhranta) wandering, moving, or rol- 
ling about (unsteadily); acc. m. «am 
(rathan) 106,55 = Dh. 222. 

*bhante, indecl. (fr. bhadanta, 
g. V.) a term of address to superiors 
or venerable persons : reverend sir, 
your reverence! !) — voc. 28,12 (to 


bhabba 


Buddha); 35,3 (tāpasa); evah ~, 
76,4 (Devadatta); 79,10 (an elder 
bhikkhu ought to be addressed by 
bhante or āyasmā); 85,29 (Narada); 
kinnāmo si ~, 96,29; — ?) = nom. 
~ Bhagava, 69,4 (with 3. sg. of the 
verb). [bhante has generally been 
considered as a Magadhism, from sa. 
bhavant- (Weber, Trenckner & Franke, 
KZ. XIV, p. 419), from which also 
bhadanta (v. above) possibly might 
have arisen through insertion of an 
inorganic ‘d’; but I think it will be 
impossible to arrive at a true histori- 
cal view of the various terms of address, 
bhagavā, bhavam  (bhonto, etc.), 
bhadanto (te), bhante, bhane, which 
seem to be connected with one another 
phraseologically as well as etymologi- 
cally. ] 

bhabba, mfn. (grd. bhavati; sa. 
bhavya) future, what probably will be 
or ought to be, suitable, proper; w. 
inf. being able to; m. ~o (kame 
paribhuüjtum) 70,1; a-bhabba, mfn. 


g. v.). 

bhamati, vb. (sa. ybhram) to 
wander about, to move to and fro (on 
account of perplexity); caus. bhameti, 
to swing, agitate, perplex; imp. 2. sg. 
med. bhamassu, Dh. 371, seems to 
be used as imp. 3. sg., but perhaps 
we have here an old error; the Mss. 
Khar. reads mā te kamaguna bha- 
memsu cittam, which seems to prove 
that we ought to read kamaguna 
bhamimsu (aor. 3. pl.) or bhamesum 
(aor. 3. pl. caus.). 

bhamara, m. (sa. bhramara) a 
bee; <o, 106,2 = Dh. 49; ?-ganà, 
swarms of bees, 62,12 (paiicavanna-°), 

bhaya, 1) n. (= sa.) fear, danger; 
nom. «am, 593,0. 110,32. Dh. 283; 
instr. bhayena, from fear, 18,15. 43,7, 
often at the end of comp. : geha-pa- 
tana-9, 19,16; niraya-°, 17,50; mara- 
na-°, 6,21; rukkha-nibbattana-°, 37,5 
(g. v.) cp. a-kuto-bhaya, ‘a-bhaya, 
maha-bhaya, mfn.; — *°-janana, mfn. 
(q. v.); — bhayattha, mfn. (sa. bhaya- 


192 


stha) terrified, f. ^ à, 111,26; — 
*O_tajjita, mfn. (g. v.); — %-dassin & 
*0_dassivas, mfn. seeing danger, fear- 
ing; nom. m. «Và, Dh. 31; pl. ~ino, 
Dh. 317; ~ *°-bhita, mfn. & *°-saii- 
kita, mfn. frightened, alarmed (v. À.) 
— ?) mfn. dangerous; acc. m. ^am 
(maggam) Dh. 123. 

bharati, vb. (sa. ybhr) to bear, 
support, hire; cp. next ete., bhara, 
bhacca, bhata(ka), bhati. 

bharita, mfn. (== sa.) filled with 
(e. c.); vippaviddha-nanakunapa-?, 
mfn. 65,10 (v. h.). 

bhariyā, f. (sa. bhāryā) a wife; 
mom, ~ya, 1,5. 51,4; acc. ~yam, 
101,18; gen. (dat. loc.) ~yaya, 1,22; 
54,29 (metri causa contracted to bha- 
riya); 58,2 (dovarika-°). 

Bharukaccha, (sa. id. & 
Bhrgukaccha) nom, pr. of a seaport- 
town in Western India (Baroach, 
Buguyate) ; non, «am (nama patta- 
nagamo) 24,9; *'-pattanam, 25,13; 
*0-payata, mfn. 20,23 (v. payati); 
*0.vānija, m. 19,21 (g. v.). 

*Bharu-rattha, x. nom. pr. of 
a country; loc. ~e, 24,9. — *Bharu- 
rājam, m. the king of that country; 
nom. ~ raja nama, 24,9. 

bhava, m. (= sa.) !) coming into 
existence, birth; existence, any mode 
of existence, being, life; «om. ~o 
upādāna-paccayā) 66,9; °-paccaya 
ti) 66,10; gen. ~assa (pāragū) 
Dh. 348; loc. ~e (pürima-9, in a 
former life) 58,11; pl. tayo bhava, 
“the three modes of existence", viz. 
sensual, corporeal], formless existence, 
or existence in the three worlds kama-, 
ūpa-, arüpa-loka, 65,11 (cp. kama, 
bhava, vibhava 67,4); — "9-tanha, 
f. thirst for existence, 67,14; *°-niro- 
dha, m. cessation of ex., 66,16; *°-gal- 
lani, ». pl. “the thorns of life", Dh. 
851; kama-°, tanha-°, nandi-° (v. h.) 
— *) increase, welfare, prosperity (opp. 
vibhava, q. v.); dat. ~aya, Dh. 282. — 
cp. bhava, punabbhava, etc. 

bhavam, pron. (orig. part. bhavat 


193 


fr. next; sa. bhavan, m. & bhavati, 
f.) thou, you (used as a respectful 
term of address, often comb. with the 
name of the person addressed, but 
mostly with the 3. pers. of the verb); 
nom. «am (Gotamo) 90,19. 93,27; 
(acc. bhavantarh); instr. bhotā (Go- 
tamena) 90,15; gen. bhoto (Gota- 
massa) 94,6; (loc. bhavati); pl. nom. 
voc. acc. bhonto (or bhavanto, nom., 
bhavante, acc.) : sunantu me no, 
97,5; (instr. pl. bhavantehi; gen. pl. 
bliavantanam, or bhavatam). As voc. 
sg. & pl. we have a contracted form 
bho (g. v. separately below). 
bhavati, vb. (sa. ybhu; very 
often contracted to hoti, g. v.) to be, 
exist, stay, become, arise, come into, 
etc. (also used as auxiliary verb); 
pr. 3. sg. eati, Dh. 875; 3. pi. 
„anti (jati-paccaya) 66,1; 111,44; 
pr. 1. pl. med. bhavamase, 105,26; 
part. v. bhavam above; imp. 2. sg. 
bhava (cp. hohi) Dh. 236; 2. pl. 
bhavatha (var. ^ atha) Dh. 143; pot. 
8. sg. bhaveyya, 1,25; 1. sg. ~eyyam, 
56,5; 2. sg. „.eyyāsi, 86,5; aor. ahu, 
ahosi, etc., v. hoti; fut. 3. sg. bha- 
vissati (cp. hessati) — will be, *must 
be’, or ‘is probably’, ‘is certainly’ : 
82,26. 87,3. 99,7, etc.; 12,97. 34, 
(vassapitam ~); 40,22 (gahito ~); 
56,30 (laddharh ~ maūūe); also in 
questions and answers: kim ~ (supi- 
nam) 61,29; kin nu kho ~ (kumārikā) 
“how may she be"? 86,29; evam <, 
56,15; fut. 2. sg. wissasi, 46,14. 56,12; 
1. sg. wissaml, 23,29; 3. pl. wissanti, 
6,28. 21,11-27. 33,27 (imam dhanam 
. dve kotthāsā ~, pl. instead of sg.); 
1. pl. wissama, 21,12; — cond. 3. sg. 
a-bhavissa, 42,11. 92,26; bhavissa, 
29,8; — inf. bhavitum, 24,24. 56,4; 
— ger. v. hutvā (under hoti); — gra. 
bhavitabba, mfn. (cp. hotabba & 
bhabba) x. ~am (used like fut. in 
pass. construction) 24,2 (imināpi āga- 
tena ~ = ayam pi agato bhavis- 
gati); 34,4-10. 47,18. 48,26. 91,25, etc.; 
acc. ^. ~am ev'etam kathesi, “you 
Páli Glossary. 


bhanavara 


tell of what must be", 47,11 (cp. kā- 
likan, 47,10); — pp. bhūta (g. v.); 
— caus, bhaveti (g. v.) cp. bhava. 
bhava, m., bhavana, x. 

bhavana, n. (= sa.) house (pa- 
lace), home, abode (world); acc. «aiii 
(attano) 19,18; loc. ~e, 41,39; asura-°, 
tavatimsa-°, naga-°, Sakka-°, su- 
panņa- (v. h.). 

bhasta, m. (sa. basta) a he-goat; 
acc. eam, 54,16 (cp. Jat. VI, 12,2; 
Abhidh. has vasso). 

bhasma, x. (sa. hhasman) ashes; 
*0-àchanna, mfn. 106,2» (v. àchanna). 

bhassati, vb. (sa. ybhraiq) to 
fall down, drop; to swoop down, go 
on shore; to take a road, lounge about; 
aor. 3. sg. bhassi (adho Gajigam) 
14,44; (tassa matthakam) 24,5; aor. 
3. sg. med. a-bhassatha (vīnā kaccha) 
104,17 (cp. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 110). 

bhaga, m. (= sa.) !)a part, 
fraction (often comp. v. numbers, v. 
catu-bhāga, ti-bhaga & sahassa-°); 
— *) a portion, share, lot; task, busi- 
ness, wages, salary; (v. acariya-°); — 
5) place, region, side, quarter (v. 
upari-°, kanna-°, bhumi-°, cp. sab- 
bato-bhagena, instr. adv.) ; — *) time, 
division of time (v. ratti-°, cp. apara- 
bhāge, Joc. adv.) cp. bhaga, ete., 
sobhagga. 

*hhagavat, mfn. (fr. prec.) par- 
taking of, having a share in (gem.); 
nom. m. «và (samaññassa) Dh. 19. 20. 

bhāgineyya, m. (sa. bhagineya) 
a sisters son, nephew; °-hamsapota- 
kassa (gen.) a young hamsa, a nephew 
of his, 10,21. cp. bhaginī. 

bhàjana, n. (= sd.) a vessel, 
an earthen jug; acc. ^am, 82,19. 

bhajeti, vb. (caus. bhajati; sa. 
bhājayati) to divide, distribute (acc.) ; 
inf. etum (matamanussam) 40,32; 
ger. ~wetva, 27,29. cp. bhaga, bhajana. 

bhāņaka, m. (= sa.; fr. bhanati) 
a reciter, repeater, declarer; *Digha-°, 
m. (g. v.). 

bhāņavāra, n. (& m.) a section 


13 


bhiiniz 


of the holy texts, which are divided 
into such sections for purpose of reci- 
tation; pathamaka-°am, the first sec- 
tion of Dhpd. containing ch. I-XIV ; 
Dh. 196. 

*bhanin, mfn. (fr. bhanati) say- 
ing, speaking; v. bahu-?, manju-?, 
manta-°, mita-?, mfn. 

bhātar, m. (sa. bhratr) a brother; 
nom. età, 108,15; 9,7 (kanittha-°); 
acc, wtaram, 31,30; instr. „tarā, 
31,31; nom. pl. «taro, 31,13. 34,32. 

bhatika, m. (sa. bhrātrka) a 
brother; acc. wath (jetthaka-°) 32,21; 
gen. massa (jettha-°) 35,20. 

bhayati, vb. (sa. ybhī, bibheti 
& bhayate) to fear, be afraid of (gen.); 
pr. 3. pl. „anti (maccuno) Dh. 129; 
aor. 2. sg. (mā) bhayl, 1,10. 4,30. 75,20; 
3. pl. (mà) bhayittha, 32,21. 76,26; 
pp. bhīta (g. v.); ger. bhāyitvā (kassa) 
98,15. cp. bhaya, bhimsanaka, bhiru, 
bherava. | 

bhara, m. (== sa.) burden, load; 
trouble, labour; task, charge; mom. 
^0 (mayham ~, or mayhath esa ~, 
“let it be my charge, leave that to 
me”) 42,6. 49,20; imassa sukha-duk- 
khari tava ~o, "look after him in 
better and worse", 28,20; khari-°, m. 
& panna-?, mfn. (v. h.). 

bharaka, m. (?) (= sa.) burden, 
load; only in the comp. *gadrabha-9, 
m. (?) 1) an ass-driver; 2) goods car- 
ried by an ass, instr, ~ena voharam 
karonto, 8,16. 

bhava, m. (= sa.) ') being, be- 
coming, appearance, state, condition, 
nature; nom, ~o (thinam) 51,31. — 
2) do., at the end of comp. (subst. m.) : 
a) w. adj. : tittaka-°, duggata-°, dub- 
haca-°, nihata-mana-°, pandita-?, 
bahu-°, sapariggaha-apariggaha-®, 
samāna-vaya-', sassamika-®, sithila-?, 
suddha-' (g. v.) ; — ») w. adv. : tatha-° 
(q. v.); — °) w. subst. (cp. dhamma) : 
atta-°, mitta-°, sotthi-°, .& likewise 
with the verb atthi, 3. sg. : atthi-° 
(g. v.) — khuracakka-° (= “that it 
was”) 24,6; yakkhini-°, 21,26 (do.) 


194 


| ep. hāva-bhāva (g. v.) 21,13; — 4) w. 


pp. or grd. (which in English is ex- 
pressed by a full sentence: “that it 
was,..”, or “that it ought to be”): 
agata-°, gata-°, gahita-°, bhinna-®, 
marita-°, vaticita-°, hattha-gata-'; 
chaddetabba-° (g. v.); — °) similarly 
w. nom. actionis : avattharana-®, iiga- 
mana-®, an-agamana-°, gamana-~°, 
nikkhamana-°, marana-? (g. v.) cp. 
tunhi-bhava & patu-bhava, m.; a- 
bhava, m. & an-abhiva-kata, mfn. 

bhavana, f. (= sa.) *) producing, 
acquiring, mastering, developing (one’s 
own mental faculties), meditation; acc. 
wath (anuyuüjati, "applies himself 
to meditation") 97,9; loc. «aya (atta- 
nā bhavita-°) 29,2; (rato mano) Dh. 
301; — ?) veneration, respect, praise, 
reputation; acc. wath (asataii, metri 
causa bhavan’) Dh. 73. 

bhāvita, mfn. (pp. fr. next; = 
sa.) produced, developed, cultivated, 
practised; f. —& (marana-sati) 86,20; 
-bhāvanāya (pattiin, “the powers l 
have developed") 29,5; — bhavita- 
tta(n), mfn. (sa. bhāvitātman) one 
who has trained himself (by medita- 
tion); acc. „ānam, Dh. 106. cp. 
a-bhāvita, su-bhavita, mfn. 

bhaveti (& bhavayati), vb. (caus. 
bhavati; sa. bhavayati) to produce, 
develop, cultivate, apply oneself to 
(acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (metri causa 
bhavayati) Dh. 350 (asubham); imp. 
2. pl. (or pot. 3. sg. med.) „etha 
(mettam) 40,5; (marana-satim) 86,17; 
pot. 8. sg. med. „etha (pandito) Dh. 
87; aor. 3. sg. ~esi, 86,25; inf. ~etum, 
ib.; ger. wetva (brahma-vihāre) 45,15; 
(bojjhange) 91,8; pp. bhavita, v. above; 
bhāvanā, f. (q. v.). 

bhasati, vb. (sa. ybhāsh) to 
speak, talk; to say, pronounce, recite 
acc.); pr. 3. sg. wati, 22,5; Dh. 1-2 
Qe d == wati; Dh. 258; 2. sg. 
asi (alikamy) 97,51; part. m. ~mano, 
103,4; Dh. 19; imp. 2. sg. med. bha- 
sassu, 98,20; pot. 3. sg. bhase (gāthā 
satam) Dh. 102; fut. 1. sg. ~issami 


195 


{gathaih) 87,1; aor. 3. sg. abhāsi, 
13,30. 80,22; 3. sg. med. abhiisatha, 
105,22; pp. bhūsita (g. v.) cp. next. 

bhāsā, f. (sa. bhāshā) language 
(esp. vernacular), dialect; loc. nāya 
.(Sihala-°, in the Sinhalese language) 
113,31; mūla-bhāsāya (abl. or instr. ?) 
MES (v. mula); sabba-bhāsa, mfn. 
v.h.). 

bhāsita, mfn. (pp. bhasati) said, 
spoken; 7. wath, 98,28; gen. ~wassa 
(attham) 90,30. n. subst. ~am, speech, 
word, Dh. 363; 93,18; cp. dubbha- 
sita, subhasita, mfn. 

*bhimsanaka, mfn. (fr. sa. bhi- 
shana & bhishma) terrible; m. ~o, 
27,6 (saddo); 80,20 (bhūmicālo); 7. 
(subst.?) ~am, 81,3. 

bhikkhati, vb. (sa. ybhiksh, 
bhikshate) to beg, ask for, esp. to 
beg alms (from, acc.); pr. 3. sg. med. 
eate (pare, others”) 106,4 = Dh. 
266. cp. next ete. 

bhikkha, f. (sa. bhiksha) the act 
of begging alms; dat. ~aya (caranto) 
29,21. 

bhikkhu, m. (sa. bhikshu) a men- 
dicant, a Buddhist monk or priest; 
nom. ~u, 79,8. 106,4 == Dh. 266; 
Dh. 75 (Buddhassa savako); acc. 
wum, Dh. 362; instr. «una, 79,8; 
gen. «uno, 79,12; eka-bhikkhussa, 
79,175 pl. mom. ^u, 29,28; ~wavo, 
109,16; voc. wave, 29,30. 70,25; «avo, 
Dh. 243; acc. nū, 66,24; instr. „ūhi, 
79,15; — ""-vagga, m. title of Dhpd. 
ch. XXV; — %sata, n. 79,33; ?-sa- 
hassa, x. 70,22 (g. v.); °-samgha, m. 
the congregation of Buddhist monks, 
the Buddhist brotherhood; gen. ~assa, 
72,27; instr. wena, 70,21; loc. «e, 
29,27; pl. wa, 109,2. 

bhikkhuni, f. (sa. bhikshuni) a 
" Buddhist nun; instr. wiya, 98,25. 

bhimkāra, m. (sa. bhrngara) a 
pitcher, bowl or vase (golden); instr. 
wena (suvanna-’) 41,11. 

bhijjati, vb. (pass. bhindati) to 
be broken or wrecked; to be scattered 
or dispersed; pr. 3. sg. „ati, 107,8 


bhisi 


-= Dh. 148; fut. 3. sg. issati (nāvā) 
19,30; 1. pl. wissiima (tattha tatth'eva) 
11,8. | 
bhitti, f. (= sa.) a wall; «om. 
ei (kannakita) 84,20. 

*bhindapeti, vb. (caus. IT. bhin- 
dati) to cause to be broken (acc.); 
fut. 1. sg. wessiimi (silai assa) 48,26. 

bhindati, vb. (sa. Vbhid) to break, 
cut asunder, destroy, disturb, violate 
(ace.); part. m. ~anto (ghatam) 16,29; 
(sotāni) 27,5; pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (met- 
tii) 53,9; aor. 3. sg. bhindi (nivam) 
20,1; itur (rañño vacananh, to diso- 
bey) 40,2; (itthiyā sila, to seduce) 
48,28; ~witva, 10,11 (hirottappaiii); 
50,5. 58,23 (dvidha); pp. bhinna; grd. 
bhejja; caus. II. bhindiipeti (q. v.) 
cp. bheda. 

bhinna, mfn. (pp. bhindati; == 
sa.) +) broken, destroyed, violated; 
wrecked; » «mi (bhandaih) 30,17; 
f. nā (navn) 20,23. 28,22; loc. miya 
(nāvāya) 28,16; bhinna-nava, mfn. 
(cp. sa. bhinnanau) shipwrecked; m. 
pl. nā, 21,9; gen. ~ānam, 20,33. — 
2) separate, different, deviating; *-rūpa, 
mfn. id.; m. pl. ~a (ūcariya-vādā, 
“the schismatic doctrines of old tea- 
chers" ?) 118,27. 

bhiyyo, adv. (sa. bhuyas; compar. 
fr. bahu) 1) more, still more; ~ cit- 
tam pasidati, 103,1; ~ nandati, 
107,27 — Dh. 18; — ?) once more, 
again; ~ opammam karohi. (“give 
another illustration”) 99,27. cp. next 
& yebhuyyena. 

bhiyyoso, adv. (sa. bhūyagas) 
still more; only in the comp. *bhiy- 
yosomattāya (v. matta, f., cp. buddh. 
sa. bhiiyasya mātrayā) in still higher 
degree, 65,8. 

bhisakka, m. (sa. bhishaj) a phy- 
sician; acc. ~am, 92,8. (As to the 
form cp. sa. a-tvak-ka) cp. bhesajja. 

bhisi, f. (sa. brsi) 8 cushion, roll, 
pad; nom. ~i, 104,50 (baddhā hi ~ 
susamkhata; in this sentence bhisi 
seems to be somewhat ambiguous; 
could it also mean a sort of cushion, 


18% 


bhita 


made of twisted grass, used instead 
of a swimming-girdle? Fausbøll, SBE. 
X, (2) p. 4, translates it by ‘raft’; 
cp. SBE. XX, p. 163. Note 3); instr. 
„iYā, 104,31. 

bhita, mfn. (pp. bhayati; — sa.) 
frightened, terrified (w. gen. or e. c.); 
m. ~o (tāsarm) 21,33; (maraņa-bhaya-0) 
8,25; 75,17; m. pl. wa, 40,10; 17,5 
(niraya-bhaya-°); bhīta-tasitā, m. pl. 
dvandva comp. 27,5; °-puriso, 86,19 
(asivisam disva ~). 

bhiru, mfn. (— sa.) timid, cowardly; 
subst. f. bhīrū, cowardice, 103,27 (cha- 
tthā [senā Marassa]). cp. bherava. 

bhuiijati, vb. (sa. ybhuj) to enjoy, 
eat (acc., rarely instr.), to take a meal; 
to swallow, devour (acc); pr. 3. sg. 
evati (vind mamsena na x) 6,1; Dh. 
324; 3. pl. „anti, 57,10; part. gen. 
m. „antassa (sayamasari) 53,29; imp. 
2. pl. „atha (bhattam) 21,5; pot. 3. 
sg. ~eyya, 101,3. 107,2 = Dh. 308; 
3. sg. med, wetha, Dh. 70; aor. 3. 
sg. bhuūji, 41,10. 57,15; 1. sg. bhuñjim, 
101,85; 3. pl. a-bhuūjisum, 111,4; 
ger. 2) bhutvā, 15,5; b) bhuūjitvā, 
21,7 (khaditva ~); 57,15; 61,7 (bho- 
janar); 78,29 (bhattam); °) bhuiijiya, 
111,5; pp. bhutta (g. v.); grd. v. 
bhojaniya; caus. bhojeti (q. v.) cp. 
bhoga?, bhojana. 

bhutta, mfn. (pp. bhuiijati; sa. 
bhukta) 1) enjoyed, eaten; m. pl. wa 
(me kama) 45,5; m. ~o (ayogulo, 
*swallowed") 107,1 = Dh, 308; *°-pa- 
tarāsa, mfn. (v. h.); — *) one who has 
eaten; gen. sg. massa (w. instr. sū- 
karamaddavena) 78,31. 

*bhuttavi(n), mfn. (fr. last) one 
who has enjoyed or eaten (acc.), who 
has finished the meal; gen. m. ~vissa 
(bhattam) 78,21; 83,14. 

bhutvā, ger. v. bhuūjati. 

bhumma, 1) mfn. (sa. bhūmya, 
cp. bhauma) belonging to the earth. 
— °) comp. = bhūmi, f. (arisen through 
bhummi? or from the old Joc. bhumyā, 
Jat. I, 507,12. V, 84,12, etc.); *bhum- 


ma-ttha, mfn. standing on the ground; | 


196 


acc. m, pl. ~e, Dh. 28; — *bhum- 
ma-ttharana, s., ‘floor covering’, a 
carpet; ~am, 84,17. cp. bhūma. 

bhusa!, mfn. (sa. bhrga) strong, 
vehement, excessive; m. pl. «à (sotā) 
Dh. 339. 

bhusa?, x. (sa. busa) chaff; ~am 
(viya) 53,2; yatha warm, 106,17 = 
Dh. 252. 

bhuta, mfn. (pp. bhavati; = sa.) 
1) being, existing, real, true; become, 
happened; n. „am, 9,25 (opp. a-bhū- 
tai, g. v.); 101,30. — ?) subst. m. n. 
any living being; pl. m. «a (sabbe) 
80,25; n. „āni, Dh. 131; loc. „esu, 
Dh. 405. — ?) e. c. being, being like 
(sometimes almost pleonast.) : 3) *agā- 
rika-°, *anda-°, *andha-9, *tanu-®, 
*samkara-°, mfn. (v. h.); ?) -ī-bhūta: 
v. tunhī-', *samaügi-^, sammukhi-°, 
siti-°; cp. yathā-bhūta (°-bhucca) & 
pahūta. | 

Obhuma& bhumaka, mfn. (only 
e. €, = bhūmi, cp. sa. bhūmikā & 
bhumma above) : satta-bhümaka, mfn. 
(sa. sapta-bhüma, & ^-bhümika) hav- 
ing 7 stories; n. „am (geham) 48,31. 

bhumi, f. (= sa.) ') the earth, 
soil, ground; nom. ~i (acalā) 110,7; 
acc. eim, 6,11; (otiņņā, gone on shore) 
112,27; loc. wiya (on the ground) 61,25. 
83,19. 97,34; „iyam, 5,12. 53,19. 56,27 
(katvā); tamba-°, 112,25 (g. v.); 
*0_cala, m. (cp. sa. bhūmi-cala) au 
earthquake; zom., ~o (maha-°) 80,19. 
— *) the floor of a house; 84,21; story 
(of a house) v. bhuma. — *) a terri- 
tory, country; v. *ariya-?, *uyyāna-0, 
paccanta-°, Suvanna-°. — ^) place; 
*0-ràmaneyyaka, n. a delightful place, 
Dh. 98 (g. v.); ukkāra-', 18,31 (q. v.); 
O-bhaga, m. place, quarter, stall (of 
a horse); loc. ~e, 65,19. — *) step, 
stage; acc. ~im (yathaviditam, “stage 
of knowledge") 69,23. [Burm. writing 
bhummi; cp. bhumma & bhüma above.] 

bhüri, !) mfn. (= sa.) much, 
great (only at the beginning of comp.). 
— °) f. knowledge, intelligence; mom. 
~l, Dh. 282 (yoga jayati); *°-sam- 


197 


khaya, m. loss of knowledge, nom. ~0, 
Dh. 282. 

*bhūsita, mfn. (pp. Ybhūseti, 
'bhūsh) adorned, decorated; f. wi 
(sabbabharana-°) 112,1. 

bhejja, mfn. (grd. bhindati; sa. 
bhedya) to be broken or destroyed; 
a-bhejja, mfn. 39,12 (g. v.). 

bheda, m. (= sa.) breaking, de- 
stroying, dissolving; abl. ~a (kayassa), 
“when this body is dissolved", 7,26. 
Dh. 140. 

bhedana, x. (= sa.) = prec.; 
ace. ~ari (sarirassa) “injury of the 
body", Dh. 138. | 

bherava, mfn. (fr. bhiru; sa. 
bhairava) terrible; x. subst. horror, 
terror; *~rava, m. a cry of horror; 
acc. eam (ravantā) 86,19. 

bheri, f. (= sa.) a drum, kettle- 
drum; acc. ~im, 35,13; (carāpetvā) 
42,2. 102,26 (used generally by pro- 
clamations); gen. ~iyā, 36,15; °-tale, 
35,21. 

bhesajja, n. (sa. bhaishajya) 
medicament, medicine; comp. gilāna- 
paccaya-°, 97,8. cp. bhisakka. 

bho, indecl. (sa. bhos) a vocative 
particle, orig. voc. of bhavaih (g. v.), 
used in addressing one or more persons : 
O! Hallo! I say, look here! !) with 
a foll. voc. bho pasana, 3,7; kim bho 
pāsāņa (vanarinda) 3,9-11; bho purisa, 
93,34. 101,6; bho corā, 32,34; bho 
yakkha, 40,36; *) without voc. ehi bho, 
24,5; aho vata bho, 42,17; dhi-r-atthu 
vata bho, 63,13; upaddutam vata bho, 
65,12; nāhari bho gamam jhapemi, 
101,7; ayam bho ko nu dipo, 110,31; 
— bhovādin, v. below. cp. ambho & 
hambho. 

bhoga!, m. (= sa.) a curve, fold; 
acc. ~am (orato katvā) 83,21. cp. 
obhoga & bhogga. 

bhoga?, m. sa.) enjoyment, 
use, advantage; wealth, riches, trea- 
sures; pl, nā, Dh. 355; gen. „ānam, 
Dh. 139; ?-tanbà, f. “thirst for riches", 
Dh. 355 (instr. aya); yaso-bhoga- 
samappita, mfn. (g. v.). 


mamsa 


*Bhoga-nagara, n. nom. pr. of 
a town (from bhoga!, in the sense of 


| ‘serpent’); Joc. we, 77,15. 


bhogga, mfn. (sa. bhugna) bent, 
crooked; gopanasi-bhogga-sama, mfn. 
47,22 (g. v.). 
bhojana, x. (= sa.) 1) enjoying, 
| eating; *vikala-?, eating at forbidden 
| times; abl. nā. 81,34 (cp. vikala). — 
| ?) a meal, food (esp. boiled rice); acc. 
e Am, Dh. 70; 20, (dibba-°); 41,9 
(nanaggarasa-9) ; 61,7 (vara-°); pāna- 
bhojanam, food and drink, Dh. 249; 
— *pariünata-", mfn. (g. v.). 
bhojaniya, x. (sa. bhojaniya; 
grd. bhuijati) soft food (as boiled 
rice, gruel, soft cake, meat etc., opp. 
khādaniya, g. v.); acc. mam, 78,2; 
khadaniya-°, 18,30. 
bhovadin, mfn. (= sa.) one 
who addresses another person by ‘bho’ 
(as non-Buddhists used to address Bud- 
dha; hence sometimes:-— a Brahman); 
m. ~1 (bhovadi nima) Dh. 396. ep. 
Tr, PM. p. 70; differently Weber, 
Ind, Str. J, 181. 


m, 1) by sandhi instead of i : vud- 
dhim anviiya, 2,18; āgacchantam eva, 
2,31, etc, — 2) an old m (iil) is sometimes 
preserved by sandhi, e. g. tunhim āsi- 
nam, Dh. 227. — *) inserted in comp. : 
naga-m-asado, 77,3; okam-okato, Dh. 
34; do. metri causa : bhūmim-rāma- 
neyyakam, Dh. 98; cp. aññam-aññam. 
— *) inserted between two words (not 
comp.) : jeyya-m-attanam, 107, — 
Dh. 103; apassi-m-uttinnapadam, 
11117; idh'eva-m-eso, Dh. 247; 
sammati-m-eva, Dh. 390; cp.sangam, 
Dh. 412 (Tr. PM. 82). — 5) m’, ab- 
breviation of me mama, 112,20. 
[ Windisch, Ber. d. süchs. Ges. 1893, 
p. 228.] 

mamsa, x. (sa. màmsa) flesh, 
meat; nom. ~am, 82,2 — 97,20; acc. 


- — 
= 


makara 


eam, 1,7 (hadaya-°); 15,7 (sarira-?); 
instr, wena, 6,1; 18,14 Aiii 
loc, ~e, (hadaya-°) 1,6; — *mamsa- 
sula, n. € m. a spit with roasted meat, 
or ‘a bit of roasted meat’ (cp. sa. 
culya-màmsa, #.; Morris, J PTS, 84,21); 
n. pl. eani, 14,29; m. pl. nā, 15,20; 
acc. m. pl. «e, 14,32; — mamsa-lohita-, 
flesh and blood, Dh. 150 (v. lepana). 
makara, m. (= sa.) a certain sea 
monster or fabulous fish (delphin, 
sword.fish; corresponding to the ca- 
pricorn of the zodiac); nom. ~o, 20,1; 
instr. pl. ~ehi (bhinnā nāvā) 20,2. 
makasa, m. (sa. macaka) a mos- 
quito, gnat, fly; *andhaka-9, m. 
g. v.). 
makkata, m. (sa. markata) a 
monkey; nom. ~o, 14,10. 
makkataka, m. (sa. markataka) 
a spider; nom. ^o, Dh. 347. 
makkha, m. (sa. mraksha & mak- 
sla) hypocrisy, dissimulation; nom. 
~0, 103,28. Dh. 150. 407. 
makkhika, f. (sa. makshika) a 
fly; acc. ~am, 53,25; nimmakkhika, 
mfn. (g. v.). 
makkhita, mfn. (pp. fr. neat; 
sa. mrakshita) smeared (with instr. 
or €. C.); n. ~am (lohita-°, mukham) 
12,31; m. pl. ~& (asucinā) 62,26, opp. 
_a-makkhito, 62,29; instr. ~ehi (kad- 
dama-°, “mud-stained’’) 71,25. 
makkheti, vb. (caus. Ymraksh) 
to besmear (acc.) with (instr.); ger. 
„etvā (mukham mattikūya) 83,2; 
pp. makkhita, v. above; cp. makkha. 
*Makhādeva, m. nom. pr. of a 
king; ~o (raja Mithilayam) 44,19; 
voc, ea, 44,31; °-amba-vana (& -va- 
nuyyana), 45,7-14 (q. v.). 
magga, m. (rarely n.) (sa. marga) 
1) track, road, way; nom. ~o (gamana-®, 
way to go or escape) 3,14; acc. ~am 
(agacchanto, “on the way”) 28,12; 
62,6; (ācikkhitvā) 56,4;  (timsa- 
yojana-° agato) 87,19; (Jqtavana-?) 
73,15; instr. wena (anfüena, “by 
another way") 12,30; abl. ~ā (uyyahi, 
“make way") 44,3; loc. me, 33,18; 


198 


(sakata-°, *carriage-road") 43,18; (ga- 
mana-?) 60,7; gen. pl. inam (me- 
tri causa maggin’) Dh. 273; — maha-®, 
m. a highroad ; insir. wena, 34,4. 43,14; 
loc. we, 34,5; — hatthi-°, m. an ele- 
phant track, 35,11. — ?) in the dogma- 
tics: the path or way (leading to 
emancipation from the misery of exi- 
stence; nom. ~o (ariyo atthangiko, 
“the holy eightfold path") 67,3, eto.; 
„0 visuddhiya, “the way that leads 
to purity", 107,3 — Dh. 277 (cy. 
Visuddhi-magga); acc. ~ar (nibba- 
nagamanam) Dh. 289; loc. ~e (the 
fourth link of the series : Buddha. 
dhamma, samgha, ete., cp. patipadā) 
79,18; dvandva comp. ?-phala-nibba. 
nāni, 97,10; °-vagga, m. title of Dhpd. 
ch. XX; santi-maggam (acc.) "the 
path. of peace", Dh. 285. cp. mezt. 
*maggamagga, m. (sg. or comp.) 
'various paths', the various parts of 
‘the path’ (or the best of paths?); 
gen, ~wassa (kovidam) Dh. 403. [cp. 
phalaphala; I think that Trenckner, 
PM. p. 74, is right in tracing this 
sort of. dvandva.comp. “to a drawing 
together of phrases like gama gamam), 
dumā dumam”; by the commentaries 
it-is generally explained by magga + 
a-magga, “the right way and the 
wrong", SBE, X p. 93.] 
Maghavat (or -van?) m. (= sa.) 
the chief of the gods, Sakka or Indra; 
nom. ««vā (devānari) Dh. 30. 
marku, mfn. (= sa.) dejected, 
despondent, dispirited; m. yo ~u 
bhavati (w. loc.) Dh. 249. (cp. sa. 
manyu, m.; Dhpd. (1855) p. 375.) 
maūgala, x. (= sa.) a festival 
or solemn ceremony (comp. — any- 
thing auspicious or solemn); acc. „am 
(karesi) 58,20; aviha-°, n. (g. v.); 
*kata-mafigala-sakkara, mfn. (g. v.); 
*mafigalassa, m. a state horse, 24,29; 
*0.sindhava, m. id. 63,5 (g. v); 
*0-ratha, m., a state chariot, 25,1; 
*0_sila-vana, n., a pleasure-grove of 
Sal-trees, 62,10; *°-hatthin, m., a state 
elephant; 24,20. cp. a-mafigala, mfn. 


199 


mangura, m. (sa. madgura & 
mangura) a kind of fish; *°-cchavi, 
mfn. having the colour of that fish 
(yellow ?), 92,15. 

macca, m, (sa. martya) mortal, 
a man, person; acc. «am, Dh. 141; 
instr. ~ena, Dh. 53; gen. pl. wana 
(metri causa ana) Dh. 182. 

maccu, m. (sa. mrtyu) !) death; 
gen. «uno, Dh. 21. — ?) Death per- 
sonified, the king of death (— Mara, 
g. v.); nom ~u, Dh. 47 = 287; 
0-rāja(n), m. (sa. mrtyu-raj) id.; acc. 
„tājānain, 44,29; gen. wrajassa, 
Dh. 46; — *"-dheyya, n. the dominion 
of death, the world of death (i. e. 
samsāra) Db. 86 (~ar suduttarari). 
(ep. Windisch, Mūra, p. 186.) 

maccha, m. (sa. matsya) a fish; 
acc. ~am (kāņa-mahā-0) 4,15; (eka-°) 
4,25; gen. ~wassa, 51,31; pl, nā, 4,1; 
acc. we, 4,1; 14,23 (rohita-°); gen. 
enam, 4,10; *khina-°, mfn. (g. v.); 
*Ovahana, 7. catching fish, «niya- 
mena, 25,35 (v. niyama); °-gandha 
& °-mamsa, m. (g. v.). 

macchaka, m. (sa. matsyaka) a 
little fish; acc. pl. we (sabba-9, all 
the poor fishes?) 4,24. 

maccharin, mfn. (sa. matsarin) 
stingy, niggardly; m. ~1, Dh. 262. 

macchera, x. (sa. mātsarya) 
stinginess, niggardliness; „am, Db. 
242. . 

majja, n. (sa. madya) spirituous 
liquor, any intoxicating drink (cp. sura, 
meraya); acc. eam, 97,11; sura-me- 
raya-°, 81,23. 

majjati, vb. (sa. ymad) to be 
drunk or mad; aor. 2. sg. mado (mā) 
77,5; pp. matta (g. v.) cp. pamajjati. 

majjha, x. (sa. madhya, mfn.) 
1) the middle, centre, the interior of 
anything; acc. «am (janapada-°) 
89,18; instr. adv. «ena, midway, 
96,17 (ubho ante anupagamma); loc. 
adv. majjhe, in the middle (of, gen. 
or e. €.) : ~ thite mige, 6,8; ~ katvā, 
6,10; ~ janapadam hanapesi, 39,4; 
pure ca paccha ca ~ ca, Dh. 421; 


maniüati 


mā ~ bhaügo ahosi. 83,11; sakuni- 
nam a, 10,12; sayanassa ~, 47,35; 
comp. agara-°, 46,18; nadi- 2,22; 
nagara-°, 60,93; parisa-°, 10,21 (etc. 
v. parisa); mahajana-?, 51,16; lekha-®, 
59,7; sakuna-samgha-?, 10,18; samud- 
da-9, 28,16. Dh. 127; — 2) the middle 
of the body, waist; v. su-majjha, mfn. 
— cp. vemajjha, next etc. 

*majjhantika, m. (sa. *madhy- 
antika; probably transformation of 
sa. madhyathdina or madhyālna) 
midday, noon; °-samayath, acc. “in 
the middle of the day”, 97,31; °-suriyo 
viya, “like the sun at midday”, 26,1 
(cp. Tr. PM. 75,16.) 

majjhima, mfx. (sa. madhyama) 
being in the middle, middlemost, in- 
termediate, central; m. ~o (puriso, 
“of the middle height") 92,13; f. Ai 
(patipada, q. v. cp. Windisch, Mara, 
p. 303) 66,28; Joc. m. ~e (yāme, “in 
the middle watch") 99,20; comp. °-tan- 


dula, m. (v. h.); °-tapasa, m. the 


second brother, 36,11; *°-desa, m. 
(sa. madhyadega) the midland; also 
nom, pr. of the midland country be- 
tween Himalaya & Vindhya; loc. ~e, 
91,18. 

Majjhima-nikaya, m. nom. pr. 
of a Pali work, the second of the five 
Nikayss (g. v.); nom. ~o, 102,15; 
specimens thereof : 92,1—95,33; com- 
mentary : Papaūca-sūdanī (g. v.). 

maiica, m. (= sa.) a bed, bedstead; 
nom. ^0, 84,11; acc. am (hettha-°, 
under the bed) 83,18; Joc. ~wamhi 
(parinibbana-°) 110,19; — *"-patipà- 
daka, m. (v. h.). 

maicaka, m. (== sa.) a bed or 
couch; a bier, litter; acc. ~am, 73,26; 
loc, we (khuddaka-?) 42,1. 

maūju, mfn. (= sa.) beautiful, 
lovely; *°-bhanin, mfn. lovely-voiced ; 
gen. m. ~ino (sikhino) 18,52. 

maiiati, vb. (sa. yman) to think, 
reflect; to suppose, imagine; to believe, 
consider;’to know, understand (acc.); 
pr. 3. sg. «ati (balyam, “knows his 
foolishness”) Dh. 63; 2. sg. „asi, 


manpita 


69,34. 94,29 (tam kim ~); pr. 1. sg. 
med. maññe (v. below); part, m. med. 
maūīamāno, 44,30; imp. 3. pl. „antu, 
Dh. 74; pp. mata (g. v.) ep. maūnīita, 
manieti; munati; mati, manas, etc. 
*maniita, »(?) (fr. maññati) 
imagining; gen. pl. ~anam (sabba-°) 
94,11. 
maiie, indecl. (orig. pr. 1. sg. 
med. maññati; sa. manye) certainly, 
to be sure; as it were; I think, sup- 
pose, or dare say (sometimes ironi- 
cally) : 3,25. 5,7. 38,28. D6,14-30. 67,31. 
*manieti, vb. (rarely instead of 
maiifiati, perhaps arisen through in- 
fluence by maññe, v. above) to think, 
imagine, etc.; aor. 2. sg. mesi, 50,33. 
mani, m. (= sa.) a precious stone, 
gem, jewel; acc. wim, Dh. 161; nila-? 
& indanila-?, m. sapphire, 26,23. 28,29; 
— 9-kundala, x. pl. (dvandva) g. v.; 
— %kkhandha, m. a large gem, acc. 
~an, 35,23; gen. wassa, 35,34; *0-gula, 
m. jewel, pearl, 5,26, 18,7; — *%-tāla- 
vanta, n. (v. tāla); — °-ratana, n. a 
most excellent jewel, 62,30 (cp. ratana); 
— */-vaņņa-gīva, mfn. v. giva; — 
*"-yimàns, x. (g. v.); — 9-sara, m. 
== mani-ratana, 24,20 (°-adini). 
manda, m. x. (= sa.) scum, 
cream, essence (e. c. implying ‘choi- 
ceness’); *Bodhi-°, the terrace of the 
Bo-tree, 113,2 (contracted of man- 
dira?). 
mandana, x. (= sa.) ornament, 
decoration; -vibhūsana-, 81,25. 
mandala, x. (= sa.) a circle, 
disk (esp. the orb of the sun or the 
moon); nom. ~am, 32,31 (canda-); 
loc. we, (do.) 16,16; apana-°, jüta-? 
(q. v.) cp. ti-mandala, pari-mandala. 
*mandu, m. (?) name of a certain 
plant (perhaps shortened from man- 
duka = sa. mandüka); °-kantakena, 
with a mandu thorn, 37,5. 
mandita, mfn. (pp. mandeti) 
adorned, dressed; °-pasadhita, mfn. 
41,10 (g. v.). ' 
mandeti, vb. (sa. mand, caus. 
mandayati) to adorn, decorate (acc.); 


200 


ger. ~wetva, 16,26; pp. mandita (g. v.) 
cp. mandana. 

mata}, mfn. (pp. maññati, = sa.) 
thought, imagined; known, understood ; 
honoured, esteemed ; subst. n. opinion, 
view, doctrine, belief; acc, ~am (sa- 
kam, otāresi) 113,12; Patanüjali-" (g. 
v.); Sambuddha-mata-kovida, mfn. 
114,13 (v. kovida). 

mata”, mfn. (pp. marati; sa. mrta) 
dead; m. <o, 34,5. 36,4; pl. wa (bha- 
vissanti) 21,1; acc. f. ~am, 89,9; 
comp. °-manussam, 40,31; x. subst. 
e. Am, death, 7,34. 108,34 (opp. jivitam) ; 
cp. &-mata, an-amatagga & next. 

mataka, mfn. (sa. mrtaka) dead; 
m. a dead man; *°-bhatta, x. a feast 
for the dead; acc. „ari (dassami) 
16,23. 

*matatta, n. (sa. *mrtatva) the 
being dead; abl. ~a (matapitunnai) 
“as my parents are dead”, 31,18. 

mati, f. (= sa.) understanding, 
knowledge, intellect; maha-9, mfn. 
eminently wise, m. ~i, 114,2; dum- 
mati, m(fn). (g. v); *vajja-mati, mfn. 
q. v.). 

c mfn. (== sa.) wise, in- 
telligent; instr. m. „matā (metri 
causa : mati-°) 113,28. 

matta!, mfn. (pp. majjati; = sa.) 
overjoyed, drunken, mad, furious; m. 
„0 (vedana-°) 24,7; acc. m. pl. ~e 
(asure), 59,25; gen. f. pl. ~ānaiı 
(uttama-yobbana-vilasa-°) 47,15; °-va- 
rana, m. a rut elephant, acc. pl. ~e, 
39,9; °-vara-varana, m. “a royal ele- 
phant in his pride", 45,31. 

matta?, n. (sa. matra; only e. c. 
= mattā, g. v.) measure, quantity (e. 
c. the exact measure, a small quantity, 
as much as, only, mere, eté.) : 1) subst. 
n. ainmana-mattena, instr. in a mea- 
sure of an ammana (g. v.) 65,29; — 
nama-mattam, a mere name, 97,2; — 
pali-mattam, the text only, 113,26; — 
manusa-matte, loc. abs., a mere mor- 
tal, 19,30; — lomakupa-mattam pi... 
na, not even a pore of the skin, 16,10; 
— vidatthi-mattam, as much as one 


201 madhura 


vidatthī (g. v.); 87,1; — (na) silab- 


through *matteyya, mfn. who loves 
bata-mattena, instr. (*not) only by 


his mother) the state of a mother, 
discipline and vows", Dh. 271; — 2) | motherhood; wa (sukha) Dh. 332. 
mfn. of that measure or number, | (cp. petteyyatā). 

as large as, just large enough :9) |  matthaka, m. (sa. mastaka) !) 
atthusabha-matta (v. attha!); addha- | the head, skull; acc. ~ar, 3,21. 24,4; 
nalika-matta (v. addha); anu-matta x loc. ~e, 65,30 etc.; °-majjhe, 41,17. 


(g. v.); catusatthi-matta (g. v.); bi- | — 2) the upper part of anything, sur- 
laranisakkana-matta (v. bilara); yo- | face, top, end (mostly e. c.); instr. 
jana-matta (g. ».); sahassa-matta | matthaka-matthakena (samuddassa, 
(g. v.); — >) comp. w. a past part., | along the crests of the ocean) 60,5; 
in English ‘often translated by a sub- | Himavanta-°, over the H., 36,5; Joc. 
ordinate (temporal) clause : an-ok- | ~e (ito tinnam samvaccharanam, 
kanta-matta, (v. okkamati); āgata- | after 3 years) 87,8; ito samvacchara-°, 
matta, at one’s arrival, 33,28; (mukhe) | 33,14. 
thapita-matta (v. thapita); thita- matthaluūga, x. (sa. mastu-° 
mattam eva (acc., w. prec. ger. bha- | & mastaka-lunga) the brain; matthake 
ttam otāretvā, instantly after he had | ~am, 82,6 = 97,23. 
put it on the ground, cp. thita & tha- mathita, mfn. (= sa. pp. y math) 
pita) 33,55; visattha-matta (g. v.); | churned; shaken, agitated; n. subst. 
vutta-matta, when thus addressed, in | agitation; gen. pl. «inam (sabba-°) 
conformity to the command : m. ~o | 94,11. 
(Sakkena) 110,5; f. ~a, 111,30. — mado, aor. 2. sg. v. majjati. 
cp. *appa-mattaka (mfn.) next etc. |. maddati, vb. (sa. y mrd) to tread 
*mattaüiu, mfn. (sa. *mātra- | upon, crush, trample (acc.); part. m. 
jiia) moderate; acc. m. eum (bhoja- | ~anto (pathavim) 28,14; ger. ~itva 
namhi, moderate in his food) Dh. 8. | (tini pi ekato) 57,28; (valika) 97,35. 
*a-mattaiifiu, mfn. (g. v.). . maddava, mfn. (?) (sa. mūrdava, 
*mattaūūutā, f. (fr. last) mo- | n.) soft, putrid, withered; n. pl. ~iini 
deration; nom. «à (bhattasmim) Dh. | (pupphani) Dh. 377; — subst. n. ‘soft- 
185. ness, mildness'; comp. *sūkara-mad- 
matta, f. (sa. matra) — matta*; | dava, x. a kind of meat, generally 
*0.gukha, x. a small pleasure, acc. | trans]. by “hog’s flesh (lard or bacon)", 
~am, Dh. 290; 9?-sukha-pariccaga, | “a dried boar's flesh" (Rhys Davids), 
by leaving a small pleasure; ib.; — | but Neumann (in his German transla- 
*pasāda-', f. (g. v.); — *bhiyyoso- | tion of MN. p. XX-XXI) is perhaps 
mattàya (instr. adv.) 65,8 (v. bhiy- | right in translating it by “Eberlust, 
yoso). | eine essbare Pilzart" (cp. Fr. Zimmer- 
mattika, f. (sa. mrttikā) earth, | mann, Buddhistischer Katechismus, 
clay; mā (temetabbā; "the face was | p. 26 ff.; “in this case probably con- 
besmeared with moistened clay in order | nected with ymrd"?) nom. „arm, 
to protect it from the heat", SBE. | 78,1-14; instr. ena (vyadhi ppabalha 
XIII, 157) 83,28; instr. Aya, 83,31. | udapadi Satthuno) 78,31. 
*matti-sambhava, mfn.of(good) madhu, n. (= sa.) honey; comp. 
maternal extraction; acc. «am, Dh. | *%-cāti, f. & °-patala, n. (g. v.); 
396. (‘matti’ may either be another | *°-bindu, x. a drop of honey, 53,18; 
form of matu- (v. matar) or con- | dvandva-comp. °-phanita-", 53,17-20; 
tracted of mattika, mfn. (sa. mātrka) | °-laja-°, 18,27; sappi-9 61,26. cp. ma- 
maternal.) | dhuvā. 
*matteyyata, f. (fr. matar | madhura, mfn. (= sa.) sweet; 


madhuvā 


pleasant, charming; acc. m. n. ~am 
(pamsum) 38,3; (bhasitar) Dh. 363; 
(varadhammaii) 87,9; f. pl. nā, 52,7; 
n. pl. „vāni (phalani) 37,3; comp. 
°.cita-sadda, m. sound of sweet song, 
23,55; °-phalanath, gen. pl. sweet 
fruit, 1,15; ?-phala, mf». bearing sweet 
fruit, m. ~o (ambo) 37,28; ?-rasa, 
m. sweetness, 38,4; Ü-ssara. m. sweet 
voice, instr. «ena, 5,20 (cp. sara). 
a-madhura, mfn. (g. v.). | 

madhuva, adv. (sa. madhu-vat) 
like honey; Dh. 69. 

mana(s). n. (sa. manas) ') the 
mind, the internal organ or mental 
powers in general (often esp. from a 
moral point of view); ?) in the psycho- 
logy : the faculty of thought or organ 
of thought, considered as the sixth 
ergan of sense (cp. àyatana), whose 
objects are dhamma (v. dhamma‘); 
nom. 3) mano (sometimes masc. gene- 
ris and considered as a-stem) 70,59 
(aditto); Dh. 116; Dh. 300—01 (rato); 
b) manam (santari, declined like a- 
stems) Dh. 96; instr. manasa, Dh. 
‘1-2. 233. 281; manasākāsi, v. next; 
gen. manaso, Dh. 390; doc. 3) manasi, 
v. next; P) manasmim, 71,11; — comp. 
mano-9, v. below, cp. manàpa, ma- 
nuüiia; e. c. mana & °-manas, v. 
atta-°, dummana (domanassa), su- 
mana (somanassa); patibaddha-®, 
vyasatta-°, sarisanna -samkappa -?, 
mfn.; hithsa-°, x. (g. v.) cp. °-mana- 
sa, mfn. i 

manasi-karoti, vb. (sa. mana- 
si-kr) to bear in the mind, think over, 
meditate upon, remember (acc.); aor. 
3. sg. manasākāsi (contraction of 
manasi akāsi) 66,6 (paticcasamuppa- 
dam); ger. manasikatvā (sc. dham- 
mam) 71,25. 

*manapa, mfn. (sa. *mana-apa) 
*gaining the mind', pleasant, charming; 
f. —& (gopi) 104,55; gen. n. ~assa 
(tinassa) 52,3; °-ssavana, mfn. flowing 
with pleasure (cp. savana): m. pl. 
nā (sot) Dh. 339. 

manuja, m. (= sa.) a man; gen. 


202 


wassa, 107,29; pl. wa, 74,2. 110,32. 
cp. manussa. 

manuina, mfn. (sa. manojiia) 
‘agreeable to the mind’, pleasing, lovely, 
beautiful; n. (adv.) «am (rudam) 
10,19. 

manussa, m. (sa. manushya) a 
man, human being; pl. men, beings; 
pl. nom. nā, 6,3. 25,26; acc. ~e, 21,3; 
gen. ~anam, 6,1; loc, „esu, 7,13. 
102,22; — comp. °-satani (satta) 27,13; 
sassa-karake-°, arakkha-°, (g. v.); 
*manussávàsa, m. (v. avasa); *°-gha- 
taka, m(fn). a manslayer; nom. ~o 
(hatthi) 76,9; *°-patilabha, m. ob- 
taining birth as a human being, Dh. 
182; *°-bhita, mfn. being a man (o: 
enjoying the benefit of having been 
born among men) m. ~o, 41,32; *-vasa, 
m. abode of men, acc. mam, 21,2; 
*0-santhana, mfn. of human form or 
figure, 85,21; *%~samana-sarira, mfn. 
with body like men, 25,23; cp. a-ma- 
nussa, manusa & next. 

manussatta, n. (sa. manushya- 
tva) manhood, the state or condition 
of man; nom. wath (dullablia-%, g. v.) 
22,15. 

*mano-duccarita, x. the sins 
of the mind, Dh. 238. 

*mano-pakopa, m. anger of the 
mind, Dh, 233: 

mano-pubbaiigama, mfn. ‘hav- 

ing the mind (or thought) -going be- 
fore’, resulting from mind; m. pl. nā 
(dhamma), Dh. 1. ` 

*mano-maya, mfn. consisting of 
mind (or thought), spiritual; m. pl. 
^ & (dhammā) Dh. 1. | 

*Manoratha-purani, f. 'ful. 
filling desires’, nom. pr. of a Pali book, 
being the Comm. on Anguttara Nikāya; 
specimen thereof: 91,13-33. 

manorama, mfn. (= sa.) plea- 
sant, beautiful; n. ~arn (padumam) 
Dh. 58; subst. n. a comfortable abode, 
15,25; cp. ati-manorama. 

*mano-vililiàna, n. ‘conscious- 
ness of mind', the thinking faculty, 
70,38. | 


203 


*mano-samphassa, m. ‘contact 
of mind', perception through the sense 
of thought, 70,55; 9-vinnanáyatana, 
the sense of thought, 72,5 (cp. āya- 
tana). 

Manosila, f. (sa. manah-cila, 
‘red arsenic") nom. pr. of a place in 
Himavanta near the Anotatta lake; 
9-tale (7oc.) “on the M. table-land”, 
61,11. | 

*mano-susamvuta, mfn. "well 
restrained in mind"; m. ~o, Dh. 281 
(cp. manasā samvuto, Dh. 233). 

. *mano-settha, mfn. having mind 
"for the best or essential part; m. pl. 
^i (dhamma) Dh. 1. 
. mano-hara, mfn. (= sa.) ‘seizing 
the mind’, ravishing, fascinating, char- 
ming; n. am (rūpam) 111,36. 
manta, m. (sa. mantra) 1) delibe- 
ration, counsel; *) a sacred text, a 
mystical verse, charm, spell; nom. ~o, 
32,2; 53,14 (anaggha-°); acc. „ar, 
1b.; instr, wena, 55,15; pl. nā, Dh. 
241; janana-°, a spell of knowledge, 
53,36; 53,14 (sabba-ruta-?); °-lobhena, 
through greed for the charm, 55,13; 
jati-mantupapanna, mfn.v, upapanna ; 
3) knowledge, doctrine, wisdom (also 
f. manta) : nom. ~o, 113,16 (Bud- 
dha-°); cp. next ete. 

*mantajjhayaks, m(fn). versed 
in mystic knowledge (the Vedas); comp. 
0.brāhmaņo, 17,5 (probably fr. manta 
-+ jhāyaka, v. jhāyati*). 

*mantatthin, mfn. desirous of 
knowledge; m. nī, 118,18. 

*mantabhanin, mfn. speaking 
wisely; m. ~i, Dh. 363 (manta vuc- 
eati pañña, Comm., cp. manta’). 

manteti, vb. (sa. ymantr) to con- 
sult, deliberate, discuss (acc.); part. 
m. pl. wenta; aor. 3. pl. wayimsu, 
11,2. 72,30. 

manda, mfn. sa.) 1) slow; 
scarce, small (of quantity); m. «o 
(gocara) 4,5; n. ~am (udakam) 3,32; 
n. pl. „ūni (sitthani) 56,25; *) weak, 
tender; f. nā, 28,8; m. eo, 99,4; 3) 
fool, stupid; m. «o, Dh. 325. cp. next. 


marati 


mandakkhi, adj. f. (sa. man- 
dāksha, mfn.) looking with softness, 
tenderness, or bashfulness, languishing 
or bashful (?), 20,27. ep. akkhi. 

mama, gen. pron. 1. pers., v. ahan; 
cp. next ete. 

mamāyati, vb. (denom. fr. prec.; 
sa. mamāyate) to treat anything as 
if it were one’s own property, to love, 
fondle, to be attached or devoted to; 
pp. *mamayita, being one’s own, be- 
loved, dear; n. sg. & pl. one’s own 
property, beloved or desired objects; 
yassa n'atthi witarh (w. loc. nāma- 
rūpasmim, “who has no desire at all 
for name and form", free from selfish- 
ness) Dh. 367; cp. Sn. v. 119. 

*mamimkàara, m. (fr. *mamī- 
kara; ep. niramkaroti = nirākaroti, 
sa. mama-kara) the false view that 
anything belongs to one's self; sabba- 
ahimkara-°, 94,11 (comm. == taņhā). 
cp. ahimkára. 

maya, mfn. (= sa.) only e. c. 
— made of, consisting of; v, amha-', 
indanilamani-?, kattha-?, muiija-^, 
rajata-°, vaddha-", suvanna-" & so- 
vanna-°, 

mayūra, m. (= sa.) a peacock; 
0_rājam, m. an excellent or magnificent 
peacock, acc. ~anam, 18,17. cp. mora. 

marana, x. (= sa.) the act of 
dying, death; nom. acc. eam, 67,9. 
103,5; 6,22. 7,10. instr. wena, 70,29; 
gen. «assa, 103,6; abl. nā, 17,15; 
~ato, 87,52; comp. *-kūle, 89,13; 
*0-dukkha, x. 7,5; marananta, mfn. 
(= sa.) ending in death, 107,5; *°-pa- 
riyosana, mfn. id, 86,16; °-bhaya, m. 
the fear of death, °-tajjita, mfn. 5,14; 
0-bhita, mfn. 27,13; °-bhava, m. (q. 
v.); *sati, f. thinking of death, call- 
ing to one’s mind that death is inevi- 
table, 86,17-18; dvandva comp. jara-°, 
66,10; jati-°, 105,26; vyadhi-°, 108,22; 
cp. param-maraņā, adv. (g. v.). 

marafi (4 miyati (miyyati) 
g. v.), vb. (sa. y mr) to die; part. m. 
instr. marantena, 49,27; m. pl. ~anta 
5,1; pot. 2. sg. weyyasi, 53,15; aor. 


marīci 


3. sg. mari, 9,3. 24,32; 3. pl. wimsu, 
16,5; fut. 1. sg. marissāmi, 88,3; 
1, pl. wissama, 5,12; pp. mata, mfn. 
(g. v.); grd. maritabba, x. „am 
(maya) 86,16; loc. we (sati) 6,24; cp. 
macca, maccu, Marana; caus. mareti 
(cp. Mara, māraņa) & mārāpeti, g. v. 

marici & maricika, f. (= sa.) 
a mirage, vapour like a surface of 
water,. often appearing in deserts; acc. 
~ika, Dh. 170; *°-dhamma, mfn. 
like a mirage; acc. m. „am, Dh. 46. 

maruvā, f. (Birm. reading : mu- 
ruvā, sa. mūrvā) a sort of hemp, from 
which bowstrings are made; gen. 
maya, 92,17. 

marū, m. pl. (sa. marutas) gods, 
deities (— devatā), 114,18. 

mala, x. (= sa.) dirt, impurity ; 
spot, taint; fault, sin; nom. acc. eam, 
106,19 — Dh. 240; Dh. 239. 241. 242 
(mal'itthiyā); 243; abl. ^a (mala- 
taran) Dh. 243; comp. mānusa-', 
61,13; "niddhanta-9, "fn. (g. v.); 
*vanta-°, mfn. free from impurity, 
Dh. 261; vita-°, mfn. id. 68,26; *a- 
sajjhaya-°, mfn. whose fault is non- 
repetition, m. pl. nā (manta) Dh. 
241; *an-utthüna-9, mfn. (v. h.) cp. 
nim-mala, mfn.; Mala-vagga, m. the 
title of Db. XVIII. 

*malatara,mfn. (compar. of mala) 
more impure; ^ ~am, a greater or 
worse taint, Dh. 243. 

mallaka, m. (= sa.) an earthen 
vessel or bowl; nom. ~o (khela-°, g. 
v.) 84,15. 

*Mallika, m. nom. pr. of a king; 
nom. ~o (Kosalaraja) 43,15; °-raiiiio, 
gen. 43,20; %-mahārājā, 43,25. 

mallika, f. (= sa.) Jasminum 
Zambac; comp. sumana-mallikādīnam 
pupphanam, 65,29; tagara-°, Dh. 54 

. 9.). 
mahaggha, mfn. (sa. mahargha) 
of great price; n. wath, 25,5 (cp. 
aggha). 

mahagghasa, m. (sd. maha- 
ghasa) a great eater, Dh. 325. 

mahaddhana, mfn. (sa. mahā- 


M 


4V4 


dhana) having much money, carrying 
much wealth; m. ~o (vānijo) Dh. 123. 
mahat, mfn. (= sa.) great, large, 
high, numerous, important. eminent, 
etc.; m. maha, 3,4. 87,1. 55,19. 95,21. 
112,15, etc.; (acc. mahantam); n. nom. 
acc. mahantam, 2,8. 5,29. 17,17. 71,28; 
f. nom. mahati, 2,12. 101,20; instr. 
m. mahatā, 70,21; f. mahatiya, 74,17; 
gen. m. n. mahato, 10,14; the strong 
stem mahanta is also used in nom. 
m. and sometimes in the weak cases: 
nom. m. mahanto, 4,6. 99,5; instr. 
mahantena, 7,5; loe. mahante, 10,7; 
mahantamhi, 110,20; at 75,35 mahan- 
tam seems to be acc. f. (silam); cp. 
ati-mahanta, kiva-mahanta & compar. 
mahantatara, m. ~0, 74,15. — At the 
beginning of comp. we generally find 
mahà (v. below), whose à in most 
cases is contracted with a foll. vowel 
(or elided, v. mahanubhava, mahā- 
raha, mahiddhika, mahesi, mahogha, 
etc., cp. mahaggha), but sometimes 
the à is shortened before a doubled 
consonant (v. mahagghasa, mahad- 
dhana, mahapphala); cp. mahallaka, 
mfn. 
mahanta&mahantatara, mfn., 
v. mahat. | 
mahapphala, mfn. (sa. mahā- 
phala) bearing much fruit, bringing 
great reward; x. «am, 14,18. Dh. 
312. 356. 
mahallaka, mfn. (= sa.) old; 
grown, adult; elder (of two); m. ~o, 
45,4. 74,01; 55,21; gen. massa, 43,27; 
f. ~ikā, an old woman, 46,23. 57,9. 
maha-°, mfn. = mahat, at the 
beginning of comp. : °-uposatha-divasa, 
m. 22,20 (g. v.); %-ganin, m. 109,17 
(g. ».); jana, m. (g. v.); ?-tala, n. 
a royal hall, acc. ~am, 39,29. 65,10; 
loc. me, 39,26. 53,17; -thera, m. 
109,11. 113,8 (g. v.); “dana, x. 61,6 
(a. v); Cnadi, f. 35,18, etc. (g. v.); 
“nada, m. 6,15 (g. v.); %-nāvā, f. 
28,27 (g. v.); %-nāsa, m. 34,18 (g. v.); 
O-pañña, mfn. very wise, of profound 
knowledge, m. ~0, 113,9 (cp. pañña); 


205 Mahinda 


°-patha, m. Dh. 58 (g. v.); ?-bhaya, | Anurādhapura (Ceylon); °-samipamhi, 
mfn. awful, m. ~o (saddo) 27,6; | 114,14. (ep. bodhi?). 
„bhūmicāla, m. 80,19 (v. bhūmi); | Mahā-brahmau, m. (= sa.) 
-magga, M. 94,4 (q. v.); °-maccha, nom. pr. the god Brahma, ruler in 
m. 4,15 (kāņa-', g. v.); 0-mati, mfn. | the Brahmaloka; pi %-brahmāno 
very clever, eminently wase, 114,5; (cattaro) 62,22 (i. e. four Mahābrah- 
“muni, m. the great sage, 7. €. Bud- | mas of different cakkavālas, q. v.). 
dha, Most 110,20; °-megha, m. 106,21 mahābhinikkhamana, n. (sa. 
(t v.); di e xm (q. v); “Y° | 0-abhinishkramaņa) ‘the great retire- 
n CIN (a. v.); — '-rava, m. ment’, 65,15 (v. abhinikkhamana). 
60, (g. v.); %-varāha, m. Dh. 325 Mah&-miyi, f. (zs sa.) nom, gr 


(g. v.); "-virava, m. 40,21 (4. v); Š 
O_sadda, m. 16,32 (4. v.) ; 0_samudda, of Buddha’s mother; (devi) 61,3. 


m. 10,27. 95,15 (q. v.); %-sampatti, f. | mahāraha, mfn. (sa. mahārha) 
58,8 (g. v.); "-sayana, x. 41,36 (g. v.); | precious, splendid; v. araha. 
0-sara, m. n. 4,9 (q. v.) ; %-sāla-rukkha, maha-rajan, m. (= sa.) !)a 


m. 61,11 (g. v.); °-soka, m. 89,10 (g. | great king or supreme sovereign (opp. 
v.); °-sobbha, m. 27,3 (g. v.); °-hasita, | uparajan); nom. "-ràjü, 43,25 (Mal- 
n. 16,29 (g. v.); cp. also next etc. lika-°) voc. °-raja, 7,16. 96,30. 97,19 
Mahā-kassapa, m. (sa. 9-ka- (~a'ti); — *) pl. °-rajano (cattaro) 
cyapa) nom. pr. of a thera (president 61,9, the four lokapālas or guardians 
of the first Buddhist council); °-thero, of the world, viz, D hatarattha (in the 
109,17— Kassapo, 109,6; -pamokkha | North), Virūļha (South), Virūpakkha 
thera, 110,15 (v. pāmokkha). (West), Vessavana (Bast). — 
mahā-nāga, m(fn). (= sa.) most | |. maha-rajja, n. (sa. "-rüjya) the 
eminent, heroic (? cp. nāga*); m. pl. title or position of & supreme sovereign; 
nā (kuūjarā) Dh. 322, ACC. ~am (katva) 44,21. 
mahānubhāva, mfn. (= sa.) of Maha-vamsa, m. (= sa.) name 
great might, powerful; m..«o (Bha- of a Pali work, being a chronicle of 
gavā), 75,0; gen. Kai (raūno) Ceylon, written in the 5 century by 
62,14 (cp. anubhāva). Mahānāma; specimens thereof : 110,17 
*Mahā-pakaraņa,n. (sa.*%-pra- | ~1149 ` 
karana) ‘the great work’, i.e. Patthana Maha-vihara, m. (= sa.) nom: 
(q. v.); nom. wath, 109,11. pr. of a Buddhist monastery (vihara) 


_ " t adhavu ; vw Y 
Mahā-pajāpatī Gotami, f.|| uS I Cay C am 


(sa. %-prajāpatī Gautami) nom. pr. rt 
of Buddha’s aunt and foster-mother; 
gāthās of hers: 108,11-22. 

*Mahā-padāna, x. (sa. *°-pra- 
dāna) name of a chapter (sutta) in 
Digha-Nikaya (DN. XIV); loc. ~e, 
63,12. 

*Maha-padhina-ghara, n. 
nom. pr. the Mahapadhaua Hall (in 
Mahavihara, q. v.); acc. ~am, 114,4. 

Mahā-bodhi, m. (= sa.) nom. 
pr. *) the. Bo-tree at Buddha Gaya; 
acc. ~im (vanditur: Jambudipam 
upāgami) 114,32; *) the Bo-tree at 


Mahā-satta, m. (sa. "-sattva) 
‘the great creature’, synon. Bodhisatta 
(g. v.); nom. ~o, 7,5; acc. ~am, 
25,24. 

*Mahā-sīlava, m. nom. pr. of 
a king; '-rājā, 38,11; °-jataka, m. 
38,7. cp. Sīlava. 

*mahiddhika, mfn. of great 
power, mighty; 75,30. 109,20 (cp. iddhi 
& iddhika). 

Mahinda, m. (sa. Mahendra) 
nom. pr. of a prince, son of king 
Asoka (he transplanted Buddhism into 
Ceylon, in the last half of the 3! cen- 


mahisa 


tury BC.); instr. wena (matimata) 
113,28. 

mahisa, m. (sa. mahisha) a buf- 
falo; gen. ~wassa, 92,21; vana-mahisari 
(acc.) a wild buffalo, 18/22. 

mahi, f. (= sa.) 1) the earth; 
°-tale, “throughout the world", 113,21; 
2) nom. pr. of a river; gen. Mahiyā, 
104,21; Mahiy’, 104,24. 

mahesakkha, mfn. (sa. mahe- 
cākhya, i. e. mahā-īga-ākhya; diffe- 
rently Tr. Mil. p. 422 (65,11)) emi- 
nent, mighty; m. ~o (putto) 62,24. 

mahesi, m. (fr. maha + isi, sa. 
maharshi) the great sage (i. c. Buddha); 
acc, ~im, Dh. 422; instr. ~ina, 77,13. 

mahesi, f. (sa. mahishi, a buf- 
falo-cow) a queen; agga-°, g. v. 

mahogha, m. (sa. mahaugha) 
a mighty flood, v. ogha. 

*mahodaka, mf(~wika)n. aboun- 
ding with water, v. udaka. 

*Mahosadha, m. (fr. sa. maha 
-+ aushadha) nom. pr. of a prince 
(Bodhisatta); nom. «o, 55,21. 

mā, indecl. (= sa.) a negative 
particle, generally used in prohibitive 
(or consecutive) sentences : ‘not, that 
not, lest’, and joined with aor. of the 
verb (augmentless or augmented), but 
also frequently with imper, or pot., 
and even with indic. of pr. & fut.; 
mà ‘ti patisedhe nipato, 85,33, — 1) 
w. aor. ~ bhayi, 1,10. 4,30; ~ asam- 
kittha, 7,11; ~ karittha, 39,2; ~ ma- 
rimsu, 16,5, etc.; augmented: ~ akāsi 
(= ma karohi) 86,1; ~ ahosi (3. sg.) 
83,11; ~ ahesum (mā-y-ime, i. e. mà 
ime, to be scanned : *may-me) 60,17; 
~ acāvayi (8. sg.) 104,4. — 2) w. im- 
per. ~ gaccha, 7,31; ~ detha, 52,20; 
~ karontu, 8,7; ~ kilamantu, 60,12; 
imper. & aor. alternatively, v. Dh. 
371. — °) w. pot. ~ anuyufjetha, 
Dh. 27; ~ vadetha, 55,2. — *) w. 
pr. 3. sg. ~ h'evam kho... pati- 
labhati, 90,34. — 5) without verb : 


vanam chindatha, mā rukkham, 


Dh. 283. 
Magadha, mfn. (= sa.) relating 


206 


to the Magadha country; m. pl. the in- 
habitants of that country, gen. ~anam, 
113,32; instr. f. ~aya (niruttiyā) the 
M. dialect, ?. e. Pali, 114,28. 

manava, m. (= sa.) a youth, esp. 
a young Brahman; nom. ~o, 19,11; 
0-vesena, in the disguise of a young 
Br., 19,10; brahmana-?, 113,2. — di- 
min. 1) manavaka, m. id.; pl. nā, 
16,81; acc. pl. we (nàga-?, “Naga 
youths") 53,1; — ?) manavika, f. a 
young girl, acc. wath, 48,21; naga-®, 
a Naga girl, 52,28; acc. ~am, 52,5; 
instr, waya, 52,27; loc. pl. māsu, 
52,24, 

mataiga, m. (= sa.) an elephant; 
nom. «o (matang'araünüe va nāgo) 
Dh. 329. 

mātar, f. (sa. matr) a mother; 
nom. mata, 20,25; 59,25 (dāraka-'); 
64,5 (Rahula-9, g. v.); acc. aram, 
23,9; instr. ~wara, 23,8; gen. matu, 
9,12, or mātuyā (Bodhisatta-°) 62,11, 
[after the analogy of u-stems, also 
used for other obligue cases] or mātāva 
(Rahula-°) 65,27 [after the analogy of 
ā-stems]; loc. wari, Dh. 284; — dvan- 
dva comp. mata-pitaro, m. pl. parents, 
22,15 (v. pitar); mātā-puttā, m. pl. 
mother and son, 49,5; matu-dhitaro, 
f. pl. & mother and her daughter, 
32,20 (instead of mata-°?); — at the 
begin. of other comp. we find the weak 
stem mātu- [or māti-| : *-hadaya, v. 
a mother’s heart, nom. «am, 59,13; 
a-matuhadayam, ib.; cp. matti-sam- 
bhava, matteyyata & matugama below. 

Mātali, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. of 
the charioteer of Sakka (Indra); ~i, 
60,18 (nom.); 60,12 (voc.); acc, ~it, 
60,9. 

matu, etc., v. matar. 

mātu-gāma, m. (sa. matr-grāma) 
womankind, the female sex, any being 
of the female sex, woman; nom. ~o, 
50,94; acc. ~am, 48,12. 50,82; *-va- 
sika, “being in the power of woman- 
kind", m. ~o (raja) 54,s. | 

mātula(ka), m. (= sa.) 8 mater- 
nal uncle (also used as a term of fa- 


207 


miliar address); voc. ~a, 5,4; piya- 
mātulaka, mfn. who loves his uncle, 
m. ~o (atibhaginiputto, g. v.) 5,5. 

mäna, m. (= sa.) pride, arrogance; 
nom. ~0, Dh. 74. 407; acc. ~am, 
Dh. 221; 9-ditthi-adi, 64,21; "9-ànu- 
saya, m. 94,11 (9. h.); *nihata-°, *pa- 
hina-9, mfn. (g. v.). 

manasa, «. (== sa.) the mind; 
e. €. mfn., v. tuttha-%, vimutta-?, 
viratta-, samvigga-'. 

mānin, mfn. (= sa.) thinking, 
imagining; pandita-°, mfn. (q. v.). 

mānusa, mfn. (= sa.) human; 
0-mala-, 61,13 (human stain); a-mā- 
nusa, mfn. (g. v.); — m. a man, hu- 
man being; pl. «à (gandhabba-°) 
Dh. 420; acc. ne, 107,3 = Dh. 103; 
0-matta, n». (v. matta?); f. manusi, 
a woman, pl. ~iyo, 21,29; comp. w. 
subst. f. mūnusi-vācā, human speech, 
acc. eam, 22,3. 

manusaka, mfn. (= sa.) human; 
acc. m. ~am (yogam) Dh. 417; pl. 
m. eA (kama) 45,5. 

mūpeti (or mapayati), vb. (sa. 
mapayati, caus. yma) to make, pre- 
pare, create (by supernatural power, 
w. acc.); aor. 3. sg. «esi (sarīram 
mahanavam katva, changed his own 
body into a large ship) 28,28; (saya- 
nam) 112,2; ger. wetva (angararasim, 
attano anubhavena) 16,5; ~ayitva 
(rüpam, nagaram) 111,36. 112,25. cp. 
mita, mfn. & atimapeti. 

Maya, f. (= sa.) nom. pr. of the 
mother of Gotama Buddha; «à (ja- 
nayi Gotamam) 108,21; Maha-®, 61,5. 

Mara, m. nom. pr. (= sa.) Death, 
the Tempter, the Evil One; nom. ~o, 
103,11. 108,5; 71,27 (papima); ace. 
~am, 103,12; gen. wassa, 71,24; °-jala, 
n. & 9-bandhana, x. (v. h.) cp. sa- 
māra-ka, mfn. & Namuci, m. — *Mara- 
dheyya, n. the realm of M., the world 
of death, ~am, Dh. 34 (cp. *maccu- 
dheyya). 

marana, ^. (= sa.) killing, death; 
*maranantika, mfn. 1) ‘bordering on 


miga 


death’, being on the point of killing, 
almost mortally; acc. m. «am (ābā- 
dhari) 78,50; pl. f. mā (vedanī), 
78,25; *) which is to end at death; x. 
eam (namarüpam) 101,12 (cp. mara- 
nanta). 

*mārāpeti, vb. (caus, IT. marati, 
cp. next) to cause to be killed or 
murdered; pp. ~ita, f. wi, 74,9 (kehi 
e, “who bade you to kill her”); 74,12. 

mareti, vb. (caus. marati, sa. 
marayati, Vmr) to kill, murder (ace.); 
pr. 1. sg. ~emi (tam) 111,26; 3. sg. 
~eti, 97,15; part. loc. m. «ente (& 
a-mārente) 17,4; fut. 1. sg. ~wessii- 
mi, 2,3. 12,98; inf. -etum, comp. 
„etu-kāma, mfn. (v. kāma*); ger. 
wetva, 9,25; pp. marita, f. nā, 74,8; 
bhava, m. the having been killed, 
acc. «am (aiifiehi) 74,3. 

*māļa!, m. a pavilion, a thatched 
hut; acc. ~am, 101,3. 

māla? % Ymāli(u) = mila 
(e. c.). 

mālā, f. (= sa.) a wreath, gar- 
land; acc. wat, 16,5; °-dama, w. 
id.; pl. ani 37,2; °-guna, m. a 
garland of flowers (by the lover cast 
over his bride), acc. pl. ~e, Dh. 53; 
*O-kacavara, m. (q. v.); dvandva comp. 
°-gandha-, 61,4. 73,11. 81,25; gandha-®, 
49,14 (perfumes and flowers); €. c. mala 
or māli(n), v. Aggi-?, Kusa-°, Khu- 
ra-°, Dadhi-°, Nala-0. 

*Maluikyaputta, m. nom. pr. 
of a thera; nom. ~0, 93,18; voc. na, 
92,2; his gāthās from Theragatha: 
107,295—108,5. 

*māluvā, f. name of a certain 
creeper, 107,29 — Dh. 334 (cp. sa. 
malu). 

māsa, m. (= sa.) a month; loc. 
~e (mase māse, month after month) 
Dh. 70. 106; acc. pl. we (cattaro) 
25,21; (dasa-°) 62,2; *-addha-masa-, 
a month and a half, 20,1 (v. À.). 

miga, m. (& f. ~i) (sa. mrga) a 
deer, antelope; acc. pl. ~e (bahu-" 
6,5; 6,18 (suvanna-9); instr. pl. „vehi, 
8,12; gen. pl. ~anam, 6,4; f. gen. 


migadāya 


„iyā (gabbhini-) 6,33; comp. ku- 
ruüga-9, m. (g. v.); Nigrodha-? & 
Sakha-°, m. nom. pr. (g. v.); gana, 
m. 6,10; *°-dhenu, f. 7,29; ?-yoni, f. 
5,25 (v. h.); %-rājam, m. 7,3; *°-lud- 
daka, m. 11,07 (a hunter); °-vadha, 
m. hunting, 5,32 (°-pasuta, mfn. g. v.) 
cp. next eic. 

migadaya, m. (sa. mrgadava) a 
deer-park; nom. ~o, 68,7; loc. ne 
(Isipatane) 66,24. 

migava, m. (?) (sa. mrgaya, f. 
& mrgavya, n.) hunting; acc. «am 
(gacchati) 6,2. 

miccha, ado. (sa. mithyā) wrongly, 
falsely; ~ carati (kamesu) commits 
immorality, 97,11; comp. °-ditthi, f. 
false doctrine, Dh. 167; 316 (°-sama- 
dana, mfn. g. v.); *°-panihita, mfn. 
(g. v.); *-laddha, mfn. falsely ob- 
tained, m. ~o (yaso) 103,29; *°-sam- 
kappa, m. wrong thought or study 
(opp. samma-°) Dh. 11 (°-gocara, 
mfn. g. v.). 

minja, f. (sa. majja, cp. majjan, 
was, & Prākr. mijjà) marrow; *atthi-°, 
f. the marrow of bones, 82,3. 97,21. 

mita, mfn. (== sa. pp. minati, 
ma) measured, moderate, little; 
*0_-bhiinin, mfn. speaking little, acc. 
m. «inam, Dh. 227. 

mitta, m. (sa. mitra) a friend, 
companion; acc. pl. we, Dh. 78. 375; 
comp. nàti-mitta, pl. kinsmen and 
friends, Dh. 219; mittāmaccā, pl. 
(v. amacca); 9-bhava, m. friendship, 
«0, 52,16 (nagarajena saddhim); 
*o-dhamma, m. id. ~o, 14,5; a-mitta, 
m. (v. h.) cp. metta, metti & paccā- 
mitta. 

*Mittavindaka, m. nom. pr. of 
a mercbant's son; 22,13, etc. 

Mithila, f. (= sa.) nom. pr. of 
a city, the capital of the Videha coun- 
try; loc. „āyam, 44,19. 

mithuna, x. (— sa.) a pair, 
couple (male and female); copulation; 
v. methuna. 

middha, w. (= sa.) the state 
between sleeping and waking, drowsi- 


208 


ness, indolence; dvandva comp. thina-®, 
103,27 (g. v.) cp. next. 

*middhin, mfn. (fr. prec.) drowsy, 
indolent; m. ^1, Dh. 325. 

minūti, vb. (sa. ymā, mi, cp. 
Vini) to measure; pp. mita (g. v.); 
caus. māpeti (g. v.). 

Milinda, m. (= sa.) mom. pr. 
of the Greek king Menander; 96,24, 
etc, — "-paüha, m. title of a Pāli 
book, containing a conversation be- 
tween king M. and the Buddhist sage 
Nagasena; specimens thereof : 96,23— 
101,5. 

miyati (& miyyati) == marati 
(g. v.; sa. Ymr) to die; pr. 3. pl. 
e. anti, Dh. 21. 

mukha, x. (= sa.) ') mouth (of 
men or animals); nom. acc. eam, 3,16. 
5,27. 41,12; instr. wena, 5,14. 35,21; 
*mukhasā = mukhena, 85,26-34; abl. 
~ato, 13,21; loc. ee, 37,24; comp. 
mukhodaka, n. (v. udaka); °-tundaka, 
n. (?) a beak, acc. ^am, 18,7; instr. 
wena, 4,8; ?-vivate, loc. abs. == mu- 
khe vivate, 3,17; *%-saūūata, mfn. 
who controls his mouth, m. ~o, Dh. 
363; vivata-°, mfn. with the mouth 
open, f. pl. «à, 65,7; stkara-°, mfn. 
(v. h.). — ?) face, head, front; „ari, 
11,6. 83,32. 85,5; abl. ~ato, 50,23; 
loc. ~e, 12,10; comp. *°-dhovana, x. 
(v. h.); assu-°, mfn. (g. v.); ohitā- 
mukha, mfn, (v. ohita); *punnacan- 
da-°, mfn. (g. v.); sa-mukha-vethita, 
mfn. (v. h.) cp. abhimukha, pamukha, 
& sammukha. — ?) entrance, opening; 
edge, brim; atavi- 30,30 (g. v.); 
avata-°, 40,28 (°-vatti, g. v.); uyyoga-', 
Dh. 235 (q. v.). — *) way, method; 
cause, means; instr. wena, adv. (e. c.) 
by means of : isi-°, 60,16 (g. v.); 
phala-patisedhana-°, 86,4 (v. patise- 
dhana); loc. we, adv. (e. c.) by way 
of, like, as : dana-mukhe, 16,6 (“as 
a free gift"). cp. next. 

mukhara, mfn. (— sa.) garrulous, 
loquacious; M. «0, 860,9. - 

mugga, m. (sa, mudga) a sort of 
bean (Phaseolus Mungo); pl. wil, 16,1. 


209 munāti 


like m., 21,35; °-maya, mfn. made of 


muggara, m. (sa. mudgara) a 
m., m. pl. mā (dama) 105,17. 


mallet, mace, club, stick; instr. pl. 
wehi, 6,11; muggarádi-9, 6,7. mutthi, f. (sa. mushti) the clen- 
muccati!, «vb. (pass. muiicati, | ched fist; a handful, a small bundle; 
sa. mucyate) to be loosed, released, | acc. «ini (akāsi, closed his hand) 
liberated; to escape (from, abl.); pr. | D6,8. , 
8. sg. vati (jālato) 88,34; aor. 3. pl. | munda(ka), mfn. (= sa.) shaved; 
eimsu (seda sarira, “rolled down") | subst. n. mundaka, tonsure, instr. 
45,1; 9) fut. 2. sg. mokkhasi (me) | wena, Dh. 264. 
72,1 (“escape from me"); 3.97. „anti, | mutiüga, m. (sa. mrdaüga) a 
Dh. 37; P) 1. sg. muccissimi, 16,28; | small drum, tabour; acc. «aii, 67,39 
inf. muccitum (marana) 17,15; pp. | (cp. Tr. PM. p. 62, 64; 78-79). 
mutta (q. v.). ' mutta!, mfn. (sa. mukta; pp. 
muccati*, vb, (sa. Vmūrch; pro- | muūcati) loosed, released, freed (from, 
bably instead of mucchati through | abl.); m. ~o, 54,21. Dh. 172 (abbhā); 
confusion with muccati!) to congeal, | 100,5 (papakehi kammehi); comp. 
coagulate, turn sour (as milk); pr. | jala-°, 88,30; vana-°, Dh. 344; m. pl. 
3. sg. ati (khiram va, papam kam- | „ū (dukkhato) 31,30. 
mam, with both significations : to mutta*, x. (sa. mūtra) urine; 


loosen & to turn sour) 106,31 — Dh. | nom. ~ar, 82,5. 97,23. 
Tl. cp. next. mutta, f. (sa. muktā) a pearl; 
muccheti, vb. (caus. ymürch) | at the beginning of comp. we find 
to strain, strengthen; to tune (a strin- | sometimes mutta-? : *"-sara, m. 24,20; 
ged instrument, ace); ger. ~etva | muttā-hāra, m. a necklace of pearls, 
(vinam) 19,32. (Morris, JPTS, ’84,92.) | acc. wath, 64,26. 
muiicati, vb. (sa. ymuc) to loose, mutti, f. (sa. mukti) liberation, 
release, set at liberty; to leave, give | deliverance (from, abl.); 67,16 (tan- 
up; to send forth, utter (w. acc.); | haya); 87,52 (maranato). 
intr. med. & act. w. abl. or gen. (dat.) mudu, mfn. (sa. mrdu) soft, mild, 
to free one’s self from, to make resi- | gentle; instr. m. „unā (amkena) 
stance against (Dh. 389?); pr. 3. sg. | 20,24; n. 44,1 (—una mudum, sc. jeti); 
„vati (assa) Dh. 389; part. m. ~anto | ~um, “something soft", 104,14; *°-citta, 
(obhasam) 26,4; imp. 2. sg. muūca | mfn. ‘soft-minded’, impressible; acc. 
(pure, g. v.) Dh. 348; pot. 3. sg. | m. ~am, 68,23. 
weyya (papakamma) Dh. 127 (w. | muduka, mfn. (sa. mrduka) soft, 
intrans. sense; B. has the pass. muc- | mild, tender; m. ~o (hattho) 50,22; 
ceyya); pot. 3. sg. med. ~etha (assa) | n. eam (mātuhadayam, w. loc, dā- 
Dh. 389; aor. 3. pl. ^ imsu (atika- | rake) 59,12. 
runa-saram, uttered) 27,15; ger. ~itva, muddā, f. (sa. mudrā) ') a seal, 


17,18, 76,13; pass. v. muccati!; pp. | seal-ring; ?) reckoning or speaking by 
mutta (g. v.); caus. moceti (g. v.) | means of the fingers, signal made by 
cp. mutti. the hand, at 56,7 called *hattha- 
mufija, m. (= sa.) name of a sort | muddā, instr. aya (pucchissami). 
of grass or rush; acc. ~am (parihare,| muddhan, m. (sa. murdhan) the 
“I wear m.-grass", a token of sacrificing | head; [nom. ~a]; acc. ~am, Dh. 72; 
one's self in battle : samgámávacarü | Joc. ~ani, 77,8. 
anivattino purisā attano anivattanaka- munāti, vb. (= maūūati, yman 
bhávam nàpanattham sise và dhaje va | (Kuhn, Beitr. p. 99) or rather fr. 
üvudhe vā muija-tinam bandhanti, | ymi (Trenckner, cp. Pischel, Gr. $ 
Comm.) 103,83; %-kesa, mfn. with hair | 489)) to understand, to know (dcc.); 


Pāli Glossary. 14 


muni 


pr. 8. sg; māti (ubho loke; etymo- 
logy of muni, g. v.) Dh. 269. (cy. 
Dh. (1855) p. 380.) 

muni, m. (= sa.) a sage; nom. 
„i (maha-°, Buddha) 110,20; voc. 
105,24 (do.); ~i (metri causa) 80,33 
(Buddha); 106, — Dh. 49; Dh. 
268-69; pl. munayo, Dh. 225. cy. 
mona, ^. 

mummura, m. (?) (sa. murmura) 
embers, ashes; loc. ~e (upakūļito) 
9,32. 

muyhati, vb. (sa. Vmuh) to be 
confused or bewildered; pp. v. mulha; 
cp. mogha, moha. 

mulàli, m. [& muļāla, m. ».] (sa. 
mrnàla, ^.) a lotus-fibre or -root 
(edible); acc. pl. wayo, 111,5. 

musa, !) adv. (sa. mrsha) falsely; 
wabhanim, 47,8 (I told a lie); ~ 
bhanati, 97,11; comp. %-vāda, m. lying, 
lie; ace. ~am (katvā) 46,24; (bhāsati) 
Dh, 246; 97,32; abl. nā, 81,23; °-va- 
di(»), mfn. who speaks falsely; gen. 
m. wissa, 106,14 = Dh. 176. — ?) 
*musa, subst. f. falsehood, lie, 51,32 
=: musavado, 52,1. 

mubutta, m. (sa. muhirta) a 
moment, instant; acc. (adv.) wath, 
for a moment, awhile, 64,32 (niddam 
okkami); 50,15 (naccitvà); 83,8; ~am 
api, but for a moment, Db. 65. 106. 

mula, x. (= sa.) ') the root (of 
plants); foot, bottom, base; metaph. 
cause, origin; mom, „am (mūlena, 
instr. “root with root") 37,34; pl. 
„ni (mūleli, do.) 37,20; sāla-', 
62,16; metaph. Dh. 247; tanhaya 
wath, 108, =: Dh. 337; vināsa-', 
33,96; abl. ~ato patthāya, "from the 
ground", 62,10; loc. ~e (rukkha-?) 
4,5; (pada-°, at one's feet) 36,27. 
49,5; „amhi (rukkha-?) 111,6; ~as- 
mim (do. 112,2; comp. *°-tandula, 
m. (v. h.); *%-bhāsā, f. the original 
language (or the chief of, all lan- 
guages?), instr. ~aya (sabbesam, i. 
e. Magadha nirutti, g. v.) 114,28; 
*ucchinna-°, mfn. (v. h.). — ?) price, 


———————————————XKÁAÁ''"JÁ"«"-————————— ——————————————————————————————————— D 


210 


payment, money; nom. «am, 57,4; 
49,19 (bahum); 49,15 (agahetva, “gra- 
tis”); 49,2 (gandha-puppha-°, “money 
to buy flowers and perfumes"); instr. 
wena (ganhatha, “take it at a price”) 
18,10; (kammam n'atthi, v. kamma °) 
57,4; comp. sahassa-mūla, mfn. (q. 
v.) cp. next. 

*mula-ghaccam, adv. radically 
(extirpated); ~ samūhatam, "taken 
out with the very root", Dh. 250 (cp. 
ghacca). 

mūļha, mfn. (pp. muyhati; sa. 
mūdha) confused, bewildered, stupid; 
acc. ih. ~am, 75,24; gen. wassa, 69,16; 
comp. *°-rupa, mfn. foolish; m. ~o, 
Dh. 268. cp. mogha, moha. 

musika, m. (sa. mushika) a mouse, 
rat; *"-cchinna, mfn. cut by mice, 
n. ~am (thanam) 25,7. 

me mama, gen. pron. 1. pers., 
v. aham; — ‘me = ime, pl. pron. 
demonstr., v. ayam. 

megha, m. (= sa.) a cloud; nom. 
no (maha-°, “a shower") 105,21. 

*menda(ka), m. (cp. sa. menda, 
mendha, mendhra, metha, mentha) 
a ram; istr. «ena, 30,3; comp. 
vara, m. 30,9 (g. v.); mendako, 
30,14 (cp. elaka). 

metta, !) n. & metta, f. (sa. 
maitra, x.) friendship, kindness; acc. 
~am, 40,7; comp. khanti-mettānud- 
daya-9, 7,12. 38,15 (v. hj); *mettā- 
viharin, mfn. “who behaves with 
kindness", m. ~1, Dh. 368. — 2) mfn. 
friendly, kind, benevolent; instr. n. 
wena (cittena) 76,34; -citta, mfn. 
friendly, benevolent, m. pl. mā, 35,14. 

metti, f. (sa. maitri) = prec.; 
nom. ~i, 18,12; acc. wim, 53,9. 

Metteyya, m. (sa. Maitreya) 
nom. pr. of the future Buddha; nom. 
~0, 114,24. 


methuna, ». (sa. maithuna) copu- 
lation, love, marriage; *°-dhamma, m. 


— 
—Á 


1d, acc. eam, 54,11. | 


meda, m. (sa. meda, m. & medas, 
n.) fat; ~o, 82,5. 97,25; — °-vanna, 


411 


mfn. "looking like (a lump of) fat", ; 


acc. m. «am (pāsāņam) 104,5. 
*medhaga (or medhaka) m. m. 
(cp. ved. sa. mrdh & medhayu) quar- 
rel, strife; pl. à, Dh. 6 (= kalaha, 
Comm.) cp. Sn. v. 893-94; Vin. 11, 88. 
medha, f. |% medhas, ».] (= sa.) 
intelligence, prudence; instr. wiiya, 
91,27. cp. dummedha, sumedha, su- 
medhasa, mfn. & next. 
medhivin, mfn. (= sa.) intelli- 
gent, wise; nom. m. ~i (dovāriko) 
90,32. 91,27; ace. „im, Db. 76. 
°medhin, mfn. (e. c. — sa.) id.; 
v. dummedhin. 


ya- 


lusion, 64,20; *°-dosa, mfn. damaged 
by delusion, f. ~@ (pajà) Dh. 358; 


| *vita-°, mfn. free from delusion, Joc. 


i pl. „esu, Dh. 358. 


meraya, (x.) (sa. maireya) a kind . 
of strong drink; dvandva comp. sura~®, | 
; by sandhi: Dh. 345; yad-idam, 97,2; 


81,2. Dh. 247 (°-panam). 
mokkhati, fut., v. muccati. 
Moggallana, m. (sa. Maudga- 

lyayana) nom. pr. of one of Buddha's 

most famous pupils; Sāriputta-Mog- 
gallina, pl. S. & M. 74,30 (nēva); 

gen. pl. nam, 74,27. 
mogha, mfn. (= sa.) vain, use- 

less; foolish; x. eam (aniiam) 89,25; 

%-purisa, voc. O foolish one! 76,5; 

*0_Jinna, mfn. grown old in vain, m. 

~o, Dh. 260. 
moceti, vb. (caus. muicati; sa. 

mocayati) to cause to be loose, let 

go (acc.); to liberate, save (acc. & abi.); 

aor. 3. sg. esi (jane dukkhā) 31,25; 

inf. etum, 40,20; ger. netvā (mam 

bandhana) 33,2; (asse) 44,12; (sata- 

kam) 50,24; (puttam) 69,1. 


modati, vb. (sa. ymud) to be | 
' bla. — 1) who, which, what (often 


glad or happy, to delight; pr. 3. sg. 
„ati (opp. socati) Dh. 16. 

mona, x. (sa. mauna) silence; 
instr, wena, Dh. 268. 

mora, m. (== mayūra, g. v.) a 
peacock; nom. ~o, 10,15; voc. ~a, 
10,11; gen. «assa, 92,20; °-yoni, f. 
18,2 (v. h.); dvandva comp. hamsa- 
morādayo, 10,6. 

moha, m. (= sa.) bewilderment, 
infatuation, delusion, folly; acc. ~am 
(in the series: raga, dosa, moha) Dh. 
20. comp. mohaggi, m. the fire of de- 


Y. 


y, !)on account of sandhi inserted 
in mà-y-ime. 60,17; mama-y-idam, 
72,20. *) instead of i or e, v. ty’ (= 
ti, te) ep. tv’. 

ya-, base of the pron. relat. (== 
$0.); mom. acc. m. yam (sa. yad): 
56,11. 72,20. 78,8 elc. ; 78,7 (yan); the 


old form yad is sometimes preserved 


yad-eva, 91,9; m. yo, 30,9 ele.; with 
elision of the vowel : y’assa, Dh. 389; 
yayam (i e. yo ayam) Dh. 56; f 
ya, 47,27, etc.; 67,12 (yāyam); ya ce 
— yai ce, Dh. 104 (v. yaīce); as 
for the rest the declension is like that 
of pron. demonstr. tam : acc. f. yum, 
67,10. 87,18; gen. m. (n.) yassa, 3,26 
(yass'ete); gen. f. yassā, 64,15 (yassá- 
yam); instr. m. n. yena, 1,9. 103,13 
(yen'atthena, v. attha!); yen'eva (n.) 
96,27; f. yāya, 92,16 (yay); Dh. 408; 
abl. m. (n.) *) yamha, Dh. 392; b) 
yasmā (v. separately); loc. m. (n.) 
a) yamhi, 106,9 = Dh. 393; 108,26 
(yamb’okiise) ; ") yasmim, 84,7; pl. n. 
yāni, 2,11; m. ye, 75,3; gen. yesam, 


i 86,20; 86,18 (yesaū hi); 92,31 (yes’- 


āhari, i. e. yesam aham); loc. f. yasu, 


corresp. with foll. demonstr., cp. tam) : 
68,23. 78,7-s etc.; yam yeva... tam 
yeva (the same. . as) 99,30; yasnum 
vihāre ...sace so viharo, 84,7; yo 
yaso...esū te senū, 103,29-31; yo 
... tanhāya... nirodho (after prec. 
idari) 67,15; yāyar tanhā, 67,12 (do.); 
esā yā (gehe vasato, part. gen.) rati, 
47,97; w. pot. of the verb.: yo evam 
vadeyya; 99,30; anavakāso yo (do.) 
76,26 (v. an-avakāsa); yarn balam 
(g. v.) 13,25. — ?) repeated : whatever, 


14* 


alā 


yam 
whichever; yam yam, 50,5; y& ya,’ = "-pura, . 112,19 (Sirisavatthu); 
50,9. — 3) combined with other pron. | %-rāja-", 112,22. I 
8) w. pron. demonstr. — whatever, - yakkhini (or yakkhi), f. (sa. 


whichsoever: yan tam, Dh. 42; yad- I yakshini & yakshi) a female yakkha; 
idah, 70,26; yena tena, 1,9; ye te, ; nom. ~ini, 58,30; 21,22 (jettha-°): 
76,30, P) in the same sense tu, pron. | 59,19 (wini-mhi = «ini amhi); «i, 
indef. : yo koci, 110,5; yam kiñci, | 111,35. 112,11; acc. wim, 111,35; instr, 
68,27; yo anno, 34,24; likewise fol- | „iniyā, 59,7; gen. winiya, 21,95; pl. 
lowed by pi: yam pi... tam pi, | ~iniyo, 20,33; °~ini-bhava, m. (g. v.); 
67,10; °) w. pron, 1. pers. (foll. by | paricdrika-°, f. (v. paricārikā). 
1. pers. of the verb.) : yo'ham, 75,4; | yajati, vb. (sa. /ya)) to sacrifice; 
ye mayam (we who, since we) 105,23; ' pot. 8. sg. med. ~wetha (sahassena, 
yesan no (gen. pl.) n'atthi kiñcanarı, | “with a thousand") Dh. 106. cp. yittha. 
though we have nothing at all, Dh. | *vaūice (or yañ ce), indecl. (i. e. 
200. — +) pleonastic or omitted: yad- | yam +- ce, g. v.) than, than if; ma- 
idari 'Nāgaseno' ti, this word N., , tam seyyo ~ jivitam, 7,34; 108,34. 
97,2; yam bhimsanakam (v. h.) 81,5; ' Dh. 106—07; by attraction to a subst. 
[yo] Jañña, Dh. 352; [yo] udiraye, ; f. we have ya ce = yaūce, Dh. 104 
Dh. 408. — ") several cases are used ! (seyyo yà c'ayam itarā paja) cp. 
as indecl. (conj.) : n. acc. yam, instr. | yah ce, Dh. 229 (v. ce). 
yena, abl. yasma, v. separately. cp. | yatthi, f. (sa. yashti) +) a stick, 
yato, yattaka, yattha, yathā, yada, ° staf; acc. ~im (pācana-, a goad) 
yadi, yava ete. & yebhuyyena. | 71,29; 2) name of a certain measure of 
yam, indecl. (conj.) (acc. m. fr. | length — 7 hatthas or ratanas (about 
ya-; sa. yad) !)that (guod); tam 31, metres) v. yojana. cp. latthi. 
bahum yam hi jivasi, 13,2» (v. bahu); yato, 1) indecl. (adv. & conj.; abl. 
a of pron. rel. ya-, correl, of tato; sa. 


2) when, if (quum in its different 
meanings): 80,33 (yam kalam akarī | yatas) *) whence, wherefrom, where, 
81,35 (~ sodariyam anaye); P) since 


muni); 97,5 (yam vadesi); 90,19 
(yam pan’); 54,26 (yan nu, even if); | when, 27,22 (~ sarāmi attanam); °) 
since, because, 66,21. 112,29; 4) repea- 


3) as, since, because : 76,3. 95,7 (yam 
ted : yato yato, as soon as, according 


hi); 51,3 (anacoluthic — as (for in- 
stance ?)); 4) comb. w. nuna (in op- | to, w. foll. tato tato : the more — the 
more, Dh. 374. 390. — ?) gen. part., 


tative sense like Germ. dass, w. pron. 
1. pers. and pot. of the verb): yan | v. yati. 
nūnāham, what if I? = let me! 33,27. | *yattaka, mfn. (correl. of ettaka, 
46,23. 68,35. 71,26 e¢e.; yan nūna ; kittaka, g. v.) however much, as much 
mayai, 6,5; 5) comb. w. ce, v. | as (quantus); pl. m. «à, as many as, 
yaiice. | 57,10 (fr. sa. yavat, v. Tr. PM. p. 30). 
yakana, x. (sa. yakrt, yakan) |  yattha (& yatra), adv. (sa. yatra) 
the liver; nom. «am, 82,3. 97,2. in or to what place, where, whither; 
yakkha, m. (sa. yaksha) name | 56,17 (gata); 63,13 (yatra, sc. jatiya, 
of certain superhuman beings (as | jatassa); 104,10 (~ gantvā); comp., 
goblins or ogres), who are the enemies | v. next etc. 
of men; nom. «o (i. e. Māra) 104,18; yattha-kamam, adv. (sa. yatra- 
gen. wassa, 112,13; pl. «à (inhabi- | kāmam) whereever one plaeses, accor- 
tants of Lanka) 112,10; acc. pl. ~e, | ding to one's wish; Dh. 326; comp. 
112,9 (to be corr. into yakkha); 112,1 | yatthakama-nipatin, mfn. (v. ni- 
(sabba-°); gen. pl. „ānam (they eat | patin). 
"dead corpses) 40,31; °-nagara, n. 20,52 *yatthatthita, mfn. (cp. sa. 


alu jūsu 


yatra-stha) where staying; m. ~o, | time, as soon as; w. aor. 18,3: (āga- 
Dh. 127; acc. ~am, Dh. 128. mā, w. foll. atha); 68,21 (do.); 99,4. 

yatra, adv. (= sa.) v. yattha. 108,24; w. pot. 35,7. 44,92 (w. foll. 

yatha, indecl. (conj; = sa.: atha); w. pr. indie. 66,20 (atha); 
correl. of. tathā) !) as, like (with full | 76,12 (tada); 107,11 (atha). 
sentence, corr. w. demonstr, tathā, yadi, indecl. (conj. == sa.) if; w. 
evam, etc. or before nouns; at the | pot. 98,33. 100,5; w. pres. ind. 100,7; 
beginning of comp. v. below): 8) w.: yadi evam (without verb, "if so") 
full sentence (pres.) : 5,8 (tathā); | 5,5; yadi và or yadivā (after prec. 
34,22 (evam eva); < (kho) pana... | vā, =: “or” Dh. 98; yadiva (shor- 
na evam, 02,25. 79,0; tadiso vanno | tened of yadi vi) Dh. 195 (“or”); 
yathà passasi, 85,16; sometimes at the | yadi va (repeated, without verb, == 
beginning of a sentence (w. pot.) by | whether — or) 92,15 ete. 
giving an illustration : "it is as if", yanta, x. (sa. yantra) a vice, 
100,11 ec. ; P) before nouns : 3,26 (~ | press, machine; loc. we (pakkhipitvit 
tava); 26,5. 51,3». 63,11 (na ~ aiiiie- | viya) 40,18. 
sam); 75,23 (~ balam, acc. like a | yanti, pr. 3. pl, v. yati. 
fool). — ?) so that, in order that (ut; yan nuna, v. yam. 
yatha na, ut non, ne); that (quod); | Yama, m. nom. pr. (== sa.); the 
12,6 (w. fut.); 12,2 (w. pres. ind.); | king of hell or god of death; gen. 
13,18. 22,23. 39,33 (do.); 68,36 (w. "ei «assa (santike, “near to the death") 
70,8 (quod). — *) as soon as, 18,17 (w. | Dh. 237; — "-purisa, m. a servant 
pres. ind.j. — comp. : *yath'icchitam, | of Y., messenger of death, pl. nā, 
adv. (or adj. n.) according to one's | Dh. 235; — ?-loka, m. the world of 
desire, 111,28; — yatha-kammam, ade. | Y., acc. ~am, Dh. 44—45. 
according to one’s deeds, 8,13. 13,7. Yamaka, n. nom. pr. (lit. “the 
22,18; — 9-dittha, mfn. as seen, acc. | twofold”) of a Pali work, the sixth 
f. mam (bhumim) 69,23; — *-paūi- | book of Abhidhamma-Pitaka; ~am, 
jiatta, mfn. 84,17 (v. h.); — %-padese, | 102,11. — -vagga, m. name of the 
loc. (sa. yathā-pradegam) 47,1 (v. | first chapter of Dh. (lit. “double- 
padesa); — *°-pasadanam, adv. Dh. | verses"). 
249 (v. h.); — ""-'bhirantam, adv. |  [yamati], vb. (sa. y yam) [to hold, 
70,20. 77,15 (v. abhiramati); — *°-bhuc- | support; hold back, restrain; intr. to 
ca, mfn. (fr. yatha-bhütam) accor- | leave off, to cease (¿ e. “to decease”?)]; 
ding to the fact, real; x. ~ar (ajā- | imper. (injunctive) 1. pl. med, yama- 
nanti, “the truth") 108,16; — °-bhu- | mase, Dh. 6 (the meaning is uncer- 
tam, adv. according to the fact, right- | tain; perhaps “to subdue one’s self" 
ly, truly, 91,8. 96,8. Dh. 203; — *"-va- | or “to be subdued” as by Yama?). 
cam, adv, (cp. sa. -vacanamh) accor- | (ep. Franke, WZKM. 1901; Dhpd. 
ding to one’s words, 108,30; *°-vatam, | (1855) p. 110.) 
adv. by the wind, 20,2 (gacchanto); yava, m. (= sa.) barley; acc. 
— vidita, mfn. (sa. %-vitta) as found | ^am, 9,1; %-khetta, x. a field of bar- 
or understood; acc. f. ~ar (bhumim) | ley, 8,18 (sali-°); — °-majjhaka, mfn. 
69,25; — °-saddham, adv, according | having barley(-fields) in the middle, or 
to faith, Dh. 249; — 9-sukham, adv. | being situated amidst the barley-field ? 
according to one's pleasure, 2,13. Dh. | comp. *Uttara-yavamajjhaka, m. nom. 
326. cp. seyyatha. pr. of a village, 55,30. 

yad-, by sandhi = yam (v. ya-). yasa°(& yasas, comp. yaso-) m. 
. yada, indecl. (conj. = sa.; correl. | (sa. yagas) 1) honour, glory, reputa- 
of tadā) when, whenever; from what | tion, celebrity; nom. ~o (maha) 55,19; 


yasassin “it 
23,19. 48,21. 102,3. 110,4. Dh. 72 (ya- 
vad-eva). Dh. 119; w. aor. 33,91. 
77,8; yàva na, while not, before, w. 
pres, ind. 19,. 92,9. Dh. 284 (ya- 


103,29; Dh. 24; acc. «am, 42,19. 
45,29. 54,34; instr, wena, 64,10; comp. 
yaso-bhoga-samappita, mfn. endowed | 
with glory and fortune, m. ~o, Dh. | 


303. — ?) Yasa, nom. pr. of a man; 
nom. ~O (kulaputto) 67,21 ete. cp. 
next. 

yasassin, mfn. (sa. yacasvin) 
glorious, famous, celebrated; nom. m. 
el, 30,9. 

yasma, indecl. (abl. fr. ya-) since, 
because (corr. w. tasmā) 85,29. 91,18 
(cp. yato). 

yagu, f. (sa, yavagu) rice-gruel; 
mom. ~u, 56,29. 82,19-20; acc. nur, 
21,5; instr. wuya, 56,25; °-ghata, m. 
(q. v.) 56,24. 


| vam); w. fut. 92,3. — ?) prp. w. abl. 


12,17 (aruņuggamanā); 62,6; w. acc. 
43,13 (paccantabhūmim); 62,10 (agga- 
sākhā); ~ tatiyam (up to the third 
time) 3,7. 102,26; ~ dutiyam, 102,26. 


| ep. ?-jara, °-jivath. 


*yàva-Jara, ade. (fr. yāva + 
jara, the last being either contr. of 


| Jarāya (?) abi. of jara, f. (9?) or abi. 
| of the base Jara, g. v.) until old age, 


yacaka, m. (= sa.) a beggar; : 


acc. pl. we, 14,19; gen. pl. wanat, | 


15,5. 

yacati, vb. (sa. yyüc) to ask or 
beg (for, acc.); pr. 1. sg. ~imi, 31,5; 
2. pl. „atha (etam) 18,23; aor. 3. sg. 
yàci (jivitam) 111,26; ger. witva (w. 
doubl. acc.) 7,23. 89,16; — pass. ya- 
ciyati; part. pass. m. š) yaciyamano, 
25,18. 46,15; P) *yāciyanto, 111,12; — 
pp. yācita, m. ~o (tena) 28,17; Dh. 
224 (w. loc. appasmi); yacaka, m. 
v. above, 

yati, vb. (sa. Vyā) to go, walk; 
pr. 3. sg. yàti, Dh. 29. 179. 294; 
2. sg. yasi, 49,4; 3. pl. yanti, Dh. 
126 (saggam); part. gen. m. yato 
(ito param, “when he is passing from 
hence") 77,4; imp. 2. sg. yahi, 13,1. 
32,19. 38,21. 

yana, n. (= sa.) a carriage, any 
vehicle or draught-animal; instr. pl. 
e, eli, Dh. 323. 

yàma, m. (= sa.) a night-watch 
(three hours); acc. «am (tinnam 
aüüataram) Dh. 157; (pathamam, 
during the first watch) 66,5; /oc. yàme 
pathama-°) 11,30; (purime, id.) 99,19; 
te hin. in the middle w.) 99,20; 
(pacchime, in the last w.) 99,35. 

= = ° ç `. 

y ava (or yavam, by sandhi yāvad-) 
indecl. (sa. yāvat) 1) conj. as long as, 
until (corr. w. tāva); w. pres. ind.: 


Dh. 333. 
yava-jivam, ade. (sa. yavaj- 
jivam) during all the life, Dh. 64. 
yàvat, mfn. (= sa.) as great, as 
much; pl. as many; m. pl. yavanto, 
108, == Dh. 337 (yavant’ ettha 
samagata). cp. next etc. 
*vāvataka, mfn. (correl. of tava- 
taka) = prec.; ace. pl. ee, 81,17. 
yāvatā, indecl. (instr. fr. yaval, 
sa.) as far as, inasmuch as, be- 
cause; 106, — Dh, 266 (corr. w. 
tena & tāvatā); cp. next. 
*yavatayukam, adv. (cp. sa. 
yavadiiyusham) all one's life long; 
~ thatva, after having lived out one's 
term of life, 8,11, 34,28. 38,5. 
yittha, mfn. (pp. yajati; sa. ishta) 
sacrificed; ». subst. «am (yajetha) 
Dh. 108 (offering, sacrifice). 
yuga, n. (= sa.) a yoke; ~am, 
98,5. 
yujjhati, vb. (sa. yyudh) to fight 
(against, acc.; with, instr. or prp.); 
part.m.med. ~mano, 60,3; ger. witva 
(corehi saddhim) 33,19; (aiifiamaii- 
iiam) 33,20. cp. neat & yuddha, yodha. 
*vujjhana, w. (fr. prec.) fighting; 
0-tthana, n. fighting ground, 29,24. 
*yuiijati, vb. (sa. yyuj) !) to yoke, 
harness, join; to prepare, arrange; * 
med. & act. w. attanam, to apply or 
give one's self to (/0c.); pr. 3. sg. med. 
wate (Buddhasasane) Dh. 382; part. 
m. yuiijam (attanam, ayoge) Dh. 209; 
pp. yutta (g. v.); caus. yojeti & *yo- 


—À 
— 


215 


jāpeti (g. v.) cp. yuga, yoga, yogga, 
yojana, etc., yotta. 

yutta (& *yuttaka), mfn. (pp. 
yuñŭjati; sa. yukta) 4) joined, yoked; 
54,9 (rathe °-sindhava); ?) prepared, 
arranged; acc. f. ~am (dhajinim) 
104,5; ?) proper, fit (w. inf.); right; 
m. «0 (maūgalasso bhaviturh) 24,51; 
comp. w, grd. *kattabba-9, mfn. right 
to do, %. „sam, 54,32; katabba-yutta- 
kai karissanti, 39,34 (v. karoti, grd.); 
*thapetabba-yuttaka, mfn. fit to be 
set in a place (loc.); ace. m. «ui 
(rājatthāne) 11,1. 

yuddha, m. n. (= sa; pp. fr. 
yujjhati) battle, war; acc. ~am (detu, 
let him fight) 36,21. 39,20; dat. ~aya 
(paccuggacchami), 104,4. 

yuvan, mfn. (=: sa.) young, nom. 
m. «và, Dh. 280 (a youth). cp. yob- 
bana. 

yūsa,m. n. (sa, yusha) juice, gravy; 
eam (amba-9, g. v.) 37,24. 

ye, pl. m. pron. rel., v. ya-. 

yena, indecl. (conj.; instr. fr. 
pron. rel. ya-, corr. w. demonstr. tena) 
1) in what direction, where; 68,5 etc. 
(cp. yena, sc. maggena, 104,2). — *) 
(so) that (ut); 77,6 (tatha karissasi 
e. gamissasi). — ?) because; Dh. 256 
(w. pot.); 260. 270 (w. pres.) 

*yenicchakam, adv. (fr. yena -|- 
iccha) where one likes; Dh. 326. 

*yebhuyyena, ade. (instr. of 
yebhuyya, mfn. numerous, much; fr. 
ye = yam (Magadhism) & bhiyyo 
(Tr. PM. p. 75); cp. sa. yad-bhiyas) 
generally, entirely, always, upon the 
whole, in all; 73,33, 96,7-11. (cp. 
Franke, KZ, n. F. XIV, 420.) 

yeva, indecl., v. eva. 

yesam, yehi, yo, v. ya». 

yoga, m. (= sa.) 1) junction, union, 
combination; acc. ~am (manusakam, 
“bondage”) Dh, 417; comp. sabba- 
9-visamyutta, mfn. (v. h.); nakkhat- 
ta-°, m. conjunction of stars, constel- 
lation (v. h.). — ?) application of the 
mind, exertion, devotion, meditation 
etc.; abl. «à, Dh. 282; loc. ~asmim, 


yojeti 


Dh. 209; comp. *aiiiiatra-°, mfn. (q. 
v.); yoga-kkhema, m. ‘tranquillity of 
devotion’, complete happiness (= Nib- 
bana); acc, wah (anuttaram, nibbā- 
nam) Dh. 23; gen. «assa (pattiya) 
103,3; a-yoga, m. (g. v.). 

yogga, m. (sa. yogya) a carriage, 
vehicle; loc. we (maha-", a chariot 
of state) 58,19. 

yojana, a. (== sa.) ‘yoking, har- 
nessing’, a measure of distance (the 
length of an Indian yojana is variously 
indicated, varying between 4—18 miles; 
according to some == 21,400 Metres 
(about 12 miles) — 4 gūvutas, one 
güvuta being 80 usabhas à 20 yatthis 
à 7 ratanas (or hatthas, !/, Metre) à 
2 vidatthis à 12 angulas (inches)); 
nom. ^um, 107, — Dh. 60; loc. 
~e (addha-', g. v.) 63,19; comp. 
*0_pypamana, & *"-matta, mf». having 
an extent of a yojana, 63,38; 0,5; 
*O-sahass'-ubbedha, mfn. (v. ubbe- 


dha); ti-yojana-satika, mfn. (g. v.); 


timsa-°, & diyaddha-° (v. A.). 

yojana, f. (= sa.) ‘union, con- 
junction’, grammatical construction; 
in the comment style : what is to be 
supplied or understood; ‘mukhena 
sukara-sadiso isin’ ti yojana, ‘I was 
like a pig by my mouth’, so is to be 
understood, 85,22. 

yojanika, mfn. (e. c. == sa.) so 
many yojanas long; satthi-0, 61,10; 
satta-°, 61,11. 

yojapeti, vb. (caus. IT. yuiijati) 
‘to cause to be joined or fixed’, to 
apply, employ, prepare (acc.); ger. 
„etvā, (dvarath) 6,7. 

yojeti, vb. (caus. yuiijati; sa. 
yojayati) !) to harness; to make ready 
(acc.); ger. ~etva (sindhave), 63,5; 
imp. 2. sg. ~ehi (rathath) 63,3; 7) 
to fasten, hold fast, grapple, attack 
(acc.); pot. 3. sg. med. ~etha (Ma- 
ram) Dh. 40; w. attānam : to apply 
or give one's self to (loc.), part. m. 
a-yojayam (attànamÀ yogasmim, who 
does not give one’s self to meditation) 


Dh. 209, 


yotta, m. (sa. yoktra) a rope, (silam) 38,14. 97,9; (dhanath) Dh. 96; 
cord; acc. wath, 25,35; pl. ~an, | pani m., ~anto, 33,24; gen. nato, 
28,30. | Dh. 241; imp. 2. sg. rakkha, 22,16. 
yodha, m, (= sa.) a warrier, | 110,25; pot. 2. 89. rakkhe, Dh. 40); 
soldier; pl. °-maha-yodha, 39,12. | rakkheyya (kāya-ppakopam) Dh. 231; 
Yona(ka), mfn. (sa. Yavana) | Dh, 157 (metri causa: weyya); 3. sg. 
Ionian, Greek; pl. the Greeks (in Bac- i med, „etha, Dh. 36; inf. «um, 
tria), ~ka, 97,. (cp. Weber, Ind. | 20,39; grd. rakkhitabba (to be ob- 
Str. II, 321.) | served) 14,12; a-rakkhiya, mfn. diffi- 
yoni, f. (=: sa.) the womb, uterus; | cult to watch, m. ~o (mūtugāmo) 
source, origin; €. €. a class or kind of | 52,8; pp. rakkhita, & caus, *rakkha- 
living beings; loc. yoniyam (kapi? | peti (v. below) cp. rakkhaka, rak- 
nibbattitva, having been born as an | khana, rakkhā, durakkha. 
ape) 1,3; (miga-?) 5,25. cp. next etc. | rakkhana, x. (sa. rakshana) 
yonija, mfn. (= sa.) born from | guarding, protecting; °-atthaya, 52,25 
the womb, born in a certain class of ' (v. attha !); sassa-rakkhan’attham, 8,7. 
beings; acc. n. ~am (na bràhmanam | rakkha, f. (sa. rakshā) protection; 
brūmi, “on account of his birth") ' acc. ~am (Laūkā-0) 110,27. 
Dh, 396. *rakkhāpeti, vb. (caus. II. rak- 
yoniso, ade. (sa. yonigas) ‘by the | khati) to watch; aor. 3. sg. „esi, 
source’, radically, thoroughly, deeply | 73,52. 
(wisely); Dh. 326 (cp. SBE. X. 79). rakkhita, mfn. (pp. rakkhati; 
yobbana, ». (fr. yuvan; sa. yau- : sa. rakshita) guarded, protected; comp. 
vana) youth; doc. we, Dh. 155; ut- | *-gopita-vatthumhi (Joc. v. vatthu) 
tama-yobbana-vilàsa-matta, mfn. | 58,13; a-rakkhita, su-rakkhita, mfn. 
47,4 (v. vilisa, cp. matta!). | (g. v.). 
| raccha, f. (sa. rathyà) a carriage- 
| road, street; acc. wath, 76,13. (cp. 
| ratha). 
raja(s), m. (sa. rajas, x.) vapour, 
| dust; dirt, impurity (metaph. of pas- 
r, sandhi-consonant, inserted be- | sions); nom. «o, 108,8 (pamādānu- 
tween vowels (like sa. siddhi-r astu, | patito, *defilement"); (sukhumo) Dh. 
| 
| 
| 


R. 


114,33) : dhi-r-atthu, 63,13. 103,33; | 125; acc. wath, Dh. 313; 58,5 (pāda-', 
usabho-r-iva, 105,19; āragge-r-iva, | "the dust at his feet", cp. pāda-pari- 
Dh. 401; sāsapo-r-iva, Dh. 407 (cp. | suni, 77,7); instr. wena, 84,23; comp. 
Tr. PM. p. 82; Windisch, Ber. d. | rajo- (originally 2.) 112,29 (tamba- 
süchs, Ges. 1893). bhiimi-°); cp. rajovajalla below. 
ramsi, f. (sa. ragmi, m.) ') a | rajata, n. (= sa.) silver; nom. 
string, line, rein, bridle (v. rasmi | wath, 26,16; gen. «assa, Dh. 239; 
below). — *) a ray of light, splendour; | comp. *°-dama-vanna, mfn. like a 
gen. pl. «inam (chabbannanam, g. | silver chain, 61,9; *°-phalaka, x. 
v.) 87,33. 48,5 (v. h.); ?-maya, mfn. made of 
rakkhaka, mfn. (sa. rakshaka) | silver, 28,50; *9-vanna, mfn. silver- 
guarding, watching; m., a watchman; | coloured, 5,27; *°-vimana, x. 23,22 
khetta-°, m. a field-watcher, pl. nā, | (v. h.); dvandva comp. suvanna-?, 
8,18. 61,27; jatartpa-°, 81,26. — Rajata- 


rakkhati, vb. (sa. yrnksh) to | pabbata, m. nom. pr. of a mountain 
guard, watch, protect; to keep, observe; | (in Himavanta), ‘Silver-Hill’; nom. 
to beware of (acc.); pr. 3. sg. māti | <o, 61,15. 


217 


rajana., n. (= sa.) colouring, 
dye; acc. ~am, 68,25. cp. ratta! 


(fr. raja(s) & *jalla, avajalla — smut, 


rattindiva 


| pl. nani, 33,6; instr. pl. wehi, 27,29; 
í i . 28,28 (sattahi, the 7 precious things, 
*rajovajalla (or rajojalla), x. ; 


soot (?) cp. sa. jhallikā & Childers | 


s. v.) 
with dust", Dh. 141 (SBE, X, 38; 
Dhpd, (1855) p. 306; "'renckner refers 
to jāleti, denom. fr. jiila, to cover, 


*dust and dirt", or “rubbing ' 


i. e. gold, silver, efe.) cp. satta-ratana- 
vicitta, mfn. ornamented with the 7 
jewels, 18,26, & satta-ratana-vassa, 
n. 32,u (v. vassa); gen. pl. wana 


. (tinnam, the 3 jewels, metaph. of 


: C. 


which is found in Pali, cp. Dhātup. 
XXXII,10; the Birm. reading is rajo- - 
jallam, which is always found else- . 
where: Jat, V, 421,29; Mil. p. 133 - 


etc.; rajovajall(am) might be due to 
tmesis = rajo va |— 
rajojallika, mfn. covered with dust, 
Jat. 1, 390,18, & Sn. v. 198. 249). 

rajja, n. (sa. rajya) sovereignty, 
government; kingdom; mom. ~am, 
112,9; acc. wath, 1,2. 8, cte. (~ 
karoti, to be king); instr. wena, 59,25; 
loc. ~e, 42,26; comp. *rajjatthika, 
mfn. (v. atthika); °-parimana, x. 
48,29 (g. v.) ; *9-siimika, m. king, 43,22 
(Biranasi-°); %-sīmii, f. 39,15 (g. v.) 
cp. eka-°, opa-?, maha-°, & rattha. 

rajju, /. (rarely m. — sa.) a rope; 
nom. ~u (ālambanī, g. v.) 47,27; acc. 
um (civara-°, g. v.) 83,21; instr, wuya, 
54,20. cp. next. 

rajjuka, m. (dimin. fr. last; = 
sa.) a rope, string; acc. vam (ugga- 
hana-°, g. v.) 14,32. 

ranhi, ranine, raunho, 9. rā- 
ja(n). 

rattha, n. (sa. riishtra) kingdom, 
realm, country; abl. wa, 38,21; nū 
~at (acc. from kingdom to kingdom) 
104,8; loc. ~e, 18,24; comp. °-jana- 
pada-vāsino, 102,5 (v. À.); %-piņda, 
m, 107,2 (v. h); Kasi-°, Kosala-^, 
Bāveru-', Videha-? (g. v.) cp. rajja. 

rata, mfn. (pp. ramati; — sa.) 
delighting in (Joc, or e. c.); m. «o, 
Dh. 181. 300; ajjhatta-°, Dh. 362; 
tanhakkhaya-°, Dh. 187; dhamma-?, 
Dh. 364 (g. v); pl. «à (gocare) 
Dh. 22. 

ratana!, x. (sa. ratna) a jewel, 
€. C, & valuable or precious thing; 


vit] jallar; cp. | 


Buddha, Dhamma, Sangha) 28,26; e. 
assa-", 24,9; kambala-9, 25,5; 
nilamani-?, 26,25; mani-°, 62,30; 
hatthi-9, 24,19 (g. v.) (cp. JRAS. XII 
(1880) p. 178). | 
ratana”, æ. (or ratani, f.; sa. 


, ratni, aratni) a certain measure of 


| 
| 


length == 2 vidatthi (q. v.) cp. yojana. 

rati, f. (= sa.) pleasure, delight 
(often esp. of love); nom, «i, 47,27. 
Dh. 149; ~i, Dh. 310; acc. ~it, 
Dh. 187; abl. wiya, Dh. 214; comp. 
kaima-°, kilesa-°, dhamma-" (v. h.) 
ep. a-rati. 

rattal, mfn. (pp. yranj, rajjati, 
raiijati, rajati; sa. rakta) coloured, 
dyed (esp. with red colour); metaph. 
affected with (e. c.); comp. °-kambuala, 
5,7 (v. h.); raga-°, mfn. subject to 
passion, pl. mā, Dh, 347; saratta-", 
mfn. Dh. 345 (v. h.) cp. rajana, 
rattata. 

ratta?, m. n. (c. c. — ratti; sa. 
rütra) night; addha-°, 40,s (g. v.); 
aho-9 Dh. 226 (g. v.); ep. digha- 
rattan, adv. 

rattata, f. (sa. raktata) redness; 
instr. ~aya (akkhinam) 59,5. 

ratti, f. (sa. ratri) night; nom. 
wi (dīghā) 107,9 — Dh. 60; ace. 
with, 58,17; 22,21 (sabba-°); adv. by 
night 9,16 (opp. diva); 112, (cp. 
rattindiva); gen. loc. «yi, 66,5. 78,1; 
41,28. 42,1; an old loc. is ratto (sa. 
rütrau) Dh. 296; pl. acc. ~iyo (sab- 
ba-°) 67,27; comp. °-khitta, mfn. (g. 
v.); **-bhatta, n. evening meal, 15,19; 
*0.bhāga, m. the night time, 21,23; 
eka-ratti-°, 104,24 (v. eka*); *aho-®, 
f. day & night (v. h.); at the end of 
comp. wé find sometimes the a-stem 
ratta? (q. v.) cp. neat. 

rattindiva, m. & n. (sa. ratrim- 


rautu alo 


diva) night and day; acc. adv. ~am | to roar, cry, to set up a cry (acc.); 
88,22 (comp. ~am-). | part. m. pl. ~ant& (bherava-ravam) 
ratto, adv., loc, ratti (q. v.). | 86,9; pari. med. m. „mūno, 9,2; 
ratha, m. (= sa.) a chariot; nom. | aor. 3. sg. ravi, 8,25. 11,30; 3. pl. 
~0, 60,5; 25,1 (mangala-*, g. v.); acc. | ~imsu, 60,5; cp. rava, rāva, ruta. 
eam, 7,5; 63,4 (uttama-°); instr. | rasa, m. (= sa.) juice, essence; 
e.ena (pāyāsi) 54,4; 98,2; 60,4 (Ve- | taste, flavour (esp. agreeable), sweet- 
jayanta-°, g. v.); pl. wa (raja-°) Dh. | ness; acc. eam, 37,9. 106,5 == Dh. 
151; comp. *°-dandaka, m. the ban- | 49; Dh. 354; 16,16 (pabbata-°); pi. 
ner-staff of a chariot, 98,5; *9-paii- | wa, 70,32; loc. pl. „esu, 71,9; %-ha- 
jara, x. 98,5 (v. h.); 9-vara, m. an | rani, f. (v. h.); dhamma-', & dham- 
excellent ch., 64,10 (acc. ~ari); 9-ve- | mapiti-? (g. v.); nànagga-" (v. nana); 
ga-, 60,10 (g. v.) cp. raccha. | paviveka-° (g. v.); madhura-? (q. v.); 
randheti (or randhayati) vb. | 
(caus. yrandh) to make subject to, 
bring to (acc. & dat.); aor. 3. pl. 
wayum (mā tam dukkhaya) Dh. 248. 
°rama, mfn. (e. c. = sa.) pleasing, 
delighting; v. du-rama, mano-rama. 
ramaņīya, mfn. (grd. fr. neat; 
= sa.) pleasant, delightful, beautiful; 
n. ~ai (uyyānam) 37,16; loc. m. we, 
65,19; n. pl. ~anli] (araūūāni) Dh. 
99. cp. rāmaneyyaka. 
ramati, vb. (sa. ram) to be glad, 
to delight in (/oc.); pr. 3. sg. „ati, 
Dh. 79; 99 (metri causa cati); 1. 
sg. med. rame (gahe) 47,26; 3. pl. 
„anti, Dh. 91; 1. pl. ~āma (kilesa- | ret; acc. wath, 46,9. cp. next. 
ratiya) 53,24; fut. 1. pl. „issūma raho, adv. (sa. rahas) in secret, 


| sadisa-9, mfn. of the same taste, 37,22 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 

(“we will enjoy ourselves") 53,27; fut. | privately; 54,13; *°-kamma, n. what 


(nimba-panna-°); supa-° (g. v.); 
dvandva comp. vanna-gandha-?, 37,30 
(-rasiipeta, mfn.). 

rasmi, f. (& m.) == ramsi (sa. 
ragmi); pi. ~iyo, 98,6 (the reins); 
0-ggaha, m. holder of the reins (opp. 
sārathi) 106,34 — Dh. 223. 

rassa, mfn. (sa. hrasva) short; 
M. ~o (puriso; opp. digho) 92,13; 
n. wath, Dh. 409. 

rahada, m. (sa. hrada) a lake, 
pool; nom. <o, Dh. 82 (metrically : 
rhado); Dh. 95. 

rahassa, n. (sa. rahasya) a sec- 


caus. (== simplex) 3. pl. ~essanti, | is to be done in secret, acc, ~am, 
Db. 99; pp. rata (g. v., ep. ramita); | 54,17. 
grd. ramaniya & ramma (g. v.); — raga, m. (= sa.) 1) colour, dye- 
caus, II. ramapeti, to gladden, de- | stuff (cp. rajana, ratta!, & vamsa- 
light; ger. ~etvā (tam kilesaratiya) | raga); °) metaph. passion, lust; nom. 
73,18. ~0, 106,32 = Dh. 14; comp. %-aggi, 
ramita, mfn. (pp. caus. ram; | m. the fire of lust, loc. „imhi, 64,20 
== sa.) delighted, happy; m. ~o, Dh. | (in the series: raga, dosa, moha); 
305. *O-dosa, mfn. damaged by passion, f. 
ramma, mfn. (grd. yram; sa. | ~ā, Dh. 356 (cp. dosa!); *°-nissita, 
ramya) delightful, beautiful; loc. ~e, | mfn. devoted to passions, Dh. 339 
109,31. (v. h.); ""-sama, mfn. like passion, 
rava, m. (= sa.) a roar, cry; song, | Dh, 202; *tibba-°, & *vita-°, mfn. 
sound; nom, ~o, 60,10; acc. «am, | (v. h.); dvandva comp. nandi-rāga-", 
53,21; 8,25 (gadrabha-°); 60,8 (ma- | 67,15. 
ha-°); loc. ~e (gadrabhanam) 113,11; rāja(n), m. (sa, rajan) a king, 
*gita-°, m. 112,7 (g. v.); *bħerava-°, | prince, chief; nom. «à, 6,5; voc. ~a 
m. 86,19 (g. v.). (maha-°) 7,16; acc. „ānam, 6,14; 
ravati, vb. (sa. yru, rauti, raviti) | instr. rañña, 48,21; gen. (dat.) rañño, 


219 ruccati 


6,5; abl, ~ato, Dh. 139; loc. rañňe, ; comp. *bhumni-9, x. (with rit inserted) 
52,14; pl. nom. acc, ~ano, 102,1. Dh. | a delightful place, Dh. 98 (cp. Tr. PM. 
294; gen. ~nan, 37,4; — in comp. p. 55—56). | 

we have the base raja-°, °-raja (e. c. riva, n. (== sd.) a cry, roar; 
also frequently rūjau) : agga-°, m. acc. „am (baddha-”, g. v.) 11,30; 
(nom. ~ riijit, 98,13); aja-0, m. (voc. instr. wena (gadrabha-0, g. v.) 118,10. 
e raja, 54,26); assa-9, m. (acc, vīnam, cp. rava. 

65,19); kapi-9, m. (gen. ^assa, 1,7); ' rūsi, m. (sa. rūķi) a heap, quan- 
kumbhila-°, m. (voc. ~ raja, 1,16); tity, multitude; acc. with (dhanassa) 
Kosala-9, m. (gen. ~rañňo, 31,2); | 34,12; 16,s (aūigāra-'); 5,8 (kantaka-°); 
cora-°, m. (gen. wraiitio, 39,35); Tam- ; 51,11 (daru-?); abl. wimhi (puppha-°) 
ba-9, m. (nom. ~ raja, 19,6; instr. | Dh. 53; loc. wimli (afigiira-°) 16,7. 
e rājena, 19,10); deva-°, m. (nom. Riihula, m. (— sa.) mom. pr. 
~ rājā, 45,30); dhamma-?, m. (nom. , !) of Gotama Buddha’s son | Lāghula 
~ Tājā, 19,1); naga-?, m. (nom. raja, ' in the Agoka Inser, (Bhabra text) |; 
28,27; insir. ~ rajena, 52,15); maccu-°, | nom. <o, 64,7 (explained by ban- 
m. (acc. «nam, 44,29); maha-", m. i dhanam, ‘a bond, fetter, impediment’, 
(g. v.); yakkha-®, m. (~ ràja-9, 112,22); ; cp. Weber, Ind. Stud. IH, 130 & 149) 
sasa-9, m. (acc. ~ rajath, 15,9); Si- | == *-kumāro, 64,9; *°-matar, f. the 
lavamahā-0, m. (gen. ~ rajassa, 39,11); | mother of R., whose name according 
supanna-°, m. (mom. ~ raja, 19,15; ; to later Buddhist tradition was Yaso- 
gen. ~raiiio, 20,10; ~ rājassa, 20,3); ; dharii; nom. wa, 64,5; gen. raya, 
harisa-°, m. (nom. < raja, 10,5; cp. ' 65,27; — 2) of a siimanera (g. v.) of 
raja-hamsa, 10,3); — raj-angana, n. | Sariputta; nom. «o, 8l.u. 

(q.v.); %-ābhisekha, m. (v. abhisekha) ; rukkha, m. (sa. ruksha & vrksha; 
*-üpatthana, x. (v. upatthāna); °-o- | cp. Pischel, Gr. Š 320; Wackernagel, 
vada-jataka, n. (v. ovüda); °-kula, | Gr. 1, 8 184, b.) a tree; nom. ~o, 
n. (g. v.); "-üataka, m. (g. v.); %-ta- 36,36; abl. wa, 12,32; ~ato, ll; 
naya, m. (g. v.); *-nandana, m. (v. : loc. we, 2,3; comp. rukkhagge, loc. 
nandanā); 9-nivesana, x. (q. v.); 9-put- | at the top of a tree, 11,25 (v. agga); 
ta, m. a prince, a person of the royal | *°-kotthaka, m. a woodpecker (q. v.); 
family; gen. ~assa, 45,23; instr. ena, : °-devata, f. 8 dryad, 3,31; °-mula, x. 
111,3; %-purisa, m. a royal servant, , the foot of a tree (g. v.); dvandva 
pl. nā, 40,3. 74,7; %-ratha, m. a royal : comp. °-gumbidayo, 6,11; cp. arama-?, 
chariot, pl. ~ā, Dh. 151; *%-rathū- : udumbara-°, kappatthiya-°, nigro- 
pama, mfn. like a royal chariot, Dh. ; dha-, phala-°, bodhi-°, maha-sala-°, 
171; 9-settha, m. the best among ; varana-", susira-". 

kings, voc. ea, 47,8; °-hamsa, m. a ruci, f. (= sa.) liking, pleasure; 


kind of swan, 10,5 (suvanna-°, ‘golden | wish, desire; acc. ~ir (uppadeti, w. 

king-swan’). loc. to take pleasure in, take a fancy 
Rajagaha, n. (sa. Rajagrha) ‘the | to) 10,12. 64,2; loc. ~iyā (assa sati, 

king's house’, nom. pr. of a city, the | “at his command") 39,11. cp. "aiiiia- 

capital of the Magadha country; acc. | rucika, mfn. 

~am, 76,9; loc. we, 76,8; %-samīpe, | rucita, mfn. (pp. ruccati; = sa.) 

near to R., 84,31. being at one's pleasure, agreeable; 
Radha, m. (= sa.) nom. pr. of | *citta-°, mfn. (g. v.). 


a parrot (Bodhisatta); nom. ~o, 9,7; | rucira, mfn. (= sa.) beautiful, 

9-jataka, n. 9,5. | lovely; f: à (pitthi) 10,19; z. wath 
ramaneyyaka, x. (fr. ramaniya; | (puppham) Dh. 51. 

sa. ramaniyaka) loveliness, beauty; ruccati (& °-rocati), vb. (sa. Vruc) 


rujati 220 


pr. 8. sg. „ati (no, mayham) 11,5-18; | cakkhu : ~āni, 69,17; m. pl. wa, 70,25. 
pot. à. sg. ~eyya (mama) 55,25; aor. | 71,5; loc. ~esu, 71,5; *°-samkha- 
3. sg. rucci (mà te ~) 74,24; pp. | vimutta, mfn. "released from what is 
rucita (g. ».); caus. roceti (g. v.) cp. | styled form", m. ~o (Tathāgato) 95,12; 


to please, to be agreeable to (gen.); | etc.; pl. visible things, objects to 


ruci, rucira. | dvandva comp. nāma-rupa, x. (v. h.) 
rujati, vb. (sa. yruj) to cause | cp. nāmaū ca rūpañ ca, 82,9. 
pain, ache; pr. 3. pl. „anti (pada, | rūpaka, x. (= sa.) an image, 
gacchantassa (te)) 97,36. cp. paluj- | esp. a statue; *kaficana-°-patibhaga, 
jati & roga, m. mfn. 47,14 (v. patibhaga). 
ruta, n. (= sa.) cry, voice (of | rūļha, mfn. (pp. rūhati; sa. rū- 


animals); sabba-°-janana-manta, m. | dha) sprung up, grown; °-tina, mfn. 
a spell giving knowledge of all sounds, | abounding with grass, loc. ~e (kacche) 
53,13. | 104,27. 

*ruda, w. (cp. sa. rud, f. & prec.) | rūhati, vb. (sa. rohati, ruhati, 
cry, voice (of animals); nom, «am | ruh) to grow; pr. 3. sg. „ati (ruk- 
(manuññam) 10,19. |i kho) Dh. 338; pp. rūļha (g. v.); caus. 

rudati (& rodati, g. v.), vb. (sa. | ropeti, ropāpeti (g. v.) cp. ruha. 
yrud) to cry, weep; part. acc. m. |  Kevata, m. nom. pr. of a thera; 
e antam, 111,15. ‘mom. ~o (mahathero) 113,s. 

rudda, mfn. (sa. rudra) furious, | roga, m. (= sa.) disease; abl, 
cruel, formidable; 9-dassana, mfn. of | nā (jigaccha paramā ~, hunger is 
dreadful appearance, m. ~o (kum- | worse than disease) Dh. 203; pandu-°, 
bhilo) 108,7; cp. ludda. | m. (g. v.); *-nidda, x. (v. h.) cp. a- 
ruha, mfn. (e. c. — sa.) growing; | roga & niroga, mfn. 
*uttamañga-? v. anga. cp. rūhati. roceti, eb. (caus. ruccati; sa. 
ruhira, x. (sa. rudhira) blood; | rocayati) to find pleasure in, to choose 
nom. acc. ~ai, 76,7. 76,4. cp. ro- | (acc.); part. f. ~enti (samikam) 10,12; 
| 
| 


hita, lohita. aor, 3. sg. vesi (moram) 10,10; ger. 
rūpa, n. (& m.) (= sa.) 1) form, | wetva (ulukam) 11,3. 

appearance, esp. handsome form, grace, rodati, vb. (sometimes also ru- 
beauty; acc. ~at (manoharari) 111,86; | dati (g. v.); sa. rud) to cry, weep; 
instr. wena (soni-", g. v.) 111,2; gen. | part, m. 2) ~anto, 17,9. 89,11; b) ro- 
vassa (adinavam) 47,23; comp. *ru- | dam, Dh. 67; part. med. f. ~mana, 
pagga-ppatta, mfn. v. agga', cp. | 58,15. 59,11; aor. 2. sg. rodi, 16,33; 
patta®; *°-ppatta, mfn. beautiful,f. pl. | 1, sg. rodim, 17,13. 58,14 (rodin ti); 
nā, 64,30; "-sampatti, f. beauty, acc. | inf, „itur, ger. nitvā, 49,10. 

with, 19,11; "-siri, f. (dvandva) “beauty *ropapeti, vb. (caus. II. rūhati) 
and majesty”, acc. wim, 64,13; *utta- | to cause to be planted (ace.); ger. 
ma-rüpa-dhara, mfn. endowed with netvā, 36,86. ` 


the highest beauty, f. nā, 19,7; e. c. s 

v. anurüpa, mfn., abhirūpa, mfn., ropita, mf n. (f fe alah ropet; = 
evarüpa, mfn., "kalyana-?, mfn., sa.) planted; n. ~am, 37,6; m. pl. 
jata~°, n., tatha-°, mfn., *bhinna-°, | ~® 100,14. | 
mfn., *mulha-°, mfn., *sadhu-°, mfn. T opima, mfn. planted, raised, 
— °) in the dogmatics : material form, | cultivated (opp. kaccha, sayamjata) ; 
body; idan «am, 107,7 = Dh, 148 | acc. ~am (kandar) 92,19. 

(synon. ayam kayo, 107,5)? esp. as ropeti, vb. (caus. rūhati; sa. ro- 
one of the five constituent elements | payati) to plant, sow (acc.); aor. 3. 
of an individual (v. khandha) : 94,8, | sg, «esi, 37,19; ger. „vetvā (nivāpa- 


agai 


lapa 


tinam) 6,6; pp. ropita (g. v.) ep. | rei); pr. 2. sg. „asi, 50,15; 1. sg. 


ropima. 


„āmi (w. duo loc.) 50,13; 3. pl. „anti 


roruva, m. (sa. raurava, cp. ruru) (lajjitaye) Dh. 316. 3. pl. med. ware, 


a kind of savage animal, the Ruru-deer; 
gen. «assa, 92,23. 

rohita, mfn. (= sa.) red; *-ma- 
cche, 14,23. (cp. lohita). 


L Cl). 


], Sandhi-Consonant (sa. -d-), pre- 
served in cha-]-abhiüiia, sa-]-ayatana 
(1. v.). 

la, indecl, a syllable indicating 
abbreviation, == etc, 70,31 (cp. pa, pe). 

*lakana(ka), n. & lakara, m., 
v. laūkara, 

lakkhana, n. (sa. lakshana) a 
mark, sign, attribute; a lucky mark, 
mark of beauty; acc. ~am (sasa-9, 
the sign of a hare) 16,16; sabba-? 
-sampanna, mfx. endowed with all 
marks of beauty, f. nā, 55,32. 


— 


īb.; ger. witva, 10,22; pp. m. ~ito 
(filled with shame) 10,16; grd. lajji- 
tabba (what one ought to be ashamed 
of) of which an elder form is found 
Dh. 316: lajjitaye, loc. n. 8 a-lajji-. 
taye (cp. Tr. PM. p. 66,13). 

lajjà, f. (= sa.) shame; instr. 
~aya (from shame) 46,6. 

lajjita, & waya, v. lajjati. 

*lajjin, mfn. (fr. lajjā) endowed 
with the sense of shame, modest, well- 
conducted; m, pl, ~ino, 102,17. 

latthi, f. (= yatthi (g. v.); sa. 
yashti) a stick, goad; patoda-°, f. 
(v. h.). 

lata, f. (= sa.) a creeping plant, 
creeper; nom. «à, Dh. 340; comp. 
*puti-°, & vijjullatā (g. v.). 

laddha, mf». (pp. labhati; sa. 
labdha) taken, obtained; arrived; x. 
wath (dukkham) 16,30; acc. m. eai 
(yasam) 54,54; it is often used as finite 


laggati, vb. (sa. Vlag) to adhere, | tense: n. „am, 22,16. 52,23. 56,30; f. 


stick in (Joc.); aor. 3. sg. laggi (gale) | 


13,11; (jāle) 36,32; caus. v. neat. 
*laggapeti, vb. (caus. IT. laggati) 

to tie (acc.), to lay to, bring to (as 

a ship); ger. ~etva (navam) 25,55. 
laggeti, vb. (caus. laggati; sa. 


wa, 58,11; w. auxiliary verb : 56,30. 
58,12 (~ bhavissati); iu duo loc. 7,14 
(abhaye ~e); 87,20 (okase); some- 
times it is even used in active sense: 
‘has got, obtained’: na kho tvam... 
patittham laddho, 28,15; — comp. 


lagayati) to tie (acc., to : loc.); aor. 
3, sg. ~esi, 19,25; ger. „etvā (su- 
ttam hatthesu) 111,1. 


| *-Abhaya, mfn. (v. a-bhaya); *9-ovà- 
| da, m. (admonition obtained from, abl.) 
| 8,11; ""-kahapana, m. (money received 


: Laka, f. (= sa.) nom. pr. of 
the capital of Ceylon; acc. ~am, 110,35; 
loc. wayam, 110,24; *%-dīpa, m. Cey- 
lon, 110,31; %-nagara, x. 112,13 (°-va- 
sini, f., v. vasin); °-rakkha, f. (q. v.). 

*laūkāra, m. (Birm. reading of 
lakara; lakana(ka) 2. is also found) 
prob, an anchor (— arab. pers. mah- 
ratt. lankar, langar); nom. «o, 28,30. 
(cp. Jat. Transl, II, 78; Tr. PM. 62,16). 

lamghati, vb. (sa. ylaügh) to 
leap over, spring up, ascend; ger. 
witva, 16,6. 

lajjati, ob. (sa. ylajj) to be 
ashamed (w. gem .pers. & instr. or loc. 


or gained, 7, e. blood rt 14,6; 
*0.gabbha-parihara, mfn. (v. R.); 
*0.pabbajjūpasampada, mfn. (v. upa- 
sampadā); 9-vijayo, 112,32 (v. Cor- 
rections); cp. *miccha-°, & su-laddha, 
mfn. 

?]addhaka, mfn. (sa. labdhaka) 
= prec. (only e. c.); *abhaya-°, mfn. 
(v. a-bhaya). 

laddha, ger. & laddhum, inf., 
v. labhati. 

*lapa, mfn. (fr. next) talking, 
speaking" (esp. falsely), hypocritical; 
*O-sakkhara, mfn. speaking sweetly, 
wheedling, f. pl. ~a, 51,34. 


lapati 


aa ; ~, Whose friend; 
a fe, lap) to talk, ; mittadhammo ~, w u 
lapati, v. s yay) id.: p ! js acquired) 14,3; part. labbhamā; 
prate; caus, lapayati (tapeti) lapa, ` (e. m.) 48,7; pp. laddha (q. v. 
2 pl ~ayanti, Dh. 83; Ge AD A g, v.) ep. Yabha, lābha 
Zipana. I : ras Hd (2. U Z a . 
lapana, x. (= sa.) talking, speak- |  ]asika, f. (sa. lasīkā) the lubri- 
ing; niratthaka-^, x. nonsense; instr. | cous fluid of the joints, synovial fluid; 
wena, 52,6. 82,5 = 97,23. 
labuja, m. (sa. lakuca & likuca, lālā mfn (sa. laghu) light, quick: 
cp. libujā) the bread-fruit tree (Arto- | TM onstant, flighty: gen. n. cana (ci- 
| 


carpus Lacucha); amba-labujádinam (tassa) Dh. 35; m. (ade) lahurñ 
(gen. pl., v. adi) 1,14 (cp. panasa). | quickly, Dh 369. i 

labbha, mfn. (grd. labhati; sa. lākhā lākshā) lae: *0-p: 
labhya) obtainable, attainable, possible; | „ 250a, f. (sa. laksha) lae; *”-pa- 
n. pl. ~a (piya) 55,2; hence *labbha, rikamma-kata, mfn. lacquered, 5,28. 
indecl. (probably originally subst. f.) laja, m. (— sa.) !) fried or par- 
frequently used in passive construc- | ched grain; dvandva comp. madhu- 


tions like sakkā (q... laja-°, 18,27. — *) a kind of flowers 
labbhati, pass., v. labhati. (of Dalbergia arborea, Childers); lājā- 
“labha, mfn. (e. c, = saj, v. | dīhi, 61,24 (v. adi). 


dullabha. lābha, m. (= sa.) obtaining, ac- 
labhati, vb. (sa. ylabh) to take, | quisition, gain, profit; nom. ~o, 18,35; 
catch, find; to get, obtain, receive | dat, „āū (shortened of labhaya, cp. 
(acc.); to be allowed, or have oppor- | Kuhn, Beitr, p. 71; Weber, Ind. Str. 
tunity of (doing anything, w. foil. | 111, 371) 70,7. 105,23, if not we have 
imf.) pr. 3. sg. „ati (paharitum) | here pl. = sg., cp. Dh. 204 : àrogya- 
8,4; (iccham) 67,10; (okāsam) 87,19; : parama (g. v.) labha, which must be 
metri causa eati, Dh. 374; 1. sg. ' nom. pl.; but ārogya-paramā might 
emi (hist. pr.) 108,25; 2. pl. watha i perhaps be an old error for arogyam 
(khaditum) 8,6; 3. sg. med. ~ate, | paramā (or paramam); if ari labha 
Dh. 131. 103,32 (sukham); part. m. | is the true reading, we have to trans- 
~anto, 48,51; a-labhanto, 3,7; f. | late: health is better than gain, and 
manti (a-°) 46,3; f. pl. wantiyo, | lābhā would be abi. (cp. roga, Dh. 
21,16; part. med. m. «màno, 37,31; | 203), parama being used in the sense 
f. emünà (a-9) 6,56; imp. 3. pl. | of a comparative; — comp. v. *a-pui- 
| 


„antu (tava, be it then that they ob- | iia-9, m.; *appa-°, mfn.; salabha, m. 
tain) 7,18; 2. pl. med. (injunctive) ! (v. sa-*); labhagga, m. the highest 
labhamase, 13,26; pot. 1. sg. ~eyyam, ; gain (v. agga?); dvandva : °-sakkara, 
15,11. 70,15; ~eyyaham, 70,14; 3. sg. ; m. gain and honour, nom. ~o, 18,25; 
med, wetha, Dh. 328; aor. 1. sg. | loc. we, 72,98; *hata-°-sakkara, mfn. 
labhim (jivitam, saved my life) 12,33; | who has lost his gain and honour, m. 
3. pl. wimsu, 28,16; fut. 3. sg. *) la- | pl. nā, 72,28; cp. *lābhūpanisa, mf». 
bhissati (jivitath) 12,5; 1. sg. ~issimi, | (? v. upanisā). 

1,10. 4,36, etc.; 3. pl. wissanti (abha- | Lala, m. (sa. lata) nom. pr. of a 
yam) 7,16; 2. pl. wissatha, 18,10; | country in India (cp. Westergaard, 
b) 2. sg. lacchasi, 2,30; inf. laddhum, | Buddha’s Dgdsaar, Overs, Vid. Selsk. 
11,1; ger. 2) witva, 6,21, 28; (pati- | Forh. Copenh. 1860, p. 162); ?-visaya, 
ttham); 60,21 (balar); a-labhitva, | m. ‘who has L. for his dominion’, i. 
10,22. 73,4. 102,27; b) witvana, 54,29; | e. king of the Lala Country, 110,22 
— pass. (to be found, obtained, ac- | (Vijayo). 

quired) pr. 3. sg. lahbhati (yassa | lala, f. (= sa.) saliva, spittle; 


223 


9.kilinna-gatta, mfn. whose body is 
wet with spittle, f. pl. nā, 65,5. 
lippati, vb. (pass. limpati, to 
besmear, taint, defile: sa. ylip) to 
adhere, cling to (loc.); pr. 3. sg. ati 
(kamesu) Dh. 401. cp. lepana. 

lina, mfn. (= sa.; pp. yh) ‘adher- 
ing’; dissolved, melted; slothful ; modest, 
humble, dispirited (often opp. uddhata); 
*a-lina, mfn. free from attachment, 
or: undaunted, confident, cheerful; Dh. 
245 (cp. J. J. Meyer, Dacakumāraca- 
rita, p. 8—9, note). . 

*līļhā, f. (prob. fr. lih : ‘delicate 
taste, delicacy’) grace, charm, graceful 
power (cp. sa. lila); instr. wiiya 
(Buddha-? dhammam desetva) 7,27. 
47,17; (kinnara-9, g. v.) 49,12. 

luficati, vb. (sa. yluiic) to pluck, | 
pull out (acc.); ger. itvā (palitam, 
kesam) 46,28-29. 

ludda!, mfn. (sa. rudra) furious, 
cruel; cp. rudda; n. pl. acc. ~wani, 
cruelties, 13,28 (cp. next). 

ludda*,m. (sa. lubdha, confounded 
with rudra = ludda!) a hunter; ~o, 
12,8; gen. ~assa, 12,7; *°-putta, m. 
a person who is by caste a hunter, 
acc, ~am, 12,22. (cp. Tr. PM. p. 59,19. 
63,31; Fausbøll, 5 Jat. p. 38.) 

luddaka, m. (sa. lubdhaka) a 
hunter; nom. ~o, 9,8; 11,27 (miga-°). | 

Lumbini-vana, x. nom. pr. of 
a grove between Kapilavatthu and 
Devadaha (the birthplace of Gotama- 
Buddha); ~am, 62,9-13. 

lekha, f. (= sa.) a line, stroke; 
acc, ~am (kaddhitvā) 59,6; °-majjhe, | 
59,7. 
leddu (or lendu, Birm. also lettu) 
m. (& n.) (sa. leshtu, cp. lenda) a 
elod or lump of earth; %-ādīhi, 52,17 
(cp. adi). 

lepana, n. (== sd.) smearing, 
plastering; mamsa-lohita-°, mfn. pla- 
stered with flesh and blood, n. ~am 
(atthinam nagaram) Dh. 150. 

loka, m. (= sa.) 1) the universe, 
a region or sphere of the universe; 
the world, the earth; acc. ~am, 86,28; 


loha 


(saggam, heaven) 7,26; loc. we, 3,2. 
61,33. 69,21; „asmīn, Dh. 247; metri 
causa ~asmi, Dh. 143; 9-dhatu, f. 
(v. h.); °-nayaka, m. (v. h.); *"-san- 
nivasa, m. (g. v.); cp. deva-V, para-', 
Brahma-°, Yama-°; 2) the life in this 
world, this existence (— bhava, sam- 
sara); ayam «o, 96,7; abl. „amhā, 
91,5. Dh. 175; loc. we, 96,8-10; *°-ni- 
rodha, m. & *°-samudaya, m. (g. v.); 
-vagga, m. name of ch, XIII of Dh.; 
*0-vaddhana, mfn. supporting or cher- 
ishing this existence, m. ~o, Dh. 
167; cp. vanta-lokamisa, mfn. & 
sabba-lokabhibhu (v. abhibhu); — 
3) mankind, people, men; ayali ~o, 
88,9 == ayam lokamahajano, 88,5; 
sabbo ^o, 90,23; jiva-°, m. living 
beings, 47,17. 

lona, w. (sa. lavana) salt; °-jala, 
n. salt water, 24,16 (°-pahata, mfm.). 

lobha, m. (— sa.) cupidity, cove- 
tousness, greediness; mom. ~o (ca 
nam’ esa vinisamulam, now, ‘cove- 
tousness is the root of ruin’ |prover- 
bially], lit. ‘this very covetousness’) 
33,25; Dh. 248; «cc. mar (imassa 
karissàmi, excite his senses) 47,1; 
instr. wena, 25,33; (dhana-9) 22,22; 
dvandva comp. iccha-lobha-°, Dh. 264. 

lobhayati, vb. (= sa, caus. 
Vlubh) to cause to desire, to excite 
lust; part. f. ~ ayanti (va naresu 
gacchati, she walks among men as it 
were in order to excite their senses) 


47,20. 


loma, m. (& n.) (sa. loman) the 
hair of the body; pl. ~ii, 82,2 =: 
97,19; lomantaresu, 16,5 (v. antara); 
C-küpa, m. (g. v.). cp. anuloma, 
patiloma, viloma & next. 

loma-hathsa & -hamsana, mfn. 
‘causing erection of the hairs of the 
body’, i. e. terrible (subst. x, terror); 
m. ~ hamso (bhūmicālo) 80,20; n. 
~ hamsanam, 81,3. 

lola, mfn. (= sa.) wanton, lust- 
ful; itthi-°, mfn. (v. itthī); a-lola, 


min. (g. v.). 


loha, x. ( sa.) iron, any metal; 


lohita 


*0.guļa, m. an iron-ball, Dh. 371; 
*0.nigaļa-sadisa, mfn. like an iron 
chain, 11,28. 

lohita, 1) mfn. (= sa.) red; ari 
dana-vilepana, n. 23,33 (v. h); c 
rohita. — ?) x. blood; nom. cs 
23,52. 103,19. 82,5 = 97,22; loc. ne, 
103,20; *°-pakkhandika, f. dysentery, 


78,4; "-bhakkha, mfn. (g. v.); *9- 
makkhita, mfn. (g. v.); dvandva 
comp. ?-maisa-, 4l, 33 (V-khadaka, 


mfn. q. v.); majñsa-% Dh. 150 (°-le- 
pana, n. g. 9.). cp. sülohita. 


V. 


va, indecl, !) enclitic particle, shor- | 


tened of iva (g. v.), only after words 
ending with a long vowel : like, as if; 
9,32. 20,16. 47,20. 88,30-33 (va'ti); 104, 
6-15 ("~ar va); 108,5 (do.); 111,10. 
Dh. 28; as conjunction with full sen- 
tence : Dh. 240 (corr. w. foll. evam). 


— ?) do. = eva (g.9.), after long | 


vowels : just, even, only, etc. : 5,35. 
22,1. 55,2. 69,21; 2,32. 6,20-29. 10,23. 
17,20; 22,25. 86,7; — 30,25. 32,5. 33,31. 
37,31; 44,31. 57,25, ete. ete. — 3) do. 
rarely == va, ‘or’: 26,5 (aggīva su- 
riyo va); 26,13-20-27; Dh. 195 (yadiva 
— yadi vā). 

varsa, m. (sa. vamga) !) bamboo; 
*eivara-?, g. v., *-raga-, the colour 
of bamboo, 26, s1 (°-veluriyam, g. v.). 

— *) race, lineage, family; acc. ~am, 
45,17. — *) tradition, list of teachers; 
genealogy, history, chronicle; v. Anā- 
gata-vamsa, Dipavamsa, Mahāvarsa. 

vakka, m. (sa. vrkka) kidney; 
nom, ~am, 82,3 = 97,21. 

vagga, m. (sa. varga) !) a division, 
class, group, multitude; *) a chapter 
or section of a book; *0-paññasaka, 
mfn. (v. h.); esp. of the sections of 
Dīgha-Nikāya; the chapters of Dhpd. 
are likewise named vagga. cp. pafica- 
vagglya, mfm. 

vamka, mfn. (sd, vakra, cp. vañ- 


224 


kya) crooked, curved, wry; ace. m. 
~an, 63,9; kog mfn. having a 
winding course, f. ~I (nadi) 48,6; 
*vamkottha, mfn. 54,20 (v. ottha). 

Vangisa, m. (cp. sa. vūg-īga) 
nom. pr. of a thera, 109,8 (~o pati- 
bhānavā). 

vaca(s), m. & n. (sa. vacas, n.) 
speech; acc. n. ~0, 110,26; dubbaca, 
mfn. (q. v.) ep. vaci, vaca, vacasika, 
& next, 

vacana, (== sa.) speaking, 
speech, word; advice, instruction; acc. 
~am (sutva) 6,17; „am karoti, to 
follow one's advice, 4,8, 32,25; ~am 
bhindati, to disobey, 40,2; ~am agan- 
hantim, disobeying, 52,32; eka-vaca- 


: nena, instr. 57,31 (v. eka”); — %-kara, 


mfn. obedient, acc. m. pl. ne, 21,33; 


; Buddha-*, n. (g. v.); ep. pati-vacana. 


| of comp.) speech, word; 


*vacl, f. (mostly at the beginning 
0-duccarita, 
n. misbehaviour in speech, 86,8 (°-san- 
nissita, mfn. q. v.) ; °-pakopa, m. anger 
of speech, acc. ^am, Dh. 232; °-su- 
carita, ^. good conduct in speech, 
86,8 (°-patisathyutta, g. v.). 
vaccha, m. (sa. vatsa) +) a calf; 
nom. eo, Dh. 284; 9-danta, m. a kind 
of arrow, acc. ~am, 92,24 (a calf-tooth 
arrow). — ?) nom. pr., v. neat. 

*Vacchagotta, m. nom. pr. of 
an ascetic (paribbajaka); nom. ~o, 
93,22; voc. Vaccha, 94,7. 

vajāti, vb. (sa. Vvraj) to go, walk, 
wander; to go away; to enter into, 
attain (acc.); pr. 3. pl. „anti, 47,28 
== Dh. 347; Dh. 83; (sugatim) 77,5; 
(devalokath) Dh. 177. 

vajira, ^. (rarely m.; sa. vajra) 
1) a diamond; «om. ~am, 25,32. Dh. 
161; pl. ~āni, 27,29; **-samudda, 
m. 8 diamond sea, 95,3; -siira, m. a 
good deal of d., acc. eain, 26,1. — 
[*) à thunderbolt. ] 

Vajira, f. nom. pr. of a bhikkhuni, 
contemporary of Buddha; instr. ~aya, 
98,28. 

vajja', x. (sa. vadya & vadya) 
speech, speaking; v. sacca-°, 


vajja?, (sa. varjya) ‘to be 
shunned’, i, e. fault, sin; nom. «aim, 


106,16 = Dh. 252; acc. abl. mam 
~ato natva, considering sin what is 
sin, Dh. 319; pl. xāni, 106,17; *9-das- 
si^, mfn. seeing. fault, pointing out 
what is sin, acc. m. ~inam, Dh. 76; 
*0 mati, mfn. seeing sin, m. pl. «ino, 
Dh. 318 (avajje); para-", the faults 
of others, Dh. 253 (°-anupassin, q. 
v.); Cp. a-vajja. 


vajjha, mfn. (sa. vadhya, grd. va- ` 


dhati) to be killed; subst. n. (or nā, | 


f.) killing, execution; *°-ppatta, mfn. 
sentenced to death, m. pi. ~a, 40,14. 
vaūcana, n. [or wi, f.] (= sa.) 
deception, fraud; nom. «um, 51,35. 
valiceti, vb. (caus. yvaiüc, sa. 
vaūcayati) ‘to cause to go astray’, 
i. e, to deceive, trick (ace.); aor. 1. 
sg. eesinm (tari) 2,7; inf. «etum 
(attano samikam, seems to be a gloss 
inserted into the text) 51,27; comp. 
raūcetu-kāma, mfn. (v. kama®*); ger. 
„etvīī (macche) 4,2; (padar, picked 
up his heels) 12.30; grd. „etabba, 
mfn. to be tricked, m. ~o, 3,15; pp. 
vanes mfn. tricked, m. ~o, 51,25. 
2,13; bhāva, m. the being tricked, 
acc. eam (maya) 5,11. cp. vaūcana. 
vatta, »., v. vatta. 


D vanta 


without subject (& object) : idam kä- 
tum ~, 44,13; laddhath vasam pah:i- 
tum na ~, 54,5; dametum ~ (“it 
will be worthy [of me| to convert 
[him]") 113,9. — >) personally : ought 
to take place, is good, is sufficient; 
appatissavāso na a, 10,1; eko vx 
[dovariko] ~, 91,2». — caus. vatteti, 
to cause to turn, to upset; pp. vattita 
(v. below). 

vatti, f. (sa. varti) ') a roll, tuft 
(esp. the wick of a lamp), a lump, 
mass; ?) rounding, edge, rim, brim, 
esp. comp. w. mukha-?; *āvāta-mu- 
khavattiyaih, Joc. “at the brink of 
the pit", 40,25. 

vaddhati, 


vb. (sometimes spelt 


- vaddhati; sa. yvrdh) to grow, increase; 
| pr. 3. 8g. „ati (udakam, opp. hayati) 
3,45 48,21 (grows up); 107,29 (tanhā); 


Ju pl. „anti, Dh. 109; part. m. ~anto, 
24,12; aor. 3. pl. nisu, 37,20; pp. 
a) vaddha & vuddha (g. v.); b) vad- 
dhita, m. ~o (samma, grown pro- 
perly) 24,33; caus. v. next ele, ep. 
vaddhana, vaddhi & vuddhi. 
vaddhapeti, vb. (caus. IT. vad- 
dhati; sa. vardhiipayati) to cause to 
increase, raise (acc.); imf. etum 


| (vetanam) 76,1. 


vattaka, m. (sa. vartaka) a cer- | 


tain kind of bird, 

~esu, 88,34. 
vattati, vb. (sa. yvrt) !) to turn, 

roll; to take place, be found; to live; 


a quail; loc. pl. 


vattati (g. v.); *) pr. 3. sg. 3) imper- 
sonally : must, ought; 
ted, advisuble, sufficient, etc. (w. inf., 
the subject of which, if added, is put 
into instr. or gen.); kin te. 
ditum ~ (had you not better to eat) 
1,16; amhākam . . . laddhum ~, 11,1; 
amhehi palayiturh `, 21,97; maya 
mu, 35,26-36. 36,8. 43,3. 64,24, 65,14 
(“it behoves me”); maya. ettha kith kā- | 
tum ~ (“what can 1 do about that?”) | 
73,7; tava gantum ~, 50,8; imāya 
me paricārikāya bhavitum ~, 56,4; 


„khā- | 


vaddhi, f. (ep. vuddhi; sa. vrddhi) 
growth, increase; prosperity, success; 
gain, profit; acc. ^ii, 34,18. 

vaddheti, vb. (caus. vaddhati; 


. sa. vardhayati) to cause to grow, in- 
 erease; to foster, bring up; to prepare, 
in this sense it is nearly always written : 


may, is permit- | 


make ready, bring, deliver (a discourse 
etc.) (w. acc.); pr. 1. sg. «emi (yii- 
gum) 56,56; aor. 3. sg. ~esi (Bodhi- 


. sattam) 45 25; (tasaram), 87,17; ger. 
| wetva, 18, 11-26. 63,18. 87,12. 


x 


vana, m. (& m.) (sa. vrana) a 
wound; «o, Dh. 124; cp. a-bbana, 
mfn. & vanita. 

vaņijjā, f. (sa. vaņijyā) trade; 
acc. «am (karoti) 30,2; cp. vanija. 

vanita, mfn. (sa. vranita) wounded; 
m. pl. wit, 0,25. 

vanta, n. (sa. vinta) the footstalk 
of a leaf (or flower); tala-°, n. (g. v.). 


vanna 


vanna, m. (sa. varna) *) form, 
shape, appearance; instr, wena (nà- 
vaya, "in ship-shape") 29,11; kassa- 
ka-9, the appearance of a ploughman, 
ace. ~am, 71,98; — 2) complexion, 
colour (also: tribe, caste); mom. ~o, 
85,16; °-gandha, m. (dvandva) colour 
aud scent, 37,30; 106,2; °-pokkharata, 


f. (q. v.) ; *-sadda, m. the word vanna, 


85,22; very frequently at the end of 
comp. mfn. = having the colour of.. ., 
coloured, v. atijana-°, kala-? (9-kata, 
84,21), kila-pasana-kuta-°, 24,21; 
kumuda-patta-°, nila-°, meda-®, ra- 
jata-°, rajata-diima-°, 61,19; ratta- 
kambala-puija-°, 5,7; suvanna-°; 
*chabbanna, mfn. of six colours (g. 
v.); paiica-°, mfn. of five colours, 4,9 
(°-paduma-); 62,12 (*-bhamara-ganā); 
— 5) beauty; ~0, Dh. 109; gen. assa, 
Dh. 241; chavi-9, 18,7; sarira-°, 47,5; 
— *) praise, glory; v. a-vanna. — cp. 
Uppala-vanna, dubbanna, vevanniya, 
suvanna (sovanna), next etc. 

vannanàá, f. (sa. varnaná) expla- 
nation, commentary; 86,10 (Sukara- 
peta-vatthu-?). 

vannavat, mfn. (sa. varnavat) 
of beautiful colour; n. ~vantam (pup- 
pham) Dh. 51. 

vannita. mfn. (sa. varnita) praised; 
loc. m. ~e (gune) 47,3; Satthu-°, 
mfn..praised by the Master, m. pl. 
wi, 109,19. 

°Vannin, mfn. (sa. varnin; only 
c. €.) having the colour of °, like, res- 
sembling; m. pl. ~ino (devakumara-°) 
45,26. 

vanneti, vb. (fr. vanna; sa. var- 
nayati) to colour, depiet, describe; 
to praise (acc.); aor. 3. sg. esi, 4,18. 
37,13. 64,1; fut. 1. sg. nessāmi, 47,5. 

vata’, adv, (= sa.) a particle 
inserted after the first word of a sen- 
tence, often followed by bho (g. v.): 
1) expressing asseveration or admission: 
certainly, indeed, truly; 2,12. 30,8 
(vat'ayam); 34,17. 42,13. 90,25. 105,25; 
— *) expressive of *) astonishment : aho 
vata bho, 42,17; b) of satisfaction or 


oe M a e — . —À 


226 


hopefulness : ~bho, 76,31-33; 9) of de- 
light : sobhati vatāyam dārako, what 
a pretty little child! 58,31; 4) of re- 
gret or hopelessness : dhi-r-atthu ~bho, 
63,13; upaddutam ~bho, 65,12; aci- 
ram vatayam, 107,5 = Dh. 41. 

vàta?, n. (sa. vrata) observance, 
religious duty, a religious vow; „am, 
Dh. 312; cp. a-bbata, su-bbata, 
sila-bbata & next. 

vatavat, mfn. (sa. vratavat) duti- 
ful, performing the religious duties; 
acc. m. ~vantam, Dh. 208. 400. 

vati, f. (sa. vrti) a hedge, fence; 
acc. ^m, 8,7. 

vatta (& vatta), x. (sa. vrtta) 
a circle; practice, custom; good con- 
duct, politeness; business, duty, ser- 
vice; comp. vatta-pativattam, every 
single duty, 36,7 (tapasassa akasi, 
he rendered him every service). cp. 
pati & next. 

*vatta-kata (or °-gata), mfn. 
round, circular; wide-open; instr. 
wena (mukhena) 5,13. 

vattati, vb. (=: vattati, g. v.) 
to take place, set in; to be found; to 
live; pr. 3. sg. eati (ravo, is heard) 
60,10; 3. pl. wanti (khari vedani, 
set in) 13,3; 78,25 (w. gen. came 
upon him); fut. 1. sg. ~wissami (gu- 
nesu, live a good life) 43,4; — med. 
pr. 3. sg. vattate (ussavo maha) 112,16. 
cp. vatta (vatta) x. 

vattabba, vattum, v. (vadati 
&) vuccati. | 

vattha, x. (sa. vastra) cloth, gar- 
ment, dress; nom. «am (suddhaii) 
68,21; acc. «am (dibba-°) 61,13; 
instr. menu, 20,26; loc. we (Kasika-°, 
g. v.) 62,29; pl. ~ani (ahata-', g. v.) 
27,18. 33,3; instr. pl. „ehi (dibba-°) 
20,8; comp. ahata-vattha-°, 61,28; 
apagata-°, mfn. with the dress fallen 
apart, f. pl. wa, 65,7. 

vatthu, n. (sa..vastu |8 vastu]) 
1) site, place, ground (of a building 
etc.) v. Kapila-9, Sirisa-°, & a-va- 
tthu-kata, mfn. ~ ?) thing, object, 
matter (of a story etc.); property; 


227 vapati 


nom. «um (a tale, story) 89,17; Joc. | pana-°, 60,13 (g. ».); purisa-0, 74,14 

^umhi (parassa rakkhita-gopita-9, : (g. v.); dvandva : vadha-bandha, m. 

"in protecting and guarding the pro- | acc. ~am, Dh. 399 ("stripes and 

perty of others") 58,13; sukara-peta-°, | bonds"). 

‘86,10 (q. v.) cp. Katha-vatthu. | vadhaka, mfn. (= sa.) killing 
vatva, ger. v. (neri &) vuccati. | or intending to kill; *°-citta, mfn. 
vadati & *vadeti, vb. (sa. vad; | with murderous intent, 75,34; *satthu-°, 

suppletive of vuccati, g. v.) to say, | mfn. 108,27 (v. satthar). 

speak (acc.), answer; to speak to (acc.), ° — vadhati, vb. (sa. yvadh) to kill, 

to tell (acc. gen.), to declare; — A) va- | murder (acc.); aor. 3. sg. a-vadhi, 

dati, 3. sg. 73,18. 85,29; 2. sg. nasi, Dh. 3; ger. witva, 19,5. 22,11. ep. 

24,1. 88,7; 1. sg. „sāmi, 70,30. 94,13; ` vajjha, vadha, vadhaka. 


(saccam) 38,28; (tam) 108,5; (num, ^ vana, n. (rarely m.; = sa.) !) 
speak to her) 9,18; 3. pl. anti, 21,6. , a forest, grove; acc, ^am, 5,20; loc. 
72,20; part. acc. m. ~antnmh, 22,18, me, 15,5; ^ asmnn, 106,13 = Dh. 


loc. ~ante, 9,3, pl. Santa, 74,11; 395; ~asmi, 107,30 — Dh. 334; pl. 
part. med. m. ~ amano, 99,81; pot. ' vana (sabbe) 48,6; «ani, Dh. 188; 
3. Sg. ~weyya, 79,15. 92,3; 2. sg. | comp. °-gumba, m. (q. v.); *?-caraka. 
weyyasi, 35,8. 99,14; 3. pl. weyyum | m. a forester, acc. pl. «e, 36,51; 
(gunam, praise) 43,8; aor. 2) 2. sg. | ?-puppha, x. a wild flower, instr. pl. 
vidi (mā) 9,19; b) 3. sg. vadi (tam) , wehi, 34,6; *"-mahisa, m. (g. v.); 
108,28; 3. pl. „irhsu, 24,27. 73,21. — | 9-sanda, m. (y. v.); cp. amba-®, Cit- 
B) vadeti, pr. 2. sg. nesi, 17,14; 7. | talata-°, tala-°, nala-9, nāga-°, mañ- 
sg. wemi, 88,19; imp. 2. sg. ~wehi, | gala-sàla-?, Lumbini-°, velu-°, Sim- 
51,5; 2. pl. wetha (mà kiūci rañño | bali-0. — 2) lust, desire (cp. ved. sa. 
~) 55,26; aor. 2. sg. nesi, 88,13. 93,31; | vanas); acc. ~am, abl. ~ato, Dh. 
1. sg. ~wesim, 88,24. — caus. vādeti ' 283; vanante, Joc. "at the end of 
(g. v.). As to the wanting forms of : desires", Dh. 305 (cp. anta); *9-à- 
this verb (act. & pass.) v. vuccati | dhimutta, *"-inutta, mfn. (v. h.) Dh. 
(vac); ep. vajja, vadana, vada, vadin. | 344. ep. next & nibbana. 
vadana, ^. (== sd.) “speaking,  "*vanatha, m. (cp. vana? & sa. 
mouth’; speech, communication, in- , yvan) lust, desire; nom. ~o, Dh. 284; 
junction; acc. „am (avoca) 110,21. | acc. wath, Dh. 283 (vanam wail ca, 
*vadeti, vb. = vadati (g. v.). “the forest of desires and its under- 
vaddha!, m. [or n.?] (sa. vardhra) 
leather, a leathern strap or thong; 
acc. «ali, 12,0; — *Ü-maya, mfn. 
leathern, acc. m. ~am (pasam) 11,29. 
cp. varattā. (e. dosa?); "mala, mfn. (g. v.); 
vaddha*, mfn. (also spelt vuddha | *-lokamisa, mfn. “who has rejected 


x growth”). 
| 
| 
| 
| 
[or vuddha], pp. vaddhati; sa. vrd- | the baits of the world”, Dh. 378 (cy. 
| 
| 
| 


vanta, mfn. (sa. vanta; pp. va- 
mati) vomited; ejected, put away; 
*0_-kasava, mfn. (g. v.); *-dosa, mfn. 


dha) grown; old; comp. *vaddhāpa- | āmisa); *°-dsa, mfn. (v. asa). 
cāyin, mfn. (v. apacayin). vandati, vb. (sa. yvand) to 

vaddhati, vb., v. vaddhati. praise, worship; to salute, greet (acc.); 

°vaddhana, mfn. (e. c., sa. var- | ger. nitvā, 28,10. 32,25 (ücariyam); 
dhana) causing to increase; "loka-9, | inf. Aitu (Mahibodhith) 114,32. 
mfn. U v.). | ep. nert, 

vadha, m. (= sa.) killing, de- | vandanā, f. (= sa.) praise, wor- 
stroying; murder; execution or corpo- | ship; nom. nā (Buddhana[m]) 108,20. 
ral punishment; comp. miga-°, 5,32; vapati, vb. (sa. Vvap) to sow, 


15* 


vapayati 


strew, throw (acc.); ger. ~itva (ni- ` 


vāpam) 6,4. : 
vapayüti. vb. (sa. vi-apa-yyà) 
to go away, pass away, vanish; pr. à. 
pl. wayanti (kaīīkhā) 66,21 (ep. Kuhn, 
Beitr. p. 96—97). 
. vàmati, vb. (sa. vam) to vomit; 
pp. vanta (g. v.). 
, vayal, m. (& vaya(s), n.; sa. vayas) 
age, vigorous age, youth, ripe age, 
old age; nom. «o (paripakko) Dh. 
260; acc. eam, 43,36; acc. m. vayo 


(anuppatto) 74,21; loc. ~e (parina- | 


mante) 47,12; comp. vaya- & vayo-: 
*a-ppatta, mfn. grown up, marri- 
ageable; m. eO, 8,15; f. mā, 101,16; 
*samāna-vaya-bhūva, m. the being 
of equal age, acc. ^, 43,29; *~0- 
hara, mfu. indicating or disclosing 
old age, m. pl. „āū, (uttamaūgaruhā) 
45,11; upanita-vaya, mfn. (g. v.). 
vaya? (or vyaya), m. (sa. vyaya) 
perishing, decay, destruction ; *°-dham- 
ma, mfn. perishable, transitory; pl. 
m. «à (samkhara) 80,2 (cp. dham- 


228 


~ assatara dantā, Dh. 322; w. abl. 
tato ~, ib.; w. instr. Db. 178. 

Varana, m. (= sa.) name of a 
certain tree (Crateva Roxburgh.); 
O-rukkhe, loc, 4,21. 

varatta, f. (sa. varatrā). a strap. 
thong (of leather); acc. „am, Dh. 
398 (metaph. of attachment); 12,7 
(camma-"); pl. «à (sesa-°) 12,20. 
cp. vaddha!. 

varüha, m. (= sa.) a hog; nom. 
0 (maha-°) Dh. 325. 

*valanja, m. (& n.) 4) use, daily 


. expenditure (also of excrements); :) 


mat); *uppada-vaya-dhammin, mf». | 


(q. v.); dvandva comp. udaya-vyaya, 
m. origin and destruction, acc. «am, 
Dh. 118. 374 (v. l. udayabbayari). 

vara, !) mfn. (= sa.) best, choicest, 
excellent; acc. n, «aii (vadanari) 
110,21; Dh. 268 (ādāya); repeated : 
^am wath (w. gen.) 51,33. 52,5; acc. 
m, ~ai „arh (praestantissimum quem- 
que) 109,4; most frequently comp. w. 
subst. (before or after): 3) °-sura, 
39,12; "-vàrana, 45,31. 61,17; ?-bho- 
jana, 61,7; °-dhamma, 87,9; ete. — 
b) meņda-%, 30,9; ratha-?, 64,10; pā- 
sada-°, 64,12; etc.; sabb'-akara-var'- 
ūpeta, 81,4 (v. akira). — 2) m. choice, 
wish, boon, gift; nom. ~o (maya 
dinno) 8,2; acc. „ari (tassā adāsi) 
10,4; comp. *gāma-vara, m. the grant 
of a village (perhaps a landed property 
of a certain measure, if not simply ‘an 
excellent village’?) acc, ~ari (datvā) 
45,3. — 3) w. varath, indecl. rather, 
better (than : abl. or instr.); ~ may- 
ham udumbaro (is better to me) 2,11; 


a mark (from scratching or scraping); 
pada-9, footprint, acc. ~am, 11,25. 
Hence valaüjaka, mfn. e. c., v. anto-®, 
bahi-9 (ep. Fausbøll, JRAS. 1870, 
p. 13, & Ten Jat. p. 90 [ylaij & lancl |). 

Valabhamukha, m. (?) (sa. Va- 
dabàmukha) the entrance to the in- 
fernal regions at the South pole; *9-sa- 
mudda, m. the Southern sea, acc. „am, 
27,1-11; *-mukhi(n), m. id. 27,9. 

valaya, n. (& m.) (= sa.) a bra- 
celet, ring; “naraca-°, 111,25 (g. v.). 

valāha(ka), m. (sa. balāhaka) 
a cloud; nom. «ako (vata-cchinna-°) 
40,28; *valāhassa, m. a flying horse 
(cp. assa!) 21,31 (°-yoni). 

valli, f. (= sa.) a creeper; Joc. 
~wlya (a stalk of a creeper, a withe) 
14,23; wiyam, 14,27; pl. ~iyo (pag: 
gava-9, g. v.) 37,19. 

vavatthāpeti, vb. (sa. vyava- 
sthapayati, caus. vi-ava-\/stha) to 
settle, determine, distinguish, under- 
stand; pp. ~ita, 3,2 (tassa su-vava- 
tthāpitari, very well known to him). 

vasa, !) m. (sa. vaga) wish, will, 
power; loc. ~e (thapeti, to bring into 
one’s power) 48,14; instr. vasena is 
used as prp. w. gen. or more frequently 
at the end of comp. with the meanings: 
by, by way of, on account of, accor- 
ding to, with regard to; hatthinam 
~, 35,12; ovada-°, 14,13; kilesa-", 
20,11; dande pavesana-°, 35,5; udā- 
na-& 42,14; chandádi-9, 42,27; kam- 
massa vipaka-°, 84,32; aniccádi-^, 


229 | T 


88,» (v. a-nicca); pubbipara-®, 
114,20; — attha-vasa, m. the power 


of the matter, acc. „arī (etam, the | 
| 24,13; solasa-vassa-padesika, °-udde- 


meaning of this) Dh, 289. — *) mfn. 


x 


subdued, subject to; ~am (kurute) Dh. : 


48, which may also be subst. (‘into his 


power’). ep. ativasa, vasi & vasika. : 


vasati, vb. (sa. yvas) to stay, 
dwell, live; pr. 3. sg. wati, 2,97 (w. 
loc. nadiyi); 35,35 (idha); 1. sg. 
Umi. 49,13. 7344; 
14,45; part. m. ~anto, 20,2; 58,25 


(w. acc. samaggavasath); 114,26; loc. | 


nte, 25,12; gen. ~ato, 47,27; pl. 
~anta, 7,21; part. med. ~mana, f. 
gen. «aya (kinnaralilhàya, endowed 


with grace) 49,12; — imp. 2. sg. vasa, ` 
$g. ` 


15,15. 23,20 (vasā ti); — aor. 3. 
vasi, 1,5; 3. pl. „imsu (piyasaimva- 
sam, acc. lived together in amity) 
11.37; 20,33; — fut. 1. sg. wissaimi 
(vassam, during the rainy season) Dh. 
286; — inf. «itum, 9,4; — ger. 
evitvi, 2,25 ete; 112,24 (vasitvettha). 
— (pass. vussati) ; pp. vussita (vuttha, 
vasita) g. v.; — caus. IT. *vasapeti 
(g. v.) ep. vāsa, vāsīka, vàsin & next. 

vasana, «. (= sa.) dwelling, re- 
sidence; comp. *%-gūma, 12,7; *°-gum- 
ba, 14,27; *°-tthana, 2,24. 65,27 (g. v.). 

vasü!, f. (sa. vagā) a cow; pl. 
wit, 105,11. 

vasa’, f. (= sa.) serum, lymph; 
nom. ^3, 82,5 — 97,23. 

*vasāpeti, vb. (caus. II. vasati) 
to cause to dwell, lodge; ger. wetva 
(tam ghare, received her into his 
house) 48,15. 

vasim, indecl. (sa. vagī-) only 
combined with karoti, to subdue 
(acc.); ^, karitva (samkappam) 104,7; 
[also comp. vasi-karoti, etc.| 
vasika, mfn. (sa. vacika) being 
in one's power; tanha-°, 23,20; matu- 
gāma-', 54,3 (v. h.). 

vassa, x. (sa. varsha) !) rain, a 
shower (ep. vutthi); *kahāpana-', 
Dh. 186 (g. e); *dhana-9, 33,15; 
satta-ratana-°, 32,11. nom. — ?)the 
rainy season; acc, eam, Dh. 286. — 


à. pl. «ant, | 


Vil 


3) a year; pl. acc. ani, 86,37. 104,11; 
%satam, 2. a century, Dh. 106. 110; 
solasa-vassa-kiile, in his 16 year, 


sika (v. h.); caturāsīti - "saliassini, 
44,20 (q. v.). cp. vassika. 
vassati!, vb. (sa. \/vac) to ery, 
screech (as birds); pr. 3. sg. «ati, 
18,18; part. m. manto, 18,1; ger. 
^ ltvà, 12,9. i 
vassnti?, vb. (sa. yvrsh) to rain; 


' pr. 8. sg. eati (vassath) 82,11; (devo, 


the god, i. e. the sky rains) 102.6; 


| part, m. gen. vassato (devassa) 105,22: 


pou 


Waysa w amaste 


caus. II. *vassapeti, v. below; ep, 
vassa, vutthi, & nezt. 

*vassapanaka, mfn. (fr. nom. 
act. of next) bringing about rain; 
dhana-°-nakkhattayoga, m. a conjunc- 
tion of stars bringing about a shower 
of money, 32,25. 

*vassüpeti, vb. (caus. I1. vas- 
sati?) to cause to rain or pour down, 
call down a shower; aor. 3. sg. «esl. 
33,11 (dhanath); 2. pl. mā ~ayittha, 
32,27; fut. 1. sg. messūmi, 33,15 
(dhanavassam); 2. pl. ~essatha, 
32,27; ger. ~wetva, 32,33; pp. ~ita 
(acariyena dhanalh ~itam, x.) 34,5. 

vassika, mfn. (sa. vārshika) !) 
belonging to the rainy season; m. «0 
(scil. pāsitdo) 67,23; — °) e. c. being so 
many years old; solasa-°, 9. ^ai 
(rüpam) 111,36. 

vassikā & «ki, f. (sa. vārshīkī, 
cp. varshika, 2. & vrshaka, 2.) a sort 
of jasmine; Dh. 55. 377. 

vaha, m. (— sa.) a river, stream, 
wave; pl. nā, Dh. 339 (in stead of 
vāhā, cp. SBE. X. p. 82). 

vahati, vb. (sa. /vah) to draw, 
convey, carry away (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
wati, 29,11; 2. sg. nasi, 54,22; 3. pl. 
wanti, Dh. 339; part. m. gen. «ato 
(of the draught animal) Dh. 1. cp. 
vaha, vāha, vahana. 

và, indecl. (= sa.) a disjunctive 
particle (sometimes comb. w. other 
particles) : 1) ‘or’, used (enclitically) 
in combinations of two sentences or 


Y wanitwés GA asus 


links of a sentence : asassato loko 
ti và, 92,30; yāvatake và pana (or 


else) 81,17; after prec. negation : na | 


...V& puna (nor yet) Dh. 271. — 


or more links) : 9,14. 9,29. 31,31. 92,10. 
etc.; w. negation = ‘neither — nor’: 
7,36. 8,1 (v. corrections); 56,11; va... 
yadivā [before the Jast link] Dh. 98; 
vāpi...vā, 114,20 (w. foll. n'eva); 
athava [before the first link] . . . và, 


| & the asceticism destructive of lust 
2) repeated == ‘either — or’ (after two 


ms <ç x 


acc, ~am, 19,15; instr. —ena, 106,29; 
nom. ~0, 103,18 (here we have a 
pun: the wind as drying up humours 
; 


comp. *9-cchinna, mfn. (v. chinna 


. 
4 


. *0_vega, m. (g. v.); *akala-9, n. *un- 


seasonable wind”, wath, 25,21; *nasa-°, 
m. (g. v.); cp. pativatam, yathāvātar. 
— *) rheumatism (cause of disease or 


pain) v. kammaja-vata, pi. 62,19. — 


Dh. 271. — ?) corresp. w. foll. ca (in ; 


the same sense): Maro và Brahma ca 
. .. na passanti, 110,11. — +) sometimes 
shortened to va (q. v.). 


cp. nivataka. 
vati, vb. (sa. va) to blow; to 


. smell; pr. 3. sg. ~ti (gandho timi- 
, rànam) 20,16; Dh. 56. 


*vākkaraņa, n. (*sa. vak + 
karana) vociferation; na°-mattena, | 
“not by means of much talking only”, - 


Dh. 262 (cp. matta?). 
vākya, n. (= sa.) speech, sen- 
tence; v. *ati-vakya. 


cerning the speech; instr. m. ~wena 
(sarhvarena) 85,19. 
vaca, f. (sa. vāc & vācā) speech, 


vada, m. (= sa.) +4) speech; v. 
musa-°; ?) addressing; v. avuso; *) 
doctrine, system; acc. wath, 113,11; 
agga-", 109,50 (g. v.) == thera-? (q. 
v.); ücarlya-? (g. v.); dhuta-°, m. 


| (q. v.); 1) discussion, controversy; 


words; nom. „āū (pacchima, Tathā- : 


gatassa) 80,5; Dh, 51-52; 67,4 (sam- 
ma-°, g. v.); acc. ~am (karunam) 
103,4; 22,5 (manusi-°, v. manusa. 


mfn.); instr. ~waya, 84,29. Dh. 232. . 


*vācānurakkhin, mfn. watching . 


one’s speech, m. ~i, Dh. 281; *yathā- : 
vacamh, adv. (v. yathā); *santa-vaca, ` 
mfn. (g. v.), cp. vākkaraņa, vaca(s) : 


& next. 


°%vacika & °vaciya, mfn. (sa. ` 
vācika), verbal; only e. e, v. eka- . l 
to play musical instruments (acc.); 


vaciya, te-vacika. 

vaceti, vb. (caus. vac, v. vuccati; 
sa. Vacayati) to read out, recite (acc.); 
aor. 3. pl. wayimsu, 114,9; inf. 
metum, 114,14. 

vàjita, mfn. (= sa.; yvaj, Dhā- 
tup. 32,74) having feathers, feathered; 
acc. „am (pattehi, kandar) 92,19. 

vāņija, m. (= sa.) a merchant; 
m0, 8,6; pl. nā, 18,4; %-kula, w. 
(g. v.) 30,2. cp. vanijjà. —*vāņijaka, 
m. (== sa.) id.; acc. pl. we, 18,8. 

vata, m. (= sa.) 1) the wind; 


UR | . Sabba-vada-^, 113,4 (°-visarada, g. 
*vācasika, mfn. (fr. vaca[s]) con- | 9.). ep. next. 


*vādatthin, mfn. (ep. atthin) 
desirous of dispute; m. a disputant; 
ml, 118,5. | 

vàdi, aor., v. vadati. 

vàdita, n. (= sa.) music; pl. 
„āni (nacca-gita-") 64,31; cp. 81,21. 

vadin, mfn. (= sa.) speaking 
(mostly e. c.); acc. m. ~inam (tathā, 
or comp. tatha-°, g. v.) 103,12; cp. 
a-bhüta-9, alika-", niggayha-°, bho-, 
musá-? (gen. °-vadissa, 106,14), sac- 
ca-9 Dh. 217. 

vàdeti, vb. (caus. vadati; su. 
vadayati) to cause to speak or sound, 


part. m. pl. ~enta (bheriyo, *beat- 


; ing drums") 8,24; loc. pl. ~entesu 
: (vinam) 50,10; aor. 3. sg. «vesi, 50,11, 


l 
I 


== a-vadesi, 51,3. cp. vadita, x. 
vanara, m. (= sa.) a monkey, 
ape; ~o, 3,9. 107,50; vanarinda, m. 


; (v. inda). 


vaina, mfn. (= sa.) left, sinister; 
0-hatthena, “with his left hand", 111,24 
(opp. dakkhina). 

vamanaka, mfn. (= sa.; fr. vā- 
mana, a dwarf) .dwarfish, deformed 


231 vihana 


(lame or halting ?); (paccha-)vàma- | vāladhi, m. (= sa.) a tail (esp. 

naka-dhātuka, mfn. (g. v.) 24,21-26. | of a horse, a deer, or an ox); mom. 
vāyamati, vb. (sa. vi -}- ā-Vyam) | ~i, 5,28; acc. wim, 22,6. 

to struggle, strive, endeavour; imp. 2. *vala-vedhin, m(fn). (sa. *vala- 

sg. vayama, Dh. 236 (khippam). ep. | vy&dhin) hair-splitting; m. wi, "skil- 

vayama. led in hair-splitting” (sophist) 110,9. 
vayasa, m. (= sa.) a crow; ~o, vālikā (or vālukā), f. (sa. vālukā) 

1044s; gen. «assa, 18,35 (synon. | sand, gravel; instr. loc. aya, 14,21; 


kaka), i 97,95; pl. acc. «à (in dvandva 
vayama, m. (sa. vyāyāma) en- | comp.) ib. 

deavour, effort; ~o (samma-, g. v.) vasa, m. (== sa.) !) dwelling, 

67,5; acc. eam (karissati) 34,5. abode; nom. ~o, Dh. 237; acc. ~am 


vara, m. (= sa.) time, turn. lot; | (manussa-°) 21,2; „arh kappeti, to 
~O, 6,25-26; acc. eam (gacchati, to | live, 1,4. 2,25; comp. *a-ppatissa-vāsa, 
take one's turn) 6,33; Joc. ~e (catu- | m. (v. patissava); *eka-rati-°, mfn. 
tthe, tatiye, for the 4*h, 3 time) (v. eka*); *brahmacariya-, m. (g. v.); 
58,7. 114,17; comp. eka-varam, adv. | *samagga-°, m. (g. v.); *samāna-", 
once, 50,16; puna-vüre, adv. the next | mfn. (g. v.) cp. sarhvāsa, vasika, vā- 
time, 18,17; *°-ppatta, mfn. whose | sin. — *) perfume; v. vāsita, 
turn it is, on whom the lot falls; m. vasi, f. (sa. vagi) a small axe, 
~0, 6,27. cp. bhanavára. . | knife, razor; ""pharasuka, m. a 

varaka, m. (= sa.) a pot, vessel; | “razor-axe” (dande pavesanavasena 
dadhi-9, m. 14,30 (g. v.). | vāsi pi hoti pharasu pi) 35,15. 
| 
| 


x 
x 


varana, m. (= sa.) an elephant; vasika, mfn. (sa. vūsaka; fr. 
„0 (seta-vara-°) 61,17; acc. „ar, | vasa!) dwelling, living (e. c.); kattha- 
24,1; gen. ~wassa (matta-°) 45,31; © vasika, m. pl. 21,8 (v. kattha). 
loc. ~e (do.) 39,5. vāsita, mfn. (=: sa.; pp. vaseti, 
vari, %. (=: sa.) water; nom. ~i, | vas, cp. vüsa?) perfumed, scented ; 
Dh. 401; acc. with, 13,3. 111,8. — : "-udakam, 41,2; °paniyam, 41,1 
0-ja, m. ‘boru in water’, ¿ e. a fish | (thapita-°, g. v.). 
(or a lotus); nom. „jo, Dh. 34. vàsin, mfn. (= sa; fr. vàsa!) 
vāreti, vb. (caus. yvr; sa. vāra- , dwelling, living (in: loc., but mostly 
yati) !)to keep back, prevent, pro- | e. c.); f. %-vāsinī (Laükanagara-?) 
hibit (ace.); aor. 3. sg. vesi, 23,75; : 112,18; m. pl. ~ino (gama-%, the 
fut. 1. sg. wessami, 23,8: inf. etum, | villagers) 8,23-29; (Baranasi-°, the 
ib.; ger. ~wetva (mige) 8,6; pass. ' inhabitants of B.) 20,12; (nagara-") 
variyati, part. m. ~anto, 111,5. — | 58,21; gen. pl. «inum (do.) 58,21. 
2) to choose, ask for (acc.); aor. 3. : 62,9; comp. Kāsirattha-vāsi-manusso, 
sg. „esi (samikam) 10,5; ger. wetva, . 35,28. 
101,15; pp. vāritā, f. 101,20 (dārikā). : vaha, m. (== sa.) lit. ‘drawing, 
— 5) to cast lots (acc. salükam); | flowing’, ¿ e. 1) a draught-animal, a 
part, pass. variyamana, f. (salaka) | horse; 3) a cart-load, a certain mea» 
23,12. cp. vara. ! sure; ?) a current (of water), stream; 
vila, mfn. (sa. vyàda & vyāla) ; pl. ~a, Dh. 339 (“waves”), 
fierce, cruel; subst. m. a beast of vühana, n. (== sa.) any animal 
prey, a snake; pl. ~ā, 51,34 (cp. 52,6). | for riding (a horse, an elephant); any 
vala, m. (= sa.) the hair (esp. | vehicle or chariot; army or military 
of a horse’s tail); the tail (of a horse | force (cp. sa. vāhanā, f.); instr. wena, 
or other animals); *pahattha-kanna-°, | 98,2 (riding? cp. rathena, ib.); *ha- 
mfn. 16,21 (g. v.) cp. next ete. la-°, n. (v. h.); sa-vāhana, mfn. to- 


vi- 


gether with ones army, acc. m. wath 
(Maram) 104,5. Dh. 175. 

vi-, indecl. (== 
and nouns, implying ‘asunder, out, 
away, about’; ‘in various directions’ 


| 
| sāro) 108,13. 
: $0.) prefix to verbs ` 
flowing from the mouth; acc. f. 


(or *contrarily', often metaph. cp. vi- : 
vadati, vicinteti); with nouns it often , 


denotes ‘negation’ or ‘separation’ (opp. 


` thathkatha, mfn., 


sa-, cp. a-*), v. vikitla, vimala, vi- 
. Dh. 356. 


raga, visoka, etc.; with verbs (and 
their derivatives) it is sometimes used 
to denote ‘intensity’ (cp. vinassati, 
vipassati) or ‘opposition’ (cp. viva- 


have vy- (viy-) : vyaya (& vaya), 
viyühati, or more frequently v- (by 
elision & contraction), esp. 
other verbal prefixes beginning with 
a vowel : id 2 ati (v. vitinameti, 
vitisareti); vi -|- " (v. vapayati, 
cp. Spas vi -|- 
tthapita, voropeti, ES vi + ā (v. 
viyamati, cp. vyikaroti (viyākāsi), 
vyāpajjatī); vi + ud (v. vutthiti, 
etc.); vi -F upa (v. vüpasama); cp. 
vippa-, vippati- (sa. vi -|- pra, vi |- 
prati). 
vikala, m. 
evening; wrong time; 


(== sd.) afternoon, 
loc, we (kale 


232 


vi-ykshi) destroyed; m. ~o (jatisath- 


*vikkhelika, mfn., having saliva 
wan, 
67,30 (cp. kheļa). 
vigata, mfn. (= sa.) gone away; 
*vigatiecha, mfn. (v. iechā); *-ka- 
*0.khila, mfn., & 


*0-surá-pána, mfn. (v. hi); Cp. i 


vighüta, m. (= sa.) destruction, 


: ruin, pain; sa-vighata, mfn. “coupled 
, With ruin" (synon. sa-dukkha) 94,2. 
rati, vijhapeti) — Before vowels we . 


before . 


, wander about, 
ava (v. vava- ' 
. 62,13; 
acc. wantam, 


*vicakkhu-kamma, »., ‘making 
blind', the making one's sight wrong. 
perplexing, bewildering; dat, witya, 
(“in order to perplex him") 71,27. (cp. 
sa. vi-cakshus). 

viearati, vb. (sa. vi-year) to 
go away; pr. 2. Sg. 
8,16; 3. pl. „anti (fly about) 

73,35; part. m. ~anto, 5,6: 
73,6; f. ~anti, 20,4; 
sg. vicari, 17,19; fut. 1. sg. 


„ati 9 


aor. D. 


. wissimi, 17,16; cond. 1. sg. vicarissam 


* (unaugmented 


fut. 1048; ger. 


"mwAtvà, 25,22; caus. v. next. 


m, "in season and out of season") 


9,12; ""-bhojana, x. 81,24 (v. h.). 
vikāseti, vb. (caus. vi + kas, 

sa. vikāsayati) to cause to be opened 

(acc.); aor. 3. sg. «esi (hattharh, 


him know that she was unmarried, cp. 


Meyer, Dacakum. p. 98) 56,9. 


nest, homeless; pl. nā (dijā) 60,17 (v. 
kulāvaka). 


chirp, sing, warble (as birds); part. 
m. pl. „antā (sakunasaingha) 62,15. 
ing dishevelled hair; ace. 


67,30. 


f. eJ Am, 


(ukham). 41, 12, 56,39. 


control (acc.); pr. 


vicüreti, vb. (caus. vicarati; sa. 
vicarayati) ‘to cause to go about’. i. 
€. to arrange, manage, administer, 
3. sg. «eti (v. l. 

„esi, aor.) 55,20; part. f. «enti 
(kutumbath, “managing the property”) 


: 22,15. 


she opened her hand, in order to make | 


vicikicchati, vb. (sa. vicikitsati, 


. desid. vi-ycit) to be uncertain, to 
: doubt; pr. 3. sg. ati, 96,14. cp. next. 
*vikulāva, mfn., deprived of one's : 


vicikiccha, f. (sa. vicikitsi) 


' doubt; nom. «à (sattami senā Mā- 
| rassa) 103,28; *tinna-vicikiccha, mfn. 
vikūjati, ob. (sa. vi-ykūj) to | 


69,13 (v. h.). 


vicitta & vicitra, mfn. (sa. 


| vicitra) variegated, ornamented, beauti- 
vikesika, mfn. (sa. vikeca) hav- | 


' we, 18, 26; 


ful; satta-ratana-vicitta, mfn., loc. 


*vicitra-kathin, mfn. 


| eloquent, m. ~i, 109,9 (Kumārakas- 
*vikkhāleti, vb. (fr. vi- -Vkshal) ; 


to wash ‘off, rinse (acc.); gef. wetva | 


sapo, cp. Mil. p. 196,7). 
vicināti (or vicinati), vb. (sa. 
vi-yci) !) to search for, investigate, 


vikkhīņa, mfn. (sa. vikshina, pp. | inquire (acc.); imp. 2. pl. watha(nam) 


253 


Vijjhapeti 


73,24; part. m. ~anto, 19,25. 34,4; ! conquered; ». „ar (rattham) Dh. 


pl. «anta, 73,25; ger. vicinitvana, 
109,1. — °) to gather, collect, pick up, 
heap up (acc.); part. f. „antī (uka, 
q. v.) 46,26; ger. witva (samkaranh, 
to heap up) 84,25. 


vicinteti, vb. (sa. vicintayati) : 


to think, reflect; pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 
Dh. 286. 


l,25 (g. v.). 
vicunnita, mfx. (sa. vicürnita) 


329. — *) subst. n. a conquered coun- 
try, realm, kingdom; loc. we, 8,1. cp. 
nert. 
Fy ijitiivin, m(fn)., victorious; con- 
queror; ace. m. «inam, Dh. 422. 
vijeti (or vijayati), vb. (sa. vi- 
yji) to conquer, defeat, subdue («cc.) ; 


| fut. 8. sg. wessati (pathavim) Dh. 44; 
*vicunna, mf». pushed or hurt ` 
on all sides, only comp. w. cunna, | 


pp. vijita (g. v.) ep. vijaya. 
vijjati, vb. (pass. vindati; sa. 


_vidyate) to be found; to be, exist; 


crushed all over; ratha-vega-? (by the : 


course of the chariot) 60,10. 
vijaya, m. (—5a.)!) victory ; *-ante, 
loc. 60,25 (v. anta!, cp. Vejayanta, 


112,2: (but see corrections). — ?) Vi- 
jaya, m. nom. pr. of a prince, con- 
queror of Ceylon, «o (Lālavisayo, 
g. v.) 110,92, efc.; °-ppamukhii, pi. 
m. (v. pamukha). 

vijahüti (or eati), eb. (sa. vi- 
Vha) to leave, quit, abandon (acc.); 
inf. mitm (etā) 21,51; ger. nitvā, 
52,29. 

vijüta, mfn. (pp. vijāyati, g. v.). 

vijanati, vb. (sa. vi-/jūā) to 
know, understand, comprehend, per- 
ceive (thoroughly) (acc.); pr. 3. pl. 
eunti, Dh. 6; imp. 2. sg. «ali, 20,97. 
54,19. 54,96; part. gen. pl. vijanatam, 
Dh. 171 (*the wise"); Dh. 374 (ama- 
tam, “who know Nibbana”); a-vijāna- 


pr. 3. sg. «ati (attho na ~, “is of 
no use", w. instr.) 103,4. 104,51; 
3. pl. (med.) vijjare, 104,27. 113,27; 


' part. (med.) vijjamāna, 18,15 (saku- 
, nanan a-°-tthine, on a place where 
nom. pr.); laddha-°, mfn. victorious, - 


Ta --.. L——— a s 


there were no birds); loc. m. ~amhi 
(gimamhi, “where there is a village”) 
111,4. 

vijjā, f. (sa. vidya) knowledge, 
science; instr. waya, 108,9; anga- 
vijà, f. ‘knowledge of limbs’ 7. e. 
chiromantia, prognostication, loc, ~aya, 
48,16; dvandva comp. *°-sippa-kala- 
vedin, mfn. accomplished in science 


. and arts, m. nī, 113,5; "-carana. 


tain (saddhammam) 107,10 = Dh. 60; . 


pot. 5. 


sg. weyya, Db, 392; ger. a) 


viññaya, Dh. 186; b) vijaniya, 113,8; ` 
pp. viūūāta (g. v.) cp. viūūāņa, efe. 


vijayati. v. vijeti. 


vijayati, vb. (sa. vi-yjan) to ' 


bear, generate, produce (acc., rarely : 


in pass. sense: to be born); fut. 3. 
sg. wissati (dhitaram) 48,17; aor. 3. 


sg. vijayi (puttam) 7,29; part, med. 


f. ~ mana (etam) 24,25; ger. ~itvā, 
6,33; pp. vijāta, f. ~ (puttar, has 
born a son) 64,5; vijata-kale, after 
her delivery, 4818. ©. > 
vijita, 1) mfn. (= sa.; pp. vijeti) 


knowledge & behaviour, theory & prac- 
tice, Dh. 144 (sampanna-®, g. v.) cp. 
a-vijjā. 

vijjullata, f. (sa. vidyul-lata; 
cp. lati) a flash of lightning; 3,21. 

vijjotati, eb. (sa. vi-Vdyut) to 
flash forth, lighten; part. med. m. 
~ mano (springing forth [like light- 
ning|) 3,21; caus. vijjoteti, to illumi- 
nate, enlighten (acc.) 85, (sabbā 
disa; synon. pabhāseti (g. v.); the 
reading of B. pabhasati vijjotati seems 
to be preferable, on account of the 
foll. explanation of obhasate as hav- 
ing a causative meaning). 

vijjhati, vb. (sa. yvyadh) to 
pierce, wound or kill (as by arrows 
or lances,. etc.) (w. ace.); part. m. 
~anto (tar tundena) 4,22; imp. 3. 
pl. mantu, 6,5; ger. witvil, 6,19. 
37,6; pp. viddha (q. v.) cp. vedhin. 

*vijjhapeti, eb. (caus. *vijjhay- 


| ati, to burn out, go out, become ex- 


viūbāņa 


tinct; ykshai, v. jhayati!) to put out, 


extinguish (acc.); ger. a-vijjhāpetvā 


(aggim, without putting it out) 100,35; 
pp. ~ita, m. a-vijjhāpito (aggi) 100,2. 
viññana, n. (sa. vijūāna) con- 


sciousness; om. ~am, 94,10 (one of 


the 5 khandhas (g. v.)); 66,7 (origi- 
nating from samkhara); instr. wena, 
95,19; comp. °-paccaya (g. v.) 66,7; 
°-nirodha, m. (g. v.) 66,13; viññanañ- 
cayatana, z., v. ānaūca & ayatana; 
*0-samgaha, m. aggregation of con- 


sciousness, acc. eam (pacchima-?) ; 
99,26; — *apeta-°, mfn. (v. h.); *kà- | 
ya-9, *cakkhu-?, *mano-°, the con- | 


sciousness of body, eye, mind, 4. c. 
mental impressions through those or- 


gans, or: the sense of touch, the fa- | 


culty of sight, thought, 70,26-33. 98,1 


(dukkha-sahagatam kaya-viññanam ! 


uppajjati, a feeling of pain arises). 

vinnata, mfn. (pp. vijānāti; sa. 
vijiata) known, understood; *samma- 
viitiàta-samaya, mfn. perfectly know- 
ing the religious precepts, mM. MO, 
113,4. 

vinfapana, mfļīļn. (sa. vijna- 
pana) instructive; acc. f. anim (gi- 
ram) Dh. 408. 

viūiūāya, ger., v. vijānāti. 

viūūutā (& viūūūtā) f. (sa. vij- 
ñata) intelligence; acc. ~am, 27,22. 

viūūū, (fn). (sa. vijňa) intelli- 
gent, clever; m. ~U, Db. 65; m. pl. 
~ü (purisā) 90,29; Dh. 229. 

vitaps, m. (== sa.) a forked 
branch; °-antare (g. v.) 4,21 (in a 
fork of the tree). 

vitakka, m. (sa. vitarka) 1) de- 
liberation, consideration; *) doubt, 
uncertainty; *°-Qpasama, m. Dh. 350 
(v. upasama); "?-pamathita, mfn. 
Dh. 349 (“tossed about by doubts”). 

vitana, m. n. (= sa.) a canopy, 
baldachin; gen, ~assa (sumana-pat- 
ta-°, g. v.) 65,18; *°-samalamkata, 
mfn. 112,5 (v. h.). 

vitinna, mfn. (pp. vitārati, to 
cross, pass over; sa. vitirna) who has 
crossed or passed over, also metaph. 


234 


(only comp.) who scouts, or does not 
believe in,..; *°-paraloka, mfn. who 
does not believe in another world, gen. 
| wassa, 106,15 == Dh. 176; a-vitinna- 
kamkha, mfn. Dh. 141 (v. h.). 
vittinna, mfn. (once instead of 
| vitthiņņa = vitthata (& ~ta), pp. 
| vittharati, to spread out, extend, vi- 
| Vstr; sa. vistirna) broad, large; f. 
| nā (Gangà) 1,16. cp. next. 
vitthāra, m. (sa. vistāra) exten- 
| sion, diffuseness ; abl. „to (adv.) fully, 
in detail, 41,1 (kathesī). | 
vidatthi, f. (sa. vitasti) a certain 
measure of length, equal to 12 augulas 
i (inches, g. v.), a span; °-mattam, 87,11 
: (v. matta?) cp. yojana. 
| [vidati], vb. (sa. Yvid) to know, 
| understand (acc.); this present-forma- 
ļ 
| 


tion is only ficticious or made for ety- 
mological purpose; forms generally met 
with are : aor. 3. sg. vedi (avedi), 
Dh, 419. 423; 3. pl. (vidu); fut. 1. 
sg. (vedissami); ger. viditvà (etam 
atthath) 66,19; 70,12; grd. (veditabba 
&) vedaniya (g. v.); pp. vidita, known, 
understood; comp. *9-dhamma, mfn. 
“having penetrated the truth", m. ~0, 
69,12; yatha-°, mfn. (v. h.). — (caus. 
vedeti, vedayati, 3) to know, under- 
| stand; b) to feel, experience, suffer 
| (acc.); the caus. pass. vediyati [to be 
i known, to be felt] is also generally 
used in the same active sense). cp. 
veda, vedanà, vedayita, vedin, & 
vindati. 
vidu (& vidū), mf». (sa. vidvas 
| & vidus) knowiug, wise; m. sabba- 
| vidū ('ham asmi) Dh. 353. cp. viddasu. 
vidüra, mfn. (— sa.) very distant, 
| 


—— — — . ————— — O S — —Á— - o 


far; only used with the prefixes a-? 
& su-° (synon. dūra); a-vidure, loc. 
adv. not far away, near to (t. gen. or 
abl.), 48,31 (gharato) ; 95,21 (gamassa). 
cp. atidura. 

videsa, m. (sa. videca) a foreign 
country, far distant region; acc. ~at, 
27,25. 

Videha, m. (pl.) (— sa.) nom. 
pr. of a country and its inhabitants, in 


400 


the eastern North-India; “-rattha, n. 
the V, kingdom, loc. we, 44,19 (its 
capital was Mithila). 

viddasu, mfn. (sa. vidvas, cp. vidu 
above) wise, intelligent; a-viddasu, 


vinodeti 


vind, adv. & prp. (= sa.) without, 


| except; usually combined with acc. or 


mfn. Dh. 268 (v.h.); viddasu is a - 


curious formation, that looks as if it ' 


had been formed with the suffix -vas 
repeated (Tr.), cp. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 69 
& avidvā (gen. aviddasuno) MN. I, 
p. 311,7-as. 

viddha, mfn. !) (= sa.; pp. vij- 


jhati) pierced, wounded; m. ~o (sal- | 
lena) 92,7-10. — 2?) (sa. vidhra. ep. 


vyabhra) clear, pure; v. Morris, IPTS. 
'85, p. 52. | 


viddhamseti, vb. (sa. vidhvath- | 


sayati, caus. vi-/dlivams) to crush, 


destroy, disperse, split (acc.); imp. 2. | 


pl. „etha (tam bhusam viya) 58,2. 


' instr. (before or after), rarely with 


abl.; ~ mamsena na bhuiijati (he 
took no meal in which meat was want- 
ing) 6,1. | 

vināsa, m. (sa. vinaga) destruc- 
tion, ruin; annihilation, death; acc. 


i wah (pāpeti, lit. to cause to go to 


| destruction) 5,10. 27,12. 29,32; instr. 


vena, 55,7; *"-ppaccaya, m. cause of 
destruction, 34,24; *-mūla, n. id. 33,26. 
ep. next. ` 

vindsana, x. (sa. vinàgana) = 


, prec.; instr. ~ena (dhanassa), 52,5; 


| 
| 
| 
| 


vidhavā, f. (= sa.) a widow; ` 


nom. ~à (itthi) 31,15. 

vidhavati, vb. (sa. vi-ydhāv) to 
run; pr. 3. sg. «ati (ito c'ito ca) 36,3. 

vidhunàti, ob. (sa. vi-ydhü, 
dhunoti) to shake (acc.); ger. vidhū- 
nitvā (or vidhunitva) 16,6 (sarīram); 
18,20 (pakkhe, flapping the wings). 

vinaddha, mfn. (= sa.; pp. vi- 
ynah) covered all over; pl. m. nā, 
31,21. 

vinaya, m. (— sa.) discipline, 
esp. the rules of the Buddhist order; 
nom. ~0, 19,5; acc. eam, 109,15-25; 
loc. «e, 109,7. — Vinaya, m. & Vi- 
naya-pitaka, n., the first section of 
the Buddhist holy scriptures; dham- 
ma-vinaya-samgaha, m. the collection 
of Dhamma & Vinaya, 109,15; *vi- 
naya-dhara, mfn. knowing the V., pl. 
wa, 109,26; °-pitakam, acc, 102,17; 
-pitakena, instr. 102,16. Specimens 
p. 66—71,18; 74,16—77,15; 81,6-28; 82,15 
—84,24. | 

vinayam, part., v. vineti. 

vinassati, vb. (sa. vi-ynag) to 
perish; to be lost or forgotten; pr. 3. 
sg. eati, 110,4; imp. 3. pl. mantu, 
23,18; fut. 3. sg. ~wissati, 34,25; caus. 
vinaseti (q. v.), cp. vināsa, vinasana. 


a-vināsana, mfn. (g. v.). 

vināseti, vb. (caus. vinassati; sa. 
vinacayati) to cause to be destroyed 
or lost; to forget (acc.); pp. vinasita. 


; destroyed, n. „arti, 34,17. 


vinicchaya, m. (sa. vinigcaya) 


. decision, judgement; justice, procedure, 


—— M —À —— — ——— .— —À —- 
— — — À— — — I — - —— 


| 


court of justice; acc. wath (anusasati, 
g. v.) 42,97; loc. we, 59,6; instr. wena 
(dhamma-5, “discernment of the law") 
Dh. 144; %-atthāya, for the sake of 
litigation, 42,31 (cp. attha 1); *°-tthana, 
n. the place where court is held, ib. 

vinicchinati, vb. (sa. vi-nig-yci) 
to settle, decide (acc.); aor. 3. pi. 
^Animsu (vohārarn) 42,28; — pass. 
vinicchiyati; part. loc. pl. ~manesu 
(voharesu) 42,2. 

viniddisati, vb. (sa. vi-nir-ydiq) 
to point out, assign, distribute (acc.); 
aor. à. sg. viniddisi (tanduladi) 111,51. 

vinipāta, m. (= sa.) lit. ‘falling 
down’, state of suffering (esp. in a 
lower existence); *a-vinipata-dhamma, 
mfn. (v. h.) cp. dhamma*. 

*vinivarana-citta, mfn., whose 
mind is free from obstacles; acc. m. 
~am, 68,22. (cp. nivarana). 

vineti, vb. (sa. vi-V/ni) !) to lead 
away, remove, dispel (acc.); ger. vi- 
neyya (oghar, g. v.) 104,30; — ?) to 
train, educate (acc.) ; part. m. vinayam 
(savake) 104,8. 

vinodeti, vb. (caus. vi-ynud, sa. 
vinodayati) to drive away or out, to 


vindati 
send away, dismiss (acc.); pot. 3. 
aye (tasinam) Dh. 343. 

vindati, vb. (= sa.; vid, cp. 
. vidati) to find (acc.); pr. 3. sg. „ati 
(maggam) Dh. 57; pot. 1. pl. ~ema 
(muduri) 104,14; pass. vijjati (v. h.). 

vipatti, f. (— sa.) 
calamity; *°-pariyosana, mfn. having 
a dreary end, m. ~o (jivaloko) 47,16. 

*viparakkamati], vb. (sa. vi- 
para-\/kram) to strive, make efforts, 
exert oneself; only ger. viparakkamma 
(jhayantam) 108,3. 

vipassati, vb. (sa. vi-Vpag) to 
see (clearly), to understand, to be in- 
telligent; pr. 3. sg. ati (tanuk'ettha) 
88,29-33; part. gen. m. vipassato (dham- 
mam) Dh. 373. 

vipáka, m. (= sa.) ripening, ma- 
turing (esp. of actions, i. €. result, re- 
ward or punishment); tass'eva kam- 
massa vipāka-vasena, because that 
action had just been ripe (for punish- 
ment) 84,39; mom. ~o (kammānam) 
97,14; acc. wath, Dh. 67. 

vipiüteti, vb. (caus. vi-ypat, sa. 
vipatayati) to break, split (acc.); part. 
m. vipatayam (muddham) Dh. 72. 

vipula, mfn. (== sa.) large, great; 
n. wai (sukham) Dh. 27. 290. 

vippakara, m. (= sa.) ‘bad man- 
ner, improper proceeding; shame, dis- 
grace; outrage; acc, «arii, 65,8. 

vippakinna, mfn. (sa. vi-pra- 
kirna) strown all round about; acc. 
n. Am, 34,2. 

vippajahati, vb. (sa. vi-pra-y/hā) 
to give up, abandon (acc,); pot. 3. sg. 
„jaheyya (minam) Dh. 221; ger. 
vippahaya, Dh. 87. 

.vippatisarin, mfn. (sa. vipra- 
tisarin) filled with regret, repentant; 
m. ~i, 20,28; pl. ~ino (paccha-9, g. 
v.) 79,18. 

vippanattha, mfn. (sa. vipra- 


8g. 


nashta, ynag) perished, disappeared ;- 


instr. (or loc.) f. witya (nāvāya) 25,31. 

vippamuicati, vb. (sa.' vi-pra- 
ymuc) to liberate, send away, shake 
off, to liberate oneself from (acc.) ; pot. 


misfortune, | 


ee er ee — 


236 


2. pl. wetha (ragam) Dh. 377; pp. 
vippamutta, liberated, free from (ab/.); 
gen. m. ~assa, Dh. 90. 212 (piyato). 

vippayoga, m. (sa. viprayoga) 
separation (from : instr.); nom. «o 
(piyehi) 67,10. 

vippalapati, vb. (sa. vi-pra-ylap) 
to mutter, talk (wildly, in one's sleep); 
parl. f. pl. ~wantiyo, 65.6. 67,30. 

vippaviddha, mfn. (sa. vipra- 
viddha, yvyadh) thrown away, scat- 
tered about; °-nana-kunapa-bharita, 
mfn. filled with various dead bodies 
scattered about, 73. ~am (amakasusa- 
nai) 65,10. 

*vippasanna, mfn. (pp. fr. next) 
clear, serene, placid; » ~o (yathapi 
rabado) Dh. 82; acc. ari (candaih 
va) Dh. 413; instr. n. wena (cetasa) 
Dh. 79. 

*vippasidati, vb. (sa. *vi-pra- 
Vsad) to be thoroughly clear or tran- 
quil ; pr. 3. pl. „anti (panditā) Dh. 82. 

vippahāya. ger., v. vippajahāti. 

vipphandita, mfn. (pp. vi-Vspand) 
trembling, moving unsteadily ; n. subst. 
«vāli, agitation, distortion, perversion 
(?); *ditthi-°, n. uncertainty in views, 
or confusion on account of false views. 
94.1. 

Vibhanga, m. (= sa.) lit. ‘divi- 
sion’, or ‘explanation’, nom, pr. 1) of 
a Pāli work, the 2. part of the Abhi- 
dhamma-pitaka; nom. ~o, 102,12; — 
2) of the 2. section of Vinaya-pitaka. 

vibhajati, vb. (sa. vi-ybhaj) ') 
to divide, distribute (acc. & gen.); 
ger. ~itva, 41,19; pp. vibhatta (g. v.); 


| — ?)to explain (cp. next). 


vibhajjana, x. (wrong spelling 
of vibhajana, — sa.) ‘separation’, di- 
stinction, explanation; loc. ~wamhi, 
109,10. (cp. pavibhajati). 

vibhatta, mfn. (pp. vibhajati; 
sa. vibhakta) divided, distributed; 
sama-vibhattam, x. an equal part, 
41,18; su-°, well arranged, 110,14. 

vibhava, m. (= sa.) 4) ‘develop- 
ment’, prosperity, power, wealth; Joc. 
~e, 48,10; comp. *°-tanha, f. thirst 


237 


for prosperity, 67,14; dvandva comp. 
siri-°, majesty and power, 47,39 (ace. 
^am); *asitikoti-°, mfn. (v. h.). — 
*) (as opp. to bhava) loss, destruction; 
dat, ~aya, Dh. 282, 

vibhūti, f. (= sa.) abundance, 
splendour; *°-sampanna, mfn. brilliant, 
61,4 (mala-gandha-°, with garlands 
and perfumes), 

vibhusana, x. (sa. vibhūshaņa) 


ornament, decoration; C-tthana, x. | 


81,25 (v. thaina’), | 
vibhüsita, mfn. (sa. vibhūshita) 


adorned, decorated; f. nā (sabbalam- | 


kàra-?) 61,7. 

vimati, f. (== sa.) doubt, uncer- 
tainty; nom. ~i, 79,17. 

vimala, mfn. (== su.) spotless, 


clean, bright; acc. m. „am, Dh. 413. ` 


vimana, n. (= sa.) seat, throne; 
place, abode; house, mansion, palace; 
dec. ~am, 29,15; abl. wii, 20,1; loc. 


ee (phalika-°, crystal-palace) 23,15; ` 


23,22-25 (rajata-°, mani-", kanaka-9, 
(. V.); deva-9, the palace of the gods, 
or a divine chariot (or throne), 68,6 
(*-sadisam rathaii); Tusita-°, n. 87,31 
(v. l., cp. corrections), 

vimuccati, vb. (pass. vi-y/ muc) 
to become free, to be delivered (esp. 


from the bonds of existence, abi); | 


pr. 8. sg. „ati (viraga) 71,4; aor. 
3. sg. vimucci (āsavehi) 69,231; 3. pi. 
Asu, 71,18; — pp. vimutta, mfn, 
released, delivered; m. ~o (anupada, 
v. upadiyati) 94,12; 71,5 (vimutt- 
amhi); Dh. 353 (w. loc. tanhakkhaye, 
"free through the destruction of thirst"); 
loc. wasmim (ñanam hoti, when de- 
livered, he comprehends that he has 
become free) 71,4; n. ~ar (cittam) 
69,36. 105,2; comp. *9-citta, mfn. one 
whose mind has been delivered, 94,13; 
*su-vimutta-citta, mfn. id. Dh. 20; 
*0_manasa, mfn. id. Dh. 348. cy. 
next etc. 

vimutti, f. (sa. vimukti) libera- 
tion, emancipation (Nibbana); %-sukha, 
n. the bliss of emancipation, 66,4. 


viraga 


vimokha, m. (sa. vimoksha) = 
| prec. ; nom. ~o (cetaso), 80,35. Dh. 92. 
| viy-?, cp. vy-0. 
| viya, indecl = iva (g. v.): 2,1. 
I 


—— 
—— 


3,7. 5,98, 111,6, e£c.; sometimes limi- 
ting the predicate of a clause: aham 
viya sukaramukho ahosi, 86,1; do. 
| w. negation : kappanii viya na hoti 
| (scarcely any) 65,22; cp. kassakā viya 
hotha, 31,1. 

viyakiisi, aor. v. vyākaroti. 

' viyuhati, vb. (sa. vi-/ūh) to re- 
| move (ace); ger. ~itvit (vālikan) 
14,35; (paisui) 40,29 (ep. apabbū- 
hati). 

Viraja, mfn. (== sa.) free from 
dust or impurity, pure, blameless: 
. ace, m. am. 68,26. Dh, 386, 412. 
virajjati, eb. (sa. vi-yraīj) to 
. change disposition or affection, to be- 
| come free from passion (or from plea- 
sure); pr. 3. Sg. «ati, 71,4; — pp. 
| viratta, mfn. having aversion to (doc.); 
m. sO (kāmesu) 65,9; *°-miinasa, 
mfn. id. 64,19 (gen. wassa (kilesesu)); 
*°-cittata, f. aversion to (loc.), instr. 
cuya (kilesesu) 64,32. cp. virāga. 
| viramati, eb. (sa. vi-yram) to 
give up, abstain from, leave off (abl.); 
aor. 3. pl. insu. (pānātipātā) 17,31. 
cp. veramani. 

virava, m. (= sa.) roaring, cry- 
ing; a roar; acc. eam (maha-°) 40,21; 
(eka-°) 60,11 (viravanti). 

viravati, vb. (sa. vi-yru) to roar, 
cry; pr. 3. pl. „anti (w. acc. eka- 
viravan) 60,11; part. m. ~anto (ga- 
drabharavena, “braying like an ass") 
118,10; 11,18; f. ~anti, 53,3; aor. 
3, 8g. viravi, 40,21, 55,15; 3. pl. withsu, 
53,31; ger. ~itvā (ti adini) 73,30. 

virāga, m. (= sa.) lit. ‘the being 
decoloured’, change of colour, play of 
colours (or simply : colour); most fre- 
quently metaph. of aversion, indiffe- 
rence: (to pleasures), absence of pas- 
sion; nom. ~o (settho dhammanam) 
Dh. 273; dat. ~āya (sarhvattati), 
| 93,8; abl. ~a (by absence of passion) 

71,14. 94,12; — in the comp. asesa- 


— ——MM—M— — a. 


viriccati 


virāga-nirodha, m. complete and track- 
less destruction, 66,12 (avijjāya) vi- 
rīga seems to be adj. ‘without colour’ 
(i. e. leaving no track, cp. raga); 
differently Rhys Davids: “the destruc- 
tion of ignorance, which consists in 
the complete absence of lust”. 
viriccati, vb. (sa. vi-yric, pass. 
viricyate; it seems to be pass. of the 
caus, vireceti, sa. virecayati, to purge) 
to be purged; part, m. ~mano, 78,33. 
viriya, n. (sa. virya) strength, 
power, energy; nom. „am, 103,16; 


Dh. 112 (viryam); acc. wath (karoti, | 


to persevere) 42,11-13; kata-". mfn. 
persevering, energetic, gen. ~assa, 
42,15; *araddha-°, mfn. id. 108,19. 
Dh. 8 (%-vīriyam), opp. hīna-vīriya, 
mfn. weak, Dh. 7. 112; 9-phala, x. 
result of energy, 42,18, "?-bala, n. 


perseverance, instr. «ena, 42,11. cp. | 


vira, virya. 

virujjhati, vb. (pass. vi-yrudh) 
to be opposed, to be at variauce with, 
contend against (insir.; pr. 3. sg. 
no eati (is patient) Dh. 95; pp., v. 
next etc. 

viruddha, mfn. (pp. fr. last; = 
sa.) opposite, hostile, intolerant; Joc. 
pl. „esu, Dh. 406; a-viruddha, mfn. 
(v. h.). 

virodha, m. Sa.) opposition, 
contradiction; acc. „am  (dassayi, 
“pointed out in what respect they were 
fallacious") 113,15. 

vilàsa, m. (= sa.) sport, play, 
routine; coquetry, dalliance; grace, 
charm, beauty; insir. pl. „ehi (at 
the end of a dvandva-comp.) 21,13; 
uttama-yobbana-vilàsa-matta, mfn., 
gen. f. pl. «anum, 47,14 (“drunken 
with the pride of their glorious youth"), 

vilimpati, eb. (sa. vi-ylip) to 
smear, anoint (acc.), anoint oneself, 
perfume oneself (sometimes with acc. 
of the name of the perfume); ger. 
„itvā (sakalasariram) 57,29; (gan- 
dhe, acc. pl.) 41,5; part. gên. ~an- 
tassa. (without obj.) 53,26; — caus. TI. 
*vilimpapeti, to cause to be anointed 


— 
c ——— 


| 
i 
i 


238 


or perfumed; ger. „etvā (mam gan- 
dhehi) 33,3. cp. vilepana. 
vilumpati, vb. (sa. vi-/lup) to 
rob, plunder (acc.); ger. ~witva (ma- 
nusse), 30,30; — caus. II. *vilumpa- 
peti, to let plunder; aor. 3. sg. „esi 
(without obj.) 39,6. | 
vilepana, x. (= sa.) anointing; 
ointment, perfume; nom. ~am (lohi- 
ta-candana-°, g. v.) 23,55; dvandva- 
comp. mālā-gandha-', 78,11. 81,55. 
viloma, mfn. (= sa.) lit. ‘against 
the hair’, contrary, wrong; n. pl. 
eüni (subst.) faults,  perversities, 
Dh. 50. 
vivata, mfn. (pp. vivarati; sa. vi- 
vrta, yvr) uncovered, open; f. wa 
(opp. channa) 104,25; *-mukha, mfn. 


| with open mouth; f. pl. nā, 65,7, 


mukhavivate, loc. abs, 3,17. cp. nezt. 
vivatta, mfn. (sa. vivrtta) turned 


| round or away. opened, developed; 


—————— —ÓMMÀ—————— 


*vivatta-cchadda, m. ‘dispeller of de- 
lusion’, an epithet of a Buddha, 61,34; 
this word seems to be sa. *vivrtta- 
chadman, one who has rolled away 
the cloud or veil (i. e. the delusion of 
this world?), but we find it spelt in 
different ways : vivata- (vivatta-, vi- 
vatta-) cchadda (-cchada, -echadana, 
-ccheda), so that it very well might 
represent sa. *vivarta-chada, or 9-che- 
da, cp. sa. vivarta & Childers s. v. 
vivadati, vb. (sa. vi-yvad) to 
contradict, contest; dispute, quarrel; 
part. med. pl. ~ mana, 101,38. 
vivara, m. n. (= sa.) aperture, 
breach, fissure, hole, cleft; fault; acc. 
ean (pabbatanam) Dh. 127; paka- 
ra- (of a wall) 90,34; cp. 91,26. 
vivarati, vb. (sa. vi-yvr) to open, 
reveal (acc.); pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (pa- 
ticchannam) 69,16; aor. 3. sg. vivari 
(mukham) 3,18; (dvaram) 65,28; 3, 
pl. ^isu, 68,3; ger. witva, 3,16; 
pp. vivata, g. v. cp. vivara. 
vivàha, m. (= sa.) marriage; 
acc. ~am (karoti, to marry a wife) 
101,17 (cp. avaha). 
vivieca, ger. & grd. (fr. vi-yvic, 


239 


to separate) in the comp. *vivicca- | 
sayana, x. sleeping alone, Dh. 271 : 18,15; 3. pl. „anti, 8,1; part. m. a- 


(instr. wena). cp. viveka. 

vividha, mfn. (— sa.) manifold, 
various; n. ~am, 111,32. 

viveka, m. (— sa.) separation, 
seclusion, solitude; acc, ~am, Dh. 75; 
loc. ne, Dh. 87. 

visa, m. ^. (sa. visha) poison, 


venom; dec, eai (bhatte pakkhipi- - 


tvā) 33,30; Dh, 123; sa-visa, mfn. 


poisoned, poisonous; instr, wena (sal- . 


lena) 92,7. cp. visattika. 


visamyutta (visaūūūutta), mfn. ` 


(sa. visamyukta) detached, delivered 
(from : instr. or e. c.); acc. m. «am, 


Dh. 385. 397. 402. 410; 417 (sabba- : 
to become pure; pr. 3. sg. māti, Dh. 


yoga-"). cp. samyoga. 

*visamkhara-gata, mfn., who 
is free from predispositions (samkhara, 
q. .), approaching Nībbānu; x. „ari 
(cittam) Dh. 154. 

*visamkhita, mfn. (pp. visam- 
kharoti, to take to pieces; sa. *vi- 
sam-ykr) taken asunder; n. «an 
(gahakūtam) Dh. 154. 

visaūūutta, v. visamyutta. 


vissa 


tivacanam datum] 90,26; 2. sg. ~āmi, 


' visahanto (gantum, not venturing to 


go, i. €. to enter on that expedition) 
39,4. 
visarada, mfn. (sa. vicārada) 
wise, skilled or versed in; bold, con- 
fident; m. ~o (devindo) 110,26; (sab- 
ba-vada-°) 113,4. cp. vesarajja. 
visidati, vb. (sa. vi-ysad) to 
sink down, be immersed in; to despond, 
despair; pr. 3. pl. „anti, Dh. 171. 
*visīveti, vb. (caus. fr. sa. "vi 
-- Veyai) to remove cold, thaw up, 
warm oneself; ger. ~etva, 100,25. cp. 
Morris, JPTS. '84. p. 72. 
visujjhati. ob. (sa. vi-yqudh) 


165; caus. visodheti (q.v.) cp. next. 
visuddhi, f. (= sa.) purification, 
purity, holiness; dat. gen. ~iya (sat- 


 tünam) 90,17; (maggo) 107,3. Dh. 


visattha, mfn. (sa. visrshta) set | 


free, released; 


"OC matta, mfn. (v. | 


matta?2>), m. ~o (at the moment he ` 
' visüka, » a puppet-show of heresy, 

*visattika, f. (prob. fr. visatta, ' 
su. vi-shakta, ysaūj, adhering to, . 
extended over, w. loc.), desire, lust, . 
longing for (often w. loc. loke and | 
coordinate with tanha (q. v.), to which : 
, emphatically; 114,23. Dh. 22. 
in the sense of “poisonous” on account - 


was set free) 17,20. 


it sometimes has been taken as adj. 


of its resemblance to visa); nom. nā 
(jālinī ~ taņhā) Dh. 180; (jammi 
tanha loke x) 107,31 = Dh. 335. 

visada, mfn. (sa. vigada) clear, 
pure, spotless; even, smooth; m. ^0, 
62,29. | 

visaya, m. (sa, vishaya) sphere, 
dominion, country; Lala-°, m. 110,22 
(v. h.). 

visahati, vb. (sà. vi-Vsah) to be 
able or capable to; to dare, venture 


274-77; *kamma-®, f. (g. v.). — *Vi- 
suddhi-magga, m. nom. pr. of a work 
of Buddhaghosa (lit. ‘way of purity’); 
acc. —am, 114,12. 

*visūka, x. (fr. sa. *vi-Vsüc, or 
vicoka, cp. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 29, 
Tr. PM, 78,33) show, spectacle, play; 
only in the foll. two comp. ; *ditthi- 


— 


94,1; *visūka-dassana, n. seeing spec- 
tacles, abl. wa, 81,24. cp. visoka, mfn. 

visesa, m. (sa. vicesha) difference, 
species; distinction, excellence; abl. 
(adv.) visesato, especially, distinctively, 


visoka, mfn. (sa. vigoka) free from 
sorrow; gen. m. ~wassa, Dh. 90. cp. 
visuka, %. 

visodheti, vb. (caus. visujjhati; 


"sa. vigodhayati) to purify, keep clear 


(w. inf.); pr. 8. sg. mati [scil. pa- ' 


(acc.); pot. 3. sg. ^aye, Dh. 165. 
281, 289. 
visoseti, vb. (caus. vi-yqush, 


vigoshayati) to make dry, dry up 
(acc.); pot. 3. sg. waye (nadīnari 
sotāni) 103,18; pp. visosita, dried up, 
f. ~ā (tanha) 108,13. ep. sussati. 
vissa, mfn. (sa. vigva?) whole, 


vissajjana 240 


entire; acc. m. «am (dhammam) | (v. h.) 30,12; Dh. 272 (metri causa 
106,5 = Dh. 266; (vissa in the sense | vissāsa-māpādi); comp. *°-parama 
of sa, vigva seems not to occur else- | ati, Dh. 204 (“trust is the best of 
where in Pali; the Comm, Dhpd. 1855. x relationships”, cp. parama & labha 
p. 379 takes it apparently — sa. visra, | above). | | 
mfn. (smelling like raw meat), and ° vissāsika, mfn. (sa. vicvisika) 
explains it by visama, vissa-gandha, | +) confident, trustful; 2) intimate, fa- 
which occurs sometimes in the com- | miliar, confidant; m. ~o (“confidential 
mentaries, e, g. Vin. 11], 288,2). ` adviser”) 38,22. 

vissajjana, x. (sa. visarjana) | vahaiifiati, vb. (pass. vi-yhan) 
sending forth, abandoning, giving up; | to be anxious or frightened, to be af- 
nom. acc, «am, 4,1; 47,4 (imassa | flicted or grieved, mourn; pr. 3. sg. 
~am karimi, “I have caused him to | «ati, 34,20. Dh. 15. 62; part. m. a- 
leave me"). vihaüiiamano (“without complaint") 

*vissajjapeti, vb. (caus. II. | 78,26. | 
vissajjati) to send, throw, thrust away viharati, vb. (sa. vi-ybr) to dwell, 
(acc.); aor. 3. sg. „esi, 55,17; ger. | stay, live; pr. 3. sg. mati, 2,19. 66,2. 
~etvā, 23,9. 51,21 (hattham). 75,6. 84,8 (vihāre); 1. pl. ~āma, Dh. 

vissajjeti, vb. (caus. vissajjati, | 197; part. m. ~anto, 28,2; gen. ~ato, 
su. visarjayati, vi-ysrj) 1) to emit, | 103,23; imp. 3. sg. „vatu, 74,22; ger. 
send (forth, away); to let go, set at | witva, 70,%0; fut. 2. sg. vihahisi (su- 
liberty (acc.); pr. 3. pl. enti (mā- | khai) Dh. 379 (if not better from 
taram) 32,20; imp. 2. sg. „ehi (mam | vijahati (sa. vi-yhà), cp. Kuhn, Beitr. 
sarasmim, put into) 5,16; pot. 1. sg. | p. 116). cp. meat & saddhi-viharika. 
weyyam, 4,9; aor. 3. sg. «esi, 4,17. vihāra, m. (= sa.) !) passing 
31,19; 36,24 (dadhighatath, overturned); | the time agreeably, pleasure; sukha- 
3. pl. esum, 32,23; fut. 3. sg. ~es- Ļvihāra, happiness, 74,22 (dittha-dham- 
sati, 4,32; ger. wetva, 4,16. 59,14; 


| ma-°, g. v.); brahma-9, v. h. — °) 
61,6 (satasahassāni, dispensing); pp. | pleasure-ground, place of recreation, 
vissajjita, m. pl. à (macchā) 4,27. | home, esp. a Buddhist monastery or 
— °) to explain, answer (a question, | cloister; nom. ~o, 84,8; ~ar, 22,20. 
acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti (paüham pu- | 114,5; loc. we, 84,7; Aggālava-', 
ttho) 90,26; part. m. mento, 8534; | Maha-°, nom. pr. (g. v.). 
gen. f. ~wentiya, 86,32; ger. netvā vihārin, mfn. (= sa.) dwelling, 
(tam attham) 85,24; pp. vissajjita, | living, delighting in; mostly e. c., v. 
m. ~o (paīīho) 88,12; x. pl. nāni, | *a-ppamada-?, *metti-°, *sadhu-°, 
98,33. 


mfn. Dh. 57. 329. 368. 
vissattha, mfn. (pp. vissajjati — vihahiti, fut., v. viharati (& vi- 
vissajjeti; sa. visrshta) sent away, 


jahati). 
loosed, released; m. ~0, 4,23 (put down). vihimsati, vb. (sa. vi-\/hims) to 
vissamati, vb. (sa. vi-yĢram) | injure, hurt (acc); pr. 3. sg. ati 
to rest, repose; ger. ~itva, 9,24; pp. | (bhutàni dandena) Dh. 131. cp. nezt. 
vissamita, comp. tesam °-kale, 21,7 | vihetheti, vb. (sa. vi-Vheth) to 
("taking their rest"). | annoy, injure, insult (acc.); part. m. 
vissasati, eb. (sa. vi-yĢvas) to | „ayanto, Dh. 184 (param); ger. 
trust or confide in (loc. (or gen., acc.)); | ~wetva, 78,6; pass. fut. 3. sg. vihe- 
pot. 3. sg. vissase (tasu) 51,4. cp. next. | thiyissati (nagena) 76,31; pp. ~ita, 
vissāsa, m. (sa. vigvāda) trust, | pl. mā, 73,5 (vihethit’ attha). [This 
confidence; acc. ~am (achinditvā, "in | verb is confounded with the synon. 
unbroken amity”) 13,7; ~am āpajjati | verb viheseti, which seems to be iden- 


€—————————————— 


n 


241 


tical with sa. vibhishayati or vihim- 
sayati, Tr.| cp. F. W. Thomas, JRAS. 
'04. p. 749. 

vici, f. (= sa.) a wave; acc. pl. 
«ci, 28,7. 

vīnā, f. (= sa.) a certain stringed 
instrument, a lute; nom. «à, 104,17; 
ace. ~am, 19,32. 50,10. 67,29. 

vīta, mfn. (pp. vi-yi; = sa.) gone 
away; very frequently at the beginning 
of comp. free from, without; 
9.tanha, mfn. Dh. 351 (v. tanha); 
*0.dosa, mfn. Dh. 357 (v. dosa*); 
*vita-ddara, mfn. fearless, Dh. 385 
(fr. dara, g. v., cp. nid-dara); ?-mala, 
mfn, 68,26 (v. h.); *°-moha, mfn. Dh. 
358 (v. h.). 

*vītināmeti, wb. (sa. *vi-ati- 
ynam) to spend time, pass away time 
(acc.); ger. „etvā (divasam) 22,25. 

vītisāreti, vb. (caus. vi-ati-Vsr; 
Buddh. sa. vyatisirayati) to finish 
(Comm, — pariyosapeti); only in the 
usual phrase : sammodaniyam kathari 
siraniyam ~, to exchange the usual 
ceremonious greetings, 89,21 (ger. ~e- 
tvā); the same phrase is put into metre 
Sn. v. 419 (cp. Jat. IV, 98,18). 

vithi, f. (= sa.) a row; a street, 
road, passage; loc. ~iyam (antara-?, 
q. v.) 39,6; loc. pl. „īsu (nagara-?) 
73,29; *?-sabhaga, m. a neighbour (liv- 
ing in the same street), gen. pl. e ánam, 
7,7. 

vimamsati, vb. (sometimes spelt 
vi-V; sa. vi-Vmrg, but perhaps con- 
founded with mīmāmsate) to investi- 
gate, examine, esp, to put to the test 
(acc.); pr. 1. sg. ~ami (nam) 3,6; 
part. m. ~anto, 57,7; imp. 2. pl. 
~watha, 58,4; pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (mam 
dānena) 16,13; fut. 1. sg. ~issami, 
18,23. 15,9; inf. ~itum, 114,8; ger. 
witva, 58,15. cp. next. [The gramma- 
rians derive this verb from desider. 
Vman, cp. Childers & Sénart, Kacc. 
p. 232 (434), Pischel, Gramm. § 251; 
on account of its signification (it has 
usually a personal object) I think it 
is preferable, as do Trenckner & Faus- 


Pali Glossarv. 


vutthahati 


ball (5 Jūt. p. 37), to derive it from 
vi-mrc?, although ymr; with other 
prp. becomes masati.] 

vimamsana, x. (sa. vimarcana, 
but v. above) trying, testing; comp. 
C-atthaya, 16,12; ?-atthaih, 57,93 (cp. 
attha '). 

vira, m. (= sa.) a brave or emi- 
nent man, hero; acc. ~am, Dh. 418; 
°Buddha-®, m. (q. v.) ; "-sena, m. nom. 
pr., name of a, man, 97,1. cp. newt, 
vera & verin. 

viriya, 9X, v. viriya. 

visam, indecl. (& visati or "th, 
nom. acc. pl. ; sa. vimqati (viritgat)) mum. 
‘20’; ~ satasahassam, 20,00,000, 23,3. 

visatima, mfn. (sa. vithgatama) 
twentieth; m. ~o (vaggo) Dh. ch. XX; 
ekuna- g. v. 

vuccati, vb. (puss.\/vac, sa. ucyate) 
to be said, told, spoken (of or to); to 
be requested; to be called or named; 
pr. 3. 8g. eati (is called): 25,31. 82,14. 
106,7. 109,11; (is spoken of) 96,5; 3. 
pl. „anti (are called) 32,17; pp. vutta 
(v. below). From this a number of ac- 
tive forms have been preserved, but 
the active present tense is taken from 
the suppletive verb vadati (*vadeti) 
Q. 9.5 aor. *) avaca, 3. sg. 51,15. 64,5; 
2. sg. 22,18 (mā math kiūci x); ava- 
cam, 1. sg. 55,6; — P) avoca, 3. sg. 
2,5 (ima gāthā); 68,1: (etad); 76,2 
(Devadattam); 110,21; 2. sg. voca 
(unaugmented after mà) Dh. 133; 3. 
pl. avocum, 76,23; [uor. €d) avacāsi, 
avocasi are also found; fut. vakkhā- 
mi|; inf. vattum, 87,21. 103,15; ger. 
vatvā, 2,8. 3,7 efc. ; a-vatva; 44,5 (alter- 
nating with vutte, abs. loc.); grd. 
vattabba, m. ~o (bhikkhūhi, to be 
spoken to) 79,15; 2. „am, 88,5; 88,6 
(siya); caus. vaceti (q. v.) cp. va- 
cana, vaca, etc. 

vutthahati & vutthati, vb. (sa. 
vi-ud-ysthā) to rise, arise, get up 
(from, abl.); aor. 3. sg. vutthasi, 111,5; 
ger. *) vutthaya (sayanā) 41,27. 65,14; 
b) vutthahitva, 80,4; pp. vutthita, doc. 
M. we, 82,22. cp. next. 


ta 


vutthana 


vutthāna, x. (sa. vyutthana) ri- 
sing up; *gabbha-9, x. 62,21 (v. h.). 

vutthi, f. (sa. vrshti) rain; nom. 
ei, 106,31 = Dh. 14; acc. ^im, 104,38. 

vuddha, mfn. (pp. vaddhati, cp. 
vaddha*; su. vrddha) grown, old; m. 
~O, 74,21. 

vutta, mfn. (pp. vuccati; sa. ukta) 
said, told, spoken; addressed, answered, 
requested, proposed; m. ~o, 118,12; 
(samāno, being requested) 98,16; f. 
e, 31,32. 111,31; ». eam (tena ~, 
on that account it is said) 51,99; (idam) 
84,28; ~am eam (“each of bis pro- 
positions") 113,13; loc, abs. ~e (ti ~, 
evam ~) 1,19. 79,20, etc.; alternating 
with vatvā (ger.) 44,5; m. pl. nā, 
33,9. 73,23; comp. *vutta-matta, mfn. 
(v. matta*?5); *hettha-vutta-? (q. v.) 
63,22 (°-nayen’eva, v. naya). 

*vuttari-bhāveti, v. uttari-°. 

vutti, f. (sa. vrtti) mode of lite, 
conduct, behaviour; *a-cchidda-°, mfn. 
Dh. 229; *patisanthara-°, mfn. Dh. 
376 (v. h.). 

vuddha, mfn. (pp. vaddhati) — 
vuddha & vaddha (q. v.). 

vuddhi, f. (sa. vrddhi) growth, 
increase; acc. eim, 2,18. 18,3. (cy. 
vaddhi). 

vusita, mfn. (pp. vasati; sa. ushita) 
lived, past, completed; 72. „arh (brah- 
macariyam) 71,15. 

vüpasama, m. (sa. vyupacama) 
cessation, pacification; «o, 80,29. 

ve, indecl. (sa. vai) a particle of 
. affirmation : ‘indeed’, ‘certainly’; 106,7 
— Dh. 267; Dh. 234; 108,6 (ve mā); 
na ve, 55,1; inserted in the relative 
sentence : yo ve, 106,33 — Dh. 222. 
cp. have. 

*vekanda, m.(?), a kind of arrow; 
ace. alit, 92,23 (not found elsewhere). 

vega, m. (= sa.) haste, speed, 
quickness, rapidity; instr. (adv.) wena 
(gantvā) 7,4; 60,6; comp. asani-', 12,22; 
vāta-/, 12,30; ratha-vega~®, 60,10. 

Vejayanta, m. (sa. Vaiļayanta) 
nom. pr. of the palace of Sakka (In- 
dra); nom. eo, 60,25 (vijayante utthi- 


242 


tattā); 9-pàsàdo, 60,24; ""-ratha, m. 
Sakka's chariot (chariot of victory) 
60,4 (instr. wena). 

vethita, mfn. (pp. vetheti, Vvesht; 
sa. veshtita) enveloped, covered; m. 
~0 (samukha-9, g. v.) 61,3. 

vetana, n. (= sa.) hire, wages; 
salary, payment; subsistence, livelihood, 
earning; acc. ~am, 76,12; (~ khan- 
detvā, q.v.) 19,55; *atta-vetana-bhata, 
mfn. 105,5 (v. attan). 

vetta, m. x. (sa. vetra) a reed, 
stick, staff; %-agga, n. the point of a 
reed, 62,17 (susedita-°, g. v.). 

veda, m. (= sa.) knowledge, per- 
ception, emotion, pleasure; pl. the 
(three) Vedas (viz. Irubbeda, Yajub- 
beda, Sāmaveda); gen. pl. «auam 
(tiņņam) 16,22; loc. pl. wesu (tisu) 
113,3. 

vedanā, f. (= sa.) !) feeling, 
sensation (in the dogmatics : the second 
of the five khandha, g. v.); nom. ~a, 
66,8 (phassa-paccaya); 94,9. 95,16; 
instr, ~aya, 95,5; gen. māja, 94,9; 
°-nirodha, m. 66,15 (g. v.) ; *°-saihkha- 
vimutta, mfn. “released trom what is 
styled sensation", 95,17; pl. tisso ve- 

and, the three perceptions (viz. duk- 
kha, sukhā, adukkha-m-asukha) 82,9; 
uttama-vedanam (acc. sg.) 103,23, 
seems to be the last of those three, — 
2) pain, suffering; acc. ~am, 80,34; 
pl. ~ā (kharā) 13,12; (pabalha) 78,24; 
comp.*vedanatta, mfn. 50,20 (v. atta !) ; 
*0.matta, mfn. “maddened with the 
pain", m. <o, 24,7; acc. eam, 30,15. 

vedaniya, mfn. (grd. yvid; sa. 
vedaniya) to be known, intelligible; 
*pandita-?, mfn, 94,26 (v. h.). 

Vedabbha, m(fn). (sa. Vaidar- 
bha) relating to the country Vidarbha; 
acc, m. «am (mantar, name of a 
certain spell) 32,9; °-brahmana, m. 
a Brahman knowing that spell, 32,16, 
etc.; 34,21 (Vedabbham); — °-jataka, 
n. 32,1. 

*vedayita, m. (fr. vedeti, v. [vi- 
dati]) sensation; perception of the sen- 
ses, impression om tbe senses; wall, 


243 


=o ap m= 


70,27; saūiā-vedayita-nirodha, m. 
80,10 (4. v.). 


*vedalla, ». (sa. *vaidalya; the | 


native grammariaus derive it from veda 
with the suffix -lla) one of the nine 
divisions of Buddha's doctrine (navaii- 
gam Satthu-sasanam); „am, 109,54 
(jātak”-abbhuta-0). 

vedi, aor., v. [vidati]. 

vedin, mfn. (— sa.) knowing, 
kala-°) 113,5. 

vediyati, vedeti, v. [vidati]. 

vedhin, mfn. (sa. vedhin & vya- 


dhin) piercing, perforating; *vala-®, | 


mfn. (g. v.). 

vema, m. (= sa.) a loom; ace. 
eam, 89,7; *°-koti, f. ib. (v. h.). 

*vemajjha, n. (cp. sa. vimadhya) 
the middle, or more correctly : the in- 
terior of anything between its centre 
and its outskirt (or uot far away from 
its limits); acc. ~am (gata-kale, 1. e. 
before he had got as far as mid-river) 


vesürajja 


yram) abstinence (from, abl.); nom. 
~i (panatipata) 81,22, efc. 
verin, mfn. (sa. vairin) hostile, 


; hating; sinful; «om. m. ~i, Dh. 42 


— T ÜB — ——— - 


(var. lect.; cp. next); acc. «inam, ib.; 
loc. pl. ~winesu, Dh. 197. cp. a-verin. 

verivat (= veravat), mfn. (sa. 
vaira-vat) = prec.; nom. m. ~va, 
Dh. 42 (but the reading : veri và 
seems to be preferable). cp. puttimat. 

vela, f. (= sa.) !) limit, boundary, 
coast, shore; "anta, m. (g. v.), loc. 
~e, 20,4 (“on the edge of the shore"); 


| — ?) time; loc. velava(m), at that time, 


98,7; loc. ~e (nadiyā, not far from | 


the bank in the river) 2,19. 

veyyaggha, mfn. (sa. vaiyaghra? 
cp. vyaggha below) belonging to a 
tiger, tiger-like, i. e. eminent (?); 
-pailicamam, ‘an eminent man besides’ 
(lit. as the fifth) Dh. 295. SBE. X. 
p. 71—72. cp. JRAS, V. 229. (Faus- 
ball, Dhpd. 1855. p. 391, takes it from 
sa. valyagra (vy-agra).) 

*veyyattiya, n. (fr. vyatta) in- 
telligence, cleverness; sir. wena, 
91,26. 

veyyakarana, x. (sa. vaiyaka- 
rana, mfn.) exposition, explanation; 
nom. «am, 109,55 (one of the nine 
divisions of Buddha's doctrine); /oc. 
ewasmim, 71,17. (cp. vyakaroti). ` 

vera, n. (sa. vaira) enmity, anger, 
hatred; acc. ~am, Dh. 201; 11,20 
(~ bandhati, g. v.); instr. ena, 
106,23 = Dh. 5; abl, <a, Dh. 291; 
pl. „vāni, 106,93; comp. *"-saxisagga- 
samsattha, mfn. Dh. 291 (v. À.); cp. 
a-vera, vira, verin. 

*veramanī, f. (fr. viramana, vi- 


on that occasion (mostly e.c.) : aruna-9, 
12,18; agata-°, 20,10; jiita-kilana-®, 
20,14; pavisana-?, 53,4; tayam ~, 


| 66,19; velayam eva, adv, === to mor- 


row (soon) 14,27—15,3. — Uru-?, nom. 
pr. (g. v.) = sa. %-vilvā. 

veļu, m. (once x.) (sa. venu) 
bamboo; nom. n. Auri, 26,37; °-vana, 
n. a bamboo-grove, 26,25 (cp. below); 
*0-pesika, f. 52,31 (q. v.). 

veluriya, n. (sa. vaidūrya) the 
cat's-eye-gem, lapis lazuli, (Jspviiog; 
*C-vannüpanibha, mfn. 10,19 (v. upa- 
nibha); *varhsa-raga-°, “coral of the 
colour of bamboo” (Jat. Transl. vol. IV. 
p. 89) 26,5. cp. JRAS. XII (1880) 
p. 178. 

Veluvana, x. (sa. venu-vana; 
cp. velu above) nom. pr. of a bamboo- 
grove and a monastery near Rajagaha, 
presented to Buddha by King Bim- 
bisāra; loc. we, 84,27. 

vevanniya, x. (84. vaivarnya) 
change of colour, loss of beauty; acc. 
~a, 47,16. 

vesa, m. (sa. vega, vesha) dress, 
ornament, appearance, disguise; mostly 
e. C.: ace. eam (itthi-°) 58,5; (tun- 
navàya-?) 58,16; instr. wena (aniia- 
taka-?, in disguise) 43,12; (aiifiatara-") 
55,29; (br&hmana-?, disguised as a 
Br.) 15,10; (manava-°) 19,10; (pari- 
bbajaka-°) 110,29. 

vesāfajja, ». (fr. visarada; sa. 
vaigāradya) clearness of intellect, ex- 
pertness; *°-ppatta, mfn. who has 


1a* 


VOSSA 244 


gained full knowledge or confidence; | esp. consonant; instr. abl. pl. ~ehi, 


m. ~0, 69,13. | | 114,1; — ?) condiment, sauce; acc. 
vessa, m. (sa. vaigya) a man of | ~am, 57,1; "aneka-süpa-?, mfn. 
*Vessantara, m. (cp. Buddh. sa. | mfn. 


I 
the third caste; nom. ~o, 92,10. | 57,1 (v. an-eka); cp. sa-vyaiijana; 
| | 
| 
| 


Vicvantara; Jat. Vl. p. 485,18) nom. | vyatta, mfn. (sa. vyakta) 1) evi- 

yr. of a king (= Buddha in his last | dent, clear; °) learned, clever, intelli- 

existence but one); 9-jàtaka, x. the | gent; m. ~o (dovariko) 90,32. 91,26; 

last tale in the Jataka-book, 102,19. | instr. ~ena (bhikkhunā) 81,16. cp. 
vehāsa (& vehāsaya), m. or n.(?) : veyyattiya. 

(su. vaihāyasa) sky, atmosphere; comp. © vyanti-karoti, vb. (sa. vyantī- 

"vehasam-gama, mfn. able to fly | ykr) to put an and to, remove (acc.); 

through the air, 21,55 (cp. sa. viham- | fut. 3. sg. wkahiti (Mārabandhanam) 

gama). i Dh. 350 (metrically = viyanti-kahiti), 
vo, pron. 2. pers., gen. dat. pl., | vyapanudati, vb. (sa. vy-apa- 

v. tvar. | Vnud) to drive away, remove (acc.); 
*vokara, m. (= okāra, g. v.) vile- | aor. 3. sg. (augmented) vyapanudi 

ness, worthlessness; anekakara-°, mfn. | (dukkhakkhandham) 108,22. 

86,5 (v. an-eka). | Vyaya, m. = vaya? (q. v.). 
voca, aor., V, vuccati. | vyasana, n, (= sa.) destruction, 
vodaka, mfn. (sa. vy-udaka) wa- | ruin; misfortune, calamity; acc. ~am 

terless, dry; acc. m. n. ~ar, 83,15. | (ajjhagu) 34,21; °-ppatta, mfn. “come 


84,2. (cp. sa-udaka). to grief", acc. m. ^am, 8,30. 
voropeti, vb. (sa. vy-ava-ropay- | .vyākaroti, vb. (sa. vy-à-ykr) to 
ati, caus. Yruh) to deprive of (abl. i declare, explain, elucidate, reveal (acc.); 
& acc. pers.); pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (Ta- ' to give an explanation or answer; to 
thagatam jīvitā) 76,27; aor. 2. sg. | call, name (acc.); pot. 2. sg. ~weyyasi 
ev e8l, 75,31; fut. 1. sg. ~essimi, 75,32; | (kim) 94,28. 95,6; 1. sg. ~eyyarı 
3. pl. ~wessanti, 75,3; inf. „etum, i (evath), 94,55; aor. 3. sg. vyakasi, 
75,30; ger. ~wetva, 75,8. 91,12; viyākāsi, 118,15; 3. pl. viyā- 
*vosana, n. (fr. vy-ava-yso) con- ; karum (nam Buddhaghoso'ti) 113,20; 
viction, determination; consummation, | fut. 3. sg. ~issati, 92,5; pp. vyākata, 
perfection; sabba-vosita-°, mfn. al- | explained, elucidated, revealed, n. 
together perfect, acc. m. eam, Dh. | wath, 90,6. 93,3; abl. ~ato, ib. (v. 
493. cp. next. | dhareti) cp. a-vyakata, mfn. & veyya- 
vosita, mfn. (sa. vyavasita, pp. | karana, m. 
vy-ava-y80) perfect, determined; *a- vyadhi, f. (= sa.) disease, sick- 
bhifiia-°, mfn. Dh. 423 (v. R.) cp. ! ness; nom. wi aukla) 67,9; (ppa- 
vosānā. bāļhā) 78,s1; dvandva comp. °-ma- 
vohāra, m. (sa. vyavahāra) ')prac- | rana-°, 108,55. 
tice, affair, business, trade; acc. ~am vyādhita, mfn. (= sa.) diseased; 
(karoti) 8,16. 23,2-4; *°-karanatthaya, | acc. m. „am (purisam) 63,21. 
“for business”, 9,11; — *) lawsuit, liti- vyapajjati, vb. (sa. vy-ā-ypad) 
gation; acc. ~am, 42,28; loc. pl. „esu, | to fall into misfortune, come to a harm; 
ib.; — 5) mode of expression, appella- | pr. 3. sg. mati, 25,14. cp. next, 
tion, name; nom, ~0, 97,2. | vyāpatti, f. (= sa.) misfortune, 
vyaggha. m. (sa. vyàghra) a tiger; | ruin; nom, ~i (nāvāya) 24,15. 
gen. massa, 8,27. cp. veyyaggha. | vyàma, m. (= sa.) a fathom; 
vyaūjana, n. (== sa.) !) ornament, | °-matta, mfn. of a fathom's length, n. 
sign, mark, efc.; — *) a letter, syllable, | pl. ~ani (pekkhunāni) 10,20. 


— —— ee ae 


| 
| 
| 


ki 


245 


sam-' 


vyūsatta, mfn. (sa. vyāsakta) | sa-brahmacārin, m. (= sa.) fel- 


attached or devoted to, occupied with; | 


comp. *°-manas (or °-manasa? cp. 
°manasa) mfn. whose mind is distrac- 
ted, acc. m. °-manasam, Dh. 47.48, 287. 


S. 

sa-!, indecl. (= sa.) prefix to nouns, 
mostly implying ‘conjunction’ or ‘pos- 
session’ (cp. saha-, sath-) and opp. 
to a-* and other negative prefixes (cp. 
sa-kubbato, Dh. 52 (var. lect.) opp. 
a-kubbato, Db. 51; sa-ce, indecl., 
opp. no-ce (4. v.)); it is often con- 
tracted with a foll. vowel (v. sattha- 
katha, etc., sodariya), but also un- 
contracted : sa-udaka, mfn. (sa. so- 
daka) containing water, m. ~o (patto) 
82,26. — *sa-upāyāsa, mfn. (v. 
upāyāsa). — sa-kala, mfn. & sakad-®, 
sakim, v. below. — *sa-kiūcana, 
mfn. wealthy, m. ~o, Dh. 396 (opp. 
a-kificana). — sa-gandhaka, mfn. 


(sa. sa-gandha) fragrant, full of scent, 


n. ~am (puppham) Dh. 52. — *sa- 
gunam, adv.(?), only in the phrase 
~ katva, duly arranged (duly tolded 
or laid together?) 82,2 (— ekato 
katvā, Comm.). — sajju, sattha, 
sadisa, v. below. — sa-dukkha, 
mfn. (sa. sa-duhkha) accompanied 
with misery, n. „am, 94,2. — sa- 
devaka, mfn. (— sa.) together with 
the gods (comb. w. loka) 78,15. 87,21. 


| 
| 
| 
| 


low-student or -priest, pl. ~i, 96,30. 
— sa-bhaga, mfn. (= sa.) having 
a share, v. vithi-°, 57,7. — sa-ma- 
raka, mfn. (= sa.) including Māra, 
loc. ~e (loke) 78,15. — sa-rajaka, 
mfn. (= sa.) including the king, Joc. 
f. wikiya (parisaya) 74,18 (i. e. king 


; Bimbisāra and his retinue). — *sa- 


vighata, mfn, v. vighata. — sa- 
visa, mfn. (sa. sa-visha) poisoned, 
instr. ~ena (sallena), 92,7. — sa- 
vyaūijana, mfn. (== sa.) together 
with condiments, acc, ~am (yagum) 
57,22. — savhaya, v. below. — *sa- 
ssamana-brahmana, mfn. includ- 


: ing Samanas and Brahmans, Joc. f. 


wiya (pajaya) 78,15.— *sa-ssimika- 
bhava, m. the being married (to a 
husband), 56,9. (cp. samin & samika). 
*sa-hetu-dhamma, m., v. 
dhamma^. — *sātthakathā, adj. 
f. together with the commentary, 102,» 
(pāli). — sātthika, v. below. '— 
*sādāna, mfn. filled with affection 
or desire, greedy, loc. pl. ~esu, Dh. 
406 (opp. an-ādāna, cp. ādāna). — 
sadharana, v. below. - sānucura, 
mfn. (= sa.) having followers, n. ~ari 
(rattham, “with all its subjects") Dh. 
204. — samacca, mfn. (sa. sāmā- 
tya) together with ministers, acc. ~am 
(rajanam) 404. — salohita, soda- 
riya, v. below. 

sa-", num. (= cha, g. v.) in the 


comp. saļāyatana, solasa, etc. (cp. 


104,5. Dh. 44. — sa-dhana, mfn. : 


(= sa.) wealthy, 52,4. — santa ra, san- 
tika, v. below. ~ sa-pajapatika, 
m(fn). (sa. %-prajāpatika) together with 
one's wife, m. ~0, 2,26.— *sa-parigga- 
ha, mfn. married, 56,6 (comp. °-a-pari- 
ggaha-bhava, m.). ~ *sa-parilaha, 


mfn. accompanied with pain, n. ~am, | 


94,2. — sa-parivara, mfn. (= sa.) 
v. parivara. — sa-phala, mfn. (= 
sa.) fruitful, f. ~& (vaca) Dh. 52. — 
sa-brah maka, mfn. (— sa.) together 
with Brabman, loc. ~e (loke) 78,15. — 


satthi). 

sa, mf. (= sa.) base of pron. 
demonstr, nom. $g., v. tam !. 

sa‘, mfn. (sa. sva) one's own (also 
referring to 1. & 2. pers.); instr. pl. 
sehi (kammehi) Dh. 136; very com- 
monly the first part of comp.: sa-kicca, 
€-citta, %-nāma (v. %.); sa-mukha, 
61,5 (°-vethito, who has let his own 
face be enveloped); °-labha, Dh. 365 
—66 (v. h.); sajjhāya, sadattha-, & 
sabhāvd, v. below. cp. saka, mfn. 

sam-°, indecl. (sa. sam) prefix to 
verbal roots, implying ‘conjunction’, 


samyata 


‘completeness’, efc. (opp. vi-°), before 
vowels sam-%, and by assimilation also 
saii-°, saii-°, san-°, sal-9, before r 
sometimes sā- (cp. sāratta, saram- 
bha). 

samyata, mfn., v. saüiiata. 

samyutta (or saüüutta), mfn. (sa. 
samyukta, yyuj) uuited, combined, 
collected; — Samyutta-nikāya, m. (cp. 
buddh. sa. samyuktagama) name of 
a canonical Pali work, the third of the 
five nikāyas (g. v.), consisting of 55 
Samyuttas or collections of short Sut- 
tas, nom. eO, 102,15; acc. m. sam- 
yuttam (adj) 110,2 (saddhammaīh, 
i. e. “according to Saimyuttas"). Spe. 
cimens thereof : 66,23—67,19; 71,19— 
72,25; 96,1-22. 

samyoga, m. (== sa.) union, con- 
junction; bond, attachment; pl. nā, 
Dh. 384. cp. next. 

samyojana & saūūojana, n. 
(sa. samyojana) = prec.; acc. ~am, 
Dh. 31; 397 (sabba-"); dvandva comp. 
O-sanga, Dh. 342 (°-sattaka, mfn. g. 
v.); — ditthi-°, 42. a clog of theory, 94,2. 

sathvacchara, m. & n. (sa. sar- 
vatsara) a year; acc. eam (“for a 
whole year") Dh. 108; loc. we (tatiye) 
36,36; n. pl. ~ani, 21,11; gen. pl. 


246 


pany with fools) Dh. 207; ([a]samā- 
na-°, g. v.) Dh. 302; (dhira-®, instead 
of sukha-?) Dh. 207 (cp. note ib.); 
acc. „arh (katvana taya) 112,5. 

*samvasiya, mfn. (= ~ika) liv- 
ing together with; f. niyā (gopi) 
104,33. 

samvigga, mfn. (sa. samvigna) 
agitated. terrified; °-manasa, mfn. 
agitated in mind, m. ~o, 41,32; *°-ha- 
daya, mfn. agitated in heart, m. ~o, 
63,14. cp. sathvega. 

samvidahati, vb. (sa. sam-vi- 
Vdhā) to place, put; dispose, arrange, 
prescribe (acc.); ger. witva, 48,15 
(arakkham); 63,23. 

samvuta, mfx. (sa. samvrta) self- 
controlled, restrained; m. ~o (sam- 
varena) 85,18; Dh. 231 (kayena); m. 
pl. ~a, Dh. 225. 234. a-samvuta, 
Dh. 7; su-samvuta (g. v.); sila~°, mfn, 
(v. h.) cp. samvara & sanñata. 

salivega. m. (== sa.) emotion, 
agitation; terror; acc. wath, 44,30; 
*0_npatta, mfn. moved, agitated, m. 
~0, 53,11. cp. samvigga & next. 

*samvegin, mfn. filled with emo- 
tion, ardent, eager; m. pl. ~ino, Dh. 
143. 

samsagga, m. (sa. samsarga) 


anam, 87,8; comp. °-matthake, 33,14 | conjunction, contact, intercourse, com- 


(v. h.). 

samvattati, vb. (sa. sum-yvrt) 
‘to roll together’, come to an end, be 
finished or destroyed; w. dat. : to con- 
duce, tend to; pr. 3. sg. eati (nibba- 
nāya) 66,80. 93,9. 

samvara, m, (= sa.) self-control, 
restraint; nom. «Oo (patimokkhe) Dh. 
185. 375; (cakkhuna, etc.) Dh. 360—61; 


instr. ~ena (kayikena) 85,18; 85,19 
(a-sarhvarena); dat. aya, 75,26. cp. 


samvuta. 


samvasati, vb. (sa. sam-yvas) 
to dwell, live (with, dxstr.); pot. 3. 
sg. samvase (pamadena) Dh. 167. 


cp. next. 
samvāsa, 


m. (== sa.) ‘dwelling 
together, living with (also of sexual 
intercourse); nom. ~o (bālehi, com- 


pany with; nom. <o, 29,6; instr. wena 
(amadhura-?) 37,31; (madhura-rasa-?) 
38,4; *vera-9-sathsattha, mfn. Db. 
291 (v. next). 

samsattha, mfn. (sa. samsrshta) 
connected, mixed with, entangled; m. 
«0 (*vera-satisagga-°, “entangled in 
the bonds of hatred") Dh. 291; m. 
pl. «à, 37,20; cp. a-samsattha. 

samsati, vb. (sa. /çams) to say, 
tell, speak to, call upon (acc.); aor. 
3. sg. asamsi (mam) 108,9. 

saīnsandeti, vb. (caus. °-sandati, - 
sa. sath-\/syand) ‘to let run together’, 
i, e. to sum up, to compare (acc., with: 
instr.); ger. wetva (niyyamakasuttena, 
gatham aha) 25,28 (¢. e. comformably 
to his mariner's lore). 


samsanna, mfn. (pp. sarisidati, 


247 


to sink, go ‘down; sa. sarñ-Vsad) de- 
pressed, without energy; *"-samkappa- 
mana(s), mfn. Dh. 280 (“whose will 
and thought are. weak"). cp. samsa- 
deti. 

samsaya, m. (sa. sañiçaya) doubt; 
e. nis-samsayam, adv. 

samsarati, vb. (sa. sam-y/sr) to 
go about (unvoluntarily), toss the body 
about, esp. to pass from existence to 
existence; part. loc. m. ~ante (apara- 
param) 40,24; aor. 1. sg. „sari, 108,16 
(saxisarr'ham). cp. sai-carati & sat- 
sara. 

samsadeti, vb. (caus. samsidati; 
sa. samsādayati) !) ‘to cause to sit 
down or sink’, to embarrass, perplex; 
2) infr. to be embarrassed or perplexed ; 
pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 90,26. cp. samsanna. 

samsara, m. (== sa.) the revolu- 
tion of being, transmigration or pas- 
sing through a succession of existences, 
the life in this world; nom. ~o (di 
gho balanam) 107,10 == Dh. 60; acc. 
eam, Dh. 414; loc. ~e (anamata- 
ggasmim, g. v.) 89,13; pl. wa, Dh. 
95; *jati-°, m. id. 108,18. 

samharati, vb. (sa. sam-vhr) to 
draw together, collect, fold up (as 
clothes, acc.); part. m. instr. „antena 
(civaramh) 83,10; ger. witva, 41,4; 
grd. n. ~witabbam, 83,9. cp. sambira. 

samhita, mfn. (= sa.) put to- 
gether, joined, accompanied by (e. c.); 
attha-9, mfn., v. attha?, an-attha-', 
mfn. (g. v.) cp. upasamhita & sahita. 

samhira, mfn. (contracted of 
samhariya (*samhera), grd. samha- 
rati, sa. sathharya) to be removed, 
shaken or corrupted; *a-samhīra, mfn. 
(v. h.) cp. Tr. PM. 78,38. Pischel, 
Gramm. Š 531. 

saka, mfn. (fr. sa*; sa. svaka) 
one’s own (referring also to 1, & 2. 
pers.); acc. m. n. ~am (parijanam) 
67,28; (matan) 113,3; (vādam, re- 
ferring to 2. pers.) 113,14; loc. ~e 
(thane) 77,9; very often at the beg. of 
comp. °-sarira, 16,6; %-rattha, 42, 
(cp. Fleet, TRAS. '04, 708); "-nagara, 


Sakka 


44.16; %-ttbāna, 55,9; °-kammani, n. 
pl. 106,20; repeated (with distributive 
meaning) : saka-saka-tthanesu (each 
on his own place) 22,. 

sakata, m. n. 1) (sa. cakata) a 
carriage; a cart-load; n. wath (pha- 
nita-9, püva-9, bhatta-9, q. v.) 53,20-30; 
*0-magga, m. a highroad, loc. «e, 
43,18. — ?) wrong reading instead of 
kasata (q. v.). 

sakad-āgāmin, mf(n). (buddh. 
sa. sakrd-agamin) lif. ‘returning only 
once more’, Z e, a person who is to 
be re-born only once in the world of 
men, who has reached the second stage 
of sanctification (cp. Childers s. v. & 
magga); °-phale patitthahi, “he en- 
tered on the fruit of the second path”, 
29,17. ep. sakim, adv, 

sakala, mfn. (= sa.) whole, all; 
M. ~0, 16,13; 9, wath, 02,3; comp. 
“_gima-viisino, all the villagers, 8,93; 
kappa, 16,15; ?-Jambudipa, 39,1; 
Ü-sarira, 57,99; "-nagara, 65,94 ep. 
next, 

*sakalika, f. (prob. fr. sakala, 
but other spellings : sakkalika, sak- 
khalikā seem to show confusion with 
sakkarā or sakkharā, g. v.) a piece, 
mass, splinter; pasana-?, a splinter of 
rock, 17,99. 

sakim, adv. (sa. sakrt) once (lat. 
semel); 56,17-18; on account of old 
sandhi we have sakid-, or sakad-, cp. 
sakad-āgāmin, mfn. 

sakuna. m. (sa. cakuna) a bird; 
nom. eO, 12,9; pl. wa, 10,5; gen. 
pl. wanam, 10,12; comp. *'-gana, 
*O-samgha, m. (g. v.); *java-°, *ruk- 
khakottha-% (g. v.) cp. sakunika & 
next, 

sakunta, m. (sa. cakunta) = 
prec.; nom. ~O, 88,30; gen. pl. nā- 
nam, Dh. 92. 

Sakka, m. (sa. Cakra) nom. pr. 
of Indra; nom. ~o, 16,3. 45,30 (deva- 
raja); 59,31 (jara-". old Sakka); 80,26 
(devanath indo); acc. ^am, 110,21; 
instr. wena, 110,28; gen. wassa, 15,7; 
pl. mā (aüüehi cakkavalehi, from 


sakka 


other worlds) 60,20; °-bhavana, 9. the 
heaven or palace of S., 65,9 (°-sadisa). 
ep. sakkatta, n. 
sakka, mfn. (sa. gakya) possible, 
v. sakka, indecl. 
sakkaceath, indecl. (orig. ger. 
fr. sakkaroti, to honour, revere; sa. 
sat-krtya) devotedly, zealously, eagerly, 
assiduously; Dh. 392. (cp. sakkāra. 
Sakkatta,n. (sa. Cakratva) Sakka- 
ship; acc. ~am (papuni, was born as 
S.) 35,1; (karesi) 52,15. 
sakkarā, f., 9. sakkhara. 
*sakkā, indecl. (perhaps orig. f. 
sg. fr. sakka, (grd. sakkoti) cp. sa. 
gakyum) mostly used in impersonal 
sentences, followed by inf. (often with 
pass. or intr, meaning, but sometimes 
with obj. added in acc.), the agens, 
if expressed, being put generally into 
instr, (but sometimes also nom.), to 
he translated by ‘it is possible’, gene- 
rally w. negation: ‘it is not possible’, 
‘cannot’, or ‘it is of no use’; 9) with- 
out subj.: na ~ tava vàram (acc.) 
aūiiesam papetum, it is not possible 
to transfer your turn to others, 6,31; 
yacakanam tinani datum na ~, 15,5; 
tumhakamh ratthe agantum na ~, 
18,4; na ~ mam varetum, 23,8; 
appen'eva balavahanena ~ B.rajjam 
ganhitum, 38,24; na « datum, 53,56; 
nanu na ~ vissajjetum, surely he 
cannot answer, 91,16; na ~ itoparam. 
112,17; w. auxiliary verb: sakka siya, 
56,5; — b) with subj. instr. : na ~ 
maya ... pakkhipitum (1 cannot) 7,5; 
maya imasmim thane vasitum na ~, 
9,4; na ~ maya marana muccitur 
(1 cannot be delivered from death) 
17,14; marantenāpi [sc. maya] tuy- 
ham kathetum na x, 49,27; — €) with 
subj. nom. (% instr. as subj. of the 
inf.) : mātugāmo kucchiyam pakkhi- 
pitvā carentenāpi rakkhitum na ~ 
(a woman you cannot be certain of, 
even if you walk about having her 
inside you) 50,54 (here we could also 
have acc. mātugāmam); the subj. 
being expressed by a relat. clause: 


248 


yo koci samano ... samāgato na ~ 
pativattetum, 110,10. Besides this 
indecl. sakkā we find in some few 
instances grd. sakka, mfn. construed 
with subj. nom. (as in sa., cp. Speyer, 
Ved, u. Sa, Synt, § 220 & Childers 
$. v.) Quite parallel to *sakka is 
*labbha (q. v.); both forms have been 
variously explained; on account of the 
predominant construction with instr. 
it seems evident that the instinct of 
speech has connected these forms with 
the pass. grd. of sakkoti (ygak); 
therefore it is difficult to judge, whether 
Pischel, Gr. § 465, is right in taking 
them as old optatives (aor.); cp. 
Franke, Pāli u. Sanskr, p. 103. 

sakkāra, m. (sa. sat-kāra) honour, 
reverence, worship; reputation; nom. 
0, 18,35. 19,4. 37,1. 74,15; acc. ~am, 
Dh. 75; °-attham, 62,31 (v. attha '); 
*kata-mangala-9, mfn. (g. v.); dvan- 
dva comp. làbha-? (v. %.). 

sakkoti (later form : sak(k)unoti 
or e Cane vb. (sa. /çak) to be 
able to (ix:f.); to dare, venture, per- 
suade oneself to (inf.); pr. 3. sg. noti 
(gocaram ganhitum na ~) 13,12; 2. 
Sg. —0S], 46,34; 1. sg. „omi, 31,30. 
48,28; 3. pl. „Onti, 8,19; 2. pl. wotha, 
31,30; 1. pl. ~oma, 40,33; pari. m. 
~wonto, 98,20; f. gen. sg. ~wontiya, 
59,9; a-sakkonto, 37,25; pl. nā, 8,22. 
40,23. 102,18; aor. 3. sg. a-sakkhi, 
16,8. 50,18; 2. sg. id. 44,31; 1. sg. 
a-sakkhim, 20,29; 1. pl. sakkhimha, 
79,20; a later form is sakuni, 3. sg. 
111,11; fut. 2) sakkhati, 2. sg. ~asi, 
48,27; b) sakkhiti, 3. pl. inti, 105,18; 
¢) sakkhissati, 89,10; 2. sg. wasi, 4,34; 
1. sg. ~ami, 48,13; 3. pl. „anti, 34,10; 
1. pl. ~ama, 1,9. 21,51; 4) sakkunis- 
sama, 1. pl. 78,2; grd. sakka, mfn. 
(4. v.) cp. sakkā. 

sakkharā, f. (sometimes spelt sak- 
karā, in the beg. of comp. also ~a; sa. 
carkara) ') gravel, pebble, small stone; 
*-a-kathala-vàlika (pl. dvandva comp.) 


' 97,35. — 2) sugar; nom. «à, 52,7; dvan- 


dva comp. sappi-madhu-sakkarā-0, 


249 


samkhiita 


61,6; °-ddaka, x. sugar-water, 38,5; | Kern, Bijdr. (Amsterdam 1886) p. 57; 
*0-pànaka, n. id. 18,27; *lapa-°, mfn. | Morris, Introd. to AN. I p. IX (1883); 


(v. h 


sakkoti. 

Sakya, m. (pl.) (sa. Cakya) nom. 
pr. of a tribe in Kapilavatthu (from 
which Gotama Buddha was descended); 


«anam (samananam, the Buddhist 
monks) 73,30. 


. h.). | 
sakkhiti, sakkhissati, fut., v. | 


SBE, XX, 300.) cp. a-samkusaka, Jat. 
VI. 297,82. 
samkara, m. n. (= sa.) sweep- 


, ings; nom. ^. wath, 84,23; *%-dhāna, 


n. a dunghill, Joc. ~asmiri, Dh. 58; 


| "-bhüta, mfn. being like sweepings, 
0-putta, m. a man of that tribe (esp. ` 
ot Gotama); °-puttiya, m. (sa. °-pu- : 
triya) a follower of Gotama, gen. pl. ` 


sagga, m. (sa. svarga) !) heaven; . 


acc. wath (yanti) Dh. 126; dat. ~aya 
(gacchati) 88,30. 89,1; gen. ~assa 
(gamana) Dh. 178; saggam (adj.) 
lokam (acc.) id. 7,26; comp. *°-katha, 
f., a discourse about heaven, 68,20 


(„am pakāsesi); °patha, °-pada, ` 


m. the way to heaven, 84,29. 44,15 (ep. 


Dh. 423 (v. apāya). — *) *Sagga, m. 
nom, pr. of a Gandharva, 19,20. 20,4-20. 

samkaddhati, vb. (sa. sam-ykrsh) 
to draw together, gather, collect, pick 
up (acc.); ger. „vitvā (dārūni) 15,52: 


gether). 

samkappa, m. (sa. samkalpa) 
will, thought, intention, desire; nom. 
^0 (sammii-°, right aspiration) 67,4; 
Dh. 74; acc. ~am, 104,7; pl. nā, 
Dh. 339; *samsanna-samkappa-mano, 
Dh. 280 (v. h.); miccha-°, Dh. 11 


loc. pl. „esu, Dh. 59. 

samkita, mfn. (sa. camkita) 
anxious, alarmed; *bhaya-°, mfn. 111,15 
(v. h.). 

samkilittha, mfn. (pp. fr. next; 
sa, samklishta) impure, sinful, depra- 
ved, corrupt; %. „am (vatam) Dh. 
312; instr. m. wena, Dh. 244. 

samkilissati, vb. (sa. sam-yklig, 


; pass. °-kligyate) to be impure, be- 
. come defiled (by carnal lust); pr. 3. 


sg. vati (attana) Dh. 165; pp. sam- 


' kilittha (g. v.) cp. next. 
pūreti); saggāpāya, m.(dvandva comp.) . 


. contamination, 


samkilesa, m. (sa. samklega) 
impurity, sinfulness; 


| ace. wat, 68,20. 


*samkuppa, mfn. (grd. sam- 


' kuppati; sa. sam-ykup) to be shaken 


(v. h.); *bahu-9, mfn. Dh. 147 (g. v.). | 


saīnkamati, vb. (sa. sam-ykram) 
to go away, enter, go to; fut. 1. pl. 
eissama, 77,17. 

samkam pati, vb. (sa. sam-ykamp) 
to shake, quake, tremble; aor. 3. sg. 
epi, 110,7. 

samkara, m. (= sa.) confusion, 
turmoil; *dura-°, mfn. secluded, soli- 
tary, tranquil; doc, we (vihāre) 114,26. 

*samkassara, mfn. (prob. fr. sa. 
*sam-kasvara, cp. samkasuka) bad, 
impure; unsteady, of doubtful charac- 
ter; ^. ~ar (brahmacariyam) Db. 


312. (cp. Weber, Ind. Str. I, 167; | 


. or moved; *a-samkuppa, mfn. (v. h.). 
33,6; 49,35 (kacavaram, to sweep to- | 


samkha, m. (sa. gamkha) a conch- 


, shell, trumpet; acc. pl. xe (dhamen- 


tā) 8,23. 

samkhata, mfn. (sa. samskrta) 
put together, constructed, prepared; 
f. ~a (su-°) 104,30. cp. samkhàta 
below. 

samkhaya, m. (sa. samkshaya) 
destruction; nom. ~o (bhuri-°) Dh. 
282; loc. —amhi (jivita-°) Dh. 331. 

*samkhalikā, f. (fr. sa. ornkha- 
la, or nā) a chain, fetter; instr. ~aya 
(deva-°) 21,14. 

samkha, f. (sa. samkhyā) reckon- 
ing; consideration, deliberation; name, 
appellation; nom. nā, 97,1; acc. ~am 
(gacchati, to be called) 95,9; instr. 
sya, (v. samkhāti below); comp. 
*rüpa-samkha-vimutta, mfn. “released 
from what is styled name”, or: ‘up to 
the very name i. €. ‘totally released 


from’ (Tr.), 95,12 ff. DK 263, 1,106. 
samkhata, mfn. (sa. RSEN 


samkhati 


wp. sarh-Vkhyā) reckoned, considered, 
weighed; called, named; known, vi- 
sible; *-dhamma, mfn. “who has well 
weighed the law", gen. pl. „ānam, 
Dh. 70 (wrong spelling : sarhkhata-°) ; 
*pañña-0, 91,37 (v. h.). 

[saxi khàti], vb. (sa. sam-ykhyā) 
to reckon; to consider, weigh; to call, 
name; inf. ~atum (to measure) Dh. 
196; ger. ~aya (“with care"). 106,7 
= Dh. 267; pp. wita, v. above. 

samkhara, m. (sa. samskara) 
*putting together', composition, aggre- 
gation; mostly in pl, mā: !) all ex- 
isting things or substances, created 
things or creatures; ?) (im the dog- 
matics :) the fourth of the five khan. 
dhà (constituents of the human being, 
94,8-10), viz. states of mind. pre- 
dispositions, conformations (originating 
from avijjā, and causing viūūāņa, 
'66,6-7) left from actions in former ex- 
istences, and therefore denoting auy 
action, speech, or thought, the vital 
functions ete., practically == moral 
constitution (Karma, v. kamma’); 
nom, pl. wit, 94,10; 80,2 (vayadham- 
mā); 80,98. 107,11 == Dh. 277 (anic- 
ci); 107,13 (dukkhā); Dh. 255 (sas- 
sata n’atthi); instr. „ehi, 95,19; 
comp. 9-nirodha, m. (g. v.) 66,12; 
*0-jipasama, m. Dh. 368 (g. v.) cp. 
vi-sainkhara-gata, mfn. For signifi- 
cation cp. dhamma‘. 

samkhitta. mfn. (pp. fr. nest; 
sa. samkshipta) contracted, abbreviated ; 
instr. n. (adv.) ~ena, briefly, conci- 
sely, 67,11. 

samkhipati, vb. (sa. sam-ykship) 
to throw or draw together (acc.), to 
contract, shorten; part. med. m. pl. 
„mānā (mige) 6,9; pp. ««khitta (v. 
above). — 

saūga, m. (= sa.) clinging to, 
attachment: hindrance, bond, fetter; 
nom. eo, Dh. 171; acc. ~am (ubho, 
q.v.) Dh. 412; comp. safigatiga, mfn: 
Dh. 397 (v. atiga); pafica-safiga-°, 
Dh. 370 (the 5 fetters, i. e. the senses, 


250 


paücindriyàni. Comm.); saüiiojana-, 
q. v., cp. sajjati. 

samganhati (or ati), vb. (sa. 
sam-\/grah) to gather, collect, to take 
hold of, take care of, help; to win 
(one's favour) (w. acc.); aor. 3. sg. 
~ganhi (nagaram) 58,4; ger. ~ga- 
hetvā (Pitakattayam), 114,3; pp. 
wgahita, m. pl. eka-samgahita (sabbe, 
unified) 99,16; cp. samgaha, sarngā- 
haka. 

sañgata, n. (= sa.) association, 
intercourse; *bala-"-carim, mfn. Dh. 
207 (v. h.). 

samgaha, m. (once %.; sa. sam- 
graha) collection, aggregation; redac- 
tion, text; nom. ~o (dhamma-vinaya-?) 
109,13; (therehi kata-°) 109,14; nom. 
n. ~am, 110,4; acc. ~am, 110,6; 
(dhamma-?) 109,16. 110,16; (viiiniana-, 
q. v.) 99,26; antevāsikānar ~ar (col- 
lecting, i. e. teaching of pupils) 102,5. 

samgahita, pp. & %-gahetvā, ger., 
v. sa miganháti. 

samgama, m. (sa. samgrama) 
battle; loc. ~e., 103,24. 107,5 == Dh. 
103; — 9-31, mfn. (sa. °-jit) victorious, 
in the comp. saūgāmajuttama, m. “the 
greatest of conquerors”, 107,4 == Dh. 
103 (cp. sa. superl. samgramajittama). 


' ep. next. 


samgameti, vb. (denom. fr. sam- 
gāma; $a. saīngrāmayate) to battle 
or fight with (instr.); fut. 3. sg. ~es- 
sati (nàgena) 76,55. 

samgahaka, m. (sa. samgrahaka) 
1) a collector, compiler; ?) a charioteer; 
nom. eo (Mātali) 60,18. 

sangiti, f. (= sa.) !) singing 
together, music; *) collection or recen- 


ion of the holy texts, or a Buddhist 


council held for that purpose; *%.ttaya, 
n. the three councils (or recensions), 
113,29. 

samgha, m. (= sa.) !) a collec- 
tion, assemblage, multitude, crowd; 
acc. «am (sakuna-°) 10,9;. pl. wa 
(do.) 62,13; — 3) the congregation or 
urder of the Buddhist monks (also a 
chapter or a certain number of monks, 


251 


elected and assembled for any religious 


purpose); nom. ~0, 79,11; ace. ~am | 


| 
| 


(in the formula Buddha, Dhamma, | 


& Saügha, cp. ratana!) 107,7 = 


Dh. 190; 114,5 instr. «ena (bhik- | 
khu-°) 70,21; gen. ~assa (do.) 102,8; . 
loc. ~e (do.), 29,28; pl. wii (bhik-: 


khu-?) 109,2 (combined with the prec. | 


n. pl. satta satasahassani); — *°-gata, : 
mfn. directed to the S., Dh. 298 (f. ` 
Da e) a solemn asseverution, oath (cp. 


eà, sati); *-sammata, 4. (v. h.). 


sam ghattati, vb. (sa.sam-vghatt) ` 
. imin& wena (“so truly") 51,18; — 4) 


to strike or knock against, to rub, ete.; 


part. m. instr. antena. (a-°) 84,12. | 
*Sathghapala, m. nom. pr. of a ` 


thera in Mahàvihára (Ceylon); gem. 
wassa, 1144. 

samghata, m. (— sa.) the timber 
or frame work of a house; *pittha- 
samghataka, x. (adj. in the comp. 
thira-°, comm. on torana) ‘with strongly 
constructed doorpost and lintel’, 91,21. 
(cp. SBE. XX. p. 105). 

samghāti, f. (= sa.) an upper 
garment, one of the three robes of a 
Buddhist monk; nom. ~i, 84,3; pl. —1yo, 
the two uppers garments, 82,25. 

*sace, indecl. (fr. ce with the in- 
decl. pref. sa-, q.v.) if; even if, though; 
this particle is always used at the be- 
ginning of a conditional period, the 
verb of both sentences being put usually 
either in fut. (sometimes pres.) or pot., 


nearly in conformity to the use of the | 
| vādin) speaking the truth; acc. m. 


indic. & conjunctive modes in Latin 
in such sentences; the second sentence 
is often beginning with a pron. de- 
monstr., but a particle corresponding 
with sace is not required; 3) w. fut. 
(in both sentences): 1,9. 2,2. 35,18. 56,7; 
sac aham : 25,82. 64,1. 65,31; b) w. pres. 
& fut. (or grd.) : 1,17. 82,19-98; 9) w. 
pot. (in both sentences) : 1,24. 4,7. 53,14. 
56,5. 86,2; 4) like yadi evam & noce 
(q. v.) without full sentence : ‘if so’, ‘in 
that case’, 97,14-15 (sace bhante Na- 
gasena yo tumhe mareti n'atthi tas- 
sāpi pānātipāto). . 

`. sacca, 1) mfn. (sa. satya) true; 
n. ~am (girar) Dh. 408; idam eva 


x 


sajjati 


~, 89,24 (opp. mogha). — 2) n. (subst.) 
a) truth; nom. eam, 51,32 (opp. musa); 
acc. wath (katheti, vadati) 24,37. 32,1; 
*0_gadisa, mfn. having the appearance 
of truth, 52,1; *sacc-üpasaiiliita, mfn. 
true, 9,31 (cp. upasaiithita); — b) speak- 
ing the truth, truthfulness, veracity; 
nom, «am, 3,57; Dh. 261; 106,9 = 
Dh. 393; instr. wena, 44,9. 108,31; 
dvandva comp. dama-?, Dh. 9 (q. v.); 


sacca-kiriyā, & "-vajja below); instr. 


in the dogmatics (mostly pi.) : the four 
cardinal truths of Buddhism (cp. ariya- 
sacca); Avüni, 29,16; sacca-pariyosiine, 
“at the conclusion of the Truths”, 29,17; 
— 9) n. (adv.) truly, indeed, verily; 
justly, by rights; 54,16 (~ evam ihai- 
su pandita). |ep. bāhusacca, fr. ba- 
hussuta]. 

sacca-kiriyā, f. (sa. satya-kriyā) 
a solemn asseveration, oath; zom. nā 
(bhinna, is rendered of no effect) 51,22; 
ace. eam (karoti) 27,20. 51,10; instr. 
evüya, 27,16. 

*sacca-pāramī, f. (Buddh. sa. 
satya-pāramitā) truthfulness (one of 
the ten virtues, v. pāramī) 108,1. 

*sacca-vajja, n. (fr. sa. satya- 
vada) !) truthfulness; *) solemn asseve- 
ration (cp. sacca-kiriyā); instr. wena 
(etena) 27,24. 

sacca-vādin, mfn. (sa. satya- 


enam, Dh. 217. 

sacchi-karoti, vb. (fr. sa. sak- 
shat-ykr, by analogy of other comp. 
of karoti w. indecl. ending in ʻi’) to 
make visibly present before the eyes, 
to realize, attain (acc.); pr. 3. sg. 
„Oti (magga-phala-nibbanani) 97,10. 
cp. next. 

sacchi-kiriy&, f. (sa. sākshāt- 
kriyā) realization; dat. ~aya (nibbā- 
nassa) 90,19. 

sajjati, vb. (sa. sai); pass. saj- 
jate) td cling, adhere; to be attached 
to (loc.); part. med. acc. m. a-sajja- 
manam (n&àmarüpasmim) Db. 221; 


sajjapeti 252 


pp. satta (g. v.); cp. safiga. (The | ~wassa, Dh. 24; a-safifiata, mfn. (q.v.): 
secondary verbal-forms sajjeti & sajjà- | pada-°, mfn. controlling one’s feet, 
peti seem to be denom. fr. sajja, sajya, | Dh. 362; mukha-°, mfn. Dh. 363; 
v, below). ' hattha-°, mfn. Dh. 362; *9-carin, mfn. 
*sajjāpeti, vb. (caus. II. sajjeti) | living under restraint, gen. m. ~ino, 
to make ready, prepare festively, adorn | Dh. 104; *safinatuttama, mfn. very 
acc.); ger. ~etva (nagaram) 45,50; | well restrained, m. ~o, Dh. 362. 
u 50,28. saniama, m. (sa. samyama) re- 
sajju, adv. (sa. sa-dyas) instantly, | straint, self-control; mom. ~o, Dh. 
immediately; 106,21 — Dh. 71. — *saj- | 261; instr. ~ena (safifiato) 85,17; 
jukam, adv. id. 110,28. | Dh. 25. 
sajjeti, vb. (denom. fr. sa. sajja, | (saūiiamati) vb. (sa. sam-yyam). 
sajya; cp. Weber, Ind. Str. I. p. 243) | to control, restrain; pp. saihata (q. 
to make ready, prepare (acc.); imp. | v.); caus. *) sañňameti, id. (acc.) ; fut. 
2. pl. „etha (nātakāni) 63,17; ger. | 3. pl. ~essanti (cittam) Dh. 37; b) 
wetva, 25,18 (navam); caus. II. saj- | saññameti, id. (acc.); imp. 2. sg. sañ- 
jāpeti (v. above); pp. sajjita, v. su- | namay[a] (attānam) Dh. 380. cp. sañ- 
sajjita. (Fausbøll, Ten Jat. p.99 traces | ñama, m. 
this verb back to Ysrj; but the signi- | saūūā, f. (sa. sarhjūā) 1) under- 
fication of that root in Pali is always | standing, conception; perception (in 
‘to throw away, leave off’ and caus. | the dogmatics : the third of the five 
is never used, except vissajjeti, Tr.). | khandha, g. v.); in this last sense: 
sajjhaya, m. (sa. svādhyāya) | 94,10; 95,18 (instr. ~aya); 80,8-10, 
repetition (of sacred texts); v. a-saj- | etc. (comp. neva-sañña-nàásañña, g. v., 
jhaya. cp. a-sañña); acc. «am (karoti, to 
samcarati, vb. (sa. sam-ycar) | think, imagine) 5,7; tumhehi arocita- 
to walk about, pass, move, rock (to | saüüaya (instr.) 25,18 (v. aroceti). — 
and fro, said of voluntary movements, | 2) sign, mark, name; acc. ~ar (adāsi, 
cp. Saīnsarati); part. m. ~anto (apa- | “made a sign to”, gen.) 50,18; (adatvā, 


raparam) 40,2. “telling nothing about it") 55,29; comp. 
samcicca, indecl. (ger. fr. sarin- | panna-bandhana-? (n. ?) 8,9 (v. panna). 
yei(t); sa. sam-citya, & °-cintya) safinüna, n. (sa. saūjnāna) = 
intentionally; 27,23. safifia?; instr. ~ena, 87,32 (olokita-®, 
saūchanna, mfn. (= sa.; pp. | = olokitakarena, 87,25; v. ākāra). 


sam-ychad) covered all over; padu- 


———M 


saūūāmeti, vb. caus., v. sahiia- 


ma-°, 4,9-27. mati. 

*saūūjānana, x. (nom. act. fr. next) saūiāya, ger. v. saijanati. 
understanding, considering, thinking; saññin, mfn. (sa. samjūin) con- 
tesam... saiijanan’-attham, “in order | scious, perceiving; thinking, imagining; 
that they might think", 21,3. m. ~1 (ahosi, “you believed, imagined"). 

saūjānāti, vb. (sa. sarh-yjūā) to | 2,0; *ujjhana-°, mfn. (v. h.). 
understand, perceive, recognize (acc.); saūūojana, n., v. samyojana. 
to conceive, imagine; aor. 3. sg. jāni sat thi, f. num. (sa. shashti) sixty ; 


(Mahasattam) 58,9; ger. *) saññaya | *°-yojanika, mfn. sixty yojanas long, 
(sīho ti) 8,19; 30,4; P) sanjanitva, 20,5. | loc. n. ~e (Manosila-tale) 61,10; ep. 
41,21. cp. *saiijanana, sañña, saññim. | catu-satthi. 

saññata (or samyata), mfn. (pp. ' satha, mfn. (sa. catha) dishonest, 
saīn-yyam, saryata) restrainifig one- | deceitful, fraudulent; m. ~o (naro) 
self, self-controlled; m. ~o, 84,29. Dh. | Dh. 262; kitavasatho, Dh. 252 (v. 
362 (w. instr. kayena, vācāya); gen. | kitava). 


253 


sathila, mfn. (an older form of 
sithila, sa. githila; the orig. base was 
*erthila or "erthira, cp. sa. cratha, 
clatha, & ved. sa. cratharyati) loose, 
relaxed; metaph. careless, or carelessly 


performed; m. ~o (paribbājo) Dh. | 


313; n. „ari (kammar) Dh. 312 


(var. lect. in both places : sithila); cp. . 


Kern, Verkl. p. 58. 


*sanikam (or sanikath), adv. (fr. ` 
sa. Ganais through sanim) slowly, . 
| Dh. 83. 151. 304; instr. pl. sabbhi, 
, Dh. 151. 29,12 (sabbhi-r-eva); gen. 
| pl. satam, Dh. 54. 77. 151. cp. santa ? 
' (santaka), samana, a-sa/, a-santa; 
: gak-kaccath, sak-kāra, sad-dhamma, 
. Sap-purisa, & satta*, 


gradually; softly, gently; cautiously, 
accurately; 14,4. 30,53. 50,18. 54,23. 
(In spite of Abh. v. 1153 & Childers 
this word has never the signification 
‘quickly’, v. Nord, Tidsskr. f. Filol. 3. 
R. V, p. 51—52; cp. Pischel, Gr. $ 84.) 

*santha, m. or n,? (cp. sa. cran- 
tha). bark-strips or fibres of bamboo (?) 


from which bowstrings were made (= | 


venuviliva, Comm.); gen. ~assa, 92,17. 
(cp. D'Alwis, Introd, p. 103.) 

santhapeti, vb. (caus. fr. next; 
sa, sam-sthapayati) to cause to stand 
firm, restore, establish (acc.); aor. 3. 
pl. esum, 114,18; inf. etum (ku- 
tumbam) 56,6. 

santhati (santhahati, or santi- 


sata 


sanhaka, z. (sa. clakshnaka) betel- 
nut (?); °-sadisa, mfn. like betel, instr. 
pl. wehi (kesehi, = pandara, white?) 
47,12 (the Birman reading s&navaka- 
sadisehi (like hempen cloth, sa. *sana- 
valka) seems to be an improvement of 
the text). ` 

sat, mfn. (== sa.; part. fr. atthi. 
g. v.) !) being; v. atthi; ?) good, right, 
righteous; acc. m, santari (padat, i. c. 
Nibbana) Dh, 368; nom. pl. santo, 


satal, n. (sa. gata) a hundred; 
a) appositive to a subst.: gāthā x, 
100 verses, Dh. 102; b) w. subst. gen., 


! à ` 
. or at the end of subst, comp. : acc. eam 


tthati), ob. (sa. sam-ysthā) to remain, | 
stand firm or still; aor. 3. sg. ~āsi 


(nibbidāya, dat. (?), v. nibbida) 67,33; 
caus. santhapeti (g. v.) cp. next. 


shape, form, appearauce; state, coudi- 


85,31 (g. v.) cp. su-santhana, mfn. 
dra; Weber, Ind. Str. 1. 237) a group 


vana-9, id., acc. «am, 15,1. 


(kahapana-") 18,13; (vassa-?, for 100 
years) Dh. 106. 110; instr. wena (for 
a hundred sc¿I pieces of money, kaha- 
pana-" being understood) 18,11; oe. 
we (pahara-?) 55,12; °) comp. w. other 
numerals, usually mfn. pl. (but also 
sg., cp. attha-satam bhattar, Mil. 
88,4) : satta-satani, n. pl. 111,14 (with- 
out subst.) ; addhateyya-9, “250”, nom. 
m. pl. «sata, 21,31; acc. m. pl. ~sate, 


. 21,55; pafica-°, “500” (v. h.); in this 
santhāna, x. (sa. samsthàna) — 


sort of comp. sata is often separated 


. from the first number and put at the 
tion; loc. ~e (chavi-9, complexion) : 
85,25; instr. pl. ~ehi (hattha-pada- | 
mukha-°) 49,5; *manussa-9, mfn. of : 
human form, 86,21; “stkara-°, mfn. : 


end of a subst, comp. : satta manussa- 
satani, “700 men", 27,13 (for more 
exx. see puiicasata); cp. sattamacca- 
satānuga (v. anuga) 110,25; 4) at 


the beg. of comp. : sata-sahassa, n. 
sanda, m(n). (sa. shanda, cp. sän- : 


“100,000”, 28,3; pl. ~āni, 109,2; 


comp. *°-agghanaka, mfn. & *°-utthi- 
of trees or plants, a wood, thicket; ' 


sandāsa, m. (sa. samdamga) a : 


pair of tongs or nippers; a vice; instr. 
wena, 5,13; 5,2 (kammara-°); 44,27 
(suvanna-°). cp. dasati. 

sanha, mfn. (sa. clakshna) smooth, 
gentle, mild; small, fine; instr. m. 
wena (amkena) 20,24. 


— e. . .—. -— — A — m: 


na, mfn. (g. v.); — *satamsamam, 
(*for à hundred years") Dh. 106, may 
be adv, with rit inserted (Fsb.), if not 
an old error for satam sama (?), v. 
sama. — cp. satika, satima. 

sata’, mfn. (sa. smrta) recollecting, 
consciotis, thoughtful, attentive; m. ~o, 
78,25 (synon. sampajana); gen. pl. 
~ānam, Dh. 293; *sadasata, mfn. 


satatam 


“always reflecting", Dh. 350. cp. sati*, 


sarati. 


satata, adv. (= sa.) continually, | 


constantly; v. sātacca & satatika. 
satapatta, m. (su. gatapattra) 
a woodpecker; nom. «o, 11,325. 
satil, part. loc., v. sat (atthi). 
sati*, f. (sa. smrti) recollection, 
thoughtfulness, attention, thinking of; 
nom. ~i, 108,22. Dh. 293; acc. im, 
104,7; ~im karoti, to think of (gen.) 
63,18; maraņa-', f. 86,20 (q. v.); sarn- 
mi-9, f. right recollection, 67,5; *sati- 
patthāna, x. (cp. Buddh. sa. smrty- 
upasthāna & upatthāna above) fixing 
the attention, earnest meditation (being 
fourfold, viz. meditation on the evils 
of body, sensation, mind, and existence, 
Childers); loc. pl. «esu (catūsu) 
91,7. cp. satimat & sarati. 
°satika, mfn. (sa. gatika) contai- 
ning or concerning a hundred (only 
e. C.); ti-yojana-9, & diyaddha-yoja- 
na-9, mfn. (v. h.). 
*satima, mfn. (cp. sa. catatama) 
the 100; paiica-9, v. paūca-sata. 
satimat, mfn. (sa. smrtimat) full 
of attention, whose thoughts are well 


collected; nom. m. «mà, 109,18. Dh. : 
379; gen. «mato, 104,12. Dh. 24: 
(metri causa : sati-°); pl..~manto, | 
Dh. 91 (do.); gen. pl. wmatam, Dh. - 


181 (do.). 

satta!, mfn. (pp. sajjati; sa. sakta) 
adhering or attached to; hence %-sat- 
taka, mfn. (e. c.) id.; m. pl. wa (saii- 
fiojana-safiga-°, “held in fetters and 
bonds”) Dh. 342; cp. a-satta. 

satta*, m. (& n.) (sa. sattva) a 
living being, creature, mortal, person; 
nom. ~o, 86,7. 89,1. 113,9; gen. assa, 


103,24; pl. wa, 17,25. 27,14. 62,25. Dh. . 
316; «acc. we (sabba-°) 38,16; gen. . 
enam, 2,6, 54,33 (imesam); nerayi- | 
ka-°, Hodhi-°, Maha-° (v. h); — 
*sattāvāsā, m. pl. (v. āvāsa); *sattū- | 
paladdhi, f. human knowledges imper- | 


fect understanding, or : false opinion con- 
cerning the real existence of ‘satta’ (?) 


254 


| [cp. Mil. 268. SBE, XXXVI. 103]; 
| loc. ~iyam (thatva) 91,13-32. 
satta?, mum. (sa. sapta) seven; 
nom. & acc, satta, 14,23. 25,20. 82,11. 
91,8; 109,2 (satt"); instr. ahi, 28,98; 
loc. „asu, 50,33; comp. °-attha (v. h.), 
seven or eight, 35,1; sattaham, seven 
days (v. aha), 23,16; %-dvāra-kotthaka, 
mfn. (g. v.); ?-bhumaka, mfn. (q. v.); 
o-yojanika, mfn. (g. v.); %-ratana (q. 
v.); sata, n. ‘700’ (v. h.). cp. satta- 
ma, etc. 
Sattapanna-guha, nom, pr. of 
a cave near Rajagaha, prob. incorrect 
spelling instead of sattapanni-guha, 
f. (sa. *saptaparni-9, cp. Vin. III, 
p. 287,17); loc. ~e, 109,51. 
sattama, mfn. (sa. saptama) the 
seventh; Joc. m. ~e (divase) 23,10-18; 
f. ~i, 103,28; comp, °-divasato, 61,3. 
sattarasa, num. (sa. saptadaca) 
‘17’; sattarasama. mfn. (sa. sapta- 
dagama) the 17; Db. X VII. ep. dasa. 
sattāvāsā, v. satta?, 
sattaham, v. satta?. 
satti, f. (sa. gakti; cp. gastrī) 
j power, energy; ”) a spear; 6,12 (asi-°); 
3) a hunting knife; acc. «im, 12,5. 
*sattupaladdhi, f., v. satta?. 
sattha', n. ag castra) a weapon; 
a-sattha, mfn. (g. v.). 
sattha?, m. (sa. sartha) a caravan, 
troop, company; v. *appa-sattha. 
| Satthar, m. (sa. cāstr) a teacher, 
, esp. nom. pr. of Buddha (“the master”); 
nom, ~i (teacher) 79,4; 28,2 (Buddha); 
. ace, e Aram, 28,10; instr. ~ara, 73,27; 
i gen. 8) ^u (sasane) 69,14; P) ~uno, 
. 78,31. 86,6. 110,5; loc. wari, 84,26; — 
| comp. Satthu-°, v. °-kappa, mfn.; 
| 0-gūrava, m. n.; °-vannita, mfn.; — 
*0_vadhaka, mfn. having murderous 
intent against the Master, m. ~o, 
108,27; *°-sasana, x. the doctrine of 
the Master, 109,38 (navanga, g. v.). 
' ep. satthuka. — 
i satthi, x. (sa. sakthi) the thigh 
| or thigh-bone; nom. „i (bhaggam) 
! 30,17. | 


& JO 


Santat 


?satthuka, mfn. e.c. (sa. çästrka), | 38; 110,1; abl. ~i, Dh. 364; loc. ~e, 


v. atita-?. 

*sadattha-pasuta, mfn. (fr. sa! 
+ attha! with ‘d’ inserted) intent upon 
one’s own aim or sake; m. no, Dh. 
166. cp. atta-d-attha. 

sada, adv. (= sa.) always, ever; 
109,27. Dh. 30. 79. 206. 226. 296; 
comp. *sadāsata, mfn., v. sata?. 

sadisa, mfn. (sa. sadrqa) like, simi- 
lar (w. gen., or instr., or both); Tatha- 
gatassa paññaya anno sadiso n’atthi, 


91,24; acc. m. eam (attano) Dh. 61; | 
most frequently e. c. mfn., e. g. puppha- | 


kannika-%, 7,29; loha-nigala-9, 11,29; 
mani-gula-?, 18,7; etc. etc. ; eka-sadisa, 
mfn. identical, pl. nā, 49,8; purima-?. 
mfn. “as above”, n. ~am, 31,28; comp. 
w. a past part. : pavittha-sadiso ahosi, 
“seemed to enter", 61,21 (cp. pubba); 
"O-rasa, mfn. (g. v.). 
sadda, m. (sa. gabda) a sound, 
tone, noise; voice, cry; a word; nom. 
„0, 97,30. 112,16; 98,30 (~ ratho iti, 
the word ratha); 23,33 (paridevana-, 
madhuragita-°); kim-saddo, 60,9. 
112,8 (v. kith?); acc. eam, 31,4. 53,16; 
40,10 (akumsu); 89,6 (do.); 59,4 (ka- 
laha-9); 112,7 (turiya-0); instr. wena. 
11,31. 16,31; 18,17-18 (acchará-9, pani- 
ppahara-°); pl. ~ā, 70,3; loc. pl. 
„esu, 71,8. — cp. nissadda, mfn. 
saddahati (& wati), vb. (sa. 
grad-/dha) to believe (w. gen. pers. 
& acc. rei); pr. 2. pl. watha (sarassa 
atthibhavam mayhan) 4,13; part. acc. 
m. pl. ~ante (mayham) 4,12; aor. 
3. sg. saddahi, 74,14; ger. witva, 1,18 
(tah); 4,14 (tassa); a-saddahitva 
(attano) 49,9; — caus, saddahapeti 
(su. graddhāpayati) to make one be- 
lieve (acc.); fut. 1. sg. ~wessimi 
(tumhe) 51,10. cp. saddha (& saddha). 
saddha, mfn. (sa. graddha) faith- 
ful, believing; m. ~o, Dh. 303; acc. 
wam, 28,3. Dh. 8; m. pl. wa, 76,32; 
a-ssaddha, v. saddhā. 
sad-dhamma, m. (sa. sad-dhar- 
ma) the sacred doctrine, the true law 
or faith; acc. ~am, 107,10 = Dh. 60. 


| 


109,21; pl. nā, 110.4; a-saddhamma, 
m., v. a-sat; 9-desana, f. Dh. 194; 
9-savana, x, Dh. 182. 

saddhā, f. (sa. graddhā) faith, 
religious belief; nom. <a, 103,16. Dh. 
333; instr. aya, Dh. 144; gen. raya. 
29,10; yathā-saddhari, adv. (v. yathà); 
a-ssaddha, mfn. v. À. 

saddhim, adv. & prp. (sa. sadhri, 
cp. sadhryae, Tr.) along, together; 


"with, together with, accompanied by 


(w. instr. before or after, sometimes 
w. gen. or other cases); piūsāņena ~ 


| kathento, 3,6; mayit <, 4,13; 15,3. 


61,10. 70,21. 72,32; ~migehi. 8,123 ~ 
bhikkhu-sarhghena, 78,1. cp. newt. 
[Childers takes it =: sa. siirdhai, 
but see Pischel, Gr. $ 103.] 

*saddhim-cara, mfn. walking 
together with; acc. m. eam (saháyam): 
Dh. 328. 

*saddhi-vihārika,m. (cp. Buddh 
sa. sārdham-vihārin) H. ‘living in the 
same vihüra', ¿ e. the famulus of a 
thera, a pupil, disciple; instr, Mena, 
82,16. cp. saddhim above. 

sanantana, mfn. (su. sanātana). 
eternal, permanent; M. ^0 (dhammo) 
106,4 == Dh. 5. 

sanikam, v. sanikam. 

santa}, mfn. (sa. cinta, pp. ycam; 
cp. sammati) appeased, pacified, tran- 
quil; ». «arm. f. «à, Dh. 96; comp. 
*0.kāya, "vica, mfn. Dh. 378 (v. 
kaya & vica); *9-citta, mfn. tranquil- 
minded, Dh. 373. cp. santavaf, mfn. 

santa? mfn. (sa. orànta, pp. y eram). 
tired, fatigued; gen. m. «assa, 107, 
— Dh. 60. 

santa?, mfn. (part., su. sat). being, 
existing, true, good; v. sat & atthi. 

*santaka, mfn. (fr. santa?) be- 
longing to, dependent, due to (gen. 
or e. C.); ^. eum (tassi) 7,10; mama 
ev (my property) 57,27; kula-9, mfn. 
(g. v.); para-9, mfn. (v. corrections); 
cp. a-sahta. 

santati, f. (= sa.) continuity, 
succession, series; 9. dhamma-’, 


santappeti 


santappeti, vb. (caus. sam-ytrp, 
sa. santarpayati) to satisfy, gladden 
(acc, & instr.); aor. 3. sg. „esi, 61,28; 
pp. santappita, gen. pl. „vānarh (sab- 
bakamehi) 61,29. 

santara, mfn. (sa. santara, fr. 
sa! -L antara) having interval or any- 
thing within; *°-bahirarh, adv. within 
ind without, Dh. 315 (guttam ~). 


—C——————————————— a - 


*santavat, mfn.(fr. santa!, qam) : 


tranquil; m. «và, Dh. 378. 
santasati, vb. (sa. sum-ytras) 
to tremble (with fear); pr. 3. pl. anti, 
86,22. cp. next & santasa. 
*santasana, n. (nom. act. fr. last) 
trembling; v. a-santasana. 
santanaka, «. (= sa.) anything 
spreading, €. g. membrane, film, cream, 
tissue of roots, efc.; a cobweb (cp. sa. 
santanika, f.); nom. „am, 84,18. 


m. pl. wii, 86,19; cp. a-santasin. 
santi! f. (sa. gānti) tranquillity, 

peace; enternal rest, Nibbana; acc. 

mim, 80,33. 110,18; ""-magga, m. the 


256 


Dp. sam-ytush) contented, pleased: 
m. ~0, Dh. 362. 
santo, pl. m., v. sal. 
santhata, mfn. (pp. santharati. 
sam-ystr; sa. samstrta) strewn, co- 
vered; subst. (n.) a cover, couch: 
comp. dhamani-°, mfn. (q. v.). 
santhana, x. (sa. cranthana. 
Vgrath) the being loosened or removed: 
salla-9, Dh. 275 (v. h.). 
santhambhati, vb. (sa. sarn- 


! Vstambh) to stand firm, take courage 


restrain oneself; inf. «itum, 34,10. 
santhava, m. (sa. sarhstava) ac- 
quaintance, familiarity, intimacy; acc 


' am (sabbhi kubbetha) 29,12; Dh 


27 (kama-rati-°, q. v.). 
sandasseti, vb. (caus. sai-ydrq 
sa. sandarcayati) to enlighten, instruc! 


. (ace.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 71,22; aor. 3 
santasa, m. (sa. santrasa) trem- . 
bling, fear; *°-ppatta, mfn. frightened, ` 


road of peace, Dh. 285; *°-para, mfn. . 


(v. para *). 

santi*, pr. 3. pl., v. atthi. 

(*santika, mfn., near, proximate; 
prob. fr. sa! + antika); several cases 
from this. stem are used as adv., or 
prp. w. gen. or e. c. (cp. sa, antikam, 
ctc.) : ') santikam, vear; to the presence 
of, to; lys» (gantvā); w. gen. 3,16. 


sg. «esi 77,25; ger. ~etva, 78,2 
pp. m. ~ito, 77,37. 

sandahati, vb. (sa. sam-ydhà 
1) trans. to put together, unite, recon 
cile; to direct, level, aim; to think 
on, comprehend, understand; ?) intr 
(cp. pati-sandahati): to stand, be the 


' case (‘sich verhalten"), or : to take 


7,30. 15,16. 24,30. 38,30. 73,14. 87,35; ` 
2) santikii, from; 6,36. 48,29. 114,4 (w. ` 


gen.); *) santike, near; in the presence 
or vicinity of, by, with, before, among; 


4,17. 17,1. 82,12. 37,14. 103,5 (w. gen.); 


comp. dhana-santike, 33,26; susana-®, ; 
56,9, nibbana’-, Dh. 372; santike : 


may also be uged in the sense of san- 


tikā : 70,15. 109,25; 109,28 (agga-san- 


| 
| 
| 
i 


tike), or of santikam : 81,11. Dh. 237. | 


santitthati, v. santhāti. 
. Santutthi, f. (sa. sam-tushti) 
satisfaction, contentment; nom. ~i, 
Dh. 204. 375. 

santusita, mfn. (= santuttha, 


' 
l 
i 


place, arise (?), or: to be comprehen 
ded (in a certain way?); pr. 3. sg 
sati (dhamma-santati, g. v.) 99,25 
(apubbam acarimam viya) 99,26 (v 
a-pubba); — ger. sandhaya (q. v.) 
pp. samhita (g. v.); cp. sandhi. 
sandana, x. (= sa.) a rope 
bond, fetter; acc, ~am, Dh. 398. 
sandeha, m. (= sa.) !) conglo 
meration (of material elements); nom 
eO (puti-9, g. v.) 107,5 = Dh. 148 
— ?) doubt, uncertainty; acc. «an 
(janassa) 110,16. 
sandhaya, indecl. (ger. sandahati 
g. v.) 1) ger. directing; dhanum ~ 
111,22 (“bending or seizing his bow”) 
2) prp. w. acc. towards, in that direc 
tion or meaning, with reference to 
concerning; sariram ~, 85,29. 
sandhavati, vb. (sa. sam-ydhàv 


i to run through (acc.); cond. 1. sg 


missam) (anekajati-samsaram) Dh 


257 


153 (in the sense of a futurum in pre- 
terito : *I should run through", like 
adhigacchissam, 104,3 (g. v.), cp. 
SBE. X. p. 43; Tr. PM. 56; Childers, 
JRAS. V. (1871) p. 222). 

sandhi, m. (= sa.) !) junction, 
union; agreement; joint; ?) interval, 
crevice, hole; acc. wim (pakara-°, g. 
v.) 90,34. 91,28-29; *aloka-°, m. (v. h.). 
— sandhi-ccheda, mfn. cutting over 
the ties, or making hole; m, a hole or 
breach in a wall; Dh. 97. ~o (naro). 

sanna, mfn. (pp. sidati; = sa.; 
cp. nisinna) set down, sunk down (into, 
loc.); m. ~o (pathke) Dh. 327. 

sannaddha, mfn. (pp. fr. next; 
== sa.) armed, mailed; m. ~o (kha- 
ttiyo) 107,34 — Dh. 387. 

sannayhati, vb. (sa. sam-Vnah) 
to bind, put on, gird on (weapons, 
acc.); ger. witva (khaggam) 33,29. 
41,19; (dhanukalapam) 75,16; pp. san- 
naddha (q. v.). 

sannicaya, m. (= sa.) gathering, 
heaping together, accumulation (of pro- 
visions); nom. «0, Dh. 92. 

*sannitthana, x. (sa. *sar- 
nishthāna) resolution, determination, 
conviction; acc. ~am (katvā) 43,27. 

sannipatati, vb. (sa. sam-ni- 
ypat) to come together, assemble; 
aor. 3. sg. sannipati, 17,25; 3. pl. 
wimsu, 10,7; ger. witva, 10,25. 72,29; 
pp. sannipatita, loc. m. ~e, 18,19; m. 
pl. wa, 31,22; caus, v. below; cp. 
next, 

sannipata, m. (= 84.) union, 
collection, assembly; acc. „arh (ak- 
kharanam) Dh. 352; Joc. ~amhi 
(devata-°) 110,20. 

sannipāteti, vb. (caus. sanni- 
patati) to collect, call together, as- 
semble (acc.); ger. wetva, 6,2; caus. 
II. *sannipatapeti, id.; aor. 3. sg. 
mesi, 10,6; ger. wetva, 8,5. 42,5. 

?sannibha, mfn. (e. c. = sa.) 
like, similar; m. «o (uttatta-kana- 
ka-°) 85,7. 

sannivasa, m. (= sa.) living 
together, company with Ten d nom. 

Pali Glossary. - 


sabbaūūt 


«0, Dh. 206; instr, „sena (satar) 
29,13; 37,55. — *loka-°, m. the society 
of men, all the world, nom. ~o (sa- 
kalo) 16,15. 

sannisinna, mfn, (sa. sam-ni- 
shanna, ysad) sitting together; m. pl. 
wa, 29,31. 

sannissita, mfn. (Buddh. sa. 
sam-ni-Qrita) connected with; acc. m. 
sam (vaciduccarita-?) 86,s. 

sanneti, vb. (sa. sarh-y/nī) to mix, 
knead (acc.); grd. ~wetabba, n. «am 
(cunnam) 83,2. 

sapatha, m. (sa. capatha) an oath; 
acc. eam (katva) 41,5; (yakkhim 
akārayi, “made her take an oath") 
111,9. 

sappa, m. (sa. sarpa) a snake, 
serpent; nom. «O0, 52,17; acc. ~am 
(udaka-°) 52,28. 

sappi, m. (& m.?) (sa. sarpis) 
clarified butter, ghee; dvandva comp. 
9-madhu-?, 61,26. 

sappurisa, m. (sa. satpurusha; 
cp. sat) a good man; ^om. ~o, Dh. 
54; acc. „am, Dh. 208. 

sabba, mfn. (sa. sarva) whole, 
entire, all, every; m. ~o, 85,6; 90,22 
(loko, ‘all men’); acc. wath, 4,16; f. 
~ā (nadi) 48,6; n. ~am, everything, 
55,19; 70,24 (adittam); 96,15 (~atthi); 
20,5. 31,28 (‘the whole story’); pl. m. 
we, 3,4; f. nā, 66,21 (nom.); 85,4 
(acc.); instr. ~ehi, 11,10; 70,22; gen. 
«esam, 11,3. 114,28; most frequently 
at the beg. of subst. comp. : 4,24. 7,23. 
10,6, etc. ete.; sabbaiiga-°, v. aüga; 
-gandhāpana, v. apana; °-loka, v. 
abhibhu, adhipacca, hita; sabbalam- 
kara-9, v. alamkàra; sabbakara-°, v. 
akara; sabbābharaņa-', v. abharana; 
sabbitthiyo, v. itthī; cp. next etc. ete. 

*sabba-cetaso, adv., ù. cetas. 

*sabbaüjaha, mfn. (sa. *sarvam- 
jaha; cp. jahati) ‘having left all’, m. 
w0, Dh. 353. 

sabbaūūū, m. (sa. sarva-jūa) om- 
niscient* (said of a Buddha); hence 
*sabbaūūutā, f., omniscience; instr. 
„āya (Satthu) 110,14. 


17 


sabbato 


sabbato, adv. (sa. sarvatas) from 
all sides, entirely; *°-bhagena, adv. 
on every side, 27,2-5 (cp. bhāga). 

sabbattha, adv. (sa. sarvatra) 
everywhere; Dh. 83. 193. 348. 361. 

sabbada, adv. (sa. sarvada) al- 
ways; at any rate; 108,5; Dh. 207; 
340 (v. 7. sabbadhi, ‘everywhere’, ‘in 
every direction’), 

*sabbadhi, adv, (fr. sa. *sarva- 

dha (= vigvadha), Weber, Ind. Str. 
III, 392; cp. sarvadry-aūc) on all 
sides, in every respect; Dh. 90; 340 
v. l). 
*sabba-bhasa, mfn. (cp. bhasa, 
f.) speaking all languages; gen. pl. 
wanam (sattānam, “all people of 
different tongues”) 114,39. 

*sabbavidu, mfn. (cp. vidu, vidū; 
sa, sarva-vid) all knowing; m. nū 
(ham asmi) Dh. 353. 

*sabba-samukkamsika, mfn., 
v. samukkarsika. 

sabba-seta, mfn. (sa. sarva- 
Qveta) white all over; m. «o, 21,54. 

sabbaso, adv. (sa. sarvagas) 
wholly, entirely; at all, at any rate, 
always (w. negation : not at all, never); 
34,95. 91,19. 93,32. 114,5; Dh. 265. 
367. 419. 

sabba-sovanna, mfn. (sa.sarva- 
Sauvarna) entirely of gold, golden all 
over; m. ~O (kayo) 84,26. 85,4-6. 

sabbābhibhū, m(fn). (sa. sarvā- 
bhibhū) who has conquered all; Dh. 
353. 

sabbha, mfn. (sa. sabhya) polite, 
honorable; v. a-sabbha. 

sabbhi, v. sat. 

sabhā, f. (= sa.) an assembly or 
meeting; a large room or hall; dham- 
ma-', f. (q. 9). = 

sabhaga, mfn., v. sal. 

sabhāva, m. (sa. sva-bhāva) na- 
tural state or disposition, nature; comp. 
*asantasana-°, mfn. (v. a-santasana). 

sama’, m. (sa. cama) tranquillity, 
equanimity, absence of passion; acc. 
vain carati, to lead a life of tranquil- 
lity, 7,26. Dh. 142 (in this construction 


MM GINE D UU U U. .)!,!?,!í((gaGdiii ln]n]L]A].]. A te ECC c c 


258 


difficult to be distinguished from sama, 
m.); *sama-cariya, f. the living in 
tranquillity; nā, instr. (shortened of 
„āya) Dh. 388. cp. samatha, sam- 
mati, etc. 

sama?, mfn. (= sa.) *) like, equal 
to (gen. or e. c.); M. ~o (me saccena) 
108,31; pl. ~ā (bhavanti) 74,2; ?-vi- 
bhatta, n. (g. 9.) ; gopanasi-bhogga-®, 
47,22 (g. v.); dosa-', riga-°, mfn. Dh. 
202; pathavī-%, Dh. 95; — 5) even; 
acc. m. wath (maggam kāretvā) 62,6; 
— °) Just, impartial; m. subst, impar- 
tiallity, justice (synon. dhamma); instr. 
vena (nayati pare) Dh. 257; dham- 
mena «ena, 42,6 (cp. samal). cp. 
sama, f. & samana, mfn. 

samagga, mfn. (sa. samagra) 
1) all, entire; ?) agreeing, harmonious; 
acc. m. pl. ~e (sāvake) 108,20; gen. pī. 
enam, Dh. 194; *-vàsa, m. living 
together in unity & harmony, acc. „am 
(vasanto, taya saddhim) 58,25; Joc. 
we, 46,17. cp. sāmaggi. 

samangin, mfn. (= sa.) & *sa- 
mañgi-bhūta, mfn. endowed with, pos- 
sessed of (instr.); gen. m. ~bhūtassa 
(kīmaguņehi) 67,25. 

samaūūā, f. (sa. samājňā) name, 
appellation, term; nom. «à, 97,1. 

samana, m. (sa. Gramana) an 
ascetic, mendicant monk, esp. (by non- 
Buddhists) said of the Buddhist men- 
dicants & even of Buddha himself, but 
also of the monks of other sects; nom. 
~o (Gotamo) 71,25. 110,8; Dh. 265. 
388 (false etymology : samitatta, sa- 
macariya, v. h.); Dh. 254-55 (n’atthi 
bahiro, v. h.); gen. pl: ~anam (Sakya- 
puttiyanam) 73,30; — comp. *°-dham- 
ma, m. the ascetic duties, acc. ~am, 
15,12. 45,7; paccha-°, m. (g. v.); ma- 
ha-°, m. the great S. (i. e. Gotama 
Buddha) 76,51; dvandva comp. °-brah- 
mana, m. pl. 104,3; acc. we, 19,4. 
cp. samanha, samanera. 

samatikkanta, mfn. (pp. sam- 
ati-kkamati; sa. ykram, samatikran- 
ta) transgressed, surpassed, overcome: 


209 


€. C. free from : *papaiica-°, Dh. 195 
(g. v.) cp. next, 


samatikkama, m. (sa. samati- 
krama) transgressing, surpassing, over- 
coming; dat. „vāja (soka-parideva- 
nam) 90,1. 

*samativijjhati, vb. (sa. *sam- 
ati-/vyadh) to pierce or break through, 
penetrate (acc.); pr. 3. sg. „ati (agā- 
ram vutthi) 106,3; = Dh. 14. 

samattha, mfn. (sa. samartha) 
able to, capable of (inf.); venturing 
(do.); knowing to behave, or capable 
of finding 8 way; m. ~o (jale pi thale 
pi) 4,14; 27,16. 35,19. (w. inf); <o 
n'āhosi (do, ‘did not venture’) 40,9; 
f. nā, 27,115 pl. nā, 39,12. cp. sam- 
atthiya. 

samatha, m. (sa. camatha 
sama !; acc. eam (gatāni, “subdued”) 
Dh. 94. 

samanantara, mfn. (= sa.) im- 
mediately following; nā, adv. (cp. sa. 
samanantaram) immediately after, 
80,18. 

samanta, mfn. (= sa.) being on 
every side, whole, entire; abl. adv, 
2) <, on all sides, around, completely; 
38,2; 90,33 (w. gen., nagarassa); 104,5; 
b) ~ato, id. ; 63,23. 85,8. cp. sāmantā. 

samannāgata, mfn. (sa. saman- 
vagata) attended by, endowed with, 
possessed of (instr. or e. c.); M. «o 
(dhammehi) 3,24; (dasahi aūgehi) 
82,14; 85,19. 91,26-27; f. pl. wa (asad- 
dhamma-9) 51,36. 

*samannāharati, vb. (sa. *sam- 
anu-ā-yhr) to direct one's whole at. 
tention to (acc.); ger. ~itvā (sabba- 
cetaso, “seizing upon it with their 
whole minds") 71,24. 

samappita, mfn. (pp. fr. neat; 
sa. samarpita) delivered over to (loc.); 
endowed with (instr. or e. c.); m. pl. 
„ā (nirayamhi) 108,7 — Dh. 315; 
gen. m. ~wassa (kamagunehi) 67,5; 
comp. yaso-bhoga-?, mfn. Dh. 303. 

samappeti, vb. (sa. samarpayati, 
caus. sam-vr) to deliver over, consign 


— 
— J 


Bamaaana 


(acc. & gen.); aor. 3. sg. ~appayi, 
110,27. 

samaya, m. (= sa.) 1) time, oc- 
casion, season; nom, ~o (pabbajja-°) 
45,12; acc. „arii (ekar, once") 66,23. 
71,20; paccūsa-° (“at dawn") 68,9; 
pubbanha-°, 76,15; majjhantika-0, 
97,34; instr. wena (tena) 5,32. 7l,a. 
74,17; aparena ~, "afterwards", 95,23. 
101,16; loc. ~e (ekasmim, once upon 
a time) 30,25; tasmilit ~, 40,30. 62,10; 
addharatta-°, “at midnight", 40,8; 
nidagha-°, 3,32; sāyaņha-0, 2,33; 14,11. 
— *) view, doctrine, system, religious 
persuasion; *sammà-viliata-6, mfn. 
113,4 (v. vitiata). 

samalamkata, mfn. (sa. sam- 
alaiikrta) well adorned, decorated; 
n. ~am (vitàna-", g. v.) 112,5. 


samassattha, mfn. (sa. samā- 
gvasta, pp. sam-i-\/cvas) revived, 
recovered; -kāle, when he was re- 
covered, 20,7. cp. next. 


sSamassaseti, vb. (caus, sam-à- 
VGvas) to reanimate, comfort (acc.); 
imp. 2. sg. ~ehi (nam) 46,11; aor. 
3. sg. „vesi, 46,12; ger. wetva, 1,11. 
57,36. 89,19. 

sama, f. (= sa.) a year (= 
vassa); satani-samam, Dh. 106 (v. 
sata !). 

samagacchati, vb. (sa. sam-a- 
Vgam) to come together, assemble, 
arrive; w. instr, to meet with, to be 
united with, cling to; aor. 2. sg. 
„gaūchi (piyehi) 106,25 = Dh. 210; 
ger. ~gantva, 10,7. 75,36; pp. «gata, 
M. ~o, 110,9; pl. wa, 108,3. 109,3. 
ep. next. 

samāgama, m. (= sa.) coming 
together, meeting with; assembly; 
nom. ~o, 20,20. 112,16. Dh. 207. 


samadapeti, vb. (caus. samā- 
diyati; sa. samadapayati) to incite, 
arouse (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 71,22; 
aor. 3. sg. eesi, 77,25; ger. wetva, 
78,23; op. m. ~ito, 77,27. 

samādāna, n. (= sa.) taking 
upon oneself, undertaking; a vow; 


17* 


samādiyati 


miccha-ditthi-°, mfn. “embracing false 
doctrines", pl. mā, Dh. 316. 
samadiyati, vb. (sa. sam-ā-y/dā, 
cp. adiyati) to take upon oneself, adopt 
(acc.); ger. 8) ~adaya (vissarh dham- 
mam) 106,5 = Dh. 266; >) ~adiy- 
itvā (sīlam) 14,18; caus. samādapeti 
(g. v.); samādāna, n., v. above. 
samādhi, m. (== sa.) tranquillity 
of mind, meditation, self-concentration, 
the highest stage of jhana (g. v.); 
nom. ~i, 103,22; samma-°, 67,5 (right 


meditation); acc. „im (adhigacchati) ` 


Dh. 249. 365; instr. inā, Dh. 144; 
comp. *9-jhàna, n. 109,21. 

samana!, mfn. (= sa.) like, equal; 
same, alike; comp. *samāna-balādi- 
padesa, mfn., 43,31 (v. padesa); 
*0.vava-bhāva, mfn. 43,29 (v. vaya!); 
*O vasa, mfn. dwelling with equals, 
m. ~0, 104,21; ""-samvàasa, m. the 
dwelling together with equals (family- 
life), nom. ~o, Dh, 302 (2. ed. [a]- 
samana-vaso ?); *manussa-samana- 
sarira, mfn. with body like men, m. 
pl. mā (maccha) 25,23. cp. sama, 
samaniya. 

*samüna?, mfn. (part. med. fr. 
atthi) being (pleonast, added mostly 
to past part., or sometimes to adj.); 
m. ~o (puttho) 90,4; (vutto) 98,16; 
(andho) 25,15; acc. pl. m. ~e (matte) 
59,26. cp. Pischel, Gr. S 561. 

*samāniya, mfn. (fr. samāna', 
cp. sa. samānyā, adv.) joined, assem- 
bled; m. pl. ~& (puttà me, "my 
children are all about me") 105,5. 

samāneti, vb. (sa. sam-à-yni) 
to collect, assemble (acc.); ger. ~wetva 
(sarhgham) 114,7. 

samāpajjati, vb. (sa, sam-ā- 
Vpad) to attain, arrive to, enter into 
(acc.); aor. 3. sg. wpajji (catuttha- 
jjhanam) 80,5. cp. next etc. 

samapatti, f. (= sa.) ‘attain- 
ment’, one of the eight successive states 
of the ecstatic meditation; abl. ~iya 
(ākāsānaūcāyatana-', g. v.) 80,6, etc. 

samāpanna, mfn. (pp. samā- 
pajjati; — sa.) arrived to, entered 


260 


into (acc. or e. c.); m. ~o, 8045; 
iccha-lobha-°, Dh, 264. - 

samaraddha, mfn. (sa. samā- 
rabdha) undertaken, begun; su-?, mfn. 
Dh. 293 (q. v.). 

[samāsati], vb. (sa. sam-yas) 
to sit together, associate with (instr.); 
pot, 3. sg. med. samasetha (sabbhir 
eva) 29,12. 

samasato, adv. (abl. samāsa, m. 
abridgement; sa. samasatas) concisely, 
briefly, in an abridged form, 114,12. 

samāhita, mfn. (= sa.) put to- 
gether, collected, composed, e. c. fur- 
nished with; m. ~o, Dh. 362 (col- 
lected in mind); *paiia-sila-°, mfn. 
Dh, 229 (g. v.); a-samahita, su-sama- 
hita, mfn., v. a-9, su-®. 

samijjhati, vb. (sa. sam-yrdh) 
to prosper, succeed, flourish, ripen; 
pr. 3, sg. eati (viriya-phalam) 42,14-19, 
cp. samiddhi. 

*samifijati, vb. (a secondary for- 
mation of sam-ying) to tremble, falter; 
pr. 3. pl. „anti, 106,29 = Dh. 81. 
(cp. Weber, Ind. Str. IIT, 397; Ol- 
denberg, KZ. XXV (1881) 324.) 

*samitatta, n. (fr. samita, pp. 
sameti; sa. *camita-tva) the being 
appeased or quieted; abl. wi (pāpā- 
nam) Dh. 265. 

samiti, f. (— sa.) coming together, 
meeting; battle, war; acc. «im, Dh. 
921. 

samiddhi, f. (sa. samrddhi) suc- 
cess, increase, perfection, welfare; acc. 
eim (attano) Dh. 84. 

samipa, n. (= 84.) nearness, 
proximity; only used adverbially in 
oblique cases: ‘near’, ‘in the vicinity’, 
‘towards’ (often e. c.); acc. «arm, 
56,10; 8,24 Tean. 65,14 (dvāra-?); 
instr. ~ena, 49,5 (Apana-°); loc. ~e, 
44,29; 21,18 (nagara-°); 73,20 (gan- 
dhakuti-°) ; 84,5: (Rajagaha-°); ekas- 
mim gāma-samīpe, in the vicinity of a 
certain village, 33,25; ~amhi (Bodhi- 
manda-?) 113,2; — samipa-ttha, mfn., 
standing near; acc. m. eam, 110,21. 

samirati, vb. (pass. sam-yir, 


261 


prob, contraction of *samiriyati) to 
be moved or shaken; pr. 8. sg. «ati 
(vàtena) 106,29 — Dh. 8l. 
samukkamsati, eb. (sa. sam- 
ut-Vkrsh) to elevate, praise, extol 
(acc.); pot. 3. sg. ~kamse (attanam) 
103,0. cp. sāmukkamsika. 
samugga, m. (sa. samudga) a 
box, casket; acc. „arh (catujati-gan- 
dha-°) 41,5; loc. ~e (suvanna-?) 41,6. 
samucchinna, mfn. (= sa.; pp. 
samucchindati) uprooted, destroyed ; 
n. am, Dh. 250 = 263. 
samutthana, x. (sa. samutthāna) 
rise, origin; *°ajjhatta-°, & *°bahid- 
dhā-%, mfn. (v. h.). 
*samutthapana, w. (nom. act. 
fr. next) the causing to rise or start; 
katha-°, 54,10 (°-attham, “for sake of 
starting talk”). 
samutthapeti, vb. (caus. sam- 
utthati, ysthā; sa. samutthāpayati) 
to cause to rise (acc.); aor. 3. 89. vesi 
(vatam) 19,15; 3. pl. wesum (kathan, 
“they discussed the matter") 29,28. 
samutthita, mfn. (pp. samu- 
tthāti, Vstha; sa. samutthita) risen, 
` sprung from; 9. wath (ayasa, v. ayas) 
106,19 = Dh, 240. 
samuttejeti, vb. (caus. *sam- 
ut-ytij; Buddh. sa. samuttijayati) to 
incite, inflame (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti, 
71,28; aor. 3. sg. wesi, 77,25; ger. 
„etvā, 78,22; pp. m. ~ito, 77,27. 
samudaya, m. (= sa.) rise, origin, 
cause; nom. ~0 (rūpassa) 94,8; (du- 
kkha-kkhandassa) 66,12; *°-dhamma, 
mfn., subject to birth, s. eam, 68,37 
(opp. nirodha-dhamma); dukkha-°, 
m. the cause of suffering; „sam ariya- 
saccam, 67,12, cp. dukkha-nirodha. 
samudacarati, vb. (sa. sam-ud- 
ā-ycar) to appear, behave; to follow, 
attack, treat, overcome; to speak to, 
address (acc.); pr. 3. pl. wanti (aū- 
ñamaññam āvuso-vādena) 79,7; 96,30; 
grd, „itabba, 79,7-10. 
. samudāhata, mfn. (sa. samu- 
dahyta, ybr) mentioned, named; acc. 
m. pl. ~e (potthake) 114,17. 


samodhāneti 


samudda, m. (sa. samudra) the 
sea, ocean; nom. „0 (maha-°) 95,13; 
acc. wath, 20,19; gen. ~assa, 2,11; 
loc. ~e (maha-°), 10,5; gen. pl. 
~anam (catunnar) 89,14; ku-samud- 
da, m., v. ku-; °-tira, ».; °-devata, 
f. %-pitthe & 9-majjhe, Joc. (q. v.); 
dakkhina-°, m. & *pakati-°, m. (v. h.). 

samuppāda, m. (sa. samutpāda) 
rise, origin; *dukkha-°, m. the origin 
of pain; acc. eam, 107,19 = Dh. 191 
(synon. dukkha-samudaya, 67,12); 
paticca-°, m. 66,5 (v. h.). 

samussaya, m. (sa. samucchraya 
collection, EIE). 
gation of the elements (mental and 
material) of a human being; existence, 
birth, body; ^om. ~o (antimo, the 
last existence) 108,17; acc. ^ai, 80,23. 
cp. next. 

samussita, mfn. (pp. sam-ud- 
Veri; sa. samucchrita) collected, joined 
together; or, elevated, arrogant (?) 
Dh. 147. 

samūhata, mfn. (pp. fr. neat; 
sa. samuddhata) done away, pulled 
out, extirpated; %. wath (mūlaghaccar) 
Dh, 250. 

*samuhanti, vb. (sa. *sam-ud- 

han) to lift up, throw away, abolish 
acc.); imp. 3. sg. wantu (sikkhapa- 
dani, samgho) 79,12. pp., v. above. 

samüheti, eb. (caus. sam-yüh; 
sa. samūhayati) to collect, assemble 
(acc.); ger. ~etvā (sarhgham) 114,15. 

samekkhati, vb. (sa. sam-yiksh) 
to investigate, examine, consider, pon- 
der (acc.); ger. samekkhiya (kathā- 
maggam) 118,30. 

sameti!, vb. (sa. emit ‘to 
come together’, agree with (insér.); 
pr. 3. sg. ~eti (sutam ditthena) 54,15. 

sameti?, vb. (caus. sammati; sa. 
Gamayati) to appease, quiet (acc.); pr. 
3. sg. ~eti (pāpāni) Dh. 265; pp. 
samita, v. samitatta, n. 

*samodhàaneti, vb. (denom. fr. 
samodhāna, sa.'samavadhāna) to put 


| together, connect, compare; to enume- 


sampajiina 


rate, calculate, sum up (acc.); aor. 3. 
8g. nesi (jàtakam, g. v.) 29,17. 
*sampajüna, mfn. (nomen agentis 
fr. sam-pra-y]ià) conscious, selfpos- 
sessed: m. ^0, 78,25; gen. pl. „ānam, 
Dh. 293 (synon. sata?). 
sampajjati, vb. (sa. sam-ypad) 
1) to prosper, succeed; pr. 3. sg. wati 
(takes root) 37,7; part. «anta, flou- 
rishing, 102,7 (a-sampajjantesu, Joc. 
pl.); fut. 3. pl. wissanti (sassani) 
ib.; ?)to become, turn into (nom.); 


pot. 3. sg. ~eyya (dadhi) 101,27; — 


Dp. sampanna (g. v.), caus. sampā- 


deti (q. v.), cp. sampatti. 
*sampaticchati, vb. (sa. sam- 
prati-yish) to receive, accept; consent, 
agree to (acc.); aor. 3. sg. wicchi 
(sādhū'ti) 5,1. 6,29. 58,16; 46,15; 3. 
pl. ~iechimsu (tam silam) 75,56; ger. 
@icchitva, 1,18. 14,14-20. 62,25; pp. 
evicchita, 55,23 (loc. abs. tena we, 
when he had consented). 
sampatta, mfn. (sa. sam-prapta) 
reached, attained; who has reached, 
arrived, come to; m. mo (w. ace. 
Mahāvihāram) 114,5; m. pl. nā 
(used as tempus finitum ‘came’) 20,13. 
62,22; acc. pl. m. we (yācake) 14,19; 
comp. °-nava (a ship arrived there), 
27,12 (acc. ~ar); parisa (the as- 
sembly present there) 86,10 (dat. „āya). 
sampatti, f. (= sa.) success, 
prosperity; excellence,. perfection; 
pleasure, bliss; magnificence, glory; 
nom. wi, 58,11; 42,10; acc. wim, 4,18. 
63,17; rüpa-?, beauty, 19,11; dibba-, 
divine bliss, 23,17. | 
sampanna, mfn. (= sa.; pp. 
sampajjati) 1) complete, perfect, ex- 
cellent; °-sassa, 5. ‘excellent crops, 
26,18; *9-vijja-carana, mfn. perfect in 
knowledge and behaviour, m. pl. nā, 
Dh. 144; *°-sila, mfn. perfect in vir- 
tues, gen. pl. «anam, Db. 57; sab- 
baiiga-°, mfn. (v. aga); — *) endowed 
with, possessed of, full of (w. instr. 
or more frequently e. c.); m. ~o (pha- 
larukkhehi) 2,20; comp. *thama-®, 1,5; 
pakka-phala-pindi-°, 2,1; khanti-me- 


202 


ttànuddaya-, 7,12; ana-°, 10,26; sara-°, 
18,4; nàna-0& 24,14; anubhava-®, 
85,23; sila-°, 41,35; sabba-lakkhana-®, 
55,5; mala-gandha-vibhiuti-°, 61,4; 
parideva-soka-°, 69,52; sila-dassana-®, 
Dh. 217 (v. h.). 

sampayāta, mfn. (sa. samprayā- 
ta) come together, having advanced 
towards; m. ~o (Yamassa santike) 
Dh. 237. 

sampayoga, m. (sa. samprayoga) 
joining, conjunction, connection (with, 
instr.); nom. ~o (appiyehi) 67,9. 

[samparivatta, m.] (sa. sam- 
parivarta) turning or rolling round; 
only in comp. *9-sàyin, mfn. “rolling 
oneself about", nom. m. ~1, Dh. 325. 

samparivareti, vb. (caus. sam- 
pari-yvr) to surround (acc); ger. 
„ayitvā (nam) 64,30. 

*sampavedhin, mfn. (fr. sam- 
pavedhati, to tremble, shake, swing 
to and fro; sa, sam-pra-yvyath) shak- ji 
ing, trembling; only in comp, a-sam- 
pavedhin, mfn. (v. h.). 

sampassati, vb. (sa. sam-ypaç) 
to look upon, regard, consider (acc.); 
part, m. «passam (vipulam sukham) 
Dh. 290; part. med. m. ~passamano 
(adinavam) 93,s2 (considering it dan- 
gerous). | 

sampahamseti, vb. (sa. sam- 
praharshayati, caus. sam-pra-yhrsh) 
to. make glad (acc.); pr. 3. sg. ~eti 
(bhikkhu) 71,5; aor. 3. sg. «esi, 
11,5; ger. ~wetva, 78,92; pp. ~ito, 
m. 77,97. 

sampadeti, vb. (caus.sampajjati; 
sa, sampādayati) to bring about, pro- 
duce, supply, prepare (acc.); intr. to 
go to work, endeavour, strive; pr. 3. 
sg. ~eti (ratham) 98,17; imp. 2. pl. 
„etha (appamadena) 80,2; ger. 
wetva, 6,4. 57,21; pp. sampadita, 
prepared, 41,9. 

sampāpunāti, vb. (sa. sam-pra- 

àp) to reach, come to, arrive at 
i. aor. 3. sg. sampapuni, 29,25; 
3. pl. eimsu, 59,21. 

sampunna, mfn. (sa. sampürna) 


263 


complete, accomplished; *°-pada, mfn. 
complete up to the single words; x. 
(adv.) ~am (correctly, perfectly) 113,7. 
samphassa, m. (sa. samsparca) 
touch, contact; nom. ~o (*cakkhu-?) 
70,26; (*mano-°, g. v.) 70,5; acc. 
~ari (hattha-°) 51,9. cp. vedayita, 
vifiiana, 
samphusati, vb. (sa. sarñ-Vsprç) 
to come in contact with, touch; suffer, 
endure (acc.); aor. 8. sg. ^,usi (metri 
causa) 78,30 (ābādhar). 
sambandha, m. (= sa.) con- 
nexion, conjunction; relationship (with, 
instr.); abl. à (tena, on account of 
the relationship with him) 112,52. 
sambahula, mfn. (== sa.) nu- 
merous; instr, pl. wehi (bhikkhuhi) 
16,16. 
sambādha, m. (= sa.) a narrow 
place; press, crowd; *°-tthana, n. the 
interstice between the legs, in the 
comp. pakata-bibhaccha-9, mfn. having 
the loathsome parts of the body dis- 
closed, f. pl. wa, 65,8. 
*sambahati (& *sambāheti), vb. 
(sa. sam -|- Vvāh (bah)) to rub (acc.); 
aor, 3. sg. ~bahi (paharam) 50,24. 
sambuddha, 1) mfn. (= sa.) 
awakened, clear in insight; som. m. 


~0, 80,25; gen. pl. ~anam, Dh. 181; | 


?) m. a Buddha; gen. «assa, 104,12; 
loc. we, 81,4; *°-mata, n, the doctrine 
of the Buddha, 114,13 (°-kovida); 
sammi~°, m. the enlightened one, the 
supreme Buddha, instr. ~ena, 88,5; 
gen. ~wassa, 81,5; Kassapa~°, 28,18 


g. v.). 

sambodhi, f. (= sa.) perfect 
knowledge, supreme wisdom (of a 
Buddha); dat. «aya, 66,30. 93,8; 
*0_narayana, mfn. destined to obtain 
supreme wisdom, m. ~0, 79,34; *0-añ- 
ga, (m.) i.e. sambojjhaūga = bo- 
jjhañga (q. sJ); Dh. 89 (loc. pl. 
ex 6SU }. 

sā , bhata, mfn. (sa. sam-bhrta) 
collected, produced, earned; gen. n. 
ewassa (dhanassa) 52,5. 

sambhava, m (= sa.) birth, 


sammatta 


origin; being, existence; mom. ~o 
(*jati-°, existence) 17,28; instr. wena 
(matu-kucchi-°, on account of the so- 
journ in the mother’s womb) 62,28; 
atta-%, & *matti-°, mfn. (g. v.). 

sambhiira, m. (= sa.) bringing 
together; abl. nā (aiiga-®, g. v.) 98,30. 

sambhūta, mfn. sa.) pro- 
duced, arisen, come into being; n. 
eam, 09,32. 

samma-, 
(qo). | 

*samma, indecl., a term of familiar 
address to inferiors or equals (not to 
women), sometimes also with plural 
ending (sammā) : friend! my dear! 
[possibly some derivate from ygam, 
or cam, indecl. (ved. sa.), cp. Gamya, 
camya, ete., if not, after all, akin to 
samma (v. below); it is by some con- 
sidered as related to sa, saumya; Fāus- 
ball, Five Jat. p. 37, hesitatingly, refers 
to sa. carman; Pischel, KZ (BB.) I. 
p. 176, to sa. *camba]; .1,20. 6,23; w. 
foll. voc. :  kumbhila, 3,15; ~ mora, 
10,11; ~ kappaka, 44,22. 

sammajjati, vb. (sa. sam-/mrj) 
to sweep, cleanse, scrub (acc.); grd. 
m. witabbo (deso) 82,23; f. wa, 84,22; 
pp. v. next, 

sammattha, mfn. (pp. samma- 
jjati; sa. sam-mrshta) cleansed, smooth; 
*0-passa, mfn. well-formed, beautiful, 
acc. f. ~am (kumarim) 47,19. 

sammata, mfn. (— sa.) !) con- 
sidered as, so called; sutta-°, 110,5; 
2) elected, authorized; m. (& n.?) a 
deputy; a select committee; *samgha-°, 
109,5. 

sammati, vb. (sa. yçam) to be- 
come quiet, appeased; to cease; to 
rest, dwell; pr. 3. sg. ~ati, Dh. 3; 
390 (sammati-m-eva); 3. pl. „anti 
(verāni) 106,25-24 — Dh. 5; caus. 
sameti, pp. santa (g. v.) cp. sama, 
samatha. 

sammatta, mfn. (= sa.) inebri- 
ated, maddened, mad with joy, love &; 
m. pl. «à (macchā) 19,5; *putta- 
pasu-°, mfn. one who is fully engaged 


shortened of sammā 


:ammad- 


in taking care of his children and cattle, 
Dh. 287. 
sammad-, sandhi-form of sammā 
(g. v.) cp. next etc. 
*samma-d-akkhata, mfn. (fr. 
sammā -H akkhata; sa. *samyag- 
akhyata) well preached; loc, ne 
(dhamme) Dh. 86. 
samma-d-aiià, f. (sa. samyag- 
Aja) perfect knowledge; *°-vimutta, 
mfn. (v. añña) Dh. 57. 96. 
*samma-ppajàna, mfn. (fr. 
samma + pajana, g. v.) possessed 
of complete knowledge, m. <o, Dh. 20. 
*samma-ppaiiia, f. (fr. samma 
+ pana, g. v.) complete knowledge, 
clear understanding; instr. „āya, 
107,18 = Dh. 190. 
sammasati, vb. (sa, sam-/mrg) 
to take hold of, grasp; to consider, 
meditate, perceive fully (acc.); pr. 3. 
sg. „ati (khandhanam udayavyayam) 
Dh. 374. 
samm a, indecl. (sa. samyak) com- 
pletely, wholly, truly, properly, duly, 
correctly, clearly; at the beg. of comp. 
it is shortened to samma- before 
double cons, (v. samma-ppajana, etc.), 
and before vowels an euphonical -d- 
géneraly is inserted (v. samma-d- 
akkhāta, etc.); likewise before a foll. 
eva: samma-d-eva, 68,25; 3) beyond 
comp.: 24,32 (vaddhito); 82,16 (? sam- 
ma-vattitabbam, v. sammā-vattati 
below); 99,31 (vadeyya); 102,6-7 (vas- 
sati, sampajjissanti); Dh. 89 (subha- 
vit); Dh. 373 (vipassato); b) at 
the beg. of comp., v. separately. 
sammā-ājīva, m. (sa. samyag- 
ājīva) right living, 67,4. 
samma-kammanta, m. (sa.sam- 
yak-karmānta) right conduct, 67,4. 
sammā-ditthi, f. (sa. samyag- 
drshti) right belief, 67,5. 96,5. 
*sammā-paņihita, mfn., v. pa- 
nihita. 
 "sammà-parinüma, m., v. pa- 
rinama. ° 
samma-vattati, vb. (probably 
to be read in two words) to observe 


264 


a right conduct (towards, /oc.); grd. 
n. witabbam, 82,16. cp. next. 
*sammā-vattanā, f. right con- 
duct or behaviour; 82,17. 
sammā-vācā, f. (sa. samyag- 
vac) right speech, 67,4. 
sammā-vāyāma, m. (sa. sam- 
yag-vyayama) right endeavour, 67,5. 
*sammā-viūiiāta, mfn. perfectly 
known or understood; °-samaya, mfn. 
having a perfect knowledge in religious 
doctrines, 113,4. 
samma-samkappa, m. (sa. sam- 
yak-sarnkalpa) right aspiration or re- 
solve, 67,4; *°-gocara, mfn. “following 
true desires" (opp. miccha-°) Dh, 12. 
samma-sati, f. (sa. samyak- 
smrti) right recollection, 67,5. 
sammā-samādhi, m. (sa. sam- 
yak-°) right meditation, 67,5. 
sammā-sambuddha, m. (sa. 
samyak-°) v. sambuddha. 
sammukha, mfn. (= sa.) being 
face to face with (gen.); present; sui- 
table; m. pl. wa, 79,20; abi. (adv.) 
„ā (Bhagavato, in the presence of) 
98,29; 109,24 (sutvā, “having heard 
it from B. himself"); comp. *°-cinna, 
n. a manifest suitable deed; instr. 
wena, 14,3. cp. next & samukha- 
vethita, 51,3 (v. sa-*). 
sammuti, f. (sa. sammati) custom, 
general or current opinion (or expres- 
sion), name, appellation, phrase; hoti 
satto'ti sammuti, 98,31 (“we use the 
phrase a living being"). 
sammodati, vb. (sa. sam-ymud) 
to exchange friendly greetings; aor. 
8. sg. sammodi (Bhagavatā saddhim) 
89,20; part. med. ~ modamana, dwell- 
ing friendly and harmonious together, 
16,19; grd. sammodaniya, in the 
phrase : sammodaniyam katham etc. 
89,20. 93,24. 96,26 (v. vītisāreti). cp. 
pati-sammodati. > 
sammoha, m. (= sa.) confusion; 
acc, ~ari (āpādim, v. āpajjati) 94,22; 
dat. „āya (alam, g. v.) 94,24. 
saya, mfn. (sa. Gaya) lying, sleep- 
ing; v. guha-°, dari-". 


400 


sayam, indecl. (sa. svayam) self, 
by one's self, spontaneously; 7,2. 83,32. 
46,16; sayam eva, 55,25. 85,28; sayam 
pi, 112,22; comp. 9-kata, mfn. Dh. 
347 (v. h.); "-jata, mfn. ‘self-born’, 
growing wild, 22,1 (°-sali). cp. samam. 

sayati, vb, v. seti. 

sayana, x. (sa. gayana) lying, 
sleeping; bed, couch; acc. wari, 112,3; 
instr. wena, 20,26. 61,10; Dh. 271 
(vivicca-?, g. v.); abl, wa, 41,27; (ucc&- 
°-maha-°) 81,26; ~ato, 16,4 (dabba- 
tina-°); gen. «assa, 47,25; loc. we 
(pupphānam ammanamattena abhi- 
ppakinna-°) 65,30; 41,36 (maha-?) cp. 
siri-sayana; *-gabbha, m. bed-cham- 
ber, 46,3; *"-gumba, m. 14,33 (v. h.); 
0-pittha (g. v.) cp. next. 

Sayanasana, n., V. senāsana. 

sayani-ghara, n. (sa. gayana- 
grha, cp. Gayaniya-grha) a bed-cham- 
ber; acc. wath, 52,92. 

sara’, m. (sa. gara) an arrow; 
acc, ~am, Dh. 320; pl. nā, Dh. 304. 

sara’, m. n. (sa. sara & saras) 
a lake, pond; acc. ~am, 4,13; 3,30 
(paduma-°); gen. „vassa, 4,12; loc. 
ne, 3,32. 21,36 (Tambapanni-?); ~as- 
mim, 5,16 [/oc. also sarasi from saras]; 
°-tira, °-pariyanta (v. h.). 

sara, m. (sa. svara) sound, voice, 
cry; acc. eam (atikaruna-°) 27,14; 
(atta-ssaram, v. atta!) 40,21; (gita-°) 
19,32; instr. ~ena (madhurena) 17,37; 
(madhura-ssarena) 5,20. 62,13; °-sam- 
panna, mfn. having a melodious voice, 
m. ~o (moro) 18,34. 

saraka, m. n. (= sa.) a drinking 
vessel or cup; instr. „sena (suvanna-?) 
41,1. 

sarana, ^. (sa. carana) refuge; 
acc, ~am, Dh, 188; 192 = 107,21; 
^am gacchati (upeti), to take refuge 
in (acc.) : 69,19. 105,24. 107,17 = Db. 
190; pi. „sāni (tini = ratanāni, v. 
ratana) 28,25. 

sarati, vb. (sa. /smr) to remem- 
ber (acc. or gen.), to think of (with 
sorrow or regret); pr. 1 8g. ~ami 

(attanath) 27,22; an earlier form of pr. 


sallapa 


8. sg. sumarati is found Dh. 324 (w. 
gen. Nigavanassa); pp. v. sata”; cp. 
sati? & saraniya. 

sarabha, m. (sa. carabha) a kind 
of deer; *°-padaka, mfn. with legs of 
that deer, loc. we (katicana-pallathke) 
42.9, 

sarita, mfn. (= sa.; pp. ysr) 
moving, going, running; x. pl. ~ni 
(somanassāni) Dh. 341 (“extrava- 
gant") cp. sarin. 

sarira, 2. (sa. garira) the body; 
nom, «anm, 2,7; acc, «ani, 1,6; 16,6 
(saka-0) ; 57,29 (sakala-°); instr. wena, 
89,9 (do.); abl. wa, 45,1; ~ato, 23,32; 
loc. «e, 15,5; "?-patijaggana, n., 
*o-bhanga, m., *"-mamsa, n. (v. h.); 
*antima-9, mfn. (g. v.); *obhagga-°, 
mfn. one whose body is bent or crooked, 
63,9; *manussa-samāna-!, mfn. (g. 
v.); maha-°, mfn. having a great body, 
1,3; cp. a-sarira, mfn. 

salaka, f. (sa. galākā) a small 
stick or twig, a piece or splint of bam- 
boo and the like, used as ticket or 
ballot (by casting of lots); v. kala- 
kanni-?, 23,12. 

salàyatana, n. (sa. shad-ayata- 
na) the six organs of sense; nom. ~am, 
66,5; 9-nirodha, m. 66,14 (g. v.) cp. 
ayatana. 

salla, x. (sa. calya) a stake or 
thorn, an arrow; a wound; nom. ~at, 
92,9; acc. ~ari (attano, metaph. of 
passions) 108,9; instr. wena, 92,7; 
pl. „vāni (*bhava-9, g. v.) Dh. 351; 
*0.gauthana, n., "the removal of the 
thorns” (metaph.) Dh. 275. cp. next, 

salla-katta, m. (sa. calya-karttr) 
a surgeon; acc. «am, 92,. 

sallakkheti, vb. (sa. sam-ylaksh) 
to notice, observe, think of, consider 
(ace.); ger. ~wetva, 84,17; a-sallak- 
khetvā (tam karanam) 3,18; (w. gen. 
tassā) 89,5. 

sallapati, vb. (sa, sam-ylap) to 
talk together, converse, speak to, ad- 
dress; part. m. ~anto (tena saddhim) 
18,24; f. -. anti, 73,4. cp. next. 

sallāpa, m. (sa. samlapa) conver- 


gallina 


sation; allipa-°, m. id., acc. «am, 
56,22; *katha-°, m. id., instr, ~ena, 
94,22. 

sallina, mfn. (sa. sam-lina, pp. 
sam-yli) bent down, depressed; *a- 
sallina, mfn. (v. h.). 

savati, vb. (sa. ysru) to flow, 
stream; pr. 3. pl. „anti (sota) Dh. 
940; cp. savana?, sota ?. 

savana!, n. (sa. cravana) hearing, 
learning; dhamma-?, sad-dhamma-? 
(g. v.); su-ssavana, n. (v. su-°). 

savana?, n. (sa. sravana) flowing, 
streaming; *manapa-°, mfn. (v. h.). 

savhaya, mfn. (e. c.) (fr. sa! -+ 
avhaya; sa. sihvaya) named, called; 
Ananda-°, m. acc, «am, 109,15. 

sasa, m. (sa. çaça) a hare; nom. 
~0, Dh. 342; *"-pandita, m. the wise 
hare, 14,12; *9-yoni, f. (g. v.); loc. 
ewlyam (nibbattitvā, having been born 
as a hare) 14,5; *9-raja, m. (v. rājan); 
0-Jakkhana,.#. the sign of a hare, acc. 
eam, 16,16.  . 

sassa, ^". (rarely m.) (sa. sasya 
or çasya) corn. crop; nom. ~o, 26,20; 
ace. ~am, 8,5; 26,18 (sampanna-', 
g.v.); pl. eani, 7,35. 102,7; *°-karaka- 
manussa, m. a husbandman, pl, nā, 
8,7; “°-rakkhana, n. protection of 
fields, 8,7 (°-atthamh). 

sassata, mfn. (sa. cacvata) eter- 
nal; m. ~o (loko) 89,24; a-sassato, 
89,26 (g. v.); m. pl. «à (samkhara, 
n’atthi) Dh. 255. 

saha, prp. (= sa.) with, together 
with, simultaneously with (instr, or 
abl.); ~ khelena, 57,4; ~ Brah- 
muna, Dh. 105; ~ parinibbānā (ab/.) 
80,19; cp. next ete. 

saha-gata, mfn. (e. c.; = sa.) 
accompanied by; dukkha-®, mfn. 97,36; 
nandi-raga-°, mfn. 67,13. 

*sahanukkama, mfn. (saha + 
anukkama) together with all pertain- 
ing; ^. ~am (sandānam) Dh. 398. 

*saha-semāna, mfn. (v. seti 
[sayati]) lying or reposing with; acc. 
f. ~am (yakkhinim) 112,8. 

sahati, vb. (sa. sah) to overcome, 


266 


conquer; to bear, endure (acc.); pr. 
3, sg. ~wati (metri causa) 107,31 = 
Dh, 335; part. m. a-sahanto (duk- 
kham) 32,26; pot. 3. pl. „eyyum 
(vuttbirh) 104,28; cp. sahasā, sāhasa. 


Sahampati, m. (Buddh. sa. Sa- 
hāpati) an epithet of Brahman (cp. 
SBE. XIII, p. 86); nom. Brahma ~, 
80,21. 

sahasā, indecl. (= sa.) by vio- 
lence; unexpectedly, inconsiderately; 
Dh. 256 (attharh naye); cp. a-sāha- 
sena. 

sahassa, x. (sa. sahasra) a thou- 
sand (w. nom. [or gen.] pl. of the 
things numbered, or e. c.); mom. acc. 
sg. ~ar (datvā, 1000 pieces of mo- 
ney) 37,10; (vaca, gāthā) Dh. 100. 
101; purisa-°, 33,22. 34,9; instr. wena 
(at the rate of) 18,26; Db. 106; 
amacca-° (saddhīrn) 39,26; kahapana-° 
(do.) 57,53; bhikkhu-? (do.) 70,22; 
sahassarn sahassena mānuse (acc. 
pl.) 1000 times 1000 men, 107, = 
Dh. 103; — comp. w. other numerals : 
sata-sahassam, x. 23,3 (visam); pl 
„āni (cattāri) 61,6; (satt'eva) 109,2; 
*0-agghanaka, mfn. (v. h.); caturā- 
sīti-vassa-sahassāni, 44,20;  asiti-9, 
mfn. eighty thousands, m. pl. nā (bhik- 
khū) 97,4; — at the beg. of comp.: 
*0_kahapana, m. (sg.) 1000 pieces of 
money, acc. wath (imam) 102,5; 
*o-thavika, f. (g. v.); *°-bhandika, f. 
(4. v.); °-bhaga, m. the thousandth 
part, or (perhaps better) : with 1000 
parts; nom. ~o (maranassa, “is the 
property of death”; perhaps we ought 
to correct : sahassabhage maranam, 
cp. Windisch, Mara, p. 4) 108,6; 
*0_matta, mfn. being a number of 1000, 
m, pl. ~à, 39,12; mula, mfn. worth 
a thousand pieces, acc. m. ^am (sa- 
takam) 31,10; (pannàakàram) 68,21; 
Ü-vagga, m. the eighth chapter of Dh.; 
*yojana-sahass'-ubbedha, mfn. (v. 
ubbedha). 

sahāya, m. (== sa.) a companion, 
friend; ^om. «o, 12,5; acc. ~am, 


267 


47,80. Dh. 328; gen. «assa, 12,34; 
pl. wa, ll. cp. next ete, 

. sahāyaka, m. (= sa.) = prec.; 
nom. ~0, 79,21; gen. e assa, ib.; gen. 
pl. „ānam, 55,29. 

sahāyatā, f. (= sa.) companion- 
ship; nom. nā (n'atthi bale) Dh. 61. 
330. 

*sahāyikā, f. (fr. sahāyaka) a 
female companion or friend; voc. ~e, 
58,31; instr. pl. hi, 57,54. 

sahita, mfn. (= sa.) !) joined, 
connected, sensible (P); x. ~am (ba- 
hum, bhasamano, speaking many 
sensible words?) Dh. 19 (cp. Childers 
sub voce, SBE. X. p. 8); ?) e. c. ac- 
companied by, endowed with (cp. 
samhita). 

sā, f. pron, demonstr., v. tam !. 

sākuņika, m. (sa. sakunika) a 
fowler, bird-catcher ; instr. wena, 88,33 
(chekena). 

Sakha, m. (sa. cikha-°), nom. pr. 
of a deer (“Branch-deer”, cp. next); 
ACC. ~am, 7,33; Joc. ~asmim, 7,34; 
omiga, m. id. (sa. -mrga), nom. ~o, 
5,81; dvandva comp. Nigrodhamiga-?, 
6,9 (gen. pl). 

sakha, f. (sa. cakhà) a branch; 
non, ~ā (sāla-) 62,17; acc. ~am, 
62,19; loc. waya, 18,13; ~āyam (sā- 
la-°) 62,17; pl. wa (sākhāhi, instr., 
branch with branch) 37,20; 62,11 (ag- 
ga-°, g. v.); sakhagge, sakhaggesu, 
on the top of the branch(es), 18,22; 
1,25 (cp. agga*); sakhantarehi, 62,11 
(v. antara); °-palasa, n. dvandva 
comp. branches and leaves, 95,23; 
' apagata-0, mfn. 95,25 (v. apagacchati). 

sitaka, m. (sa. Ģātaka) cloth; 
dress, clothes; robe, skirt, gown; «om. 
e 0, 87,11 (v. corrections); acc. ~at, 
31,4-10. 50,25. 57,53; 50,13 (ghana-', 
g. v.); instr. wena, 50,12; loc. ~e, 
58,99; pl. wa, 45,1; acc. pl. we, 41,4; 
*camma-, m. (g. v.). 

sātī (or satika), f. (sa. gātī; cp. 
prec.) a robe, skirt, gown; *ajina-°, 
f. (a. v.); *sāna-", f. (g. v.). 

sātthakathā, v. sa’. 


sādhukam 


sina, mfn. (sa. cana) made of 
hemp; *%-sāti-nivattha, mfn. wearing 
a skirt or tunic of hempen cloth, s. 
^O, 11,29. 

sini, f. (sa. càni) cloth of hemp 
(used for tents or curtains); acc. «irit 
(curtain) 62,20; instr. „iyā, 112,5; 
*pata-9, f. 37, (g. v.). 

sāta, n. (sa. cata) joy, pleasure; 
*a-sata, mfn, (g. v.); *0-sita, mfn. 
bound to pleasure, given up to plea- 
sure, pl. wa, Dh. 341. 

*sātacca-kārin, mfn. (sa. *sāta- 
tya-°; cp. satatarit above) persevering; 
m. pl. ~ino (w. loc. kicce) Dh, 293. 

*sātatika, mfn. (fr. sa. satata) 
= prec.; m. pl. wa, Dh. 23. 

satthaka, mfn. (sa. sarthaka) 
useful, successful, beneficial; f. mikā 
(desanā) 86,10. 87,2. 89,s. 

sida, m. (sa. svāda) taste; *appa- 
ssūda, mfn. Dh. 186 (v. h.). 

*sādāna, mfn. (sa. sa + adana) 
v. sa~t, 

sādhana, x. (= sa.) accomplish- 
ment, establishment, demonstration; 
O-attham, 31,11 (“in order to enforce 
this truth”), 

sādhayati, or sadheti, vb. (sa. 
Vsādh, caus. sadhayati) to direct, 
set right, accomplish, prepare (acc.); 
ger. ~wayitvana (bhattani) 111,33. 

sādhāraņa, mfn. (= sa.) com- 
mon, belonging to all; instr. n. wena 
(rajjena) 59,25. 

sadhu, 1) mfn. (= sa.) good, ex- 
cellent, right, honorable; n. ~u (hoti) 
2,30; acc. „ur (sādhunā [instr. | jeti, 
“pays good with goodness”) 44,9 (cp. 
a-sādhu); m. ~u (damatho) Dh. 35; 
instr. pl. uhi (therehi) 109,12; gen. 
pl. «unam (sabba-?, all good men) 
114,3. — ?) indecl. 2) adv. well, rightly; 
~ jānāsi, 98,24; P) interj. very well! 
well done! „ūti (sampaticchitva) 
1,18; 6,1. 53,16; (patisunitva) 16,26; 
w. foll. voc. sādhu deva! 65,17; re- 
peated’: sādhu sādhu Nagasena! 
98,34. cp. next eic. 

*sādhukam, adv. (fr. sadhu?) 


sādhu-kāra 


well, rightly, properly, thoroughly; 
82,21. 110,5. 
 sādhu-kāra, m. (= sa.) appro- 
val; ~ar dadāti, to consent, applaud, 
5,19. 34,27. 87,1. 98,18. 

*sādhu-rūpa, mfn. respectable, 
comely, sympathetic; m. ~o (naro) 
Dh. 262. | 

*sadhu-viharin, mfn. living 
righteously; m. acc. °-vihari (formally 
in one word with the foll. E 
instead of °-viharim (or °-viharinam 
Dh. 328-29. 

sāma, mfn. (sa. cyama) dark- 
coloured; m. ~o (puriso) 92,15. 

*samam, indecl. (pron.), self, 
one's self (said of all persons) (— 
sayam, to which it seems to be related 
in some way; possibly from *sayamam, 
‘ipsissimum’, Tr. 2); 6,9 (~ gantvā 
āneti); 68,31 (samam yeva); 85,98 
(sàman 'ti sayam eva). 

sāmaggi, f. (fr. samagga; sa. 
sāmagrī) ') totality, complete collec- 
tion, completeness; ?) concord, harmony; 
nom, ~i (samghassa) Dh. 194. 

sàmaiüia, ! n. (fr. samana, g. 
v.; sa. Gramanya) the state of a sa- 
mana, asceticism; nom, ~at (duppa- 
ràmatthai) Dh. 311; gen. ~assa, 
Dh. 19; cp. next. — ?) mfn. (sa. sã- 
manya) common; 4. community. 

*sāmaiūiatā, f. = samania}; 
Dh. 332. 

sàmanera, s. (sa. grāmanera) 
a Buddhist monk in his noviciate, 
pupil, uovice; nom. wo, 81,15; pl. 
wa, 81,14; acc. we, 81,17; instr. vehi, 
81,21; gen. ~anam, 81,18. 

sāmatthiya, x. (fr. samattha; 
sa. samarthya) ability, competence, 
qualification; acc. ~ar (tava dassehi) 
114,5. 

sàmanta, mfn. (fr. samanta; — 
sa.) being on all sides, near; ^. neigh- 
bourhood; abl. (adv. & prp.) «à, 
near, round (w. gen. (acc.) or e. c.): 
àpatti-^, 83,4 (v. h.). ° 

sāmika, m. (fr. next; sa. "svà- 
mika) an owner, lord, husband; nom. 


268 


0, 14,26. 100,12 (amba-?) 100,26 
(khetta-°); 10,10; acc. «am, 10,5; 
gen. ~wassa, 58,5; loc. ~amhi, 31,9; 
pl. acc. ~e, 21,22; gen. ~anam, 21,10; 
comp. *-acchādana, n.(v.h.); *rajja-°, 
m. king, 43,22-23 (Baranasi-°, Kosala-'); 
*sa-ssāmika, mfn., v. sa-1, 

sāmin, m. (sa. svàmin) an owner, 
master, lord, husband; nom. ~i, 87,6; 
voc. sāmi, 1,7. 5,14. 7,15, etc. (at the 
beginning, after the opening word, or 
at the end of the sentence); gen. * 
sāmino, 112,9; >) sāmissa (Dhamma-®, 
g. v.) 114,6; pl. ~ino, 43,31. cp. next 
& prec. | 

sāminī, f. (sa. svāminī) mistress, 
lady; nom. «A. 111,5. 

*sāmukkamsika, mfn. (Buddh. 
sa, samutkarshika ; cp. samukkamsati, 
vb.) most excellent, most essential (or 
principal); f. «à (dhammadesana 
buddhanam) 68,23; acc. m. ~am (sab- 
ba~°, pañham) 90,55. [cp. SBE. XIII, 
p. XXVI] 

siyam, adv. (= sa.) in the evening, 
at evening time; 2,2. 57,9, 73,11; 
ajja..~.. eva, even this very evening, 
2,30. cp. next etc. 


sayanha, m. (sa. sāyāhna) evening; 


.9-samaye (loc.) 2,32. 14,11. 


sayataram, ade. (compar.; sa. 
sayatare) late or later in the evening, 
57,14. 

sāyam-āsa, m. (sa. sāyam-āca) 
evening meal, supper; acc. ~am 
(bhuūjantassa) 53,29. 

sayika, f. (sa. qayika) lying, 
sleeping; v. thandila-?, Dh. 141. 

sāyin, mfn. (sa. gāyin) lying; v. 
samparivatta-°, Dh. 325. 

Sàra, m. (= sa.) strength; the 
essential part of anything, a precious 
thing, reality, quintessence; loc. we 
(patitthito) 95,4; acc. & abl. sarai 
sārato fiatvà, knowing what is essen- 
tial in its essence, Dh. 12; — *sara- 
mati(n) mfn. imagining to find the 
essence; pl. ~ino (asare) Dh. 11; 
Cp. a-sara; — e.c. mani-?, mutta-?, 


269 


choice gems, pearls, 24,20; vajira-°, 
26,1. (cp. ratana). 

*sāratta-ratta, mfn. (sa. *sarh- 
rakta-rakta) passionately enamoured 
or devoted to; f. nā (apekhā, “pas- 
sionately strong”) Dh. 345. 

sārathi, m. (= sa.) a charioteer; 
nom. voc. wi, 43,201; acc. wim, 
63,2. 106,34 = Dh, 222; instr. „inā, 
Dh. 94. 

sarada, mfn. (sa. carada) autumnal, 
mature, new, fresh (not too old; cp. 
Mil. trans]. IT. p. 79, note 2, where it 
is taken == sara-da, which can hardly 
be possible); — m. subst. (— sarada) 
autumn; loc. we, Dh. 149. 

s&radika, mfn. (sa. caradika) 
autumnal; acc. ~ar (kumudai) Dh. 
285. 
sārambha, m. (sa. samrambha) 
quarrel, brawling; abuse, brutality; 
anger, fury; nom. «o, Dh. 134; *°-ka- 
thi, f. abusive or angry speech, Dh. 
133. 

*sārāņīya, mfn. (either from ysr, 
caus. kathah sareti, cp. vītisāreti 
& Tr. PM. 75,22, or from ysmr, Chil- 
ders) usual, customary, traditional (or 
introductory ?); acc. f. ~ai (sammo- 
danīyarh katham, the usual (introduc- 
tory) compliments) 89,20-21. 

sarin, mfn. (= sa.) flowing, run- 
ning, wandering about; in the comp. 
anoka-°, mfn., v. an-oka. 

Sāriputta, m. (Buddh. sa. Čāri- 
putra) nom. pr. of one of Buddha's 
most famous pupils; nom. eO, 29,18; 
gen. ~assa (ayasmato) 81,11; °-Mog- 
gallānā, m. pl. (dvandva) 74,26-30. 

sāla, m. (sa. gāla) the Sāl tree 
(shorea robusta); acc. ~am, Dh. 162; 
9.rukkha, m. id. 61,11 (mahā-); 95,21; 
ovana, n., a grove of sal trees, 62,10 
(maīgala-'), 62,15 (°-kilam), 62,16; 
O-sakha, f. 62,17 (g. v.) cp. next. 

sila, f. (comp. also sala-°; sa. 
cali) a house, mansion, workshop; 
ace. eam, 87,10; 88,5 (pesakāra-', 
g. v.); sāla-dvārena (gacchanti, pass 


Biisana 


by the house-door) 59,3; cp. assa-?, 
dana-°, panna-®, hatthi-0. 

sāli, m. (sa. gali) rice, paddy, 
grains of rice; acc. ~im, 100,93; 22,1 
(sayarh-jata-°, g. v.); *°-yava-khetta, 
f. 8,18 (g. v.). 

sālohita, m. (Buddh. sa. id.; fr. 
sa. sa-lohita) a kinsman; pl. nā (iā- 
ti-°, dvandva, “relatives and kinsmen”) 
92,8. 

sivaka, m. (sa. gravaka) “a 
hearer”, a disciple, pupil, esp. a be- 
lieving Buddhist; nom. ~o (samma- 
sambuddha-?) Dh. 59; pl. wa (Go- 
tamassa) 73,96. Dh. 296 1f.; acc. pl. 
we, 104,8. 108,20; gen. pl. «anam, 
raga 74,13 (Gotama-°); *ariya-°, m. 
v. h.). 

Sāvatthi, f. (sa. Ģrāvastī) nom. 
pr. of a city, the capital of North- 
Kosala (the exact position of which 
seems to be rather doubtful; according 
to Dhpd. (1855) p. 232 seven yojanas 
north of Saketa (Oudh ?)); mom. ~i, 
81,8; loc. wiyam, 29,24; °-vasino, m. 
pl. the inhabitants of S., 73,32. 

*sāvanā, f. (sa. grāvaņa, n.) an- 
nouncement, proclamation; acc. pl. 
mA, 11,4; tatiya-sāvanūya (instr.) 
11,5; cp. savana. 

sāveti, vb. (caus. sunati; sa. Ģrā- 
vayati) to cause to be heard, teach; 
to announce, proclaim (acc.); part. m. 
gen. ~entassa, 11,4; aor. 3. sg. „esi 

“made a proclamation”) 11,4; 64,22 
Arom rt ger. ~wetva (sa-nā- 
mam) 111,22; cp. savana, f. 
sasana, n. (sa. casana) 1) order, 
instruction, message; nom. acc. ~am, 
36,22. 64,6; 2) teaching, doctrine, re- 
ligion; nom. 110,5-34. Dh. 183. 185 
(Buddhana ~); 109,32 (Satthu-°); 
loc. ~e (Satthu) 69,14; 109,6 (Jina-0, 
g.v.); Kassapassa Bhagavato sasane, 
at the time when K. B, preached his 
doctrine, 84,28; *sasana-karaka, m. 
one who acts according to the order 
or doctrine, pl. mā (mama) 104,9; 
*sāsanāraha, mfn. worthy of the sa- 
cred doctrine, 110,6 (cp. araha). 


süsapa 


s&sapa, m. (sa. sarshapa) & mu- 
stard-seed; nom. ~o, Dh. 401. 

sāhasa, x. (= sa.) violence, cruel- 
ty; v. a-sāhasa. 

si == asi, v. atthi. 

sikkhati,: vb. (sa. yeiksh) to 
learn, study (acc.); to practise or ex- 
ercise oneself (in: loc.); pr. 3. sg. 
„ati (sipparn) 99,12; grd. n. «itab- 
bam (kattha amhehi ~, in what have 
we to exercise ourselves?) 81,20; imf. 
etum (tesu, used in a passive sense 
w. instr. simanerehi) 81,21; pp. sik- 
khita, learned, studied; trained, edu- 
cated; m. ~o, 99,12; su-sikkhita, 
mfn. (v. su-°); caus. v. *sikkhapeti, 
cp. sekha & next. 

sikkhāpada, x. (sa. giksha-pada) 
a moral precept; nom. «am, 81,13; 
pl. „vāni, 79,12. 81,19; (dasa) 81,21. 

*sikkhāpana, n. (nom. actionis 
fr. next) the giving instruction; °-at- 
thaya, “in order to give (her) a les- 
son", 53,8. 

*sikkhāpeti, vb. (caus. sikkhati) 
to cause to learn, train, instruct (acc.) ; 
aor. 3. sg. „esi (paricarikam) 51,13; 
ger. ~etva, 18,18; cp. *sikkhāpana. 

sikkhita, mfn., v. sikkhati. 

sikhā, f. (sa. gikhā) a lock of 
hair, crest; a flame; aggi- f. 107,1 
(q. v.), cp. next. 

sikhin, mfn. (sa. cikhin) having 
locks, crests or flames; m. !)fire; ?) 
a peacock; gen. ~ino, 18,32 (= mo- 
rassa). 

sigāla, m. (sa. srgāla) a jackal; 
nom. ~0, 14,10. 

singa, w. (sa. criiga) the horn of 
an animal; instr. wena, 12,31; pl. 
~ani, 5,26. 

siñghānikā, f. (sa. çrūkhānikā, 
siūghāņikā) the mucus of the nose, 
82,5. 97,25. 

Sificati, vb. (sa. ysic) to be- 
sprinkle, water; to pour out, empty, 
bale out (a ship, acc); pm 3. pl. 
ewanti, 37,1; imper. 2. sg. ~a (nà- 


vam) Dh. 369; pp. sitta (v. below); 


210 


caus, *sincapeti, to water; aor. 3. sg. 
„esi (atthim khirodakena) 36,se. 
gita, mfn. (= sa.) bound; v. sata-°. 
sitta, mfn. (pp. siñcati; sa. sikta) 
poured out, emptied; f. nā (nāvā) 
Dh. 369. 
sittha, n. (sa. siktha) a grain or 
lump of boiled rice; nom. wath (ekar) 
53,29; pl. ~ani, 56,28. 

sithila, mfn. (sa. Ģithila; cp. 
sathila above) loose, relaxed; m. O 
(pamsu) 40,24; n. ~am (bandhanam, 
yielding, elastic ?), Dh. 346; %-bhāva, 
m. the being loosened, acc. ~am, 49,36. 
cp. next. 

*sithila-hanu, (m.) lit. ‘loose- 
jaw’, name of a certain bird; gen. 
wuno, 92,20. 

Siddhattha, m. (sa. Siddhartha) 
nom. pr. of Gotama Buddha before 
his pabbajjà; °-kumaro, 64,26; ?-ku- 
marassa, 63,7. 

siddhi, f. (= sa.) accomplishment, 
success, prosperity, result; siddhi-r- 
astu, 114,33. 

*Sineru, m. nom. pr. of a mythi- 
cal mountain (sa. Meru, or Sumeru, 
of which sineru is possibly only a 
variation; the short forms Neru and 
Meru are also found in Pali); nom. 
~u, 110,10; acc. eum, 60,2; gen. 
^ussa, 59,27; °-papata, m. (g. v.). 

sineha, m. (sa. sneha) affection, 
love, attachment: acc. ~am, Dh. 285. 

sinehita, mfn. (sa. snehita) con- 
nected with love or lust; n. pl. wani 
(somanassani) Dh. 341. 

sindhava, m. (sa. saindhava) 
‘coming from Indus or Sindh’, a horse; 
nom. ~0, 54,24; pl. nā (rathe yutta-0) 
54,9. Dh. 322; acc. pl. ~e (manga- 
la-°, g. v.) 63,5. 
^ sinna, mfn. (sa. svinna, pp. vsvid) 
wet, sweating, wet with perspiration; 
^. ~am (civaram) 83,8; cp. sedita. 

sippa, ^. (sa. cilpa) art, discipline, 
learning; acc. wath (ugganhati) 32,12; 
(sikkhati) 99,12; gen. ~assa (upa- 
caro, g. v.) 55,7; loc. pl. „esu (sab- 
ba-°, all branches of learning) 38,10; 


271 


niyyamaka-*, x. 24,15 (q. v.); dvandva 
comp. vijja-° (v. h.) cp. next. 

sippavat, mfn. (sa. cilpa-vat) 
skilled in art (or science), well-edu- 
cated; nom. m. «và, 99,8. 

sibbati, vb. (sa. ysiv) to sew 
(acc.); fut. 1. sg. wissimi, 57,5; grd. 
^. witabbam (kiüci) 57,5. 

simbali, m. or f. (sa. calmali, 
cp. simbala) the silk-cotton tree; loc. 
eismim, 60,16 (= Simbali-vane); 
*Simbali-vana, n. name of a forest in 
heaven, 60,6-11. 

siya, pot., v. atthi. 

siras, ^. (sa. Ģiras) the head; 
nom. siro (phalitam) Dh. 260; instr. 
sirasā (nipatitva) 75,39; loc, sirasmim, 
44,23; cp. sisa. 

Siri (comp. siri-°), f. (sa. cri) 
beauty, welfare, success, glory, dignity, 
majesty, etc.; acc. eim (rüpa-9, “beauty 
and majesty”) 64,13; generally at the 
beg. of subst. comp. : *siri-gabbha, 
m. & royal bed-chamber, 41,22. 61,8; 
*0_vibhava, m. majestic power, 47,39; 
*0.gayana, m. a royal bed, loc. me, 
53,3. 64,28; "-pitthe, 41,25; *°-sobhag- 
ga, ^. majestic glory, instr. wena, 
64,10. 

*Sirīsavatthu, x. (sa. *girīsha- 
vastu) nom. pr. of a fabulous town; 
nom. ~u (yakkha-puram) 112,12; 
eum (yakkha-nagaram, Tambapan- 
nidipe) 20,5. 

sila, f. (sa. cilà) a stone, rock; 
acc. eal, 75,35; pandu-kambala-®, 
f. & sort of stone, of which Sakka's 
throne (pandu-kambala-silasana, x. 
15,8) is said to be made (cp. asana). 
cp. sela, m. 

siloka, m. (sa. cloka) fame, re- 
putation, praise; a verse; nom. ~o, 
103,29. 

sivikā, f. (sa. çibikā, givikā) a 
palanquin, litter; loc. ~āya (sovan- 
na-°) 62,7. 

sigha, mfn. (sa. gīghra) quick, 
rapid; n. (adv.) «am, quickly, 63,17. 
111,28; 87,12 (sigham eva); — comp. 
sigh’-assa, m. a race-horse, Dh. 29. 


silavat 


sita, mfn. (sa. cita) cold, cool; 
^. ~am (odakam) 15,25; *°-cchaya, 
mfn. yielding cool shadow, n. „ati 
(manoramam) 15,25; — subst. n. ~ai, 
coolness; cold water, 88,35 (opp. un- 
hath); instr. «ena, ib.; cp. next. 

sitala, mfn. (sa. citala) cold, 
cool; 2. ~ar (sariram), 21,26; *ati- 
sitala, mfn. (q. v.). 

sītibhūta, mfn, (sa. gītī-bhūta) 
become cold, metaph. tranquillized; 
acc. m. «am, Dh. 418. 

sima, f. (sa. sima, f. & siman, 
m.) boundary, border, limit; acc. ~am, 
39,17; abl. ~ato (paccanta®-, g. v.) 
43,14; *simantarika, f. 40,5» (v. an- 
tarikà). 

sila, x. (sa. qila) 1) morality, vir- 
tue; acc. wat, 15,1. 48,26; loc. ne, 
17,32; 29,2 (attanā rakkhita-°); comp. 
*sīlācāra, *sīlaguņācāra, m. (v. ācāra); 
*sīlānisamsa, m. (v. dnisatisa); *°-ka- 
thā, f. the duties of morality, acc. 
~ar (pakāsesi) 68,19; *°-gandha, m. 
“the perfume of virtue”, Dh,55; *°-teja, 
m. “splendid display of virtue", instr. 
wena, 15,; silabbata, v. below; 
*0_sarivuta, mfn. well behaved, Dh. 289; 
*0_sampanna, mfn. virtuous, 41,35, 
42.18 == *sampanna-sila, mfn. Dh. 
57; dvandva comp. %-dassuna, Dh. 
217 (Ü?sampanna, mfn. possessing 
virtue and intelligence); paññā-?, Dh. 
229 (°-samahita, mfn.). — °) moral 
precept, esp. pl. paūca sīlāni (= the 
first five of the Ewa 
81,21); loc. pl. paūcasu „esu, 74 — 
5) nature, quality (good or bad), mostly 
e.c., v. *kujjhana-°, *dus-°, *dho- 
rayha-9, mfn. (cp. next etc.). 

*silabbata, n. (sa. *gīla-vrata) 
mere ceremonial practices or rites 
(probably ironically said of brahmani- 
cal rites); ?-mattena, Dh. 271 (“not 
only by discipline and vows’, cp. 
matta?). (cp. Childers s. v. & Dham- 
ma-saūgaņi, transl. by C. Rhys Davids, 
p. 260-61). 

silavat, mfn. (sa. gīlavat) moral, 
virtuous; ^om. m. «và, 15,31. 99,9; 


silavanta 


ace. m. ~vantam, Dh. 400; gen. pl. 
evatam, Dh. 56; at the beg. of comp. 
silava-° : *Sīlava-kumāra, m. nom. 
pr. of a prince, 38,9; *Silava-[mahà-] 
rajan, m. = Mahāsīlava (g. v.) 40,4-s. 

sīlavanta, mfn. = prec.; gen. 
m. ~assa, Dh. 110; compar. silavan- 
tatara, gen. m. «assa, 43,93. 

silin, mfn. (sa. gilin) virtuous 
(only e. c.); v. abhivadana-®, 

sisa, m. (sa. cirshan) the head; 
acc. ~am, 5,19. 65,15; instr. wena, 
36,3. 57,12. abl. ~ato, 46,28; loc. we, 
46,25; ~amhi, 47,1; 9-ccheda, m. cut- 
ting off the head, acc. ~am, 17,7; 
*kāka-", mfn. & Gaya-9, m. (v. h.); 
cp. ussisaka, n. & *pacina-sisaka, 
mfn. 

siha, m. (sa. sinha) a lion; nom. 
~O, 8,22. 13,22; acc. ~am, 10,2. 112,31; 
gen. ~wassa, 8,27. 13,10; ?-camma, n. 
(g. v.) cp. next etc. 

*sīha-paūjara, n. (cp. paiijara) 
a window; loc. ne, 46,1. 

Sīhabāhu, m. (sa. Simha-bāhu) 
nom. pr. of a king, father of Vijaya 
(q. v.); 112,51; °-narinda-ja, m. son 
of king S. (Vijaya), 110,22. 

Sihala, m. (sa. Simhala) Ceylon; 
pl. ~a, the people of Ceylon, 112,32; 
no (m. sg.) = Sīhabāhu (siham 
ādinnavā iti, 7. e. so called on account 
of his having split a lion) 112,81-32; 
— "-atthakathā, f. & *-bhasa, f. 
(v. h.). 

Sihasena, m. (sa. Simhasena) 
nom. pr. of a man; nom, «o, 97,1. 

Su -, indecl, (= sa.) prefix to subst., 
implying the sense of ‘good, right, 
excellent’, or to adj. & adv., ‘well, 
rightly, very, greatly, beautifully, 
easily’, etc. (opp. du- (dur-)); before 
vowels sv- (or suv-) cp. svakkhata 
below, or contracted, cp. sotthi. 


su-kata (or su-kata), mfn. well 


done (opp. dukkata, g. v.) 97,1; x. 
a good deed, Dh. 314. — ?-kara, 
mfn. easy to do, Dh, 163. = ?-ku- 
mara, mfn. very tender or delicate, 
f. pl. gen. anam, 47,4 (= sukhu- 


272 


māla, g. v. separately). — sukha, ». 
sep. — °-gata, mfn. wellfaring, Dh. 
419; Sugata, m. nom. pr. — Bud- 
dha, 72,24; instr. ~ena, Dh. 285; loc. 
we, 105,25. — %-gati, f. (sometimes 
spelt suggati after the analogy of 
duggati) happiness, bliss, 77,4; acc. 
wim, 7,26. 77,5. 89,1; 107,27 = Dh. 18 
) — *?-gatin, mfn. righteous, 
pl. ~ino, Dh, 126. — ?-gandha, 
mfn. fragrant, f. mā, 53,27; °-gan- 
dhaka, mfn. id.; f. ~ikā, fragrant 
substance (?) 41,13 (paūca-sugandhika- 
parivara, mfn.). — °-gahana, x. 
4,55 (g.v). —%-gahita, mfn. firmly 
seized or held, acc. ~am, 4,30 etc. — 
0-carita, mfn. good, right; acc. m. 
~am (dhammaim, righteousness, vir- 
tue) Dh. 168; x. good conduct, 86,8 
(vaci-9, g. v.); Dh. 231. — °-citta, 
mfn. (v. citta?) — *?-cchanna, mfn. 
well thatched, acc. ~am (agaram) Dh. 
14 = 106,1. — ?-jiva, mfn. easy 
to live, n. ~am (jivitai Dh. 244 
(w. instr.). — °-tanu, mfn. having 
a very slender or beautiful body, acc. 
f. ui (kumārim) 47,19. — -danta, 
mfn. well tamed, restrained; m. ~O, 
Dh. 159; n. «am (citta) 105,2; 
instr. «ena, Dh. 323; m. pl. nā 
(asst) Dh. 94, — ?-dassa, mfm. 
easily perceived, n. „am, 106,16 = 
Dh. 252. — ?-duttara, mfn. very 
difficult to be passed, n. ~am (Mac- 
cudheyyam) Dh. 86. — °-duddasa, 
mfn. very difficult to be observed, x. 
~at (cittam) Dh. 36. — ?-dullabha, 
mfn. very difficult to be found, 51,80. 
— "-desita, mfn. well shown, well 
taught, x, ~ar (dhammapadam) Dh. 
44, -—*°-dhammata, f. honesty (or 
generosity ?) loc. waya, 1,22. — *°-ni- 
puna, mfn. very skilful, very subtile, 
n. ~am (cittam) Dh. 36. — *?-ni- 
vattha, mfn. carefully dressed, 63,50. 
— °-paticchanna, mfn. well pro- 
tected, 110,14. — ?-panna, v. below 
Sep. — °-patitthita, mfn. standing 
firm; m. «o, 110,10; f. —8, Dh. 333; 
acc. am (satim) 104,7; comp. *°-citta, 


273 


mfn. firm-minded, pl. mā, 91,7. — 


or overspread, n. «am (sayanar) 
112,3. — -parimandalam, adv. 
completely, 113,. * -parisan- 
vuta, mfn. well controlled, pl. nā, 
Dh. 234. — *°-paruta, mfn. 63,30 
(v. h.). — ?-pesala, mfn. very hand- 
some or skilful, m. ~0, 30,8. — 


sukhuma 


' trained, very skilled or perfect (in: 
*0_narikkhitta, mfn. well covered : 


loc.) 18, 21. 64,29. — °-sukham, adv. 
very pleas antly, comfortably, happily, 
Dh. 197. — *?-sedita, mfn. well 
soaked (or heated?) 62,17. — *°-ssa- 
vana, n. a good lesson, 64,92 (v. 


. savana!). — “-hajja, v. sep. below. 
| = 9-hita, mfn. very pleased, 41,20. 


9-ppa- : 


buddhaih. ato. KS pabujjhanti “are ` 
: (bala-9) 2,5; instr. wena, 108,25. (cp. 


well awake”, Dh.296. — °-ppahara, 
m. a well dealt blow, acc. mam, 30,15. 
— *-bbata, mfn. pious, virtuous, 
dutiful, m. ~o, Dh. 95; pl. 


; kumbhila). 


nū, 104,2. : 


(cp. vata”). — subha, v. below sep. | 
— *-bhana, mfn. well spoken, salu- ` 
tary (synon. niyyanika), n. wam (g. 


rain) 9,31. (ep. bhanati). — °-bhad- 


bright, pure (good); ace. 


daka, mfn. 30, (v. h.). — %-bhā-: 


vita, mfn. well developed or culti- 
vated, n. ~ai (cittam) 106,32 == Dh. 
14, - %-bhāsita, mfn. well «spokon, 


mfn. well pleased, cheerful, m. ~o, 
Dh. 68 (cp. somanassa & mana(s)). 
— mana. f. v. below sep. 
%medha, mfn. wise, acc. m. cul, 
Dh. 208 (ep. medhà). — -modhasa, 
mfn. wise, m. <o, Dh. 29. — ?-rak- 
khita, mfn. well protected, Dh. 157. 
— *0.laddha, mfn. well obtained, 
n. ~ali, “a high bliss", 70,8, —%-van- 
na. v. below sep. — *?-vavattha- 
pita, mfn. (v. vavatthapeti). — ?-vi- 
nita, mfn. well u pasei f. nā 
(parisa) 40,5. — °-vibhatta, mfn. 
well arrauged. 110,14. — *?- vimutta- 
citta, mfn. (v. h). °-samvuta, 
mfn. well controlled, Dh. 8. 281. — 
0-samkhata, mfn. well constructed, 


— 


sumsumiara, 
a crocodile; xom. 


m. (sa. gigumāra) 
~0, ly; voc. na 
f. sumsumari, ace. 
^m, 1,11. 
suka, m. (sa. Quka) a parrot; 
%notaka, m. a young parrot, acc. pl. 
me, 9,u; yoni, f. 9,7 (q. v.). 
sukk ka, mfn. (sa. quklu) white, 
MH. ~am 
(dhammath, “the bright state of life”) 
Dh. 87 (opp. kanha); ep. next. 
"sukkamsa, m. (fr. sa. cukla -- 


| amQa, 9. amsa?) the good side or 
f. wi (vaca) Dh. 51. — ?-majjha, . 
mfn. having a slender waist, acc. f. . 
eam (kumarim) 47,19. — ?-mana, , 


agreeable, 


' 118; f. wa, Dh. 331-32; 


point of a person, «cc. ~mi, Dh. 72. 

sukha, ') mfn. (== su.) pleasant, 
happy; m. ~o, 80,9. Dh. 
H. wa, 


| 10,27; %-vihāra, m. 74,23 (v. h.); comp. 
' sukha-sathviisa, m. Dh. 207 (wrong 
: reading instead of dhīra-saivāsa, v. 


X wiwak ce ee cere a ee 


104,30. — *°-sajjita, mfn. wel pre- ; 


pared or decorated, 62,14: — ?-sun- 
thāna, mfn. well formed or made, 
105,17, 0.gamāraddha, mfn. 
(q. v.) well undertaken, well composed, 
Dh. 293. — °-samahita, mfn. well 
collected, very intent upon (loc.), Dh. 


| 
| 
x 
| 


samvasa); a-sukha, unpleasant, 70,28 
(a-dukkham-?); — i, sukham, «dv. 
pleasantly, happily; 5,31 («am edhati, 
q. v.); Dh. 79 (seti); 112,5 (nipajji 
sayane); comp. sukha-payata, mfn. 
19,27 (v. payāti); yatha-sukham, adv. 
(v. yatha); su-sukham, Dh. 197; 
*) n. subst. „ai (opp. dukkhaih) 
happiness, joy, pleasure, 23,17. 103,32; 
*kama-?, n. (g. v.); *inattà-^, n. (g. 
v.); dvandva comp. sukha-dukkham 
(massa, Ee bhāro) 28,20 (v. bhara) ; 
vimutti-°, x. (g. v.); *-kāma, mfn. 
(v. h.); badā. m. title of Dhpd. ch. 
XV; %avaha, mfn. (v. h.), cp. neat 
& sukhesin. 

sukhin, mfn. (= sa.) possessing 
happiness, blessed; m. ~i, Dh. 177. 
206. 393. 

sukhuma, mfn. (sa. sükshma) 


10. 378. — *-sikkhita, mfn. well | small, fine, light; m. ~o (rajo) Dh. 125. 


Pāli Glossary. 


18 


sukhumāla 


sukhumala, mfn. (= su-kumāra, 
g. v., through confusion with sukhu- 
ma); m. a delicately nurtured youth; 
nom. ~0, 67,22; accanta-°, 97,34 (q. 
v.); *khattiya-°, 97,33 (g. v.). 

sukhesin, mfn. (sa. sukhaishin) 
seeking pleasure; m. pl. ~ino, Dh. 
341. 

suñka, n. (or m.) (sa. gulka) price, 
tol, customs, nuptial gift (for pur- 
chase of a bride); acc, ~am (datvā) 
101,15; *dinna-suiika, adj. f. (a maid) 
for whom the purchase-money has been 
paid, 101,20 (maya). 

suci[n], mfn. (sa. quel & cucin) 
clear, bright, pure; m. «i, 106,9 (== 
Dh. 393: sukhi); *°-kamma, mfn. 
whose deeds are pure, gem. m. ~assa, 
Dh. 24; *°-gandha, mfn. having a 
pure scent, n. ~ari (padumam) Dh. 
58; *9-gavesin, mfn. looking for what 
is pure, instr. m. «ina, Dh. 245. 

*Suja, f. nom. pr. of Sakka’s wife; 
acc. eam (asura-kaünam) 54,7. 

sufifia, mfn. (sa. Ģūnya) empty, 
void; °-agara, n. au empty house, 
acc. ~am, Dh. 373 (ep. agāra). 

*suūūata, mfn. (fr. prec. w. 
pleonastic ending?) empty, i.e. in- 
discriminate or destitute of all cha- 
racteristics, said of Nibbana; m. «o 
(animitto ca vimokho) Dh. 92. 

sutthu, adv. (sa. sushtu) duly, 
well; ~ te katam, 15,59; ~ ñatvā, 
494; ~ pandita-9, 91,24. 

sunati, vb. (sa. cru) to hear, 
listen to (acc.), to hear or learn from 
(w. gen. of the person speaking); pr. 
1. sg. sunami (dhammam) 87,4; 
tassā papam) 104,54; 3. pl. sunanti 
dhammam) 71,4; part. m. sunanto 
tam, n.) 54,23; imper. 2. sg. sunāhi, 
22,17; 44,7; 3. pl. sunantu (me) 97,5; 
aor. 1, pl. assumha, 54,13; fut. 1. sg. 
sossami, 87,16; inf. sotum, 65,25. 87,9; 
comp. sotu-kama, mfn. wishing to 
hear (acc.), f. ~a, 87,13; ger. sutvā 
(tassa katharn) 4,18; 49,29; (devassa 
vassato) 105,22; (tassā) 112,21; su- 
tvana, Dh. 82. 259; pass. 3. sg. 


ts U. U U U U. SSS SSS SS SS ret a . . 


274 


suyyati, 27,6 (suyyat'); pp. suta (v. 
below); caus. saveti (g. v.) cp. savana, 
savana, sāvaka, sota '. 
suta, mfn. (pp. sunati; sa. cruta) 
heard, learnt; n. „am (tam no ~, 
we have heard it) 54,15; (evam me 
e, thus I have heard) 66,23. 93,21 (v. 
corrections); (ti me ~) 78,2; ?-di- 
vasato, 86,30 (v. divasa); cp. *appa- 
ssuta, bahu-ssuta, mfn. & nezt. 
sutavat, mfn. (sa. crutavat) 
learned, wise; nom. M. ~via, 71,5. 
sutta!, mfn. (pp. supati; sa. 
supta) sleeping; acc. m. «am (gā- 
mam) Dh. 287; loc. pl. mesu, Dh. 29. 
sutta*, n. (sa. sutra) ') a string, 
thread; acc. „am (tesam hatthesu 
laggetvà) 111,1 (i.e. a charmed thread); 
*paritta-°, 111,11 (v. paritta*). — 
2) the thread of tradition, doctrine, 
scientific system, a single rule, passage, 
or chapter in the Buddhist holy scrip- 
tures (containing a discourse of Buddha 
himself); nom. „am, 31,14 (of a single 
gāthā); 109,33 (a part of navanga- 
Satthusāsana); *-sammata, mfn. 
known by the name of Sutta, 110,3; 
*niyyāmaka-0, n. “the mariner's lore", 
25,28. cp. next etc. [Tr. PM. p. 69; 
Neumann, Die Reden des Gotama 
Buddha, I. p. 505—6.] 
"Sutta-nipüta, m. name of a 
collection of old Buddhist Suttas, 
mostly in verse, forming a section of 
the Khuddaka-nikaya (g. v.); speci- 
mens thereof p. 103—5. 
suttanta, n. (& m.) (Buddh. sa. 
sūtrānta, m.) 1) == sutta; Aggi- 
Vacchagotta-9, n. 95,33; 2) — Sutta- 
pitaka, or Suttanta-pitaka, x. (v. 
pitaka); loc. we, 102,14; "-pitakam, 
102,13 (the 2. division of the holy 
scriptures, comprising the five nikayas). 
*sudath, indecl, an enclitic par- 
ticle used in narrative sentences, 
mostly after demonstr. (or relat.) pron. 
or adv., the verb generally following 
in pres.; tatra ~, 70,22. 77,19. 81,9; 
tā ~, 78,25 (w. foll. aor.). [The last 
part of this word seems to be iden- 


2 


tical with the last element of idari, the 
first part with another frequently oc- 
curring particle su ('ssu, assu, or sa, 
'Ssa), probably — sa, sma; cp. sū. 
svid, indecī.] 

sudda, m. (sa. çudra) a man of 
the fourth caste; nom. ~o, 92,11. 

suddha, mfn. (sa. guddha; pp. 
sujjhati, ycudh, cp. sodheti) cleansed, 
pure; faultless, genuine, eíc.; m. ~o, 
62,29; (rukkho) 95,4; gen. «assa 
(posassa) Dh. 125; f. wa (attha- 
kathā) 118,28; ^. «am (vattham) 
68,24; (pavacanam) 95,25; m. pl. wa, 
109,3; *°-citta, mfn. pure-minded, pl. 
wit, 62,22; bhava, m. purity, chastity, 
acc. eam, 58,15; cp. next ete. 

suddhata, f. (sa. guddhatā) pu- 
rity; acc. ~am, 108,24. 

*suddhajiva, mfn. living a pure 
life (cp. ajiva, m.); instr. wena, Dh. 
245 (cp. Kern, Verkl. p. 59); acc. 
pl. m. ~e, Dh. 375. — *suddhajivi(n), 
mfn. id.; acc. «im, Dh. 366. 

*suddhin, mfn.(?) possessed of 
purity, pure; nom. m. ~1 (paccattam, 
g. v.) Dh. 165 (ep. a-suddhin). 

Suddhodana, m. (sa. guddho- 
dana) nom. pr. of the father of Go- 
tama Buddha; 62,1. 64,6 (-mahara- 
ja(n)). 

sunakha, m. (rarely sunaka [per- 
haps on account of false etymology : 
su-nakha]; se. qunaka) a dog; pl. 
nā, 111,4; acc. we, 21,4; cp. sona. 
[Pischel, Gr. Š 206; Trenckner, PM. 
p. 59,12. | 

sundara, mfn. (= sa.) good, ex- 
cellent, beautiful, handsome; f. na 
(yāgu) 57,26; n. adv. „am, well, 
rightly, 1,34 (~ te katar). 

Sundari, f. (= sa.) nom. pr. 
of a woman; nom. wi, 74,11; voc. mi, 
73,16; acc. ~i, 73,3; instr. ~iyā, 
78,2; gen. wiya, 73,31. 

supanna, m. (sa. suparna) a kind 
of bird (of mythical or fanciful de- 
scription); nom, «o, 20,18; °-potaka, 
m. 60,8 (g. v.); *°-bhavana, n. the 
abode or world of the Supannas, 19,9; 


5 


suvanna 


yoni, f. 19,8 (g. v.) ; %-rājan, m. the 
S.-king, 19,15. 

supati, vb. (sa. ysvap) to sleep; 
pari. acc. m. «anta, 67,28; pp. v. 
sutta!; cp. next. 

supina, m. (& x.) (sa. svapna) 
sleep, sleeping; a dream, vision; acc. 
en (addasa) 61,9. 

Suppüraka, m. (sa. gūrpāraka) 
nom. pr. 8) of a seaport-town (pattana), 
probably in the western India, b) of 
a man (niyyamaka) : -kumaro, 24,11; 
9-pandita, m. id. 25,14; 9-jutaka, m. 
24.5. 

subha, mfn. (sa. qubha) splendid, 
beautiful, handsome; good, agreeable, 
delightful; happy, auspicious; acc. f. 
eam (pokkharanim) 111,16; ». ~am 
(astu) 114,33; dvandva comp. subha- 
subham, Dh. 409 (cp. a-subha); — 
*subhinupassin, mfn. looking only 
for what is delightful, acc. m. «im, 
Dh. 7; Dh. 8 (a-°); gen. m. «ino, 
Dh. 349. cp. sobhati. 

sumanā, f. (at the beg. of comp. 
sumana-°; == sa.) uame of a sort of 
great flowering jasmine; 9-mallikádi- 
nam, gen. pl. (cp. mallika) 65,29; 
*0.pattu-vitāna, m. n. a canopy of 
cloth with pattern of that flower, gen. 
„ASSA, 65,18. 

sumarati, vb. (sa. ysmr; v. sa- 
rati) Dh. 324. 

suyyati, vb. (pass. sunāti, q. v.) 
27,6. 

surā, f. (== sa.) a kind of spiri- 
tuous liquor; acc. ~am, 74,4; °-pana, 
^. drinking sp. l, 61, (vigata-®, 
mfn.); %meraya-pana, x. id. Db. 
247; °-meraya-majja-°, 81,23. (q. v.). 

suriya, m. pr sūrya) the sun; 
nom. ~o, 26,5; (majjhantika~°) 26,4; 
loc. we, 32,29. 42,1; "suriyuggamana, 
^. sunrise, 72,29 (?-kale). 

suruūgā, f. (= sa.) a subter- 
raneous abode; loc. ~ayam, 111,13. 
(cp. Weber, Ind. Str. IT, 395. III, 
392). >» 

suvanna, ^. (sa. suvarna) gold; 
nom. «am, 26,9; at the beg. of subst. 


18* 


Suvanna-? 


comp. ‘golden’ or ‘golden coloured’, v. 
9-katacchu, *-camgotaka, 9-jala, °-paii- 
jara, °-paduka, °-pasaka, °-bhimkara, 
0-miga, °-rajata-patiyo, f. pl. (dishes 
of gold and silver, cp. pati) 61,27, 
C.rajaharisa, °-sandasa. °-samugga, 
saraka, °-hamsa; — °-maya, mfn. 
made of gold, x. pl. māni, 28,30; 
%vanna, mfn. golden coloured, of 
beautiful complexion, m. ~o, 5,36. 
24,11. 87,8; cp. sovanna & next, 

*Suvanna-pabbata, m. “Gold- 
Hill", nom. pr. of a (mythical) moun- 
tain (in Himavanta); nom. ~o, 61,17. 

Suvanņa-bhūmi, f. (sa. Su- 
varna-bhümi) nom. pr. of a country 
(*the golden land"), probably on the 
coast of Burma or of the Malay Pen- 
insula; acc. wim, 19,24. 

suve, adv., t. sve. 

susana, n. (sa. gmacana) a ce- 
metery; nom. wth, 56,18. 67,31; 
C-santike (g. v.) 56,19; *amaka-°, n. 
V. h.). 
susira, mfn. (sa. sushira) per- 
forated, full of holes, hollow; °-rukkha, 
m. a hollow tree, instr. ~ena, 25,3. 

Susima, m. (== sa.) nom. pr. of 
a king; voc, wa, 46,32; °-kumara, m. 
45,35; °-jataka, n. 45,19. 

sussati, vb. (sa. yqush) to be- 
come dry, dry up; pr. 3. sg. «ati, 
103,20; part. med, loc. sussamanamhi 
(lohite) ib.; cp. upa-sussati, vi-soseti. 

*Sussondi, f. nom. pr. of a queen, 
19,7. 20,17; gen. wiya, 19,18; ~i-jā- 
taka, x. 19,5. (Among the different 
varr. lect. of this name Sussonī (sa. 
su-groņī) seems to be worthy of no- 
tice,) 

suhajja [& suhada], m. (sa. su- 
hrdaya [su-hrd]) a friend; pl. nā, 
Dh. 219; gen. pl. „ānam, 47,5 
(ūāti-mitta-'). 

sūkara, m. (= sa.) a boar, hog, 
pig; nom. <o, 35,22. 46,33 (-gama~, 
g. 9.); acc. ~am, 35,33; gen. —ass[a], 
85,5; *°-maddava, n. (g. v.); %mukha, 
n. a pig's mouth, 84,84 (°-sadisa, mfn.); 
mfn. having a pigs mouth, 85,26; 


276 


84,27 (peta, g. v.); %-sadisa, mfn. 
ressembling a pig, 85,22. 

sūpa, m. (== 8d.) sauce, soup; 
°-rasa, m. the taste of soup, acc. ~at, 
Dh. 64; aneka-sūpa-vyaiijana, mfn. 
57,11 (v. an-eka). 

sūra, mfn. (sa. çūra) strong, brave, 
valiant; m. ~o (ativiya ~ hutva, 
“showing a very bold front") 38,31; 
m. pl. wa, 40,14; — subst, m. a hero, 
warrior; abhejja - vara - sūra - mahā- 
yodha, pl. unconquerable excellent 
heros and great warriors, 39,12; a-sura, 
m. 103,32 (g. v.); *kika-°, m. (g. v.). 

Surasena, m. (sa. Ģūrasena) 
nom, pr. of a man (fictitious); nom. 
w0, 96,31. 

süla, m. n. (sa. cula) a pointed 
stake, spike, pike; a spit (for roasting 
meat); *mamsa-9, m. n. 14,29 (q. v.). 

sekha, m. (sa. çalksha; cp. sik- ` 
khati) a beginner, pupil, one who has 
entered the path (v. magga?), but 
has not yet become an arahat (q. v.); 
nom. ~0, Dh. 45; — mfn. (cp. sa. 
gaikshya) belonging to the stage of 
a pupil, elementary; instr. n. wena 
(ñanena, dassanena, “an imperfect 
degree of knowledge, or insight") 
69,34-35. 

settha, mfn. (sa. creshtha) most 
excellent, best (w. loc. or e. c. best 
of or among); m. ~o (manussesu) 
Dh. 321; n. „am (dhanam) Dh. 26; 
comp. raja-°, m. 47,8 (voc. ~a); 
Buddha-%, m. 109,5 (gen. wassa). 
cp. seyya & next. 

setthata, f. (sa. greshthatā) the 
first rank, superiority; acc. ~am (de- 
vànam) Dh. 30. 

setthi, m. (sa. creshthin) the 
chief of an association (of merchants 
etc.), president of a guild (in later 
times appointed by the king to this 
office (which was sometimes beritable)); 
nom. ~i (gahapati) 68,29; gen. ~ino, 
22,18; ~wissa, 69,9; loc. ~imhi, 70,15; 
*0_kula, x. (purana-°, an ancient 8. 
family) 55,81; *°-putta, m. 67,22 (g. v.). 


277 


[SBE. XIII, y. 102; Fick, Soc. Glied. 
p. 166.] 


seni, f. (sa. creni) a guild or 
association of traders; acc. pl. «yo 
(sabba-°, opp. amacca-brahmana- 
 gahapatike) 42,2. 

seta, mfn. (sa. gveta) white; m. 
„0 (sabba-°, white all over) 21,51 
n. pl. „vāni, 47,2; comp. °-cchatta, 
n. 42,8; %paduma, n. 61,19; °-vara- 
vāraņa, m. 61,17 (g. 9.). 

seti (& sayati), vb. (sa. yci) to 
lie, lie down, sleep, repose; pr. 3. sg. 
seti, 30,21. Dh. 79. 168. 169 (sukhar, 
“lives happily”); Dh. 201 (dukkham); 
sayati (ekako) 46,19; 1. sg. sayāmi, 
47,25; 3. pl. senti, Dh. 156; part. 
med. *semāna [*sayamana, sayāna | 
v. saha-semāna; pot. 3. sg. sayetha, 
9,32; ger. sayitva, 12,1. 58,17 (taya 
saddhim). cp. sayana, ete., seyyaka, 
seyya. 

seda, m. (sa. sveda) sweat, per- 
spiration; mom. ~0, 82,5. 97,22; pl. 
8, drops of perspiration, 45,1. cp. 
nezt. 

sedita, mfn. (pp. sedeti, to soften, 
cook, steam; sa. svedita) softened; 
*su-sedita, mfn. well-steamed (bent, 
or crooked) 62,17 (°-vettagga, g. v.). 

Senaka, m. (sa. senaka?) nom. 
pr. of a king; loc. ~e (Barainasiyam) 
52,14; gen. massa, 52,15. 

senā, f. (= sa.) an army, battle- 
array; nom. <, 108,25; acc. ~am, 
104,5; instr. ~waya (caturanginiya) 
35,15; at the end of comp. (nom. pr. 
m.) sena, v. Naga-°, Vira-°, Silia-°, 
Sura-?. 

senasana (& sayanasana), n. (sa. 
cayanasana) Jit. ‘sleeping and sitting’, 
bedding, dwelling, habitation (some- 
times — vihara); 97,8; Dh. 185 
(sayanāsanam, pantam, g. v.). 

*semāna, part., v. seti. 

semha, x. (sa. gleshman, m.) 
phlegm; nom. «am, 82,4. 97,22, 103,20. 

*semhāra, [m.] name of a certain 
animal, according to the comm. a 
monkey (makkata); gen. wassa, 92,22. 


sevati 


seyya (or seyyas), mfn. (sa. 
creyas) better, preferable; m. ~o (atta) 
55,2; 107, — Dh. 308; acc. «am, 
Dh. 61; the orig. s-stem is preserved 
in x. seyyo, 7,4. 103,73; Dh. 76. 
100. 106 (sā pujana); 314; further 
in *seyyaso, indecl. == still better, 
Dh. 43. (cp. settha). 
*seyyaka, mfn. (fr. seyy&) lying, 
sleeping (only e. c.), v. uttana-®, 
*seyyathūi, indecl. (Magadhism 
instead of taih-yatha, Buddh. sa. tad- 


„yathā, cp. sa. sa yathū) just as, as 


if; w. foll. nom. 69,27 (~ pi pubbe 
agārikabhūto); 95,13 (~ pi mahāsa- 
muddo); at the beg. of full sentence 
(w. pot.) : ~ pi puriso sallena viddho 
assa (“it is as if...”) 92,6; < pi 
rañño paccantimam nagaram |scid. 
assa, pot.) 90,30 (only fancy, for in- 
stance, that a certain king has a fron- 
tier fortress); < pi nama (w. foll. 
pot. & corresp. evam eva) 68,24; — 
seyyath'idarh, that is to say, namely, 
67,3, 68,19. [cp. Trenckner, PM. p. 
75; Franke, KZ. (N. F.) XIV. p. 419; 
differently Pischel, Gr. § 493.] 
*seyyaso, indecl., v. seyya(s). 
seyyā, f. (sa. gayyū) lying, sleep- 
ing; a bed, couch; ace. ~am (kap- 
peti, g. v.) 46,22; *eka-9, f. (g.v.); 
gabbha-°, f. (g. v.); *nanikama-®, f. 
(4. v.) ep. uttana-seyyaka,, mfn. 
*Seruma, [m.] nom. pr. of an is- 
land; acc. «am, 20,19; ?-dipa, m. 
(= Nāgadīpa, Ceylon?) 19,8. 
sela, !) m. (sa. gaila; cp. sila) a 
stone, rock; nom. ~o, 106,29 =: Dh. 
81; acc. ~am, 104,16. — 2) mfn. stony, 
rocky ; acc. m. wath (pabbatam) Dh.8. 
sevati, vb. (sa. sev) to frequent, 
serve, follow, practise, devote oneself 
to (acc.); pr. 3. sg. „ati (piyāni) 
55,4; 3. pl. „anti, Dh. 293; pot. 3. 
sg. 9) seve (paradaram) Dh. 310; 
b) seveyya, 7,33; Dh. 167 (dhammar); 
grd. sevitabba, 66,25 (na «à, to be 
avoided); pp. sevita, enjoyed, Dh. 
272 (a-puthujjana-?, g. v.) cp. next. 


sevana 


sevanā, f. (== sa.) waiting upon, 
service, honouring; 14,2. 

sesa, !) mfn. (sa. cesha) remain- 
ing, left, mostly pl. == the others, the 
rest, or at the beg. of comp.; pl. nom. 
m. mā, ye. 40,16; 49,7 (sesāpi); 
73,32 (pleonast. added after thapetva 
ariyasavake); acc. pl. ~e, 21,21; instr. 
pl. well, 112,25; gen. pl. ~anam, 
40,16; comp. %-varattā, 12,20; °-vani- 
janam, 21,25; %-āmacce, 40,5. 
subst. n. sesa(ka), the rest; loc. 
33,82; CD. a-sesa, mfn. 

so, pron. demonstr, m. (= 
v. tam. | 

soka, m. (sa. qoka) sorrow; nom. 
mo (maha-") 89,10; acc. ~am, ib.; 
pl. nā, 107,32 -== Dh. 335; instr. pl. 
Aebi, 70,29; comp. (dvandva) : ?-pari- 
deva-, 66,10. 90,17. 92,31; parideva- 
soka-sampanna, mfn. full of lamen- 
tation and sorrow, 69,32; *tinna-soka- 
pariddava, mfn. (v. pariddava); *tanu- 
bhita-°, mfn. (g. v.); *%-pareta, mfn. 
(g. v.) cp. a-soka, vi-soka (visuka) 
& next. 

*sokin, mfn. (fr. soka) sorrowing; 
acc. f. «inim (pajam) Dh. 28. 

socati, vb. (sa. yguc) to grieve, 
mourn, suffer pain; pr. 3. sg. «ati, 
17,29; 105,31 (puttehi); Dh. 15 (opp. 
nandati, modati); 8. pi. „anti, 108,7; 
3. pl. med. socare, 104,10. Dh. 225; 
aor. 2. sg. (mà) soci, 89,12; cp. soka, 
ete., socana. 

socanā, f. (= sa.) sorrow, suffer- 
ing; 105,52. 

Soņa, m. (f. ~i, also spelt sona, 
wi; Sa. Gvana, mī) a dog; soni- 
rupena, in the appearance of a bitch, 
111,2; cp. sunakha. 

sonda, f. (& sonda, m.; sa. caunda, 
fr. guņdā) an elephant’s trunk; acc. 
wan, 76,21; instr. māya, 61,19. 

80tal, n. (sa. grotra) the ear (as 
organ of hearing, cp. kanna); nom. 
vam, 70,50; instr. wena, Dh. 360; 
loc. wasmim, 71,8; pl. wani, 27,4; 
9-samphassa-, 72,9 (v. h.); “*ohita-®, 
mfn. (g. v.). 


sa’), 


278 


sota*, m. & n. (sa. srotas, n.) a 
stream, flood, current; nom, ~o, 108,5; 
acc. ~am, Dh. 347 (metaph. of the 
flood of passions); pl. ~a, Dh. 339 
(do.); n. pl. ~ani (nadinam) 103,18; 
cp. uddham-sota, mfn. & next. 

sotāpatti, f. (Buddh. sa. srota- 
patti) the state of a sotapanna, the 
first step in sanctification; °-phala, n. 
the advantage of Sotāpannaship, Dh. 
178; loc. we, 87,1; (= „die Hörer- 
schaft", nicht von ysru, sondern von 
yoru, Neumann, Reden des Gotama 
Buddha, I. p. 505). 

sotapanna, mfn. (Buddh. sa. 
srotapanna) ‘who has entered the 
stream’ (4. e. of sanctification), a con- 
verted who has reached the first stage 
of sanctification (the three last stages 
of which are: sakad-agamin, an-āgā- 
min, arahat); m. <o, 28,18. 29,18 (v. 
corrections); 79,33; pl. wi, 22,13. 

sotum, inf., v. sunati. 

sotthi, f. & m. (sa. svasti) wel- 
fare, success, prosperity; acc. ~ii 
(tesan karissami, I will save them) 
27,16; amhakam im karonto pi 
tva eva karissasi (you do so, I 
think, in order to save me) 54,1; 
eim gacchati (was saved) 29,13; so- 
tthim, acc. (adv.) safely, happily, Dh. 
219 (~agatam); sotthinā, instr. (adv.) 
id, 42,23; sotthi-bhava, m. safety, acc. 
eam (kàtum) 27,15. 

sotthiya, m(fx). (sa. crotriya) 
conversant with the sacred doctrine, a 
brahman (or bhikkhu); acc. m. pl. 
we (rājāno, "holy kings") Dh. 295. 

sodariya, m. (fr. sa + udariya; 
sa. sodarya) a uterine brother; acc. 
eam, 31,35. 

sodhana, x. (sa. codhana) clean- 
sing, investigation, examination; °-kale 
(“when the search was made") 49,36, 

sodheti, wb. (sa. codhayati, 
VĢudh) to cleanse, purify; to clear 
up, examine, investigate (acc.); pr. 
3. pl. ~wenti (maccam) Dh. 141; 
part. instr. m. «entena (viharam) 
84,; pl. wenta, 25,7 (examining); 


279 hattha 
inf. wetum, 50,3 (id); ger. wetva, H. 
48,31 (id.); grd. m. wetabbo, 84,5; 
cp. suddha & sodhana. 


h', apparently sandhi-consonant in 
sona, v. sona. | some few instances (if not shortened 
sobbha, m. (sa. cvabhra) a hole, | of ha, or hi, q. v.) : no h’etarh, (cer- 
pit, abyss; nom. ~o, 27,7 (a whirl- | tainly) not so! 70,3; mā h’evam kho, 
| 

! 


pool); 27,3 (chinna-tata-maha-"); loc. | 90,24. À 
ee, 18,14. | ha. indecl, (= sa.) an emphatic 
sobhagga, n. (sa. saubhagya) | particle ("indeed", “verily”), mostly 
welfare, prosperity, auspiciousness; | 
beauty, grace, loveliness; instr, wena 
(siri-®, g. v.) 64,10; ""-ppatta, mfn. 
happy, well-to-do, auspicious, lovely; 
M. m0, là; acc. «am, 10,26; f. nā, 
73,8; (perhaps confounded with sobhii, 
f. (sa. Gobha), beauty, v. newt etc.). | 16,7; gen. «assa, 10,4 (suvanna-?); 
sobhati, eb. (sa. yçubh) to be | suvanna-°, m. id. 10,5-15. 


| used after ti, or na; tasma ti ha, 
| 
| 
| 
| 
bright or splendid, to shine, look °hamsa*, & Shamsana, mfn. 


93,2 (g. v.); comp. have (v. h.). 
hamsa!, m. (— sa.) a goose (or 
swan); pl, «à, Dh. 91; 9-potika. f. 
10,4 (g. v.); *-rajan, m. 10,5; raja-?, 
m. a special kind of swan, som. <o, 


beautiful; aor. 3. sg. sobhi (Buddho | (only e. c.; sa. harsha, harshana) 
viya) 113,21. causing erection (of the hairs), v. 
sobhana, mfn. (sa. gobhana) | loma-?. 
splendid, beautiful; excellent, good; hanfiati (or te), vb. (pass. hanti; 
n. wali (kammam) 100,6. sā. hanyate) to be slain or killed; pr. 
somanassa, n. (fr. su-mana(s); | 3. sg. wate, 30,19. 
sa. saumanasya) gladness, satisfaction; | haūūe, pot., v. hanti. 
pl. «ni (pleasures) Dh. 341; *°-jata, *hata-hata-kesa, mfn. (of un- 
mfn. glad, delighted, 16,28. 64,13; | certain derivation; cp. sa. hatha & 
*O-ppatta, mfn. id, 15,29. | mahratt, hatahata) having dishevelled 
solasa, ') num. (mfn. pl.) (sa. | hair; m. wo, 71,29. 
shodaga) 16; ~ petiyo, 23,28; °-vas- hattha, mfn. (sa. hrshta) glad; 
sa-, 42,25, eic. (v. h.); *-vassika, | m. <o, 68,16; *tuttha-°, mfn. (g. v.). 
mfn. being 16 years old, 111,36 (m. hata, mfn. (pp. hanti; = sa.) 
^am, rupam). — *) mfn. the 16th; | beaten, slain, destroyed; m. ~0, 30,22; 
acc. f. wim (kalam) Dh. 70; — sola- | *-labha-sakkara, mfn. (v. lübha); 
sama, mfn. (sa. shodagama) id.; ~o | *hatāvakāsa, mfn. (cp. okiüsa, m.) 
(vaggo) Dh. XVI. who has cut off every ocension (for 
sovanna, 1) mfn. (fr. suvanna; | good and evil), m. ^o, Dh. 97 (con- 
sa. sauvarna) golden; m. ~o (sabba-°) | founded with hata (pp. harati) cp. 
84,26; "-sivikā, f. 62,7 (g. v.); — °) | pahata); a-hata, mfn. (v. h.). 
n. gold; *°-maya, mfn. made of gold, hattha, m. (sa. hasta) the hand 
fh. ~0, 28,29. (or arm), fore leg (or paw); mom. 
sossati, fut., v. sunāti. m0, 50,22; acc. „ari, 23,9; instr. 
svākkhāta, mfn., v. akkhāti. | wena, 24,23. 83,17-20; 111,21 (vàma-?); 
*svātanāya, adv. (an old dat. | abl. ~to (“from”) 101,25-29; loc. we, 
[scil. divasāya ?] cp. ajjatana & sa. | 23,9. 36,21. 58,7. 101,26 (tassa, ‘with 
cvastana, mfn.) for the next day, or | him’); acc. pl. ~e (dve) 62,28; instr. 
to-morrow; 77,28. cp. next. pl. „ehi (ubhohi) 27,20; loc. pl. 
sve (& suve), adv. (sa. gvas) to- | ^,esu,*b9,s. 111,1; comp. ?-gata, mfn. 
morrow; 14,16. 101,26; suve suve, | come to hand, obtained, 37,18 (°-bhava, 
daily, day after day, Dh. 229. cp. prec. | m., g. v.); "-gahana, n. seizing one's 


hatthin 


hand, 51,14; *°-dhovana, n. 56,25 (v. 
h.); 9-ppatta, mfn. (cp. patta?) = 
0-gata; *%-patha, m. the reach of one's 
hand, acc. ~am, 62,18; pada, m. 
pl. hands and feet, 99,13; 5,27 (comp. 
hatthapada-°); *°-mudda, f. 56,7 (v. 
h.); *°-saniiata, mfn. who controls 
his hands, m. ~0, Dh. 362; — danda-®, 
mfn. (g. v.); *nanavudha-°, mfn. 
armed with weapons of all kind, 6,7 
(cp. àvudha). cp. neat. | 

hatthin, m. (sa. hastin) an ele- 
phant; nom. ~i, 76,8; 24,1 (maī- 
gala-°, g. v.); wim, 24,26; gen. ~wissa, 
77,1; pl. mī, 85,1; instr. pl. mīhi, 
85,11; gen. pl. «inam, ib.; comp. 
hatthi-°, v. *°-kkhandha, m.; ?-naga, 
m. an excellent elephant, insír. wena, 
102,25; *"-pabhinna, m. (g. v.); ?-pi- 
tthe (v. pittha); *°-bhanda, m. (g. v.); 
*).magga, m. (g. v.); *-ratana, m. 
(g. ».); %-sālā, f. (g. v.). 

hadaya, n. (sa. hrdaya) the heart; 
the mind or soul; nom. «am, 1,24, 
82,3. 97,21; 59,12 (matu-°, amatu-°); 
64,17 (pitu-°); 64,18 (pajapati-°); acc. 
eam, 2,2. 27,5; instr. wena, 59,10; 
pl. Ani, 2,1; comp. °-mathsa, w.; 
*thaddha-°, mfn.; *samvigga-°, mfn. 
(4. v.). | 

hanati, vb., v. hanti. 

*hanapeti, vb. (caus. II. hanti, 
yhan; cp. ghateti) to cause to be 
killed, massacred, or devastated (acc.); 
imper, 2. pl. ~etha (paccantagāmam) 
38,29; aor. 3, 8g. „vesi (do.) 38,32. 

hanu % hanuka, f. (= sa.; but 
also hanu, & «ka, m. n.) a jaw; 
*sithilahanu, m. (g. v.); *hanukatthi- 
ka, w. 40,18 (v. atthika). 

hantar, m. (sa. hantr) a striker, 
one who kills; acc. ~aram (brahma- 
nassa) Dh. 389. 

hanti, vb. (& hanati; sa. yhan) 
to strike, kill, destroy, devastate (acc.) ; 
pr. 3. sg. 2) hanti, Dh. 72. 355. 405; 
b) hanati (panam) 97,10; 3. pi. ha- 
nanti, Dh. 355; 2. pl. hanatla (ga- 
mam) 38,5; pot. 3. sg. *) haññe 
(pàninam) 17,9; 5) haneyya, Dh. 


280 


129; aor. 3. pl. hanimsu, 34,21; ger. 
hantva, Dh. 294; caus. v. *hanapeti 
& ghateti; pass. haūūati, pp. hata 
(q. v.) cp. ghacea, ghañña, hantar. . 

handa, indecl. (sa. hanta) a par- 
ticle implying resolution or exhortation, 
followed by pr. 1. sg., fut. 1, Sg., or 
imper., mostly at the beginning of a 
sentence and often followed by dani 
(v. idāni) — well then! come! look! 
80,1 (< dani, w. pr. 1. sg.). 

hambho, indecl. (cp. ambho; sa. 
hamho) a particle implying indigna- 
tion, anger, efc.; or exclamation of 
surprise; ~ passatha, 88,3. (cp. Pischel, 
Gr, § 267.) 

hammiya, n. (sa. harmya) a large 
house with more stories, or the top- 
most story of such a house; loc. pl. 
„esu, 76,39 (“the balconies”, SBE. 
XX, 248). 

Ohara, mfn. (e. c. = sa.) bringing, 
taking, seizing, ravishing; mano-hara, 
mfn. (g. v); *vayo-hara, mfn. (v. 
vaya). 

"harana, n. & mfn. (e. c. = sa.) 
bringing, taking, removing; manusa- 
mala-°-attham, “in order to remove 
every human stain", 61,13, 

harani, f. (= sa.) a passage by 
which water, etc., passes, a channel, 
conductor, nerve; *rasa-harani, f. à 
nerve of taste, acc. pl. ~iyo, 51,25. 

harati., vb. (sa. yhr) to carry, 
bring, fetch, take (away), remove, de- 
stroy (acc.); to rob, plunder, attack 
(gen.); pr. 8. sg. mati, 50,3 (opp. 
āharati); 2. sg. «asi, 56,13 (kassa 
yāgum); 1. sg. „āmi (pitu tasaram) 
87,14; imper. 2. sg. hara (mama san- 
tika) 49,15; pot. 3. sg. weyya (visam 
pàninà) Dh. 124; (brahmanassa x) 
Dh. 389 (var. lect. pahareyya); aor. 
3. sg. ahàsi (me) Dh. 3; fut. 2. sg. 
~issasi, 56,14; 1. sg. wissimi (jīvi- 
tam) 4,5; caus. II. harāpeti (q. v.); 
(pp. hata, cp. hata); cp. hara, ha- 
rana («ni). 

harapeti, vb. (caus, II. harati) 
to cause to be brought or removed, 


281 


to take away (acc.); ger. wetva (pam- 
sum) 38,2. 

harita, mfn. (— sa.) green; acc. 
m. «am (yavam) 9,1; *haritupatta, 
mfn. (prob. fr. harita + upatta, g. 
v.) strown or prepared with green 
leaves, loc. f. ~āya (bhūmiyā) 61,24 
[different from harita-patta, mfn. (v. 
patta!) having green leaves, Jat. ILI, 
495,1, etc.]. 

have, indecl. (sa, ha vai) particle 
of asseveration (sometimes used after 
relatives): truly, certainly; yada ~, 
66,20; yo ~, Dh. 382. 

hasati, vb. (sa. yhas) to laugh; 
part. acc, f. ~antim (tapasim) 111,17; 
part. f. med. hasamānā, 58,10; aor. 
3. sg. hasi, 36,3. 53,22. 65,24 (mahā- 
hasitam, said of a horse : neighed); 
2. sg. hasi, 16,32; 2. sg. hasim, 17,9. 
58,13; ger. witva (maha-hasitam) 
16,29; pp. hasita (v. next); cp. hasa. 

hasita, n. (=: sa.) laughing, 
laughter; acc. ~ai (maha-°, hasati, 
to laugh aloud) 16,29. 65,24; %-kūraņa, 
n. 58,34 (v. h.). 

hüpeti, vb. (caus. jahati; sa. hà- 
payati, yhā) to abandon, neglect, for- 
feit (acc.); pot. 3. sg. hapaye (atta- 
dattham) Dh. 166. 

hāyati, vb. (pass. jahati; sa. 
hiyate, yhā) to be left or abandoned; 
to be lost, decrease; to be inferior, be 
outrun; pr. 3. sg. „ati (udakam) 3, 
(opp. vaddhati); aor. 3. sg. med. aha- 
yatha (labho ca sakkāro) 18,55. 19,4 
(cp. Kuhn, Beitr. p. 110). 

hara, m. (= sa.) a garland, neck- 
lace; muttà-9, m. a pearl-necklace, 
64,26. 

hava, m. (= sa.) ‘calling’, dalli- 
ance, blandishment ; °-bhava, m. (dvan- 
dva) coguettish gestures, 21,15. 

hāsa, m. (= sa.) laughter; joy, 
P pleasure; nom. «o, Dh. 146. 

hi, indecl. (= sa.) an enclitic 
particle, generally joined to the first 
word of a sentence, with a causal or 
affirmative meaning, but sometimes de- 
noting only transition, continuation, 


hirimat 


or emphasis : for, since, indeed (nam, 
enim; igitur); sace <, 1,21; tva <, 
5,01; 13,1; santi A, 11,4; yam a, 
18,29 (g. v.); yatra <, 63,13; aluum 
e, 73,14; Ayam h’ ettha attho, 85,29; 
na ~, 97,19 (“nay verily”); tena hi, 
“well then", 1,10-19; 90,98 (tena h’); 
113,14; at the end of a sentence: 112,10. 

himsati, vb. (sa. yhims) to in- 
jure, harm, kill, destroy (ace.); pr. 3. 
sg. „ati (bhutini dandena) Dh. 
131-32; (panani) Dh, 270; pp. hith- 
Sita, injured, killed; n. wat (ma... 
ekapanam pi) 27,33. cp. nert. 

himsā, f. (== sa.) injury, harm; 
comp. *himsa-muna(s), 2. (2) inclina- 
tion to injure, nom. «o, Dh. 390. 
cp. a-himsa, f. 

hita, mfn. (pp. dahati, ydhà; == 
sa.) !) put, set, placed; 2. ohita, pu- 
rohita, sahita (salita), su-hita; *) 
good, advantageous, salutary; n. ~am, 
benefit, welfare; sabbaloka-hitam ka- 
tva, “having conferred blessings on 
the whole world”, 110,18; *hitavaha, 
mfn. (cp. ūvaha) conductive to wel- 
fare or blessing, f. nā, 114,29; 113,53 
(sabhaloka-°); cp. a-hita, m/n. 

hitvā, ger, v. jahati. 

hima, x, (= sa.) cold, frost; ice, 
snow; °-gabbha, m. an icy or snowy 
place, acc. «um, 16,9. cp. next & 
hemanta. 

Himavanta (or Himavat), m. 
(sa. Himavat) ‘the snowy mountain’, 
Himalaya; nom. ~0, Dh, 304; ace. 
~ar, 46,34; loc. ~e, 10,5; abl. «to, 
21,35; comp. °-padese, 13,9; °-mattha- 
kena, 36,5 (v. h.). 

hiri (or hiri), f. (sa. hri) shame, 
modesty; nom. wi, 10,16 (ajjhatta- 
samutthānā, g. v.); dvandva comp. 
*hirottappa, x. (cp. ottappa) sense 
of shame and tact in behaviour, acc. 
vam (bhinditvā) 10,13; *bhinna-hi- 
rottappa, mf». without shame and 
decency, 10,17; — *hiri-nisedha, mfn. 
Dh, 143 (v. nisedha); cp, a-hirika 
(a-hirika) & next. l 

hirimat, mfn. (sa. hrimat) mo- 


hina 


dest, bashful; instr. m. ~mata (dujjī- 
_vam) Dh. 245. 

hina, mfn. (pp. jahāti, cp. hayati, 
Vhā; = sa.) !) abandoned, left, lost; 
O.vīriya, mfn. weak, feeble, Dh. 7. 
112 (v. viriya); *) inferior, low, vile, 
bad, mean, base, secular; m. <o, 66,26; 
dat. n. ~aya (āvattitvā, the secular 
life, the world) 69,27. 

huta, ». (= sa.) an oblation, sa- 
crifice; nom, ~am, Dh. 106. 108. 
(cp. juhati). 

hutta, x. (sa. hotra) =  prec.; 
only in the comp. aggi-' (g. v.). 

huram, adv. (ved. sa. huras) only 
used in old texts, and always opp. to 
idha : ‘yonder’, 4. e. in another world, 
in another existence, Dh. 20 (idha 
và ~ va). Hence *hurühuram, adv. 
(= huram huram?) from life to life, 
hither and thither, 107,30 — Dh. 334. 
(cp. Morris, PTS, '84, p. 103-05. 

hettha, prp. & adv. (sa. adbastā 
1) under, beneath, from under (w. gen. 
or abl.; or acc. in comp.); rukkhassa 
e, 36,26; setacchattassa ~, 42,9; 
vitànassa ~, 65,18; ~ pasada (ab/.) 
67,24; °-pitham, adv. (under the chair 
83,18; °-maficam, adv. (under the bed] 
88,18; — *) below (adv.); 85,30 (opp. 
upari); ‘hettha’ in a book is = ‘above’, 
the reading (or writing) being con- 
sidered as a moving upwards, so that 
a preceding passage consequently is 
‘below’; °-vutta-nayen’eva, 63,22 (‘just 
in the same manner as mentioned be- 
fore’, cp. naya). 

*hetthima, mfn. (superl. of he- 
ttha; sa. *adhastima, cp. Pischel, 
Gr. S 107) lowest; °-tale, 59,27 (v. 
tala). 

*hetheti, vb. (sa. yheth) to worry, 
injure (acc.); part. nom. m. a-hetha- 


yam (vannagandham, “without in- 
juring") 106, == Dh, 49. cp. vi- 
hetheti. | 


hetu, m. (= sa.) cause, reason; 
e 


282 . 


e. C. (adv.) = for one's sake (sa. 
hetoh), v. atta-°, parassa-° (para-?); 
*0-attha, m. causative meaning, 85,9 
(antogadha-°, mfn. g. v.); *-tanha, 
f. ‘thirst’ as cause [scil. sabba-duk- 
khassa] 108,15; sa-hetu-dhamma, m., 
v. sā-!, & dhamma‘, 66,21. 
hemanta, m. (= sa.) winter; 
%simhisu (loc. pl.) in winter and 
summer, Dh. 286 (v. gimha); cp. next. 
hemantika, mfn. (sa. haim a ade 
relating fo winter; m. ~o (pasado 
67,22; loc. we (kale) 100,24. 
hessati, fut., v. hoti. 
hoti, vd. (a contracted form of 
bhavati, g. v.; sa. ybhū) to be, exist, 
become, arise, turn into, etc.; pr. 3. 
sg. hoti, 2,6-30. 35,11. 66,12-18. 89,29. 
98,30-31. 106,5 == Dh. 266; 3. pl. 
honti, 4,1. 6,22. 12,21. 31,15; 2. pl. 
hotha, 31,1; part., v. bhavam; imper. 
3. sg. holi, 25,16. 37,14. 62,24. 105,24; 
3. sg. hotu, 2,7. 6,25. 7,1. 10,10. 64,9. 
74,7 (hotu hotu); 2. pl. hotha, 14,18. 
Dh. 243; 3. pl. hontu, 44,6; pot., v. 
bhaveyya; aor. 3. sg. š) ahu & ahü, 
80,32 (nāhu); 94,25. 112,30; Dh. 228 
(cāhu); 20,20 (ahu); 42,16. 80,5 
(ahū'ti); b) ahuvā, 37,30; °) ahosi, 
3,32; 3,3 (assa etad ~, he thought by 
himself); 23,3. 64,19 (do.); 67,31 (pà- 
tur-9, g. v.); 2. sg. *) ahu, 85,26. 86,1 
(mā... ahūti); P) ahosi, 2,6. 86,2 
(mā ~, comm. on mā...ahū); 7. 
sg. š) ahum, 108,15; b) ahosith, 52,10; 
3. pl. š) abū (or ahu) 112,29; b) ahe- 
sum, 5,26; 60,17 (mā ~); 79,21 (tun- 
hi ~); 2. pl. ahuvattha (mā ~) 
79,19; 1. pl. (med.) ahuvamhase (“we 
had”, in the sense of abhisambhavati) 
13,55 (cp. bala); fut. 8. sg. (hohiti &) 
hessati, 54,30. 110,52. Dh. 228 (accord- 
ing to the metre, mss, bhavissati); inf., 
v. bhavitum; ger. hutva, la 2,19. 
9,4. 4,18. 12,97, 23,81. 35,18, 38,31, etc.; 
grà. hotabba, n. „ari. 83,2 (w. instr.); 
pp. v. bhūta, cp. pa-hūta. 


10 


13 


15 


CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. 


after a-bhāsi insert: 
a-bhuijisum, v. bhuijati. 
read: a-katannu 
a-kiūcana.. cp. akiticania. 
after a-gata insert: 
a-gati, f., v. gati. 
after a-disvā insert: 
a-dukkha. mfn. 70,27. v. 
dukkha. 
*a-dübha..read: (cp. dub- 
bhati). 
*a-ppatikaraka... 
(v. patikara). 
after a-bhejja insert: 
a-makkhita, mfn. 62,39, 
v. makkhita. 
*a-vajja . . read: not to be 
avoided, 2, no sin (or fault). 
after *a-samkuppa insert: 
a-samghattanta, v. sai- 
ghattati. 
*a-santasana 
°-sabhava. 
after a-sāhasa insert: 
a-sukha, mfn. 70,27, v. sukha. 
*an-eja ... (ep. Leumann, 
Album-Kern, p. 393) 
akkosati ... aor. 3. sg. 
akkocchi, Dh. 3. 
after accaya insert: 
accasanna, mfn., v. asanna. 
acchati... cp. asina. 
after acchadeti add: (cp. 
achanna). 
acchindati, vb., v. chindati. 
ania... (cp. ana, f.) 
*attiyati ... (cp. Kern, 
Verkl. p. 68.) 


read: 


. read: 


— ————————ÓÓ———M Ó—À—M 
- 


P. 


16 *anda-bhüta, mfn.... (difte- 
rently K. Hardy. litt, Cen- 
tralbl. 1904, p. 507). 

17 *ati-dhona-eàrin ... (ep. 
dhona, dhuta). 

19 after *attha-pada insert: 
attharana, v. tharana. 
19-20 atthi... pr. 2. pl. ’ttha, 
29,30. 31,23; — pot. 3. sg. 
assa, Dh. 376; — «or. (impf.) 

3. sg. āsi, 81,3 (tadāsi). 

20 read: addhagu. 

21 adhipa, read: adhipati 

26 andhaka... read: "andlia- 
ka-makasa 

27 aparadha ought to be put 

after *aparabhage. 

abhinná ... jianábhiüna, 
read: jhinábhinnà 

— abhinikkhamana, n. (sa. 
abhinishkramana) 

30 *abhippaharani, read: 

0-hàrini 

abhirühati . 

PM. p. 78). 

3l abhisamkhāra, m. 

after amacca insert: 

Amarādevī, f. nom. pr. of 

a woman, 55,32. 58,23; = 
Amara, 56,12. 

— amba...ambapakka, nom. 
wath, 15,5 (ambapakk’). : 

33 ariya... (ep. kadariya, mfn.) 

34 avajiyati ... (ep. ojita). 

, avaharati... caus. v. ohā- 

reti (cp. *ohārin) 

36 ūkāra ... (ep. pannaka- 
ra, m.). 


29 


.. (ep. Tr. 


— 


. 37 


41 
43 


96 


98 


284 


āgacchati.. 
agaiichi, 20,26. 
&cikkhati, vb. (sa. a-\/caksh, 
or possibly fr. a-ykhyà, re- 
dupl. *ā-cikhyatī; Pischel, 
Gr. $ 492, cp. T. Michelson, 
Idg. F. XIX, p. 210.) 
Grama ... (cp. dhamma- 
rāma, mfn.) 

āvunāti (or avunati, cp. 
Tr, PM. p. 68,45.) 


*AVUSO ... read: "āvuso- 
vāda, m. 
àsana ... (cp. dhammā- 


sana.) 

after asalhi insert: 

àsi, asim, v. atthi. 
upaga ... (cp. Brahma- 
lok'üpaga, mfn.) 
upatthana ... (cp. pa- 
tthāna & sati-patthāna.) 
Uruvelā, f. (sa. Uruvilvā) 
ereti... or = sa. erayati 
(à + yir). n 
obhāsati... (cp. vijjotati.) 
kaccha!... read: kakshya 
(instead of *kakshya). 
kaūia, read: kañña. 
karana!... (cp. *dubbali- 
karana. mfn.) 
[kamal ... 
mfn. 50,35. 
kama-kama... or, perhaps 
better, abl. sg. (“out of desire 
for sensual gratification”, Mor- 
ris, IPTS. 1891-93, p. 39—41) 
kufijara ... nom. eo, Dh. 
324. 

kula... (ep. pati-kkūla, mfn.) 
khamāpeti...to ask one's 
(acc.) pardon. 

khaya, m. (instead of n.) 
gāma... "-vara, m. (cp. 
vara, m.) . . . pattana-°, m. 


naccitu-kama, 


q. v. 
c&ra(ka) ... (cp. *pinda- 
cara, m.) 

citta! ... (cp. sa-*, instead 
of sa-3.) 

cha ... (cp. salayatana.) 


. aor, j. sg. p. 


98 


127 
129 


jhayati! 
peti.) 
jhāyati*... (cp. ajjhaya 
& mantajjhayaka.) 

-ttha . . . (ep. bhumma- 
ttha, mfn.) 

tam... loc. f. tassa, 2,26. 
tanha ... add -nirodha, 
m, 66,15 (4. v.) 

after tathā-rūpa insert: 
tatha-vadin, mfn., v. vadin 
terasa... (cp. Franke, Pāli 
und Sanskrit, p. 104 (s0).) 
thera-vada ... abl. pl. 
114,21 (instead of instr. pl.) 
dugga ... acc. ~am (pali- 
patham, instead of samsa- 


woe (ep. *vijjhā- 


rai.) 

dubbuddhin, read: dub- 
buddhi. 

dūra... read: (ep. vidura) 
instead of (opp. vidura.) — 
add: *°-samkara, mfn. (g. v.) 
dhana ... read: *9-vassa- 
panaka. 
dhamma-pitin... 


iti.) il 


140 [nibbana] ... (cp. F. Otto 


154 
158 
161 


Schrader, On the problem of 
Nirvana, IPTS. 1904—5, p. 
157.) 

*pat,.. read: (cp. la, in- 
stead of la.) 


-pakati . . . (cp. pākata 
[pakata].) 
pajapati... Pajapati (= 


sa. prajavati, 
Buddha, p. 112.) 
patikkūla... instr. ena 
(if not, as suggested by E. 
Olesen, adv. — sa. pratiku- 
lam, in inverted order, i. e. 
with the head turned down- 
wards, head foremost?) 
*patisanthara ... 
(sa. *9-vrtti). 

padeti ... to be inserted 
below after paduma. 
pabhaseti... (ep. vijjo- 
tati). | 


Oldenberg, 


read: 


285 


read: paveni & paveņi. 
bahira ... (cp. santara- 
bahiram, adv.) 


P. 203 manta... nom. «o, 32,9. 
— 905 Mahāpajāpatī Gotami 
(fr. sa. *-prajavati, Olden- 


bhāga ... (cp. sabhaga, berg, Buddha p. 112, cp. Sp. 
mfn.) Hardy, Manual of Buddhism 
*bhāņavāra (instead of p. 306.) 

bhanavara). — 215 yojana ... (= about 7!/, 
mati...(cp.*sāra-mati(n)) | mile, IRAS. 1902, p. 284 
madhuva, adv. (or rather | Note.) 

adj. n. instead of madhuvam | — 945 sa-! ... read: satthaka 
(an old error?) cp. bhadrath, (instead of satthika.) 

Dh. 119.) | — 946 samvāsa ... acc. ~am 


manuina ... read: m. 


(piya-%, vasimsu) 11,97. 
(adj.) vari. 


SUPPLEMENTARY LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 


Childers == Dictionary of the Pali Language; Fausbøll, Bem. = Nogle Be- 
merkninger om enkelte vanskelige Pāli-Ord i Jātaka-Bogen (Oversigt 
over det Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl. 1888 p. 7—58); Faus- 
boll, Das. Jat. — Dasaratha Jātaka (Copenhagen 1871); Five Jat. = 
Five Jātakas (Copenhagen 1861); Ten Jāt. — Ten Jātakas (Copenhagen 
1872); Fick, Soc, Gl. — Die sociale Gliederung im nordóstlichen Indien 
zu Buddhas Zeit (Kiel 1897); Jacobi, Erzähl. — Ausgewählte Erzüh- 
lungen in Māhārāshtrī (Leipzig 1886); Kern, Bijdr. (or Verkl.) = Bij. 
drage tot de Verklaring van eenige woorden in Pali-geschriften voor- 
komende (Verhandelingen d. Kon. Akad, van Wetenschappen. Afd. Let- 
terkunde XVII. Amsterdam 1888); Kuhn, Beitr. — Beiträge zur Pāli- 
Grammatik (Berlin 1875); Lassen, IA. — Indische Alterthumskunde; 
Müller, PGr. = A simplified grammar of the Pāli language (London 
1884); Pischel, Gr. — Grammatik der Prakrit-Sprachen (Strassburg 1900); 
Sénart, Kace. == Kaccayana et la Littérature grammaticale du Pāli (Paris 
1871); Wackernagel, Gr. = Altindische Grammatik (Göttingen 1896 ff.); 
Weber, Ind. Str. = Indische Streifen; Ind. Stud. — Indische Studien; 
Windisch, Mara — Mara und Buddha (Leipzig 1895; Abhandl. d. Kün. 
sūchs, Ges. d, Wiss. phil.—hist. Cl. XV.) 

BB, = (Bezzenberger’s) Beiträge zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen; 
GGA, = Goóttingische gelehrte Anzeigen; Gött. Nachr. = Nachrichten 
von der Kön. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gottingen; Idg. F, = Indogermanische 
Forschungen; Ind. Ant. — The Indian Antiquary; KZ. == (Kuhn's) 
Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung; KZ (BB) — dieselbe ver- 
einigt mit Bezzenberger's Beiträge (Bd. I = Bd. XLI.); Pan. = Pānini's 
Grammatik, herausgeg. von O. Bēhtlingk (Leipzig 1887); Tr, PM. = 
Trenckner, Pali Miscellany, Part I (Copenhagen 1879); WZ. or WZKM. 
== Wiener Zeitschrift fūr die Kunde des Morgenlandes, 


CORRECTIONS TO PART I. 


lit... cinnatthine | 83,20... ekena hatthena 

2,29-30 . . . dohalo uppanno 85,8 ... sumantato pabhasati vijjo- 
—3... siyanhasamaye tati 

7,32... ovadanti — 32... kim idan ti ce ti aha (cor- 
8,1 ... petum va na visahanti "rected by E. Hardy). 

9,0 ...SU- 87,11... parasantako me sūtako 
—9 ... puttat- ūropito, tassa vidatthi- 
—14... patiechā- mattam anitthitah (the 
—15... Carl, Cinghalese Edition, Colom- 
15,19... dussam bo 1898.) 

— 33... daruni | — 11-12... nitthāpessāmi 
17,16... appa- — 3... Tusitavimane 
— 18... elakaih 89, ... papatā 
93,4 ... utthāpetvā (bis instead of | — 26...aūnan* ti 
upatthapetvā) 91,19... pākāro na hoti 
276 ...saddo (instead of samuddo) | — s... pañham puna pi pucchi 
29,18... sotāpanno upāsako 93,21... evam me sutam 
36,28... (in some copies:) násakkhi | 96,14... ñanam 
(instead of nāaskkhi) 103, ... Tam [man] 

4l, ...catujati-? — 6 ...Sahassabhige maranam, 


47,4... ‘imassa lobhar — 13... Sen'atthena 
48,7 ...labbhamane nimantake — 14, _- Anumatto pi puiiiiena 


441 ... Malliko, ekathse 
— 32... sattadvāra-0 — 15. + yosañ ca attho puüiiena 


53.31... tassa ravam — a... -übhippaharini 

59, ...nipajjāpetvā | 1041... . . Pagalha ettha [na] dissanti 
60.25... devalokesu 106,16... pana duddasamh 

62,:2-33 . . . gāhāpesum — 1+... kitavā satho 


66,15-16. . . (insert after tanhaniro- | 111,27... Jīvitam dehi 
dhā:) upādānanirodho, | 112,» ... yakkhā ca ghātiyā 


upādānanirodhā — 22...sayam pi Vijayo laddha 
73,11... mālāgandha-0 — 23... Tambabhūmirajophutthā 
75,26... ayatim tambapanni yato aliu 
76,1 ... papatika | 113,9 ...satto, dametum 


— 10... etad avoca 


——- ———————M — — "— 


ADDITIONS TO THE NOTES. 


Baka-Jütaka ... translated by R. | (cp. Nēldeke, ib, XXIX, p. 155, & 
Pischel, Ausland, 1876, p. 757. Zachariae, Wien, Zeitschr. f. d. Kunde 
Nacca-Jataka... translated by R. d. Morgenl. XV, p. 72). 
Pischel, Ausland, 1876, p. 758 ;trans- | Vedabbha-Jātaka., translated by 
lated by Warren, Hermes, XXIX, J. J. Meyer, Dandin's Daca-kumara- 
p. 476. caritam, Leipzig 1902, p. 15—19. 
Ucchaiiga-Jataka.,. translated by | Susima-Jütaka ... 47,38 = Dh. 
R. Pischel, Hermes, XX VIII, p. 465 347,3-4 (cp. 346). 


288 


Andabhita-Jataka ... translated 
with Notes by R. Pischel, Philol. 
Abhandlungen M. Hertz zum 70, Ge- 
burtstage von Schūlern dargebracht. 
Berlin 1888, p. 74. 

Mahosadha’s Marriage .. trans- 
lated by J. J. Meyer, Dandin’s Daca- 
kumāra-caritam, p. 96—103. 

Mahosadha's Judgement ... cp. 
H. Oldenberg, Die Literatur des alten 
Indien. Stuttgart 1903, p. 114 (& 
Note p. 291). 

The Great Retirement .. 64,14-15 
= As. p. 34,5 (cp. Mahávastu IT, 157). 

Dhammacakka-pavattana-Sutta 
... translated SBE. XI, p. 146 & 
XIII, p. 94. 

Yasapabbajjà .. cp. Lalita Vistara 
ed. by Rajendralala Mitra, Calcutta 
1877, p. 251; Sp. Hardy, Manual of 
Buddhism, p. 156 (159); P. Bigandet, 
The Life or Legend of Gaudama. 
Rangoon, 1866, p. 55; H. Alabaster, 
The Wheel of the Law. London 1871, 
p. 125. 

The Fire-Sermon... translated by 
Oldenberg, Buddha p. 209. 

Mara as Plowman..translated by 
E. Windisch, Maya und Buddha. 
Leipzig 1895, p. 104. 


Buddha's Death ... == DN. II, 
p. 154. — 80,28-29 = Jat. I, p. 392. 

The Ten Precepts.. 81,22 (cp. Dh. 
v. 246-47). 

The Legend of the Weaver’s 
Daughter, 86,12—89,17 . . Edited: 
Dhammapadatthakathā ... by W. 
Dhammananda Thera & M. Nanis- 
sara Thera. Colombo 1898, p.428-31. . 

The Questions of Uttiya .. cp. 
Mil. ed. by V. Trenckner. Copen- 
hagen 1880, Note p. 424. — 89,20-21 
cp. Sn. v. 419. 

Rebirth is not Transmigration 
.. translated (the beginning only) 
by R. Garbe, Beitrüge zur indischen 
Kulturgeschichte. Berlin 1903, p. 
129-30. 

Padhüna-Sutta ... translated by 
E. Windisch, Māra und Buddha, p.3 
(= Lalita Vistara, ch, X VIII; Mahā- 
vastu IT, 237) cp. ib. p. 322. — v. 19 
bhaijami (Ed. gacchāmi) cp. R. 
Pischel, Indische Miscellen (KZ. 
(BB) I, p. 182). 

Dhaniya-Sutta ... translated by 
Pavolini, Buddismo. Milano 1898, 
p. 126. 

Buddhaghosa.. translated SBE. X. 
Introduction, p. XXIX-XXXI. 


Obs! Several of the Texts above have been printed in: J. Takakusu, A Pali 
Chrestomathy, with notes and glossary giving Sanskrit and Chinese equi- 


valents. Tokyo 1900. 


MISPRINTS 


to be corrected in the Pali Text of Dhammapada, 2. ed. by V. Fausbøll. 
London 1900. 


V. 18,4.. suggatim 

— 37,2.. Mārabandhanā 

— 40,.. thapetva 

— 41,..apetaviiūiāņo 

— 691... Madhuvā 

— 86,2. .suduttaram 

— 1484..idam 

— 166, ..8ttadattham 

— 997, ..tunhim I 
951, ..nadi 

258,1 . . paravajjanupassissa 


V. 312,2.. samkilitthaū ca 


— 816,2.. micchaditthi-° 
— 329,1.. labhetha 

— 330,2.. sahāyatā 

— 343,4.. akamkha 

— 369,1. . bhikkhu 

— 370, .. paūcasaūgātigo 
— 890,4... akiūci 

— 391,2.. brahmanam 

— 404,2.. appiccham 


— 4141 .. palipatham 


PALI GLOSSARY 


A 


PALI READER 


WITH NOTES AND GLOSSARY 
BY 


DINES ANDERSEN, PH. D. 


PROFESSOR AT THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN 


PART II: GLOSSARY 


COPENHAGEN 
GYLDENDALSKE BOGHANDEL, NORDISK FORLAG 


LONDON LEIPZIG 
LUZAC & Co. O. HARRASSOWITZ 


1907 


Trykt med Understettelse af Universitetels Fritrykskonto 


NIELSEN & LYDICHE 
(AXEL SIMMELELER) 


A 


PALI GLOSSARY 


INCLUDING THE WORDS OF THE 
PALI READER amo m DHAMMAPADA 
bY 


DINES ANDERSEN, PH. D. 


PROFESSOR AT THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN 


COPENHAGEN 
GYLDENDALSKE BOGHANDEL, NORDISK FORLAG 


LONDON | LEIPZIG 
LUZAC & Co. 0. HARRASSOWITZ 


1907 


Trykt med Underslollelse af Universilelels Fritrykskonto 


PREFACE. 


In issuing the present part of the Pali Reader I ought to express 
my sincere regret that various circumstances have so much retarded the 
final revision and printing of the glossary, the conclusion of which T know 
has been expected long ago by not a few scholars. As has been pro- 
mised in the preface to Part I. this glossary includes the vocabulary of 
the whole text of Dhammapada, and I have upon the whole done my 
best to make it as complete as possible. It has been my aim by this to 
supply the young student with a sufficient help for the first years’ study, 
untill he will be able to work inpendently, and Í have therefore above 
all striven to arrange the materials so that every passage in the texts 
which might be supposed to present even the slightest difficulty to the 
beginner should not be passed by in silence. Whether [ have succeeded 
in my explanations in such cases, where I differ from the usual inter- 
pretation, [ must leave to my critics to judge of. With regard to the 
lexicographical system introduced into this glossary [ need not to say 
much; it is of course, as to the outer form, in many respects different 
from that of the Dictionary of Childers : in addition to the Indian order 
of the letters I have introduced all declinable words in their stems (only 
with a few exceptions, e. g. pronouns like aham, bhavam, etc.); where 
the stems are ending in consonants these have been printed in Italics, 
the reason for which I hope will be understood: ghosavat, cetas, 
muddhan, gandhin, pitar (the latter I have considered more prac- 
tical than pitu). The verbs ought in my opinion to be given in their 
present indicative (3. sing.), .88 4 has also been done by Childers, together 
with-reference to the Sanskri roots; so l have not paid any attention 
to roots or forms given by the native Pali-grammarians, my task only 


«V m: 


being to deal with the texts themselves, and nothing has been quoted, 
that cannot be traced: in the litterature. In many single cases I have 
had an indispensable support in the exhaustive lexicographical collections 
of V. Trenckner (now in the Copenhagen University Library), especially 
where my own collections were not sufficient to state a certain signifi- 
catien, form, or gender of a word; the abbreviation (Tr.) added here 
and there in the glossary will show that also on other accounts Í have 
derived some benefit from suggestions of his accidentally occurring among 
the vast number of his quotations. With regard to typographical ar- 
rangements I beg to remark that asterisks have been put before those 
Pāli words to which no Sanskrit equivalents can be traced; likewise 
generally before compounds not found in the Sanskrit Dictionary of 
Monier Williams, the new edition of which has been of great help to 
me during the whole work; certain forms of the Pali words are put 
within parentheses in order to show that they do not occur in the 
Reader or the Dhpd., whilst brackets put to a heading-word (e. g. |sa- 
māsati|) denote that this particular form of the word is not traced. 
Of the English translations it ought to he observed that those within 
double inverted comma are simply quotations from my predecessors; 
other typographical indications, abbreviations, ete., I hope will easily be 
understood. Before using the book my readers are earnestly requested 
to insert the corrections and additions given on the last pages into the 
text of both parts. 

In conclusion Í wish to address my best thanks to my young friend 
Mr. Joh. Iryser, Assistant Librarian at our University Library, to whom 
] am indebted for his kind assistance in correcting the proofs. 


Copenhagen, September 1907. 


DINES ANDERSEN. 


THE ASIAT] 
CAtcUTTA O DCIE 


Date Jézu-* M MN